Auerbach_Standard_EDP_Reports_196609_Volume_4_IBM Auerbach Standard EDP Reports 196609 Volume 4 IBM

User Manual: Pdf Auerbach_Standard_EDP_Reports_196609_Volume_4_IBM

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 1136

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

STANDARD. EDp· REPORTS
An Information Service for the Electronic Data processing Field

Prepared & Edited by
AUERBACH CORPORATION
Philadelphia, Penna.

Printed and Distributed by .
BNA Incorporated
WASHINGTON, D. C.

4

STANDARD

EDP
REPORTS

PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

The information contained herein has been obtained from reliable sources
and has been e"valuated by technical teams with extensive working experience
in computer design, selection and application. The information, however, is
not guaranteed.
Acknowledgement is ma,de oftheinspiration and guidance provided by the
Information Systems Bra,"!ch of Office.ofNaval Research which has supported
data gathering activity by" Auerbach Corporation in fields similar to some
covered in these reports. The data contained and formats used in STANDARD
EDP REPORTS were not prepared under any contract with the U. S. Government; and they are the exclusive property of the copyright holders.

IBM 1401
International Business Machines Corp.

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

IBM 1401
International Business Machines Corp.

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

401 :001.001
IBM 1401
Contents

CONTENTS

1.
2.
3.

4.

5.
6.
7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.
13.
14.

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
IBM 1401-G - Summary Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . .
System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
I
Typical Card System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
II 4-Tape Business System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
III 6-Tape Business System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IV Expanded Tape System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
V 6-Tape Auxiliary Storage System with 1311 Disk
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V 6-Tape Auxiliary Storage System with 1405 Disk
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Storage
1406
Core Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Disk Storage Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1405
3327
Disk Storage Control .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
1311
Disk Storage Unit . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . .
Central Processor
1401
Processing Unit. . . . . . . • • . . . • • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . ..
Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . ..
Input-Output; Punched Tape and Card
1402
Card Read-Punch (Reader) . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Read-Punch (Punch) . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
1402
1011
Paper Tape Reader . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . ••
Paper Tape Punch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
1012
Input-Output; Printers
1403
Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Printer (Cards or Continuous Forms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
1404
Console Inquiry Station . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . ,
1407
Input-Output; Magnetic Tape
729
Magnetic Tape Unit . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
7330
Magnetic Tape Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
7340
Hypertape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Input-Output; other
1009
Data Transmission Unit •. . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
1418
Optical Character Reader. . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • ..
1419
Magnetic Character Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .•
1412
Magnetic Character Reader. . . . . . • . . . . . • • . • • . • . . . • •.
1428
Alphameric Optical Reader. • . . . . . . • • . . . . • . . . . . . . . ..
7710
Data Communication Unit . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
1231
Optical Mark Page Reader . • . . . . . • . . . . • . • . . . • . . . . . .
7770
Audio Response Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Simultaneous Operations • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • . • . . . • . . . • . • . . . • ..
5730
Processing Overlap . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . ..
Print Storage . • • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5585
6040
Read Punch Release. . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . ..
Instruction List. . . . • • . . . • • . . • • . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . ..
Coding Specimens
Symbolic Programming System . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . . . • . .•
Autocoder • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • • . . . . . . .
Data Codes
Internal, Magnetic Tape, & Disk Storage. . . . • . . . . . . . . . ..
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ". . . . . . . . . . ..
Collating Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.

401:011
401:012
401:021
401:031
401:031.1
401:031. 2
401:031.3
401:031.4
401:031.5
401:031. 6
401:031.7
401:041
401:042
401:042.4
401:043
401:051
401:061
401:071
401:072
401:073
401:074
401:081
401:082
401:083
401:091
401:092
401:093
401:101
401:102
401:103
401:104
401:105
401:106
401:107
401:108
401. 111
401:111. 1
401:111.1
401:111.1
401:121
401:131
401:132
401:141
401:142
401:143
401:144

3/64

401:001.002

IBM 1401

CONTENTS (Contd.)

15.

16.
17.
18.

19.
20.

21.
22.

Problem Oriented Facilities • . • • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . 401:151
Data Sorting and Merging ••. . . . . . • . • . . • • . • . . . . • . • •• 401:151.13
1401 SORT 1 . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . • .. 401:151.13
1402 SORT 2 & MERGE 2 • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . • • 401:151.13
SORT 6 • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . • • . . . • . . . . • . • . . . . .. 401:151. 13
Report Writing .. • • . . • • • . • • • . . • • • . • . . • • . • . . • . • •. 401:151. 14
1401 Card Report Program Generator. • . . • . . . . . . . . . . • .• 401:151.14
1401 Tape Report Program Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 401:151.14
FARGO. . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . .. 401:151.14
Data Transcription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401:151. 15
Multiple Utility Program for mM 1401 Tape Systems . . . . • • . 401:151.15
Programs for Card Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401:151.15
Disk Storage Utility Programs .. '.' . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • •• 401:151.15
1009 Utility Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . 401:151. 15
7710 Utility Programs . . . . . • • • . . • • • . . . . . . . . . • . . . • • 401:151.15
File Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 401:151. 16
Other . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • 401:151.17
Process Oriented Languages
COBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . • . . • . . . . .. 401:161
FORTRAN. . . . . . . . . . . • • . . • • . . . • . . . • . . • . . . . . . •. 401:162
Machine Oriented Languages
Symbolic Programming System. . . • . • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .. 401:171
Autocoder . . . . • • . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • • . • • • . • . . . . • 401:172
Program Translators
Symbolic Programming System .• . . . • . . • • • . . . . . • • . . .. 401:181
Autocoder . . . . . . . . • . . . • • . • • • • . . • • . . . . . . . • . • . . • 401:182
COBOL 4-8K • . . • • . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . . . . • . . • . • 401:183
FORTRAN • . . . • . . • • . . . . • • • • • • . . • • . . . . . . . • . • • . '. 401:185
Operating Environment. • . • . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . • . • . . . . • . . . . . . • . .. 401:191
System Performance .. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . • . . . • • . . • • . . • .. 401:201
Notes on System Performance . . • . • . . • . . . • • . • . • . • • . •. 401:201. 001
Worksheet Data. . . . . . . • . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . • . . • • . . • .• 401:201. 011
Generalized File Processing. • . • • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • .. 401:201.1
Sorting . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • • . • . • . . • . . . . 401:201.2
Matrix Inversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • • • . . . . • • • . . • •. 401:201.3
Generalized Mathematical Processing. . . . . • • . . • . . . . . • .• 401:201.4
Generalized Statistical Processing. . . . • . . . • . . • • . . • . . .• 401:201.5
Physical Characteristics ••...•••.••....••..•.•..••....••••• 401:211
Price Data. • • • • • . . . • • . . . • . • • • • • • . • . . • • . . • . • • • • • • . . . • . .. 401:221

/

./

3/64

401 :011.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

IBM 1401

REPORTS

Introduction

INTRODUCTION
§

011.

The IBM 1401 is a small scale, solid-state computer system oriented toward business
data processing applications. A wide range of peripheral devices and optional features are
offered for 1401 systems. In addition to its primary function as a small scale business data
processing system, the 1401 has found wide acceptance as an input-output processor for
larger, tape-oriented systems such as the IBM 7070 and 7090 series. System rentals range
from approximately $2,500 to $18,000 per month, but most installations fall within the $4,000
to $12,000 range. First customer deliveries of 1401 systems were made in September, 1960,
and more than 4, 000 have been installed to date.
Com patibility
The 1401 was the first member of the rapidly expanding IBM 1400 series of data
processing systems, and it is now the second .smallest in price and throughput. The IBM 1440
(Report 414:), the smallest member of the series, is program-compatible with (and slightly
faster than) the 1401 with respect to internal processing, but the 1440 uses slower input-output
units and different instructions to control them. The recently announced IBM 1460 (Report
415:) uses the same set of stored-program instructions as the 1401, so programs coded for
a 1401 can, in general, be run without alteration on a 1460 with the same (or expanded) complement of input-output units and optional features. The 1460 is nearly twice as fast internally
as the 1401 and uses most of the same peripheral devices. The faster, more expensive
IBM 1410 (Report 402:) uses a different addressing method and instruction set, but can execute
many 1401 programs without alteration through the use of built- in 1401 compatibility circuits.
Hardware
A 1401 system can have from 1,400 to 16,000 alphameric character positions of core
storage. Each core position contains six data bits, a parity bit, and a word mark bit used to
denote the end of a variable-length field. Core storage cycle time is 11.5 microseconds
(compared to 11.1 microseconds in the IBM 1440, 6.0 in the 1460, and 4.5 in the 1410).
Up to five 1311 Disk Storage Drives can be used in a 1401 system. Each drive holds
one replaceable Disk Pack at a time, providing random access storage for 2,000,000
alphameric characters in addressable sectors of 100 characters each. With the optional
Track Record feature, a single 2~ 980-character record can be recorded on each track, increasing the capacity of a single Disk Pack to 2,980,000 characters. Up to 20, 000 characters
can be read or recorded without movement of the comb-like access mechanism, so the system
is suitable for sequential as well as random processing. Total waiting time for access to a
randomly-placed record averages 270 milliseconds; with the optional Direct Seek feature, the
figure is reduced to 170 milliseconds.
The older 1405 RAMAC Disk Storage Unit provides 10,000,000 or 20, 000, 000
character positions of non-replaceable storage, in 200-character blocks. Average random
access time is about 600 milliseconds.
The 1401 ProceSSing Unit is a solid- state, alphameric processor with add-to- store
logic. It has no accumulator. All operations are performed serially by character. The
basic instruction format consists of a one-character operation code, two 3-character operand
addresses, and a one-character modifier; instruction length can vary from one to eight
characters and averages about six characters. Operands can be of any length up to the
capacity of core storage. Operand length is not specified in 1401 instructions; instead each
operation is terminated when a word mark bit is sensed in the operand itself. Instructions
are executed at the rate of about 4, 000 per second in typical 1401 routines.
A flexible editing capability is standard, but multiplication, division, indexing, threeway comparisons, sense, switches, and multi-word internal transfers are all extra-cost

© 1963

by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised

5/63

401:011.101

IBM 1401
INTRODUCTION (CONTD.)

§

011.

options. Without these optional features, the processing capabilities·of the 1401 are severely
limited. In fact, the Advanced Programming Feature (which provides three index registers,
instructions to store the address register contents, and the "move record" instruction) is
nearly indispensable if the user hopes to take advantage of the much-heralded variable field
length capabilities of the 1401.
The use of dynamically variable field lengths (i. e., fields whose lengths vary from
record to record within the same file) deserves very serious consideration. The main
advantage of variable field lengths is that the required input-output time is reduced, and this
is a valid consideration when the input-output time is the limiting factor on overall processing
time. The additional data manipulation required to utilize these fields of varying length and
varying location within a record, however, can significantly increase the central processor
time (sometimes to the point where it exceeds tape input-output time) and the programming
complexity .
An alternative method of reducing total time requirements for a problem is the use of
a variable record length technique employing combinations of variable and fixed length fields.
All fields (usually numeric) that require considerable manipulation are assigned fixed lengths
and fixed locations in the record, while any fields (usually alphabetic) that. require very little
manipulation form the variable portion (usually the end) of the record. This method effectively
reduces total time requirements for most applications without unduly complicating the
programming.

System operation is basically serial in nature (i. e., one operation at a time). Little
overlapping of input-output operations with one another or with internal processing is possible
unless optional features such as Print Storage, Processing Overlap, and Read Punch Release
are added. Use of these features (described in Section 401:111) increases the system's
capability for simultaneous operations, but also increases programming complexity and inputoutput area storage requirements.
The 1401 Card Read-Punch reads standard 80-column cards at a peak speed of 800
cards per minute and punches them at 250 cards per minute. The 1403 Printer prints up to
600 alphameric lines per minute. It features a unique, horizontal-chain printing mechanism
that produces high qualtity printing and permits interchangeable character sets.
Up to six 729 and/or 7330 Magnetic Tape Units can be connected. Peak data transfer
rates range from 7,200 to 62,500 characters per second. Only one tape read or write operation at a time is possible. The central processor is interlocked during tape read and write
operations unless the Processing Overlap feature is added. With Processing Overlap, internal
processing can be overlapped with tape start-stop times and (at transfer rates of 20,016
characters per second or below) with character transfers to or from a tape unit.
Up to four 7340 Model 2 Hypertape Drives can be connected to a 1401 through the
Serial Input/Output Adapter. These new magnetiC tape units are cartridge-loaded, have peak
data transfer rates of 34, 000 characters or 68,000 decimal digits per second, and are compatible with the faster Hypertape Drives used on IBM 7074, 7080, 7090, and 7094 systems
(but not with the 729 or 7330 tape units).
The Serial Input/Output Adapter alternatively permits connection of anyone of the
following devices: a paper tape reader or punch, a magnetic or optical character reader, a
data transmission terminal, or a direct system-to-system link with an IBM 1440, 1460, or
another 1401.
Software
A wide variety of software has been developed and made available for the 1401 by both
the manufacturer and 1401 users. Programs supplied by the manufacturer include:
• SPS-l and SPS- 2: basic symbolic assembly systems, usable on a card-only 1401.
5/63

Revised

401:011.102

INTRODUCT ION
INTRODUCTION (CON TO.)
§

OIl.

• 1401 Autocoder: more advanced assembly system, providing macro facilities;
requires four magnetic tape units on the translating 1401.
• 1401-1311 Autocoder: utilizes 1311 Disk Storage instead of magnetic tape;
otherwise similar to 1401 Autocoder.
• Input-Output Control Systems: provide macro instructions and corresponding
generalized routines to facilitate coding of input-output operations; four versions
are available for different system configurations.
• Report Program Generator: facilitates preparation of programs to produce
printed reports from punched cards, magnetic tape, or 1311 Disk Storage.
• FARGO: a "load-and-go" report generator that produces IDM 407-type printed
reports.
• Sorting and Merging: four generalized routines to handle sort/merge operations
using either magnetic tape units or 1311 Disk Storage.
• Auto-Test: expedites testing and debugging of programs coded in Autocoder,
SPS, and FARGO.
• Disk File Organization Programs: nine programs to assist in establishing and
maintaining data files in 1311 Disk Storage, in either random or sequential
arrangements.
• Utility Programs: a variety of routines to perform frequently-needed functions
such as data transcription, multiplication, and program loading in card, tape,
and Disk Storage systems.
• COBOL: translates programs coded in COBOL into symbolic form for Autocoder
assembly; 2 versions are available, for 1401 systems with at least 4, 000 and
12,000 core storage positions; both versions require 4 magnetic tape units and
a number of special features.
• FORTRAN: compiles programs coded in a severely restricted subset of the full
FORTRAN language; magnetic tape is not required, and "load-and-go" operation
is possible.

© 1963

by Auerbach Carporaf;on and BNA Incorporated

Revised

5/63

401 :012.100

IBM 1401-G

Summary Repart

SUMMARY REPORT:
IBM 1401-G
§ 012 .

. 01

INTRODUCTION
The IBM 1401-G is a low-cost, stored-program punched card processing system designed
primarily to replace conventional punched card tabulating equipment in applications which
are not large enough to justify installation of any of the higher-performance computer
systems in IBM's 1400 series. The most significant feature of the 1401-G is that its
introduction has reduced the rental price of a minimum IBM 1401 card system (consisting
of central processor with 1400 core storage positions, card read-punch unit, and printer)
from $2,475 (for a 1401 Model A) to $1,900 per month. This reduction in price is accompanied by a significant reduction in system performance capabilities: although the
1401-G Processing Unit has the same instruction set and processing speed as other 1401
models, the only models of the 1402 Card Read Punch and 1403 Printer available in 1401-G
systems are considerably slower than their counterparts in other 1401 systems.
A 1401-G system consists of:
o

A 1401 Model G Processing Unit with 1,400, 2,000, or 4,000 alphameric
character positions of core storage and a cycle time of 11. 5 microseconds.

o

A 1402 Model 4 Card Read Punch that can read 450 cards per yninute and
punch 250 cards per minute.

o

A 1403 Model 4 or 5 Printer that can print 465 single-spaced alphameric
lines per minute; Model 4 has 100 print positions and Model 5 has 132.

No other peripheral devices, and only a limited number of the optional features available
for other 1401 models, can be used in a 1401-G system. When the user's equipment
needs increase, he will need to replace the 1401-G with a different model of the 1401 or
with a 1460, both of which are program-compatible with the 1401-G.
Most of the programs and programming systems available for 1401 card systems can be
used with 1401-G systems of adequate core storage capacity. These include SPS, Basic
Autocoder, Report Program Generator, FARGO, and a variety of utility routines.
Initial customer deliveries of 1401-G systems are scheduled for October, 1964.
. 02

DATA STRUCTURE
The 1401-G, like all IBM 1400 series computers, is a character-oriented system. Each
core storage position consists of 8 bits (6 data bits, parity bit, and word mark bit) and
can hold one alphameric character (i.e., a decimal digit, a letter, or a special symbol).
Both data fields and instructions are variable in length, and their lengths are defined
by word mark bits. Instruction lengths range from 1 to 8 characters and are most
commonly 7 characters. Data fields may be of any length up to the capacity of core
storage.

©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Infa,lnc.

3/64

IBM 1401-G

401 :012.1 03
§ 012 .

. 03

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Typical Card System; Configuration I
Deviations from Standard Configuration: ... printer is slower by 535
lines/minute.
card reader is slower by
550 cards/minute.
core storage is smaller by
4,000 characters.
multiply-divide hardware and
index registers are not available.
Equipment

..

\

Core Storage:
4,000 positions
$1,180
Processing Unit:
1401 Model G3

Optional features included: . . . . . . . . . .

.04

Card Read Punch
RElads: 450 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

400

Printer: 465 lines/min.
(132 print positions)

600

High-Low-Equal Compare
Sense Switches
Expanded Print Edit
Additional Print Control
Read Punch Release

75
15
20
60
~

TOTAL:

$2,375

INTERNAL STORAGE
Models G1, G2, and G3 of the 1401 Processing Unit contain 1400, 2000, and 4000
character positions, respectively, of core storage. The 1401-G differs from all other
1401 models in that the user may not expand its core storage capacity beyond 4000 positions
by adding a 1406 Core Storage UnU:- Cycle time is 11.5 microseconds for each access of
one alphameric character. See Section 401:041 for further details on 1401 core storage.
None of the IBM Disk Storage Units may be used in a 1401-G system .

. 05

CENTRAL PROCESSOR
The 1401 Model G Processing Unit is functionally identical wlth other 1401 models
(Section 401:051) except that the range of peripheral devices and optional features that
can be used with the 1401-G is severely restricted. The following 1401 optional features
are not available in 1401-G systems:

•
•
•
3/64

Advanced Programming (indexing, Store Address Register, and Move
Record instructions)
Multiply-Divide instructions
Processing Overlap

SUMMARY REPORT
§

401 :012.1 05

012 .

. 05

CENTRAL PROCESSOR (Contd.)

•
•
•
•
•

Column Binary
Print Storage
Numerical Print
Selective Tape Listing
Serial Input/Output Adapter.

The 1401-G Processing Unit uses add-to-storage logic and has no accumulator. All
operations are performed serially by character. The basic instruction format consists
of a I-character operation code, two 3-character addresses, and a I-character modifier.
Instructions may contain various combinations of these four parts and range from one to
eight characters in overall length. Operand lengths are not specified in 1401-G instructions; instead, most operations are terminated when a word mark bit is sensed in the
operand itself.
Instructions (other than those that initiate I/O operations) are executed at the rate of about
4,000 per second in typical 1401-G routines. Processor speeds for the 1401-G are the
same as those listed for the 1401 in Paragraph 401:051. 4; for example:
For random addresses
c = a + b: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
b = a + b: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sum N items: . . . . . . . . . .
c : ab: : . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c - a/b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

207 + 46D psec.
115 + 23D psec.
(115 + 23D)N psec.
466 + 3450D + 140D2/sec .
8680 + 2950D + 172D p.sec.

where D is operand length in decimal digits.
Optional Features
Bit Test: Permits a programmed branch if any bit in a specified core location matches
the corresponding bit in the modifier character of the branch instruction.
High-Low-Equal Compare: Permits indicators to be tested for high, low, or equal
conditions after a comparison.
Expanded Print Edit: Adds check protection, floating dollar sign, decimal control, and
sign control left to the basic 1401 editing capabilities.
Read Punch Release: Permits use of the 35-millisecond card reader start time and the
37-millisecond card punch start time interlock periods for internal processing, thereby
making more processing time available during each read or punch cycle.
Sense Switches: Six console switches and corresponding testable indicators which can
be used for external control of the stored program.
Space Suppression: Provides program control of space suppression on the 1403
Printer .
. 07

1402 CARD READ PUNCH, MODEL 4
The 1402 Model 4 consists of a 450 card-per-minute reader and a 250 card-per-minute
punch for standard 80-column cards. The two units are housed within the same cabinet
but are functionally independent of one another. All operating characteristics of the 1402
Model 4 are the same as those of the 1402 Model 1 used in other 1401 systems (Sections
401:071 and 401:072) except that Model 4 has a reading speed 350 cards per minute lower
than Modell and includes the Early Card Read option as a standard feature.
Optional Features
Interchangeable Feed: Permits either 80-column or 51-column cards to be read by
interchanging some hardware components.
Punch Feed Read: Adds a reading station ahead of the punching station so that results
can be punched into the same cards from which input data was read.

©1964 Auerbach Corporatian and Info, Inc.

3/64

IBM 1401-G

401 :012.1 08
§

012 .

. 08

1403 PRINTER, MODELS 4 AND 5
Models 4 and 5 of the 1403 Printer are slower versions of the 1403 Modell and 2 horizontalchain printers used in other 1401 systems. Rated speed is 465 single-spaced alphameric
lines per minute. All other characteristics are the same as those bf Models 1 and 2, as
described in Section 401:081. A dual-speed carriage provides skipping speeds of 75
inches per second for skips of more than 8 lines and 33 inches per second for shorter
skips. The standard print set has 48 characters. The only difference between 1403
Models 4 and 5 is that Model 4 has 100 printing positions and Model 5 has 132.
Optional Features
Interchangeable Chain Cartridge Adapter: Permits the operator to replace the standard
print chain with another chain containing a different type font or special character
arrangement.
Auxiliary Ribbon Feeding: Permits satisfactory utilization of polyester film ribbons,
which provide improved printing quality as required for optical character recognition.

. 11

SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
The basic 1401-G, like other 1401 systems, has a very limited capability for simultaneous
operations. The Processing Unit is inhibited during all input-output operations except
during a short period at the end of each card or print cycle. The optional Read Punch
Release feature increases the amount of overlapping by permitting internal processing
to continue during the card reader and punch "start times" (35 and 37 milliseconds,
respectively). This feature introduces the possibility of an error halt if the read or punch
instruction is not issued within the required interval after card feeding has been initiated.
The Print Storage feature, which permits virtually complete overlapping of printing with
internal processing in other 1401 models, is not available for the 1401-G.
The 1401-G has a new capability, called "interleaving" by IBM, that enables it to perform
either a print-and-read or print-and-punch operation in the time normally required for a
card read or punch operation alone. This is accomplished by overlapping the printing
operation with either card reading or card punching. Card reading and punching, however,
cannot be interleaved with one another. Time relationships for 1401-G input-output
operations, including the times available for internal processing, are summarized in
the table below.
~tion

.12

Cycle
Time, msec

Processing
Time, msec

Cards/Lines
l2er Minute

Card Reading:
Without Read Punch Release
With Read Punch Release

133.3
133.3

21
56

450
450

Card Punching:
Without Read Punch Release
With Read Punch Release

240
240

22
59

250
250

Printing

129

17

465

Print and Read

133.3

20

450

Print and Punch

240

22

250

INSTRUCTION LIST
The 1401-G uses the same set of instructions as other 1401 systems, as listed in Section
401:121. (Those 1401 instructions which pertain to peripheral devices and optional
features which are not available for the 1401-G naturally cannot be used in 1401-G
programs.)

.14

DATA CODE TABLES
Same as IBM 1401; see Sections 401:141 through 401:144.

3/64

401 :012.150

SUMMARY REPORT

§

012 .

. 15

SOFTWARE
IBM 1401-G users will be able to utilize most of the programs and programming systems
that have been developed for 1401 card systems by both the manufacturer and cooperating
users. The principle programming systems available from IBM include:

.20

o

1401 Basic Autocoder 4K - a symbolic assembly system for card systems
with 4, 000 positions of core storage. The language includes all the
facilities of 1401 Autocoder, as described in Section 401:172, except
macro instructions.

o

1401 Basic Autocoder 2K - a symbolic assembly system for card systems
with 2, 000 positions of core storage. The language is a subset of Basic
Autocoder 4K and has the same capabilities except that no literals are
permitted and symbolic names may not be used as operands in Origin and
Equate statements.

o

SPS-1 - a basic symbolic assembly system for card systems with the
minimum 1,400 positions of core storage, as described in Section
401:171.

o

FARGO and Card Report Program Generator - two systems that facilitate
the preparation of reports from data in punched card files on 1401-G
systems with 4, 000 core storage positions; both are described in Section
401:151.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Internal processing speed of the 1401-G is the same as that of other 1401 models, except
that the Advanced Programming and Multiply-Divide features, which can sigpificantly
reduce processing times, are not available for the 1401-G. Timing relationships for the
input-output devices and their capabilities for simultaneous operations are discussed in
Paragraph .11, above.
Since the 1401-G is a punched card system designed for business applications, the most
meaningful standard test of its system performance is the generalized file processing
problem, Standard File Problem A, as performed on Standard Configuration I, the
"Typical Card System" shown in Paragraph. 03. This problem involves updating a
master file from information in a detail file and producing a printed record of each
transaction. The standard problem is fully described in Section 4:200. 1 of the Users' Guide.
For Standard Configuration I, both the master and detail files are on punched cards, and
it is assumed that the two files have been collated off-line so that each detail card follows
the two cards which comprise the associated master file record. Master file records
with no activity (i. e., no corresponding detail cards) would, in most cases, be removed
from the file before the computer run, so only the processing time at an activity factor
of 1. 0 is significant.
For each record processed at an activity factor of 1.0, it is necessary to read two master
cards and one detail card, punch two updated master cards, and print one report line.
This can be accomplished by means of two read operations, two punch operations, and
one "interleaved" read-and-print operation in a total of 833 milliseconds per record.
Taking full advantage of the optional Read Punch Release feature, a total of 164 milliseconds per record is available fOL- internal processing, and this exceeds the 106 milliseconds required to perform the specified computations. The time required to process
10, 000 master file records, therefore, is 139 minutes. (Standard Configuration I of
the original IBM 1401, shown on page 401:031.100, can perform the same job in 100
minutes, though at a significantly higher cost, through the use of a faster card reader
and printer plus the optional Advanced Programming, Multiply-Divide, and Processing
Overlap features on a 1401 Model B4 Processing Unit. )

@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.

3/64

401 :012.210

IBM 1401-G
§

012.

.21

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

.illhl

Power
(KVA)

60

1,840

4.0

6,700

30

45

1,260

*

3,500

29

53

750

*

3,000

Width
(in. )

Depth

1401 Model G
Processing Unit

58

31

1402 Model 4 Card
Read Punch

58

1403 Printer, Models
4 and 5

48

EguiQment

ill0

Height
(in. )

Weight

Heat
(BTU/hr)

.. --' ..

*Included in Processing Unit Load.
Power requirements: 208 or 230 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire,
60-cycle AC •
. 22

PRICE DATA
Eguipment
1401 Processing Unit:
Model G1; 1400 core positions
Model G2; 2000 core positions
Model G3; 4000 core positions

Monthly
Rental

Monthly
Maintenance *

Purchase

950
1,050
1,180

$50.00
50.00
52.00

$65,750
66,550
69,750

1402 Model 4 Card Read Punch

400

38.25

28,000

1403 Printer:
Model 4; 100 print positions
Model 5; 132 print positions**

550
660

104.00
112.75

31,400
34,950

0.50
0.50
1. 75
0.50
0.50

800
750
2,800
950
550
60
3,175
2,985
3,125
3,075

Optional Features:
Bit Test
Expanded Print Edit
High-Law-Equal Compare
Read Punch Release
Sense Switches
Space Suppression
Interchangeable Feed (1402)
Punch Feed Read**
Interchangeable Chain (1403)
Auxiliary Ribbon Feeding

*

$

20
20
75
25
15
75***
50
80
75
75

28.25
5.75
20.00

Maintenance charges shawn here apply for first 36 months, and are higher thereafter.
** Prices include cost of required control on Processing Unit.
*** Single use charge (one time only).

3/64

401 :021.100
•

STANDARD

EDP

_

IBM 1401

'[FCRTS

Data Structure

DATA STRUCTURE

§

021.

.1

.2

STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of
Location

Size

Character:
Sector:

8 bits
200 char

Band:
Disc:
Band:
Disc:

Purpose or Use

Alphamerics.
1405 Disk Storage
record location.
5 sectors 1405 Disk Storage
400 bands 1405 Disk Storage
2,000 char 1311 Disk Storage
500 bands 1311 Disk Storage

© 1963

INFORMATION FORMATS
Type of Information

Representation

Numeral: •
Letter: ••
Instruction:
Number:

I character.
1 character.

Unit
Block: ••
Unit.
Unit.
Unit.
Unit.

1 to 8 characters.
I to N characters, ended
by word mark.
1 to N characters, ended
by record or group mark.

N is limited by size of core storage.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised

5/63

401:031.100
IBM 1401
System Configuration

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

I.

031.
TYPICAL CARD SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION I)
Deviations from standard configuration:

Printer slower by 400 lines/minute.
Card reader slower by 200 cards/minute.

Rental:

$4,330 per month.
Equipment

Rental

Core Storage: additional
4, 000 positions

$ 575

Processing Unit: 1401 Model B4
(with 4,000 positions core
storage)

Card Read- Punch
Reads:
800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

550

Printer: 600 lines/min.

775

Optional Features Included: . • • • . • . . • . . . • • Advanced Programming.
Multiply- Divide.
Processing Overlap.
Early Card Read.
High- Low- Equal Compare.
Sense Switches.
Expanded Print Edit.

TOTAL • • . • • . . .

© 1963

1,630

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

105
325
250
10
75
15
20

$4,330

Revised 5/63

401 :031.200

§

IBM 1401

031.

II.

4-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION II)
Deviations from Standard configuration:

Card Reader faster by
300 cards/minute.
Card Punch faster by
150 cards/minute.
3 index registers.

Rental:

$5,920.

Equipment

Rental

Core Storage: additional
4, 0000 positions

$ 575

Processing Unit: 1401
Model E4.
(with 4,000 positions
core storage)

Optional Features Included:

5/63 Revised

2,130

Card Read- Punch
Reads:
BOO cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

550

Printer: 60.0 lines/min.

775

Magnetic Tape Units (4)
7,200 or 20,016
char/sec.

1,800

. . . . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . High - Low- Equal Compare.
Sense Switches.

75
15

TOTAL.. . . . . . • . .

$5,920

401 :031.300

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

031.

III.

6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION III)
Deviations from standard configuration: . . • . .

. Magnetic tape faster by 11, 000 char/sec.
Card Reader faster by 300 cards/minute.
Card Punch faster by 150 cards/minute.
$10,830 per month.

Rental:

Equipment

Rental

Core Storage: additIonal
12, 000 positions

$1,575

Processing Unit: 1401 Model C6
(with 4, 000 positions core
storage)
2,755

Console Inquiry Station
(including Adapter)

175

Card Read- Punch
Reads: 800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

550

Printer: 600 lines/min.

775

Magnetic Tape Units (6):
15,000 or 41,667
char/sec.

4,200

Optional Features Included: • . • . . . • . . . . . . • . . • • • . . Advanced Programming.
Multiply- Divide.
Processing Overlap.
Early Card Read.
High-Low-Equal Compare.
Sense Switches.
Expanded Print Edit.

105
325
250
10
75
15
20

TOTAL: . . • . • . • • . $10, 830

© 1963

by Auerbach Carparation and BNA Incorporated

Revised 5/63

IBM 1401

401:031.400
§

031.

IV.

EXPANDED TAPE SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION IV)
Deviations from standard configuration: . . . . .

Simultaneous reading and writing on
magnetic tape is not possible.
Maximum number of tape units available
is 6 rather than the 12 specified.
Core storage is smaller by 40,000
positions.
Card Reader is 300 cards/minute faster.
Card Punch is 150 cards/minute faster.

Rental: .

$11,540 per month.
Equipment

Rental

Core storage: additional
12, 000 positions

$1,575

Processing Unit: 1401 Model C6.
(with 4,000 positions
core storage)
2,755

Console Inquiry Station.
(including Adapter)

Card Read- Punch
Reads: .800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

550

Printer: 600 lines/min.

775

Magnetic Tape Units (6):
15,000, 41,667 or
60, 000 char/sec.

4,535

Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Programming.
Multiply-Divide.
Processing Overlap.
Print Storage.
Early Card Read.
High- Low- Equal Compare.
Sense Switches.
Expanded Print Edit.

TOTAL. • • • • . . . . .
5/63 Revised

175

105
325
250
375
10
75
15
20

$11,540.

401 :031.500

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§

03l.

V.

6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM WITH 1311 DISK STORAGE (CONFIGURATION V)
Deviations from standard configuration: . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Card Reader faster by 300 cards/minute.
Card Print faster by 150 cards/minute.
Disk Storage is smaller by 5, 100,000
characters.

Rental: .

$13,330

Equipment

Rental

1311 Disk Storage Drives (5):
14,900,000 positions total

$2,500

Core Storage: additional
12,000 positions

1,575

Processing Unit: 1401 Model F16
(with 4,000 positions core
storage)
2,665

Console Inquiry Station
(including Adapter)

175

Card Read- Punch
Reads: 800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

550

Printer: 600 lines/min.

775

Magnetic Tape Units (6):
15,000 or 41,667
char/sec.

4,200

Optional Features Included: • . . . . • . • • • . . . . . . . . . Advanced Programming.
Multiply- Divide.
Processing Overlap.
Early Card Read.
High- Low- Equal" Compare.
Sense Switches.
Expanded Print Edit.
Track Record.
Direct Seek.

105
325
250
10
75
15
20
40
50

TOTAL.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised 5/63

IBM 1401

401 :031.600

§

031.

V.

6-TAPE AUXIlJARY STORAGE SYSTEM WITH 1405 DISK STORAGE (CONFIGURATION V)
Deviations from standard configuration:

. Card Reader faster by 300 cards/minute.
Card Punch faster by 150 cards/minute .

Rental:

. $12,255 per month.

Equipment

Rental

1405 Disk Storage and
Controller: 20,000, OPO
characters

$1,515

Core Storage: additional
12,000 positions

1,575

Processing Unit: 1401 Model F16.
(with 4,000 positions
core storage)
2,665

Console Inquiry Station
(including Adapter)

175

Card Read- Punch
Reads: 800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

550

Printer: 600 lines/min.

775

Magnetic Tape Units (6)
IS, 000or41, 667 char/sec.

Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . Advanced Programming.
Multiply- Divide.
Processing Overlap.
Early Card Read.
High- Low- Equal Compare.
Sense Switches.
Expanded Print Edit.

4,200

105
325
250
10
75
15
20

TOTAL. • • • •. • • . . • $12,255

5/63 Revised

401 :031. 700

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS - IBM 1401

1401 Processing Unit Model
No., with core storage
positions indicated:
1,400
2,000
4,000
8,000 (with 1406 Modell)
12,000 (with 1406 Model 2)
16,000 (with 1406 Model 3)
Maximwn number of peripheral
units:
1402 Card Read Punch
1403 Printer, Modell *
1403 Printer, Model 2 *
1404 Printer*
1405 Disk Storage
1311 Disk Storage
1406 Core Storage
1407 Console Inquiry
729 Tape Unit
7330 Tape Unit
1412 Magnetic Reader, ·or
1418 Optical Reader, or
1419 Magnetic Reader, or
1428 Alphameric Optical
Reader, or
1009 Data Trans. Unit, or
1011 Paper Tape Reader, or
7710 Data Communication
Unit or
3271 Direct Data Channel

Availability of Special
Features:
Processing Overlap
Expanded Print Edit
Read Punch Release
6 Sense Switches
Multiply- Divide
Print Storage
Column Binary
High - Low- Equal Compare
Advanced Programming
Compressed Tape
Punch Feed Read
51- Column Feed
Early Card Read
Numerical Print
Interchangeable Chain
Selective Tape Listing
Space Suppression
Additional Access Arm
Direct Seek
Scan Disc
Seek Overlap
Track Record

CARD ORIENTED

TAPE ORIENTED

SYSTEMS

SYSTEMS

Al
A2
A3
A4
AS
A6

Bl
B2
B3

B4

as

B6

SYSTEMS

Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6

DI
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6

Dll
DI2
DI3
DI4
DIS
DI6

El
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6

1
0
1

0
0
1
0
0
0
1
6
6t

0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
6

1
1
1
1
0
5
1
1
0
6

0
1
1
0
0

1

1

1

1

1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
0
5
1
1
0
0

0
5
1
1
6
6t

0

1

1

no
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
no
no
no

yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes

yes
std.
std.
std.
yes
ye(3
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes

I

1

yes
std.
no
std.
no
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
no
no
no

yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes

F3
F4
F5
F6

1
1
1
1
1

none
none
F13
F14
F15
F16

1
1
1
1
1
0

F23
F24
F25
F26

1
6
6t

1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
6

1

1

1

yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no

* Only one printer may be attached to a system.
t Tape Intermix Unit required (max. total of 729 and 7330 tape units is 6).

© J963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised 5/63

401:041.100

II
•

ST!NDMO

EDP

IBM 1401

REPORTS

Internal Storage
Core Storage

INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE

§041.
.1

GENERAL

· 11

Identity:.

. 12

Basic Use: . .

· 13

Description:

Core Storage.
1401 Processing Unit and
1406 Core Storage Unit.
Models I, 2, and 3.

• 28

· 29

· 14

Availability: . .

.15

First Delivery: . . . . 1401, September, 1960
1406, March, ,1961.

.291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates: . . . . .
.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data:
Conversion factor:
Data rate:. . . . .
Compound data rate:
.3

DATA CAPACITY

.31

Module and'System Sizes

Purpose

Number of locations

Locks

Index registers:
Arithmetic registers:
Logic registers:
1-0 control:
Card read area:
Card punch area:
Printer area:
Column binary area:

9 char

none.

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Storage Medium:.

· 22

Physical Dimensions

O.
O.
O.
none.
none.
none.
none.

. . magnetic core.

· 221 Magnetic core type storage
Core diameter: . . . . 0.050 inch.
Core bore:.. . . . . . . 0.030 inch.
Array size (4Kmodule):50 by 80 by 8 bits.
6 by 5. 125 by 8.5 inches.
• 23

Storage Phenomenon: . . direction of magnetization.

· 24

Recording Permanence

. 241 Data erasable by
program: . . . . . . . yes,

Identity:
1401 Model:
1406 Model:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Modules:

. character.
. 8 bits/char.
.87,000 char/sec.
. 87,000 char/sec.

Maximum
Storage

3
2
4
1
none
none none
1
variable.
1,400 2,000 4.000 B.OOO
variable.
1
1
2

5
2

6.
3.

12.000

16,000.

2

2.

.32

Rules For Combining
Modules:. . • • . . . . all possible configurations
are shown above.

.4

CONTROLLER: .

.5

ACCESS TIMING

,51

Arrangement of Heads: .

.52

Simultaneous
Operations: • . • . . . none.

.53

Access Time Parameters and VariatiOns

.531 For uniform access
Access time: . . .
Cycle time: . . .
For data unit of: .

.6

© 1963

87,000 cycles/second.

Minimum
Storage

Reserved Storage

.2

· coincident current.
· uniform.

Potential Transfer Rates

12 months as of
April, 1963.

80 char
80 char
100 or 132 char
160 char

• no •
· no .
· no.
• no.

Access Techniques

.281 Recording method:
· 283 Type of access: . .

. working storage .

The 1401 Processing Unit may contain 1,400, 2,000,
or 4,000 character positions of core storage. When
more than 4,000 positions are required, a 1406
Core Storage Unit is added. Models I, 2, and 3
contain 4,000, 8,000, and 12,000 positions, respectively. Cycle time is 11.5 microseconds for each
access of one alphameric character. Each character position consists of 8 bits: 6 data bits, 1 odd
parity bit, and 1 word mark bit. Core Storage is
used for all input-output areas and in4ex registers,
a total of from 260 to 461 positions, depending upon
the optional features installed.

.16

· 242 Data regenerated
constantly:. . .
· 243 Data volatile: . .
• 244 Data permanent:
.245 Storage changeable:.

· none.

1

access device.

· 6.5/1. sec.
· 11.5/1. sec.
· 1 character .

CHANGEABLE STORAGE: no.

by: Auerbach Corparation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 5/63

401 :041.700

§

041.

.73

.7

AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

. 71

Data Transfer
Pair of storage units possibilities
With self: . • . . • . . yes.
With Disc Storage Unit: yes.

• 72

IBM 1401

Transfer Load Size
With self: . . . . . . . . 1 to N char limited by
storage capacity.
With Disc Storage Unit:. 1 record or 1 band.

5/63 Reprinted

Effective Transfer Rate
With self: . . . • . • . . 43,500 char/sec.
With Disc Storage Unit:. 8,420 char/sec .

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Conflicting commands:
Invalid character:
Recovery of data:

limit check
parity check
send parity bit
not possible.
Validity check
parity check

stop•
indicator and alarm.
indicator and alatm.
stop and alatm.
indicator and alarm.

401:042.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

R£PORTS

IBM 1401
Internal Storage
1405 Disk Storage

INTERNAL STORAGE: DISK STORAGE UNIT

§

042.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

• 12

Basic Use: .

• 13

Description:

Disk Storage Unit.
1405 Models 1 and 2.
"RAMAC".
auxiliary storage .

This store, often referred to as a RAMAC unit,
consists of 25 or 50 thin magnetic discs on a common vertical shaft. Each disc has 200 bands on the
top face and 200 on the bottom. Each band is divided into 5 sectors, each capable of holding 1 record with a fixed length of 200 alphameric characters. Model 1 has 25 discs with a total capacity of
50,000 records or 10,000,000 characters. Mode12
has 50 discs with a capacity of 100,000 records or
20,000,000 characters. Only one unit can be connected to a system. Disc storage drive seek time
can be fully overlapped with interoal processing.
No overlapping is possible during Ilisc read or write
operations.
Access is by means of a fork-shaped arm with two
read-write heads, one head serving each face of the
disc. The arm moves vertically to the selected
disc, then horizontally to the selected band. A
seven-position indelible address on the disc is used
to verify automatically that the record accessed is
the one called for by the program. The "write disc
check" command can be used for a programmed
comparison of data in core storage with data previ0usly ~itten on the disc. Access time varies from
O. 2 to 860 milliseconds; the average for pure random processing is about 600 milliseconds. The peak
transfer rate is 22,500 characters per second; bulk
transfer rate with optimum arrangement of data is
8,420 characters per second.
An Additional Access Arm is available as an optional
feature. This makes it possible to seek two different
records simultaneously, but only one read or write
operation can be done at a time.
.14

Availability:

12 months as of
April, 1963.

.15

First Delivery:

July, 1961.

.16

Reserved Storage:

none.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Storage Medium:

.22

Phrsical Dimensions

.222 Drum or Disc
Diameter:
Thickness or length:
Number on shaft:

• multiple discs.

24 inches.
thin.

Model I, 25 discs.
Model 2, 50 discs.

© 1963

.23

Storage Phenomenon: . . magnetization.

. 24

Recording Permanence

.241 Data erasable by
program: . . . .
.242 Data regenerated
constantly:
.243 Data volatile: . .
.244 Data permanent:
. 245 Storage changeable: .

· yes
·
·
·
·

no .
no.
no.
no.

.25

Data Volume Per Band of 1 Track

.26

Words: . . .
Characters:..
Digits: . . •
Instructions:
Records: . .
Bands Per Phrsical Unit:

.27

Interleaving: Levels:

variable.
1,000.
1,000.
variable.
5.
. 400 per disc (200 on each
side),
· none.

.28 Access Techniques
,281 Recording method:
.283 Type of access

· moving heaas.

Descrietion of Stage

Possible

stllrti~&

stage

Remove head from unif new disc is selected.
wanted disc:
Move head to selected disc: no.
Move head to selected band: if same disc was previously
selected.
Wait for start of selected
record: • • • • • • • • • • if same band was previously
selected.
Wait for transfer of record:. no.

.....

.29

Potential Transfer Rates

.291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates: . . .
Bit rate per track: .
.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data: • • . .
Conversion factor: .
Gain factor: . . • .
Data rate: . . . . .
Compound data rate:.

.1,200 rpm.
· 157,500 bits/sec/track.
· character.
• 7 bits/char.
. 1.
· 22,500 char/sec.
· 22,500 char/sec.

.3

DATA CAPACITY

.31

Module and System Sizes
Minimum
Storage
Identity:
Discs:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Records:
Bands:
Modules:

by Auerbach Corporalion and BNA Incorporaled

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Maximum
. Storage
1405 Modell
1405 Model 2.
25
50.
variable
variable.
10,000,000
20. ODD, 000.
variable
variable.
50,000
100,000.
20.000.
10.000
1
1.

Revised 5/63

401:042.320
§

042 .

. 32

.52

Simultaneous Operations (Contd.)

Rules Jor Combining
Modules:. . •
• • only 1 module per system.

Without Additional
Access Arm : •

.4

CONTROLLER

• 41

Identity: . • . •

With Additional
Access Arm: •

. 42

On-Line: ••

• 422

Off-Line: •.

.43

•'Disk-Storage Control.
#3327.

a
.53

• 1 max (Built into Disk
Storage Unit) .
. none.

Stage

.441 Size of load:

· one 200-char record or
one 1, OOO-char band.
· core storage •

. 442 Input-Output area:
. 443 Input-Output area
access:
• 444 Input-Output area
lockout: .
.445 Synchronization:
. 447 Table control:. • •
. 448 Testable conditions:.

.....

• each character.

...

.51

Arra!Yiement of Heads

· yes, for full block.
• automatic •
· none .
· inoperable access arm .

Stacks per module: •
Stacks per yoke: •

.512 Stack movement:

.

· 2 (4 with Additional Access
Arm).
· 2 (4 with Additional Access
Arm).
• 2 (4 with Additional Access
Arm) •
• 1 (2 with Additional Access
Arm).
• vertically to selected disc;
then horizontally to selected band.

.513 Stacks than can access
any particular location: 1 (2 with Additional Access
Arm).
.514 Accessible locations, records
Model 1
Model 2
By single stack
With no movement:
5
5.
With all movement:
25,000
50,000.
By all stacks
With no movement:
10
10.
.515 Relationship between
stacks and locations:
1 stack serves top faces of
all discs; other stack
serves bottom faces.
.52 Simultaneous Operations

A:
B:
C:

D:

5/63 Revised

Variation

Example

~

~

Remove head from unwanted disc: o or 90 to 250
Move to selected disc:
o or 100 to 315
Move to selected band:
o or 90 to 250
Wait for start of selected record: 0.2 to 50.2
Read one record, or
10
Read one band:
50

200 •
200.
200.
25.
10.

Total:

635.

10.2 to 915

.6

CHANGEABLE STORAGE: none .

.7

AUXIUARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

• 71

Data Transfer
Pair of storage units possibilities
With self: . . • •• . no.
With core storage: . . yes.

.511 Stacks per system: •

Yokes per module:

2.

.532 Variation in access time

Data Transfer Control

ACCESS TIMING

+ c + d = at most

Access Time Parameters and Variations

Connection to Device

.5

= O•
c + d = at most 1.
b= O•

. 431 Devices per controller:. 1.
.432 Restrictions: . • • . . . none.
. 44

+ c + d = at most 1.
b

Connection to Sl!:stem

.421.

a

• Waiting for access to specified location.
• Searching for access by
pattern matching.
. Readi.ng.
· Recording.

. 72

Transfer Load Size
With core storage: . • . 1 record or 1 band.

.73

Effective Transfer Rate
With core storage: . • . 8,420 char/sec •

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Conflicting
commands:
Inoperable access arm:
Wrong -length
record:
Wrong-record
selected:

none.
parity check
send parity bit,

indicator and alarm.
indicator and alarm.

interlock

wait.

check

indicator and alarm.

check

indicator and alarm.

address comparison

Any DSU error:
Recovery of data:

check
parity check and
address comparison

try again; if still
wrong. set indicator and alarm.
indicator and alarm.
indicator and alarm.

Action

NOTE: "Write disc check" can be programmed for complete verification of write operations.

I AUERBACH I $;]

401 :043.100
STANOARO

•

EDP

•

Internal Storage

REPORTS

IBM 1401

1311 Disk Storage Drive

INTERNAL STORAGE: 1311 DISK STORAGE DRIVE

§

043.

. 13

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

Disk Storage Drive.
1311 Models 2 and 4.

.12

Basic Use:

auxiliary storage.

.13

Description
The 1311 Disk Storage Drive is a low cost random
access storage, available for the IBM 1410, 1440 and
1620 Data Processing Systems as well as the 1401,
which features rapid interchangeability of the "Disk
Pack" storage cartridges. The system is suitable
for either random or sequential processing methods.
Each Disk Pack consists of six discs on a common
vertical axis. Data can be recorded on ten disc surfaces; the top and bottom surfaces of the pack are not
used. Each recording surface is divided into 100
concentric tracks, each track is divided into 20 sectors, and each sector holds a 5-character address
and up to 100 alphameric characters of data. The
data capacity is therefore 2, 000 characters per
track, 200,000 characters per surface, and
2, ODD, 000 characters per pack. With the optional
Track Record feature, the data capacity is 2,980
characters per track, 298,000 characters per surface, and 2, 980,000 characters per pack. It should
be noted that use of this feature requires reading full
tracks of data, thereby increasing the required internal core storage. Up to 5 Disk Storage Drives can
be connected to a .1401 system, thus the maximum
on-line data capacity is 10,000,000 characters.
Access is by means of a comb-like mechanism containing five arms that move horizontally between the
discs. Each arm has one read-write head mounted
on the top and one on the bottom, and each head
serves one disc surface. The entire access mechanism moves as one unit, so all 10 read-write heads
are always positioned at corresponding tracks on
tbeir respective surfaces. The term "cylinder" is
applied to each group of 10 tracks (Ion each disc
surface) that can be read or recorded upon at a single
setting of the access mechanism. There are 100
cylinders per Disk Storage Drive, and each cylinder
can hold 20,000 characters.
Time for access mechanism movement ranges from
zero (for successive references to a previously selected cylinder) to 400 milliseconds; average random
access time is 250 milliseconds. Unless the optional
Direct Seek feature is installed, the access arms
cannot move directly from one cylinder to another.
Instead, the arms retract all the way to the ''home''
position (beyond track 00) and then mov~ back to the
selected cylinder. The result is that movements between adjacent cylinders require from 85 milliseconds (track 00 to 01) to 390 milliseconds (track
98 to 99).

© 1963

Description (Contd. )
Rotational speed of the discs is 1,500 rpm. Maximum rotational delay is 40 milliseconds, and the
average is 20 milliseconds. There is also a head
select delay of 2 milliseconds. Total reference cycle
time to read a randomly-placed 100-character record,
up-date it, re-write it, and execute a programmed
write check is 354 millisec;onds. If no access motion
is required, the total reference cycle time is reduced
to 104 milliseconds. Peak data transfer rate is
77, 000 characters per second, and the effective bulk
transfer rate is 33,800 to 38,200 characters per
second.
A single read or write instruction can transfer from
1 to 200 consecutive sectors of information; i. e. ,
from 100 characters to the capacity of core storage
in multiples of 100 characters. The programmer can
elect to read and write sector addresses along with
the data records. Handling of variable-length disc
records is facilitated by "sector count overlays" in
which the first three characters of a record specify
the number of sectors (from 2 to 200) comprising that
record.
All capacities and transfer rates quoted here are
based on operation in the "move" mode, in which six
data bits and one parity bit are recorded for each
character. In the alternative "load" mode, the word
mark bit is also recorded for each character, and
seclor capacity is reduced from 100 to 90 data characters. All capacities and transfer rates for the load
mode are therefore 10 per cent lower than the figures
quoted here. Use of the load mode is essential for
program storage and for data storage when field
lengths vary from record to record.
-Checks are made for parity errors, wrong length
records, and unequal address comparisons. The
''write disc check" instruction causes a characterby-character comparison of data just written on the
disc with the data in core storage. This instruction
usually follows each write operation. All disc errors
cause the setting of testable indicators.
Disk Storage Drive seek time can be fully overlapped
with internal processing. A "branch if access mechanism busy" instruction is provided. No overlapping
is possible during disc read or write operations. Only
one seek operation may go on at a time, regardless of
the number of Disk Storage Drives in a system.
The removable Disk Packs are 14 inches in diameter,
4 inches high, and weigh less than 10 pounds, including covers. A Disk Pack can be removed from a Disk
Storage Drive and replaced by another Disk Pack in
one minute. When a Disk Pack is not mounted on a
drive, the pack and its cover combine to form a
sealed container that can be conveniently stored and
transported. One Disk Pack is supplied with each
1311 Disk Storage Drive. Additional Disk Packs cost
$490 each, f. o. b. San Jose.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

401:043.130

IBM 1401

§ 043.

.27

Interleaving Levels: . . 1.

· 13

• 28

Access Techniques

Description (Contd. )

.281 Recording method:.

by one of the magnetic heads
on access arms which move
horizontally in unison .

Optional Features
Direct Seek: Penuits the access mechanism to move
directly to the specified cylinder without returning to
the "Imine" position. Access motion time ranges
from zero to 250 milliseconds and averages 150
milliseconds.
Track Record: Penuits reading and writing a full
track as a single 2, 980-character record, thereby
increasing the capacity of each Disk Pack from
2,000,000 to 2, 980, 000 characters. The increased
capacity is achieved by using the areas that normally
contain sector addresses for data storage.
Scan Disk: Penuits an automatic search of data recorded in disc storage for a specific identifier or
condition.
Seek Overlap: Permits a "Seek" operation on one
disc storage drive to be overlapped with one 1311
"Read" or "Write" operation on another disc unit
plus any number of other "Seek" operations.
. 14

Availability: •.

?

.15

First Delivery:

?

• 16

Reserved Storage: •

none. (Note that each 100digit sector is preceded by
a 5-digit address, but
these address digits are
not counted as storage. )

•2

PHYSICAL FORM

• 21

Storage Medium: •

• 22

Physical Dimensions

Storage Phenomenon:

· 24

Recording Permanence

• 241 Data erasable by
instructions: . .
• 242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . .
• 243 Data volatile: . .
• 244 Data penuanent: .
• 245 Storage changeable:
• 25

.26

t
.29

magnetization.

yes •
no .
no.
no.
yes.

Not necessary with Direct Seek feature.

Potential Transfer Rates

.291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates:
Bit rate per track:
.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data: . . . .
Conversion factor: •

1,500 rpm.
539,000 data bits/sec/track.
character.
7 bits per character (6 plus
parity).
1 track/band .
77,000 characters/sec. not
counting address digits.

Gain factor:
Data rate: •
.3

DATA CAPACITY

.31

Module and

S~stem

Sizes

Minimum
Storage

• multiple magnetic discs.

• 222 Drum or Disc
Diameter: • . . . • . 14 inches o. d.
Thickness or length: . thin.
Number or shaft:. .
6.
• 23

• 283 Type of access
Description of stage Possible starting stage
Move heads to home
position t and then
to selected band:
mandatory When new band is
selected.
Wait for selected
sector for reading
or recording: . . . if same band was previously
selected.

Maximum
Storage

Identity:

0

1311
Model 4

1311
Model 2

Discs:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Modules:

0
0
0

6
variable
2.000.000
variable
1

6
variable
2.000,000
variable
1

0

0

.4

CON~ROLLER

.41

Identity: . . . .

.42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:
•• .
.422 Off-line: . . . . . • .
.43

1 1311 Model 4
and 4 1311
Model 2.
30.
variable•
10.000.
variable.
5.

. part of 1311 Model 4 •

1 1311 Model 4 .
none.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 5 modules .
.432 Restrictions:. • . . . . 1 Model-4 and 1 to 4 Model
2; no other restrictions .

Data Volume per Band of 1 Track

. 44

Words: • . .
Characters:
Digits: . . .
Instructions: .
Sectors: . . .

.441 Size of load.
Variable length: . . . 1 to 200 sectors of 100
characters per sector;
number of sectors set by
programmer.
Fixed length: . . . . . 20 sectors of 100 characters
per sector (one band).

variable.
2,000.
2,000.
variable.
20.

Bands per Physical Unit: 100 per disc surface.

5/63

Data Transfer Control

INTERNAL STORAGE: 1311 DISK STORAGE DRIVE

§

043.

.442 Input-output area:
.443 Input-output area
access: ••.
.444 Input-output area
lockout: • • • . •
.445 Synchronization:.
. 447 Table control: . .
• 448 Testable conditions: •

401:043.442

.6

CHANGEABLE STORAGE

core storage.

• 61

Cartridges

each character.

·5

ACCESS TIMING

· 611 Cartridge capacity
Without Track Record
feature: . . . . .
2, 000, 000 characters
(6 discs) .
With Track Record
feature: . . . . .
2, 980, 000 characters
(6 discs) •
• 612 Cartridges per module: I.
.613 Interchangeable:. .•
yes.

• 51

Arrangement of Heads

· 62

.511 Number of stacks
Stacks per system: •
Stacks per module:.
Stacks per yoke: •.
Yokes per module: .
• 512 Stack movement: . . •
• 513 Stacks that can access
any particular
location: . . . • . .
.514 Accessible locations
By single stack
With no movement: .
With all movement: •
By all stacks
With no movement: •

yes.
automatic.
none.
none.

.621 Possible loading
While computing
system in use:
While storage. system
in use: . • • • •

50 max.
10.
10.
I.
horizontal.

.622 Method of loading: •
• 623 Approximate change
time: . . • •
.624 Bulk loading: •

1.

20 sectors.
2, 000 sectors.
200 sectors per module
200 to I, 000 sectors per
system.

. 515 Relationship between
stacks and locations: • three most significant digits
of Sector Address denote
head and band (cylinder)
number.
.52

.53

Simultaneous
Operations: •

maximum of 1 1311 Disk
Storage operation (reading,
recording, or seeking) at
a time per 1401 system.

yes, if the particular
module is not addressed •
operator .
1 minute.
no; 1 cartridge of 6 discs at
a time.

AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

.7l

Data Transfer
Paint of storage unit possibilities
With self:. . • • .•
no •
With core storage: .
yes.

.72

Transfer Load Size
1 to 20 sectors; number of
sectors selected by
program.
1 block of 20 sectors
(one band).

With core storage:.

.73

Effective Transfer Rate
The times shown are the average for either reading
from or recording on disc storage with no checking.

• 532 Variation in access time
Stage
Variation
Average
Without Direct Seek
Move head to home
position and then
to selected band: 75 to 392 msec. 250 msec.
Wait for selected
sector for reading
or recording:
0 to 40 msec.
20 msec.
Total:
75 to 432 msec. 270msec.
With Direct Seek
Move head to
selected band:
54 to 248
Wait for selected
sector for reading
or recording:
0 to 40 msec.
Total:
54 to 288 msec.

yes.

.7

Access Time Parameters and Variations

© 1963

Loading Convenience

154 msec.
20 msec.
174 msec.

With core storage
With Direct Seek: •• 38,200 char/sec .
Without Direct Seek:. 33,800 char/sec.

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Invalid address:
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Timing confl1ct:
Physical reoord missing:
Reference to locked area:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Check or
Interlock
check on matching
sector address
none.
parity check
programmed read -back
and compare
parity check
parity bit inclnded.
interlock
check on reoord length
check on optional lock

Action
indicator.

indicatot.
indicator.
indicator.
wait.

Indicator.
,indicator.

5/63

401 :051.100
.STANMRD

EDP
•

IBM 1401

REPORTS

Central Processor
Processing Unit

CENTRAL PROCESSOR: PROCESSING UNIT

§

051.

. 12

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity: .

. 12

. Processing Unit.
1401 Models A, B, C, D,
E, F.

Description:
The 1401 is a two-address, add-to-storage proces
sor. All operations are performed serially by
character and terminated when a word mark bit is
sensed, so operand size is limited only by the programmer's desires and the available core storage.
The basic arithmetic and logical capabilities of the
six models are identical; they differ, however, in
the configurations of peripheral equipment and optional features that can be attached, as shown in the
System Configuration "chart. Controllers for the
card read-punch, printer, and magnetic tape units
are an integral part of the Processing Unit.
The processor is well suited to general data manipulation and has powerful editing capabilities, but
multiplication, division, indexing, high-low comparison, and record transfer capabilities are extracost options, as described below. "Instruction
length is variable from one to eight characters.
Arithmetic and data transfer instructions are
usually seven characters long. Through careful
placement of data, instructions can sometimes be
"chained" so that a one character instruction does
the work of a seven character one, resulting in
savings in both storage requirements and execution time. C.haining is possible only when a series
of operations is to be performed on items of data
stored in consecutive locations.
Data movement is performed in either the MOVE
mode or the LOAD mode of operation. In the
MOVE mode, data items are moved without fielddefining word marks, thereby effectively restricting the data format to fixed item lengths, because
instructions must repeatedly operate on the same
data addresses. In the LOAD mode, data items
are moved with restricting word marks, marking
dynamically variable item lengths possible; i. e. ,
the number of characters used to represent a given
data item can vary from record to record. The
LOAD mode usually results in longer internal
processing because it usually requires storing
address registers and subsequent indexing to
determine the length of each data item in order to
ascertain the low order pOSition of the next data
item. The LOAD mode usually makes tape inputoutput operations shorter, even though an extra
word mark character is inserted on the tape record
for each item, because non-significant zeros or
blanks used to fill out items to equal lengths in the
MOVE mode can be omitted. Because the basic
1401 system (without optional features) does not

© 1963

Description (Contd.)
possess the ability to index or store address
registers, the data format is necessarily restricted to fixed position fields of preset length and,
therefore, to the MOVE mode of data manipulation.
The ability to store the contents of either the
A-address or the B-address registers (an optional
feature) is very helpful when addressing data items;
however, the contents of only one of the two
address registers can be stored for a given setting,
because the instruction that stores one destroys the
contents of the other.
The card reader, card punch, and printer inputoutput areas are preset locations in core storage.
These locations are completely usable as regular
storage. Before a card punch or printer output
operation can be performed, the data to be punched
or printed must be moved to the appropriate preset
output area. Similarly, care must be exercised so
that no data which needs to be preserved is located
in the preset card reader input area when a read
operation is initiated.

Optional Features
Advanced Programming: Makes three 3-character
registers in core storage available as index
registers which can index any instrUction address;
permits storing the contents of the A or B address
registers; and permits the transfer of complete
records of data within core storage by a single
instruction.
Column Binary: Permits processing of column
binary coded cards and magnetic tapes, such as
those used in the IBM 704, 709, and 7090 systems.
Expanded Print Edit: Adds check protection,
floating dollar Sign, decimal control, and sign
control left to the basic editing capabilities.
High-Low-Equal Compare: Permits testing of
indicators for high, low or equal conditions after
a comparison. (Without the compare feature, only
equal-unequal comparisons can be made.)
Multiply-Divde: Permits direct multiplication and
division.
Sense Switches: Provide six console switches and
corresponding testable indicators which can be
used to control the stored program.
Direct Data Channel: Permits two 14:01 systems
or a 1401 and 1441 to transfer data from one to
another.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised 5/63

IBM 1401

401 :051.120
051.
• 12 Description (Contd.)

§

.218 Table look-Up:. . . . . . none .
· 22

Qptional Features (Contd.)
Processing Overlap: Allows the system to compute
while input/output is in process. Computing continues while the input-output unit prepares to send
or receive data, and between character transfers
to and from core storage.
Tape Intermix: Permits mixing 729 tape units with
7330 tape units on the same system.
.13

Availability:.. • • • 12 months as of
April, 1963.

.14

First Delivery:. • • • September, 1960

•2

PROCESSING FACILITIES

• 21

Operations and Operands
Operation
and Variation

Divide:
No remainder:
Remainder:

Radix

Size

automatic

decimal

1 to N char.

decimal
decimal

1 to N char.
1 to N char.

decimal

1 to N char.

decimal

1 to N char.

subroutine
subroutine
subroutine

decimal
decimal
decimal

8 & 2 char.
8 & 2 char.
8 & 2 char.

none.
none.

Binary

• 212 Floating point
Add-Subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:

.213 Boolean
AND:

Inclusive OR:

· 214 Comparison:

. only for equality; optional
feature for high -low.

Numbers:
automatic
Absolute:
none.
Letters:
automatic
Mixed:
automatic
Collating sequence: blank. specials. A-Z. 0-9.

1 to N char.

1 to N char.
1 to N char.

• 215 Code translation:
optional
feature

From

To

Size

column binary
(card image)

binary tape
format

1 to 80 columns.

To

Size

none.

.217 Edit format:
Comment
automatic

Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Insert $. CR-:
Float $:
Protection:

automatic.
none.
automatic.
automatic
automatic
optional feature.
optional feature.

5/63 Revised

. 222 Zero:

• 223 Operand size
determination: .

• word mark bit in high
order digit position.

Instruction Formats

Part
Size (char)

Size

expand but
not conuact.

1 to N char.

OP
1

A or I
3

B

d

3

1

Instructions may consist of:
1. OP only
2. OP, d
3. OP, A or I
4. OP, A or I, d
5. OP, A or I, B
6. OP, A or I, B, d
.233 Instruction parts
Name
Purpose
OP: •
. operation code.
A: . •
. address of an operand in
core storage or of a
peripheral device.
I:
. location of next instruction
if a branch occurs.
B:
• address of an operand or
field in core storage.
d:
. modifier for an operation
code.
.234 Basic address structure: 2 + O.
• 235 Literals
Arithmetic: • • • . . • none.
Comparisons and tests: yes, single character.
Inc:t;ementing
modifiers: • • . • • . p.one.
• 236 Directly addressed operands
• 2361
Internal storage type
Minimum size Maximumsize Volume accessible
core:
disc:

• 216 Radix conversion:

Alter size:

· absolute value with B zonebit in units position .
· positive, negative, and
unsigned zeros and blanks
give same result in arithmetic but are unequal in
comparisons.

.231 Instruction structure: . . variable; 1 to 8 characters •
• 232 Instruction layout:

Provision

none.
subroutine
automatic (with
Multiply-Divide)
none.
subroutine
automatic (with
Multiply-Divide)

.221 Negative numbers:

• 23

• 211 Fixed point
Add-Subuact:
MUltiply:
Short:
Long:

Special Cases of Operands

1 char
1 block

total capacity total capaCity.
total capacity (in1 band of 5
blocks
direct addressing
must be used).

• 237 Address indexing
• 2371
Number of methods: . • 1.
.2372
Names: . . . .
· indexing (with optional
feature).
.2373
Indexing rule:
· addition, modulo 16, 000.
.2374
Index specification: · zone bits in tens position
of presumptive address.
.2375
Number of potential
indexers:., . . . . . • 3.
.2376
Addresses which can
be indexed:. . . . . · all.
.2377
Cumulative indexing: · none.

401 :051.2378

CENTRAL PROCESSOR: PROCESSING UNIT
.92 + 34.5C .
. none.
. none.

05l.
• 2378 Combined index and step: none.
• 238 Indirect addressing:.
none. except for disc
storage unit •
• 239 Stepping:
none.

.416
. 417
,418

Edit: . . .
Convert: •
Shift:

.42

Processor Performance in J.L sec

.24

Special Processor Storage

.421

F:or random addresses

.241

Category of

§

stora~

Processing Unit:
Processing Unit:
Core Storage

.242

Category of
storage

No. of
locations

Fixed point

Size in
characters

Program usage

1
3
sequence counter.
2
3
data transfer control.
3 (5 with
BO to 132 Input-output areas.
Column
Binary Feature)
Total
Physical Access time. Cycle time,
no. of
sec.
sec.
locations
form

Processing Unit:

Core Storage:

3

c = a + b: • • • • • • ••
b = a + b:. • • • • • ••
Sum N items: • • • • • •
'" = ab, with MD: ••••
c = ab, with subroutines:
c = alb, with MD: ••••
c = alb, with subroutines:

.422

transistorized
latch

3 (5 with
Column core
Binary Feature)

=ai + bj,
ci =ai + bj,

.423
.3

SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES

.31

Instruction Sequencing

.311

Number of sequence
control facilities:
.
Sequence control
step size: . . . .
.
Accessibility to routine:
Permanent or optional
modifier: .
.

.315
.316
. 317

.424
1 character.
none.
no.
.425

Look-Ahead:

. none.

• 33

Interruption:

. none.

.34

Multi-running:

. none.

. 35

Multisequencing:

. none.

.4

PROCESSOR SPEEDS

.41

Instruction Times in J.L secs

. 411

Fixed point
Add-subtract:
Multiply: .

. 413

.414
. 415

Floating point

965 + 46D

9,500.

without AP:

1173 + 46D

9,600.

713 + 23D
529 + 23D
920 + 150D + 58D 2

9,600.
B,600.
17,300.

765 + 3450D + 140D 2

Branch based on comparison
With HighLow-Equal
Compare
Numeric data:. .
1012 + 230
Alphameric data:
1012 + 230

Without HighLow-Equal
Compare
1104 + 460.
impractical.

1.

.32

.412

Fixed point
with AP:

bj = ai + bj:
Sum N items:
c = c + aibj, with MD:
c =c + aibj, with subroutines:

11.5

6.5

For arrays of data
ci

11.5

Floating point

B, BOO.
207.+ 46D
115 + 23D
B.800.
B,200.
115 + 23D
B,600.
207 + 127D + 57. 5D2
466 + 3450D + 140D 2
196 + 115D + BO. 5D 2 12,700
86BO + 2950D + 1720 2

115 + 230.
115 + 1040 + 57. 50 2
(with optional feature).
Divide: . .
104 + 920 + 80. 50 "
(with optional feature).
Floating pOint (8-digit precision)
Add-subtract:
.7,850.
Subtract: .
. 8,300.
Multiply:. • .
• 7,600.
Divide:
11,700.
Additional allowance for
Indexing: . . . . . .
34.5 or 46. 0 per modified address.
Re-complementing:
. 34.50.
Control
Compare: . . .
. 92 + 230.
Branch: . • . .
.57.5. to 115.
Counter control:
. none.

© 1963

Switching
Unchecked:
Compose: .

483.
943 (with High- LowEqual Compare) .
List search: .
644 + 644N.
Format control per character
Unpack: .
. 34.
Compose: . . . . . . . 62 •

.426

Table look up per comparison
For a match: . . . . . . 575 + 23C.
For least or greatest: . 775 + 25C .
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . • . 575 + 23C •

.427

Bit indicators
Set bit in separate
location: . . . . .
Test bit in separate
location:

. 184.

.428

Moving:

. 92 + 230.

.5

ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Check or
Error
Interlock
Overflow:
Underflow (float-pt):
Zero divisor:
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

. 115 .

check

Action
indicator & alarm.

none •

overflow check
char. validity check
check
none.
limit check
parity check

Indica tor & alarm.
stop & alarm.
stop & alarm •
stop & alarm•
indicator & alarm.

none •

Revised 5/63

401 :061.100
•

STANDARD

EDP

•

IBM 1401

REPORTS

Console

CONSOLE

§

061.

.25

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

. 12

Associated Units: . . . . none .

.13

Description

contained in 1401 Processing Unit, at upper left
corner Of front pane1.

The 1401 Console occupies the upper left quarter of
the front panel of the Processing Unit cabinet. Display lights are set into a schematic diagram of the
processor's data flow paths. Alarm lights across
the top indicate errors in the processor or in specific peripheral units. The main operating controls
are at the bottom of the console panel. Less frequently used controls are in the Auxiliary Console,
which is located just below the main console panel
and is covered during normal operation. The Console is designed for operation from a standing
position, and no desk space is provided. Typewriter
input-output is available only through the inclusion
of the optional 1407 Console Inquiry Station.

.2

CONTROLS

.21

Power
Form

Comment

Power on:

button
button
pull switch

turns on main power supply.
turns off main power supply.
disconnects all power.

Connections:

.23

Stops and Restarts
Name

Form

Comment

Start key:
Stop key:

button
button

initiates machine operation.
ha Its processing upon completion of current instruction

Stepping:

Name

Form

Comment

Start reset:
Check reset:

button
button

I/O check stop:

toggle switch

Check stop:

toggle switch

turns off all indicators.
must be depressed after
a processing error.
determines whether system w11l stop on reader,
punch, or printer errors.
determines whether processing errors will result
in halts.

Special
Name

Form

Comment

Manual address:

4 10-position
dials

Register keylights:

5 buttons

select address for entry
into A-. B-. or I-address register.
select an address register
for display or data entty.-

Loadi~

Name

Form

Comment

Tape 101Ul:

button

Bit switches:

8 toggle switches

Enter switch:

toggle

selects tape unit 1. loads
1 record starting at position 001. and transfen control to 0002.
used to alter charactelS
in storage •
enten character selected
by bit switches into
storage •

Program Branching
Name

Form

Sense switch A:

toggle switch

Sense switches B-G:

._. none.

.22

.24

.26

• 27

Name
Power off:
Emergency off:

.28

Resets

Mode switch selects one of
nine operation modes:
RUN, INSTRUCTION
EXECUTION, SINGLE
CYCLE PROCESS, SINGLEt
CYCLE NON-PROCESS,
CHARACTER DISPLAY,
STORAGE PRINT -OUT,
ALTER, STORAGE SCAN,
or ADDRESS STOP.
Several of these result in
stepping each time Start
key is depressed.

© 1963

.3

DISPLAY

.31

Alarms
---

Comment

controls last-card operations (standard).
toggle switcbes (6) testable by program to
control branching
(optional feature) •

Name

Form

Condition indicated

Process light:
RAMAC light:
Tape light:
Extemall/O light:
Reader light:

static
static
static
static
static

Punch light:

static light

Printer light:
Storage light:

static light
static light

Logic light:
A light:
Blight:
Storage-address
light:
OP-register light:

static
static
static
static

Processing Unit error.
Disc Storage Unit error.
tape read or write- error.
error in a serial I/o unit.
operator attention required by card reader.
operator attention required by card punch.
printer error.
parity error in core
storage.
arithmetic parity error.
parity error in A-register.
parity error in B-register.
parity error in address
register.
incorrect operation code.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporoted

light
light
light
light
light

light
light
li ght
light

static light

Reprinted 5/63

401:063-320
§

IBM 1401

061.

.32

Conditions
Name

Form

Comment

OVerflow light:

static light

remains ON until overflow indicator is tested
by program.
indicates unequal comparison.
indicates equal comparison.
with High-Low-Equal
Compare feature
ouly.
with High-Low-Equal
Compare feature
ouly.
indicates which character of a n instruction is
displayed •

of A light:

dynamic light

B = A light:

dynamic light

> A light:

dynaniic light

B < A light:

dynamic light

Instruction length:

static light

B

B

. 33

ENTRY OF OAT A

.41

Into Control Registers
(1) Set Mode switch to ALTER.

(2) Set Manual Address switches to the address to
be entered.
(3) Press key-light for the desired register.
(4) Press Start key.

.42

Into Storage
(1) Set Mode switch to ALTER.
(2) Set Manual Address switches to storage location to be filled.
(3) Set Bit-switches to the required pattern.
(4) Turn on Enter switch to load one character at
a time.

Control Registers
Name

Form

A -register:

BCD lights.
BCD lights.
BCD lights.
BCD lights
(4 positions)

B-register:
OP-register:
Storage address:

.34

.4

Comment

A-, B-, or I-address is
displayed, depending
upon key-light depressed.

Storage
(1) Set Mode switch to CHARACTER OISPLA Y.
(2) Set Manual Address switches to location to be

displayed.
(3) Press Start key to display storage contents
(one character) in the B-register lights.

5/63 Reprinted

.5

CONVENIENCES

.51

Communication: .

.52

Clock: ..

..

none .

. 53

Desk Space: .

none.

.54

View:

the console is designed for
best visibility and operation from a standing
position.

none.

401:071.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 1401

REPORTS

Input.Output

1402 Card Reader
INPUT ·OUTPUT: CARD READ·PUNCH (READER)

§

071.

.22

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: ..

· 12

. Card Read-Punch,
(Reader only).
1402 Model 1.

SenSing and Recording S}:,:stems

.221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system: .
. 223 Common system:

· none .
· brush .
· no.

.23

Multiple copies: •

· none .

. 24

Arrangement of Heads

Description:
While the 1402 consists of a card reader and punch
housed in the same cabinet, the two units are completely independent of one another from the user's
viewpoint and are covered in separate sections of
this report.
The reader reads standard 80-column cards at a
peak speed of 800 cards per minute. Conversion
from the card column code to internal BCD code is
automatic. A hole-count check is made on each column at a second reading station, and the bit configuration of each character is checked for validity as
it is transferred into core storage. A .hopper with
a 3, ODD-card capacity and 3 stackers with 1,000card capacities (one shared with the punch unit) can
be loaded and unloaded without stopping the reader.

Use of station:.
Stacks:
.
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

.. .

· reading.
.1.
.80.
· 1 row at a time.

Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks: ...
Heads / stack:
Method of use:

· checking.
· 1 card.
.1.
.80.
1 row at a time.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium: • • . • .

Optional Features:
.312 Phenomenon:

.....

• standard 80-column cards
(51-column cards with
optional Interchangeable
Feed).
• rectangular holes •

.32 Positional Arrangement
Column Binary: Permits true card image to be
stored in core positions 401-480 and 501-580. (No
· 12 rows at standard
character validity checking can be done in this case.) . 321 Serial by: .
spacing.
.322 Parallel by:
· SO-columns of standard
Early Card Read: Provides a 3-point clutch so card
spacing.
reading can be initiated at 25-millisecond intervals
.324 Track use
instead of the standard 75-millisecond interval.
Data:
· SO.
Total:
· SO.
Interchangeable Feed: Permits reading of either
.325 Row use
SO- or 51-column cards by interchanging hardware.
Data:
· 12.
ProceSSing Overlap: Permits computation during
.33 Coding:
· column code as in Data Code
reader start time and between character transfers.
Table No. 3 (401:143.100),
or (with Column Binary)
Read-Punch Release: Permits computation during
binary pattern of holes in
reader start time (21 milliseconds per card).
each col•
. 34 Format Compatibility
Other device or system Code translation
· 13

Availability:....... 12 months, as of
April, 1963.

.14

First Delivery: . .

·2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head:.
.212 Reservoirs: . . • . .

. September, 1960

. clutch driven rollers.
. none.

© 1963

All devices using std.
80-column cards: . . not required .
.35

Ph}:':sical Dimensions: . . standard SO-column cards.

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:....

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

· no separate controller
(circuitry is in processing unit).
Reprinted 5/63

401:071.420

§

IBM 1401

071 .

. 42

Connection to System

PERFORMANCE

· 61

Conditions

. 1.
. none.

.421 On-line:.
. 422 Off-line:. . . . . .•
. 43

.6

I: ••
IT: ••
ill: •

Connection to Device

standard unit.
with Read-Punch Release •
with Processing Overlap•

. 431 Devices per controller:. 1.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . . none.
.44

.62

Data Transfer Control

...

. 441 Size of load: .
.442 Input-output areas:

· 1 card of 80 characters .
· core storage positions
001-080 (also positions
~0l-480 and 501-580 in
Column Binary mode).

.443 Input-output area
access:
..
. 444 Input-output area
lockout:

..
...

· each character.
• yes, for full block.
(no lockout when Processing Overlap is used. )
· none.
· automatic.

. 445 Table control: .
. 446 Synchronization: .
.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.621 Nominal or peak speed:. 800 cards/min, all cases.
· 622 Irnportantparameters
Name
Value
.75 msec.
Clutch cycle:.
· 623 Overhead: • . • .
· I clutch point (3 with
optional feature).
• 624 Effective speeds:
· 800 cards/min if processing time per card does
not exceed these values:
I: .
.10msec.
II: .
. 31 msec.
III:.
. 63 msec •

.63

Demands on Srstem
Comeonent

.511 .size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input:

.1 card.

.. ... .

Input-Ou~ut

.521
. 522
.523
. 524
.525
• 526

Input:
Output: . .
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
Marking:.
Searching: .

·
·
·
·
·

.' 53

Code Translation: .

• automatic by processor .

. 54

Format Control: .

· none.

. 55

Control Operations

msec eer card.

I

65

n

44

III

12

or Percentage
or
or
or

86.7.
58.7.
16.0 •

Operations

..

Disable: • . . . . .
Request interrupt:.
Offset card: . .
Select stacker:
Select format: .
Select code: .
Unload: . . . .

· I card forward .

none.
none .
none.
none .
none.

Disabled: . .
Busy device: .
Output lock: .
Nearly exhausted: •
Busy controller:. .
End of medium marks:
Exhausted: . .
Full stacker: . . • . •

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments
Adjustment

no.
no.
no.
yes, one of 3.
no.
with Column Binary only.
no.

· no.
· with Processing Overlap only.
· no.
• no.
· no.
· no.
· yes.
· no.

Method

Card width:

.72

Load:
Check reset:
Stop:

.73

Comment

interchange of with Interchangeable
hardware
Feed only•

Other Controls
Function

·
·
·
·
·
·
·

Testable Conditions

5/63 Reprinted

Conditj.on

Processing Unit:

· fixed.

.52

.56

Speeds

Form

Comment

key
key
key

starts loading of instruction cards.
resets read error indicators.
halts system at end of current
program step.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: . . .
Stackers: . . .
.732 Replenishment time:
.733 Adjustment time (80to 51-column cards):
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . . . .

Capacity"
· 3,000 cards.
· 1, 000 cards each.
• O. 25 to 0.50 minute.
• 10 to 15 minutes.

· 1. 25 minutes.

INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READ-PUNCH (READER)

§

401 :071.800

071

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

Reading:
Input area ovelflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Feed jam:
Stacker full:

hole count
cannot occur.
check
check
none.
interlock
check
check

indicator and alarm.·
indicator and alarm.·
indicator.
wait.
stop and alarm.
stop and alarm.

• Stop will occur if I/O Check Stop Switch is on.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 5/63

401:072.100

.srANOAAO

II

EDP
REPORrs

IBM 1401
Input-Output
1402 Card Punch
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READ-PUNCH (PUNCH)

§

072.

· 24

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

. 12

. Card Read-Punch,
(Punch only).
1402 Model 1.

Description
Housed in the same cabinet as the card reader, this
unit punches standard 80-column cards at a peak
speed of 250 cards per minute. Conversion from
internal BCD representation to the column card code·
is automatic. A reading station makes a hole-count .3
check on each column. The 1, 200-card feed hopper
and three 1, ODD-card stackers (1 shared with the
• 31
reader unit) can be loaded and unloaded without stopping the punch.
. 311
. 312
Optional Features
· 32
Column Binary: Permits punching contents of
core positions 401-480 arid 501-580 into a single
. 321
card without code conversion.
· 322
Punch Feed Read: Adds a reading station
ahead of the punching station so that results can be
punched into the same card from which data was
read. Hole-count and character validity checks are
made on the read operation, and the demand on the
processing unit is increased by 3 milliseconds per
card.

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:.
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

• punching.
.1.
.80.
· 1 row at a time.

Use of station:.
Distance: . .
Stacks: .....
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

· checking.
· 1 card.
.1.
.80.
· f row at a time.

EXTERNAL STORAGE
Form of Storage
Medium: ..
Phenomenon: . . .
Positional Arrangement
Serial by: .
Parallel by:

• 324 Track use
Data:
Total:
.325 Row use
Data:
.33

Coding:

· 34

Format Compatibility

Processing Overlap: Permits computation during
punch start time and between character transfers
from core store.
Read-Punch Release: Permits computation during
punch start time (37 milliseconds per card).
· 13

Availability:....... 12 months, as of
April, 1963.

· 14

First Delivery:

·2

PHYSICAL FORM

• 21

Drive Mechanism

. 211 Drive past the head:.
.212 Reservoirs: . . . •.
. 22

Sensing and Recording Systems

. 221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system: .
· 223 CO)11mon system:

· die punches .
· brush .
· no.

. 23

• none.

Multiple Copies:.

© 1963

· 12rows at standard spacing.
· 80 columns at standard
spacing.
.80.
.80.
.12.
· column code as Data Code
,Table No. 3(401:143.100),
or (with Column Binary)
binary pattern of holes
in each column.

Other device or system Code translation
All devices using
standard 80-column cards:. ....

· September, 1960.

. clutch driven rollers.
. none.

· standard 80-column cards •
• rectangular holes .

. not required.

.35

Physical Dimensions: . . standard 80-column cards •

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:.

.42

Connection to System

. 421 On-line: .
.422 Off-line:.
.43

· no separate controller
(circuitry is in processing unit) .

.1 .

• none.

Connection to Device

· 431 Devices per controller: . 1 .
. 432 Restrictions: . . . . . . . none •

by Auerbach ,Corporation and' BNA Incorporated.

Reprinted 5/63

40J :072.440
§

IBM l401

072.

.44

.62
Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:. . . .
.442 Input-output areas:

Speeds

.621 Nominal or peak speed:. 250 cards/min, (all cases) .
. 622 Important parameters
Name
Value

. 1 card of 80 characters.
core storage positions
Clutch cycle:. .
101-180 (also positions
.623 Overhead: . . . .
001-080 with Punch Feed
· 624 Effective speeds:
Read and 401-480 and
501-580 with Column Binary.

.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
. 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . .
. 445 Table control:. .
.446 Synchronization:

.240 msec.
· -4 clutch pOints.
· 250 cards/min if processing time per card does
not exceed these values:
I: .
22ll).sec.
II: .
59 msec •
III:.
212 msec.

• each character.
· yes, for full block.
(no lockout when Processing Overlap is used) •
· none.
· automatic.

• 63

Demands on System
Component

Condition

Processing Unit:

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

. 51

Blocks

msec. per card. 2! Percentage

218
181
16

I
II

III

,.511 Size of block:
.1 card .
• 512 Block demarcation
Output: . . . . . .
· fixed •
• 52 Input-Output Operations

. 522
.523
. 524
. 525
. 526

Output: . .
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
Marking:.
Searching:

with Punch Feed Read,
1 card forward, interlocked with output.
· 1 card forward •
· none •
· none .
· none .
• none.

. 53

Code Translation: .

· automatic, by processor.

.54

Format Control:

· none.

,. 55

Control Operations

.521 Input:

Disabled: . . . . .
Request interrupt:.
Offset card: . •
Select stacker:
Select format: .
Select code: .
Unload: . . • .
• 56

• 61

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments: . . • . . . none.

.72

Other Controls

· 73

Form

Comment

Check reset:
Stop:

key
key

resets punch error indicatoR.
halts system at end of current
program step.

Loading and Unloading
Capaci!y

Hopper: . . . .
Stackers: . . •
. 732 Replenishment time:

0

6.7 •

Function

.731, Volumes handled
Storage
· no.
· no.
· no.
· yes, 1 of 3.
· no.
• with Column Binary only
· no •

90.8 •
75.4.

.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . •

• 1 ,"zOO cards.
• 1, 000 cards each.

.0.25 to 0.50 minute •
Punch does not need to be
stopped.
.4.0 minutes.

Testable Conditions
Disable: .
Busy device: •
Output lock: •
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Hopper empty:
Stacker full: .

.6

.7

or
or
or

· no.
W1thProcessingOverlap only.
.8
· no.
· no.
• no.
· no.
· no.
· no.

PERFORMANCE
Conditions
I:
II:
III:

standard unit.
with Read-Punch Release.
with Processing Overlap.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Errors

Check or
Interlock

Action

Recording:
Reading:

hole count
,hoie count
(with Punch
F~ed Read)
fixea.
check
check
none.
interlock
check
check

indicator and alarm.'
indicator and alarm.'

Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Feed jam:
Stacker full:

indicator and alarm.'
stop and alarm•
wait.
stop and alarm.
stop and alarm.

• Stop will occur if I/O Check Stop Switch is on.

5/63 Reprinted

401:073.100
•

II

""DARO
EDP

IBM 1401
Input-Output
1011 Paper Tape Reader

REPORTS

INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER

§

073.

· 32

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . .

.12

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by: •
· 322 Parallel by:

· 1 to N rows at 10 per inch.
· 5 to 8 tracks at standard
spacing.

· Paper Tape Reader.
1011 Model 1.

· 324 Track use
Data:
.....
Redundancy check:
Description:
Timing: . . . • .
This unit reads data from punched paper tape into
Control signals: .
1401 core storage at a peak speed of 500 rows per
Unused:
second. Five-, six-, seven-, or eight-track tape
Total: •
. 325 Row use
can be read, and translation of the tape codes to
Data: .
1401 BCD coding is controlled by plugboard wiring.
Redundancy check:
The tape can be either chad of chadless; 11/16,7/8,
Timing: . . • . . •
or I-inch wide; and in the form of strips, conControl signals: . .
ventional reels, or rolls which feed from the center.
Unused: . • . . • .
Parity checks can be applied to tape codes which
employ odd-bit parity, but not to five-track teleGap: (if calibrated) •
graphic tape. The optional Processing Overlap
feature permits computation to be overlapped with
· 33 Coding:........
paper tape input.

• 13

Availability: •

.14

First Delivery:

.

.12 months, as of
April, 1963.
• 34

· June, 1961.

.6 or 5.
.1 or O.
· 1 (sprocket track).
· lor O.
• O.
· 8 to 5 (Plus sprocket track) .
· variable.
• O.
• O.
· 1 (end-of-record; optional).
• O.
• 2.
· normally 5-track telegraphic or 8-track BCD
coding; most 5, 6,7, or
8-track codes can be
translated by plugboard
wiring.

Format Compatibility
Other device or system Code translation

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

. 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs
Number: .
Form:
Capacity:
.213 Feed drive:
.214 Take-up drive:
. 22

Most devices using 5,
6,7, or 8-track paper tape: . . . . . . . plugboard wiring.
· sprocket drive.

. 35

.2.
· swinging arm.
· about 2 feet.
· motor.
· motor.

.351 Over-all width:
.
.352 Length
Strip: . . . .
.
Roll (inside feeding): .
Reel (outside feeding):.

Sensing and Recording Systems

. 222 Sensing system:.

· photo-electric .

. 23

Multiple Copies:

· none.

.24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:.
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:.

....

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

..

.311 Medium: .
.312 Phenomenon:

· reading.
.1.
.8.
· reads 1 row at a time.

· paper tape .
· punched holes (chad or
chadless type).

© 1963

Physical Dimensions

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

.42

Connection. to System

.421 On-line:
Off-line'
.43

; ..

.......
,..

it

•••••

11/16, 7/8, or 1 inch.
20 to 240 inches.
5 to 400 feet.
5 to 1,000 feet •

· No separate controller.
(#7080 Serial Input/Output
Adapter required on 1401) ..
.1.
• none.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller:. 1.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . • . • 0 if other units reauiring
7080 Adapter or 3271
Direct Data Channel is
connected to the 1401.
,.44 Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load:. . . . . . . 1 to N characters, where
N is limited by available
core storage.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 5/63

401:073.442
§

IBM 1401

073.

.62

.442 Input-output areas:
• 443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . • • •

· core storage.

Speeds

· 621 Nominal or peak speed: . SOD char/sec .
· 622 Important parameters
Name
Value

• each character.

.yes, for full block, (no
lockout when Processing
Overlap is used).
.445 Table control: • • • • • none.
• 446 Synchronization: • • • •automatic.
•5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

. 511 Size of block:
· 512 Block demarcation
Input: • . . • . .

Input: . .
Output: .
Stepping:
Skipping:
Searching:.

·
·
·
·
·

• 53

Code Translation: .

· plugboard wiring.

.54

Format Control

.56

1 block forward.
none.
none .
none.
none.

PERFORMANCE

· 61

Conditions
I:
II:

Component

Condition

· plugboard.
· undefined.
· yes.
• no.
· no.
· no.
· no.
· no.

msec per char ••
2.0000
0.0115

II

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments

.72

or
or

100.00.
0.57.

• change reels.
· change plugboard panels.

Other Controls
Function

Form

Reset alarm circuits:. . key.
Reel/strip selector: .• 2-position switch.
· 73

Loading and Unloading

· yes.
.731 Volumes handled
Storagr

· yes.

· no.
• no.
• no.
· no.
• no.
· no.

. 733 Adjustment time: .
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .

.8
·
·
·
·
·
·

Capacity

Supply & take-up
reels: . . • . • .
Center-roll feed:
. 732 Replenishment time:

• I, 000 feet.
.400 feet .
. . 0.3 to 0.5 minute for strips •
1.0 to 2.0 minutes for reels.
· 2.0 to 3.0 minutes •
.4.0 minutes.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

yes.
yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.

· without Processing Overlap.
· with Processing Overlap

Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Excessive stop
distance:
Photocell failure:

parity check •
check for group mark
plugboard wiring
check
none.
interlock

set indicator.
stop data transmission.
as wired.
stop.

check
check

set indicator.
stop: alarm.

• No parity check on 5-uack tape.
A

5/63 Reprinted

.2!. Percentage

Method

Tape width:
Tape code:

Testable Conditions

.6

Demands on System

Adjustments

Control Operations

Disabled:
Busy device:.
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller:.
End of medium marks:
Exhausted:.

· 63

Processing Unit:
Processing Unit:

• 521
· 522
· 523
. 524
.526

Disable; .
Request interrupt:.
Select format: .
Select code: .
Rewind:
Unload:

Stop distance:
• 623 Overhead: . . .
· 624 Effective speeds:

· group mark in core storage, or end-of-record
character on tape.

Input-Output Operations

.55

· 2.5 msec average,
9.0 msec max •
• 1.5 rows average,
2.0 rows max •
.8.5 msec/block.
• 500 N/ (N +4) char/sec. ,
where N = number of
char/block.

· 1 to N characters.

· 52

Control: •
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement: .
Suppress zeros:.
Insert point: .
Insert spaces:.
Recording density:
Section sizes: •
Omit unwanted
characters:
Assign several tape
codes to 1 character:

· 50. a inches/sec.

Tape speed: . . .
Start time (to full
speed): ••.

I AUERBAC~

wait.

401:074.100

.SIM"""
EDP
_

Il£POR1S

IBM 1401
Input-Output
1012 Tape Punch

INPUT-OUTPUT: 1012 TAPE PUNCH

§

074.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

.12

Description

.23

Multiple Copies: . . . . none .

.24

Arrangement of Heads

Tape Punch .
1012.

The 1012 Tape Punch operates at the rate of 150 tape
character s per second us ing either 5 -, 6-, 7-, or 8track paper tape or Mylar tape. A punched tape
character is represented by a bit pattern found in two
or three consecutive core store positions. For
eight-track tape characters, the three low order bit
positions in the two low order characters and the two
low order bit positions in the high order character
represent the bit structure of a row. For five-track
tape characters, the three low order bit positions in
the unit character and the two low order bit positions
in the second character represent the bit structure
of a row. The 1401 BCD data codes are translated by
a macro routine, character by character to the required code format for the tape being used. After
translation, a write instruction will cause a character to be punched on either 11/16, 7/8, or I-inch
wide chad (holes completely punched) tape.
A read instruction, given approximately 3.2 milliseconds after the punch instruction, will cause the
tape character, punched three cycles previously, to
be read into the 1401 core storage. The 1401 representation of the tape character can be compared with
the representation of the character previously
punched for validating the punched character. If an
error is found, the tape character in error and those
following can be overpunched with code representing
an invalid character, and the characters can then be
repunched.
. 13

Availability:

12 months as of April, 1963 •

· 14

First Delivery:

November, 1962.

.25

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

• 211 Drive past the head: •
.212 Reservoirs
Number: .
Form: . .
Capacity: .
.213 Feed drive:
• 214 Take-up drive:.
.22

punching.
1.
8 plus 1 sprocket.
1 row at a time.

Use of station: .
Distance: .
Stacks: .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use: .

check reading.
3 characters.
1.
8.
1 row at a time.

Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
Total:

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage
paper or Mylar tape.
punched holes .

.311 Medium:
• 312 Phenomenon: .
.32

0 - 9.
A - Z.

M.

.3

Positional Arrangement
1 to N rows at 10 per inch.
5, 6, 7, or 8 tracks at
standard spacing.

.321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:
. 324 Track use
Data: . . . . . • . .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: • . . • .
Control signals:
Unused: .
Total: . .
• 325 Row use: •

7.
O.
1 sprocket.
1; end of line.
O.
8 plus sprocket.
all for data .

Format Compatibility
Other device or system: all devices using standard
5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-track
paper tape.
programmed.
Code translation:

..

pin wheel.
.35
2.
swinging arm.
approximately 2 feet.
electric motor .
electric motor.

Physical Dimensions

.351 Overall width:
• 352 Length: . . . .
.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

Sensing and Recording Systems

• 221 Recording system:.
. 222 Sensing system: .
· 223 Common system: .

10
26
28.

.

.34
·2

Use of station: •
Stacks: .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use: .

....

die punch •
photo-electric (check read) .
none.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incarporated

11/16, 7/8, or 1 inch.
up to 1, 000 feet per reel.

no separate controller.
(#7080 Serial Input-Output
Adapter required on
1401. )

5/63

401:074.420
§

IBM 1401

074.

.42

. 421 On-line:
.422 Off-line: . . • . • . •
· 43

1.
none.

Connection to Device

. 431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions:. . . . . . 0 if other units requiring
70S0 Adapter or 3271
Direct Data Channel is
connected to the 1401.
· 44

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load: • . . •
• 442 Input-output areas:
. 44!l Input-output area
access: . . . . .
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . • . .
.445 Table control: . .
• 446 Synchronization: .

· 61

Conditions: .

.62

Speeds

• 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Output: • . • . • •
. 52

Input-Output Operations

. 521
.522
• 523
.524
· 525

Input:. . .
Output: • •
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
Marking:.

. 526 Searching:

•

Code Translation:

Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: ..
Insert spaces: .
Recording density:.
Section sizes: . . .

1 to N characters.
End of Line character
sensed.

none.
1 character forward •
none.
none.
delete code for error
characters.
none.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

· 71

Adjustments

.72

5/63

number of tracks •
tape width guide •

program; 1 character at a
time.
yes.
yes.
yes.
no.
no.
no.

no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.

yes.
yes.
no.
yes.

Other Controls
Function

Form

Feed Switch:

Comment

push
button
Rewind Switch: toggle
switch
Channel Switch: 2-position
switch

own coding or macro.

Testable Conditions
Disabled: •.
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:

15 inches/second.
10 characters/inch.
none.
150 characters/second.
If less than 6. 6 milliseconds
elapse between initiation
of punching instructions.

Demands on System

Adjustment:
Method: •.

Control Operations
Disable: . . . . • .
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload: •.•

150 characters/second.

processor.
Component: . . . .
6.67*
Msec per character: •
or
Precentage: •••• •
100%.
* This time based on using a subroutine for code conversion which does not make any attempt to process
data between punching operations .

Format Control
Control: • . . .

. . . none .

• 621 Nominal or peak speed:
.622 Importan.t parameters
Tape speed: . .
Packing density:
· 623 Overhead: . • . .
· 624 Effective speeds:

.63

Blocks

.56

PERFORMANCE

none.
none.
automatic.

.51

• 55

.6

each character.

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

• 54

Testable Conditions (Contd.)
Busy controller: . . . . yes.
End of medium marks: no •

1 character.
core storage .

•5

.53

.56

Connection to System

.73

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage: • . . •
Capacity: • . . .
.732 Replenishment time:.
. 733 Adjustment time:
.734 Optimum reloading
period: • . • . . .
.S

punches feed code in Strack tape .
rewinds punched tape onto
the supply reel.
conditions read circuit
for number of tracks on
tape to be punched.

reel.
1,000 feet.
2.0 to- 3. 0 minutes.
punch needs to be stopped .
3.0 to 4.0 minutes.
13.3 minutes.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Recording:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exbausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Nearly exhausted:

program read after punch
none.
check.
none.
none.
check
check

Action
programmed.

indicator.
indicator.

•

401 :081.100

STANDARD

EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 1401
Input -Output
1403 Printer
INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTER

§

081.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Description:

Description (Contd.)
Optional Features (Contd.)
leaving 98 milliseconds for processing during each
print cycle.

Printer.
1403, Models 1 and 2.

The IDM 1403 is a line priI).ter with a unique
horizontal-chain printing mechanism, a tapecontrolled carriage, and a feeding and stacking
mechanism for continuous form s. Five identical
sets of 48 characters are assembled serially on a
chain that resembles a bicycle chain and moves in
a horizontal plane at 90 inches per second. The
print hammers are timed to strike against the paper
individually because each character slug travels
across many printing positionsduringaprintcycle.
At each printing position, the paper is forced into
contact with the ribbon against the chain by a
solenoid-activated hammer that is fired as the
appropriate character slug passes the printing
position.
The horizontal-chain printing method generally
produces printing of a high quality and eliminates
the problem of vertical character alignment that
has plagued designers of high speed drum and
wheel printers. Output produced by a 1403
Printer, however, can often be recognized by the
presence of "framing" (Le., light boxes which
frame some of the printed characters).

Selective Tape Listing Feature: Permits printing
paper "adding machine" tapes as an alternative to
the regular width forms. When utilizing this
feature, as many as eight 1. 5 inch-wide tapes or
four 3.1 inch-wide tapes or a combination of the
two widths can be used. Up to 13 characters per
1.5-inch tape, or up to 29 characters per 3.1
inch tape can be printed. Tapes are individually
spaced under program control; however, no form
skipping is possible with this feature. Primary
use of this feature has been with magnetic ink
character recognition equipment in providing batch
control over checks.
.13

Availability:. . . . .. 12 months, as of
April, 1963.

. 14

First Delivery:

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

September, 1960 .

. 211 Drive past the head: • · . sprocket drive push and
pull, paper punched on
both sides.
., none.
.212 Reservoirs:

The 1403 Modell has 100 printing positions and
the Model 2 has 132; the two models are identical
in all other respects. Peak speed is 600 lines per
minute with single spacing and 480 lines per
minute with an average line spacing of 1 inch.
Printers used with 1401 Model A Processing Units
have a single skipping speed of 33 inches per
second. In all other 1401 models (B, C, D, E,
and F), the printer has a dual-speed carriage
which executes all skips of more than eight lines
at a speed of 75 inches per second. Skipping is
controlled by a 12-channel punched tape loop.

.221 Recording system: •. , magnet-driven hammer
presses form against
moving horizontal chain.
.222 Sensing system:
.. echo check on hammer
magnet.
.223 Common system:
· . no.

Optional Features

.231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon: ..• 6 .
. 232 Types of master
Multilith:
.. yes, with special ribbon.
Xerox:
. . yes.
Spirit: . .
. . yes.

Numerical Print: Permits changing from the
standard 48-character chain to a chain with only
16 characters; speeds up to 1,285 lines per
minute can then be obtained on all-numeric output.
Print Storage: Reduces time demands on the processing unit from 84 to 2 milliseconds per line
printed by means of a special buffer register,

© 1963

.22

.23

.24

Sensing and Recording Systems

Multiple Copies

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

·
·
·
·

.
.
.
.

printing.
1.
100 or 132.
1 line at a time.

Revised 5/63

401:081.250
§

IBM 1401

081.

.25

.42

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line: . . . . . . .

Range of Symbols
Stan$rd Set
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
Alternatives:
FORTRAN set:
Basic COBOL set:
Total: . . . . . • .

10
26
12

&,0- $ * / %# @ :1=.
by special request.

alter·native Print Set
no.
48 and blank.

10

o

· 43

0-9.
A-Z.

Numeric Set
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
FORTRAN set:
Req. COBOL set:
Total: . . . . .

Connection to System

P:

1.

none.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: L
.432 Restrictions:. . . . . . 0 if 1404 Printer is
attached.
.44

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load: . . . .
.442 Input-output areas.

0-9.

1 line of 100 or 132 characters .
core storage positions
201-300 (201-832 on
Model 2).

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
· 444 Input~output area
lockout:
.445 Table control: . .
. 446 Synchronization: .

.31

Form of Storage

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

continuous fanfold
sprocket punched stationery.
.312 Phenomenon: . . . . . . printing.

.51

Blocks

· 32

.52

6

$.,*-0.

no.
no.
16 and blank.

.311 Medium: . . . . .

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by: •
.322 Parallel by:
· 324 Track use
Data:
Total:
.325 Row use
Data:
· 33

Coding:...

. 34

Format Compatibility:

· 35

PhysicalOimensions

· 351 Over-all width:.
.352 Length:
Forms: . . . .

. 353 Maximum margins:
Left: . . . . . . .
Right, Modell:.
Model 2:.

.511 Size of block:
.512 mock demarcation
Output: . . . . . .

.521 Input:
.522 Output: .

100 or 132.
100 or 132.

· 523

engraved character font
(Internal coding as in
Data Code Table No.2,
401:142.100).
none.

3.50 to 18.75 inches by
vernier.
1 to 22.0 by 1/6 inch at
6 lines/inch.
1 to 16.5 by 1/8 inch at
8 lines/inch.
1 to i7.0 inches (recommended maximum for
proper stacking).

CONTROLLER

. 41

Identity:

5/63 Revised

fixed.

.525
.526
.53

Code Translation:

.54

Format Control

.524

Control: . . . . . . .
Format alternatives:.
Rearrangement:
SuppresS zeros:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Section sizes:

3.0 inches.
6.2 inches.
-3.0 inches.

No separate controller
(circuitry is in Processing Unit).

100 or 132 char per line.

none.
1 line forward with
single step.
step 1, 2, or 3 lines as
Stepping: .
separate operation, or as
combined "print then
step".
Skipping: . . . . . . . . skip to 1 of 12 channels on
paper tape loop; can be
combined in "print then
skip."
.
Marking: . . . . .
none.
none .
Searching: . . . .

· 55

.4

yes, for full block.
none .
automatic .

Input-Output Operations

1 line at 6 or 8 per inch.
100 or 132 characters at
10 per inch.

all.

each character.

automatic, by processor.

program.
unlimited.
no.
yes .
yes.
yes.
no.

Control Operations
Disable: . . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format: .
Select code: . . . .

no .
no.
no.
no.

401:081.560

INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTER
§ 081.

.56

Testable Conditions
Disabled: . .
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Exhausted: . . .

.6

PERFORMANCE

. 61

Conditions
I: .

II:
III:
IV:

.62

.63

Demands on System
Component

no.
with Print Storage only.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.

standard character set,
without Print Storage.
standard character set,
with Print Storage.
numeric set, without
Print Storage.
numeric set, with Print
Storage.

IV

! ~

or
or
or
or

Percentage·
84.0.
2.0.
65.8.
4.3.

• At single spacing

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITmS

.71

Adjustments
Adjustment
Vertical alignment:
Horizontal alignment:
Form width:
Printing quality:
Form thickness:
Line pitch:

.72

. 73

Method
knobs.
knobs.
sliding forms tractors.
graduated dial.
graduated lever.
switch
6 or 8 lines/in.

Other Controls
~

© 1963

msec per line,
84.0
2.0
30.7
2.0

II
III

Speeds

.621 Nominal or peak speed: I & II, 600 lines/minute.
III & IV, 1285 lines/minute.
.622 Important parameters
Name
Value
Print 1 line, I & II:
100.0 msec.
Print 1 line, III & IV: 46.7 msec.
Skipping speed: . . .
33.0 in/sec for skips of
8 lines or less.
75. 0 in/sec for skips of
more than 8 lines (not
Model A).
. 623 Overhead
Step 1 line:
20 msec.
Step·2 lines:
25 msec.
Step 3 lines:
30 msec.
Independent skip N
lines: . . . . • . .
15 + 5N msec. (N < 9).
15 + 5N msec. (N ~ 9,
Model A).
37.4+ 2. 2N msec.
(N ~ 9, all others).
Print & skip N lines,
I & II: . . . . . . .. as above + 80.0 msec.
Print & skip N lines,
III & IV:
as above + 26.7 msec .
. 624 Effectlve speeds:
Average line
Lines/min. ,
Lines/min. ,
I & II
III & IV
feed, inches
1/6:
600
1,285
2/6:
572
1, 160
3/6:
545
1, 059
1:
480
838
2:
418
664
4:
353
514
(See graph)

Condition

Processing Unit:

Form

Check reset:

key

Carnage restore:

key

Single cycle:

key

Comment
rese ts printer error
indications.
pOSitions carriage at
channell on tape loop.
initiates one print cycle

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: . . . .
Stacker: . . . .
.732 Replenishment time:

Capacity:
20 inch stack.
20 inch stack .
1 to 2 minutes.
printer needs to be
stopped.
.733 Adjustment time:
2 to 3 minutes.
printer needs to be
stopped.
.734 Optimum reloading period
I & II: . . . . . . . . . 56 minutes.
III & IV: . • . . . . . . 35 minutes.
Basis: 2-part sets, 17 inches long, at I-inch
line spacing.
.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Error
Interlock
Action
echo check
Recording:
Input area overflow: none
Output block size:
fixed.
Invalid code:
check
Exhausted medium:
check
Imperfect medium:
none.
Timing conflicts:
interlock
Feed jam:
check
• Stop will occur if I/O Check Stop Switch

by Auerbach Corporatian and BNA Incorporated

indicator and alarm.·

indicator and alarm.·
stop and alarm.
wait.
stop and alarm.
is on.

Revised 5/63

401 :081.810

IB~

Effective Speed

IBM 1403
6,000
5,000
4,000
3,000

2,000

~
1,000
900
800

~

'" i"'-.. r---...

..........

700
600

I'-- r--.

500
400
Printed Lines
per Minute

t--..

~

r--...

-r---

I--

,.r- Numeric Only (w· h NJ»

r----- r-

--- -- -r-------

F=:--- r-- r-Alpha

~eric,

Models B-F

~1!Fhameric,

300

--

M del A

1-- _ _

--

200

100
90

80
70
60
50
40
30

20

o

2

3

Inter-line Space in Inches

NP = Numerical Print feature.

5/63 Revised

5

1401

401 :082.100

_STANDARD

II

EDP
"'ORTS

IBM 1401
Input.Output

1404 Printer
INPUT·OUTPUT: PRINTER

) 082.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: ••

• 12

Description:

.23
Printer.
1404. Model 2.

This unit has the same horizontal-chain printing
mechanism, tape-controlled carriage, and continuous -form feeding and stacking system as the 1403
Printer. Like the 1403, it has 132 printing positions
and a peak speed of 600 lines per minute. In addition' the 1404 has a feeding and stacking system for
card forms. By unlocking a single knob, the entire
printing assembly can be moved laterally to print on
either continuous forms or cards (but not on both
during the same run). The card transport mechan·
ism can handle single 51- or 80-column cards or
two 51- or 80-column cards fed side by side. Peak
speed when feeding single cards and printing one
line per card is 400 cards per minute. Up to 25
lines can be printed on a standard IBM card.

.231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon:
.232 Types of master
MultUith:
Xerox: . . • . .
Spirit: . . . . .
.24 Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use:

Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

Cards can be printed on either side depending on how
.25
they are loaded into the hopper; however, cards are
stacked in reverse of the order in which they are
loaded into the hopper. This condition will present
file sequence problems if additional processing is
required.
Optional Features
Read-Compare: Permits reading any 30-columns of
data (specified by plugboard wiring) into core storage positions 334-363 from the punched cards passing through the printer feed channel. Processing is
inhibited for 75 milliseconds while each card is read. .3
Print Storage: Reduces time demands on the processing unit from 84 to 2 milliseconds per line printed
by means of a special buffer register, thus allowing
98 milliseconds for processing.
• 13

Availability:

•

.14

First Delivery:

•2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

12 months, as of
April, 1963.
September, 1962 •

sprocket drive push and
pull for continuous forms;
pinch roller friction for
cards .
. 212 Reservoirs: . . . . . . . none.

. 211 Drive past the head:

.22

Multiple Copies

.31

Numerals:
Letters:
..
Special: . . . .
Alternatives: .
FORTRAN set:
Basic COBOL set:
Total: . . . . . .

© 1963

printing.
1.

132.
prints I line at a time,
on cards or continuous
forms.
reading (optional Read.
Compare).
1 card before print station.
1.
160.
reads any 30 card columns,
1 row at a time.

0-9.
A-Z.
& •• O-$*/%#@;f:
by special request.
alternative Print
Set F.
no.
48 and blank.
10
26
12

EXTERNAL STORAGE
Form of Storage

.312 Phenomenon:

continuous fanfold stationery or punch cards •
printing.

Positional Arrangement

· 321 Serial by:
· 322 Parallel by:
· 324 Track use
Data:
Total: .
.325 Row use
Data:
· 33

Coding:.

.35

Physical Dimensions

Sensing and Recording Systems

. 221 Recording system: . . . magnet-driven hammer
presses form against
moving chain.
,.222 Sensing system:
echo check on hammer
magnets .
. 223 Common system: .
no.

• yes, with special ribbon .
• yes.
· yes.

Range of Symbols

.311 Medium: ..

.32

· 6.

· 351 Overall width:

by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incarporated

1 line at 6 or 8 per inch.
132 char at 10 per inch.
132.
132.
all.
engraved character font (Internal coding as in Data Code
TableNo. 2, 401:142.100) •

• 3.50 to 18.75 by inches
(continuous forms).
single 51-column to
double 80-column cards.
Revised 5/63

401 :082.352

IBM 1401

§ 082.
.352 Length
Forms at 6 lines/inch: 1. 0 to 22.0 by 1/6 inch at
6 lines/inch.
Forms at 8 lines/inch: 1. 0 to 16.5 by 1/8 inch at
8 lines/inch.
Cards: . . . . . . .
standard.
• 353 Maximum margins
(continuous forms):
3.0 inches.
Left: .
3.0 inches.
Right: . . . . . . .

.4

CONTROLLER

. 41

Identity: . . . .

.42

1.

none.

.443 Input-output area access:
. 444 Input-output area lockout: .
.445 Table control:
. 446 Synchronization: .

1 line of 132 characters.
core storage positions
201-332.

. 51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Output: . . . . . .

132 char per line.

.61

Conditions

no.
with Print Storage only •
no •
no.
no •
no.
no •

printing on continuous
forms, without Print
Storage .
II: . • . . . . . . . . . printing on continuous
forms, with Print
Storage •
III: . • . . . . . •
printing on 80-column
cards, without Print
Storage.
IV: • . • . • . . •
printing on 80-column
cards,with Print
Storage •
I: . . . . .

.62

Speeds

fixed.

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input:
. . . . . . . none.
.522 Output: . . . . . . . . . 1 line forward with single
step, on cards or continuous forms but not both at
the same time .
. 523 Stepping:. . . . . . .. step I, 2, or 3 lines as separate operations, or as
combined "print then
step" .
. 524 Skipping: . . . . . . . . skip to 1 of 12 channels on
paper tape loop or position
new card at first printing
line; may be combined in
"print then skip. "
.525 Marking:
none .
. 526 Searching:
none.
automatic, by processor.
. 53 Code Translation:

5/63 Revised

no .
no.
no .
no.

Testable Conditions

PERFORMANCE

yes, for full block.
none.
automatic.

PROGRAM FACILITmS AVAILABLE

Disable: . . . • . .
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
.
Select code: . . . .

.6

each character.

.5

program.
unlimited.
no.
yes.
yes .
yes.
no.

Control Operations

Disabled:..
.
Busy device: .. .
Output lock: .. .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:.
Exhausted: . . . . . . .

Connection to Device

.441 Size of load:
.442 Input-output areas:

. 52

.55

no separate controller
(circuitry is in Processing
Unit).
.56

. 431 Devices per controller: 1 •
. 432 Re strictions:
none if 1403 Printer is
connected.
.44 Data Transfer Control

Format Control
Control: . . . .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros: .
Insert point: . . .
Insert spaces: ..
Section sizes: ..

Connection to System

. 421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
. 43

.54

. 621 Nominal or peak speed: I and II, 600 lines/minute .
III and IV, 400 cards/minute. (for 1 line of print
on each card; 800 cards/
minute if 2 cards are fed
side by side.)
. 622 Important parameters
Name
Print & step 1 line:
Skipping speed: .
Skipping speed: . .
Cards feed clutch
cycle: . . . . . .

Value
100 msec.
38 inches/sec for skips
of 8 lines or less.
85 inches/sec for skips
of more than 8 lines.
150 msec (12-tooth
clutch).

INPUT-OUTP.UT: PRINTER

.401 :082.623

§ OB2.

.72

.623 Overhead:
Step 1 line:
Step 2 lines:
Step 3 lines:
Independent skip N
lines: . . . . . . .
Independent skip N
lines:. . . . . . .

Function

20 msec.
25 msec.
30 msec.
15. a +4.4N msec
(N < 9).
34.2+2.0Nmsec
(N ~ 9).
as above + BO. a msec.

Print and skip N lines:
Position next card at
first line: . . . . . . . 70 msec •
. 624 Effective speeds (at 6 lines/inch)

De~ands

.73

Form

Comment

Check reset:
Carriage restore:

key
key

Single cycle:
Channel select:

key
rotary
switch

resets error alarms.
pOsitions carriage at channel
1 on tape loop.
initiates 1 print cycle.
selects 1 or both card (eed
channels.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage

Continuous forms (I & II)
Average line feed,
inches
Speed, lines/minute
1/6:
600.
2/6:
572.
3/6:
545.
1:
494.
2:
434.
4: . . . . . . . .
372.
Punched Cards (Ill & IV)
Lines printed/card
Speed, cards/minute
1: .
400 or BOO.
2: .
240 or 4BO.
4: .
136 or 272.
8: .
72 or 144.
16: .
37 or 74 .
. 63

Other Controls

Capacity

Card hopper & stacker: 1,200 cards.
Forms hopper &
stacker: • . . . . • 20-inch stack.
. 732 Replenishment time:

. 1 to 2 minutes •
printer needs to be stopped.

.733 Adjustment time: . . . . 2 to 5 minutes.
printer needs to be stopped.
. 734 Optimum reloading period
Cards:
• 3 minutes.
I & II:
.56 minutes.
Basis: .
2-part sets, 17 inches
long, at 1- inch line
spacing.

on System

Component
Processing Uni 1:
ProceSSing Unit:

Condition

msec per line

or

I & III

84
2

or
or

II & IV

Percentage·
84.
2.

• At single spacing.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITmS

.71

Adjustments
Adjustment

Method

Cards or continuous
forms:
Throat openings:

move print unit
literally
calibrated screw

Card width:

move hopper
side plates.
same as 1403
Printer.

Other adjustments:

.8

Comment
invol;ves unlocking and
relocking 1 knob.
handles standard or postcard stock.

© 1963

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Feed jam:

echo check
char validity
none.
fixed.
check
check
none.
interlock
check

indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm.

by Auerbach Corporafion and BNA Incorporafed

indicator & alarm.
stop & alarm.
wait.
stop & alarm.

Revised 5/63

401 :083.1 00

_STANDARD

II

EDP

IBM 1401

REPORTS

Input-Output
Console Inquiry Stotion
INPUT-OUTPUT: CONSOLE INQUIRY STATION

§

083.

.24

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

.12

Description:

. Console Inquiry Station.
1407 Modell.

The 1407 Console Inquiry Station is a modified IBM
Model B electric typewriter with control circuits and
work table. Information can be typed into core
. 25
storage from the keyboard and out of core storage on
continuous fan-fold forms. The 1407 is primarily an
inquiry unit for 1401 RAMAC systems using 1405
Disk Storage, but it will be found useful for console
control, monitor printing, and program testing
functions in any 1401 system. It cannot be connected
to a 1401 Model A Processing Unit.

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

printing.
1.
1.
1 character at a time.

Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

keyboard input.
1.
44 keys.
1 character at a time.

Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters: .
Special: . .

10
26
28

Alternatives:
FORTRAN set:
Basic COBOL set: .
Total:

64.

Interruption is not provided in the 1401, so console
inquiries must be handled by the inclusion of "branch
on inquiry request indicator" instructions in the
EXTERNAL STORAGE
stored program. The indicator is turned on by de.3
pressing a key on the 1407 when an inquiry is to be
made. Output format is controlled by the stored
.31 Form of Stora~
data. Characters with word marks can be printed
in red as an aid in debugging.
.311 Medium:
. 312 Phenomenon:
. 13

Availability:

12 months, as of
April, 1963.

.14

First Delivery:

October, 1961.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.32

Positional

pin-feed platen; paper
punched both sides.

as in Data Code
Table No.!.
none.
yes.
yes.

continuous fan -fold
stationery or roll paper.
printing (output) .
key depression (input) .

Arran~ment

. 321 Serial by: .

.211 Drive past the head:

0-9.
A-Z.

...

. 324 Track use
Data:
Total:
.325 Row use
Data:

1 to N characters at 10 pel.
inch (N limited by CQre
storage) .
120 print positions.
120.
all.

.212 Reservoirs:. . . . . . . none.

. 22

.33

Coding:

engraved character font; (Internal coding as in Data Code
Table No. 1, See 401:141. 100) •

.34

Format Com~tibilit:y::

none.

.35

Ph:y:sical Dimensions

Sensing and Recording System

. 221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system:

engraved hammers .
typewriter keyboard .
no.

.351 Overall width:
. 23

Multiple Copies
.352 Length:

. 231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon:
Carbon creep: .

.232 Types of master
Multilith:
Spirit:

depends on stationery.
none.
no.
yes.

© 1963

.353 Maximum margins: .
.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: .

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

9.75 inches for sprocketpunched stationery .
up to 11 inches per sheet,
or continuous rolls .
no limitations.

no separate controller
(#2272 adapter required
on 1401 Processing Unit).
Reprinted 5/63

401:083.420
§

IBM 1401

083.

.42

Connection to Slstem

.421 On-line: .
.422 Off-line:
.43

1.
none.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller:. 1.
.432 Restrictions:
none .

..

.44

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load: .
. 442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control: .
.446 Synchronization:

· 1 to N characters.
· core storage .

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions:.

.62

S12eeds

.63

.51

Blocks

Output:

100.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments

lever

Multiple copy control:

lever

Set tab stops:
Set margin stops:

key.
key.

.72

Code Translation: .

· automatic. by processor.

.54

Format Control:

· contained in data.

.55

Control 012erations
..no .
· no.
· no.
· no.

Testable Conditions
Disabled: ..
Busy device:
Output lock: .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:
Inquiry request:.
Exhausted: . . . . . .

·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·

step 1. 2. or 3
lines .
compensates for
form thickness.

Line spacing:

.53

..

Comment

typed group mark or Clear
Key.
group mark in core storage
or Clear Key.

.521 Input: . . . . . . . . . . 1 block forward from keyboard. with printed
record.
. 522 Output: .
1 block forward. printed.
. 523 Stepping:
step 1 line upon 1401 instruction or console key
depression.
.524 Skipping:
· none.
.525 Marking:
· none.
.526 Searching:
· none.

Disable: .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code: .

Method

1 to N characters.

Input-Output Operations

5/63 Reprinted

Processing Unit.
0.092.

Adjustment

.511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation
Input: .

.56

Demands on System
Component: • •
Msec per block:
plus
Percentage of
typing time:

· yes. for full block.
· none.
· automatic.

PROGRAM FACIUTIES AVAILABLE

. . . . none.

.621 Nominal or peak speed:. 10 characters/second
(output).
manual typing speed
(input).
.624 Effective speeds: . . . same as peak speeds. plus
allowance for carriage
returns.

· each character.

.5

.52

.6

no.
yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
no.

Other Controls
Function

.8

Form

Comment

Request enter:

key-light

Clear:

key-light

Respond:

key-light

Word mark:

key

sets inquiry request
indicator .
sets inquiry clear
indicator.
inserts group mark in
core storage. returns carriage. and
releases processor
interlock.
enters word mark
with next character
typed.

ERRORS. CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:

none.
none.
none.

Action

none.

a 11 codes va lid.
none.
none.
interlock

wait.

~~~D

•

II

401 :091.100

EDP
R[PORTS

IBM 1401
Input-Output
729 Magnetic Tape Unit
INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

§ 091.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

. 12

Description:

·2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

with 1401, September,
1960 for Models II & IV;
May, 1962 for Models V
& VI.

Tape speed, Density,
inches/sec. char/inch

Transfer rate,
char/sec,

.21l Drive past the head:
pinch roller friction.
.212 Reservoirs
Number:
2.
Form:
vacuum.
Capacity:
about 7 feet.
.213 Feed drive:.
motor.
.214 Take-up drive: .
motor.
· 22 Sensing and Recording Systems

II

75.0

200
556

15,000
41,667

.221 Recording system: .
,222 Sensing system: .
,223 Common system:

IV

112.5

200
556

22,500
62,500

,.23

Multiple Copies: . • . . none.

200
556
800

15,000
41,667
60,000

· 24

Arrangement of Heads

200
556
800

22,500
62,500
90,000 (not with 1401)

V

VI

75.0

112.5

Up to six tape units can be connected to a 1401 system, but only one can read or write at a time. No
computing can be done during a tape input or output
operation unless the Processing Overlap feature
is added. Lateral and longitudinal parity checks are
made on both reading and recording. Different
models of the 729 can be intermixed with each other
and with 7330 tape units through the use of Tape
Intermix Units. Model VI cannot be used at the 800
characters an inch density in a 1401 system.

Column Binary: Permits the processing of
binary tapes such as those used in the ruM 704, 709,
and 7090 systems.
Compressed Tape Operations: Permits reading
of compressed tape (with high-order zeros eliminated) prepared by ruM 7070 systems.
Processing Overlap: Permits computation during tape start time and (at 200 characters per inch
only) between character transfers.
Availability: . . . . .

recording.
1.

Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack:
Method of use: .

sensing.
1.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

with 1401 system •
12 months, as of
April. 1963.

© 1963

...

. 312 Phenomenon: .
.32

magnetic head.
magnetic head.
2-gap head provides
read-after-write checking.

Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/ stack:
Method of use:

.311 Medium:

Optional Features

. 13

First Delivery:

Magnetic Tape unit .
729 Models II, IV, V, & VI.

These tape units are used in ruM's more powerful
1410, 7070, 7080, and 7090 series systems as well
as in the 1401. In tape width, density and format,
they are compatible with the 7330 and 727 tape units.
The only significant differences among the four
models are in recording densities and tape speeds.
These are summarized in the following table.
Model

· 14

7.
1 row at a time.

7.
1 row at a time.

plastic tape with magnetizable surface .
magnetization.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:

... . . . .

. 322 Parallel by: . . . . .
· 324 Track use
Data: . . . . . . . .
Redundancy check: .
Timing:
Control signals:
Unused:
Total: . . . . .

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1 to N rows at 200, 556, or
(Models V & VI) 800 rows/
inch; N limited by available core storage .
7 tracks.

6.
1.

o (self-clocking).
O.
O.
7.

Reprinted 5/63

IBM 1401

401:091.325

.325 Row use
Data: .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . . . ' ..
Control signals:
Unused: .
Gap:
. 33

Coding:

.34

Format Compatibility

O.
O.

.. 524 Skipping: . . . . . . . · 1 block backward (backspace). erase 3.5 inches
forward (to skip defective
tape areas).
.525 Marking:
· inter-block gap, 0.75 lnch
long.
.526 Searching:
· none.

0.75 inch.

.. 53

1 to N.
1.

o.

as in Data Code Table No.1. 54
(See 401:141 Inm
,,55

Other device or system Code translation
mM 7330, 727 tape
units: . . . . . . .
mM 7070 series compressed tapes: . .
mM 704, 709, 7090
binary tapes: . . .
• 35

optional Compres sed Tape.
optional Column Binary.

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: . . . .

. 42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line: . . . . . . .

0.50 inch.
2, 400 feet per reel.

Tape Adapter Unit (built
into 1401 Processing
Unit) .

Connection to Device

.441 Size of load: . . . .

1 to N char., limited by
available core storage.
core storage.

.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area access: . . . . . • . .
each character.
. 444 Input-output area lockout: . . . . . . . . . . yes, for full block, (no
lockout when Processing
Overlap is used) •
.445 Table control:
none.
.446 Synchronization: • • • automatic.
•5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
Blocks

· 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: .
Output:
. 52

1 to N char., limited by
available core storage
gap on tape or limiting
mark in core storage.
limiting mark.

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input: . .
. 522 Output:
. 523 Stepping:
5/63 Reprinted

· matched codes .

Format Control:

· none.

Control Operations
Disable: . . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload:

disabled after unloading.
no.
no.
with optional Compressed
Tape or Column Binary •
yes.
yes.

Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device: . . .
Output lock: . • .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medlum marks:

no .
withProcessingOverlap only.
no.
yes .
no.
yes •

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions
I:
II:

without Processing Overlap
with Processing Overlap.

1.

none.

.431 Devices per controller: 6.
. 432 Restrictions: . . . . . total number of 729 and
7330 Tape Units is 6.
.44 Data Transfer Control

• 51

.56

Physical Dimensions

· 351 Overall width:
. 352 Length:

· 43

not required;

Code Translation:

· 1 block forward.
· 1 block forward.
· none.

.62 Speeds
.621 Nominal or peak speed
Model II: .
Model IV:
Model V: .
Model VI:
. 622 Important parameters
Name
Density
Models II & IV:
Models V & VI:
Tape speed
Models II & V:
Models IV & VI:
Start time
Models II & V
'Read: . . . .
Write: . . . .
Models IV & VI
Read:
Write: . . . .
Stop time
Models II & V
Read: . . . .
Write: . . . .
Models IV & VI
Read: . . . .
Write: . . . .
Full rewind time
Models II & V:
Models IV & VI
Inter- block gap:

15,000 or 41,667 char/sec.
22,500 or 62.500 char/sec.
15,000,41,667. or
60,000 char/sec.
22.500 or 62,500 char/sec.
Value
200 or 556 char/inch.
200, 556, or 800 char/
irich .
75.0 inches/sec.
112.5 inches/sec.
10.5 msec.
7.5 msec.
6.7 msec.
5.0 msec.
2.1 msec.
5.1 msec.
2.1 msec.
3.8 msec.
.1..2 minutes .
0.9 minutes .
0.75 inch.

401:091.623

INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

§091.
.623 Overhead
Models II & V:
Models IV & VI:
.624 Effective speeds
Models II & V
200 char/inch:
556 char/inch:
Models IV & VI
200 char/inch:
556 char/inch:
Model V
BOO char/inch:
where N
block
. 63

= char /

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments

12.6 msec/b1ock.
B.8 msec/block.

Adjustment
Recording

15,000 N/(N+189) chari
sec.
41,667 N/(N+525) chari
sec.
22,500 N/(N+19B) chari
sec.
62,500 N/(N+550) chari
sec.

Method
densi~:

switch

Densities option:

.72

selects 1 of 2 densities.
selects any pair of
densities (Models
V & VI only).

Other Controls
Function

60,000 N/(N+756) char/
sec.
(See graphs.)

switch

Comment

Form

Address selection:
Load rewind:

dial.
key.

Unload
File protection:

key.
ring on
spool

Comment
lowers tape into
reservoirs.
ring permits writing .

Demands on S},:stem
Coml!0nent Condition
Processing
Unit

Processing
Unit

msec. I!er
block

I; without Processing Overlap
Models II & V
Read
200 char/inch: 10. 5 + O. 0667C
556 char/inch: 10.5 + O. 0240C
800 char/inch: 10.5 + O. 0167C
Write
200 char/inch: 7.5 + O. 0667C
556 char/inch: 7.5 + O. 0240C
800 charfinch: 7.5 + O. 0167C
Models IV & VI
Read
200 char/inch: 6. 7 + O. 0444C
556 char/inch: 6.7 + O. 0160C
Write
200 charfinch: 5. 0 + O. 0444C
556 char/inch: 5.0 + O~0160C
II; with Processing Overlap
Models II & V
Read
200 char/inch: O. 0 + O. 01I5C
556 char/inch: 3. 9 + O. 0240C
800 char/inch: 3.9 + O. 0167C
Write
200 char/inch: O. 0 + O. 01I5C
556 char/inch: 0.2 + O. 0240C
800 char/inch: 0.2 + O. 0167C
Models IV & VI
Read
200 char/inch: 0.0 + O. 01l5C
556 char/inch: 2.3 + O. 0160C
Write
200 char/inch: 0.0 + O. 01l5C
556 char/inch: 0.1 + O. 0160C

or

Percentage of
transfer time

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
100.0
100.0
100.0

Reel:

100.0
100.0
100.0

2,400 feet; for 1, OOO-char blocks,
5,000,000 char at 200 char/inch,
11, 300, 000 char at 556 char/inch, or
14,400,000 char at 800 char/inch.

.732 Replenishment time: . . 1,0 to 1.5 minutes.
tape unit needs to be
stopped.
100. o . 734 Optimum reloading period
100.0
Models II & V: .
6 minutes.
Models IV & VI: . . . 4 minutes.
100.0
100.0

17.3
100.0
100.0
17.3
100.0
100.0

25.9
leO. 0
25.9
100.0

where C is number of charactets per block.

© 1963

• 73

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Checks or
Interlock

Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Recording level:

read-back; lateral parity
lateral & longitudinal parity
none.
all codes acceptable.
reflective spot or tape mark
none.
interlock
signal strength check

by Auerbctch Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Action
indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm,

indicator.
wait.
indicator & alarm.

Reprinted 5/63

113M 140J

401:091:800

Effective Speed

IBM 729-IV & 729-VI
10,000,000
7

4

2

1,000,000

7

.

4

2

100,000
7

Effective Speed,
char/sec.

--...-

i'"
;,; i"'" .... i'"

800 char/inch (Model VI only)~

4

~

2

/:....

10,000

V

V
~
...........

,/

-

I--"'~

-

!-

~

\:556 char/inch

_,

~I~

1.1

200 char/inch

7
~

~

4

2

1,000

V

~

~

7

4

2

100
10

2

4

7

100

2

4

71,000

Characters Per Block

5/63 Reprinted

2

4

710,000

INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNeTIC TAPE UN!T

40T:091:801

Effective Speed
729~1I

IBM

& 729-V

1O,QOO,000

7

4

2

1,000,000

7
4

2

100,000
7

Effective Speed,
char/sec.

.-

4

800 char/inch (Model V only)-...

2

~ """
~
A

1O,QOO
V/

7

./

..

~~
I-' r- i'"

V'

r-~ r-

I-""'"' '-556 char/inch
.~

,.....

.1

_L ...1

"200 ,char/in~h

I.'

II

4

I~II

2

/

1,000

V

~

7

4

2

100
10

2

4

7 100

2

4

7 1 ,000

2

4

710,000

Characters Per Block

© 1963

by Auerbach Carparation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 5/63

401 :092.1 00
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 1401
Input-Output
7330 Magnetic Tape Unit

REPORTS

INPUT-OUTPUT:

§

7330 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

092.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

.12

Magnetic Tape Unit .
7330 ModelL

Description:
The 7330 Magnetic Tape Unit is slower, simpler,
and less expensive than the 729 Tape Unit, but the
two are completely compatible. Tape speed is 36
inches per second, and peak transfer rate is either
7,200 or 20,016 characters per second, depending
upon the recording density selected. Lateral and
longitudinal parity checks are made on both reading
and recording.
The basic speed of the 7330 should be adequate for
most 1401 system applications, but its throughput
can be limited by two restrictions that must be considered:

.. 2

PHYSICAL FORM

. 21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head:
.212 Reservoirfj.
Number:
Form:
Capacity: .
.213 Feed drive:
.214 Take-up drive:
• 22

pinch roller friction.
2.
vacuum.
about 1. 5 feet.
motor.
motor.

Sensing and Recording Systems

. 221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system: .
.223 Common system: •

magnetic head .
magnetic head .
2-gap head provides
read-after-write checking.

.23

Multiple Copies: •••• none.

.24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/ stack:
Method of use:

(1) High speed rewind, which requires 2.2 minutes
per full reel, is always terminated by unloading
of the tape from the vacuum columns 'and readrecord head. Rewinding without unloading reqUires 13.3 minutes.
(2) To switch the unit from read to write status, it
must be programmed to backspace over the last
record read and then rewrite it; such switching
between reading and recording will be infrequent
in normal applications.

Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/ stack:
Method of use: .

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

recording.
1.

7.
1 row at a time.
sensing.
1.

7.
1 row at a time.

Optional Features
Column Binary: Permits the processing of
binary tapes such as those used in the IBM 704, 709
and 7090 systems.

plastic tape with magnetizable surface.
magnetization.

. 311 Medium: .••
. 312 Phenomenon: •

Compressed Tape Operations: Permits reading
of compressed tape (with high-order zeros eliminated) prepared by IBM 7070 systems.
Processing Overlap: Permits computation during tape start time and between character transfers.

.13

. 14

Availability :

. 12 months, as of
April, 1963.

First Delivery: . . . . . October, 1961 •

© 1963

.32

Positional Arrangemem

.321 Serial by:

.....

. 322 Parallel by:
.324 Track Use
Data: . . .
Redundancy check: .
Timing:
Control signals:
Unused:
Total:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1 to N rows at 200 or 556
char/inch; N limited by
available core storage.
7 tracks .

6.
1.

o (self-clocking).
O.
O.
7.
Reprinted 5/63

401 :092.325

IBM ]401

§ 092.
.325 Row use
Data: .
Redundancy check: .
Timing:
Control signals:
Unused:
Gap:

.. . .

.33

Coding:

.34

Format Compatibili!y

.512 Block demarcation
Input:
1 to N .
1.

Output: .

O.
O.
O.
0.75 inch.
as in Data Code Table No.1
(See 401:141.100).

Other device or system Code translation
mM 729, 727 tape
not required.
units: . . . . .
mM 7070 series comoptional Compressed Tape.
pressed tapes: ..
mM 704, 709, 7090
optional Column Binary.
binary tapes: .
Ph:y:sical Dimensions

.

..

.35

.351 Overall width:
.352 Length:

. 41

Identity:........ Tape Adapter Unit.
(built into 1401 Processing Unit).

Input:
Output: .
Stepping: .
Skipping: .

.526 Searching:

1 block forward.
1 block forward .
none.
1 block backward (backspace). 3.5 inches forward (to skip defective
tape areas) .
inter- block gap, 0.75 inch
long.
none .

.53

Code Translation:

matched codes.

.54

Format Control: .

none .

.55

Control Operations

. 525 Marking:

Rewind: ••
Unload: ••
.56

1.
none.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 6 .
. 432 Restrictions: . . . . . total number of 7330 and
729 Tape Units is 6..

disabled after unloading.
no.
no.
with optional Column Binary
or Compressed Tape.
yes •
yes.

Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:

Connection to System

..421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:

.44

.521
.522
. 523
.524

Disable:
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:

CONTROLLER

. 43

Input-Output Operations

0.50 inch.
2, 400 feet per reel.

.4

.42

.52

gap on tape or limiting
mark in core storage.
limiting mark.

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions

no.
with Processing Overlap only.
no.
yes.
no .
yes .

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load: . . . .
. 442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . . .
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: ••
• 445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization: • • •

II:

.62

yes, for full block. (no
lockout when Processing
Overlap 1s used).
none.
automatic.

PROGRAM FACILITmS AVAILABLE

. 51

Blocks

Speeds

1 to N char, limited by
available core storage.

.621 Nominal or peak speed: 7,200 or 20,016 char/sec.
.622 Important parameters
Name
Value
Density: . . . .
200 or 556 char/inch.
Tape speed: . .
36. 0 inche s/ sec.
Inter-block gap:
0.75 inch .
Start time
Read: .
7.6 msec •
5.0 msec.
Write: .
Stop time
Read: .
12.9 msec.
15.3 msec.
Write: .
I

5/63 Reprinted

without Processing Overlap
with Processing Overlap.

each character.

.5

.511 Size of block:

I:

1 to N char, limited by
available core storage .
core storage .

Ir-A-UE-R-BA-CH-,-:-l@

INPUT-OUTPUT: 7330 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
§

401 :092.623

092 .

.73

Loading and Unloading

. 623 Overhead:
20.4 msec/block.
.731 Volumes handled
.624 Effective speeds
Storage
At 200 char/inch:
7,200 N/(N + 147) char/sec.
Spool: • • • • • • • • • •
At 556 char/inch:
20,016 N/(N + 40S)char/sec.
where N = char/block (see graph).
. 63

2,400 feet: for I, OOO-char blocks,
5, 000, 000 char at 200 char/Inch,
11,300,000 char at 556 char/inch •

Demands on System
Component Condition
Processing
Unit:

Processing
Unit:

msec. per
block

or

Percentage of
transfer time

I: without Processing Overlap
Read
200 char/inch: 7." + O. 139N
556 char/inch: 7.7 + 0.050N
Write
200 char/inch: 5.0 + 0.139N
556 char/inch: 5.0 + O. 050N

100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0

.732 Replenishment time: . . 1.0 to 1.5 minutes.
tape unit needs to be
stopped.
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .
13 minutes.
.S

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or Interlock

Action

Recording

read back: lateral parity

:Reading

lateral & longitudinal parity

indicator &
alarm.
Indicator &
alarm.

loput area overflow:
Output block size:
lovalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing Confilcts:
Recording level:

none.
none.
all codes acceptable.
reflective spot or tape mark
none.
Interlock
signal strength check

n: with Processing Overlap
Read or write
200 char/inch: 0 + O. 01l5N
B.3
556 char/inch: 0 + O. 0115N
23.0
where N is number of characters per block.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

. 71

Adjustments
Adjustment

Method

Recording density:

.72

Capacity

switch

Comment

indicator.
wait.
Indicator &
alarm.

200 or 556 char/in.

Other Controls
~
Address selection:
Load rewind:
Unload:
File protection:

~

dial.
key
key.
ring on spool

Comment
loads tape into
reservoirs.
ring permits writing.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 5/63

401:092.800

IBM 1402

Effective Speed

IBM 7330

10,000,000

7

4

2

1,000,000

7

4

2

100,000

7
Effective
Speed,
char/sec.

4

2

L---...-

~5 S6 cil~r! inch i

~~

10,000
7

1/

l,...-I-

/

/

4

"-..:2"00 "char inch"

./

./
V y

2

b~

1,000

7

V-

//

'#'

4

2

100
10

2

4

7 100

2

4

7 1,000

Characters per Block

5/6~

Reprinted

2

-4

710,000

401:093.100
IBM 1401
Input-Output
Hypertape

INPUT-OUTPUT: HYPERTAPE DRIVE

§

093.

. 12

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity: . . . . . . . . Hypertape Drive .
7340 Model 2.

• 12

Description
The 7340 Model 2 Hypertape Drive was announced in
April, 1963. It fulfills the need for a tape unit for
IBM 1401, 1410, and 1460 systems that is compatible
with the high-performance, cartridge-loaded 7340
Modell Hypertape Drive for the IBM 7074, 7080,
7090, and 7094 systems. First deliveries are scheduled for the third quarter of 1963.
Up to four 7340 Model 2 Hypertape Drives can be
connected to a 1401 (or 1460) system via a 7641
Hypertape Control and a Serial Input-Output Adapter.
Either the Bit Test or Column Binary feature is a
prerequisite. In addition to the four Hypertape
Drives, a 1401 (or 1460) can control up to six 729
and/or 7330 Magnetic Tape Units connected in the
standard manner.
Recording density is 1,511 rows per inch, and tape
speed is 22. 5 inches per second. The peak data
transfer rate is 34,000 characters per second. In
the optional "packed" format, two decimal digits are
recorded in each tape row, and transfer rates of up
to 68,000 digits per second are possible. Unlike
other IBM tape equipment, the Hypertape Drive can
read backward as well as forward. Average access
time to the next sequential tape block is 18.5 milliseconds. Inter- block gap length is 0.45 inch.
Ten tracks are recorded on l-inch-wide tape; there
is no tape compatibility with non-Hypertape IBM
magnetic tape units such as the 729 and 7330. Two
tracks are used for double odd parity checking, and
bit detection is based on signal phase rather than
signal strength. The manufacturer states that these
factors make possible detection of all errors and

© 1963

Description (Contd.)
correction of all single-bit and most double-bit
errors. The eight data bits in each tape row can
hold either one 6-bit alphameric character (in which
case two bits are unused) or two 4-bit decimal digits .
An important feature of the Hypertape Drive is its
cartridge loading technique. Supply and take-up
reels holding I, 800 feet of tape are enclosed in a
sealed cartridge that measures about 17 by 10 by- 2
inches and weighs about 8 pounds. The operator
loads a reel of tape by raising the top cover of the
tape drive, sliding the cartridge into place, lowering
the top cover, and pressing the Load-Unload button.
Then the tape reels move back to engage the hubs,
the tape is lowered into the vacuum columns, and the
read-write head moves into position. Unloading is
accomplished by reversing this procedure. It is not
necessary to rewind the tape before unloading a
cartridge.

The differences between the 7340 Model 1 and Model
2 Hypertape Drives can be summarized as follows:
7340 Modell

7340 Model 2

Tape speed, inches/sec: 112.5

22.5

Peak transfer rates
Character/sec:
Decimal digits/sec:

170,000
340,000

34,OOf)
68,000

Average access time,
msec:

4.2

18.5

Full rewind time,
minutes:

1.5

3.75

IBM 7074,
7080, 7090,
7094

IBM 1401,
1410, 1460

Available for:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

401: 101.100
IBM 1401
Input.Output
1009 Data Transmission Unit
INPUT-OUTPUT: DATA TRANSMISSION UNIT

§

101.

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity: ..

.12

Description

The available transmission speeds are 75, 150, and
300 characters per second. Maximum usable speed
and reliability of data transmission are dependent
upon the quality of the available communications circuits; at present tlie 300 characters per second
speed cannot be used on toll lines. Unless a 4
wire, full-duplex line is available, a turn-around
time of 250 milliseconds is required at the beginning and end of each message. Maximum effective
transfer rates, according to IDM, are generally obtained with messages ranging from 300 to 1,000
characters in length. Special 1401 instructions control the transmission of data, and sub-routines are
required to handle synchronization, checking, and
retransmissions due to errors.

• Data Transmission Unit.
1009.

This unit enables the 1401 Processing Unit to trans."
mit and receive data at speeds up to 300 characters
per second over public or private telephone or telegraph lines. The unit at the other end of the line
may be a similarly equipped 1401 or 1410 system or
an IDM 7701 or 7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission
Terminal. A specially-equipped telephone and a
serial data set, supplied by the communications
company, are also required at each terminal.
Data from the transmitting 1401 in serial-by-character, parallel-by-bit, BCD form is converted by
the 1009 into a speCial serial-by-bit, 4-of-8 transmission code in which each character code consists
of four "I" bits and four "0" bits. The 1009 at the
receiving terminal handles the reconversion to BCD
form. Validity checks insure that each character
received contains exactly four out of eight bits, and
most errors resulting from switched bits are
detected by a longitudinal parity check.

© 1963

.13

Avallability: •.

.14

First Delivery: . . . . . October, 1961.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

. 12 months, as of
April, 1963.

Reprinted 5/63

401: 102.100
•

STANDARD

_

EDP

IBM 1401
Input-Output
Optical Character Reader

REPORTS

INPUT-OUTPUT: OPTICAL CHARACTER READER

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

. 12

Optical Character Reader.
1418 Models 1 & 2.

Description:

.13

Availability:

.14

First Delivery:

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head:

This unit reads numerical characters printed in mM
407 type style into 1401 core storage at the rate of
4205-7/8 inch documents per minute. The standard model reads one line of data, which may be positioned anywhere on the document. Acceptable input data for the reader can be produced by an mM
407, 408, or 409 Accounting Machine, a 1403 or
1404 Printer, or a typewriter equipped with the 407
type font.

.212 Reservoirs:
. 22

The optical character reading is accomplished by
scanning. Light reflected from the surface of the
moving document is positioned by a lens system on
a rotating scanning disk, which produces an image
of the character sensed. The light image passes
through a fixed aperture plate to the surface of a
photomultiplier tube, which converts it into a matrix
pattern of electrical impulses. A character recognition network determines either that the character is
a valid one, in which case it is transmitted to 1401
core storage, or that it is unreadable, in which case
the symbol @ is sent to core storage in its place.
Each programmed "read" instruction causes only one
character to be transmitted from the 1418 to core
storage, and indicators must be tested before each
character transfer to guard against timing conflicts.

Multiple Copies:

none.
reflected light on photomultiplier tube.
none.

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks; . . . .
Heads/ stack:
Method of use:

reading.

Use of station:
Distance: • .
Stacks: • • •
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

reading (optional).
4.25 inches.

1.

1.
1 character at a time.

1.
1.

1 character at a time.

Use of station: . . . . . mark reading (optional; alternative to Additional
Read Station).
4.25 inches.
Distance:
1.
Stacks: . .
13.
Heads/ stack: .
1 column at a time.
Method of use: .

.25

Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters: .
Special: .
Alternatives:
Total: . . . .

Optional Features

Additional Read Station: Permits reading data
from two lines on the document in a singfe pass.
Switching between the two read stations, which are
4.25 inches apart, is under program control.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

Mark Reading Station: Permits the reading of up to
37 columns of numerical data marked on a standard
mM card with an ordinary black pencil or ink; cannot
be used when the Additional Read Station is installed.

. 311 Medium: . .
. 312 Phenomenon:

© J963

vacuum drum and moving
belt friction.
none.

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:
.222 Sensing system:

.23
Documents are fed from the hopper, through document separation and alignment stations, to a vacuum .24
drum, which holds them flat as they pass the optical
reading station. They are then removed from the
drum by a continuous belt mechanism and sent to the
selected stacker pocket. Model 1 has 3 stackers and
is designed for on-line use only. Model 2 is equipped
with 13 stackers and can be used off-line for singledigit sorting on any digit position. Both models have
an "overflow stacking" mode that permits unloading
the stackers without stopping the reader when no
sorting is required.

October, 1961.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

0-9.
10
none.
O-l,
3
none.
13 and blank.

paper or card documents .
printing .
Reprinted 5/63

401: 102.. 320

§

IBM 1401

102.

. 32

· 44

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by: •
. 322 Parallel by:
.323 Bands: . . .

. 324 Track use
Data: . . . . . . . .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: .
Total:
.325 Row use
Data: .
.33

.34

Data Transfer Control

:.441 Size of load: . . . .
.442 Input-output areas:
1 to 80 char/document at 10 . 443 Input- output area
access: . . . . .
or 7 char/in., from right
· 444 Input- output area
to left.
lockout: . . . . .
1 track .
. 445 Table control: . .
2 if optional features are
. 446 Synchronization: .
installed; each band is
served by a separate
· 447 Synchronizing aids:
read station, but only
1 band can be read at a
time.

O.
O.
O.
O.
1 per band.

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

all.

Format Compatibility

.511 Size of block: . . . . .
,.512 mock demarcation
Input: .
Output: . . . . . .
.52

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: . . .

. 42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line
Use
Document sorting
(Model 2 only): .
. 43

none required.

trailing edge of docum.e·nt".
none.

Output: . .
Stepping: .
Skipping: .
Marking: .
Searching:

documents are fed continuously after unit is engaged; 1401 must be programmed to read each
character.
none.
none .
none.
none .
none.
automatic .

2.75 to 3.67 inches .
5.875 to 8.750 inches .

. 53

Code Translation:

0.375 inch.
0.375 inch.

.54

Format Control: . . . . none.

.55

Control Operations

no separate controller
(Serial Input-Output adapter 7080 required on 1401
Processing Unit).

Disable: . . . . . .
Request interrupt: .
Select stacker: . . .
Select format: . . . . .
Select code: . . . . . .
Start feeding documents
continuously: . . . . .
Stop feeding documents:
Select reading station:.

. 1.

no.
no.
yes.
no.
no.
yes .
yes.
yes (with optionalfeatures).

Associated equipment
none.

Connection to Device

. 431 Devices per controller:
. 432 Restrictions: . . . . . none if other units requiring a 7080 Adapter or a
3271 Direct Data Channel
are connected to the 1401.

5/63 Reprinted

.522
.523
. 524
'.. 525
.526

I to 80 char/document.

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input:

Physical Dimensions

. 351 Overall width: .. .
. 352 Length: . . . . . .
.353 Minimum margins:
Left: .
Right:
.

none .
none .
by program.
tests: document under read
station 1 or 2; document
end reached; character
available to 1401; late
transfer .

.5

Other device or system Code translation

. 35

each character.

all.

Coding: . . . . . . . . . . printed numerals 0.093
inch high by 10 char/in.
(mM 407 font) or 0.114
inch high by 7 char/in .•
(407-E font).

All equipment using
mM 407 or 407-E
fonts: . . . . . . .

1 character .
core storage .

.56

Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device: . . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: . . . .
End of medium marks:
Character ready to be
transferred:
Exhausted: . . . . . . .

yes .
yes.
no .
no .
no.
yes.
yes.

INPUT-OUTPUT: OPTICAL CI:IARACTER READI;R

§ 102.

. 73

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions:

.62

Speeds

Stackers (3 or 13):
. 732 Replenishment time: ,

Value

Read station switch
time: . . . . . . .
Reader transport rate:
Space between documents:
.624 Effective speeds:. . .

4 msec.
48 inches/sec.
1. 25 inches average.
3,000
S=L+1.25
for continuous feeding,
where:
S = speed, documents/
minute;
L = document length, inches.

. 733 Adjustment time:
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .
.8

Processing Unit.
0.195*.

Component: • • • • •
msec per character:

*Includes time required to test ready, interpret
read instruction, and transfer 1 character.
.7

EXTERNAL FACILITmS

. 71

Adjustments

12.0 inch stack (600-1, 200
documents) .
4.5 inch stack each.
0.5 to 1;0 minutes •
Reader needs to be stopped
unless in alternate-pocke~
mode .
5 to 10 minutes.
1.5 to 3.0 minutes.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Reading:
Input area overflow:
In valid code:

see "Invalid code".
none.
validity logic
transmit @ to core storage.
stop reader; alarm & incheck
dicator.
none.
set indicator.
check
stop reader; alarm.
check
stop reader; alarm.
checks,

Exhausted medium:

Demands on System

Adjustment

Capacity

Storage
Hopper:

Name

Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Full stacker:
Improper feeding:
Improper registration:

check

Action

alarm•

Method

Read station positioning: . . .
. 72

Loading and Unloading

,731 Volumes handled
. . . . none.

. 621 Nominal or peak speed: 420 documents/minute
(5-7/8 inches long).
.622 Important parameters

.63

401:102.60Q

levers .

Other Controls
Function
Manual feed:
Start document feeding:
Reset alarm circuits:
Overflow stacking mode:
Off-line sort mode:
Start document counter:
Select sort pOSition:
Document end switch:

Select display character:

Form
knob.
key.
key.
key.

Comment
permits registration check.

permits continuous operation.

key~

key.
rotary
switch.
4-pos.
switch.

has automatic ,reset.

determines point at which
"document end" indicator
shall be set.

rotary
SWitch.

controls CRT display unit.

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 5/63

401:103.100

_STANDARD

II

IBM 1401
In put - Output
1419 Magnetic Character Reader

EDP
R[PORTS

INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER

§

103.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

. 12

Seli-Ch!=!cking Number: Proyides verification
of account numbers. Available in either Modulus 10
or Modulus 11; the latter is more effective and more
expensive .
Magnetic Character Reader.
1419 Model!.
.13

Description:
This magnetic character reader- sorter reads 1, 600
six-inch documents per minute. Documents up to
8-3/4 inches long can be handled at proportionately
lower rates. The 1419 is functionally similar to the
earlier 1412 Magnetic Character Reader, whose peak
speed is 950 documents per minute. Characters
printed in magnetic ink in Font E-13S (adopted as
standard by the American Bankers' Association) are
recognized in a character matrix 7 positions wide by
10 positions high. Only the 10 numerical characters
and 4 special symbols can be read, and all magnetic
ink imprinting must be on a single line within 5/8
inch of the bottom edge of the document. Invalid or
unrecognizable characters cause an indicator to be
set and an asterisk to be transmitted to core storage.
Missing fields, incorrect field lengths, document
spacing errors, and missing or out-of-sequence
special symbols also cause error indications.
Four basic modes of operation are possible:
1. Off-line sorting on anyone digit position.
2. On-line use (reading data into 1401 core storage)
with single-digit sort as above.
3. On-line use with programmed selection of any of
the 13 stacker pockets.
4. On-line use in "alternate pocket" mode. This
permits unloading the stackers without stopping
the reader, but no sorting can be done.
When reading 6-inch documents, 32_2 milliseconds
are available for processing each document with the
Processing Overlap feature and 9.5 milliseconds
without it. The 1419 has only one operating speed.
If, therefore, the required processing time exceeds
these values, it will be necessary to transcribe the
magnetic ink data to magnetic tape and then process
the tape in a separate operation.
Optional Features
Multiple Column Control: Permits the routing to
stacker A of documents with specified digit values
in up to four selected digit pOSitions.
Electronic Accumulator and Sequence Checking:
Permits accumulated totals of the amounts read from
documents to be printed on paper tape, and checks
selected positions for correct document sequencing.
(Multiple Column Control is a prerequisite.)
Split Field: Permits the division of standard
A. B. A. check fields into two elements, each of
variable length.

© 1963

Availability:

12 months, as of
April, 1963 •

· 14

First Delivery:

.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

· 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs: . . . . .
.22

November, 1962.

moving belt friction.
none.

Sensing and Recording Sy stems

.221 Recording system:
.222 Sensing system:

none.
magnetic heads.

.23

Multiple Copies: .

none.

.24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . .
Heads/ stack:
Method of use:

.25

1.

30.
scans characters horizontally from right to left.

Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:

10
none.
4

Alternatives: .
Total:

none.
14.

..

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:
. 312 Phenomenon:
.32

reading.

0-9.
amount, dash,
transit, on-us.

paper or card documents.
magnetic ink imprinting .

Positional Arrangement

7 segments per character;
1 to 42 characters per
document.
.322 Parallel by: . • . . . . 30 tracks (3 groups of 10
each; allows for variations
in vertical position of
magnetic characters on
document) .
. 323 Bands: . . . . . . . . . 1.
.321 Serial by:

•

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 5/63

401:103.324

§

. IBM 1401

103.

.324 Track use
Data: . . . . . . . . .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: .
Total: .
.325 Row use
Data: .
.33

Coding:

. 34

Format Compatibility

.447 Synchronizing aids: .. tests: document ready to
be read; document under
read head.
10 of 30.

O.
O.
O.
20.
10 of 30.

. . . . . . . . font E - l3B magnetic ink
characters.

Physical Dimensions

. 351 Overall width: .. .
2.75 to 3.67 inches .
. 352 Length: . . . . . . .
6.00 to 8.75 inches .
. 353 Maximum margins:
Distance of leading
edge of first symbol
from reference edge
of document:
0.3125 inch + O. 0625.
.4

CONTROLLER

. 41

Identity: . . . .

. 42

Connection to System

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:

trailing edge of document
or group mark in core
storage.
Output: . . . . . . . . none.

.52

.53

Code Translation:

.54

Format Control
Control: . . . .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: .
Insert spaces:
Section sizes:
Select fields: .

.55

Connection to device

.56

..

1 document.
core storage.

.

each character.

.445 Table control:
. 446 Synchronization: .

5/63 Reprinted

for full block (no lockout when
Processing Overlap is used).
none .
automatic within a document; by program for suc'
cessive documents.

control panel and program.
undefined.
by program.
no.
no.
no .
limited.
control panel.

no.
no .
yes.
no .
no .
yes.
yes.

Testable Conditions
Disabled:. . . . .
indirectly.
Busy device: . . .
yes .
Nearly exhausted:
no.
no .
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks: no .
Exhausted: . . . . . . ., indirectly .

Data Transfer Control

. 441 Size of load:
·
. 442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access: .. ·
.444 Input-output area
lockout: ..

automatic.

Control Operations
Disable: . . . . . .
Request interrupt: .
Select stacker:
Select format: . . .
Select code: . . . .
Start feeding documents
continuously: . . . . .
Stop feeding documents:

. 431 Devices per controller: 1.
. 432 Restrictions: . . . . .
none if other units requiring a 7080 Adapter or a
3271 Direct Data Channel
are connected to the 1401.

. 44

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input: . . . . . . . . . . documents are fed coiltinuously after unit is engaged; 1401 must be programmed to read each
document .
. 522 Output: . .
none.
.523 Stepping:
none.
.524 Skipping: .
none .
. 525 Marking: .
none.
.526 Searching:
none.

1.

Associated equipment
none.

up to 42 characters per
document in standard
A.B.A. fields .

. 512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . . . . .

no separate controller
(Serial Input-Output
Adapter #7080 reauired on
1401 Processing Unit).

.421 On-line: ... · .
. 422 Off-line
Use
Document sorting:.
. 43

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

all.

Other device or system Code translation
All equipment using
Font E-13B characters
in standard A. B. A.
format: • • • • • ••
none required.
.35

.5

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions
I: .
II:

without Processing Overlap.
with Processing Overlap.

401: 103.620

INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER

§

103.

.62

. 73
Speeds

· 621 Nominal or peak speed: 1,600 6-inch documents/
minute. (1,960 51-column
documents can be read per'
minute, but cannot be
sorted).
.622 Important parameters
Value
Name
Space between docu2.5 inches minimum.
ments: . . . . . .
Reader transport
rate: .
263 inches/sec.
. 623 Overhead: . . . . . .
50 msec minimum interval from "engage" instruction until first document
reaches read head.
.624 Effective speeds:
S= 9, 600/L
for continuous feeding,
where:
S = speed, documents/
minute.
L = document length,
inches.
· 63

Demands on System
BASIS: 6-inch documents at minimum spacing.
Com2onent
Processing Unit:
Processing Unit:

Condition
--

msec per
document

II

28.0
5.3

·7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:

· 72

Other Controls

or

Percentage

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Feed hopper: .
Stackers (13): .
.732 Replenishment time:

.733 Adjustment time:
. 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .
.8

Capacity
12.0 inch stack (600-1200
documents).
4.5 inch stack each.
0.5 to 1. 0 minutes. '
Reader needs to be stopped,
unless operating in alternate pocket mode.
no adjustments required.
0.4 to 0.8 minute.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Reading:
Input area overflow:

see "Invalid code ".
check for group mark.

Invalid code:

validity logic

Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Full Slacker:
Field length error:
Document spacing:
Feed jam:
Pocket selection:

check
none.
6 photocells
check
character count
2 photocells
2 photocells
check

Action

stop data transmission.
transmit • to storage
& set indicator.
stop reader; alarm.
set indicators.
stop reader; alarm.
set indicator.
set indicator.
stop reader; alarm.
stop reader; alarm.

74.7
14.1

none required (feeds intermixed documents of
varying sizes).

Function

Form

Document counter on-offreset:
Unload pocket/restart
Single document feed:

switch.
foot switch
key

Field selection:
Off -line mode:
Program-sort mode:

5 keys
key.
key

Sort field
Sort position:

5 keys
10 keys

Comment

halts & restarts feeding.
reads & processes 1 document.
select fields to be read.
permits programmed
stacker selection.
select field for sorting.
select pOSition for sorting.

© 1963

by Auerboch Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 5/63

401: 104.100
IBM 1401
Input - Output
1412 Magnetic Character Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: 1412 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER

§

183.

.• 12

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity: .

Description (Contd.)
A field length verification check and odd-bit parity
checks are performed on each character transmitted from the 1412 to core storage.

Magnetic Character Reader.
1412 Model!.

Optional Features
Multiple Column Select-Sort Suppress:
.12

Description

Permits the sorting to pocket A or B of documents
with specific digit values in up to four selected
digit positions.

The 1412 Magnetic Character Reader-Sorter reads
and sorts into any 1 of 13 pockets 950 documents (6
inches long) per minute. Documents up to 8-3/4
inches long can be handled at proportionately lower
rates. The 1412 is functionally similar to the later
Model 1419 Magnetic Character Reader, whose peak
speed is 1,600 documents per minute, (see Section
401:i03.100). Characters printed in magnetic ink
character Font E-13B (adopted as standard by the
American Bankers' Association) are recognized
through a reader head matrix 7 scan-time units wide
by 10 units high. Only the 10 numerical characters
and 4 special symbols can be read, and all magnetic
ink imprinting must be on a single line within fiveeighths of an inch of the bottom edge of the document.
Invalid characters or characters not included in the
group of stored logical patterns cause an indicator to
be set and an asterisk to be transmitted to core storage. Missing fields, incorrect field length, document spacing errors, and missing or out-ofsequence special symbols also cause error indications.

Permits the routing to pocket A or B of documents
that do not have specified numbers in designated
column positions of a predetermined field.
Permits the routing to pocket A or B of documents
that contain a specific code in a predetermined
field while sorting all other documents.
Auxiliary Document Counter: counts all documents
passing photocell 4.
Self-Checking Number Verification: provides verification of account numbers. Available in either
Modulo 10 or Modulo 11; the latter is more effective
and more expensive.
Electronic Accumulator and Sequence Checking:
permits accumulated totals of the amounts read
from documents to be printed as lists, and checks
selected positions for correct document sequencing.
(Multiple Column Select-Sort Suppress is a prerequisite. )

Pocket selection is determined by the digit read from
the column being sorted (one column at a time in the
normal mode) which activates the correspondingly
numbered chute blade, thus directing documents into
specified pockets (A, B, 0 to 9, and reject).

.13

Availability: . .

12 months as of April, 1963.

.14

First Delivery:

?

Three basic modes of operation are possible:

·2

PHYSICAL FORM

Off-line sorting on any individual digit position.

• 21

Drive Mechanism

On-line use; 1410 controls document feeding and
reading, 1412 controls document sorting.

.211 Drive past the head: • . moving belt friction.
.212 Reservoirs: . . . . . . none.

On-line use; 1410 controls document feeding and
reading, and selects distribution stacker.

· 22

When reading 6-inch documents, the minimum time
avai~ble for processing each document is 15.0
milliseconds. The processing overlap feature cannot
be utilized on a system having a 1412; therefore, if
the processing time exceeds these values, it is necessary to program the start-stop and reading as
required.
One 1412 Magnetic Character Reader can be connected to a 1401 system through the 7080 Serial
Input-Output. Adapter.

© 1963

Sensing and Recording Systems

• 221 Recording system: .
. 222 Sensing system: .

none.
magnetic heads .

· 23

Multiple Copies: .

none.

• 24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack: .•
Method of use: •

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

reading.
1.

30.
scans characters
horizontally.

5/63

401:104.250
§

IBM 1401

104.

· 25

· 44
Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters:
Special: •

10
0 - 9.
none.
4
amount, dash, transit,
on-us.
none.
14.

Alternatives: .
Total: . . . .
.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

· 31

Form of Storage
paper or card documents .
magnetic ink imprinting•

• 311 Medium: • . .
• 312 Phenomenon: •
· 32

• 325

7 segments per character; 1
to 40 characters per
document.
Parallel by: . . . . . . 30 tracks (3 groups of 10
each, allows for variations
in vertical position of
magnetic characters on
documents ).
1.
Bands: •.
Track use
Data: •.
10 of 30.
Redundancy check: .
O.
O.
Timing: . . . . .
Control signals:
O.
20.
Unused:.
10 of 30.
Total: . .
all for data .
Row use: .

.33

Coding:

· 34

Format Compatibility

.323
· 324

Font E-13B magnetic ink
characters.

Other device or system: all equipment using Font
E-13B characters in
standard A. B. A. Format.
Code translation: • .
none requh:ed.
· 35

. 441 Size of load: . . . .
. 442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . • .
.444 Input-output area
lockout: • . . . •

Physical Dimensions

. 351 Overall width:
.352 Length: . . . .

•4

CONTROLLER

• 41

Identity:....

. 42

Connection to System

2.75 to 3.67 inches.
6.00 to 8.75 inches.

·5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . . . . •

.52

.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 1 per adapter.
• 432 Restrictions:. . . . . . none.

up to 40 characters per document in standard A. B. A.
fields.
trailing edge of document or
group markJn core storage.

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input:. • . . . . • . . • documents are fed continuously until a stop feed
command is given; 1401
must be programmed to
read each document.
none.
.522 Output: . .
none .
• 523 Stepping: .
none .
. 524 Skipping:.
none.
. 525 Marking: .
none.
.526 Searching:

.53

Code Translation: . • . automatic .

• 54

Format Control
Control: • . . .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: .
Insert spaces:
Section sizes:
Select fields: .

• 55

5/63

each character.

for full block (no lockout
when Processing Overlap
is used) •
• 445 Table control: . .
none .
.446 Synchronization:.
automatic within a document;
by program for successive
documents.
• 447 Synchronizing aids: . . tests; document ready to be
read; document under read
head.

. 7080 Serial I/O Adapter.

.421 On-line:
1.
.422 Off-line
document sorting.
Use:
Associated equipment: none.
. 43

1 document .
core storage.

Positional Arrangement

· 321 Serial by: .
• 322

Data Transfer Control

control panel and program.
undefined.
by program.
no .
no.
no.
limited.
control panel •

Control Operations
Disable: . . . • . .
Request interrupt: •
Select stacker:.
Select format: . • .
Select code: . . . .
Start feeding documents
continuously: . . . . .
Stop feeding documents:

no.
no .
yes.
no .
no.
yes .
yes.

401:104.560

INPUT - OUTPUT: 1412 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER

§

104.

· 56

.72
Testable Conditions

Function

Disabled: . . . . '.
Busy device: . . •
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Exhausted: . . . . . . .

•6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions: .

.62

Speeds

yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.

Demands on System

Component
Processing Unit:

Comment

Stop-restore:

key

Sort key:
Alternate pocket
select:

key
key

.73

msec per document

Percentage

48.0

76.4

key

Sort column:

key

Sort field:

key

Read field:

key

Stackers (13):.
.732 Replenishment time: .
• 733 Adjustment time: •
.734 Optimum reloading
period! . . . . . .

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

• 71

Adjustments:...... none required (feeds intermixed documents of varying sizes).

© 1963

permits off-line
operation.
determines which sort
column will be used
for sort operation .
selects field to be
sorted.
selects field(s) for
transmission to the
central processor.

Capacity
12. O-inch stack (600 to
1, 200 documents).
4. 5-inch stack each.
O. 5 to 1. 0 minute;
no adjustment necessary .
0.6 to 1. 3 minutes.

ERRORS. CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:

.7

puts unit on line.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Feed hopper: •

.8
6 inch documents at
minimum spacing.

Reader off-line:

resets document
counter to yes.
stops machine and resets SOIj:-compare
circuits.
permits sorting.
for alternating input
pockets .

Central processor
on-line:
key

. .. none.

Basis: . . . . . . .

Form

Document counter
on-off-reset:
switch.
Reset plunge:
plunges

.621 Nominal or peak speed: 950 6-inch
documents/minute.
. 622 Important parameters
Space between
documents: • . . . . 3.0 inches minimum; average is approximately equal
to document length.
Reader transport rate: 200 inches/second.
Minimum processing
time: . . . . . .
15.0 msec/document.
Minimum stacker
selection time:
7.5 msec/document.
.623 Overhead: . . . . .
50 msec minimum interval
from "engage" instruction
until first document
reaches read head.
.624 Effective speed: . . . . S = 6, OOO/L for continuous
feeding, where: S =speed,
document/minute, L =
document length, inches.
• 63

Other Controls

Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflict:
Fill stackers:
Field length error:
Document spacing:
Peed jam:
Transfer of data:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Check or
Interlock

Action

see "Invalid code".
check for group
stop data transmission.
mark
validity logic
transmit • to storage
and set indicator.
check
stop reader, set indica tor.
none.
5 photocells
set indicator.
interlock
stop reader.
character cost
set indicator.
set indica tor.
2 photocells
check
stop reader. set
indicator.
halt computer.
parity check

5/63

401: 105.100

.STANOARO
EDP
•

REIORTS

IBM l401
Input.Output
1428 Alphameric Optical Reader
INPUT.OUTPUT: 1428 ALPHAMERIC OPTICAL READER

§

lOS.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: .

• 12

Description

Alphameric Optical Reader
1428 Modell and 2.

.13

Availability: . .

12 months as of April, 1963.

.14

First Delivery:

?

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head: •
The 1428 unit reads alphameric characters printed
in 1428 tape font (available on IBM 1403 Printers and
IBM Electric typewriters) into 1401 core storage at
the rate of 400 5-7/8 inch documents per minute.
The standard model reads one line of data, which
may be positioned anywhere on the document within
marginal limitations.
Documents are fed from the hopper, through document separation and alignment stations, to a vacuum
drum, which holds them flat as they pass the optical
reading station. They are then removed from the
drum by a revolving belt mechanism and sent to the
selected stacker pocket. Model 1 has 3 stackers and
is designed for on-line use only. The 3 stackers can
be utilized for alternate pocket selection only. Model
2 is equipped with 13 stackers and can be used offline (when the off-line switch is depressed) for single
character sorting on any position. Both models have
an "overflow stacking" mode that permits unloading
the stackers without stopping the stackers and without stopping the reader when no sorting is required.
The optical character reading is accomplished by
scanning. Light reflected from the surface of the
moving document is positioned by a lens system on a
rotating scanning disk, which produces an image of
the character sensed. The light image passes
through a fixed aperture plate to the surface of a
photomultiplier tube, which converts it into a matrix
pattern of electrical impulses. A character recognition network determines either that the character is
a valid one, in which case it is transmitted to 1401
core storage, or that it is unreadable, in which case
the symbol@ is sent to core storage in its place.
Each programmed "read" instruction causes only
one character to be transmitted from the 1428 to
core storage, and indicators must be tested before
each character transfer to guard against timing conflicts, and possible loss of characters.

.22

Mark Reading Station: Permits the reading of up to
37 columns of alphameric data marked on a standard
IBM card with an ordinary black pencil or ink; cannot
be used when an Additional Read Station is installed.

© 1963

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:.
. 222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system:

none .
reflected light on
photomultiplier tube.
none.

· 23

Multiple Copies: .

none.

· 24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: .
Stacks: •
H~ads/stack: .
Method of use: .

reading.

Use of station: •
Distance: •
Stacks: •
Heads/stack: •
Method of use: .

reading (optional).
4.25 inches.

Use of station: .

mark reading (optional; alternative to additional
Read Station).
4. 25 inches.

Distance:. •
Stacks: •
Heads/stack: .
Method of use: .
• 25

Optional Features
Additional Read Station: Permits reading data from
two lines on the document in a single pass. Switching between the two read stations, which are 4.25
inches apart, is under program control.

vacuum drum and moving
belt friction.

1.
1.

1 character at a time.

1.
1.

1 character at a time.

1.

13.
1 column at a time.

Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:

10
26
6

Alternatives:. •
FORTRAN set: •
Req. COBOL set:
Total: ••.

none.
none.
none.
42.

·3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

· 31

Form of Storage

• 311 Medium:
· 312 Phenomenon: .

by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

0 through 9.
A through Z.
$ / * - (decimal and
comma as one) and a
preprinted vertical
field mark (1).

paper documents.
printing.

5/63

IBM 1401

401: 105.320
105.

§

• 32

Positional Arrangement

· 321 Serial by:
• 322 Parallel by:
· 323 Bands: • • .

· 324 Track use
Data: • . . • . . . .
Redundancy check: •
Timing: • • . . .
Control signals:
Total: •.
. 325 Row use: •

1 to N rows at most, 10 per
inch where N is size of
docmnent.
1 track only.
2 if optional second Read
Station installed; each
band is served by a separate read station but only
1 band may be read at a
time.
all.
inherent in system.
character to character.
special characters.
1.
same as track use.

.444 Input-output area
lockout: •.•••
.445 Table control: • •
• 446 Synchronization: .
.447 Synchronizing aids :

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
• 512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . . . . .
Output: •••••.
.52

.33

.34

printed characters, 1428
type font, • 090-inch high
and spaced 10 characters
or fewer per inch.
Format Compatibility
Other device or system: all equipment USing IBM
1428 type font.
Code translation: . • • none required.

• 35

Left:

Right: • • . • • • •

•4

CONTROLLER

• 41

Identity: • . • .

· 42

Connection to System

• 421 On-line:
422 Off-line
Use:

trailing edge of docmnent.
none •

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input:. . . . . • . . • • docmnents are fed continuously after unit is engaged; 1401 must be programmed to read each
character •
• 522 Output: • .
none .
• 523 Stepping: .
none.
.524 Skipping:.
none.
.525 Marking:.
none.
• 526 Searching:
none.

2. 75 to 3. 67 inches •
5.875 to 8.75 inches.

.53

Code Translation:

• 54

Format Control
Control: . • . .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: ..
Insert spaces: .
Zero insertion:
Reading selection: •

0.375 inch.
0.375 inch.

no separate controller
(Serial Input-Output adapter 7080 required on 1401
Processing unit).
• 55

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 1.
• 432 Restrictions:. . • . . . none if oth~r units requiring a 7080 Adapter or a
3271 Direct Data Channel
are connected to the 1401.
Data Transfer Control

• 441 Size of load: • . . •
. 442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access: • . . • • •
5/63

1 character.
core storage •
each character.

.56

automatic .

program.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
yes.

Control Operations
Disable: . . . . . .
Request interrupt: .
Select stacker: .
Select format: . . •
Select code: • . • .
Start feeding documents
continuously: .
•
Stop feeding documents:
Select reading .iitation:

1.

Docmnent Sorting
(Model 2 only).
Associated Equipment: none.

• 44

1 to 80 characters per
document.

Phys.ical Dimensions

• 351 Overall width: . • .
. 352 Length:. . • • . • .
· 353 Maximmn margins

• 43

none.
none •
by program.
tests; docmnent under read
station I or 2; docmnent
end reached; character
available to 1401; late
transfer.

no •
no.
yes.
no.
no.
yes.
yes.
yes (with optional features).

Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . . .
Busy device: . • .. .
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller: . .
End of medimn marks:
C}1ar'acter ready to be
transferred:
Exhausted: • • • . . • •

yes.
yes.
no.
no •
no .
yes.
yes.

401: 105.600

INPUT -OUTPUT: 1428 ALPHAMERIC OPTICAL READER

§ 105.

.6

.72

Other Controls

PERFORMANCE

Function

Form

Comment

· 61

Conditions: •

.62

Speeds

Manual feed:
Reset:
Register Run Key:

knob
key
key

Alternate Pocket select:

key

Stan document counter:
Off-line sort mode:
Document End switch:

key
key.
4-position
switch

permits registration check.
resets electronic circuitry.
used to feed documents
without operating system.
makes alternate pocket selection operative.
has automatic reset.

. •. none.

.621 Nominal or peak speed: 400 documents/minute
(5-7/8 inches long).
• 622 Important parameters
Name
Value
Read station switch
4 msec.
time: • . . . . .
Reader transport
rate: . . • . .
48 inches/sec.
Space between
1. 25 inches.
documents:
4 msec when second read
• 623 Overhead: . . • .
station is used.
S = 2,880
'. 624 Effective speeds:
L+1.25
for continuous feeding,
where:
S =speed, documents/
minute
L = document length,
inches.
· 63

Demands on System
Component: ••••
Msec per character:.

Processing Unit.
0.195*

* Includes time required to test ready, interpret
read instruction, and transfer 1 character.

• 73

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: ••.•
Stacker (3 or 13): .
. 732 Replenishment time:.

• 733 Adjustment time: •
.734 Optimum reloading
period: • . . . . .

.8

Capacity
15.0 inch stack (800- 1,500
documents ).
4. 5-inch stack each.
0.5 to 1. 0 minute •
Reader needs to be stopped
unless in alternate pocket
mode.
5 to 10 minutes •
2.0 to 3.75 minutes.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

',.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

Reading:

.71

Adjustn;lents

Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:

see "Invalid
code" •
none.
validity logic
check

Imperfect medium:
Timins conflicts:
Full stack:
Improper feeding:
Improper registration:

none.
check
check
check
check

Adjustment:
Method: •
Comment: •

read station positioning.
levers.
positions for reading from
any specified location on
the face of the document.

© 1963

determines point at which
"document and" indicator
shall be set.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Action

transmits@ to core storage.
stops reader: alarm and
indicator.
sets indicator.
stops reader: alarm.
stops reader: alarm.
alarm.

5/63

401: 106.100
IBM 1401
Input-Output
7710 Data Communication Unit
DATA COMMUNICATION UNIT

§

106.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: .

.12

Description

movement of data, while the 7710 controls the transmission of data. The transmitting 7710 converts
each character from six-bit code plus parity bit into
a fixed-count four-of-eight code. It is possible to
transmit intermixed binary and BCD alphameric records. Transmission through communication facilities is serial by character and serial by bit. The
receiving 7710 reverses the code translation procedure. Validity checks ensure that each character
received contains exactly four out of eight bits, and
a longitudinal parity check detects most errors resUlting from switched bits.

7710 Data Communication
Unit.

The 7710 Data Communication Unit enables the 1401
Data Processing System to transmit and receive data
at speeds up to 5,100 characters per second from
remote equipment. This unit can use both public and
private line communication facilities. The equipment at the other end of the network can be: a similarlyequipped 1401; 7701 or 7702 Magnetic Tape
Transmission Terminal; a 1009 Data Transmission
Unit; or a 1013 Card Transmission Terminal. A
specially equipped telephone and serial data set,
supplied by the communication company, are also
required at each terminal. The 7710 must be operated at a speed compatible with the equipment it is
communicating with. This compatibility is achieved
by setting a Speed Select Switch located oli the Customer Engineer's Panel to a speed of 4, 800, 2,400,
2,000, or 1,200 bits per second. The 7710 allows
high speed data transfer and remote area communicadon between two 1401 installations or centralized
data processing facilities.
Data are transferred between 1401 core storage and
the 7710 via the Serial I/O Adapter (7080) serially by
character and parallel by bit. The 1401 controls the

© 1963

Description (Contd.)

Input messages can be of any length and are terminated by an end-of-message signal. Output messages
can also be any length and are terminated by a group
mark with a word mark in core storage.
Optional Features
A high speed communication interface or provision
for high speed and low speed communication interfaces: Permits multipoint communication for low
speed data gathering and point-to-point communication for volume transfer of data at high speed.
.13

Availability: . .

14 months as of April1963.

• 14

First Delivery:

?

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

401: 107.100
IBM 1401
Input-Output
1231 Optical Mark Page Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: 1231 OPTICAL MARK PAGE READER

13 107.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: ..

.12

Description

Optical Mark Page Reader.
1231.

The Optical Mark Page Reader reads ordinary pencil marks (not printed characters) from 8-1/2" x
11" data sheets directly into a 1401, 1440, or 1460
Data Processing System. A #7080 Serial Input/Output Adapter is required on the 1401 or 1441 Processing Unit.
The 1231 (or its off-line counterpart, the 1232) will
be useful in organizations that use standardized
forms for such functions as surveys, orders, applications, medical records, payroll time records,
inventory listings, and sales analyses. The 1231's
chief advantage is the elimination of much of the
key punching and verifying normally associated with
the preparation of input for automatic data processing. In a single pass of the pencil-marked data
sheets through the 1231, the marks are read and
the data is transferred to the computer. (The 1232,
working off-line, converts the marked information
into punched cards.)
Documents are read at varying rates of speed, depending upon the mode switch settings. When set
to "continuous", feeding is at a constant speed of
2,000 documents per hour. When set to "demand",
feeding is controlled by the computer program with
speeds varying up to 1600 documents per hour. The
feeding mode selected depends upon the computer
program control method used.

Description (Contd. )
Data sheets are fed from a pneumatically-controlled hopper (600-sheet capacity) through the reading
area and directed to one of two stackers. The main
stacker holds 600 sheets. Sheets with detected
errors are directed to a separate stacker (50-sheet
capacity). Documents are stacked in reverse sequence in both stackers.
All marks read from a data sheet are stored as
bits in a sonic delay line storage unit until they are
transferred to the computer by execution of a Read
instruction. Less than 10 milliseconds are required
to transfer data from the sonic delay line to the
computer storage.
The user may have up to 1,000 mark positions on
one side of a sheet (2,000 on both sides). Mark
positions are pre-printed in rows of 20 positions.
Each row is divided into two 10-position groups.
Each 10-position group is called a "word" for the
purpose of defining a marking area. Each word can
be divided into two 5-position segments. Data
words and segments can be grouped in various combinations to form fields.
First deliveries are scheduled for the third quarter
of 1964.
Optional Feature
Master Mark: A master data sheet, containing up
to 10 words of marked data, can be read and stored
in the delay line for transfer to the computer. The
master sheet is identified by a special preprinted
mark and contains data that is to be associated with
all subsequent data sheets until a new master sheet
is read. Thus, data common to a series of data
sheets need be recorded and read only once.

© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.

3/64

401: 108.100

IBM 1401
Input-Output
7770 Audio Response Unit
INPUT-OUTPUT: 7770 AUDIO RESPONSE UNIT

§

. 12

108.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: . . .

.12

Description

Audio Response Unit.
7770, Modell.

The IBM 7770 Audio Response Unit is a buffered
communications unit that accepts telephoned requests and relays them to a central processing
unit which processes the data and returns a coded
reply to the 7770. The 7770 interprets the reply,
selects the proper words from its stored vocabulary, and transmits these words as a voice response
back to the inquirer.

Description (Contd.)
The vocabulary is recorded on the magnetic sleeve
of a drum 4 inches in diameter and 10 inches long.
There are 128 tracks on the drum, addressable
by a seven-bit BCD address field associated with
each track. Two tracks are prerecorded; one
having an address of zeros (blank) and the other
with ones (group mark). The "blank" track indicates 500 milliseconds of silence (500 milliseconds per revolution), and the "group mark"
track is used for end-of-message control.
The prerecorded drum vocabulary is flexible in
three ways:
(1)

The Audio Response Unit is composed of three
sections: inquiry, control, and audio output.
The inquiry section accepts digital inquiries from
the connected inquiry terminals through a common
carrier receiver, in message lengths up to 40
digits. Transmission of the inquiry between the
receiver and the 7770 is accomplished in a 3-outof-14 or 2-out-of-8 inquiry code. The 7770 receives the inquiry from the receiver terminal in
serial-by-character, parallel-by-bit form. The
inquiry is then translated into BCD form, stored
in a buffer, and transferred to the computer when
the total inquiry has been received. An inquiry
is assumed to be complete when the 7770 receives
no data for five consecutive seconds.
The digital control section controls the data flow
between the CPU (central processing unit) and the
7770 through the 1311 Disk Storage control unit.
A Read File command from the CPU causes the
inquiry to be transferred from the 7770 to the
CPU. When the CPU completes its interpretation
of the inquiry, it composes a coded response
message. The CPU then issues a Write File command, and the response message is transferred to
the buffer of the 777 O. The response message is
composed of vocabulary word locations (located on
the 7770's magnetic drum), and is sent one word
at a time. The maximum length of this response
message is 38 words. Positions 1 through 38 may
contain the drum addresses of the appropriate
audio response words. A group mark in any position from 2 through 39 will signify the end of the
message. The last position of the 40-character
area is always a blank.
The audio output section provides the actual
audio response to the inquirer. These words,
recorded on the magnetic drum in analog form as
an audio signal, are amplified and transmitted to
the terminal originating the inquiry.

The number of drum words can be 32, 48, or
64, and can be increased to 80, 96, 112, or
128 by a special feature.

(2) A master vocabulary provided by IBM is a
list of frequently used industry wor (A)
Jump to I on overflow.
Jump to I if reader error.
Jump to I if punch error.
Jump to I if printer error.
Jump to I if printer tape channel #12 is sensed.
Jump to Ion processing error.
(unequal comparison).
Jump to I if (B) of (A)
Jump to I if console inquiry clear key pressed.
Jump to I if (B) = d (d = any char.).
Jump to I if (B) has certain zone bit configuration,
specified by d value.
Data Transfer
(A) --+ B; 1 char., numerical portion only.
(A) -+B; including word mark.
(A) - + B; word marks undisturbed.
(A) -+B; 1 char., zone portion only.
(A) - + B; with zero suppression.
Set word marks at A & B.
Clear word marks at A & B.

Miscellaneous Internal Operations
Compare (A) to (B) & set indicator.
(A) ---.. B. modified by edit-control word at B.
Contents of B Address Register -+ A.
Contents of A Address Register --+ A.
No operation.
Clear storage from A to next lower lOa's position
Halt.
H
MA*
(A) + (B) -+ B. for address m~dification.
(A) --+ B; moves entire record to record mark.
MCM*
C
MCE
SBR*
SAR*
NOP
CS

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporotion and BNA Incorporated

Revised 5/63

401:121.101
§

tBM 1401

INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)

121.
INSTRUCTION
OP.

A or I

B

d

MNEM.
OP.

M
M
M
L
L

%Fo
%Fx
%Fx
%Fx
%Fx

B
B
B
B
B

R
R
W
R
W

MCW
MCW
MCW
LCA
LCA

1
2
2
3
4
4
5
6
6
7
8
9

-

-

-

R
W
W
WR
P
P*
RP
WP
WP*
WRP
SRF*
SPF*
CC
SS
SS*
SS*

-

-

0

-

R

-

OPERATION
Internal Storage: Disc Storage Units
Seek disc storage record whose address is in B.
Read from disc storage into B; no word-marks.
Write into disc storage from B; no word-marks.
Read from disc storage into B with word-:marks.
Write into disc storage from B with word-marks.
For disc storage instructions:
x= 1: single record.
x = 2: full trapk.
x = 3: write disc check operation.
Input-Output: Punched Card & Printer
Read I card Into Core Storage pOSitions 001-080.
Print 1 line from Core Storage positions 201-332.
Print word marks from Core Storage positions 201-332 as l's
Print 1 line & read 1 card, overlapped.
Punch 1 card from Core Storage positions 101- 180 •
Read 1 card at punch feed & punch 1 card.
Read 1 card and punch 1 card, overlapped.
Print 1 line & punch 1 card, overlapped.
Read at punch feed, punch, & print.
Print, read, & punch, overlapped.
Start card-read feed, without interlock.
Start card-punch feed, without interlock.
Space or s~ip printer, as indicated by d.
Select reader or punch stacker indicated by d.
Enter Processing Overlap mode.
Exit from Processing Overlap mode.

K
K
K

-_.
-

L
L
M
M
M
U
U
U
U
U

%Ux
%Ux
%Ux
%Ux
%Cx
%Ux
%Ux
%Ux
%Ux
%Ux

B
B
B
B
B

-

R
W
R
W
R
B
E
M
R
U

M
M
L
L

%To
%To
%To
%To

B
B
B
B

R
W
R
W

InEut-Output: Magnetic Tape
Read 1 block from Magnetic Tape x into B with word-marks.
Write 1 block on Magnetic Tape x from B with word-marks.
Read 1 block from Magnetic Tape x into B; no word-marks.
Write 1 block on Magnetic Tape x from B; no word-marks.
!t4CiW'"
Read 1 block from Magnetic Tape x into B; compressed tape.
CU
Backspace 1 block on Magnetic Tape x.
CU
Skip & erase 3.5 inches on Magnetic Tape x.
CU
Record end-of tape mark on Magnetic Tape x.
CU
Rewind Magnetic Tape x.
CU
Rewind and unload Magnetic Tape x.
Input- Output: Console Inquiry
Data from keyboard
B; no word-marks.
MCW
(8)
console printer; no word-marks.
MCW
B; with word-marks.
Data from keyboard
LCA
(8)
console printer; with word-marks.
LCA

L
M

%Pl
%Pl

B
B

R
R

LCA
MCW

M
M

%Pl
%Pl

B
B

MCW
MCW

K
K

I

W
R
A
A

U
U
L
M

%SI
%SI
%SI
%SI

-

E
D
R
R
d

CU
CU
LCA
MCW
SS

F

K

-

-

-

B
B

-

R

-

-

d
d

$

LCA
LCA
MCW
MCW

Input-Out: Paper Tape Reader
Read 1 block into B with word-marks.
Read 1 block into B; no word-marks.
Input-Out: Tape Punch
Punch 1 tape character.
Read 1 tape character (for read-back check).
Backspace I tape character.
Backspace I tape character and jump to I.
Inl1ut-OutI~ut:

Magnetic Character Readers
Start feeding documents continuously.
Stop feeding documents.
Transfer data from I document into Bwith word-marks.
Transfer data from 1 document into B; no word- marks.
Select stacker pocket indicated by d.

* Optional features required.
5/63 Revised

A

@

A-U=ER--BA-:-CH~/

'I

INSTRUCTION LIST

§

402: 121.102
INSTRUCTION LIST (Ccmtd.)

121.
INSTRUCTION
MNEM.
OP.

OP.

A or I

B

d

U

%D1

-

E

CU

M

9'oDl

B

W

MCW

K

-

G

SSG

K
K

-

-

M

%D1

B

C
E
R

SSC
SSE
MCW

U

9'oDl

-

D

CW

U
U
L

%S2
%S2
%S2

-

E
D

B

R

CU
CU
LCA

M

%S2

B

K
K

-

-

R
d
d

MCW
SS
SS

M

%S2

B

R

MU

-

© 1963

OPERATION
Input-Out: Data Communication Unit
Informs Receiving computer that the transmitting
computer has data to transmit.
Moves 1 record from core storage to the
Communication Unit.
Informs transmitting computer it must retransmit
last message.
Signals end of job on transmit.
Signals end of job on receive.
Moves 1 record from Communication Unit to
Core Storage.
Informs transmitting computer that Receiving
computer has received the last record that was
transmitted.
Input- Output: Optical Character Readers
Start feeding documents continuously.
Stop feeding documents.
Transfer 2 character into B; convert vertical field marks
to word-marks (1418 only).
Transfer 1 character into B; no word-marks (1418 only).
Select stacker pocket indicated by d.
The d-modifier C. E. or F. permits the 1428 to read
only those characters included in the corresponding
alphabetic. numeric. or alphanumeric character sets
respectively.
Transfer 1 character into B (1428 only).

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised

5/63

401:131.100

II
•

STANDARD

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 1401
Coding Specimen
Symbolic Programming System
CODING SPECIMEN: SYMBOLIC PROGRAMMING SYSTEM

§

131.

.1

TRANSLATOR LISTING
PAGE

REC TYPE

PG LIN

CT

510
520
530
540
550
560
570
580
590
600
610
620
630
640
650
660
670
680
690
700
710
720
730
740
750
760
770
780
790
800
810
820
830
640
650
660
670
B60
890
900
910
920
930
940
950
960
970
9HO

8
7
B
7
6
7
6
7
7
7
6
7
7
7
1
8
7
8
7
7
8
R
8
7
7
7
R
7
8
8
6
8
8
B
7
7
8
7
5
7
7
7
1
4
7
4
6
2

LABEL

OP

A OPERAND

B OPERAND

B

BLANTO
0019

0019
LOTAPE
0006
MACHSZ
0007
SEN SSW
0008
PRNTSI
ORG2
ORG2
0012
ORG2
TAPESW
TAPE

A
MMACHS B
MCW
B
MCW
8
MCW
MC.
A
e
A
MCW
MCW
MCw
8
MCW
B
MCW
MCW
BWl
B
8
MCW
BLOCKT MC'
RAMTST MCW

+006
0006
+006
COC
+008
COOC
PRNTSl
CIC
RAMTST
C2C
CIC
CIC
+008
CIC
+015
C1C
0016
FIXEDT
VARUNB
+008

CIC
CIC
I DENT
B
NORAM
MCW C IC
MIROUT
B
B
M2ROUT
M3ROUT
B
M4ROUT
8
M5ROUT
B
M6ROUT
B
-006
H
FIXEDT MCW CIC
RAMTST
8
0012
C
+015
B
MCW C999C
MC. CIC
0014
A
A
BLOCKT
B
VARUNB MCW C200C
RAMTST
B
+003
ERRORI B
SS

© 1963

0015
HEADER
0016
MUL TIF
NTF ILE
0012
0012
0012
VAReEx
BLKTP
0180
0026
RAMAC
0075
0075
0075
0075
0075
0075
0102
FIXED
0014
COOOC
0012
Tl000R
TBLKFA
0012
0001

D

2

2
V
B

1
2
3
4
5
6

LOCN

INSTRUCTION

COMMENT ILITERAL

0354
0362
0369
0377
0364
0392
0399
0407
0414
0421
0426
0436
0443
0450
0457
0458
0466
0473
0481
0488
0495
0503
0511
0519
0526
0533
0540
0548
0555
0563
0571
0579
0587
0595
0603
0610
0617
0625
0632
0637
0644
0651
0658
0659
0663
0670
0674
0682

B 691
A 019
B 384
M 006
8 399
M JOB
B 414
M J16
M G03
A J09
B 533
A J10
M J09
M, J09
M
8 473
M J09
B 495
M J09
M 016
V 610
B 663
B 526
M J09
M J09
M H69
B 702
M J09
8 783
B 794
B 805
8 900
B *10
B *21
• 603
M J09
B 533
C 012
B 651
M J22
M J09
A 014
A
B 526
M J25
B 533
B 684
K 1

TAPE OUTPUT

019
'H64
006
Gal
007
209
008 2
G03
G05
G05
012
G05
H58
202
015
207
016
20B
GIl
012
012
012
205
204
180
026
210
075
075
075
075
075
075
102
203
014
J19

SFX

2
ER~ORS

INlTL

TAPE INPUT

2
V
B

RAMAC IS SPECIF
1
2
3
4
5
6
NO MODE
TAPE

I

012
206
GIO
012
001 •

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 5/63

tit

tv

'0\

c.>

to)

i

IB"1

[

Program _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

I;j.

t 40 t

n

9

Page No.

~
I

Date _ _ __

(AI OPERAND
COUNT

LINE
3

:::0

~

::I:

I~I

7 8

5 6

0

I

0

0

2

0

0

3

0

0

4

0

0

5

0

0

6

0

0

7

0

0

8

0

0

9

0

0

I
I

I

0

2

0

I

3

0

I

4

0

I

5

0

I

6

0

OPERATION
1314

16 17

I

ADDRESS

I~I

zQ

of _ _ __

til

2

Identifi cation

~

76

tIl

80

>-i

(Bl OPERAND
CHAR.
ADJ.

ci

:!:
27 28

ADDRESS

I~I

CHAR.
ADJ.

Q

z

38

d
39 40

COMMENTS
55

I

I
I
I

I
I

I
I

I

I
I

0

I

LABEL

.....

0

Symbolic Programming System
Coding Sheet

Programmed by ____________

~
r'T'I

.......

I

I

I
I

I
I

I
I

I
I
I
I

I

7

0

I

8

0

I

9

0

2

0

0

I
I

_I
I
I

I
I

I

I
I
I

I

I

I

I
I

I
I

I

~

I

XZ .... llS2-Z

6i

.-~

'-1>0.
CI

401:132.100

_STANDARD
EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 1401
Coding Specimen
Autocoder

--,
CODING SPECIMEN: AUTOCODER

§ 132.

.1

TRANSLATOR LISTING
.,-

ILLUSTRATE TYPICAL ORGANIZATION OF PROGRM·' WITII IOCS
SEQ
2!1B

249
251]
251

252

253
25!t

,
I

.
•

~G

I II'lI

I LIBEl

O~ERMlIQS

51:!

10(<:11.1+36
IOCSLr.+36,IOCSV6-1
IOCSIB+:ib
IOCSV6-1.-:-0365I!lMOOI
IOCSL8+31,IOCSV6-4

CIf
) 3ROOI C
BI
A

C
BE
fli

255
256
251

H

2~1l

B

259
262
261
262
263
2!z!l
265
2!z~

261

2{!~

269
ZIO
211
212
273
214
215
216
211
218

219

280
. 281
282
285
281t
285
286
281
288
289
290
291
292
293
29_
295
296
291

SE.LC.L-.LO..CJLJ.N-5 TRllt TION neE

02
A

)4HOOI sw
S
A

tH
8

l!:!JQQ) B

Mew

MCW

MCW
M!;W
Mew

!!
1
!:!

7
5
7
1
5
5
4

IDtSll6-).IOtIOY

)IIJOOI
I!lJ!lQ]
)4JOOI
IZOIlO)
loeSL8+30
-3650-. [QCSil6
+1.IOCSLS+31
IQ!;SLB+30
)3ROOI
f8PQQI
- -.IOCSlS+39

14KOOI Mew
Mew
Mew
Mew

"

0696
Q9QO
0904
29QB
0915
09ZZ
0926

II

09~0

1

0934
0941
091&5
0949
0953
·0957
0961
0965
0969
0977
0964
0991
0998
1005
1009

'"
1

"

"1&
"

I Ql; 112Y
IOCIOT

"4
"8

IOCSEQ

Ii

J4N001.IOCOPS
IOCSER E IOCSlB+ 14
-IHOR -,IoeSlS+4
-W-!IOCTDF+13

7
7
1
1

~M-,IOCTOF+6

""81

8

© 1963

!Hl2)

1

IQCRtY

rOCRWR
8
loeLVE
) a.NOO I BW
)4K001!IOCFSW
Mew loeSL8+9,IOCSER
)41(.001
B
- PROCESS TAPE OUTPUT - END O,F REel
)4POOt EQU
-+1
MN
IoeTAP,-+4
WTH
0
)8PDOI
B
Mew
J8Q001=10,10eSl8+29
Mew
18QOOI
MCW
loeBlK-I
Mew
-IEOR BW
-+5,IoelOS
B
-+8
Mew
-F-,IOCSlB+3
-w-,loeTOF+13
Mew
Mew
-M-,lOCTOF+6
8
10CRwR

08!U.

0849
0856
0660
0661
0672
0819
0666

!I

M~W

Mew
Mew
8W

PAGE

4

1013

1021
1028

!J12
U74 KS9
U12
C K59 K64

GEr:iIO

8 2Q!i I

GE!:iIO

I

A
}

A U67
t K59
8 930
B 230
930

. ISS

K56
)99
5

I

U66
S MB
A KSI
I !,!66
8 860
B l5!!
M K69
M T9iJ
M K70
M 199
M U16
M K69
M UOI
M K70
V *13
M U06
M K7S
M K16
M K71
B T47
B S05
V 971
M U45
B 917

U67

1

""
8
It

Ii

1
1
7
4

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1032
1032
1039
1044
1046
1055
1059
1063
1061
1075
1019
1086
1093
If@

U7S

K28
U50
U40
T90
T8l
KI&S
U06

0 U30 *42

IUD
8 /56
M K67
M K87
M U21
M 1(.92
V *19
8 *86
H K93
M K76
M K71
8 T41

U

20
20
2.!l.20

GENIO
GENIO

GHIIO

GEI'HO

!lENIQ
GE!HIl
GENIO

G~NIQ

S

7
5
1&

GE~IO

GENIO
KflQ

M

U6S

K30
U39
T90
T63

2.0~

20

GE!HO

,

tARD_

GENIO

GENIO

B

4

GENIO
!iENJO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIQ
GENIO
GfNIQ
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENIO
GENI.O
GENIO
GENIO
GENlO

2]

21

2]

21
21

21

2]
22

22

22

22

22
22

22

2~

23
2~

23
23

23
23
24
24

24
24
24
2"
25
25
25
25
2S
25
2S
26
26
26
26
26
26
27
21

Reprinted 5/63

,.-

til

~
w
~

.g

I

~

IBM
Program _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Programmed by _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Form X24·1350·1"

Printed in U.S.A.

Line
56

o
o
o

I
2.

3

04
05
06
07
08
09

1!:

~

j~

10
I I
I 2

:

Page No. L.L...J of _ _

19
20
2 I
2 2
2 3
2 4
25

30

35

40

~

'"':l
50

4"

N
C
C

55

60

65

70

,

l
:

:
I

:

:
I
I

:

17

25

-~

w

!'oJ

:

I 5

18

,

80

"..
C

l

:
:

I 6

20 21

0

8

!"

......

tIl
tIl

I

I 4

I 3

1516

0

OPERAND

Operation

Label

0

76

AUTOCODER CODING SHEET

D"',,:
3

Identification'

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION

IBM 1401 AND 1410 DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS

0

"'"
....
w

, ,

I

!

,

, , , ,

, , , , , , , , , ,

I

:
I

:
:
I

:
I

:
I
I
I

~

:

o
....

I

I
L __ -1- __

,

I

I

, , ,

I

I

, ,

I

, , , ,

,

.

N

,

.....
'"

til

...
...
:I::

~

401:141.100
•

II

STANDARD
REPORTS
EDP

IBM 1401
Data Code Table
Internal Code
DATA CODE TABLE NO. 1

. 23

1141.
·1

USE OF CODE:

· internal, magnetic tape,
and disc storage.

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size: • . . • . 8 bits: 6 data, 1 parity,
1 word mark.
Odd parity is used internally, and on disc storage;
even parity is used on
magnetic tape.
Word mark bit is not used
on magnetic tape or disc
storage; it is replaced by
the word separator
character, = •

· 22

0
1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Character Structure

.221 More significant
pattern: . . • •
· 222 Less significant
pattern: . . . •

Character Codes

• 2 zone bits: B, A

=32,

16

12
13
14
15

• 4 numeric bits: 8, 4, 2, 1

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

MORE SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0

16

blank
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

X
Y
Z

8
9
0

32

48

$.-

-

&

/

J

S
T
U

K
L
M

V

N
P

A
B
C
D
E
F
G

Q

H

R

I
?

W

*

,

,
%

$

@

:

=

,

)
;

"

L:.

#

>

V

*

0
(

<

...

Reprinted 5/63

401:142.100
.STANOARO

II

EDP

IBM 1401
Data Code Table
Printer Code

REPORTS

DATA CODe TABLE NO.2

§

.23

142 .

•1

USE OF CODE: . . . • • 1403 and 1404 Printers.

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

. 21

Character Size: • .•

.22

Character Structure

.221 More significant
pattern: ••.•
.222 Less significant
pattern: ••••

• 8 bits: 6 data, 1 odd parity,
1 word mark.

• 2 zone bits: B, A

= 32,

16.

• 4 numeric bits: 8, 4, 2, 1.

© 1963

Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporoted

MORE SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
16 32 48
0
blank
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
@

:I:

-

/

J

S
T
U

K
L
M
N
0
P

A
B
C
D
E
F
G

Q

H

V

W
X
Y
Z

R

-

*,

$

%

*

&

I
&

0

Reprinted 5/63

I

, I

401:143.100

IBM 1401

Data Code Table
Card Code
DATA CODE TABLE NO.3

§

143 .

.23

•1

USE OF CODE: . . . . . punched card input-output.

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size:. . . . . 1 column.

Character Codes
OVER PUNCH
UNDERPUNCH

None
12
11
0

© 1963

None

12

11

blank

&

-

0

0

./

,

1
2

1
2

J

/

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

A
B
C
D
E
F

K
L
M
N

S
T
U
V
W

G

P

H

Q

I

R

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

#

0

$

@

0

:

(

>

<

)
;

V

i

A

*

X
y
Z

.",
%
.
.
=

Reprinted 5/63

401:144.100
_STANDARD

II

REPORTS
EDP

IBM 1401
Data Code Table
Collating Sequence
DATA CODE TABLE NO.4

§ 144.

.1

USE OF OODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

internal collating
sequence.

In ascending sequence:
blank.
0
(

,.

<

G
H
I

J
(group mark)

*

K
L
M
N

!:J.

Q

/

+ (record mark)

&

$

0
P

R

%

= (word separator)

S
T
U
V

W
¢
#

X
Y

@

Z
0

>

1

y- (tape mark)
?
A
B

C
D
E
F

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 5/63

401:151.100

.SIN and < not available.
always ignored by translator.
literals may not exceed 120 characters.
HIGH BOUND(S), LOW BOUND(S) not available.
no alternative computer names.

12

File Description
FILE CONTAINS
Label formats
SEQUENCED ON
HASHED

approximate file size cannot be shown.
labels must be standard or omitted.
no list of keys can be given.
hash totals cannot be created.

13
14

Record Descrjption
Tahle length
Item length

2
3
4
5
7
9
10
11

15
16
17

BITS option
RANGE IS
RENAMES

18
21

SIGN IS
Label handling

23
25
26

Verbs
i5EFINE
INCLUDE
USE

28
29
34

Verb Options
MOVE CORRESPONDING
OPEN REVERSED
Relationships

36
39

43
44
45
46

5/63

Elective

Conditionals
Conditional statements
Environment Division
FILE-CONTROL
PRIORITY IS
I/O-CONTROL
I/O-CONTROL

47

Identification Division
DATE-COMPILED

48
49

Special Features
Library
Segmentation

lengths of tables and arrays may not vary.
variable item lengths cannot be specified in a
PICTURE.
items cannot be specified in binary.
value ranges of items cannot be shown.
alternative groupings of elementary items
cannot be specified.
no separate signs allowed.
only standard labels (or none) may be used.
new verbs cannot be defined.
no library routines can be called.
no non-standard I/O error and label handling
routines.
each item must be individually moved.
tapes cannot be read backward.
IS UN~QUAL TO, EQUALS, and EXCEEDS
are not provided.
no implied objects with implied subjects.
only AT END or ON SIZE ERROR may follow
imperative statements.
cannot be taken from library.
no priorities can be specified for multirunning purposes.
cannot be taken from library.
rerun methods and multi-file tapes cannot be
specified.
current date will not be inserted automatically.
library routines cannot be called.
no provision for segmentation of object
programs.

401: 162.100
•

STANDARD

II

IBM 1401

REPORTS
EDP

Process Oriented Language

FORTRAN
PROCESS ORI ENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN

§

162.

• 14

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

IBM 1401 FORTRAN.

. 12

Origin:.

General Products Division,
IBM Corporation.

• 13

Reference: •

IBM Publication J24-1455-1.

. 14

Description
The IBM 1401 FORTRAN language is basically
FORTRAN 1 and is considerably less powerful than
the IBM 709/7090 FORTRAN II language described in
Section 408:161. Probably the most significant language limitations are the inability to define and use
FORTRAN-coded subroutines and functions, the restriction of arrays to one or two dimensions rather
than three, the inability to perform Boolean operations and complex arithmetic (i. e., arithmetic using
numbers composed of a real part and an imaginary
part), and the inability to in~orporate symbolic coding. Other restrictions relative to 709/7090
FORTRAN II are summarized at the end of this description.
The most significant positive feature of IBM 1401
FORTRAN is its ability to take advantage of the variable word length capabilities of the. 1401 Processing
Unit. The programmer can specify any desired degree of precision up to 20 decimal digits for the internal representation of numeric data. The precision (f) to be used for all floating point values within
a single program is preset by a control card. If no
specification is made, f is set at eight digits. The
number of core storage positions required for each
floating point variable of f digits precision is f + 2,
because two additional digits are required to specify
the exponent. Fixed point precision (k), which is
also specified by a control card, is set at five digits
if no other specification is made and applies to all
fixed point values within a program. Object program
execution times and storage requirements will
naturally increase when increased precision is demanded.
The ranges of numeric magnitudes that can be represented in 1401 FORTRAN and in 709/7090
FORTRAN II are compared in the following table:
1401 fORTRAN:
709/7090 fORTRAN:

Floating Point

Fixed Point

10- 100 to (1 x lO-f) x 1099
10-38 to 1038

1 to 10k - 1.
1 to 131,071.

where f and k are floating and fixed point precisions' respectively, in decimal digits.
As in 709/7090 FORTRAN II, a single READ, PRINT,
PUNCH, READ INPUT TAPE, or WRITE OUTPUT
TAPE statement can cause input or output of any

© 1963

Description (Contd. )
number of blocks whose lengths can be a maximum of
80 characters for the card reader or punch or 133
characters (including 1 printer control character) for
the printer or magnetic tape units. A READ TAPE
or WRITE TAPE statement, however, will produce a
transfer of a single block of data whose length may
not exceed 233 characters unless the input-output
"list" names a Single, non-subscripted array •
Shorter blocks are blank-filled to produce a fixed
tape block length of 233 characters. Tape records
produced by the READ TAPE statement are in internal format. Despite these limitations, the READ
TAPE and WRITE TAPE statements will be found
useful for temporary magnetic tape storage of the
"scratch-pad" variety because of the relatively limited internal storage capacity of 1401 systems.
The restrictions and extensions of the IBM 1401
FORTRAN language relative to mM 709/7090
FORTRAN II follow.
Restrictions
(1) The follOwing statements are not permitted:
SUBROUTINE
FUNCTION
CALL
RETURN
COMMON
FREQUENCY
ASSIGN
Assigned GO TO
IF ACCUMULATOR OVERFLOW
IF QUOTIENT OVERFLOW
IF DIVIDE CHECK
READ DRUM
WRITE DRUM
(2) Arrays are limited to two dimensions
(709/7090 FORTRAN II permits three).
(3) Double precision, complex, and logical operations are not permitted (but note that precision
can be preset at up to 20 digits).
(4) Alphameric information can be handled only in
the form of Hollerith items (FORMAT specification wH), which cannot be named or manipulated in storage; the Aw specification is not
available.
(5) Arithmetic function statements are not
permitted.
(6) Symbolic coding cannot be incorporated into the
FORTRAN source program.
(7) Input-Output in octal form (O-type conversion)
is not permitted.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

IBM 1401

401: 162.140
§

.14

162.

Description (Contd.)
Restrictions (Contd.)

• 14

Description (Contd.)
Restrictions (Contd.)

(8)

A list of compiler output options following the
END statement will be ignored.

(9)

Floating point and fixed point variables can be
assigned to the same storage locations by an
EQUIVALENCE statement only if f + 2 = k.

(10) Separately compiled programs cannot be com-

bined at execution time.
(11) Object programs cannot be segmented (as in
709/7090 CHAIN operations).
(12) The number of branch points in the list of a
computed GO TO statement cannot exceed 10.
(13) Exponentiation of a negative floating pOint base
to an integral floating point power (e. g. ,
A** 3.0) always produces a positive result; i. e. ,
the result is incorrectly signed for odd integral
powers.

(14) Only nine of the standard FORTRAN functions
are provided:
SINF: •
COSF:.
LOGF:

EXPF:.
SQRTF: ••
ABSF: •
XABSF:

FLOATF: •
XFIXF:

sine.
cosine.
natural logarithm.
exponentiation.
square root.
absolute value of floating
point argument.
absolute value of fixed point
argument.
convert fixed point argument
to floating point.
convert floating point argument to fixed point.

Extensions
(1) Data items can be represented internally with any
desired degree of precision between 2 and 20
digits for floating point items and between 1 and
20 digits for fixed pOint items, as preset by control cards.
(2) A wider range of numeric magnitudes can be represented in 1401 FORTRAN than in the 709/7090
system, as shown in the table above.
(3) Variable names can be up to 14 characters in
length.

5/63

401:171.100
•

_

STANDARD

EDP
REIORTS

IBM 1401
Machine Oriented Language
Symbolic Programming System
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: SYMBOLIC PROGRAMMING SYSTEM

§l7l".

.22

Label: . . • . •

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: . .

.12

Origin: . . . . . . . . · IBM General Products
Division, 1401 Applied
Programming.

.13

Reference: . . . . . . · mM publications:
J24-0200-2 & J24-l412-l;
1401 Program Library
File No. S1401-SP-021
and l40l-SP-030.

. 14

Description:

The use of the SPS language provides understandable
mnemonic operation codes as well as the ability to
use the actual instruction codes if desired. Several
useful subroutines are available from the 1401
Program Library which can be manually inserted
into the program deck. These .subroutines offer
error control, file labeling, special math functions,
multipllcatlon and division facilities, and several
other·commonly used routines. For complete
details refer to the 1401 Program Library Abstracts.
Publication Date:
SPS-l:
SPS-2:

October, 1960.
August, 1961.

.2

LANGUAGE FORMAT

.21

Diagram:

.22

Legend
Line:
Count: .

. names an area or instruction.
Operation:. . .
. mnemonic or machine
code, for operation to be
performed.
A & B Operands: •• , , actual or symbolic addresses of data to be operated upon, including
specification of relative
addresing and/or indexing~
d: , , , , , . • . . . . . single-character modifier
for certain operation
codes.
Comments: . . . . . . . explanatory information to
be listed but not
assembled.

· mM 1401 Symbolic Programming Systems.
SPS-1 & SPS-2.
SPS.

SPS is the basic machine- oriented language for the
1401 system. Its powers are necessarily very limited because its translator was designed to operate
on a 1401 with no tapes and only 1,400 positions of
core storage. Literals and macro- instructions
cannot be used, Except for eight pseudo-operatioIl6
which define constants and labels.and provide limited translator control, there is a strict one-to-one
correspondence between SPS statements and 1401
machine language instructions. There are no
significant language 1iifferences between SPS-1 and
SPS- 2; the latter was developed to facilitate the full
use of expanded 1401 systems, and its translator
requires at least 4, 000 core .storage positions.

. 15

Legend (Contd.)

•

refer to SPS coding sheet,
401:171.820.
. sequences entries on coding sheet.
. denotes number of characters a defined area or
constant will contain.

© 1963

.23

Corrections: , • , ••• spare lines on coding sheet
and gaps in sequence
numbers.

• 24

Special Conventions

.241 Compound addresses: . • BASE + ADJUSTMENT,
where BASE is any label
and ADJUSTMENT is a
decimal integer.
.242 Multi-addresses: . . • . none.
.243 Literals: • . • . • . . . not available.
.244 Special coded addresses: * refers to low-order position of instruction in
which it appears.
,245 Other
Actual core storage
addresses: . . • . • . 4-digit decimal numbers,
left- justified in operand
fields.
.3

LABELS

.31

General

· 311 Maximum number of labels per
translator interation:
Core Storage Positions

Translator

1,400:
2,000:
4,000:
4,000:
8,000:
12,000:
16,000:

SPS-1
SPS-1
SPS-1
SPS-2
SPS-2
SPS-2
SPS-2

.312 Common label formation rule: • . . .
.313 Reserved labels:
.314 Other restrictions:
· 315 Designators: . . .
.316 Synonyms permitted:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

.
.
.
.
,

Maximum Labels
40
100
300
260
660
1,060
1,460

yes
none.
none .
none.
no.

Revised 5/63

IBM 1401

401: 171.320
§171.
• 32

Universal Labels

• 321 Labels for procedures
• mandatory if referenced by
Existence: .••
other instructions.
Formation rule
First character: • • alphabetic.
Others: • • • • . • • alphabetic or numeric (no
special characters).
• 1 to 6.
Number of chars:
.322 Labels for library
routines:. . . . .• • none.
.323 Labels for constants: . . same as Procedures .
• 324 Labels for files: •.•• none.
• 325 Labels for records:. . • same as Procedures •
• 326 Labels for variables: • • same as Procedures.
· 33

Local Labels: • • . . • • none.

.4

DATA

• 41

Constants

.411 Maximum size constant: 32 characters per card;
may be split into two or
more entries.
. 412 Maximum size literals:. none available.
· 42

Working Areas

. 421 Data layout
xmplied by use: . • •• no.
Specified in program: yes •
• 422 Data type: . • • . •
• not required.
. 423 Redefinition: . • • • . • no.
.43

.5
• 51

· explicit.
· not required.
· no.

PROCEDURES
Direct Operation Codes

,511 Mnemonic
Existence: .
Number: .
Example: . .
Comment: .
.512 Absolute
Existence: .
Number:
Example:
Comment:
Macro Codes:
Interludes: .•
Translator Control

.61

Special Arithmetic
• multiplication, division,
floating point arithmetic.
• manual insertion of cards.

. 611 Facilities: ••.
.612 Method of call:
.62

Special Functions

.621 Facilities:. • • .
.622 Method of call:
• 63

Overlay Control

.631 Facilities: •.
.64

· square root, sin-cos .
• manual insertion of cards.

. ••• none •

Data Editing

.641 Radix conversion: .
Code translation:
. 642 Format control:
.65

InEut-Output Control

.651
• 652
. 653
. 654
• 655

File labels: .
Reel labels: .
Blocking: '
Error control:.
Method of call:

.66

Sorting

..

.661 Facilities:

......

• alternative.
.37.
• R = read a card.
• must be left-justified.
• alternative.
• 38 (many variations
through "d" modifier.
• 1 = read a card.
• must be right-justified.
. none .
• none.

· none.
• none •
· not required due to hardware editing capability•

• yes •
• yes •
.. no.
• yes .
• manual insertion of cards •

· none (all sort routines are
independent programs).

Diagnostics

.671 Dumps: •••

• 672 Tracers: •
.673 Snapshots:.

. 52
• 53
.54
.541 Method of control
Allocation counter: . . pseudo operations.
Label adjustment: .• none.
Annotation:. . . . .. "comment card" with* in
column 8 .
. 542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute:.
.ORG pseudo.
Set to label: • •
.no.
Step forward: .
.DS pseudo with *as op~rand.
Step backward: .
.no.
Reserve area:
•..• no.
5/63 Revised

SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE

· 67

Input-Ou92ut Areas

• 431 Data layout: .
.432 Data type: ••
.433 Copy layout: •

.6

.7

LffiRARY FACILITmS

.71

Identity:......

• 72

Kinds of Libraries

• linkages to fixed or selective core storage printout routines may be inserted and removed by
special routines.
• none •
• see. 671

· ffiM 1401 Program Library.

.721 Fixed master: . . •
.722 Expandable master:.
• 723 Private: . • . .

· no.
• yes.
• yes.

.73

Storage Form:.

• cards •

.74

Varieties of Contents: .• wide variety of subroutines
and independent programs
available; reference:
"ffiM 1401 Program Library Abstracts. "

· 75

Mechanism

• 751 Insertion of new item: •.. file in card library.
· 752 Language of new item:. generally SPS.
· 753 Method of call: • • • • • insert in deck.

MCHINE-ORIENTED LANGUAGE: SPS

401: 171.760

§l71.

.82

.76

Insertion in Program

.761
. 762
.763
.764

Open routines exist: . . .
Closed routines exist: . .
Open-closed is optional:.
Closed routines appear
once: • • • • • • . . . •

yes .
yes.
in some cases.
yes.

•8

MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES

.81

Macros:

.82

Pseudos

. . • . . . . • none.

Code
CTL:.
ORG: • . . . . '"

Description
• specifies core storage
sizes of translating and
target systems.
• . sets address allocation
counter.

© 1963

Pseudos (Contd.)
Code
Description
EX: . . . . . . •. • causes a temporary halt in
loading of the object program, and execution of
the portion just loaded.
END:. . • • • . • • • • indicates end of source
program; can initiate execution of object program
immediately after loading•
DCW: . • • . • • • • • • loads a constant and sets
work mark in high-order
position.
DC:
• loads a constant without
word mark.
DS:
• assigns a machine address
to a label.
• stores a constant equivaDSA: .
lent to the machine address assigned to a specific label.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporaled

Revised 5/63

.~

CIt

'Q:;
c.>

iE.

IBM.

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION

FORM X24·1152·2

IBM 1401 SYMBOLIC PROGRAMMING SYSTEM

PRINTED IN U.S.A.

CODING SHEET

Program

I

(A) OPERAND
LINE

COUNT

3

5 6

0

I

0

0

2

0

0

3

0

0

4

0

~

:I:

I~I

OPERATION
13 14

7 8

ADDRESS

16 17

I

I~I

S

CHAR.
ADJ.

'"

:;

ADDRESS

27 29

6

0

0

7

0

0

8

0

0

9

0

I

0

0

I

I

0

I

2

0

I

3

0

I

4

0

I

5

0

I

6

0

I

7

0

I

8

0

I

9

0

Identification

76

80

I~I

CHAR.
ADJ.

ci
z

d

COMMENTS

-

38 39 40

5S

I
I
I

I

I

I

I
I

I

I
I

I

0

0

2

(S) OPERAND

I

0

E:

LABEL

~

Page No. L...-.l of _ _ __

Date _ _ __

Programmed by

.....
.....
::::l
c..

I

I

I

I

I
I
I

I

I

I

I

I

I
I
I

:I

I
I

I

I

I
I

:

I
I
I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I
I
I
I

0

2

I

I

0

I

I
I
I
I

I

,

,

,

, , , ,

,

I
I

, , , , ,

,

I
I
I

I

I

I

~_~

___ L_I_

I

,

-

L

I

I

I

I

, , , ,

.

I

,
tl'
~

.....
"'CI
....."

401: 172.100

.STAIIDARD
EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 1401
Machine Oriented Language
Autocoder

MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: AUTOCODER

§

172.
.14

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . .

.12

Origin:

.13

Reference:. . . . . . WM Publication J24~ 1434;
1401 Program Library
File No. 1401-AU-037.

.14

Description:

programs in either system, and scheduling
Direct Data Channel routines for each system.

mM 1401 Autocoder,
Version 3. A

•

. • . . . . • mM General Products
Division, Applied
Programming.

Autocoder is a more powerful machine-oriented
language than the basic Symbolic Programming
System. It provides macro-instructions, literals,
library routines, and a free-form coding sheet
that simplifies programming, but requires at least
4 magnetic tape units and 4,000 positions of core
storage on the translating 1401 system. As in Sps,
there is a general one-to-one correspondence
between source statements and machine language
instructions. Through the use of macros, however,
the programmer can call and cue open or closed
library routines at will, thereby greatly reducing
coding time and effort. User-defined macros can
easily be inserted into the library.
The Autocoder language is not directly compatible
with SPS, but the Autocoder translator can translate
source programs coded in either language or in a
combination of the two. Compatibility between
WM 1401 and 1410 systems is provided by the fact
that the 1401 Autocoder language is eflsentially a
subset of the 1410 Autocoder language. This means
that programs coded in 1401 Autocoder can be
translated and run on a 1410 system after relatively
minor modifications, mainly to the. input-output
operations.
The 1401 Input/Output Control System is a supplement to Autocoder. It consists of additional control
and macro operations that handle reading and writing, tape blocking and unblocking, file labeling, and
error checking. Characteristics of the overall
program, the object system, and each record file
must be included in the source program in the form
of a series of descriptive cards preceded by a
header card.
Additional input-output control and macro operations
are available for the following:
•

Description (Contd.)

Direct Data Channel routines for: Program
detection of read request or write requests,
error detection and corrections, system to
system read-write, output scheduling, coordination with other Input-Output Control System

© 1963

1311 Disk Storage Drive routines for: Inputoutput operations associated with punched cards,
magnetic tape, printer and 1311 Disk Storage.
These ro~tines provide facilities for blocking
and unblocking, together with the associated
macro instructions, GET, PUT, OPEN, and
CLOSE, as well as standardized routines for
input-output error correction, end-of-file and
labeling.

.15

Publication Date: . • . Version 3, October, 1961.

.2

LANGUAGE FORMAT

.21

Diagram:

.22

Legend
Line: •
Label: •
Operation:

Operand:

Refer to Autocoder coding
sheet, 401: 172.081.

sequences entries on
coding sheet.
names an area or instruction.
defines operation to be
performed, in either
mnemonic or machine
code.
actual or symbolic
addresses of data to be
operated upon with
specification of indexing
or relative addressing,
address 'constants, literals
and/ or comments.

· 23

Corrections:.. . • • spare lines on coding
sheet and gaps in
sequence numbers.

· 24

Special Conventions

.241 Compound addresses:

• 242 Multi-addresses:
.243 Literals
NUmeric: . •
Alphameric:
All: • . • •
· 244 Special coded
addresses: .

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

BASE + ADJUSTMENT,
where BASE is any label
and ADJUSTMENT is a
decimal integer.
in pseudos & macros only •
preceded by +or - sign.
preceded and followed by @.
total operand length may
not exceed 52 characters.

* refers to low-order position of instruction in
which it appears.

Revised

5/63

IBM 1401

401:172.245
§

172.

.411

.245 Other
Actual core storage
address: . . . .
Address constants: .

.3

LABELS

.31

General

1 to 5 decimal digits.
- preceding label of
item whose address is to
be used as an operand.

+ or

. 311 Maximum number of labels per translator iteration
Core stor:.a~ positions Maximum labels
4,000
150
8,000
510
12,000
870
16,000
1,270
.312 Common label formation
rule: .. . . . . .
yes .
• 313 Reserved labels
For basic macros: .
CHA, MAD, TOV, OVL,
CA~, INC, mo, DTF,
GET, PUT, OPE, CLO,
DCL, FEO, RDL, REL,
SPA, STA.
none.
. 314 Other restrictions:
none.
.315 Designators: . . . .
. 316 Synonyms permitted:
yes; EQU pseudo.
.32

.42

Working Areas

.421 Data layout
Implied by use:
Specified in program:
. 422 Data type: . . . . .
. 423 Redefinition: . . . .
.43

.431 Data layout:
. 432 Data type:
. 433 Copy layout:
.5

PROCEDURES

.51

Direct Operation Codes

.511 Mnemonic
Existence:
Number: .
Example:
.512 Absolute
Existence:
Number: .

mandatory if referenced by
other instructions.

.325
.326

alphabetic.
alphabetic or numeric (no
special characters).
Number of characters: 1 to 6.
Labels for library routines
mandatory.
Existence: . . . .
Formation rule
First character:
alphabetic.
Others: . . . . .
alphameric (no special
characters).
Number of characters:
5 (no two routines mayhave
the same first 3 characters.
Labels for constants:
same as Procedures.·
same as Procedures (with
Labels for files: .. '.
IOCS only).
Labels for records:
same as Procedures.
Labels for variable: .
same as Procedures.

. 33

Local Labels:

.4

DATA

. 41

Constants

none.

.411 Maximum size constants
Numeric: .
52 char.
Alphabetic: . . . . . . 50 char, preceded & followed by@ •

5/63 Revised

.52

no.
yes .
not required .
yes; EQU pseudo .

Input-Output Areas

Example:
Comment:

Formation rule
First character:
Others: . . . . .

.323
.324'

Alphameric: . . . . . 50 char, preceded & followed by@ •
.412 Maximum size literals: 52 char total operand
length.

Universal Labels

.321 Labels for procedures
Existence: . . .

. 322

Maximum size constants (Contd.)

explicit layout .
not required .
yes.

alternative to absolute.
95.
R = read a card .
alternative to mnemonic .
38 (many variations through
"d" modifier).
1 = read a card.
punch op. code in column
19 & d modifier in column
20.

Macro-Codes

.521 Number available
Input-output: . .
Atithmetic: ..
Math functions:
Error control: .
Restarts: . . . . ..
Subroutine call and
cue: . . . . . . . . .
Overlay control: ..
Chaining of instructions: . . . . . . ..
Address modification:
.522 Examples
Simple:
Elaborate:
. 523 New macros:

.53

Interludes:......

. 54

Translator Control

. 541 Method of control
Allocation counter:
Label adjustment:
Annotation:.
..

I AUERBACH I .$J

8.
none.
none.
none.
none.
2.
2.
L
1.

CALL SQROI.
CALL SUBOI, DATAl,
DATA2, DATA3 .
inserted into library in
separate run .
none .

pseudo operations.
pseudo operations.
special cards.

401: 172.542

MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: AUTOCODER
§

172.

.542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute:
Set to label: . . .
Step forward: .
Step backward:
Reserve area: .
.543 Label adjustment
Set labels equal:
Set absolute value: .
Clear label table:
· 544 Annotation
Comment phrase:
Title phrase:

ORG, LTORG pseudos.
ORG pseudo.
ORG pseudo.
ORG pseudo.
DS pseudo.
EQU pseudo.
EQU pseudo.
no.
COMMENT card (* in
column 6).
JOB card.

·6

SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE

.61

Special Arithmet ic

..

.611 Facilities:
.612 Method of call:
. 62

Special Functions

.621 Facilities:
.622 Method of call:
.63

.632 Method of call:

.65

Input-Output Control

. 651
.652
· 653
.654
· 655

File labels:
Reel labels:
Blocking: . .
Error control: .
Method of call:

.66

Sorting

.661 Facilities:
. 67

square root.
sin-cos.
macros.

.672 Tracers: .
. 673 Snapshots:

Identity:

.72

Kinds of Libraries

..

1401 Autocoder Library,
included in system tape.

.721 Fixed master:
.722 Expandable master:
.
.723 Private: ...

..

.73

Storage Form: .

..

.74

Varieties of Contents:

. 75

Mechanism

no.
yes.
private facilities may be
added to master library.
tape (supplied on cards for
transcription to tape).
supplied with 6 basic
macros; Input-Output Control System and other
facilities desired by user
may be added .
special library run.
1401 Autocoder.
CALL or INCLD macro.

.751 Insertion of new item:
.752 Language of new item:
.753 Method of call:. . ..
Insertion in Program

yes; user-defined macros.
yes; CALL or INCLD
macros .
. 763 Open-closed is optional: no .
. 764 Closed routines appear
. yes.
once: ...

.

OVLAY & TOVLY macros
clear storage and load
next program section
from cards or tape.
macros.

none.
none.
not required due to hardware editing capability.·

}

Input- Output Control
System.

macros.

. . . . . . none.

Diagnostics

. 671 Dumps:

.71

.761 Open routines exist: .
.762 Closed routines exist:

Data Editing

.641 Radix conversion:
Code translation:
. 642 Format control: .

LIBRARY FACILITIES

.76

Overlay Control

. 631 Facilities:

.64

multiply .
divide.
floating point arithmetic.
macros.

.7

linkages to fixed or selective core storage printout
routines may be inserted
and removed. by special
routines.
none.
see.671.

© 1963

.8

MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES

.81

MfLcros
Description
• sets up linkage to a
closed library routine and
(once only) inserts it in
program.
inserts an inflexible library
INCLD: .
routine wi thout linkage.
facilitates coding of chained
CHAIN: .
instructions .
prepares storage and loads
OVLAY:
an overlay from cards.
prepares storage and loads
IOVLY:
an overlay from tape.
facilitates coding of address
MA:
modifications without indexing.
User-defined macro: causes an open library routine to be inserted directly'
into the program .
initializes a tape or card
OPEN: .
file .
deactivates a file, with reCLOSE:
wind if desired.
locates a single record for
GET: .
processing, from either a
blocked or unblocked file.
inserts a processed record
PUT:
into an output file .

Code
CALL: •

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised 5/63

401:172.810
§

112.

.82

.81 Macros (Contd.)
Code
RELSE:

Description
causes next GET or PUT to
refer to next block in the
file.
initiates end-of-reel rouFEORL:
tine.
deactivates the tape used
DCLOS:
for dumping uncorrectable
blocks.
RDLIN: . • . . . . . causes cards to be read at
object time to modify tape
labels.

.82

IBM 1401

Pseudos
Code
JOB:

Description
• • • • • • • • • identifies program deck or
tape & prints headings on
listing.
CTL: . . . . . . . . . specifies storage sizes of
translating & target systems and type of translator output desired.
ORG: ..
sets address allocation
counter.
LTORG:
assigns storage locations to
previously encountered
literals & closed library
routines.
EX: . . . . . . . . . . causes a temporary halt in
loading of the object program, and execution of the
portion just loaded.
XFR: . . . . . . . . . same as. EX, except that
literals & closed library
routines are not stored.
END: . . . . . . . . . indicates end of source program; can initiate execution of object program immediately after loading.

5/63 Revised

Pseudos (Contd.)
Code
ALTER:

Description
permits additions, dele~'
tions, & substitutions in
the object program after
original assembly.
deletes all or part of a rouDELET:
tine from the library tape.
inserts a whole or partial
INSER: .
routine into the library
tape.
provides listing of a speciPRINT:
fied library routine.
provides listing and punched
PUNCH:
deck for a specified Iibrary routine.
REPET:
copies library portion of
the system tape.
DA: . . .
defines an area of core
storage and the lengths,
names, and relative positions of the fields within
it.
DCW: . . . . . . . . . loads a constant and sets
word mark in high-order
position.
DC: .
loads a constant without
word mark.
by-passes and labels an
OS: .
area of storage.
stores a constant equival«;lnt
DSA:
to the machine address assigned to a specific label.
EQU: .
assigns a label to an actual
or symbolic address.
DlOCS:
precedes a series of cards
describing characteristics
of the program and the
target computer.
DTF: • . • • . . . . precedes a series of cards
describing a specific file.

. . .. . . .

';I::
.»
n
':1:

FORM X24-13S0-1

IBJ.1
Program _____________

PRINTED IN U.S.A.

Programmed b y - - - - -_ _ _ __

76
I

Line

o

04

@

05

~

06

~

07

>
C

o

8

II>

g-

09

::r

10

n
o

-ao

I I

[

I 2

0'

I :3

::>
D..

D

I 4

'"
>

I 5

Z

~
n

o

-ao

il

;;

D..

25

30

40

35

50

45

55

60

,~

70

65

.C")

I

0:3

::>

2021

m
r

'0

I

02

n

ISI6

z

-I

C

OPERAND

pperatiOl"l

ldbel

S6

2
m

!

80

Poge No, Ll..J of _ _

Oat,e
3

b

Identification! , , , ,

1401/1410 AUTOCODER CODING SHEET

I 6
17
I 8
I 9
20
2 I
2 2
2 3
2 4
25

'zm

c:

»

I

C")

:
:
:
:

m

'"

»
c:

d

n

o

o
,m

:

,;0

I

:
I

I

:
I

:
I
I
I
I

:

:
:
:
I

:

I

I
I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I
~

....~
f/l

:
I

o"""

I

....,

(1)

Po
til

"0:;
C/O

~

I

~

!"

CCI

~

401:181.100

_STANDARD
ElDP
•

IBM 1401

REI'ORTS

Program Translator
Symbolic Programming Systems

PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: SYMBOLIC PROGRAMMING SYSTEMS

§

181.

.22

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

.221 Input media:
.222 Obligatory ordering:
IBM 1401 Symbolic Programming Systems.
SPS-1 & SPS-2.

.223 Obligatory grouping:
. 23

.12

Form
punched cards.
must be in correct sequence
according to coding sheet
page and line numbers.
none .

Size Limitations

Description:
Both of the SPS translators are designed for punched
card input-output, and both normally require 4 card
passes (or 5 if a condensed object program deck is
desired). SPS-l will operate on a 1401 card system
with the minimum 1,400 positions of core storage.
The object programs it assembles cannot be run on
1401 systems with more than 4,000 storage positions. SPS-2 requires at least 4,000 storage positions in the translating system and can assemble
programs for any 1401 system configuration. The
number of labels that can be processed per translator iteration depends upon the translating system's
core storage capacity. Because of the strict one-toone correspondence of SPS statements to 1401
machine language instructions, the object program
will require the same storage space and operating
rime as a hand-coded program ~
.
The 1401 Program Library contains several userdeveloped revisions of the SPS-2 translator utilizing tape passes rather than card passes. These
programs will effectively speed up the time
required for translation; however, they require
from one to three magnetic tape units (depending
on the program used) in addition to the minimum
configuration requirements. For additional information about these programs refer tp the 1401
Program Library Abstracts. Since these program s
require expanded 1401 systems to operate, the
remainder of this report is devoted to the card
system translators.

.13

Originator:

IBM General Products Division' 1401 Applied
Programming.

. 14

Maintainer:

as above .

. 15

Availability:

.231 Maximum number of
source statements:

limited by target computer
storage size.

.232 Maximum size source
55 characters per card.
statements:
.233 Maximum number of
data items: . . ..
see next entry.
.234 Others
Maximum number of labels per translator iteration:
Core storage
positions
1,400
2,000
4,000
4,000
8,000
12,000
16,000
.3

OUTPUT

.31

Object Program

. 311 Language name: .
. 312 Language style: .
.313 Output media:. .

.32

Translator
SPS-l
SPS-l
SPS-1
SPS-2
SPS-2
SPS-2
SPS-2

Maximum
labels
40
100
300
260
660
1,060
1,460

· IBM 1401 machine language.
· machine .
punched cards; 1 instruction
per card. Condensing
Program prepares condensed deck containing up
to 7 instructions or 38
characters per card,
whichever is reached
first; its input is the SPS
object deck.

Conventions

.321 Standard inclusions: . . none .
.33

Documentation

Dates of general issue for current versions:
SPS-1: . . . . .
October, 1960.
SPS-2: . . . . . . . . . August, 1961.

Provision

.2

INPUT

Source program:
Object program:.

.21

Language

Storage map: . .

. 211 Name: ..
.212 Exemptions:

IBM 1401 SPS Language.
none.

© 1963

Restart point list: .
Language errors:

by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

pre-process. listing routine.
post-process listing
routine.
post-process listing
routine.
· none.
pre-process listing routine.
Revised 5/63

401:181.420
§

tBM 1401

181.

.4

TRANSLATING PROCEDURE

.41

Phases and Passes
Pre-process listing:
Pass 1:
Pass 2:
Post-process listing:

.42

Optional Modes

.421
. 422
. 423
. 424
. 425

Translate:. . . .
Translate and run:
Check only:
Patching: .
Up-dating:.

.43

Special Features

· lists source program &
checks it for errors.
· prepares table of labels &
assigns addresses to them.
· processes operands &
punches object deck.
lists source & object programs & notes undefined
symbols.

·
·
·
·
·

yes.
no.
yes (pre-process listing) .
no (must re-assemble) .
no (must re-assemble) .

.431 Alter to check only:
no.
.432 Fast unoptimized
translate:
no.
.433 Short translate on restricted program: . · no.
. 44

Bulk Translating: .

no.

. 45

Pro~am

none.

.46

Translator Library:

Diagnostics: .

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

.51

Object Program Space

. 511 Fixed overhead:. . . . . none.
. 512 Space required for each
input-output file: . . . variable.
.513 Approximate expansion
of procedures:. . . . . 1. 0
Translation Time

.521 Normal trans latin&": .
.522 Checking only: . . .

5/63 Revised

Optimizing Data: . . . . none.

.54

Object Program
Performance: . . . . . unaffected.

.6

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

.61

Translating Computer

. 611 Minimum configuration
SPS-l: . . . . . . . . . 1401 Processing Unit with
I, 400 core storage positions; 1402 Card ReadPunch; 1403 Printer; no
optional features.
SPS-2: . . . . . . .. As above, except 4K minimum core storage .
. 612 Larger configuration
advantages: . . . . . larger core storage
handles more labels per
iteration (see .234).
.62

4.0 + 0.015S min.
1. 0 + 0.003S min. (for
pre-process listing).

Target Computer

,.621 Minimum configuration:. no limitations.
.622 Usable extra facilities
SPS-1: . . . . . . . . . 4K is maximum core
storage size; otherwise
all facilities are usable.
SPS-2: . . . . . . . . . all facilities are usable .

.7

none (required routines
must be manually inserted
into program deck).

.5

.52

.53

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
Target computer overflow:
Inconsistent program:
Undefined names:

none.
sequence check
none •
check
chec k
none.
none.
check

Illegal operation code:

check

Action

noted in listing.
noted in listing.
noted in listing.

m

inserted as
address •
noted in listing.

ALTERNATIVE TRANSLATORS
Date

Computer

Identity

IBM 704:

704 Assembly available now
of 1401 SPS
Programs

Comment
1401 Program
Library File
No. 13.2.001.

401: 182.100
•

III

STANDARD

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 1401

Progrom Tronslotor
Autocoder
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: AUTOCODER

§

182.

. 12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

IDM 1401 Autocoder,
Version 3.
Autocoder.

Description (Contd.)
performs the same functions for different data files
appears only once for each file. Some of the error
routines may be shared by more than one data file.

.13

Originator:

IDM General Products Division' Applied Programming.

.14

Maintainer:

as above.

.15

Availability: .

Version 3 released in
October, 1961.

.2

INPUT

.21

Language

Description:
Operation of the Autocoder translator requires at
least 4,000 core storage positions, 4 magnetic tape
units, card reader-punch, printer, and the Advanced Programming and High-Low-Equal Compare
features. Larger core storage sizes speed up the
translation by permitting longer tape blocks and the
processing of more labels per translator iteration.
Input may be from either punched cards or tape,and
the object program may be in the form of a condensed card deck and/or a loadable tape. The trans1ator will accommodate source programs in either
the Autocoder or SPS languages or a combination of
the two.

.211 Name: .
. 212 Exemptions: .
.22

The Input-Output Control System is a supplement
to Autocoder that effectively eliminates the need
for detailed programming of standardized input and
output routines. By using a few macro instructions,
routines for reading and writing blocked and unblocked records, packing and unpacking blocked
records, file labeling, and checking and preparing
magnetic tape (including record count checking,
error checking, and correction) are available.
Autocoder will generate only the Control System
routines necessary to service the requirements of
the job according to the detailed information
supplied from the control card entries. The manufacturer has estimated that the generated inputoutput routines require approximately 5 percent
more core storage than programmer-created
machine oriented language coding.
Input- Output Control System macro instructions
provide linkages to two basic procedures: the
OPEN- CLOSE subroutine and the GET- PUT subroutine. The OPEN- CLOSE routines check and
write IDM 1401 standard front and end of label
records; for multi-reel files, they automatically
process end-of-reel records, provide for automatically alternating tape units, and enter the
label- record at the beginning of the new reel.
The GET- PUT routine reads or writes, blocks or
unblocks files, and provides error checking
routines.
The routines generate for the Input-Output Control
System appear only once for a file regardless of
the number of different places in a program they
are referred to. The housekeeping subroutine
(Le., GET, PUT, OPEN, or CLOSE) which

© 1963

Form

. 221 Input media: .
.222 Obligatory ordering:
.223 Obligatory grouping:
.23

IDM 1401 Autocoder or SPS
language or a combination
of the two.
none.

punched cards or card
images on magnetic tape.
must be in correct sequence
according to coding sheet
page and line numbers.
none.

Size Limitations

.231 Maximum number of
source statements:

limited by target computer
storage capacity.

.232 Maximum size source
statements: . . .. 72 characters per card.
.233 Maximum number of
data items:.
see next entry.
.234 Others
lV!.aximum number oflabels per translator iteration
Core storage
positions

Maximum
labels

4,000:
8,000:
12,000:
16,000:

150
510
870
1,270

.
.
.
.

.3

OUTPUT

.31

Object Program

. 311 Language name: .
. 312 Language style:
.313 Output media: . .'.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

. IDM 1401 machine language .
. machine .
punched cards and/ or magnetic tape.

Revised 5/63

IBM 1401

401: 182.320

§

182.

. 32

Bulk Translating: . . . no .

.45

Program Diagnostics: . none in basic system; can be
inserted into library.

'.46

Translator Library

Conventions

.321 Standard inclusions:.
.322 Compatible with:
.33

.44

Input/Output Control System
is generally included.
c:
1401 Autocoder Library.

Documentation
Subject

Provision

Source program: .
Object program: .
Storage map:. . .
Restart point list:
Language errors:
Label table: . . .

listing.
listing.
none.
none.
listing & messages during
assembly.
listing.

.4

TRANSLATING PROCEDURE

. 41

Phases and Passes
Pass 1:
Pass 2:
Pass 3:

Pass 4:
Pass 5:
Pass 6:

Pass 7:

Pass 8:

handles additions, deletions,
or alterations to the library
if required.
reads source program; processes macros and
pseudos.
converts mnemonic operation
codes to machine language
and fixed form (SPS) statements to Autocoder format.
converts literals to constants
and assigns relative addresses to all data.
assigns actual addresses to
as many labels as can be
handled.
processes all-operands, lists
symbol table on the printer,
and transfers control back
to pass 5 if -more labels
must be processed.
. . . . . . . . prints combined listing of
source and object programs
with error messages;
punches condensed, selfloading deck if desired.
. . . . . . . . produces loadable object
program tape and/or resequenced source program
deck .

. 42

Optional Modes

.421
.422
.423
.424
.425

Translate:. .
Translate and
Check only:.
Patching:. . .
Up-dating:. .

. 43

Special Features

.
run:
.
. .
. .

Organization:
.464 Contents
Routines: . . . . .
Functions: . . . . .
Data Descriptions:
.465 Librarianship
Insertion: . . .
Amendment: . .
Open routines: .
Closed routines: .

· yes.
· no.
· no.
begin with pass 4.
· begin with pass 4.

. 1401 Autocoder Library.
none .
tape (on Autocoder system
tape).
card images, in alphabetical
order by routine name.
open and closed.
yes.
in IOCS entries .
during special library run .
during special library run.
inserted whenever cued by
specific macro instructions.
CALL or INCLD macro with
name of routine as operand;
CALL also generates subroutine linkages.

.5

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

.51

Object Progra.m Space

.511 Fixed oyerhead
Name
Space
IOCS
variable

Comment
depends upon facilities used;
1900 positions exclusive of
input-output areas for typical program with card input
and blocked tape output.

.512 Space required for each
input-output file: . . . same as block length.
.513 Approximate expansion
of procedures: . . . . . 1.0, exclusive of macros.
.52

.431 Alter to check only: .. no.
. 432 Fast unoptimized
translate: . . . . . . no .
. 433 Short translate on restricted program: .. no.

5/63 Revised

.461 Identity: . . . . . .
.462 User restriction: .
. 463 Form
Storage medium:

Translation Time

.521 NormlJ.l translating: .

0.009S minutes for 10;000statement program on 16K
translating computer with
729IV tapes. Smaller core
store· or slower tapes will
increase translation time .

. 53

Optimizing Data: . . . . none .

.54

Object Program
Performance: . . . . . unaffected.

PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: AUTOCODER
§

401: 182.600

182.

.6

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

. 61

Translating Computer

.62

Target Computer

. 621 Minimum configuration:. no limitations .
.622 Usable extra facilities: . all facilities .

.611 Minimum configuration:. 1401 Processing Unit with
4, 000 core storage
positions.
4 Magnetic Tape Units,
model 729II, 729fV, 729V,
or 7330.
1402 Card Read-Punch.
1403 Printer, Model 2.
Advanced Programming
feature.
High-Low-Equal Compare
feature .
. 612 Larger configuration
larger core storage handles
advantages: . . . .
longer blocks and more
labels per iteration; fifth
tape unit permits stacked
program output.

© 1963

.7

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
Target computer overflow:
Inconsistent program:
Undefined names:

none.
none.
check
check
check
check
none.
check

Action

noted
noted
noted
noted

in
in
in
in

listing.
listing.
listing.
listing.

noted in listing.

ALTERNATIVE
TRANSLATORS: . . . none available.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised 5/63

401: 183.100
•

III

STANDARD

ED]?

IBM 1401

REPORTS

Program Translator

COBOL (4K)
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: COBOL (41<)

§

183.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: • . • . . . • . IBM 1401 COBOL (4K).
Program 1401-CB-07o.

.12

Description
The 1401 COBOL 4K Processor converts source programs written in IBM 1401 COBOL (Section 401:161)
into 1401 Autocoder programs. The Autocoder programs are, in turn, converted to 1401 machine language object programs in a separate run by the 1401
Autocoder translator, described in Section 401:182.
The translating 1401 must have a minimum of 4, 000
core storage positions, 4 magnetic tape units, a 1402
Card Read-Punch, a 1403 Model 2 Printer, and the
Advanced Programming, High-Low - Equal Compare,
and Sense Switches features. The Print Storage and
Read Punch Release features can be utilized to speed
up compilation if available. A fifth magnetic tape
unit is required if a listing of the COBOL source
statements followed by their Autocoder expansions
is desired.

Description (Contd. )
detection of a "critical" error (1. e., one that makes
further attempts at compilation impractical). Critical
errors will usually be detected during the first few
minutes of the compilation process. A printed "Cobol
Dictionary" lists each COBOL data-name, procedurename, and special-name; the sequence number of the
card on which it first appears; and the condensed
Autocoder name by which it can be identified in the
symbolic program listing.

.13

Originator:. • • • . . . General Products Division,
IBM Corporation.

• 14

Maintainer:

as above •

.15

Availability:

released for general use
November 30, 1962; modification letters 1 and 2
dated January 22 and
February 26, 1963.

.2

INPUT

. 21

Language

. 211 Name: . .
.212 Exemptions:
The 1401 used to run COBOL-coded object programs
must have the Advanced Programming, High-LowEqual Compare, and Sense Switches features. The
Multiply-Divide feature is required if the source
program contains any multiplication, division, or
exponentiation. The Print Storage and Processing
Overlap features are not required, but can be utilized if available.

In addition to the lOCS (Input-Output Control System)
macro instructions, 17 COBOL Subroutines must be
inserted into the 1401 Autocoder Library before the
Autocoder system is used to process the COBOL
translator's output. The closed COBOL subroutines
range from 137 to 1,800 characters in length, and
each is called when a particular language facility is
used in the source program. As an example, use of
the DISPLAY verb necessitates the inclusion of a
526-character subroutine in the object program. Because even the largest 1401 has only 16,000 positions
of core storage, and because 1401 COBOL object
programs cannot be segmented, the programmer
should try to avoid particularly the use of those language facilities that require the inclusion of the
larger COBOL subroutines. The subroutines, their
lengths, and the reasons they are called are listed in
Paragraph 401:183.511.

The COBOL Processor checks for a variety of source
program errors and prints a diagnostic message
whenever one is found. Compilation is halted upon

© 1963

.22

Form

• 221 Input media: • • . . •
· 222 Obligatory ordering: •

• 223 Obligatory grouping: •
• 23

IBM 1401 COBOL •
see "Deficiencies with respect to Required COBOL
61" in Paragraph
401:161. 14.

punched cards.
COBOL RUN card.
Identification Division.
Environment Division.
Data Division.
Procedure Division.
by division, section, and
paragraph.

Size Limitations

.231 Maximum number of
source statements: .
.232 Maximum size source
statements:. • . . .
• 233 Maximum number of
data items: . • . .
.234 Others
Maximum record
length (tape): •
Maximum block
length (tape): •

limited by target computer
storage.
not specified.
prac~ically

unlimited.

999 characters.
limited by target computer
storage.

Maximum computational item size: •
18 digits.
Maximum alphameric
literal size: ••••• 120 characters.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

401:183.300
§

IBM 1401

183.

.41

.3

OUTPUT

· 31

Object Program

Segment E: Analyzes input-output entries, generates
IOCS descriptions, and prints input-output diagnostics.
Segment F: Processes portions of the Procedure
Division •

.311 Language name:
. 312 Language style:

IBM 1401 Autocoder.
symbolic (converted to final
machine language program
by the 1401 Autocoder
translator; see Section
401:182).
.313 Output media: • • . . . magnetic tape and/or
punched cards.
· 32

· 33

Segment G: Converts the COBOL arithmetic, MOVE,
PERFORM and READ procedural statements to
macro form; processes arithmetic and comparison
operators, and optimizes arithmetic statements by
eliminating unnecessary temporary storage locations.
Segment H: Converts data, equipment, program
switch, and literal descriptions to table entries;
processes subscripts; and merges data descriptions
after Procedure Division names .

Conventions

.321 Standard inclusions: .
. 322 Compatible with:. . .

none.
IBM 1401 Input-Output Control System (IOCS) and 4K
COBOL Subroutines; both
must be included as part
of the 1401 Autocoder
sy.stem tape used.

Segment I: Generates procedural macros, selects
appropriate library routines , and prints arithmetic
and relational diagnostics.
Segment J: Substitutes proper parameters into model
statements from library, sets up subroutine linkages,
arranges Autocoder program in proper sequence and
outputs it, and (if requested) merges source and
Autocoder statements for dptional source-symbolic
listing.

Documentation
Subject

Provision

Source program:.
Object program: .
Storage map:. • .
Restart point list:
Language errors:
Dictionary:. . . .

listing.
optional listing. t
none.
none.
messages in listing.
listing (shows COBOL-name
to Autocoder-name relationships).

t

Optional listing of the COBOL source statements
followed by their Autocoder expansions can be produced, but requires a fifth magnetic tape unit. .A
symbolic object program listing is also produced
by tile Autocoder translator.

.4

TRANSLATING PROCEDURE

.41

Phases and Passes
The 1401 COBOL 4K Processor consists of 10 logical
segments, and each segment contains from 3 to 20
separate phases. The main functions of each segment can be summarized as follows:
Segment A: Reads source deck, assigns sequence
number!l, lists card-images on the printer, processes the Identification Division, compresses key
words, and eliminates "noise" (non-required)
words.
Segment B: Prints syntax diagnostics and suspends
compilation if necessary, compresses data and procedure names, and produces dictionary of COBOL
names and their corresponding Autocoder counter
parts.
Segment C: Processes SPECIAL-NAMES paragraph
and condition-names (level 88 data entries).
Segment D: Analyzes PICTURE clauses, builds an
internal description for each data entity, prints
data description diagnostics, generates edit masks,
and outputs storage reservation entries.

5/63

Phases and Passes (Contd.)

.42

Optional Mode

.421 Translate: . .
. 422 Translate and run:.
. 423 Check only:
. 424 Patching: .
• 425 Up-dating:
.43

yes .
no .
no; but translation halts upon
detection of a "critical"
error .
no .
no.

Special Features

.431 Alter to check only:
. 432 Fast unoptimized
translate: • . . . .
• 433 Short translate on
restricted program:

..

no .
no .
no.
possible for the COBOL-toAutocoder phase, but not
for the entire translation
process.

.44

Bulk Translating::

.45

Program Diagnostics:

none.

.46

Translator Library: .

none in COBOL-to-Autocoder
phase; but see 1401 Autocoder Library, Paragraph
401:182.46.

.5

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

.51

Object Program Space

.511 Fixed overhead: . . . . required COBOL subroutines
may occupy up to 6,770
core storage positions depending upon language facilities used in the source
program; see table.

401: 183.512

PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: COBOL (4K)
§

183.
COBOL SUBROUTINES
Approximate
Length (chars)

Name
Accept
Display
Go To Depending
Subscript 1
Subscript 2
Subscript 3
Alpha Compare
Compare FIGCON

265
526
137
185
230
276
663
445

If Numeric

148

If

176

~phabetic

Move ALL
Editing
Move Field to Record
Exponentiation
Exponentiation
Examine
Index

289
347
324
500
1,800
375
86

• 512 Space required for each
input-output file: • •• same as maximum block
length, except doubled
when "1 ALTERNATE
AREA" is specified •
. 513 Approximate expansion
of procedures: •
?
. 52

Translation Time: .

.53

Optimizing Data

Reason Subroutine is Called
Use of ACCEPT verb.
Use of DISPLAY verb.
Use of GO TO • • • DEPENDING.
Use of one-level subscripting.
Use of two-level subscripting.
Use of three-level subscripting.
Comparison involving alphabetic group item.
Comparison of group item to figurative constant
with SIZE greater than 1.
Use of IF NUMERIC on item with
SIZE greater than 1.
Use of IF ALPHABETIC on item with
SIZE greater than 1.
Filling a group item with a figurative constant.
Use of COBOL zeros, floating + or - sign, or DB.
Movinggroup item to a record of unequal length.
Use of an integer exponent.
Use of a non-integer exponent.
Use of EXAMINE verb.
Use of any other COBOL Subroutine
except DISPLAY •

.53

Optimizing Data (Contd.)
Automatic:
o Arithmetic statements are optimized by eliminating
unnecessary temporary storage locations •

?

o Because of the 1401's alphameric, variable word
length mode of operation, conversions between the
DISPLAY and COMPUTATIONAL modes are not
required.

Explicit:
o Storage sizes and optional features of both the
translating and target computers are specified in
the SOURCE-COMPUTER and OBJECT-COMPUTER
paragraphs of the environment division.
o One alternate input-output area can be specified
for magnetic tape files only if the Processing Overlap feature is available.
o Magnetic tape records may be of variable length.
Implicit:
o Avoid use of the source language facilities that require the presence of the larger COBOL Subroutines (see 401:183.511).
o Do not compute anything within each pass through a
PERFORM loop that can just as well be computed
only once, before entering the loop.
o Do not compute the same SUb-expression within two
or more different COMPUTE statements if the practice can be avoided by evaluating the sub-expression
in a separate statement.
o Check input data for reasonability.

© 1963

. 54

Object Program
Performance:. . . . .

?

.6

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

.61

Translating Computer

.611 Minimum configuration: 1401 Processing Unit with
4, 000 core storage
positions.
1402 Card Read-Punch.
1403 Model 2 Printer.
4 Magnetic Tape Units.
Advanced Programming
feature.
High-Low-Equal Compare
feature.
Sense Switches feature.
.612 Larger configuration
advantages:. . • . •
larger core store speeds
compilation.
fifth tape unit permits listing
of source and symbolic
statements.
Read Punch Release
and/or Print Storage features speed compilation.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

401:183.620
§

183.

• 62

.7

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Target Computer

.621 Minimum configuration: 1401 Processing Unit with
sufficient storage to hold
object program, data, and
subroutines.
Advanced Programming
feature.
High-Low-Equal Compare
feature.
Sense Switches feature.
Multiply-Divide feature (if
source program calls for
multiplication, division,
or exponentiation.)
• 622 Usable extra facilities: up to 16, 000 core storage
positions.
1402 Card Read-Punch.
1403 Printer.
up to 6 Magnetic Tape Units.
Print Storage feature.
Processing Overlap feature.

5/63

IBM 1401

Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries:
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
Target computer
overflow:

Check or
InterlOCK
checks
checks
checks
checks

check by Autocoder
translator.
checks
Inconsistent program:
checks
Excessive item size:
Data desCription conflict: checks
checks
Invalid editing:
checks
Invalid subscripting:
checks
Class contradiction:

Action
print
print
print
print

message.
message.
message.
messa ge.

print
print
print
print
print
print

message.
messa ge.
message.
message.
message.
messa ge.

Note: When a "critical" error is detected. compilation is baIted .

.8

ALTERNATIVE
TRANSLATOR: .

IBM 1401 COBOL (12K -16K);
see Section 401: 184.

401: 185.100
•

STANDARD

II

IBM 1401

RU1lRTS
EJDP

Program Translator

FORTRAN
PROGRAM TRANSLA TOR: FORTRAN

§

185.

.12

.I

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

.12

Description

Description (Contd.)
placed on efficient use of storage rather than on
minimizing object program execution speed •

IBM 1401 FORTRAN.
Program 1401- FO-OSO,
Version 2.

This translator permits utilization of all the facilities
of the IBM 1401 FORTRAN language, which is
basically FORTRAN I and is described in Section
401:162. No magnetic tape units are required for
translation or for object program execution, but
tape units can be utilized in either phase when
available. The minimum facilities required in both
the translating and target 1401 systems are 8,000
core storage positions, a card read-punch and
printer, plus the Advanced Programming, High - LowEqual Compare, and Multiply-Divide features. Core
stores consisting of 12,000 or 16,000 positions can
be fully utilized, and are virtually mandatory when
FORTRAN programs of any appreciable siz.e or
complexity are contemplated.
Translation of the FORTRAN source program to a
machine language object program is performed in a
single pass of the compiler program, which may be
stored on either punched cards or magnetic tape.
The source program is loaded into core storage from
punched cards. Then the 63 logical phases of the
compiler are loaded and executed, one at a time,
causing a gradual transformation within core storage
of the source statements to an object program that
consists of generated 1401 instructions, list and format strings, and constants. Arithmetic statements
are translated into strings of operand addresses and
operation codes which are to be executed interpretively. At the end of the translation process, the object program and all necessary subroutines are
present in core storage, ready for immediate execution. A condensed object program deck and its
listing will be punched and printed if requested.
All floating point arithmetic, input-output operations,
and format conversions are performed by standard
subroutines, which occupy a total of 3,500 character
positions of storage in the object program. lnputoutput and arithmetic work areas and a "snapshot"
routine that permits core storage dumps occupy an
additional 700 storage positions. Nine standard
library functions and six "processing" r9utines,
which are included only when required by specific
source program operations, occupy a total of up to
2,526 storage positions. The obvious conclusion is
that, in an 8K 1401, very little storage space is
likely to be available for the generated object program and the data it is to process. The manufacturer states that the total number of generated object program characters (exclusive of subroutines)
will, in general, be less than twice the number of
characters in the source program. Emphasis is

© 1963

Checks are made for source program errors, and a
diagnostic message is printed whenever an error is
detected. Translation will then continue when possible. Errors at execution time result either in system halts with error code displays (for input-output,
data format, or subscript errors) or in printed messages and continuation of program execution with incorrect but predictable results (for arithmetic
errors).
.13

Originator: .

General Products Division,
IBM Corporation.

.14

Maintainer:

as above.

.15

Availability:

Version 1 - December 1961.
Version 2 - December 1962.

.2

INPUT

.21

Language

.211 Name:
. 212 Exemptions:

.22

IBM 1401 FORTRAN .
none, but note language
limitations in Section
401:162.14.

Farm

.

.221 Input medli!.:
• 222 Obligatory ordering: .
• 223 Obligatory grouping: .
.23

punched cards .
all statements in correct
logical sequence, preceded
by a control card.
none.

Size Limitations

.231 Maximum number of
source statements:.
.232 Maximum size source
statements: .
.233 Maximum number of
data items: .
.3

OUTPUT

.31

Object Program

.311 Language name:
.312 Language style:
.313 Output media:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

limited by core storage
capacity.
660 characters.
limited by core storage
capacity.

IBM 1401 machine language.
condensed, non-relocatable
card deck.
punched cards; program is
also retained in core storage for immediate
execution.

5/63

IBM 1401

401: 185.320
§

185.

.46

Translator Library

.461 Identity: . . . • .
• 32

Conventions
.462 User restriction:

• 321 Standard inclusions: .

• 33

arithmetic, input-output,
format, and snapshot
routines.

.463 Form
Storage medium: .

Documentation

Organization: .
Provision

Source program: •
Object program: .

listing.
optional listing in form of
core storage dump.
listing.
none.
listing.

Storage map: • . .
Restart point list:
Language errors:
•4

TRANSLATING PROCEDURE

.41

Phases and Passes
The 1401 FORTRAN system IS a one-pass compiler.
First the source program is read into core storage.
Then the compiler (on either punched cards or magnetic tape) is loaded and executed, one phase at a
time, gradually transforming the source statements
into a 1401 machine language object program. When
the end of the compiler deck (or tape) is reached, the
compilation is complete. The compiler consists of
63 logical phases, beginning with a system monitor
that initiates loading and execution of each succeeding phase, and ending with insertion of the standard
closed arithmetic subroutines that are always included in the object program.

.42

Optional Mode

• 421
• 422
.423
• 424
. 425

Translate: •.
Translate and run: .
Check only:
Patching: .
Up-dating: •

.43

Special Features

.431 Alter to check only:
,.432 Fast unoptimized
translate: . . . . .
.433 Short translate on
restricted program:

..

.44

Bulk Translating:

.45

Program Diagnostics

. 451 Tracers: .
.452 Snapshots:
• 453 Dumps: . .

5/63

yes.
yes.
no.
no.
no.

no.
no.
no.

.464 Contents
Routines: .
Functions: ; . . . .
Data descriptions:
.465 Librarianship
Insertion:. .

Amendment: .•
Call procedure:

1401 FORTRAN function
library.
none.

punched cards or magnetic
tape.
relocatable machine language, assembled from
1401 Autocoder language.
standard arithmetic, inputoutput, format, and snapshot routines.
9 standard plus up to 12
user-defined.
none •

must be manually inserted
into system deck, which
can then be transcribed
to tape.
same as insertion.
use of a function name in an
arithmetic statement
causes inclusion of the
appropriate closed
subroutine.

.5

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

.51

Object Program Space

. 511 Fixed overhead
Name
Space
Input-output and
arithmetic work
area: • . . • . •
333 characters.
Snapshot program:
367 characters.
Arithmetic, inputoutput, and format
routines: . . . • . 3,500 characters.
Note: The 9 standard library functions and 6 "processing" routines, which are included only when
required, occupy a maximum of 2,526 addi'tional character positions.

no .

none.
none.
a printout of the contents
of core storage can be
produced at any halt encountered during object
program execution by
transferring control to the
"snapshot" program,
which is always present in
core storage.

.512 Space required for each
input-output file: • . . single input~output area
serves all files.
.513 Approximate expansion
of procedures: . . . . total number of generated
object program characters
(in -line procedures, list
and format strings, constants, and subscripting
parameters) will not exceed twice the number of
characters in the source
program (**).

PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FORTRAN

401: 185.520

§ 185.

.52

Translation Time

.521 Normal translating (exclusive of object program
punchout and listing)
Card version: . • • . approximately 3 minutes;
time is essentially independent of program size
(**).
Tape version: •. • • 0.25 + O. 0l2S minutes,
where S is number of
source program cards,
using a 729 LV tape unit
(**).
(**) Estimate by the manufacturer.

.53

.6

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

. 61

Translating Computer

.611 Minimum configuration: 1401 Processing Unit with
8,000 core storage
positions.
1402 Card Read-Punch.
1403 Printer (Model 1 or 2).
Advanced Programming
feature.
High-Law-Equal Compare
feature.
Multiply-Divide feature.
.612 Larger configuration
advantages: • . • • •

Optimizing Data

.531 Explicit:
EQUIVALENCE statement reduces data storage requirements by causing locations to be shared by two
or more variables within a program.
Floating and fixed point data representation can be
preset to the minimum required precision, thereby
minimizing both storage requirements and execution
time.

. 532 Implicit:
Keep subscript expressions as simple as possible.
Do not compute anything within a DO loop that can
just as well be computed before entering the loop.
Do not compute the same sub-expression more than
once if the practice can be avoided by evaluating the
sub-expression in a separate arithmetic statement.

.62

Target Computer

• 621 Minimum configuration: 1401 Processing Unit with
8,000 core storage
positions.
1402 Card Read-PUnch.
1403 Printer (Model 1 or 2).
Advanced Programming
feature •
High-Law-Equal Compare
feature.
Multiply-Divide feature.
.622 Usable extra facilities: 729 or 7330 Magnetic Tape
Units.
More core storage.
Sense Switches feature.
.7

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

Check input data for reasonability.
Error

Use s'uccessive multiplications rather than exponentiation to develop squares and cubes.

Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
Target computer
overflow:
Mixed arithmetic:
Undefined names:
Unreferenced names:
Illegal subscripts:

. 533 Automatic:
Generated strings of arithmetic operations are reorganized to minimize the required number of temporary storage areas.
Duplicate lists appearing in input-output statements
are eliminated to minimize object program space
requirements.
. 54

Object Program
Performance:. . • • . no conclusive data available.

© 1963

1 Magnetic Tape Unit can
speed compilation by replacing the card reader in
containing the FORTRAN
compiler.
More core storage can be
utilized when available.
Sense Switches can control
compiler output options.

Check or
Interlock

Action

checks
none.
checks
checks
checks

print message.
print message.
print message.
print message.

check
check
checks
checks
checks

print
print
print
print
print

messa ge •
message.
message.
message.
message.

Note: Upon detection of a source program etror, compilation will
continue whenever possible after the diagnostic message has
been printed •

•8

ALTERNATIVE
TRANSLATORS: • • • none.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

401: 191.100
•

11

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 1401
Operating Environment

'EPORTS

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

§

191.

.1

GENERAL

· 11

Identity:

• 12

Description

.22

Library Subroutines: . may be inserted at translation time in forms of cards
(SPS) or tape (Autocoder
Library), or at execution
time as independents.
Open subroutine card decks.

· 23

Loading Sequence

. • • . . • . no integrated supervisor
available.

No comprehensive supervisor routine for production
running has been published or announced to date for
the 1401 systems. The facilities covered in this section, therefore, must be provided by incorporating
in each program specific routines, either special
library routines or individually written routines to
perform loading, tracing, dumping, run to run
locators, etc.

Method

Description

Manual:

sequencing of card decks or
program tapes.

1401 Tape Executive
Program: . • . . . .

All routines used in a program are called in through
standard or specially' created macro codes and are
incorporated into the program at translation time.

1401 Monitor System
for tape: • . . . . .

There is, however, a comprehensive supervisor routine for testing called Auto-Test, which is described
in section 401:52. This routine provides the facilities for stacking programs to be tested and automatically produces the necessary documentation to
evaluate the tested programs.
.13

Availability:

library routines described
are currently available.

.14

Originator: .

IBM Corporation and
individual users.

.2

PROGRAM LOADING

.21

Source of Programs

.211 Programs from on-line
libraries:. . . . . • . Card Library for stanc:!ard
routines is supplied by
IBM; cards for desired"
program must be loaded
manually.
Tape Libraries: several
library control routines in
1401 Program Library.
• 212 Independent programs: self-loading card decks or
magnetic tapes, as produced by SPS and Autocoder translators.
· 214 Master routines:. . . . Input-Output Control System
(IOCS) is called by macros
at translation time. The
subroutines called in are
a combination of open and
closed routines. (See
401:172.14 and
401:172.81).

© 1963

1401 Program Tape
Execution Routine: .

.3

.4

· 45

HARDWARE
ALWCATION: .

RUNNING
SUPERVISION:

1401 Program Library File
No. 01. 4.015 permits
placing programs on an
executive tape and loading
these programs based on
sense switch setting.
1401 Program Library File
No. 01. 4. 039, permits
addition or deletion of programs on an executive
tape and loading these programs into core storage
for execution.
1401 Program Library File
No. 01. 4.052, permits
writing and maintaining a
1401 Program tape from
condensed card decks and
loading these programs
into core storage for execution. The loading conditions are based on sense
switch settings.

as incorporated in user's
program.
as incorporated in user's
program.

Restarts

.451 Establishing restart
points: . . . . . . .

1401 Check-Point Card
Program.
1401 Program Library
No. 01. 4.030 provides facility for recording mem0ry contents and I/O unit
poSitions to enable restart
under program control.
· 452 Restarting prbces s: . . same series of routines as
above enable restart under
program control.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised 5/63

IBM 1401

401: 191.500
§

191.

• 52

.5

PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS

.51

Dynamic

Note (Contd. ):
• Automatically correct the object program (in
source language) without reassembling or
manually calculating patching addresses.

1401 Trap Subroutine Card
Program.
1401 Program Library
Program No. 01. 4. 032
generates a tape record
containing necessary information for tracing.
Trace Card Program, 1401
Program Library file No.
01. 4.026, provides facility
for tracing a program to
the error ..
.512 Snapshots: • • . . . . . the following programs are
available in the 1401 Program Library: Insert
Linkage to fixed Print
Storage, this program inserts in the desired section of an object program
linkage to a routine which
prints out the contents of
storage between specified
limits.
Insert Linkages to Selective
Print Storage performs
same function as preeeding
routine but the specified
limits may vary with each
print mode.
.511 Tracing:

.52

Post Mortem: .• , . . Memory Annotation, Post
Test Program, 1401 Program Library Program No.
01. 4.050. Produces a
print-out of all or any position of core storage.
Prints program locations
and instructions in machine language and converts addresses to 5 decimal-digit form, with index
register identification. If
they are tagged, .program
distinguishes between numeric-constant fields and
alphabetic fields. Several
other storage dump routines are available in the
1401 Program Library.

Post Mortem (Contd.)

• Trace RAMAC File references by listing: the
disc address used in the execution of RAMAC
instructions, an indication of a read (R) or
write (W) instruction, and in the LOAD mode
the actual data read or written transferred to
or from the disc.
• obtain a printout of core storage between
specified limits during run execution at
specified points in the object program.
• At the end of a program test, obtain a memory printout and a tape print of all specified
tapes.
• Produce an 80-80 card listing of all inputoutput cards with individual identification of
the stacker pockets the cards came from.
• If a program stalls, a restart procedure is

available that will provide the memory printouts and tape printouts specified; bypass the
program with the error, and begin automatically to test the ne~ program.
The Auto-Test routines can be used in any desired combination for obtaining efficient testing
of 1401 programs. If used properly, these routines can be a very useful testing tool.

.6

OPERATOR CONTROL: as incorporated in user's
program.

.7

LOGGING:....... as incorporated in user's
program.

.8

PERFORMANCE

.81

Program Loading Time: condensed card decks; approximately 2, 800
instructions per minute.
program tapes; approximately 2,400 to 6,000 instructions per minute using card images with 1 instruction per card.

. 82

Reserved Equipment:

none.

.83

Running Overhead: . .

depends upon facilities
incorporated in program.

Note: Auto-Test for the IBM 1401 System is a comprehensive test control operating system. This
system provides the ability to stack Autocoder,
SPS, and FARGO programs and automatically
produce the necessary documentation to evaluate the tested programs.
The Auto-Test routines provide the ability to:
• Generate either tape or RAMAC File records
required as input test data for the program
to be tested.

5/63 Revised

401 :201.001
IBM 1401
System Performance

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

201.

GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING (401:201.1)
These problems involve updating a master file from information in a .detail file and
producing a printed record of each transaction. This application is one of the most typical
of commercial data processing jobs and is fully described in Section 4: 200.1 of the Users'
Guide.
Standard Configuration I has no magnetic tape units. Therefore, it is assumed that
both the master and detail files are on punched cards, and that the two files have been
collated off-line so that each detail card follows its associated master record cards. Since
master records with no activity (i.e., no corresponding detail cards) would, in most cases,
be removed from the file before the computer run, only the times at an activity factor of
1.0 are really significant for Standard Configuration I. The relatively low speed of the
card punch (250 cards per minute) in producing the updated Master File makes the over-all
processing time for Configuration I much higher than for Configurations II, III, and IV,
which utilize magnetic tape for the master file. It should be noted that the master record
length for Standard File Problem A is 108 characters, which necessitated the use of two
80-column cards for each master record. Although there are well-lmown methods for packing more than 80 characters of information onto a card, their use was not deemed appropriate in these standardized performance calculations.
In Standard Configurations II, III, and IV, the master file is on magnetic tape, the
detail file is read by the 1402 Card Read- Punch, and the report file is produced by the 1403
Printer. The combination "print and read" instruction is used wherever it results in
improved performance.

Standard Configuration II is a "stripped-down" magnetic tape system that includes
none of the optional features that improve the 1401's capabilities for sirrlUltaneous operations. Furthermore, the lack of the Automatic Programming and Multiply- Divide features
makes internal processing time for Configuration II over three times as long as for Configurations III and IV. Because of this inefficient processing and the high penalties imposed
by each input-output operation, central processor time is the limiting factor on throughput
in Configuration II.
Standard Configuration III has a significantly nigher throughput than Configuration II
as a result of the following major configuration additions: doubled core storage; more and
faster magnetic tape units; and the Processing Overlap, Advanced Programming, and
Multiply- Divide features. The facilities of Configuration III are more than adequate for use
of the 1401 Autocoder, IOCS, COBOL, and FORTRAN systems. The Processing Overlap
feature permits card reading and magnetic tape start-stop times to be overlapped with internal processing. The Advanced Programming feature provides three index registers,
instructions to store the A and B address register contents, and a full-record internal transfer instruction. These facilities add up to a highly significant increase in processing
capabilities, as the system performance graphs clearly show.
Standard Configuration IV adds still faster magnetic tape units (729V) and the Print
Storage feature to the facilities of Configuration III. Print Storage permits 98 per cent of
each 1403 Printer cycle to be overlapped with internal processing and with the input or output operation (card reading in this case) that is being performed in the Processing Overlap
mode. With this increased capability for simultaneous operations, the speed of the 1403
Printer becomes the limiting factor on total time required over most of the plotted activity
range. (In comparing the price of the 1401 in Standard Configuration IV with other systems,
it should be kept in mind that a 1401 system can have only half as much core storage and
half as many magnetic tape units as the configuration rules on page 4:030.120 specify.)

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

401 :201.002

IBM 1401
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (Contd.)

§

201.

SORTING (401:201. 2)
The standard estimate for sorting 80-character records by straightforward merging
on magnetic tape was developed from the time for Standard File Problem A by the method
explained in Paragraph 4:200.213 of the Users' Guide. A two-way merge was used in
Configuration II (which has only four magnetic tape units) and a three-way merge in Configurations III and IV. The results are shown in Graph 401:201.214.
Graph 401:201.224 is based on published timing data for the manufacturer-developed
sort routines: SORT 1 for Configuration II and SORT 2 for Configurations III and IV. The
two graphs show close agreement between the estimated and published sorting times.
MATRIX INVERSION (401:201.3)
In matrix inversion, the object is to measure central processor speed on the
straightforward inversion of a non-symmetric, non-singular matrix. No input-output op-.
erations are involved. The standard estimate is based on the time to perform cumulative
multiplication (c = c + atbj) in eight-digit precision floating point using standard subroutines
(see Paragraph 401:051.422). The results are shown in Graph 401:201.313. Speeds are
relatively low because of the 1401's lack of floating point arithmetic hardware.

Graph 401:201. 323 shows the times for a matrix inverslon routine coded in 1401
FORTRAN by the manufacturer and timed on a 1401. The FORTRAN-coded routine takes
about three times as long as the matrix inversion times derived by the standard estimating
technique. According to the manufacturer, this I-to-3 relationship between the speeds of
1401 FORTRAN-coded and symbolic-coded object programs is fairly typical.
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING (401:201.4)
This problem measures over-all system performance on a simple mathematical
application with widely varying ratios of input-to-computation-to-output volume, as des~ribedinSection4:200.4 of the Users' Guide. The time requirements shown in Graph
401:201.414 apply to Standard Configurations I and III. In both configurations, input is via
the 1402 Card Read- Punch, output is via the 1403 printer, and the calculations are performed in eight-digit precision floating point, using standard subroutines.
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING (401:201.5)
Here the object is to compile a number of cross-tabulation tables, using input records
consisting of thirty 2-digit items that have been pre-edited and blocked for efficient input.
The procedure is described in Section 4:200.5 of the Users' Guide. Graph 401:201.514
shows the times required when from 1 to 1,000 table elements are augmented for each
input record. Configuration I uses the 1402 Card Read-Punch as an input device, with one
record per card. In Configuration ill and IV, input is via magnetic tape, with 18 records
per block. Configuration II lacks the Advanced Programming and Multiply-Divide features,
and was therefore found unsuitable for this type of statistical processing.

5/63

401:201.011
IBM 1401
System Performance

IBM 1401

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised

5/63

401:201.012

IBM 1401
IBM 1401 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
Configuratian

Worksheet

1

InputOutput
Times

Item

Char/block

Reference
I

II

III

IV

(File 1)

54 per card

1,080

1,080

1,080

(File 1)

0.5

10

10

10

150/480

74.4/74.4

38.6/38.6

30.3/30.3

Recards/block

K

msec/block

File I/File 2

msee/switeh

File 3

75

75

75

75

File 4

120

120

120

120

File I/File 2

4:200.112

File 3
File 4
maee pene1ty

2
Central
Processor
Times

61.7/59.0

29.9/26.0

21.6/17.9

File 3

12

65

12

12

File 4

84

84

84

2

al

4.1

2.1

2.1

2.1

maee/reeord

a2

5.0·

9.4

8.3

8.3

maee/detail

b6

maee/work

b5

maee/bloek
for C.P.
and
daminant
column.

Standard
Prob.lem A

4:200.1132

+ b9
b7 + b8

28.0

92.6

al

4.1

2.1

2.1

2.1

a2 K

2.5

94.0

83.0

83.0

a3 K

14.0

926.0

211.0

211.0

File 1 Master In

12.0

61.7

74.4

29.9

38.6

21.6

File 2 Master Out

16.0

59.0

74.4

26.0

38.6

17.9

Unit of measure

6.0

File 4 Reporta

42.0

60.0

1,320.0

1,500.0·

Total

96.6

300.0

2,462.8

1,648.8

120.0
840.0
1,312.0

120.0
1,500.0·
1,577.2

20.0

1,200.0

475.6

1,200.0

(character)
100

1,850

3,150

3,150

9

0

9

9

387

672

654

654

2,676

2,628

2,676

2,676

744

2,584

2,584

2,58~

Working

---

108

108

108

Total

3,916

7,842

9,181

9,181

Fb:ed
Standard
Problem A
Space

240.0

File 3 Details

Std. routines

3 (Bloeka 1 to 23)

4:200.1151
6 (Blocks 24 to 48)
Files

• Total time for Files 3 and 4, uaing combination "read and print" instruction.

Revised

21.1

21.1

4:200.114

F= 1.0

4

24/32

msee/bloek

maee/report

3

File I/File 2

5/63

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

401:201.013
IBM 1401 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (Contd.)
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2
Con fig uration

Worksheet

5

Item

Reference

I

III

Floating Point

Floating Point

Card Reader

Card Reader

Printer

Printer

input

80 characters

80 characters

output

132 characters

132 characters

Fixed/Floating point
input

IV

Unit name
output

Size of record

Standard
Ma themati cal
Problem
A

input

T1

75

75

output

T2

120

120

input

T3

12

12

output

T4

84

84

msec/block

4:200.413

msec penalty

7

msec/record

T5

0.161

0.161

msec/5 loops

T6

499.088

499.088

msec/report

T7

7.050

7.050

Unit name

Size of block

Standard
Statistical
Problem
A

Records/block

B

msec/block

Tl

msec penalty

T3

Card Reader

729 II Tape Unit

729 V Tape Unit

80 characters

7,080 characters

1,080 characters

18

18

75

38.6

30.3

12

29.9

21.6

1

4:200.512

C.P.

msec/block

T5

0.161

0.380

0.380

msec/record

T6

---

1.852

1.852

msec/table

T7

3.423

3.423

©

3.423

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNAlncorporated

Revised

5/63

401 :201.100
•

STANDARD

II

REPORTS
ED
P

IBM 1401
System Performance

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

§

201.

. 112 Computation:
.113 Timing basis:

.1

GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING

.11

Standard File Problem A

.111 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:

standard .
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113 .
see graph below.

. 114 Graph:
.115 Storage space required
Configuration I:
. 3,900 characters.
Configuration II: .
7,800 characters.
Configuration III: .
9,200 characters.
Configuration IV: .
9,200 characters.

108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

4 -+----~--------~----------------------------~
2

100.0
7

4

4

/

7'

/"

./ ./

2

1.0
7

4

2

O.i ~-----4------------~--------------------------------------1
0.0
0.1
1.0
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 5/63

401 :201.120

§

IBM 1401

201.

.12

.122 Computation: .
. 123 Timing basis: .

standard .
using estimating procedure.
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.12 •
. 124 Graph: . • . • . . . . see graph below .

Standard File Problem B

. 121 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:

54 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

1,000.00
7

4

2

100.0
7

I

4

~

2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records

-

/

10.0
./
./

7

./
/'

/

4

2

--

//

V V

~

-'

""" / '

-L'
./

./

/'

~

1.0
7

4

2

0.1
0.0

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

5/63 Reprinted

1.0

401 :201.130

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

standard .
using estimating p,rocedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13 .
. 134 Graph: . . . . • . . . see graph below •

.132 Computation: .
. 133 Timing basis: .

201.

.13

Standard File Problem C

. 131 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:

216 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

1,000.0
7

4

I

2

100.0
7

4

II

~ ~~

10.0
7

4

-

~III

2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records

____

.,

./
./

./

~

./

V

~

-""

.-

./

.-

.J'"

"

2

1.0
7

4

2

0.1
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 5/63

IBM 1401

401 :201.140

§

.14

trebled .
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.14 •
see graph below .

.142 Computation:.
• 143 Timing basis:

201.
Standard File Problem D

• 144 Graph:

• 141 Record sizes
Master file: .
Detail file: .
Report file: •

108 characters.
1 card.
1 line 2

1,000.G
7

4

2

I

100.G
7

.".

~

4

~

2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records

/

1O.G

,,

7

4

I

2

V

..".
..".

./

/

/

../'"

-'"

"".

~

--....;.

~~
--

,/'

1.0
7
4

2

0.1
D.G

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

5/63 Reprinted

l.G

401 :201.200

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

2ol.

. 213 Timing basis:

.2

SORTING

.21

Standard Problem Estimates

. 211 Record size: .
. 212 Key size: ..

using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213 .
.214 Graph: . . . . . . . .. see graph below .
. 215 Capacity of one reel (ten 8o-char records per block)
200 char/inch:
57,000 records.
556 char/inch: . . . . 125,000 records.

80 characters .
8 characters .

1,000

7

4

I

2

 cycle

±V> cycle

±V> cycle

±v> cycle

±V> cycle

±v> cycle

±v> cycle

3cp.4-line

3cp.4-line

3·cp. 4-line

3cp.4-line

3cp.4-11ne

3cp.4-1ine

3cp.4-line

3.2

4.0

4.5

3.7

4.5

4.6

Included in
1401 load

Weight. pounds

60X 29x 31

60X5sx31

60x5sx31

60x5SX31

1015

lS40

2025

2170

-----

---

---

---

---

IS (1402)

18 (1402)

50-110

60x5SX31

1402 Model 1

PHYSICAL Maximum cable lengths. ft.
To Processing Unit
To Power Receptacle
To Indicated Unit

Temperature. 0 F.

IS
14

Storage
Ranges
Humidity• .,.

ATMOS·
PHERE t

Working
Ranges

Heat dissipated. BTU/hr.

Air flow. cfm.

Nominal
Voltage
Tolerance

l'iominal
ELEC.
TRICAL

Cycles
Tolerance

Phases and lines

Load KVA

t All units have intemal
filters.

NOTES

5/63

Revised

I AUERBACH I.$J

401:211.103

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

IBM 1401 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Contd.)

Unit Name

Magnetic
Character
Reader

Magnetic
Tape
Unit

Magn<>tic
Tapa
Unit

T ransmi ssion

7330

Di sk Storage
Drive

Di sk Storage
Drive

Disc Storage
Unit

Core Stora ge
Unit

Core Storage
Unit

Core Storage
Unit

Consolo
Inquiry
Statien

Magnetic
Character
Reader

Optical
Character
Reader

Optical
Character
Reader

1403 Models
1, 2

1311 Model 2

1311 Model 4

1405 Models
1, 2

1406 Modell

1406 Model 2

1406 Model 3

1407

1412 Modell

141S Model!

141S Model 2

1419 Modell 1428 Modell

1428 Model 2 729. all models

53 x 48 x 29

38 x 30 x 24

38 x 43 x 24

70 x 61 x 31

40x29x31

40x29X31

40X29X31

39 X 60 X 29

61 x 112 X 41

6S x 112 x 41

6S X 112 X 41

61 X 112 X42

61X 112x41

61 X 112 X 41

69x29X34

58X29X31

1600

750

390

650

2115

350

350

350

300

2400

1950

2300

2600

1950

2300

1200

21 (1401)

21

40

10

10

10

10

40

25

25

40

25 (1401)

25 (1401)

---

14

-----

-----

---

---

10

15

15

6

15 (Power
Receptacle)

15 (Power
Receptacle)

Printer

Printer

Alphameric
Optical
Reader

Alphamoric
Optical
Reader

Data

Paper

Unit

Paper
Tape
Reader

1009

1011

40X2~X31

640

100 total

100 total

---

---

-----

IS (subset)

---

r"pe

Data
Compressor

Accumu latar
Unit

1012

Part of 1405

Accessory to
1412 or 1419

7710

60X32X 37

60 x 32 x 37

29 X 40 X 33

39X17X21

32 x 70 X 38

3S0

530

570

700

100

500

15

SO

80 (1401)

14

14 (Power
Receptacle)

-----

14 (Power
Cord)

15

----40 (1405)

5 (1412 &
1419)

.25 (Dataset)

Punch

Communication Unit

IDENTITY

1404

Model Numbe.

Height X width X depth, in.

Weight. pound"

PHYSICAL

54

67 x 32

X

Maximum cable lengths
To Processing Unit
To Power Receptacle

---

---

To Indicated Unit

---

---

---

---

---

---

25 (1401)

50 - 110

50-110

50 -110

50-110

50- 110

50 - 110

50- 110

50 -110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50- 110

50 - 110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

O-SO

0-80

O-SO

0-80

0-80

0-80

O-SO

O-SO

0-80

0-80

O-SO

0-80

0-80

Temperature, of.

60-90

60-90

60-90

60- 90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

65-80

65-80

65-80

65-S0

65-80

65-80

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

50- 90

Humidity. %

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-S0

20-S0

20-65

20-65

20-65

20-65

20-65

20-65

20-80

20-80

20-S0

20-80

20-80

20-S0

20-80

20-80

5100

3000

2000

4000

7240

450

650

850

425

6300

8300

8300

S500

8300

8300

3900

3415

1000

4100

4100

10.S00

---

2S0

310

500

90

90

120

60

320

575

575

?

575

575

550

150

120

150

65

300

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

20S or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

115

208 or 230

208 or 230

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

+10. -8'7.

+ 10. -8'7.

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

±V, cycle

±y, cycle

±'/, cycle

±y, cycle

±y, cycle

±y, cycle

±y, cycle

±y, cycle

±y, cycle

±y, cycle

±y, cycle

±y, cycle

±y, cycle

Temperature,

0

F.

Storage
Ranges
Humidity. '7.

ATMOS.
PHERE

Working
Ranges

Heat dissipated. BTU/hr.

Air flow, elm.

Nominal

208 or 230

208 or 230

2000

0

500

208 or 230

20S or 230

20S or 230

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

60

60

±y, cycle

±y, cycle
l¢.3-line

Voltage

± 10'7.

Tolerance

60

Nominal
ELEC.
TRICAL

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

Cycles

±y, cycle

Tolerance

Phases and lines

Load KVA

3CjJ,

4-line

---

3CP, 4-line

lcp

lcp

3cp.4.line

3cp.4-line

3cp.4-11ne

3cp.4-line

3cp.4.!ine

lcp.3-11ne

3cp,4-line

3cp.4-11ne

3cp.4"line

3CP, 4-line

3CP, 4-line

3cp.4-line

3cp.4.1ine

lcp.3-line

lcp.3-11ne

lCP

3cp.4.line

Included in
1401 load

0.75

1.4

5.0

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.2

2.7

4.6

4.6

3.3

4.6

4.6

1.6

1.1

0.3

1.S

1.8

4.0

1 cp, 3-llne

0.6

--~

NOTES

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised

5/63

401:221.100
IBM 1401
Price Data

P~ICE DATA
§

221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS

CENTRAL
PROCESSOR

No.

Name

1401

Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model

PRICES
Monthly
Maintenance

Purchases

$

$

$

1,430
1,580
2,680
2,175
2,655
2,080
1,610
2,110
2,590

49.00
53.25
81.50
70.50
72.75
71.25
55.25
73.25
75.50

87,700
97,600
131,100
130,000
130,000
126,400
98,950
127,750
127,750

-230
-130
0
+50
+75
+75

-1.50
-1.50
0
+ 2.00
+3.00
+ 3.00

-4,000
-3,200
0
+ 2, 150
+ 2,550
+ 2,550

105
75
250
20
100
325
15

1.00
1. 75
13.75
0.50
2.50
9.50
0.50

3,935
2, 800
15,000
800
3,600
11,700
550

35
35

3.25
0

1,300
1,575

965
1,515

88.00
96.00

36,000
48,500

400
425

64.00
64.00

14,750
15,500

575
1,075
1,575

13.50
15.50
20.75

24,500
45,800
67,100

Processing Unit
(All prices include 4, 000
positions of core storage).
A3
B3
C3
D13
03
E3
F3
F23
F13

Card System
Expanded Card System
729 Tape/Card System
7330 Tape System
729 Tape System
7330 Tape/Card System
RAMAC/Card System
RAMAC/Card/7330 Tape
RAMAC/Card/729 Tape
Corrections to above
prices for other core
storage sizes:
1,400. positions
2,000 positions
4,000 positions
8,000 positions *
12,000 positions *
16,000 positions *

*
1060
4575
5730
1490
1990
5275
7600
2210
3580
STORAGE

Monthly
Rental

1405
Modell
Model 2

Add appropriate 1406
Core Storage Unit.

Optional Features
Advanced Programming
High- Low- Equal Compare
Processing Overlap
Bit Test
Column Binary
Multiply- Divide
Sense Switches
Compressed Tape
(#1060 required)
800 char. linch Tape Adapter
Disk Storage Unit
10,000,000 characters
20,000,000 characters
(#3327 controller req'd.)

1008
1009

Optional Features
Additional Access Arms
For 1405 Modell
For 1405 Model 2

1406
Modell
Model 2
Model 3

Core Storage
4,000 positions
8,000 positions
12,000 positions

CD 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised

5/63

401:221.101

IBM 1401

PRICE DATA (Contd.)
§

221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS

STORAGE
(CONTD.)

No.

1311
Model 2
Model 4

3281
6396
6400
8011
INPUTOUTPUT

1402
3550
4150, 1013
5890,5895
6040
1011
1012
1403
Modell
Model 2

4740
5380, 5381
3835
5585
6411, 6412
7246
1404

4740
3835
5585
5990, 5991
7246

Revised

5/63

Name

Disk Storage Drive
Additional on System
First on System (3339 Adapter
included)

PRICES
Monthly
Rental

Monthly
Maintenance

Purchases

$

$

$

375

29.00

17,000

1,000

74.25

46,650

50

3.25

2,400

35
40
40

.50
1. 75
.50

1,680
1,950
1,920

Card Read-Punch
Optional Features
Early Card Read
51-Column Feed
Punch Feed Read
Read Punch Release

550

45.00

30,000

10
60
'80
25

0
28.25
5.75
0.50

215
3,810
2,985
950

Paper Tape Reader
(#7080 adapter req'd.)
Tape Punch

500

42.50

22,400

465

35.50

20,850

725
835

172.00
187.75

32,900
36,450

75
275

0
8.75

3,125
11,050

20
375
275
75

0.50
34.50
10.75
0

750
12.600
12,400
60

1,635

249.00

89,330

75
20
375
250
75

0
0.50
34.50
21.75
0

3,125
750
12,600
14,000
60

175

14.75

8,800

Optional Features
Direct Seek (Model 4 only)
Scan Disk (Model 4 only; 4575
req'd on 1401)
Seek Overlap
Track Record (Model 4 only)

Printer
100 print positions
132 print positions
(#5540 control included)
Optional Features
Interchangeable Chain
Numerical Print
(#4740 req'd.)
Expanded Print Edit
Print Storage
Sel Tape Listing Feature
Space Suppression
Printer
(#5539 and #5563 controls
included)
Optional Features
Interchangeable Chain
Expanded Print Edit
Print Storage
Read- Compare
Space Suppression

1407

Console Inquiry Station
(#2272 adapter included)

729

Magnetic Tape Unit
Model II
Model IV
Model V

700
900
750

116.00
128.00
122.00

36,000
41,250
37,200

7330

Magnetic Tape Unit

450

52.25

22,000

7340
Model 2

Hypertape Drive

?

68, 700

1,050

PRICE DATA

401:221.102
PRICE DATA (Contd.)

§

221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS

No.

Name

PRICES
Monthly
Rental

$
INPUTOUTPUT
(CONTO.)

1412
2385
3610
5215
7061
7062
1419
3610
5201
7440
7061
7062
3791

1418
Modell
Model 3

91,400

15
250

2.25
19.00

600
9,750

50

2.00

• 2,250

40
65

1. 75
2.75

1,950
3,000

Magnetic Character Reader
Optional Features
Electronic Accumulation
(#5201 required)
Multiple Column Control
Split Field
Self- Checking Numbers:
Modulus 10
Modulus 11
Endorser
for 1412
for 1419

2,275

240.00

110,500

250

19.00

9,750

50
20

2.00
0.75

2,250
1,225

40
65

1. 75
2.75

1,950
3,000

350
375

31.50
32.00

17,150
18,350

2,600
2,900

160.00
190.00

120,300
133,800

125

5.00

5,950

125
125

16.00
16.00

5,450
5,450

3,000
3,300

190.00
220.00

138,600
152,100

Optical Character Reader
3 stackers
13 stackers

Alphameric Optical Reader
3 stackers
13 stackers
Optional Features
Mark Reading Station
(not with 6044)
Read Station (not with
4950)

125

5.00

5,950

125

16.00

5,450

1009

Data Transmission Unit

500

11.50

26,400

7710

Data Communication Unit

1,575

75.00

83,000

3460

Optional Features
CUal Communications
Interface
Internal Clock

15
145

0
1.25

600
5,000

Disc Storage Control

355

45.50

10,850

Serial I/O Adapter
(Required for 1009, lOll,
1412, 1418, 1419, or 7641,
only one of which may be
connected to a system.)

100

1.50

3,750

4703
'.

$

183.00

1428
Modell
Model 2

6044

\

Purchases

2,000

6045
6046

4950

I

$

Magnetic Character Reader
Optional Features
Document Counter
Electronic Accumulation
(#5215 required)
Multiple Column Select
Self- Checking Numbers:
Modulus 10
Modulus 11

Optional Features
Mark Reading Station
Additional Read Station
.093-inch characters
.130- inch characters

4950

Monthly
Maintenance

CONTROLLERS 3327
7080

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporotion and BNA Incorporated

Revised

5/63

401:221.103

IBM 1401

PRICE DATA (Contd.)
§

221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS

Name

No.

- - - - - - - - - - - - - _ ..-

CONTROLLERS
(CONTD.)

7641
7804
7805
7806
7807
7808

Hypertape Control Unit
Tape Intermix Units
729 IVs with 729 II/Vs
729 II/Vs with 729 IVs
7330s with 729 II/Vs
7330s with 729 IVs
7330s with 729 lIs/IVs/Vs
(Require 7804 or 7805)
Note:

Revised

5/63

PRICES
Monthly
Rental

Monthly
Maintenance

Purchases

$

$

$

?

160,000

2,500
0
0
45
45

0
0
0
0

0
0
2,250
2,250

45

0

2,250

Monthly maintenance charges apply to purchased equipment only;
they are based on a graduated scale, and the charges listed here
are for the first 3 years after installation.

IBM 1410
International Business Machines Corp.

c

c
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

IBM 1410
International Business Machines Corp.

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

402:001.001
IBM 1410
Contents

CONTENTS
1.

2.
3.

4.

5.
6.
7.

8.

9.

10.

futroduction
Data Structure . . .
System Configuration
Typical Card System
Minimum Tape System
Average Tape System.
Expanded Tape System
Auxiliary Storage System
Scientific System
lO-Tape General, Paired
futernal Storage:
1411
Core Storage (in Processing Unit)
1405
Disk Storage Unit
3326
Disk Storage Control
1301
Disk Storage Unit
7631
File Control . . •
1311
Disk Storage Drive
Central Processor:
1411
Processing Unit
Console
1415
Console....
fuput-Output: Punched Tape and Card
1011
Paper Tape Reader • • .
1414
fuput-Output Synchronizer •
1442
Card Reader . . . . . . .
1402
Card Read-Punch (Reader)
1414
fuput-Output Synchronizer
1402
Card Read- Punch (Punch) .
fuput-Output Synchronizer.
1414
fuput-Output: Printers
1403
Printer, Models 1 and 2. .
1414
Input-Output Synchronizer.
1403
Printer, Model 3 • . . . •
1414
fuput-Output Synchronizer •
1415
Console I/O Printer.
fuput-Output: Magnetic Tape
729
Magnetic Tape Unit. . ,.
1414
fuput-Output Synchronizer. •
Magnetic Tape Unit . • • .
7330
1414
fuput-Output Synchronizer •
fuput-Output: Other
1009
Data Transmission Unit.
1014
Remote fuquiry Unit • .
1414
fuput-Output Synchronizer
1419
Magnetic Character Reader
4900
Magnetic Character Reader Adapter
1412
Magnetic Character Reader • • • •
7750
Programmed Transmission Control
7864
Telegraph I/O . . . • • . . • . .

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

402:011
402:021 Revised
402:031 Revised
402:031. 101
402:031.102
402:031.103
402:031.104
402:031.105
402:031.106
402:031.107

.,

402:041 Revised
402:042
402:042.4
402:043
402:043.4
402:044
402:051 Revised
402:061
402:071
402:071.4
414:071 (IBM 1440)
402:072
402:072.4
402:073
402:073.4
402:081
402:081.4
402:082
402:082.4
402:083
402:091
402:091.4
402:092
402:092.4
402:101
402:102
• 402:102.4
402:103
402:103.4
402:104
402:105
402:106
5/63

IBM 1410

402:001.002
CONTENTS (Contd.)

11.

12.
13.

14.

15.
16.

17.

18.

19.
20.

21.
22.

5/63

Simultaneous Operations. . • • • • •
1414
Input-Output Synchronizer .
5730
Processing Overlap. • . •
Dual Synchronizer Adapter
3470
5620.
Priority Feature
Instruction List. . • • . .
Coding Specimen:
Basic Autocoder
Autocoder.
FORTRAN ••
COBOL
Data Codes:
Internal
Printer
Card .
Collating Sequence
Problem Oriented Facilities
Process Oriented Languages:
FORTRAN • • •
COBOL • • • •
Machine Oriented Languages:
Basic Autocoder
AutQcoder • • .
Program Translators:
Basic Autocoder
Autocoder.
Operating Environment • •
System Performance
Worksheet Data
Generalized File Processing •
Sorting • • . •
Matrix Inversion
Physical Characteristics
Price Data • . . . . • . •

402:111 Revised
402:111.1
402:111.1
402.111.1
402.111.1
402.121
402:131
402:132
402:133
402:134
402:141
402:142
402:.143
402:144
402:151 Revised
402:161
402:162
402:171
402:172
402:181
402:182
402:191
402:201 Revised
402:201.011
402:201.1
402:201.2
402:201..3
402:211 Revised
402:221 Revised

402:011.100
•

_

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 1410
Introduction

REPQRTS

INTRODUCTION
§011.
The IBM 1410 is a small to medium scale, solid-state computer system oriented
toward solving business data processing problems. System rentals range from approximately
$7,000 to $40,000 per month, and most installations will probably fall within the $12,000 to
$20,000 range.
The 1410 is compatible with the IBM 1401 to the extent that built-in 1401 compatibility
circuits enable many 1401 machine language programs to be run directly on a 1410. The
increased speed and power of the 1410 cannot be fully utilized in this mode of operation,
however, and 1401 programs that use the Processing Overlap, Column Binary, Compressed
Tape, Punch Feed Read, or Serial Input-Output features cannot be run on the 1410. The
buffers for card read and card punch operations for the 1410 are Significantly different from
those for the 1401.
Programs written for the 1410 can be operated unaltered on the more powerful 7010
with an identical configuration of input-output devices. Programs for the 1410 which use
IBM 1405 Disk Storage, 1412/1419 Magnetic Ink Character Readers, or the Program
Addressable Clock will not operate on the 7010 because these 1410 input-output devices are
not available for connection to the 7010.
The core storage of the 1410 can consist of 10,000, 20,000, 40,000, 60,000, or
80,000 character pOSitions, with each pOSition containing 6 data bits, a parity bit, and word
mark bit, The core storage cycle time is 4.5 microseconds and can be reduced to 4.0
microseconds by using the optional Accelerator feature. In addition, up to 5 disc storage
units with a total capacity of up to 280,000,000 characters can be connected. The 1301 Disk
Storage Unit and the 1311 Disk Storage Drive each utilize acomb-like access mechanism which
makes it possible to access corresponding bands on all discs simultaneously. The 1405 is the
familiar RAMAC unit which utilizes one read-write mechanism to search all disc surfaces
(i. e., its operation is Similar to that of a juke box).
The central processor is a variable word-length, alphameric processor with add-tostore logic, which utilizes a five-character address structure. Instructions contain from
1 to 12 characters. Input-output, arithmetic, and data transfer instructions are usually
10, 11, and 12 characters in length, respectively. Although 15 index registers are prOVided,
their usefulness is limited because no special instructions are available for incrementing or
testing them. Floating pOint arithmetic is available on an RPQ (Request for Price Quotation)
basi~ only.
The application of variable length field definitions to a data processing problem should
be given very serious consideration. The main advantage of variable length fields is that the
required input-output time is reduced. This advantage is a very valid consideration if the
input-output time is the limiting factor for the total time reqUired. However, in reducing the
input-output time by using variable length fields, the additional data manipulation required to
utilize these fields increases the required central processor time.
An alternative method to reduce to a minimum the total time requirements for a
problem is to use a variable length record technique employing combinations of variable and
fixed fields. That is, any fields (usually numeriC) that require a great deal of manipulation
are assigned fixed field length in fixed locations in the record, and any fields (usually
alphabetic) that require very little manipulation form the variable portion of the record.
Using this method effectively reduces the total time requirements for the majority of
applications.
The 1410 instruction repertoire is characterized by: 64 data move instructions;
versatile editing capabilities; table look-up capability; basic arithmetic instructions, including multiply and divide; comparison instructions; and logical branching. The variable

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

IBM 1410

402:011.101
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)

§Oll.
"length operand fields are defined by word marks, enabling the program to be designed for
the data rather than the machine.
The 1410 can operate with a variety of peripheral units, including magnetic ink
character readers, telegraphic equipment, and remote inquiry units, in addition to magnetic
tape, paper tape, and unit record equipment.
Punched card input-output and printer output are buffered; thus internal processing
can be overlapped with card reading, punching, and printing. Unless the Processing Overlap
feature is installed, however, magnetic tape reading and writing cannot occur simultaneously,
either with each other or with internal processing. Additional facilities for expanding the
degree of simultaneity available in a 1410 system include priority interrupt and a second
input-output channel. With two channels and ProceSSing Overlap, simultaneous read, compute,
and write operations are possible.
The 1402 combination Card Read-Punch unit provides the 1410 system with a peak
reading capability of 800 cards per minute and a peak punching capability of 250 cards per
minute. A 1442 card reader, which can read 400 cards per minute, can also be connected
to the 1410 system (see 414:071). The 1011 Paper Tape Reader has a peak speed of 500
characters per second.
The 1403 Modell and 2 Printers have 100 and 132 print positions, respectively.
Each uses a 48-character print set and operates at a peak speed of 600 alphameric, singlespaced lines per minute. The 1403 Model 3 Printer has 132 print positions with a 48-character
print set and operates at a peak speed of 1,100 alphameric lines per minute.
The IBM 729 series and 7330 Magnetic Tape Units can be used in the 1410 system.
Peak transfer rates can range from 7, 200 to 90,000 characters per second. The effective
transfer rates can range from 6,100 to 50,000 characters per second using 1,000-character
blocks. Since the effective transfer rate of core storage is 111,000 characters per second,
very little data manipulation during tape read or write time is possible when using the higher
speed tape units. Up to 20 tape units (10 per channel) can be connected, and no more than 2
tape read or write operations can occur simultaneously with internal processing.
The IBM 1412 or mM 1419 Magnetic Ink Character Readers can be connected to a
1410 system to provide input from paper or card documents inscribed with magnetic ink.
A wide range of telegraphic equipment is available for connection to the 1410, including the powerful 7750 Program Transmission Control, the 7864 Telegraph Input-Output, the
1009 Data Transmission Unit, and the 1014 Remote Inquiry Unit.
Autocoder, the basic machine oriented coding system for the 1410, is available in
two versions: BaSic Autocoder and Autocoder. Autocoder is more powerful than BasIc
Autocoder in that it provides macro-instructions, longer literals, and the means to call on
library routines. However, a minimum of 4 magnetic tape units and 20,000 pOSitions of core
storage are required for the assembly of Autocoder programs. The Autocoder library includes
the Input-Output Control System (IOCS), which provides control and macro-instructions that
handle reading and writing, tape blocking and unblocking, file labeling, and magnetic tape
error detection.
The Autocoder library also includes the following programs:

4/63

e

Simulation of the IBM 650; Enables the 1410 to assume the characteristics of
the 650.

•

1410 Sort 10: Generalized program for ordering records of an unordered file
on either magnetic tape or a RAMAC disk file.

II

1410 Sort/Merge 11: Generalized program for ordering and merging tape
records; does not use Processing Overlap or the Priority Feature.

402:011.102

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
§

OIl.
o

1410 Sort/Merge 12: Generalized program for ordering and merging tape
records; uses Processing Overlap and Priority Features.

o

1410 Card Report Program Generator: Facilitates the preparation of report
programs.
1410 Tape Report Program Generator: Facilitates the preparation of report
programs for tape files.

o

Seven 1405 and six 1301 Disk Storage utility programs which provide the basic
facilities for program testing, and service functions for production runs.

The library also contains a Procedure for Automatic Testing (PAT) which can include
any or all of the following:
o

Tracing routine: Traces each instruction within a specified area.

o

Snapshot routine: Prints out the contents of selected areas of core storage
following the execution of any instruction in the program being tested.

o

Post Mortem: Prints out the entire contents of 1410 core storage.

o

Clear Storage: Sets all of core storage to blank.

o

Tape Duplicate: Duplicates data on one tape upon another.

Both COBOL-61 and FORTRAN II have been implemented for the 1410. Both the
COBOL and FORTRAN compilers are on the Processor Operating System Tape, both produce
Autocoder programs which must be translated to 1410 machine language by the Autocoder
translator, and both require at least 20,000 positions of core storage and 4 magnetic tape
units in the translating 1410 system. IBM 1410 COBOL includes a number of useful electives,
such as the COMPUTE and ENTER verbs; but several significant features of Required COBOL61, including the EXAMINE verb and the COBOL library, have not been implemented for the
1410. FORTRAN II for the 1410 is distinguished by the fact that the programmer can specify
any deSired degree of precision for the internal representation of both fixed and floating point
data items.
The 1410 FORTRAN language includes complete facilities for defining and using subroutines and functions, but does not allow Boolean operations, complex arithmetic, or
symbolic coding.

\

"

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

402:021.100
II·STANDARD

II

R£PORTS
ED
P

IBM 1410
Data Structure

DATA STRUCTURE
.2

§021.
.1

STORAGE LOCATIONS

INFORMATION FORMATS
Type of Information

Representation
1
1
I
1

Name of Location

Size

Purpose or Use

Character:

8 bits

alphamerics.

Numeral:
Alphabetic:
Instruction:
Number:

Sector:

200 char.

Block:

Band:
Disc:

5 sectors
400 bands

1405 DSU record
location.
1405 DSU.
1405 DSU.

Band:
Disc:

2,800 char.
500 bands

1301 DSU.
1301 DSU.

Band:

2,000 char.
:500 bands

1311 DSU.
1311 DSU.

Disc:

© 1963

char.
char.
to 12 char.
to N char, ended by
word mark.
1 to N char, ended by
record mark or group
mark with word mark.

Note: N is limited by size of core storage.

by Auerbach Corporation and. BNA Incorporated

Revised 4/63

402:031.101

IBM 1410
System Configuration

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§

1.

03l.
TYPICAL CARD SYSTEM
Deviations:

none.

Rental:

$6, 115 per month.
Rental

Equipment
Core Storage: 10,000 positions }

$3,800
Processing Unit: 1411 Model 1

250

. Console Typewriter

Synchronizer: 1414 Model 3

675

Card Read-Punch
Reads:
800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

615

Printer: 600 lines/min.

775

Optional Features Included:. • • • • • • . • . . • . • . . . . . • none.
Total

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

~

Revised 4/63

402:031.102
§

IBM 1410

031.

II.

MINIMUM TAPE SYSTEM
Deviations: .
Rental:

none.
$8, 415 per month.
Equipment
~ore

Storage: 10,000 positions }

Rental
--'$3,800

Processing Unit: 1411 Model 1

Optional Features Included:

Console Typewriter

250

Synchronizer: 1414 Model 3

675

Card Read-Punch
Reads:
800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

615

Printer: 600 lines/min.

775

Synchronizer: 1414 Model 2

500

Magnetic Tape Units (4):
7,200 or 20,016 char/sec.

1,800

none.
Total

4/63 Revised

~

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

402:031.1 03

031.

Ill.

AVERAGE TAPE SYSTEM
Deviations: .

none.

Rental:

$12, 240 per month.
Equipment

Rental

Core Storage: 20,000 positions )
$4,550
Processing Unit: 1411 Model 2

Console Typewriter

250

Synchronizer: 1414 Model 3

675

Card Read - Punch
Reads:
800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

615

Printer: 600 lines/min.

775

Synchronizer: 1414 Modell

975

MagnetiC Tape Units (6):
15,000 or 41,667 char/sec.

Optional Features Included: •• . • • • • • • • . • • •• . • . . • Processing Overlap

200

Total

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4,200

$12,240

Revised 4/63

402:031.104
§

IBM 1410.

031.

IV.

EXPANDED TAPE SYSTEM
Deviations: •

none.

Rental:

$19,060 per month.
Equipment
Core Storage: 40,000 positions

1

Rental

$5,400
Processing Unit: 1411 Model 3

Console Typewriter

250

Synchronizer: 1414 Model 3

675

Card Read-Punch
Reads: 800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

615

Printer: 600 lines/min.

775

Synchronizer: 1414 Modell

975

Magnetic Tape Units (6):
15,000,41,667, or 60,000
char/sec.

Synchronizer: 1414 Modell

975

Magnetic Tape Units (6):
15,000, 41,667 or 60,000
char/sec.
Optional Features Included: . • . • . . . • . • . • • . • . • • .•

Processing Overlap
Priority Feature
!SOO cPi FeatuJ:'e
on 729 Model IV (2)

4,500

200
125
70
Total

4/63 Revised

4,500

$19,060

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§

402:031.105

031.

v.

AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM
Deviations: .

none.

Rental:

$15,365 per month.
Rental

Equipment
Disk Storage and Controller:
1301 Modell;
28, 000, 000 characters

$3,000

Core Storage: 20,000 Positions )
4,550
Processing Unit: 1411 Model 2

Console Typewriter

250

Synchronizer: 1414 Model 3

675

Card Read-Punch
Reads: 800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

615

Printer: 600 lines/min.

775

Synchronizer: 1414 Modell

975

Magnetic Tape Units (6): 729 II
15,000 or 41,667 char/sec.

4,200

Optional Features Included: . . . • . . . • • . • • . . . • . • • • Processing Overlap
Priority Feature

200
125
Total

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

$15,365

Revised 4/63

402:031.106

IBM 1410

§031.
VI.

SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM
Deviations: .

floating point hardware available on
RPQ basis only; not included here.

Rental:

$15,790 per month.

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••

Rental

Equipment
Core Storage: 80,000 positions }

$8,100
Processing Unit: 1411 Model 5

Console Typewriter

250

Synchronizer: 1414 Model 3

675

Card Read-Punch
Reads: 800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

615

Printer: 600 lines/min.

775

/

Synchronizer: 1414 Model 1

Magnetic Tape Units (6): 729 II
15,000 or 41,667 char/sec.

Optional Features Included: . . • • . . • . . • . • . . . . . . . • Processing Overlap.

4, 200

200
Total

4/63 Revised

975

$15, 790

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§

402:031.107

031.

VIm lO-TAPE GENERAL, PAIRED CONFIGURATION
Deviations from Standard Configuration
On-line: • • . • . . . . . . . • . •

card reader 700 cards/min. faster.
on-line Card Punch.
floating point hardware available
on RPQ basis only; not included here.
9 more index registers.
Rental: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $23, 560 per month.

On- Line Equipment

Equipment

Core Storage: 80,000 positions

1

Processing Unit: 1411 Model 5

r

$8,100

Console Typewriter

250

Synchronizer: 1414 Model 3

675

Card Read- Punch
Reads: 800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

615

Synchronizer: 1414 Modell

975

Magnetic Tape Units (4)
22,500 or 62,500 char/sec.

Synchronizer: 1414 Modell

Magnetic Tape Units (4)
22,500 or 62,500 char/sec.
Optional Features Included: • . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . Processing Overlap
Priority Feature
TOTAL On- Line
TOTAL Off- Line
GRAND TOTAL

© 1963

Rental

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3,600

975

3,600
200
125
$19,115
4,445
$23,560
Revised 4/63

402:031.108
§

IBM 1410

031

VIm 10-TAPE GENERAL, PAIRED CONFIGURATION (Contd.)
Deviations from Standard Configuration
Off-line:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . magnetic tape 10,000 char/sec. slower.
printer 100 lines/min. faster.
Card Reader 300 cards/min. faster.
Card Punch 150 cards/min. faster.
no Console typewriter output.

Off-line Equipment

Equipment

Rental

Core Storage: 8,000 positions.

$2,130
Processing Unit:
1401 Model E4.

Card Read-Punch
Reads: 800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

550

Printer: 600 lines/min.

775

7330 Magnetic Tape Units (2)
7,200 or 20,016 char/sec.

900

Optional Features Included: • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Low-Equal Compare.
Sense Switches.
TOTAL

4/63 Revised

75
15
$4,445

402:041.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 1410
Internal Storage
Care Storage

INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE

§

041.

.1

. 11

. 12
.13

.29

.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data:
Cycling rate: .
Identity: .
Core Storage.
Conversion factor:.
1411 Processing Unit Models
Data rate: . . . . . .
1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
Compound data rate:.
Basic Use: . . . . . . working storage.
.3
DATA CAPACITY

GENERAL

Description

.31

The 1411 Processing Unit can include from 10,000
to 80,000 character positions of core storage.
Models 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 contain 10,000, 20,000,
40,000, 60,000, and 80,000 positions, respectively.
Cycle time is 4.5 microseconds for each access of
one alphameric character. Each character position
consists of eight bits: Six data bits, one odd parity
bit, and one word mark bit.

Char acters:
Instructions:

14 months as of February,
1962.

Availability: .
First Delivery:

.16

Reserved Storage
Purpose
Index
registers:

Number of locations

Locks
none.

.2

75 (can also be used
as working storage)
PHYSICAL FORM

. 21

Storage Medium: .

. 23

Storage Phenomenon:

. 24

Recording Permanence

. 28

none.

ACCESS TIMING

.52

Simultaneous
Operations: . . . . . none .

.53

Access Time Parameters and Variations

.531 For uniform access
Access time:
Cycle time:
For data unit of: .

'! J.lsec.
4.5/J.sec'.
1 character.

.6

CHANGEABLE
STORAGE:. . . . . . no.

.7

AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

. 71

Data Transfer
Pair of storage units possible.
With self: . . . . . . yes.

yes .
no .
no.
no .
no.

.72

Transfer Load Size
With self: . . . . ..

Access Techniques

.281 Recording method:
. 283 TyPe of access: ..

CONTROLLER: .

1

all possible configurations
are shown above.

Arrangement of Heads: 1 access device .

. magnetic core .
direction of magnetization.

Rules for combining
modules: . . . . . .

1

.Sl

December, 1961.

.241 Data erasable by
program:. . . .
. 242 Data regenerated
constantly:. . .
. 243 Data volatile: . .
.244 Data permanent:.
. 245 Storage changeable:.

Minimum
Maximum
Storage
Storage
Modell Model 2 Model 3 Model 4 Model 5.
variable (1 to N characters, limited by storage
capacity)
10,000
20,000
40,000
60,000
80,000
variable (1 to 12 characters).

Modules:

Accelerator Feature: Reduces the cycle time from
.32
4.5 microseconds to 4.0 microseconds for each
access of one alphameric character and reduces the
number of word cycles for some data operations.
This feature produces an internal speed-up of approx- .4
imately 23 per cent, with a resulting increase of 15
per cent to 23 per cent in the data throughput, by
.5
improving the timing of 39 instructions.

. 15

1 character .
222,222 cycles/sec.
8 bits/character.
222,222 char/sec.
222,222 char/sec .

Module and System Sizes

Identity:
Words:

Optional Features

. 14

Potential Transfer Rates

.73
. coincident current .
uniform.

© 1963

1 to N characters, limited
by storage capacity .

Effective Transfer Rate
With self: . . . . . . . 111,000 char/sec.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised 4/63

IBM 1410

402:041.800
§041.

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Conflicting
commands:
Improper
commands:
Recording of
data:
Recovery of
data:

Check or
Interlock

Action

limit check
parity check
send parity bit.

stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.

not possible.
check

stop & alarm.

record parity bit.
pari ty check

stop & alarm.

.---_ _ _ A

4/63 Revised

I AUERBACH I @IJ

402:042.100
IBM 1410
Internal Storage
1405 Disk Storage Unit

INTERNAL STORAGE: 1405 DISK STORAGE UNIT
§

.22

042.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

1405 Disk Storage Unit.
Models 1 & 2.
DSU.

. 12

Basic Use: .

auxiliary storage.

. 13

Ph;tsical Dimensions

.222 Drum or disc
Diameter:
Thickness or length:
Number on shaft: .
.23

Storage phenomenon:

Description

.24

Recording Permanence

This store, often referred to as a RAMAC unit, consists of 25 or 50 thin magnetic discs on a common
vertical shaft. Bach disc has 200 bands on the top
face and 200 on the bottom. Bach band is divided
into 5 sectors, each capable of holding 1 record
with a fixed length of 200 alphameric characters.
The Modell has 25 discs with a total capacity of
50, 000 records or 10,000, 000 characters. The
Model 2 has 50 discs with a capacity of 100, 000
records or 20,000,000 characters. Up to five units
can be connected to a system.

.241 Data erasable by program: . . . . . . . .
.242 Data regenerated constantly: .
.243 Data volatile:
.244 Data permanent: ;
.245 Storage changeable:

Access is by means of a fork-shaped arm with two
read-write heads, one head serving each face of the
disc: The arm moves vertically to the selected
diSC, then horizontally to the selected band. A
seven-position indelible address on the disc is used
to verify automatically that the record accessed is
the one called for by the program. The "write disc
check" command may be used for a programmed
comparison of data in core storage with data previously written on the disc. Access time varies from
O. 2 to 800 milliseconds; the average for pure random processing is approximately 600 milliseconds.
The peak transfer rate is 22, 500 characters per
second; the bulk transfer rate with optimum arrangement of data is 8, 400 characters per second.
Two Additional Access Arms per unit are available
as optional features. These arms make it possible
to seek three different records on one unit simultaneously, but only one read or write operation at a
time can be performed on one channel. The maximum total number of access arms which a 1410 system can have is twelve.

. 14

Availability:

14 months, as of February,
1962.

. 15

First Delivery:

with 1410 system, February, 1962.

.16

Reserved Storage:

none.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

. 21

Storage Medium:. . . . mUltiple disc .

.25

24 inches.
thin.
Modell, 25 discs.
Model 2, 50 discs.
magnetization ..

yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.

Data volume per band of 1 track
Words: . . .
Characters:
Digits: . . .
Instructions:
Records: . .

variable.
1,000.
1, ODD.
variable.

5.

,26

Bands per phlsical unit: 400 per disc (200 each
side).

.27

Interleaving Levels:

.28

Access Technigues

.281 Recording method: .
. 283 Type of access
Descri2tion of stage
Remove head from unwanted disc:
Move head to selected
disc:
Move head to selected
band:
Wait for start of selected record:
Wait for transfer of
record:

.29

none.

two magnetic heads on moving access arm .
Possible starting stage
if new disc is selected.
no.
if same disc was previously
selected.
if same band was previously
selected .
no.

Potential Transfer Rates

.291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates:
Bit rate per track:
,.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data: . . .
Conversion factor:
Gain factor:
Data rate:

©'1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1,200 rpm.
157,500 bits/sec/track.
character.
7 bits/char.
1.
22,500 char/sec.

Reprinted 4/63

IBM 1410

402:042.300
§

042.

.3

DATA CAPACITY

.31

Module and System Sizes

.513 Stacks that can access
any particular location: . . . . . . . .
. 514 Accessible locations,
records
Maximum
Storage

Minimum
Storage
Identity:
Discs:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Records:
Bands:
Modules:
.32

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1405, Modell
25
variable
10,000,000
variable
50,000
10,000
1

Rules for Combining
Modules: . . . . . .

1405, Model 2.
50.
variable.
20,000,000.
variable.
100,000.
20,000.
1.

5 modules max;
Modell or 2.

Model 1 Model 2
By single stack
With no movement: . . . . . .
5
5.
50,000.
With all movement:. . . . . . 25,000
By all stacks, with no movement
Per module, standard: . . .
10
10.
Per module, with 3 access
arms: . . . . . .
30
30.
Per system, max:
120
120.
.515 Relationship between
staCiXs and locations: . one stack serves top faces
of all discs; other stack
serves bottom faces.
.52

Simultaneous Operations
A:

.4

CONTROLLER

. 41

Identity:

. 42

Connection to S:t:stem

Connection to Device

.....

.441 Size of load:
. 442 Input-output area:
.443 Input-output area
access: .
. 444 Input-output area
lockout: ..
. 445 Synchronization: .
. 447 Table control:
. 448 Testable conditions:

.5

ACCESS TIMING

. 51

Arrangement of Heads

.511 Number of heads
Stacks per system:
Stacks per module:
Stacks per yoke: . .
Yokes per module: .
. 512 Stack movement: . . .

Access Time Parameters and Variations

.532 Variation in access time

~
Remove head from
unwanted disc:
Move to selected
disc:
Move to selected
band: ...
Wait for start of selected record:
Read one record, or:
Read one band:
Total

one 200-char record or
one 1, OOO-char band.
core storage.
each character.
yes, for full block.
automatic .
none .
not ready; access arm
busy; invalid character;
wrong length record; no
transfer.

waiting for access to specified location .
searching for access by
pattern matching .
reading.
recording .

b
= O.
c+d
= at most 1 per channel.
a + c + d = at most n, where n is the number of access arms in the system (maximum of
12) .
.53

.431 Devices per controller: up to 5.
.432 Restrictions:
maximum of 5 Disk Storage
Units per system; 1405's
cannot be included in the
same 1410 system with
1301's.
. 44 Data Transfer Control

4/63 Reprinted

C:
D:

No more than 1 per I/O
channel.
none.

.422 Off-Line:
. 43

B:
Disk Storage Control.
#3326.

.421 On-Line: .

3 max •

Variation
(msec)

Example
(msec)

o or 90 to 250
o or 100 to 315
o or 90 to 250

200 .

0.2 to 50.2
10
50
10.2 to 915

.6

CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . none.

.7

AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

.71

Data Transfer

200 .
200 .
25.
10 .

635 .

Pair of storage units possibilities
24 max.
6 max.
2.
1 standard; 3 max .
vertically to selected disc,
then horizontally to
selected band.

With self:
no.
With core storage: . . yes.

.72

Transfer Load Size
With core storage:

in units of 1 record or 1
band.

INTERNAL STORAGE: 1405 DISK STORAGE UNIT

402:042.730

§ 042 .

. 73

Effective Transfer Rate
With core storage:

.8

8,400 char/sec.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Conflicting commands:
Inoperable access
arm:
Wrong-length record:
Wrong record selected:

none.
parity check·
send parity bit.

indicator & alarm.

interlock

walt.

check
check

indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm.

address comparison

Any disc unit error:
Recovery of data:

check
parity check and
address comparison

try again; if stilI
wrong. set indicator
& alarm.
indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm.

• ··Write disc check·· can be programmed for complete checking
of w;rite operations.

© 1963

Reprinted 4/63

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

"

402:043.100
•

STANDARD

II

REPORTS
ED
P

IBM 1410
Internal Storage

1301 Disk Storage Unit
INTERNAL STORAGE: 1301

§

DISK STORAGE UNIT

043.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

.13

Description

is required, the total reference cycle time is reduced to 88 milliseconds. Using the Read/Write
Cylinder feature, an effective bulk transfer rate of
82,300 characters per second can be achieved.
Disk Storage Unit.
1301 Models 1 and 2.

Checking features include a parity check upon data
received by the File Control, a comparison of the
record address on the disc with the address in the
stored program, and a wrong-length record indicator. Three check characters are generated and recorded during each write operation. When the record is read, the check characters are automatically
generated again and compared with the ones read
from the disc. As in the 1405 RAMAC unit, a programmed comparison of data recorded OIl a disc
with data in core storage can be carried out by means
of the "write disc check" instruction.

The 1301 Modell Disk Storage Unit can store up to
28,000,000 alphameric characters. The Model 2 has.
2 modules on a single vertical shaft and can store up
to 56,000,000 characters. Each module contains 25
discs; 40 of the 50 disc surfaces are used for data
storage. Each module is served by a comb-like
access mechanism. Forty data read-write heads,
one for each data surface, move horizontally between
the discs. The entire access mechanism moves as
one unit, so the horizontal position of all the heads
serving a given module is always the same. The
40 baJ;1ds, 1 on each disc surface, that can be read
or recorded upon when the access mechanism is
in any given position are referred to as a "cylinder".
There are 250 bands on each disc surface. The size
and number of records stored in each hand are variable. Their formats are controlled by a format surface that can be written upon only by a special instruction after manually releasing a write lock.
Each of the 250 bands on the format surface controls
the record format of the entire cylinder in the corresponding position. A different record format can
be used in each of the 250 cylinders in each module.
Data can be recorded in either of two modes. In the
move mode, only the six data bits and one space bit
are recorded for each character. In the load mode,
word mark bits are also recorded, and a total of
nine bits is used for each character. All storage capacities and transfer rates quoted in this report are
based on the move mode; they will be about sevenninths as high when the load mode is used.
Each band contains one six-character home address
plus one six-character record address for each record stored in it. The storage capacity of each band
is 2,838 - 38R characters, where R is the number of
records in the band. Twenty-four 80-character records, for example, could be stored in one band. Instructions are provided to read or record a single
record, a full band with or without record addresses,
or, with the optional Read/Write Cylinder feature
a full cylinder of up to 112,000 characters.

1301 Disk Storage Units can be connected to one or
both of the 1410's I/O channels; the total number of
1301 units is limited to five in either case. Model 1301,
1311, and 1405 Disk Storage Units cannot be used in
the same 1410 system. The 1301 has larger capacities, faster access, higher transfer rates, more
flexible formats, and more checking features than
the earlier 1405 RAMAC unit.
.14

Availability:

14 months as of February,
1962.

.15

First Delivery:

July, 1962.

.16

Reserved Storage
Number of locations

Locks

Clocking:
Spares:
Format:
Addresses:

1 disc surface
8 disc surfaces
1 disc surface
42 + 38R char/track,
for R records/
track

not addressable.
not addressable.
manual lock.
none.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Storage Medium:

.22

Physical Dimensions

. mUltiple magnetic discs.

.222 Drum or Disc
Diameter:
Thickness or length:
Number on shaft:. .

.23
Time for access mechanism movement ranges from
zero (for a record in a previously-selected cylinder) .24
to 180 miliiseconds. Maximum rotational delay time
is 34 milliseconds. Total reference cycle time to
.241
read a randomly-placed record of 270 characters,
up-date it, re-write it, and execute a programmed
.242
write check is 248 milliseconds. If no access motion

,CD 1963

Purpose

Storage Phenomenon: .

24 inches.
thin.
Modell, 25 discs.
Model 2, 50 discs.
magnetiza tion.

Recording Permanence
Data erasable by
instructions: . .
Data regenerated
constantly: . . .

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

yes.
no.

Reprinted 4/63

402:043.243
§

IBM 1410

043 .

. 243 Data volatile:
. 244 Data permanent: . .
. 245 Storage changeable:
.25

no.
no.
no.

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

.42

Connection to Sxstem

....

File Control.
#7631 Models 1 and 3 .

Data Volume per Band of 1 Track
Words: . . .
Characters:

variable.
2,838 - 38R,
for R records/track.
2,838 - 38R.
variable.
variable.

Digits: . . .
Instructions: .
Records: . . .
.26

Bands per Physical Unit: 250 per disc surface.

.27

Interleaving Levels:.

. 28

Access Techniques

. 281 Recording method: .

1.

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:

.43

2; 1 J:le!-" I/O channel.
#7631 Model 3 permits
shared use of 1301s with
an IDM 7000 series system
(except 7072).

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 5.
. 432 Restrictions:. , . . . . maximum of 5 Disk Storage
Units per system; 1301 and
1405 Disk Storage Units cannot be used in same system .
.44 Data Transfer Control

magnetic heads on access
arms which move horizontally in unison.

· 441 Size of load: . . . . . . 1 record of! to 2,800 chars,
1 band of up to 2,800 chars,
or (with optional Read/Write
Cylinder) 1 cylinder of up to
.283 Type of access
112,000 characters.
Description of stage
Possible starting stage
.442 Input-output area:
core storage .
Move heads to selected
. 443 Input-output area
band: . . . . . .
if new band is selected.
access: . . . . .
each character,
Wait for selected
· 444 Input- output area
record: . . . . .
if same band was previously
yes, for full block (no locklockout: . . . . .
selected.
out in overlap mode).
Read one record or
. 445 Synchronization: .
automatic .
one band: . . . . ,
no.
.447 Table control: ..
none.
1.448 Testable conditions: .
not ready; access in motion;
'. 29 Potential Transfer Rates
data check; wrong record .
selected; no transfer;
. 291 Peak bit rates
wrong length record .
Cycling rates:
1,790 rpm.
Bit rate per track:
630, 000 bits/ sec.
·5
ACCESS TIMING
.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data: . . . . .
Conversion factor (bits
per unit): . . . . .
Gain factor (tracks
per band): .
Data rate: . . . . .

.3

DATA CAPACITY

.31

Module and Sxstem Sizes

7 (9 in load mode).
1.
90,000 char/sec.

Minimum
Storage
Identity:
Discs:
Words:

0
0

Characters
(max):
0
Instructions: 0
Records:
0
Bands:
0
Modules:
0

i.32

Maximum
Storage
1301 Modell 1301 Model 2 5 13015,
Model 2
20 data
40 data
200 data
variable
28,000,000
variable
Variable
10,000
1

Rules for Combining
Modules: . . . . . .

4/63 Reprinted

· 51

character.

56,000,000

280,000,000

20,000
2

100,000
10

up to 5 1301s, Modell
and/or Model 2, in any
combination.

Arrangement of Heads

· 511 Number of Stacks
SUicks per system: .
40 to 400.
40.
Stacks per module: .
40.
Stacks per yoke: . .
1.
Yokes per module: .
horizontal .
. 512 Stack movement:. . .
.513 Stacks that can access
any particular location: . . . . . . . .
1.
. 514 Accessible locations
By single stack
With no movement: . 1 band.
With all movement: . 250 bands.
By all stacks
With no movement: . 40 bands per module.
40 to 400 bands per system.
.515 Relationship between
stacks and locations:. first 4 digits of 6-digit home
address for each band denote head and band
number.
· 52

Simultaneous Operations
A:
B: .
C:
a + b + c = at most 1. per
b +c
= at most 1 per

seeking a specified location.
reading.
recording.
Disk Storage Unit module.
File Control.

INTERNAL STORAGE: 1301 DISK STORAGE UNIT

§

402:043.530

043.

.53

. 73
Access Time Parameters and Variations

.532 Variation in access time
Variation,
~
(msec)
Move head to selected
band: . . . . . .
o or 50 to ISO
Wait for selected
record: . . . . .
o to 34
Read one record:.
0.4 to 34
Read one band:
34.
Total: . . . .
0.4 to 24S

.6

CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . . no.

.7

AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

.71

Data Transfer
With self:
With core storage: .

. 72

With core storage (using
optional Read/Write
cylinder):. . . • . . 82,300 char/sec.
With core storage (without Read/Write
Cylinder): . . . . . 42,000 char/sec.

Example,
(msec)
160.
17.

4.

.S

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

·Invalid address:
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:

check
parity check
parity check
programmed write
check; generate
check characters
regenerate and compare check characters
send parity bit;
check

indicator &
indicator &
indicator &
.indicator &

check

indicator & alarm.

none.
check
check

indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm.

lSI.

Recovery of data:

no.
yes.

Transfer Load Size
With core storage: .

Effective Transfer Rate

1 record of 1 to 2, 800
chars, 1 band, or (with
optional Read/Write
Cylinder) 1 cylinder.

© 1963

Dispatch of data:
Timing confUcts:
Physical record
missing:
Reference to locked
area:
Circuit failure:
Wrong length record:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

alarm•
alarm.
alarm.
alarm•

indicator & alarm.

indicator & alarm.

Reprinted 4/63

/

402.044.100
•

51"'OARO

EDP
•

IBM 1410
Internal Storage
1311 Disk Storage Drive

REPORTS

INTERNAL STORAGE: 1311 DISK STORAGE DRIVE

§

044.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

.12

Basic Use:

.13

Description

. 13

• . . . . . . Disk Storage Drive.
1311 Models 1 and 2.
auxiliary storage.

The 1311 Disk Storage Drive is a low cost random
access storage, available for the IBM 1401, 1440,
and 1620 Data Processing Systems as well as the
1410, which features rapid interchangeability of the
"Disk Pack" storage cartridges. The system is
suitable for either random or sequential processing
methods.
Each Disk Pack consists of six discs on a common
vertical axis. Data can be recorded on ten disc surfaces; the top and bottom surfaces of the pack are not
used. Each recording surface is divided into 100
concentric tracks, each track is divided into 20 sectors, and each sector holds a 5-character address
and up to 100 alphameric characters of data. The
data capacity is therefore 2, 000 characters per
track, 200, 000 characters per surface, and
2, 000, 000 characters per pack. With the optional
Track Record feature, the data capacity is 2,980
characters per track, 298, 000 characters per surface, and 2,980, 000 characters per pack. It should
be noted that use of this feature requires reading full
tracks of data, thereby increasing the required internal core storage. Up to 5 Disk Storage Drives
per channel can be connected to a 1410 system; thus
the maximum on-line data capacity is 20, 000, 000
characters.
Access is by means of a comb-like mechanism containing five arms that move horizontally between the
discs. Each arm has one read-write head mounted
on the top and one on the bottom, and each head
serves one disc surface. The entire access mechanism moves as one unit, so all 10 read-write heads
are always positioned at corresponding tracks on
their respective surfaces. The term "cylinder" is
applied to each group of 10 tracks (Ion each disc
surface) that can be read or recorded upon at a
single setting of the access mechanism. There are
100 cylinders per Disk Storage Drive, and each cylinder can hold 20, 000 data characters.
Time for access mechanism movement ranges from
zero (for successive references to a previouslyselected cylinder) to 400 milliseconds; average random access time is 250 milliseconds. Unless the optional Direct Seek feature is installed, the access
arms cannot move directly from one cylinder to
another. Instead, the arms retract all the way to the
"home" position (beyond track 00) and then move back
to the selected cylinder. The result is that move-

© 1963

Description (Contd. )
ments between adjacent cylinders require from 85
milliseconds (track 00 to 01) to 390 milliseconds
(track 98 to 99).
Rotational speed of the discs is 1,500 rpm. Maximum rotational delay is 40 milliseconds, and the average is 20 milliseconds. There is also a head select delay of 2 milliseconds. Total reference cycle
time to read a randomly-placed lOa-character
record, up-date it, re-write it, and execute a programmed write check is 354 milliseconds. If no access motion is required, the total reference cycle
time is reduced to 104 milliseconds. Peak data
transfer rate is 77, 000 characters per second, and
the effective bulk transfer rate is 33,800 to 38,200
characters per second.
A single read or write instruction can transfer from
1 to 200 consecutive sectors of information; 1. e. ,
from 100 characters to the capacity of core storage,
in multiples of 100 characters. The programmer
can elect to read and write sector addresses along
with the data records. Handling of variable-length
disc records is facilitated by "sector count overlays"
in which the first three characters of a record specify the number of sectors (from 2 to 200) comprising
that record.
All capacities and transfer rates quoted here are
based on operation in the "move" mode, in which six
data bits and one parity bit are recorded for each
character. In the alternative "load" mode, the word
mark bit is also recorded for each character, and
sector capacity is reduced from 100 to 90 data characters. All capacities and transfer rates for the
load mode are therefore 10 per cent lower than the
figures quoted here. Use of the load mode is essential for program storage and for data storage when
field lengths vary from record to record.
Checks are made for parity errors, wrong length
records, and unequal address comparisons. The
"write disc check" instruction causes a characterby-character comparison of data just written on the
disc with the data in core storage. This instruction
usually follows each write operation. All disc errors
cause the setting of testable indicators.
Disk Storage Drive seek time can be fully overlapped
with internal processing. A "branch if access mechanism busy" instruction is provided. No overlapping
is possible during disc read or write operations.
Only one seek operation may go on at a time, regardless of the number of Disk Storage Drives in a
system.
The removable Disk Packs are 14 inches in diameter,
4 inches high, and weigh less than 10 pounds, including covers. A Disk Pack can be removed from a
Disk Storage Drive and replaced by another Disk

by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

402;044.130

§

IBM 1410

044.

. 13

.26

Bands per phYSical unit: 100 per disc surface.

Description (Contd.)

.27

Interleaving Levels: .

Pack in one minute. When a Disk Pack is not
mounted on a drive, the pack and its cover combine
to form a sealed container that can be conveniently
stored and transported. One Disk Pack is supplied
with each 1311 Disk Storage Drive. Additional Disk
Pa,cks cost $490 each, f. o. b. San Jose.

· 28

Access Techniques

Optional Features
Direct Seek: Permits the access mechanism to move
directly to the specified cylinder without returning to
the ''home'' position. Access motion time ranges
from zero to 250 milliseconds and averages 150
milliseconds.
Track Record: Permits reading and writing a full
track as a single 2, 980-character record, thereby
increasing the capacity of each Disk Pack from
2,000,000 to 2,980,000 characters. The increased
capacity is achieved by using the areas that normally
contain sector addresses for data storage.
Scan Disk: Permits an automatic search of data rec<;>rded in disc storage for a specific identifier or
condition.
.14

Availability:

?

.15

First Delivery:

?

. 16

Reserved Storage: .

none. (Note that each 100digit sector is preceded by
a 5-digit address, but
these address digits are
not counted as storage.)

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

. 21

Storage Medium: .

.22

Physical Dimensions
14 inches o. d.
thin.
6.

.23

Storage Phenomenon:

magnetization.

.24

Recording Permanence

.241 Data erasable by
instructions: . .
. 242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . .
.243 Data volatile:
.
.244 Data permanent: .
.245 Storage changeable:

.

.25

.
..

4/63

t
.29

Not necessary with Direct Seek feature.

Potential Transfer Rates

.291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates:
Bit rate per track:
.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data: . . .
Conversion factor: .

1,500 rpm.
539,000 data bits/sec/track.
character.
7 bits per character (6 plus
parity).
1 track/band.
77, 000 characters/sec not
counting address digits .

Gain factor:
Data rate: .

.3

DATA CAPACITY

.31

Module and System Sizes
Maximum
Storage

Minimum
Storage
Identity:

0

1311
Modell

1311
Model 2

Discs:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Modules:

0
0
0
0
0

6
variable
2,000,000
variable
1

6
variable
2,000,00'0
variable
1

.4

CONTROLLER

no.
no .
no.
yes.

.41

Identit~:

.42

Connection to System

variable.
2,000.
2,000.
variable.
20.

by one of the magnetic
heads on access arms
which move horizontally in
unison .

. 283 Type of access
Description of stage Possible starting stage
Move heads to home
position t and then
to selected band:
mandatory when new band is
selected.
Wait for selected
sector for reading
or recording: . . . if same band was previously
selected.

yes .

Data Volume Per Band of 1 Track
Words: . .
Characters:
Digits: .
Instructions: .
Sectors:

'. 281 Recording method: .

. multiple magnetic discs .

.222 Drum or Disc
Diameter:
Thickness or length:
Number on shaft: .

1.

. ...

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
. 43

2 1311's
Modell &
8 1311's
Model 2.
60.
variable.
20, 000,000.
variable.
10.

part of 1311 Model 1.

2 1311's ModelL
none .

Connection to Device

· 431 Devices per controller: 5 modules.
· 432 Restrictions:. . . . . . 1 Model 1 and I to 4 Model
2; no other restrictions.

INTERNAL STORAGE: 1311 DISK STORAGE DRIVE

402:044.440

044.
· 44 Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load
Variable length: . . . 1 to 200 sectors of 100
characters per sector;
number of sectors set by
programmer.
Fixed length: . .
20 sectors of 100 characters
per sector (1 band).
. 442 Input-output area:
core storage.
. 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
each character.
. 444 Input-output area
. lockout: . . . . .
yes.
· 445 Synchronization:.
automatic .
. 447 Table control: . .
none.
· 448 Testable conditions: .
none.
•5
ACCESS TIMING
§

· 51

Arrangement of Heads

. 511 Number of stacks
Stacks per system: .
Stacks per module:.
Stacks per yoke: . .
Yokes per module: .
.512 Stack movement: . . .
. 513 Stacks tliat can access
any particular
location: . . . . . .
. 514 Accessible locations
By single stack
With no movement: .
With all movement:.
By all stacks
With no movement: .

• 53

Simultaneous
Operations: .

CHANGEABLE STORAGE

.61

Cartrid~s

.611 Cartridge capacity
Without track record
feature: . . . . .

1.

2, ODD, 000 characters (6
discs).

With track record
feature: . . . . .

2, 980, 000 characters (6
discs) .
.612 Cartridges per module: 1.
. 613 Interchangeable: . .
yes .

.

.62

Loading Convenience

.621 Possible loading
While computing
system in use:
While storage
system in use:

yes.

. 622 Method of loading: .
.623 Approximate change
time: . • . .
.624 Bulk loading: . . . . .

100 max.
10.
10.
1.
horizontal.

yes, if the particular module is not addressed .
operator.
1 minute.
no; 1 cartridge of 6 discs at
a time.

.7

AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

.71

Data Transfer

20 sectors.
2, 000 sectors.

Pairs of storage unit possibilities

200 sectors per module
200 to 1,000 sectors per
system.

.515 Relationship between
stacks and locations: . 3 most significant digits of
Sector Address denote
head and band (cylinder)
number.
. 52

.6

With self:. . . . . .
With core storage: .
.72

Transfer Load Size
1 to 200 sectors; number of
sectors selected by
program.
1 block of 20 sectors (1
band) .

With core storage:.

no more than 1 1311 Disk
Storage operation (reading, .73
recording, or seeking) at
a time per 1410 system.

no.
yes.

Effective Transfer Rate
The times shown are the average for either reading
from or recording on disc storage with no checking.

Access Time Parameters and Variations
With core storage

.532 Variation in access time
Stage
Variation
Average
Without Direct Seek
Move head to home
position and then
to selected band:
75 to 392 msec 250 msec.
Wait for selected
sector for reading
or recording:
o to 40 msec
20 msec.
Total: . . . . .

75 to 432 msec

With Direct Seek
Move head to
selected band: .
54 to 248 msec
Wait for selected
sector for reading
or recording: ..
o to 40 msec
Total: . . . . . . .

54 to 288 msec

© 1963

270 msec.

154 msec.
20 msec.
174 msec.

With Direct Seek:
38,200 char/sec.
Without Direct Seek:. 33,800 char/sec.
.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

check on matching
sector address
none.
Invalid code:
parity check
Receipt of data:
programmed read-back
Recording of data:
and compare
parity check
Recovery of data:
parity bit included.
Dispatch of data:
interlock
Timing conflict:
Physical record missing: check on record length
Reference to locked area: check on optional lock
Invalid address:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Action
indicator.

indicator.
indicator.
indicator.
wait.
indicator.
indicator.

4/63

./

402:051.100

_STANDARD
_EDP
."

IBM 1410

REPORTS

Central Processor

CENTRAL PROCESSOR

§

051.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Description

related IBM 1401 Processing Unit, but the instruction addresses for the 1411 are two characters
longer and it requires more storage cycles for
certain operations. In most applications, the overall internal speed ratio of the 1411 over the 1401
with Multiply-Divide, Advanced Programming, and
High-Low-Equal Compare options is very close
to 2.0.

1411.
Processing Unit.
Models I, 2, 3, 4, and 5.

The 1411 is a two-address, add-to-storage processor. The five models differ only in the number of
core storage positions they contain. The standard
instruction repertoire includes multiplication, division' table look-up, comparison, a wide variety of
internal data transfers, and a powerful editing capability. Operations are performed serially by character and are usually terminated when a word mark
bit is sensed. Operand sizes may vary from one
character to the capacity of core storage. Instruction length is variable from 1 to 12 characters, but
most arithmetic and data transfer instructions are
11 characters long. When a series of operations is
to be performed on data stored in sequential locations' it is possible to "chain" some of the instruction addresses so that I-character instructions do
the work of 11-character instructions. Fifteen
5-position index registers are provided in core
storage, but no specific commands exist for initializing, stepping, or testing the index registers.
Data movement is performed in either the MOVE
mode or the LOAD mode of operation. In the MOVE
mode, data are moved without field-defining word
marks, thereby effectively restricting the data
format to fixed word length, because instructions
must repeatedly operate on the same data
addresses. In the LOAD mode, data are moved
with restricting word marks making variable field
length possible. The LOAD mode usually results in
longer internal processing because it usually
requires storing address registers, and subsequent
indexing to determine the length of the data field in
order to ascertain the low-order position of the
next data field. The LOAD mode usually makes tape
input-output operations shorter, even though an
extra word mark character is inserted on the tape
record for each field, because the total length of
the record is usually shorter and because nonsignificant zeros used to fill out fields to equal
lengths in the MOVE mode can be omitted.
The ability to store the contents of either the Aaddress or the B-address registers is very helpful
when addressing fields; however, the contents of
only one of the registers can be stored for a given
setting because the instruction that stores the contents of one register will destroy the contents of
the other.
The 1411 core storage cycle time of 4.5 microseconds is 2.56 times as fast as that of the closely

© 1963

Description (Contd.)

Optional Features
Program Addressable Clock: Permits storing real
time values, in hours and hundredths, in core storage by program interrogation of the clock. The
unit is mounted on the 1415 Console and provides a
visual display of time.
Priority Feature: Permits automatic interruption
of the stored program upon com pletion of selected
input-output or seek operations or upon console
request, allowing more efficient use of the system's
overlap and inquiry capabilities.
Process Overlap Feature: Allows processing to
continue during storage cycles not required for data
transfer by input-output operations.
Accelerator Feature: Reduces the cycle time from
4.5 microseconds to 4.0 microseconds for each
access of one alphameric character and reduce the
number of word cycles for some data operations.
This feature produces an internal speed-up of
approximately 23 per cent, with a reSUlting increase
of 15 per cent to 23 per cent in the data throughput,
by improving the timing of 39 instructions.
14 months as of February•
1962.

. 13

Availability:

.14

First Delivery: . . . . December, 1961.

.2

PROCESSING FACILITIES

.21

Operations and Operands
Operation
and Variation

Provision

.211 Fixed pOint
Add-Subtract: automatic

Multiply
Short:
Long:
Divide
No remainder:
Remainder:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Radix

Size

decimal 1 to N char.
(N limited by
available
store).

none.
automatic

decimal 1 to N char.

none.
automatic

decimal 1 to N char.

Revised

4/63

402:051.210
§

IBM 1410

051.

. 21

.23

Operations and Operands (Contd. )
Operation
and Variation

.212 Floatingpoint*
Add-Subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.213 Boolean
AND:
Inclusive OR:
.214 Comparison
Numbers:

Provision

Radix

.231 Instruction structure:
Size

none.
none.

Absolute:
Letters:

none.
automatic

Mixed:

automatic

1 to N
char.
1 to N
char.
1 to N
char.

Collating seblank, spequence:
cial characters,
A-Z, 0-9.
* Hardware available on a "Request Price Quotation"
basis.
.215 Code translation:
none .
none.
. 216 Radix conversion:
.217 Edit format:
Provision
Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Insert $, CR - *:
Float $:
Protection:

Equality:
Greater than:
Greatest:
Least:
Stop on any:
Lookup to end:
Less than:
Greater than or
equal to:
Less than or
equal to:

.22

Comment

automatic expand but not
contract
automatic
none.
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic asterisk protection,
sign and decimal
control
automatic
automatic
none
d modifier (see wtrucnone
tion format) deterautomatic
mines type of look-up
automatic
automatic

Size

2 to N
char.

Instruction formats may contain:
1. OP only
2. OP, d
3. OP, X, d
4. OP, A
5. OP, A, d
6. OP, X, B, d
7. OP, A, B
8. OP, A, B, d
.233 Instruction parts
Name
Purpose
OP: . . . . .
operation code-specifies
operation to be performed.
I: .
address indicating the
destination of a jump.
A:
address of a field in core
storage.
X:
channel and I/O unit involved in an I/O operation.
B: .
address of a field in core
storage.
d: .
modifier for an operation
code .
. 234 Basic address structure: 2+ O.
.235 Literals
Arithmetic: . . .
none.
Comparisons and
tests: . . . . .
yes, single character.
Incrementing modifiers: . . . . . .
none.
.236 Directly addressed operands
.2361 Internal storage type
Minimum size
Core:
Disc (1405):

1 to N

Disc (1301):

char.

automatic

SEecial Cases of Operands

.222 Zero:

absolute value with B zonebit in units position.
positive, negative and unsigned zeros and blanks
give same result in arithmetic, but are unequal in
comparisons.

. 223 Operand size determ ina tion: . . . . . . . . word-mark bit in highorder digit position.

.2375 Number of potential
indexers:
.2376 Addresses which can
be indexed:
.2377 Cumulative indexing:
· 2378 Combi!J,ed index and
step: . . . . . '.
.238 Indirect addressing:
· 239 Stepping: . . . . .

~_ _ _

4/63

1 char
1 block
(200 char)
1 char

.237 Address indexing
.2371 Number of methods:
. 2372 Names: . . . . . .
. 2373 Indexing rule: . . .
.2374 Index specification:

automatic

.221 Negative numbers:

Revised

variable: 1 to 12 characters.

· 232 Instruction layout:

subroutine decimal 8&2char.
subroutine decimal 8 & 2 char.
subroutine decimal 8&2char.

automatic

Instruction Formats

A

I AUERBACH~U

Maximum size
total capacity
1 band
(5 blocks)
80,000 char

Volume accessible
total capacity.
total capacity, but
must use indirect
addressing.

1.
indexing .
addition, modulo 80,000 .
zone bits in the lO's and/
or 100's position of presumptive address.

15.

A, B.I.
none.
none.
none, except for Disk
Storage Unit operations.
none.

CENTRAL PROCESSOR

§

402: 051.240

051.

. 24

none.

.333 Operator control: . . . 1. select 1 of 4 I/O units
using Priority Select
switch .
2. Priority Select On -Off
switch permits or prohibits interruption by
unit designated by Pri0rity Select switch.
.334 Interruption conditions: 1. interruptible instruction
in main routine.
2. system operating in
PRIORITY ALERT
mode.
3. a priority request has
been set.
4. channel associated with
latch not busy .
. 335 Interruption process
Disabling interrupautomatic (priority alert
tion:
latch is set OFF).
Registers saved:
own coding.
fixed location (automatic
Destination: .
jump) .
. 336 Control methods
Determine cause:
own coding (test indicators).
own coding (one instrucEnable interruption:
tion).

1 character.

.34

Special Processor Storage

. 241 Category of Nwnber of
storage
locations
Core:
Processing
Unit:

Size in
char.

Program usage

15

5

index registers.

7

5

address registers.

.242 Category of Total num- Physical Access time.
p. sec
ber locations form
storage
Core:
Processing
Unit:

15

7

core

4.5

?

?

.3

SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES

• 31

Instruction Seguencing

.311 Nwnber of sequence
control facilities:
.314 Special sub-sequence
counters:
.315 Sequence control step
size:
.316 Accessibility to routine:

Cycle time,
p. sec

4.5

1.

indirectly, by storing
B-address after Branch.

.317 Permanent or optional
modifier:

no.

. 32

Look-Ahead:

none .

. 33

InterruQtion:

available as an optional
feature .

. 331 Possible causes
In-out units:

free (unit specified by Pri0rity Select switch).
In-out controllers:
free (applicable for overlapped I/O instructions
only) .
Storage access: . . . 1. seek operation completed by access arm.
2. free controller.
Processor errors:
none.
Other: . . . . .
1. Moving Priority Select
switch, from OFF to
ON position.
2. console request.
3. Teleprocessing buffer
requesting service.
Program control
Individual control: . 1. disc storage, console,
I/O channel, or Teleprocessing buffer.
2. I/O unit designated by
Priority Select Switch.
Method:
set Priority Latch.
Restriction:
system must be operating
in PRIORITY ALERT
mode.

® 1963

Multi - running:

possible on a limited basis,
using Priority Feature.

.341 Method of control:
.342 Maximum nwnber of
programs: .
.343 Precedence rules: .
.344 Program protection:

2 is practical limit.
own coding .
none.

.35

Multi - seguencing:

none.

.4

PROCESSOR SPEEDS

.41

Instruction Times in IJ. sec

.411 Fixed point
Add-subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:

own coding.

Without Accelerator
Feature
54.0+ 1l.3D
78.8 + 61.9D
+ 28.1D 2
58.5 + 87.8D
+ 73.lD 2

With Accelerator
Feature
48 + 8D
60 + 36D + 2002
52 + 52D + 52D 2

.412 Floating point (subroutines, 8-digit precision)
Without Accelerator
Feature
3,360
Add:
3,840
Subtract:
4,800
Multiply:
8,160
Divide:
.413 Additional allowance for
Without Accelerator
Feature
Indexing:
34.5 per modified
address.
Re-complementing: 6.8D

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

With Accelerator
Feature
30. 67 per modified
address.
4.0D

Revised

4/63

402:051.414
§

IBM 1410

051.

. 414 Control

Without Accelerator
Feature
54.0 + 9D
Compare:
Branch:
40.5
Compare and Branch: 69.8 (comparing
1 bit or
character)

With Accelerator
Feature
48 + 8D.
36.0

62.0 (comparing
1 bit or
character).

.415 Counter Control:
. none.
. 416 Edit
Without Accelerator
feature: . . . .
54.0+ 13.5C.
With Accelerator
feature:
48.0+ 12.0C.
.417 Convert:
none.
.418 Shift:. . .
none.

. 42

Processor Performance in

)J.

secs

.421 For random addresses
c. a + b:
b: a + b:
Sum N items:
c =ab:
c : alb:

Fixed eoint
113. 0 + 22. 5D
54.5 + 11. 3D
54.5 + 11. 3D
137.3 + 73.2D + 28.lD 2
117.0 + 99.10 + 73.lD 2

Floatins eoint
3,990.
3,990.
3,360.
5,430.
8,790.

.422 For arrays of data
ci
bi

=ai + bi:
=a i + bi :

Sum N items:
c ~ c + aib i :

Fixed Point
567.0+ 31. 5D

Floatins I!0int
4,453.

385.0+ 9.0D

4,453.

338.0+ 11. 3D
616.0 + 84.4D + 28.10 2

3,644.
8,930.

.423 Branch based on comparison
Numeric data: .
605 + 9D •
Alphabetic data:
605 + 9C.
.424 SWitching
Unchecked: .
302.
Checked: . .
581 .
List search: .
412 + 389N.
.425 Format control per character
Unpack: • . . . . • . 18.
Compose: . . . . • . 34.
.426 Table look-up per comparison
For a match:
23 + 9C .
For least or greatest: 392 + lOC (Look-up instructions not usable).
For interpolation
point: . . . . .
23 + 9C.
.427 Bit indicators
Set bit in separate location: . . . . .
65.
impractical.
Set bit in pattern:
Test bit in separate
location: . . . . •
65 .
Test bit in pattern: .
65.
impractical.
Test AND for B bits:
impractical
Test OR for B bits: .
58.5+ 11.3D .
. 428 Moving data: . . .
.5

ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Check or
~
Overflow:
Underfl~:
Zero divisor:
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:

cliTck
none.
overflow check
char. validity check
check
none.
check
parity check
parity check

indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm.
stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm.

/

4/63

Revised

I.------:-l~
AUERBACH I!~J

402:061.100
.S1ANOARO

EDP
•

IBM 1410

"1'O'1S

Console

CONSOLE

§

061.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Associated Units:

Console.
1415 ModelL

. 24

Stepping (Contd.): • . .

.25

Resets
Form

Name

. 13

Console Input-Output
Printer stands on console
desk.

Computer reset: button

The 1415 Console, which is a required part of every
1410 system, consists of a desk holding the console
I/O printer, control unit, and indicator-light panel.
(TIle console I/O printer is described in the InputOutput section.) The control unit contains the main
operating controls for the system and the power
status lights. The indicator-light panel, mounted
just above the console printer, contains a variety of
error alarms, processor status indicators, and I/O
channel status indicators. The only display of control register contents is provided by printouts via the
console printer, which occur whenever the system
stops. The 11 compatibility switches on the 1401
make it possible to run many IBM 1401 routines using the 1410 without reprogramming.

.2

CONTROLS

.21

Power
Name

button.
Power on:
button.
Power off:
Emergency off: button
button
DC off:
.22

Connections: . . . .

.23

Stops and Restarts
Name

Form

Start key: button
Stop key: button

\

'"

.24

Stepping: . . . . .

resets check circuits and
registers; sets sequence
counter to 00001.
as above, but all indicators
are also reset.

.26

Loading: . • . .

none.

.27

Sense Switches:

none, except when operating
in 1401 mode.

.28

Name
Printout
control:
Check
control:

Form

Function

on-off
switch

inhibits stop printouts by
typewriter.

3-position determines whether error
switch
printouts will be followed by
automatic restarts.

Asteriskinsert:
on-off
switch
Form

Function

Program reset: button

Description

typewriter printout of all
registers for each step if
desired .

Address
entry:

Function

7-position selects an address register for
switch
entry of an address from
typewriter.

1401 Compatibility: 11 toggle
switches

disconnects all power.
disconnects DC power during short idle periods.

causes input characters of invalid parity to be replaced by
asterisks in storage.

none.

permits running most ffiM 1401
programs on the 1410. The
toggles represent the 1401
I/O check stop,
I/O check reset, bit entry,
and sense switches.

Function
initiates machine operation.
stops program upon completion of
current instruction and prints
register contents via the Console
Typewriter.

.3

DISPLAY

.31

Alarms:

Mode switch selects 1 of 6
operation modes: C. E.
(storage scan), I/E
CYCLE, ADDRESS SET,
RUN, DISPLAY, or
ALTER. The lIE CYCLE
mode permits stepping
through the program, with

cD 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

15 System Check lights
indicate error conditions
such as parity errors,
invalid characters,
I/O timing errors, invalid
addresses, and improper
instructions.
5 Power Indicator lights
indicate overheating,
tripped circuit breakers,
etc.
Reprinted

4/63

402:061.320

§

IBM 1410

061.

• 32

.33

.34
Conditions: .

6 Status lights show when
the overflow, zero balance, and high, low, and
equal compare indicators
are turned on.
6 I/O Channel Control lights
on each I/O channel installed indicate the following conditions: interlock,
write disc check interlock,
reading, writing, overlapped operation in process, non-overlapped operation in process.
6 I/O Channel Status lights
on each I/O channel indicate: unit not ready, unit
busy, I/O parity error,
wrong length record, endof-file condition, no data
transfer.
4 System Controls lights indicate: 1401 compatibility
mode, priority alert mode
system stopped, console
switches not in normal
positions.

Control Registers:. . . no dynamic display; setting
Mode switch to lIE
CYCLE and pressing Start
key causes typewriter to
print contents of 1-, A - ,
and B-address registers,
OP register, d register,
and 7 other I-character
registers. (The same
printout occurs whenever
an error stop, programmed stop, or manual
stop is encountered. )

.4

Storage: . . . . . . . . printed on typewriter by
setting Mode switch to
DISPLAY, pressing Start
key, and typing high-order
address of field to be
printed. Printout is terminated by a word mark,
but continues if Start key
is held down.
ENTRY OF DATA

.41

Into Control Registers
1.
2.
3.
4.

. 42

Reprinted

Into Storage
1. Display contents of desired field on typewriter,
as described in . 34.
2. Set Mode switch to ALTER.
3. Press Start key.
4. Type correct data on typewriter keyboard.

.5

CONVENIENCES

.51

Communication:

none.

.52

Clock:

optional Program Addressable Clock provides visual
display of time and can be
interrogated by the stored
program.

.53

Desk Space: . . . . . . console desk top is 70 by 29
inches; ample free space
is provided for operating
convenience.

.54

View:.

....-_ _---,-i

4/63

Set Mode switch to ADDRESS SET.
Set Address entry switch to desired register.
Press Start key.
Type data on typewriter keyboard.

I AUERBAC~

the 1410 is designed for operation by person seated at
console desk; unobstructed
view in all directions .

402: 071. 100
IBM 1410

Input·Output
Paper Tape Reader
INPUT· OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER
§071

.32

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . .

.12

.321 Serial by: .
.322 Parallel by:

1 to BO rows at 10 per inch .
5 to B tracks at standard
spacing .

Paper Tape Reader.
1011 ModelL

. 324 Track use
Data:
.....
Redundancy check:.
Timing: . . . . .
Description:
Control signals:
Total:
This unit reads data from punched paper tape into
.325 Row use
1410 core storage at a peak speed of 500 rows per
Data:
second. Five-, six-, seven-, or eight-track tape
Redundancy check:.
can be read, and translation of the tape codes to
Timing: . . . .
1410 BCD coding is controlled by plugboard wiring.
Control signals:
The tape can be either chad or chad1ess; 11/16, 7/B,
Unused:
or I-inch wide; and in the form of strips, conventionGap:
al reels, or rolls which feed from the center. Parity
checks can be applied to tape codes which employ
odd-bit parity, but not to five-track telegraphic tape.
Paper tape input is buffered; however, a maximum of
. 33 Coding: . . . . . . . .
BO characters can be read from the tape on 1 read
instruction.

. 13

Availability: .

. 14

First Delivery:

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

14 months as of February,
1962.
· June, 1961 .

.34

.212 Reservoirs
Number: .
Form: ..
Capacity: .
.213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive:

.2.
· SWinging arm.
about .z feet.
motor .
motor.

• 221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system: .

none •
photoelectric.

. 23

Multiple Copies:.

none .

. 24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:.
Stacks:
Heads/stack:. .
Method of use:.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

. 31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:. . .
.312 Phenomenon: . .

1.

B.
reads 1 row at a time.

paper tape.
punched holes (chad or
chadless type).

© 1963

1 (end-of-record; optional).

O.
2.

normally 5-track telegraphic
or B-track ruM coding; most
5-, 6-, 7-, or B-track codes
can be translated by plugboard wiring.

Code translation

Physical Dimensions

. 351 Overall width: •
. 352 Length
Strip
Roll (inside feeding):
Reel (outside
feeding): • . . • • .

· reading.

1 to BO.

O.
O.

Most devices using
5-, 6-, 7-, or
B-track paper tape: ..plugboard wiring

.35

Sensing and Recording Systems

6 or 5.
1 or O.
1 (sprocket track).
1 or O.
B to 5 (plus sprocket track).

Format Compatibility
Other device or
system

.211 Drive past the head:. . sprocket drive.

. 22

Positional Arrangement

.4

CONTROLLER

. 41

Identity: . . . .

.42

Connection to

11/16, 7/B, orl inch .

20 to 240 inches.
5 to 400 feet .
5 to 1,000 feet .

. Input-Output Synchr9nizer .
1414 Model 4 or Model 5
(with Paper Tape Read
Adapter #5514) .

S~stem

.421 On-line: .
.422 Off-line: .

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1.
none.

Reprinted 4/63

402:071.430

IBM 1410

§071 .

. 43

.55

Connection to Device

Disable: . . . . . .
Request interrupt .
~elect format: .
Se~ect code:
Rewind:
Unload: ..

. 431 Devices per controller:

A 1414 Model 4 can control
a Card Read-Punch, a
Printer, and various
combinations of the following devices: Data
Transmission Unit, Remote
Inquiry Unit, Telegraph
I/O Features, and Paper
Tape Reader; ModelS is
identical except that it cannot control a Card ReadPunch or Printer.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . · A 1414 Model 4 or 5 can
control any configuration
which does not exceed
6 buffers. A Pap~r Tape
Reader requires 1 buffer .
. 44

Control Operations

.56

·
·
·
·

yes.
yes (with optional feature).
no.
no.
no.
· no.

Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . .. .
Busy device:. . .. .
Nearly exhausted: . .
Busy controller:..
.
End of medium marks:
Exhausted: . . . . . .

yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load: .
.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output
area access: .
.444 Input-output
area lockout:
.445 Table control: .
.446 Synchronization: .

1 to 80 characters .
· core storage .

PERFORMANCE

. 61

Conditions: . . . . . . none.

.62

Speeds

· each character.
· no.
none.
· automatic .

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

. 511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . . . .

.6

· 1 to 80 characters .
· group mark in 8lst
position of core storage,
or end-of-record character
on tape, whichever occurs
first.

. 52

Input-Output Operations

. 521
. 522
. 523
. 524
. 525
. 526

Input:
Output:
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
Marking:.
Sei\.rching: .

·
·
·
·
·

.621 Nominal or peak
speed: . ....
500 char/sec.
. 622 Important parameters
Tape speed:
50.0 inches/sec.
Start time (to
full speed) .
2.5 msec average, 9.0
msec max.
Stop distance:
1. 5 rows average, 2.0
rows max .
.623 Overhead ...
8. 5 msec/block.
.624 Effective speeds:
· 500 N/(N + 4) char/sec,
where N = no. of char/block.
. 63

.53

Code Translation: . . . plugboard wiring.
Format Control

~

4/63 Reprinted

plugboard.
undefined.
yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
yes.

0.52 minimum .

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments
Adjustment

Control: . . . .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement: .
Suppress zeros: .
Insert point:. . .
Insert spaces:. .
Recording density:.
Section sizes: .
Omit unwanted
characters:. .
.
Assign several tape
codes to 1 character:

Processing unit .
0.880.

Component: •.
Msec per block:
or
Percentage: . .

1 block forward .
none .
none .
none .
none .
none.

.54

Demands on System

Tape width:
Tape code:
.72

Method
change reels.
change plugboard panels.

Other Controls
Function
Reset alarm
. circuits: .
Reel/strip
selector: .

Form
key .
2-position switch.

INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER
§

402:071.730

071 .

. 73

.8
Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Supply & takeup reels:
Center- roll
feed:
,732 Replenishment time:
. 733 Adjustment time: .
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Capacity

Reading
Input area
overflow:

1,000 feet.
400 feet.

Check or
Interlock
parity check·

set indicator.

check for end-ofrecord
plugboard wiring
check
none.
interlock

set indicator.

check

se t indic a tor.

1. 0 to 2.0 minutes for reels.
0.3 to 0.5 minute for strips.
Reader needs to be stopped.
2.0 to 3.0 minutes .

Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Excessive stop
distance:

4.0 minutes.

• No parity check on 5-track tape.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Action

as wired.
set indicator; alarm.
wait.

Reprinted 4/63

402:072.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 1410
Input-Output
Card Reader

REPDRIS

INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READ-PUNCH (READER)

§

072.

· 24

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

· 12

Description

Card Read-Punch (Reader
only).
1402 Model 2.

While the 1402 consists of a card reader and punch
housed in the same cabinet, the two units are independent of one another from the user's viewpoint and
are covered in separate sections of this report.
The reader reads standard 80-column cards at a
peak speed of 800 cards per minute. Conversion
from the card column code to internal BCD code is
automatic. A hole-count check is made on each column at a second reading station, and the bit configuration of each character is checked for validity as it
is transferred into the read synchronizer for later
transmission into core storage. A hopper with a
3, ODD-card capacity and 3 stackers with 1, ODD-card
capacities (1 shared with the punch unit) can be
loaded and unloaded without stopping the reader.
A 1442 Card Reader can also be connected to the

1410 system (see 414:071).
Optional Features
Interchangeable Feed: Permits reading of
either 80- or 51-column cards by interchanging
hardware.
Priority Feature: Permits interruption of the
main routine upon the completion of a cycle by the
card reader.
.13

Availability:..

.14

First Delivery:

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

..

· 211 Drive past the head:
.212 Reservoirs: . . . .
· 22

Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

reading.
1.
80.
12 rows of each card,
1 at a time.

Use of station:
Distance: . '
Stacks: . . .
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use: .

checking.
1 card.
180.
12 rows of each card,
1 at a time.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium: . . . . .
. 312 Phenomenon: .
· 32

. 321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:
· 324 Track use
Data:
Total: .
.325 Row use
Data:
. 33

Coding:

.34

Format Compatibility

Multiple Copies: . . .

All devices using standard 80-column
cards:. . . . .

September, 1960.
. 35

Physical Dimensions:

.4

CONTROLLER

. 41

Identity: . .

none.
brush .

.42

Connection to System

none.

. 421 On-line:
.422 Off- Line: .

© 1963

12 rows at standard spacing .
80 columns at standard
spacing.
80.
80.
12.
column code as in table 3 .

Other device or system Code translation

14 months as of February,
1962.

clutch driven rollers.
none.

standard 80-column cards
(51-column cards with
optional feature).
rectangular hole s .

Positional Arrangement

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system: .
• 222 Sensing system:
. 23

Arrangement of Heads

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

not required.
standard 80-column cards .

Input- Output Synchronizer .
1414 Model 3 or 4.

1 Model 3 or Model 4 •
none.
Reprinted 4/63

402:072.430
§

IBM 1410

072.

.43

.62
Connection to Device

. 431 Devices per controller: l.
.432 Restrictions:. . . . . . none.
.44

Speeds

. 621 Nominal or peak speed:
· 622 Important parameters
Clutch cycle: . .
· 623 Overhead: . . . .
.624 Effective speeds: . . .

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load: . . . .
. 442 Input- output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . .
. 445 Table control: .
'.446 Synchronization: .

1 card of 80 characters .
core storage .
each character.
no.
none.
automatic.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: .

.....

· 63

75 msec.
1 clutch point.
800 cards/min. if processing
time per card does not
exceed 74. 12 msec .

Demands on System
Processing Unit.
0.88.
1. 2.

Component:
Msec per card:
Percentage:

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments
card width.
interchange of hardware.
with interchangeable feed
only.

Adjustment:
Method:
Comment:

1 card.

800 cards/min .

fixed .

.72
.52

Input-Output 0l2erations

.521
.522
.523
. 524
. 525
. 526

Input: . .
Output: .
Stepping:
Skipping:
Marking:
Searching:

1 card forward.
none.
none.
none .
none .
none.

. 53

Code Translation:

automatic, by processor .

.54

Format Control: .

none.

.55

Control 0l2erations

Other Controls
end of file.
key.
activates circuits that signal
last- card condition in
central processing unit .

Function:
Form:
Comment:

· 73

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Capacity

Storage
Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Offset card: . .
Select stacker: .
Select format:
Select code:
Unload:
.56

Testable Conditions
Disabled:. • . . .
Busy device: . . •
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: •
End of medium marks:.
Controller not ready:
Hopper empty: •
Stacker full: . . .

.6
,.61

Hopper: . . . . . .
no.
Stackers: . . . . .
with optional priority feature. . 732 Replenishment time: .
no.
yes, 1 of 3.
no.
.733 Adjustment time: .
no.
.734 Optimum reloading
no.
period: . . . . . .
.8

no.
yes.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes.
no.

PERFORMANCE
Conditions:....... none.

4/63 Reprinted

3,000 cards.
1,000 cards each.
O. 25 to O. 50 minute.
reader does not need to be
stopped.
10 to 15 minutes.
1. 25 minutes.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Feed jam:
Stacker full:
Wrong length record:
No transfer:

hole count
none.
validity check
check
none.
interlock
check
check
check
check

indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm.
stop & alarm.
wait.
stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
indicator.
indicator.

402:073.100
•

STANDARD

_EDP
."

REPORTS

IBM 1410
Input -Output
Card Punch

INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READ-PUNCH (PUNCH)

§073.
.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

. 12

Description

Card Read -Punch (Punch
only).
1402 Model 2.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage
standard 80-column cards.
rectangular holes.

.311 Medium: .
. 312 Phenomenon: .
.32

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:
Housed in the same cabinet as the card reader, this
unit punches standard 80-column cards at a peak
speed of 250 cards per minute. Conversion from
internal BCD representation to the column card code
is automatic. A reading station makes a hole-count
check on each column. The I, 200-cardfeed hopper
and three I,OOO-card stackers (one shared with the
reader unit) can be loaded and unloaded without
stopping the punch. A punch buffer register in the
Input-Output Synchronizer permits the overlapping
of punching with other operations.

12 rows at standard
spacing.
80 columns at standard
spacing .

.322 Parallel by:
. 324 Track use
Data:
Total:
.325 Row use
Data:
.33

Coding:

.34

Format Compatibility

80.
80.
12.
column code as in table 3 .

Optional Feature
Other device or
Code translation
system
All devices using
standard 80column cards: •. not required.

Priority feature: Permits interruption of the
main routine upon the completion of a cycle by the
card punch.
. 13

Availability:.

14 months as of March, 1962 .

. 14

First Delivery:.

September, 1960

.. 2

PHYSICAL FORM

. 21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head: .
• 212 Reservoirs: .
.22

clutch driven rollers .
none.

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system: .
. 223 Common system:
.23

Multiple Copies:

. 24

Arrangement of Heads

.35

Physical Dimensions: . standard 80-column cards .

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: .

.42

Connection to System

Input-Output Synchronizer.
1414 Model 3 or 4 .

.421 On-line: .
. 422 Off-line: .

. die punch.
brush .
no.

.43

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per
controller: .
.432 Restrictions:

none.

Use of station:.
Stacks:
Heads/ stack:.
Method of use: .

.44

80
1 row at a time.

Use of station:.
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use: .

checking.
1 card.
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

punching.

1; Model 3 or Model 4 .
none.

.1.
. none .

Data Transfer Control

1.

© 1963

.441 Size of load: .
.442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access: .
. 444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control: .
.446 Synchronization: .

by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incarporated

1 card of 80 characters.
core storage .
each character.
no.
none .
. automatic.
Reprinted 4/63

IBM 1410

402:073.500
§

073.

. 63

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

. 51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation
Output:. . . . ..

.521
. 522
. 523
.524
. 525
. 526

Input:
Output:
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
Marking: .
Searching: .

· none .
1 card forward.
none.
none.
none .
none .

. 53

Code Translation: .

· automatic, by processor.

.54

Format Control: .

· none.

.55

Control Operations

Testable Conditions

PERFORMANCE

. 61

Conditions:

.62

Speeds

. 621 Nominal or peak
speed: . . . . .

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:

. none .

.72

Other Controls:

. start and stop only.

.73

Loading: and Unloading:
Capacity
. 1,200 cards.
. 1, 000 cards each.
0.25 to 0.50 minut~.
punch does not need to be
stopped.
none.
4.0 minutes.

no.
yes.
no.
y.es.
no.
yes.
yes.
no.

. . . none.

25.0 cards/min.

.622 Important parameters
clutch cycle:. .
• 240 msec •
. 623 Overhead: . . . .
4 clutch points .
. 624 Effective speeds:
250 cards/min if processing
time per card does not exceed 216. 6Tmsec.

4/63 Reprinted

0.4.

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
· no.
Hopper:
· with optional Priority Feature.
Stackers: .
no.
.732 Replenishment time:.
yes, 1 of 3.
no.
no.
.733 Adjustment time:
no.
.734 Optimum reloading
period: .

Disabled:. . . . . .
Busy device:. . . .
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller: .
End of medium
marks: . . . . . . . .
Controller not .ready: .
Hopper empty:. .
Stacker full: . . . . . .
.6

Processing Unit.
0.88 .

. fixed .

Input-Output Operations

.56

Component:
Msec per block:
or
Percentage:

. 1 card .

. 52

Disable: .
Request interrupt: .
Offset card: .
Select stacker:
Select format:
Select code:
Unload:

Demands on System

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Recording:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Feed jam:
Stacker full:
Wrong length
record:

hole count
fixed.
parity check
check
none
interlock
check
check
check

Action
indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm •
stoppage & alarm.
wait.
stoppage & alarm.
stoppage & alarm.
indicator.

402:081.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
_

IBM 1410

'[PO'TS

Input-Output

1403 Printer

INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTER (1403)

§

081.

· 23

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

. 12

Printer.
1403, Models 1 and 2.

Description

Multiple Copies

.231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon:
.233 Types of master
Multilith: .
Xerox:
Spirit:

.24
The 1403 Models 1 and 2 printers are line printers
with horizontal-chain printing mechanism, dualspeed tape-controlled carriage, and feeding and
stacking system for continuous forms_ Each character is printed as it is positioned opposite a magnetdriven hammer that presses the form against the
moving chain at the correct printing position. Peak
. 25
speed is 600 lines per minute with single spacing
and 480 lines per minute at an average spacing of 1
inch. The Modell has 100 printing positions and
the Model 2 has 132; they are identical in all other
respects. A print buffer register in the InputOutput Synchronizer holds a full line of data and
permits the overlapping of printing with other
operations.
Optional Features

Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

Standard Set
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
Alternatives: .
FORTRAN set:

· 13

Availability:

14 months as of February,
1962.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

· 14

First Delivery:

September, 1960.

.31

Form of Storage

·2

PHYSICAL FORM

.311 Medium: . . .

· 21

Drive Mechanism

. 312 Phenomenon: .

.212 Reservoirs:
. 22

...

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:
.222 Sensing system:
. 223 Common system:

magnet-driven hammer
presses form against
moving horizontal chain.
echo check on hammer
magnets.
no.

© 1963

1.

100 or 132.
1 line at a time.

Range of Symbols

Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
FORTRAN set:
Req. COBOL set:
Total: . . . . . .

Smaller type: Desirable for printing eight lines
per inch on continuous forms.

sprocket drive push and
pull, paper punched on
both sides.
none.

printing.

10
26
12

0-9.
A-Z.
&,.-/%#@:j:O*$
special request.
alternative Print
Set F.
no.

48 and
blank.
Numeric Print Set

Priority feature: Permits interruption of the
main routine upon the completion of a cycle by the
printer.

· 211 Drive past the head:

yes, with special ribbon.
yes.
yes .

Arrangement of Heads

Req. COBOL set:
Total: . . . . .

Numerical Print: Permits changing from the standard 48-character set chain to a chain with only a
16-character set; speeds up to 1,285 lines per
minute can then be obtained on all-numeric output.

6.

· 32

0-9.

O.
6

$.,*-0
no.
no.

16 and
blank

continuous fanfold sprocket
punched stationery .
printing.

Positional Arrangement

. 321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:
· 324 Track use
Data: .
Total: .
.325 Row use
Data: .
.33

10

Coding:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1 line at 6 or 8 per inch .
100 or 132 char. at 10 per
inch.
100 or 132 .
100 or 132.
all.
engraved character font
(Internal coding as in
Data Code Table No.2) .

Reprinted 4/63

IBM 1410

402:081.340
§

081.

. 34

.54

Format Control
Control: . . . .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: .
Insert spaces:
Section sizes:

Physical Dimensions

• 351 Overall width: •

3.50 to 18. 75 inches by
vernier.
1 to 22.0 inches by 1/6 inch
at 6 lines/in.
1 to 16.5 inches by 1/8 inch
at 8 lines/in.
1 to 17.0 inches (recommended maximum for
proper stacking).

· 352 Length forms: •

• 353 Maximum margins
Left: • . . . .
Right; Modell:
Model 2:
.4

CONTROLLER

. 41

Identity: . . . .

• 42

Connection to Si:stem

.55

.56

• 422 Off-line:

no.
with optional Priority Feature.
no.
no .

Testable Conditions
Disabled:. .
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Controller not ready:
Exhausted: . . . . . . .

1 Model 3, Model 4, or
Model 8 per channel.
none.

Connection to Device

program .
unlimited .
no.
yes.
yes.
yes.
no.

Control Operations
Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code: . . .

3.0 inches.
6.2 inches.
3. a inches.

Input- Output Synchronizer .
1414 Model 3, 4, or 8.

. 421 On-line:

.43

Code Translation: . . . automatic, by processor .

Fonnat Compatibility
Other device or system: 1403 Model 3.
Code translation:..
none.

• 35

.53

no .
yes.
no .
no.
yes .
no.
yes .
yes .

. 431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions: .
none .

....

.44

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load: . . . .
.442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
. 444 Input- output area
lockout: . . . . .
· 445 Table control: . .
.446 Synchronization: .

1 line of 100 or 132 characters.
core storage .

. 51

Blocks

. 52

.524

· 525
. 526
4/63

Conditions
I: .

standard character set, lOC
print positions .
numeric set, 100 print positions.
standard character set, 132
print positions.
numeric set, 132 print positions .

n:
III:

IV:

100 or 132 characters per
line.

.62

Speeds

.621 Nominal or peak speed
I and III:
600 lines/min.
n and IV: . . . . . I, 285 lines/min .

fixed.

.

.

Input-Output Operations

.622 Important parameters
Print 1 line, I and III:
none.
Print,l line, n and IV:
1 line forward with single
Skipping speed: .
step.
Stepping:
step I, 2, or 3 lines as sepSkipping speed: .
arate operation, or as
combined "print then
step".
.623 Overhead
Step 1 line:
Skipping: . . . . . . . . skip to one of 12 channels
Step 2 lines:
on paper tape loop; may be
Step 3 lines:
combined in "print then
Independent skip of N
skip".
lines: . . . . . . . .
Marking: .
none .
Searching:
none.
r-------,~
AUERBACH / ~
Reprinted

· 521 Input:.
.522 Output:
. 523

.61

no.
none.
automatic.

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.512 Block demarcation
Output: . . . . . .

PERFORMANCE

each character.

.5

.511 Size of block:

.6

I

100.0 msec.
46.7 msec.
33. a in/sec for skips of 8
lines or fewer .
75.0 in/ sec for skips of
more than 8 lines.
20 msec.
25 msec.
30 msec.
15 + 5N msec. (N < 9).
37.4+ 2. 2N msec •. (N ,2:9).

INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTER (1403)

§

402:081.624

081.

.72

.624 Effective speeds
Average line
feed, inches
1/6:
2/6:
3/6:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
(See graph)
.63

Lines/min. ,
II & IV
1,285
I, 160
1,059
838
664
580
514
461

Lines/min. ,
I & III
600
572
545
480
418
382
353
327

Demands on S},:stem
Component

Condition

Processing
Unit:

I
II
III
IV
* at single spacing.
.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

. 71

Adjustments
Adjustment
Vertical alignment:
Horizontal alignment:
Form width:
Printing quality:
Form thickness:
Line pitch:

Msec per
line
1. 10
1. 10
1.45
1.45

Percentage *
or
or
or
or

1. 10
2.35
1. 45
3.10

Comment
Method
knobs.
knobs.
sliding forms
tractors.
graduated
dial.
graduated
lever.
switch
6 or 8
lines/
inch.

cD 1963

Other Controls
Function
Check reset:
Carriage restore:
Single cycle:

.73

Form Comment
key
resets printer error
indications.
key
positions carriage at
channel 1 on tape
loop.
key
initiates 1 printer
cycle.

Loading: and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: . . . .
Stacker: . . . .
.732 Replenishment time:.
.733 Adjustment time:. . .

Capacity
20 -inch stack.
20-inch stack.
2 to 3 minutes.
3 to 5 minutes.
printer needs to be stopped.
.734 Optimum reloading period
I & III:
56 minutes.
II & IV:
35 minutes.
Basis:.
2-part sets, 17 inches long,
at I-inch line spacing.

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

Recording:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Feed jam:
Wrong length record:

echo check
none.
fixed.
check
check
none.
interlock
check
check

indicator & alarm.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

indicator & alarm.
srop & alarm.
wait ..
stop & alarm.
indicator.

Reprinted 4/63

IBM 1410

402:081.800
EFFECTIVE SPEED
IBII\ 1403

6,000
5,000
4,000
3,000

2,000

i'-.
1,000
900
800

i'-.

"'"'

..........

~

700
600

........

500

....... .......

400
Printed Lines
per Minute

---

--

NUMERIC ONLY (with NUMERICAL
PRINT FEATURE)

,-----

------ /1

I---I " -

A~PH1'ERIC

--

300

200

100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30

20
0

112

1

2

3

Inter- Line Space in Inches

4/63 Reprinted

I AUERBACru....~

4

5

II

402:082. 100
STANDARD

EDP

•

mORTS

IBM 1410
Input-Output
1403 Printer Model 3

INPUT ·OUTPUT: PRINTER (1403 MODEL 3)

§

082.

.212 Reservoirs: . . . • . . none.

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity:

.12

Description

.22
. . . . . . . Printer .
1403 Model 3.

The mM 1403 Printer, Model 3, has the same general
physical characteristics as the Models 1 and 2. The
basic difference between the Model 3 and the other
models is in design of the device which rotates the
type elements.
In the earlier models, the individual slugs of type
formed a closed-loop oval chain which was mounted
in a horizontal plane. In the Model 3, a train of type
slugs (with three characters per slug) moves through
a similarly shaped channel, reSUlting in greater
printing accuracy at higher speeds. The relative increase in rotational speed from 90 inches to 206
inches per second results in peak printing speed of
1,100 single-spaced lines per minute, and 755 lines
per minute with an average spacing of 1 inch.
The Model 3 uses the same dual-speed, tape-controlled carriage as the Model 2, permitting skipping
at 33 inches per second for skips of eight or fewer
lines, and 75 inches per second for skips of more
than eight lines.
Use of the same instruction and core storage areas
as the Model 2, precludes the need to change programs in order to use the Model 3. However, the
reduction from 100 milliseconds to 54.5 milliseconds
in the print cycle time results in a corresponding reduction in available processing time. Programs may
therefore need to be rewritten in order to complete
all necessary processing in the reduced time available without sacrificing the increase in printing
speed.
No more than two Model 3 printers can be connected
to a 1410 system. Each Model 3 in a 1410 system
requires a 1414 Input-Output Synchronizer (Model 3,
4, or 8).

· 221 Recording system:. . . magnet-driven hammer
passes from against horizontal moving line of tape
slugs .
none.
. 333 Sensing system: .
none.
· 223 Common system:
· 23

Multiple Copies

.231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon:
Carbon creep:
· 233 Types of master
Multilith: .
Spirit: . . . . .
· 24

Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: .
.25

Priority Feature: Permits interruption of the main
routine upon completion of a cycle by the printer.
.13

Availability: . .

18 months.

. 14

First Delivery:

August, 1964 .

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

. 21

Drive Mechanism

yes, with special ribbon.
yes.

printing.
1.
132.
1 line at a time.

Range of Symbols
Standard Set
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
Alternatives: .
FORTRAN set:.
Basic COBOL set:
Total: . . . . . .

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

· 31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium: . . .

· 32

. 321 Serial by:
. 322 Parallel by:
• 324 Track use
Data: .
Total: •
. 325 Row use
Data: .
· 33

10
26
12

0 - 9.
A - Z.
&,.-/%#@~O*$

special request.
alternative Print Set F.
no.
48 and blank.

continuous fanfold sprocketpunched stationery.
.
printing.

Positional Arrangement

Coding: .

sprocket drive, paper
punched on both sides.

©

6.
no.

Arrangement of Heads

.312 Phenomenon: .

Optional Features

.211 Drive past the head: .

Sensing and Recording Systems

1963 by Auerbach Corporatian and BNA Incarporated

1 line at 6 or 8 per inch .
132 char at 10 per inch •
132.
132.
all.
engraved character font (Internal coding as in Data
Code Table No.2).

5/63

402:082.340
§

IBM 1410

OS2.

· 34

Fonnat Compatibility

. 53

Code Translation: . . . automatic.

. 54

Fonnat Control

Other device or system: 1403 Models 1 and 2.
Code translation: "
none.
. 35

Physical Dimensions

.315 Overall width:
. 352 Length
Forms: •

3. 50 to IS. 75 inches by
vernier.
1. 0 to 22.0 by 1/6 inch at 6

lines/in.
1. 0 to 16.5 by 1/8 inch at S
lines/in.
1. 0 to 17; 0 inches (recommended maximum for
paper stacking).
. 353 Maximum margins
Left: •
Right: . . . . .
.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:....

· 42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:
. 422 Off-line:
· 43

3.0 inches.
3.0 inches.

1 Model 3, Model 4, or
Model S per channel .
none.

Connection to Device

Data Transfer Control

. 441 Size of load: • . . .
• 442 Input-Output areas:
. 443 Input-Output area
access: . . • . •
• 444 Input-Output area
lockout: . . . . .
. 445 Table control: . .
. 446 Synchronization:.

1 line of 132 characters .
core storage.
each character.
no .
none.
automatic.

•5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

. 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Output: . . • . . .
• 52

Input-Ouq,ut Operations

.55

Select fonnat:
Select code:
.56

132 char per line .
fixed.

.6

PERFORMANCE

• 61

Conditions: •

.62

Speeds

.524

.525
. 526

5/63

yes .
yes.
no.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.

. . . none.

.621 Nominal or peak speed: 1,100 lines/minute.
.622 Important parameters
Print 1 line: . .
54.5 msec.
Skipping speed: .
33.0 in/sec for skips of
8 lines or less.
Skipping speed: .
75.0 in/sec for skips of
more than 8 lines .
.623 Overhead
Step 1 line: .
20 msec.
Step 2 lines:
25 msec.
Step 3 lines:
30 msec.
Independent skip of
N lines: • . . .
15 + 5N msec (N < 9).
37.4 + 2. 2N msec (N ~ 9) •
.624 Effective speeds
Average line feed,
inches
1/6:
2/6:
3/6:
1:
2:

3:

.523

no.
with optional Priority
feature.
no.
no .

Testable Conditions
Disabled: . .
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
EXhausted: • . . •

none.
1 line forward with single
step.
step I, 2, or 3 lines as sepStepping:.
arate operation, as combined "print, then step. "
.63
Skipping: . • • . • • . . skip to 1 of 12 channels on
paper tape loop; may be
combined in "print, then
skip. "
none.
Marking:.
none.
Searching:

.521 Input:. . .
.522 Output: . .

program.
unlimited.
no .
yes.
yes.
yes.
no .

Control Operations
Disable: . . . . . .
Request interrupt: .

Input-Output Synchronizer
1414 Model 3, 4, or 8.

.431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions:. . . . • . none.
· 44

Control: . . . .
Fonnat alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: .
Insert spaces: .
Section sizes:

4:
5:

Lines/minute
1,100.
I, ~OS.
930.
755.
610.
538.
481.
435.

(see graph)
Demands on System
Component: . .
Msec per line: .
Percentage"': . •
'" at single spacing.

processing unit.
1.4.
2.57.

INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTER (1403 MODEL 3)

§

082.

.73

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments
Adjustment

.72

402:082.700

Method

Comment

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: • . . .
Stacker: . . . .
. 732 Replenishment time:.

. 733
Vertical alignment: knobs.
.734
Horizontal
knobs.
alignment:
Form Width:
sliding forms
tractor.
Print density
knob.
control:
.8
graduated lever.
Form thickness:
switch
Line Pitch:
6 or 8 lines/in.

Basis: 2-part sets, 17 inches long at I-inch line
spacing,

Other Controls

Error

Check or
Interlock

Recording:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Feed jam:
Wrong length record:

echo check
fixed.
check
check
none,
interlock
check
check

Function

Form

Comment

Check reset:

key

resets printer error
indications.
positions carriage at posi~
tion 1 on tape loop.
initiates 1 printer cycle.

Carriage restart: key
Single cycle:

key

©

Adjustment time: .
Optimum reloading
period: . . • . • .

Capacity
20-inch stack.
20-inch stack •
2 to 3 minutes.
printer needs to be stopped.
3 to 5 minutes .
38 minutes.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Action
indicator and alarm.
indicator,
stop and alarm.
wait.
stop and alarm.
indicator.

5/63

402:082.800

IBM 1410

EFFECTIVE SPEED
IBM 1403 PRINTER, MODEL 3

6,000
5,000
4,000
3,000

2,000

~

1,000
900
800
700

.....
~

.....

~

600

--

~

---r--

500
Printed
Lines
per
Minute

t--

400
300

200

100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30

20

o

1/2

1

2

3

Interline Space in Inches

5/63

4

5

402:083.100
.SIANOARO

II

EDP
REPDRlS

IBM 1410
Input-Output
Console I/O Printer

INPUT-OUTPUT: CONSOLE I/O PRINTER
.23

§083
.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

. 12

.231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon: . . depends on stationery.
· Console I/O Printer.
Part of 1415 Model 1
Console.

.232 Types of master
Multilith:
Zerox:
Spirit:

· no.
· yes.
· yes .

Description:
. 24
The Console I/O Printer is a modified mM electric
typewriter that stands on the console desk. The
printer handles console inquiries, prints messages
under program control, provides a log of console
operations, and displays and permits alteration of
the contents of control registers and core storage.
The display function is particularly important because
no other visual display of control register or
storage status is provided in the 1410 system.
Whenever a system stop occurs (whether it is programmed, operator-controlled, or caused by an
error) the contents of the 12 primary control
registers are automatically printed in a fixed format. The same information can be printed after
each cycle when manually stepping through a
program in the I/E CYCLE mode. In the DISPLAY
mode, the starting address is typed manually; then
the contents of successive core storage positions
are printed until a word mark is sensed.
Console inquiries are initiated by pressing the Request key. This sets an indicator which must be
tested by the stored program to transfer control to
the inquiry routine. If the optional Priority Feature
is installed, pressing the Request key causes the
priority routine to be executed as soon as inputoutput channel 1 is not busy. Inquiries are limited
to a preset length specified by the programmer;
longer or shorter messages result in wrong-length
record indications and incorrect processing of the
inquiry. Carriage returns, backspacing, and tabulation cannot be controlled from the keyboard.

. 13

Multiple Copies

Availability: .

.14

First Delivery:

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

· 14 months as of February,
1962
· December, 1961.

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:
Use of station:.
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

. 25

· 1 character at a time.
· keyboard input.

.1.
.44 keys.
· 1 character at a time.

Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters
Special:
Alternatives:
FORTRAN set:
Req. COBOL set:
Total:

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:.
. 312 Phenomenon:
.32

· printing.

.1.
.1.

.10
.26
· 28

0-9.
A - Z.

as in Data Code Table
No.1.
none.
yes.
yes.
· 64 plus word mark and
invalid parity symbols.

· continuous fanfold
stationery.
input- -key depression .
output- -printing.

Positional Arrangement

. 321 Serial by:
.324 Track use
Data:
. 325 Row use:

· character at 10 per inch .

.33

Coding:

· engraved character font .
(Internal coding as in
Data Code Table No.1) .

. 212 ReservoirS: . . . . . . . none.

. 34

Format Compatibility: .. none .

.22

.35

Physical Dimensions

. 211 Drive past the head:.

. pin-feed platen; paper
punched both sides.

Sensing and Recording Systems

. 221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system: .
. 223 Common system: .

· engraved hammers .
· typewriter keyboard
· no.

© 1963

. 351 Overall width: . . .
.352 Length: . . . . . .
.353 Maximum margins:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

· 85 print positions.
· all for data .

.9.75 inches .
· no limitations.
· no limitations .
Reprinted 4/63

402:083.400

IBM 1410

§083

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:....

. 42

Connection to System

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

. 71

Adjustments

· no separate controller.

.421 On - Line: .
.422 Off-Line:
.43

.7

Adjustments
Line spacing:
Margin set:
Copy control:

. 1.
. none.

Connection to Device

.72

.431 Devices per controller: . 1.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . . none.
.44

.441 Size of load:. .

. . ..

.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . .
.444 Input-output area
lockout:..
.445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization:

· 1 to N characters, where
N is limited by core
storage.
· core storage or control
registers .

.51

Blocks
· 1 to N characters, where
N is limited by core
storage.

· Release key; next higher
core position must contain a previously-inserted
group mark.
Output: . . . . . . . . · group mark in core storage
or Cancel key.

4/63 Reprinted

compensates for
form thickness.

Form

Inquiry request:
Cancel:

key
key

Release:

key

Word-mark:

key

Comment
sets testable indicator
terminates inquiry
routine.
initiates processing of
a typed inquiry.
enters word mark with
next character typed .

· yes, for full block (no
lockout in overlap mode.)
· none .
· automatic.

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . . . .

step 1 or 2 lines .

· each character of core
storage .

.5

.511 Size of block:

lever
2 levers.
5-position
lever

Other Controls
Function

Data Transfer Control

Comment

Method

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:

none.
none.
check

Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Receipt of data:

none.
all codes valid.
none.

Action

indicator & carriage
lock-up.

none.

interlock
parity

wait.
indicator & alarm.

402:091.100
IBM 1410
Input-Output
Magnetic Tape Unit

INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT (729)

§

091.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Magnetic Tape Unit.
729 Models II, IV, V, VI.

Description
These tape units are used in the mM 1401, 7070,
7080 and 7090 series systems as well as in the 1410.
In tape width, density and format, they are compatible with the 7330 and 727 tape units. The only significant differences among the four models are in
recording densities and tape speeds. These are
as follows:
Model
II

IV
V
VI

Tape speed
Density
(inches/sec.) (char/inch)
75.0
200
556
112.5
200
556
75.0
112.5

Transfer rate
(charlsec. )

200
556
800
200
556
800

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head:
.212 Reservoirs
Number:
Form: . .
Capacity: .
.213 Feed drive:
.214 Take-up drive:
· 22

Sensing and Recording Systems

. 221 Recording system:
.222 Sensing system: .
.223 Common system:

magnetic head .
magnetic head.
2-gap head.

.23

Multiple Copies: .

none.

· 24

Arrangement of Heads

15,000
41,667
60,000
22,500
62,500
90,000

Use of station:
Stacks: ••••
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

sensing.

Priority Feature: Permits interruption of the main
routine upon completion of an overlapped read,
write, or write check operation that does not result
in a busy or not ready condition.
with 1410 system,
14 months as of February,
1962.

,.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium: . . .
.312 Phenomenon: .
· 32

1 row at a time.
1.

7.
1 row at a time.

plastic tape with magnetiZable surface.
magnetization.

. . . . . . . 1 to N rows at 200, 556, or
800 rows per inch; N lim-

· 322 Parallel by: . . . .
· 324 Track use
Data: . . . . . . .
Redundancy check:
Timing: . . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: .
Total: .
.325 Row use
Data: .
Redundancy check:
Timing: . . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: . .
Gap: .
Coding:

September, 1960 .

© 1963

7.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:

.33
First Delivery:

2.
vacuum.
about 7 feet.
motor.
motor.

recording_
1.

Processing Overlap: Permits computation during
tape start time and between character transfers.

. 14

pinch roller friction.

Use of station: •
Stacks: •••••
Heads/stack: ••
Method of use: •

Optional Features

Availability:. . • . •

PHYSICAL FORM

15,000
41,667
22,500
62,500

Up to 20 tape units can be connected to a 1410
system, with a maximum of 10 units on each data
transmission channel. In a one-channel system no
computing can be done during a tape input or output
operation unless the Processing Overlap feature is
added. However, overlapped reading, writing and
processing are possible in a two-channel system.
Lateral and longitudinal parity checks are made on
,
both reading and recording. Different models of the
729 can be intermixed with each other and with 7330
tape units through the use of Tape Intermix Units on
a 1414 Modell Synchronizer.

.13

.2

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

ited by available core
storage.
7 tracks.

6.
1.

o (self-clocking)
O.
O.

7.
1 to N.
1.

O.
O.
O.
0.75 inch.
as in Data Code Table
No.1.
Reprinted 4/63

402:091.340
§

IBM 1410

091.

. 34

Format Compatibility

. 526 Searching:

inter-block gap, 0.75 inch
long .
none .

Other device or system Code translation

. 53

Code Translation:

matched codes .

.54

Format Control: .

none.

· 55

Control Operations

.525 Marking: .

mM 7330, 727 tape
units: . . . . . .
.35

Physical Dimensions

. 351 Overall width:
. 352 Length:. . . .
.4

CONTROLLER

. 41

Identity: ..

. 42

. 422 Off-line:

Input/ Output Synchronizer .
1414, M o d e l l . . 56

Testable Conditions

maximum of 2 1414·s,
Modell and/or 2.
none .

Disabled: ..
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:

disabled after unloading.
yes (with special features).
no.
no.
yes .
yes.

no.
no .
no.
no.
yes.
yes .

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: up to 10 Model lIs, IVs,
Vs and VIs in any combination .
. 432 Restrictions:..
. .. 7330s can be mixed with
729s if a tape Intermix
Unit is installed on the
1414 Modell.
.44

Disable: .. . ..
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload: . . .

0.50 inch .
2, 400 feet per reel .

Connection to System

.421 On-line:

. 43

not required.

. 442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
. 444 Input-output area
lockout: .
. 445 Table control:
. 446 Synchronization:.

1 to N char, limited by
available core storage.
core storage.
each character.
yes, for full block (no lockout
when Processing Overlap
is used) •
none.
automatic.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

. 51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation
Input: .
Output:
.52

Input-Output Operations

. 521
. 522
. 523
.524

Input:. .
Output: .
Stepping: .
Skipping: .

4/63 Reprinted

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions
I: .
II:

.62

Data Transfer Control

. 441 Size of load:

.6

1 to N char, limited by
available core storage.
gap on tape. or limiting
mark in core storage.
limiting mark in core
storage.

1 block forward .
1 block forward .
none.
1 block backward (backspace).
erase 3.5 inches forward
(to skip defective tape
areas).

standard system.
with Processing Overlap

Speeds

· 621 Nominal or peak speed
Model II:
Model IV: .
Model V:
Model VI:.

15,000 or 41,667 char/sec .
22,500 or 62,500 char/sec.
15,000, 41,667, or 60,000
char/sec.
22, 500, 62,500, or 90,000
char/sec .

· 622 Important parameters
Name
Density
Models II & IV: .
Models V & VI: .
Tape speed
Models II & V:
Models IV & VI:
Start time
Models II & V
read: . . . .
write: ..
Models IV & VI
read:
write: . . .
Stop time
Model~ II & V
read: . . .
write: . . . .
Models IV & VI
read: ..
write: . . .
Full rewind time
Models II & V:
Models IV & VI:
Interblock gap: ..

Value
200 or 556 char/inch .
200, 556 or 800 char/inch.
75.0 inches/sec.
112.5 inches/sec .
10.5 msec.
7.5 msec .
6.7 msec.
5.0 msec.
2.1 msec.
5.1 msec.
2.1 msec.
3.8 msec.
1. 2 minutes.
0.9 minute.
0.75 inch.

INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT (729)

§

402:091.623

091.

.623 Overhead
Models II & V:
Models N & VI:
. 624 Effective speeds:
Models II & V
200 char/inch:
556 char/inch:
Models N & VI
200 char/inch:
556 char/inch:
Model V
800 char/inch:
Model VI
800 char/inch:

12.6 msec/block.
. 8.8 msec/block •

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

. 71

Adjustments
Adjustment
Recording density:
Densities option:

15.000 N/(N + 189) char/
sec.
41.667 N/(N + 525) char/
sec.
22.500 N/(N + 198) char/
sec.
62.500 N/(N + 550) char/
sec.

Method Comment

.72

switch selects 1 of 2 densities.
switch selects any pair of
densities (Models V &
VI only).

Other Controls
Form

Function

60.000 N/(N + 756) char/
sec.

Address selection:
Load rewind:

dial.
key

90.000 N/(N + 792) char/
sec.

Unload:
File protection:

key
ring on
spool

Comment
lowers tape into
reservoirs.
ring permits writing.

where N = char/block (see
graphs).
. 63

. 73

Demands on System
Component

Condition

Processing
Unit

I; without Processing Overlap
Models II & V
Read
200 char/inch: 10.7 + O. 0667C
556 char/inch: 10.7 + O. 0240G
800 char/inch: 10.7 + O. 0167G
Write
200 char/inch: 11.7 + O. 0667C
556 char/inch: 11. 7 + O. 0240G
800 char/inch: 11.7 + O. 0167C
Models IV & VI
Read
200 char/inch:
6. 8 + O. 0444C
556 char/inch:
6.8 + O. 0160G
Write
200 char/inch:
7.8 + O. 0444G
556 char/inch:
7.8 + O. 0160G
II; with ·.Processing Overlap
Models II & V
Read
200 char/inch:
O. 0 + O. 0045G
556 char/inch:
O. 0 + O. 0045C
800 char/inch:
0.0 + 0.0045C
Write
200 char/inch:
0.0 + 0.0045C
556 char/inch:
0.0 + 0.0045C
800 char/inch:
0.0 + 0.0045C
Models iv & VI
Read
200 char/inch:
0.0 + 0.0045C
556 char/inch:
O. 0 + O. 0045C
800 char/inch:
O. 0 + O. 0045C
Write
200 char/inch:
0.0 + 0.0045G
556 char/inch:
0.0 + 0.0045G
800 char/inch:
O. 0 + O. 0045C

Processing
Unit

Msec per block

where G is number of characters per block.

® 1963

or

Percentage'
of transfer
time

100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Capacity
Reel: . . . . . 2.400 feet; for 1.000 char blocks.
5.000.000 char at 200 char/inch.
11.300. 000 char at 556 char/inch.
or
14.400.000 char at 800 char/inch.
.732 Replenishment time:
1. 0 to 1. 5 !l1inutes.
tape unit needs to be
stopped.
.734 Optimum reloading period
Models II & V: .
6 minutes.
Models N & VI: . . . 4 minutes.

100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0

7.9
21.9
31.4
7.9
21.9
31.4

.8

ERRORS • CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

Recording:

read-back; lateral
parity
lateral & longitudinal
parity
none.
none.
all codes acceptable.
reflective spot or tape
mark
none.
interlock
sign al strength check

indicator & alarm.

Reading:
14.6
32.9
47.3
14.6
32.9
47.3

Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Recording level:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

indicator & alarm.

indicator.

wait.
indicator & alarm.

Reprinted 4/63

402:091.800

IBM 1410_.

Effective Speed

IBM 729-IV & 729-VI
10,000,000
7

4

2

1,000,000
7
4

2

100,000
7

~

~

Effective Speed,
char/sec.

800 char/inch (Model VI only)i}.

4

2

~

10,00a

yV
/..

V

/'

~~

I--

~~j...

.....

~

I--

\556 char/inch

1 II

j..oj..ol-

~.......... 200 char
T /"1
inC h

7

I.~

4

2

1,000

7'

~

/

7

4

2

100
10

2

4

7

100

2

4

Characters Per Block

4/63 Reprinted

I AUERBAC'U!iD

2

4

7 10,000

INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT (729)

402: 091. 80 1

Effective Speed

IBM 729-11 & 729-V

10,000,000
7

4

2

1,000,000
7

4

2

100,000
7

Effective Speed,
char/sec.

-

~

4

800 char/inch (Model V only)-.,.

~ ::::1-'"

2

~
~

10,000

V

_f-- I -

...- \.556 char/inch

'/'
_ ... 1-

~

"'-200

char/in~h

2

4

1//

7

V
~

4

""

/.1-"
2

/

1,000

V

~

7

4

2

100
10

2

4

7 100

2

4

7 1,000

710,000

Characters Per Block

C0 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 4/63

402:092.100

.SlAND'''D

II

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 1410
Input-Output
Magnetic Tape Unit
INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

§

092.

.22

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

. 12

Description

Magnetic Tape Unit .
7330 Model 1.

The Model 7330 Tape Unit is slower, simpler, and
less expensive than the 729, but the two are completely compatible. Tape speed is 36 inches per
second, and peak transfer rate is either 7,200 or
20,016 characters per second, depending upon the
recording density selected. Lateral and longitudinal
parity checks are made on both reading and recording.

To switch the unit from read to write status, it
must be programmed to backspace over the last
record read and then rewrite it; such switching
between reading and recording will be infrequent
in normal applications.

Sensing and Recording Systems
magnetic head .
magnetic head .
2-gap head provides
read-after-write checking.

. 221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system: .
. 223 Common system: .
. 23

Multiple Copies:.

.. 24

Arrangement of Heads

The throughput of the 7330 can be limited by two restrictions that must be considered:
High-speed rewind, which requires 2.2 minutes,
is always terminated by unloading of the tape from
.the vacuum columns and read-record head. Rewinding without unloading requires 13.3 minutes
per full reel.

(7330)

3
.31

.. none .

Use of statio~:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

recording.

Use of station:
Stacks: . . .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

sensing.
1.

..

. 312 Phenomenon: .

.321 Serial by:

· 13

Availability:

with 1410 system,
14 months as of February,
1962.

: 14

First Delivery:

October, 1961.

·2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

.33

Coding:

.34

Format Compatibility

· 211 Drive past the head:
.212 Reservoirs
Number:
Form:
Capacity: .
. 213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive:

7.
1 row at a time.

plastic tape with magnetizable surface .
magnetiza tion.

Positional Arrangement

. 322 Parallel by:
. 324 Track use
Data:
..
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: .
Total: .
. 325 Row use
Data:
Redundancy check:
Timing: . . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: .
Gap:

Priority feature: Permits interruption of the main
routine upon completion of an overlapped read or
write operation that does not result in a busy or
not ready condition.

1 row at a time.

Form of Storage

Optional Features
Processing Overlap: Permits computation during
tape start time and between character transfers.

7.

EXTERNAL ST'ORAGE

.311 Medium:

.32

1.

1 to N rows at 200 or 556
char/inch; N limited by
available core storage .
7 tracks.

6.
1.

o (self-clocking).

O.
O.

7.
1 to N.
1.

O.
O.
O.
0.75 inch.
as in Data Code Table No.
1.

pinch roller friction.

2.
vacuum.
about 1. 5 feet.
motor .
motor.

© 1963

Other device or system: mM 729, 727 tape units.
Code translation:
not required .

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated

Reprinted 4/63

402:092.350

§

IBM 1410

092 .

. 35

Physical Dimensions

· 351 Overall width:
. 352 Length:. . . .

.4

CONTROLLER

. 41

Identity: . . . .

. 42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:

Input-Output Synchronizer .
1414 Model 2

Connection to Device

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:

....

.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
. 444 Input- output area
lockout: .
.445 Table control:
. 446 Synchronization:

1 to N char, limited by
available core storage.
core storage.
each character.
yes, for full block (no
lockout when Processing
Overlap is used).
none.
automatic.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

. 51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: .
Output:
.52

Input-Output Operations

. 521
.522
.523
. 524

Input:. . .
Output: . .
Stepping:
Skipping: .

1 to N char, limited by
available core storage.
gap on tape or limiting
mark in core storage.
limiting mark.

.526 Searching:

1 block forward .
1 block forward.
none .
1 block backward (backspace); erase 3.5 inches
forward (to skip defective
tape areas).
inter-block gap, 0.75 inch
long.
none.

· 53

matched codes.

· 525 Marking: .

Code Translation:

4/63 Reprinted

.55

Control Operations

0.50 inch.
2, 400 feet per reel.

.431 Devices per controller: up to 10 .
. 432 Restrictions:. . . . . . 729s cannot be intermixed
with 7330s on 1414 Model 2;
7330s can be intermixed
with 729s on 1414 Model 1
with addition of #7814 Tape
Intermix.

,.44

Format Control: . . . . none.

Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload: . . .
.56

disabled after unloading.
yes (with optional features) •
no.
no.
yes .
yes.

Testable Conditions
Disabled: . .
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:

no more than 2 1414s,
Models 1 and/or 2.
none.

. 422 Off-line:
· 43

.54

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions

no.
no .
no.
no.
yes.
yes .

standard system.
with Processing Overlap

I: .
II:

.62
. 621 Nominal or peak speed:
. 622 Important parameters
Density: . : . . .
Tape speed: . . .
Inter-block gap: .
Full rewind time
With unloading:
Without unloading:
Start time
Read: . .
Write . .
Stop time
Read: .
Write: . .
. 623 Overhead: .
.624 Effective speeds
at 200 char/inch:

7,200 or 20,016 char/sec .
200 or 556 char/inch.
36.0 inches/sec.
0.75 inch.
2. 2 minutes.
13.3 minutes.
7.6 msec.
5.0 msec.
12.9 msec.
15.3 msec.
20.4 msecjblock .

7,200 N/(N + l47} chari
sec.
20,016 N/(N + 408} chari
at 556 char/inch: .
sec.
where N = char/block (see graph).

.63

Demands on System
Component

Condition

Processing
Unit

1; without Processing Overlap
Read
200 char/inch:
8.1 + 0.139C
100.0
556 char/inch:
8. 1 + O. 050C
100.0
Write
200 char/inch:
13. 8 + O. 139C
100.0
556 char/inch:
13.8 + O. 050C
100.0
II; with Processing Overlap
Read
200 char/inch:
0+ 0.0045C
3.8
556 char/inch:
o + O. 0045C
10.5
Write
200 char/inch:
o + 0.0045C
3.8
556 char/inch:
o + 0.0045C
10.5
wher" C is number of characters per block.

Msec per block

or Percentage
of transfer
time

402:092.700

INPUT·OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT (7330)

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments
Adjustment:
Method:
Comment:

.8

recording density.
switch.
200 or 556 char/in.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

Recording:

lateral & longitudinal
parity
lateral & longitudinal
parity
none.
none.
all codes acceptable.
reflective spot or tape
mark
none.
interlock
signal strength check

indicator & alarm.

Reading:

. 72

. 73

Othe"r Controls
Function
Address selection:
Load rewind:

Form
dial
key

Unload:
File protection:

key
ring on
spool

Comment
loads tape into
reservoirs.
ring permits
writing .

Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Recording level:

indicator & alarm •

indicator.

wait.
indicator & alarm.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
reel.
2,400 feet; for 1, ODD-char
blocks, 5, 000, 000 char at
200 char/inch or
11, 300, 000 char at 556
char/inch.
. 732 Repleni"shment time: . . 1. a to 1. 5 minutes •
tape unit needs to be
stopped .
. 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .
13 minutes.
Storage: .

Capacity: .'

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 4/63

IBM 1410

402:092.800

EFFECTIVE SPEED
IBM 7330
10,000,000
7

-1-1---.f--+-- ~l---I----l--- -

4

-1-1---~-+---

- -l-jl--J 4---+--1--1-

--- -

---.+-,---11--- --- -

2

1,000,000

7
4

2

100,000
Effective Speed,
char/sec.

7
4

2

---.--

~4--. 556 char/inch.
10,000

-

7
./

I---+--I-+-+-II--I-++-l-I/--?,,/=--+~--,i,...-f:=--=-lf--+++--t----:;:::-- 200 char/ inchl-l--+l~
4

2

1,000
7
1.0-

4

2

10

4

7

2

4

100
Characters Per Block

4/63 Reprinted

7

2

1,000

4

7

10,000

402: 101.1 00
•

II

STANDARD

EDP
R£PORIS

IBM 1410
Input-Output
Data Transmission Unit

INPUT-OUTPUT: DATA TRANSMISSION UNIT

§

101.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . .

.12

Description

Data Transmission Unit.
1009 Modell.

This unit enables the 1410 Data Processing System
to transmit and receive data at speeds up to 300
characters per second over public or private telephone or telegraph lines. The unit at the other end
of the line may be a similarly equipped 1401 or
1410 system or an mM 7701 or 7702 Magnetic Tape
Transmission Terminal. A specially-equipped
telephone and a serial data set, supplied by the
communications company, are also required at each
terminal.
Data from core storage of the transmitting 1410 is
transferred to the output synchronizer in loads with
a fixed length of 80 characters. This transfer
requires 880 microseconds, after which the Processing Unit is free to perform other operations.
From the synchronizer, the data goes to the 1009
Data Transmission Unit. There it is converted from
the normal serial-by-character, parallel-by-bit,
BCD form to a special serial-by-bit, 4-out-of-8 trans . 13
mission code in which each character code consists
of four JJ1 JJ bits and four JJOJJ bits, and sent over the
. 14
communications line.

© 1963

The 1009 at the receiving terminal reconverts the
data to the internal BCD form. Validity checks insure that each character received contains exactly
four out of eight bits, and a longitudinal parity check
detects most errors resulting from switched bits.
Data from the receiving 1009 is transferred to an
input synchronizer and from there into 1410 core
storage. Input messages may be of any length and
are terminated by an end-of-message signal. The
two 80-position input synchronizers are filled
alternately. Whenever one synchronizer fills up, the
1410 inquiry request indicator is set, and the stored
program must initiate the transfer from the synchronizer to the d f:'lsired core storage positions.
The 1410 Priority Feature simplifies programming
and increases operating efficiency.
The available transmission speeds are 75,~SO, and
300 characters per second. Maximum usable
speed and reliability of the data transmission are
dependent upon the quality of the available communications circuits. At present, the 300 character per
second speed cannot be used on toll lines.
The 1414 Model 4 Input/Output Synchronizer and the
#3238 Data Transmission Unit Adapter are required
to attach the 1009 to a 1410 system, and only one
Data Transmission Unit may be connected to a system.
Availability: ..

14 months as of February,
1962.

First Delivery:

October, 1961 .

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 4/63

402: 102.1 00

.STANIlARO
_EDP
."

IBM 1410

REPORTS

Input-Output
Remote Inquiry Unit

INPUT -OUTPUT: REMOTE INQUI RY UNIT

§

102.

.212 Reservoirs: . .

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

. 12

Description:

. 22
Remote Inquiry Unit.
1014 ModelL

When an inquiry is to be made, the Request key on
the Remote Inquiry Unit is depressed. This signals
the Remote Inquiry Unit Adapter on the 1414 Model
4 or 5 Input/Output Synchronizer. As soon as the
adapter is not busy with another inquiry operation,
the Proceed light on the Remote Inquiry Unit is
turned on. The inquiry unit address (0-9) is automatically loaded into the input synchronizer;
followed by the typed inquiry message of up to 78
characters. After typing of the inquiry is completed, the Release key is depressed. This action
sets the Inquiry Request indicator in the 1410 and the
message can be transferred to core storage and
processed by the stored program. With the
optional Priority Feature, control can be transferred
to the inquiry routine as soon as the synchronizer
is filled.
The reply message is set up in core storage with
the address of the receiving inquiry unit in the
first position. It is transferred to the output
synchronizer at internal speeds, and from there
to the inquiry typewriter at 15.5 characters per
second. Each reply message is limited to 78 characters, terminated by a group mark, and followed
by an automatic carriage return.
.13

Availability:.

.14

First Delivery:

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head: .

. 14 months as of February,
1962.
July, 1962.

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:
.222 Sensing system: .
. 223 Common system:
. 23

The Remote Inquiry Unit is a modified electric
typewriter with control circuits and indicator
lights, mounted on a 29- by 24-inch work table.
This unit is used for interrogating and printing replies from a 1410 system, and is connected to the
system by a four-wire cable up to 8 miles long.
The user is responsible for the installation and
maintenance of cable runs over 50 feet in length.
Up to 20 Remote Inquiry Units can be connected to
a 1410 system. An automatic sequencing device
controls the order of acceptance of inquiry requests when more than one unit is connected.

Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

Alternatives:
FORTRAN set:
Req. COBOL set:
Total:
.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:. .
. 312 Phenomenon:

· printing.

.1.
.1.

· 1 character at a time.
· keyboard input.
.1.
.44 keys.
· 1 character at a time.

10 0-9.
26 A-Z.
8 &. - $ * . # / (All other
special characters
print as #).
none.
no.
no.
44 plus space .

. continuous fanfold stationery .
. input - key depreSSion.
output - printing .

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:
. 324 Track use
Data:
.325 Row use:.

· character at 10 per inch .

. 33

· engraved character font .
(Internal coding as in
Data Code Table No. I,
except that only 8 of the
28 special characters are
available. )

Coding: .

. sprocket drive - paper
punched both sides.

© 1963

· no.
· yes.
· yes.

Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:

. 32

· depends on stationery .

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

.25

· engraved hammers.
· typewriter keyboard .
· no .

Multiple Copies

.231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon:
. 233 Types of master
Multilith:
Zerox:
Spirit:
.24

. none .

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

· 85 print positions.
· all for data .

Reprinted 4/63

IBM 1410

402: 102. 340
§

102.

. 34

Format Compatibility: . none.

.35

Physical Dimensions

. 351 Overall width: . . .
. 352 Length: . . . . . .
.353 Maximum margins:
.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: . . . .

.53

Code Translation:

· automatic .

. 54

Format Control:

· contained in data .

.55

Control Operations
Disable: . . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format: .
Select code:

.9.75 inches.
· up to 11 inches per sheet.
· no limitations
. 56

Remote Inquiry Unit Adapter.
#6136

. 42

Connection to System

Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . . .
Busy device:. . . .
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller: . . .
End of medium marks:
Exhausted:

· Input/Output Synchronizer.
1414 Model 4 or 5.

(Both units are required.)

.no.
· with Priority feature only •
· no.
· no .

.6

PERFORMANCE

· 61

Conditions:

. 62

Speeds

· no.
· no.
· no.
· yes.
· no.
· no .

. . . . none .

.421 On-line: . . . . . . . . · 1 1414 Model 4 or 5 and
1 or 2 #6136 adapters
per system.
. 422 Off-line: . . . . . . .
· none.

· 621 Nominal or peak speed:

.43

. 624 Effective speeds:

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: . 10 per #6136 adapter.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . . maximum of 6 buffers in
1414 Model 4 or 5; each
#6136 adapter requires
2 buffers.
.44

.71

Adjustments: . . . . . . typical typewriter
adjustments.

· each character.

.72

Other Controls

· yes .
· none .
· automatic.

. 51

Blocks

. 52

1 to 78 characters per inquiry (input) or reply
(output) .

.8

.524 Skipping:
.525 Marking:
.526 Searching:

· Release key.
· group mark in core storage.

· 1 block forward.
· 1 block forward.
· step 1 or 2 lines upon
key depressions or
control character 0
in output data.
· none.
· none.
· none.

Form
key

Inquiry release:

key

Inquiry cancel:

key

Comment
signals adapter that
an inquiry is to be
made.
signals end of message
and sets Inquiry Request indicator .
terminates inquiry
without a reply .

Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

Recording:
Reading
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:

parity
parity
none.
check
none.
check
none.
checks

indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm •
indicator & alarm.
alarm.
a larm if input typing
speed exceeds 12. 5
char/sec.: wait for
Proceed light if
adapter is serving
a nother Inquiry
Unit.

I

4/63 Reprinted

Function
Inquiry request:

ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input:
. 522 Output:
.523 Stepping:

Processing Unit
. 0.88.

· 1 to 78 characters .
· core storage .

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

. 512 Block demarcation
Input:
... .
Output: . . . . . .

Component
Msec per block: •

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.5

. 511 Size of block: .

Demands on System

.7

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load: .
.442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access: .
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
. 445 Table control: .
. 446 Synchronization:

· 63

input - manual typing
speed .
output - 15.5 char/sec .
· same as peak speeds, less
allowance for carriage
returns.

I AUERBAC'!1..~

402:103.100

.S1'''''0

EDP

_

REPORTS

IBM 1410
Input-Output
MCR 1419
INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER
§

103.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: . .

. 12

Description:

Description (Contd.)
Electronic Accumulator and Sequence Checking:
permits accumulated totals of the amounts read
from documents to be printed on paper tape, and
checks selected positions for correct document
sequencing. (Multiple Column Control is a prerequisite. )

. Magnetic Character
Reader.
1419 Model!.

Split Field: permits the division of standard A.B.A.
check fields into two elements, each of variable length.

This magnetic character reader- sorter reads 1, 600
6- inch documents per minute. Documents up to
8-3/4 inches long can be handled at proportionately
lower rates. The 1419 is functionally similar to the
earlier 1412 Magnetic Character Reader, whose
peak speed is 950 documents per minute. Characters printed in magnetic ink in Font E-13B (adopted
as standard by the American Bankers' Association)
are recognized in a character matrix 7 positions
wide by 10 positions high. Only the 10 numerical
characters and 4 special symbols can be read, and
all magnetic ink imprinting must be on a single line
within.S/B-inch of the bottom edge of the document.
Invalid or unrecognizable characters cause an indicator to be set and an asterisk to be transmitted to
core storage. Missing fields, incorrect field
lengths, document spacing errors, and missing or
out-of-sequence special symbols also cause error
indications.

· 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs: . . . . .

Four basic modes of operation are possible:

· 22

1. Off-line sorting on anyone digit position.

.221 Recording system: .
.222 Sensing system:

none.
magnetic heads.

2. On-line use (reading data into 1410 core storage)
with single-digit sort as above.

.23

Multiple Copies:

none.

.24

Arrangement of Heads

3. On-line use with programmed selection of any of
the 13 stacker pockets.

Self- Checking Number: provides verification of
account numbers. Available in either Modulus 10
or Modulus 11; the latter is more effective and more
expensive.
.13

Availability:

14 months as of February,
1962.

· 14

First Delivery:

October, 1962.

·2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

When reading 6- inch documents, 32. 2 milliseconds
are available for processing each document with the
Processing Overlap feature and 9.5 milliseconds
without it. The 1419 has only one operating spe-ed.
If, therefore, the required processing time exceeds
those values, it will be necessary to transcribe the
magnetiC ink data to magnetic tape and then process
the tape in a separate operation.

Sensing and Recording Systems

Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

4. On-line use in "alternate pocket" mode. This
permits unloading the stackers without stopping
the reader, but no sorting can be done.
.' 25

moving belt friction.
none.

reading.
1.
30.
scans characters horizontaUy froin right to left .

Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
Alternatives: .
Total: . . . .

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

10
0 - 9.
none.
4
amount, dash,
transit, on-us.
none.
14.

Optional Features
Multiple Column Control: permits the routing to
stacker A of documents with specified digit values
in up to four selected digit positions.

© 1963

.311 Medium: . .
.312 Phenomenon:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

paper or card documents.
magnetic ink imprinting.
Reprinted 4/63

402: 103.320
§

IBM 1410

103.

. 32

.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . .
Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:

. . . . . . . 7 segments per character;
1 to 40 characters per
document.

.322 Parallel by: . . . . . 30 tracks (3 groups of 10
each; allows for variations
in vertical position of magnetic characters on document).
.323 Bands: ..
1.
. 324 Track use
10 of 30.
Data: ..
Redundancy check:
O.
Timing: . . . . .
O.
Control signals:
O.
'Unused: .
20.
10 of 30.
Total: .
.325 Row use
Data: .
all.
.33

Coding:

.34

Format Compatibility

Font E-13B magnetic ink
characters.

Other device or system Code translation
All equipment using
Font E-13B characters in standard
A.B.A. format:. .
none required.
. 35

Physical Dimensions

. 351 Overall width: .. .
. 352 Length:. . . . . .
.353 .Maximum margins:
Distance of leading
edge of first symbol
from reference edge
of document: .
.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

. 42

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . . . . .
. 52

no separate controller
(.Magnetic Character
Reader Adapter on 1411:
#4900 for channel I,
#4901 for channel 2).

Code Translation:

.54

Format Control
Control:
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Section sizes:
Select fields: .

.55

Associated Equipment
none.

4/63 1'teprinted

1 document .
core storage.
each character.

.56

automatic, by Magnetic
Character Reader.

control panel and program.
undefined.
by program.
no.
no .
no.
limited.
control panel.

Control Operations
Disable:
Request interrupt: .
Select stacker: .
Select format:
Select code:
Start feeding documents
continuously: .
Stop feeding documents:

Connection to Device

. 441 Size of load: . . . .
.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input- output area
access: . . . . . .

trailing edge of document
or group mark in core
storage .

Input-Output Operations

.53

1 per I/O Channel.

Data Transfer Control

up to 42 characters per docment in standard A.B.A.
fields.

.521 Input:. . . . . . . . . . documents are fed continuously after unit is engaged; 1410 must be programmed to read each
document .
. 522 Output: . .
none .
. 523 Stepping: .
none .
. 524 Skipping: .
none .
. 525 .Marking: .
none.
.526 Searching:
none .

0.3125 to. 0625 inch.

.431 Devices per controller: I per Adapter.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . . none.
. 44

.5

Connection to System

.421 On-line: . . . . . . .
. 422 Off-line:.
Use
Document sorting:
. 43

2.75 to 3.67 inches .
6.00 to 8.75 inches .

for full block (no lockout
when PO is used) .
.445 Table control:
none .
. 446 Synchronization: .
automatic within a document; by program for successive documents.
.447 Synchronizing aids: .. tests: document ready to be
read; document under read
head.

no .
no.
yes.
no .
no.
yes.
yes .

Testable Conditions
Disabled: .
Busy device:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:
Exhausted: .

indirectly .
yes.
no.
yes.
no.
indirectly.

402: 103. 600

INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER
§

103.

. 72

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions

.62

Speeds

.621 Nominal or peak speed: 1,600 6-inch documents/
minute. (1,960 51-column
documents can be read
per minute, but cannot be
sorted).
. 622 Important parameters
Value
Name
Space between docu2.5 inches minimum.
ments: . . . . . .
Reader transport rate: 263 inches/sec.
. 623 Overhead: . . . . . . . 50 msec minimum interval
from "engage" instruction
until first document
reaches read head.
.624 Effective speeds:
S = 9, 600/L
for continuous feeding,
where:
S = speed,
documents/minute
L = document length,
inches.
. 63

Form
Comment
Function
Document counter on-offswitch
reset:
foot
halts & restarts
Unload pocket/restart:
switch feeding.
reads & prokey
Single document feed:
cesses 1 document.
5 keys selects fields to
Field selection:
be read.
key.
Off-line mode:
key
1419 sort mode:
key
programmed
Program - sort mode:
stacker selection.
Sort fields:
5 keys selects field for
sorting.
10 keys selects position
Sort position:
for sorting.

without Processing Overlap
with Processing Overlap

I: .
II:

Demands on System
Basis:
Component
Processing Unit:
Processing Unit:

. 73

Condition

m. sec per document or

II

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:

28.0
5.3

or
or

Percentage
74.7
14.1

none required (feeds intermixed documents of varying sizes).

© 1963

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Feed hopper:
Stackers (13):.
.732 Replenishment time:

.733 Adjustment time:
. 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .
;8

. . 6-inch documents at minimum spacing.

Other Controls

Capacity
12. 0- inch stack (600-1, 200
documents).
4.5- inch stack each.
0.5 to 1. 0 minute.
Reader needs to be stopped,
unless operating in alternate pocket mode.
no adjustments required.
O. 4 to O. 8 minute .

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Reading:
Input area overflow:

see "Invalid code".
check for group mark

Invalid code:

validity logic

Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Full stacker:
Field length error:
Document spacing:
Feed jam:
Pocket selection:

check

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Action

stop data transmission.
transmit • to storage
& set indicator.
stop reader; alarm.

none

6 photocells
check
character count
2 photocells
2 photocells
check

set indicators.
stop reader; alarm.
set indicator."
set indica~or.
stop reader; alarm.
stop reader; alarm.

Reprinted 4/63

402: 104.100

_STANDARD
EDP
•

IBM 1410
Input-Output
1412 Magnetic Character Reader

REI'ORTS

INPUT-OUTPUT: 1412 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER

§ 104.

.12

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

. 12

Description

Description (Contd. )
A field length verification check and odd-bit parity
checks are performed on each character transmittet\
from the 1412 to core storage.

. . . . • . . Magnetic Character Reader.
1412 Modell.

Optional Features
Multiple Column Select-Sort Suppress:
The 1412 Magnetic Character Reader-Sorter reads
and sorts 950 documents (6 inches long) per minute
into any 1 of 13 pockets. Documents up to 8 3/4 inches long can be handled at proportionately lower
rates. The 1412 is functionally similar to the later
Model 1419 Magnetic Character Reader, whose peak
speed is 1,600 documents per minute (see 402:103.
100). Characters printed in magnetic ink character
Font E-13B (adopted as standard by the American
Bankers' Association) are recognized through a
reader head matrix 7 scan-time units wide by 10
units high. Only the 10 numerical characters and 4
special symbols can be read, and all magnetic ink
imprinting must be on a single line within fiveeighths of an inch of the bottom edge of the document.
Invalid characters or characters not included in the
group of stored logic patterns cause an indicator to
be set and an asterisk to be transmitted to core storage. Missing fields, incorrect field length, document spacing errors, and missing or out-of-sequence
special symbols also cause error indications.

• Permits the routing to pocket A or B of documents
with specific digit values in up to four selected
digit positions.
• Permits the routing to pocket A or B of documents
that do not have specified numbers in designated
column positions of a predetermined field.
• Permits the routing to pocket A or B of documents
that contain a specific code in a predetermined
field while sorting all other documents.
Auxiliary Document Counter: counts all documents
passing photocell 4.
Self-Checking Number Verification: provides verification of account numbers. Available in either
Modulo 10 or Modulo 11; the latter is more effective
and more expensive.
Electronic Accumulator and Sequence Checking: permits accumulated totals of the amounts read from
documents to be printed as lists, and checks
selected positions for correct document sequencing.
(Multiple Column Select-Sort Suppress is a prerequisite. )

Pocket selection is determined by the digit read from
the column being sorted (one column at a time in the
normal mode) which activates the correspondingly
numbered chute blade, thus directing documents into
specified pockets (A, B, 0 to 9, and reject).
Three basic modes of operation are possible:

.13

Availability:

?

Off-line sorting on any individual digit position.

· 14

First Delivery:

?

On-line use; 1410 controls document feeding and
reading, 1412 controls document sorting.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

On-line use; 1410 controls document feeding and
reading, and selects distribution stacker.
When reading 6-inch documents, 57.7 milliseconds
are available for processing each document with the
processing overlap feature and 15.0 milliseconds
without it. If the processing time exceeds these values, it is necessary to program the start-stop and
reading as required.
Either one or two 1412 Magnetic Character Readers
can be connected to a 1410 system. If only one 1412
is required, it can be connected to either data channel. If two 1412's are required, one must be connected to each data channel. One Model 4900, 4902,
or 4903 Magnetic Character Reader Adapter is required for each 1412.

© 1963

.211 Drive past the head: . . moving belt friction .
. 212 Reservoirs: . . . . . . none.
• 22

Sensing and Recording Systems

· 221 Recording system: .
• 222 Sensing system: •

none.
magnetic heads .

· 23

Multiple Copies: . •

none .

• 24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack:. •
Method of use: •

by Auerbach Corporation ond BNA Incorporated

reading.
1.
30.
scans characters
horizontally.

4/63

402: 104.250
§

IBM 1410

104.

. 25

• 44
Range of Symbols

Numerals:
Letters:
Special:

.

Alternatives: .
Total:

....

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

. 31

Form of

.32

. 441 Size of load: . . . .
.442 Input-output areas:
0-9.
10
.443 Input-output area
none.
access: . . . . .
amount, dash, transit, .444 Input-output area
4
on-us.
lockout: • . . . .
none.
14.
.445 Table control: . .
.446 Synchronization: •

Stora~

. 311 Medium: • . .
. 312 Phenomenon: • • .

Data Transfer Control

paper or card documents.
magnetic ink imprinting.

1 document .
core storage.
each character.

for full block (no lockout
when Processing Overlap
is used).
none.
automatic within a document;
by program for successive
documents •
· 447 Synchronizing aids: • • tests; document ready to be
read; document under read
head.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:

......

. 325

7 segments per character;
1 to 40 characters per
document.
Parallel by: • . . . • . 30 tracks (3 groups of 10
each; allows for variations • 5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
in vertical position of
magnetic characters on
.51 Blocks
documents).
1.
Bands: • .
up to 40 characters per doc.511 Size of block:
Track use
ument in standard A. B. A.
Data: •.
10 of 30.
fields.
Redundancy check: •
O.
.512 Block demarcation
Timing: . . . . .
O.
trailing edge of document or
Input: . . • . • • .
Control signals:
O.
group mark in core
Unused: .
20.
storage.
Total: ••
10 of 30.
Row use: .
all for data .
.52 Input-Output Operations

· 33

Coding:..

• 34

Format Compatibility

.322

· 323
· 324

Font E-13B magnetic ink
characters.

Other device or system: all equipment using Font
E-13B characters in
standard A. B. A. Format.
Code translation: ••. none required.
• 35

Physical Dimensions

• 351 Overall width:
• 352 Length:. . . .
•4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

. 42

Connection to System

2.75 to 3.67 inches .
6.00 to 8.75 inches .

. 53

Code Translation:

· 54

Format Control
Control: . . . .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: .
Insert spaces:
Section sizes:
Select fields: •

no special controller (Magnetic Character Reader
Adapter on 1411: #4900 or
4903 for channell, #4902
or 4903 for channel 2.)

.421 On-line:
1 per I/O channel.
. 422 Off-line
Use: •
document sorting.
Associated equipment: none.
· 43 Connection to Device
• 431 Devices per controller: 1 per adapter.
. 432 Restrictions:. . . . • • none.
4/63

.521 Input:. . . . . . . . . . documents are fed continuously until a stop feed
command is given; 1410
must be programmed to
read each document.
.522 Output: . .
none.
none.
.523 Stepping:.
none.
.524 Skipping:.
none .
.525 Marking:.
none.
• 526 Searching:

· 55

automatic .

control panel and program.
undefined.
by program.
no.
no.
no.
limited.
control panel.

Control Operations
Disable: • . . . . .
Request interrupt: .
Select stacker:.
Select format: • . •
Select code:. . . . .
Start feeding documents
continuously: • . . . .
Stop feeding documents:

no •
no.
yes.
no.
no.
yes .
yes .

402: 104.560

INPUT-OUTPUT: 1412 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER

§

104.

.56

.72

.6

PERFORMANCE

• 61

Conditions

yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.

without Processing Overlap.
with Processing Overlap.

I: •
II:
.62

Function

Testable Conditions
Disabled:. . . . .
Busy device: . . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: . •.
End of medium marks:
Exhausted: . . . .

Speeds

. 621 Nominal or peak speed: 950 6-inch
documents /minute.
· 622 Important parameters
Space between documents: . . . . . . . 3.0 inches minimum; average is approximately equal .73
to document length.
.731
Reader transport rate: 200 inches/second.
Minimum processing
time: . • . . . •
15.0 msec/document.
Minimum stacker
selection time:
7.5 msec/document.
. 623 Overhead: . . . . .
50 msec minimum interval
from "engage" instruction
until first document
.732
reaches read head.
.733
. 624 Effective speed: . . . . S = 6, OOO/L for continuous
feeding, where: S = speed, .734
documents/minute; L =
document length, inches.
.8
• 63

Other Controls

Document counter
on-off-reset:
switch.
plunger resets document counter
Reset plunge:
to zero.
Stop-restore:
key
stops machine and resets'
sort-compare circuits.
permits sorting.
key
Sort Key:
Alternate pocket
key
for alternating input
select:
pockets .
Central processor
puts unit on line.
key
on-line:
permits off-line operation.
key
Reader off-line:
determines which sort
key
Sort column:
column will be used for
sort operation.
selects field to be sorted •
key
Sort field:
selects field(s) for transkey
Read field:
mission to the central
processor.
Loading and Unloading
Volumes handled
Storage
Feed hopper: •
Stackers (13);.

Replenishment time:.
Adjustment time: .
Optimum reloading
period: . . . • . .

Component

6 inch documents at
minimum spacing.

Condition

Processing Unit: I
Processing Unit: II

Msec per
document

Percentage

48.0
5.3

76.4.
8.4.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

· 71

Adjustments:...... none required (feeds intermixed documents of varying sizes).

© 1963

Capacity
12. O-inch stack (600 to
1,200 documents).
4. 5-inch stack each•
Reader must be stopped unless operating in alternate
pocket mode.
O. 5 to 1. 0 minute.
no adjustment necessary.
O. 6 to 1. 3 minutes.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

Demands on System
Basis: . • . . . . .

Comment

Form

Error

Check or
Interlock

Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:

see "Invalid code".
check for group mark
validity logic

Exhausted medium:

check

Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Fill stackers:
Field length error:
Document spacing:
Feed jam:

none.
5 photocells
interlock
character cost
2 photocells
check

Transfer of data:

parity check

by A~erbach Corporation and BNA incorporated

Action
stop data transmission.
transmit • to storage
. and set indicator.
stop reader. set
indicator.
set indicator.
stop reader•
set indicator.
set indicator.
stop reader. set
indicator.
halt computer.

4/63

402: 105.100
.srANDARD
EDP
•

IBM 1410
Inpu t-Output
Programmed Transmission Control

mORTS

INPUT-OUTPUT: PROGRAMMED TRANSMISSION CONTROL

§

. 12

105.

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity:

.12

Description

. . . . . . . 7750 Programmed
Transmission Control.

Description (Contd. )
processes the input characters in each. Consequently,
as the program proceeds from character to character
by area, different routines may be required. Since
it is impossible to predict when particular subroutines
will be required, all necessary routines must be available at all times. Therefore, the more varied the
message format, the more process storage required.

General
The 7750 Programmed Transmission Control links
telecommunication terminals to the IBM 1410, permitting the 1410 to deal with a single input-output device instead of treating each terminal individually.
The 7750 has 16 scan points that can be connected to
adapters to permit use of varied types of transmission services. From 4 to 112 low speed lines (45 to
200 bits per second) or 1 to 16 high speed lines
(voice quality, 1,200 bits per second) or a combination of the 2 types can be connected.
Telecommunication equipment such as the IBM 65/66
Data Transceiver (with IBM 67 Telegraph Signal
Unit), the IBM 1009 Data Transmission Unit, the IBM
7701 Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal, and
teletype machines can be connected via communication lines to the 7750.
Function
The 7750 is an electronic computer available in
3 models having 4, 096, 8, 192, and 16,384 words
(48 bits each) of core storage for processing and
128 words (also 48 bits) of control storage for
directing the receive and transmit operations for
each scan point or communication channel. Data
originating in outlying transmission terminals are
transmitted to the 7750, then:

The six possible modes of operation are assigned
priority in the following sequence: Service, Channel
Service, Copy, Out, In, and Normal. A separate
program must be written to service each mode. Operation mode indicators are set either automatically
or by programming. When an indicator of a higher
priority mode is set, control is automatically transferred to the program that will service that mode.
Control is transferred back to the original point of
interruption only after all of the modes of higher pri0rity have been serviced.
The 7750 can initiate a request for data transfer between it and the 1410 by setting an indicator in the
1410. When the 1410 recognizes the request, programming must be available in the 1410 to service the
input-output operation. When the 1410 initiates or
services a request for data transfer between it and the
7750, the 7750 must be in a suitable mode of operation
to perform the required operation.
Equipment

(1) assembled into messages on a character-bycharacter basis, checked for validity of transmission, and edited to remove functional characters used in transmission.

The 7750 Programmed Transmission Control can be
connected to either channel of the IBM 1411 Central
Processor through an optional control adapter. Prerequisites for stich connection include the 1410 Priority and Process Overlap special features with any of
the Models Al through A5 of the 1411. The same prerequisites permit the connection of the 1440 computer
with a special adapter. With the 1448 Transmission
Control Unit (see 414:102) connected to the 1440, 1062
Teller Terminals can transmit via the 1440 to the
1410.

(2) sent to the 1410 for processing. After the data
processing operations are performed in the 1410,
the steps are reversed.

With the connection of the 7750 to the 1411, the
instruction set has been expanded to include an inputoutput assignment, K, for the 7750.

The stored program of the 7750 performs the editing
and controls the sequence of input-output operations
to and from the communication lines.

Core Storage

Logical Operation
Simultaneous servicing of the Communication Channels is achieved through the use of the Process Control Scanner. The 7750 processes data character
by character. Each input cpannel has an exclusive
input area, set by a Limit Word. The program goes
from area to area in a predetermined sequence and

© 1963

The 7750 has two core stores: Control Storage, and
Process Storage. Each store has 48-bit words.
Control storage contains 128 words which are used for
controlling the mode operation and input-output operations, and for indicating automatically detected channel errors.
Process storage words can be used for program instructions, constants, tables, area (chain) controlling
limit words, and data.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

402: 105.120
§

105.

.12

.12
Description (Contd.)
Programming

The 12 basic instruction types for the 7750 are increased to 77 actual instructions by modifying microcodes. Each instruction is contained in 1 word of
core storage and is executed in either 28 microseconds or 56 microseconds depending on the instruction.
The instruction repertoire includes logical AND, inclusive OR, exclusive OR, comparison, data movement, and editing; however, no provision is made for:
arithmetic computation.
Indirect addressing is permissible. Direct addressing of any part of Control core storage is possible
through the seven-bit binary address used in the in-

4/63

IBM 1410
Description (Contd.)
Programming (Contd.)
struction word. Direct addressing of any part of
Process core storage is possible through the l6-bit
binary address used in the instruction word.
Process core storage is divided into blocks, each
consisting of eight consecutive words. Blocks can
be linked together by putting the address of one into
the block control character of the other. In this way,
variable length records can be processed while fully
utilizing Process core storage.
A symbolic assembly program using mnemonic operation codes and symbolic addresses is available
for the 1410 for assembling 7750 programs. This
assembly program includes a Data Control Package
and an Input-Output Control System. After assembly,
programs are loaded into the 7750 via the 1410.

Sl~~DARD

•

402: 106.100

EDP
•

IBM 1410
Input-Output
TELEGRAPH 1/0

R£f'ORlS

INPUT-OUTPUT: TELEGRAPH INPUT-OUTPUT

§

106.

. 12

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . . . . . . . . Telegraph Input-Output .
Models 7864, 7871, 7875.

.12

Description
The 7864 telegraph input-output feature provides for
the connection of a telegraph line to the IBM 1410
System. A Model 7864 unit consists of one input line
connection and one output line connection. A maximum of four telegraph lines can be connected to a
system in any combination as long as at least one
input line and one output line are included.
The input unit (either 7864 or 7871) consists of an
input adapter that is connected to an input synchronizer (either 1414-4 or 1414-5) which contains a buffer storage with a capacity of 80 characters. The
output unit (either 7864 or 7875) consists of an output
adapter that is connected to an output synchronizer
(either 1414-4 or 1414-5) which also contains a buffer
storage for 80 characters.
The input operation is performed in two steps: first,
transfer of data from the telegraph line into the input
synchronizer; then, transfer of data from the input
synchronizer into core storage.
The input synchronizer receives data through the
7864 Telegraph input-output unit which converts 5-bit
telegraphic code to 7-bit BCD code, 1 character at a
time, until either 80 characters are transmitted or
an end parenthesis, ), is encountered or the line is
disconnected because of failure. Either of the foregoing conditions sets the inquiry status latch, whose • 13
setting is program testable and can be used to initiate
the routine which transfers 80 characters from the
.14
synchronizer to core storage.

© 1963

Description (Contd. )
Characters representing each of the following are always deleted from incoming messages prior to being
entered into the synchronizer: letters, figures, line
feed, and blank. Characters representing the followingcan opti"onalIy De de!f!teafrom incoming messages:
carriage return, beginning of record, and end of
record.
The output operation is performed in two steps: first
the transfer of data from core storage to the output
synchronizer; then the transfer of the data from the
output synchronizer to the telegraph line. Messages
or message segments must be 80 characters in
length and in the proper format for the telegraph
line. Transfer of data from core storage to the output synchronizer is initiated by a move or load instruction. The entire 80 characters of the message
are then transferred to the output synchronizer.
After the output synchronizer is filled, the output unit
tests the telegraph line. As soon as the line is free,
the data are translated from seven-bit BCD to five-bit
telegraphic code and transmitted via the line one
character at a time until the synchronizer is empty.
Any characters which translate into an invalid fivebit telegraphic code are sent out via the line as valid
blanks; then an error indicator is set in the central
processor.
The 1414-4 or 1414-5 I/O Synchronizer to which the
te~graph feature is connected requires either a 4659
or 4661 I/O Adapter to be connected to the 1411
processing unit.
Availability: . .

?

First Delivery:

?

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

402:111.100

.STANCARD

II

REPORTS
EDP

IBM 1410
Simultaneous Operations

SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS

§

.12

111.

.1

SPECIAL UNITS

. 11

Identity: . . . . .

is always connected to I/O channell and reduces
demands on the Processing Unit to a small fraction of
each input-output device's operating cycle.

Input/Output Synchronizers .
1414 Models I, 2, 3, 4, 5,
7, and 8.

The Model 5 Synchronizer is similar.to the Model 4
except that it cannot control the Card Read-Punch or
Printer.

Processing Overlap Feature.
#5730.

. 12

Description (Contd. )

Dual Synchronizer Adapter.
#3470.

The Model 7 Synchronizer can control up to 10 IBM
729 II, IV, V, VI Magnetic Tape Units in any combination, and with the 7814 Tape Intermix "Special
Feature" 7330 Magnetic Tape Units can be intermixed.

Priority Feature.
#5620.

The Model 8 Synchronizer controls only a 1403
Printer Modell, 2, or 3. Only one Model 3, 4, 5,
or 8 Synchronizer can be connected to channell .

Description

Processing Overlap Feature: Permits the overlapping
of Processing Unit operations with input-output operations on Magnetic Tape Units, Disk Storage Units,
Magnetic Character Readers, or the Console I/O
Printer. Internal processing continues while the input-output device prepares to send or receive data
and is interrupted for 4.5 microseconds for each
character transmitted to or from core storage. Only
one overlapped operation at a time can be done on
each I/O channel. No other input-output operation
can be initiated while an overlapped operation is in
progress on the same channel, but an overlapped operation can be started while buffered operations (such
as reading a card and printing a line) are in progress.

Input-Output Synchronizers: These units contain the
circuitry to control data transfers between the Processing Unit and most of the input-output devices.
The Model 1 can control up to ten 729 Model II, IV,
or V Magnetic Tape Units in any combination, while
the Model 2 performs the same function for up to ten
7330 Magnetic Tape Units. One Model I, 2, or 7
Synchronizer can be connected to each I/O channel,
for a maximum of two per 1410 system. Each Synchronizer handles one tape read or write operation at
a time, and the Processing Unit is interlocked during
the entire tape operation (including start and stop
times) unless the Processing Overlap Feature is
installed.

Dual Synchronizer Adapter: Provides a second I/O
channel to which up to 10 Magnetic Tape Units, 5 Disk
Storage Units, and 1 Magnetic Character Reader can
be connected. This adapter and two 1414 Modell or
2 Input-Output Synchronizers permit simultaneous
tape reading, writing, and internal processing. The
Processing Overlap Feature is a prerequisite for twochannel operation.

The 1414 Model 3 Input-Output Synchronizer is connected to I/O channel 1 when printed reports or
punched cards are to be handled by the system. It
provides and controls input-output buffers for the
1402 Card Read Punch and the 1403 Printer. Data to
be punched or printed is transferred at internal
speeds from 'core storage to the synchronizer in
blocks of a full card or line when the output instruction is given; thus the Processing Unit is free to perform other duties during most of the operating cycle
of the output device. When a "read a card" instruction is given, the contents of the 80-character card
input buffer are immediately transferred to the designated area of core storage. Then, with the Processing Unit free, the buffer is refilled with the data
read from the next card.
The Model 4 Synchronizer controls and buffers the
1009 Data Transmission Unit, the 1011 Paper Tape
Reader, the 1014 Remote Inquiry Unit, and/or the
7864 Telegraph Input-Output Feature, as well as the
Card Read-Punch and Printer. Like the 1414 Model
3, which it replaces in expanded systems, the Model 4

© 1963

Priority Feature: Permits automatic interruption of
the stored program upon completion of selected inputoutput or seek operations or upon console request.
This feature is required for maximum utilization of
the system overlap and inquiry capabilities. It makes
multi-running possible on a limited basis, although
the associated programming is complex. The Priority
Feature is described in detail in the 1411 Processing
Unit section •
.2

CONFIGURATION CONDITIONS
I: .

II:
III:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

without Processing Overlap.
with Processing Overlap and
1 channel.
with Processing Overlap and
2 channels.

Revised

4/63

402:111.400.
§

111.

.4

IBM 1410
.4

RULES (Contd. )

RULES

Condition II

General

All of the following operations:

The card reader, card punch, printer, and teleprocessing units operate through separate buffers in
order that internal processing can continue as soon
as the buffers for these units become either filled or
emptied.
Only one overlapped operation (e. g., read tape operation) can be performed on each input-output channel. No other input-output operation can be initiated
on the same channel while an overlapped operation
is in progress; however, an overlapped operation can
be started while buffered operations (such as reading
a card and printing a line) are in progress.

Card read/Card punch/print one line/Data Trans-mission Unit input or output/Remote Inquiry input
or output/Paper Tape Reader input/Process/ and
anyone of the following operations:
Magnetic tape read or write
Disc storage read or write
Console I/O Printer output
Magnetic Character Reader input
Programmed Transmission Control read or write.
Condition III
All of the following operations:

Condition I
All of the following operations:
Card read/Card punch/Print one line/Data Trans-·
mission Unit inpur or output/Remote Inquiry input
or output/Paper Tape Reader input or output/and
anyone of the following operations:
Process
Magnetic tape read or write
Disc storage read or write
Console I/O Printer output
Magnetic Ink Character Reader input
Programmed Transmission Control read or write.

4/63.

Revised

Card read/Card punch/Print one line/Data Transmission Unit input or output/Paper Tape Reader
input/Process/ and
no more than two of the following operations in any
combination (including two identical operations) with
the exception of those denoted by asterisks:
Magnetic tape read or write
Disc storage read or write
Console I/O Printer outPll.t*
Magnetic Ink Character Reader input
Programmed Transmission Control input or output*
* Only one such device can be in the system.

402:121.101
•

STANDARD

_EDP

11"

REPORTS

IBM 1410
Instruction list

INSTRUCTION LIST
§

121.
INSTRUCTION
OP.

A, lor X

OPERATION

B

d

B

-

mnemonic
OP. code
Arithmetic

A
A
S
S
?
?,

,
@

%

A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A

B
B
-

B

-

B
B

(A)+ (B)_B.
(A)+ (A)_A.
(B) - (A)-- B.
(A) - (A)-- A; result is 0 with sign of (A).

A
A
S
S
ZA
ZA
ZS
ZS
M
D

(A)--B.
(A)_A; strips zone bits (except for sign position).

-(A)_B.
-(A)-A; strips zone bits and changes sign.

(A)x (B)_B.
(B) -:-(A)-B.
Logic

-

or X
or X
or X
or X
orX
or X
B
W
V
V

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

B
B
B
B

V

I

B

J
J

J
J

J

J
J
J

J
J

J
J
J
J

R
R
R
R
R
R

-

-

9
@

1
S
T
U
V
W
Z
Q
1
2
R
1
2
4
8
A
B
d
d
1
2, B,
K,S
3,C,
L,T

B
BC9
BCV
BU
BE
BL
BH
BZ
BDV
BAV
BNQ
BOL 1
BOL 2
BPB
BNR 1 or 2
BCB 1 or 2
BER 1 or 2
BEF 1 or 2
BNT10r2
BWL1 or 2
BCE
BBE
BW
BZN

jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump
jump

unconditionally to I.
to I if printer tape channel #9 is sensed.
to I if cartiage overflow (channel 12).
to I if unequal compare.
to I if equal compare (B = A).
to I if low compare (B < A).
to I if high compare (B > A).
to I if zero balance.
to I if divide overflow.
to I if arithmetic overflow.
to I if inquiry.
to I if overlap in process on channelL
to I if overlap in process on channel 2.
to I if printer carriage busy.
to I if Not Ready Indicator is ON (channel 1 or 2).
to I i{B"usy Indicator is ON
to I if Data Check Indicator is ON
to I if Condition Indicator is ON
to I if No Transfer Indicator is ON
to I if Wrong Length Indicator is ON
to I if (B) = d (d = any character).
to I if any bit in (B) = any bit in d (not wm or c).
to I if word mark in (B).
to I if zone in (B).

BWZ

jump to I if word mark or zone in (B)
Data Transfer

D

A

B

1

D

A

B

2

D

A

B

4

D

A

B

-

MLx
MRx
MLx
MRx
MLx
MRx
SCNLx
SCNRx

CD 1963

numerical portion of (A) - . B.
zone portion of (A)- B.
word mark portion of (A)- B.
scan for word marks, record marks, or group-marks with
word marks.
Note: 8-bit in d indicates a left-to-right move; no 8-bit indicatesa right-to-left move; the four different A and
B bit configurations determine what stops transfer
or scan. X portion of mnemonic is used to specify
portion of data moved and terminal point of move.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 4/63

113M 1410

402: 121.1 02

INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.
§

121.
OPERATION

INSTRUCTION
OP.

A, lor X

g

,
0

A
A
A

B

d

mnemonic
OP. code

B

-

MCS

-

SW
CW

B
B

( A ) - B; suppress high order zeros and com-

mas and remove units position zone bits.
set word marks at A and B.
clear word marks at A and B.
Miscellaneous Internal 0eerations

C

A

B

T
T
T

A
A
A

B
B
B

7
d

C

compare (A) to (B) and set jndicator.

---

table look-up to end*.
table look-up to any*.
table look-up* -- d character determines whether
look-up is for higher, lower, or
equal to search argument; appropriate compare indicator is turned
on.

xxx

'" A is address of search argument.
B is address of low order character of table.
E

A

B

-

MCE

(A)-B, modified by edit-control word at B.

G
G
G
G

A
A
A
A

-

A
B
E
F

SAR
SBR
SER
SFR

contents
contents
contents
contents

1

-

B

CS

1

I

B

-

clear storage from B down through nearest hundreds
position.
clear storage and jump to I.
halt (pressing start key restarts system with the next
sequential operation).
halt (pressing start key restarts system with instruction located at I address).
no operation.

-

I
N

-

-

-

CS
H
H
NOP

of A address
of Baddr.ess
of E address
of F address

register-A.
register_A.
register-A.
register-A.

1405 Disc Storage
MorL
Mor L
Mor L
Mor L
Mor L
Mor L
M

xFO
xFl
xF2
xF3
xFl
xF2
xF4

B
B
B
B
B
B

-

RorW
W
W
W
R
R
W

SD

WD
WDT
WOC
RO
ROT

-

seek disc storage record whose address is in B.
write into disc storage from B - one record.
write into disc storage from B - full track.
check data recorded by previous write disc operation.
read from disc storage into B - one record.
read from disc storage into B - full track.
write indelible address for a single specified sector
on disc unit.
1301 Disc Storage

Mor L
Mor L
Mor L

xFO
xFI
xF2

B
B
B

R orW
W
W

WO
WCY

Mor L

xF2

B

W

WOT

Mor L
Mor L

xF6
xF5

B
B

W
W

WFT
WHA

Mor L
Mor L

xF7
xF3

B
B

W
W

WFO
WOC

4/63 Reprinted

SD

seek disc storage record whose address is in B.
write into disc storage from B - one record.
write into disc storage from B in the cylinder mode,
stopping either at the end of the cylinder or upon
sensing a group mark in core storage, whichever
comes first.
write into disc storage from B, stopping either at the
end of the track or upon sensing a group mark in
core storage, whichever comes first.
write into disc storage from B - one track.
write into disc storage from B, beginning at home address area and continuing through record addresses
and record areas as defined by the format track, to
the end of track.
write into disc storage from B - one format track.
check data recorded by previous write disc operation.

402: 121.1 03i

INSTRUCTION LIST

§

INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.

121.
INSTRUCTION
OP.

A, I or X

OPERATION

B

d

mnemonic
OP. code

Mor L
Mor L

xF1
xF2

B
B

R
R

RD
RCY

Mor L

xF2

B

R

RDT

Mor L
Mar L

xF6
xFS

B
B

R
R

RDT
RHA

Mar L
Mar L

xF4
xF8

B
B

-

-

NOP
SAl

read from disc storage into B - one record.
read from disc storage into B in the cylinder mode,
stopping either at the end of the cylinder or upon
sensing a group mark in core storage, whichever
comes first.
read from disc storage into B, stopping when a group
mark is sensed.
read from disc storage into B - one track.
read from disc storage into B, beginning at home
address area and continuing through record addresses and record areas as defined by the format
track to the end of track.
no operation.
disconnect access unit.

%TO
%TO
%TO
%TO

B
B
B
B

R
W
R
W

MCW
MCW
MCW
MCW

data from keyboard - B ; no word-marks.
(B) - + console printer; no word-marks.
data from keyboard-- B; with word-marks.
(B)_ console printer; with word-marks.

Input- Output: Console
M
M
L
L

Inquir~:

Input- OutEut: Card and Printer:
M

%In

B

R

R

L

%In

B

R

RW

K

-

-

M

r04n

B

d
W

SSF
P

L

r04n

B

W

PW

M

%20

B

W

W

L

%20

B

W

W

F

-

-

d

CC

80 characters in read synchronizer--B; refill synchronizer from next card. *
80 characters in read synchronizer - - B; refill synchronizer from next card; read word separator
characters into storage as word marks. *
select read stacker indicated by d.
80 characters in B__ punch synchronizer, then
punch 1 card. *
80 characters in B __ punch synchronizer, then punch;
word marks are translated into word separator
chars. *
100 (or 132) characters in B-print synchronizer,
then print.
100 (or 132) characters in B - print synchronizer,
then print; translate word marks to word separator
characters for printing.
space or skip printer, as indicated by d.

* n determines
U
U
U
U
U
M
M
L
L
L

%Un
%Un
%Un
%Un
roUn
%Un
%Un
%Un
%Un
%Un

L

%Un

B
B
B
B
B

B
E
M
R
U
R
W
R
W
$

BSP
SKP
·WTM
RWD
RWU
RT
WT
RTW
WTW
RTG

B

$

WTE

-

-

card pocket.

Input- Output: Magnetic Tape
backspace one block on MTn.
skip and erase 3.5 inches on MTn.
record end-of-tape mark on MTn.
rewind MTn.
rewind and unload MTn.
read one block from MTn into B.
write one block on MTn from B.
read one block from MTn with word marks into B.
write one block on MTn with word marks from B.
read from MTn into B; stop when inter-record gap is
sensed or last core-storage position is encountered.
write from B onto MTn; stop when last core storage
position is encountered (ignores group mark with
word mark).

(0 1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 4/63

IBM 1410

402: 121.1 04
INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.
§ 121.

INSTRUCTION
OP.

A, lor X

B

OPERATION
d

mnemonic
OP. code
~put-Output:

L
M

%Pl
%Pl

B
B

R
R

LCA
MCW

U
U
L

%SI
%SI
%SI

-

E

B

D
R

CU
CU
LCA

M
U

%Sl

B

R
d

MCW
SS

-

-

Paper Tape Reader

read 1 block into B with word marks.
read 1 block into B; no word marks.
Input- Output: Magnetic Character Reader
start feeding documents continuously.
stop feeding documents continuously.
transfer data from 1 document into B, with word
marks.
transfer data from 1 document into B; no word marks.
select stacker pocket indicated by d.
Input- Output: Data Transmission Unit

roDO

L
M
L
M

%DO

L
M
L
M

roOD
roOD

B
B
B
B

W
W
R
R

LeA
MCW
LCA
MCW

%Qn
%Qn
%Qn
%Qn

B
B
B
B

R
R
W
W

LCA
MCW
LeA
MCW

write 1 block from B with word marks.
write 1 block from B; no word marks.
read 1 block into B with word marks.
read I block into B; no word marks.
Input- Output: Remote Inquiry Unir
read message into B, erasing word marks.
read message into B. *
write message from B. **
write message from B.

*

* No word marks transmitted.
** Causes a pound sign ( #) to be printed on inquiry
unit I/O printer for every word mark transmitted.

4/63 Reprinted

_EDP

402: 131.100

. S l. . DARD

REPORTS

IBM 1410
Coding Specimen
Basic Autocoder
CODING SPECIMEN: BASIC AUTOCODER
§

13l.

.1

TRANSLATOR LISTING
~;\r-t~LE

HASIC

VbLIN

LAilEL

Iwcnll

.. H.O",H.AH rLlR UAS Ie AU ruCIJllt';K

PAGE

1'.10-AI.;-IUl

cr

UPlH.Af\,IU

AlJiJI(S

INST_utT ION

CARD

FLAG

ClL
p~r

URG

sou

IlA

lXlOO,Xl.G

00500

101

coseo

PAUL
OA

OU500

lxsa.Xl'1,o.li

OObOI

1,17

OUbl7

23, l4

00624

JIi, i5

OU6'JS

MIXUP

15.20

00620

EXC[~~

!J3,55

OU65S

LA

I, J

11

00652

,t<

11

00663

SOO+0300+e4

12

00674

NOO+AbOO+B3

EUll

6,X

11

OU666

AOO*J600+03

DOb'l7

JOO+A63 +03

1 +'::

2

I~

3
4

:

5

6
7
8
9
20

:

2

I

2 2

;

I

2 3
2 4

I

I

I

I

I

I

:

2 5
I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

!

I

I

I

I

I

OJ

3=
l_-.L __

~

~

o

II

II

402: 132.1 00
STANDARD

EDP
'EPORTS

IBM 1410
Coding Specimen
Autocoder

CODING SPECIMEN: AUTOCODER
§

132

.1

TRANSLATOR LISTING

SA"'Pll: PROGRAM

lAe.E:l

CPCCD

CPfRA,..O

15'

13'S3

155

1356 ICCS[AI'LL2

fllewA

o,10C~OlJCKf[f;,q

SM"

SEQNC

PGLlN

le~

hlO IAJ'E

AUDit::.

INsrRUc..T 10,,"

CAtW

OOlSc)

JOOtl6,
(JuuOUOOlu2&X

IOCStRRt::P2

1

0080H

JOObJ.lt

-&30

1

00011;1

liOOU,>16

10

00822

H~rOOll]3N

1351

1'8

l]IHl

kCP

IOCSi-R~l:Sl-12

159

l3bC

6CH I

·-16

160

1361

6AI

.&]

161

1362

162

1363 IOCSEtiNRRQ

foIltP

JnCS.EKNRM~.10CSt:.HHES1-l

163

13blt llJCSERI:FWl

6

IOC::.I:R .. CPR

1"02

PAlit;

JUl.::.

00796

1358 IOCSERkCPR

1365

Ll

1

151

1M

"1111

12

IOC::'lkEFHl

15<

16'

AU'C('OUt~

DoaH

1{008222

1

00811:1

KOUSlt6f/1

1

008lt6

JOUODD

"

12

0081)3

UOl120011"tleL

1

0086~

JOO8L~

6

OOO1)

.OJ01'9

12

00818

uo 1 a1 'J00'ol511

12

00890

UOlO'>8001J1ltJ

1

00902

JOOOOO

1

00'109

JOOOUO

£17, lCCHREX 12&5

II

00916

)Ol~M'OO
t-.)

Col

~
~

~

IBM
PAGE PROGRAM
3
I
PROGRAMMER
SERIAL

I SYSTEM

ISHEET

10ATE

IIDENT.

~A

678

18
I
12
I

16

24

20

28

32

36

40

44

48

52
1 1

56

OF

64

~

til

80

73

60

0

Z
0

~

0

4

Form NQ. X2B-1464
Printed in U. S. A.

COBOL PROGRAM SHEET

68

..,tIlffi

72

I

L

I

I

I

I
L

I

I

I

I
I
I

L
I

1

.t

I

~

I

I

I

I
I
I

I~I

I
I

I
i

I

I
~

I
I

I

I

.~

i

I
~.

..i

.1

I

I

I

ill

I

I

..i.1

I

I

I
I

I
I

,

I

, , , ,I

lI

I

I

I

I

,

I

I

,

I

I

I

I

I

,

I

,

I

I

J

,

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

,

I

I

,

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

1

,

I

I

,

I

,

I

I

I

I

, , , , , ,

I
I

UI

--....
~

o

402: 141.1 00

IBM 1410
Data Code
Internol Codes
DATA CODE TABLE NO. 1

§

141.

.1

USE OF CODE:

.23
internal, magnetic tape,
and disc storage.

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size: . . . . 8 bits: 6 data, 1 parity, 1
word mark.
(Word mark bit is not used
on magnetic tape or disc
storage; it is replaced by
the word separator character, = .)

. 22

Character Structure

.221 More significant pattern: 2 zone bits: B, A = 32, 16.
.222 Less significant pattern: 4 numeric bits: 8, 4, 2, 1.

© 1963

Character Codes

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
48
0
32
16
.

",r

"

;

<

t::..

f

Reprinted 4/63

402: 141.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP
REPIlRTS

IBM 1410
Data Code
Interna I Codes

DATA CODE TABLE NO. 1

§

141.

.23

.1

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size: . . . . 8 bits: 6 data, 1 parity, 1
word mark.

internal, magnetic tape,
and disc storage.

(Word mark bit is not used
on magnetic tape or disc
storage; it is replaced by
the word separator character, = .)
.22

Character Structure

.221 More significant pattern: 2 zone bits: B, A

= 32,

16.

.222 Less significant pattern: 4 numeric bits: 8, 4, 2, 1.

© 1963

Character Codes

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
48
0
32
16
It
Blank
&
1
A
J
/
2
S
K
B
T
3
L
C
U
M
D
4
E
V
5
N
¢
6
F
W
P
X
G
7
8
H
Y
0
Z
R
I
9
#
0
?
$
#
,
@
0
%
*
)
(
:
-

.

>

V

.

..

;

6

<

+

Reprinted 4/63

!'.

'.

402: 142. 100

.Sl"DA"

EDP

•

REPORTS

IBM 1410
Data Code
Printer Code

DATA CODE TABLE NO.2

§ 142.
.1
USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size: . . .

. 22

Character Structure

.23

Character Codes

1403 Printer .

8 bits: 6 data, 1 odd parity,
1 word mark.

.221 More significant pattern: 2 zone bits: B, A

= 32,

16.

.222 Less significant pattern: 4 numeric bits: 8, 4, 2, 1.

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
1
2

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

12
13
14
15


v(tape mark)
?
A

B
C
D
E
F

K
L
M
N
0
p

Q
R
:j: (record mark)
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
0
1
2
3
4

5
6
7
8
9

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 4/63

402: 151.1 00

·ST"DlRD
EDP
•

IBM 1410
Problem Oriented Facilities

REPORTS

PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES

§

151.

.12

.1

UTILITY

.11

Simulators of Other Computers
IBM 650
Reference:
Date available: .
Description:

Simulation by Other Computers (Contd.)
Description (Contd):
simulated; the 1301 cannot be simulated. A maximum of 120 print positions can be simulated.

IBM Publication J24-1453- O.
released.

Using this simulator, the 1410 assumes the characteristics of a 650. It can simulate all models of the
650, except Model IV. The simulated 650 system
.13
can have any or all of these features:

The simulator contains the Basic Autocoder translator. It is possible to run several programs without interruption (assembly and/or production runs).
A 1410 program run on the 704 takes about 20 times
as long as on the 1410.
Data Sorting and Merging
1410 Sort 10
Reference:
Record size:
Block size:
Key size: . .

2,000 words of core storage
index registers
core storage
disc storage
magnetic tape

Date available: •
Description: • .

IBM Publication J29-1414- O.
13 to 2,000 characters.
1,000 or 2,000 characters.
up to 10 fields of up to 10
characters each.
limited by Disk Storage
Unit capacity.
minimum of 1 (plus one
1405 Disk Storage Unit).
released.
Sort 10 is a generalized program for ordering records
of an unordered file stored
on tape or in disc storage,
using a RAMAC 1410 Systern. Control information
is supplied by the user.
Checkpoints and restarts
are provided, as well as
the ability to print error
messages on-line.

1410 Sort/Merge 11
Reference: .
Record size:

IBM Publication }28-0237-0.

File size: . . .
The 1410 System must have 40,000 positions of
core storage. The 1410 usually has the same configuration of input and output units as the 650 system being simulated; however, the simulation program can substitute tape units for card and 407 input and output. Control panel wiring is simulated
by editing routines. These editing routines, plus
the configurations of both computers, are specified'
by control cards.
:12

Number of tapes: .

Simulation by Other Computers

IBM 704, 709, and 7090
Reference: . . .
Date available: .
Description:

IBM Publication J29-1427 - O.
released.

This program enables the user to simulate a 1410
system with 20,000 core storage positions on a 704,
709, or 7090. One version operates with the 704;
another with the 709 or 7090.
The simulating computer must have the following
minimum configuration:
32,678 words of core storage, an on-line card
punch, and an off-line printer. In addition, the
704 must have four magnetic tape units plus one
for each 1410 tape unit to be simulated, as well
as an on-line card reader. The 709 and 7090
must have five tape units plus one for each simulated tape unit, as well as off-line card-to-taPe
equipment. Input to the 704 must be on punched
cards; input to the 709 and 7090 must be on magnetic tape.

Block size: •

Key size: .
File size:.
Number of tapes: .
Data available: .
Description: . . .

The 709 and 7090 can simulate up to ten 1410 tape
units; the 704 can handle up to five. No more
than one disc of a 1405 disc storage unit can be

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

13 char to maximum allowable block length.
maximum of 1,330 to 9,999
characters, depending on
order of merge and system
configuration.
up to 10 fields of up to 10
characters each.
up to 4 reels (using 10
tapes).
4 to 10.
released.
Sort/Merge 11 is a generalized program for ordering
and merging tape records.
It does not utilize Processing Overlap or the Priority
Feature. It requires a minimum of 20,000 positions
of core storage. Any order
of merge up to 5-way may
be employed.

Revised

4/63

402: 151.130

§

IBM 1410

151.

.13

.14
Data Sorting and Merging (Contd. )
1410 Sort/Merge 12
Reference: .
Record size:
Block size: •

Key size: .
File size:.
Number of tapes:.
Date available: .
Description: . • .

1410 Tape Report Program Generator
Reference: . . .
IBM Publication J24-1443-0.
Date available: . . . . released.

IBM Publication J28-0253.
13 characters to maximum
allowable block length.
maximum of 298 to 9,999
characters, depending
on order of merge and
storage capacity.
up to 10 fields of up to 999
characters each.
up to 4 reels (using 10
tapes).
4 to 10.
released.
Sort/Merge 12 is a generalized program for ordering
and merging tape records.
Unlike Sort/Merge 11, it
utilizes the Processing
Overlap and Priority
Features. Any order of
merge up to 5-way may be
employed.

Description:
The Tape Report Program Generator utilizes the
same language and performs the same basic function'
as the card version described above. An object program produced by the tape version, however, processes an input file which may be on tape, card or
disc storage to produce a printed report, a punched
card deck, an output tape file, or any combination
of the three. The output tape file will contain unblocked 132 character records in the move mode,
with even parity.
The object computer must have 10,000 core storage
positions and a card read-punch. If the specifications indicate tape input and tape, card, and printer
output, the target system will require two magnetic
tape units and a printer, as well as a card readpunch. The generated program utilizes IOCS for
input-output control.
. 15

• 14

Data Transcription

Report Writing
Tape File Generators (A & B).
Reference: • . •
IBM Publication J24-1435-0.
released.
Date available: .
Description: . .
These 2 programs (which
differ only in the card formats they handle) prepare
tape files from card records. With one of the programs the record can be
either fixed or variable
length. With the other program, fixed -length records
can be written in blocked or
unblocked form.
Tape Print Program
IBM Publication J24-1435-0.
Reference: . . .
released.
Date available: .
This program produces a
Description: . .
listing of the data contained
on any magnetic tape
written by the IBM 1410.
Tape records can be either
fixed or variable length and
written in either the move
or load mode.

1410 Card Report Program Generator
Reference: . . •
IBM Publication J24-1443-0.
Date available: . . . • released.
Description:
This generator facilitates the preparation of report
programs which will process an input card file to
produce a printed report and/or a punched card
deck. Four distinct phases are involved in its use:
1. Writing the report specifications in a problem-

oriented language.
2. Translating the report specifications into a symbolic (Basic Autocoder) object program through
the use of the Card Report Program Generator
Processor Deck.
3. Translating the symbolic program into 1410 machine language by means of either the Basic
Autocoder or Autocoder tranl;llator.
4. Executing the object program to produce the
desired report.
A minimum of 10,000 positions of core storage is
required to generate a report program. The object
program can be run on any 1410 system whose
storage capacity will accommodate it, and no special features are required. Primary eItlphasis has
been placed on the generation of efficient object
programs for a wide variety of report formats and
computational requirements. The generation process is lengthy and involves considerable card
handling unless the translating 1410 system is large
enough to permit use of the Autocoder translator. '
The problem-oriented language, while not as easy
to master as one might hope, should result in significant savings in programming time and effort as
compared with the use of a machine-oriented language for program preparation.
4/63

Report Writing (Contd.)

Revised

. 16

File Maintenance
1405 Disk Storage Utility Programs
Reference: . • .
IBM Publication J28-0248.
Date available: • . . . released.
Description:
Seven 1405 Disk Storage utility programs provide
the following facilities for program testing and
basic service functions operating on full tracks of
selected areas of disc storage:
• Erase and fill areas with any valid 1410
character specified by user.
• Load areas with data contained on cards.

PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
§

402: 151.160

151.

.16

.16
File Maintenance (Contd.)

File Maintenance (Contd.)
1301 Disk Storage Utility Routines (Contd.)

1405 Disk Storage Utility Programs (Contd.)

• Generate home address identifier and addresses
of records, and write them on one or more disc
tracks.

• Write contents of areas on magnetic tape (with
or without Processing Overlap and Priority
special features).

• Load data from magnetic tape records into a
designated track of disc storage.

• Reload areas from magnetic tape (with or without
Processing Overlap and Priority special
features).

• Write all the data from one or more tracks and
the disc location identifier onto magnetic tape.

• Produce on the printer data recorded on selected
tracks.

• Read data from magnetic tape into its original
disc storage location.

1301 Disk Storage Utility Routines
Reference: . . .
IBM Publication J28-0252.
Date available: • . . • released.
Description:

• Fill record areas of specified tracks with a
character specified by the user.
.17

Other:......... none to date.

.2

PROBLEM ORIENTED
LANGUAGES: . . . • none.

Six 1301 Disk Storage utility routines provide the
following facilities for both test and production
runs:
• Generate characters for the fonnat track and
write them on one or more format tracks.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised

4/63

•

402: 161.100

STANDARD

EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 1410
P. O. Language

FORTRAN
PROGRESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN

§

161.

. 14

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

IBM 1410 FORTRAN.

• 12

Origin: .

Data Processing Division,
IBM Corporation.

. 13

Reference: .

IBM Publication J24-1468-0 •

.14

Description
The IBM 1410 FORTRAN language is a reasonably
complete and useful version of FORTRAN II, the
most widely accepted process oriented language for
scientific applications. The 1410 version differs
from the 709/7090 FORTRAN II language (Section
408:161) primarily in that Boolean and complex arithmetic cannot be performed. The other language restrictions are minor. On the other hand, 1410
FORTRAN takes advantage of the variable word
length capabilities of the 1411 Processing Unit by
permitting the programmer to specify any desired
degree of precision for the internal representation of
numeric data. The only limitation on item size is the
capacity of core storage. The precision (f) to be
used for all floating point values within a single program is preset by a control card. If rio specification
is made, f is set at eight decimal digits. The number of storage positions required for each floating
point data value of f digits precision is f + 2, because
two additional digits are required to specify the exponent. Fixed point precision (k), whichl\s also preset by a control card, applies to all fixed point values
within a program, and is set at five decimal digits if
no explicit specification is made. Object program
execution times and storage requirements will naturally increase when increased precision is demanded.
The ranges of numeric r::agnitudes that can be represented .in 1410 and 709/7090 FORTRAN II are compared in the following table:

1410 FORTRAN:
709/7090 FORTRAN:

Floating Point

Fixed Point

10- 100 to (1-10- f ) x 10+ 99
10- 38 to 10+ 38

1 to 10 k•
1 to 131,071.

Where f and k are floating and fixed point precisions,
respectively, in decimal digits.
The 1410 FORTRAN language includes complete facilities for defining and using subroutines and functions. Conversion of FORTRAN-coded programs and
subroutines written for other systems (e. g., SHARE
library routines) should be fairly straightforward so
long as the routines include no symbolic coding and
no Boolean or complex arithmetic statements. All
the standard built-in and library functions of 709/
7090 FORTRAN II except hyperbolic tangent are provided. Virtually all the input-output and format
features of 709/7090 FORTRAN are available, except
that input-output in octal form is not possible.

© 1963

Description (Contd.)
The 1410 FORTRAN Compiler is designed to operate
on a 1410 system with 20,000 or more positions of
core storage, a 1402 Card Read Punch, a 1403
Printer, and a minimum of 4 magnetic tape units.
The compiler translates the FORTRAN source program into a 1410 Autocoder program, which is in
turn converted into a machine language object program by the Autocoder translator.
The restrictions and extensions of the IBM 1410
FORTRAN language relative to IBM 709/7090
~ORTRAN II follow:
Restrictions
(1) The following statements are not permitted:
FREQUENCY
READ DRUM
WRITE DRUM
(2) Boolean, complex, and double precision operations are not permitted (but note that precision
can be preset to any desired value).
(3) Input-output in octal form (O-type conversion) is
not permitted.
(4) A list of compiler output options can follow the
END statement, but will be ignored by the compil~r.

(5) IF ACCUMULATOR OVERFLOW, IF QUOTIENT
OVERFLOW, and IF DIVIDE CHECK all test the
setting of the same pseudo overflow indicator,
which is turned on only by floating pOint arithmetic operations.
(6) IF SENSE SWITCH tests one of six pseudo sense
switches whose settings must be specified by a
control card.
(7) Symbolic coding cannot be incorporated into the
FORTRAN source program.
(8) Floating point and fixed point variables must not
be assigned to the same storage location in an
EQUIVALENCE statement.
(9) The hyperbolic tangent (TANHF) function is not
provided.
(10) Object programs cannot be segmented as in
709/7090 CHAIN operations.
Extensions
(1) Fixed point and floating point data items can be
represented internally with any desired degree of
precision, as preset by control cards (see
Description above).
(2) The TYPE statement provides typed output on
the on-line 1415 Console I/O Printer.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

402: 162.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 1410
P. O. Language

COBOL 61
PROCESS ORI ENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL 61

§

162.

• 14

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity:

IBM 1410 COBOL.

· 12

Origin:.

IBM Corporation.

. 13

Reference:.

IBM Publications .
F28-8053-l,
J28-0232, N28-1007, and
N28-1012.

• 14

Description (Contd. )
data mode. In the load mode, each word mark bit in
core storage corresponds to a word-separator character on tape. In the move mode, word marks in
core storage are neither recorded on the tape during
a write operation nor disturbed during a read operation. Magnetic tape files can be organized in any of
the following record formats:
• Fixed length records, unblocked; with or without
record marks.
• Fixed length records blocked; with record marks
and padding of short blocks.

Description
mM 1410 COBOL is a subset of COBOL-61, the most
widely implemented pseudo-English common language for business applications. Although a number
of electives have been incorporated, 1410 COBOL has
several significant deficiencies with respect to Required COBOL-61. These deficiencies result from
the manufacturer's decision to "defer" several important but not easily implemented language facilities
in order to produce the first operative COBOL-6l
compiler. The deficiencies of 1410 COBOL relative
to Required COBOL-61, as well as the facilities of
Elective COBOL-6l that have and have not been implemented, are tabulated at the end of this description.
Probably the most significant language facilities of
Required COBOL-61 that have not been implemented
for the mM 1410 are the EXAMINE verb and the
COBOL library. The EXAMINE verb and associated
TALLY register are used to replace a given character and/or to count the number of times the character occurs in a data item. Thus, a variety of character manipUlation operations that cannot otherwise
be coded in the COBOL language are possible. The
COBOL library is a collection of prewritten entries
for the Environment, Data, and Procedure Divisions
that can reduce the amount of writing involved in
coding programs and encourage standardization of
coding techniques.
Among the electives that have been incorporated into
1410 COBOL, the COMPUTE and ENTER verbs are
especially useful. COMPUTE permits arithmetic operations to be expressed in a convenient formula notation similar to that of FORTRAN. The statement
"ENTER AUTOCODER" enables the programmer to
use the 1410 Autocoder language (subject to certain
restrictions) within a COBOL program. Autocoder
statements can reference non-hyphenated COBOL
data and procedure names. The ENTER AUTOCODER facility can be used to develop object programs that utilize IBM 1301 Disk Storage.
IBM 1410 COBOL object programs can read and record information on magnetic tape with either even
parity or odd parity, and in either the load or move

© 1963

• Variable length records, blocked; with a record
mark and Record Character Count field in each record and a Block Character Count field in each block.
Files assigned to the Card Read-Punch or Printer
must be in the move mode, have even parity, and
must contain only fixed length, unblocked records.
Although the 1410 is a variable word length computer,
the COBOL provisions for dynamically variable item
lengths have not been implemented. Arithmetic operand sizes can be preset to any value up to 18 digits.
The data description clauses USAGE, SIGNED, and
SYNCHRONIZED have no Significance in the 1410 system because of its variable word length and its use of
the same representation for both numeric and alphameric data. Therefore, these three clauses are ignored by the compiler.
The 1410 COBOL Processor accepts a COBOL source
program and converts it into a 1410 Autocoder program. The 1410 Autocoder Processor then produces
the machine language object program and listing. The
1410 Processor Operating System Tape contains both
the COBOL and Autocoder Processors, and the entire
translation process can be performed without operator
intervention if the translating computer has at least
five magnetic tape units and if no serious source program errors are encountered. The minimum configuration for use of the 1410 COBOL Processor is:
•
•
•
•

20,000 positions of core storage.
4 IBM 729 or 7330 Magnetic Tape Units.
1 IBM 1402 Card-Punch, Model 2.
1 IBM 1403 Printer, Model 2 or 3.

One or two additional tape units can be substituted for
the Card Read-Punch and/or Printer if the source program input, object program output, and/or translator
listing are to be on magnetic tape.
Availability
Language: .

1961.

Translator:

January, 1962.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

402: 162.140

§

162.

14

Description (Contd. )
Deficiencies with respect to Required COBOL-61
Environment Division:
• The OPTIONAL option in the FILE-CONTROL paragraph, which prov4les for files that will not necessarily be present each time the object program
is run, is deferred.
• The MULTIPLE REEL option in the FILECONTROL paragraph "and all other features that
provide for automatic assignment of tape units are
deferred.
• The COPY options that enable SOURCECOMPUTER, OBJECT-COMPUTER, and SPECIALNAMES paragraphs to be taken from the library
are deferred.
• The RENAMING clause in the FILE-CONTROL
paragraph, which enables more than one file to
utilize the same File Description without the need
to rewrite the description, is deferred.
• One ALTERNATE AREA may be specified in the
FILE-CONTROL paragraph if the object computer
has the Processing Overlap feature; otherwise,
none may be $pecified.

4/63

IBM 1410
.14

Description (Contd.)
Deficiencies with respect to Required COBOL- 61
(Contd.)
Data Division:
• The COpy options that enable File and Record descriptions to be taken from the library are
"
EFINE
INCLUDE
USE
Verb Options
MOVE CORRESPONDING
OPEN REVERSED
Relationships
Conditionals
Complex conditionals
Conditional statements

Comments
new verbs cannot. be defined.
no library routines can be called.
no non-standard I/O error and label handling routines.
each item must be individually moved.
tapes cannot be read backward.
IS UNEQUAL TO, EQUALS, and EXCEEDS are not
provided.
no implied objects with implied subjects.
not permitted.
only AT END or ON SIZE ERROR may follow imperative
statements.

43
45
46

Environment Division
FILE-CONTROL
I/O-CONTROL
I/O-CONTROL

cannot be taken from library.
cannot be taken from library.
rerun methods cannot be specified.

47

Identification Division
DATE-COMPILED

current date will not be inserted automatically.

48
49

Special Features
Library
Segmentation

library routines cannot be called.
no provision for segmentation of object programs.

402: 171.100
IBM 1410
Machine Oriented Language
Basi c Autocoder
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: BASIC AUTOCODER
§

171.

· 24

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . . . . . . . . mM 1410 Basic Autocoder .
Basic Autocoder.

.12

Special Conventions

.241 Compound addresses:

Origin: . . . . . . . . . mM Data Processing Division, Applied Programming.

.13

Reference: . . . . . . . mM Publication J24-1413-1.
1410 Program Library 1410AU-102.

.14

Description

.242 Multi-addresses:
· 243 Literals
Numerical: ..
Alphamerical:

· 244 Special coded
addresses: .

Basic Autocoder is the basic machine oriented language for 1410 systems. There is essentially a one- .245 Other
to-one correspondence between Basic Autocode;r
Actual core storage
statements and 1410 machine language instruction!:!;
addresses: . . . .
however, there are eleven pseudo operations which
define constants and labels and provide limited transAddress constants: .
lator control. Basic Autocoder utilizes a free-form
coding sheet. lMeTals are permissible but are limited to five characters. Macro-instructions cannot
be utilized.
.3
LABELS
. 15

Publication Date:

.2

LANGUAGE FORMAT

.21

Diagram:

.22

Legend
Line: .
Label:
Operation:

Operand: .

.23

Corrections: .

released .

.31

refer to Autocoder Coding
Sheet (402:171.820).

.311 Maximum number of
labels:
.312 Common label formation rule: .
. 313 Reserved labels: .
.314 Other restrictions:
. 315 Designators: .
. 316 Synonyms permitted:

sequences entries on coding
sheet.
.32
names an area or instruction.
.321
defines operation to be performed, in either
mnemonic or machine
code.
actual or symbolic addresses of data to be operated upon, with specification pf indexing or relative addressing, address
constants, literals, and/or .322
comments.
.323
spare lines on coding sheet . 324
.325
and gaps in sequence
numbers.
.326

© 1963

BASE± ADJUSTMENT,
where BASE is any label
and ADJUSTMENT is a
decimal integer.
none.
1 to 5 digits preceded by +
or - sign; 'no blanks.
1 to 5 characters preceded
and followed by @; can
contain blanks and @ symbol; no more than 1 alphamericalliteral can appear
in a single coding sheet
entry.

* refers to low-order position of instruction in which
it appears.
1 to 5 decimal digits; leading zeros omitted.
+ or - preceding label of
item whose address is to
be used as an operand
(limited to 5 characters).

General
600 per translator iteration.
yes.
none.
none.
none .
yes.

Universal Labels
Labels for procedures
Existence:
Region: .
Formation rule
First character:
Others:

mandatory if referenced by
other instructions.
universal.
alphabetic.
letters or numerals; no
special characters.

Number of characters: .
1 to 6.
Labels for library rounone.
tines: .
Labels for constants:
same as procedures.
Labels for files: .
none.
Labels for records:
same as procedures.
Labels for variables:
same as procedures.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 4/63

IBM 1410

402: 171.330

§

171.

. 544 Annotation
Comment phrase:

.33

Local Labels: . . . . . none.

.4

DATA

· 41

Constants

Title phrase: . . .

comment card, with
column 6.
JOB card.

.6

SPECIAL ROUTINES
AVAILABLE: . . . . . none .

. 412 Maximum size literals
Alphameric: . . . . . one to five characters preceded and and followed by
@.
Numeric: . . . . . ; . one to five digits preceded
by sign; no blanks.

.7

LffiRARY FACILITIES:

.42

.8

MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES

.81

Macros: . . . . . . . . none.

.82

Pseudos

.411 Maximum size
constants: ..

.43

limited only by available
core storage .

Working Areas

.421 Data layout
hupUed by use:.
Specified in program:
. 422 Data type: . . . . .
. 423 Redefinition: . . . .

no.
yes .
not required .
yes; EQU pseudo.

Input-Output Areas

.431 Data layout:
.432 Data type:
.433 Copy layout:
•5

PROCEDURES

.51

Direct Operation Codes

Code
explicit.
not required.
yes; DA pseudo.

DA:

DCW: . . . . . . . . .
. 511 Mnemonic
Existence:
Number:
Example: .
.512 Absolute
Existence:
Number:
Example:

DC: .
alternative.
151.
M = multiply.
alternative.
38 (many variations through
"d" modifier).
@ = multiply.

OS: .
EQU:
CTL:.

.52

Macro-Codes:

none.

ORG: ..

. 53

Inte:r;ludes: .

none.

LTORG:

.54

Translator Control

· 541 Method of control
Allocation counter: .
Label adjustment:
Annotation: . . . .
.542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute: .
Set to label: ..
Step forward:. .
Step backward: .
Reserve area: .
· 543 Label adjustment
Set labels equal:
Set absolute value:
Clear label table:

4/63 Reprinted

* in

EX: . . . . . . . . . .
pseudo operations.
pseudo operations.
special carda.
END: . . . . . . . . .
ORG, LTORG pseudo.
no.
OS pseudo.
no.
DA pseudo.
PST: . . . . . . . . .
EQU pseudo.
EQU pseudo.
no.

none.

Description
defines an area of core
storage and the lengths,
names, and relative positions of the fields within
it .
loads a constant and sets
word mark in high-order
position.
loads a constant without
word mark.
. by-passes and labels an
area of storage.
assigns a label to an actual
or symbolic address.
specifies storage sizes of
translating & target systems and type of translator output desired.
sets address allocation
counter.
assigns storage locations to
previously encountered
literals & closed library
routines . .
causes a temporary halt in
loading of the object program, and execution of the
portion just loaded.
indicates end of source
deck; causes execution of
object program immediately after loading if
starting address is specified in operand.
prints a listing of all source.
program labels together
with assigned actual addresses.

3=

:I>

n

fORM X24·13S0·1
PRINTED IN U.S.A.

IBM
(!)

Program _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Programmed by _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Identification!

1401/1410 AUTOCODER CODING SHEET

Page

Oat, e
56

o
o
o

I

2
3

04

@

05

'"

06

0-

07

»
c:

08

0W

'<

"
0-

09

:r

10

g
n

o

I I

og.

I 2

-ao

:J

I 3

o
:J
a.

I 4

'"

I 5

Z

»

I 6

:;n
o

I 7

-ao

o

it
a.

I 8
I 9
20
2 I

2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5

!

! !

!

80

of _ _

No.~

Label

c:>peration

:

1516

2021

30

35

40

45

m

b

::!:!

m

z

-f

o

OPERAND
25

z

m

Ii:

Line
3

!

76

:::t:

r
50

55

60

65

:I>

70

z

G'>

c::

I

:I>
G'>

m

I
I

OJ

:I>

:

~

n

:

:I>

c::

:

I

I

:

-f

o
n
o
o

m

;;0

I

:

:
I

I

,

I

,

I

, ,

I

, ,

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

,

:
:
I
I
I

:
:
:

:
I

:
I

I

::a
ct>

"0

!:!.

::;
ct>

0-

"".......

0\
W

I

:
I

..,.
o

!':>

I

~

:::!
(XI

!::l

402: 172.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP
'[PORTS

IBM 1410
M. O. Language
Autocoder

MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: AUTOCODER

§

172.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.22

Legend
Line:

· sequences entries on
coding sheet.
names an area or instruction.
· defines operation to be
performed, in either
mnemonic or machine
code.
· actual or symbolic addresses of data to be
operated upon, with specification of indexing or
relative addressing,
address constants,
literals, and/or comments.

Label:

· IDM 1410 Autocoder.
Autocoder.

Operation: .
.12

· IDM Data Processing
Division, Applied
Programming.
Operand:

.13

Reference:

.14

Description:

· IDM Publication
J24-1433-0.

Autocoder is a more powerful machine oriented
language than Basic Autocoder. It provides macroinstructions, longer literals, and library routines,
but requires at least 4 magnetic tape units and
20,000 positions of core storage on the translating
1410 system. As in Basic Autocoder, there is a
general one-to-one correspondence between source
statements and machine language instructions.
Through the use of macros, however, the programmer can call and cue open or closed library routines
at will, thereby reducing coding time and effort-.
User-defined macros can be inserted into the
library.

.23

Corrections:

.24

Special Conventions

.241 Compound addresses: . · BASE ±ADJUSTMENT,
where BASE is any label
and ADJUSTMENT is a
decimal integer.
.242 Multi -addresses:
· macros only .
. 243 Literals:
· any number of characters,
provided total operand
length does not exceed
52 characters.
Numeric:
· preceded by + or - sign;
no blanks.
Alphameric:
· preceded and followed by

Since the Autocoder language is an extension of
Basic Autocoder, the Autocoder translator can
translate source programs coded in either language
or in a combination of the two. Compatibility between IDM 1401 and 1410 systems is provided by the
fact that the 1401 Autocoder language is essentially
a subset of the 1410 Autocoder language. This
means that programs coded in 1401 Autocoder can be
translated and run on a 1410 system after relatively .244 Special coded
addresses: .
minor modifications, mainly to the input-output
operations.
The 1410 Input/Output Control System is a
supplement to Autocoder. It consists of additional
control and macro operations that handle reading
and writing, tape blocking and unblocking, file
labeling, and error checking. Characteristics of
the overall program, the object system, and each
record file must be included in the source program
in the form of a series of descriptive cards preceded by a header card.
. 15

· spare lines on coding sheet
and gaps in sequence
numbers.

@

..... · * refers to low-order

. 245 Other
Actual core storage
addresses: . . . .
Address constants:

.3

LABELS

.31

General

position of instruction
in which it appears .

· 1 to 5 decimal digits
(leading zeros omitted).
· + or - preceding label of
item whose address is
to be used as an operand
(up to 10 characters).

Publication Date: . . . . released December, 1961.

.2

LANGUAGE FORMAT

.21

Diagram:

· refer to Autocoder Coding
Sheet.

© 1963

.311 Maximum number of
labels: . . . . .
. 312 Common label
formation rule:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

.600 per translator iteration.
· yes.

Reprinted 4/63

IBM 1410

402:172.313
§

172 .

.42

. 313 Reserved labels
For hasic macros:.

OPEN, CLOSE, CLOSO, GET, PUT,
ST ACK,:' SKIP, CONSL, RTLBL,
WTLBL, RELSE, FEORL, CHKPT,
RDLIN, IOBSP, IORWO, IORWU,
IOWTM, PST AC, RT APE, WT APE,
CALL, INCLO.
For "pseudO' macros"*:MATH, BaaL, CaMP, NOTE,
MEND.

*These macros never appear in source programs;
they are used in writing library routines .
. 314 Other restrictions: .
.315 Designators:
. 316 Synonyms permitted:
.32

· none.
· none .
· yes.

Universal Labels

. 321 Labels for procedures
· mandatory if referenced by
Existence: . . .
other instructions.
Formation rule
First character:
· alphabetic.
Others: ..
· alphameric; no special
characters.
Number of
characters: .
. 1 to 10 .
. 322 Labels for library routines
Existence: . . ..
. mandatory for entry points.
Formation rule
First character:
• alphabetic.
Others:. . . . .
. labels for each entry point
in a subroutine must have
the same first three
characters; last two
characters can be any
alphamerics; first three
characters of subroutine
symbols should not be
used as the first three
characters of any symbols in the source program.
Number of
characters: .
.5.
323 Labels for constants: · same as procedures.
same as procedures, with
324 Labels for files:
Input/Output Control
System only •
. 325 Labels for records:
· same as procedures.
.326 Labels for variables: · same as procedures.
. 33

Local Labels:

.4

DATA

.41

Constants

· none.

.411 Maximum size constants:limited only by available
core storage.
.412 Maximum size literals: total operand length may
not exceed 52 characters.
Alphameric:
. preceded and followed by
@

Numeric:. .

4/63 Reprinted

. preceded by sign.

Working Areas

.421 Data layout
Implied by use:
Specified in program:
.422 Data type:
.423 Redefinition:
.43

Input-Output Areas

.431 Data layout: .
.432 Data type:
. 433 Copy layout:
.5

PROCEDURES

.51

Direct Operation Codes

.511 Mnemonic
Existence:
Number: .
Example:.
.512 Absolute
Existence:
Number:
Example:

.52

· no.
· yes.
· not required .
· yes; EQU pseudo .

· explicit .
· not required .
· yes; DA pseudo .

· alternative .
· 151.
· M = mUltiply.
· alternative.
.38 (many variations
through "d" modifier).
• @ = multiply.

Macro-Codes

.521 Number available
Input-output:. . . . . .
Subroutine calls: . . . .
Writing of new macros:
.522 Examples
Simple:
·
Elaborate:
·
.523 New macros:
.53

Interludes:

.54

Translator Control

.541 Method of control
Allocation counter:.
Label adjustment:
Annotation:. . . .
.542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute:
Set to label: . .
Step forward: .
Step backward:
Reserve area:
.543 Label adjustment
Set labels equal: .
Set absolute value:.
Clear label table:
. 544 Annotation
Comment phrase:
Title phrase:. . .

21.
2.
5 ("pseudo-macros").

CALL SQROl.
CALL SUBOl, DATAl,
DATA2, DATA3.
· inserted into library in
separate run.
· none.

· pseudo operations.
· pseudo operations.
· special cards.
· ORG, LTORG pseudos.
.ORG, LTORG pseudos .
.ORG, DS pseudos.
· ORG pseudo.
· DA pseudo.
· EQU pseudo.
· EQU pseudo .
· no •
· comment card, with * in
colu.mn 6.
· JOB card.

MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: AUTOCODER

402:172.545

§ 17:l.

. 76

.545 Other
Delete routine from
library tape: . ..
Insert routine into
library tape: . ..

.761 Open routines exist:.

. pseudo operation.
. pseudo operation.

Insertion in Program

. yes; cued by name in
operation column.
.762 Closed routines exist: .. yes; cued by CALL or
INCLD macros.
.763 Open-closed is optional: no.
.764 Closed routines appear
once: . . . . . . . . . yes.

·6

SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE

.8

MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES

.61

Special Arithmetic: . . . none.

.81

Macros
Code

.62

Special Functions:. ..

· 63

Overlay Control: . . . . none.

.64

Data Editing

.641 Radix conversion: .
. 642 Format control:. .

none.

Input-OuEEut Control

.651
.652
.653
.654
.655

File labels:
Reel labels:
Blocking:
Error Control:
Method of call:

. 66

Sorting:

...

· none .

. 67

Diagnostics: .

· none.

.7

LffiRARY FACILITIES

.71

Identity:

· 72

Kinds of Libraries

:1

sets up linkage to a closed
library routine and (once
only) inserts it in program.
INCLD: . . . . • . . inserts an inflexible
library routine without
linkage.
OPEN: •
initializes a tape or card
file.
CLOSE:
deactivates a file, with
rewind if desired.
locates a single record
GET: . •
for processing, from
either a blocked or unblocked file.
PUT: • • . . . • . • inserts a processed
record into an output
file.
causes next GET or PUT
RELSE:
to refer to next block
in .the file .
initiates end-of-reel
FEORL:
routine.
causes cards to be read
RDLIN:
at object time to modify
tape labels.
deactivates a dump tape.
CLOSD:
selects cards read into
STACK:
the specified pocket.
skip to specified tape
SKIP:
channel.
CONSL:
performs specified console
operation.
RTLBL:
reads non-standard tape
labels .
writes non-standard tape
WTLBL:
labels .
CHKPT:
causes branch to check
point routine .
backspaces one tape record
IOBSP: •
on specified unit.
rewinds specified tape unit.
IORWD:
rewinds and unloads speciIORWU:
fied tape unit.
writes a tape mark on
IOWTM:
specified tape.
selects cards punched into
PSTAC:
specified pocket .
reads a record from speciRTAPE:
fied tape unit .
writes a record on speciWTAPE:
fied tape unit .
CALL:

· none .
· not required because of
hardware editing
capability .

.65

Description

·Input/Output
Control
System

:j· macros.

· 1410 Autocoder Library,
included in system tape.

. 721 Fixed master:. ; .
.722 Expandable master: .
. 723 Private: . . . . . . .

· no.
· yes.
· private facilities may be
added to master library.

. 73

Storage Form:

. routines supplied on cards
for transcription to tape.

.74

Varieties of Contents:. supplied with 7 basic macros;
Input/Output Control System
and other facilities desired by user may be added.

. 75

Mechanism

. 751 Insertion of new item: .. special library run.
.752 Language of new item:.. 1410 Autocoder.
. 753 Method of call: . . . . . CALL or INCLD macro.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

. Reprinted 4/63

402:172.820

§

IBM 1410

172.

.82

Pseudos
Code

CTL:

Description

· specifies storage sizes of
translating & target
systems and type of
translator output desired.
DE LET: ••.
· deletes all or part of a
routine from the library
tape.
EJECT:.
· causes carriage to restore.
END:
· indicates end of source
program; can initiate
execution of object program immediately after
loading.
EX:
· causes a temporary halt
in loading of the object
program, and execution
of the portion just loaded.
INSER: . • . . . . . . · inserts a whole or partial
routine into the library
tape.
· identifies program deck or
JOB:
tape and prints headings
on listing.
LOAD: . . . . . . . . · signals processor that a
load program should
precede object deck.

4/63 Reprinted

LTORG: . . . . . . . . assigns storage locations
to previously encountered
literals & closed library
routines.
ORG:
. sets address allocation
counter.
PST:
· prints a listing of all
source program labels
together with assigned
actual addresses.
RESEQ:
· resets card sequence
count.
RUN:
· specifies type of run: Autocoder, FORTRAN, COBOL
RPG, System.
SFX:
· adds a specified sixth character to all labels with 5
or fewer characters.
XFR:
· same as EX, except that
literals & closed library
routines are not stored.
DIOCS: • . • • . . . · precedes a series of cards
describing characteristics
of the program and the
target computer.
DTF: • . • • . . . . · precedes a series of cards
describing a specific file.

402:181.100

_STANOARO

II

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 1410
Program Translator
Basic Autocoder
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: BASIC AUTOCODER
§

181.

.233 Maximum number of
data items:. . . . .

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:......... mM 1410 Basic Autocoder.

.12

Description
The Basic Autocoder translator is designed for
punched card input and output. Translation will
normally require two passes; however, additional
passes will be required for a program which contains more labels than can° be accomodated in the
label table of the translating computer. The translator is designed to operate on a 1410 with 10,000
positions of core storage, a card read-punch, and
a printer; there is no provision for tape input or
output. The object computer, however, may be a
tape or disc storage system. In addition to producing a machine language deck in condensed form,
the translator prints a listing of both the symbolic
and machine language instructions. Because of the
one-to-one correspondence of Basic Autocoder
statements to 1410 machine language instructions,
the object program will require the same storage
space and operating time as a hand-coded program.

. 13

Originator:

.31

Object

Pro~am

. 311 Language name: .
. 313 Output media:

.32

Conventions

.321 Standard inclusions:
. 322 Compatible with:
.33

· mM 1410 machine language.
· punched cards .

· none.
· mM 1410 Autocoder .

Documentation
Subject
Source program:
Object program:
Storage map
(symbol table):
Restart point list:
Language errors:

Provision
. listing.
. listing.
listing.
none~

listing & messages
during assembly .

.4

TRANSLATING PROCEDURE

.41

Phases and Passes

Maintainer:

· as above

.15

Availability:

· released.

.2

INPUT

.21

Lan~a~

. . . ..

· control operations implemented; addresses assigned to labels; multiple
labels flagged; operation
codes checked for validity.
Pass II:
· machine operation codes
and d modifiers furnished
in place of mnemonics;
declarative operations
(DC, DCW, etc.) performed; listing, object
deck and load program
produced; symbol table
printed if requested.
Note: Additional passes may be required if the
- - number of labels and literals used exceeds
othe storage capacity of the symbol table.
Pass I:

.. . . . .

. 211 Name:
. 212 Exemptions: .

· mM 1410 Basic Autocoder .
· none.

Form

.221 Input media: .
. 222 Obligatory ordering:

· punched cards .
· must be in correct sequence according to
coding sheet page and
line numbers .
· none .

. 223 Obligatory grouping:
. 23

OUTPUT

· mM Data Processing
Division, Applied
Programming.

.14

.22

.3

• 600 labels per translator
iteration •

Size Limitations

.231 Maximum number of
source statements:

· limited by target computer
storage capacity.

. 232 Maximum size source
statements:
. . . .72 characters per card.

.

© 1963

.42

OE!;ional Modes

.421
.422
. 423
.424
.425

Translate: .
Translate and run:
Check only:
Patching:
Up-dating: .

by Auerbach CO'l>oration and BNA Incorporoted

· yes .
· no .
· no .
· no .
· no .

. Reprinted 4/63

402:181.430

!BM 1410

§lSI.
.43

Special Features

.6

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

.61

Translating

Com~ter

. 44

Bulk Translating: . . . . no.

.611 Minimum configuration: 10,000 core storage
locations .
1402 Card Read-Punch.
1403 Printer .
.612 Larger configuration
advantages:
. more labels can be processed per iteration .

.45

Program Diagnostics:. . none.

. 62

.46

Translator Library:. . . none.

. 621 Minimum configuration: any 1410 system .
. 622 Usable extra facilities: all .

.5

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

.51

Object Program Space

.431 Alter to check only: . . no.
. 432 Fast unoptimized
translate: . . . .. . no.
. 433 Short translate on
restricted program:. . no.

....

.7

.511 Fixed overhead:..
. none.
.512 Space required for
each input-output
. . . . . . . . . variable.
file:
.513 Approximate expansion
of procedures: . . . . . slightly over 1.0 (because
literals are permitted in
the source language but
not in machine language).
. 52

Translation Time

.521 Normal translating: .

. '1

.53

Optimizing Data:

. none .

. 54

Object Program
Performance:

4/63 Reprinted

.S

Tar~t

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock Action

Missing enuies:
Unsequenced enuies:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Incomplete enuies:
Target computer overflow:
Inconsistent program:
Undefined names:

none.
check
check
check
check
none.
none.
check

noted
noted
noted
noted

in
in
in
in

listing.
listing.
listing.
listing.

noted in listUig •

ALTERNATIVE TRANSLATORS

1410

. unaffected; 1. e ., same as
hand coding.

Computer

Autocoder

released

Basic Autocoder is
a subset of 1410
Autocoder language.

402:182.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 1410

Program Translator
Autocoder
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: AUTOCODER
§

182.

· 23

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

· 12

. . . , . . . mM 1410 Autocoder.
Autocoder.

Description
Operation of the Autocoder translator requires at
least 20, 000 core storage positions, 4 magnetic tape
units, card read-punch, and printer. Larger core
storage sizes speed up the translation by permitting
longer tape. blocks and the processing of mor~ labels
per translator iteration. Input may be from either
punched cards or tape, and the object program may
be in the form of a condensed card deck and/or a
loadable tape. The translator will accommodate
source programs in either the Autocoder or Basic
Autocoder languages or a combination of the two.
The translation process is fully automatic. Only
those facilities of the Input/Output Control System
that are required by the object program are
generated and included.

.231 Maximum number of
source statements: .
· 232 Maximum size source
statements: . . . . .
· 233 Maximum number of
data names:

.3

OUTPUT

.31

Object Program

.311 Language name:
.313 Output media:
· 32

.33

Originator:

Provision
listing.
listing.
listing.
listing.
messages during assembly
and listing.

.41

Phases and Passes:

.42

Optional Modes
Translate: . . .
Translate and run: .
CheCK only:
Patching: . . . . .
Up-dating:
.. .
Special Features

· 15

Availability:

released December, 1961.

.2

INPUT

· 21

Language

. 43
mM 1410 Autocoder.
none.

Form

· 223 Obligatory grouping: .

Input/Output Control System.

mM Data Processing Division' Applied Programming.

.421
. 422
.423
. 424
. 425

· 222 Obligatory ordering: .

mM 1410 machine language.
punched cards and/or magnetic tape.

TRANSLATING PROCEDURE

as above.

.221 Input media:

600 per translator iteration.

·4

Maintainer:

.22

72 characters per card.

Documentation
. Subject
Source program: ;
Object program: .
Storage map (symbol
table): .
. ..
Restart point list:
Language errors:

. 14

. 211 Name: . .
.212 Exemptions:

limited by target computer
storage capacity.

Conventions

.321 Standard inclusions: .

The Autocoder translator and Input/Output Control
System are included in the 1410 Compiler System
Tape, along with the Report Program Generator,
COBOL, and FORTRAN.. A system supervisor picks
up information from control cards ana, acting
upon this information, positions the system tape,
calls in the required phase or program, and then
turns control over to the program called.

.13

Size Limitations

yes .
no.
no .
no .
no .

.431 Alter to check only:
no .
.432 Fast unoptimized translate:
. . . . .
no .
. 433 Short translate on restricted program:
no.

punched cards or magnetic
tape.
.44
must be in correct sequence
according to coding sheet
page and line numbers.
.45
none.

© 1963

?

Bulk Translating:

yes; "END" control card
must follow each program.

Program Diagnostics:

none in basic system; can be
inserted into library.

by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

Reprinted 4/63

IBM 1410

402:182..460
§

182.

· 46

.54
Translator Library

. 461 Identity: . . . . . .
• 462 User restriction: .
.463 Form
Storage medium: .
Organization:
· 464 Contents
Routines: . . . . .
Functions: . . . .
Data descriptions:
· 465 Librarianship
Insertion:. .
Amendment:

1410 Autocoder Library .
none.
tape (on Compiler System
Tape).
alphabetical order by routine name.
open and closed.
yes.
in IOCS entries.
yes, during special library
run.
yes, during special library
run.

Call procedure
Open routines:

Object Program
Performance: .

unaffected; i. e., same as
hand coding .

.6

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

.61

Translating ComEuter

.611 Minimum configuration: 20, 000 core storage locations, four 729 or 7330
Magnetic Tape Units, 1402
Card Read-Punch, and
1403 Printer.
.612 Larger configuration
additional tape unit permits
advantages: . . . . .
tape input of source program; larger core storage
handles more labels per
iteration.

inserted whenever cued by
specific macro instruc.62 Tar~t Computer
tions.
Closed routines: . . CALL or INCLD macro with
.621 Minimum configuration: 10, 000 core- storage posiname of routine as opertions and 1402 Card Readand; CALL also generates
Punch.
subroutine linkages.
.622 Usable extra facilities: all facilities .

.5

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

.51

Object Program Space

.7

.511 Fixed overhead
Name
Space
varies greatly with facilities
IOCS:
used.
• 512 Space required for each
variable.
input-output file: . .
.513 Approximate expansion
slightly over 1. 0 (exclusive
of procedures: .
of macros).
.52

7

.53

none.

.8

0Etimizing Data:

4/63 Reprinted

Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries:

check
check on new macros
being inserted
check
check
check

noted in listing •
noted in listing.
noted in listing.
noted in listing.
noted in listing.

check

noted in listing.'

Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
Target computer overflow:
Inconsistent program:

Translation Time

. 521 Normal translating:

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

ALTERNATIVE
TRANS LA TORS:

nen~

•

...

none .

•

II

STANDARD

EDP
"FORTS

IBM 1410
Operating Environment
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
§

191.

.1

GENERAL

· 11

Identity:

· 12

Description

· no integrated supervisor
available.

No comprehensive supervisor routine has been
published or announced to date for the 1410 system;
therefore, the facilities covered in this section
must be provided by the incorporation in each program of specific routines, where available, or by
individual coding.
. 13

Availability:.

.2

PROGRAM LOADING

. 21

Source of Programs

511 Tracing: . . . . . . . . . 1) Trace Program traces
each instruction within
a specified area of a
1410 program.
2) Branch Trace Program
traces each branch instruction in a specified
area .
. 512 Snapshots:. . . . . . . . Snapshot Program prints
out the contents of a
selected area of core
storage following the
execution of any instruction in the program being
tested .

· supervisor routine
.52
not presently committed;
library routines described
here are available now.

.211 Libraries:

· card library for standard
routines supplied by ruM;
cards for desired program
must be loaded manually. .
.212 Independents: . . . . . · self-loading card decks or
magnetic tapes, as produced by Basic Autocoder
or Autocoder translator.
· 22

Library Subroutines:

· may be inserted at translation time in form of
cards (Basic Autocoder)
or tapes (Autocoder) or
at run time as independents .

. 23

Loading Sequence: .

· manual sequencing of card
decks or program tapes.

.3

HARDWARE ALLOCA TION: . . . . . . . . . as incorporated in user's
program.

.4

RUNNING SUPERVISION: as incorporated in user's
program.

.5

PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS: . . .

· called in as needed from
program library; control
cards used to set up
linkages.

© 1963

Post Mortem: . . . . . . Storage Print Program
prints out the entire
contents of 1410 core
storage except the area
normally occupied by the
1410 load program .
Execution of the print
program destroys the
contents of certain areas
of core storage.
Note: The PAT (Procedure for Automatic Testing)
System incorporates the above-mentioned
""programs plus Clear Storage and Tape
Duplicate. This package is used to facilitate
program testing. Except for Storage Print,
which is included automatically, each of the
programs can be used at the discretion of the
.operator by submitting the appropriate control
cards. The PAT System is available only for
tape 1410 systems, with or without disc storage. The individual programs described above are available for card systems.

.6

OPERATOR CONTROL: as incorporated in user's
program.

.7

LOGGING:

.8

PERFORMANCE: . . . .·l

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

. as incorporated in user's
program .

Reprinted 4/63

Ml2:201.011
IBM 1410
System Performance

IBM 1410
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

©

1963 by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

402:201.012

IBM 1410
IBM 1410 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
Configuration

Worhheet

1

It.m
Char/b1oek
Recorda/block

K

II

III

IV

VII B

(PUe 1)

88

1080

1080

1080

1080

(PUe 1)

0.5

10

10

10

10

74.4

38.6

30.3

38.6

FUe 1= PUe 2
maec/block

Input.
Output
Times

1=150; 2=480

PUe 3

75

75

75

75

14.5

PUe4

120

120

120

120

15.8

PUe 1= PUe 2

0

0

0

0

0

PUe 3

0

0

0

0

0

FUe 4

0

0

0

0

0

FUe 1= FUe 2

1.76

1=62.1; 2=67.8

4.9

4.9

4.9

FUe3

0.88

0.88

0.88

0.88

0.36

F11e 4

1.452

1.452

1.452

1.452

0.594

al

0.9

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

a2

0.8

3.9

3.9

3.9

3.9

4:200.112
maec/awitch

maec penalty

2

Ref.rence

I

maec/b10ck

maec/record
Central
Processor \ maec/detaU
Times
maec/work

b6

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

b5 +b9

9.5

9.5

9.5

9.5

9.5

maec/report

b7 +b8

3

al

maec

for C.P.
and
dominant
co1U1111lo
Standard
Problem A
F= 1.0

3.8
I/O

3.8

3.8
I/O

C.P.
1.2

I/O

3.8

C.P.
1.2

I/O

C.P.
1.2

I/O

0.4

39.0

39.0

39.0

39.0

a3K

7.0

141.0

141.0

141.0

141.0

FUe 1 Maeter In

1.8

62.1

4.9

4.9

4.9

FUe 2 Maater Out

1.8

67.8

4.9

4.9

4.9

FUe 3 Detalls

0.5

8.8

8.8

8.8

3.6

FUe 4 Report.

0.7

14.5

38.6
4:200.114

UDlt of mea.we

240.0

240.0

1200.0
1200.0

14.5

1200.00

14.5

1200.00

1200.0

5.$1

158.0

1200.0

200.5

(character)
Std, routine.

100

1,500

1,500

1,500

1,500

75

75

75

75

75

3 (Block. 1 to 23)

600

900

900

900

900

6 (Block. 24 to 48)

4,500

4,500

4,500

4,500

4,500

600

2,440

2,440

2,440

2,440

108

108

108

108

9,523

9,523

9,523

Plzed

Standard
Problem A
Space

PUes
Worklng
:

4/63

C.P.
1.2

a2 K

Total

4

3.8
C.P.
0.9

4:200.1132

Total

5,875

9,523

4:200.1151

I

402:201.100

IBM 1410
System Performance

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

201.

.113 Timing Basis:

.1

GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING

.11

Standard File Problem A Estimates

.111 Record Sizes
Master File: •
Detail File:
Report File:
.112 Computation:

. using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113 .
. • 114 Graph: • . . . • . . . see graph below.
.115 Storage Space Required
5, 900 characters.
Configuration 1: •
9, 500 characters.
Configuration II: . •
12 ,000 characters.
Configuration Ill:. .
12,000 characters.
Configuration IV: • .
Configuration VIIB: . . 12,000 characters.

108 characters.
1 card.
1 Line.
standard.

1,000
7

4

2

I"

100
7

4

Time in Minutes
to Process 10, 000
Master File
Records

2

~

10
7

-7

7

4

..--?'

II
~

2

~

/

~~

~

IV

JA

--- ---

-

7

4
2

0.1
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised 4/63

.402:201.120

§

IBM 1410

201.

.12

.122 Computation: •
• 123 Timing Basis: •

Standard File Problem B Estimates

.121 Record Sizes
Master File: .
Detail File: •
Report File: .

• 124 Graph:

•.••

• 54 characters.
.1 card.
.lline.

· standard.
• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide;
4:200.12.
· see graph below •

1,000
7

4

2

100
7
I

4

Time in Minutes
to Process 10,000
Master File
10
Records

2

7
./

./

4

2

--

./

V
~
7u,~
!-oIl

VIla

~

---

-

7

4
2

0.1

0.0

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

4/63 Revised

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

402:201.130

§201.
.13

.132 Computation: .
.133 Timing Basis: .

Standard File Problem C Estimates

. 131 Record Sizes
Master File: .
Detail File:
Report F He: .

. 134 Graph:

• standard.
• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13 •
• • • . • • . • . see graph below •

. 216 characters.
.1 card.
.1line.

1,000
7

4

2

ICD

100
7

4
2

Time in Minutes
to Process 10, 000
Master File
Records

~

10
~

7

./

II

4

./

.-'

2

III

1/

~
~
~

-

~

7

4

2

0.1

0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

© 1963

by Auerbach Carporation ond BNA Incorporated

Revised 4/63

402:201.140

§

IBM 1410
.142 Computation: •
.143 Timing Basis: •

201.

.14

Standard File Problem D Estimates
• 144 Graph:

.141 Record Sizes
Master File: •
Detail File: •
Report File: .

••••

· trebled.
• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide.
4:200.14.
• see graph below .

• 108 characters.
.1 card.
. 1 line.

1,000
7

4

2
I"

100
7

4
Time in Minutes
to Process 10, 000
Master File
Records

2

~

10
7

4
2

-ltJ7

~

~

11.-.. "." -/

~

-

..,.....--

----

/,VIIB

"/7 -IV

1
7

4
2

0.1
0.0

0.1

6.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

4/63 Revised

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
'§

402:201.200

201.

.212 Key Size: •••
. 213 Timing Basis: •
.214 Graph:

.2

SORTING

. 21

Standard Problem

.211 R.ecord size:

8 characters •
. as in 4:200.213 .
. see graph below .

•. , . . . 80 characters

1,000

7
4

lJli

2

V

1I

100

7

,

/

/

4
Time in Minutes
to Put Records
Into Required
Order

7

2

1I

10

7

/ /

VI

~V

:1"'11

IV

7

17

/

V

2

7

/

/

17 I",,'"

/

~I

V 1I

~

17

I
I

,

/

4

2

II

~

4

/

[7

0.1

v:

~

~V II

1/

2

I;"

4

2

7

4

7

1,000

100

2
10,000

4

7

100,000

Number of Records

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised 4/63

402:201.220

§

IBM 1410

201.

.22

• 222 Key Size: • .
• 223 Timing Basis:

8 characters •
mM Publication C28-0293
Timing For
SORT/MERGE 12 •
see graph below.

SORT/MERGE 12 Times

• 221 Record Size: . • • . • 80 characters.

.224 Graph:. • • .

1,000

7
4

2
100

7
'f

Time in Minutes
to put Records
into Required Order

4

~ ~ ~~

1/ ~ ~
VI
Ih~ IV
tIl, V-

2

A

10

VIla

/

"

7

.,. i.IIII"
~

4

IV
~

2

I~

III, V

~

~

~~

1001-

VI vIla

7
4

2
0.1

2
100

4

7

2

4

7

Number of Records

4/63

2
10,000

1,000

I AUERBACH I ~

4

7
100,000

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

402:201.300

201.

.3

MATRIX INVERSION

. 31

Standard Problem

.311 Basic Parameters:

.312 Timing Basis: • • . . . as in 4:200.312, using
floating point subroutines •
.313 Graph: • • . • • . . . see graph below •
• 314 Maximum Matrix Size . 80 by 80 .
. general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8 decimal
digits.

100

7
4

~

J

2

II

10

7

I

I

II

4
Time in
Minutes
for Complete
Inversion

I

2

V
I

7

I

I

I

4

I

II

2
0.1

7
I

4

J

2

I
J

0.01

2

4

7

2

4

7

2
100

10

4

7
1,000

Size of Matrix

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised

4/63

402:211.101

IBM 1410
Physica I Characteri sti cs

IBM 1410
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised 5/63

402:211.102

IBM 1410
IBM 1410 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Unit Name

Processing Unit

Processing Unit

Processing Unit

Processing Unit

InputOutput
Synchronizer

InputOutput
Synchronizer

InputOutput
Synchronlzer

InputOutput
Synchronlzer

InputOutput
Synchronlzer

1411
Models
1,2,3

1411
Models
A1,A2,A3

1411
Models
A4&AS

1411
Models
4,5

1414
Models
1,2&7

1414
Model 3

1414
Model 4

1414
ModelS

1414
Model 8

70X38x32

70x74X32

70X74X32

70X38X32

IDENTITY

Model Number

Height XWidth XDepth, in.

Weight, lbs.

70X146x32 70x182X32 70X218X32 70X182X32 70X38X32

2,600

3,000

3,700

3,300

500

500

1,000

1,100

750

To Processing Unit

---

-------

40-50

40-50

40-50

50

50

14
40-50
(1414)

-------

---

To Power Receptacle

14
40-50
(1414)

---

-----

-----

50-110

50- 110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50 -110

50- 110

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

Temperature, of.

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

Humidity, '7.

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

16,700

17,100

21,900

21,500

1,400

2,120

5,000

4,050

6,050

2,000

2,500

3,000

2,000

500

500

1,000

500

1,000

Yes

Yes

---

---

---

---

Yes

Yes

Power
from
1411

Power
from
1411

Power
from
1411

Power
from
1411

Power
from
1411

60

60

3 phase,
4 line

3 phase,
4 line

1.2

1.9

PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths, ft.

To Designated Unit

Temperature, o'F.

---

Storage
Ranges
Humidity, '7.

ATMOSPHERE

Working
Ranges

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Air Flow, cfm.

Intemal Filters

Nominal

---

208 or 230 208 or 230 208 or 230 208 or 230

Voltage

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

Nominal

60

60

60

60

Tolerance

±y,

±>;,

±>;'

±>;,

3 phase,
4 line

3 phase,
4 line

3 phase,
4 Une

3 phase,
4 line

6.1

6.6

7.5

7.0

Tolerance

ELECTRICAL

Cycles

Phases and Lines

Load KVA

NOTES

5/63 Revised

For I/O
Adapter
1412/
14199,
7750 attachment

On channel 2, on
1440-1448

0_5

0.8

1.8

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

402:211.103
IBM 1410 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Contd.)

Unit Name

Card
ReadPunch

Card
Reader

Printer

Console

IDENTITY

Model Number

Height x Width X Depth, in.

Weight, lbs.

Disk
Storage
Unit

Disk
Storage
Unit

Disk
Storage
Unit

Disk
Storage
Unit

Disk
Storage
Unit

1402
Model 2

1442
Mode13

1403
Models
I, 2

1415

1405
Models
I, 2

1301
Modell

1301
Mode12

1311
Mode12

1311
ModelS

45X5SX30

49x43X24

53X4SX29

29X70X44

70X61x31

69X33XS6

69x33x86

38x30X24

38x43x24

1,400

450

2,115

3,625

3,825

390

750

300

650

Magnetic
Tape
Unit

729
Models
lI,IV,V,VI

Magnetic
Tape
Unit

7330

69x29x 34

58x29x31

1,160

640

Paper
Tape
Reader

1011

Data
Transmission

Unit

1009

Magnetic Magnetic
CharCharacter
acter
Reader
Reader

1412

x 112
60X32x37 40X29x31 61x41

1419

Remote
Inquiry
Unit

1014

Compressor

Part of
1405

Accumu.
lator
Unit

Accessory to
1419

61 x 112 35x29x24 29x40X33 39x17x21
x42

Disk
Control
Unit-

1405

Switch
Control
Console

File
Contra I

Pro·
grammed
Transmission

Control

Tele.
graph
Converter

Base

3326

7155

In first
1405
DSU

12x9x7

10

500

2,700

400

50 - 110

50 - 11 0

50 - 11 0

50 - 110

50 - 110

530

500

2,400

2,600

175

700

100

?

---

---

To 141125'
To Accumulator5'

25

---

---

14

-----

---

10

---

14

---

---

125
(1405)

5 (1412)

---

7631

7750

7S90

70 x3SX32 70XSlX31 70x36x31

PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths, ft.
To Processing Unit
To Power Receptacle
To Designated Unit

Temperature, of.

---

-----

25 (1414)

50

50

40

100

100

---

-----

---

25 (1414)

-----

40 (compressor &
other
1405's)

Maximum
total1engtl
of a power
leg* is
100 ft.

---

Maximum
total1engtl
of a power
14
leg. is
80 ft.
80 (1414)

15
From
1414-60

50-110

50- 110

50 -110

50-110

50 - 110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50 -110

50-110

50 -110

50 - 110

50-110

65-80

50- 110

50 - 110

O-SO

O-SO

O-SO

O-SO

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

O-SO

O-SO

20-65

0-80

O-SO

20- 65

O-SO

o-so

O-SO

O-SO

0- SO

Temperature, OF.

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

60-90

65

-so

65-S0

60-90

60-90

65 -80

60-90

60- 90

60-90

60- 90

60-90

Humidity, '70

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-S0

20-80

20-80

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

20 - 65

20- 65

20 -80

20-80

20 -65

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

20 -SO

20 -80

4,400

3,000

3,000

490

3,240

16,700

20,000

2,000

4,000

3,900

3,415

4,100

1,000

6,300

S,500

500

10,800

0

7,240

---

4,800

26,000

310

0

300

?

?

---

---

Storage
Ranges

Humidity, '7.

ATMOS-

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Air Flow, cfm.

290

Internal F 11 ters

---

Yes

---

---

Power
from
1411

208 Or 230

Power
from
1411

Power
from
1411

Nominal

---

208 or 230 208 or 230

Yes

20S or 230 20S Or 230

550

150

150

120

320

320

?

300

0

500

Yes

---

---

---

---

Yes

---

---

---

---

---

208 or 230

208 or230

Power
from
1411

OS or 230

115

Power
from
1405

Power

115

Power
from
1405

Voltage
Tolerance

Nominal
TRICAL

60

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

60

60

60

±'h

±y,

±V,

60

60

+10'7., -S'7.

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

60

60

60

±'h

±'h

±V,

208 or 230 20S Or 230

60

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

60

60

±'h

±'h

from

1412

Yes

Yes

*

Yes

See 7750

Yes

20S Or 230 20S or 230 208 or 230 208 or 230

60

60

60

60

3 phase,
4 line

1 phase,
3 line

3 phase,
4 line

1 phase

---

2.7

10.8

Cycles
Tolerance

Phases and Lines

Load KVA

3 phase,
4 lines

1 phase

1.6

0.9

Card input only
NOTES

-so

Working
Ranges

PHERE

ELEC-

65

1.0

4.4

3 phase,
4 lines

7.5

~ r1:t~~e,

1 phase

9.0

0.75

With Disk
Storage
Control

1 phase

1.4

~ fi~~~e,
1.6

1.1

1.S

*Power cable plus
successive tape-totape power cables

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

~ fi~~~e,

1 phase

0.3

2.7

When 141
used with
1410 systemworkingranges
of 1412
apply

1 phase, 1 phase,
3 lines
3 lines

3.3

0.2

4.0

0

0.3

Add 0.6
KVA for
each additional
access
arm

*27,000
with
Telegraph
Converter Base

Revised 5/63

402:221. 101
IBM 1410
Price Data

PRICE DATA
§

221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS

No.

CENTRAL
PROCESSOR

1411

Name

PRICES
Monthly
Maintenance Purchase
$
$

Processing Unit

Modell
Model 2
Model 3
Model 4
Model 5

10,000
20,000
40,000
60,000
80,000
~

Model
Model
Model
Model
Model

Monthly
Rental
$

Al
A2
A3
A4
A5

4660

core
core
core
core
core

storage
storage
storage
storage
storage

positions
positions
positions
positions
positions

3,800
4,550
5,400
7,250
8,100

66.50
70.75
75.25
117.00
122.00

189,400
223,000
262,000
380,000
419,000

3,960
4,710
5,560
8,260

66.50
70.75
75.25
117.00
122.00

197,400
231,000
270,000
388,000
427,000

160

4.00

5,600

350
200
125
20

6.00
5.25
2.75
1.75

17,500
8,375
5,375
675

2,165
3,565

139.75
239.75

119,100
189,100

25

1.00

1,250

1,000
375

77.00
29.00

46,500
17,000

For an I/O Adapter (#4660) on chalUle1 2,
1412/1419s, 7750 or 1440-1448 attachment.
10,000
20,000
40,000
60,000
80,000

core
core
core
core
core

storage
storage
storage
storage
storage

positions
positions
positions
positions
positions

I/O Adaptor

7~41O

Optional Equipment
1007
5730
5620
5621

Accelerator
Processing Overlap 1/
Priority Feature 2/ Priority Feature -=- Extension (5620 Required)
Core Storage: Refer to 1411 Processing Unit

STORAGE
1301
Modell
Model 2

.Y

Disk Storage

28,000,000 characters
56.000,000 characters
Optional Feature
Cylinder Mode

1311
Model 5
Model 2

Disk Storage
First on chalUlel
Additional on chalUlel

3341

Disk Storage Drive Adapter for chalUlel 1

120

2.00

3,000

3342

Disk Storage Drive Adapter for chalUlel 2

120

2.00

3,000

35
30
30
40
40

.50
1.75
.50

1,680
600
600
1,950
1,920

995
1,545

90.00
98.00

37,350
49,850

Optional Equipment
6396
6397
6398
6400
8011
1405
Modell
M:odel2

Scan Disk (model 5 only - #6397 or 6398
required)
Scan Feature for chalUlel 1
Scan Feature for chalUlel 2
Seek Overlap (model 5 and each model 2)
Track Record (model 5 only)
Disk Storage

y

10,000,000 characters
20,000,000 characters

CD 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised

4/63

402:221.102
§

IBM 1410

221.

PRICE DATA (Contd.)
IDENTITY OF UNIT

CLASS

Name

No.

PRICES
Monthly
Maintenance Purchase
$
$

Optional Equipment

STORAGE
(CONTD.)
1008
1009
CONTROLLERS

Monthly
Rental
$

1414
Modell
Model 2
Model 3
Model 4
Model 5
Model 7
Model 8

40
400
425

. 1.25
64.00
64.00

1,725
14,750
15,500

1,030
555
700
800
725
1,180
1,175

15.50
16.75
17.50
20.50
12.25
16.25
22.75

45,650
27,050
31,500
41,025
36,825
51,650
59,625

175

2.00

8,750

400

44.25

13,950

15

1.00

600

File Control (for 1301)
835
This system only
This system and 7000 system (not 7010 or 7072) 1,035
1,035
This system and a 7010 or other 1410

30.00
35.00
35.00

42,000
52,000
52,000

325

8.25

13,000

35
55
80
100

5.50
11.00
16.50
22.00

1,775
2,675
3,875
4,775

45

0

2,250

640

70.00

33,825

65

28.25

4,125

350

23.25

19,350

50

.75

2,750

1,275

185.50

55,650

1,385

201.25

59,200

Priority Feature
Additional Access Arm (Max. 2) Modell
Additional Access Arm (Max. 2) Model 2
Input/Output Synchronizer
Controls 729 magnetic tape unit 6/
Controls 7330 magnetic tape unit-6/
Controls card I/O only 7/
Controls card and "Teleprocessing" I/O
Controls "Teleprocessing" I/O only 7/
Controls up to 10 729's
For 1403 only

?J

Optional Equipment
6025

Read, Punch Column Binary (on model 4 only)
Disk Stora~e Control
(on first 1405 on each channel)

7576
7631
Modell
Mode13
Mode15
3470

Dual Synchronizer Adapter 1/

7155,

Switch Control Console

Modell
Model 2
Model 3
Model 4
7814

1402

INPUTOUTPUT

Successive Disk Storage

For
For
For
For

up
up
up
up

to
to
to
to

2
4
6
8

tape units
tape units
tape units
tape units

Tape Intermix (on 1414 model 1 only, to
intermix 729 il's, 729 IV's and 7330's in
any combination).
Card Read Punch (includes Adapter - 4659)
Optional Equipment

4150 &
1013
1442
Model 3
4661
1403
Modell
Model 2
Model 3

4/63

Revised

51-Column Read (IF)
Card Reader (card input only)
Input/Output Adapter (for 1414 modelS or 8)
Printer
-100 print positions (includes Synchronizer
Storage #7680)
132 print positions (includes Synchronizer
Storage - #7680 and 7681)
132 print positions (includes Synchronizer
Storage - #7680 and 7681)

2,010

95,200

402:221.103

PRICE DATA

§

PRICE DATA (Contd.)

221.

IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
INPUTOUTPUT
(CONID.)

Monthly
Rental
$

Name

No.

PRICES
Monthly
Maintenance Purchase
$
$

Optional Equipment
4740
5380 &
5381
1415
1412
Modell
4900
4902
4903

Interchangeable Chain (IC)
Numerical Print
Console
Magnetic Character Reader
Magnetic Character Reader Adapters
for channel 1 (not with 4902)
for channel 2 (not with 4900)
second adapter (4900 or 4902 required)

75

0

3,125

275

8.75

11,050

250

10.25

13,600

2,000

183.00

91,400

215
215
115

18.50
18.50
10.06

8,875
8,875
4,750

15
250

2.25
19.00

600
9,750

50
40
65

2.00
1.75
2.75

2,250
1,950
3,000

700
900
750
950
450

116.00
128.00
122.00
134.00
52.25

36,000
41,250
37,200
42,450
22,000

700
600
400
500

15.00
44.00
18.25
11.00

37,400
26,150
22,500
30,500

110
125

3.25
3.25

6,750
7,750

90

6.25

4,125

6.50

4,400

Optional Equipment
2385
3610
5215
7061
7062

Document Counter (DC)
Electronic Accumulation (EA) (#5215 required)
Multiple Column Select (MCS)
Self Checking Numbers:
Modulus 10 (M-I0)
Modulus 11 (M-11)

729I1
729IV
729V
729VI
7330

Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic

Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape

Unit
Unit
Unit
Uriit
Unit

1009
1011
1014
7864

Data Transmission Unit
Paper Tape Reader 5/
Remote Inquiry Unit -5/
Telegraph I/O Feature

y

Additional Telegraph Features
7871
7875
5737

Telegraph Input Feature
Telegraph Output Feature (Both require #7864)
Program Addressable Clock

'if

Optional Equipment
7830

Tape Switching Feature (on 729's)

85

3585
or
3586

800 CPI Feature (to operate 729 V's or
VI's at 800 CPI density)

35

1,575

7,150
7,950
9,550

440,000
490,000
590,000

7750
Modell
Mode12
Mode13
1067
1068

Programmed Transmission Control

Control Adapters
for channel 1
for channel 2
on 1411 (models AI-AS only)

325
325

4.00
4.00

9,000
9,000

1/ Required for two-channel operation.

2/ Required when using 1405 Disk Storage.
3/ Prices include required Disk Storage Adapter on 1411 (#3301 or #3302 for 1301 and #3310 or 3311 for 1405)

"4/ Maintenance prices apply only to purchased equipment and are based upon a sliding scale; those listed here
are for the first 3 years after installation.
(continued)
V

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised

4/63

402:221.104
§

221.

IBM 1410

PRICE DATA (Contd.)

5/ Price includes Adapter on 1411 (#3238 for 1009', #5514 for 1011, #6136 for 1014, #5738 for 5737).

6/ Price includes Tape I/O Adapter (#7823 for channel 1 and #7824 for channel 2).

!/

4/63

Price includes I/O Adapter #4659.

Revised

AUERBACH / Rf\JA

,"

IBM 7070
International Business Machines Corp.

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

\

'-

IBM 7070
International Business Machines Corp.

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

403:001.001
•

STANOARO

EDP
•

IBM 7070

REPORTS

Contents

CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.

4.

5.
6.
7.

8.

9.

10.

11.
12.

Introduction:.
Data Structure: . •
System Configuration
III
6-Tape Business System:.
V
6-Tape Auxiliary Storage System:.
VI
6-Tape Business/Scientific System:
VII B
lO-Tape General System (paired):.
VIII B
20-Tape General System (Paired):.
Internal Stora~
7301
Core Storage: ••
•
7602
Core Storage Control:
7300
Disk Storage Unit: •
7605
Disk Storage Control:
1301
Disk Storage Unit: •
7631
File Control:
7907
Data Channel: .
Central Processor
7601
Arithmetic and Program Control:
Console
7150
Console: • .
Input-Output; Punched Tape and Card
7500
Card Reader:
7600
Input-Output Control:.
7603
Input-Output Synchronizer:
7550
Card Punch: .
•
Input-Output Control: .
7600
7603
Input-Output Synchronizer:
7501
Console Card Reader:
7600
Input-Output Control: .
Input-Output; Printers
7400
Printer:.
7600
Input-Output Control:.
7603
Input-Output Synchronizer:
7150
Console Typewriter: .
7600
Input-Output Control:.
Input-Output; Magnetic Tape
729
Magnetic Tape Unit:
Tape Control: •
7604
Input-Output; Other
7900
Inquiry Station:
Inquiry Control Synchronizer: •
4671
1414
Input-Output Synchronizer: •
7907
Data Channel:. • • • •
1009
Data Transmission Unit:
1011
Paper Tape Reader: •
1014
Remote Inquiry Unit:. •
7864
Telegraph Input-Output:
S1m ultaneous Operations:
Instruction List: • •
••••

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

403:011
403:021

A03:031. 101
403:031. 102
403:031. 103
403:031. 104
403:031. 106
403:041
403:041.4
403:042
403:042.4
403:043
403:043.4
403:043.4
403:051
403:061
403:071
403:071. 4
403:071. 4
403:072
403:072.4
403:072.4
403:073
403:073.4
403:081
403:081.4
403:081.4
403:082
403:082.4
403:091
403:091. 4
403:101
403:101.4
403:102
403:102.12
403:102.121
403:102.122
403:102.123
403:102.124
403:111
403:121
5/63

403:001.002

IBM 7070
CONTENTS (Contd.)

13.

Coding Specimens
Autocoder:
COBOL: •.
FORTRAN:

14.

15.

16.

17.
18.

19.
20.

21.
22.

5/63

403:131
403:132
403:133

Data Codes
Internal Numeric: •
Internal Alphameric: ••
Punched Cards:
Magnetic Tape: • • •
Problem Oriented Facilities
Simulation of mM 650:
Simulation of mM 704/709/7090: .
Sort 90:. • • . • • • . • .
Merge 91: . • . • . • . • .
Hypertape Sorting Program: •
Report Program Generator: .
Tape File Generator: •
Tape Print Program: • .
Spool System: • . . . .
Storage Print Program: •
Procedure for Automatic Testing (PAT):
Process Oriented Languages
COBOL 61:
FORTRAN:
Machine Oriented Languages
Autocoder:
Program Translators
Autocoder:
Four-Tape Autocoder:
Basic Autocoder:. •
COBOL 61: . . •
FORTRAN: • • •
Basic FORTRAN:
Operating Environment; PEST: • • . • •
System Performance
Worksheet Data: .
Generalized File Processing:
Sorting: • • • • • • . . . •
Matrix Inversion: • • • • •
Generalized Mathematical Processing:
Generalized Statistical Processing:
Physical Characteristics:
Price Data:. • • . . . • • . . . . . . • • • . . . . .

.. .

403:141
403:142
403:143
403:144
403:151. 11
403:151. 12
403:151. 13
403:151. 13
403:151.13
403:151.14
403:151. 15
403:151. 15
403:151. 15
403:151.17
403:151. 17
403:161
403:162
403:171
403:181
403:182
403:183
403:184
403:185
403:186
403:191
403:201. 011
403:201.1
403:201. 2
403:201. 3
403:201. 4
403:201.5
403:211
403:221

403:011.100
IBM 7070
Introduction

INTRODUCTION
The solid-state IBM 7070 is most effective as a tape oriented data processing system
for high volume business applications.
Core storage may consist of 5, 000 or 9,990 word locations, and each location can
hold one single-address instruction, five alphameric characters, or a data word of ten decimal digits plus sign. The core storage cycle time is six microseconds.
The instruction repertoire is versatile and effective; the only significant omission is
the lack of automatic editing facilities. Three accumulators are provided, and many of the
instructions can refer to anyone of the three. Ninety-nine core storage locations can be
used as index registers. Floating point arithmetic is optional. While the 7070 is basically
a fixed word-length system, operand sizes for most internal operations can vary from one
to ten digits, and several short fields of like sign can readily be packed into a single core
storage location.
A major feature of the 7070 is its ability to transfer several blocks of data to or from
different core storage areas in a single operation. This scatter-read and gather-write capability facilitates internal data transfers as well as transfers between core storage and magnetic tape, disc storage, or unit record devices.
Automatic interruption facilitates effective use of the system's capabilities for simultaneous operations. Execution of a priority routine can be initiated automatically whenever an operation is completed by a selected peripheral unit or a manual inquiry request is
made.
Overall internal speeds of the 7070 are significantly lower than those of other systems in the same price range. Full-word internal transfers are parallel by word, but transfers of fields less than ten digits in length and all arithmetic operations are performed serially by digit. A 7070 system can, at a rental increase of at least $5,000 per month, be converted to an IBM 7074. The 7074 offers greatly increased internal speeds, up to 30,000
words of core storage, and faster magnetic tape drives, while maintaining program compatibility with the 7070.
The liM 729 series of magnetic tape units is used in 7070 systems. Peak transfer
rates can range from 15,000 to 90,000 characters per second. Up to ten tape units can be
connected to each of a maximum of four channels, and up to four tape read/write operations
can occur simultaneously with internal processing.
Two different types of magnetic disc storage may be used; the maximum total capacity is 278 million characters. When the faster and more flexible 1301 Disk Storage Units
are used, the maximum number of magnetiC tape channels is reduced to two.

\

A line of unit record devices, including a 500 card-per-minute reader, a 250 cardper-minute punch, and alSO line-per-minute printer, is offered for the 7070 on an "as
available" basis. A maximum of three readers and three output devices (printers and/or
punches) can be connected. The 7070 has been found to be most effective in tape oriented
configurations, and most installations utilize IBM 1401 systems for off-line card-to-tape,
tape-to-card, and tape-to-printer operations. As a result, the on-line reader, punch, and
printer are no longer in production. A console card reader, rated at 60 cards per minute,
is useful in tape systems for direct card input on an exception basis.
Paper tape readers, remote inquiry stations, data transmission terminals, and telegraph transmitters and receivers can be connected to the system through the 1414 Input/Output Synchronizer and the 7907 Data Channel.

© )962

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

IBM 7070

403:011.101

INTRODUCTION - Contd.
Autocoder is the basic machine oriented coding system for the 7070. It is offered in
three versions for different translating computer configurations. The full, six-tape version
includes powerful macro generation and input-output control facilities.
A FORTRAN II processor is available, and a COBOL 61 processor was delivered in
March, 1962. A "compiler systems tape" combines the Autocoder, COBOL, and FORTRAN
processors and a Report Program Generator. The manufacturer also offers generalized
sort and merge routines, program testing aids, and various utility routines. A wide variety
of user-developed routines is available through GUIDE, the 7070 users' organization.

/
/

/'

6/62

403:021.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7070 / 7072 / 7074

REPORTS

Data Structure

DATA STRUCTURE

§

021.

.1

INFORMATION FORMATS
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of Location
Word:
Digit:

Character:
Band:
Band:

Size

Purpose or use

10 digits
plus sign
5 bits

data or instruction; basic
storage location.
holds 1 decimal digit;
addressable by field
definition.
6 bits plus
magnetic tape and 1301
parity
Disk Storage Unit,
2,780 char- 1301 DSU.
acters max,
60 words
7300 DSU.

©

Type of Information

Representation

Numeral:

· digit (internal) or character (tape).
· 2 digits (internal) or 1
character (tape).
· 1 word; 1 to 10 digits by
field definition.
· 1 to 9,990 words, defined
by record definition word
or record mark.
.1 word.

Letter: .
Number:
Block:
Instruction:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and DNA Incorporated

6/62

403:031.101
•

STANDARD

II

IBM 7070
System Configuration

REPORTS
ED
P

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

031.

III.

6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM
Deviations from Standard Configuration:

printer slower by 350 lines/min.

Rental:

$19,400 per month.

Core Storage: 5, 000 words.
Core Storage Control.

Arithmetic & Program Control.

Input/Output Control, Model 1.
Console.

Input/Output Synchronizer, Model 3.
Card Reader: 500 cards/min.
Card Punch: 250 cards/min.
Printer: 150 lines/min.

Tape Control, one channel.
Magnetic Tape Units (6): 15,000 or
41,667 char/sec.
Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

©

none.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

IBM 7070

403:031.102
§

031.

V.

6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM
Deviations from Standard Configuration:
Rental:

...............

. printer slower by 350 lines/min.
• $24,785 per month.

Disc Storage: 1301 Modell; 27,800,000
characters max.

File Control.

Data Channel, Modell.

Core Storage: 5,000 words.
Core Storage Control.

Arithmetic & Program Control.

Input/Output Control, Modell.
Console.

Input/Output Synchronizer, Model 3.
Card Reader: 500 cards/min.
Card Punch: 250 cards/min.
Printer: 150 lines/min.
Tape Control, one channel.
Magnetic Tape Units (6): IS, 000 or 41, 667
char/sec.
Optional Features Included: . • . • . . . . • . . • . • • . . .

6/62

Cylinder Mode (Disc Storage).

403:031.103

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

031.

VI.

6-T APE BUSINESS/SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM
Deviations from Standard Configuration:
Rental:

• • • • • . • . . . core storage smaller by 4,400 words; printer
slower by 350 lines/min.
$23,450 per month.
Core Storage: 9,990 words.
Core Storage Control.

Arithmetic & Program Control.

Input/Output Control, Model 1.
Console.

Input/Output Synchronizer, Model 3.
Card Reader: 500 cards/min.
Card Punch: 250 cards/min.
Printer: 150 lines/min.

Tape Control, one channel.
Magnetic Tape Units (6): 15,000 or 41, 667
char/sec.
Optional Features Included: . • • • • • • • • •

©

Floating Decimal Arithmetic.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

403:031.104

IBM 7070

§031.
VII. B

lO-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED)
Deviations from Standard Configuration
core storage smaller by 4, 400 words.
none.

On-line equipment:
Off-line equipment:
Rental

$23, 650 per month.

On-line equipment:
Off-line equipment:
Total: . • • • • .

$ 6,105 per month.
$29,755 per month.

On- Line Equipment:

Core Storage: 9,990 words.
Core Storage Control.

Arithmetic & Program Control.

Input/Output Control, Model 2.
Console.
Console Card Reader: 60 cards/min.

Magnetic Tape Units (4): 22,500 or. 62, 500
char/sec.
Tape Control, two channels.

Magnetic Tape Units (4): 22,500 or 62,500
char/sec.

,

6/62

!IJ

1"-A-U-ER-BA-CH--'-/

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§

403:031.105

031.
Off- Line Equipment (roM 1401):

Core Storage: 4,000 positions.

Processing Unit: 1401 Model C3.

Card Read- Punch
Reads:
800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

Printer: 600 lines/min.

Magnetic Tape Units (2): 15,000 or.41, 667
char/sec.

Optional Features Included
On~ line

eqUipment:

Floating Decimal Arithmetic.

Off-line equipment:

High-Law-Equal Compare.
Advanced Programming.
Read Punch Release.
Sense Switches.
Print Storage.
Compressed Tape.
Early Card Read.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporotion and BNA incorporated

6/62

403:031.106
§

IBM 7070

031.

VIII. B

20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED)
Deviations from Standard Configuration
On-line equipment: .
Off-line equipment:

core storage smaller by 18, 800 words.
magnetic tape slower by 30,000 char/sec.
none.

Rental

On-line equipment:
Off-line equipment:
Total: • • • • • .
,On- Line Equipment

$35,850 per month.
$ 9,180 per month.
$45,030 per month.

Core Storage: 9,990 words.
Core Storage Control.

Arithmetic & Program Control.

Input/Output Control, Model 2.
Console.
Console Card Reader: 60 cards/min.
Magnetic Tape Units (4): 22,500, 62,500
or 90,000 char/sec.
Tape Control, two channels.

Magnetic Tape Units (4): 22,500, 62,500
or 90,000 char/sec.
Magnetic Tape Units (4): 22,500, 62, 500
or 90,000 char/sec.
Tape Control, two channels.

Magnetic Tape Units (4): 22,500, 62,500
or 90,000 char/sec.

6/62

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

403:031.107

031.
Off- Line Equipment (mM 1401):

Core Storage: 8,000 positions.

Processing Unit: 1401 Model C4.

Card Read- Punch
800 cards/min.
Reads:
Punches: 250 cards/min.

Printer: 600 lines/min.

Magnetic Tape Units (4): 22,500 or
62,500 char/sec.
Optional Features Included
On-line equipment: .

Floating Decimal Arithmetic.

Off-line equipment:

High-Low-Equal Compare.
Advanced Programming.
Read Punch Release.
Sense Switches.
Compressed Tape.
Print Storage.
Processing Overlap.
Early Card Read.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

403:041.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
_

II"L.....

IBM 7070

R[PORTS

_

Internal Storage
Core Storage

INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE

§

.24

041

Recording Permanence

.241 Data erasable by instructions: . . . . . .
yes
.242 Data regenerated
constantly:
no.
no.
.243 Data volatile: . . .
no .
. 244 Data permanent:.
no .
.245 Storage changeable:

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

. Core Storage.
7301, Models 1 and 2.
CS.

.12

Basic Use:

. working storage .

. 13

Description:

.28

A 7070 system can contain 5,000 or 9,990 word locations of core storage. Each location can hold one
numeric word consisting of ten decimal digits and
sign, one alphameric word consisting of five characters, or one single-address instruction. "Each
digit is represented by a two-out-of-five-bit code
combination, and validity checks insure that each
digit transferred to or from storage contains exactly two bits. Two successive digit positions are required for each alphameric character. Core storage
cycle time is six microseconds, and all transfers
are parallel by word.

. 281 Recording method: .
. 283 Type of access: . . .

The 7070's scatter-read and gather-write capabilities make it possible to distribute a block of data in
core storage into a number of smaller blocks or to
assemble several blocks into one larger block. individual digits or fields within a word can be addressed through the 7070' s field definition feature.
. 14

Availability:

12 to 15 months (**).

. 15

First Delivery:

March, 1960.

.16

Reserved Storage
Purpose
Index registers:
Arith registers:
Logic registers:
I -0 control (including
DSU):
Table look-up:
Electronic switches:

.29

Access Techniques

Potential Transfer Rates

.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data: . .
· word.
Conversion factor:
53 bits/word.
166,667 cycles/sec.
Cycling rate: . . .
166,667 words/sec.
Data rate: . . . . .
166,667 words/sec.
Compound data rate:
.3

DATA CAPACITY

.31

Module and System Sizes

Identity:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Modules:
.32

Number of
locations

Locks

99

none.

Minimum
Storage

Maximum
Storage

Modell
5,000
50, 000 numeric
25, 000 alphabetic
5,000
1

Model 2 .
9,990.
99, 900 numeric .
49, 950 alphabetic.
9,990.
1.

Rules for Combining
Modules:
..

.

..

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

Note: All locations can also be used as working
storage.

.42

Connection to System

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.421 On-Line:
.422 Off-Line:

. 21

Storage Medium:

magnetic core.

.23

Storage Phenomenon:

direction of magnetization.

O.
O.
144
1
3

©

· coincident current .
· uniform.

· Core Storage Control.
7602.
Model 1,2,3,4, or 5, depending upon number of
tape channels.

none.
none.
none.

.43

one only, Modell or Model
2.

. . . . . . · one .
. . . . . · none .

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: . 1.
.432 Restrictions:
· none .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

..

6/62

IBM 7070

403 :041.500

§

041.

.72

.5

ACCESS TIMING

.51

Arrangement of Heads:. 1 access device.

. 52

Simultaneous Operations: . . • . . . . . . none.

.6

.8
'l

6J.1 sec.
1 word.

CHANGEABLE
STORAGE:
. . . . . No.

.7

AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

.71

Data Transfer
With self: . . • . . . . . yes.

6/62

Effective Transfer Rate
With self: . . . . . . . . 41,700 words/sec .

Access Time Parameters and Variations

. 531 For uniform access
Access time: . .
Cycle time: • . .
For data unit of:

1 digit to several blocks;
length and number of
blocks are limited only
by the capacity of core
storage.

With self: . . . . • .

.73
.53

Transfer Load Size

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Interlock

Action

Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Conflicting comma ods:
Recovery of data:
Recording of data:
field overflo~:

check
validity check
none.
check
validity check
none •
check

stop & alarm •
stop & alarm.

Sign change·:

check

Error

stop & alarm.
stop & a1arm.
alarm & indicator:
optional stop.
alarm & indicator:
optional stop.

• When storing field -defined portion of a word.

403:042.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7070/7074

REPORTS

Internal Storage

7300 DSU
INTERNAL STORAGE: 7300 DISK STORAGE UNIT

§

042.

.16

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

. . . . . . . Disk Storage Unit.
7300 Models 1 and 2.
"RAMAC".
DSU.

. 12

Basic Use: .

.13

Description

Reserved Storage
Purpose
Number of locations Locks
Band addresses: 48 positions/band non-addressable.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

. 21

Storage Medium: .

. 22

Physical Dimensions

. multiple magnetic discs.

auxiliary storage .

This store, often referred to as a RAMAC unit,
consists of 50 thin magnetic discs on a common
vertical shaft. Each disc has 100 bands per'surface
on Modell and 200 bands per surface on Model 2.
Each band holds a single block of 60 ten-digit 7070
words recorded in the internal two-out-of-five bit
code. Total unit capacity is 600,000 words for Model 1 and 1,200, 000 words for Model 2. Up to four
units may be connected to a 7070. They share tape
channels 1 and 2 with the 7604 Tape Control, and up
to two disc read or write operations can occur simultaneously with internal processing.
Access is by means of three fork-shaped arms per
unit, each with two read-write heads. An arm
moves vertically to the selected disc, then horizontally to the selected band. Priority interruption of
the stored program occurs upon completion of every
seek operation. A seek instruction may be directed
either to a specific access arm or to any arm that
is not busy. A variety of checking features is incorporated, including an automatic comparison of
data recorded on the disc with the data in core storage after every write operation. Errors cause pri0rity interruptions; the initial and final status
words, which are generated automatically, can be
examined to determine the reason for the interruption.
Access arm positioning requires from 100 to 855
milliseconds. Reading of one band requires from
88 to 113 milliseconds including setup time and rotational delay. An additional 50 milliseconds per
band are required for the automatic comparison
when writing. Each read or write command transfers exactly one band of 60 words. The data may be
gathered from or scattered into different areas of
core storage by means of record definition words.
The maximum effective bulk transfer rate is 516
words per second.
The 7300 Disk Storage Unit is no longer in production and is currently offered on an "as available"
basis. It will be superseded by the larger, faster,
and more flexible 1301 Disk Storage Unit.
.14

Availability:

no longer in production;
offered on an "as available" basis.

. 15

First Delivery:

March, 1960 (**) .

©

.222 Disc
Diameter: . . . . . . 24 inches.
Thickness ot length: . thin.
50.
Number on shaft:. .
. 23

Storage Phenomenon:

.24

Recording Permanence

.241 Data erasable by
instructions:
.242 Data regenerated constantly: .
,243 Data volatile:
.244 Data permanent: .
.245 Storage changeable:
.25

yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.

Data Volume eer Band of 1 Track
Words: . . .
Characters:
Digits: . . .
Instructions: .

.26

magnetization.

60.
300.
600.
60.

Bands per Physical Unit
Modell:
Model 2:

.27

Interleaving Levels: .

.28

Access Techniques

200 per disc (100 per
surface).
400 per disc (200 per
surface).
none.

moving heads.
• 281 Recording method: .
.283 Type of access
Possible starting stage
Description of stage
Remove head from
if new disc is selected.
unwanted disc: . .
Move head to selected
no.
disc: . . . . . . . . .
Move head to selected
band: . . . . . . . .
if same disc was previously selected.
Set up access :r;egister:
if same band was previously selected.
Wait for start of selected record: . . . .
no.
Wait for transfer of
record: . . .
no.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

IBM 7070/7074

403':042.290
§

042.

. 29

Potential Transfer Rates

.291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates:
Bit rate per track:
. 292 Peak data rates
Unit of data: . . .
Conversion factor:
Gain factor: . . .
Data rate: . . . .
Compound data rate: .

.3

DATA CAPACITY

.31

Module and System Sizes
Minimum
Storage
Identity:
Discs:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Digits:
Modules:

.32

0
0
0
0
0
0

Modell
50
600,000
3,000,000
600,000
6,000,000
1

Rules for Combining:
Units: .

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: . . . .

1,200 rpm.
74, 200 bits/sec/track.
word.
53 bits/word.
1.
1,400 words/sec/unit.
2, 800 words/ sec maximum.

Maximum
Storage
Model 2
4 Model 2 units.
50
200.
1,200,000
4,800,000.
6,000,000
24,000,000.
1,200,000
4,800,000.
12,000,000
48,000,000.
2
8.

up to 4 units, Modell and/
or Model 2 in any
combination.

Disk Storage Control.
7605 Model 1.
Disk Storage Attachment.
#3315 (on 7602 Core Storage Control).

.42

.5

ACCESS TIMING

.51

Arrangement of Heads

.511 Number of Stacks
Stacks per system: .
Stacks per module: .
Stacks per yoke: .
Yokes per module:
.512 Stack movement:. .

vertically to selected disc;
then horizontally to selected band.

Simultaneous Operations

Access Time Parameters and Variations

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 4 units, Modell and/or
Model 2.
. 432 Restrictions:. ..
.. none.
.44

2.
3.

A:
seeking specified band.
B:
reading.
C:
recording.
a + b + c = at most 12 (3 per DSU).
b+c
= at most 2 (1 if only 1 DSU is installed).

one 7605 and one #3315
(both units are required);
7300 DSUs share channels 1 and 2 with magnetic tape units on a 7604
Tape Control.
.53

. 43

24 maximum.

6.

.513 Stacks that can access
any particular location: . . . . . . . .
3.
.514 Accessible locations
By single stack
With no movement: . 1 band of 60 words.
With all movement~
Modell: .
5, 000 bands.
Model 2: . . . . . . 10, 000 bands.
By all stacks
With no movement: . 6 bands per module.
24 bands per system
(maximum) .
. 515 Relationship between
stacks and locations:. 1 stack per yoke serves
top surfaces of all discs;
other stack serves bottom
surfaces.
. 52

Connection to System

.421 On-line: . .

.448 Testable conditions: . . priority interruption occurs at end of seek, read, .
and write operations;
digit position 1 of final
status word indicates normal condition or specific
error .

.532 Variation in access time
Stage
Remove head from unwanted disc:. . . .

Move to selected band: .

o or 100
to 225
o or 150
to 405
o or 100

Set up access register: .
Wait for start of band:
Read one band:
Total: . . . . . . . .

to 225
38
o to 50
50
88 to 993

Data Transfer Control
Move to selected disc:

. 441 Size of load: . . .
.442 Input-output area:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . .
. 445 Synchronization: .
.447 Table control: . .

one band of 60 words.
core storage.
each word (each digit by
field definition).
none .
automatic.
yes; scatter read and gather wrhe. controlled by
record definition words.

Example,
m.sec .
200.
300.
200.
38.
25.
50.
813.

Note: When recording, an additional 50 m. sec
per band is required in all cases for the
automatic compare check.

iBn
I

6/62

Variation,
m.sec.

'IA-U......
ER......
BA......
CH-:-:-'

INTERNAL STORAGE': 7300 DISK STORAGE UNIT
§

042.

403:042.600
.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

.6

CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . . no.

Error

Check or
Interlock'

Action

.7

AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

· 71

Data Transfer

Invalid address:
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:
Reference to locked
area:
Wrong length record:

address comparison
2-out-of-5 bit check
2-out-of-5 bit check
automatic write compare
2-out-of-5 bit check
2-out-of-5 code.
check

priority
priority
priority
priority
priority

wait or branch.

not possible.
check

priority Signal.

Pairs of storage units possibilities
With self:. . . . .
no.
With core storage: . . yes.
· 72

Transfer Load Size
With core storage: .

· 73

1 band of 60 words.

Effective Transfer Rate

signal •
signal.
Signal.
signal.
signal.

Note: "Priority signal" indicates that digit position 1 of the final
status word is set to a particular condition code and control
is transferred to a disc priority routine which takes the
appropriate action.

With core storage:. . . 516 words/sec,
5,160 digits/sec, or
2,580 char/sec.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated

6/62

403:043.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP
R[I'()RTS

IBM 7070/7074
Internal Starage

1301 DSU
INTERNAL STORAGE: 1301 DI SK STORAGE UNIT

§

043.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . . . . . . . . Disk Storage Unit .
1301 Models 1 and 2.
DSU.

.13

Description

Checking features include a validity check upon data
received by the File Control, a comparison of the
record address on the disc with the address in the
stored program, and checks for illegal operation
codes or sequences of instructions. Three check
characters are generated and recorded during each
write operation. When the record is read, the
check characters are automatically generated again
and compared with the ones read from the disc. As
in the 7300 RAMAC unit, a programmed comparison
of data recorded on a disc with data in core storage
can be made.

The 1301 Model 1 Disk Storage Unit can store up to
27, 800, 000 alphameric characters. Model 2 has
two modules on a single vertical shaft and can store
up to 55,600,000 characters. Each module contains
25 discs; 40 of the 50 disc surfaces are used for data
storage. Each module is served by a comb-like access
mechanism. Forty data read-write heads, one for
each data surface, move horizontally between the
discs. The entire access mechanism moves as one
unit, so the horizontal position of all the heads serving a given module is always the same. The 40
bands; one on each disc surface, that can be read or
recorded upon when the access mechanism is in any
given position are referred to as a "cylinder".
There are 250 bands on each disc surface. The size
and number of records stored in each band are variable. Their formats are controlled by a format
surface that can be written upon only by a special
instruction after manually releasing a write lock.
Each of the 250 bands on the format surface controls
the record format of the entire cylinder in the corresponding position. A different record format can
be used in each of the 250 cylinders in each module.
Data can be recorded in either the 6-bit or 8-bit·
mode. In the 6-bit mode each band can store up to
2,780 characters. In the 8-bit mode, only 2,160
alphameric characters can be stored in a band, but
all-positive numeric data can be "packed" in the
form of two 4-bit digits per character position.
When more than one record is stored in a band, the
data capacity is reduced by 42 characters for each
additional record address. Instructions are provided to read or record a single record, a full band,
or, with the optional Read/Write Cylinder feature
(RC), a full cylinder of up to 111,200 characters.
Time for access mechanism movement ranges from
zero (for a record in a previously-selected cylinder)
to 180 milliseconds. Maximum rotation delay time
is 34 milliseconds. Total reference cycle time to
read a randomly-placed record of 270 characters,
update it, re-write it, and execute a programmed
write check is 248 milliseconds. If no access motion is required, the total reference cycle time is
reduced to 88 milliseconds. Using the Read/Write
Cylinder feature, an effective bulk transfer rate of
83, 000 characters per second can be achieved in the
6-bit mode.

A maximum of five 1301 Disk Storage Units can be
connected to a 7070 or 7074 system through one or
two 7631 File Controls and a 7907 Data Channel.
Two read or write operations can occur simultaneously when two File Controls are used. Every disc
storage operation is initiated by a "channel select"
instruction, which sends the core storage address of
the initial channel command word to the specified
Data Channel. Internal processing then continues
while the Data Channel independently controls the
disc operation. A group of 1301 units can be shared
by two mM 7000 series and/or 1410 systems. When
1301 Disk Storage is used in a 7070 system, the
maximum number of magnetic tape channels is reduced from four to two.
.14

Availability: . .

12 to 15 months (**).

.15

First Delivery:

Jtily, 1962.

.16

Reserved Storage
Purpose
Clocking:

Number of locations
1 disc surface

Spares:

8 disc surfaces

Format:
Addresses:

1 disc surface.
29 + 42R char/band,
for R records/band

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

. 21

Storage Medium: .

.22

Phrsical Dimensions

.222 Disc
Diameter:
Thickness:
Number on shaft: .
.23

Storage Phenomenon:

@ 1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorpor.ated

Locks
not addressable.
not addressable.
manual lock.
none.

multiple magnetic discs .

24 inches.
thin.
Modell, 25 discs.
Model 2, 50 discs.
magnetization.

6/62

IBM 7070/7074

403:043.240
§

043.

. 24

Recording Permanence

.241 Data erasable by
instructions: . .
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . .
.243 Data volatile: ..
.244 Data permanent: .
.245 Storage changeable:
.25

.3

DATA CAPACITY

.31

Module and S):,:stem Sizes

yes.

Identity;

no.
no.
no.
no.

Discs:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Modules:
Basis:

6-bit mode
278
2, 780
2, 780
278

Words: . . .
Characters:
Digits: . . .
Instructions:

8-bit mode
216
2;160
2, 160
216

Note: These are maximum capacities, based upon 1
record per band; each additional record address requires 42 characters. In 8-bit
packed mode, up to 4,320 all-positive decimal digits can be stored in a band.

.26

Bands per Ph):,:sical Unit: 250 per disc surface.

.27

Interleaving: Levels: . . 1.

. 28

Access Techniques

.281 Recording method: .

magnetic heads on access
arms which move horizontally in unison.

.283 Type of access
Description of stage
Possible starting stage
Move heads to selected
band: . . . . . . . . . if new band is selected.
Wait for selected record: . . . . . . . . .
if same band was previously selected.
Wait for transfer of
data: . . . . . . . .
no.
Potential Transfer Rates

.291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates:
Bit rate per track:
.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data:
Conversion factor: .
Gain factor:
Data rate
6-bit mode:
8-bit mode, unpacked:
8-bit mode, packed:

..

Rules for Combining:
Modules: . . . . .

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity': . . . .

Connection to S):,:stem

.421 On-Line:. . . . . ..

one 7631 with one 7907
Modell, or two 7631s
with one 7907 Model 2
(two channels) .
.422 Off-Line: . . . . . . . . 7631 Model 3 permits
shared use of 1301s with
an IDM 1410 system; 7631
Model 4 permits shared
use with another 7000
series system (except
7072).
. 43

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 5.
.432 Restrictions:. . . . . . maximum of 5 1301s per
system, whether 1 or 2
7631s are used .
Data Transfer Control

. 441 Size of load: . . . . .
1,790 rpm.
630,000 bits/sec.
.442 Input-output area:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .

90,000 char/sec.
70,000 char/sec.
140,000 digits/sec.

File Control.
7631 Model 2, 3, or 4.

Data Channel Attachment,
3221.
(all three are required) .

.44

character.
7 or 9 (including space bit).
1 track/band.

up to five 1301s, Modell
and/ or Model 2 in any
combination.

Data Channel.
7907 Modell or 2.

. 42

6/62

1301 Modell 1301 Model 2 51301s,
Model 2.
200 data
40 data
0
20 data
27,800.000
2,780,000
5,560,000
0
278,000,000
55,600,000
27,800,000
0
27,800.000
5,560.000
2,780,000
0
1
2
10.
0
6-bit mode, 1 record/band.

Data Volume per Band of 1 Track
.32

. 29

Maximum
Storage

Minimum
Storage

.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . .
.445 Synchronization: .

1 record of up to 2, 780
chars, 1 band of up to
2,780 chars, or (with
RC) 1 cylinder of up to
111,200 characters .
core storage.
each word (each digit by
field definition).
none.
automatic.

403:043.447

INTERNAL STORAGE: 1301 DISI( STORAGE UNIT

§

043.

.6

CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . . no .

.7

AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

.71

Data Transfer

.447 Table control:

yes; scatter-read and
gather-write, controlled
by channel commands .
. 448 Testable conditions: • . access not ready, access
inoperable, and various
error conditions are signaled by the File Control
in response to a "sense"
command.

.5

ACCESS TIMING

. 51

Arrangement of Heads

. 511 Number of Stacks
Stacks per system:.
Stacks per module: •
Stacks per yoke: .
Yokes per module: .
. 512 Stack movement:. • .
.513 Stacks ihat can access
any particular
location: . . . . . .
.514 Accessible locations
By single stack
With no movement:
With all movement:
By all stacks
With no movement: .

. 72

.73

40 to 400.
40.
40.
1.
horizontal.

1 record, 1 band, or (with
RC) 1 cylinder .

Effective Transfer Rate
With core storage, using optional RC
6-bit mode: . . . . '. . 83,000 char/sec.
8-bit mode, unpacked: 64,500 char/sec .
8-bit mode, packed: . 129,000 digits/sec.

.8

1.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

1 band.
250 bands.
40 bands per module.
40 to 400 bands per system.

Simultaneous Operations
A:

seeking a specified
location.
B:
reading.
C:
recording.
a + b + c = at most 1 per DSU module.
, b + c = at most 1 per File Control.
. 53

Transfer Load Size
With core storage: .

.515 Relationship between
stacks and locations:. first 4 digits of 6-digit
home address for each
band denote head and
band number.
• 52

Pairs of storage units possibilities
With self:. . . . .
no.
With core storage: . . yes.

Check or
Interlock

Invalid address:
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:

Recove~, of

data:

Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:
Physical record missing:
Reference to locked area:
Access inoperative:
Circuit failure:
lllegal instruction
sequence:
lllegal format character:

check
check
2 -out -of -5 bit check
programmed write
check; generate
check characters
regenerate and compare check characters
2 -out -of -5 code
check
check
ignored •
check
check
check
check

Action
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.

indicator.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.

indicator.

Note: These error indications are transmitted from me File Control
to the computer in response to a "sense" command •

Access Time Parameters and Variations

.532 Variation in access time
Stage
Variation,
m.sec.
Move head to selected
band: . . . . . . . • o or 50 to 180
Wait for selected record: . . . . . • .
o to 34
Read one record: .
0.4 to 34
Read one band: •
34.
Total: • . . . . . .
0.4 to 248

©

Example,
m.sec.
160. O.
17.0.
4.0.
181. O.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

403:051.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7070

RE",RTS

Central Processor

APC
CENTRAL PROCESSOR

§

sign can therefore be stored in a single core storage
location. Store and add-to- storage operations using
field definition can result in field overflows (when
digit positions beyond the field-defined ones are affected) or sign changes (when the sign of the stored
field differs from that of the storage location). Depending upon console switch settings, detection of
these errors ·can result in system halts or the setting of testable indicators .

051.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

. 12

Description

Arithmetic and Program
Control.
7601.
APC.

The 7070's ·scatter-read and gather-write capabilities can be used in internal transfers as well as input-output operations. A block of data in core storage can be scattered into a number of smaller
blocks, or a number of blocks can be gathered into
one larger block. The addresses of the several
blocks that data is to be gathered from or scattered
into are specified in a list of record definition (RD)
words; one word for each block to be transferred.
The end of a block transfer operation is indicated
by a record definition word with a minus sign. Conversions between the numeric and alphameric
modes can be made during core-to-core block
transfers. Each lO-digit numeric word becomes
two five-character alphameric words, and leading
zeros can be converted to blanks. Only numeric
data should be converted from alphameric to
numeric mode; all even-numbered digit positions
are lost, so alphabetic or special characters are
converted into unrelated numeric codes.

The 7601 Arithmetic and Program Control executes
the stored program instructions and performs all
arithmetic operations in a 7070 system. It contains
three accumulators, a one-digit adder, an instruction counter, and the program, arithmetic, auxiliary, and synchronizer registers. Each of the accumulators and registers has a capacity of one word
and can hold ten decimal digits plus sign or five alphameric characters. All internal transfers are
parallel by word, but arithmetic is performed serially. Although the core storage cycle time is only
six microseconds, no instruction can be executed in
less than 36 microseconds.
A feature of the 7070 is its versatile instruction rep
ertoire. Full fixed point arithmetic facilities are
provided, including addition to and subtraction from
a core storage location. Ninety-nine index registers
are standard; they occupy core storage locations
0001 through 0099, and a full complement of instructions is provided for loading, incrementing, and testing them. A unique "split-shift" operation permits
shifting of only those digits to the right or left of any
specified position in the 20-digit register composed
of accumulators 1 and 2 coupled together. There
are no facilities for bit manipulation, but 30 "electronic switches" (each consisting of one digit position in core storage) can be turned on or off or
tested by the program. Table look-up operations
can be carried out automatically on tables broken up
into any number of core storage blocks. Internal
facilities for editing and format control are severely
limited. Many load, store, add, subtract, compare,
and branch operations can be carried out in any of
the three accumulators, and the accumulators can be
addressed and used as instruction operands. Multiplication and division require all th:i:-ee accumulators.
The most common operand length is one 10-digit
word, but the 7070's field definition feature (FD)
permits arithmetic, load, store, compare, and table
look-up operations to be carried out on specified
portions of a word. The control portion of.an instruction specifies the high- and low~order digit positions of the field to be used. Several fields of like

©

Automatic interruption of the stored program and
transfer of control to a priority routine can occur
whenever an operation is completed by a magnetic
tape unit, disc storage unit, or unit record device,
or when an inquiry request is made. This capability
is called "Priority Processing". It permits a limited degree of multi -running, but it is not possible for
one priority routine to interrupt another.
Optional Features
Floating Decimal Arithmetic (FDA): Provides a full
complement of floating point arithmetic operations
using an 8-digit fixed point part and. a 2-digit exponent. Sixteen-digit results are formed in addition,
subtraction, and multiplication.
Interval Timer (IT): Records time in 30-second intervals for up to 8.3 hours, and may be interrogated
or reset to zero by the stored program. The Console Card Reader Attachment is a prerequisite.
. 13

Availability: . .

12 to 15 months (**) .

.14

First Delivery:

March, 1960.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

IBM 7070

403:051.200
§ 051.

.22

.2

PROCESSING FACILITIES

. 21

Operations and Operands

Special Cases of Operands

.221 Negative numbers: .
.222 Zero: • • . . . . . .

0l2eration
and Variation

Provision

Radix

Size

.211 Fixed point
Add -Subtract:
Multiply
Shon:
Long:
Divide
No remainder:
Remainder:

automatic

decimal

1 word (FD).

none.
automatic

decimal

1 word (FD).

none.
automatic

decimal

1 word (FD).

optional FDA
optional FDA
optional FDA

decimal
decimal
decimal

8 & 2 digits.
8 & 2 digits.
8 & 2 digits.

absolute value with nega'tive sign.
plus zero is greater than
minus zero in comparisons; both give same results in arithmetic.

.223 Operand size determination: . . . . . . . . . 1 word or a portion thereof, defined by control
portion of instruction.
• 23

Instruction Formats

.231 Instruction structure: . 1 word.
• 232 Instruction layout:

.212 Floating point
Add-Subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:

Part

Size (digits) sign + 2

.213 Boolean
none.
none.

AND:
Inclusive OR:

.214 Comparison
Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating sequence:

automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
specials. A to Z. 0 to 9.

Provision From
.215 Code translation:
automatic
numeric
automatic

• 216 Radix conversion:

1 word
1 word
1 word
1 word

(FD).
(FD).
(FD).
(FD).

To

Size

alphameric

1toNwords
(RO).
1 to Nwords
(RO) •

alphameric numeric

. 233 Instruction parts
Name
Operation:

none.

Provision Comment

Size

.217 Edit format
Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insen point:
Insen spaces:
Float:
Protection:

automat~c

automattc
automatic
none.
none.
none.

}

in code translation 1 to N words (RO).
operations only
in right shifts only 1 or 2 words.

.234
.235

none.

.218 Table look- up
Equality:
Equal or
greater:
Greatest:
Least:

automatic

1 word (FD. RD).

automatic
none.
automatic

1 word (FD, RD).

automatic

1 word (FD).

automatic
automatic
automatic

1 word (FD).
ltoNwords(RD).
ltoNwords(RD).

1 word (FD, RO).

.219 Others
Add to storage:
Subtract from
storage:
Record gather:
Record scatter:
Electronic
switches:

automatic

test. turn on or

off

30 switches
available.

(FD): Field definition is applicable to this operation (1 to 10 digits).
(RO): Record definition words are used to define blocks of data
locations.

6/62

Operation Index Control

.236
.2361

.2362
.237
.2371
.2372
.2373
. 2374

2

2

Address

4

Purpose
specifies operation to be
performed.
Index: . .
specifies indexing word to
be added to addre s s part.
Control: .
1) specifies high- and loworder digit positions of
a field within the addressed core storage
location (FD); or
2) augments the operation
code.
Address: . . . . . . 1) specifies operand address in core storage;
2) specifies destination of
a jump;
3) contains a positive literal; or
4) augments the operation
code.
Basic address
structure: .
1 + O.
Literals
Arithmetic:
none.
Comparisons and
tests: . . . . .
1 digit.
Incrementing modifiers: .. . . . . . . 4 digits.
Directly addressed operands
Internal
Storage
Minimum
Maximum
Volume
size
size
accessible
~
Core:
1 character 1 word
total
capacity
Increased address
capacity: . . . . .
none.
Address indexing
Number of methods: 1.
Name: . . . . . . . . indexing.
Indexing rule: . . . . addition; modulo 10, 000.
Index specification: . . index portion of the modified instruction (2 digits).

403:051.2375

CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§

05l.

· 33

.2375

Number of potential
indexers: . . . . . 99 (core storage locations
0001-0099).
.2376 Addresses which can
be indexed:
address portion of all instructions .
. 2377 Cumulative indexing: none.
.2378 Combined index and
step: . . . . . .
yes .
. 238 Indirect addre ssing:
none.
. 239 Stepping
.2391
Specification of
increment:. .
address portion of stepping
instruction .
. 2392 Increment sign:
always positive, but may be
added or subtracted .
. 2393 Size of increment:
up to 4 digits.
. 2394 End value: . . . . .
zero, non-negative, or value specified in indexing
word.
.2395 Combined step and
test: . . . . . . .
for increment of 1 or
decrement of up to 4
digits.
.24

Special Processor Storage

. 241 Category of
storage
Arithmetic and
Program Control:
Arithmetic and
Program Control:
Arithmetic and
Program Control:

. 242 Category of
storage
Arithmetic and
Program Control:

Number of Size in
locations digits

Program usage

3

10 + sign

accumulators.

1

4

instruction
counter.

1

10 + sign

program register.

Total number
locations

Physical
form

5

?

?

.3

SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES

. 31

Instruction Sequencing

.311 Number of sequence
control facilities:
.314 Special sub- sequertce
counters: . . . . . .
. 315 Sequence control step
size: . . . . .
. 316 Accessibility to
routines: . . .

Access Cycle
time
time
/-Lsec
/-L sec
6.

1.

none .
1 word .

Interruption

.331 Possible causes
In-out units: .

In-out controllers:
Storage access:
Processor errors:
Other: . . . . . .
. 332 Control by routine
Individual control:

individual unit record devices, tape channels, inquiry controls, disc storage seek, and/or disc
storage read/write.
Method: . . . . . . . . stacking latches, set by a
mask word in core storage, enable interruption
by specific unfts or
groups.
Restriction:
none.
.333 Operator control:
console switches determine
which 2 unit record devices can cause interruption .
.334 Interruption conditions: 1) not in priority mode.
2) completion of operation
by a unit whose stacking
latch is not masked.
Note: Upon completion of magnetic tape or disc storage operations, interruption may occur always or only in the event of an error or unusual condition, depending upon sign of the
tape or disc instruction .
.335 Interruption process
Disabling interruption: yes; enters priority mode.
Registers saved: . . . stores instruction counter
contents in index word 97
and indicator settings in
index word 100 .
Destination:
depends on cause.
· 336 Control methods
Determine cause:
destination usually indicates cause; for tape and
disc operations, initial
and final status words can
be tested.
Enable interruption: . "priority release" instruction.

can be stored in an indexing word .

· 34

. 317 Permanent or optional
modifier: .

no.

.341 Method of control:

.32

none.

Look-Ahead:

©

completion of an operation
by a magnetic tape unit or
unit record device; manual inquiry request.
as above.
completion of a disc storage seek, read, or write
operation.
none.
none .

Multi - running: . .

1962 by Auerbach' Corporation and BNA Incorporated

limited capability.
own coding, using interruption facilities described above.

6/62

IBM 7070

403:051.342
§

05l.

.422 For arrays of data

. 342 Maximum number of
programs: . . . .
. 343 Precedence rules: .
.344 Program protection
Storage: . .
In-out units: . .

none.
none.

.35

Multi - sequencing:

none.

.4

PROCESSOR SPEEDS

.41

Instruction Times in /.l secs

2 is practical limit.
own coding.

.424

.411 Fixed point
Add-subtract:
36 + 4D. *
Multiply (average): .
180 + 82D. *
Divide (average):..
672+ 216D.
.412 Floating pOint (with FDA)
Add: . . . . . . .
168 to 336.
Subtract: . . . . .
168 to 360.
Multiply (average)
1,080.
Divide (average): .
2,472.
. 413 Additional allowance for
Indexing: . . . . . .
36 (24 for branch instructions).
Re-complementing:
4+ 4D. *

* Round these

.417 Convert:
.418 Shift: . .

.421 For random addresses

=a+ b:

b=a

+ b:

...
.•.

Sum N items: .
c = ab: .
c = alb: . . . .

6/62

.426

.427

.428
32+ 4D. *
36.
68 + 4D. *
60.
60 or 84.
36.
36 + 120N + 36R, for con.5
versions between alphameric and numeric form,
where N is number of data
words moved and R is
number of record definition words.
none.
28 + 4D. *

Processor Performance in /.l secs

c

.425

times to hext higher multiple of 12.

.414 Control
Compare: . . . . . . .
Branch: . . . . . . . .
Compare and branch:
. 415 Counter control
Step: . . . . .
Step and test: .
Test:
.416 Edit: . . . . . .

. 42

.423

Fixed point Floating point
(10 digits) (with FDA)
156
324.
120
324.
84
252.
1,080
1,152.
2,904
2,544.

Fixed point Floating point
(10 digits)
(with FDA)
636.
c i = ai + b j :. .
468
b j = a i + bj :. .
396
636 .
372.
Sum N items: .
204
1,680.
c = c + aibj: .
1,404
Branch based on comparison
Numeric data (10
digits): . . . . . .
450.
Alphabetic data (5
450.
characters):
.'
Switching
Unchecked: .
156.
Checked: . .
300.
List search:
144 + 228N.
Format control per character
Unpack:. . . . . . . .' 23.
Compose:. . . . . . . 120 (**).
Table look up per comparison
For a match: . . . . . 108.
For least or greatest: 114.
For interpolation
108.
point: . . . . . .
Bit indicators
Set bit in separate
location: . . . .
84.
Set bit in pattern:
impractical.
Test bit in separate
location: . , . . .
72.
impractical.
Test bit in pattern: .
Test AND for B bits: . impractical.
impractical.
Test OR for B bits: .
Moving
84.
1 digit: .
1 word: .
72.
Nwords:
36 + 24N + 36R, where R
is the number of record
definition words .

* Round these times to next higher multiple of 12.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

Overflow:

check

Underflow:
Zero divisor:
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Field overflow: :f

check
causes overflow.
fixed count check
check
none•
check
fixed count check
fixed count check
check

alarm; stop or set
indicator.
alarm & indicator.

Sign change:

t

check

stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
alarm; stop or set
indicator.
alarm; stop or set
indicator.

'" Can occur only when storing a field-defined ponion of a word.

/

403:061.100

II
•

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7070/7072/7074

BEPORTS

Console

CONSOLE

§

.22

061.

Connections
Name
Priority Controls:

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

Console.
7150
C.

. 12

Associated Units:..

Console Typewriter (CT)
stands upon console desk.

. 13

Description:

Form

Function

4 dials assign unit record
priorities A and B to
specific card readers,
punches, or printers.

.23

Stops and Restarts
Name
Start:
Stop:

Form
button
button

Function
starts stored program .
stops program upon
completion of current
instruction, and types
contents of instruction
counter and program
register.

Name
Single Cycle:

Form
button

Run:

button

Function
causes execution of one
instruction each time
start button is de
pressed.
selects normal mode
for continuous runing.

The 7150 Console is included in every 7070 series
system. It consists of a desk holding an operating
panel, an operating keyboard, and a typewriter
keyboard. The two keyboards are built into the console typewriter, which stands on the left side of the
desk. The typewriter is described in Section 403:082 .
. 24
The operating panel is mounted vertically to the
right of the typewriter. It contains power keys and
lights, alteration switches, unit-record priority and
address stop controls, and a variety of error and con!tition lights. The operating keyboard contains the
controls most frequently used for program testing
and operation. No console lights are provided for
the display of register or core storage contents; these
displays are provided by the console typewriter.
Contents of the program register and instruction
counter are typed automatically whenever the stored
.25
program stops.
In addition to the 7150 Console, each 7070 series
system contains a Customer Engineering Console,
which is used primarily by mM Customer Engineers
for diagnostic testing and preventive maintenance.
This unit consists of four separate panels: Unit
Record, Arithmetic-and-Programming and Storage,
Dis\< Storage and Inquiry, and Magnetic Tape. While
the numerous register displays, condition lights,
and error alarms in the Customer Engineering Console can be useful in debugging and in determining
the exact causes of error halts, only the controls
and displays in the main 7150 Console are described
in this section.

.2

CONTROLS

. 21

Power
Name

Form

Function

Emergency Off:
Power On:
Power Off:
DC Off:

pull switch
button
button
button

disconnects all power.
provides full opera ting power.
turns off system.
disconnects DC power during
short idle periods.

©

Stepping

Resets
Name
Reset:

Form
button

Program Reset:

button

Computer Reset

button

Type Reset:

button

.26

Loading:

.27

Sense Switches

Function
resets error-detecting
circuits.
resets certain program
controls and registers.
resets all program controIs and registers.
stops typing operation
in progress and causes
typing of instruction
counter and program
register contents.

. • . . . . . none .

Name
Alteration:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Form
4 buttons

Function
set indicators which
can be tested by
stored program.

6/62

403:061.280

§

I BM 7070 17072/7074
.33

061.

.28

Special
Name
Accumulator
Overflow:

Form

Function

3 buttons

determine whether
accumulator overflows will stop
computer.

Exponent Overflow:

button

Address Stop:

Inquiry Only:

Display:

Alter:

Store:
Log:

.3

DISPLAY

. 31

Alarms:

. 32

as above, for float
ing point operations.
button and cause stored program
4 dials
to halt whenever the
.34
selected address
is encountered for
either data or an
instruction.
button
permits processing
of inquiries during
periods when the
computer is idle.
button
causes typewriter
display of an alphameric word in 10digit core storage
notation.
button
permits manual
alteration of a word
just displayed on
typewriter.
.4
button
stores typed data in
core storage.
button
permits normal typ- .41
ing on the console
typewriter.

6 check lights indicate error
. conditions caused by incorrect programming,
operation, control-panel
wiring, or machine malfunction .

Conditions: • . • . . . . 3 mode lights indicate mode
in which computer is operating: normal, priority,
or inquiry only.
6 status lights show when
the accumulator overflow,
field overflow, exponent
overflow, and sign change
indicators are turned on.
7 operating lights indicate
which peripheral device,
if any, is operating, the
status of stored program
execution, and, if the
stored program has
stopped, whether the next
instruction is to come
from the instruction
counter or from the address in the instruction.

Storage:

. contents of instruction
counter: and program register are typed automatically on console type writer whenever execution
of the stored program
stops for raltine causes
and when certain error
conditions occur. The
contents of these registers
may also be displayed under operator control by
the method described in
.34.
typing of a 4-digit address
causes automatic console
typewriter display of contents of the addressed
location in the appropriate.
mode (numeric or alphameric).

ENTRY OF DATA
Into Control Registers
(1) Type 4-digit address on console typewriter,

resulting in display of contents of desired register .
(2) Press Alter button .
. (3) Type sign and 10 digits (always numeric mode) .
(4) Press Store button.

.42

Into Storage:

.5

CONVENIENCES

.51

Communications:

none.

.52

Clock:

manual interrogation of
optional Interval Timer
causes typed display of
its contents.

.53

Desk Space: .

.54

View:

,--_ _-;- A

6/62

Control Registers:

I AUERBACH I @

same as Control Registers.

. adequate free work space
in front of operating panel.
designed for operation by
person seated at console
desk; unobstructed view
in all directions.

403:071.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

IBM 7070 /7074

REPORTS

Input-Output
Card Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READER

§

071.

.24

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

· 12

reading (data entry).
1 card.
1.

SO.
1 row at a time.

Description

Availability:

· 14

First Delivery:

·2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

. 211 Drive past the head:
.212 Reservoirs:
..
· 22

Use of station:
Distance: .
Stacks: .
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use:

. . . . Card Reader.
7500.
CR.

The 7500 Card Reader reads standard SO-column
cards at a peak speed of 500 cards per minute. Up
to three readers may be connected to a system, and
all three can operate simultaneously. Input format
is controlled by plugboard wiring. Formats may be
varied by manual Alteration Switches or by control
information punched into the cards. A 16-word input
synchronizer serves as a buffer. The scatter-read
feature permits data from a single card to be distributed into several different areas of core storage
by a single instruction. Translation from card column code to either the numeric or alphameric internal code is automatic; the plugboard wiring determines which internal code will be generated for each
card field. Although there are three separate reading stations, read compare checks can be made only
on alphameric data. All data is checked for character validity (two-out-of-five bit coding) as it is
transferred from the input synchronizer into core
storage.
.13

Arrangement of Heads (contd.)

no longer in production;
furnished "as available".

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

. 311 Medium: ..
.312 Phenomenon:
. 32

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:
. 324 Track use: .
. 325 Row use: .
. 33

Coding: .

.34

Format Compatibility

March, 1960 (**).

standard BO-column cards .
rectangular holes.

12 rows at standard spacing.
SO columns at standard
spacing.
all for data .
all for data .
column code as in Data
Code Table No.3.

Other device or system Code translation
All devices using
standard SO-column
cards:. ... . .
not required.
. 35

Physical Dimensions:

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

standard BO-column cards .

clutch driven rollers .
none.

Sensing and Recording Systems

. 221 Recording system: .
.222 Sensing system:
.223 Cpmmon system:

none.
brush.
no.

. 23

MultiEle Copies: .

none.

.24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks: .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

..

Use of station:
Distance: .
Stacks: .
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use:

..

..

Input/Output Control.
7600 Modell.
Input/Output Synchronizer.
7603 Models 1 through 9.

reading (control).
1.

.42

SO.
1 row at a time.

.421 On-line:

Connection to System
one 7600 and one 7603 (both
are required).
none.

reading (control or prereading of alphameric
data).
1 card.

.422 Off-line:

1.

. 431 Devices per controller: maximum of 3 .
. 432 Restrictions: .
appropriate 7603 model
must be used.

BO.
1 row at a time.

©

.43

Connection to Device

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

403:071.440

IBM 707017074

§071.
.44

Data Transfer Control

. 441 Size of load: . . . .
. 442 Input-output areas:
· 443 Input- output area
access: . . . . .

1 card of 80 characters .
core storage.
each word (each digit by
field definition).

• 444 Input- output area
lockout: . . . . .

processing is inhibited during data transfer from input synchronizer to core
storage.
.445 Table control: . . . . . yes; scatter-read, controlled by record definition words .
. 446 Synchronization: . . . . automatic.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . . . . .
. 52

one card.
fixed.

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input:. . . . . . . . . . transfer 1 to 16 words from
input synchronizer to
core storage, then read
next card into synchronizer.
none.
· 522 Output: .
none.
· 523 Stepping:
none .
· 524 Skipping:
. 525 Marking:
none.
none.,
· 526 Searching:
.53

Code Translation:

. 54

Format Control
Control: . . . .
Format alternatives:

Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: .
Insert zeros: .
Section sizes:
· 55

no.
yes.
yes.
no.
very limited.
no.

Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . . .
Busy device: . . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Hopper empty:
Stacker full: . . . . . .

6/62

plugboard.
indefinite number; selected
by 4 manual Alteration
Switches or by control
data punched in card.
yes.
no.
no.
yes.
yes.

Control Operations
Disable: . . . . . .
Request interrupt: .
Offset card: . .
Select stacker: .
Select format:
Select co!1e: . .

. 56

automatic.

no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
no.

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions: .

. . . . none .

. 62
. 621 Nominal or peak speed: 500 cards/minute .
.622 Important parameters
120 m.sec.
Clutch cycle: . .
. 623 Overhead: . . . .
4 clutch points (**) .
.624 Effective speeds:
500 cards/min. if processing time per card does
not exceed 114 m. sec.
.63

Demands on System
Component
m. sec per card
Arithmetic and Program Control:
6.0 max.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

· 71

Adjustments:...... none .

· 72

Other Controls
Function
Reset:

Form
button

Alteration:
End-of-File:
.73

4 two-way
switches
button

5.0 max .

Cpmment
turns off error
alarms.
select formats.
permits processing
of last cards infile.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: . . . .
Stacker: . . . .
. 732 Replenishment time: .
· 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .

.8

Percentage

Capacity
1,000 cards (**).
1,000 cards (**).
O. 25 to O. 50 mins .
reader does not need to be
stopped.
2.0 mins (**).

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Reading:

read compare (alalarm: optional stop
or offset.
phabetic data only)
none.
validity check
alarm: optional stop
or offset.
check
branch to end-of-file
routine: stop reader.
none •
alarm: stop reader.
clocking check

Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Inconsistent plugboard
wiring:
Misfeed:
Burned out fuse:
Transfer to storage:

ring check
card advance check
check
validity check

alarm: stop reader.
alarm: stop reader.
alarm: stop reader.
repeat data transfer:
if still invalid.
branch to error routine.

403:072.100
•

STANDARD

_EDP

IIJ"

IBM 7070/7074

REPORTS

Input-Output
Card Punch
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD PUNCH

§

072.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

· 12

Description

..

. . . . Card Punch.
7550.
CPo

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

. 311 Medium:
..
. 312 Phenomenon: . .
.32

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:
The 7550 Card Punch punches standard 80-column
cards at a peak speed of 250 cards per minute. Output format is controlled by plugboard wiring, and
formats can be selected by manual Alteration
Switches or by control words in the stored program.
A 16-word output synchronizer serves as a buffer.
The gather-write feature permits data from several
different areas of core storage to be punched into
one card by a single instruction.
Translation from either numeric or alphameric internal code to the card column code is automatic.
Data is checked for character validity (two-out-offive bit coding) as it is transferred from core storage to the output synchronizer. Urider control of the
plugboard wiring, numeric datil can be checked for
double punches and blank columns, and cards can be
offset in the stacker.
.13

Availability:

· 14

First Delivery:

·2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

· 211 Drive past the head: .
. 212 Reservoirs: . . . .

.322 Parallel by:
. 324 Track use: .
.325 Row use:
.33

Coding: .

.34

Format Compatibility

12 rows at standard spacing.
80 columns at standard
spacing.
all for data .
all for data.
column code as in Data
Code Table No.3.

Other device or system Code translation
All devices using
standard 80-column
cards:..
....
.35

Physical Dimensions:

no longer in production;
furnished "as available".

.4

CONTROLLER

March, 1960 (**).

.41

Identity:

not required.
standard 80-column cards.

Input/Output Control.
7600 Model,l.
Input/Output Synchronizer.
7603 Models 1 through 9 .

clutch driven rollers.
none.

. 42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:
. 22

standard 80-column cards .
rectangular holes .

Sensing and Recording Systems
.422 Off-line:

. 221 Recording system: .
. 222 SenSing system: .
.223 Common system:

die punch.
brush .
no.

. 23

Multiple Copies: .

none.

· 24

Arrangement of Heads

.43

one 7600 and one 7603 (both
are required) .
punch can be used for independent gang punching .

Connection to Device

Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: .

1.

.431 Devices per controller: maximum of 3 .
.432 Restrictions:. . .
. . total number of 7400
Printers and 7550 Card
Punches may not exceed 3;
appropriate 7603 model
must be used.

80.
1 row at a time.

.44

Use of station: .
Distance: . .
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use:

checking
1 card.
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

punching.

©

Data Transfer Control

. 441 Size of load: . . . .
.442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Input- output area
access: . . . . . .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1 card of 80 characters •
core storage .
each word (each digit by
field definition).

6/62

IBM 7070/7074

403:072.444
§

072.

· 444 Input- output area
lockout: . . . . .

processing is inllibited during data transfer from
core storage to output
synchronizer.
.445 Table control: . . . . . yes;.gather-write, controlled by record definition words.
. 446 Synchronization: . . . . automatic .

·5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

. 51

Blocks

. 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Output: . . . . . .
.52

one card .

· 523
· 524
· 525
. 526

Stepping:.
Skipping: .
Marking: .
Searching:

· 53

Code Translation:

.54

Format Control

none.
transfer 1 to 16 words from
core storage to output
synchronizer and punch 1
card.
. ' none.
none.
none .
none.

Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: .
Insert space:. .
Section sizes: .

Conditions:. . . . . . . none.

.62

Speeds

.621 Nominal or peak speed:
.622 Important parameters
Clutch cycle: . .
. 623 Overhead: . . . .
.624 Effective speeds:

· 63

Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . . .
Busy device: . . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Hopper empty: .
Stacker full: . . . . . .

Arithmetic and
Program Control:

no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.

6.0 max.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:...... none .

· 72

Other Controls
Function

Method

· 73

2.5 max.

Comment

button
4 two-way
switches

turns off error alarms.
select formats.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: . . . .
Stacker: . . . .
. 732 Replenishment time: .
. 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .

no.
yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
no.

240 m.sec.
4 clutch points.
250 cards/min. if processing time per card does
not exceed 234 m. sec .

m. sec per card Percentage

Reset:
Alteration:
plugboard.
indefinite number; selected
by 4 manual Alteration
Switches or by control
word (word 1 in output
synchronizer ).
yes.
no.
yes.
yes.
yes.

250 cards/minute.

Demands on System
Component

automatic.

Control Operations
Disable: . . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Offset card: . .
Select stacker: .
Select format:
Select code: . .

6/62

.61

fixed.

Control: . . . .
Format alternatives:

.56

PERFORMANCE

Input-Output Operations

· 521 Input:. .
· 522 Output:.

· 55

.6

Capacity
1,000 cards (**).
1,000 cards (**).
0.25 to 0.50 mins .
punch does not need to be
stopped .
4.0 mins (**).

.8
Error
Recording:

Check or
Interlock

OUtput block size:
Invalid code:

double-punch and
blank column checks
ring check
validity check

Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Transfer to synchronizer:

check
none.
clocking check
validity check

Misfeed:

card advance check

Action
alarm; optional
stop or offset.
alarm; stop punch
alarm; optional
stop or offset.
alarm; stop punch.
alarm; stop punch.
br anch to error
routine.
alarm; stop punch_

403:073.100
IBM 70701707217074

Input-Output
CCR
INPUT-OUTPUT: CONSOLE CARD READER

§

073.

.32

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

. 12

Positional Arrangement

Console Card Reader.
7501.
CCR.

.322 Parallel by:
.324 Track use:
. 325 Row use:

Description
The Console Card Reader is intended for low-cost
.33
direct card input, on an exception basis, into a tapeoriented 7070 series system. Using a card feeding,
transporting, and stacking mechanism similar to the
24 and 26 Keypunches, the 7501 achieves a peak speed
of 60 cards per minute. Data is read from the card
one column at a time, converted to internal numeric
.. 34
code, transferred to a one-word synchronizer register in the 7601 Arithmetic and Program Control,
and then sent to the designated core storage location.
Only the digits 0 through 9 and the plus, minus, and
alpha signs are recognized. Each alphameric character must therefore be entered in the form of the
appropriate two-digit numeric code as shown in Data
.35
Code Table No.2. Field length is fixed at 10 columns
per word, and no columns within a word may be left
blank. The sign is represented by a zone punch over
A
the units column of each word. No internal processing can be done while data is being read from a card.

Format Compatibili!y
Other device or system
Code translation
All devices using standard
SO-column cards (numeric
data only): . . . . .
not required.
Physical Dimensions:

First Delive!)'::

042

Connection to

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.421 On-line:

. 21

Drive Mechanism

.14

. 211 Drive past the head:.
.212 Reservoirs: .

043

Multiple Copies:

.24

Arrangement of Heads

Connection to Device

none .
photo-electric.
Data Transfer Control

none.
.441 Size of load:

Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:
.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

. 31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:
. 312 Phenomenon:

one 7600, connected to
Arithmetic and Program
Control .
none .

.431 Devices per controller:. 1 .
0432 Restrictions: . . . . . . none .
.44

.23

S~stem

0422 Off-line:

Sensing and Recording Systems

. 221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system:

. Input/Output Control.
7600 Modell or 2.

12 to 15 months (**).

clutch driven rollers.
none.

standard 80 -column cards.

CONTROLLER
Identity:

Availabili!y:

column code as in Data
Code Table No.3; accepts
only the numerals 0-9 and
special characters +, and alpha.

Coding: .

Al

.13

. 22

80 columns at standard
spacing.
12 rows at standard
spacing.
all for data .
all for data .

.321 Serial by:

reading.
1.
12.
1 column at a time.

. 442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . .

.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . .
.445 Table control:

standard 80-column cards .
rectangular holes.

©

.446 Synchronization: . .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1 card; 1 to 8 fields of
10 digits each .
core storage.
each word (each digit by
field definition).
processing is inhibited
until data transfer from
reader is completed .
. yes; scatter-read, controlled by record definition
words.
automatic.

6/62

IBM 7070/70721 7074

403:073.500
§

.63

073.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

m. secper card

· fixed.

InEut-Ou~ut

.521
.522
. 523
.524
.525
.526

Input:
Output:
Stepping:
Skipping:
Marking:
Searching:

one card forward.
none .
none.
none.
none.
none.

• 53

Code Translation: .

automatic.

· 54

Format Control: .

· 55

Control Operations

Operations

Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Offset card:. .
Select stacker:
Select format:
Select code:. .

Percentage

1,000

100

• one card .

.52

· none.

·
·
·
·
·
·

no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no .

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITmS

.71

Adjustments: . . . . . . none.

.72

Other Controls

.73

Function
Feed Reset:

Form
button

End-of-File:

button

Comment
feeds or releases a card;
turns' off error and
end-of -file alarms.
allows processing of last
cards in file.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: . . .
Stacker: . . .
. 732 Replenishment time:
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . .

Capacity
.500 cards.
.500 cards.
0.5 to 1.0 mins .
reader needs to be stopped.
8.3 mins.

Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . . .
no.
Busy device:. . . .
no.
Nearly exhausted:
no.
Busy controller:
no.
End of medium marks
no.
Hopper empty:
• yes
Stacker full:
· no.

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions:

. 62

Speeds

. . . . none.

· 621 Nominal or peak speed:
· 622 Important parameters
Clutch cycle:
. 623 Overhead:. . . . . . .

6/62

Component
Arithmetic and
Program Control:

. 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . . . .

. 56

Demands on System

60 cards/minute.

1.0 second.
one clutch point.

.8

ERRORS, CHECK AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Exhausted medium:

none.
none.
double punch and
blank column
checks
check

lmperfect medium:
Timing couflicts:
Stacker full:
Misfeed:
Incomplete word:

none.
none.
check
card advance check
check

Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:

Action

branch to error
routine.
branch ro end -offile routine;
stop reader•
alarm; stop reader.
alarm; stop reader.
branch 'ro error
routine •

403:081.100

_51ANDARD

II

EDP
R[PORIS

IBM 7070/7074
Input-Output
Printer
INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTER

§

081.

· 24

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

· 12

Description

Use of station:
Stacks: .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

Printer.
7400.
PRo
· 25

The 7400 Printer uses the same basic printing
mechanism as the 407 Accounting Machine. The
7400 prints at a peak speed of 150 lines per minute
by means of a bank of 120 print wheels mounted side
by side. Each print wheel contains 47 different
characters, including 11 special symbols which are
available in ten different sets. All format control is
provided by plugboard wiring. The stored program
cannot directly control the output format nor test
the printer for busy or error conditions.
Data to be printed is transmitted from core storage
to a 16-word output synchronizer. The system's
gather-write feature permits data from several
areas of core storage to be assembled and printed
on one line by a single instruction. The first word
transferred to the output synchronizer can be a control word that selects the wired format features to
be used on a particular line. A maximum of 80 data
characters may be printed on one line. An optional
printing technique called "unloading" bypasses the
plugboard format and prints the first eight words
and their signs from the output synchronizer in print
positions 1 through 95.
.13

Availability :

no longer in production;
furnished "as available".

.14

First Delivery:

March, 1960 (**).

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

· 211 Drive past the head:.

sprocket drive push and
pull, paper punched on
both sides; or pressure
rolls.
.212 Reservoirs: . . . . . . none.
· 22

printing.
1.

120.
one line at a time.

Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
Alternatives: .

10
26
11

FORTRAN set:. .
Req. COBOL set:
Total: . . . . . .

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium: . .

. 222 Sensing system:

wheels.
none.

+.0-$*,%/+-

9 other arrangements of special
characters.
character set F.
no.
47 and blank.

.•

.32

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:
· 322 Parallel by:

1 line at 6 or 8 per inch.
120 print positions at 10
per inch.

· 324 Track use
Data: .
Unused: .
. 325 Row use: .

80 maximum.
40 minimum .
all for data.

.33

Coding: .

engraved character font .

.34

Format Compatibility:. none.

· 35

Physical Dimensions

.351 Overall width:
.352 Length
at 6 lines/inch: .
at 8 lines/inch: .

bank of 120 individual print

0-9.
A-Z.

continuous fanfold sprocket
punched stationery,
single sheets, or roll
paper.
.312 Phenomenon: . . . . •. printing.

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system: .

. 23

Arrangement of Heads

.353 Maximum margins
Left:
Right: . . . . .

4.75 to 16.75 inches by
vernier.
up to 22.0 inches by 1/6
inch.
up to 16.5 inches by 1/8
inch.
4.375 inch .
4.375 inch .

Multiple Copies

.231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon:
· 232 Types of master
Multilith:
Xerox:
Spirit:

6.

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: . . . .

no.
yes.
yes.

Input/Output Control.
7600 Modell.
Input/Output Synchronizer.
7603 Models 1 through 9.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

IBM 7070/7074

403:081.420
§

081.

.42

.54

. 422 Off-line:

· 43

Control: . . . .
Format alternatives:

Connection to System

.421 On-line:

one 7600 and one 7603
(both are required).
none.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

. 511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation
Output: . . . . . .

120 print positions per line.
plugboard wiring.

none.
transfer 1 to 16 core storage words to output synchronizer, fill remaining
synchronizer words with
blanks, and print 1 line
forward.
.523 Stepping: . . . . . . . . Single, double, and triple
spacing and space suppression controlled by
plugboard wiring.
· 524 Skipping: . . . . . . . . skip to one of 10 channels
on paper tape loop, before
or after printing, controlled by plugboard
wiring.
none.
· 525 Marking: .
none.
· 526 Searching:

6/62

.56

Code Translation: . . . automatic.

plugboard.
indefinite number; selected
by 4 manual Alteration
Switches or by control information in first word in
output synchronizer .
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes .

Control Operations
Disable: . . . . . .
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Select code: . . . .

no.
yes'.
yes.
no .

Testable Conditions
Disabled:. . . . .
Busy device: . . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Exhausted: . . . .
Punch in carriage
control tape: . .

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions: .

no.
no.
no .
no .
no.
no.
yes; channel 9 only.

. . . none.

.62
. 621 Nominal or peak speed: 150 lines/min .
.622 Important parameters
400 m. sec.
Print 1 line: •.
.624 Effective speeds: . . . 150 lines/minute if processing time.does not ex"
ceed 394 m. sec; peak
speed is maintained for
skips between lines of up
to 2 inches .
.63

Demands on System
Component
m. sec per line
Arithmetic and
Program Control: 6.0 max

Input-Output Operations

. 521 Input:. .
.522 Output: .

. 53

.55

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load: . . . . . . 1 line, containing a maximum of 80 characters
from the 16 words in the
output synchronizer.
. 442 Input-output areas:
core storage.
. 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
each word (each digit by
field definition).
.444 Input-output area
processing is inhibited durlockout: . . . . .
ing data transfer from
core storage to output
synchronizer.
.445 Table control: . . . . . yes; gather-write, .controlled by record definition words .
. 446 Synchronization: .
automatic.

.52

Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: .
Insert spaces: .
Section sizes: .

Connection to Device

. 431 Devices per controller: maximum of 3 .
. 432 Restrictions:. . . . . . total of Printers and Card
Punches may not exceed
3; appropriate 7603 model
must be used.
. 44

Format Control

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments

Percentage
1.5 max .

Adjustment
Comment
Method
Vertical alignment:
platen and vernier knobs.
Horizontal atractor adjustlignment:
ment wheels.
sliding forms
Form width:
tractors.
Form thickvaries distance
ness:
dial
between printwheels and
platen.
Line spacing:
movable shift
6 or 8 lines/
cam
inch .

403:081.720

INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTER

§

081.

.72

.73

.732 Replenishment time: .
Other Controls
Function

Form

Comment

Carriage restore:

button

Space:
Reset:
Form stop:

button
button
switch

Carriage stop:
Platen clutch:

button
2-position knob

Alteration:

4 two-way switches

sets carriage at channell
position.
advances form 1 space.
turns off error alarms.
causes stop when forms
are exhausted.
stops undesired skipping.
disengages platen for
manual adjustment.
select formats.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: .
Stacker: .

Capacity
24-inch stack (**).
. 6-inch stack (**).

©

. 733 Adjustment time:
. 734 Optimum reloading
period:
Basis: . . . . . . .

.8

2 to 3 mins.
printer needs to be stopped
3 to 5 mins .
290 minutes (**).
2-part forms, 22 inches
long, at I-inch line spacing.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Recording:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Burned out fuse:
Transfer to
synchronizer:

none.
ring check
validity check
end-of-form check
none.
clocking check
check

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

validity check

Action

alarm; stop printer.
alarm; optional stop.
optional alarm & stop.
alarm; stop printer.
alarm; stop printer.
branch to error routine;
no printing.

6/62

403:082.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

IBM 707017072/7074

REPORTS

Input-Output
CT
INPUT-OUTPUT: CONSOLE TYPEWRITER

§

.25

082.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . .

.12

Description:

1. Types output data under control of the stored
program.
2. Automatically displays the contents of the
instruction counter and program register when
the stored program stops.
3. Displays and alters content of a core storage
word or addressable register under operator
control.
4. Performs manual typing independently of the rest
of the 7070 system.
.13

Availability:

12 to 15 months (**).

. 14

First Delivery

March, 1960 .

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

. 21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head:
. 212 Reservoirs:. .

. 22

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:
.312 Phenomenon
Input:
Output:
.32

0 - 9
A - Z
+-)./*$#
none.
no.
no.
44 and blank.

continuous fanfold stationery.
key depression.
printing.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by: .
.324 Track use
Data:
. 325 Row use:

character at 10 per inch.
85 print positions.
all for data .

. engraved character font .

. 33

Coding:

.34

Format ComEatibility: • none .

.35

Physical Dimensions

. 351 Overall width:
.352 Length:

8.875 inches .
no limit .

engraved hammers .
typewriter keyboard.
no.

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

.42

Connection to System

Input/Output Control.
7600 Modell or 2.

MultiEle Copies

.231 Maximum number:
.232 Types of master
Multilith:
Xerox:
Spirit:
. 24

pin feed platen - paper
punched both sides.
none .

.3

10
26
8

Sensing aFld Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system:

.23

Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
Alternatives:
FORTRAN set:
Req. COBOL set:
Total:

Console Typewriter.
Part of 7150 Console.
CT.

The Console Typewriter is a modified mM electric
typewriter which stands upon the console desk. It
performs the following functions:

Range of Symbols

depends on stationery.
.421 On-line:

no.
. yes.
. yes .

.422 Off-line:

Arrangement of Heads

.43

Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/ stack:
Method of use:

printing.
1.
1.
one character at a time.

Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

keyboard input.
1.
44 keys.
one character at a time.

©

one 7600, connected to
Arithmetic and Program
Control.
. none .

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller:.!.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . none.

.44

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load
Input: .
Output: . . .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1 word.
limited only by capacity of
core storage.

6/62

403:082.442
§

IBM 7070/7072 /7074

082.

.56

.442 Input-output areas:

· core storage or a control
register.

. 443 Input-output area
access: . . . .

Disabled: . . . ..
Busy device:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:
Exhausted: . . .

· each word (each digit by
field definition).

. 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . .

processing is inhibited
during data transfers
between core storage and
synchronizer register.
· yes, for output .
· automatic .

. 445 Table control:. .
. 446 Synchronization:
.5

PROGRAM F ACILITIES AVAILABLE

. 51

Blocks

Testable Conditions

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions:

.
.
.
.

no.
no.
no .
no.
no .
. no.

. . . . none .

.62
.621 Nominal or peak speed:

10 chari second for output;
manual typing speed for
input (**) •
same as peak speeds, less
allowance for carriage
returns.

.624 Effective speeds: . . .
· 511 Size of block
Input: .
Output:
. 512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . . . .
Output: . . . . .
. 52

1 word.
1 word to capacity of core
storage, defined by
record -definition words .

.63

Demands on System
Component

· fixed - 1 word.
record-definition word.

m. sec per char, or Percentage

Arithmetic and
Program Control:

100

Input-Output Operations

100 .

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:

typical typewriter adjustments.

.72

Other Controls: .

refer to Console section.

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

.521 Input:

load 1 manually typed word
into selected register or
core storage location.
· 522 Output: . . . . . . . . . type 1 block forward; data
is transferred from core
storage to typewriter via
arithmetic register and
synchronizer register .
. 523 Stepping:
steps 1 or 2 lines at end of
each printout operation.
.524 Skipping:
· none.
.525 Marking:
· none.
none.
· 526 Searching:
· 53

. 54

.55

Error

Check or
Interlock

Recording:

validity check

Input:
Input area overflow:

validity check
word length check

Format Control: . . . . fixed format; automatic
carriage return after each
line.

Output block size:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Transfer to synchronizer:

none.
none.
none •
interlock

Control Operations

Alphameric input:

check

Code Translation:

Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt

6/62

automatic; alphameric input data must be typed as
two numeric digits per
character.

. no.
. no.

validity check

Action
type bit representation of invalid
character.
alarm.
print asterisk; data is
not stored.

wait.
branch to error
routine.
keyboard locks if nonnumeric key is pressed.

403:091. 100
•

II

STANDARD

ED]?

IBM 7070

REPORTS

Input-Output
729 MT
INPUT-OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

§

.12

091.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

.12

Description:

Since a 7070 word may consist of either ten numeric
digits plus sign or five alphameric characters, a
mode change character, D., is automatically recorded on the tape whenever the data mode changes from
alphameric to numeric or vice versa. When the
tape is read, the mode change characters insure
that each word will be translated back into the proper
internal form. When recording in the numeric mode,
up to five high-order zeros in each word can be
eliminated and not recorded on the tape; they are
filled in automatically when the tape is read.

. Magnetic Tape Unit •
729 II, IV, V, VI.
MT.

These tape units are used in the mM 1401, 1410,
7040, 7080, and 7090 series systems as well as in
the 7070 and 7074. In tape width, density and format, they are compatible with the 7330 and 727 tape
units. The only significant differences among the
four models are in recording densities and tape
speeds. These are summarized in the following
table:
Model

Every tape instruction that might cause a priority
signal when it is completed automatically creates an
initial status word in a fixed core storage location;
a final status word is generated at the end of each
read or write operation. The status words are used
by the priority routine to determine the specific
cause of the priority signal. At the programmer's
option, priority interruptions may occur at the end
of every tape operation or only when error conditions
are detected by the numerous checking circuits.

Transfer rate,
Tape speed, Density,
inches/sec.
char/inch char/sec.

II

75.0

IV

112.5

V

75.0

VI

112.5

200
556
200
556
200
556
800
200
556
800

Description (Cont'd.)

15,000
41,667
22,500
62,500
15,000
41,667
60,000
22,500
62,500
90,000

Because the internal data structures of the mM 7070
and 1401 systems are different, certain precautions
must be observed to insure tape compatibility between the two systems. The 7070 mode change and
segment mark characters have no special significance
to the 1401; they will be read into its core storage
just as any other characters. When preparing tape
for the 7070, however, the 1401 must insert the
mode change character between alphameric and
numeric sections of data. The 1401's word separator character, =, has no Significance to the 7070
and should not be used in preparing tapes for it.
The optional Compressed Tape Feature enables the
1401 to process tapes written by a 7070 in the zero
elimination mode.

Up to ten tape units can be connected to each of four
channels in a 7070 system, and up to four tape operations can be performed simultaneously with internal
processing. The maximum number of tape channels
is reduced to two if 1301 Disk Storage is installed
and/or if the 800 characters-per-inch type density
is to be used. Different models of the 729 can be
intermixed on the same channel.

Optional Feature
The 7070' s scatter- read and gather-write capabilities make it possible to distribute sub-blocks of a
block of data read from tape into various portions of
core storage under the control of record definition
words in the stored program. Similarly, data from
different sections of core storage can be assembled
into one block on tape.
The optional record-mark control mode provides
additional flexibility and facilitates the handling of
variable-length records. Detection of a record
mark in a data word signals the end of a sub- block,
and control is transferred to the next sequential
record definition word.

©

Tape Switching Feature: modifies a tape unit so that
it can be logically switched between two tape channels,
two computers, or a computer and an off-line auxiliary unit under operator control. The 7155 Switch
Control Console is also required.
.13

Availability:

.14

First Delivery
729
729
729
729

II:
IV:
V:
VI:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

• • • . • 12 to 15 months (**).

•
·
·
•

March, 1960.
March, 1960
May, 1962
May, 1962

6/62

403:091.200

§

IBM 7070

.33

091.

Coding:... . . . . . as in Data Code Table No.

4.

•2

PHYSICAL FORM

.• 21

Drive Mechanism

.34

Format Compatibility
Other device or system Code translation

.211 Drive past the head:.
.212 Reservoirs
Number:
Form: . .
Capacity:
. 213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive:
.22

. pinch roller friction.
.2.
. vacuum.
. about 7 feet •
• motor •
. motor.

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:
• 222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system:

mM 7330, 727 Tape
units: • . . . • • • • • not required.
.35

Multiple Copies: .••• none.

.24

Arrangement of Heads

.42

.3

Use of station:
Stacks: . . . •
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

· recording.
• 1.
.7.
1 row at a time.

Use of station:
Distance: ••
Stacks: •.••
Heads/stack: •
Method of use:

sensing.
• 0.3 inch.
· 1.

0.50 inch •
2,400 feet per reel.

• 351 Overall width: ••.•
• 352 Length: • . . •

· magnetic head.
.4
· magnetic head •
• two-gap head provides read-.41
after-write checking.

. 23

Physical Dimensions

CONTROLLER
. Tape Control.
7604 Models 1,2,3.
TC .

Identity:

Connection to System

.421 On-line
Model 1 has two channels and handles 200 and 556
char/inch only.
Model 2 has one channel and handles 200 and 556
char/inch only.
.Model 3 has two channels and handles 200, 556,
and 800 char/inch.
The following c!ombinations are possible:

.7.

First 7604 Second 7604
Number of
Tape Channels Model No. Model No•

1 row at a time.

EXTERNAL STORAGE

Without 7907:
2

.31

3

Form of Storage

4

.311 Medium:

.•

.312 Phenomenon:
.32

· plastic tape with magnetiZable surface.
• magnetiZation.

With 7907 Model 2:

2
1
2

2
1

Positional Arrallgement

.321 Serial by: • • . • • . . • 1 to N rows at 200, 556, or
(Models V and VI) 800
rows per inch; N limited
by available core storage.
.322 Parallel by: • . • . • •.• 7 tracks.
.324 Trach use
Data: . . . . . .
· 6.
Redundancy check:
.1.
Timing: . . . .
· 0 (self-clocking).
Control signals:
• O.
Unused: . .
• O.
Total: . . .
• 7•
. 325 Row use
Data: . "
.
· 1 to N.
Redundancy check:
.1.
Timing: . . . .
• O.
Control signals:
· 0 (record and segment
marks are optional).
Unused: . . . .
Inter-block gap:

6/62

With 7907 Modell:

2
lor 3
1
1
2
lor 3
2
1

· O.
· 0.75 inch.

Note: 7907 Data Channel is required for 1301 Disk Storage
Units and/or 1414 Input/Output Synchronizer.

.422 Off-line

.43

. may be switched to another
channel, another computer,
or an off-line auxiliary
unit by means of the optional 7830 Tape Switching
Feature and 7155 Switch
C'.ontrol Console.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: up to six 729 lIs, IVs, Vs,
and VIs, in any combination, per tape channel
(up to 10 per channel with
Additional Tape Attachment, 7835, 7836, 7837
or 7838).
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . . 729 Vs and VIs at 800 chari
inch can be connected only
to 7604 Model 3.

403:091.440

INPUT.OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

§

091.

.44

.525 Marking: .. . . . . . . inter-block gap, segment
mark (SM) , tape mark
(TM), and mode change

Data Transfer Control

(Ll) •

.441 Size of load:

.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .

1 to N words from (or into)
different areas of core
storage, as specified by
record definition words.
· core storage.

.526 Searching:
.53

none.

Code Translation: .

• each word (each digit by
field definition).

. 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . •
• 445 Table control:

.54
· none .
· yes; scatter-read and
gather-write, controlled
by record definition words.
.446 Synchronization: . • . • automatic.

Control: . . . . .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

Suppress zeros:

. 51

Blocks

Insert point:. . .
Insert spaces:
Recording density:
Section sizes:

.511 Size of block:

. 512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . • • •
Output:
. 52

1 to N words, limited by
available core storage
(blocks less than 3 words
long are normally treated
as noise) .

.55

Input: . . . . . . . . . . read one block forward
into core storage locations specified by record
definition word(s); record
mark control is optional.
.522 Output: . . . . . . . . . write one block forward
from core storage locations specified by record
definition word(s); record
mark control is optional.
. 523 Stepping:
· none.
.524 Skipping:
1) one block backward
(backspace) .
2) 4 inches forward (to
skip and erase defective
tape areas).
3) N segments forward or
backward (N is specified
in record definition word;
a segment is the data between two segment marks
on the tape).

©

.56

· program.
· undefined.
· yes; scatter-read and
gather -write .
· yes; up to 5 per numeric
word .
· no.
· no.
yes.
· yes.

Control Operations

Select code: .
Rewind:
Unload: . . .

Input- Output Operations

.521

Format Control

Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format:. . .

• gap on tape or negative
record definition word in
core storage.
· negative record definition
word.

· automatic, between tape
codes in Data Code Table
No.4 and internal numeric or alphameric modes
(Ll on tape signifies mode
change) .

". disabled after unloading.
· yes; priority signal.
· yes, normal, all alphameric, zero suppression,
or record mark control:
no.
· yes .
· yes.

Testable Conditions
Disabled: .•
Busy device:.
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:

· yes.
no.
· no.
· no.
· yes.
yes; 14 feet from physical
end.
End of segment: . . . yes .

.6

PERFORMANCE

. 61

Conditions:

.62

Speeds

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

. . . . none.

6/62

IBM 7070

403:091.621
§

.63

091.

.621 Nominal or peak speed
Model n:
Model IV:
Model V:
Model VI:

Demands on S:ystem

15,000 or 41,667 char/sec.
22,500 or 62,500 char/sec.
15,000, 41,667 or 60,000
char/sec.
22,500, 62,500 or 90,000
char/sec.

Condition

Core Storage:

Models II & V
200 char/ioch
556 char/inch
Models IV & VI
200 char/inch
556 char/Inch
Model V
800 char/inch
Model VI
800 char/inch

.622 Important parameters
Name

Value

Density
Models II & IV:
Models V & VI:
Tape speed
Models n & V:
Models IV & VI:
Start time
Models n & V
read: . . . .
write:
Models IV & VI
read: .
write:
Stop time
Models n & V
read:
write:
Models IV & VI
read:
write:
Full rewind time
Models II & V:
Models IV & VI:
Inter-block gap:
. 623 Overhead
Models n & V:
Models IV & VI:
.624 Effective speeds
Models II & V
200 char/inch:

.

·...

2.1 m.sec.
5.1 m.sec.

· ...

2.1 m.sec.
3.B m.sec.
.

.
.

556 char/inch: •
Models IV & VI
200 char/inch: .
556 char/inch: .
Model V
BOO char/inch: .
Model VI
BOO char/inch: .

Percentage of
ua nsfer time

1.8
5.0

0+ 0.0012N
0+ 0.OO12N

2.8
7.6

0+ 0.OO12N

7.2

0+ 0.OO12N

10.8

/----

Note: These demands are based upon alphameric mode; they will
be ha If the size in numeric mode when there is no zero
elimination.

10.5 m.sec.
7.5 m. sec.

· ...

or

where N =
char/block

75.0 inches/sec.
112.5 inches/sec.

6.7 m.sec.
5.0 m.sec.

~r

0+ 0.0012N
0+ O. 0012N

200 or 556 char/inch.
200, 556 or BOO char/inch.

· ..

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments

.72

Adjustment

Method

Comment

Recording density:
Densities option:

switch
switch

selects 1 of 2 densities.
selects any pair of
densities (Models V
and VI only).

Other Controls
Function

Form

Comment

Address selection:

dial

12.6 m.sec/block.
B• B m. sec/block.

Load rewind:

button

15, OOON/(N + IB9) chari
sec.
41,667N/(N+ 525) chari
sec.

Unload:

button

22, 500N/(N + 19B) chari
sec.
62, 500N/(N + 550) chari
sec.

File protection:

ring on
reel

selects unit address
0-9.
lowers tape into
reservoirs and
rewinds tape to
load point.
removes tape from
reservoirs and
raises upper portion of head assembly.
ring permits writing.

1.2 min.
0.9 min.
0.75 inch .

.73
60, OOON/(N + 756) chari
sec.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled

90, OOON/(N + 792) chari
sec.
where N = char/block
(See graphs.)

...-_ _-,-A

6/62

m.sec
block

ComEonent

Stora~

Reel:

I AUERBACH.L~

CaEaci!},:
•••••

I

••

2, 400 feet; for 1, 000 -char
blocks,S, 000, 000 chars
at 200-char/inch,
11,300,000 chars at
556-char/inch, or
14,400,000 chars at
BOO char/inch .

INPUT-OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

§

403:091.732

091.

.732 Replenishment time:

1. 0 to 1. 5 mins.
tape unit needs to be stopped •

. 734 Optimum reloading
period
Models II & V: .
Models IV & VI:
.8

6 mins.
4 mins.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Recording:
Reading:
Input block size:

Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exha usted med ium
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Recording level:
Word length:
Misplaced /:; character:
Code translation:

Check or
Interlock

Action

read-after-write with
lateral parity check
lateral & longitudinal
parity
compare working &
stop addresses when
gap is reached
none.
all codes acceptable.
reflective spot or tape
mark
none.
interlock
signal strength check
check

wait.
priority signa 1.
priority signal.

check
2-out-of-5 bit check

priority Signal.
priority signa 1.

priority signal.
priority signal.

priority signal.

priority signa L

Note: "Priority signal" indicates that digit position 1 of the final
status word is set to a panicular condition code, and control
is transferred to a tape priority routine which takes the appropriate action.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

IBM 7070

403:091.800

EFFECTIVE SPEED
IBM 72911 & 729 V

10,000,00 0

.- -

-

- .•

7

4

_.

.- -

-

-

2

1,000,000

.-

- --

t-

7

4

-

. -

2

Effective Speed,
char/sec.

100,000
7
~

1-._-

-

4

V _ ~f-"

800 char/inch (Model V only):::::::;,..
-~-

2

~~

V

VV
V

w

7

-

.

556 c,har/ln1chl

V

...-;~

10,000

>-:"

r-

200

c4a~/!nch

~

7"

V

4

/V

2

/

1,000

VV

~

- ---

7

4

2

100
2

10

4

7

2

4

100
Characters Per Block

6/62

7

2

1,000

4

7
10,000

403:091.801

INPUT-OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

EFFECTIVE SPEED
IBM 729IV & 729 VI

10,000,00 0

-7

-- _...

..

-

-

_.

-- _ .
.. - - ---- f--- _.- --- -, --_. -.
-_.r---

-

-

.-.

4

t--

-

-

-- -

2

1,000,000

-

.-- 1:=

-- . -

-

7

--- -I--

---

-

--'

~

.--

..

-

... ,-

-- --

--..

4
--

-

- -

2

100,000
7

t.....-

---

800 char/inch (Model VI only) ...
Effective Speed,
char/sec.

4

V VI--~

2

V
-;,..c

10,000

1,000

V f-

~

.......

-,

200 cha~/inch

I

"
-

V

t-

V

4

2

V

:-.- 556 char/inch

V

ra'-

i-

7

~

~

V

V

~

7
4

2

100

4

2
10

2

7

4

100

7

2
1,000

4

7
10,000

Characters Per Block

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

403: 101. 100

.STAN""D
EDP
•

IBM 7070/7074

REPORTS

Input-Output
IS
INPUT-OUTPUT: INQUIRY STATION

§

101 .

.22

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Inquiry Station.
7900 Modell.
IS.

Description:
The 7900 Inquiry Station is a modified mM Model B
electric typewriter with control circuits and indicator lights mounted on a 48 - by 3D-inch desk. It is
used for interrogating and printing replies from a
7070 system. Up to five Inquiry Stations can be connected to each of two Inquiry Control Synchronizers
on the 7600 Input/Output Control. Only one station
at a time can be operative on each synchronizer.
Maximum cable length is 2,500 feet.

. 221 Recording system:
.222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system:
.23

.24

engraved hammers .
typewriter keyboard.
no.

Multiple Copies

.231 Maximum number:
.232 Typ~s of master
Multilith:
Xerox
Spirit: .

Each synchronizer has a capacity of 10 words. Because the first word in each message must be a control word, maximum data length is 90 digits or 45
alphameric characters per message. The control
word designates which of the stations is originating
or receiving the message and which of three message
formats on a punched tape loop is to be used. Lengths .25
and formats of all inquiries and replies are preset
by the tape loop and the stored program. Control
words for inquiries are automatically supplied by the
tape loop.
An inquiry can be typed whenever no other Inquiry
Station on the same synchronizer is in use. Each
character enters the synchronizer position designated by the tape loop as it is typed. When the typing is completed and the Release button is pressed,
the 7070 receives a priority signal and branches to
a subroutine which processes the inquiry. The reply
message and its control word are transferred from
core storage to the synchronizer, and the reply is
typed by the selected Inquiry Station. Then, by
means of the "priority release" instruction, the 7070
returns to the main routine at the point where the
interruption occurred. Internal processing is inhibited only during the data transfers between the
synchronizers and core storage.

Sensing and Recording Systems

· depends on stationery.
· yes.
· yes.
· yes.

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use:

· printing.
.1.
1.
· one character at a time.

Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use:

· keyboard input.
.1.
.44 keys.
· one character at a time.

Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters: . . .
Special: . . .
Alternative s:
FORTRAN set:
Req. COBOL set:
Total: . . . . . .

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:
. 312 Phenomenon
Input:
Output:

0- 9.
A - z.
&.-$*,#/
none.
no.
no.
· 44 plus space.
10
26
8

continuous fanfold stationery .
key depression.
printing.

. 13

Availabili!y:

12 to 15 months (**) .

. 14

First Delivery:

March, 1960 (**) .

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

. 321 Serial by: .
. 324 Track use:

. 21

Drive Mechanism

. 325 Row use:

• character at 10 per inch .
· 104 print positions for
data .
· all for data .

.33

Coding:

· engraved character font .

.34

Format

.32

. 211 Drive past the head:
. 212 Reservoirs: .

platen friction (pin -feed
platen is optional).
none.

©

Positional Arrangement

Compatibili~:

1962 by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

· none.

6/62

IBM 707017074

403: 101.350

§

.52

101.

.35

Physical Dimensions

.351 Overall width:.
. 352 Length: . . . .
.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

. 42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
.43

11 inches (15 inches with
optional carriage).
no limit .

• Inquiry Control Synchronizer.
4671 and 4672.
(attached to 7600 Input/Output Control).

· 2; first is No. 4671, second
is No. 4672.
· manual typing .

.521 Input: . . . . . . . . . . transfer one block of
manually typed data from
synchronizer to core
storage .
. 522 Output: . . . . . . . . . transfer one block from
core storage to synchronizer, then to Inquiry
Station .
.523 Stepping: . . • . . . . . step variable number of
columns, tab stops, or
lines, according to punches
in control tape.
.524 Skipping: .
· none.
.525 Marking: .
none .
. 526 Searching:.
none .
.53

Code Translation:

.54

Format Control

automatic.

Control:
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point:
Section sizes: .
Insert spaces: .

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller:. 5 per Inquiry Control Synchronizer.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . . none.
. 44

Input-Output Operations

Data Transfer Control
.55

.441 Size of load: . . . .
.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-Output area
access: . • . . .

1 to 9 words plus control
word.
core storage.

Control Operations
Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
Select inquiry unit:

· each word (each digit by
field definition).

.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . .

processing is inhibited
.56
during data transfers
between core storage
and synchronizers.
.445 Table control: . . . . . yes; scatter-read and
gather-write, controlled
by record definition words.
. 446 Synchroriization: . . . . automatic.

Disabled: . . . . .
Busy device:
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:
Exhausted: . . .

.5

PROGRAM F ACILITIES AVAILABLE

.6

PERFORMANCE

.51

Blocks

.61

Conditions:

. 62

Speeds

. 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: . • . .
Output: . . .

6/62

maximum of 90 digits or
45 alphameric characters.
record definition words or
limit counter.
record definition words or
limit counter.

· punched tape.
.3.
· yes.
: yes .
· no.
· yes.
· yes .

·
·
•
·
·

no .
yes; initiate priority signal.
yes, in control word .
no.
yes, in control word.

Testable Conditions
no.
no.
no.
no.
no .
no .

. . . . none .

. 621 Nominal or peak speed
Input: . . . . .
Output:
.624 Effective speeds:

manual typing speed.
10 char/sec.
same as peak speeds, less
allowance for carriage
returns.

403:101.630

INPUT-OUTPUT: INQUIRY STATION

§

.8

101 .

. 63

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

Demands on System
Error
Component
Arithmetic and
Progra m Control: input
output
Inquiry Control
Synchronizer:
input
output

m.sec per
block

or

3.0 average
17.5 average
9,000 maximum
9,000 maximum

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:

. 72

Other Controls

Percentage

variable.
variable.
100.
100.

typical typewriter adjustments.

Form

Format selection:

3 buttons selects one of the
three formats on
control tape.
signals synchronizer
button
that a request is to
be made.
initiates 7070 priority
button
signal at end of an
inquiry.
terminates inquiry
button
without a reply.

Release:
Cancel:

©

none.
none.
check
automatic cut-off.
2-out-of-5 bit
check

Action

alarm

alarm on input,branch
to error routine on

output.
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Illegal format or
station number:

none.
none.
interlock

Typing error:

check

Comment

Function

Request:

Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:'
In valid code:

Check or
Interlock

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

check

wait.

branch to error
routine .
alarm; depress Cancel
key and re-type.

6/62

403: 102.1 00

.S!AODARO
EDP
•

IBM 707017074

REPORTS

Input-Output
I-OS
INPUT-OUTPUT: 1414 SYNCHRONIZER

§

102.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Description

Input-Output Synchronizer.
1414 Model 6.
I-OS.

.121 Data Transmission- Unit, 1009 Modell: This device
enables the 7070 or 7074 system to transmit and
receive data over telephone or telegraph lines at
speeds of 75, 150, 250, or 300 characters per second. The unit at the other end of the line can be
a similarly equipped mM 7000 or 1400 series system,
a 7701 or 7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal' or a 1013 Card Transmission Terminal. The
1009 uses two of the six buffers in a 1414 Synchronizer and requires the #3238 Data Transmission Unit
Adapter. One buffer is loaded while the other is
unloaded, so messages of variable length can be processed. (See also Section 402: 101) ..

The 1414 Model 6 Input/Output Synchronizer is used
to control a variety of communications devices in a
7070 or 7074 system. It contains six 80-character
buffers. Each buffer can be equipped with the appropriate adapter and assigned to the input or output
.122 Paper Tape Reader, 1011 Modell: This unit reads
data from punched paper tape at a speed of 500 rows
line of a specific device. The 1414 Input/Output Synper second. From five to eight tracks can be read.
chronizer is in turn connected to one channel of a
The tape can be either chad or chadless and_ in the
7907 Data Channel on the 7070 or 7074 system. A
single data channel can be shared by the 1414 and
form of strips, reels, or center-feed rolls. The
1011 uses one of the six buffers in a 1414 Synchroa 7631 File Control through the use of the #3224 Data
nizer and requires the #5514 Paper Tape Reader
Channel Switch. Two 1414s (one per data channel)
Adapter. Block length is limited to 80 characters.
can be connected to a system.
(See also Section 402:071).
Delays in executing the stored program are minimized during communications device input-output opera- .123 Remote Inquiry Unit, 1014 Modell: This unit consists of a modified electric typewriter with control
tions. A" channel select" instruction selects the
circuits and indicator-lights, mounted on a 29- by
I/O channel and sends the address of the first of a
series of channel commands to the 7907 Data Chan24 -inch table. It is used for interrogating and
printing replies from a 7070 or 7074 system, and
nel; the 7907 then assumes control of the input-output operation while the central processor continues
may be located up to eight miles away. Message
executing the stored program. Channel commands
length is limited to 78 characters. Up to ten Inquiry
may be of the read, write, control, or sense type.
Units can be connected to a #6136 Remote Inquiry
A read or write command initiates the transfer of
Adapter, and one or two adapters can be connected
a block of up to 80 characters between a buffer in
to a 1414 Synchronizer. Each adapter requires two
the 1414 and core storage. A control command
of the six buffers. (See also Section 402: 102.)
transmits an order to the 1414 which selects the desired communications device. A sense command
.124 Telegraph Input-Output, #7864: This adapter permits
transmits a lO-digit word into core storage which
direct connection of a telegraph transmitter and reindicates the status of the selected device. The
ceiver to a 7070 or 7074 system. Maximum data
powerful priority interrupt facilities of the 7070
transmission rate is about ten characters per second,
series are utilized to service the communications
and the data portion of a message should not exceed
devices.
80 characters in length. The #7864 adapter controls
one telegraph input unit and one output unit; each
Data transfer between the 1414 and the 7907 Data
unit requires one buffer in the 1414 Synchronizer. A
Channel requires 11 microseconds per character.
total of up to four telegraph units can be connected
Transfer rates between the 1414 and the communicato the 1414 through the addition of the #7871 Telegraph Input and/or the #7875 Telegraph Output,
tions devices connected to it depend upon the individual devices; these are described below.
which control one unit each.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

403: 111.1 00

II
•

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7070
Simultaneous Operation s

REPORTS

SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS

.3

§ 111.

CLASSES OF OPERATIONS

.1

SPECIAL UNITS:. . . . none .

Class

Member

. 12

Description

A:

A major feature of the 7070 is the flexibility and simultaneity of its input-output operations. Up to four
magnetic tape channels can be attached, and a read
or·write operation on each channel can occur simultaneously with internal processing. (If 1301 Disk
Storage and/or the 800 character-per~inch tape density are used, the maximum number of tape channels
is reduced to two.) Magnetic tape and disc storage
have direct access to core storage through their respective controllers. Execution of the stored program is delayed for one 6-microsecond cycle each
time a word is transferred between core storage and
the tape or disc storage controller.

B:

read card on Console Card
Reader.
read card on 7500 Card
Reader.
punch card.
print or advance forms on
7400 Printer.
read or write on magnetic
tape.
rewind magnetic tape.
read or write in disc storage.
seek record in disc storage.
input or output on Console
Typewriter.
input or output on Inquiry
Station.
input or output on devices
attached to 1414 Input/
Out put Synchronizer.
internal processing.

In systems using unit record input-output, up to
three 7500 Card Readers and three output devices
(printers and/or card punches) can operate simultaneously. They are buffered by means of a magnetic drum revolving at 12,375 revolutions per minute in the 7600 Model 1 Input/Output Control. The
stored program is delayed from one to six milliseconds each time a load of data (one card or one line)
is transferred between a unit record buffer and core
storage.
Console Card Reader and Console Typewriter operations are unbuffered and cannot occur simultaneously
with other operations.
Effective utilization of the 7070's capabilities for simultaneous operations is facilitated by the "Priority
Processing" feature, which can interrupt the stored
program and transfer control to priority routines
upon completion of selected input-output or auxiliary
storage operations.

.2

C:
D:

E:

F:
G:
H:
I:

J:
K:
P:
.4

...

RULES
a + i + P = at most 1.
b.
= at most 3.
c+d
= at most 3.
e
=atmostT.
e +f
= at. most lOT.
g
= at most 2.
g+h
= at most 10 (for 1301 Disk Storage).
g+h
= at most 12 (for 7300 Disk Storage).
e+ g
= at most 4.
j
= at most 2.
k
= at most 12 (6 per 1414 Synchronizer).
where T = number of magnetic tape channels (T is at
most 4; when 1301 Disk Storage is used, T is at
most 2).

CONFIGURATION
. . . none.
CONDITIONS:

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

403: 121.1 01
•

STANDARD

EDP
_

REPORTS

IBM 70701707217074
Instruction List

§

INSTRUCTION LIST

121.
INSTRUCTION

OPERATION
Op.

Index Control Address Mnemonic Op.

4114
-n4
+53
-53
+17
-17
+n8
-n8
+n9

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

FD
FD
FD
FD
FD
FD
FD
FD
FD

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

An
Sn
M
D
AA
SA
AS
SS
AAS

Arithmetic
(An) + (Y) An.
(An) - (Y) - - An.
Al & A2
(A3) x (Y) (AI & A2) -:- (Y) '---+ A2; remainder (AI) + I (Y) I - - A!.
(AI) - I (Y) I - - A!.
(Y) + (An) - - Y.
(Y) - (An) Y.
I (Y) I + (An) - - Y.

+75
+74
-74
+76
-76
+77
-77
+71
+73
-73
-75

X
X
X

-

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

FZA
FA
FS
FAD
FADS
FAA
FSA
FR
FM
FD
FDD

Floating Point Arithmetic (Optional FDA):!:
(Y) - - . AI, normalized.
(AI) + (Y) _
Al & A2, normalized.
(AI) - (Y) Al & A2, normalized.
(AI & A2) + (Y) - - Al & A2, normalized.
(AI & A2) + (Y) - - Al & A2, not normalized.
(AI) + I (Y) I - - Al & A2, normalized.
(AI) - I (Y) I - - Al & A2, normalized.
Round off (AI).
(Y) x (AI) - - Al & A2, normalized.
(AI) -:- (Y) - - AI; 'remainder- A2.
(AI & A2) -:- (Y) - - AI; remainder - - A2.

X

X
X
X

-

X
X
X

-

-

-

-

Y
Y
Y

A!.

:!: standard on 7072.
+50
+50
+50
+50

X
X
X
X

-50
-50
-50
-50

X

-

J

SRn
SRRn
SLn
SLCn

OOK
OIK
02K
0300

SR
SRR
SL
SLC

Shift
Shift
Shift
Shift

(AI
(AI
(AI
(AI

Shift
Shift
Shift
Shift

(AI & A2) K places right from position P in A!.
(AI) K places left from position P in A!.
(A2) K places right from position P in A2.
(AI & A2) K places left from position P in A2.

X
X

-

X

J

-50
-50
-50
-50

X
X
X
X

-

P4K
P5K
P6K
P7K

SRS
SLS
SRS
SLS

+45
-45
-48
+46
-46
+47
-47
+48

X
X

J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J

Y
Y
Y

XL
XU
XLIN
XZA
XZS

X

X
X
X
X
X

-

Logic: Shifting
Shift (An) K places right (K~lO).
Shift (An) K places right and round.
Shift (An) K places left.
Shift (An) left and count positions shifted; stop on non -zero
digit and place count in index word J.

nOK
niK
n2K
n300

L
L
L
L
L

XA

XS
XSN

©

&
&
&
&

A2)
A2)
A2)
A2)

K places right (KS20).
K places right and round.
K places left.
left and count as in SLCn.

Logic: Indexing
(Y) - - . J; J is any of the 99 index words.

0> - Y o
(Y) - - J, with positions 2-5 and 6-9 interchanged.
L - - 12-5; L is a 4-digit literal.
L - - J2-5; sign of J is set to minus.
02-5) + L - - J2-5.
02-5) - L - - 12-5'
L - - J6-9; loads non-indexing portion.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

403: 121.1 02
§

IBM 7070 170721 7074

121.

INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.
INSTRUCTION
OPERATION

Op. Index Control Address Mnemonic Op.
-44
+44
-43
+49
-49

X
X
X
X
X

J
J
J
J
J

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

+nS

X

FD

Y

Cn

-15
+03

X
X

FD
dp

Y
Y

CA
CD

-03
-03
-03

X
X
X

30
60
90

Y
Y
Y

CSA
CSM
CSP

+01
+02
+nO
-nO
+51
+51

X
X
X
X
X
X

J
-

Y
Y
Y
y:
Y
Y

B
BLX
BZn
BMn
BAS
BCB

+6e
+40
-40
-41
+nl
+41
-03
+00

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

es

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

BES
BL
BH
BE
BVn
BFV
BSC
HB

sO
nl

-

00
04

-

BXM
BXN
BCX

B1X

BOX

+66
+67
+68

X
X
X

FD
FD
FD

Y
Y
Y

LL
LE
LEH

+60
-61
-62
+55

X
X
X
X

c
c
c
00

Y
Y
Y
Y

BcL
cLN
cLF

+64
+64

X
X

-

Y
0097

PR
PR

PC

Log!c: Indexing (Cont'd. )
Branch to Y if sign of J is minus.
Branch to Y if 02-5) is non-zero.
Branch to Y if 02-5) ~ 06-9).
.
02-5) + 1 _ Jz-~; then branch to Y if 02-5) < 06-9).
02-5) - 06-9) 12-5); then branch to Y unless result
is 0 or a sign change.
Logic: Comparisons
Compare (An) with (Y); turn on high, low, or equal indicator and turn off the other two.
Compare I (AI) I With I (Y) I; proceed as above.
Compare (digit position p of Y) with the digit d; proceed
as in Cn.
Compare sign of Y to alpha; proceed as in Cn.
Compare sigh of Y to minus; proceed as in Cn.
Compare sign of Y to plus; proceed as in Cn.
Log!c: Branching
Branch unconditionally to Y.
Store (instruction counter) in 12-5 and branch to Y.
Branch to Y if (An) = O.
Branch to Y if sign of An is minus.
Branch to Y if alteration switch s is ON (s = 1, 2, 3, or 4).
Branch to Y if tape/disc channel n is busy (n = 1,2,3, or
4).
Branch to Y if electronic switch es is ON (Irs. es 'S. 39).
Branch to Y if low indicator is ON.
Branch to Y if high indicator is 'ON.
Branch to Y if equal indicator is ON.
Branch to Y if An overflow indicator is ON.
Branch to Y if field overflow indicator is ON.
Branch to Y if sign change indicator is ON.
Halt; type (instruction counter) and (program register)
and branch to Y when Start Key is pressed.
Logic: Table Look-up
Table location is defined by list of RDWs beginning at Y;
search argument must be in A3. If search is successful,
place found value in ·A3 and its address in positions 2-5
of index word 98 and skip next instruction.
Search for lowest value.
Search for table value equal to (A3).
Search for table value equal to or greater than (A3).
Log!c: Priori~ Processin~
Branch to Y if stacking latch c is ON.
Turn on stacking latch c.
Turn off stacking latch c.
Prevent certain stacking latches from causing interruption,
according to mask word in Y.
Release priority and re-enter main program at Y.
Release priority and resume main program at point where
it was interrupted.

~

6/62

I AUERBAC~

INSTRUCTION LIST

§

403: 121.1 03

121.

INSTRUCTION LIST-Contd.
INSTRUCTION
OPERATION

Op. Index Control Address
-00
-01

+41
+41
-03
-03
-03
-03
-03
+n3
-n3

+16
-16
-nl
+n2
-n2

-

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

01
02
02
03
31
61
91

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

FD
FD
FD
FD
FD
FD
FD

Mnemonic Op.

-

Y
Y
Y

NOP
SMFV
HMFV
SMSC
HMSC
MSA
MSM
MSP

Logic: Miscellaneous
Halt; type. (instruction counter) and (program register).
No, operation.
Set field-overflow sense/stop switch to SENSE.
Set field-overflow sense/stop switch to HALT.
Set sign-change sense/stop switch to SENSE.
Set sign-change sense/stop switch to HALT.
Make sign of Y alpha.
Make sign of Y minus.
Make sign of Y plus.

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

ZAn
ZSn
ZAA
ZSA
ZSTn
STn
STDn

Data Transfer
0 An, then (Y) An.
o - An, then -(Y)--+ An.
o - AI, then I (Y) I ~A1.
o -- AI, then - I (Y) I - - AI.
o --- Y, then (An) - - Y.
(An) - - Y; digits outside field- defined portion are unchanged.
(An) --+ Y; same as STn, except sign of An is ignored.

-

HP

+65
-65
+56

X
X
X

J
J
J

Y
Y
Y

RS
RG
ENA

-56

X

J

Y

ENS

+57

X

J

Y

ENB

-57

X

J

Y

EAN

+9n

-

X

00

Y

(P)DR

-+9n

X

01

Y

(P)DW

+95

X

-

Y

PDS

-95

X

-

--nm

DAR

In the following block transfer operations, a list of record
definition words (RDWs) starting at Y defines the initial
and final addresses of each of the smaller blocks; starting address of the larger block is in index word J.
Scatter 1 block of data into several smaller blocks.
Gather several blocks of data into 1 larger block.
Same as RS, except each numeric word is converted to 2
alphameric words during the transfer.
Same as ENA, except low-order character of each alpha
word indicates sign of the numeric word.
Same as ENA, except leading zeros are converted to
blanks.
Same as RG, except each pair of alphameric words is
converted to 1 numeric word.
Internal Storage: 7300 Disk Storage
Read one record on channel n into core storage under
control of RDWs starting at Y. *
Write one record on channel n from core storage under
control of RDWs starting at Y. *
Branch to Y if access arm is not available; otherwise seek
disc record whose address is in A3, and send priority
signal upon completion.
Release access arm nm for another seek operation.
*Priority signal occurs upon completion if sign of
instruction is +.

+93

X

IF

Y

(P)DCS

-+94

X

IF

Y

(P)DCS

-

©

Internal Storage: 1301 Disk Storage
Select I/O channel 1 and transmit channel command at Y
to file control; F = 1 for packed data or 6 for unpacked
data. *
Same as above, except channel 2 is selected. *

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

403: 121.104
§

IBM 7070/707217074
INSTRUCTION LI ST-Contd.

121.
INSTRUCTION

OPERATION
Op. Index Control Address Mnemonic Op.

-+40
-+10

U

V

-

U

V

Y

+20

U

V

Y

-+50

U

V

Y

+60

-

-

Y

-

•

Channel commands for the 1301 are as follows (minus sign
denotes last command in a series):
Perform control operation defined by word in core storage
loc~tion UV (seek, set mode, prepare to verify, etc.)
Read from disc storage into core storage locations UV
through Y.
Write into disc storage from core storage locations UV
through Y.
Transmit "sense" information concerning error and attention conditions from file control to core storage locations
UV through Y.
Branch to next channel command in location Y.

* Priority Signal occurs upon completion if sign of instruction is +.
+69

-

nO

-

US

+69

X

nl

Y

UR

+69

X

n2

Y

UP,UW

+69

X

n4

Y

TYP

+8n

X

ml

Y

(P)TR

-+8n

X

m2

Y

(P)TRR

+8n

X

m3

Y

(P)TW

-+8n

X

m4

Y

(P)TWR

+8n

X

m5

Y

(P)TWZ

-+8n

X

m6

Y

(P)TWC

-

-

-

6/62

Input- Output: Cards and Printer
Turn on the program switch exit associated with input synchronizer n.
Transfer up to 16 words from input synchronizer n to core
storage under control of record definition word(s), the
first of which is in Y; then read a card.
Transfer up to 16 words to output synchronizer n frGm core
storage under control of record definition word(s), the first
of which is in Y; perform a punch/write cycle even if transfer is invalid.
Transfer up to 10 words from core storage to output synchronizer under control of record definition word(s), the
first of which is in Y; type data from synchronizer; return
carriage.
Input- Output: Magnetic Tape (729 and 7330 only)
Note: Priority signal occurs upon completion if Sign of
instruction is + (mnemonic op. code preceded by p).
Read a block from tape unit nm into core storage under controlof ROWs, the first of which is in Y.
Read a block from tape unit nm into core storage under control of ROWs, the first of which is in Y.
Record mark on tape causes next ROW to be used if present
one is "+" or termination of data movement if "_".
Write' a block onto tape unit nm from core storage under control of ROWs, the first of which is in Y.
Write a block onto tape unit nm from core storage under control of ROWs, the first of which is in Y.
The detection of a record mark in storage causes new block
definition word to be read if present one'is "+" or terminates
data movement if "_".
Write a block onto tape unit nm from core storage under control of ROWs, the first of which is in Y. High-order inSignificant zeroes in numerical words, up to 5 per word, are
not written on tape.
Write a block onto tape unit nm from core storage under control of ROWs, the first of which is in Y. The detection of
a record mark in storage causes new block definition word
to be read if present one is "+" or terminates data movement if "- ". High-order insignificant zeroes in numerical
words, up to 5 per word, are not written on tape.

INSTRUCTION LIST
§

403: 121.1 05
INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.

121.

INSTRUCTION
OPERATION
Op. Index Control Address Mnemonic Op.

-+8n

X

m7

Y

(P)TSF

-+8n

X

m8

Y

(P)TSB

-

+8n

X

m9

Y

(P)TRA

,:t8{l

X

mO

-0

TSEL

+8n
+8n
+8n
+8n
+8n
+8n
+8n
+8n
+8n

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

mO
mO
mO
mO
mO
mO
mO
mO
mO

-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9

(P)TM
TRW
TRU
TRB
(P)TSM
TSK
TEF
TSHD
TSLD

+54

X

nO

Y

QR

+54

X

nl

Y

QW

-

-+9n

X

sF

Y

(P)DCS

Input-Output: Magnetic TapeJ7~~_ and 7~O onlYliCont.d.)
Move tape on unit nm forward a specified number of segments under control of RDW in Y.
Move tape or unit nm backward a specified number of segments under control of RDW in Y.
Read a block from tape unit nm into core storage under
control of RDWs, the first of which is in Y; all tape characters are read in the alpha mode and become 2 characters
in storage.
Set up tape unit nm so that a BCB test will determine
whether it is available to the stored program.
Write tape mark on tape unit nm •
Rewind tape unit nm •
Rewind and unload tape unit nm .
Backspace tape unit nm one block.
Write segment mark on tape unit nm •
Skip forward and erase on tape unit nm •
Turn off End-of- File indicator for tape unit nm.
Set tape unit nm to operate at high density (729 only).
Set tape unit nm to operate at low density (729 only).
InEut- OU!Eut: Inquiry
Transfer 1 block of up to 10 words from inquiry synchronizer n to core storage under control of RDW s starting at Y.
Transfer I block of up to 10 words under cO.ntrol of RDWs
starting at Y from core stqrage to inquiry synchronizer n,
then to Inquiry Station.
Input- Output: 7907 Data Channel
NOTE: These instructions apply to Hypertape (7074 only)
and all devices connected to the 7907 through the
1414 I/O Synchronizer.
Select I/O channel and transmit channel command at Y to
7907; n = 3,4, 6,7 for channel 1,2,3,4; s denotes Channel
Switch position 1 or 2; F denotes coding format; plus sign
causes priority signal upon completion.
Channel commands are as follows (minus sign denotes last
command in a series):

+10
+20
-

U
U

V
V

Y
Y

+30
+40

U
U

V
V

Y
Y

+50

U

V

Y

-+60

-

-

Y

-

Read data into core storage location UV through Y.
Read backward into core storage locations UV through y,
where UV >Y.
Write from core storage locations UV through Y.
Transfer order words from core storage locations UV
through Y to Hypertape Control or I/O Synchronizer to
initiate control operation(s).
Transfer status word(s) from Hypertape Control or I/O
Synchronizer to core storage locations UV through Y.
Branch to next channel command in location Y.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

IBM 7070/7072 /7074

403: 121.1 06

§

INSTRUCTION LIST NOMENCLATURE

121.

Definition
An: . .
(An): •
\ (An) \: •
c:
d:

es:

F:
FD:

J:
12-5:

K:
L:

m:

n:
p:
P:

ROW:
s:
UV:

X:
Y:

Accumulator n, where n = 1, 2, or 3.
Contents of Accumulator n.
Absolute value of contents of Accumulator n.
Stacking latch number.
A digit used as a literal.
Electronic Switch number.
An integer denoting coding format to be used.
Field Definition may be used; control digits specify high and loworder digit positions of the field to be operated upon.
Indexing Word number.
Digit positions 2 through 5 of Indexing Word J.
Length of a shift, in digit positions.
A four-digit literal.
An integer; usually the unit number of an input-output device.
An integer; usually an I/O channel number.
A specific digit position within a word.
In mnemonic operation code, causes priority signal upon
completion of the operation.
Record Definition Word; defines the initial and final core storage
addresses of a block of data.
Alteration Switch number or Channel Switch position.
Core storage address specified by the combined Index and Control
portions of an instruction.
Number of Indexing Word to be used to modify Address portion; if
not indexed, X = 00.
Address of a core storage location.

.

6/62

&

I AUERBACH~

403:131.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDJP

IBM 7070 /7072/7074
Coding Specimen
Autocoder

REPORTS

CODING SPECIMEN: AUTOCODER

§

13l.

.1

TRANSLATOR LISTING

LN CDREF LABEL
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11

12
l3

14
IS
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
2B
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53

ORIGIN

0001
0002

...

..

DOD)
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
0051
0052

CONS Tl
PHIST

CC IN

ENSW

ESTBR

PAGE AA

7070 COMPILER SYSTEM VERSION 00001, OHANGE LEVEl 00000.

PROGRAM

PAGE AA

OP

OPERAND

CNTRL 325
I. B. M•
7070 SNAPSHOT PROGRAM
PROV IDE ORIGIN CONTROL CARD
DC
&6363657564
10%O,50&X1
IA3
9993
CSP
.. &3
BE
MSM
CCIN
MSM
PHI
PHl%O,50
5T3
5T3
CCIN%O,50
11%0,50&X1
IA3
PHl%O,50&1
5T3
CC I N%O, 500
ST3
IA3
*%2q
STD3 PHl%30
STD3 CCIN%30
5TD3 PH1%3D&1
ST03 CCIN%30&1
1,99
XU
XIA
1,0
XSN
1,l6&X1
LA3
CONST!
1,CCARD
UR
HB
NOP
0
CK FOR END
C3
CCARD&1
PHI
YES
BE
NOP
HLTA
IAI
SET UP FOR
DL
DELETE
I5Tl 2%2~5D
ISTl ENTRYl&X1 RETURN
lAl
GET DP
002
l5Tl DPl&X1
TO TABLE
GET BRANCH
IA1
B1
TO DP
ISTl 0&X2
IAA
CCARD&2
MSM
9991
CCARD%00&2,3
CO
.. &2
BE
MSP
9991
lA2
"%20
9991%50,5
CD
BL
*&2
*%50-2
IA2
STD2 9991%50
LIMI TS
ISTl MHHX1
IA1
MASK
15Tl M1&X1
IAI
BC
EST.
STD1 ACTRl&X1
CTRS.FOR
ZA1
AD

..

©

CDNO FD

LOC

0001 09

032.5
0326
0327
0328
0329
0330
0331
0332
0333
0334
0335
033"6
0337
0338
0339
0340
0341
0342
0343
0344
0345
034"6
0347
0348
0349
0350
0351
0352
0353
0354
0355
0356
0357
0358
0359
0360
0361
0362
0363
0364
0365

0002

0003

0004

000.5

0006

0007

0008

0009

036~

0010

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorparated

0367
0368
0369
0370
0371
0312
0313

INS TRUCTI ON RI REF

0003250325
&6363657564
&3301050010
-0300909993
-4100090331
-0300610345
-0300610385
&3200050385
&3200050345
&330105C011
&320005C386
&3200050346
&3300220336
-3200330385
-3200330345
-3200330386
-3200330346
-4500010099
&4600010000
&4801010016
&3300090325
&6900110390
&0000090346
-0100090000
&3500090391
-4100090385
-01C0090384
&1300030391
-1100250002
-1101690499
&1302090000
-1101090496
0300090399
-1102090000
&1600090392
-0300619991
&0300300392
-4100090363
-0300919991
&2300220363
&0300559991
&4000090361
&2300550364
-2200559991
-1101090498
&1300090393
-1101090491
&1300610391
-1201010498
&1300890391

0325
00
CC
00
01
01
01
01
01
00
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
00
CO
00
01
01
01
00
01
01
01
01
00
01
CO
01
01
00
01
00
01
01

M

M

CO
M

01
00
01
01
CO
01
01

C1
01
01
01

7/62

-..:J

"Cl\

N

N

IBM"
Program _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - - - -

• FORM X28-6417-2
PRINTED IN U.S,A,

7070 AUTOCODER

CODING

Identification ':-'..L'--'-'-'-~

SHEET

76

Pragrammed by ______________

OPERAND

Operation

Label

1516

56

2021

25

30

35

40

50

55

60

65

*
gj

Autocoder _______

Basic Autacoder-----t;l
45

g
(J)

I 2

Line
3

:-

80

Page No.LLJ of _ __

Oat t::

()

""
....
w

70

7~

tIl

"'l

01
02

o

3

04
05
06
07
08
09

E:
,....,

§"'"

10
I I
I 2
I 3

Ii

14
15
I 6
I 7
I 8
19
20
2 I
2 2
23
24
25

~

-,-,-

....o

;:l

"----'------'~

, , ,

~_~.11

~

N

......
;:l
:;;::!

403:132.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
_

R£fORTS

IBM 7070/7072 /7074
Coding Specimen
COBOL
CODING SPECIMEN: COBOL

§

132 •

.1

SOURCE PROGRAM LISTING
004130 PROCEDURE DIVISION.
004140 HOUSEKEEPING SECTION.
004150 HK. OPEN INPUT MASTER-FILE TRANSACTION-FILE OUTPUT OUTPUT-FILE
004160
ORDERS-CANCELLED-FILE ERROR-OUT.
004170 BEGIN. READ MASTER-FILE AT END GO TO CLOSEM. GO TO SWITCH-OFF
004180
DEPENDING ON SKIPIT. READ TRANSACTION-FILE AT END GO TO
004190
CLOSET.
004191 PRE-TEST. IF CANCEL-ORDER GO TO TEST-AGAIN.
005010 CMP. IF ADDITIONAL-QTY AND MOD-ORD-NO EQUAL TO TMOD-ORD-NO NEXT
005020
SENTENCE ELSE GO TO TEST. ADD NEW -QTY TO QUANTITY.
005030 OUT. WRITE MASTER-OUTPUT FROM MASTER. GO TO BEGIN.
005040 TEST. IF QTY -CANCELLED AND MOD-ORD-NO EQUAL TO TMOD-ORD-NO NEX
005050T SENTENCE ELSE GO TO TEST-AGAIN. SUBTRACT NEW-QTY FROM
005060
QUANTITY. IF QUANTITY IS NEGATIVE NEXT SENTENCE ELSE GO TO
005070
OUT.
005080 CANCEL-IT. WRITE CANCEL-RECORD FROM MASTER GO TO BEGIN.
005090 TEST-AGAIN. IF CANCEL-ORDER AND MOD-ORD-NO EQUAL TO TMOD-ORD-N02
005100
GO TO CANCEL-IT. IF TMOD-ORD-N02 IS GREATER THAN MOD-ORD005110NO MOVE 1 TO SKIPIT GO TO OUT ELSE WRITE ER-OR FROM MASTER
005120
GO TO BEGIN.
005130 SWITCH-OFF. MOVE ZERO TO SKIPIT GO TO CMP.
005140 WR. WRITE MASTER-OUTPUT FROM MASTER READ MASTER-FILE GO TO WR.
005150 CLOSET. CLOSE TRANSACTION-FILE ORDERS-CANCELLED-FILE ERROR-OUT.
005160
GO TO WR.
005170 CLOSEM. CLOSE MASTER-FILE OUTPUT-FILE. STOP RUN.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incarporated

PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PItOB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB
PROB

13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13

7/62

403:132.200
§

IBM 7070/707217074

132 •

•2

CODING SHEET

...
N

0

CD

-

CD

co
LL

a

I-

IIJ
IIJ

...,

...

,..:
Z
....

-

0

e
~ r-:r:

-

- ~
Ul
0
f--- r -





~
~

w
w
N
c

C>

~
~

I

80

FORTRAN STATEMENT
7

15

10

20

I

I

1

I

.l.

25

30
L

35

45

40

.L

50

55

60

65

70

72

i
.1

1

I

I

eo

,."

""

~

I~'
1

I

.1

I»

~

I

I

L
I

1
.1
I

I

I

I

I

.1

_.........l.....

~
~

.......
~

'I

N

.......
~

~

403: 141.1 00
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7070/7072 /7074
Data Code Table
Internal Numeric

REFORTS

DATA CODE TABLE NO.1

§

141.

.1

.23
USE OF CODE:

internal numeric data and
7300 Disk Storage Unit.

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size: . . .

5 bits per digit.

.22

Character Structure:

two-out-of-five fixed-count
code; bit coding as in
table below.

Character Codes
DIGIT
VALUE

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

9

©

0

BIT CODE
1
2
3

6

0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0

1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0

0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1

SIGN
VALUE

ALPHA

MINUS
PLUS

6/62

403: 142.100

.ST"DARD

_EDP

.,..

R[PORTS

IBM 7070/707217074
Data Code Table
Internal Alphameric
DATA CODE TABLE NO.2

§

142.

.23

.1

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

· 21

Character Size: . . .

· 22

Character Structure

Character Codes

internal alphameric data .
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0

1

2 digits per character.

+

4

6

+

-

7

8

9

-

0 RM 0

A

J

2

B

K

S

2

3

C

L

T

3

D

M

U

4

E

N

V

5

F

0

W

6

7

G

P

X

7

8

H

Q y

8

I

R

9

blank

/

1

4
5

6

9

©

5

0

0

· 221 More significant
pattern:. . . . . . . . 1 digit, coded as in Table
No.1.
.222 Less significant pattern: I digit, coded as in Table
No.1.

2 3
&
or

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

$
)::(
or
)

GM

*

1

#
or

,

=

%

@

or or
,
(

SM TM

Z

6/62

403: 143.1 00
.SIANDARD

II

EDP

IBM 7070 /70n /7074
Data Code Table
Card Code

REPORTS

DATA CODE TABLE NO.3

§

143.

.23

.1

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size: . . . . 1 column.

Character Codes

punched card input-output .
UNDERPUNCH
None
None

blank

OVERPUNCH
12
11
& or+

0

-

12

a:

11

0

0

+
0

0

1

1

A

J

/

2

2

B

K

S

3

3

C

L

T

4

4

D

M

U

5

5

E

N

V

6

6

F

0

W

7

7

G

P

X

8

8

H

Q

y

9

9

I

R

Z

-

8-2

RM:I:

8-3
8-4

$
@

or:

)::( or)

* %or (

GM '"

/:;.

8-5
8-6
8-7

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporatian and BNA Incorporated

TM

SM

6/62

403: 144.1 00
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7070 1707217074
Data Code Table
Magnetic Tope

REPORTS

DATA CODE TABLE NO.4

§

144 .

.1

23

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size: . . .

. 22

Character Structure

. 221 More significant
pattern: . . . .
. 222 Less significant
pattern: . . . .

magnetic tape and 1301
Disk Storage.

7 bits; 6 data, 1 even
parity.

Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATIERN

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATIERN
0

0

16

32

48

blank

-

& or+

1

1

/

J

A

2

2

S

K

B

2 zone bits; B, A = 32, 16.

3

3

T

L

C

4 numeric bits; 8, 4, 2, 1.

4

4

U

M

D

5

5

V

N

E

6

6

W

0

F

7

7

X

P

G

8

8

Y

Q

H

9

9

Z

R

I
+
0

-

10

0

RM

0

11

#or =

,

$

12

@

%or (

*

SM

/::,

or :

l:t or

)

13
14
15

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

TM

GM

6/62

403:151.100

.ST"'' 'D
II

EDP

IBM 7070/ 7072 / 7074

REfORTS

P. O. Facilities

PROBLEM ORI ENTED FACI L1TI ES

§

151.

.13

.1

UTILITY ROUTINES

. 11

Simulators of Other Computers

Data Sorting and Merging
IBM 7070/7074 Sort 90
Reference: .
Record size:

IBM 650
Block size:
Reference:
Date available: .
Description:

IBM Publication C28-6090.
October, 1960.

Key size: .
File size: .

This routine enables a 7070 (or 7074) system to
simulate all standard IBM 650 configurations except those using the 4, OOO-word drum store or inquiry stations. In general, the configuration of the
7070 system must be the same as the 650 system
being simulated. To permit operation of the simulator on a tape oriented 7070, magnetic tape units
can be substituted for the unit record input and output devices on the 650. Control panel operations .
on the 650 can be simulated by control panel wiring
on the 7070 unit record devices or by the off-line
tape transcription equipment; e. g., by the stored
program of an IBM 1401 system. Console controls
on the 650 are simulated partly by control cards
and partly by the 7070 console switch settings.
The simulation is performed interpretively. Most
simulated routines will be executed by the 7070 at
from one to three times their speeds on the 650;
the major variable is degree of optimization of the
original 650 routine.
. 12

Simulation by Other Computers

Number of tapes: .
Date available:
Description:

IBM Publication C28-6111.
variable; 999 words maximum.
variable; 999 words maximum.
pre-set; up to 160 digits in
up to 10 separate fields.
N-1 reels, where N is the
merge order.
4 to 12 units, on 1 or 2
channels.
third quarter, 1960.

Sort 90 is a generalized routine which modifies itself in accordance with parameters entered on control cards. Phase I reads the input file, performs
an internal sort, and generates a series of sequenced strings. Phase II performs a series of
two-, three-, four-, or five-way merges. Phase III
performs the final merge pass and writes the
sorted output file.
Sort 90 can be run on an IBM 7070 or 7074 system
with 5,000 or 9,990 words of core storage, and the
user can control the amount of storage made available to it. Checkpoints are written at the beginning of each merge pass. Record types, labels,
checkpoints, restarts, and error procedures are
the same as in the 7070 Input/Output Control System. Provisions have been made for user modifications and additions to Sort 90.

IBM 704
IBM 7070/7074 Merge 91.
Reference:
Date available: .
Description:

IBM Publication J28-6042.
April, 1959.

This routine was designed for pre-installation
testing of IBM 7070 routines on an IBM 704 system.
The 704 must have 32,768 words of core storage,
card reader, printer, and three magnetic tape
units plus one more for each 7070 tape unit to be
simulated. Disc storage and inquiry operations
are not simulated. Results and debugging data are
written on magnetic tape for off-line listing; the
on-line printer simulates the 7070 console typewriter.
Execution of a 7070 routine is performed interpretively on the 704 and requires about 40 times as
long as on the 7070.

Reference: .
Record size:
Block size:
Key size: .
File size: .
Number of tapes: .
Date available:
Description:

IBM Publication C28-6115.
variable; 999 words maximum.
variable; 999 words maximum.
pre- set; up to 160 digits in
up to 10 separate fields.
unlimited.
1 (for sequence checking)
to 20, on 1 or 2 channels.
third quarter, 1960.

Merge 91 is a generalized single-pass tape merging program whose specifications are closely related to those of Sort 90. Parameters for a particular merge are entered on control cards. As

@ 1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

IBM 7070/7072/7074

403:151.130

§

151.

.13

2. Generating a symbolic routine consisting
mainly of Autocoder macro- instructions from
the report specifications.

Data Sorting and Merging (Cont'd)
IBM 7070/7074 Merge 91 (Cont'd)

3. Translating the symbolic routine intO machine
language by means of the Autocoder processor.

many as eight sequenced input tape files of any
length can be merged into a single sequenced output file, or a sequence check may be performed
without creating an output.
Merge 91 can be run on an IBM 7070 or 7074 with
5,000 or 9,990 words of core storage. One or two
tape units may be assigned to each input file, and
the sequenced output can be written on up to eight
tape units in rotation. Additional tape units can be
used for writing checkpoints, dumping unreadable
records, and loading the merge routine. As in
Sort 90, provisions have been made for user modifications.

The Report Program Generator is contained on the
7070/7074 Compiler System Tape along with the
Autocoder Processor, so steps 2 and 3 are accomplished by a single computer run. The translating
computer must have a minimum of six magnetic
tape units; additional units are required for hatched
report program generation. Execution of the object program requires at least two tape units or
one tape unit and a printer.

IBM 7074 Generalized Sorting Program Using Hypertape Drives

Two report$ (one printed on-line and one on tape
for off-line listing) can be produced simultaneously
from the same input file; they can be completely
different, or the report printed on-line can be a
summary of the full report. If the input file is not
in the correct sequence, a pre-sort routine can be
generated to set up the input to Sort 90. After the
sort, control is transferred to the report writing
program proper. Arithmetic capability is limited
to the accumulation and listing of totals; multipIication, division, or crossfooting can be performed
only through manual insertions into the generated
routines.

Reference: .
Record size:
Block size:
Key size:
File size
Sorting:
Merging:
Number of tapes
Sorting: . . .
Merging: . .
Date available:
Description:

IBM Publication J28- 6154.
variable; 999 words maximum.
variable; 999 words maximum.
preset; up to 160 digits in
up to 10 separate fields.
N-l reels, where N is the
merge order.
99 reels.

Report Writing
IBM 7070/7074 Report Program Generator (RPG)
Reference: . .
IBM Publication C28-6113.
Date available: . . . . second quarter, 1961.
Description:
This generator facilitates the preparation of report writing programs that will process an input
tape file to produce a report on an on-line printer
and/or magnetic tape for off-line listing. Four
phases are involved in its use:
1. Writing the report specifications in an abbreviated format on four different types of
forms: Tape File and Printer Specific~tions,
Report Format, Field Dictionary, and Data
Selection Requirements.

7/62

There is no source language compatibility between
the Report Program Generator for the 7070/7074
and those for other IBM systems.

at least 2N.
at least N + 1.
fourth quarter, 1963.

This routine is being developed to take advantage of
the higher speeds and special features of the 7340
Hypertape Drives. Its specifications and operating
procedures are quite similar to those of Sort 90
and Merge 91, and it will perform both sorting and
merging operations. Input and output may be on
either Hypertape Drives or 729 tape units (for
compatibility with other systems). The order of a
merge may be as high as five for sorting and eight
for merging.
.14

4. Executing the object routine to produce the
desired report.

.15

Data Transcription
IBM 7070/7074 Tape Pile Generator Program
Reference: . . .
Date available:
Description:

IBM Publication C28-6110,
pp. 26-35.
third quarter, 1960.

This routine produces a magnetic tape file from
data records on punched cards or another tape
unit. Records may be of fixed or variable length
and may be blocked or unblocked. A control card
'precedes the data cards and specifies the parameters for each tape file to be produced.
IBM 7070/7074 Tape Print Program
Reference: . . .
Date available:
Description:

IBM Publication C28-6110,
pp. 62-70.
third quarter, 1960.

Data contained in a magnetic tape file can be listed
on an on -line printer or on tape for off-line listing
by means of this routine. Records up to 10,000
words in length can be listed. The data is listed in
a standardized format, with no provision for editing.

403: 151.150

PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES

§

151.

.15

.17

Data Transcription (Cont'd)

Storage Print Program

IBM 7070 SPOOL System
Reference:. •
. IBM Publication J28-6047-1
and 7070-10-076.
Date available:
• November, 1960.
Description:

Reference: . .
Date available:
Description:

Procedure for Automatic Testing (PAT)
Reference: . .
Date available:
Description:

The SPOOL routines occupy the top 400 locations of
a 5,000- or 9, 990-word core store. In a system
with two tape channels, two SPOOL transcription
operations and an independent main routine can be
performed simultaneously. The SPOOL routines
perform straightforward transcriptions upon
blocked or unblocked records. No editing is performed, but provisions are made for the addition
of special routines coded by the user.

©

IBM Publication C28-6110,
pp. 100-126.
third quarter, 1960.

This system facilitates program testing by combining various utility routines, the object program,
and the test data into a single package. After execution, a listing is produced of the contents of core
storage and all input and output tapes. The entire
procedure is performed in one continuous operation with a minimum of operator intervention.

.2
File Maintenance: . . . none.

IBM Publication C28-6110,
pp. 45-51.
third quarter, 1960.

The contents of one or more core storage areas
are listed either on-line or on magnetic tape for
off-line printing. The listing also indicates the
contents of the accumulators and index words plus
the settings of the High- Low- Equal Indicator and
all stacking latches.

SPOOL is an acronym for "Simultaneous Peripheral
Operations On-line". The system enables a 7070
(or 7074) with on-line unit record equipment to
perform card-to-tape and tape-to-printer or
-punch transcriptions on-line during the execution
of another routine. All SPOOL instructions are
executed in the 7070's priority mode. When a priority signal is received from a tape unit or unit
record device, the main routine is interrupted and
the appropriate SPOOL routine is entered. After
the necessary input or output operation has been
initiated, control is returned to the main routine.

.16

Other

PROBLEM ORIENTED
LANGUAGES:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

none.

7/62

403: 161.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7070/7072/7074

REPORTS

P. O. Language

COBOL 61
6~

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL

§

161.

.14

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity:

. 12

Origin: . . . . . . . . . CODASYL committee; implemented by IBM Data
Processing Division.

. 13

Reference:....... IBM Publications F28-8053I and J28-6182.

. 14

Description

Description (Cont'd)
Extensions
1.

. . . . . . . IBM 7070/7074 COBOL.
COBOL 61.

The IBM 7070/7074 COBOL language contains virtually all of the facilities of Required COBOL 1961 and
parts of Elective COBOL 1961, as described in the
Users' Guide, section 4:161. Deficiencies from Required COBOL, electives which have been or will be
implemented, and extensions of the language are
summarized below. The electives are keyed by
number to their descriptions in 4:161. 3.

"PROGRAM-START" clause permits execution of
object program to begin at any named point in
procedures.

2. "Autocoder-name IS COBOL-name" clause permits procedures coded in Autocodfilr to refer to
COBOL procedure or data names .
.15

Publication Date: • • • • December, 1961.

.2

PROGRAM STRUCTURE

.21

Divisions
IDENTIFICATION: .
ENVIRONMENT: .

DATA:
The most significant elective facilities that are provided in the language are the evaluation of algebraic
formulae (COMPUTE); the handling of arithmetic operands of up to 18 digits; the movement of data
where there are excess source or destination items
(MOVE CORRESPONDING); and the insertion of
Autocoder coding in a COBOL source program
(ENTER).

PROCEDURE:
.22

Deficiencies:. . . . . . none in language (but see
item 403:184.212).
.23

#22
#24
#27
#28
#32
#33
#35
#41
#42
#43
#45
#46

..

Procedure Entities

..

Electives (see 4:161)
=

·.

PROCEDURE DIVISION: sections and/or paragraphs.
paragraphs.
SECTION:
PARAGRAPH:
sentences.
imperative, conditional,
SENTENCE:
and compiler directing
statements.
STATEMENT:
· COBOL words.

It should be noted that not all of the language facilities described here have been implemented in the
initial 7070/7074 COBOL Processor. The exemptions are listed in item 403:184.212.

#1
#2
#6
#21

..

·.

name of author;
name and date of program.
describes translating and
target computers and relates I/O units to files,
names to units.
describes the data items
and shows the structure
of records, files, working storage, and constants.
describes the procedures
in an imperative form.

sign only.

.

Data Entities
FILE:
RECORD:

records.
elementary items or group
items.
GROUP ITEM:
elementary items or group
items; up to 48 levels of
group items are possible.
ELEMENTARY ITEM: . character s.

LABEL RECORDS ARE NON-STANDARD
permits labels of standard size (80 characters) but ~ori.- standard format.
ENTER AUTOCODER.
.24
handles operands of up to 18 digits.
SEGMENT- LIMIT clause not implemented.

©

Names

.241 Simple name formation
Alphabet: . . . . .
Size: . . . . . . .
Avoid key words:.
Formation rule: .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

A to Z, 0 to 9, and hyphen.
30 characters maximum.
yes.
at least one letter; no hyphen as first or last
character.
7/62

403: 161.242
§

IBM 7070/7072/7074

161.

· 33

· 242 Designators
Procedures
PROCEDURE
DIVISION: .
SECTION: . .
PARAGRAPH: .
SENTENCE:
Data: . .
Equipment: . .
Comments: .
Translator control:
· 25

· 27

.331 Variable record size:
.332 Variable block size: .
.333 Record size range:
labeled with name.
SECTION is part of name.
none.
no name allowed.
none.
none.
begin with key word NOTE.
none.

o to 3.
group item or items.
no.
yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
only positive.

. 31

Methods of Direct Data Description

.311
. 312
.313
. 314
.315
.316
· 317
. 318

Concise item picture:
List by kind: . . . ." .
Qualify by adjective: .
Qualify by phrase: .
Qualify by code:
Hierarchy by list:
Level by indenting:
Level by coding:

. 32

Files and Reels

Block count:
Multi-files: .

Data Items

.341 Designation of class:
. 342 Possible classes
Integer:. .
Fixed point:
Floating point:
Alphabetic: .
Alphameric:
· 343 Choice of external radix:
.344 Possible radices:
.345 Justification: .
"
· 346 Choice of code:
.347 Possible codes
Magnetic tape:

all.
none.

DATA DESCRIPTION FACILITIES

Control totals: .
Identity control:
Multi-reel: . . .
· 322 Reel sentinels
Variable layout:

.34

yes.
no.

.3

· 321 File labels
Variable layout:

preset or dynamic.
preset or dynamic.
3 to N words, limited by
core storage capacity.
Block size range:
3 to Nwords.
Choice of record size: . description or automatic.
Choice of block size:
description or automatic .
Sequence control:
none .
In-out error control:
automatic.
Blocking control:. . .
automatic.
Note: Three types of data record organization are
permitted in tape files:
1. Fixed number of fixed-length records per
block .
2. Fixed number of variable-length records
per block.
3. Variable number of variable-length records per block.

TOTAL-IN-MASTER.
yes.
optional.
yes.

Region of Meaning of Names

· 271 Universal names:
. 272 Local names:

7/62

.334
.335
.336
. 337
. 338
.339

Structure of Data Names

. 251 Qualified names
Example: . .
Multiple qualifiers:
Complete sequence:
Broken sequence: .
· 252 Subscripts
Number per item:
Applicable to:
Class may be:
Special index
variable:
Any variable:
Literal: .
Expression: .
Form may be
Integer only:
Signed:
.253 Synonyms
Preset:
Dynamically set:

Records and Blocks

yes .
no.
NUMERIC.
CLASS IS NUMERIC .
no.
yes.
optional.
mandatory.

description, library, or
standard.
none.
description.
description.
description, library, or
standard.
description.
description.

yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes.
none.
only decimal.
description, or automatic
left for alpha and pOint
alignm~nt for numeric.
description.
BCD, as in Data Code
Table No .. 4 .
column code, as in Data
Code Table No.3 .

Punched cards:
. 348 Item size
Variable size:
Designation:
Range
Fixed point numeric:
Alphameric:
. 349 Sign provision: .
.35

description .

preset.
picture or phrase .
1 to 18 characters .
120 characters .
optional.

Data Values

.351 Constants
Possible sizes
Integer: . . .
Fixed point: .
Alphabetic-:
Alphameric:
Subscriptible:
Sign Provision: .
.352 Literals: .
. 353 Figuratives
Examples:

1 to 18 characters.
1 to 18 characters .
1 to 120 characters.
1 to 120 characters .
by redefining.
optional.
same as constants .

ZERO, ZEROES, ZEROS.
SPACE, SPACES,
QUOTES, ALL "literal".
· 354 Conditional variables:. yes.
· 36

Special Description Facilities

.361 Duplicate format:

. . COPY.

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL 61

§

403:161.362

161.

.434 Rounding of results: .

. 362 Re-definition:
.363 Table description
Subscription: . .
Multi - subscripts:
Level of item: . .
Implied subscript at
lower level:. . .
. 364 Other subscriptable
entities: . . . . .

.435 Special cases

REDEFINES.

x = -x: ..

mandatory, preset size.
by hierarchy of levels.
group item or elementary
item.
yes .
none.

.4

OPERATION REPERTOIRE

. 41

Formulae: . . . . . . . COMPUTE verb.

*
/
** .
. 412 Operands allowed
Classes:
Mixed scaling:
Mixed classes: .
Mixed radices: .
Literals:
. 413 Statement structure
Parentheses
a - b - c means:
a + b x c means:
a ! b / c means:
abC means: • . .
Size limit:
Multi-results:
.414 Rounding of results:
.415 Special cases

x = -x:
x = x + 1: .
x = 4.7 y: . . . .
x = 5 x 107 + y2:

. 42

Operations on Arrays:

. 43

Other Computation

. 431 Operator list
ADD:
SUBTRACT:
MULTIPLY:

SUBTRACT X FROM 0
GIVING X.
ADD 1 TO X.
x = x + 1: .
ADD YTO X.
x= x + y: .
x = x.;. y: .
DIVIDE Y INTO X.
MULTIPLY Y BY X.
x= xy: . .
x = remainder x .;. y: . DIVIDE Y INTO X GIVING
Z. MULTIPLY Y BY Z.
SUBTRACT Z FROM X.
.436 Typical cases
x = y + z: . . . . . . . ADD Y, Z GIVING X .

.44

.411 Operator list

+ ..

addition.
subtraction.
multiplication.
division.
exponentiation.
replacement.

.441 Data copy example:
.442 Levels possible: .

all numeric.
yes.
no.
no.
yes.
(a-b) - c.
a + (b xc).
(a/b}/c.
not defined.
?
no.
automatic truncation.
COMPUTE
COMPUTE
COMPUTE
COMPUTE
+ Y ** 2.

X
X
X
X

=
=
=
=

Data Movement and Format

- X.
X + 1.
4.7 * Y.
5 * 10 ** 7

none.

addition, to.
subtraction, from.
unrounded multiplication,

.443 Multiple results: .
.444 Missing operands
Excess sources:
Excess destinations:
. 445 Size of operands
Exact match: .
Alignment rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: .
Filler rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: .
Truncating rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: .
Variable size
destination:
. 446 Editing possible
Change class:
Change radix:
Delete editing
symbols:
Insert editing symbols
Actual point:
Suppress zeroes: .
Insert:
Float: .
.447 Special moves: .
.448 Code translation:
.449 Character manipulation:

by.
DIVIDE:
. 432 Operands allowed
Mixed scaling:
Mixed classes: .
Mixed radices: .
Literals:
Restrictions: .

.433 Statement
Mixed verbs:
Multi-results:
Size limits: .
Multi-operands:
Implied results:

optional ROUNDED in procedures, else truncated .

MOVE XTOY.
group items.
elementary items.
MOVE X TO y, Z.
MOVE CORRESPONDING.
MOVE CORRESPONDING.
only group items.
decimal point.
left justified.
zeroes.
spaces.
at each end.
at right.
no .
description.
no.
no.
description.
description .
$, . + - CRDB blank.
$•
none .
none.
EXAMINE; to replace and/
or count the number of
occurrences of a given
character in a data item.

unrounded division, into .
yes.
no.
no.
yes.
must be pure numeric; no
decimal points allowed in,
data.
no.
no.
?
yes.
last named operand.

©

.45

File ManipUlation
Open: .
Close:
Advance to next record:
Step back a record:
Set restart point:
Restart:
Start new reel: .
Start new block:
Search on key: .
Rewind:
Unload: .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and dNA Incorporated

OPEN.
CLOSE.
READ, WRITE.
none.
description or library.
none.
CLOSE REEL.
none.
none.
automatic for CLOSE file.
CLOSE ... WITH LOCK.

7/62

403:161.460

IBM 7070/7072/7074
.525 Compound Conditionals
IF A AND B:

161.
.46 Operating Communication

§

.461 Log of progress:. . . . DISPLAY; to display low
volume data on console
typewriter.
. 462 Messages to operator: . same as log.
own COBOL coding using
. 463 Offer options:
DISPLAY and ACCEPT.
.464 Accept option: . '.' . . ACCEPT; to receive low
volume data from console
card reader.
.47

Object Program Errors
Error
Overflow:
In-out:
Invalid data:

Discovery
ON SIZE
ERROR
automatic
none

.5

PROCEDURE SEQUENCE CONTROL

. 51

Jumps

.511 Destinations allowed:
.512 Unconditional jump:
. 513 Switch: . . . . . . .
.514 Setting a switch:
. 515 Switch on data: .
.52

Special Actions
own COBOL
coding.
automatic.
none.

sections.
paragraphs.
GOTOX.
separate paragraph, named
Y, containing only a GO
TO X statement.
ALTER Y TO PROCEED
TOZ.
GO TO X, Y, Z DEPENDING ONW.

Conditional Procedures

· 521 Designators
Condition:
IF.
Procedure:
implied.
· 522 Simple conditions
Expression v expression:.
no.
Expression v variable:
no.
Expression v literal:
no.
Expression v figurative:
no.
Expression v condition: .
no.
Variable
v variable:
. yes.
Variable
v literal: . .
. yes and reverse.
Variable
v figurative:
.. yes and reverse.
Variable
v condition: .
. yes.
Conditional value:. . .
. yes.
· 523 Conditional relations
Equal: . . . . . . . . IS (NOT) EQUAL TO, - .
Greater than: . . . • . IS (NOT) GREATER THAN.
Less thari: . • . . . . IS (NOT) LESS THAN.
Greater than or equal: none.
Less than or equal:
none.
. 524 Variable conditions: . . NOT POSITIVE; does include zero.
POSITIVE; does not include
zero.
NOT NEGATIVE; does include zero.
NEGATIVE; does not include zero.
NOT NUMERIC.
NUMERIC.
NOT ALPHABETIC.
ALPHABETIC.
ZERO.
NOT ZERO.
7/62

IF A OR B: .

many times, not mixed
with OR.
many times, not mixed
with AND.

IFADOCANDBDO
D: . . . . . . . . . . yes .
IF A DO C OR B DO D: yes .
.526 Alternative designator: ELSE, or OTHERWISE.
.527 Condition on
alternative: . . . .
yes.
.528 Typical examples: . . ,IF X IS POSITIVE AND Y IS
POSITIVE ADD X TO Y
ELSE IF Z IS POSITIVE
MOVE Z TO Y.
.53

Sub-routines

.531 Designation
Single statement: .

name of paragraph or section, in a cue.

Set of statements:
First: .
name of first .
name of.last.
Last:
. 532 Possible sub-r':lUtines: . series of paragrap\:ls or
sections.
.533 Use in-line in program: yes.
.534 Mechanism
Cue with parameters: none.
Cue without
parameter:
PERFORM A THRU B.
Formal return: .
implied.
Alternative return: .
EXIT •
all universal.
.535 Names: .
, none.
.536 Nesting limit:
.537 Automatic recursion
none.
allowed:
.54

Function Definition by
Procedure: . . . . . . none.

.55

Operand Definition by
Procedure:

.56

Loop Control

.561 Designation of loop
Single procedure:
First and last
procedures: .
.562 Control by count
Literal: ..
Data:
..
Example: ..
. 563 Control by step
Parameter
Special index: .
Any variable: .

· 564
· 565
· 566
.567
. 568

non~.

Step:
....
Criteria: . • . •
Multiple parameters:
Control by condition
Example: . . . . . .
Combined with step:
Control by list:
..
Nesting limit: . . . .
Jump out allowed: . .
Control variable exit
status: • • . . . . .

PERFORMA.
PERFORM A THRU B.
yes.
yes.
PERFORM A AGE TIMES.
none.
VARYING AGE FROM 1 BY
1 UNTIL.
any variable.
any conditional expression.
no.
UNTIL B IS NEGATIVE.
optional.
no.
7
yes .
available always.

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL 61
§

161.

.6

EXTENSION OF THE
LANGUAGE: . . . .

.7

LIBRARY FACILITIES

. 71

Identity: . . . . . .

. 72

Kinds of Libraries

none.

403:161.600
.8

TRANSLATOR CONTROL

.81

Transfer to Another
Language: . . . . .

.82

Optimizing Information
Statements: . . . . . . none .

.83

Translator
Environment: .

COBOL library.

. 721 Fixed master: . . .
. 722 Expandable master:
. 723 Private: . . .

no .
no.
yes.

.73

Storage Form:

magnetic tape.

.74

Varieties of Contents:

data descriptions; object.9
computer, special names,
file control, and I/O con- .91
trol paragraphs; file and
reel labels.
.92

. 75

. 84

Mechanism

. 751 Insertion of new item:
not yet defined.
.752 Language of new item:. COBOL.
. 753 Method of call:. .
COpy statement.
. 76

Types of Routine:

see.74 •

©

yes; ENTER AUTOCODER

. 85

. . . implied .

Target Computer
Environment:. .

library call or description.

Program Documentation
Control: . . . . . . . none.
TARGET COMPUTER ALLOCATION CONTROL
Choice of Storage Level: none.
Address Allocation: . . none .

. 93

Arrangement of Items in
Unpacked Form: . . . SYNCHRONIZED •

.94

ASSignment of InputOutput Devices: .

description or library.

Input-Output Areas:

description or library .

. 95

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

403: 162.100
•

STANDARD

ElDP
•

IBM 70701707217074
P. O. Language

REf'{)RTS

FORTRAN

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN

.21

§162.

Data Statements:.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

. 12

Origin: .

.13

Reference:....... IBM Publication C28-6170.

. 14

Description:

.7070/7074 FORTRAN.
"Full FORTRAN".
Data Processing Division,
IBM Corporation.

7070/7074 FORTRAN is, in general, the FORTRAN
II language. It differs from 709/7090 FORTRAN
principally in that the following stateme~ts have not
been implemented for the 7070 series: FREQUENCY,
READ DRUM, WRITE DRUM. Furthermore, there
is no provision in 7070/7074 FORTRAN for Boolean
operations or for bit manipulation of any kind, and
the object program cannot be segmented.

.22

Subroutine: .
Statement:
Function: .

• 23
7070/7074
709/7090
Data Type
1 to 9,999,999,999 1 to 32,767.
Integer:
10- 38 to
Floating point: 10- 51 to 10+ 49
10+ 38.

PROGRAM STRUCTURE

. 21

Divisions
Procedure Statements:

IBM 7070 Basic FORTRAN,
June 1960; Full FORTRAN,
February 1962.

algebraic formulae.
comparisons and jumps.
input and output.

©

Data Entities
all variables.
floating point variables or
constants.
fixed point integer variables or constants.
Hollerith item.
alphameric item.
Hollerith item: • '• . . . alphameric item that can
only be used for output.
Alphameric item: • . . alphameric item that can
only be input during a
run; it can be used for
output or as a format
statement .

. 24

.2

statements.
functions.
subroutines.
statements.
characters; blanks are
ignored.
statements.

Arrays: .
Items: ..

The FORTRAN Monitor System, which coordinates
FORTRAN compilations, symbolic assemblies, and
execution of object 'programs on the 709/7090, has
not been made available for the 7070 series (but
see section 403:191).
Publication Date: , .

FORMAT: describes the
layout, size, scaling
and code of input-output
data.
EQUIVALENCE: used to
cause two variables to
have ~ common location
or to specify synonyms.
COMMON: used to cause a
name to be common to
more than one segment
rather than local to each.
DIMENSION: desc;ribes the
elements in each dimension of an array or set
of arrays.

Procedure Entities
Program: . . . . . .

Complete facilities for defining and using subroutines and functions are provided in 7070/7074
FORTRAN. TYPE provides output on the console
typewriter on 7070 series systems; it is not available in 709/7090 FORTRAN. The ranges of numbers th~t can be handled by the two FORTRAN systems are compared below:

.15

Divisions (Cont'd)

Names

.241 Simple name formation
Alphabet:. . . . . . . . A to Z, 0 to 9 .
Size: . . . • . . . • . . 1 to 6 char.
Avoid key words:.
no .
Formation rule: . .• first char must be a
letter;
do not use final F if subscripted and if name is
more than 3 char long.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporoted

7/62

.403:162.242

IBM 7070 /7072/ 7074

§162,
.242 Designators
Procedures
Statement: .

unsigned integer, 5 digits
max.
same as variable being
defined.
none.

Function:
Subroutine:
Data
Integer variables: .
Floating point variables: . .
Equipment
Card:..
..

initial I, J, K, L, M, N.
any other initial letter.
implied by verbs READ,
PUNCH.
use key word TAPE.
implied by verb PRINT.
C in column 1.
key words EQUIVALENCE,
COMMON, DIMENSION.

Magnetic Tape:
Printer:
....
Comments: . . . •
Translator control: .

· 25

· 252 Subscripts
Number per item: .
Applicable to: .
Class may be
Special index
variable: . .
Any variable:
Literal: . . .
Expression: .
Form may be
Integer only:
Signed: . . .
Truncated fraction: . .
. ...
Rounded fraction: .
. 253 Synonyms
Preset: . . . . .
Dynamically set:.

.3

DATA DESCRIPTION FACILITIES

• 31

Methods of Direct Data Description

.311
· 312
• 313
• 314
.315
.316
.317
• 318
.319

Concise item picture: ••
List by kind: . . • . .
Qualify by adjective: •
Qualify by phrase: •
Qualify by code: . .
Hierarchy by list: .
Level by indenting:
~vel by coding:. .
Others
Array size: ••.
Four-digit integer: • .
Four-digit integers,
5: • . . • • • • • . .
Floating point items:

none.

3.
all variables.

no.
only integers.
yes.
at most C * N± C';
where C and C' are
literals.
C, C', and N.
none.
no.
no.
EQUIVALENCE statement.
no.

..

FORMAT statement.
no.
no.
no.
yes; first letter of name.
no.
no.
no.
DIMENSION.
FORMAT (14).
FORMAT (514).
FORMAT (F8. 3, ElO.4)
for +999.999 and
+. DDDDE + 99

Note: If format of input data differs from FORMAT
statement, the data over-rides the FORMAT
specifica tions .

o to

Number of Names

. 261 All entities: .
. 262 Procedures
Subroutines and
functions:
Statement numbers: .
Subroutine arguments: .
. 263 Data
Files: .
Record formats:
Items
Nonsubscripted
variables:
Dimensional variables (arrays): .
Three-dimensional
arrays: .
.264 Equipment
Card readers: .
Card punches: .
Printers: .
7/62

Region of Meaning of
Names: . . . . • . . • all names are local to the
subroutines in which they
are established unless a
COMMON statement is
.used. '

Structure of Data Names

· 251 Qualified names: .

· 26

.27

.32

Files and Reels: .•

• 33

Records and Blocks

.331
.332
.333
.334

.338
. 339

Variable record size: . . implied.
Variable block size: . . . no.
Record size range:. . . no limit.
Block size range: . .
120 char. for WRITE OUTPUT TAPE; 240 char. for
WRITE TAPE.
Choice of record
READ, WRITE statement.
size: . . . . . .
Choice of block size: . none.
1 logical record per tape
Sequence control: . .
input-output statement.
In-out error control:.
automatic •
Blocking control:.
FORMAT statement.

.34

Data Items

· 335
.336
· 337

.' own coding.

. undefined .
50.
. 400.
50 per subroutine.
no limit.
no limit.
290.
290.
50.
.1.
.1.
.1.

. 341 Designation of class: .
.342 Possible classes
Integer:
Fixed point: .
Floating point:
Alphabetic: •
Alphameric:
.343 Choice of external
radix: .
.344 Possible radices
Decimal: .
Octal: •
. 345 Justification: .
.346 Choice of code:

by name.
yes .
no.
yes.
yes.
yes.
none.
yes.
no.
alpha automatic left justified.
' FORMAT statement and
READ, WRITE statements •

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN

§

162.

· 34 7 Possible codes
Decimal:
Octal: .
Hollerith: .
Alphameric:
· 348 Item size (internal)
Variable size:
Designation:
Range
Fixed point numeric:
Floating point
numeric:
Alphameric :
• 349 Sign provision:
.35

yes.
no.
yes.
yes.
fixed.
none.
fixed; 10 digits.
· fixed; 8 & 2 digits.
· fixed; 5 char.
. optional.

Data Values

.351 Constants
Possible sizes
Integer:
Fixed point: .
Floating point:
Alphabetic: .
Alphameric:
Subscriptable:
Sign provision:.

1 to 10 digits.
none.
1 to 8 digit fixed point
part; 1 or 2 digit exponent.
.120 char.
.120 char.
.yes.
· optional.

.411 Operator List (Cont'd)
XFIXF ( ): •
ABSF ( ): ••
INTF ( ): •.
MODF (A,B):
MAX (A, .•• ):
MIN (A, ••• ): •
DIMF (A,B):
LOFG ( ):.
SINF ( ): •
COSF ( ): . ;
EXPF ( ): .
SQRTF ( ):
ATANF ( ): .
TANHF ( ): .
.412 Operands allowed
Classes:
• •
Mixed scaling: .
Mixed classes: .
Mixed radices: .
Literals: . • • •
.413 Statement structure
Parenthesis
a - b - c means: .
a + b x c means: .
a .;. b .;. c means: •
abc means:
Size limit:
•
Multi-results:
•
• 414 Rounding of results:.

· 352 Literals
Possible sizes
Integer:
Fixed point: .
Floating point:

1 to 10 digits.
none.
1 to 8 digit fixed point
part; 1 or 2 digit exponent.
Alphabetic: .
none.
none.
Alphameric: .
implied for numerics.
Designation:. .
Sign provision:
optional .
. 353 'Figuratives: .
own coding.
. 354 Conditional variables: .. computed GO TO .
· 36

403: 162.347

fix.
absolute value.
entire.
remainder A .;. B.
max value.
min value.
diminish A by B.
natural log.
sine.
cosine.
exponential.
square root.
arctangent.
hyperbolic tangent •
numeric only.
yes.
only in exponentiation and
functions.
no.
yes.
· (a-b) - c.
• a + (b x c).
• (a';' b)';' c.

· a**b**c is illegal;
parenthesis must be
used •
. 660 char.
.no •
· truncation of integers at
each step in expression.

.415 Special
cases
Fixed
Floating
x = -x:
K = -K
X = -X
x=x+l:.
• K=K+1
X=X+1
x = 4.7 y: •.•• K = 47*K/10
X = 4.7 *y
x = 5x107 + y2: •• K = 50000000
X = 5. E7 +
+ L**2
Y**2
X = ABSF(Y)
x = y : • . • • • K = XABSF(L)
X =INTF(Y)
x = entire (3.5): K = XINTF(L)
.416 Typical examples: X = (-B + SQRTF
(B*B-4. 0*A*C»/(2. O*A)

Special Description Facilities

.361 Duplicate format:
• 362 Re-definition: . .
· 363 Table description
Subscription: . .
Multi -subscripts:
Level of item: . . . .
Implied subscript
at lower level: . .
• 364 Other subscriptible
entities: . . . . . .

by multiple references to
single FORMAT statement. .42
COMMON statement •
EQUIVALENCE statement. .421
. 422
• 423
yes.
1 to 3.
.43
variables.

Operations on Arra'f..s
Matrix operations: ••
Logical operations:
Scanning: • . . • • .

none •
none •
none.

Other Computation:

none.

no.

.44

Data Movement and Format

tape units.

.441
• 442
• 443
.444
.445

Data copy example:,
Levels possible: •
Multiple results: •
Missing operands:
Size of operands
Exact match: .

.4

OPERATION REPERTOIRE

· 41

Formulae

. 411 Operator List

+

* :
/
** .
=

FLOATF ():

addition, also unary.
subtraction, also unary.
multiplication.
division.
exponentiation.
is set equal to.
float.

©

Alignment rule
Numbers:
Alpha: .•
Filler rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: •••

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

• Y= X.
items.
none.
not possible.
implied, except for alpha
or input-output•
right justified; normalized for
floating point.
left justified.
zeros.
blanks.
7/62

IBM 7070/7072/7074

403: 162.445
§l62 •

.52

. 445 Size of Operands (Cont'd)
Truncating rule
Numbers: . .
truncate at left.
Alpha: . . . .
truncate at right.
Variable size
destination:
no.
. 446 Editing possible
Change class: .
yes.
Change radix: .
no.
Delete editing
symbols:. . .
automatic.
Insert editing symbols
Actual point:. ..
automatic.
Suppress zeroes:
automatic.
Insert: . . .
automatic point.
Float: . . . .
. + - signs only.
.447 Special moves: .
none.
automatic.
. 448 Code translation:
. 449 Character manipulation: . . . . . . .
none.

.521 Designators
Condition: .
IF.
Procedure:
implied.
.522 Simple conditions
no.
Expression v expression:
no .
Expression v variable: .
no.
Expression v literal: . .
Expression v figurative:
always zero.
Expression v condition:.
no.
no.
Variable
v variable: .
no.
Variable
v literal: ..
Variable
v figurative:
always zero.
Variable
v condition:.
no.
Conditional value: . . . .
no.
.523 Condition relations
Equal: •••••••• } jointly in each
Greater than: • • •• IF statement against zero •
Less than: . . . . . .
Greater than or equal: no.
Less than or equal: •• no.
• 524 Variable conditions:. • always zero •
.525 Compound Condino.
tionals: • . • • . • .
.526 Alternative designator: none.
.528 Typical Example:
IF (X**2.0 - 3.0) 29, 37,
18; means go to 29, 37
or 18 if x 2 -3 is respectively less than, equal to,
or greater than zero.
This is the only permitted
form of conditional statement.

.45

File Manipulation
.own coding.
own coding.

Open: . . . . . .
Close: . . . . .
Advance to next
record: . . . .
Step back a record:
Set restart point: . . .
Restart: ••••.
Start new reel: .
Start new block: .
Search on key: •
Rewind: .
Unload: . . . . .
. 46

READ, WRITE, PUNCH,
PRINT.
BACKSPACE.
none.
none.
own coding.
implied in each inputoutput statement.
none.
REWIND.

none.

Operating Communication

. 461 Log of progress: . . . • TYPE uses console typewriter; PRINT uses online printer.
.462 Messages to operator: •. same as log.
• 463 Offer options: • .
PAUSE causes halt and
type-out of a specified
integer.
• 464 Accept option. . . . . . use Alteration Switch
(SENSE SWITCH).
.47

Object Program Errors
Error
Overflow:
In-out:
Invalid data:

Discovery Special actions
IF clause own coding.
automatic type message and
halt.
none.

.5

PROCEDURE SEQUENCE CONTROL

.51

Jumps

.511
• 512
. 513
• 514
. 515

Destinations allowed:.
Unconditional jump: ••
Switch: • • • . .
Setting a sv; itch:
Switch on data:.

.53

7/62

Subroutines

.531 Designation
Single statement: .
same as set •
Set of statements:
First: . . . • . .
SUBROUTINE.
END.
Last: . . . . • •
. 532 Possible subroutines: .
any number of statements.
.533 Use in-line in program:. • . • . • ••
no •
.534 Mechanism
Cue with parameters: CALL XXX (X, Y, Z).
Number of parameters: 50•
Formal return:. .• .RETURN at least once.
Alternative return:. . none .
• 535 Names
Parameter call by
value: . • • • • •
none.
Parameter call by
name: . • . • • •
yes.
Non -local names:
use COMMON.
Local names:. • .
all.
Preserved own variables: . . • . . •
all .
• 536 Nesting limit:. . • .
unlimited .
• 537 Automatic recursion
allowed: . . • • . .
none .
.54

statement .
GOTON.
GO TO M, (35, 47, 18).
ASSIGN 35 TO M.
GO TO (35, 47, 18), 1.

Conditional Procedures

Function Definition by Procedure

.541 Designation
Single statement: •
Set of statements
First: . . • • . •
Last: • . • • • • •
• 542 Level of procedure: ••

same as set
FUNCTION.
END •

any number of statements •

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN
§l62.
• 543 Mechanism
Cue: •.•
Formal return:
.544 Names
Parameter call by
value: . . • . • .
Parameter call by
name: • . • • . •
Non-local names:
Local names: •
Preserved own
variables: • •
. 55

Operand Definition
by Procedure:

.74
by name in expression.
RETURN.
none.
yes.
use COMMON.
all.

none.

• 561 Designation of loop
Single procedure: .
none.
First and Last procedure:. . . . . . . current place to named
end; e.g., DO 173 1= 1,
N,2.
. 562 Control by count: .
none.
.563 Control by step
Parameter
Special index: .
no.
Any variable: .
integer only.
Step: . . . . . .
positive integers.
Criteria: . . . . •
greater than.
Multiple parameters: no.
.564 Control by condition: .• no.
• 565 Control by list: . . . . . no .
. 566 Nesting limit: . . . . . 50.
.567 Jump out allowed:. . . yes.
• 568 Control variable exit
status: . . . . . . .
available.
EXTENSION OF THE
LANGUAGE: . . . . .

.7

LIBRARY FACILITIES

• 71

Identity:......

. 72

Kinds of libraries

.721 Fixed master: . . .
. 722 Expandable master: .

. 75

. subroutines.
functions.

Mechanism

.751 Insertion of new item: .. separate systems run.
.752 Language of new item: •• Autocoder.
.753 Method of call:. . . . . named in procedures.
.76

Types of Routine

.8

TRANSLATOR CONTROL

.81

Transfer to Another
Language: • . . . . . . no (subroutines may be
written in Autocoder).

.82

Optimizing Information Statements

.821 Process usage state ments: • . • • • •
.822 Data usage statements: . . • . .
.83
.84
.85

Translator Environment: . . . • •.

• no.

Target Computer
Environment:

• no •

Program Documentation Control:. • . .

no .

.91

Choice of Storage
Level: •

none .

.92

Address Allocation:

none .

.93

Arrangement of Items
in Word in Unpacked
. none .
Form:

• 94

Assignment of Input
Output Devices: . •

. FORTRAN library.

• no •
. yes.

©

COMMON.
EQUIVALENCE.

TARGET COMPUTER ALLOCATION CONTROL

can write new function in
library.

Storage Form: . . • . . .magnetic tape.

none.

.9

.95
.73

Varieties of Contents: • . .

.761 Open routines exist:. . yes.
.762 Closed routines exist: .. yes .
• 763 Open-closed is variable: • . . • • . . • . no .

all.

.56' Loop Control

.6

403: 162.543

.

yes .

Input-Output Areas: ... automatic; but overlapping
operations are not
possible.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

403:171.100

.ST""'"

_EDP

."

IBM 7070 / 7072 / 7074

REPORTS

M. O. Language
Autocoder

MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: AUTOCODER
§

171.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

Description (Cont'd)
All material in this report section applies to the
full Autocoder system, which requires at least six
magnetic tape units and is used in most 7070 series
installations. Two restricted versions of the language are avaUable for translation on smaller configurations. Basic Autocoder is usable on systems
with unit record input-output only, but it is limited
to a one-for-one translation of symbolic to machine
instructions and cannot process macro instruc,tions
of any kind. Four-Tape Autocoder can be used on
systems with four or five magnetic tape units; it is
restricted to simpler substitution-type macros.
Differences among the three versions of Autocoder
are emphasized in the Program Translator sections.

.15

Publication Date: •••• original version, thira
quarter, 1960.

.2

LANGUAGE FORMAT

.21

Diagram: ,

IBM 7070/7074 Autocoder.
IBM Data Processing
Division, Applied Programming.

.12

.13

.14

Reference: . . . . . . . IBM Publication C28-6121-

O.
.14

Description
Autocoder is the most widely used coding system for
the IBM 7070 series. Basically a symbolic machine
oriented language, it has been expanded through the
addition of powerful macro generators and the Input/Output Control System. The Autocoder language permits utilization of all hardware facilities
of a 7070, 7072, or 7074, and there is full program
compatibility among the three systems. There is,
however, no source language compatibility between
Autocoder for the 7070 series and Autocoder for the
IBM 1401 and 1410.
Each macro instruction in the source routine is converted by the appropriate macro generator into a
series of symbolic instructions which are then converted to machine codes. Parameters in the operand of the Il!acro instruction control the coding that
will be produced by the generator. Most powerful
of the macros is ARITH, which generates instructions to compute the value of an arithmetic expression written in a manner similar to FORTRAN.
Operations may be performed on floating or fixed
point variables, constants, or literals; fixed point
scaling is handled automatically; and nine floating
point arithmetic functions are provided. The LOGIC
macro generates instructions to test whether a
specified logical expression is true or false, and
to set a switch or execute a branch depending upon
the result. Other standard macros facilitate loop
control and initialization, comparisons, data movement, output editing, and program testing. Additional macro generators can be coded. by the user
and added to the systems tape. Subroutines are
treated as special cases of macro codes.

.22
sequences entries on coding sheet.
Label:
names the location of an
instruction or data item.
Operation:
mnemonic representation
of a machine operation,
pseudo operation, or
macro code.
Operand: • • • • • • . • actual or symbolic address
of data to be operated
upon, with specification
of field definition, relative addressing, indexing;
literals and/or commentE;
or parameters for a macro code.
Identification:
identifies the routine.
Line: .

.23

Corrections: .

.24

Special Conventions

.241 Compound addresses:.
The IBM 7070 Series Input/Output Control System
(lOCS) is a supplement to Autocoder. It provides
additional control and macro operations that handle
reading, writing, tape blocking and unblocking,
file labeling, checkpoints, and error checking. Information pertaining to the system configuration,
file characteristics, record layouts, file labels, and
checkpoints must be included in the source routine
in the form of a series of descriptive entries. The
file specification for each tape file must contain 36
separate entries.

©

refer to 7070 Autocoder
Coding Sheet, 403:131. 2.

.242 Multi-addresses:
• 243 Literals
Fixed numeric:
Floating numeric: •

spare lines on coding
sheet and gaps in sequence numbers.

BASE + ADJUSTMENT
where BASE is any label
and ADJUSTMENT is a
decimal integer.
• in pseudos and macros
only.
• preceded by + or - sign.
· ± nF ± m, where n is an

integer of 1 to 8 digits
and m is a 1 or 2-digit
exponent.
Alphameric: . . • . . • preceded and followed by@

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

IBM 7070/7072/7074

403:171.244
§l7l.

.244 Special coded
addresses: •
.245 Actual core
storage addresses:
.3

LABELS

.31

General

.311 Maximwn nwnber
of labels: . . • •
. 312 Common label formation rule:
.313 Reserved labels:. •

..

.314 Other restrictions:
.32

· * refers

.1 to 4 decimal digits.

no practical limit.
yes .
labels ABS, AND, E, G,
IN, L, LC, LS, NOT,
NOZERO, OR, R, RR,
RS, TO, WITH, and all
function names are forbidden when certain macros are used.
· none.

. 321 Labels for procedures
Existence: • . . . . . • mandatory if referenced by
other instructions.
letter.
letters or numerals; no
blanks or special
characters.

Number of
characters: .
• 1 to 10.
.322 Labels for library
routines: . • • • . . • same as procedures.
. 323 Labels for constants: . · same as procedures.
.324 Labels for files
Existence: . . •
· mandatory when lOCS is
used.
Formation rule
(recommended form)
First 8 characters: .. TAPEFILE.
Last 2 characters:. . alphameric.
Number of
characters: .
10.
. 325 Labels for records: . . same as procedures.
. 326 Labels for variables: .• same as procedures.
.33

Local Labels:. .

...

none .

DATA

.41

Constants

to this address.

Universal Labels

Formation rule
First character:.
Others: . • . . • .

.4

.411 Maximwn size constants
Integer
Decimal
When referenced
by symbolic instruction:. . ..
When referenced by
macro-codes only:
Octal:
Hexadecimal:
Fixed nwneric: . .
Floating nwneric
Decimal: •

20 digits.
none.
none •
same as integers.
8 digit mantissa, 2 digit
exponent.
none.
none.

Octal: . .
Hexadecimal:
Alphabetic
When referenced
by symbolic instruction: . . . • . . . • 5 characters.
When referenced
by macro -codes
only: . . . . . . •
unlimited .
Alphameric: . . • .
same as alphabetic.
.412 Maximwn size literals
Integer
Decimal
When referenced
by symbolic instruction: • . . . . • • . 10 digits.
When referenced by
macro-codes
only: . . . .
.20 digits.
Octal: . . . . .
• none.
Hexadecimal: •
. none.
Fixed numeric:
· same as integers.
Floating numeric
Decimal: • . . .
· 8 digit fixed point part, 2digit exponent; usable
only with macro-codes.
Octal: . . . . •
• none.
Hexadecimal: •
. none.
Alphabetic
In symbolic
machine instructions: . . . •
.5 characters •
In macro-code
operands: •
.120 characters.
Alphameric :
• same as alphabetic.

•

7/62

10 digits.

~

' IA-U-ER-BA-CH--:-j

MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: AUTOCODER
§171

.42

· 544 Annotation
Comment phase: .
Working Areas

.421 Data layout: •

• specified in program; DA
pseudo.
• tabulated in program; alphameric, fixed or floating point numeric.
• yes; EQU pseudo •

• 422 Data type: . •
• 423 Redefinition: ••
• 43

•

Tide phrase:

· any card; separated from
operand by at least two
blanks·.
• comments card, with
asterisk in column 6.

.545 Other
Reserve index words
or electronic switches: XRESERVE, XRE LEASE ,
SRESERVE, SRELEASE
CNTRL pseudos •

Input-Output Areas

.6

SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
Note: Only those facilities
supplied by the manufacturer on the 7070
Series Compiler Systems Tape are listed
here; others may be
incorporated as described in paragraph
.75.

· 61

Special Arithmetic

specified in program; DA
pseudo.
not required •
no.

.431 Data layout: ••
• 432 Data type: •••
.433 Copy layout:. .
•5

PROCEDURES

.51

Direct Operation Codes

· 511 Mnemonic
Existence: .
Number: .
Example:

· mandatory.
.152.
ASn = add to storage from
accumulator n (n = 1, 2,
or 3).

.512 Absolute
Existence: .
.52

403: 171.420

. . . not permitted.

.611 Facilities: . . . . .

. 612 Method of call: . .

operand of ARITH macro
may specify addition,
subtraction, multiplication' and/or division in
fixed or floating point
mode.
ARITH macro .

Macro-Codes
· 62

.521 Number available
Input-output: .
. 17 (in IOCS system).
Arithmetic: . .
. 1.
Math functions:
. 9 (in ARITH macro only).
Error control: . ..
. none.
Res tarts: • • . ..
.• 1 (in IOCS)
Logic: •• • . • • . • . 6.
Initialization: . . . . . .3.
Data movement: . •
3.
Diagnostics:
1.
. 522 Examples
MOVE A TO B.
Simple: .
Elaborate:
ARITHX=A+B*CD/2, OVERF LOWBR.
.523 New macros:
inserted into library in
separate run.
.53

Interludes:...

..

.54

Translator Control

• 541 Method of control
Allocation counter:.
Label adjustment: .
Annotation: . • . . .
• 542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute:. . .
Set to label:. . •
Step forward: .
Step bacl-ward:
Reserve area: . •
. 543 Label adjustment
Set labels equal:
Set absolute value:
Clear label table:

Special Functions

square root, log, exponential, sin, cosin, arcsine,
and arctangent (all in
floating point mode).
.622 Method of call: • • • • . by name in operand of
ARITH macro; e. g.,
ARITH Y = SIN (X).
.621 Facilities: • . • •

.63

Overlay Control: .

· 64

Data Editing

· 641 Radix conversion:
Code translation:

none.

· pseudo operations.
· pseudo operations.
· see .544.
ORIGIN CNTRL and
LITORIGIN CNTRL
pseudos.
ORIGIN CNTRL and LITORIGIN CNTRL pseudos.
ORIGIN CNTRL pseudo.
ORIGIN CNTRL pseudo.
DA pseudo •
EQU pseudo.
EQU pseudo.
none.

©

none .

none.
none (machine instructions
are available for conversions between alphameric
and numeric modes).

.642 Format control
Zero suppression: •
Size control: • • ••
Sign control: . . • .
Special characters:

• yes.
• yes .
• yes.
• insert $ ,
float $
• 643 Method of call: . • • • • DLINE pseudo specifies
layout and editing for a
print-line area; EDMOVE
macro edits fields and
moves them into the
print-line area.
• 65

Input-Output Control

• 651
.652
.653
• 654
• 655

File labels: •
Reel labels: •
mocking:; •.
Error control:
Method of call:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

· IOCS, see. 81.
· IOCS, see .81.
• lOCS, see. 81.
• IOCS, see. 81.
• macros; 15 available.
7/62

403:171.660

IBM 70701707217074

§171.

.81

• 66

Sorting:.

• 67

Diagnostics

• • • . . • none.

SNAP macro may be used .
none.
SNAP macro provides listing of specified portions
of core storage on any
selected output unit.

.7

LIDRARY FACILITIES

• 71

Identity: •••••

.72

Kind of Libraries

• 721 Fixed master: ••.

• 722 Expandable master: •
.723 Private: •••

....

Storage Form:

.74

Varieties of
Contents: •

• 75

SETSW: • . • . • . • •
no.
yes.
private facilities may be
added.

, ZERO: • • . • . . • • •

• magnetic tape.

FILL: . • . • . • . • .

• macro generators and
functions (subroutines
are considered as
special cases of macros).

EDMOV: . . . • . • .

Mechanism
MOVE: ••••••••

Insertion in Program

SHIFT: . • . • • • • .

SNAP:
OPEN (lOCS):

.761 Open routines exist: ••• yes; most macros.
• 762 Closed routines
exist: • . . . .
yes; functions and some
macros.
.763 Open-closed is
optional: .
no.
.764 Closed routines
optional.
appear once: .

GET (lOCS): •
PUT (lOCS): •

CLOSE (IOCS): •

MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES

END (lOCS): •

Macros

PUTX (lOCS): •

Code

Description

. computes value of an
arithmetic expression
and stores the result in
any desired field.
COMP: . . . . . . • . compares two fields and
branches according to the
results of the comparison.
CYCLE: . . . . . . . branches specified number
of times to each of a
series of locations.

ARITH:.

7/62

LOGIC: . . . . . . . .

7070 Series Compiler Systems Tape.

. special generator run compiles new macro generator and inserts it into
systems tape.
. 752 Language of new item: Autocoder .
.753 Method of call: . . . . . macro code or function
name in ARITH macro.

•8

DECOD:

ZSIGN • • . • . • • • •

.751 Insertion of new
item: . . . . . .

.76

Code
RECYC:

• 671 Dumps: •.
• 672 Tracers: •
.673 Snapshots:

.73

Macros (Cont'd)

RlSE (lOCS): •
WTM (lOCS):.
BSP (lOCS): ••
RWD (lOCS): •
RDSF (lOCS): •

Description
reinitializes one or more
CYCLE macros.
analyzes a code field and
branches according to
the value it contains.
tests whether a given expression is true or false,
sets a switch or branches,
or both.
analyzes a field or
area for the presence of
zero and, if not zero, for
its sign, and branches
accordingly.
sets one or more digit,
electronic, or program
switches to an on or off
condition.
replaces contents of fields
or areas with zeros or
blanks.
replaces contents of fields
or areas with a specified
constant .
transfers data items between specified fields in
storage and edits them to
conform to the format of
the field to which they
are moved •
transmits data from one
specified field or area in
storage to another.
places contents of a field
into one or more accumulators, shifts it and
stores the result.
provides a listing of a
specified portion of
storage.
prepares input and output
files for processing.
makes'one data record
available for processing•
moves one record from a
processing area to the
next available space in an
output area.
makes input and output
files unavailable for processing.
removes all tapes from use
upon completion of a job.
places records in an output file by exchanging
ROWs rather than by
moving the record •
starts a new record block.
writes one or more tape
marks on an output file.
backspaces over one or
more records in a file.
rewinds either an input
or output file.
spaces an input tape forward over a specified
number of segment marks.

MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: AUTOCODER
§171.

.81

.82
Macros (Cont'd)

RDSB (IOCS): •

RDLIN (IOCS):

spaces an input tape backward over a specified
number of segment marks.
reads data from input
label Information Cards.

writes one or more segment marks on an output
file.
CHPT (IOCS): .
. writes checkpoint record
defined by DCHPT descriptive entry.
FEORN (IOCS):
force end-of-reel on an
input file.
FEOR (IOCS): . . . . . force end-of-reel on an
output file.
DEOR (IOCS): . • . • . delay end-of-reel after
reaching end-of-tape
mark and continue writing.
NOTE: Macros marked (IOCS) are available in
Autocoder and Four-Tape Autocoder; all
others in full Autocoder only.
WSM (IOCS):. •

Pseudos
Code

Pseudos (Cont'd)
Code

Description

.82

403:171.810

Description

DA.

defines and reserves any
portion of storage.
DC: •.
assigns names to constants.
DRDW: •
generates a block definition word.
defines digital switches
DSW*: •
for use by SETSW and
LOGIC macros.
DLINE*: •.••
specified layout of r.:tintline area and editing to
be performed.
EQU: ••
assigns a label to an.
actual or symbolic
address.
CODE*:
names a field which may
contain a code during
processing; names and
defines code values.
DIOCS (lOCS) • . • • . selects major methods of
processing to be used.

©

Description

DTF (lOCS)!

describes any input or
output tape file.
DUF (lOCS):
describes type of file and
unit record equipment to
be used.
DCHPT (IOCS):
descriptive entry associated with the writing
of checkpoint records.
XRESERVE*: . • . . . prevents assignment of
symbolic names to
designated index
register.
SRESERVE*: . • . • . • prevents assignment of
symbolic names to
designated electronic
switches.
XRELEASE*: .
releases designated index registers for later
assignment
SRELEASE*: . . .
releases designated
electronic switches for
later assignment.
CNTRL:
. . . used in conjunction with
ORIGIN, LITORlGlN,
END, BRANCH,
XRELEASE, SRELEASE,
XRESERVE, SRESERVE.
BRANCH: . . . . . . . . causes processor to
produce an execute card
containing an unconditional branch instruction.
END: ..
indicates to processor
that end of source language program has
been reached.
ORIGIN: . . . . . . . . . instructs processor to begin assignment of suc- .
ceeding entries at specified location.
LlTORIGIN:
causes immediate compilation of all remaining material generated
"out-of-line" since
last LITORlGlN or beginning of program.
NOTE: Pseudos marked (lOCS) are available in
Autocoder and Four-Tape Autocoder;
those marked * are available in full Autocoder only.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

403: 1B1.100

.S"'DA"
II

EDP

IBM 70701707217074

REPORTS

Program Translator
Autocoder

PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: AUTOCODER

• 23

§181.
.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

Size Limitations

• 231 Maximum number
of source statements:
IBM 7070 Series Compiler
System: Autocoder.
"Autocoder 76. "
.232 Maximum size source
statements: . • . • .

• 12

Description
This translator permits utilization of all the facilities of the Autocoder language as described in
section 403:171.

· 233 Maximum number of
data items: •

Its operation requires at least six magnetic tape
units. The translator and its library of macro generators and functions are provided in the 7070
Series Compiler Systems Tape, which also contains the COBOL and FORTRAN processors, the
Report Program Generator, and the Input/Output
Control System. Up to ten magnetic tape units will
be found useful for bulk translating, and on -line
unit record input-output devices can be utilized if
available.

.3

OUTPUT

· 31

Object Program

Additions, alterations, and deletions from the Compiler Systems Tape are handled by a systems run
which produces an updated systems tape. New macro generators, written in the Autocoder language,
are processed and added to the macro library
durin&" a special generator run.

.321 Standard inclusions:.

no practical limit if overlays are used in object
program.
75 characters per card;
continuation cards may
be used with certain instructions.
no practical limit.

.311 Language name: . . . • . IBM 7070 series machine
code.
.313 Output media: . • . . . . magnetic tape (punched
card deck is optional).
· 32

· 33

Conventions
. Input/Output Control System (optional).

Documentation
Subject

Provision

Source program: .
.13

Originator: . . . . . . . IBM Data Processing Division' Applied Programming.

• 14

Maintainer:

as above.

.15

Availability:

third quarter, 1960.

.2

INPUT

.21

Language

• 211 Name: •
.212 Exemptions: •
.22

Object program: . . .
Storage map (symbol table): . . . .
Restart point list:
Language errors: .
Cross reference
table: . . . . . . . .
Allocation counter
limits: . • . . •
Available index
words: . . . . .

• IBM 7070/7074 Autocoder •
• none.

magnetic tape listing
(on-line printer listing
is optional).
listing.
listing.
none.
listing.
listing (with symbol
table).
listing.
listing.

.4

TRANSLATING PROCEDURE

.41

Phases and Passes

Form
Systems Control: .

.221 Input media:
"-

. 222 Obligatory ordering: •
.223 Obligatory grouping:.

• magnetic tape and/or
punched cards (both
forms may be used in a
single run).
correct sequence according to coding sheet page
and line numbers.
. none.

©

supervises the translation process and handles
house-keeping functions.
Phase I: • . . • . • . • • scans and assigns numbers to source program
statements, checks for
errors, and prepares input files for Phases II
and III .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporoted

7/62

IBM 7070/ 707217074

403:181.410
§lSI.

.41

Phases and Passes (Cont'd)
Phase II: • . . • . . • •

Phase III: . . . • . . •

.42

Optional Modes

• 421
.422
.423
. 424

Translate: • . .
Translate and run:
Check only:
Patching: .••

. 425 Up-dating: •
.43

converts each macro instruction to a series of
symbolic machine instructions.
assigns machine locations
to statements and machine addresses to operands; prepares listing and
condensed program deck.

yes.
no.
no.
no; must alter object deck
or retranslate.
no.

Special Features

no.
. 431 Alter to check only: .
.432 Fast unoptimized
translate: . . . • . •
no.
. 433 Short translate on
restricted program: .• no.
. 44

Bulk Translating:. . .

. 45

Program Diagnostics

. 451 Tracers: .
• 452 Snapshots:
• 453 Dumps: •
. 46

.5

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

.51

Object Program Space

.511 Fixed Overhead
Name
Input-Output
Control Systern (optional):

approx. 750
to 2,000
words

Comment
depends upon
facilities
used and number of files .

. 512 Space required for each
input-output file: ••
1, 2, or 3 times maximum
block length, as specified .
. 513 Approximate expansion of procedures: • 1. 0 (exclusive of macros,
which vary widely).
.52

Translation Time

.521 Normal translating (* *)
ruM 7070; 729 IV
tape units:. . .
0.0075.
ruM 7072; 7330
tape units: . . .
not available.
ruM 7074; 729 IV
tape units:. . .
O.OO4S .
where S is number of source statements.

yes (at least 7 magnetic
tape units are required).

.53

Optimizing Data: • • . • none.

.54

Object Program Performance: . . • • •

none.
SNAP macro •
SNAP macro •

• essentially unaffected; decreased if macro codes
are used extensively .

Translator Library

.461 Identity: • . . • .
.462 User restriction:
• 463 Form
Storage medium:
Organization: .•

.464 Contents
Routines: .
Functions:
Data descriptions:
. 465 Librarianship
Insertion: •.•
Amendment: . .
Call procedure:

• 7070 Series Compiler Systems Tape.
• none .
magnetic tape.
alphabetical order by
macro or function name;
each routine preceded by
16-word identification
record.

.6

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

· 61

Translating Computer

· 611 Minimum configuration: . . . . . . . . .
· 612 Larger configuration
advantages: . . . • .

open and closed.
yes; used in ARITH macro.
no •
systems or generator run.
systems run.
macro code or function
name in ARITH macro.

,

7/62

Space

A-U-ER-SA-CH-_"'~
-"

'-1

6 magnetic tape units and
5, 000 words of core
storage.
up to 10 magnetic tape
units provide greater
flexibility and facilitate
bulk translating; two
magnetic tape channels
and 9,990 core storage
locations speed up translation; card reader,
punch, and/or printer
provide on-line card input, object deck, and/or
listing.

PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: AUTOCODER

403: 18 1.620
.7

§ISl.

· 62

· 622 Usable extra facilities: . . . . . . . .

.7

Improper format:
Incomplete
entries:
Target computer
overflow:
Inconsistent
program:

Target Computer

• 621 Minimum configuration: . . . . . . • .

• any IBM 7070, 7072, or
7074 system.
all.

Input-output
errors:

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Error
Interlock
Action
Missing entries:

check

type message and
halt.

Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:

check
check

noted in listing.
noted in listing.

©

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION (Cont'd)

.S

check

noted in listing.

check

noted in listing.

check

noted in listing.

checks on
noted in listing.
some macros
various
checks

type message .and
halt.

ALTERNATIVE TRANSLATORS: . . . . . . . none.

1962 by Auerbach Corp?ration and BNA Incorporated

7/62

403: 1B2.100
IBM 70701707217074

Program Translator
Four-Tape Autocoder

PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FOUR-TAPE AUTOCODER

.22

§182.
.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

. 12

Description

Form

• 221 Input media: .
IBM 7070/74 Four-Tape
Autocoder.
"Autocoder 74. "

.222 Obligatory ordering:
.223 Obligatory grouping:
.23

This translator was designed for use in installations having a 7070, 7072, or 7074 system with four
or five magnetic tape units. It provides most of
the advantages of the full Autocoder system, but its
ability to process macro codes is limited to simple
substitution-type macros, in contrast to the powerful macro generation capability of full Autocoder.
There are also a number of minor limitations on
the use of the Input/Output Control System (lOCS),
and seven of the Autocoder pseudo instructions have
not been implemented.
'l11e Four-Tape Autocoder system includes a library of subroutines and macro instructions. The
only macros supplied by the manufacturer (other
than those in roCS) are ZSOM, which sums up to
seven items and stores the result, and CALL, which
calls a library subroutine and sets up a linkage to
it. Additions, corrections, and deletions to the library are handled by special system runs. Changes
to a previously assembled routine are facilitated by
a special reassembly run which uses as input the
edited listing tape from the original assembly and
Autocoder statements specifying the changes to be
made. Since Four-Tape Autocoder and Full Autocoder use different types of macros, neither translator can process routines written for the other
unless no macro codes are used.
.13

.....

. 232 Maximum size source
statements:
.233 Maximum number of
data items: .
.234 Maximum number of
library items:
.3

OUTPUT

.31

Object Program

.311 Language name: .
.313 Output media: .

.33

Maintainer:

as above.

.15

Availability:

third quarter, 1960.

.2

INPUT

".21

Languages

• 211 Name: .
• 212 Exemptions: .

IBM 7070/7074 Autocoder.
no macro generators (substitution-type macros are
used instead); numeric
constants limited to 10
digits; Input/Output Control System is less flexible than in full Autocoder; 7 pseudos are not
available.

©

no practical limit if overlays are used in object
program .
75 characters per card.
no practical limit.
196 macros and/or
subroutines.

IBM 7070 machine code.
magnetic tape and/or
punched cards.

Conventions

• 321 Standard inclusions: .

Input/Output Control System (optional).

Documentation
Subject

Originator: . . . . . . • IBM Data Processing DiviSion, Applied Programming.

.14

Size Limitations

.231 Maximum number
of source statements: .

.32

· magnetic tape or punched
cards.
· correct sequence according to coding sheet page
and line numbers.
· none .

Source program:.
Object program: .
Storage map (symbol table): . . • .
Restart point list:
Language errors:
Available index
words: .•

Provision
listing on magnetic tape
and/or on-line printer.
listing.
listing.
none.
listing.
listing.

.4

TRANS LA TING PROCEDURE

.41

Phases and Passes
Systems Control:.
Phase I: • • . • . .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

supervises the translation
process.
reads source program,
checks sequence, inserts skeleton routines
in place of macro codes,
generates subroutine
linkages, and types error
messages.

7/62

403:182.410

IBM 7070 /7072 /7074

§182.
. 41

• 465 Librarianship
Insertion: . .
Amendment: •
Call procedure: .

Phases and Passes (Cont'd)
Phase II: . • • • '. . ••

checks operation codes for
validity and converts them
to· machine codes, generates symbol table, allocates storage locations
and processes operands
insofar as possible.
checks for duplicate labels,
assigns operand addresses, assigns index word
and electronic switch
numbers. (Phase III is
repeated if number of
labels exceeds core storage capacity).
packs literals into storage
locations, checks all instructions for completeness, writes object program tape and edited
listing tape (Plus on-line
card deck and listing if
elected).

Phase III: • . • • . • •

Phase IV: • • • • • • •

• 42

Optional Modes

.421
. 422
• 423
.424

Translate: . . . . . . . •
Translate and run:. • .
Check only: . • •
Patching:. . . .

.5

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

.51

Object Program Space

.511 Fixed overhead
Name:

.425 Up-dating:. . . . • •.

. 43

Comment:

.512 Space required for each
input-output file:
1, 2, or 3 times maximum
block length, as specified.
.513 Approximate expansion of procedures: •• 1.0 (exclusive of macros,
which vary widely).

.521 Normal translating: .

. not available •

.53

Optimizing Data: • •

• none.

.54

Object Program Performance: . . . . . .

essentially unaffected;
decreased if macro
codes are used extensively.

Bulk Translating: . • . • yes; at least 5 magnetic
tape units are required.
Program Diagnos tics:.. none; can be added to Iibrary by user.

.46

Translator Library

.461 Identity: . . . . .
. 462 User restriction:
. 463 Form
Storage medium:
Organization:

.464 Contents
Routines: .
Functions:
Data descriptions:

.6

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

.61

Translating: Computer

.611 Minimum configuration: 4

. 45

7/62

Translation Time

Special Features

.431 Alter to check only:
no .
. 432 Fast unoptimized
translate: • • . . • • . no.
.433 Short translate on
restricted program: •• no.

.44

• Input-Output Control
System (optional).
• approx. 750 to 2, 000
words.
depends upon facilities
used.

Space:

.52
yes.
no •
no.
yes; re-assembly run
makes corrections, additions or deletions to previously assembled listing tape.
yes; re-assembly run.

yes, system run.
yes; system run •
macros by name; subroutines by name in
operand of CALL macro.

• 612 Larger configuration
advantages: . • . • •

. Four-Tape Autocoder
Library•
• . • none •
. magnetic tape.
• alphabetical order by
routine name.
open and closed.
yes.
no.

.62
i·

~agnetic tape units and
5., 000 words of core
storage •

9,990 words of core storage, two tape channels,
and/or fifth magnetic
tape unit speed up translation; card reader,
punch, and/or printer
provide on-line card input, object deck, and/or
listing•

Target Computer

621 Minimum configuration: . . . .

i·622 Usable extra
facilities: .

IAUERBACH I .$]

.....
. .....

any mM 7070, 7072, o,r
7074 system.
all.

PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FOUR-TAPE AUTOCODER

403:182.700

§182.

.7

ERRORS. CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Interlock Action
Error
Missing entries:

check

Unsequenced entries:

check

Duplicate names:

check

Improper format:

check

Incomplete entries:

check

Target computer overflow:

check

Inconsistent program:
Input-output errors:

none.
check

type message
and continue.
type message
and continue.
type message
and continue.
type message
and continue.
type message
and continue.
type message
and continue.
type message

and halt.
.8

ALTERNATIVE TRANSLA TORS: • • • • • • • none.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

403:183.100
•

STANDARD

_EDP
."

IBM 7070/7072/7074
Program Translator
Basic Autocoder

REPORTS

PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: BASIC AUTOCODER

§

.232 Maximum size source
statements:. . . . .
.233 Maximum number of
data items: . . . . •

183.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: . .

· 12

Description

IBM 7070/74 Basic Autocoder.
"Autocoder 72".

The Basic Autocoder system was designed for cardonly 7070 or 7074 systems. It uses a subset of the
Autocoder language, but most of the refinements
have been eliminated. Neither macro codes nor the
Input/Output Control System can be used, and maximum operand length is reduced frolll 55 to 40 char ...
acters. Translator input and output are normally on
punched cards, and two card passes are required
for an assembly. There is a strict one-to-one correspondence between imperative statements in the
source routine and machine instructions in the object routine. Routines written in Basic Autocoder
can be processed by any of the three versions of
the Autocoder translator and can utilize all hardware facilities of the 7070 series.
.13

.3

OUTPUT

.31

Object Program

.311 Language name:.
. 313 Output media: .
.32

. IBM 7070 series machine
code.
. punched cards.

none.

Docum.entation
Provision

Subject

Originator: ••••••• IBM Data Processing Division, Applied Programming.

limited by core storage
capacity of translating
computer; 700 to 1,100
symbols with 5K core
storage and 2, 300 to
3,500 with 10K.

Conventions

• 321 Standard inclusions: .
.33

60 characters per card.

Source program: •
Object program: .

listing or symbolic card
deck.
listing or symbolic card
deck.
none.
none.
typed messages.

. 14

Maintainer:

as above •

.15

Availability:

third quarter, 1960

.2

INPUT

.4

TRANS LATING PROCEDURE

.21

Language

.41

Phases and Passes

.211 Name: .
.212 Exemptions: .

. 22

Storage map:
Restart point list:
Language errors:

IBM 7070/7074 Autocoder.
no macro codes; maximum
operand length is 40 characters; numeric constants limited to 10 digits;
Input/Output Control System is not available; 7
pseudos are not available.

Pass 1: . . . • . . •

performs checks, reserves storage for data
and instructions, prepares symbol table and
assigns addresses.
Pass 2: . . . . . • . . • processes operation codes
and operands, types
error messages, and
prepares the object deck
and listing•

Form
. 42

Optional Mode

.221 Input media: . . . . . . . punched cards or magnetic tape.
. 222 Obligatory ordering:. . correct sequence according to coding sheet page
and line numbers.
none.
· 223 Obligatory grouping: .

.421
.422
.423
.424
.425

Translate:. .
Translate and
Check only: •
Patching:. • •
Up-dating:. •

· 23

.43

Special Features

Size Limitations

· 231 Maximum number of
source statements: •

limited by target computer storage capacity.

©

•
. yes •
run:
• no.
. . .
• no.
• • •
• no.
• . . •.• no.

. 431 Alter to check only:. . • no.
.432 Fast unoptimized
translate: • . • . . . • no.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

403: 183.433
§

IBM 7070 / 707217074

183.

• 612 Larger configuration
advantages: ••••

.433 Short translate on
restricted program: •• no.
. 44

Bulk Translating:. • •

no.

.45

Program Diagnostics:

none.

.46

Translator Library: .

• none.

.5

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

• 62

.51

Object Program Space

.621 Minimum configuration: • • . . • . • •

. 511 FiXed overhead: •.
. none .
. 512 Space required for
each input-output.
file:
variable.
.513 Approximate expansion of procedures: . 1. o.
. 52

Optimizing Data: •

.54

Object Program Performance: .

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Error
Interlock Action
Missing entries:
check
type message •
Unsequenced entries: check
type message.
Duplicate names:
check
type message.
Improper format:
check
type message •
Incomplete entries:
check
type message.
Target computer
overflow:
check
type message.
Inconsistent program: none
type message and
Input-output errors: cheCk
halt.

.8

ALTERNATIVE TRANSLATORS

. none •

.

unaffected; 1. e. , same as
hand coding.

Computer Identity
IDM 650:
.6

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

.61

Translating Computer

. 611 Minimum configuration: . . . • • • • .

7/62

5,000 words of core storage, card reader, and
card punch.

any IDM 7070, 7072, or
7074 system •
all.

.7

. not available.

.

• 53

Target Computer

• 622 Usable extra facilities:

Translation Time

• 521 Normal translating: •

second card punch eliminate/! need for sorting
object and symbolic output decks; printer provides on-line listing;
one magnetic tape unit
handles symbolic output for off-line listing;
second tape unit handles
source program input,
replacing c~rd reader.

Date

"Assembly and August,
Condensing of
1960
7070 Basic
Autocoder Programs on the
IDM650", IDM
form J28- 6041-1

Comment
handles
Basic Autocoder language only,
on card 650
with alphabetic and
special character devices.

403:184.100
•

11

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7070 17072 I 7074

R[f'QRTS

Program Translator

COBOL 61
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: COBOL 61

§

184.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . . . . . . . . IBM 7070/7074 COBOL
Processor.

.12

Description
The COBOL Processor accepts source programs
written in the IBM 7070/7074 COBOL language, described in section 403:161. A number of the language facilities, however, have not been implemented in this version of the processor; these "deferred features" are listed in item. 212. Probably
the most significant omissions are the EXAMINE
verb and several useful features of the PICTURE
clause.
Conversion from COBOL source statements to 7070
series machine language instructions is a twd-stage
process. The COBOL Processor generates a set of
symbolic instructions in Autocoder language; these
ate converted to the machine language object routine by the Autocoder translator. Since both the
COBOL and Autocoder translators are contained in
the 7070 series Compiler Systems Tape, the entire
translation process is automatic.
Operation of the COBOL Processor requires 9,990
core storage locations and at least seven magnetic
tape units. There is no provision for bulk translating. When a source language error is detected,
the erroneous entry and a diagnostic message are
written on magnetic tape. Whenever possible, an
assumption is made about the programmer's intent
and processing continues.

.13

Originator:. . . . . . . IBM Data Processing Division, Applied Programming.

. 14

Maintainer:

as above .

. 15

Availability:

February, 1962

.2

INPUT

.21

Language

.211 Name:
• . . . . . • • IBM 7070/7074 COBOL.
.212 Exemptions
Procedure Division
1. The CORRESPONDING option of the MOVE
verb.
*2. The EXAMINE verb, including the TALLY
register.
*3. Class conditions in conditional statements.
*4. Numeric literals in DISPLAY statements.
*5. The figurative constant ALL.
*6. Truncation of arithmetic results; the
ROUNDED option is standard.

©

.212 Exemptions (Contd)
Data Division
*1. The JUSTIFIED clause .
*2. The BLANK WHEN ZERO clause as applied to
output data.
*3. The CHECK PROTECT clause.
*4. The figurative constant ALL.
*5. The COpy option.
*6. The following PICTURE characters:
a. preceding + and - signs.
b. floating + and - signs.
c. asterisk (check protect).
d. zero and blank as insertion characters.
e. Z if preceded by another character.
f. V (implied decimal point) in a report item.
Environment Division
*1. The COPY option.
*2. The OPTIONAL clause of the FILE-CONTROL
paragraph.
*3. Automatic allocation of object computer inputoutput devices.

* Denotes

that the exempted facility is part of Required COBOL -1961.
.

.22

Form

.221 Input media:
. 222 Obligatory ordering: .

. 223 Obligatory grouping: .
.23

Size Limitations

.231 Maximum number of
source statements: .
.232 Maximum size source
statements: .
.233 Maximum number of
data items: .

.3

OUTPUT

.31

Object Program

.311 Language name:
.313 Output media: .
. 32

magnetic tape or punched
cards.
Identification Division.
Environment Division.
Data Division.
Procedure Division.
by division and section.

limited by target computer storage capacity.
?
?

IBM 7070 series machine
code.
magnetic tape; optional online punched card deck.

Conventions

.321 Standard inclusions: .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Input-Output Control
System.
7/62

403: 184.330
§

IBM 7070 / 7072 /7074

184.

.33

· 52
Documentation
Subject
Source program:
Object program:
Storage map: . .
Restart pOint list:
Language errors:

Provision
listing (card images on
magnetic tape).
listing (in Autocoder form).
listing.
none.
listing (typed messages explain error halts).

.4

TRANSLATING PROCEDURE

. 41

Phases and Passes
Part I (COBOL
Processor): .

Translation Time

.521 Normal translating (***)
(typical total times per source program line,
based upon limited user operating experience)
IDM 7070; 729 IV
tape units:. . . .. 10 seconds.
IDM 7072; 7330 tape
units: . . . . .
not available.
IDM 7074; 729 IV
5 seconds.
tape units:. .

.53

Optimizing: Data: .

.54

Object Program
Performance: .

source program is converted to Autocoder symbolic form.

Part II (Autocoder
Translator): ..

Autocoder statements are
converted to machine
code.

.42

Optional Mode

.421
. 422
.423
. 424
. 425

Translate:
Translate and run: .
Check only:
patching: .
Up-dating:

.43

Special Features

none .
limited data available;
manufacturer estimates
that overall time and
space requirements
will be about 1. 4 times
the requirements for
good hand coding.

.6

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

.61

Translating: Computer

.611 Minimum configuration: 7 magnetic tape units and
9,990 words of core storage.
.612 Larger configuration
card reader provides onadvantages: .
line card input; printer
lists error messages online.

yes.
no.
no.
no •
no.

.431 Alter to check only:
.432 Fast unoptimized

no.

· 62

translate: .

no .

.621 Minimum configuration: any IDM 7070 series system .
. 622 Usable extra facilities: up to 10,000 core storage
locations, magnetic tape
units, card readers,
punches, printers .

...

.433 Short translate on restricted program:

no.

.44

Bulk Translating::

no.

. 45

Program Diagnostics:

none.

. 46

Translator Library: .

none.

.5

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

.51

Object Program Space

.511 Fixed overhead
Name
Input-Output
Control
System:

. 512

Space
approx. 750
to 2,000
words

•7

Comment
depends upon facilities used
and number of
files.

Spa~e

required for each
input-output file: . . . controlled by user; RESERVE ... ALTERNATE
AREAS .
. 513 Approximate expansion
of procedures: . . . . average is 5 to 10 machine
instructions per elementary procedural statement
(**).

7/62

Target Computer

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Errors

Check or
Interlock

Action

Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
Target computer overflow:
Inconsistent program:
Use of "deferred" feature:
Translator storage overflow:
Input-output error:

check
check
check
checks
checks
check
checks
checks
checks
checks

halt;
error
error
error
error
error
error
error
error
halt;

type message.
message.
message.
message.
message.
message.
message •
message.
message.
type message.

Note: In all above cases except the first and last, assumptions about
the data are made automatically and processing continues.

.8

ALTERNATIVE
TRANSLATORS: . . . none.

403:185.100
•

II

STANDARD

ED:!?

IBM 7070/7072/7074

REPDRTS

Program Translator

FORTRAN
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FORTRAN

§

185.

.23

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:........ IBM 7070 Series Compiler
System: FORTRAN
Processor ..
"Full FORTRAN".

. 12

Size Limitations

.231 Maximum number of
source statements: .

Description

.232 Maximum size source
statements:. . . . . . 660 char (10 cards).
· 233 Maximum number of data items
Nonsubscripted:
290 .
Subscripted: . . . . . 290.

This translator permits utilization of all the facilities of the 7070/7074 FORTRAN language as described in section 403:162.

.3

OUTPUT

.31

Object Program

The FORTRAN Processor is part of the 7070 Series
Compiler Systems Tape, which also contains the
Autocoder and COBOL Processors, the Report Program Generator, and the Input/Output Control System. At least six magnetic tape units are required
for its operation, and up to ten tape units will be
found useful for bulk translating. On-line unit record input-output devices can be utilized if available.
The optional Floating Decimal Arithmetic feature
will speed up execution of the object routine. There
is no provision for overlapping input-output operations and computation in the object routine.

· 311 Language name:

The FORTRAN Processor converts each FORTRAN
source program into a set of symbolic machine instructions. and macro codes in the Autocoder language, which is then converted by the Autocoder
Processor into a machine language object routine.
The translation process is fully automatic. At execution time, the object routine can be loaded anywhere in core storage by means of the FORTRAN
Relocatable Loader. The relocatability feature permits several routines that have been compiled separately to be loaded at the same time. FORMAT
statements are executed interpretively at run ti.rne.
.13

Originator: .

IBM Data Systems Division, Programming
Systems.

.14

Maintainer:

-----

as above.

.15

Availability:

1961.

.2

INPUT

.21

Language

limited by target computer
storage.

.313 Output media: .

· 32

IBM 7070 series machine
code.
magnetic tape (on -line
punched card deck is optional).

Conventions

.321 Standard inclusions: .

FORTRAN Package (includes input- output,
floating point arithmetic,
float, fix, log, and exponential subroutines).
.322 Compatible with:. . . . PEST monitor routine (see
403:191).
· 33

Documentation
Subject
Source program:
Object program: .
Storage map: . . .
Restart point list:
Language errors:

Provision
listing on magnetic tape or
on-line printer.
listing (in Autocoder language).
listing.
none.
typed messages and listing.

.4

TRANSLATING PROCEDURES

.41

Phases and Passes
Part I: . . . . . . .

.211 Name:
.212 Exemptions:
.22

7070/7074 FORTRAN.
none.

. 222 Obligatory ordering: .
. 223 Obligatory grouping: .

Translate: . . .
Translate and run: .
Check only:
Patching: . . . . . .

.425 Up-dating: . . .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

punched cards or magnetic
tape.
all statements must be in
correct sequence.
none.

©

.421
. 422
.423
. 424

yes .
no.
no .
no (but individual segments
can be recompiled separately).
no.

Form

.221 Input media:

.42

converts FORTRAN source
statements into Autocoder
statements.
Part II (Autocoder): . . assembles the object program in machine language.
Optional Modes

IBM 7070/7072/7074

403:185.430
§

185.

.43

· 52

Special Features

.431 Alter to check only:
. 432 Fast unoptimized
translate:. . . . .
. 433 Short translate on restricted program:

no.

.44

Bulk Translating:

yes; multi-file run compiles two or more independent programs and
writes all output on same
tapes.

.45

Program Diagnostics:

none (tracers, snapshots,
and dumps can be handled
by the PEST monitor).

. 46

Translator Library

. 461 Identity: . . . . . .
.462 User restriction: .
.463 Form
Storage medium: .
Organization: .
· 464 Contents
Routines:
Functions: . . . .
Data descriptions:
. 465 Librarianship
Insertion:. . . .
Amendment: . .
Call procedure:

no.
no.

FORTRAN library, on 7070
Series Compiler Systems
Tape.
general.

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

.51

Object Program Space

FORTRAN PaCkage:

Space

Comment

960 locations

FORMAT interpreter. I/O.
fix. float. log. e·xponential routines. etc.
area can be used for object
program data.

Relocatable Loader: 743 locations
Special hardware
functions:

325 locations

. 512 Space required for
each input-output
file: . . . . . . . .

indexing and status words.
etc.

Optimizing Data:. . . . none .

.54

Object Program Performance
Type

single I/O area serves all
files .

Time

Elementary algebra:
Complex formulae:
Deep nesting:
Heavy branching:
Complex subscripts:
Overlapping operations:
Data editing (FORMAT):

unaffected
unaffected
increased
unaffected
increased
not
possible.
increased
greatly

.6

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

.61

Translating Computer

Space
unaffected.
unaffected.
increased.
unaffected.
increased.
unaffected .

· 611 Minimum configuration: 6 magnetic tape units and
5, 000 words of core
storage.
· 612 Larger configuration
advantages: . . . . .
up to 10 magnetic tape
units provide greater
flexibility and facilitate
bulk translating; 2 tape
channels and more core
storage speed up translation; card reader,
punch. and/ or printer
provide on-line card input, object deck, and/or
listing.
• 62

Target Computer

.621 Minimum configuration: . . • . • • • •

. 513 Approximate expansion
of procedures: . . . . averages 5 to 6 machine
instructions per
FORTRAN statement (**).

7/62

.53

closed.
yes.
no.

·5

· 511 Fixed overhead
Name

.521 Normal translating (**)
System overheads
IBM 7070; 729 IV
8 minutes .
tape units:. . .
IBM 7072; 7330 tape
units: . . . . .
not available .
IBM 7074; 729 IV
tape units:. . .
5 minutes.
Approximate total times
per source statement,
for typical routines of
around 100 statements.
IBM 7070; 729 IV tape
units: . . . . . . . 6 seconds.
IBM 7072; 7330 tape
units: . . . ..
. not available.
IBM 7074; 729 IV
tape units:. .. . 3.5 seconds .

magnetic tape.
alphabetical order by
internal name.

systems run.
systems run.
named in procedural
statement.

Translation Time

· 622 Usable extra facilities:

any IBM 7070, 7072, or
7074 system.
all magnetic tape units;
on line card reader,
punch, and printer;
additional core storage;
Floating Decimal Arithmetic.

PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FORTRAN
§

403:185.700

185 .

.7

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Error
Interlock Action
Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
Target computer overflow:
Inconsistent program:
Size limitations exceeded:

.8

check type message
and halt.
none.
check noted in listing.
check noted in listing.
check noted in listing.
check noted in listing.
checks notiinn listing.
checks noted--in listing.

ALTERNATIVE TRANSLATORS: . . . . • . • none.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

403:186.100
•

STANDARD

II

REPORTS
ED
P

IBM 7070/7072 /7074
Program Translator
Basic FORTRAN
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: BASIC FORTRAN

§

.22

186.

Form

.221 Input media:

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:.

.12

Description

'.223 Obligatory grouping: .

Basic FORTRAN was designed for use on systems
with fewer magnetic tape units than the six required
for full 7070/7074 FORTRAN. Either a card reader
or a magnetic tape unit can be used to read in the
FORTRAN source program. Conversion to symbolic Basic Autocoder form is accomplished in a
single pass. Output of the symbolic routine can be
on a card punch, printer, or magnetic tape unit.
Anyone of the three Autocoder translators may then
be used to translate the symbolic routine into machine language form. All FORMAT statements are
executed interpretively at run time.

.23

. . . . . . .IBM 7070 Basic FORTRAN.

The IBM 7070 Basic FORTRAN language is a proper
s.ubset of full 7070/7074 FORTRAN. The principal
differences between the two versions are as follows:
1.

Subroutines and functions cannot be defined and
used in Basic FORTRAN; i. e., the CALL,
SUBROUTINE, FUNCTION, RETURN, and
COMMON statements are not implemented.

. 222 Obligatory ordering: .

punched cards or magnetic
tape.
all statements must be in
correct sequence.
none.

Size Limitations

.231 Maximum number of
source statements: .
.232 Maximum size source
statements: .
. 233 Maximum number of
data items: .

limited by target computer
storage.
660 characters (10 cards).
2S + N .:::; 200, where Sand
N are the numbers of subscripted and nonsubscripted variables, respectively.

.234 Others
Pairs of parentheses: 50 per statement.
40 per statement.
Constants:
Subscripts: . . . . . . 64 per statement; 2 per
data item.
DO loop nesting limit: 27.
User function sub-·
20 per source program.
routines:
Names: . .

5 characters max.

2. Basic FORTRAN allows a maximum of two subscripts per item, versus three for full FORTRAN.
3. Data names are limited to five characters in
Basic FORTRAN, versus six in full FORTRAN.
4. Size limitations on the source program are
more severe in Basic FORTRAN (see item
. 23).

.3

OUTPUT

.31

Object Program

.311 Language name:
.312 Language style:

Basic Autocoder .
symbolic; translatable to
machine code by any of
the Autocoder translators.
.313 Output media: . . . . . punched cards or magnetic
tape .

.13

Originator: .

. 14

Maintainer:

as above.

. 32

.15

Availability:

June, 1960.

.321 Standard inclusions:

.2

INPUT

. 21

Language

IBM Data Systems Division' Programming Systems.

. 33

.211 Name: . .

7070 Basic FORTRAN (a
subset of 7070/7074
FORTRAN).
. 212 Exemptions: . . . . . . subroutines and functions
cannot be defined; see
also size limitations in
item.23.

©

Conventions
none (FORTRAN Package,
Relocatable Loader, and
all required subroutines
must be loaded at execution time) .

Documentation
Subject
Source program:
Object program: .
Storage map: . . .
Restart point list:
Language errors:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Provision
listing.
listing (on-line printer or
magnetic tape) .
none.
none.
typed messages.

7/62

IBM 7070 /7072 170.74

403: 186.400
§

186.

· 52

Translation Time:

not available.
none.

.4

TRANSLATING PROCEDURE

· 53

Optimizing Data: .

.41

Phases and Passes:

· 54

Object Prog!:am Performance

.42

Optional Modes

.421
.422
. 423
. 424
.425

Translate:
Translate and run: .
Check only:
Patching: .
Up-dating:

. 43

Special Features

. . one-pass compiler.

.431 Alter to check only:
. 432 Fast unoptimized
translate: .
. 433 Short translate on
restricted program:

yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.

no .
no .

.6

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

no.

.61

Translating Computer

.44

Bulk Translating:

yes; press Start key to
initiate compilation of
each successive routine.

.45

Prog!:am Diagnostics:

none.

.46

Translator Librar}':

. 461 Identity:
.463 Form
Storage medium:
Organization: .
• 464 Contents
Routines: .
Functions:
Data descriptions:
.465 Librarianship
Insertion: .
Amendment:
Call procedure:

.5
• 51

Type
Time
Space
Elementary algebra
unaffected
unaffected.
Complex formulae
unaffected
unaffected.
Deep nesting
increased
increased.
Heavy branching
unaffected
unaffected .
Complex subscripts
increased
increased.
Data editing (FORMAT) increased
unaffected.
greatly
Overlapping operations
not possible .

FORTRAN library.
punched cards.
absolute relocatable form.
no.
yes (closed subroutine!'!).
no.
yes.
yes; switch cards.
name in procedural statement sets up linkage; subroutine must be loaded
with object deck.

.611 Minimum configuration: 5, 000 words of core storage; card reader or magnetic tape unit for input;
card punch, printer, and/
or magnetic tape unit for
output .
. 612 Larger configuration
advantages:. . .
none .
· 62

.621 Minimum configuration: any mM 7070, 7072, or
7074 system .
.622 Usable extra facilities: all magnetic tape units; online card reader, punch,
and printer; additional
core storage; Floating
Decimal Arithmetic.

.7

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
Object Program Space

. 511 Fixed overhead: . . . . total of 1, 250 core storage
locations for FORTRAN
package, indexing words,
tape status words, etc.
. 512 Space required for each
input-output file: . . . single I/O area serves all
files.
.513 Approximate expansion
of procedure s :. . . . averages 5 to 6 machine
instructions per FORTRAN statement (**).

7/62

Target Computer

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Missing' entries:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
Target computer overflow:
Inconsistent program:
Size limitations exceeded:

check
none.
none•
check
check
none
checks
checks

Action
typed message •

typed message.
typed message.
checked by assembler.
typed message.
typed message •

Note: Each typed message includes the first 40 characters of the
erroneous statement. Processing continues after the message
is typed.

.8

ALTERNATIVE
TRANSLATORS: . . . none.

403:191.100
•

STANDARD

EDP

•

IBM 7070 1707217074
Operating Environment
PEST

/l[PORTS

OPERATING ENVI RONMENT: PEST

§

191.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

Originator and
maintainer: ..

University of Pittsburgh
Executive System for
Tapes.
PEST.

Availability:

.2

PROGRAM LOADING

.21

Source of Programs

.211 Libraries: . . . . .
Mr. Russell Ranshaw,
University of Pittsburgh.

Source of information:. Mr. Lee Ohringer, University of Pittsburgh.
. 212 Independents:
.12

first used in April, 1961;
all features mentioned
here are currently functioning.

.13

Description
No comprehensive operating system has been made
available for the 7070 series by the manufacturer.
The Compiler Systems Tape automates the compilation of programs written in the Autocoder, COBOL,
FORTRAN, and Report Program Generator langiJages, but provides no control over execution of the
object routines. The Procedure for Automatic Testing (PAT), described in 403:151. 17, facilitates the
testing of object routines. Other Operating Environment facilities must, in general, be provided by individual subroutines, by the Input/Output Control
System, or by the user's own coding.
The University of Pittsburgh Executive System for
Tapes (PEST) is an integrated supervisor routine
developed by !l 7070 user; the remainder of this report section describes the facilities it provides.
Control cards are read by the PEST routine, and the
information from them is stored in "hidden memory"
(ten locations which are never available to the user
through normal programming). PEST then calls the
necessary routines frol:l the system tape and initiates the performance of FORTRAN compilations,
Autocoder assemblies, program listings, object
program executions, storage dumps, or other operations specified on the control card. In FORTRAN
programs compiled by PEST, a STOP statement is
translated into a 10-step routine that will return
control to the PEST system. A macro instruction is
provided to accomplish the same function in routines
written in Autocoder.
The PEST system requires at least three magnetic
tape units to handle the input, output, and systems
tapes. The existence of an IDM 1401 for off-line
data transcriptions is assumed. The program
translators that have been incorporated into the
PEST system are Four-Tape Autocoder (Autocoder
74) and an extended version of Basic FORTRAN that
permits the insertion of Autocoder instructions into
the FORTRAN source routine. The COBOL Processor has not been incorporated.

©

PEST systerrtlibrary (on
magnetic tape) contains
pre-assembled routines
which user can select by
preceding his data with
the appropriate parameter
card .
. . . . . EXECUTE causes loading
and execution of the routine currently in position
in the input unit.

.22

Library Subroutines:

Autocoder 74 macro library
and Basic FORTRAN function library are included
in PEST system; a simple
up-date process is provided.

.23

Loading Sequence:

routines are normally
loaded sequentially from
magnetiC tape; sequence
may be altered by entering number of routine to
be run into accumulator 1.

.3

HARDWARE ALLOCATION

.31

Storage

.311 Sequencing of program
for movement between
levels: . . . . . . . . any routine can be segmented by the insertion
before assembly of Autocoder BRANCH CONTROL
statements .
. 312 Occupation of working
all core storage is availstorage: . . . . .
able to the user.
relocation codes are
.313 Choice of location: .
punched into object decks;
routines can be loaded
anywhere in core storage.
.32

Input-Output Units

.321 Initial aSSignment: .
. 322 Alternation: .
.323 Reassignment:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

specified when program is
written.
tape swapping can be specfied in IOCS entries.
operator can at all times
choose which physical
tape units shall be used.
7/62

403:191.400
§

IBM 7070/7072/7074

191.

mately 80 different types of errors. If any
errors are found, they are listed and compilation of the program is bypassed .

.4

RUNNING SUPERVISION

.41

Simultaneous Working:

as incorporated in program.

.42

Multiprogramming:

as incorporated in program.

.43

Multisequencing:.... none.

.44

Errors, Checks, and Action
Error
Loading input error:
Allocation impossible:
In-out error single:
In-out error persistent:

.45

Check or
Interlock

lOGS checks

repeat operation.

lOGS checks

halt and type message.
halt or set indicator.

Invalid instructions:
Program conflicts:
Gontrol card error:

none.
none.
check

.61

Signals to Operator

. 611 Decision required by
operator: . . . . . .

Action

none.

hardware checks

OPERATOR CONTROL

. 612 Action required by
operator: . . . . .

none.

Overflow: .

.6

note in listing and
bypass program.

.452 Restarting process:

DCHPT entry in IOCS
causes checkpoint records to be written before
processing of each input
and/or output reel or
when CHPT macro occurs
in routine.
load restart sequence number into accumulator 1
and transfer control to
PEST system.

.5

PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS

. 51

Dynamic

. 62

Operator's Decision:

.63

Operator's Signals

.631 Inquiry: . . . . .
.632 Change of normal
progress: . . . .

. 52

Post- Mortem: . . . . . dumps of selected portions
of core storage are made
after execution of a program if specified on control card; the dumps may
be made unconditionally
or only if an error has
occurred.
Note: FORTRAN source programs are run through
a pre-scan routine which can detect approxi-

7/62

Alteration Switches .

none.
methods are available to
abandon a run, to alter
the sequence of routines
in a queue and to reallocate equipment .

.7

LOGGING

. 71

Operator Signals:

console typewriter .

. 72

Operator Decisions:

console typewriter .

.73

Run Progress:

console typewriter, output
listing, and punched summary cards .

. 74

Errors:

some recorded on output
listing .

.75

Running Times:

console typewriter, user's
output, and punched
summary cards.

.76

Multi-running Status:

none.

.8

PERFORMANCE

.81

Program Loading
Time: . . . . . .

.511 Tracing:

trace routines have been
modified for use within
the PEST system.
.512 Snapshots: . . . . . . . SNAPSHOT, which lists the
contents of a specified
core storage area when a
certain point is reached
in the program, has been
rewritten for use with
PEST.

off-line IBM 1401 lists operator actions reqUired
as it prepares the input
file.

.613 Reporting progress of
run:. . . . . . . . . . console typewriter types
log, including time used
for each operation.

Restarts

.451 Establishing restart
points: . . . . . . .

not required; necessary information is specified on
control cards.

not available; system is
fully automatic and quite
efficient.

.82

Reserved Equipment: . 3 magnetic tape units (input, output, and system
tapes).

.83

Running Overhead:. . . very low; normal computer
performance is essentially unaffected.

II ~"". ,

403:201.011

_EDP

IIII'JI

RtPORTS

IBM 1010
System Performance

IBM 1010

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

11/62

IBM 7070'

403:201.012
" ct

IBM 7070 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
ConfigLH'otion
Worksheet

1

I.nput.
Output
Times

III

VII B

VIIJ B

(File 1)

1,080

1,080

1,080

(FUe 1)

10

10

10

38.5

26.1

20.8

FUe 3

120·

10.1

9.7

File 4

400

10.7

10.1

File 1 = File 2

0

0

0

File 3

0

0

0

File 4

0

11

0

1.2

1.2

1.2

File 3

6

0.1

0.1

File 4

6

0.1

0.1

Char/block
Records/block

K

m.aec/block

File 1

= File 2

4:200.112
m. sect switch

m. Bec penalty

2

Reference

Item

File 1 =·File 2

m. Bec/block

a1

0.8

0.8

0.11

m.Bec/record

a2

1.9

1.9

1.9

m. sec/detail

b6

2.5

2.5

2.5

m.Bec/work

bS +b9

7.5

7.5

7.5

m. sec/raport

b7 +b8

14.7

14.7

14.7

m..8ec

al

Centrol
Processor

4:200.1132

Times

3

for C.P.
and
dominant
column.
Stondord
Problem A

I

0.8

0.8

0.8

a2K

18.7

18.7

18.7

a3K

247.8

247.8

247.8

File 1 Master In

1.2

1.2

1.2

File 2 MaBter Out

1.2

1.2

File 3 Details

60.0

1.0

FilII .4 Reporta

60.0

4000

1.0

107.0

1.0

101.0

389.7

4000

271.7

133.1

271.7

101.0

4:200.114
26.1

1.2

F=1.0

Total

4

Unit of measure

(worda)
1,500

1,500

1,500

Fb:ed

247

247

247

3 (Blocks 1 to 23)

102

102

102

6 (Blocks 24 to 48)'

792

79.2

792

Filea

864

880

880

32

32

32

3,537

3,553

3,553

Std. routine a

Stondord
Problem A
Spoce

4:200.1151

Working
Total

11/62

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

403:201.013
IBM 7070 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE-Contd.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2

Configuration
Reference

Item

Worksheet

VII B

VIII B

Floating *

Floating*

input

729 IV

729 VI

output

729 IV

729 VI

input

80 char (unblocked)

80 char (unblocked)

output

100 char (unblocked)

100 char (unblocked)

III

5

Fixed/Floating point

Unit name

Size of record

Standard
Math.·
matical
Problem
A

input

Tl

10.1

9.7

output T2

10.4

9.9

input

T3

' 0.1

0.1

output T4

0.1

0.1

m. sec/record

T5

2.3

2.3

m.sec/5 loops

T6

60.1

60.1

m. sec/report

T7

5.9

5.9

Unit name

729 IV

729 VI

Size of block

30 char

30 char

1

1

4:200.413

m. sec/block

m. sec penalty

7

Standard
Stati sti co I
Problem
A

Records/block

B

m.sec/block

Tl

9.B

9.S

m. Bee penalty

T3

0.1

0.1

m.sec block

T5

--

--

m. sec. record

T6

2.9

2.9

m.sec table

T7

0.77

0.77

4:200.512

C. P.

*'Using optional Floating Decimal Arithmetic feature.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

11/62

403:201.100
IBM 7070
System Performance

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

§

201.

standard.
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.113
see graph below •

· 112 Computation:
· 113 Timing basis:

.1

GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING

• 11

Standard File Problem A Estimates

.111 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:

• 114 Graph: • . • . • . .
· 115 Storage space required
Configuration ill: • •. 3,500 words.
Configuration VII B: •• 3,500 words.
Configuration Vill B: . 3, 500 words.

108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
1,000.0

7

4

2

100.0

7
I~

4

V

2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File
Records

~

----

/

10.0
7

"

I

4

2

1.0
7

I

I

.f

VII-B,~

V

/

I=- VII-B

-

..... ~

- t~

4 - I?vm-B
2

0.1
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

IBM 7070

403:201.120

.121 Record sizes
Master file: .
Detail file:
Report file: .

standard .
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.12
see graph below.

• 122 Computation: .
.123 Timing basis:

20l.
. 12 Standard File Problem B Estimates

§

.124 Graph:

54 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

1,000.0
7

4

2

100.0
7

4

~
J

2

Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File
Records

.!!!----

:--.--

~

/

10.0
IT

7
I

I

4

2

1.0

VlI-B~l-!L

7

I

I

/1

"",-

~

,

7

7'

4

/.

2

0.1
0.0

0.1

1.0

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

iNn
I

7/62

Ir-A-U-ER-BA-CH---'-"

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

403:201.130

201.

.13

. 132 Computation:
• 133 Timing basis:

Standard File Problem C Estimates

. 131 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:

• 134 Graph:

. • . . . ..

standard .
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.13 .
see graph below .

216 characters.
1 card.
1Une.

1,000.0

7

4

2

100.0
7

\\1,......--4

2

Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File
Records

/

10.0
7

/

"\[n-13 • ~-13_

/

2

7 -

"\[\\-13

-

"

/

4

1.0

-'~

~

~

.-

~

~\-Y>

4

2

0.1
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

IBM 7070

403:201.140
§

. 142 Computation:
.143 Timing basis:

201.

. 14

Standard File Problem D Estimates

. 141 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:

. 144 Graph:

• . . • . ..

trebled .
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide •
4:200.14 .
see graph below .

108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

1,000.0
7

4
2

100.0
7

4
2

Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File
Records

/

10.0

-"

~

~

~

--

v

7

I

4

I

2

'J\\\-13
----

I

'J\\-13,
..;:.:;--

I

II

1.0

-

7

-

V

VII-B

./

~

~

I

'lIT

4

-

VIII-B

2

0.1
0.0

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

7/62

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

403:201.200
. 212 Key size: . .
.213 Timing basis:

201.

.2

SORTING

. 21

Standard Problem Estimates

.211 Record size:

8 characters .
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.213 .
see graph below .

. 214 Graph: . . .

80 characters.

1,000

7

4

2

100

,

7

4

/

/

2

Time in Minutes to
Put Records Into
Required Order

/

Y,

10

7

/

V

V

"

2

I'

,/

1

,,

"

7

~~

, I~~
I

I'

I

~ //

~
/
~~

.J'f

I

~

/

'/

~

1.1
4

.~

".

~~
".:::.~

~I
~

/
//

/ /

4

//

~

2

0.1
100

4

2

7 1,000

2

4

7 10,000

2

4

7100,000

Number of Records

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

IBM 7070

403:201.220

. 22

8 characters~.
mM Publication C28- 6111,
pp. 76-84 •
see graph below •

• 222 Key size:
.223 Timing basis:

§ 201.

mM7070/7074 SORT 90 Times
. 224 Graph: • . •

• 221 Record size:

80 characters .

. 1,000

7

4

2

100

7

1/

II'
~

4

)"

2

/
~

Time in Minutes to
Put Records Into 10
Required Order

/
~~

)1

I

/

7

/

I

2

1

,

7

,

/

4

/

V

/

1I
~

I

I

~y
~

~,r

1,J'f

4

/

0/

~~

I

/

/

/
/"

,/

2

0,1
100

2

4

7 1,000

2

4

7 10,000

2

Number of records
NOTE: Times for Configurations VU-B and VIlI-B are the same because internal
processing speed is the limiting factor ...

7/62

4

7100,000

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

403:201.300
.312 Timing basis: . . . .

201.

.3

MATRIX INVERSION

.31

Standard Problem Estimates

.311 Basic parameters: . .

100.00

general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
pOint to at least 8 decimal
digits.

using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.312; with Floating
Decimal Arithmetic
option.
see graph below.

• 313 Graph: . . . • . • .
.314 Maximum matrix sizes
5,000 core .storage locations:
. 67.
9,990 core storage locations: . . 97.

7

4

2

'I

~

10.00
I

'I

7

I

'I

4

7
I

2

/

Time in Minutes for
C01Qplere Inversion 1.00

I

7

I

4

I

I

I

)

2

0.10
I

/

I

7

I

I

II

4

~

2

~
IJ

0.01

1

4

2

©

7

2
10
Size of Matrix

4

7

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

100

4

7 1,000

7/62

IBM 7070

403:201.320
§

.322 Timing basis: . • • , . GUIDE General Program
Library, No. 10.1.003;
routine does not utilize
the optional Floating
Decimal Arithmetic
hardware .
• 323 Graph: . . . . . . . . see graph below .
.324 Maximum matrix sizes
5,000 core storage locations:
.67.
9,990 core storage locations:
.97.

201.

.32

Single Precision Matrix Inversion Times

. 321 Basic parameters: . . . general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8
decimal digits.
100.00
7

4

~

2

j

10.00

7

I

~

~

J

IT

4

/

2

~

I

Time in Minutes for
Complete Inversion 1.00
I

I

7

I

II
4

I

/

2

0.10
I

/

I
II

7

4

2

0.01
1

7/62

2

4

7

2
10
Size of Matrix

4

7

100

2

4

7 1,000

403:201.400

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

201.

5 fifth-order polynomials •
5 divisions.
1 square root •
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.413; with optional
Floating Decimal
Arithmetic.
see graph below .

.412 Computation:

•4

GENERALlZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING

.41

Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates

.413 Timing basis: • . • .
.411 Record sizes: • • ••

10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max. size
8 digits.

•414 Graph:

10,000
Configurations VII B and VIII B; Single Length (8 digit precision); Floating Point.
R =Number of Output Records per Input Record

7

~

4

/

2

/

1,000

V

~

V

/

/

7

i7
~

4

/

/

2
Time in Milliseconds per
Input Record

~

100

V

/

//

1/,/

7
V~
/ [)7

4

2

10

,,9/ ~

.J>

/

~
...
~>

V~9

V

7

4

2

1

0.1

2

4

7

1.0

2

4

7

10.0

2

4

7 100.0

C, Number of Computations per Input Record

© 1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1/63

IBM 7070

403:201.500
§

201.

.512 Computation:

.5

GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING

. 51

Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates

. 513 Timing basis:
.514 Graph: • . • • • . •

. 511 Record size:

augment T elements in
cross-tabulation tables .
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide.
4:200.513 .
see graph below .

thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.

10,000

7

4

2

1,000
7

1/

4

/

2

Time in Milliseconds per
Record

100

v

/

V

V

V

7

~.q"

4

V

IL

4.~ '"
~,/

;>

2

/

10

7

4

2

1
1

2

4

7

10

2

4

7

T, Number of Augmented Elements
Roman numerals denote Standard Configurations

1/63

100

2

4

7 1,000

403:211.101

IBM 7070
Physical Characteristics

IBM 7070
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

IBM 7070

403:211.102
IBM 7070 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Unit Name
IDENTITY

Arithmetic
and Program
Control

Core
Storage

Core
Storage
Control

Console
Card
Reader

Cord
Reader

Card
Punch

Printer

7601

7301

7602

7501

7500

7550

7400

39x 33 x 29

43)( 29)( 35

43)( 29x 35

49x60x31

Model Number

Height x width x depth, In.

69x59x68

Weight, Ibs.

69x 29.5 x 68 69X 29.5)( 68

4,600

1,500

1,800

200

1,000

1,000

1,900

To 7601

----

----

----

-------

----

To Power Supply

-------

----

-------

-------

51 (7605)

o (7602)

40 (7150)

35 (7600)

40 (7603)

40 (7603)

40 (7603)

50-110

50-110

50-110

50 -110

50-110

50-110

50-110

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

O-SO

O-SO

Temperature, 0 F.

65 -90

65-90

65-90

65-90

65-90

65-90

65-90

Humidity, '7.

20-80

20-S0

20-S0

20-80

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

9,200

6,600

600 (Modell)
1,900 (other
models)

4,SOO

4,400

4,800

4,SOO

900

400

220

----

----

----

----

PHYSICAL Maximum Cable Lengths, feet

To Designated Unit

Storage
Ranges

Temperature, "F.

Humidity. %

ATMOSPHERE

Working
Ranges

Heat Disspitated, BTU/hr.

Air Flow, cfm.

75

Intemal Filters

Nominal

20S Dr 230

208 Dr 230

208 or 230

208 Dr 230

208 Dr 230

20S Dr 230

208 Dr 230

Tolerance

+ 10'7., - S'7.

+ 10'7., - S'7.

+ 10'7., - S'7.

+ 10'7., -8'7.

+10'7., +8'7.

+ 10'7., - 8'7.

+10'7., -

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±o.s

±O.s

±0.5

±O.S

3cp,4-wlre

3cp,4-wlre

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

1.7

1.5

1.5

1.7

Voltage

ELECTRICAL

Nominal
Cycles
Tolerance

Phases and Lines

Load KVA

3

cp; 4-wire
0.7

3

cp, 4-wire

3

cp, 4-w Ire

1.4

0.1

NOTES

I

6/62

8'7.

I AUERBACH I ~

403:211.103

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM 7070 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS-Contd.

Unit Name

Magnetic
Tape

Console

Disc
Storage

Remote
Compressor

Disc
Control

Disc
Storage

Disc
Storage

File
"Control

I/O
Control

I/O
Synchronizer

Tape
Control

Inquiry
Station

7600

7603

7604

7900

Power
Converter

IDENTITY

729

7150

7300

Part of
7300 DSU

7605

1301 Modell

1301 Mode12

7631

69 x29 x34

40x66x33

71 X 62 X 30

29 X40 X33

69 X29.5 X 68

69x86x33

69x86X33

70x38X32

1,200

400

2,300

700

1,200

3,625

3,825

500

2,100

2,300

To 7601

----

35

----

----

----

----

----

----

24

----

To Power Supply

----

----

----

----

----

--.--

----

----

----

100 (7604)

35 (7600)

45 (7605)

72 (7605)

46 (7602)

100 (7631)

100 (7631)

55 (7907)

50-90 mylar
40-120 HD

50- 110

50 -110

50-110

50-110

50- 110

50-110

Humidity, %

20-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

Temperature, OF.

65 -90

65-90

65 -90

65 -90

65 -90

Humidity, %

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

3,900

800

9,100

0

300

Model Number

Height X width Xdepth, in.

Weight, lbs.

7802

69 X 29.5 X 68 69 x29.5 X68 69 X29.5 X68 29 x29.5 x68 69x29.sx68

Data

Paper Tape
Reader

Remote
Inquiry
Unit

Input/Output
Synchronizer

Data
Channel

1009

1011

1014

1414 Mode16

7907

40x29x31

60X32 x 36

3sX29X24

70X74 x 32

69X 20x 68

rrransmission

Unit

400

1,700

500

529

175

1,100

1,500

----

----

----

----

----

----

----

----

----

----

----

----

IS

14

14

----

----

46 (7602)

29 (7602)

41 (7605)

SO (7602)

75 (7602)

60 (1414)

90 (1414)

8 miles (1414)

55 (7907)

55 (7631)
55 (1414)

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50- 110

50-110

50-110

50- 110

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0- 80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

65 - 90

65-90

65 -90

65-90

65 -90

65- 90

65 -90

65 -90

65-90

65 -90

65-90

65-90

65-90

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20- 80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20- 80

20-80

20-80

20-80

10,800

1,800

16,700

20,000

4,800

3,600

4,600

4,600

500

15,100

1,000

4,100

1,000

4,450

7,800

300

320

1,800

1,800

400

560

800

400

0

800

120

150

----

1,000

400

115

208 or 230

115

2.100

PHYSICAL Maximum Cable Lengths, feet

To Designated Unit

Temperature, of.

Storage
Ranges

Working
ATMOSPHERE

Ranges

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Air Flow, cfm.

550

Intemal Filters

Nominal

208 or 230

208 Or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 Or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

Tolerance

+10%, -8%

+ 10'7., - 8'7.

+ 10'7., - 8'7.

+ 10'7., - 8'7.

+ 10'7., - 8'7.

+ 10'7.. -8'7.

+ 10'7., - 8'7.

+ 10'7., -8'7.

+10'7., -

+ 10'7., -8'7.

+ 10'7., - 8'7.

+ 10'7., - 8'7.

+ 10'7., -8'7.

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

±O.S

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±O.s

±o.s

±0.5

±o.s

±0.5

±O.S

±O.S

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp.4-wire

3cp.4-wire

3cp.4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp.4-wire

3¢.4-wire

0.02

3.7

4.0

0.3

7.5

9.0

2.7

0.9

0.9

208 or 230

115

208 or 230

208 Or 230

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

± 10'7.

+ 10'7., - 8'7.

60

60

60

60

60

60

±o.s

±O.S

±O.s

±o.s

±O.s

±o.s

±O.S

3cp.4-wire

lcp,3-wire

3¢. 4-wire

lcp.3-wire

lcp,3-wire

lcp.3'wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp.4-wire

0.9

0.2

12.8

0.3

1.8

0.35

1.30

2.25

Voltage

Nominal
ELEC.
TRICAL

8'7.

Cycles
Tolerance

Phases and Lines

Load KVA

1.6

Cable length
is total for
all 7295 on a
channel.
NOTES

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

403:221.101

.SlANDARD
EDP
•

R[rORTS

IBM 7070
Price Data

PRICE DATA
§

221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT

PRICES

CLASS
Name
-

No.

Central
Processor

Storage

Purchase
$

3,000

87.50

145,500.

750
70

17.25
1. 75

33,350.
3,375.

7601

Arithmetic and Program Control

4419
4760

Optional Features
Floating Decimal Arithmetic
Interval Timer

7301
model 1
model 2

Core Storage
5,000 words
9,990 words

3,500
6,800

31. 25
37.50

195,000.
343,000.

1301
model 1
model 2

Disc Storage
55,600,000 BCD characters
111,200,000 BCD characters

2, 100
3,500

138.00
238.00

115,500.
185,500.

25

1. 00

1,250.

975
1,500

194.00
306.00

62,200.
74,800.

700
900
750
950

116: 00
128.00
122.00
134.00

36,000.
41,250.
37,200.
42,450.

100

0.50

4,500.

85

6.50

4,400.

Optional Features
Cylinder Mode

Input Output

Monthly
Maintenance
$

Monthly
Rental
-$-

7300
model 1
model 2

Disc Storage
6, 000, 000 digits
12,000,000 digits

729
729
729
729

Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic

II
IV
V
VI

7835,
7836,
7837 or
7838
7830

Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape

Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit

Optional Features
Additional 729 Tape Attachment (on 7602)

Tape Switching Feature
(on 729 II/IV /V /VI)

7400

Printer

950

40.50

37,000.

7500

Card Reader

400

44. 75

13, 100.

7550

Card Punch

550

36.75

19,500.

7501

Console Card Reader (Price includes #2265 Card
Reader Attachment on 7600. )

100

6.25

4,300.

7900

Inquiry Station

250

26.75

10,300.

7150

Console Control Unit

300

15.50

13,050.

1414

Input/Output Synchronizer (Model 6)

850

12.00

43,350.

1009

Data Transmission Unit (requires 3238)

500

11. 50

26,400.

1011

Paper Tape Reader (requires 5514)

500

42.50

22,400.

,

\

®

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and aNA Incorporated

6/62

403:221.102
§

IBM 7070

221.

PRICE DATA-Contd.
PRICES

IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS

Input Output
(Cont'd)

Controllers

Rental
~

Monthl~

Maintenance

$

Purchase
$

1014

Remote Inquiry Unit (requires 6136)

200

12.50

11, ODD.

7864

Telegraph Input/Output

500

11. 00

30,500.

7871

Telegraph Input (requires 7864)

110

3.25

6,750.

7875

Telegraph Output (requires 7864)

125

3·.25

7,750.

3238

Data Transmission Unit Adapter

200

3.50

11,000.

5514

Paper Tape Reader Adapter

100

1. 50

3, 750.

6136

Remote Inquiry Unit Adapter

200

5.75

11,500.

7602
model 1
model 2
model 3
model 4
modelS

Core Storage Control
For card-only system
Two channels (tape/disc system)
One channel (tape/disc system)
Three channels (tape/disc system)
Four channels (tape/disc system)

1,400
1,600
1,500
1,800
1,900

21. 25
31. 25
29.25
36.25
38.25

65,200.
73,950.
69,800.
83,800.
88,500.

7600
model 1
model 2

Input/Output Control
For any card system
For tape/disc systems

1,400
800

41. 00
19.75

63,000.
33,000.

7603
model 1
model 2
model 3
model 4
modelS
model 6
model 7
model 8
model 9

Input/Output Synchronizer
One input and one output (unit record)
Two inputs and one output (unit record)
One input and two outputs (unit record)
Two outputs and two inputs (unit record)
Two inputs and three outputs (unit record)
One input and three outputs (unit record)
Three inputs and one output (unit record)
Three inputs and two outputs (unit record)
Three inputs and three outputs (unit record)

1,000
1,300
1,350
1,650
2,000
1,700
1,600
1,950
2,300

22. 75
30.50
31. 25
39.00
47.50
39.75
38.25
46.75
55.25

35,900.
46,000.
48,300.
59,300.
72,700.
61,600.
57,100.
70,400.
83,700.

4671

Inquiry Control - Synchronizer #1 (on 7600)

400

6.50

18,250.

4672

Inquiry Control - Synchronizer #2 (on 7600)

350

5.00

15,250.

7605

Disc Storage Control (for 7300 DSU)

3,900

36.75

141,800.

3315

Disc Storage Attachment (on 7602)

300

0

14,250.

7604
model 1
model 2
model 3

Tape Control
Two channels
One channel
Two channels (800 chari inch)

2, 700
1,850
3,300

86.75
48.00
88.75

125,500.
96,300.
155,300.

7155
model
model
model
model

Switch Control Console
For up to 2 tape units
For up to 4 tape units
For up to 6 tape units
For up to 8 tape units

35
55
80
100

5.50
11. 00
16.50
22.00

1,775.
2,675.
3,875.
4,775.

835
1,035
1,035

30.00
35.00
35.00

42,000.
52,000.
52,000.

1
2
3
4

7631
model 2
model 3
model 4

6/62

Monthl~

Name
-

-No.

File Control (for 1301 DSU)
For this system only
For this system and a 1410
For this system and another 7000 series
system (except 7072)

I~---~
AUERBACH I .§!J

PRICE DATA

§

403:221.103

PRICE DATA-Contd.

221.

PRICES

IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
Name
-

-No.

Monthly
Rental

-$Controllers
(Cont'd)

Power
-

7907
model 1
model 2

Data Channel
One channel
Two channels

3221

Data Channel Attachment (on 7601 and 7602)

3224

Data Channel Switch

7802

Power Converter (required in every system)

Monthly
Maintenance

Purchase

$

$

2,000
3,000

61.00
98.00

80,000.
120,000.

450

5.00

18,000.

25

1. 25

650.

400

6.00

20,000.

Note: Maintenance charges apply only to purchased equipment and are based upon a
sliding scale; those listed here are for the first 3 years after installation.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

IBM 7072
International Business Machines Corp.

c.

c
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

IBM 7072
International Business Machines Corp.

/

/'

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

404:001.001
IBM 7072
Contents

CONTENTS

1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

11.
12.
13.

14.

15.
16.

17.
18.

19.
20.

Introduction:....
Data Structure: . . .
System Configuration
VII B lO-Tape General System (paired):
VIII B 20-Tape General System (paired):
Internal Storage
7301
Core Storage: . . . .
Central Processor
7105
High-Speed Scientific Processor: .
Console
7150
Console:.......
Input-Output: Punched Tape and Card
7501
Console Card Reader: .
Input-Output: Printers
7150
Console Typewriter:
Input-Output: Magnetic Tape
7330
Magnetic Tape Unit:
7624
Power and Tape Control:
7625
Tape Control:
Simultaneous Operations:
Instruction List: • • • . • . •
Coding Specimens
Autocoder: •
COBOL: ••
FORTRAN:
Data Codes
Internal Numeric:
Internal Alphameric:
Punched Cards: •
Magnetic Tape:.
Problem Oriented Facilities: .•
Process Oriented Languages
COBOL 61:.
FORTRAN II:
Machine Oriented Languages
Autocoder: .
Program Translators
Autocoder: .
Four-Tape Autocoder:
Basic Autocoder:
COBOL 61: . . • .
FORTRAN II: . .
Basic FORTRAN: •
Operating Environment: . • . . • .
System Performance
Worksheet Data:
Generalized File Processing:
Sorting: • • . . •
Matrix Inversion:. • • • • •

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

404:011
403:021 (IBM 7070)
404:031. 101
404:031. 103
404:041
404:051
403:061 (IBM 7070)
403:073 (IBM 7070)
403:082 (IBM 7070)
404:091
404:091.4
404:091.4
404:111
403:121 (IBM 7070)
403:131 (IBM 7070)
403:132 (IBM 7070)
403:133 (IBM 7070)
403:141
403:142
403:143
403:144
403:151

(IBM
(IBM
(IBM
(IBM
(IBM

7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)

403:161 (IBM 7070)
403:162 (IBM 7070)
403:171 (IBM 7070)
403:181
403:182
403:183
403:184
403:185
403:186
403:191

(IBM
(IBM
(IBM
(IBM
(IBM
(IBM
(IBM

7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)

404:201. 011
404:201.1
404:201. 2
404:201. 3
5/63

IBM 7072

404:001.002

CONTENTS (Contd.)

20.

21.
22.

5/63

System Performance (Contd.)
Generalized Mathematical Processing:,
Generalized Statistical Processing: .
Physical Characteristics:
Price Data:. . • . • . . • • • . . • • . • . . . . . •

404:201. 4
404:201. 5
404:211
404:221

404:011.100
IBM 7072
Introduction

INTRODUCTION
The 7072 is a solid-state tape oriented system intended for scientific applications. It
offers relatively high processing speeds, large core storage capacity, decimal logic, and
floating point arithmetic hardware as standard equipment. On typical scientific problems the
7072's internal speeds will be roughly twice as fast as the IBM 704, up to ten times as fast as
the IBM 7070, and about 70% as fast as the more expensive IBM 7074.
Core storage may consist of from 5,000 to 30,000 word locations. Each location can
hold one single-address instruction, one 5-character alphameric word, or one numeric word
of ten decimal digits and sign. Core storage cycle time is six microseconds, as in the
IBM 7070. The secret of the 7072's higher performance is its improved internal circuitry;
all arithmetic is performed in parallel, and the number of cycles required for virtually every
operation has been greatly reduced. The instruction repertoire is versatile and effective; the
only significant omission is the lack of automatic editing facilities. Three accumulators are
provided, and many of the instructions can refer to anyone of the three. Ninety-nine core
storage locations can be used as index registers. While the 7072 is basically a fixed wordlength system, operand sizes for most internal operations can vary from one to ten digits,
and several short fields of like sign can readily be packed into a single core storage location.
A major feature of the 7072 is its ability to transfer several blocks of data to or from
different core storage areas in a single operation. This scatter-read and gather-write capability facilitates internal data transfers as well as transfers between core storage and the
peripheral units.
Automatic interruption facilitates effective use of the system's capabilities for
simultaneous operations. Execution of a priority routine can be initiated automatically whenever an operation is completed by a selected peripheral unit.
The only magnetic tape unit available with the 7072 is the relatively slow IBM 7330.
Peak transfer rate is 7,200 or 20,016 characters per second, and the 7330 is fully compatible
with the 729 series tape units used in the 7070 and 7074 systems (but not with Hypertape).
Up to ten tape units can be connected to each of a maximum of two channels.
A console card reader, rated at 60 cards per minute, is useful for direct card input
on an exception basis. No line printer, punched tape, or high-speed card input-output devices
are offered for the 7072. It is intended strictly as a tape oriented system, and an IBM 1401
will usually be used for the required off-line data transcription operations.
Nearly all IBM 7070 software is usable without change on the 7072. Autocoder is the
basic machine oriented coding system and is offered in three versions for different translating computer configurations. The full, six-tape version includes powerful macro generation
and input-output control facilities.
A FORTRAN II processor is available, and a COBOL 61 processor was delivered in
March, 1962. A Compiler Systems Tape combines the Autocoder, COBOL, and FORTRAN
processors and a Report Program Generator. The manufacturer also offers generalized sort
and merge routines, program testing aids, and various utility routines. A wide variety of
user-developed routines is available through GUIDE, the 7070 series users' organization.
NOTE: In order to emphasize the close family relationship of the IBM 7072 system to the
ruM 7070, report sections covering those items of equipment and software whose
form and use are the same in both systems have not been duplicated in this report.
In these cases, the Contents section (404:001) refers the reader to the applicable
sections of Computer System Report 403 on the IBM 7070.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

•

404:031.101

STANDARD

II

REPORTS
ED
P

IBM 7072
System Configurotion

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§

03l.

VII B.

la-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED)
Deviations from Standard Configuration
On -line equipment: .
Off-line equipment:

magnetic tapes slower by 40, 000 char/sec.
none.

Rental
On-line equipment:
Off-line equipment:
Total: . . . . .

$ 26,850 per month.
$ 6, 065 per month.
$ 32,915 per month

On -line Equipment

Core Storage: 15, 000 words

Processor

Power and Tape Control

Console
Console Card Reader: 60 cards/min.
Magnetic Tape Units (4): 7,200 or
20,016 char/sec.

Magnetic Tape Units (4) and Control:
7,200 or 20, 016 char/sec.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corparatian and BNA Incorporated

7/62

404:031.102

§

IBM 7072

031.
Off-Line Equipment (IBM 1401):

Core Storage: 4,000 positions.

Processing Unit: 1401 Model C3.

Card Read-Punch
Reads:
800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

Printer: 600 lines/min.

Magnetic Tape Units (2): 15,000 or
41,667 ·char/sec.

Optional Features Included
On -line equipment:

none.

Off-line equipment:

High-Low-Equal Compare.
Advanced Programming.
Read Punch Release.
Sense Switches.
Print Storage.
Compressed Tape.
Early Card Read.

,

7/62

A-U-ER-BA-CH-I"""~

'-1

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

404:031.103

03l.
VIII B.

20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED)
Deviations from Standard Configuration
On -line equipment:

magnetic tapes slower by 100,000
char/sec.
two less magnetic tape channels.
none.

Off-line equipment:
Rental
On -line equipment:
Off-line equipment:
Total:
.....

$ 40,750 per month.
$ 9, 140 per month.
$ 49,890 per month.

On -line Equipment:

Core Storage: 30,000 words.

Processor

Power and Tape Control

Console
Console Card Reader:
60 cards/min.
Magnetic Tape Units (8):
7,200 or 20,016 char/sec.

Magnetic Tape Units (8) and
Control: 7,200 or 20,016
char/sec.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

404:031.1 04

§

IBM 7072

031.
Off- Line Equipment (IBM 1401):

Core Storage: 8,000 positions.

Processing Unit: 1401 Model C4.

Card - Read Punch
Reads:
800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

Printer: 600 lines/min.

Magnetic Tape Units (4):
22,500 or 62,500 char/sec.

Optional Features Included
On-line equipment:
Off-line equipment: . • . •

7/62

none.
High-Low-Equal Compare.
Advanced Programming.
Read Punch Release.
Sense Switches.
Compressed Tape.
Print Storage.
Processing Overlap.
Early Card Read.

404:041.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

IBM 7072

R[PORTS

Internal Storage
Core Storage

INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE

§

.23

041

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

. 12

Basic Use: .

.13

Description:

Core Storage.
7301, Models 1,2,11,21,
22,23.
CS.
working storage.

Each core storage location in the 7072 system can
hold one numeric word consisting of ten decimal
digits and sign, one alphameric word consisting of
five characters, or one single-address instruction.
Each digit is represented by a two-out-of-five-bit
code combination, and validity checks insure that
each digit transferred to or from storage contains
exactly two bits. Two successive digit positions
are required for each alphameric character. Core
storage cycle time is six microseconds, and all
transfers are parallel by word.
The 7072' s scatter -read and gather-write capabilities make it possible to distribute a block of data
in core storage into a number of smaller blocks or
to assemble several blocks into one larger block.
Individual digits or fields within a word can be addressed through the 7072' s field definition feature.

.24

Recording Permanence

.241

. 243
. 244
. 245

Data erasable by
instructions:. .
Data regenerated
constantly:. . . .
Data volatile:. . . . .
Data permanent:. . .
Storage changeable: . . .

.28

Access Techniques

. 281
. 283

Recording method: .
coincident current .
Type of access: . . . . . uniform .

.29

Potential Transfer Rates

.292

Peak data rates
Cycling rate:
Unit of data: .
Conversion factor:
Data rate: . . . . .
Compound data rate:

:242

Availability: .

.15

First Deliver}':,

DATA CAPACITY

.31

Module and Si:stem Sizes

.16

Reserved Storage
Number of
Purpose
locations
Index registers:
99
Arith registers:
O.
Logic registers:
O.
I -0 control:
40
Table look-up:
1
Electronic switches:
3

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

. 21

Storage Medium: .

Locks
none.
none.
none.
none.

Identity:
Words:
Digits:
Characters:
Instructions:
Modules:

5,000
50,000
25,000
5,000
1

9,990
99,900
49,900
9,990
1

15,000
150,000
75,000
15,000
2

Identity:

Models
22 and
21

Models
22, 23
and 11

Maximum Storage;
Models 22, 23,
and 21 .

Words:
Digits:
Characters:
Instructions:
Modules:

20,000
200,000
100,000
20,000
2

25,000
250,000
125,000
25,000
3

30,000.
300,000.
150,000.
30,000.
3.

.32

Rules for Combining
Modules: .

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identiti:: .

magnetic core .

©

no.
no.
no.
no.

Minimum
Storage;
Modell Model 2

. 12 to 15 months.
. June, 1962.

yes.

.166,667 cycles/sec.
· word.
.53 bits/word.
· 166,667 words/sec.
· 166,667 words/sec.

.3

7301 Models 1 and 11 each contain 5,000 word locations of core storage; Model 2 contains 9,990 locations; and Models 21, 22, and 23 each contain
10, 000 locations. Up to three modules may be used
in a system, for a maximum core storage capacity
of 30,000 words. When more than 9,990 words are
used, Additional Core Storage Attachments must be
added to the High Speed Processor and all Tape Controis. Programs which utilize the additional core
storage must be coded and run in a different mode
from those which do not; the details are covered in
the Central Processor report, 404:051.12.
. 14

Storage Phenomenon: . . direction of mao;uetization.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Models 22
and 11

all combinations are
shown above.

High-Speed Scientific
Processor.
7105 Modell or 2.

7/62

404:041.420
j

IBM 7072

041

.42

ACCESS TIMING

. 51

Arrangement of
Heads:.

Pair of storage units possibilities
With self:. . . . . . . yes .

one access device per
system.

.72

Transfer Load Size

.73

Effective Transfer
Rate

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

Access Time Parameters and Variations
. 6 /L sec.
• 6 /L sec.
one word, or a fielddefined portion thereof.

CHANGEABLE STORAGE: • • • • • • • • • • no.

Error

Check or Interlock

Action

Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Recording of Data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Field overflow':

check
validity check
none •
validity check
none.
check

stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.

Sign change':

check

• When storing field-defined portion of a word.

I

7/62

one digit to several
blocks; length and number of blocks are limited
only by capacity of core
storage .

With self:

With self: . . . . . . . . 83,300 words/sec .

Simultaneous
Operations:. . . . . . .none.

.531 For uniform access
Access time:. • . .
Cycle time: . . .
For data unit of: . .

.6

Data Transfer

Connection to Device

.5

.53

.71
.1.
none.

.431 Devices per
controller:. . . . . . . up to 3 modules, as shown
in .31.
.432 Restrictions:. . . . . . none.

. 52

AUXILIARY STORAGE .PERFORMANCE

Connection to System

.421 On-Line:.
.422 Off- Line: .
. 43

.7

I AUERBAC~

stop & alarm.
alarm & indicator;
optional stop.
alarm & indicator;
optional stop.

404:051.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7072

REPORTS

Central Processor

HSP
CENTRAL PROCESSOR

§

051.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

.12

sign changes (when the sign of the stored field differs from that of the storage location). Depending
upon console or programmed switch settings, these
errors can cause system halts or the setting of testable indicators.

High- Speed Scientific
Processor.
7105.
HSP.

The 7072's scatter-read and gather-write capabilities can be used in internal transfers as well as in
input-output operations. A block of data in core
storage can be scattered into a number of smaller
blocks, or a number of blocks can be gathered into
one larger block. The addresses of the several
blocks that data is to be gathered from or scattered
into are specified in a list of record definition words,
one word for each block to be transferred. The end
of a block transfer operation is indicated by a record definition word with a minus sign. Conversions
between the numeric and alphameric modes can be
made during core-to-core block transfers. Each
lO-digit numeric word becomes two 5-character alphameric words, and leading zeros can be converted
to blanks. Only numeric data should be converted
from alphameric to numeric mode; all even-numbered digit positions are lost, so alphabetic or special characters are converted into unrelated numeric
codes.

Description
The 7105 High-Speed Scientific Processor executes
the stored program instructions and performs all'
arithmetic operations in a 7072 system. It contains
three accumulators, an adder, an instruction counter, and the program, arithmetic, auxiliary, and
synchronizer registers. Each of the accumulators
and registers has a capacity of one word and can
hold ten decimal digits plus sign or five alphameric
characters. All internal transfers are parallel by.
word. Floating point arithmetic is a standard feature, using an 8-digit fixed pOint part and a 2-digit
exponent. Internal speeds are from 3 to 25 times as
high as those of the IBM 7070 system and about 30
per cent lower than the speeds attained by the more
expensive IBM 7074.
A feature of the 7072 is its versatile instruction repertoire. Full arithmetic facilities are provided, including addition to and subtraction from a core storage location. Ninety-nine index registers are standard: they occupy core storage locations 0001
through 0099, and a full complement of instructions
is provided for loading, incrementing, and testing
them. A unique "split-shift" operation permits
shifting of only those digits to the right or left of any
specified position in the 20-digit register composed
of accumulators 1 and 2 coupled together. There
are no facilities for bit manipulation, but 30 "electronic switches" (each consisting of one digit position in core storage) can be turned on or off or
tested by the program. Table look-up operations
can be carried out automatically on tables divided
into any number of core storage blocks. Internal
facilities for editing and format control are severely
limited. Many load, store, add, subtract, compare,
and branch operations can be carried out in any of
the three accumulators, and the accumulators can be
addressed and used as instruction operands. Multiplication and division require all three accumulators.
The most common operand length is one lO-digit
word, but the 7072's field definition feature permits
arithmetic, load, store, compare, and table look-up
operations to be carried out on specified portions of
a word. The control portion of an instruction specifies the high- and low-order digit positions of the
field to be used. Several fields of like sign cim
therefore be stored in a single core storage location.
Store and add-to-storage operations using field definition can result in field overflows (when digit positions beyond the field-defined ones are affected) or

©

Automatic interruption of the stored program and
transfer of control to a priority routine can occur
whenever an operation is completed by a selected
input-output device. This capability is called "Pri0rity Processing". It permits a limited degree of
multi-running, but it is not possible for one priority
routine to interrupt another.
Optional Features
Additional Core Storage (ACS): Permits up to
30, 000 words of core storage to be used in a 7072
system, in increments of 5,000 words. An internal
switch, turned on or off by sp~cial instructions, selects the additional storage mode or the normal
storage mode. In the normal mode, only the loworder 10, 000 words can be addressed, and all IBM
7070 programs with standard 4-digit addresses can
be run without change. In the additional storage
mode, the values 00 through 09 in the index portion
of an instruction specify no indexing; instead, the
index digits serve as an extension of the normal 4digit operand address. Index values 10 through 99
cause the addition of a 5-position field in the specified index word to the 4-position operand address,
forming a 5-digit effective address. All record definition words must be stored below location 10,000,
and there are several other minor programming
complications. Routines using the additional storage mode cannot be run on systems not equipped
with this feature.
.13

Availability: . .

12 to 15 months.

.14

First Delivery:

June, 1962.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

IBM 70n

404:051.200
§

051.

• 22

Special Cases of Operands

.2

PROCESSING FACILITIES

.221 Negative numbers: .

.21

Operations and Operands

.222 Zero: . . . . . . . •

Operation
,
and Variation
.211 Fixed point
Add-Subtract
Multiply
Short:
Long:
Divide
No remainder:
Remainder:

Provision

Radix

Size

automatic

decimal

I word (FD).

none.
automatic

decimal

1 word (FD).

decimal

1 word (FD).

automatic
automatic
automatic

decimal
decimal
decimal

8 & 2 digits.
8 & 2 digits.
8 & 2 digits.

. 212 Floating point
Add-Subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:

· 223 Operand size
determination:

.23
none.
automatic

none.
none.

.214 Comparison
Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating
sequence:

1 word
I word
I word
I word

automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
specials. A to Z. 0 to 9.

PrOvision From To
.215 Code
translation:

.216 Radix
conversion:

(FD).,
(FD).
(FD).
(FD).

Size

I to N words
automatic numeric alphameric
(lID).
automatic alphanumeric 1:0 N words
meric
(RD).

none.

Provision Comment

Size

.217 Edit format
automat~c"} in, code tran,slaautomauc J tlon operauons
only
automatic in right shifts
only
none.
none.
none.
none.

1 to N words
(RD).

Equality:

automatic

Equal or greater:

automatic

1 word (FD.
RD).
1 word (FD.
RD).

Greatest:
Least

none.
automatic

Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Float:
Protection:

lor 2 words.

.218 Table look-up

1 word (FD.
RD).

.219 Others
Add to storage:
Subtract from storage:
Record gather:

automatic
automatic
automatic

I word (FD).
I word (FD).
I to N words

Record scatter:

automatic

I to N words

Electronic switches:

automatic

1 word or a portion thereof,
defined by control portion
of instruction.

Instruction Formats

.231 Instruction structure:
.232 Instruction layout:
Part
Size (digits)

. 213 Boolean
AND:
Inclusive OR:

absolute value with negative sign.
plus zero is greater than
minus zero in comparisons; both give same results in arithmetic.

1 word.

Operation

Index

Control

Address

sign + 2

2

2

4

· 233 Instruction parts
Name
Operation:

Purpose
specifies operation to be
formed.
Index: , . .
1) specifies indexing word
to be added to address;
or
2) serves as extension of
operand address (in additional storage mode
only).
Control:. . . . . . . 1) specifies high- 'and loworder digit positions of
a field within the addressed core storage
location (field definition); or
2) augments the operation
code.
Address: . . . . . . 1) specifies operand address in core storage;
2) sPi3cifies destination of
a jump;
3) contains a positive literal; or
4) augments the operation
code.
. 234 Basic address structure: 1.+ O•
.235 Literals
Arithmetic:. . . .
none.
Comparisons and
tests: . . . . . .
1 digit.
Incrementing modifiers: . . . . . . .
4 digits.
.236 Directly addressed operands
Minimum Maximum Volume
.2361 Internal
accessible
size
size
storage type
Core:

I charac-

1 word

ter

(RD).

test. turn on
or off

(RD).
30 switches
available.

(FD): Field definition is applicable to this operation
(1 to 10 digits).
(RD): Record definition words are used to define blocks of
data locations.

7/62

total capacity
in additional
storage mode:
maximum of
10,000 words
in normal storage mode.

.2362

Increased address
capacity: . . . . .
.237 .Address indexing
.2371 Number of methods:
.2372 Name: . . . .
.2373 Indexing rule: . . . .

none .
1.
indexing.
addition, modulo 10, 000.

CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§

os!.

.2374
.2375

.2376
. 2377
.2378
. 238
. 239
.2391
. 2392
.2393
.2394
. 2395

404:051.2374

.33
Index specification:. index portion of the modified instruction (2 digits). .331
Number of potential indexers
Normal storage
mode: . . . . . . 99 (core storage locations
0001 through 0099).
Additional storage
mode: . . . . . . 90 (core storage locations
. 332
0010 through 0099).
Addresses which can
be indexed:
address portion of all instructions .
Cumulative indexing: none.
Combined index and
step: . . . . . . .
yes.
Indirect addressing:
none.
.333
Stepping
. 334
Specification of
increment:. .
address portion of stepping
instruction.
Increment sign:
always positive, but may be
added or subtracted.
Size of increment:
4 digits.
End value: . . . . .
zero, non-negative, or
value specified in index.335
ing word.
Combined step and
test: . . . . . . .
for increment of 1 or decrement of up to 4 digits.

.24

Special Processor Storage

.241

Category of
storage

Number of
locations

Arithmetic and
Program Control,
Arithmetic and
Progr am Control,

10 + sign accumulators.

3

1

Arithmetic and
Program Control:

. 242

Size in Program
digits usage

4

instruction
counter.

10 + sign program
register.

1

5

core

6

.3

SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES

. 31

Instruction Sequencing

Look-Ahead:...... none.

©

In-out controllers:
Storage access:
Processor errors:
Other: . . . . . .
Control by routine
Individual control:
Method: . . . . . .

completion of an operation
by a magnetic tape unit.
as above.
none.
none.
none •

individual tape channels.
stacking latches, set by a
mask word in core storage, enable interruption
by specific units or
groups.
Restriction: . . . . . none.
Operator control: . . . none .
Interruption conditions: 1) not in priority mode.
2) complc:ltion of operation
by a unit whose stacking
latch is not masked .
Note: Upon completion of magnetic tape operations,
interruption may occur always or only in the
event of an error or unusual condition, depending upon sign of the ta'pe instruction.
Interruption process
Disabling interruption: yes; enters priority mode .
Registers saved: . . . stores instruction counter
contents in index word 97
and indicator settings in
index word 100.
Destination:
depends on cause.
· 336 Control methods
Determine cause:
destination usually indicates cause; for tape operations, initial and final
status words can be
tested.
Enable interruption:
"priority release" instruction.

.34

Multi-running: . .

· 342 Maximum number of
programs: . . . . .

6.

. 311 Number of sequence control facilities: . . .
1.
.314 Special sub- sequence
counters: . . . .
none .
. 315 Sequence control
step size: . . .
1 word .
. 316 Accessibility to
routines: . . .
can be stored in an indexing word.
. 317 Permanent or optional
modifier: . . . . . .
no.

. 32

Possible causes
In-out units: .

.341 Method of control:

Category of Total number Physical Access time Cycle time
storage
locations
form
f1 sec
f1 ~ec
Processor,

Interruption

. 343 Precedence rules: .
· 344 Program protection:
Storage:
In-out units: . .

limited capability .
own coding, using interruption facilities described
above .
2 is practical limit, since
one priority routine cannot interrupt another .
own coding.

none.
none .

.35

Multi-sequencing: . . . none .

.4

PROCESSOR SPEEDS

.41

Instruction Times in p. secs

.411 Fixed point
Add-subtract:
Multiply (average): .
Divide (average): .
.412 Floating point
Add-subtract:
Multiply (average): .
Divide (average); .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12.
30+ 3.40 .
.30+ 6.80.
20.
32 + 3.40 .
30+ 6.80.
7/62

IBM 7072

404:051.413

§

os!.

. 413 Additional allowance for
7.
Indexing: . . .
1. OD, for shift of D posiNormalization: . . .
tions.
Re-comp1ementing
Fixed point:. .
2.
Floating point:
3.
. 414 Control
Compare: . . . .
12.
6.
Branch: . . . . .
Compare and branch: 18.
.415 Counter control
Step: . . . . .
20.
Step and test: .
20.
14.
Test:
12 + 18N + 6R, for conver.416 Edit: . . . . . .
sions between alphameric
and numeric forms,
where N is number of
numeric words moved and
R is number of record
definition words.
. 417 Convert:
none.
.418 Shift: . .
6 + D, for shift of D positions.
. 42 Processor Performance in I.L secs
.421 For random addresses Fixed point
(10 digits)
c = a + b: .
36
b= a + b: .
30
Sum N items: .
12
C = ab:
84
115
C = alb:.
. 422 For arrays of data
Fixed point
(10 digits)
118
Ci = ai + bj:.
106
bj = ai + bj: ..
Sum N items:.
39
166
C = C + aibr
.423 Branch based on comparison
Numeric data (up to
10 digits): .
103.
Alphabetic data (up
to 5 char):
103.

7/62

Floating point
44.
44.
20.
84.
110.
Floating point
126.
126.
47.
185.

.424 Switching
Unchecked:
42 .
Checked: . .
78.
List search: .
37 + 45N.
.425 Format control per character
Unpack: . . . . . . . . 5.
Compose:. . . . . . . 30 (**).
.426 Table look up per comparison
For a match: . . . . . 6 .
For least or greatest: 6.
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . . 6.
.427 Bit indicators
Set bit in separate location: . . . . . .
30.
Set bit in pattern: .
impractical.
Test bit in separate
location: . . . . .
20.
Test bit in pattern: .
impractical.
impractical.
Test AND for B bits:
Test OR for B bits: .
im practical.
.428 Moving
1 digit: .
30.
1 word: .
24 .
N words:
12 + 12N + 6R, where R is
number of record definition words .
.5

ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

Overflow

check

Under,flow (float-pt):
Zero divisor:
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Field overflow*:

check
causes overflow.
fixed count check
check
none.
check
fixed count check
fixed count check
check

alarm; stop or set
indicator.
alarm & indicator•

Sign change·:

check

,stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
alarm; stop or set
indicator,
alarm; stop or set
indicator.

• Can occur only when storing a field-defined portion of a word.

404:091.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7072

REPORTS

Input.Output
7330 MTU

INPUT·OUTPUT: 7330 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

§

091.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:.

. 12

Description

tion; a final status word is generated at the end of
each read or write operation. The status words are
used by the priority routine to determine the specific cause of the priority signal. At the programmer's option, priority interruptions may occur at
the end of every tape operation or only when error
conditions are detected by the numerous checking
circuits .

Magnetic Tape Unit.
7330 Model 1.
MT.

Because the internal data structures of the IBM 7072
and 1401 systems are different, certain precautions
must be observed to insure tape compatibility between the two systems. The 7072 mode change and
segment mark characters have no special significance to the 1401; they will be read into its core
storage just as any other characters. When preparing tape for the 7072 however, the 1401 must insert the mode change character between alphameric
and numeric sections of data. The 1401' sword
separator character, =, has no significance to the
7072 and should not be used in preparing tapes for
it. The optional Compressed Tape Feature enables the 1401 to process tapes written by a 7072 in
the zero elimination mode.

The 7330 is the only magnetic tape unit offered in the
7072 system. It is slower, simpler, and less expensive than the 729 series tape units used in the
IBM 7070 and 7074, and is fully compatible with them
except that the 800 character-per-inch recording
density and the "set density" instructions cannot be
used.
Tape speed is 36 inches per second, and peak transfer rate is either 1,200 or 20,016 characters per
second, depending upon the recording density selected. Lateral and longitudinal parity checks are
made on both reading and recording.
The 7330' s main drawback is its inability to terminate a high speed rewind without unloading the tape
from the vacuum columns and read-record head. A
full rewind without unloading requires 13.3 minutes.
Up to ten tape units can be connected to each of two
channels. Simultaneous tape reading, writing, and
internal processing are possible in a two channel
system.
The 7072's scatter-read and gather-write capabilities make it possible to distribute sub-blocks of a
block of data read from tape into various portions of
core storage under the control of record definition
words in the stored program. Similarly, data from
different sections of core' storage can be assembled
into one block on tape.
The optional record-mark control mode provides
additional flexibility and facilitates the handling of
variable -length records. Detection of a record mark
in a data word signals the end of a sub-block, and
control is transferred to the next sequential record
definition word.
Since a 7072 word may consist of either ten numeric
digits plus sign or five alphameric characters, a
mode change character, t.., is automatically recorded on the tape whenever the data mode changes
from alphameric to numeric or vice versa. When
the tape is read, the mode change characters insure
that each word will be translated back into the proper
internal form. When recording in the numeric mode,
up to five high -order zeros in each word can be
eliminated; they are filled in automatically when the
tape is read.
Every tape Instruction that might cause a priority
signal when it is completed automatically creates
an initial status word in a fixed core storage loca-

©

Optional Feature
Read Binary Tape: Permits odd-parity binary tapes
prepared by systems such as the IBM 704, 709 or
7090 to be read by the 7072, on tape channel number 1
only. Each binary row on tape is converted to two
octal digits, and each octal digit occupies one digit
position in 7072 storage. Since the 7072' s internal
logic is entirely decimal, the octal data must be
converted to decimal form or processed by means
of programmed subroutines.
. 13

Availability: . .

.6 to 8 months •

.14

First Delivery:

. October, 1961 (in IBM
1401 system).

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head:.
. 212 Reservoirs
Number:.. . . . .
Form: . . . . . . .
Capacity: . . .
.213 Feed drive: . .
.214 Take -up drive: .
.22

.2.
. vacuum.
. about 1. 5 feet.
motor.
. motor.

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system: .
.222 Sensing system: . .
.223 Common system: ..

.23

. pinch roller friction .

Multiple Copies:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

magnetic head
magnetic head.
two-gap head provides
read-after-write checking.

. . . . none.
7/62

IBM 7072

404:091.240

§

.42

091.

.24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: •
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/ stack:. .
Method of use: .

· recording.
.1.
.7.
.1 row at a time.

Use of station:.
Stltcks: . . . . .
Heads/ stack . .
Method of use: .

· sensing.
.1.
.7.
.1 row at a time.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

Positional Arrangement

. 321 Serial by: •..

.. . .

. 322 Parallel by: • • . . •
.324 Track use
Data: . • . . . . • .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: •••.
Control signals:
Unused:
Total: .•
.325 Row use
Data: . . •
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . . • .
Control signals:
Unused: . • . .
Inter-block gap:
. 33

Coding: . . • . .

.43

· 1 to N rows at 200 or 556
char/inch; N limited by
available core storage.
.7 tracks.
. 6.
. . 1.
. . 0 (self-clocking).
• • O.
... O.
.7.

.1 to N.
.1.
· O.
· 0 (record and segment
marks are optional).
• O.
· 0.75 inch.

IDM 729, 727 tape
units:.
.35

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: .

7/62

Code translation
not required.

0.50 inch .
2, 400 feet per reel.

Power and Tape Control.
7624 Modell.
(for channel #1 required).
Tape Control.
7625 Modell.
(for channel #2 optional).

Data Transfer Control

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:

.1 to N words, limited by
available core storage.

.512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . • . . .

.gap on tape or negative
record definition word
in core storage.
Output: . • • • . . . . . negative record definition
word .

.52

Physical Dimensions

. 351 Overall width: .
. 352 Length: . . . .

· up to 6 per channel; or up to
10 per channel with Additional 7330 Tape Attachments #7851 on channel #1
and #7852 on channel #2 .

.441 Size of load: . . . . . . • 1 to N words from (or into)
different areas of core
storage, as specified by
record definition words.
.442 Input-output areas:
· core storage .
. 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
· each word (each digit by
field definition).
.
.444 Input- output area
lockout: '.' •
• none •
.445 Table control:
• yes; scatter-read and gatherwrite, controlled by record
definition words •
.446 Synchronization: • • • • automatic.

· as in Data Code Table No.

Format Compatibility
Other device or system

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: . . . . .

4.
. 34

· one 7624 and one 7625.
· none.

. 432 Restrictions:. . . . . . . none

· plastic tape with magnetizable surface.
· magnetization.

. 312 Phenomenon: .
.32

.421 On-line: .
.422 Off-line:.

.44

. 311 Medium: . . .

Connection to System

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input:. .

· read one block forward into core storage locations
specified by record definition word(s); record
mark control is optional.
.522 Output: . .
• write one block forward
from core storage locations specified by record
definition word(s); record
mark control is optional .
.523 Stepping . . . . . . . . none •
.524 Skipping:. . . . . • • . . 1) one block backward
(backspace). 2) 4 inches
forward (to skip and erase
defective tape areas).
3) N segments forward or
backward (N is specified
in record definition word;
a segment is the data between two segment marks
on the tape).

INPUT-OUTPUT: 7330 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

§

091.

.525 Marking:.

· inter-block gap, segment
mark (SM), tape mark
(TM), and mode change

. 526 Searching: . . . .

. none.

.53

· automatic, between tape
codes in Data Code Table
No. 4 and internal numeric or alphameric
modes (i\ on tape signifies mode changes).

( i\ ) .

.54

Code Translation:

.63

20.4 m. sec/block .
7, 200N/(N + 147) char/sec.
20, 0l6/(N+ 408) char/sec.
(see graph)

Demands on System
m.sec
per
block

Component

Condition

Core Storage:

200 char/inch 0+
0.00l2N
556 char/inch 0+
0.00l2N

Percentage
of Transfer time
0.9.

2.4.

Where N =
char/block
NOTE: These demands are based upon alphameric
mode; they will be half as high in numeric
mode when there is no zero elimination.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments

Control Operations
Disable: . . . .
Select format: .

disabled after unloading.
yes; normal, all alphameric, zero elimination, or
record mark control.
Select code:. . . . . . . no.
Rewind: .
. . . . . . yes.
Unload:. . . . . . .
yes .
. 56

. 623 Overhead: . . . . .
.624 Effective speeds
At 200 char/inch:.
At 556 char/inch:
Where N =char/block

Format Control
Control: . . . .
.program.
Format alternatives: .. .undefined.
Rearrangement: .
· yes; scatter-read and
gather-write.
Suppress zeroes:.
· yes; up to 5 per numeric
word.
Insert point:. . . ..
.no.
Insert spaces:. . .
.no .
Recording density:. . . .no; "set density" instructions are ignored.
Section sizes:. . . . . . yes.

.55

404:091.525

Adjustment

Method

Recording density:

Comment

switch

200 or 556 chari
inch.

Testable Conditions
Disabled: . .
·
Busy device:
•
Output lock:
·
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks: .

yes.
no.
·no.
no.
yes.
yes; 14 feet from physical
end
End of segment: . . . . yes.

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions:

. 62

Speeds

.72

Other Controls
Function

Form

Address selection:

dial

Load rewind:

key

Unload:
File protection:

key
ring on
reel

Comment
selects unit address 0-9.
loads tape into
reservoirs.
ring permits
writing .

. . . . none .

.621 Nominal or peak speed:
.622 Important parameters
Density:. . . . • • • .
Tape speed:. . .
Inter-block gap: . . . .
Full rewind time
With unloading: . .
Without unloading:.
Start time
Read: ..
Write: .
Stop time
Read: .
Write: •

.73
7,200 or 20,016 char/sec.
200 or 556 char/inch.
36.0 inches/sec.
0.75 inch.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Reel: . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 minutes.
13 .3 minutes
7.6m. sec.
5.0 m. sec.

. 732 ReJ;!lenishment time:.

12.9 m. sec.
15.3 m. sec.

.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Capacity
.2,400 feet; for 1,000character blocks,
5,000,000 char at 200
char/inch or 11,300,000
char at 556 char/inch.
. 1. 0 to 1. 5 mins .
Tape unit needs to be
stopped.
. 13 mins.

7/62

IBM 7072

404:091.800
§

091-.

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Recording:
Reading:
Input block size:

Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Recording level:
Word length:
Misplaced
character:
Code translation:

Check or
Interlock

Action

lateral & longitudinal parity
read-after-write; lateral
parity check
compare working & stop
addresses when gap is
reached
none.
all codes acceptable.
reflective spot or tape mark
none.
interlock
signal strength check
check

priority signal.
priori ty signal.

wait.
priori ty signal.
priority signal.

check
2-out-df-5 bit check

priority signal.
priority signal.

priority signal.

priority signal.

NOTE: "Priority signal" indicates that digit position 1 of the final
status word is set to a particular condition code and control
is transferred to a tape priority routine which takes the
appropriate action.

7/62

404:091.801

INPUT-OUTPUT: 7330 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

EFFECTIVE SPEED
IBM 7330

4

.-::~ """J

----""

-+---+---I-l--I--4~

1,000,000
7
4

2

100,000
Effective Speed,
char/sec.

7
4

-----

2

~556
10,000

char/inch

-

7
/'

1---t--+-+-+-H-+H-/..".£/=--+.----4-4--=+--H~--M==""200 chari inch I--+-I-I~
4

/
2

§

1,000

~

V

//

7

Z?

W
4

2

4

2

10

7

2

4

100

7

2

1,000

4

7

10,000

Characters Per Block

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

404:111.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 7072
Sim~ltaneous Operations

SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS

§

.3

Ill.

.1

. 12

Class

Member

A: .•

read card.

SPECIAL UNITS: . . . • none.
E: . .

read or write on magnetic
tape.
F: . . . . . . . . . . . . rewind magnetic tape unit.

Description
The only input-output devices available for the 7072
are magnetic tape, the console typewriter, and the
console card reader. Since the typewriter and
reader are unbuffered, simultaneous operations are
limited to one magnetic tape read or write operation
per channel while computing; the maximum number
of tape chlllmeis is two. Execution of the stored
program is delayed for one 6-microsecond cycle for
each word transferred between core storage and the
magnetic tape control.

.2

CLASSES OF OPERATIONS

.4

I: .. . . . . . . . . . .

input or output on console
typewriter.

P: . . . .

internal processing.

RULES
a + i + P = at most 1.
e
= at most T.
e +f
= at most lOT.
where T = number of magnetic tape channels (maximum of 2).

CONFIGURATION CONDITIONS: . . . . .•
none.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

II ~,"Il!R'
II

404:201.011

EDP

"""'IS

IBM 7072
System Performance

IBM 7072

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

©

1962 by Auerbach Corparation and BNA Incorparated

11/62

IBM 7072.

404:201.012

IBM 7072 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
Configuration
Worksheet

Item

Reference
YII B & YIII B

1

InputOutput
Times

~hBJ'/block

1,080

(File 2)

10

Recorda/block

K

m. sec/block

File 1 = ·File 2

74.4

File 3

24.4

File 4

26.4

m. sec/switch

m. sec penalty

2

(File 1)

m. sec/block

File I=File 2

0

File 3

0

File 4

0

41200.112

File I=File 2

1.2

File 3

0.1

File 4

0.1

al

0.25

m. aec/record
Central
Processor. m. aec/detail
Times
m.sec/work

a2

0.57

b6

0.64

bS

+ b9

0.89

m. sec/report

b7

+ b8

3.75

m. sec
for C. P.
and
dominant
column.

al

0.3

a2K

5.7

a3K

52.4

3

Standard
Problem A

File 1 Mas ter In

1.2

File 2 Master Out

1.2

File 3 Details

1.0

File 4 Reports

1.0

264.0

62.8

338.4

4:200.114

F=1.0

Totai

4

Unit of measure

1,500

Fixed

247

3 (Blocks i to 23)

102

6 (Blocks 24 to 48)

792

Files

880

4:200.1151

Working
Total

11/62

74.4

(words)
Std. routines

Standard
Problem A
Space

4:200.1132

32
3,553

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

404:201.013

IBM 7072 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE -Contd.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2

Configuration
Worksheet

Item

Reference
VII B & VIII B

5

Fixed/Floating point

Floating
input

7330 Mag. Tape

output

7330 Mag. Tape

input

80 char (unblocked)

output

100 char (unblocked)

Unit name

Size of record

Standard
Mathematical
m. sec/block
Problem
A

input

Tl

24.4

output T2

25.4

4:200.413

input

T3

0.1

outppt T4

0.1

m. sec/record

TS

0.7

m. sec/S loops

T6

4.2

m. sec/report

T7

1.6

m. sec penalty

7

Unit name

7330 Mag. Tape

Size of block

Standard
Statistical
Problem
A

30 char

Records/block

B

m. sec/block

Tl

23.4

m. aec penelty

T3

0.1

m. aectblock

TS

--

m. aec/record

T6

0.83

m. sec/table

T7

0.13

1

4:200.512

c.

P.

©

1962 by .Auerbach Corporatiqn and BNA Incorporated

11/62

404:201.100

_STANDARD
EDP
_

AEPORlS

IBM 7072
System Performance

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

201.

. 112 Computation:.
.113 Timing basis:

.1

GENERALlZED FILE PROCESSING

. 11

Standard File Problem A Estimates

.111 Record sizes
Master file:.
Detail file: .
Report file: .

standard .
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.113.
• 114 Graph:. • • . . . . . see graph below .
• 115 Storage space required
Configuration VilB:
3,500 words.
Configuration VIIIB: • 3, 500 words.

108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

1,000.0
7

4

2

100.0

7

4

2

Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File
Records

10.0

7

4

2

/

,.-

~

..,. ~

1.0

7

4

2

0.1
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

404:201.120
§

IBM 7072

201.

.12

• 122 Computation:.
.123 Timing basis:.

standard.
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.12.
• 124 Graph:. • . • • • • . see graph below .

Standard File Problem B Estimates

.121 Record sizes
Master file: •
Detail file: •
Report file: .

54 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

1,000.0

7

4,

2

100.0
7

4
2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File
Records

10.0

7

4

'1\\\~

2

1.0
7

.,

V

~

L

4
2

0.1
0.0

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

~--..,-~

7/62

I AUERBACH I @[J

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

404:201.130
.132 Computation:.
.133 Timing basis:

201.

.13

Standard File Problem C Estimates

. 131 Record sizes
Master file: .
Detail file: .
Report file: .

. 134 Graph:

standard.
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.13 .
see graph below .

216 characters.
1 card.
1Une.

1,000.0
7

4

2

100.0

7

4
2

Time in Minu tes to
Process 10,000
Master File
Records

10.0
7

4

j,..--'
2

1.0

------

Vll-B, Vlll-B

I

T

4

2

0.1
0.1

0.0

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of. Detail Records Per Master Record

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

404 :20 1.140

§

IBM 7072

201.

• 14

• 142 Computation:.
.143 Timing basis:
Standard File Problem D Estimates
. 144 Graph:

.141 Record sizes
Master file: •
Detail file: .
Report file: .

trebled •
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.14.
see graph below .

108 characters.

1 card.
1 line.

1,000.0

7

4

2

100.0

7

4
2

Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File
Records

10.0
7

4

vn_~nl-l3_

2

V

~

~

-

I-""'"

1.0

7

4

2

0.1
0.0

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

7/62

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

404:201.200

201.

8 characters .
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.213 .
see graph below .

. 212 Key size:
.213 Timing basis:

.2

SORTING

. 21

Standard Problem Estimates

. 211 Record size: . . . . .

.214 Graph:

80 characters.

1,000
7

4

2

100

I.'"

7

i/
/

/

4

/

2

;/

/

.:".<$

~"<;>'

Time in Minutes to
Put Records Into 10
Required Order
7

.:"."

~

/

4

V

2

,

1

/

V

V

"

7

4

2

0.1
100

4

2

7

1,000

2

4

7 10,000

2

4

7 100,000

Number of Records

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

404:201.300

§

IBM 7072

201.

using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide •
4:200.312.
• 313 Graph: . . . . • . . see graph below.
.314 Maximum matrix sizes
5,000 core storage locations:
. 67.
10,000 core storage locations:
• 97 .
20,000 core storage locations:
.139.
30,000 core storage locations:
.171.

.-312 Timing basis:

.3

MATRIX INVERSION

.31

Standard Problem Estimates

• 311 Basic parameters:

• . general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8
decimal digits.

100.00

7

4

2

/

10.00
I

I

7

I

I

!I

4

J

2

I

Time in Minutes,
for Complete· 1.00
Inversion
7

J

I

II
4

I

I

2

/

0.10

7

I

I

I

I

4

~

I

2

/

0.0 1

1

7/62

2

4

7

2
10
Size of Matrix

4

7

100

2

4

7 1,000

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

404:201.400

201.

5 fifth-order polynomials.
5 divisions •
1 square root.
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.413.
see graph below.

.412 Computation:

.4

GENERALIZED MATHEMA TICAL PROCESSING

.41

Standard Mathematical Problem A Estfmates

.413 Timing basis:
• 411 Record sizes:

10 signed numbers, avg •
size 5 digits, max. size
8 digits.

.414 Graph:

Configurations VII-B and VIII-B; Single length (8 digit precision); Floating point.
R = Number of Output Records per Input Record
lO,OOO

7

4

2

1,000

7

4

l/tt

/

2

Time in Milliseconds per
Input Record

/

,;'

/

100

/

/

7

/

/

V

4

,~

.....

R=l.O, 0.1 0.01

2

10
7

4

2

0.1

4
2
7 1.0
4
C, Number of Computations per Input Record

2

©

7

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10.0

2

4

7 100.(

7/62

404:201.500
§

IBM 7012

201.

.512 Computation:

.5

GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING

. 51

Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates

augment T elements in
cross-tabulation tables .
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.513 .
see graph below.

• 513 Timing basis:
.514 Graph:

.511 Record size:

thirty 2-digit integral
number/?

10,000
7

4

2

1,000
7

4

2

Time in Milliseconds per
Record

"

100
1/

7

/

4

/
VII-B, VIII-B

~

./

2

10
7

4

2

1
2

4
Roman

7/62

2
7
4
10
T, Number of Augmented Elements
numer~ls

7

denote Standard Configurations

100

2

4

7

1,000

404:211.101

IBM 7072
Physical Characteristics

IBM 7072
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

IBM 7072.

404:211.102
IBM 7072 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS-Contd.

Magnetic
Tape Unit

Canso Ie Card
Reader

Power and
T ape Control

Tape Control

Power
Converter

7330

7501

7624

7625

7802

58x29X31

39 X 33 X 29

69 X 30 X 68

69 X 30 X 68

69 X 30 X 68

200

1,800

2,100

1,700

14 (power)

14 (power)

14 (power)

Unit Name
IDENTITY
Model Number

Height X Width XDepth, in.

Weight, Ibs.

I

650

PHYSICAL
Msximum Cable Lengths to
Designated Units, feet

Temperature, of.

80 (7625)
90 (7624)
See Note.

35 (7624)

50-110

50-110

50- 110

50- 110

50-110

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

Temperature, of.

65-90

65-90

65 -90

65 -90

65-90

Humidity, "1.

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

3,415

800

1,900

400

13,200

ISO

800

220

400

800

Storage
Ranges
Humidity, "1.

Working
Ranges
ATMOSPHERE

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Air Flow, efm.

Intemal Filters

Nominal

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

±8%

t8"l.

±8"l.

±8"l.

±8"l.

60

60

60

60

60

±O.5

±0.5

±0.5

to.5

±0.5

39, 4-wire

39,4-wire

39,4-wire

39,4-wire

39,4-wire

1.1

0.3

0.4

0.3

12.7

Voltage
Tolerance

Nominal
ELECTRICAL

Cycles
Tolerance

Phases and Lines

Load KVA

NOTES

7/62

Cable lengths
are totals for all
7330s on a ehannel.

404:211.103

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM 7012 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Unit Name

Processor

Console

CE Console

Core Storago

7105

7150

Part of 7150

7301

IDENTITY

Model Number

Height

X

Width

X

Depth, in.

Weight, Ibn.

69

X

30

X

68

40

X

66

X

23

33

X

46

X

21

69

X

30

X

68

1,500

2,500

400

300

Maximum Cable Lengths to
Designated Units, feet

----

35 (7624)

35 (7624)

----

Temperature, of.

50- 110

50-110

50-110

50 - 110

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

65-90

65 -90

65-90

65 -90

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

12,000

800

Included in 7150

6,600

800

----

----

400

PHYSICAL

Storage
Ranges
Humidity, %

Temperature,

0

F.

Working
Ranges
Humidity, '7.

ATMOSPHERE

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Air Flow, cfm.

Internal Filters

Nominsl

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

±8'7.

±8'7.

±8'7.

±8'7.

60

60

60

60

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

Included in 7802

0.02

Inc! uded in 7150

1.4

Voltage
Tolerance

Nominal
ELECTRICAL

Cycles
Tolerance

Phases and Lines

Load KVA

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

404:221.101

.'IM"'RD
II

EDP

IBM 7072

""ORIS

Price Data

\"

§

PRICE DATA

221.

No.
Central
Processor
Storage

71 OS
Modell
Model 2
7301
Modell
and 11
Model 2
Model 21,
22 & 23

InputOutput

7330

NOTE:

Monthly
Rental

Monthly
Maintenance

Purchase

$

$

7,675
7,775

260.00
263.00

310,000
314,000

5,000 words
9,990 words

3,500
6,800

31. 25
37.50

195,000
343,000

10,000 words

6,800

37.50

343,000

450

52.25

22,000

350

1. 50

14,000

100
100

0.50
0.50

4,500
4,500

High - Speed Scientific Processor
One tape channel
Two tape channels

$

Core Storage

Magnetic Tape Unit

7851
7852
7150

Console Control Unit

300

15.50

13,050

7501

Console Card Reader

75

5.75

3,100

7624

Power and Tape Control (channell)

2,050

73.00

84,000

7625

Tape Control (channel 2)

1,850

48.00

75,000

1017
1018
1018

Additional Core Storage Attachments
(required when more than 10,000
words are used)
On 7105 Processor
On 7624 Power and Tape Control
On 7625 Tape Control

450
25
25

9.25
2.00
2.00

18,450
900
900

Power Converter (required in every
system)

400

6.00

20,000

7802

Power
-

Name

Optional Features
Read Binary Tape (channell only)
Additional Tape Attachment (required when more than 6
7330s are connected to a
channel)
For channel 1
For channel 2

5980

Controllers

PRICES

IDENTITY OF UNIT

CLASS

Monthly maintenance charges apply to purchased equipment only; they are based on a
graduated scale, and the charges shown here apply to the first three years after
installa tion.

©

J962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

IBM 7074
International Business Machines Corp.

\
"--

c

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

IBM 7074
International Business Machines Corp.

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

405:001.001
IBM 7074
Contents

CONTENTS

1.
2.
3.

4.

5.
6.
7.

8.

9.

10.

Introduction
Data Structure .
System Configuration
6-Tape Business System
ill
V
6-Tape Auxiliary Storage System
VI
6-Tape Business/Scientific System
VII B 10-Tape General System (Paired)
VmB 20-Tape General System (Paired)
Internal Storage
Core Storage
7301
Core Storage Control
7602
7300
Disk Storage Unit
Disk
Storage Control
7605
1301
Disk Storage Unit
File Control
7631
Data Channel
7907
Central Processor
7104
High-Speed Processor
Console
7150
Console
Input-Output; Punched Tape and Card
7500
Card Reader
Input/Output Control
7600
7603
Input/Output Synchronizer
7550
Card Punch
7600
Input/Output Control .
7603
Input/Output Synchronizer
7501
Console Card Reader
Input-Output Control
7600
Input- Output; Printers
7400
Printer.
7600
Input/Output Control
7603
Input/Output Synchronizer
Console Typewriter
7150
7600
Input/Output Control
Input-Output; Magnetic Tape
Magnetic Tape Unit
729
7604
Tape Control
7340
Hypertape Drive .
7640
Hypertape Control
7907
Data Channel
Input-Output; Other
7900
Inquiry Station
4671
Inquiry Control Synchronizer
1414
Input/Output Synchronizer
7907
Data Channel

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

405:011
403:021

(mM 7070)

405:031.101
405:031.102
405:031.103
404:031.104
405:031.106
405:041
405:041.4
403:042
403:042.4
403:043
403:043.4
403:043.4

(mM
(ffiM
(mM
(mM
(mM

7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)

405:051
403:061

(mM 7070)

403:071
403:071.4
403:071.4
403:072
403:072.4
403:072.4
403:073
403:073.4

(mM
(ffiM
(mM
(mM
(mM
(mM
(ffiM
(mM

7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)

403:081
403:081.4
403:081.4
403:082
403:082.4

(mM
(ffiM
(ffiM
(mM
(mM

7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)

(mM
(mM
(mM
(ffiM

7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)

405:091
405:091.4
405:092
405:092.4
405:092.4
403:101
403:101.4
403:102
403:102.12

5/63

405:001.002

IBM 7074

CONTENTS (Contd.)
10.

11.
12.
13.

14.

15.
16.

17.
18.

19.
20.

21.
22.

5/63

Input·Output; Other (Contd.)
1009
Data Transmission Unit
1011
Paper, Tape Reader.
1014
Remote Inquiry Unit
7864
Telegraph Input-Output
Simultaneous Operations
Instruction List
•
Coding Specimens
Autocoder
COBOL
FORTRAN
Data Codes
Internal Numeric
Internal Alphameric
Punched Cards
Magnetic Tape
Problem Oriented Facilities
Process Oriented Languages
COBOL 61
FORTRAN ••
Machine Oriented Languages
Autocoder
Program Translators
Autocoder
Four-Tape Autocoder
Basic Autocoder
COBOL 61
FORTRAN
Basic FORTRAN
Operating Environment; PEST
System Performance
Worksheet Data •
Generalized File Processing
Sorting.
•
Matrix Inversion
Generalized Mathematical Processing
Generalized Statistical Processing
Physical Characteristics
Price Data ••
•
•

7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)

403:102.121
403:102.122
403:102.123
403:102.124
405:111
403:121

(ffiM
(ffiM
(ffiM
(ffiM

403:131
403:132
403:133

(ffiM 7070)
(ffiM 7070)
(ffiM 7070)

403:141
403:142
403:143
403:144
403:151

(ffiM
(mM
(ffiM
(ffiM
(ffiM

403:161
403:162

(ffiM 7070)
(ffiM 7070)

403:171

(ffiM 7070)

403:181
403: 182
403:183
403:184
403:185
403:186
403:191

(ffiM
(ffiM
(ffiM
(ffiM
(ffiM
(ffiM
(ffiM

405:201.011
405:201.1
405:201.2
405:201.3
405:201.4
405:201.5
405:211
405:221

(ffiM 7070)

7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)

7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)
7070)

.405:011.100
.SJANDARD

EDP
•

IBM 7074

R[PDRJS

Introduction

INTRODUCTION
The solid-state 7074 system is the most powerful member of liM's 7070 series. It
is most effective as a tape oriented system for high volume business applications, and the
mM 1401 is commonly used with it to perform the off-line data transcription operations.
Because it offers relatively high internal speeds, large core storage capacity, and optional
floating point hardware, the 7074 can also be effective as a scientific processor.
An ruM 7070 system can be converted to a 7074 in the field by replacing the central
processor and power converter and altering the internal circuitry in the core storage units
and console. The 7074's internal speed is, on the average, about six times as fast as the
7070 and about 1.4 times as fast as the 7072. Overall system throughput for a 7074 on typical
commercial applications will average twice that of a Similarly equipped 7070, according to
the manufacturer. Program compatibility among all members of the 7070 series is virtually
complete.
Core storage may consist of from 5,000 to 30,000 word locations. Each location can
hold one single-address instruction, one 5-character alphameric word, or one numeric word
of ten decimal digits and sign. The 7074's core storage cycle time is four microseconds,
compared to six microseconds in the 7070 and 7072 systems.
The instruction repertoire is versatile and effective; the only Significant omission is
the lack of automatic editing facilities. Three accumulators are provided, and many of the
instructions can refer to anyone of the three. Ninety-nine core storage locations can be
used as index registers. While the 7074 is basically a fixed word-length system, operand
sizes for most internal operations can vary from one to ten digits, and several short fields
of like Sign can readily be packed into a single core storage location.
A major feature of the 7074 is its ability to transfer several blocks of data to or from
different core storage areas in a single operation. This scatter-read and gather-write
capability facilitates internal data transfers as well as transfers between core storage and
magnetic tape, disc storage, or unit record devices.
Automatic interruption facilitates effective use of the system's capabilities for
simultaneous operations. Execution of a priority routine can be initiated automatically whenever an operation is completed by a selected peripheral unit or a manual inquiry request is
made.
The liM 729 series of magnetic tape units offers peak transfer rates from 15,000 to
90,000 characters per second. Up to ten 729 tape units can be connected to each of a maximum of four channels, and up to four tape read/write operations can occur simultaneously
with internal processing.
Up to ten of ruM's Hypertape Drives can be connected to each of two tape channels in
place of the 729s. Hypertape offers transfer rates of up to 170,000 alphameric characters or
340,000 decimal digits per second plus backward reading, fast stops and starts, and efficient
cartridge loading. Hypertape, however, is not compatible with the other mM tape units.
Two different types of auxiliary magnetic disc storage can be used; the maximum
system capacity is 278 million characters.
A line of unit record devices, including a 500 card-per-minute reader, a 250 cardper-minute punch, and alSO line-per-minute printer, is offered for the 7070 on an "as availabe" basis. A maximum of three readers and three output devices (printers and/or punches)
can be connected. A console card reader, rated at 60 cards per minute, is useful in tape
systems for direct sard input on an exception basis.

CD

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

405: 011.1 01

IBM 7074

INTRODUCTION-Contd.
Paper tape readers, remote inquiry stations, data transmission terminals, and
telegraph transmitters and receivers can be connected to the system through the 1414 Input/
Output Synchronizer and the 7907 Data Channel.
Nearly all IDM 7070 software is usable without alteration on the 7074. Autocoder is
the basic machine oriented coding system and is offered in three versions for different translating computer configurations. The full, six-tape version includes powerful macro generation and input-output control facilities.
A FORTRAN II processor is available, and a COBOL 61 processor was delivered in
March, 1962. A Compiler Systems Tape combines the Autocoder, COBOL, and FORTRAN
processors and a Report Program Generator. The manufacturer also offers generalized sort
and merge routines, program testing aids, and various utility routines. A wide variety of
user-developed routines is available through GUIDE, the 7070 series users' organization.
NOTE:

6/62

In order to emphasize the close family relationship of the IDM 7074 system
to the ffiM 7070, report sections covering those items of equipment and
software whose form and use are the same in both systems have not been
duplicated in this report. In these cases, the Contents section (405:001)
refers the reader to the applicable sections of Computer System Report 403
on the ffiM 7070.

405:031.101
•

STANDARD

EDP

•

REPORTS

IBM 7074
System Confi guration

SYSTEM CONFI GURATI ON

§

03l.

III.

6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM
Deviations from Standard Configuration:

printer slower by 350 lines/min.

Rental:

$24,700 per month.

Core Storage: 5,000 words.
Core Storage Control.

High - Speed Processor.

Input/Output Control, Model 1.
Console.

Input/Output Synchronizer, Model 3.
Card Reader: 500 cards/min.
Card Punch: 250 cards/min.
Printer: 150 lines/min.

Tape Control, one channel.
Magnetic Tape Units (6): 15,000 or
41,667 char/sec.
Optional Features Included: . . . • . • . . . . . • .

©

none.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

405:031.102
§

IBM 7074

031.

V.

6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM
Deviations from Standard Configuratipn:

printer slower by 350 lines/min.

Rental:

$29,860 per month.

Disc Storage: 1301 Modell; 27, 800,000
characters max.

File Control.

Data Channel, Modell.

Core Storage: 5,000 words.
Core Storage Control.

High-Speed Processor.

Input/Output Control, Modell.
Console.

Input/Output Synchronizer, Model 3.
Card Reader: 500 cards/min.
Card Punch: 250 cards/min.
-Printer: 150 lines/min.
Tape Control, one channel.
Magnetic Tape Units (6): 15,000 or 41, 667
char/sec.
Optional Features Included:
6/62

Cylinder Mode (Disc Storage).

405:031.103

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

031.

VI.

6-TAPE BUSINESS/SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM
Deviations from Standard Configuration:

printer slower by 350 lines/min.

Rental:

$34,175 per month.
Core Storage: 15,000 words.
Core Storage Control.

fUgh-Speed Processor.

Input/Output Control, Modell.
Console.

Input/Output Synchronizer, Model 3.
Card Reader: 500 cards/min.
Card Punch: 250 cards/min.
Printer: 150 lines/min.

Tape Control, one channel.
Magnetic Tape Units (6): 15,000 or 41,667
char/sec.
Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . • . • • . • • . • . . Floating Decimal Arithmetic.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

405:031.104

§

IBM 7074

031.

VII. B

lO-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED)
Deviations from Standard Configuration
On-line equipment:
Off-line equipment:

none.
none.

Rental
On-line equipment:
Off-line equipment:
Total: • . • . • .

$34,400 per month.
$ 6, 065 per month.
$40,465 per month.

00- Line Equipment:

Core Storage: 15,000 words.
Core Storage Control.

High-Speed Processor.

Input/Output Control, Model 2.
Console.
Console Card Reader: 60 cards/min.

Magnetic Tape Units (4): 22,500 or 62,500
char/sec.
Tape Control, two channels.

Magnetic Tape Units (4): 22,500 or 62,500
char/sec.

6/62

405:031.105

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

031.
Off- Line Equipment (ruM 1401):

Core Storage: 4,000 positions.

Processing Unit: 1401 Model C3.

Card Read- Punch
Reads:
800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

Printer: 600 lines/min-.

Magnetic Tape Units (2): 15,000 or 41,667
char/sec.

Optional Features Included
On-line equipment:

Floating Decimal Arithmetic.

Off-line equipment:

High - Low- Equal Compare.
Advanced Programming.
Read Punch Release.
Sense Switches.
Print Storage •
Compressed Tape.
Early Card Read.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

IBM 7074

405:031.106

§

03l.

VIII. B

20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED)
Deviations from Standard Configuration
On-line equipment: .

none.

Off-line equipment:

none.

Rental
$63, 700'per month.
$ 9,140 per month.
$72,840 per month.

On -line equipment:
Off-line equipment:
Total: . • . . . .
On- Line Equipment

Core Storage: 30,000 words.
Core Storage Control.
Data Channel, Model 2.

rugh-Speed Processor.

Input/Ou!:J?ut Control, Model 2.
Console.
Console Card Reader: 60 cards/min.
Hypertape Drives (4): 170,000 char/sec. or
340,000 digits/sec.
Hypertape Control, two channels.

Hypertape Drives (4): 170,000 char/sec. or
340,000 digits/sec.
Magnetic Tape Units (4): 22,500, 62,500
or 90,000 char/sec.
Tape Control, two channels.

Magnetic Tape Units (4): 22,500, 62,500
or 90,000 char/sec.

l

6/62

@

A-U-ER-BA-CH--'--"

'-1

405:031.107

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

031.
Off- Line Equipment (ruM 1401):

Core Storage: 8,000 positions.

Processing Unit: 1401 Model C4.

Card Read-Punch
Reads:
800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

Printer: 600 lines/min.

Magnetic Tape Units (4): 22,500 or
62,500 char/sec.

Optional Features Included
On -line equipment: •
Off-line equipment:

Floating Decimal Arithmetic.
High- Low- Equal Compare.
Advanced Programming.
Read Punch Release.
Sense Switches.
Compressed Tape.
Print Storage.
Processing Overlap.
Early Card Read.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

405:041.100
.STANOARO

II

EDP

IBM 7074

REPORTS

Internal Storage
Core Storage

INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE

§041.
.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

. 12

Basic Use: .

· 13

Description

Core Storage .
7301, Models 3, 4, 31, 41,
42, 43.
CS.

Each core storage location in the 7074 system can
hold one numeric word consisting of ten decimal digits and sign, one alphameric word consisting of five
characters, or one single-address instruction.
Each digit is represented by a two-out-of-five-bit
code combination, and validity checks insure that
each digit transferred to or from storage contains
exactly two bits. Two successive digit positions are
required for each alphameric character. Core storage cycle time is four microseconds, and all transfers are parallel by word.
The 7074 's scatter-read and gather-write capabilities make it possible to distribute a block of data in
core storage into a number of smaller blocks or to
assemble several blocks into one larger block. Individual digits or fields within a word can be addressed through the 7074's field definition feature.
The 7301 Model 3 contains 5, 000 word locations of
core storage; Model 4 contains 9,900 words, which
was the maximum core storage capacity in the 7074
as originally conceived. More recently, the 7301
Model 31, with 5,000 words, and Models 41, 42, and
43, each with 10,000 words, were introduced. Up
to three of these modules may be used in a system,
extending the maximum core storage capacity to
30,000 words. When more than 9,900 words are
used, Additional Core Storage Attachments must be
added to the High Speed Processor, the IngutjOutput
Control, and an Tape Controls. Programs which
utilize the additional core storage must be coded and
run in a different mode from those which do not; the
details are covered in the Central Processor report,
405:051. 12.
Availability:

12 to 15 months.

· 15

First !?elivery:

November, 1961.

. 16

Reserved Storage

PHYSICAL FORM

. 21

Storage Medium: .

magnetic core .

.23

Storage Phenomenon:

direction of magnetization.

.24

Recording Permanence

.241 Data erasable by instructions:
.242 Data regenerated
constantly:
.243 Data volatile:
. 244 Data permanent: .
. 245 Storage changeable:

..
..

working storage.

· 14

.2

.28

Locks
none.
none.
none.
none.

no .
no .
no .
no.

Access Techniques
coincident current.
uniform.

. 281 Recording method: .
.283 Type of access:
.29

Potential Transfer Rates

.292 Peak data rates
Cycling rate: .
Unit of data:
Conversion factor:
Data rate:
Compound data rate:
.3

DATA CAPACITY

.31

Module and S:t:stem Sizes
Identity

5,Oilo

Digits:
Characters:
Instructions:
Modules:

50,000
25,000
5,000
1

WiirdS:
Digits:
Characters :
Instructions:
Modules:

250, 000 cps.
word.
53 bits/word.
250,000 words/sec.
250,000 words/sec.

Minimum Storage
Model 3

Wo@S

Identity

.32

Purpose
Number of locations
Index registers:
99
Arith registers:
O.
Logic registers:
O.
1-0 control:
144
Table look-up:
1
Electronic switches:
3

yes .

Models 42,
43, & 31
25,000
250,000
125,000
25,000
3

Models 42 &
41
20,000
200,000
100,000
20,000
2

Rules for Combining
Modules: . . . . . .

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

.42

Connection to S:t:stem

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:

Model 4
9,900
99,000
49,500
9,900
1

Models 42 & 31
15,000
150,000
75,000
15,000
2
Maximum
Storage
Models 42,
43 & 41.

-ao:ooO.

300,000.
150,000.
30,000.
3.

all combinations are shown
above .

Core Storage Control.
7602 Model 6.

one.
none.

Note: All locations can also be used as working
storage.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporaled

6/62

IBM 7074

405:041.430
§

041.

.43

. 72
Connection to Device

Transfer Load Size
With self:

.431 Devices per controller: up to 3 modules, as shown
in .3l.
. 432 Restrictions: . . .
none .
.5

ACCESS TIMING

.51

Arrangement of Heads:

. 52

Simultaneous Operations: . . . . . . . . . none .

. 53

Access Time Parameters and Variations

.73

one digit to several blocks;
length and number of
blocks are limited only by
capacity of core storage.

Effective Transfer Rate
With self:

.531 For uniform access
Access time: . .
Cycle time:. . .
For data unit of:

· 4 fL sec.
· 4 fL sec.
· . one word, or a field-defined portion thereof.

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock
check
validity check
none.
validity check

AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Field overflow-:

Data Transfer

Sign change-:

check

Pairs of storage units possibilities
With self:. . . . . . . yes.

- When storing field-defined portion of. a word.

.6

CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . . no.

.7
. 71

6/62

125,000 words/sec.

one access device per system .

Action
stop & alarm.
stop & alarm •
stop & alarm.

none •

check

alann & indicator;
optional stop •
alarm & indicator;
optional stop.

405:051.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7074

"PORTS

Central Pracessor

HSP
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§

051.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: .

.12

Description

High-Speed Processor.
7104.
HSP.

The 7104 High-Speed PrQcessor executes the stored
instructions and performs all arithmetic operations
in a 7074 system. It contains three accumulators,
an adder, an instruction counter, and the program,
arithmetic, auxiliary, and synchronizer registers.
Each of the accumulators and registers has a capac·
ity of one word and can hold ten decimal digits plus
sign or five alphameric characters. All internal
transfers are parallel by word. Internal speeds are
from 4 to 30 times as high as those of the IBM 7070
system, depending upon the application; in typical
commercial applications the 7074 's internal speed
will be about six times as fast.
A feature of the 7074 is its versatile instruction repertoire. Full fixed point arithmetic facilities are
provided, including addition to and subtraction from
a core storage location. Ninety-nine index registers
are standard; they occupy core storage locations
0001 through 0099, and a full complement of instructions is provided fo:t loading, incrementing, and
testing them .• A unique "split-shift" operation permits shifting of only those digits to the right or left
of any specified position in the 20-digit register
composed of accumulators 1 and 2 coupled together.
There are no facilities for bit manipulation, but 30
"electronic switches" (each consisting of one digit
position in core storage) can be turned on or off or
tested by the program. Table look-up operations
can be carried out automatically on tables divided
into any number of core storage blocks. Internal
facilities for editing and format control are severely
limited. Many load, store, add, subtract, compare,
and branch operations can be carried out in any of
the three accumulators, and the accumulators can
be addressed and used as instruction operands.
Multiplication and division require all three accumulators.
The most common operand length is one 10-digit
word, but the 7074 's field definition feature (FD)
permits arithmetic, load, store, compare, and
table look-up- operations to be carried out on specified portions of a word. The control portion of an
instruction specifies the high- and low-order digit
positions of the field to be used. Several fields of
like sign can therefore be stored in a single core
storage location. Store and add-to-storage operations using field definition can result in field overflows (when digit positions beyond the field-defined
ones are affected) or sign changes (when the sign of
the stored field differs from that of the storage location). Depending upon console switch settings, these
errors can cause system halts or the setting of testable indicators.

©

The 7074's scatter-read and gather-write capabilities can be used in internal transfers as well as in
input-output operations. A block of data in core
storage can be scattered into a number of smaller
blocks, or a number of blocks can be gathered into
one larger block. The addresses of the several
blocks that data is to be gathered from or scattered
into are specified in a list of record definition (RD)
words, one word for each block to be transferred.
The end of a block transfer operation is indicated by
a record definition word with a minus sign. Conversions between the numeric and alphameric modes
can be made during core-to-core block transfers.
Each lO-digit numeric word becomes two 5-character alphameric words, and leading zeros can be converted to blanks. Only numeric data should be converted from alphameric to numeric mode; all evennumbered digit positions are lost, so alphabetic or
special characters are converted into unrelated numeric codes.
Automatic interruption of the stored program and
transfer of control to a priority routine can occur
whenever an operation is completed by a magnetic
tape unit, disc storage unit, or unit record device,
or when an inquiry request is made. This capability
is called "Priority Processing." It permits a limited degree of multi-running, but it is not possible
for one priority routine to interrupt another.
Optional Features
Floating Decimal Arithmetic (FDA): Provides a full
complement of floating point arithmetic operations
using an 8-digit fixed point part and a 2-digit exponent. Sixteen-digit results are formed in addition,
subtraction, and multiplicathm.
Interval Timer (IT): Records time in 3D-second intervals for up to 8.3 hours, and may be interrogated
or reset to zero by the stored program. The Console Card Reader Attachment is a prerequisite.
Additional Core Storage (ACS): Permits up to
30,000 words of core storage to be used in a 7074
system, in increments of 5, 000 words. An internal
switch, turned on or off by special instructions, selects the additional storage mode or the normal
storage mode. In the normal mode, only the loworder 10,000 words can be addressed, and all IBM
7070 and 7074 programs with standard 4-digit addresses can be run without change. In the additional
storage mode, the values 00 through 09 in the index
portion of an instruction specify no indexing; instead,
the index digits serve as an extension of the normal
4-digit operand address. Index values 10 through 99
cause the addition of a five-position field in the
specified index word to the four- position operand
address, forming a 5-digit effective address. All
record definition words must be stored below location 10, 000, and there are several other minor programming complications. Routines using the additional storage mode cannot be run on systems not
equipped with this feature.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorparated

6/62

405:051.130
§

IBM 7074

051.

.22

Special Cases of Operands

. 13

Availability:

12 to 15 months.

.221 Negative numbers: .

. 14

First Delivery:

November, 1961.

.222 Zero: . . . . . . . .

.2

PROCESSING FACILITIES

. 21

Operations and Operands
Operation
and Variation

absolute value with negative
sign.
plus zero is greater than
minus zero in com pari sons; both give some results in arithmetic.

· 223 Operand size
determination:

Provision

Radix

Size

automatic

decimal

1 word (FD).

none.
automatic

decimal

1 word (FD).

none.
automatic

decimal

1 word (FD).

optional FDA
optional FD A
optional FDA

decimal
decimal
decimal

8 & 2 digits.
8 & 2 digits.
8 & 2 digits.

1 word or a portion thereof,
defined by control portion
of instruction .

. 211 Fixed point
Add-Subtract
Multiply
Shott:
Long:
Divide
No remainder:
Remainder:

.212 Floating point
Add -Subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:

23

Instruction Formats

.231 Instruction structure: . 1 word.
· 232 Instruction layout:
Part

Operation

Size (digits)

sign

+

2

Index

Control

Address

2

2

4

.213 Boolean
233 Instruction parts
Name
Operation:

none.
none.

AND:
Inclusive OR:

.214 Comparison
Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating sequence:

automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
specials. A to Z,

Provision From

.215 Code
translation: automatip

numeric

1 word
1 word
1 word
1 word

(FD).
(FD).
(FD).
(FD).

o to 9.
To

Size

alphameric 1 to N words
(RD).

automatic

alphameric numeric

1 to N words
(RD).

.216 Radix
conversion: none.
Provision
.217 Edit format
Alter size:

automatic

Suppress zero:
Insett point:
Insett spaces:
Float:
Protection:

automatic
none.
none.
none.
none.

Comment

Size

in code translation
operations only
in right shifts only

1 to N words
(RD).

lor 2 words

.218 Table look-up
automatic

l word (FD,

Equal or grea rer: automatic

1 word (FD,

Equality:

RD).
RD).

Greatest:
Least:

none.
automatic

1 word (FD,
RD).

.219 Others
Add to storage:
Subtract from
storage:
Record gather:

automatic

1 word (FD).

automatic
automatic

1 word (FD).
1 to Nwords
(RD).

Record scatter:

1 to Nwords

automatic

(RD).

Electronic
switches:

automatic

test. turn on or off

30 switches
available.

(FD): Field definition is applicable to this operation (1 to 10 digits)
(RD): Record definition words are used to define blocks of data
locations.

6/62

Purpose
specifies operation to be
performed.
Index: . . .
1) specifies indexing word
to be added to address;
or
2) serves as extension of
operand address (in additional storage mode
only).
Control: . .
1) specifies high- and loworder digit positions of a
field within the addressed core storage location (field definition);
or
2) augments the operation
code.
Address: . . . . . . 1) specifies operand address in core storage;
2) specifies destination of a
jump;
3) contains a positive literal; or
4) augments the operation
code.
.234 Basic address structure: 1 + O.
· 235 Literals
Arithmetic:. . . .
none.
Comparisons and
tests: . . . . . .
1 digit.
Incrementing modifiers: . . . . . . .
4 digits.
.236 Directly addressed operands
.2361 Internal Minimum Maximum Volume
storage size
size
acCeSsible
~

Core:

1 character

1 word

total capacity in
additional storage mode; maximum of 10,000
words in normal
storage mode.

CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§

405:051.2362

051.

.2362
.237
.2371
. 2372
. 2373
. 2374
.2375

.2376
.2377
.2378
. 238
.239
.2391
. 2392
.2393
. 2394
.2395

Increased address
capacity: • . . . .
Address mdexing
Number of methods:
Name: . . . . . . . .
Indexing rule: . . .
Index specification: .

none.

1.
indexoing.
addition, modulo 10,000.
index portion of the modified instruction (2 digits).
Number of potential indexers
Normal storage
mode: . . . . . . 99 (core storage locations
0001 through 0099).
Additional storage
mode: . . . . . . 90 (core storage locations
0010 through 0099).
Addresses which can
be indexed:
address portion of all instructions.
Cumulative indexing: none.
Combined index and
step:.
yes.
Indirect addressing:
none .
Stepping
Specification of
increment: .
address portion of stepping
instruction.
Increment sign: .
always positive, but may be
added or subtracted.
Size of increment:
4 digits.
End value: .
zero, non-negative, or value specified in indexing
word.
Combined step and
test:
for increment of 1 or decrement of up to 4 digits.

.24

Special Processor Storage

.241

Category of
storage
Arithmetic and
Program Control:
Arithmeti<; and
Program Control:
Arithmetic and
Program Control:

.242

Category of
storage

Number of
locations

Size in
digits

Program
usage

3

10 + sign

accumulators.

1

4

1

10 + sign

instruction
counter.
program
register.

~
number
locations

High-Speed
Processor:

5

Physical
form

core

.3

SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES

.31

Instruction Sequencing

.311 Number of sequence
control facilities:
.314 Special sub- sequence
counters: .
.315 Sequence control step
size:
.316 Accessibility to routines: .
.317 Permanent or optional
modifier: .

Access
time

.32

Look-Ahead: . . . . . . none.

· 33

Interruption

.331 Possible causes
In-out units: .

In-out controllers:
Storage access:
Processor errors:
Other: . . . . . .
· 332 Control by routine
Individual control:

.333

.334

.335

· 336

Cycle
time

/L~

/L~

4

4

. 34

individual unit record devices, tape channels, inquiry controls, disc storage seek, and/or disc
storage read/write.
Method: . . . . . . . . stacking latches, set by a
mask word .in core storage, enable interruption
by specific units or
groups.
none.
Restriction:
console switches determine
Operator control:
which 2 unit record devices can cause interruption.
Interruption conditions: 1) not in priority mode.
2) completion of operation
by a unit whose stacking
latch is not masked.
Note: Upon completion of magnetic tape or disc
storage operations, interruption may occur
always or ~nly in the event of an ~rror or unusual condition, depending upon SIgn of the
tape or disc instruction.
Interruption process
Disabling interruption: yes; enters priority mode.
Registers saved: . . . stores instruction counter
contents in index word 97
and indicator settings in
index word 100.
depends on cause.
Destination:
Control methods
destination usually indiDetermine cause:
cates cause; for tape and
disc operations, initial
and final status words can
be tested.
Enable interruption: . "priority release" instruction.

Multi-running: .

.341 Method of control:
1.
.342 Maximum number of
programs:

none.
1 word.
can be stored in an indexing word.
no.

©

completion of an operation
by a maghetic tape unit or
unit record device; manual inquiry request .
as above.
completion of a disc storage seek, read, or write
operation.
none.
none.

.343 Precedence rules:
.344 Program protection:
Storage:
In-out units:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

limited capability.
own coding, using interruption facilities described
above.
2 is practical limit, since
one priority routine cannot interrupt another.
own coding.
none.
none.

6/62

IBM 7074

405:051.350
§

051.

. 35

Mul.ti - sequencing:

.4

PROCESSOR SPEEDS

.41

Instruction Times in

. none.

/L

secs.

.411 .Fixed point
Add-subtract:
8.
Multiply (average): .
26 + 3. 4D.
Divide (average):..
26 + 6. 8D.
. 412 Floating point (with FDA)
Add-subtract: . ..
16.
Multiply (average):. . 28 + 3. 4D.
Divide (average):. . . 26 + 6. 8D.
.413 Additional allowance for
Indexing: . . . . ..
5.
Normalization: . . .
1. OD.
Re - complementing
Fixed point:. .
2.
Floating point:
3.
.414 Control
Compare:. . . .
8.
Branch: . . . . .
4.
Compare and branch: 12.
.415 Counter control
Step:.....
14.
14.
Step and test: .
Test:
10.
.416 Edit: . . . . . .
8 + 12N + 4R, for conversions between alphameric
and numeric forms,
where N is number of numeric words moved and
R is number of record
definition words.
none.
.417 Convert:
6 + D, for shift of D posi.418 Shift: . .
tions.

. 42

Processor Performance in

.421 For random addresses
c = a + b: .
b =a + b: .
Sum N items: .
c = ab:
c = alb:.
.422 For arrays of data
ci = ai + bj:.
bj = ai + br.
Sum N items: .
c = c +aibj:

6/62

/L

secs .

Fixed point Floating point
(with FDA)
(10 digits)
32.
24
32.
20
16.
8
72.
72
98.
103
81
72
27
128

89.
89.
35.
140.

.423 Branch based on comparison
Numeric data (up to 10
digits):
70 .
Alphabetic data (up to
5 chars):
70 .
. 424 Switching
Unchecked: .
28.
Checked:
52 .
List search:
25 + 31N.
.425 Format control per character
Unpack: .
4.
Compose: .
20 (**).
.426 Table look up per comparison
For a match: .
6.
For least or greatest: 6.
For interpolation
point:
6.
.427 Bit indicators
Set bit in separate
location:
20.
Set.bit in pattern:
impractical.
Test bit in separate
location:
12.
Test bit in pattern: .
impractical.
Test AND for B bits: . impractical.
Test OR for B bits: .
impractical.
.428 Moving
20.
1 digit:
1 word: .
16.
Nwords:
8+8N+4R, where R is
number of record definition words.

.5

ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Action

Overflow:

check

Underflow (float-pt):
Zero divisor:
tnvalid data:
tnvalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
tnvalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Field overflow: 9=

check
causes overflow..
fixed count check
check
none.
check
fixed count check
fixed count check
check

alarm; stop or set
indicator.
alarm & indicator.

Sign change: 9=

check

stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
stop & alarm.
alarm; stop or set
indicator.
alarm; stop or set
indicator.

9= Can occur only when storing a field-defined portion of a word.

405:091.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
_

REPORTS

IBM 7074
Input-Output
729 MT
INPUT-OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

Since a 7074 word may consist of either ten numeric
digits plus sign or five alphameric characters, a
mode change character, 11 , is automatically recorded on the tape whenever the data mode changes
from alphameric to numeric or vice versa. When
the tape is read, the mode change characters insure
that each word will be translated back into the proper internal form. When recording in the numeric
mode, up to five high-order zeros in each word can
be eliminated and not recorded on the tape; they are
filled in automatically when the tape is read.

§091.
.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

.12

Description

Magnetic Tape Unit.
729 II, N, V, VI. .
MT.

These tape units are used in the IDM 1401, 1410,
7040, 7080, and 7090 series systems as well as in
the 7070 and 7074. In tape width, density and format, they are compatible with the 7330 and 727 tape
units. The only significant differences among the
four models are in recording densities and tape
speeds. These differences are summarized in the
following table:
Model

Tape speed,
inches/sec.

II

75.0

IV

112.5

V

75.0

VI

112.5

Density,
char/inch

200
556
200
556
200
556
800
200
5,56
800

Every tape instruction that might cause a priority
signal when it is completed automatically creates an
initial status word in a fixed core storage location;
a final status word is generated at the end of each
read or write operation. The status words are used
by the priority routine to determine the specific
cause of the priority signal. At the programmer's
option, priority interruptions may occur at the end
of every tape operation or only when error conditions are detected by the numerous checking
circuits.

Transfer rate,
char/sec.

15,000
41,667
22,500
62,500
15,000
41,667
60,000
22,500
62,500
90,000

Because the internal data strllctures of the IDM 7074
and 1401 systems are different, certain precautions
must be observed to insure tape compatibility between the two systems. The 7074 mode change and
segment mark characters have no special significance to the 1401; they will, be read into its core
storage just as any other characters. When preparing tape for the 7074 however, the 1401 must insert
the mode change character between alphameric and
numeric sections of data. The 1401's word separator character, =, has no significance to the 7074 and
should not be used in preparing tapes for it. The
optional Compressed Tape Feature enables the 1401
to process tapes written by a 7074 in the zero suppression mode.

Up to ten tape units can be connected to each of four
channels in a 7074 system, and up to four tape operations can be performed simultaneously with internal processing. Only two of the channels can utilize the 800 characters-per-inch density. When
7340 Hypertape Drives are used in a system, the
maximum number of channels for 729 tape units is
reduced to two. Different models of the 729 can be
intermixed on the same channel.

Optional Features
Tape Switching Feature: Modifies a tape unit so
that it can be logically switched between two tape
channels, two computers, or a computer and an offline auxiliary unit under operator control. The 7155
Switch Control Console is also required.

The 7074's scatter-read and gather-write capabilities make it possible to distribute sub-blocks of a
block of data read from tape into various portions of
core storage under the control of record definition
words in the stored program. Similarly, data from
different sections of core storage can be assembled
into one block on tape.

The optional record-mark control mode provides
additional flexibility and facilitates the handling of
variable-length records. Detection of a record
mark in a data word signals an end of a sub-block,
and control is transferred to the next sequential record definition word.

©

Read Binary Tape: Permits odd-parity tapes prepared by systems such as the IDM 704, 709 or 7090
to be read by the 7074, on tape channel number 1
only. Each binary row on tape is converted to two
octal digits, and each octal digit occupies one digit
position in 7074 storage. Since the 7074 's internal
logic is entirely decimal, the octal data must be
converted to decimal form or processed by means
of programmed subroutines.
.13

Availability:

1962 by Auerbach Corporalion and BNA Incorporaled

12 to 15 months with 7074
system or 7 to 9 months
alone.

6/62

IBM 7074

405:091.140

§091.
· 14

First Delivery
729
729
729
729

March, 1960.
March, 1960.
May, 1962.
May, 1962.

II: .
IV: .
V: •

VI: .

·2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

· 211 Drive past the head: .
· 212 Reservoirs
Number: .
Form: . .
Capacity: .
· 213 Feed drive:
.214 Take-up drive: .
.'
· 22

. 23

Multiple Copies: .

.24

Arrangement of Heads

sensing.
0.3 inch.

. 31

Form of

. 312 Phenomenon: .
.32

Positional

. 33

Coding: .

.34

Format Compatibili!y

.322 Parallel by:
.324 Track use
Data:
Redundancy check: .
Timing: .
Control signals:
Unused: .
Total: .

as in Data Code Table No.
4.

ruM 7330, 727 tape
units:
.35

not required.

,,-

"

Phx:sical DimeIisions

.351 Overall width:
.352 Length: .

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: . . . .

0.50 inch.
2,400 feet per reel.

Tape Control.
7604 Models 1, 2, or 3.

7.
1 row at a time.

1.

7.
1 row at a time.

plastic tape with magnetizable surface .
magnetization.

Te.
.42

Connection to Sx:stem

.421 On-line
Modell has two channels and handles 200 and 556
char/inch only.
Model 2 has one channel and handles 200 and 556
char/inch only.
Model 3 has two channels and handles 200, 556,
and 800 char/inch .
The following combinations are possible:
Nu~ber

of 729 First 7604
Tape Channels Model No.

Without 7907 Data
Channel:

Arran~ment

.321 Serial by:

6/62

1.

Stora~

.311 Medium:

0.75 inch.

none.

Use of station: .
Distance: .
Stacks: . .
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use: .
EXTERNAL STORAGE

marks are optional).

O.

Unused: .
Inter- block gap:

magnetic head.
magnetic head.
two-gap head provides
read-after-write check~
ing.

recording.

.3

O.

o (record and segment

Other device or system Code translation

2.
vacuum.
about 7 feet.
motor,'
motor.

Use of station: .
Stacks: .
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use: .

'.

1 to N.
1.

pinch roller friction.

Sensing and Recording Sx:stems

. 221 Recording system: .
.222 SenSing system:
'.223 Common system:

.325 Row use
Data:
Redundancy check: .
Timing: .
Control signals:

1 to N rows at 200, 556,
or (Models V and VI) 800
rows per inch; N limited
by available core storage.
7 tracks.

With 7907 Model 1 or
2, used for 1301 Disk
Storage and/or 1414
Synchronizer:

6.
1.

o (self-clocking).
O.
O.
7.

With 7907 Model 2, 3,
or 4, used for 7340
Hypertape:

Second 7604
Model No.

2
lor 3

1
2
3
4

lor 3

2
1

1
2
3
4

2
lor 3
1
1

2
1

1
2

2
lor 3

1

405:091.422

INPUT-OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
.52

§ 091.

.422 Off-line:

.43
.431

.432

. 44
.441

. 442
. 443
. 444
. 445

. 446

.5
. 51
.511

.512

Input-Output Operations

may be switched to another
channel, another computer, or an off-line auxiliary unit by means of the
optional 7830 Tape
Switching Feature and
7155 Switch Control Console.

· 521 Input:. . . . . . . . . . read one block forward into core storage locations
specified by record definition word(s); record
mark control is optional.
· 522 Output: . . . . . . . . . write one block forward
from core storage locations specified by record
definition word(s); record
Connection to Device
mark control is optional.
none.
· 523 Stepping:
Devices per controller: up to six 729 lIs, IVs, Vs,
1) one block backward
· 524 Skipping:
and VIs, in any combina(backspace).
tion, per tape channel (up
2) 4 inches forward (to skip
to 10 per channel with Adand erase defective tape
areas).
ditional Tape Attachment,
3) N segments forward or
7835,7836,7837,or7838)
Restrictions: . . . . . . 729 Vs and VIs at 800 chari
backward (N is specified
inch can be connected
in record definition
word; a segment is the
only to 7604 Model 3.
data between two segData Transfer Control
ment marks on the tape) .
· 525 Marking: . . . . . . . . inter-block gap, segment
Size of load: . . . . . . 1 to N words from (or into)
mark (SM), tape mark
different areas of core
(TM), and mode change
( ~).
storage, as specified by
none .
record definition words.
· 526 Searching: . . . .
Input-output area.s:
core storage .
Input-output area
automatic, between tape
· 53 Code Translation:
access: . . . . .
each word (each digit by
codes in Data Code Table
field definition) .
No.4 and internal numerInput- output area
ic or alphameric modes
lockout: . . .
( ~ on tape signifies mode
none .
Table control: ..
changes).
yes; scatter-read and
gather-write, controlled
.54 Format Control
by record definition
words .
program.
Synchronization: . . . . automatic.
Control:
Format alternatives:
undefined.
yes; scatter-read and
Rearrangement:
gather-write.
Suppress zeros:
yes; up to 5 per numeric
word .
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
no.
Insert point:
no .
Insert spaces:
Blocks
yes.
Recording density: .
yes.
Section sizes:
1 to N words, limited by
Size of block: •
available core storage
.55 Control Operations
(blocks less than 3' words
long are normally treated
disabled after unloading.
Disable:
as noise).
Request interrupt:
yes; priority signal.
Block demarcation
yes; normal, all alphamerSelect format:
Input: . . . . . . .
gap on tape or negative
ic, zero suppression, or
record definition word in
record mark control.
core storage.
no.
Select code:
Output: . . . . . . . . negative record definition
yes.
Rewind:
word.
yes.
Unload: .

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

IBM 7074

405:091.560
§091.
.56

Testable Conditions
Disabled: ..
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
End of segment: .

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions:.

. 62

Speeds

yes.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
yes; 14 feet from physical
end.
yes.

Model VI:.
· 622 Important parameters
Name
Density
Models II & IV: .
Models V & VI: .
Tape speed
Models II & V:
Models IV & VI:
Start time
Models II & V
read: . . . .
write: . . . .
Models IV & VI
read:
write: . . . .
Stop time
Models II & V
read: . . . .
write: . . . .
Models IV & VI
read: . . . . .
write: . . . .
Full reWind time
Models II & V:
Models IV & VI:
Inter-block gap:
· 623 Overhead
.
Models II & V: .
Models IV & VI:

15, OOON/(N + IS9) chari
sec.
41, 667N/(N + 525) chari
sec.

556 char/inch:
Models IV & VI
200 char/inch:

22, 500N/(N + 19S) chari
sec.
62, 500N/(N + 550) chari
sec.

556 char/inch:
Model V
. SOO char/inch:

60, OOON/(N + 756) chari
sec.

Model VI
SOO char/inch:

. . . none.

· 621 Nominal or peak speed
Model II:
Model IV: .
Model V: .

6/62

. 624 Effective speeds
Models II & V
200 char/inch:

90, OOON/(N + 792) chari
sec .
where N = char/block (See
graphs).

15,000 or 41, 667 char/sec.
22,500 or 62,500 char/sec.
15,000, 41,667 or 60,000
char/sec.
22,500, 62,500 or 90,000
char/sec.

.63

Demands on System
m. sec. per
block.

Component

Condition

Core Storage:

Models II & V
200 char/inch
556 char/inch
Models IV & VI
200 char/inch
556 char/inch
Model V
BOO char/inch
Model VI
BOO char/inch

Value
200 or 556 char/inch.
200, 556 or 800 char/inch.
75.0 inches/sec.
112.5 inches/sec.

12.6 m. sec/block.
S. Sm. sec/block.

1.2.
3.4.

0 + O. OOOBN
0 + O.OOOaN

1. B.
5. O.

() + O. OOOBN

4. B.

0 + O.OOOBN

7.2.

Note: These demands are based upon alphameric mode; they will
be half as high in numeric mode when there is no zero
elimination.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITmS

.71

Adjustments
Adjustment

1. 2 min.
0.9 min.
0.75 inch.

0 + O. OOOBN
0 + O. OOOBN

where N
char/block

6.7 m.sec.
5.0 m.sec.

2.1 m. sec.
3 ...8 m. sec.

Percentage of
transfer time

=

10.5 m. sec.
7.5 m. sec.

2.1 m.sec.
5.1 m. sec.

or

Method

Recording density:

switch

Densities option:

switch

Comment
selects 1 of 2 densities.
selects any pair of
densities (Models V
and VI only).

405:091.720

INPUT-OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
§ 091.

.72

.8

Other Controls
Function
Address selection:
Load rewind:
Unload:

File protection:
• 73

Form
dial
button
button

ring on
reel

FArror

Check or
Interlock

Action

Recording:

lateral & longitudinal
parity
read-after-write: lateral parity check
compare working &
stop addresses when
gap is reached
none.
all codes acceptable.
reflective spot or tape
mark
none.
interlock
signal suength· check
check
check
2-out-of-5 bit check

priority signal.

Comment
selects unit address
0-9.
lowers tape into reservoirs and rewinds
tape to load point.
removes tape from
reservoirs and
raises upper portion
of head assembly.
ring permits writing.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Reel: . . . . .

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

Capacity
2,400 feet; for 1, OOO-char
blocks, 5, 000, 000 chars
at 200-char/inch,
11,300, 000 chars at 556char/inch, or 14,400, 000
chars at 800 char/inch .

Reading:
Input block size:

Output block size:
Invalid Code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
TiIl).ing conflicts:
Recording level:
Word length:
Misplaced character:
Code Translation:

priority Signal.
priority signal.

priority Signal.

wait •
priority signal.
priority signal.
priority Signal.
priority signal.

Note: "Priority signal" indicates that digit position 1 of the final
status word is set to a particular condition code and conuol
is uansferred to a tape priority routioe which takes the
appropriate action.

. 732 Replenishment time:. . 1. a to 1. 5 mins.
tape unit needs to be
stopped .
. 734 Optimum reloading period
Models II & V: .
6 mins.
Models IV & VI: . . . 4 mins.

©

1962 by Au~rbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

IBM 7074

405:091.800

EFFECTIVE SPEED
IBM 729IV & 729 VI

10,000,000

-

.•

7

-

.. -

4

-

--.
'-

-

2

.
..

- - _.

1,000,000

-

...

..-

7

-

.- -

4

2

100,000
7
800 char/inch (Model VI only) ...
Effective Speed,
char/sec.

4
/'

~
';/

2

~/

10,000

'/
.......

V

,/

~

--

II

~

,... .. 1-

I--

~
~ 556 char/inch

2100

cL~/ inch

7

7.

4

2

1,000

V

?

~

7

4

2

100
2

10

4

7

2

4

100

Characters Per Block

6/62

7

2

1,000

4

7

10,000

405:091.801

INPUT-OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

EFFECTIVE SPEED
IBM "(2911 & 729 V

10,000,00 0

-

- - _-...

-

7

-

-

-.

- -

4

--

-

--

2

1,000,00 a

-

---

..

7

4

-

2

Effective Speed,
char/sec_

100,00 a

-

7

--

4

v
v

~~
/-V"

10,000

V-

I

..

J.--

200

cha~/!nch

.,.-

w

7

-

-156 c,har(inch

800 char/inch (Model V only)::::::::;....
1/
1-1-- 1----- f----=

2

~

i---r--

./

V
4

Vv

2

/

1,000

/~
[?7
- --

7
4

2

100

4

2
10

7

2

4

100

7

2

1,000

4

7

10,000

Characters Per Block

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

405:092.100
IBM 7074
Input-Output

7340 MT
INPUT-OUTPUT: HYPERTAPE DRIVE

§

092.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Description

A major' feature of the Hypertape Drive is its cartridge loading technique. Supply and take-up reels
holding 1,800 feet of tape are enclosed in a sealed
cartridge that measures about 17 by 10 by 2 inches
and weighs about eight pounds. The operator loads
a reel of tape by simply raising the top cover, sliding the cartridge into place, lowering the cover, and
depressing the load-unload button. Then the tape
reels move backward to engage the hubs, the tape is
lowered into the vacuum columns, and the read-record head moves into position. Unloading is accomplished by reversing the procedure. It is not necessary to rewind the tape before unloading. The file
protection device on each. cartridge can be turned on
manually or by program control; resetting must be
done manually when the cartridge is not loaded on
the drive.

Hypertape Drive.
7340 Model 1.
MT.

Announced in October, 1961, Hypertape is the most
advanced magnetic tape equipment in the IBM line.
It is currently available only with the IBM 7074,
7080, 7090, and 7094 data processing systems. One
Hypertape Control can be connected to a 7074
through a 7907 Data Channel. The Hypertape Control has two independent tape channels, and a maximum of ten Hypertape Drives can be connected to
each channel. When Hypertape is used, the maximum number of 729 tape channels is reduced from
four to two.

Two Hypertape operations, one on each channel, can
in general be performed simultaneously. The only
exceptions are read-read and· write-write, which
cannot occur simultaneously because the two channels share the same read and write circuitry. Every Hypertape operation is initiated by a "channel
select" instruction, which sends the core storage
address of the initial channel command word to the
specified Data Channel. Internal processing then
continues while the Data Channel independently controls the tape operation. Scatter-read, gatherwrite, record-mark control, and priority signaling,
as described for the 729 Magnetic Tape Unit in section 405:091. 120, are also available with Hypertape.

Recording density is 1,511 rows per inch and tape
speed is 112.5 inches per second. The peak transfer .rate is 170, 000 characters per second. In the
optional packed format, two decimal digits are recorded in each tape row, and transfer rates of up to
340, 000 digits per second are possible. Unlike
other IBM tape equipment, the Hypertape Drive can
read backward as well as forward. Average access
time to the next sequential tape block is 4. 2 milliseconds, compared to 7.3 milliseconds for the
729 IV and VI.

Optional Feature
Ten tracks are recorded on one-inch-wide tape;
there is no format compatibility with other IBM tape
units. Two tracks are used for double-odd parity
checking, and bit detection is based on signal phase
rather than signal strength. The manufacturer
states that these factors make possible detection of
all errors and automatic correction of all single-bit
and most double - bit errors.
In the unpacked format, six tracks are used for data
and two are unused. Data is recorded in the form of
one BCD character per row. Since a 7074 word may
consist of either ten numeric digits plus sign or five
alphameric characters, a mode change character, 1'1,
is automatically recorded on tape whenever the mode
changes from alphameric to numei'ic or vice versa.
When the tape is read, the mode change characters
insure that each word will be translated back into
the proper internal form.
In the packed format, the eight data bits in one tape
row can hold either two decimal digits or one alphameric character. Therefore, five tape rows fill one
7074 word regardless of the internal mode, and the
mode change character is unnecessary. Another
special character, (j, is automatically recorded before and after the five tape rows representing each
negative numeric word.

©

Automatic Cartridge Loader: Reduces lost time
during tape changes by automatically unloading one
Hypertape cartridge and loading another under manual or program control. Maximum time for a complete unload and load cycle is 30 seconds. The
loader is mounted on top of the Hypertape Drive.
. 13

Availabili~:

18 to 20 months .

.14

First Delivery:

1963.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head:

.212 Reservoirs
Number:
Form:
Capacity: .
.213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive: .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

non-coated surface of tape
is held against single capstan by vacuum action of
reservoirs.

2.
vacuum columns.
about 4 feet.
motor .
motor.

6/62

405:092.220
§

IBM 7074

092.

.22

Format Compatibility: . only with Hypertape Drives
on other IBM 7074, 71)80,
7090, and 7094 systems,
using unpacked alphameric format.

.35

Physical Dimensions

Sensing and Recording Systems

. 221 Recording system: .
. 222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system:

.23

Multiple Copies: . . .

. 24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks: .
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use:
Use of station:
Distance: .
Stacks:.
..
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

. 31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium: ..
.312 Phenomenon:
. 32

.34

magnetic head .
magnetic head .
two-gap head provides
read-after-write checking.

. 322 Parallel by:
.323 Bands:
. 324 Track use
Data: .
Redundancy check:
Timing:.
. .
Control signals:
Unused: .
Total: .
.325 Row use
Data:
Redundancy check:
Timing: .
Control signals:

1. 0 inch .
1, 800 feet per cartridge .

none .

recording.
1.

10.
1 row at a time.
sensing.
?
1.

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: . . . .

10.
1 row at a time.

Hypertape Control.
7640 Model 1.
Data Channel.
7907 Model 2, 3, or 4 .

plastiC -tape with magnetizable surface •.
magnetization.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:

. 351 Overall width:
. 352 Length:. . . .

(Both units are required. )
.42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:

..

1 to N rows at 1, 511 rows
per inch; N is limited by
available core storage.
10 tracks .
1.

8 or 6.
2.

o (self-clocking).
O.
o or 2.

.422 Off-line:
.43

....

one 7640 (containing .two
tape channels) connected
to one 7907 Model 2, 3,
or 4; Models 3 or 4 permit connection of 1 or 2
7631 File Controls for
1301 Disk Storage Units.
When Hypertape is used,
maximum number of 729
tape channels' is two.
none.

Connection to Device

10.
20; up to 10 drives on each
of the 2 tape channels.
. . . none.

.431 Devices per controller:
I to N.

O.
O.

o (record marks are op-

.432 Restrictions:..
.44

Data Transfer Control

tional).
Unused:.
. .
Inter-block gap:
.33

Coding
Unpacked format:

Packed format: . .

6/62

O.
0.45 inch (nominal).

one character per row, as
in Data Code Table No.4;
only 6 tracks are used for
data.
one alphameric character
or two decimal digits per
row.

.441 Size of load: ....
.442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access: . . .
. 444 Input- output area
lockout: . . .
.445 Table control: . .

.446 Synchronization: .

1 to Nwords.
core storage .
each word (each digit by
field definition) .
none.
yes; scatter-read and
gather-write. with separate channel command
for each sub-block.
automatic.

INPUT·OUTPUT: HYPERTAPE DRIVE
§

405:092.500

092.

.56

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

. 511 Size of block:
.512 'Block demarcation
Input: .
Output:
.52

Code Translation:

.54

Format Control
Control: . . . .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: . .
Insert spaces: .
Recording density: .
Section sizes: . . . .'

· 55

automatic.

program.
undefined.
yes; scatter-read and
gather-write.
no.
no.
no.
no.
yes.

Operator attention
required: . . . . .
Correction occurred:
.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions

yes.
yes.

I:

alphameric data in packed
or unpacked format.
numeric data in unpacked
format.
numeric data in packed
format.

II:
Ill:

.62

Speeds

.621 Nominal or peak speed
I:
II: .
Ill:

170,000 char/sec.
170, 000 digits/ sec.
340,000 digits/sec.

.622 Important parameters
Recording density:
1,511 rows/inch.
Tape speed: . . .
112.5 inches/sec.
Start time: . . . .
3.0 m. sec. maximum.
Stop time: . . . .
3.0 m. sec. maximum.
Full rewind time:
1. 5 minutes.
Rewind speed: '.'
250 inches/sec.
Inter-block gap:.
0.45 inch.
.623 Overhead (average):.
4.2 m. sec/block.
.624 Effective speeds (in tape-limited applications)
I: .
170, OOOC/(C + 715) char/
sec.
II: .
170, OOOD/(D + 715) digits/
sec.
Ill:
340, OOOD/(D + 1,430)
digits/sec., where C and
D = number of characters
and digits per block (See
graph).
.63

Demands on System
Component

Condition

m. sec per block, or Percentage of
transfer time

o + 0.0008C

Core Storage:

n
III

Control Operations
Disable: . '. . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code: .
Rewind: . . .
Unload: . . ','
Enter file-protect
status: . . . . .

yes.
yes.
yes.
yes; 40 feet from end-oftape mark .
yes.
yes; 25 feet from physical
end.

Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:

gap on tape or channel read
command with minus sign.
channel write command
with minus sign.

· 521 Input:. . . . . . . . . . read one block forward or
backward into core storage area(s)' specified by
one or more channel read
commands; record mark
control is optional for forward reading only.
.522 Output: . . . . . . . . . write one block forward
from core storage area( s)
specified by one or more
channel write commands;
record mark control is
optional.
· 523 Stepping:.
none.
skip one block forward
· 524 Skipping: .
(space) or ba9kward
(backspace); skip forward
or backward to tape mark
or end-of-tape marker; or
skip forward and erase 8
inches (to skip defective
tape areas).
· 525 Marking: , . . . . . . . inter--block gap; tape mark;
mode change, !!.. (unpacked format only); neg'
ative word identifier (J
(packed format only).
none.
· 526 Searching: . . . .
· 53

Disabled: .
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:

1 to N words; limited by
available core storage.

Input-Output Operations

Testable Conditions

o + 0, 0004D
o + O. 0004D

where C and D are equal to the number of characters and digits per
block,

disabled after unloading.
yes; priority signal.
yes; p'acked or unpacked.
no.
yes.
yes.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

yes.

.71

Adjustments:...... none.

©

13.6.
6,8,
13, 6,

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

405:092.720

IBM 7074

0092.
. 72

.8·
Other Controls
Function
Address
selection:

Form
dial

Load-unload: button
Rewind:
. 73

Comment
selects unit address 0
through 9.
lowers tape into reservoirs and moves head
into position.

button.

C~CKS

Capacity
1,800 feet; for I, ODD-row
blocks, 19, ODD, 000 characters in unpacked format.
.732 Replenishment time: .. 0.3 to 0.5 mins.
tape. drive needs to be
stopped .
. 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .
3.1 mins.

AND ACTION

Error

Check or
Interlock

Recording:

read-after-write dual- indicattlr.
row parity
indicator; correct
dual-row parity
error if possible.
none.
none.

Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid operation
code:
Exhausted medium:

Loading and Unloading

. 731 Volumes handled
Storage
Cartridge:

6/62

ERRORS,

Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Excessive skew:
Circuit failure:

check
reflective spot or
tape mark
none •
overrun check
check
check

Action

indicator.
indicator•

indicator.
indicator.
indicator.

Note: These error indications and other status information are
transmitted from the Hypertape Control to core storage (in
the form of three IO-digit words) in response to a "sense
channel" command.

INPUT-OUTPUT: HYPERT APE DRIVE

405:092.800

Effective Speed
Hypertope Drive

10,000,000
7

4

2

1,000,000
7

4

2

Effective Speed:
Characters Per
Second

~

100,000
7

~ i-"'"

L;

./

/

4

V

z

/

!;o!;o

..,~

10,000
7

~

/
.I

4

2

"

V

/

1,000
7

4

2

100
10

4

7

2

100

7

4

2 1,000

7

4

2 10 ,000

Characters Per Block

©

1962 by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

405:111.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7074

REPORTS

Simultaneous Operations

SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS

§

111.

·1

SPECIAL UNITS:. . . . none.

· 12

Description

C:
D:

E:
F:

A major feature of the 7074 is the flexibility and simultaneity of its input-output operations. Up to four
magnetic tape channels can be attached, and a read
or write operation on each channel can occur simultaneously with internal processing. Magnetic tape
and disc storage have direct access to core storage
through their respective controllers. Execution of
the stored program is delayed for one 4-microsecond cycle each time a word is transferred between
core storage and the tape or disc storage controller.
In systems using unit record input-output, up to
three 7500 Card Readers and three output devices
(printers and/or card punches) can operate simultaneously. They are buffered by means of a magnetic drum revolving at 12,375 revolutions per minute in the 7600 Model 1 Input/Output Control. The
stored program is delayed from one to six milliseconds each time a load of data (one card or one line)
is transferred between a unit record buffer and core
storage.
Console Card Reader and Console Typewriter operations are unbuffered and cannot occur simultaneously
with other operations.
Effective utilization of the 7074 's capabilities for simultaneous operations is facilitated by the "Priority
Processing" feature, which can interrupt the stored
program and transfer control to priority routines
upon completion of selected input-output or auxiliary
storage operations.
.2

CONFIGURATION
CONDITIONS: . . . . none.

·3

CLASSES OF OPERATIONS
Class

A:
B:

G:

H:
I:

J:
K:
M:
N:
0:

P:
.4

'"

punch card.
print or advance forms on
7400 Printer.
read or write on 729 Magnetic Tape Unit.
rewind 729 Magnetic Tape
Unit.
read or write in disc
storage.
seek record in disc storage.
input or output on Console
Typewriter.
input or output on Inquiry
Station.
read on Hypertape Drive
write on Hypertape Drive.
rewind Hypertape Drive.
input or output on devices
attached to 1414 Input/
Output Synchrc:mizer.
internal processing.

RULES
a + i + P = at most 1.
= at most 3.
b
= at most 3.
c+d
= at most T.
e
e+f
= at most lOT.
g
= at most 2.
g+h
= at most 10 (for 1301 Disk Storage).
g+ h
= at most 12 (for 7300 Disk Storage).
e+ g
= at most 4.
j
= at most 2.
= at most 1.
k
m
= at most 1.
k+m+n = at most 20.
o
= at most 12 (6 per 1414 Synchronizer).
where T = number of 729 magnetic tape channels (T
is at most 4; when Hypertape is used, T is at most
2).

Member
read card on Console Card
Reader.
read card on 7500 Card
Reader.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

III
_

405:201.011

srlliOAAll

EDP
"",RIS

IBM 7074
System Performance

IBM 7074

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporalion and BNA Incorporaled

11/62

405:201.012

IBM 7074
IBM 7074 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
Configurotion

Worksbeet

1

InputOutpllt
Times

Item

Chu/b1ock

Central
Processor

VIII B

(File 1)

1,080

1,080

1,080

(File 1)

10

10

10

K

m. sec/block

File 1 = ,File 2

38.5

26.1

10.6

File 3

120

10.1

9.7

File 4

400

10.7

10.1

File 1 = 'File 2

0

0

0

File 3

0

0

0

File 4

0

0

0

1.2

1.2

1.2

File 3

6

0.1

0.1

File 4

6

0.1

0.1

m. Bec/Bwitch

File 1 = ,File 2

4:200.112

m. sec/block

al

0.18

0.18

0.18

m. aec/record

a2

0.38

0.38

0.38

m. sec/detal1

b6

0.44

0.44

-0.44

m. sec/work

b5

+ b9

0.66

0.66

0.66

m. sec/report

b7

+ b8

2.51

2.51

2.51

m ..

a1

0.2

0.2

0.2

a2K

3.8

3.8

3.8

a3K

35.8

35.8

35.8

File 1 Mas ter In

1.2

1.2

1.2

File 2 Master Out

1.2

1.2

File 3 Details

60.0

1.0

File 4 Reports

60.0

4000

1.0

107.0

1.0

101.0

162.2

4000

44.2

133.1

44.2

101.0

Times

3

VII B

Records/block

m. Bec penalty

2

Reference
III

S8C

for C. P.
and
dominant
column.
Stondard
Problem A

4:200.1132

4:200.114
26.1

1.2

F='1.0

Total

4

Unit of measure

(words)
1,500

1,500

1,500

Fixed

247

247

247

3 (Blocks 1 to 23)

102

102

102

6 (Blocks 24 to 48)

792

792

792

Files

864

880

880

32

32

32

3,537

3,553

3,553

Std. routines

Standard

1.0

4:200.1151

Problem A
Space

Working
Total

11/62

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

405:201.013
IBM 7074 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE-Contd.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2

Configuration
Worksheet

Item

Reference
III

5

Fixed/Floating point

VII B

VIII B

Floating·

Floating·

input

729 IV

729 VI

output

729 IV

729 VI

80 char (unblocked)

80 char (unblocked)

lOO char (unblocll;ed)

100 char (unblocked)

T1

10.1

9.7

autput T2

10.4

9.9

T3

0.1

0.1

output T4

0.1

0.1

m. sec/record

T5

0.5

0.5

m. sec/5 loops

T6

3.6

3.6

m. sec/report

T7

1.1

1.1

729.IV

729 VI

30 char

30 char

1

1

Unit name

input
Size of record
output
Standard

~athematical
Problem

input
m. sec/black

4:200.413

A

input
m. sec penalty

7

Unit name
. Size of block

Standard
Stattstlc:al
Problem

Records/block

B

m. sec/block

T1

9.B

9.5

m. sec penalty

T3

0.1

0.1

m. sec/block

T5

--

--

m. sec/record

T6

0.56

0.56

m. sec/tsb1e

T7

0.10

0.10

4:200.512

A

C.P.

• Using optional Floating Decimal Arithmetic feature.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

11/62

405 :20 1.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7074
System Performance

"PORTS

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

§

201.

· 112 Computation: •
.113 Timing basis:

.1

GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING

• 11

Standard File Problem A Estimates

. 111 Record sizes
Master file:.
Detail file: .
Report file: .

· 114 Graph: . • • • . . .
· 115 Storage space required
Configuration III: .
Configuration VII B.
Configuration VIIIB:

108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

standard.
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.113.
see graph below.
3, 500 words .
3,500 words.
3,500 words.

1,000.0
7

4

2

100.0
7

4

~

2

Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File
Records

~

~

----

/

10.0
II

7

J
4

2

I

/

I

If

1.0
7

4

",.,.

io'

./'

-

/'

2

VI~
~

---

~

~

.4'

;"I'"

7

0.1
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

405:201.120
§

IBM 7074
standard .
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.12.
• 124 Graph:. . . • . . . . see graph below.

201.

.12

• 122 Computation:.
.123 Timing basis:

Standard File Problem B Estimates

.121 Record sizes
Master file:.
Detail file: .
Report file: .

54 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

1,QOO.0
7

4

2

100.0
7

4
~

2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File
Records

..!!!--

-

/

10.0

,,

7
4

2

~

~

IL

I

I

I

~=.

-

1.0

., .-

7
4

2

0.1

,

/

I
-

0.0

IL

~

~

.-

VIII-B

./

/

./

'f'

0.1

0.33

Activity. Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

7/62

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

405:201.130

201.

.13

standard .
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.13.
see graph below .

. 132 Computation:.
.133 Timing basis:.

Standard File Problem C Estimates

.131 Record sizes
Master file: .
Detail file:
Report file .

. 134 Graph:
216 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

1,000.0

7
4

2

100.0

7

4

2

Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File
Records

V

/

10.0

~

~

----

7

4

/

/

"

2

1.0

7

-

VII-B

-

~

~

V~

-

.., .- ---

""

4

2

0.1
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

405:201.140
§

IBM 7074

201.

.14

.142 Computation:.
. 143 Timing basis:

trebled.
using estimating procedure .
outlined in User's Guide,
4 :200.14 .
see graph below.

Standard File Problem D Estimates

.141 Record sizes
Master file:.
Detail file: .
Report file: •

. 144 Graph:

108 characters.

1 card.
1 line.

1,000.0

7

4

2

100.0

7

4
~

2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File
Records

~

~

~

---

/'

10.0
7

II

,
I

4

2

I

I

~

1.0

7
~

4

2

::::------- -

VIl-B

"
10""'-"

---

~

..,

.-

/'

--

/'

/'

0.1
0.0

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

...-_ _---.,.-A

7/62

I AUERBACHl!!]

1.0

405:201.200

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

.212 Key size:
.213 Timing basis:

201.

.2

SORTING

. 21

Standard Problem Estimates

.211 Record size: . . • . .

8 characters.
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.213 .
see graph below .

. 214 Graph: . . . .

80 characters.

1,000

7

4

2

100

7

4

/

V

/

2

Y

10

Time in Minutes to
Put Records Into 7
Required Order

4

~

2

~

1/

7

V

V

/

1

./

1I

"

4

V
2

/

1I i1
~

V

/
~"Q

"

~O/

/

I~~
~

V

/

/

Il'

I.l'
.J

V

/

/

V

-/

7

II

V

/

/

~~

;~

"
VII

~~

~

V

.J

1/

V

V

1/

0.1
100

4

2

7 1,000

2

4

710,000

2

4

7100,000

Number of Records

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporotion and BNA Incorporated

7/62

IBM 7074

405:201.220
§

201.

.22

ruM 7070/7074 SORT 90 TIMES

.222 Key size: • •
.223 Timing basis:

mM Publication C28- 6111,

. 224 Graph:

pp. 76-84 •
see graph below •

8 characters.

. 221, Record size: • • • • • 80 characters.
1,000
7

4

2

100

7

I

/

V

4

/
2

/
/

Time in Minutes to
Put Records Into
Required Order

10

/'

/
I'
~ I
II

f

/

-$'

4

/

/

I

V

V/'
2

/

1

II

,

I

V

/ /
'//
'/

V

1/

/

1/ V

V

4

~

V

1/
1/

7

/V

/

2

;/

0.1
100

2

4

7 1,000

~

2

4

710,000

Number of Records
NOTE: Times for Configuration VlII-B are based on use of the 729 VI magnetic
tape units; see next page for Hypertape sort times.

7/62

1/ J

1/

7

2

4

7 100 ,000

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

405:201.2201

201.

.22

.223 Timing basis:

IBM Publication J28-6154,
pp. 10-32: IBM 7074
Generalized Sorting
Program Using Hypertape Drives. (Routine
will be available in
fourth quarter of 1963.)
see graph below.

HYPERTAPE SORT TIMES

.221 Record size:

80 characters.

.222 Key size: . .

8 characters.

.224 Graph:

1,000

7

4

2

100

7

4

2

Time in Minutes to
Put Records Into 10
Required Order
7

II

4
~

I'

~/

2

~

/

4'"

1
L

/

7

/
~

1/

4

LV

2

/

0.1
100

4

2

1,000

2

/

/

4

V

7 10,000

2

4

7 100,000

Number of Records

©

J 962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7/62

IBM 7074

405:201.300
§

201.

.312 Timing basis:

.3

MATRIX INVERSION

.31

Standard Problem Estimates

.311 Basic parameters:

• • general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8
decimal digits.

. . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.312; with Floating
Decimal Arithmetic
option.
. 313 Graph: . . . . . . . see graph below.
.314 Maximum matrix sizes
5,000 core storage locations:
67.
10,000 core storage locations:
97.
20,000 core storage locations:
139.
171.
30,000 core storage locations:

100.00

7

4

2

I

10.00
I

I

7

I

4

I

I

/

'I
2

~
Time in Minutes
for Complete 1.00
Inversion

I

7

I

I

4

I[

/

2

/

0.10

7

J

I

4

I

I

~
2

/

0.01
2

7/62

4

7

2
10
Size of Matrix

4

7

100

2

4

7 1,000

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

405:201.400

201.

.412 Computation:

.4

GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING

.41

Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates

.411 Record sizes: • . . . • 10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max. size
8 digits.

. 5 fifth-order polynomials.
5 divisions •
1 square root .
.413 Timing basis: . • . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.413; with optional
Floating Decimal
Arithmetic.
. 414 Graph:
see graph below .

10,000
Configurations VII B a~d VIII B; Single Length (8 digit pre~ision); Floating Point.
R=Number of Output Records per Input Record

7

4

2

1,000

7

4

[.III
2

Time in Milliseconds per
Input Record

V

100

V

/

7

/

L

4

/

~

<::Jr::;;~

'\.y

<::J'~

2

~Y

/
10
7

4

2

1

0.1

4

2
4
7
1.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record

2

©

7

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10.0

2

4

7 100.0

7/62

IBM 7074

405:201.500
§

201.

.512 Computation:.

.5

GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING

.51

Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates

.5!1 Record size:

thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.

augmentT elements in
cross-tabulation tilbles •
using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.513.
see graph below .

.513 Timing basis:
• 514 Graph:

10,000
7

4

2

1,000
7

4

2

Time in Milliseconds per
Record

100

7

~

~

4

2

VII-B, VIII-B

10

V

V

1/

1/

7

4

2

1

1

7/62

2

2
4
7
7
10
T, Number of Augmented Elements
Roman numerals denote Standard Configurations

100

2

4

7 1,000

II ~M~
II "PO~S

405:211.101

EDP

IBM 7074
Physical Characteristics

IBM 7074
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

405:211.102

IBM 7074

IBM 7074 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Unit Name

Processor

Magnetic
Tape

Disc
Storage

Disc
Storage

Console

CE
Console

Disc
Storage

Remote
Compressor

7104

729

1301
Modell

1301
Model 2

7150

Part of
7150

7300

Part of
7300 DSU

69 X30 X6S

69 x29 X34

69XS6X33

69 XS6 X33

40 X66 X33

23X45x21

71X62X30

29 x40X33

2,500

1,200

3,625

3,S25

400

300

2,300

700

35 (7150)

100 (7604)

100 (7631)

100 (7631)

35 (7104)

See 7150

High-Speed

IDENTITY
Model Number

Height X Width XDepth, in.

Weight, Ibs.
PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths to
Designated Units, feet

45 (7605)

72 (7605)

90 (7602)

35 (7600)

160 total

160 total

See note.

40 (7602)

(Compressor)

(7300s)

50-110

50- 110

50-110

50-·110

50-110

50 - 110

50-110

50-110

O-SO

O-SO

0-80

O-SO

O-SO

O-SO

O-SO

O-·SO

Temperature, OF.

65 -90

65 -90

65-90

65-·90

65-90

65-90

65-90

65 -90

Humidity, '7.

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

20-80

12,000

3,900

16,700

20,000

800

Included
in 7150

9,100

10,800

800

550

1,800

1,800

---

---

300

300

Nominal

208 or 230

20S or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

Tolerance

+10'7., -8'7. +10'7., -

+10'7., -

+10'7., -S'7. +10'7., -S'7. +10'7., -S% +10'7., -

Temperature, of.
Storage
Ranges
Humidity, %

ATMOSPHERE

Working
Ranges

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Air Flow, cfm.

Internal Filters

Voltage

Nominal
ELECTRICAL

6/62

+ 10'7., -

S'7.

8'7.

8'7.

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

7.5

9.0

0.02

Included
in 7150

3.7

4.0

Cycles
Tolerance

NOTES

S'7.

Phaaes and Lines

3~, 4-wire 3cp,~-wire

Load KVA

Included
in 7802

1.6

Cable
lengths are
totals for
all 729s on
a channel.

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

405:211.103

IBM 7074 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS-Contd.

Unit Name

Core
Storage

Hypertope
Drive

Printer

7301

7340

7400

Card
Reader

Console
Card
Reader

Card
Punch

7501

7550

I/O
Control

Core
Storage
Control

I/O Synchronizer

Tape
Control

Disc
Control

File
Control

Hypertape
Control

Power
Converter

Inquiry
Station

Data
Channel

Dato
Transmis.
sion Unit

Paper
Tape
Reader

Remote
Inquiry
Unit

1009

1011

1014

IDENTITY
Model Number

Height XWidth XDepth, in.

Weight, lbs.

7500

7600

7602

69X30X68 48 X29x60 49X60X31 43 X 29 X 35 39 X33 x29 43 X29x35 69X30x68 69 X30 X 68

1,500

1,350

1,900

1,000

200

1,000

130 (7640)

40 (7603)

40 (7603)

35 (7600)

40 (7603)

2,100

1,100

7603

7604

7605

7631

69 X30 X 68 69 X30 X68 69x30 X68 70 X38 x32

2,300

2,100

1,200

500

7640

7802

7900

70x74X31 69 X30 X 68 29 X48 X30

7907

t.iput/
Output
Synchro-

nizer
1414
Mode16

69X20 x68 40X29x31 60X32X36 35 X29 X24 70X74X32

1,000

1,700

400

1,500

500

529

175

1,100

55 (7907)

75 (7602)

50 (7600)

55 (7640)

60 (1414)

90 (1414)

55 (7631)

15 (power)

14 (power)

8 miles
(1414)

55 (7907)

50 (other
7900s)

PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths to

SS (7907)

Designated Units, feet

See 7150,

44 (7150)

7501,7900. 75 (7602)

See note.

See 7400,

See 729.

45 (7300)

55 (7907)

72 (Compr)

7500,7550.

130 (7340s;
total per
channel)

14 (power)

50-110

50- 110

50-110

50- 110

50-·110

50- 110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50- 110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50 - 110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

50-110

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-80

0-·80

65-90

50-90

65-90

65-90

65 - 90

65 -90

65-90

65-90

65 -90

65-90

65-90

65 -·90

50-90

65-90

65-90

65-90

65-90

65-90

65-90

65-90

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20- 80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

6,600

12,000

4,800

4,400

800

4,800

3,600

600

4,600

4,600

1,800

4,800

3,400

19,500

500

7,800

1,000

4,100

1,000

4,450

400

700

---

---

560

220

800

400

320

400

450

800

---

400

120

150

---

1,000

Nominal

208 or 230

208

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208 or 230

208

208 or 230

208 or 230

ll5

208 Or 230

115

208,pr 230

Tolerance

+10~., -8~. +10~.,

+10~., -8~.

+10~.,-8~.

+10~., -8~.

+10%,

+10~., -8~.

+10~., -8~.

+10~., -8~.

+lO~., -8~.

±10~.

±10~.

±10~.

±10~.

Temperature, OF.

Storage
Ranges
Humidity,

~.

Temperature, OF.

Working
ATMOS-

Ranges
Humidity,

PHERE

~.

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Air Flow, cfm.

---

Internal Filters

208 or 230 208 or 230

208 or 230 208 or 230 208 Or 230 208 or 230

+10~., -8~. +10~., -8~.

+10~.,-8~. +10~., -8~. +10~.,-8~.

115

Voltage

Nominal
ELECTRICAL

-8~.

+

10~., -8~.

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

lcp,3-wire

3cp,4-wire

lcp,3-wire

lcp,3-wire

0.2

2.25

0.3

1.8

Cycles
Tolerance

Phases and Lines

Load KVA

NOTES

-8%

3cp,4-wire

1.4

3cp,4-wire 3cp,4-wire

4.0

1.7

3cp,4-wire 3cp,4-wire 3cp,4-wire 3cp,4-wire 3cp,4-wire

1.5

0.3

1.5

0.9

0.1

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

0.9

0.3

3cp,4-wire 3cp,4-wire

0.3

Cable
length is
total for
all 7340s
on a chan..
nel.

2.5

3cp,4-wire 3cp,4-wire

0.1

17.8

lcp,3-wire 3¢,4.-wire

0.35

1.30

Cable
lengths to
2,500 feet
by special
arrangement.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6/62

•

405:221.101

"','"'''

_EDP

IIJ'

IBM 7074

RlPORIS

Price List

PRICE DATA
§

221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT

PRICES

CLASS
No.
-

Name
-

Monthly
Rental

Monthly
Maintenance
$

Purchase
--r-

-r
Central
Processor
---

Storage

7104
model 1
model 2
model 3
model 4
modelS

High-Speed Processor
Card-only system
One tape channel
Two tape channels
Three tape channels
Four tape channels

7,300
7,400
7,500
7, 700
7,800

215.00
217.00
220.00
225.00
227.00

313,000.
317,000.
321,000.
329,000.
333,000.

4420
4760

Optional Features
Floating Decimal Arithmetic
Interval Timer

1,000
70

23.00
1. 75

45,000.
3,375.

7301
model 3
& 31
model 4
model 41,
42, & 43

Core Storage
5,000 words

4,700

48.75

225,000.

8,000
8,000

55.00
55.00

373,000.
373,000.

1301
model 1
model 2

Disk Storage
55, 600, 000 BCD characters
111,200, 000 BCD characters

2,100
3,.500

138.00
238.00

115,500.
185,500.

25

1. 00

1,250.

975
1,500

194. 00
306.00

62,200.
74,800.

700
900
750
950

116.00
128.00
122.00
134.00

36,000.
41,250.
37,200.
42,450.

100

0.50

4,500.

85

6.50

4,400.

350

1. 50

14, 000.

1,300

130.00

78, 000.

9,900 words
10,000 words

Optional Feature
Cylinder Mode

Input ."
Output

7300
model 1
model 2

Disk Storage
6, 000, 000 digits
12, 000, 000 digits

72911
729 IV
729 V
729 VI

Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic

7835,
7836,
7837, or
7838
7830
5980

Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape

Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit

Optional Features
Additional 729 Attachment (on 7602; required
when more than 6 729s are used on a
channel)
Tape Switching Feature
(on 729 II/IV/V/VI)
Read Binary Tape (channell only)

7340

Hypertape Drive

1284

Optional Feature
Automatic Cartridge Loader

125

16.00

7400

Printer

950

40. SO

37, 000.

7500

Card Reader

400

44.75

13, 100.

®

1962 by Auerbach ,Carparation and BNA Incorporated

7,

SO~.

6/62

IBM 7074

405: 221.1 02

PRICE DAT A-Contd.
§

221.
PRICES

IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS

-No.
Input Output
(Cont'd)

Controllers

Monthli':
Rental
~

Monthli':
Maintenance

Purchase

!Ii

!Ii

7550

Card Punch

550

36.75

19,500.

7501

Console Card Reader
(Price includes #2265 Console Card
Reader Attachment on 7600. )

100

6.25

4,300.

7900

Inquiry Station

250

26.75

10,300.

7150

Console Control Unit

300

15.50

13,050.

1414

Input/Output Synchronizer (Model 6)

850

12.00

43,350.

1009

Data Transmission Unit (requires 3238)

500

11. 50

26,400.

1011

Paper Tape Reader (requires 5514)

500

42.50

22,400.

1014

Remote Inquiry Unit (requires 6136)

200

12.50

11,000.

7864

Telegraph Input/Output

500

11. 00

30,500.

7871

Telegraph Input (requires 7864)

110

3.25

6,750.

7875

Telegraph Output (requires 7864)

125

3.25

7,750.

3238

Data Transmission Unit Adapter

200

3.50

11,000.

5514

Paper Tape Reader Adapter

100

1. 50

3,750.

6136

Remote Inquiry Unit Adapter

200

5.75

11,500.

7602,
model 6

Core Storage Control

1,200

25.00

49,400.

400
50
50
25

8.25
1. 00
4.00
2.00

16,350.
2,100.
1,800.
900.

835
1,035
1,035

30.00
35.00
35.00

42, O~~.
52,000.
52,000.

3,900

36.75

141,800.

300

0

14,250.

1,400
800

41. 00
19.75

63, ODD.
33, DOD.

400
350

6.50
5.00

18, 250.
15,250.

1017
1018
1019
1020

6/62

Name
-

Additional Core Storage Attachments
(required with more than 10,000 words)
On High-Speed Processor
On Input/Output Synchronizer
On 7604 Tape Control, model 1
On 7604 Tape Control, model 2

7631
model 2
model 3
model 4

File Control (for 1301 DSU)
for this system only
for this system and a 1410
for this system and another 7000 series
system (except 7072)

7605

Disk Storage Control
(for 7300 DSU)

3315

Disk 'Storage Attachment
(on High-Speed Processor)

7600
model 1
model 2

Input/Output Control
for any card system
for tape/diSC systems

4671
4672

Inquiry Control - Synchronizer #1
inquiry Control - Synchronizer #2
(on 7600)

./

PRICE LIST

405:221.1 03
PRICE OAT A-Contd.

§

221.

PRICES

IDENTITY
CLASS
No.

Name
-

-

Monthl)::
Rental

--rControllers
(Contld)

Purchase

$

!Ii

7603
model 1
model 2
model 3
model 4
modelS
model 6
model 7
model 8
model 9

InEut/Out(~ut

S:inchronizer (unit record)
one input and one output
two inputs and one output
one input and two outputs
two inputs and two outputs
two inputs and three outputs
one input and three outputs
three inputs and one output
three inputs and two outputs
three inputs and three outputs

1,000
1,300
1,350
1,650
2,000
1,700
1,600
1,950
2,300

22. 75
30.50
31. 25
39.00
47.50
39.75
38.25
46.75
55.25

35,900.
46,000.
48,300.
59,300.
72,700.
61,600.
57,100.
70,400.
83,700.

7907

Data Channel (for 1301 DSU, 1414 I-OS,
and7 or Hyperta [Ie }
one channel
two channels
three channels
four channels

2,000
3,000
4,500
5,500

61. 00
98.00
135.00
172.00

80,000.
120,000.
192,000.
234,000.

200

11.00

8,000.

25

1. 25

650.

2, 700
1,850
3,300

86.75
48.00
88.75

125,500.
96,300.
155,300.

35
55
80
100

5.50
11. 00
16.50
22.00

1,775.
2,675.
3,875.
4,775.

3,400

102.00

218,000.

400

6.00

20,000.

model
model
model
model

Power
-

Monthl)::
Maintenance

1
2
3
4

3221

Data Channel Attachment
(on High-Speed Processor)

3224

Data Channel Switch

7604
model 1
model 2
model 3

Tape
two
one
two

7155
model 1
model 2
mope13
model 4

Switch Control Console
for up to 2 tape units
for up to 4 tape units
for up to 6 tape units
for up to 8 tape units
(7830 is required on each tape unit to be
switched. )

7640

Hypertape Control

7802

Power Converter (required in every system)

Control (for 729s)
channels
channel
channels (800 char/inch)

Note: Monthly maintenance charges apply to purchased equipment only; they are based on a
graduated scale, and the charges shown here apply to the first three years after
installation.

®

1962 by Auerbach Corporotion and BNA Incerporated

6/62

IBM 704
International Business Machines Corp.

I
\

',-

(
I

'I

I

.......

~/

I
I

I

i--

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

IBM 704
International Business Machines Corp.

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

406:001.001
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

REP{)RTS

IBM 704
Contents

CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.

8.
9.
10.

11 .
12.
13.

14.

15.
16.
17.

Introduction.....
Data Structure. . . •
System Configuration.
Internal Storage
737 Core Storage
738 Core Storage •
733 Magnetic Drum
Central Processor
704 Central Processing Unit
Console . • • • . • • • • • • . .
Input-Output; Punched Tape and Card
711 Card Reader
721 Card Punch
Input-Output; Printers
716 Printer. •
Input-Output; Magnetic Tape
727 Magnetic Tape Unit
Input-Output; Other
740 Cathode Ray Tube Recorder
780 Cathode Ray Tube Display
Simultaneous Operations
Instruction List .
Coding Specimens
SAP . • •
FORTRAN
Data Codes
Internal, Magnetic Drum and Magnetic Tape, Binary
Punched Card, Input-Output
Printer . • . • • • .
Magnetic Tape, BCD
Problem Oriented Facilities
Data Processing Package. '.
Process Oriented Languages
FORTRAN • • . • •
Machine Oriented Languages
SAP •

18.

19.
20.
21.
22.

406:011
406:021
406:031
406:041
406:041
406:042
406:051
406:061
406:071
406:072
406:081
406:091
406:101
406:101
406:111
406:121
406:131
403: 133 (IBM 7070)
406:141
• 406:142
406:143
• 406:144
406:151
• 406:161
406:171

Translators
SAP •
FORTRAN
Operating Environment. •
System Performance • .
Physical Characteristics
Prices • • . . . • • •

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

406:181
406:182
• 406:191
406:201
406:211
406:221

10/62

406:011.100

IBM 704
In troducti on

I NTRODUCTI ON
§ 011.

The IBM 704 is a large-scale, vacuum tube, parallel, 36-bit word, binary, scientific data processing system. Although it is no longer being produced, it is now available as
used and/or rebuilt equipment. The 704 was the first commerciaJ large-scale system with
~luUt-in floating point instructions; execution speeds of about 40,000 instructions per second;
and from 4,096 to 32,678 words of magnetic core storage all included in one system. These
features made possible the development of FORTRAN, the first process oriented language to
gain wide acceptance.
Being binary, the IBM 704 is most widely used for "scientific" computation. Business
applications, however, have not been neglected. Even with the burden of radix conversion,
the 704 can keep up with or out-perform most of its predecessors in an interpretive mode.
Special business data processing systems are available. Whether business or scientific, .
there is more software available, as of this year, for the IBM 704 system than for any other
system in the world. It is maintained by the SHARE users group.
The IBM 704 Processor has three index registers which modify instruction addresses
by subtraction. Arithmetic is performed in two's complement and sign notation. Its basic
cycle time is 12 microseconds, and most instructions require 2 cycles. Exceptions are
floating point add and subtract (5 to 11 cycles), multiply and divide (18 to 22 cycles), and
input-output instructions, timings depend on the mechanics of the various units (ranging
from 2 cycles to 110 milliseconds). The processor program controls all data transfers to
the input-output units. Computation can be overlapped with input-output, but only editing,
error checking, and control routines are generally used during such operations. Any logical
combination can be gener~ted since the processor has the AND, inclusive OR, and NOT
functions built in as instructions.
Internal storage is provided by the IBM 737, Models 1 or :.:, and the IBM 738 Core
Storage units. Each unit of the 737 provl."les storage for 4,096 36-bit words; whereas, the
738 can replace one or two 737's with 32,768 36-bit word stogge locations. A read or write
cycle for either unit requires 12 microseconds, and no parity check is provided during access.
The optional IBM 733 Magnetic Drum, Modell, provi( .'S 8,192 words of drum storage, and the Model 2 version can provide an additional 8,192 \I.ords of storage. For interchanges of data, the drum is treated as an input-output unit havmg a peak transfer rate of
about 10,400 words per second. Although the average access time is 12.3 milliseconds,
depending on the time of the previous instruction and the drum position, an individual access
can require up to 62.7 milliseconds.
The IBM 727 M?gnetic Tape Unit has a peak data transfer speed of 15,000 characters
per second. The effActive speed, however, is 12,900 ch:J.racters per second when reading or
writing 1000 charactr. r blocks with <' check sum. Some automatic and programmed error
correction and det' ct!· m is possible' for tape written data.
Although two models of the IBM 711 Card Reader were available, the 250 cards per
minute unit (Model 2) is the ~ost widely used. The Model 2 permits the overlapping of up to
75 percent of the Tead time, which is usually used to convert the 864 bit card image to 72 six
bit BCD characters stored in packed form in the wre store in 12 words. At least 25 milliseconds are available for other computing before the reader is stopped. Only 72 out of 80
(as wired on a plugboard) columns can be react, and are read in two 36-bit groups from each
row of a punched card. The clata is generally stored as a "map" image of the card in 24
word locations.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

IBM 704

406:011.101

INTRODUCTION-Contd.
§ OIl.

The IBM 721 Card Punch will punch up to 100 cards per minute. This unit also uses
an 864 bit image as does the 711 Card Reader. However, more than 72 card columns can be
punched since gang punching is possible by specific wiring of the plugboard. The plugboard
has two sense exits that can be impulsed by the processor to control which card fields are to
be punched.
The 150 line per minute IBM 716 Printer is the only unit that can be checked by the
processor without limiting throughput. The checking feature requires more time than unchecked printing and the conversion of + and - signs to alternative image configurations.
The unit can print a 120 character line, but requires two separate data transmission cycles,
which reduces the printing speed to 75 lines per minute.
The features of the IBM 716 are similar to those of the IBM 407 except that it cannot
read cards. All of the editing features including zero-suppression control are contained on
the 716's plugboard. The carriage can be controlled by a paper tape loop and/or by program.
The processor can accept one signal from the 716 and, in turn, transmit nine different signals to the printer, in addition to data.
The printer acts as a controller for the punch and is also the power distribution unit
for the card reader and punch. For these reasons it is required with the system when either
reader or punch is to be used.
A 7-inch cathode ray tube (CRT) and 35 millimeter camera, IBM 740 CRT Recorder,
is available with the system. Horizontal, vertical or 45 degree upper-right moving lines
can be displayed as well as point- by- point plots on the face of the CRT.
The IBM 780 CRT Display is an accessory for the IBM 740. This unit reprodm:c5 the
IBM 740 display on a 21-inch CRT for on-line monitoring. All power and decoding networks
for the 740 are built into the 780.
Being a vacuum tube machine, the IBM 704 system has rather high power and airconditioning requirements. At large installations the air cooling capacity is as high at> 20
tons. Although this is a disadvantage, the advantages of the greatly reduced price, and the
abundance of available software in the SHARE library may more than offset all of the disadvantages, including the higher speeds of the newer solid-state equipment.

10/62

406:021.100

·STAN""'D
II

EDP
"'QRTS

IBM 704
Data Structure

DATA STRUCTURE

.2

§ 021.

.1

Type of Information

STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of
Location

Size

Word:

36 bits

Record:
File:
Unit Record:
Sector:
Logical Drum:
Physical Drum:

INFORMATION FORMATS

Purpose or Use

data and instructions.
1 to Nwords
magnetic tape.
1 to N records
magnetic tape.
24 words
punched card.
8 words
magnetic drum.
256 sectors
magnetic drum.
2 logical drUD;l.s . magnetic drum.

©

Alphanumeric: . . .
Fixed point number: .
Floating point number:
Instruction:
Data: . . . .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Representation
6 bits.
sign bit plus 35 bit number.
sign bit plus 8 bit characteristic plus 27 bit
fraction.
36 bits.
36 bits.

10/62

406:031.101

·STANDAROEDP

•

"fORTS

IBM 704
System Configurations

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

§

I

031.
STANDARD CONFIGURATION XI
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . has I, 100 words less storage.
card reader is 50% slower.
card punch is 50% slower.
tIO simultaneous input-output.
has two additional index registers.
the on -line printer and console are used in place of a
typewriter.

Equipment
Core Storage:
8,192 words.

Processor and Console:

Card Reader:
250 cards/minute

Printer:
150 lines/minute

pard Punch:
100 cards/minute

Magnetic Tape System:
4 Magnetic Tapes
(15,000 chars/second)
1 Controller
Power Supplies:
Total:
Total Down Payment:

*

Rental

60 Month
Purchase

$ 7,400

$ 1,827.80

9,700

2,220.83

800

240.00

1,200

345.55

600

159.38

2,200
2,350

618.80
396.67

3,900
$ 28,150

$ 6,772.70

*

963.67
$30,821.00

This is the discounted monthly payment exclusive of .system maintenance and interest charges for a four
year old, used system.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406:031.102
IT

IBM 704

STANDARD OONFIGURATION VI

Deviations from Standard Configuration:

has 1,000 words less storage using a drum store.
card reader is 50% slower.
printer runs 80% slower.
'no simultaneous input-output.
the on-line printer and console are used in place of a
typewriter.
the magnetic tape units are 50% slower.
Equipment

Drum Storage:
8,192.words

$

522.50

3,700

913.90

'Processor and Console:

9,700

2,220.83

800

240.00

1,200

345.55

600

159.38

3,300
2,350

928.20
396.67

3,900
28,450

963.67
6,690.70
$31,211.00

Printer:
150 lines/minute

Card Punch:
100 cards/minute

Magnetic Tape System:
6 Magnetic Tapes
(15,000 char/second)
1 Controller
Power Supplies:
Total:
Total Down Payment:

10/62

$ 2,900

Core Storage:
4,096 words

Card Reader:
250 cards/minute

'" This is the dilscounted monthly payment exc1usiv4!
four year old, used system.

60 Month
Purchase

Rental

o~

system maintenance and interest charges for a

*

406:031. lOa

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
§

031.

III

STANDARD CONFIGURATION VII A
Deviations from Standard Configuration:

has 12,800 words more storage.
card reader is 50% slower.
printer is 80% slower.
no input-output simultaniety.
has only 3 index registers.
has no typewriter.
Equipment
Core Storage:
32,768 words
Processor and Console:

Card Reader:
250 cards/minute

Printer:
150 lines/minute
Card Punch:
100 cards/minute

Magnetic Tape System:
10 Magnetic Tapes
(15,000 chars/second)
1 Controller
Power Supplies:
Total:
Total Down Payment:

*

Rental

60 Month
Purchase *

$ 19,700

$ 4,465.00

9,700

2,220.83

800

240.00

1,200

345.55

600

159.38

5,500
2,300

1,547.00
396.67

3,800

938.60
$10,313.03
$48,899.00

$ 43,600

This is the discounted monthly payment exclusive of system maintenance and interest.charges for a four
year old, used system.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incarporated

10/62

406:031.104
§

IBM 704

031.

IV.

STANDARD CONFIGURATION VII B
Deviations from Standard Configuration:

has 18,700 words more storage.
the on -line card reader is 250% faster.
the card punch is on-line.
the on-line printer compensates for a typewriter, and
the off-line tape-to-printer unit will, in almost all
cases, be equivalent to the standard.
the off-line card-to-tape and tape-to-printer units were
the equivalents of the smaller processor.
the magnetic tape units are 75% slower.
has only 3 index registers.

Equipment
Core Storage:
32,768 word

:Processor and Console:

Card Reader:
250 cards/minute

Printer:
150 lines/minute

o

Card Punch:
100 cards/minute

Magnetic Tape System:
8 Magnetic Tapes
(15,000 chars/sec)
1 Controller

0, 0

6-c:J----'

Tape Switch (for 3 tapes)
Two Magnetic Tapes:
(15,000 char/sec)
Card Reader and Controller:

'----c:=>e

Printer and Controller:
rower Supplies:
Total:
Total Down Payment:

*

10/62

Rental

60 Month
Purchase '"

$ 19,700

$ 4,465.00

9,700

2,220.83

800

240.00

1,200

345.55

600

159.38

4,400
2,300

1,237.00
396.67

RPQ

RPQ

1,100

309.40

2,400

697.07

2,157
3,800
$ 48,157

631.13
938.60
$ 11,640.63
$ 62,007.00

This is the discounted monthly payment exclusive of system maintenance and interest charges for a four
year old, used system.

406:041.100
•

STANDARD

_EDP
."

REPORTS

IBM 704
Internal Storage
Core Storage

INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE

§

041.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: . . . . . . . . Core Storage.
Type 737, Modell and 2.
Type 738, ModelL

. 12

Basic Use: .

.13

Description

.3

DATA CAPACITY

.31

Module and System Sizes
Minimum
Storage

working storage.

Core stores are used to provide either 4, 096, 8, 192,
or 32,768 words of working storage. Each word,
composed of 36 bits, can hold one number or one instruction. The cycle time of the store is 12 microseconds. There are no checks applied to data recorded in, or read from, the store.

Identity:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Digits:
.32

• 15

Three stores are available: the 737, Models 1 and
2; and 738. Each model of the 737 has a capacity of .4
4,096 words and the 738, a capacity of 32, 768 words.
A 704 configuration may contain either a 737 Model
1; or one each of Models 1 and 2; or a 738.
·5
Availability: . . . . . . not in production, can be
.51
rented or purchased only
as used or rebuilt equipment.
· 52
December', 1955.
First Delivery: . .

.16

Reserved Storage: .

·2

PHYSICAL FORM

. 21

. 14

737
Modell
4,096
,24,576
4,096
43,008

Rules for Combining
Modules: . . . . . .

Arrangement of Heads:

Storage Medium:

magnetiC core.

• 23

Storage Phenomenon:

direction of magnetization.

· 24

Recording Permanence

.28

one access device for all
core storage.

Access Time Parameters and Variations
121J. sec.
1 word.

none.

·6

CHANG1?ABLE
STORAGE: . . . . • . none.

.7

AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

. 71

Data Transfer

Access Techniques

.281 Recording method:.
· 282 Reading method: . .
. 283 Type of access: ..

Pair of storage unit possibilities
With Self:. . . .
no.
With Processor: • . . yes.

coincident current.
sense wire •
uniform.
· 72

· 29

either a 737 modell, or a
737model 1 and 2, ora 738.

Simultaneous
Operations:. . . . . . none.

.531 For uniform access
Cycle time:. . . .
For data unit of: .
.532 Variation in access
time: . • . . . . .

yes.

738
Modell
32, 768
196,608
32,768
344,064

ACCESS TIMING

.53

no.
yes.
no •
no.

737
Model 2
4,096
24,576
4,096
43,008

CONTROLLER: . . . . none.

none.

.241 Data erasable by
instructions: •.
· 242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . .
· 243 Data volatile:
• 244 Data permanent: .
. 245 Storage changeable:

Maximum
Storage

Transfer Load Size

Potential Transfer Rates
With Processor: . .

. 292 Peak data rates
Cycling rates:
Unit of data: .
Conversion factor: .
Data rate: . , . . .
Compound data rate: .

83,333 cps.
1 word.
36 bits/word.
83,333 words/sec.
83,333 words/sec.

©

.73

1 word .

Effective Transfer Rate
With Processor (operands and instruc. 83,333 words/sec.
tions): . . • .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406:041.800

IBM 704

§ 041.

.8

10/62

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Invalid address:

not possible

Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:
Physical record missing:
Reference to
locked area:

not possible.
none.
none.
none.
none.

not possible.
not possible.
not possible.

Action
Address modulo
storage size.

406:042.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 704
Internal Storage
733 Magnetic Drum

INTERNAL' STORAGE: 733 MAGNETIC DRUM

§

042.

.25

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Basic Use: .

• 13

Description
Magnetic drums are used to provide either 4,096,
8,192, 12,288, or 16,384 words of auxiliary storage. Each word location on the drum is addressable and can hold one 36-bit word. A block transfer
is program controlled word by word. Average access ·time to the first word is 13 milliseconds and
the maximum access time is 25.5 milliseconds.
Full words are recorded in, or read from successive word locations at a rate of approximately
10,000 words a second.

.14

.15
.16
.2
. 21
• 22
.222

.23
.24
.241
. 242
. 243
. 244
. 245

Words: . . . . . . .
Characters (6. bit. BCD):
Digits (binaryequivalent):
Instructions: . . .

Magnetic Drum.
Type 733.
Modell and 2.
auxiliary storage.

Data volume per band of 36 tracks

.26

2,048
12,288
21,504
2,048

Bands per phrsical
unit:

2.

. 27

Interleaving Levels: .

8

.28

Access Techniques

.281 Recording method:
.282 Reading method:
.283 Type of access

fixed heads.
fixed heads.

description of stage
(a) Select instruction to specify choice of drum
and read or write status.
(b) Locate instruction to specify first drum address for transfer if other than yes.
(c) Individual copy instructions to specify the core
address corresponding to the next drum word.
(d) Transfer stops when no ctJpy instruction occurs within 36 microseconds.

Two models of a 733 Magnetic Drum Unit are available. Model 1 may contain either one or two physical drums, each drum having a capacity of 4,096
words. A physical drum consists of two logical
drums, each with a s,torage capacity for 2,048 words
The Model 2 is used as a second unit, with the same
feature as the Model 1 and provides an additional
.29 Potential Transfer Rates
8,192 words of storage for the system.
.291 Peak bit rates
Availability: . . . . . not in production, can be
Cycling rates:
2,419 rpm.
rented or purchased only
Track/head speed:
'1 inches/sec.
as used or rebuilt equip'1
BitS/inch/track: .
Bit rate per track:
ment.
83,333 bits/sec/track.
.292 Peak data rates
First Delivery:. .
December, 1955.
Unit of data:
word (six 6-bjt char).
Conversion facReserved Storage:
none.
tor:
36 bits/word.
Gain factor: .
36 tracks/band .
PHYSICAL FORM
Loss factor:
8 interleaving levels.
Data rate:
10,416 words/sec.
. magnetic ,drum .
Storage Medium: .
Compound data
rate: . . . .
10,416 words/sec.
Physical Dimensions.
.3
DATA CAPACITY
Drum or Disc
Diameter:
./
.31 Module and Srstem Sizes
Thickness or length:. ./
Number on shaft: '.' 1.
Minimum
Maximum
Storage
Storage
Storage phenomenon:
magnetization.
Drums:
1
4
Words:
4,096
16,384
Recording Permanence
Characters:
24,576
98,304
Instructions:
4,096
16,384
Data erasable by
Bands:
2
8
instructions: .
yes .
Digits:
43,008
172,032
Data regenerated
Modules:
1
2
no .
constantly: . .
Data volatile:
no .
.32 Rules for Combining
Data permanent: .
no .
Modules: . . .
1 or 2 drums may be conStorage changeable: .
yes.
tained in a module; up to
2 modules may be used.
© 1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62

406:042.400

IBM 704
.532 Variation in access time
Variation
Stage
(m.sec.)

.§ 042.
.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:...

.42

Connection to System

.421 On-Line:
. 43

. 447 Table control: . .
.448 Testable conditions:
.S

ACCESS TIMING

. 51

Arrangement of Heads

.511 Number of Stacks
Heads per stack:
Stacks per systern:
Stacks per yoke:
Stacks per module:

.6
1 word .

0.6
103.2; N=
1000
116.6

CHANGEABLE STORAGE: . . . . . . .

none.

1 word.

no.
programmed .
wait for access to drum
location .
no.
none.

.7

STORAGE PERFORMANCE

.71

Data Transfer,

• 72
36

.73

8
2
4

. 513 Stacks that can access
any particular location: .

1

Pair of storage units
possibilities
With self:
With core store:

no .
yes .

Transfer Load
Size:

1 word.

Effective Transfer Rate
-With core store: . . .

8

2,048 words.
all per module.

Simultaneous Operations: . . . . . . . none.

.53

Access Time Parameters and Variations
0.7 to 25.5 m.sec.
24.8 m.sec.
1 word.

10,076 words/sec.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

.52

10/62

0.5

core storage .

none .

.531 For uniform access
Access time: . .
Cycle time:
For data unit of:

12.3

2 drum modules (each containing 1 or 2 drums) .

.512 Stack movement:

.514 Accessible locations
By single stack:
By all stacks:

0.6
0.103N

Consecutive reads
of 1000 words:
• all part of the same command

Data Transfer Control

. 441 Size of load: . . .
. 442 Input-Output area:
. 443 . Input-Output area
access:
.444 Input-Output area
lockout:
.445 Synchronization: .
. 446 Synchronizing aids:

0.0 to 23.9
0.0 to 47.7
0.5 or 15.0
0.0 to 15.0

1.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller:
• 44

Select same drum·
Select another drum·
Select read status·
Select write status"
Load drum address:
Transfer N words:

functions carried out by
stored program.

Example
(m.sec.)

Check or
Interlock

Invalid address:
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:

not possible
not possible
none
none
none

Physical record missing:
Reference to locked
area:

none

none

check

none

stall processor
and alarm.

406:051.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 704

REPORTS

Central

Proc~ssor

CENTRAL PROCESSOR

§

.12

051.

.1

GENERAL

,11

Identity: .

.12

Description

Central Processing Unit.
ffiM 704.

The ffiM 704 Processor has a binary arithmetic unit
operating on 36 bit words in both fixed and floating
point using two's complement arithmetic. Each
single address instruction is 36 bits in size and there
are several instruction formats. All instructions
take a multiple of 12 microseconds and most take 24
microseconds. The processor contains one accumulator and three index registers. The index registers are the sa,rile size as the address part of the instructions (15 bits) and are used to modify addresses
by subtraction. Either no indexing, or indexing by
anyone register, or indexing by the ORed sum of
two or three registers can be specified for each instruction. All operations can be indexed except
those that set, test, or alter the index registers.
The processor controls all input-output operations
completely from the selection of a unit until the last
data transfer. Overlapped operation is possible and
the majority of the software available from SHARE
utilizes this time to perform data conversions and
accuracy checks. However, multiplication and division operations cannot be performed during data
transfers of one unit record because the same register used for these operations (MQ register) is used
as the input-output buffer register.
Since the system does not have internal parity checking, it is not uncommon to use check sums on magnetic tape, and periodically to hash-total important
sections of the program. Occasional output of restart parameters is an accepted technique for long
running programs.
Standard features of the processor include four
sense lights and six sense switches. The sense
lights are useful for storing program decisions, and
can be set, tested and reset under program control.
The sense switches can be turned on and off by the
operator at any time and can be tested by the program. These switches provide program breakpoints
or program option control such as print suppression.
The processor console provides load buttons which
initiate program loading from cards, drum, or tape.
All locations in core storage can be cleared, the
logic of the processor reset, and the contents of
registers and store locations displayed using other
buttons provided. Data or instructions can be keyed
in manually through a 36 key input register.
Built- in diagnostic features include buttons for single
step and sl!lw speed execution of instructions. A

©

Description (Contd.)
special feature is Transfer Trapping. This feature
is a program diagnostic aid used under program conoTol at processor speeds. All transfer instructions
except the trap transfer cause the contents of the
program counter tu be stored in one storage location
and control to be transferred to an instruction stored
in another 10catiCln. This latter location generally
contains a trap transfer to a routine that prints-oilt
a message giving the address of the "trapped" in"
struction and the register contents. Control is then
transferred to the location where the "trapped" instruction would have sent control. This trap record
is useful in debugging programs written in
FORTRAN as well as SAP.
The software for the processor and system is very
complete and is maintained by the SHARE organization. There is virtually no need to program any
diagnostic aids, operating systems, or any arithmetic function from transcendenta1s through complex numbers, many at n-tuple precision. With
either FORTRAN II or SAP and the rest of the
SHARE library, little more than the logic of a problem need be programmed or coded for the machine.

Optional Features
Several optional features can be incorporated in the
processor. One of these is a half-word option which
permits using the accumulator as though it were tWo
18-bit registers for single register operations. Six
extra sense switches can be added to the console for
additional program optional control. Another option
is a Tape Switch which will connect any of three
magnetic tape units to the. processor or an off-line
device such as a tape controlled printer. An audible
alarm attachment can be added which sounds when
the processor is stopped.
Other processor options contain special instructions
and their associated hardware which perform the
following functions:
Copy and Add Logical Word:
This instruction is the same as the copy and skip
operation for input-output data transfers, but
this .instruction also forms a check sum of the
transmitted words in the accumulator.
Enter (Leave) Floating Trap Mode:
This instruction enables (inhibits) a feature
which causes the processor to trap (see transfer above) when a floating point overflow occurs,
storing an indication of this in one storage location and transferring control to another.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406:051.120
§

IBM 704

051.

. 12

,.23

Instruction Formats

Description (Contd.)

. 1 word •

Optional Features (Contd.)

NOT USED
6

Backspace file:
This option winds a magnetic tape backward until
the first end-of-file gap is found, then moves the
tape forward so that the first record of the file is
positioned under the read-write head of the tape
unit.
Input-output equipment options are available for"use
under program control. Included among these are a
Rewind-Disable option for magnetic tapes and a realtime clock which can be sampled by "reading" the
printer where it is located.
. 13

Availability: . . • . . . not in production. can be
rented or purchased only
as used or rebuilt equipment.

. 14

First Delivery: . • . . December, 1955 •

.2

PROCESSING FACILITIES

. 21

Operations and Operands
Radix

Size

.211 Fixed point
automatic

binary

35 bits & sign.

automatic

binary

35 bits & sign.

automatic

binary

35 bits & sign.

automatic
automatic
automatic

binary
binary
binary

Fraction Characteristic
27 bits
8 bits.
27 bits
8 bits.
8 bits.
27 bits

automatic
automatic
automatic

binary
binary
binary

36 bits.
36 bits.
36 bits.

.212 Floating point
Add-subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:

.213 Boolean
AND:
Inclusive OR:
NOT:

.214 Comparison
Numbers:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating sequence:

automatic
see numbers.
see numbers.

.215
°.216
.217
• 218

Code translation:
Radix conversion:
Edit format:
Table look-up: .

.22

Special Cases of Operands

.222 Zero: • • • . . . . .
.223 Operand size determination: . . . . .

10/62

36 bits.

o to 9 # tA.+ A to 11; .0- J to R 0 $
* BLANK / S to zt, %

.221 Negative numbers:.

.233 Instruction parts
Name
Operation: .
Decrement: •

Purpose
command code.
for index limits and modiiication values.
Tag: . . .
indicates which index registers will be applied to
the addre ss.
Address: . . . . . • address of data or next instruction.
.234 Basic address structure: 1 address (sequential).
· 235 Literals
Arithmetic:. . . .
none.
Comparisons and
tests: . . . . '.
none.
Incrementing
modifiers: . . .
1 to 32,767.
.236 Directly addressed operands
· 2361 Internal
Minimum
Maximum
Volume accessible
size
size
storage
Core Store:
Magnetic Drum:

Operation
and Variation Provision
Add-subtract:
Multiply
Long:
Divide
Remainder:

15

none.
none.
none.
none.

sign bit (most significant)
set; two's complement and
sign .•
plus or minus not equal in
comparison.
fixed at 1 word (and right
or left half word as
optional feature).

1 word
1 word

1 word
1 word

entire storage.
entire storage.

.2362

Increased address
capacity: . . . . . . none.
.237 Address indexing
.2371 Number of methods: 1.2372 Names: . . • .
indexing (can be multiple
indexes).
.
.2373 Indexing Yule: .
the contents af the indicated
index registers are ORed
together then subtracted
from the address of the
instruction to form the effective address.
· 2374 Index specification: . each of the index bits specify an index register.
.2375 Number of potential
indexers: . . . .. 3.
.2376 Addresses which can
be indexed: .0 .•• all.
· 2377 Cumulative indexing: none.
none.
• 238 Indirect addressing: •
index registers.
· 239 Stepping: . • . . . •
· 2391 SpeCification of
increment: . . .
in stepping instructions.
positive.
. 2392 Increment sign: .
o to 32,767 (words).
.2393 Size of increment:
value of increment.
• 2394 End value: . . . . •
.2395 Combined step and
test: . . . . . . .
yes.
o

.24

SpeCial Processor Storage

.241 Category of
storage
Accumulator:
MultipllerQuotient:
Index:

Number of
locations
1

Size in
bits
38

1

36

3

15

Program usage
arithmetic unit.
arithmetic unit &
input output.
address modification.

CENTRAL PROCESSOR

§

406:051.241

051.

.241 Category of
Number of
stor~ge (Contd.) locations

Size in
bits
15

Program Counter:
Sense Lights:
Sense Switches:
Storage:
Instruction:

. 242 Category of
storage

Program usage
specified instruction
address.
sa ve condition.
accept condition.
buffer with store.
shift counter. holds
instruction.

1
1
36
18

4
6

Total number Physical
locations
form

Accumulator:
Multiplier-Quotient:
Index:
Program Counter:
Sense Lights:
Sense Switches:
Storage:
Instruction:

Access

time
fl.-sec
register
2
2
register
register
2
2
register
2
flip-flop
2
switch
2
register
2
register

1
1
3
1
4

6
1
1

.3

SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES

. 31

Instruction Sequencing

Cycle
time
"..sec
12.
12.
12.
12.
12.
12.
12.
12.

. 311 Number of sequence
control facilities: . . 1.
.314 Special sub-sequence counters
Number
Purpose
1: . . . . . . . . .
counts shifts (not accessible by program).
. 315 Sequence control step
size: . • • . .
1 word.
. 316 Accessibility to
program: • . .
change, or save in index,
see paragraph .33.
.32

Look-Ahead: .

• 33.

Interruption

. 331 Possible causes
Other: . . • •

none.

on encountering transfer of
control instruction while
in trapping mode.

.332 Control by routine
Individual control:
Method: •

. 333
. 334
. 335

. 336

• 34

processor.
enter or leave trapping
mode instruction (ETM,
LTM).
Restriction:
none.
execute ETM or LTM inOperator control:
struction from console.
Interruption conditions: trappihg mode on and a
transfer of control
instruction•
Interruption process
Disabling interruption: LTM instruction.
Registers saved:
location of next instruction
in normal sequence in a
fixed location.
Destination:
fixed location •
Control methods
Determine cause:
fixed.
Enable interruption:
ETM instruction.

Multi - running: .

. 35 . Multi-seguencing:

none.
none.

©

.4

PROCESSOR SPEEDS

.41

Instruction Times in

j.J.

Sec.

.411 Fixed point
Add- subtract:
Multiply: . . .
Divide: . . . .
.412 Floating point
Add - subtract:
Mul~iply: . . .
Divide: . • . .
.413 Additional allowance for
Indexing: . • . . . .
Re-complementing:
.414 Control
Branch: . . . . . . .
Compare & branch:"
.415 Counter control
Step: . . • . •
Step and test: .
Test: •
.416 Edit: •.
. 417 Convert:
.418 Shift: ••
.42

24.
240.
240.
72 to 132.
204 .
216.
none.
none.
24.
24 to 36.
24.
24.
24 •
none .
none .
24 to 84 (252 possible) .

Processor Performance in

j.J.

Sec.

.421 For random addresses Fixed point
c = a + b: • . .
72
b = a + b: • • •
72
Sum N items: .
24 N
288
c = ab: • • . .
c = alb:. • . .
288
.422 For arrays of data
ci=ai+bj:..
120N
bj = ai + br. .
120 N
Sum N items:.
48N

Floating point
156 ± 24.
156 ± 24.
(108 ± 24)N•
252.
264 •
(204 ± 24)N.
(204 ± 24)N.
48+(I32±
24)(N - 1).
408N.

c=c+aibj: .
360N
.423 Branch based on comparison
Numeric data: .
72 + 132 N.
Alphabetic data:
96 + 132N.
.424 Switching
Unchecked: .
72.
Checked: • .
120.
List search:
72 + 60N.
.425 Format control per character
Unpack:. . • . . . . • 550 from cards, 170 from
tape (using off-line cardto-tape converter).
Compose: . • . . • • . 250 .
.426 Table look-Up per comparison
For a match: . . . . . 48 + 84 N .
For least or greate/lt: 48 + 108 N.
For interpolation
point: . . . • . .
48 + 84N .
. 427 Bit indicators
Set bit in separate
location: . . . .
24.
Set bit in pattern:
48.
Test bit in separate
location: • . . . .
24.
Test bit in pattern: .
72.
Test AND for B bits:. 72.
Test CR for B bits: .
72 .
. 428 Moving N words
4 instructions: .
24 + 72N.
2 N instructions:
48 N .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406:051.500
§

IBM 704

051.

.5

10/62

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

overflow:
Underflow:
Zero divisor:

check
check
check

Invalid data:
Invalid operation
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:

not possible.
none.
none.
check
none.
none.

Action
sets indicator.
sets indicator.
sets indicator and/or
stops processor.
attempts operation.
modUlo memory size.

406:061.1 00
•

STANDARD

EDP

_

REPORTS

IBM 704
Console

CONSOLE

§

061.

.24

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identi!1'::

. 12

Associated Units:

.13

Descri!2tion

....

CONTROLS

.21

Power
Name
Power-On:
Normal-Off:
DC-On:
DC-Off:

. 22

Name
Single Step:

Console panel; a part of the
Central Processor.
none.

Multiple Step:

The Console panel is a physical part of the Central
Processing Unit. The panel contains neon lights, incandescent lamps, buttons, and switches. The contents of the Program Counter, Instruction, Storage,
Accumulator, and MQ registers are displayed on a
set of neon lamps. The contents of index registers
may also be displayed on a separate set of neon
lamps by depressing appropriate buttons. More than
one index register can be manually displayed in sequence. Thirty-six panel input switches are available to allow manual insertion of a word or words
into the Processor and core storage.

.2

Stepping

.25

.26

Name
Clear:

Form
button

Reset:

button

button
button
button
button

Comment
turns
turns
turns
turns

AC power on.
off all power.
DC power on.
DC power off.

Comiections:...... none.

Form

button

Name

Form

Enter MO:

button

Index Display:

button

Enter Instruction:
button

Stops and Restarts
Name
Start:

AutomaticManual:

Form
button

switch

Comment
starts computer operation after a program
halt, read/write
check, or when in
automatic mode.

Display
Storage:

button

Display Effective Address: button

stops computer operation after instruction
in process is executed. When I/O device is in operation,
computer stops after
device disconnects.

©

Comment
permits operator to initi{ ate the loading of a
self-loading program
stored on cards, drum
or tape .

Special

Sense Switches switch
. 23

Comment
resets all registers in
processor and in core
storage.
resets all registers and
indicators in logical
section of machine.

Loading

Load Cards: }
Load Drum:
Load Tape:

Form

button

Comment
used only in manual
mode to execute program,_ one instruction
at a time .
used only in manual
mode to automatically
execute program at a
slow speed.

Resets

Name

. 27

Form
button

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Comment
transfers manually
keyed-in word to the
MQ register.
3 index display buttons
permit operator to display contents of any of
the index registers
while in manual mode.
causes manually keyedin word to be executed.
6 switches, the settings
are program testable .
the contents of the location specified by the
address part of the
manually keyed-in word
are displayed in this
register.
displays in the address
field of the storage
register the difference
between the contents of
the address field of the
storage register and
the specified index
register.
10/62

406:061.300

§

IBM 704

061.

.33

.3

DISPLAY

.31

Alarms
Name
Accumulator
Overflow:
MQ Overflow:
Divide Check:
Read-Write
Check:

.32

Form

Conditions Indicated

light
light
light

accumulator overflow.
MQ overflow.
divide-check condition.

light

improper instruction sequence or a CPY instruction received too late.

Form

Ready:
Power:
Automatic:

light
light
light

Trap Indicator: light

.33

Form

Name

Conditions
Name

Control Registers (Contd.)

Sense Lights:

light

Program Stop:

light

Read-Write
Select:

light

Conditions Indicated
on when computer is ready
to begin operating.
on when computer is in
automatic mode.
on when computer is operatingin the trap mode.
four sense lights controlled by the program.
turned on when computer
executes halt instruction.

Accumulator:

lights

MQ:

lights

.

....

.34

Storage:

.4

ENTRY OF DATA

.41

Into Control Registers

"

" "

Conditions Indicated
38 neon lights; one for
each bit position plus
one for Q and one for P.
36 neon lights; one for
each bit position.
36 neon lights to indicate
contents of core storage
buffer register.

(1) desired word keyed into panel input switches,
then
(2) depress Enter MQ button.

..

.42

Into Storage: .

.5

CONVENIENCES

.51

Communication:

.52

Clock:

.53

Desk Space:

none.

.54

View:.

when operator is at console, all the equipment
can easily be seen if
conveniently placed.

" "

one core storage location is
written into by using enter
instruction push- button
with a store instruction
keyed into the 36 manual
input switches.

turned on when an I/O device has been selected
for reading or writing.

Control Reg!sters
Name
Instruction:

Instruction
Counter:

10/62

Form
lights

lights

Comment
18 neon lights, allocated
to sign bit and bits 1
through 17 to indicate
instruction operation.
15 neon lights, allocated
to bits 21 through 35 to
indicate location of next
ilu;tructton.

..

optional.
optional.

406:071.100
•

"ANDARD

_EDP
."

REMR!S

IBM 704
Input-Output

711 Card Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: 711 CARD READER

§ 071.

.12

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

.12

Descrrption:

Manual controls are provided for normal run-in of
cards. Various contacts are used to sense for improper feeding of cards, and lamps are provided to
indicate when a malfunction exists within the unit.

Card Reader.
Type 71l.
Modell or Model 2.
. 13

Only one card reader can be used in a 704 configuration. It may be either model of the 711 Card Reader.
.14
The Model 1 reads cards at a rate of 150 cards a
minute, and the Model 2 reads cards at 250 cards
.2
per minute, otherwise there are no basic differences. Cards are fed from a 110pper with a capacity
.21
of approximately 700 cards and placed in a stacker
that holds approximately 1,500 cards.
.211
During read operations data read from cards goes to . 212
the MQ register before being sent to storage.
· 22
Therefore, any data stored in this register from
previous operations is d~stroyed. Words are stored
in storage in the form of a "card image". Each card .221
. 222
image represents 72 characters. Data may be
punched on cards in either binary or BCD codes, and
.23
by a suitable program, BCD data may be converted
to binary data. The card image is represented by
.231
twenty-four 36-bit words; two words per row of the
card image. The reader will read any 72 out of 80
· 24
columns ·of each card.
The program must control the entire input operation,
from starting the first read cycle to sending pairs of
words to storage at each index point. It is possible
to interleave up to 292 milliseconds of other computing in a 400 millisecond card cycle for Modell,
and up to 180 milliseconds of other computing in a
240 millisecond card cycle for Model 2. This maximum computing time requires careful programming.
When using standard routines virtually no overlapping is possible; the routines, however, utilize the
spare time for each operation as conversion between
BCD and card image.
There are two card reading stations; first station is
for control and the second for read operations.
The 711 contains a plugboard that can be wired to
control format of a card read at the second station.
Format control signals can be read from a card at
the first station by control brushes and decoded by
plugboard wiring. A minimum of 10 different formats can be conveniently wired, and all 80 columns
can be controlled by these rearrangements.
A programmed check of card reading of selected
columns can be arranged by reading those columns
at both stations. However, the total number of
columns read, counting two for a column read at
both stations, is still only 72. Thus, a total of 36
checked columns can be read.

©

Description (Contd.)

Availability: . . . . . . not in production. can be
rented or purchased only
as used or rebuilt equipment.
First Delivery:

.

PHYSICAL FORM
Drive Mechanism
Drive past the head: .
Reservoirs: . . . . .

clutch driven rollers .
none.

Sensing and Recording Systems
Recording system: .
Sensing system: .

none .
brush.

Multiple Copies: .

none.

Maximum number
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use:
Use of station:
Distance: . . .
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/ stack:.
Method of use:

.
.
.
.
.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium: . .
. 312 Phenomenon:
· 32

December, 1955.

reading (control).
l.
80.
1 row at a time.
reading.
1 card.
l.
80.
1 row at a time.

standard 80-column cards •
rectangular holes.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by: .
.322 Parallel by:
. 324 Track use
Data: . . . . . . . .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: .
Total: .
.325 Row use: .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12 rows at standard spacing.
80 columns at standard
spacing•
72.
O.

O.
O.

8.
80.
all for data.

10/62

406:071.330
§

IBM 704

071.

. 33

. 34
. 35

.54
Coding: . . . . . . . . . binary or Hollerith Code .
(see Data Code Table
No.2).

Control (plugl:JQaz-d or
program): ·
Format alternatives
(number): . . .

...

Format Compatibility:. all devices using standard
80-column cards.
Physical Dimensions:

standard 80-column cards.

Format Control

Rearrangement:
.55

....
·.

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

.42

Connection to

.56
built into processor (functions carried out by programmed instructions).

. 421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
.43

l.
none.

Connection to Device

..

· ..

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions

.431 Devices per controller: 1.
. 432 Restrictions: . . • • . . none.
.44

I: .

II:
III:
IV:

Data Transfer Control

• 441 Size of load: . . . .
.442 Input- output areas:
.443 Input- output area
access: . . . . .
. 444 Input- output area
lockout: • . .
.445 Table control: . .
• 446 Synchronization: .
.447 Synchronizing aids:

1 word.
core storage.

.62

. 51
.511
. 512
.52
-.521
. 522·
. 523
.524
.525
.526
. 53

no.
no.
no.
none.
no.
no.

Modell.
Model 2.
continuous running.
starting from rest.

Speeds

. 621 Nominal or peak speed
I: . . . . . . . . . . . 150 cards per minute.
II: . . . . . . . . . . . 250 cards per minute.
no.
.622 Important parameters
I
II
no.
Cycle time:. . . . . . 400 m. sec.
240 m. sec.
programmed •
Data transfer time per
wait on row index pulse.
card: . . . . . . . . 108 m. sec.
60 m. sec.
Maximum computing
time per card: . . . 292 m. sec.
180 m. sec.
Time to first copy
from select at rest,
avg: . . . . . • . . . 270 m. sec.
110 m.sec.
Maximum safe computing time during
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
startup:.. . . . . . 50 m. sec.
55 m. sec •
Available minimum computing time, m. sec •
Blocks
Between select and
I & III I & IV II & III II&IV
start of transfer
Size' of block:
one card (24 words).
of data: . . . •
100.0 50.0 74.0 55.0
Block demarcation
Between pairs of
Input: . . .
end of card.
15.0 15.0
8.0
data transfer: .
8.0
Between transfers in
InEut-OutEut 0Eerations
a pair of transfers:
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
Between last copy and
Input: . . .
transfer 1 to 24 words to
next select: •
20.0 20.0 12.0 12.0
core storage for one card. . 623 Overhead: . . . .
single point clutch .
none.
Output: •.
.624 Effective speeds: '"
I 150 cards/min.
Stepping: .
1 card forward •
II 250 cards/min.
Skipping: •
none.
provided computing time
Marking: .
none.
per card is less than 292
Searching:
none.
milliseconds and 180 milliseconds, respectively,
Code Translation:
must be programmed •
for I and II.
1 word.

..

.5

no .
no.
no.
no.
no.

Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . . .
Busy device: ·
Nearly exhausted:
End of medium marks:
Hopper empty: . .
Stacker full:

S~stem

10, as selected on plugboard .
by plugboard.

Control 0Eerations
Disable: . .
Request interrll:pt: .
Offset 'card:
Select stacker: .
Select format: .

.4

plugboard.

10/62

...

I AUERBACH / iiD

INPUT-OUTPUT: 71l CARD READER

§

406:071.63(J

071.

.63

. 73

Demands on System

Component
I:
I:
II:
II:

m.sec
per
Condition
cycle
best coding
108
simplest coding
380
best coding
60
simplest coding
220

Percentage
27
95
25

92

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: . . . .
Stacker: . . • .
.732 Replenishment time: .

Capacity
700 cards
1500 cards
0.25 to 0.50 mins.
reader does not need to
be stopped.
.733 Adjustment time: . • . 0.25 to 1. 0 mins.
.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:...... none.

Error

Check or
Interlock

.72

Other Controls

Reading:
Input area overflow:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:

check
none •.
check
none.
none.

Function
Start
Stop

Form
button
button

Comment
places unit in "ready" status.
removes control from computer by placing unit in "not
ready" status.
Resets error indicators.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Action
programmed.
stop and alarm.

10/62

406:072.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 704
Input-Output
721 Card Punch
INPUT OUTPUT: 721 CARD PUNCH

§

072.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Description

The 721 contains keys for normal manual operations
and lamps to indicate various conditions that may
exist in the unit. There is a double punch or blank
column check feature to check card punching.

Card Punch.
Type 721.

The 721 punches cards, one row at a time, at a
maximum rate of 100 cards per minute. Cards are
fed from a hopper with a capacity of approximately
600 cards and stored in a stacker that holds approximately 600 cards.
Punching forma t is controlled by the arrangement of
data in storage and a plugboard, which is wired to
punch specific functions according to the requirements of the operation. Words to be punched are
stored in core storage in the form of a "card image, " i. e., each of the 864 possible punch positions
is represented by a bit in the store; a zero indicating no punch and a one indicating a punch. Each
card image represents 72 characters. The card
image is represented by twenty-four 36-bit words;
two words per row of the card image. It is only
possible to punch 72 out of 80 columns on each card
with one set of punch instructions. However, the
other eight columns can be gang punched simultaneously with the punching of data from the store.

Description (Contd.)

.13

Availability: . . . . . not in production, can be
rented or purchased only
as used or rebuilt equipment.

.14

First Delivery:. .

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

. 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs: .
.22

December, 1955.

clutch driven rollers.
none.

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:
.222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system:

.23

Multiple Copies:

.24

Arrangement of Heads

die punch.
brushes.
none.
none.

During the punch operations the MQ register is used
as a buffer for data transfers to the punch unit.
Therefore, any data stored in this register from
previous operations is destroyed.

Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

control brushes.
1.
6.
1 row at a time.

The program must control the entire output operation' from starting the first punch cycle to sending
pairs of words to the punch at each index point. It
is possible to interleave up to 442 milliseconds of
other computing in a 600 millisecond cycle, but this
requires careful programming. When using standard routines virtually no overlapping is possible;
the routines, however, utilize the spare time for
such operations as conversion between BCD and card
image.

Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use:

punch dies.
3 rows.
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

Use of station:

checking, and/or gang
punching control.
1 card.
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

The 721 Card Punch can be used for on-line or offline gang punch operations by proper wiring of the
plugboard. On -line gang punch operations can be
activated by plugboard wiring and program control.
Four different possible format rearrangements can
be wired on the plugboard.
The punch unit makes use of six control brush hubs
which can also control format rearrangement by
sensing control punches in the 8-row of a pre-punched card.
In order to use a 721 Card Punch in a: computer configuration, a 716 Printer must also be attached since
the Punch uses some of the Printer's circuitry.

©

Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use:
.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium: .
. 312 Phenomenon: .
.32

standard 80-column cards .
rectangular holes.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by: .
.322 Parallel by:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12 rows at standard spacing.
80 columns at standard
spacing.

10/62

406:072.324
§

IBM 704

072.

.324 Track use
Data:
Unused:
Total:
. 325 Row use:.
.33

Coding:

.34

Format Compatibility: .

.53

Code Translation:

.54

Format Control

72 or 80.

8 or O.
80
80.
all for data.

Control: .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert character:
Insert spaces:
Section sizes:

Hollerith (see Data Code
Table No.2).
all other devices using
standard 80-column cards.
.55

.35

Physical Dimensions:

.4

CONTROLLER

•41

Identity:

. 42

Connection to Sxstem

.421 On-line: .
. 422 Off-line: .
.43

.44

built into processor (functions carried out by programmed instructions).
.56

1.
none.

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:
.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area •
lockout:
. 445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization:
.447 Synchronizing aids:

1 word .
core storage.
1 word.
no.
no.
programmed .
wait on row index pUlse.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Output: .
.52

one WRS (PUNCH).

o to 24 CPY instructions.

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input:
. 522 Output:
.523
. 524
. 525
. 526

one card.

Stepping:.
Skipping:.
Marking:.
Searching:

10/62

none .
1 card forward, 0 to 24
CPY instructions.
none.
one card forward .
none .
none.

yes.
no .
no.
no .
yes.
no.
yes .

Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Hopper empty:
Stacker full:

1.

none.

plugboard.
4.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes.
yes.

Control Operations
Disable: .
Request interrupt:
Offset card:
Select stacker:
Select format:
Select code:
Select character:

standard 80-column cards.

Connection to Device

• 431 Devices per controller:.
.432 Restrictions: .

matched (card image required) and subroutine
conversion.

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditons:

. 62

Speeds

.621 Nominal or. peak
speed:
.622 Important parameters
Continuous running
cycle time:
Maximum computing
time per card
(continuous):
Available computing
time:
between select when
runni~g and first
copy:
between pairs of data
transfer,:;:
between transfers in
a pair of transfers:
between last copy
and next select: .
between select at
rest and first
copy:
Average time between
from select at rest
to first copy:

I AUERBACH / ~

no .
no.
no .
no.
no .
no.

none .

100 cards/min.
600 m.sec .
442 m.sec.

70.0 m.sec.
31.0 m.sec.
0.5 m.sec.
25.0 m.sec.
70.

m.sec .

400 rtl. sec.

406.072.623

INPUT OUTPUT: 721 CARD PUNCH
§072.
.623 Overhead:
• 624 Effective speeds:

.63

· 731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: . .
Stacker: . .
· 732 Replenishment
time:

single point clutch.
100 cards/min.

Demands on System
Component
Processor:

Condition
best coding
simplest coding*

Capacity
600 cards.
600 cards.

Percenm.sec
per card tage

158
375

39.5
93.5

· 7~3 Adjustment time:
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . .

0.25 to 0.50 mins.
punch does not need to be
stopped.
0.25 to I mins.
6 mins.

*. e. g. using standard routines which utilize spare
time for functions such as conversions between
BCD and "image".
·7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

· 71

Adjustments:.

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

none.
Error

· 72

Other Controls
Function Form
Start:
key
Stop:

• 73

key

Recording:

Comment
makes unit "ready" when hopper
is filled and control panel is in
place.
places unit in a "not ready" status and clears error detection
circuitry.

Loading and Unloading

©

Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Misfeed:
Double Punch:
Blank Column:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Check or
Interlock
see blank column and
double punch.
interlock
see blank column and
double punch.
check
check
check
check
check
check

Action
stops processor.

punch.stops.
punch stops.
computer stalls.
punch stops.
punch stops.
punch stops.

10/62

406:081.100

.STANDA"
EDP

II

'[FO'TS

IBM 704
Input-Output

716 Printer
INPUT-OUTPUT: 716 PRINTER

§

081.

.12

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

. 12

Description

The usual printer adjustment operations may be controlled manually by keys and switches located on the
printer. In addition, the printer has lamps which
indicate to the operator different printer conditions
that may be present .

. . . . . . . Printer .
Type 716.

The plugboard can also be wired so that a variety of
conditions can activate a pulse which can be sensed
by program. These conditions include end-of-page,
printer busy, and alteration switch setting.

The 716 is a modification of the 407 Accounting Machine. The 716 prints data from 120 print wheels
which form a solid bank 12 inches wide. Each print
wheEll has 48 characters, including all the numerals,
all the letters of the alphabet, and 12 special characters engraved on its rim. A line of printing is
pitched at ten characters to the inch. Line spacing
is either 6 or 8 single spaced lines-to-the-inch controlled by a manually-operated lever.
Printing format is controlled by the arrangement of
data in storage and a plugboard, which is wired to
perform specific functions according to the requirements of the operation. The printer has a tape-controlled carriage which uses a standard 12-channel
paper tape to control the skipping and spacing of
forms. Functions of the carriage, such as changing
or suppressing line spacing, selecting the channel
on the punched tape to control skipping, or sensing
end-of-page, may be controlled through various hubs
on the plugboard. Forms up to 22 inches long may
be used.

Description (Contd.)

The program must control the entire output operation from starting the first print cycle, sending
pairs of words to the printer at each index pOint, and
checking echo pulses. It is possible to interleave up
to 322 milliseconds of other computing in a 400millisecond cycle, but this requires careful programming. When using standard routines, virtually
no overlapping is possible, but the routines utilize
the spare time for such operations as conversion between BCD and card image.
. 13

Availability:...... not in production, can be
rented or purchased only
as used or rebuilt equipment.

.14

First Delivery:

.

December, 1955 .

.2
PHYSICAL FORM
Printing is controlled by the stored program. Words
to be printed are stored in core storage in the form
.21 Drive Mechanism
of a "card image." Each card image contains one
record of 72 characters. The card image is repre.211 Drive past the head:
marginally punched pin
sented by twenty-four 36-bit words, two words per
feed continuous forms
row of the card image. To print a full line, two
driven by forms tractor.
print actions, with no intervening line feed, are nec- .212 Reservoirs:
none .
essary. However, if less than 73 characters are
printed, only one print action is necessary, and by
• 22 Sensing and Recording Systems
use of the plugboard, the 72 characters can be arranged in, several distinctly different layouts. When • 221 Recording system: .
engraved wheels .
two print actions are required for each line, the ef• 222 Sensing system:
impulses from print wheels .
fective lines per minute are usually halved.
.23 MultiEle Copies
The print wheels generate "echo pulses" which may
be used, by proper programming, to check the
.231 Maximum number
printing. The echo pulses indicate the position of
Interleaved carbon:
1 + 5.
the print wheels at 8-3, 8-4, and 9 through 1 print
.232 Types of master
positions. No check is pos sible on the 0-, 11-, and
Multilith: .
yes.
12-zone times. It is possible to check the printing
Xerox:
yes.
of all characters except zero. In continuous printSpirit:
yes.
ing, without echo checking, 322 milliseconds of the
print cycle of 400 milliseconds are available for
.24 Arrangement of Heads
computing. The 78 milliseconds difference is required for executing the printer instructions and
Use of station: .
printing.
synchronization of mechanical and electrical comStacks: .
I.
ponents. When using echo checking, 313 millisecHeads/stack: .
120.
onds of the print cycle are available for computing.
Method of use: .
1 line at a time.

......

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406:081. 250
§

IBM 704

081.

. 25

Range of Symbols
Numerals:
10
Letters: . . .
26
Special: . . .
9
Alternatives: .
FORTRAN set: .
Required COBOL set:· .
Total: . . . . . . . • . 45.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

. 31

Form of Storage

o through 9.
A through Z.
$.+. -/%*
optional.
optional.
no.

.442 Input-output areas:
• 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
. 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . •
.445 Table control: . •
.446 Synchronization:.
· 447 Synchronizing aids:

continuous fanfold form pin
feed punched stationery.
single sheets.
roll paper.
address tape.

1 word.
no.
no.
programmed.
wait on row index pulse.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks
up to 120 print positions
per line .

.511 Size of block:
.311 Medium: • . . . .

core storage •

.512 Block demarcation
Output: . . . • . .

.52

one
to
one
to

WRS (PRINTER) and up
24 CPYs.
RDS (PRINTER) and up
46 CPYs.

Input-Output Operations

.312 Phenomenon: . . • . . . printing.
.32

.521 Input:. .
· 522 Output: .

Positional Arra~ment
1 line at 6 or 8 lines per
inch.
120 print positions at 10
per inch.

.321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:

......

. 33

Coding: . . .

.34

Format Compatibility:. ruM 1418. optical character
reader can read a single
line.
ruM 1428. can read a
series of lines.

.35

. 353 Maximum margins
Left: •
Right: . . . . •
.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

4.75 to 16.75 inches .
1 to .22 by 1/6 inches at
6 lines/in.
1 to 22 by 1/8 inches at
8 lines/in.
19.4 inches.
19.4 inches.

built into processor (functions carried out by programmed instructions).

1.
none.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 1.
. 432 Restrictions: . . . . • . none.
.44

Data Transfer Control

. 441 Size of load: • . . . . . 1 word •
10/62

• 524 Skipping: . .

• 525 Marking: . .
· 526 Searching: .

Connection to Slstem

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
. 43

as in Data Code Table No.
3.

Physical Dimensions

. 351 Overall width:
.352 Length
Forms: . . .

.42

• 523 Stepping: • .

none.
start printer cycle.
copy a word as necessary
to printer by individual
instruction; up to 24 per
print action.
. . • • . . step size 1 or 2 lines. set
on plugboard; occurs before printing.
suppress step before print
in cycle.
call extra step after print
in cycle.
. . . . . • controlled by carriage paper tape loop with punched
channels 1 to 12;
skip channel 11. less than 7
lines before print in a
cycle with no extra step.
skip channel 11. less than 3
lines after print in a cycle
as an extra step.
skip channell to 10. following print in a cycle.
up to form .length .using
extra cycles .
skip channel 1 to 10. up to
2 inches following print in
cycle with no extra cycles.
end-of-page signal from
channel 12 can be plugged
to give a skip on another
channel.
none.
. . .
none.
• • .

.. 53

Code Translation:

· 54

Format Control
Control: . • . .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement: .
Suppress zeros: .
Insert character:·
Insert space s:
Section sizes: . •

automatic from card image •

program and plugboard.
4 manual alteration
switches.
plugboard.
plugboard.
plugboard.
plugboard.
plugboard.

INPUT-OUTPUT: 716 PRINTER

§

406:081.550

081.

· 55

.56

Control Operations
Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format: . .
Select code: . . .
Suppress print in cycle:
Short skip control: ..

yes.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.
inhibits interlock.

Testable Conditions:.

the program can test one
exit hub signal from the
plugboard; this can be
wired for a variety of
conditions including exhausted, end-of-page,
busy, and even disabled.

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions
I: . . . . .

II:
III:
IV:

.62

using short skip and optimum choices of paper
feed up to 2 inches.
not using short skips.
line less than 73 char.
line more than 72 char_

.63

150 lines/min.
75 lines/min.
75 lines/min.
50 lines/min.

Condition

Processor:
Processor:

best coding
simplest
coding

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments
Adjustment

Method

Vertical
alignment:
Horizontal
alignment:

©

150 lines/min.
75 lines/min.

Demands on System

Component

Speeds

· 621 Nominal or peak speed: 150 lines per minute for 72
char (one print cycle per
line).
75 lines per minute for 120
char (two print cycles per
line).
· 622 Important parameters
Wait for synchronization when starting
from rest:
400. 0 m. sec max.
280.0 m. sec avg.
400 m. sec.
Cycle time:.
Printing internal: ;
78 m. sec.
Skipping speed:. .
6 to 7 in/sec.
Available minimum computing time, m. sec:
Continuous
From Rest
between select and
transfer of data:
173
58
between pairs of
data transfers:.
13
13
between transfers in a
pair of transfers: .
0.5
0.5
between last copy and next select
when checking: . . 12
12
16
16
when not checking:
Actual average mechanical time, m. sec.
between select and
transfer of data: . 210
280
between pairs of data
transfers: . . . . . 16
16
between transfers in a
pair of transfers: .
0.5
0.5
between last copy and next select
when checking: . . 12
12
when not checking:
16
16

single point clutch .

• 623 Overhead: . . . .
. 624 Effective speeds
I & III:
I & IV: • . • . .
II & III
up to 4 inches:
4 to 6 inches:
II & IV
up to 4 inches:
4 to 6 inches:

Form
thickness:

Percentage

78
388

19.5.
97. O.

Comment

platen and
vernier knobs.
adjustable
forms tractor.
dial

Line spacing: shift cam

.72

m.sec
per
cycle

varies distance between print wheels
and platen.
may be setforeither 6 or 8Unes/in.

Other Controls
Function

Form

Comment

Alteration switches
I, 2, 3, 4:
Stop before
printing:

toggle switches

used to alter plugboard.

toggle switch

Test:

toggle switch

Form stop:

toggle switch

Print:

key

Stop:

key

Start:

key

removes printer from
automatic status prior
to printing each line.
allows print cycle key to
initiate a print cycle
for test operations.
turns "form" light on
when paper is exhausted.
initiates a print cycle
under special conditions.
inhibits printing and
makes unit "not ready·.
makes unit "ready" for
channel equipment.

Restore (carriage control):

key

restores carriage to home
position.

key

stops carriage operation.

key

advances form.

Stop (carriage
control):
Space (carriage
control):

1962 by AuerbQch Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406:081.730

§

IBM 704

.8

081.

. 73

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

Loading and U'nloading
Error

.731 Volumes handled: . .
. 732 Replenishment time:.
. 733 Adjustment time:

10/62

continuous or single-sheet
forms.
2 to 3 hours •
printer needs to be stopped.
3 to 5 mins •

Recording:

Check or
Interlock

Action

programmed echo
check
interlock.

program.

none

uncertain.
tums OD ind ica tor
and stops priDter.

Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:

check

Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:

none.
none

wrong output.

406:091.100

IBM 704
Input-Output
727 Magnetic Tape Unit
INPUT-OUTPUT: 727 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

§

.12

091.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Magnetic Tape Unit
Type 727
Models 1, 2, and 3.

Description:
These tape units are used in mM's 650, 705 and
7080 systefns as well as in the 704. In tape width,
density and format, they are compatible with the
729 and 7330 tape units. There are three models:
models 1, 2, and 3. Only model 3 is now in production. The essential differences in the models
are only in appearance and housing.
Up to ten Type 727 Magnetic Tape Units can be connected to a 704 configuration through a 753 Tape
Controller, but only one unit can read or write at a
time.
The data on the tape may be recorded in one of two
modes, binary or BCD. Each is recorded in rows of
seven bits: six data bits and one parity bit per row,
even parity for BCD and odd parity for binary. Each
.block is recorded with a final row which contains an
even parity bit for each track. In the binary mode,
a 36-bit word is copied directly onto 6 rows; the
original data being binary patterns or characters in
the binary 6-bit code. In the BCD mode each word
is considered as being 6 characters in binary 6-bit
code in storage and BCD 6-bit c'ode on tape; the conversion between the two codes is automatic.
Reading or writing is performed at the rate of 2,500
words or 15,000 characters a second while the tape
is moving at 75 inches per second. (When writing
1,000 character blocks with a check sum, an effective speed of 12,900 characters per second 'can be
maintained.) Records are written or read by a single-gap head under control of the program. This
read/write head is preceded by an erase head which
erases the tape prior to writing. A reel on which
data has been written may be protected from inadvertent writing by removing a circular plastic insert from the back of the file reel. Tapes are read
or written in a forward direction only.
Writing is initiated by programming a write select
(WRS) instruction followed by a series of copy (CPY)
instructions. The W RS instruction starts the selected tape in motion and selects the recording
mode. A single CPY instruction causes the transfer
of one word between core storage and the controller.
Reading is initiated by executing a read select (RDS)
instruction followed by a series of CPY instructions.
The RDS instruction starts the selected tape in motion, selects the checking mode and clears the multiplier quotient (MQ) register. Each CPY causes one
word read from tape to be transferred to core stor-

©

Description (Cont'd)
age. When end-of-record or file is reached, no
data is transferred and the CPY acts as a skip instruction in this case.
There is no automatic read-back check but the tape
may be written, backspaced and then read to perform a check, and if in error, backspaced and rewritten under program control up to 10 times. Both
row and track parity are checked when reading.
Some error correction may be done on reading an
incorrect block provided that a check sum was recorded on writing. This can be accomplished by
using the CAD instruction, then recording the check
sum with the block. By using the CAD instruction on
reading, the check sum can be regenerated in the
accumulator. If after each CAD the parity indicator
is checked, any word read in error can be isolated.
If only one word read was in error, a simple routine involving the check sums and the error word
will correct the error. It is convenient to use this
procedure because very little useful computation
can be done while tape is read or written, and the
check sum may even pick up errors that the parity
circuitry does not. The correction procedure is
useful in reconstructing a tape that has been broken
and carefully spliced or for drop-outs caused by
tape flaws or dust.
During read and write operations, the MQ register
is used as a buffer between core storage and the
tape units; therefore, the MQ cannot be used for any
divide or multiply operations between successive
CPY instructions.
Each input-output transfer must be carefully programmed. When writing, 324 microseconds of
other computing can be performed between the
CPYs. If the CPY is delayed longer, the end-ofrecord gap will be written. When reading, 276
microseconds of other computing can be performed
between copies. If the CPY is delayed longer, the
transfers -will cease and the tape will be stopped at
the next gap, and the processor stalls.
The normal rewind of the tape is 75 inches per
!?econd for a low-speed rewind and 500 inches per
second for a high-speed rewind. A high-speed rewind is initiated when more than 450 feet of tape has
been used. Rewinding a full reel of tape (2,400 feet)
takes approximately 1.2 minutes.
Each tape unit contains manual controls for placing
the unit under computer control or removing the unit
from computer control, loading tape, unloading tape,
address selection, and lamps to indicate various
conditions that may exist within the unit. A mechanical interlock is mounted in the reel door to prevent
tape operation when the door is open.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406:091.120
§

IBM 704

091.

.12

Description (Contd.)
Opti9nal Features
Backspace file (BSF) instruction. This instruction
may be used to backspace an entire file or to locate
the beginning of file on tape. An on-line/off-line
switch is available.

.13

Availability:

.14

First Delivery: .

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

• 211 Drive past the head: .
. 212 Reservoirs
Number:
Form:
Capacity: .
.213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive:

. 22

.324 Track Use
Data:
Redundancy' check:
Timing:
Control signals: .
Unused:
Total:

only model 3 is in production. model 1 and 2 can
be rented or purchased
only as used or rebuilt
equipment.

.325 Row use
Data:
Redundancy check:.
Timing:
Control signals: .
Unused:
Gap: (inter-record)
Gap: (end-of-file).

December, 1955.

.33

Coding:

.34

Format Compatibility:

pinch roller friction .

2.

.35

vacuum.
approx. 7 feet.
motor .
motor.

.351 Over-all width: .
.352 Length:

.23

Multiple Copies:

.24

Arrangement of Heads

O.
O.
7.

1 to N.
1.

O.
O.
O.
0.75 inch.
3.75.
one character to a row,
using 6 bits as in Data
Code Table.No. 2 or 4 •
mM 729 low density .
mM 7330 low density.

Physical Dimensions

.4

CONTROLLER

magnetic head .
magnetic head .
yes, one gap read/write
head.

.41

Identity:.

.42

Connection to System

up to 3 units can be connected to common output
at one time to prepare
duplicate tapes.

0.5 inch.
30 to 2,400 feet per reel.

Use of station:
Stacks:
Method of use:
Use of station:

erase.
1.
erase tape before writing.
read/write.

Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

0.375 inch.
1.

.43

Connection to Device

7.
1 row at a time.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

. 44

.311 Medium:.
.312 Phenomenon:

plastic tape with magnetizable surface.
magnetization.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:

Tape Control.
Type 753.

1.
.421 On-Line:
.422 Off-Line: (On-line off-line
switch is available)
Associated equipment
Use
Tape to Card:
Type 758 Card Punch Control.
Card to Tape:
Type 759 Card Reader
Control.
Tape to 717 Printer: .
Type 757 Printer Control.
Tape to 720, 730
Printer:.
Type 760 Control and
Storage.

.431 Devices per controller:
. 432 .Restrictions:

10/62

1.

o (self clocking).

Sensing and Recording Systems

•221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system:

.32

6.

1 to N characters at 200
characters/inch.
7 tracks.

10 .
none .

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:
• 442 Input-outPut areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
. 445 Table control:
. 446 Synchronization:
. 447 Synchronizing aids:

1 word .
core storage .
1 word.

no .
possible by program •
programmed.
wait for next word .

406:091.500

INPUT-OUTPUT: 727 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
~

091.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

. 51

Blocks

. 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation:
Input: .

· 1 to N words .

Output: .
.52

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input:
. 522 Output:
.523 Stepping:.
.524 Skipping:
. 525 Marking:.

.526 Searching: .
.53

Code Translation:

.54

Format Control:

.55

Control Operations
Disable: .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload:
Record "End-ofFile":

.56

· 0.75 inch inter-record or
block gap.
· no CPY at row time.

• 621 Nominal or peak speed: .15,000 char/sec .
.622 Important parameters
Gap passing time with
no stop: . . . . . . . 10.8 in/sec.
Start time: . . . . .. 10 m. sec .
Stop time: .. . . . . 7 m. sec.
Computing time available between:
Select and write
instructions: .
7 m. sec.
Select and read
instructions:.
3 m. sec.
Two consecutive read
or write
instructions: .
0.288 m. sec.
Tape speed: . . .
75 in/sec.
Character Time: .
67 f.L sec/char.
Rewind Speed:
high speed: 500 in/sec.
(avg).
low speed: 75 in/sec.
· 623 Overhead: • . . • . . . stop time of one tape can be
overlapped with start time
of another.
.624 Effective speeds: .
15, OOON/(N + 162)·
char/sec.

1 block forward with cut
off as programmed.
1 block forWard .
one block forward or backward.
optional BSF to backspace
to "End-of-File" mark.
End-of-File: 3.75 inch
blank space followed by
a special character (tape
mark).
End-of-Record or block gap; • (\3
0.75 inch blank space on
tape.
none.
matched codes for binary
6-bit.
automatic for BCD 6-bit.
none.

no.
no.
no.
binary or BCD.
specified by I/O instruction.
yes.
no.

Demands on System
Component

Condition

Processor:
Processor:

Writing
Reading

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:...... none.

· 72

Other Controls
Function
Address
selection:

.6

PERFORMANCE

. 61

Conditions

. 62

Speeds

no.
no.
no.
yes, 14 feet.
no.
yes (write only).
yes.
.73

21-

36.

dial

determines tape unit
address.

ring on back
of reel

inhibits writing when
removed from reel.

Load
Rewind:

button

Reset:

button

Start:

button

lowers tape into column and rewinds tape
to load point.
turns off ready light and
changes from highspeed rewind to slowspeed.
places tape unit in
ready status.

File protection:

yes.

Percentage

Comment

Form

Testable Conditions
Disabled:
,
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:
Sense "End-of-File":
Error in last word
read:
Error in last block
read:

m. sec per
word
0.084
0.144

Loading and Unloading

yes.
731 Volumes handled
Storage
Reel: . . . . .
. 732 Replenishment time: .

yes.

· 734 Optimum reloading
period: • • • . . .

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Capacity
2,400 feet.
1. 0 to 1. 5 mins .
tape unit needs to be
stopped .
7 mins.

_ 10/62

406:091.800

§

IBM 704

091 .

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:

Check or
Interlock
none.
lateral + longitudinal
parity
none.
none.
yes
reflective spot or
tape mark
yes
interlock

Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Improper Command
alarm
Sequence:

Action
indicator + alarm.

see reading.
indicator.
halt the unit.
stalls processor.
indicator and halts
processor~

10/62

406:091.801

INPUT-OUTPUT: 727 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

§

091.

EFFECTIVE SPEED
IDM727

1,000,000
7
4

2

100,000
7
4
~

~

2

Characters Per
Second

/

10,000

~

......

~

~

~

7

~

,

4

2

~

/

1,000

~

/

7
4

2

100
2

fa

4

7

2

100

4

2

1,000

4

7

10,000

Characters Per Block

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406: 101.1 00

.STANOARD-

II

EDP
'[PORI,

IBM 704
Input. Output

CRT
INPUT·OUTPUT: CATHODE RAY TUBE OUTPUT RECORDER AND DISPLAY

§

101.

.12

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity: • • . . . • .

.12

Description

A point is specified by its coordinates in a square
1024x1024 pOSition matrix. A spot can be recorded
in either normal or high intensity. to distinguish
certain pOints. Two points four increments apart
appear separate. and points in adjacent positions appear as a smooth line. The time to display one
pOint is 140 microseconds.

Cathode Ray Tube Output.
740 CRT Recorder.
780 CRT Display.

An axis, is specified by the coordinates of a point and
two control bits to denote that a line is to be generated from that point. The control bits will cause a
sweep to be made either up to the top of the frame
across to the right of the frame. or. at 45 d,:grees up
and to the right of the point. The tIme to display
one axis is approximately 220 microseconds.

The 740 CRT Recorder and 780 CRT Display Units
are used as output units to display data in the form
of dots under control of a stored program. Data is
presented point by pOint to form alphameric characters. symbols. curves. or any plot desired; each
point being controlled by the cOlp,puter program. On
the 740 unit. data is displayed on a 7-inch CRT and
recorded, on 35mm commercial film. Simultaneously. the data pOints can be displayed on the 21- inch
CRT of a 780 unit.

The 7-inch CRT of the 740 Recorder uses a display
area of 3.366 inches by 3.366 inches and has a persistency of a few microseconds. The manufacturer
claims that position stability of dots is better than
O. 1 percent of full deflection and a maximum error
of 0.5 percent pOSitional accuracy may be expected.
The 35mm camera has capacity for 100 feet of perforated or unperforated film which can be easily
'loaded.

The 740 unit can be used independently of the 780.
but the 780 cannot be used independently of the 740.
Conversion of the digital data to analog voltages is
performed in the 740. The 780. therefore. can operate only when connected to this unit.
Dots are displayed at a rate that exceeds 7.000 a
second. Three instructions. write. copy and sense.
are. required to initiate the recording and displ,ay operations. The write instruction selects the umts;
the copy instruction transfers the data from storage
to the deflection register in the' 740; and the sense
instruction is used to advance the film to a new
frame. An interlock is provided which delays the
execution of a copy instruction when film is being
advanced. One data word is used to specify thEl x
and y coordinates of a point written. Da~a transfers
to the CRT units are through the MQ reglsterl therefore. all data in this register from previous operations is destroyed.
Two types of output can be recorded. a single point
or an axis.

©

Description (Contd.)

The 21-inch CRT of the 780 Display uses a display
area of 10 inches by 15 inches and has a persistency
of approximately two seconds. Depending on the
amount of ambient light. the persistency may vary
from 0 to 7 seconds. Accuracy is 1 percent of full
deflection and a dot on a square matrix will not drift
more than 1 percent of full deflection in one hour.
The 780 has its own controls for focus. axis intensi·
ty. dot intenSity. vertical and horizontal gain. and
vertical and horizontal centering.
. 13

.14

Availability: • . . • • not in production, can be
rented or purchased onl1
as used or rebuilt equip,
ment.
First Delivery:
Decembe'r. 1956

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporaled

10/62

406:111.100

II
•

STANDARD

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 704
Simul taneous Operations

SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS

~

.3

Ill.

.1

SPECIAL UNITS

• 11

Identity: . .

.12

Description

...

F: . . . . . . . . . . read magnetic tape or
drum, or write drum (the
period during which data
is being transferred).
G: . . . . . . . . . . write the same block of
data on 1, 2, or 3 magnetic tapes simultaneous1y.
H:
read or punch a card.
I:
print a line.
J:
space form on printer.
K:
rewind or backspace all of
the magnetic tapes (10
max.) connected to system.

none.

The IBM 704 is not capable of any simultam:ous operations; however, overlapped computinK during input-output operations is possible. In a sense this
mode of operation is mandatory because the processor must select a unit and execute a &ta transfer
instruction (CPY or CAD) for each word transferred.
The kind of computing that is usually performed in
overlapped operation is peculiar to the unit selected.
The computation usually involves editing, radix conversion, and error checking. Most of the available
software for input-output functions utilizes this input-output time overlap to perform the required functions and permit the input-output units to run at
their maximum speeds.

.4

CONFIGURATION CONnone.
DITIONS:

.3

CLASSES OF OPERATION
A:,

B:
C:
D:

E:

RULES
a + b + c = at most 1.
d + e + f + g + h + i = at most 1.
a + j + k = at most 3.
b+ (d+ e) = at most 2.
(b + c) + (h + i) = at most 2.
c + (h + g) = at most 2.
(d + f + g + h) + j + k = at most 3.

Input-output operations cannot be overlapped with
each other because only one unit can be "selected"
by the program at one time. Selecting another unit"
logically disconnects the previously selected unit.

.2

CLASSES OF OPERATION (Contd.)

.5

TABLE
Class

compute, general.
compute, editing and conversion.
compute, input-output checking and control.
mechanical acceleration
time (between unit selection and first data transfer) for one of these units:
card reader or card punch.
. . . • . . . . . . mechanical acceleration
time for the printer.

©

Sets of Possible Simultaneous Operations

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i

1

j

1
k

k

1

1

1
1

1
1

1

1

1
1
1

g
1
1
1
k

k

1
k

k

k-f*

k-g

* one tape only, not including drum.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406: 121.1 01
•

STANDARD

EDP

_

IBM 704

'EFO'TS

Instruction List

INSTRUCTION LIST
§

121.
INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

OPERATION
Address

Tag

Accumulator (AC) bits are called S, Q, P, 1 thru 35.
Multiplier-Quotient (MQ) bits are called S, 1 thru 35. Q
and P hold overflows, S's sign.
Fixed Point Arithmetic

x

T

Y

X
X
X

T
T

Y
Y

T

MPY
MPR

X

Y
Y

X

T
T

DVH

X

T

Y

DVP

X

T

Y

ADD
ADM

SUB
SBM

Y

(AC and MQ use bits S, 1 thru
35 unless overflow in AC, then
P and Q)

(Y) + (AC)~AC
I (Y) I + (AC)~AC
(AC) - (Y) --?o- AC
(AC) - I (Y) I -?>- AC
(Y) x (MQ) ~ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ
(Y) x (MQ) --?o- (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ, and if MQl = 1;
AC + I--:>AC
(MQ) .;. (Y)~ MQ (quotient), AC (remainder). If
overflow, set divide-check indicator and halt
processor.
Same as for DVH except processor is not halted.
Floating Point Arithmetic

Y
Y
Y

T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y

FDH

X
X
X
X
X
X

FDP

X

T

Y

FAD
UFA
FSB
UFS

FMP

T

Y

(Y) + (AC) ~ (AC), (MQ).
(Y) + (AC) ~ (AC), (MQ).
(Y) + (AC) ~ (AC), (MQ).
(Y) + (AC) -?>- (AC), (MQ).
(Y) x (MQ)-?>- (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ.
(AC)';' (Y)~MQ (quotient), AC (remainder). If
overflow, set divide-check indicator and halt
processor.
Same as for FDH except processor is not halted.
Data Transfer (Arithmetic)

LDQ
STQ
SLQ
STO
S1'2
STP

X
X
X
X
X
X

STD
STA
CLA
CLS

X
X
X
X

Y
Y

T
T
T

Y

T
T

Y
Y
Y

T

Y

T
T
T

Y

T

Y
Y

(Y)~(MQ).

(MQ) -?>- (Y).
(MQ)S, 1-17~(Y)S, 1-17'
(AC) -?>-(Y).
O~ (Y); sign is plus.
(AC)P, 1, 2 -?>- (Y)S, 1, 2'
(AC)3-17 -?>-(Y)3-17.
(AC)21-35~ (Y)21-35.
(Y)
(AC).
(-Y)
(AC).
Data Transfers (Logical)

CAL
SLW

X
X

Y

T
T

Y

(Y)~(AC)
(AC)~(Y)

Logical Operations (Uses ACP, 1 through 35)
ACL

ANA
ANS
ORA
ORS

X
X
X

X
X

Y
Y

T
T
T
T
T

Y

Y
Y

©

(Y) + (AC)~AC
(AC) "AND" (Y)---;;. AC
(AC) "AND" (Y)~Y
(AC) "OR" (Y)~AC
(AC) "OR" (Y)~ Y

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

IBM 704

406:121.102
§

121.

INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.
INSTRUCTION

Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

Tag

OPERATION
Address
Shift Operations (All are modulo 256 places)

ALS
ARS
LLS
LRS
LGL
RQL

x

T

X
X

T
T

Y
Y
Y

X

T
T
T

Y
Y

X
X

Y

(AC) shifted left Y, sign unchanged.
(AC) shifted right Y, sign unchanged.
(AC) and (MQ) shifted left Y, (MQ)S-+ (AC)S'
(AC) and (MQ) shifted right y, (AC)S~ (MQ)S'
(AC) and (MQ) shifted left Y, signs unchanged.
(MQ) rotated left Y.
Control Operations

NOP
HPR

X
X

T

Y
Y

HTR

X

T

Y

TRA
TZE
TNZ
TPL

X
X
X

T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y

TMI

X

T

Y

TOV

X

T

Y

TNO
TQP

X
X

T
T

Y
Y

TQO

X

T

Y

TLQ
TSX

X
X

T
T

Y
Y

TXI

D

T

:y

TXH

D

T

Y

TXL

D

T

Y

TIX

D

T

Y

TNX

D

T

Y

TTR

X

T

Y

CAS

X

T

Y

LXA

X

T

Y

LXD

X

T

Y

X

T

Next instruction in sequence is executed.
Halts processor; processor steps to next instruction
when Start key is depressed.
Halts processor; processor steps to instruction in
location Y when Start key is depressed.
Next instruction is taken from location Y.
(AC) = D, next instruction taken from location Y.
(AC) f D, next instruction taken from location Y.
If sign bit of AC positive, next instruction taken from
location Y. Sign bit negative, next instruction
executed.
If sign bit of AC negative, next instruction taken from
location Y. If sign bit positive, next instruction
executed.
If overflow indicator on, it is turned off and processing continues from location Y.
If overflow indicator off, continue from location Y.
If sign bit of MQ positive, next instruction taken
from location Y.
If MQ overflow indicator turned off, next instruction
taken from location Y.
(MQ) < (AC) next instruction taken from location Y.
2's complement of location Y placed in index
register T. *
Adds the value of D to t.1]e number in index register
T and takes next instruction from Y. *
If number in index register T greater than value of
D, next instruction taken from location Y. *
If number in index register T is less than or equal to
the value.of D, next instruction taken from location Y. *
If number in index register T is greater than the
value of D, the number in index register T is
reduced by the value of D and next instruction is
taken from Y. *
If number in index register T is greater than the
value of D, number in index register T is reduced
by the value of D and transfers to the next instruction; .otherwise the index is unchanged and the next
instruction is taken from Y. *
Processor takes its next instruction from location Y
and proceeds whether or not in trapping mode.
(Y) < (AC) next instruction executed. If (Y) = (AC)
skip next instruction. If (Y) > (AC) skip next two
ins tructions.
Address portion of (Y) replaces number in index
register T. *
Decrement portion of (Y) replaces number in index
register T. *
'" Not indexable.

10/62

406: 121.1 03

INSTRUCTION LIST

§

121.

INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.
INSTRUCTION

Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

OPERATION

Tag

Address

SXD

X

T

y

PAX

X

T

y

PDX

X

T

y

PXD

X

T

y

(T) replaces decrement part of location
location Y. *
Address part of (AC) replaces the number in the
index register T. *
Decrement part of (AC) replaces the number in the
index register T. *
O~(AC) and number in index register T is placed
in the decrement part of the AC. *
Input-Output Operations

lIDS
WRS
BST
WEF

X
X
X
X

T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y

REW
ETT

X
X

T
T

Y
Y

LDA

X

T

Y

CPY

X

T

Y

PSE

X

T

X

MSE

X

T

X

Start the unit specified by Y in the read mode.
Start the unit specified by Y in the write mode.
Backspace tape designated by Y one record.
An end-of-file gap and mark and a redundancy
character is written on the tape on unit Y.
Rewind tape unit Y.
When tape indicator light is on, light is turned off
and next instruction executed. If indicator is off,
the ETT instruction is ignored and the next
instruction is skipped.
The first location of the record to be read or written
on the drum is Y.
Transfer one word between storage and an inputoutput unit. If the transfer occurs, then execute
the next instruction; otherwise, halt the processor.
During input operations, if an end-of-file condition
is enc01.mtered, no data is transferred and the next
instruction is skipped. If an end-of-record condition was encountered no data is transferred and
the next two instructions are skipped.
Provides a means for testing the status of sense
switches, controlling sense lights, and the sampling of or sending of impulses to the printer and
punch. Other functions include:
(1) Clear Magnitude (AC)
(2) Low order bit test (AC)
(3) Change sign (AC)
(4) Set sign plus (AC)
(5) Complement magnitude (AC)
(6) Enter trapping mode
(7) Round (MQh x 2- 35 + (AC)~AC
(8) Divide check test
Provides a means for testing and turning off the sense
lights. Other functions include:
(1) P bit test (AC)
(2) Leave floating trap mode
(3) Enter floating trap mode
(4) Set sign minus
(5) Leave trapping mode
(6) Redundancy tape test
(7) End-of-tape test

Optional Instructions (see Central Processor
Description)
Copy and Add Logical Word (CAD)
Leave Floating Trap Mode (LFM)
Enter Floating Trap Mode (EFM)
Backspace File (BSF)

*
©

Not indexable.

1962 by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406:121.104
§

IBM 704

121.

INSTRUCTION LISt NOMENCLATURE

Symbol

Definition

MSB:
LSB:
AC: •
MQ: .

most significant bit.
least significant bit.
accumulator.
multiplier-quotient.
contents of Y.
absolute value of the
contents of Y.

(Y): •
I (Y) I

In the instruction format:
X is part of the operation code.
T is the Tag (index specification).
Y is the address.
N. B. All address fields are indexable unless specifically noted.

10/62

406: 131.1 00
IBM 704
Coding Specimen

SAP
CODING SPECIMEN: SAP

§

131.

.1

CODING SPECIMEN

INS6

INS2
INS4
INSU

INS5
INS3

INSX

TSX
COM
PAX
CAL
ARS
PAX
ADD
STA
CAL
STA
LDQ
LGL
ALS
RQL
ACL
TNX
TIX
SLW
LXA
LDQ
TXI
LGL
TIX
SLW
LXD
LXD
TRA
SXD
SXD
LXD
LXA
CAL
TRA

LFS,2

LOCATE FIELD START

0,2
INSN
18
0,4
UDB
INSU
STAB + 1, 1
INS2
-1,2

SET IR-2= ICOM(A+Q)

(

)

SET IR-4=N
(UD+N)
SET UP INITIAL SHIFT
GET FIRST PACKED WORD
INITIAL SPIN

6
6
),4
INS3,4,I
INS4,I,1
-1,2
6A,1
0,2
INS4,2,-I
6
INS5,1,1
-1,2
INSB,2
INSC,4
1,2
INSB,2
INSC,4
XTRR,I
XTRC,2
XTRN
INS6

(

INSERT
TEST FOR N CHAR.
TEST FOR 6 CHAR.
STORE PACKED WORD
SET IR-l=6
GET NEXT PACKED WORD
STEP P. W. ADDR.
SPIN LAST
PACKED WORD
RESTORE
AND
RETURN
SAVE I. R.
SET IR-I=(6-REM)
SET IR-2= lCOM(A+Q)
SETN

DECIMAL TO BINARY CONVERSION
DTB

DBI

DB3

SXD
SXD
CLA
PAX
TOV
CLA
TSX
STA
STZ
LDQ
CLA
TLQ
ADD
TXL
STO
ALS
ADD
ADD
STO
TIX

XA,1
XB,2
1,4
0,1
DBI
2,4
XTR,2
DB3
Tl
9A
( ),1
DB4
Tl
DB5,I,1
Tl
3
Tl
Tl
Tl
DB3,1,1

©

SAVE I. R.
GETN
SET IR-l=N
TURN OFF OV. TRIGGER
EXTRACT FIELD
TO BE CONVERTED
SET (UD+N)
CLEAR PARTIAL SUM
SET MQ=9
TEST FOR PURE DIGIT
TEST FOR UNITS DIGIT
PROGRAMMED
MULT.
BY
10

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

DPPI0224
DPP10225
DPP10226
DPP10227
DPPI0228
DPP10229
DPP 1023 0
DPP10231
DPP10232
DPP10233
DPPI0234
DPP10235
DPPI0236
DPP10237
DPP10238
DPP10239
DPP10240
DPPlO241
DPP10242
DPP10243
DPPI0244
DPP10245
DPP10246
DPP10247
DPPI0248
DPPlO249
DPPI0250
DPPI0251
DPP10252
DPP10253
DPP10254
DPPI0255
DPP10256
DPPI0257
DPPI0258
DPPI0259
DPP10260
DPP10261
DPP10262
DPP10263
DPP10264
DPP10265
DPP10266
DPP10267
DPP10268
DPP10269
DPP10270
DPPI0271
DPP10272
DPP10273
DPP10274
DPP10275
DPP10276
DPPI0277
DPP10278
DPP10279

10/62

406: 141.1 00
IBM 704
Data Code Tobi e
Internal
Magnetic Drum
Magnetic Tape

DATA CODE TABLE NO.1

,§

141.

.1

USE OF CODE:

binary 6- bit code.
internal.
magnetic drum.
magnetic tape.

.2

STRUCTURE OF' CODE

.21

Character Size:

.22

Character Structure

...

6 bits.

.221 More significant
pattern: • . . •

2 zone bits; B. A = 32. 16.

.222 Less significant
pattern: •••.

4 numeric bits; 8. 4. 2. 1.

.23

Character Codes

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0

16

32

0

0

&

-

Blank

1

1

A

J

/

2

2

B

K

S

3

3

C

L

T

4

4

D

M

U

5

5

E

N

V

6

6

F

0

W

7

7

G

P

X

8

8

H

Q

y

9

9

I

R

Z

-

oj.

+

10
11

=It

12

@

13
14
15

©

0

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

0

a

48

$

•

*

%

406: 142.1 00

STANDARD

•

EDP

•

REPORTS

IBM 704
Data Code Talile
Card Code

DATA CODE TABLE NO. 2

§

142.

•1

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

• 21

Character Size: .

• 23

Character Codes

punch card input-output •

OVERPUNCH

UNDERPUNCH
None

None

12

11

0

Blank

&

-

0

1 column .

+

12

&

&

11

-

cc

0

0

+

-

0

0

1

1

A

J

/

2

.2

B

K

S

3

3

C

L

T

4

4

D

M

U

5

5

E

N

V

6

6

F

~

W

7

7

G

P

X

8

8

H

Q

y

9

9

I

R

Z

+

-

~

$

,

*

%

8-2
8-3

#

8-4

@

0

oc

0

0

0

8-5
8-6
8-7

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

TM

+

11

10/62

•

...-

STANIlAAD

-

406:143.100

EDP

•

IBM 704
Data Code Table

R!PORTS

Printer Code

DATA CODE TABLE NO.3

§

143.

• 23

·1

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size: . . •

· 22

Character Structure

• 221 More significant
pattern: • . • • •

printer.

Character Codes

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

6 bits.

2 zone bits: B, A = 32, 16.

.222 Less significant
pattern: . • • . • . • • 4 numeric bits: 8, 4, 2, 1.

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0

16

32

48

-

+

0

Blank

1

1

/

J

A

2

2

S

K

B

3

3

T

L

C

4

4

U

M

D

5

5

V

N

E

6

6

W

0

F

7

7

X

P

G

8

8

Y

Q

H

9

9

Z

R

I

+

,

$

%

*

10

11
12

0

13
14
15

®

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406: 144.1 00
.SIAND/RD

II

EDP

IBM 704

R[fORTS

Data Code Table
Magnetic Tape

DATA CODE TABLE NO.4

•§

144.
BCD 6- bit code .
magnetic tape.

•1

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

. 21

Character Size: . . •

. 22

Character Structure

. 221 More significant
pattern:. . • • .

.222 Less significant
pattern:. • ••
.23

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0

0

6 bits •

2 zone bits: B, A = 32, 16.
•.• 4 numeric bits, 8, 4, 2, 1.

16
Blank

32

48

-

&

1

1

/

J

A

2

2

S

K

B

3

3

T

L

C

4

4

U

M

D

5

5

V

N

E

6

6

W

0

F

7

7

X

P

G

8

8

Y

Q

H

9

9

Z

R

I

10

0

oj.

-

+
0

11

#

,

$

12

@

%

*

Character Codes

0

0

13
14
15

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

TM

~

f

10/62

406: 151.1 00
•

II

STANDARD

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 704
P. O. Facilities

PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES

§

.13

151.

.1

UTILITY ROUTINES

• 11

Simulators of Other Computers
IBM 650
Reference:
SHARE.
May, 1959.
Date available: •
Description
SIFON4 MURA 650 ON 704 SIMULATOR
Simulates an IBM 650 with floating point and
indexing accumulators on an IBM 704 with 8, 192
words of core storage. SIFON4 is from 5 to 10
times slower than an optimized 650.

OR SRT3 (Contd.)
Description
SORT, ALGEBRAIC, MULTIWORD KEYS .
(WHOLE WORD KEYS ONLY)
Number items a power of 2. One-word clues
(which give loco of keys) are ordered to match
sorted keys. Only clues moved. Words of key
must be adjacent cells. WKG STG=2* (No. clues).
90 cells.
.14

IBM 709
Reference: . . •
SHARE.
Date available: •
May, 1959.
Description
LOADS BINARY ABSOLUTE, CORRECTION AND
TRANSFER
Cards-simulates 709 execution of program. By
means of control cards, logical trace is available.
By means of call card, memory dump is available.
CORR/471.
.12

Simulation by Other Computers
TYDAC
Reference:
SHARE.
May, 1959.
Date available: .
Description
TYDAC (PSEUDO COMPUTER) SIMULATOR
This computer is described in the book Digital
Computer Programming by D. C. McCJ;'acken.

.13

Data Sorting and Merging
CF0065
Reference: .
SHARE.
W*Nwords.
Record size:
Block size:
Nwords.
Key size: •.
K words.
File size: ••
any.
4 or more.
Number of tapes:.
May, 1959.
Date available: • •
.15
Description
GENERALIZED MEMORY SORTING ROUTINE
Places in ascending logic sequence a block of N
consecutive items of W words each in core storage using K words of each item as the sorting key.
Requires 100 storages + (W*N + N) COMMON.
OR SRT3
Reference:
Record size:
Block size:
Key size: •.
File size: ••
Number of tapes: •
Date available: ••

SHARE.
Optimum.
S O. 5 record.
Nwords.
2x blocks.
>4.
May, 1959.

©

Data Sorting and Merging (Contd.)

Report Writing
CEJ4G
Reference:
SHARE.
Date available: •
May, 1959.
Description
OUTPUT CONVERSION WITH FORMAT
CONTROL
A general output conversion routine (Binary to
BCD) with completely flexible locations and format control. Text may be interspersed anywhere
in print line and successive lines may be the
same or different. ForIT).at can be changed at
load time with use of CE 14G. Prepares BCD for
punching or printing (with or without over punched
signs).
CF 0013
Reference:
SHARE.
Date available: •
May, 1959.
Description
GENERALIZED, PACKAGED, ON- LINE
lNPUT- OUTPUT SUBROUTINE
Loads decimal data from variable field cards
directly into core storage with automatic conversion. Conversion may be fixed-to-fixed,
fixed-to-fleating, or floating-to-floating. Also
loads and/or prints card images. Prints decimal
data in variable format form directly from core
storage with automatic conversion. Conversion
may be fixed-to-fixed, floating-to-fixed, or floating-to-floating. Page identification is handled
automatically and column headings are op~ionally
automatic. Requires 1, 180 cells + 295 COMMON.
Data Transcription
BE CTXl
Reference:
SHARE.
Date available: •
May, 1959.
Description
BINARY/BCD CARD-TO-TAPE SIMULATOR
Simulates the card-to-tape converter, accepting
a mixed deck of Hollerith and SHARE standard
column binary cards and producing BCD and/or
Binary Card Images on tape 10. Column binary
control punches are not deleted from the binary
record written. Operates the card reader at full
speed. Non self-loading executive routine.
Program (30-332), Erasable storage (333-417)
octal.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406: 151.150
§

.17

051.

.15

IBM 704

MU EAS2
SHARE.
Reference:
Date available: .
May, 1959.
Description
MURA EFFECTIVE ADDRESS SEARCH ROUTINE
Self loading. Searches memory for any effective
address (i. e., account taken of indexing) set up
on panel switches. Account is taken of multiple
indices. Locations and words found are printed.
Occupies first 110 words of memory timing.
About 4 seconds per address searched plus one
line of print for each reference thereto found.

Data Transcription (Contd.)

MU R704
Reference: . • •
SHARE.
Date available: .
May, 1959.
Description
MURA REFLECTED 704
Causes the 704 to behave like a 407 in its role as
a reader and printer of cards. Fifty words program plus 24 words for lower binary loader.
Reader and printer operate at full speed.
UATPH2
Reference: . . •
SHARE.
Date available: •
May, 1959.
Description
OFF-LINE PRINTER SIMULATOR
Simulates the tape-to-off-line-printer machine.
The tape is redundancy-checked, and print wheel
echo-checking is performed. The carriage control (program device) is simulated. Printer
usually operates at something less than half
speed.
. 16

File Maintenance
DI TPCl
Reference:
SHARE.
Date available: .
May, 1959.
Description
TAPE CORRECTOR
Duplicates a BCD tape and makes insertions, deletions, or changes. Corrections may be read
on-line or off-line.

10/62

Other

.2

PROBLEM ORIENTED LANGUAGES
DPPI
Reference:
mM Manual.
Date available: .
May, 1959.
Description
The Data Processing Package is an integrated set
of subroutines which allow the 704 to operate on
binary coded decimal (BCD) information. Input,
output, information transfer and manipulation and
arithmetic are all performed on packed BCD data.
Regardless of which subroutines are called into
use, a section of the Data Processing Package
known as the Universal Routine must always be
present. The principal function of the Universal
Routine is to supply a mechanism for reference
to the various subroutines and to provide universal constants and erasable storage ..

406: 161.1 00
•

SlANDIRD

_EDP

.,-,

REPORTS

IBM 704
Process Oriented Language
FORTRAN II

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 704 FORTRAN II

§

161.

Divisions (Contd.)

The 704 FORTRAN II is an augmented version of the
original 704 FORTRAN I translator. A group of control statements establishing linkage to subroutines
and functions are available in this present version
which were not present in 704 FORTRAN I. The
principal difference between 704 FORTRAN II and
700 /7090 FORTRAN II is that 709/7090 FORTRAN II
operates under control of a "monitor system"
whereas 704 FORTRAN II does not include the supervisory monitor routine.

.22

Procedure Entities

It is possible to enter SAP coding directly into a
FORTRAN program by use of an S in column 1 of the
statement. Recognition of this character causes the
translator to assume the statement to be in SAP
form (using and generating FORTRAN II variables
and constants). Boolean statements are also possible.

.23

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: .

FORTRAN II Automatic
Coding System for the
IBM 704.

. 12

Origin: . . .

IBM Data Processing
Division.

• 13

Reference: .

IBM Manual C28- 6106 .

.14

Description

Program: . .
Subroutine: .
Statement: .

Function: .••

Hollerith item:. .

There is no provision in 704 FORTRAN II for double
precision floating point computation or manipulation
of complex variables.

statements.
subroutines.
statements.
characters; blanks are ignored, except in Alphameric field in FORMAT
statement.
statements.

Data Entities
Arrays:
Item: ..

Programs written in FORTRAN I may be compiled by
FORTRAN II compiler systems tapes.

. 15

COMMON: used to cause a
name to be common to
more than one segment
rather than local to each.
DIMENSION: describes the
elements in each dimension of an array or set of
arrays.
Optimizing statement: . FREQUENCY: optional
statement of ratio of expected use of alternative
paths at branch point or
average repetitions of
loops.

.21

Alphameric item:

all variables.
a floating point variable or
a constant.
an integer variable or a
constant.
a Hollerith item.
an alphameric item.
alphameric item that can
only be used for output.
alphameric item that can
only be input during a run;
it can be used for output
or as a format statement •

Publication Date:. . . . 1958.
.24

.2

PROGRAM STRUCTURE

.21

Divisions: . . . . . . . one division, composed of
the following types of
statements.
Procedure statements:. algebraic formulae.
comparisons and jumps.
input and output.
Data statements: . . . . FORMAT: describes the
layout, size, scaling and
code of input-output data.
EQUIVALENCE: used to
cause two variables to
have· a common location
or to specify synonyms.

©

Names

.241 Simple name formation
A to Z, 0 to 9.
Character set: . .
1 to 6 char.
Size: . . . . . . .
Avoid key words: .
no.
first char must be a letter.
Formation rule: .
a final F may not be used if
the name is subscripted
and/ or is more than 3
characters long.
. 242 Designators
Procedures
unsigned integer.
Statement label:
similar to variable being
Function label: .
defined, except 4 to 7
characters with a
terminal F.
Subroutine label: . . . same as variable being
defined.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406: 161.242

§

IBM 704

161-

.242 Designators (Contd.)
Data
Integer variables:
Floating point
variables: .
Equipment
Card: . . . . .

initial I, J, K, L, M, N.·

. 264 Equipment
Tapes: . . . . . . .
Printer: . . . • . . .
Card Reader/Punch:
Drums: . . . . . . .

any other initial letter.

.27

implied by verbs READ,
PUNCH.
Magnetic tape:
use key word TAPE.
Printer: . . • .
implied by verb PRINT.
Magnetic Drum:
use key word DRUM.
Sense Light or Switch: implied by noun SENSE.
Overflow Triggers:
implied by noun
OVERFLOW.
Divide Check Trigger: implied by phrase
DIVIDE CHECK.
Input or Output:
implies BCD data on tape.
Comments: . . . . .
C in col. I of statement.
Translator control:
key words FREQUENCY,
EQUIVALENCE, or
COMMON.
Structure of. Data Names

.

.25

. 251 Qualified names: . .
.252 Subscripts
Number per item:
Applicable to:
Class may be
Special index
variable:
Any variable: .
Literal: . • .
Expression: .

none.

Form may be
Integer only:
C, C' and N.
no .
Signed: . .
Truncated fraction: . no.
Rounded fraction: .
no.
.253 Synonyms
EQUIVALENCE statement
Preset:
causes sharing of storage
locations.
Dynamically set: .
no.

.

.......

.26

Number of Names

. 261 All entities: .• . . .
. 262 Procedures
Subroutine and
Function: . .
Numbered Procedures:
Arithmetic Functions:
Assigned GO TO
Variables: . . . . .
IF, ASSIGN, GO TO:;
SAP Skip type:
CALL:
DO: . .
.263 Data
Files: .
Record formats:
Data levels:
Right of =:
Left of =: .
Dummy variables:
Floating point
variable s: . . . .

10/62

7
750
750
50
25
300
425
400
150
no limit.
less than 4, 285 char in
FORMAT statements.
3 levels by subscripting.
750 fixed point variables.
500 fixed point variables.
ISO.
no limit.

Region of Meaning of Names
In the straightforward use of FORTRAN each name
is established in a subroutine and is local to that
routine. Thus, a name in a lower subroutine can
only be used by use of a COMMON statement

.3

DATA DESCRIPTION FACILITIES

.31

Methods of Direct Data Description

.311
. 312
. 313
. 314
.315
. 316
.317
.318
.319

Concise item picture:
List by kind: . • . . .
Qualify by adjective: .
Qualify by phrase: .
Qualify by code:
Hierarchy by list: .
Level by indenting:
Level by coding: . .
Others
Array size: • . . .
Four-digit integer: .
Four-digit integers,S:
Floating point items: •

O·to 3.
all variables.
no special index variables.
only integers.
yes.
at most C * N ± C'; where
C and C' are literals.

I to 10.
I.
I each.
I to S.

.32

..

FORMAT statement only.
no.
no.
no.
first letter of name.
no.
no.
no.
DIMENSION ARRAY (4, 7).
FORMAT (14).
FORMAT (514).
FORMAT(FS.3, EI2.4).
~999.999~ f\9. 9999E~ 99
( f\ means blank or minus
sign).

Files and Reels

.321 File labels
Variable layout:
.322 Reel sentinels:. .

own coding.
no multi-reel files.

.33

Records and Blocks

.331
. 332
.333
.334
. 335

Variable record size:
Variable block size: .
Record size range:
Block size range:
Choice of record size: .

.336
.337
• 33S
. 339

Choice of block size:
Sequence control:
In-out error control:
Blocking control: .

.34

Data Items

..

..

dynamic.
dynamic.
1 to 999,999 words.
I to 999,999 words.
READ, WRITE statement
and FORMAT statement.
REA:D, WRITE statement.
none .
automatic •
FORMAT statement •

. 341 Designation of class:
by name .
.342 Possible classes
Integer: . . . •
yes.
Fixed point: .
no.
Floating point:
yes.
Alphabetic: •.
yes.
Alphameric: .
yes •
. 343 Choice of external
radix:. • . . . . .
FORMAT statement.
.344 Poss ible external radices
Decimal: • • . . •
yes.
Octal: • • . . . .
yes.
.345 Internal justification:
alpha automatic left
justified.
integers automatic right
justified in decrement
of word.

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 704 FORTRAN II
§

161.

. 346 Choice of code:

FORMAT statement and
READ, WRITE statements.

. 347 Possible codes
Decimal: .
Octal:
Hollerith:. .
Alphameric:
. 348 Internal item size
Variable size:
Designation: . .
Range
Fixed point numeric:
Floating point
numeric: .
Alphameric:
.349 Sign provision: .
. 35

fixed, 1 word.
fixed, 1 word.
fixed, 1 word.
optional.

217.
none.
10-38 to 10+ 38 .
660 char/statement.
660 char/statement.
yes.
optional.
same as constants.
own coding.
computed GO TO.

. 362 Re-definition:

..

.363 Table description
Subscription: . .
Multi - subscripts:
.364 Other subscriptable
entities:
..

..

.

SQRTF ( ) : .
square root.
ATANF ( ) :.
arctangent .
TANHF ( ) :.
hyperbolic tangent.
FLOATF ( ) :.
float an integer .
XFIXF ( ) : . .
fix a floating point variable.
SIGNF ( )r: . .
sign change.
Note: t Functions may have an X in front to
specify fixed point operands.
.412 Operands allowed
Classes: . . .
numeric only.
Mixed scaling: .
yes, but restricted.
Mixed classes: .
only in exponentiation and
functions.
.
no.
Mixed radices: .
Literals: . . . .
yes ..
.413 Statement structure
Parentheses
a - b - c means:
(a-b) - c.
a + b x c means:
a +(b x c) .
a -;. b -;. c means:
(a -;. b) -;. c.
a bC means: ....
illegal; parentheses must
be used.
Size limit: .
660 char.
Multi-results:
no.

yes; by mUltiple references
to a single FORMAT
statement •
COMMON statement.
EQUIVALENCE statement.

.414 Rounding of results: .. truncation of integers at
each step in expression.
.415 Special cases
Fixed
Floating
x= -x: ..
K=-K
X=-X
x =x + 1: . .
K=K+I
X=X+I .
x = 4.7 y: . .
K=47 *K/I0
X=4. 7 *y
x= 5xIQ7 +y2:
too large
X=5.E7+Y**2
x=IYI:· . . . . K=XABSF(L) X=ABSF(Y)
x = integer part
of {y): • • • . •
K=XINTF (Y) X=INTF(Y)
.416 Typical examples: . . X=( -B+SQRTF(B*B-4. O*A *
C»/(2.0*A)
18 ALPHA = CON
DO 201= 2,N
20 ALPHA = ALPHA * X +
CON (I)

mandatory in DIMENSION
statement.
I to 3.

.42

SJ2ecial DescriJ2tion Facilities

.361 Duplicate format:

.4

fixed, I word.
none.

Data Values

. 351 Constants
Possible sizes
Integer: . . .
Fixed point: .
Floating point:
Alphabetic: ••
Alphameric: .
Subscriptable: .
Sign provision: .
. 352 Literals: . . . . .
. 353 Figuratives: .. .
.354 Conditional variables: .
.36

yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.

406: 161.346

tape units, and drum.

OPERATION REPERTOIRE

Operations on Arrays

.421 Matrix operations: .
.422 Logical operations
Sizes of operands:
AND: . • . . .

. 41

Formulae

. 411 Operator list

+

*

/

**

ABSF( H:.
INTF( H: . .
MODF (A, B)t: •.
MAXOF (A, ••• H:
MAXIF (A, ... H:
MINOF (A, .•. H:
MIN2F (A, ••• H:
DlMF(A,BH:
LOGF() :
SINF():.
COSF( ) ..
EXPF ( ) :.

.

addition, also unary.
subtraction, also unary.
multiplication.
division.
exponentiation.
is set equal to.
absolute value.
entire.
remainder A -;. B.
max value, result fixed.
max value, result floated.
min value, result fixed.
min value, result floated.
diminish A by B.
natural log.
sine.
cosine.
exponential.

©

Inclusive OR: .
Exclusive OR:
NOT: . . • .
Designation:
.• 423 Scanning:. . .

. 43

none .
36 bits .

*

+

none.

B in col. 1 of statements.
none.

Other Computation

.431 Operator list: . . .

S in col. 1 denotes SAP
(symbolic) entry.

.44

Data Movement and Format

.441
.442
.443
.444

Data copy example:
Levels possible: . .
Multiple results: •.
Missing operands: .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Y=X.
items.
none.
not possible.
10/62

406:161.445

§

IBM 704

161.

· 445 Size of operands
Exa:ct match: . •
Alignment rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: . . •
Filler rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: •. ".
Truncating rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: . . .
Variable size
destination:

output only.
right justified or
normalized.
left justified.
zeros.
blanks.
truncate at left for integers;
right for floating.
truncate at right.
no.

.51

Jumps

.511
. 512
. 513
• 514
. 515

Destinations allowed:
Unconditional JUInP:
Switch: . . . . . .
Setting a switch: . .
Switch on data: . • .

. 52

Conditional Procedures

.521 Designators
Condition:
Procedure:
.522 Simple conditions: .
.523

.446 Editing possible
Change class:

integer to floating or fixed
point,
floating to integer or fixed
point,
integer or floating to octal.
Change radix: . . . . yes.
Insert editing symbols
automatic.
Actual point: . . .
automatic.
Suppress zeroes: .
automatic point.
Insert: . . • .
minus sign only.
Float: • . . . . .
none.
· 447 Special move s:. .
automatic .
. 448 Code translation:
.449 Character manipulation: none.

· 45

. 46
. 461
.462
.463

. 464
.47

statement •
GOTON.
GO TO M, (35, 47, 18)•
ASSIGN 35 TO M.
GO TO (35, 47, 18)~ I .

.524
.525
.528

.53

IF.
implied.
single form of multiple
condition; see example
paragraph.528.
Conditional relations: . IF (A) B, C, D
If the value 6f the expression A is less than, equal
to, or greater than zero,
respectively, go to B, C
orD ..
Variable conditions: . . expression always aga.~nst
zero.
Compound conditionals: no.
Typical examp~es: .
IF (X * * 2. 0 - 3.0) 29,37,
18; means go to 29, 37,
or 18 if x 2-3 is respectively less than, equal to,
or greater than zero.
Subroutines

.531 Designation
not possible.
Single statement: .
Set
of
statements
File Manipulation
SUBROUTINE.
First: . . . . . .
Last: . . . . . .
END.
own coding.
Open: . . . . • . .
any number of statements.
.532 Possible subroutines:
own coding.
Close: . . . . . .
.533 Use in-line in program: no.
Advance to next record: READ, WRITE, PUNCH,
.534 Mechanism
PRINT.
Cue with parameters: CALL XXX (X, Y, Z).
Step back a r~cord:
BACKSPACE.
Number of
none.
Set restart point:
parameters: .
no practical limit.
none.
Restart: . . . .
Cue without
own coding.
Start new reel: .
CALL XXX.
parameter: . .
implied in each input-output
Start new block:
RETURN, at least once.
Formal return: .
statement.
none.
Alternative return: .
none.
Search on key: .
.535 Names
Rewind:
REWIND.
Parameter call by
Unload: . . . . .
none.
no.
value: • . • . . .
Parameter call by
yes .
name: . . . . . .
Operating Communication
Non-local names:
use COMMON.
Local names: .
all.
Log of progress: . . . . . PRINT uses on-line printer.
Preserved own
Messages to operator:. same as log.
variables: . .
all .
Offer options: . . . . . PAUSE and octal display.
300.
.536 Nesting limit: .
PRINT message.
.537 Automatic recursion
SENSE LIGHT.
allowed: . • . . . .
no.
STOP and octal display .
Accept option: . . . . . use sense switch or usual
.54 Function Definition by Procedure
operator intervention.
.541 Designation
Object Program Errors
Single statement: •
same as set.
Set of statements
Special Actions
Discovery
Error
First: . . . . . .
FUNCTION.
own coding.
Overflow:
IF clause
Last: . . . . . .
END.
stall.
In-out:
automatic
any number of statements •
• 542 Level of procedure:
none.
Invalid data:
• 543 Mechanism
by name in expression.
Cue: • . . . . .
PROCEDURE SEQUENCE CONTROL
RETURN .
Formal return:.

.

•5
10/62

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 704 FORTRAN II

406:161.544

§ lq1.

· 75

. 544 Names
Parameter call by
value: . . . . . .
Parameter call by
name: . . . . . .
Non-local names:
Local names: .
Preserved own
variables: . .

.751 Insertion of new item:. separate run •
.752 Language of new item:. SAP and/or FORTRAN.
.753 Method of call:. .
named in procedures.

· 55
· 56

Operand Definition by
Procedure:

yes.
use COMMON.
all.
all.
none.

Loop Control

. 561 Designation of loop
Single procedure:
First and last
procedures: ..
· 562 Control by count:
· 563 Control by step
Parameter
Special index: .
Any variable: .
Step: . . . . . .
Criteria: . . . .
Multiple parameters:
• 564 Control by condition:
· 565 Control by list: . . .
• 566 Nesting limit: . . . .
• 567 Jump out allowed: . .
· 568 Control variable exit
status: . . . . . . .
.6

yes.

EXTENSION OF THE
LANGUAGE: . • • .

.7

LIDRARY FACILITIES

· 71

Identity: . . . . .

• 72

Kinds of Libraries

.76

current place to named end;
e.g.• DO 173 1= 1. N. 2.
possible.
no.
integer only.
positive integers.
equal to or greater than.
no.
possible.
possible.
50 of DO type •
yes.
available.
can write new function in
library.

Types of Routine

.761 Open routines exist: •. yes; ABSF. XABSF only.
.762 Closed routines exist:. yes.
.763 Open-closed is variable: no.

.8

TRANSLATOR CONTROL

.81

Transfer to Another
Language:

· 82

none.

Mechanism

Optimizing Information Statements

.821 ·Process usage
statements:. . . .
. 822 Data usage statements:

· 83
.84

no .
yes.

. 73

Storage Form: . . .

tape or cards.

• 74

Varieties of Contents:. subroutines •
functions.

©

FREQUENCY.
COMMON.
EQUIVALENCE.
S DED. (I).

Translator
Environment: .

implicit.

Target Computer
Environment:. .

implicit.

.85

Program Documentation
Control: . . .
yes .

· 86

Output Options
Translator:. . . . . . END (11' 12. 13 ... 16)

.9

TARGET COMPUTER ALLOCATION CONTROL

.91

Choice of

.92

Address Allocation: . . absolute for drum.

.93

Arrangement of Items
in Word in Unpacked
Form: . . . . . . .

none.

Assignment of InputOutput Devices:

yes.

Input-Output Areas:

implicit •

Sto~age

704 FORTRAN library.

.721 Fixed master: • . .
. 722 Expandable master:

yes; SAP .

.94
. 95

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Level: WRITE DRUM.
READ DRUM.
WRITE TAPE.
READ TAPE.

10/62

406: 171.100
•

STANDARD

II

REPORTS
EDP

IBM 704
M.

o. Language

UA SAP 3-7
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: UA SAP 3-7

§

.14

171.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:. .

UA SAP 3-7 .

. 13

Reference:

SHARE Distribution 347 .
SHARE Distribution 564.
SHARE Distribution 716.

.14

Description
UA SAP 3-7 is a two pass, hatched job assembly system which incorporates most of the features that can
be usefully employed in preparing a program at the
machine code level. The operation codes, including
pseudo-operations, are represented by three character mnemonic codes. The addressing scheme can
be in either absolute addresses and/or in one to six
character symbolic address labels. Relative addressing is possible as is address arithmetic.
The input and output to or from the program may be
on cards or magnetic tape. Although an input statement can contain only one instruction (or a maximum
of 61 words of constants), the output record will contain either 22 words, including loading information
such as relocatability and a checksum, or 24 words
depending on the kind of output requested. A listing
of the program can be generated on -line or off-line.
An input statement is simple to prepare. The first
six columns of a card may contain a symbolic label
which identifies the following data with a storage location. Leading blanks are always eliminated so
that this source of key-punching error is virtually
eliminated. The next field of the statement is the
operation field which contains the mnemonic operation code. Following this is the variable length field
which contains the address, tag (Le., index call)
and decrement parts of the instructions if they are
required. The address, tag, and decrement parts
are separated by commas, and all may be in symbolic form and use "address" arithmetic. Constants
are also entered in this field separated by commas,
and may be in octal, decimal (fixed and right justified or floating point) or in binary coded decimal
(alphameric). After the first space in the variable
length field, a comment can be added to use up the
rest of the field. The last field can be used for program identification and/or sequence number codes
since the assembly translator does not use it.
Error detection is limited to the peculiarities of the
assembly system although this is very complete.
Undefined and missing operation, address, tag, and
decrement instruction parts are annoted next to the
error on the listing. Undefined symbolic addresses
are symbolic labels that appear in the variable length
field but not in the label field. Those undefined addresses that are not automatically defined by the DEF
pseudo-operation are listed after the first-pass of
the assembly on the on-line printer as are labels

©

Description (Contd.)
appearing in the label field more than once (double
definitions). In the event of error, the field in error is assembled as zeros on tape or no punches on
cards. This permits easy hand correction without
reassembly. Error counts and other statistics are
printed at the end of the second and final pass.
One minor inconvenience is that all numbers except
constants must be entered in decimal. This occurs
only when assembling corrections or adding to programs since the addresses on the listings are in octal and must be hand converted to decimal to make
up some of the new input statements.

.15

Publication Date: . . . October 7, 1957.

.2

LANGUAGE FORMAT

.21

Diagram:

.22

Legend
H: . .

Location:
OP: . .
Address, Tag, Decrement:

. 23

Corrections: . . . . .

.24

Special Conventions

.241 Compound addresses:
.242 Multi -addresses:
.243 Literals:
.244 Special coded
addresses: •

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

refer to diagram at end of
section.

used for heading number or
normal symbol.
location - actual or symbolic of the instruction or
constant.
mnemonic code, for operation or pseudo op to be
performed.
symbolic or actual address
of data or index register
branch, tag digit, arithmetical address decrement; all separated by
commas.
pseudo operation CIT restricted, best used for
patching.

allowed.
not allowed.
EQU pseudo operation.
this address *
ZERO ** or * - *
this address squared
ONE */*

***
10/62

IBM 704

406: 171.245
§

17l.

.245 Other address computation
X/Y :
divide X by Y.
X*Y:
multiply X by Y.
X+Y : .
add X to Y.
subtract Y from X.
X - Y:.
As many address manipulation symbols can be
used as can be placed on a line separated by labels
or numbers (decimal), e.g., DOG * CAT / 2+ 3 MICE. Decimal integer values less than 10 6 must
be used. The resultant value modulo 2 15 is used
as the value of the address.
.3

LABELS

. 31

General

.311 Maximum number of
labels: . . . . . .
.312 Common label formation rule:

.313 Reserved labels
For temporary storage
in library routines: .
For temporary storage in library routines: .
. 315 Designators:
DEC:
OCT:
BCD:
.316 Synonyms permitted:

. 32

Formation rule
First character:
Last character:
Others: . . . .
Number of characters:

.323
•324
.325
. 326
. 327

Region:
Formation rule
First character:
Last character:
Others: . . . .
Number of characters:

.333
. 334
.335
.336
.337

1097 + (core store size 4096) /2.
1 to 6 characters, A-Z and
0-9, "=", and" _It.
= and - (8-3 and 8-4 punch
card codes respectively)
are considered numeric.
COMMON.
VULGAR.
psuedo -opera tions .
decimal.
octal.
binary coded decimal.
yes.

mandatory if specifically
referred to by another
procedure statement.
between HED statements.

.338

blank.
A-Z, 0-9, ,
same as last character.

1 to 5, one of which is al
phabetic.
Labels for library routines
Existence: . . . .
same as procedures .
Labels for constants
Existence: . . . .
same as procedures.
Labels for files:. .
none .
Labels for records:
· none.
Labels for variasame as procedures.
bles: . . . . . . .
Labels for Allocated
areas:
same as procedures.

.4

DATA

.41

Constants

.411 Maximum size constants
Integer
Decimal: . .
Octal:
Fixed numeric
Decimal:
Floating numeric
Decimal:
Alphabetic:
Alphameric: .
.412 Maximum size
laterals: ..
Integer
Decimal: .
Fixed numeric:
Floating numeric:
Alphabetic:
Alphameric: .

less than 10 6 •
none.
none.
6 char.
6 char.

.42

see paragraph .313 .

235 - 1.
12 digits.
235 - 1.
10+38 to 10- 38 •

60.
60.
EQU pseudo-operation.

Universal Labels

•321 Labels for procedures
Existence: . .

.322

.332 Labels for procedures
Existence: . . . . .

optional unless referred
to by another procedure.

.421 Data layout: .
.422 Data type:

A-Z, 0-9, =, A-Z, 0-9, =, A-Z, 0-9, =, -

. 423 Redefinition:

1 to 6, one of which is alphabetic.
Labels for library routines
Existence: . .
same as procedures.
Labels for consame as procedures.
stants: . . . .
Labels for files:
none.
Labels for records: .
none .
Labels for variasame as procedures.
bles: . . . . . .
Labels for allocated
same as procedures.
areas: . . .

. 33

Local Labels:

. 331 Region:
10/62

Working Areas:

see HED Pseudo-Operation .
between HED statements .

.43

own coding.
no specification must be
implied by a comment .
· yes.

Input-Output Areas

.431 Dita layout:
. 432 Dita type:
.433 Copy layout:
.5

PROCEDURES

.51

Direct Operation Codes

.511 Mnemonic
Existence: .
Number:
Example:
Comment:

own coding or as required
by LID routine .
no specification, must be
implied by a comment .
· as special case of REP
pseudo-op.

·
·
·
·

mandatory.
104.
TXL 127, I, 1.
26 codes are extended.

MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: UA SAP 3-7
§

171.

406: 171.512
.62

.512 Absolute:

only as constants or special .621
pseudo operations.
.622
Number:
· all instructions.
Example:
· OCT 700001100127.
..63
Comment:
· equivalent .
. 513 Special pseudo-opera.64
tions
Existence:
• optional.
.641
Number:
· 12.
Example:
• MTHA, 1, 1.
Comment:
• equivalent to operation TXL
127, 1, 1.

.52

. 521 Number available:

· none.

.53

· psuedo operation PLB.

.65

.54

Facilities: .
Method of call: .

may be supplied to library.
Lffi pseudo-operation.

Overlay Control:

own coding.

OI.ta Editing
Radix conversion:

Code translation:
.642 Format control:

Macro-Codes

Interludes:

Special Functions

Input-Output Control:

..

· DEC - converts decimal to
binary.
OCT - converts octal to
binary.
· BCD - input to 6 bit BCD.
own coding or library routines .
· own coding or library routines.

PLB simulates the Load Card Button in either pass
1: (which generates the symbol table) or pass 2
(which generates the machine code) or both. It is
possible to read in a program via the card reader
that will perform any desired function including
loading the assembled program, generating con.
stants or modifying the assembler itself.

.66

Sorting:

own coding or library.

.67

Diagnostics:

own coding or library generally inserted by operator into object program
as required.

Re-entry points to the assembly are provided. It is
possible to assemble the interlude, execute it, and
cause it not to appear in the final object program.

.7

LffiRARY FACILITIES

. 71

Identity: .

.72

Kinds of Libraries

Translator Control: .

. 541 Method of control
Allocation counter:
Label adjustment:
Annotation: .
.542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute:
Set to label:
Step forward: .
Step back ward:
Reserve area:
.543 Label adjustment
Set labels equal:
Set absolute value: .
Clear label table:
Load symbol table:
Define Undefined
symbols:
.544 Annotation
Comment phrase:
Title phrase:

pseudo operations.
BES, BSS.
SYN, EQU
REM.

.721 Fixed master:
.722 Expandable master: .
.723 Private:

possible .
generally.
generally.
either card or magnetic
tape.

.73

Storage Form:

ORG, LOC.
ORG, LOC.
BSS, BES.
BSS, BES.
not possible.

.74

Varieties of Contents:

SYN.
SYN' EQU.
RST.
AST.

.75

DEF.
follows first blank after
col. 11.
REM pseudo-operation, remarks appear in listing.

conversion and editing Input-Output, mathematics,
utility, generators, and
others.

Mechanism

.751 Insertion of new
item:
.752 Language of new
item:
.753 Method of call:
.76

.545 Other
Insert new operation
code: .
Adjust output format:

SHARE supplied or own
coding.

special run.
SAP.
Lffi pseudo-operation.

Insertion in Program

.761 Open routines exist:.
. 762 Closed routines
exist:
ABS, FST, FUL, PLR, PST, . 763 Open-closed is optional:
SKP, SPC, TCD, WST.
• 764 Closed routines appear
once:

yes .

OPD.

yes .
yes •
yes .

.6

SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE

.8

MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES

.61

Special Arithmetic: .

..81

Macros: •

none.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

none.
10/62

406:171.820

§

IBM 704

.82

171.

.82

Pseuqos
Description

changes binary output mode
to absolute binary card
format.
SBCDV:
inserts "V" BCD words, S
. identifies first word.
S BCD nnH:
inserts "nn" BCD characters following the H, S
identifies first word.
S BES N:
advances LC N places. S
is then assigned to LC
settlD.g + 1.
SBSSN: . . . . . . S is assigned to this location. LC is advanced by

ABS:

N.
SDEC: . .
DEF M, N:

S EQUT:

FIN :

FST:
FUL:

HHED:
LffiN:
LOC S:
OCT: .
DRGS:
PLBN:
PLR:
REL:

10/62

copies remarks into listing.
repeats preceeding M words
N times.
replace current symbol
RSf M, N:
table with Nth symbol
table on tape M. If M, N
are blank, table is from
cards.
SKPN: . . . . . • causes carriage skip to paper tape control channel N
during assembly.
REM: . . .
REP M, N:

Code

ENDS:

Pseudos (Cont'd)

.
.

converts decimal to binary.
defines next N undefined
symbols as M, M+ I, ...
M+N-l.
marks end of assy. Transfer .to S card for loader
routine.
define preset program parameter S as equals to T.
marks finish of a batch of
stacked assemblies.
punch final symbol table.
changes binary output mode
to 24 wds/card.
heads all 5 or fewer character symbols with the
"H" number.
obtains specified library
routine from library
tape N.
resets assembler's location counter to S.
convert octal input to binary.
punches waiting output and
sets new program origi.D.
at S.
.
pushes load button in (1st,
2nd, both) passes if N =
I, 2, blank.
causes library routines to
print.
changes binary output mode
to relocatable format.

SPC N:

cause single or double spacing if N is 1 or 2 during
assembly.

S SYNT:

sets symbol "S" to refer to
the same location as T.
TCDS: .
punches waiting output and
a binary transfer card
(TRA S).
WST M, N: . . . . • write the current symbol
table as the Nth Table on
tape 1>4. If M, N all
blank, punch on line.
MTH:
first octal digit of this
word is 7.
SVN :
first octal digit of this
word is 7.
MTW:
first octal digit of this
word is 6.
SIX:
first octal digit of this
word is 6.
MON:
first octal digit of this
word is 5.
FVE:
first octal digit of this
word is 5.
MZE:
first octal digit of this
word is 4.
FOR:
first octal digit of this
word is 4.
PTH:
first octal digit of this
word is 3.
PTW:
first octal digit of this
word is 2.
PON:
first octal digit of this
word is 1.
PZE:
first octal digit of this
word is O.

Note: LC is Location Counter.

406: 171.8201

MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: UA SAP 3-7

§

171.

g

j!

-.:I

~

!:!

a

1
"gp

~

B

"
~

:::
:::
~

II

j j 1
1 1 1 1 1

1 1

'"

0

~

~

~

c

1

E

:Ee II
p.
8
'"CI

--- - ;,:
N

-

Ij

j

J

J

1

--t- ©

j

1 1

1 1 1

1 1

1

J

1 1

II

j j
1 1

- - - -

-t-t-

j

J

-

-1-

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

-

-

-- -

- - -

-

10/62

406:181.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
_

"fORTS

IBM 704
Program Translator

UA SAP 3-7
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: UA SAP 3-7

§

The object program can be output in a number of
ways including absolute or relocatable binary with
and without check sums on any combination of cards
and tape. Printed output can also be controlled in
that the printing of library routines, any section of
a program, or the whole program can be suppressed.
Paper spacing options are also available .

18!.

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity: . . . . . . . . UA SAP 3-7.

. 12

Description
The translator program for UA SAP 3-7 is a very
fast assembly program which handles hatched assemblies by completing each two-pass assembly before starting the next. Input-output control is accomplished by using the console sense switches and
by using special assembly control pseudo-operations. This program and the object programs it produces can be used on the IBM 709, 7090/94, and
7040/44, when the IBM 704 compatibility features
and routines are used.

Pseudo operations are also used to control storage
allocation. Since the IBM 704 is a sequential magnetic core storage machine, storage allocation involves advancing the location indicator used for
storage assignment rather than reserving storage
blocks. Other pesudo operations can be used to set
the location counter to a particular location address.
One of these set-type pseudo-ops is used to keep the
first few hundred locations unassigned because many
of the utility routines use this area.

A very extensive library of both programs and routines are available and maintained by the SHARE
users group. Each installation takes the routines
that it needs from the SHARE library and generates
a library tape sequencing the routines in the manner
best suited to them. This is a rather important
consideration in that whenever a library call statement is encountered in a program being assembled,
the routine is searched for on the library tape. No
other part of the assembly can be done while this
search is in progress. The individual library call
statement in the source program should be sequenced in the order that the called routines appear on
the library tape in order to minimize search time.
It is also important to sequence the source program
correctly before assembling since there is no sorting option built into the assembler.

The assembler can be modified permanently by a
maintenance routine or temporarily by using interludes. The interlude may also be used to generate
tables of data and/or instructions. The interlude
can be used in either pass of the assembly. Thus,
it is possible to assemble the interlude program,
execute it, and then continue to the end of the assembly.

©

Efficient and fast as the translator is, some users
have added the pseudo operation "Midpoint" (MOP).
This requires an extra magnetic tape unit but can
save the time required for the rewinding of a tape
that normally occurs between passes one and two.
.13

Originator:

United Aircraft.

.14

Maintainer:

SHARE.

.15

Availability:

September, 1957

.2

INPUT

.21

Language

.211 Name:
.212 Exemptions:
.22

Form

.221 Input media:
.222 Obligatory ordering:

.223 Obligatory grouping:
.23

cards or card images on
tape.
must be sequenced in the
order in which groups of
instruction are to be executed.
programs must be separated by "END" statements.

Size Limitations

.231 Maximum number of
source statements:
.232 Maximum size source
statements:. . . .
.233 Maximum number of
data items:
.3

OUTPUT

.31

Object Program

. 311 Language name:
. 312 Language style:
.313 Output media:
.32

UA SAP 3-7
library must be compiled
at each installation.

no practical limit.
72 characters if cards.
80 characters if tape.
unlimited.

704 Binary Format .
row on column binary .
cards and/or tapes and/or
listing.

Conventions

.321 Standard inclusions:
.322 Compatible with: . .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

yes.
709, 7090, 7094, 7040,
7044.

10/62

406: 181.330
§

IBM 704

181.

.33

.52

.521 Normal translating
(tape output):

Documentation
Subject
Source program:
Object program:
Language errors:
Statistics:
Library routines:

Translation Time

Provision
listing.
listing.
listing.
listing.
listing (optional).

•522 Checking only
(symbols only):
.524 Output options
Print:
Punch:

card input O. 008S mins.
tape input O. 002S mins .
twice normal speed.
0.133S to 0.267S.
O.OO1S.
S = number of source
statements •

•4

TRANSLATING PROCEDURE

• 53

Optimizing Data:

.41

Phases and Passes

.54

Object Program
Performance: . . . . unaffected.

.6

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

.61

Translating Computer

First Pass:
Second Pass:
.42

Optional Mode

.421
. 422
. 423
. 424
.425

Translate: .
Translate and run:
Check only:
Patching:
UpdatiIig:

.43

Special Features

assigns absolute value to
symbols.
prepares binary output
and listing.

yes .
yes .
yes •
yes.
yes.

.431 Alter to check only:
. 432 Fast unoptimized
translate:
.433 Short translate on
restricted program:

yes •

.44

Bulk Translating: .

yes .

. 45

Program Diagnostics

.451 Tracers:
. 452 Snapshots:
.453 Dumps: .
. 46

not required .

.611 Minimum
configuration:. . . . one 727 tape unit.
one printer.
one card reader.
one card punch.
.612 Larger configuralibrary on tape, additions,
tion advantages: .
and changes to assembly
program.

not required.
yes.

library .
library.
library.

.62

Target Computer

.621 Minimum configuration: . • • •
. 622 Usable extra
facilities:

one 704.
any extra facility may be
fully utilized .

Translator Library

.461 Identity: . . . . .
:462 User restriction: .
.463 Form
Storage medium:
• 464 Contents: . •
.465 Librarianship
Insertion:
,Amendment: .
Call Procedure:

library (tape, cards).
none.

possible.
possible.
LID card.

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

.51

Object Program Space

. 511 Fixed overhead: .
. none.
.512 Space required for
each input-output
file: • .' . . • . • • own coding.
.513 Approximate expansion of procedures:
all but constants, 1 for 1.
constants 1 to 57 for 1.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

tape or cards (or drum).
produced by each installation.

.5

10/62

.7

Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
-Improper format:
Incomplete entries:

none •
none.
check
check
check

Hardware failure:
Symbol table
packed:
Tape redundancy

interlock

listing.
assembly stops.
blanks insened into
assembly.
halts processor.

check

messge.

check

message and after 4 tries
an error. Interlock occurs and the processor
stops .

chec~

.8

Check or Interlock Action

ALTERNATIVE
TRANSLATORS:

this program can be run
on the 704, 7040, 7044,
709, 7090, 7094, and
7030 with 704 compatibility routines.

406: 182.100
.STANIlAAD

EDP
•

RCi'ORTS

IBM 704
Program Translator

FORTRAN II
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FORTRAN II

§

182.

.13

Originator:

IBM Data Processing"DiviSion, Applied Programming.

.14

Maintainer: .'

as above.

.15

Availability:

?

Description:

.2

INPUT

FORTRAN II is a hatched job compiler that accepts
both punched cards and magnetic tape input. Trans1ation is effected by creatjng tables from the various
types of information found ·on source statement
cards. The statement cards are referenced only
once and compilation begins as (3oon as the first
card is read in. A total of eight separate routines
operating as one, translate the source statements
into a highly optimized, well-coded machine language program. The object program can expected
to require very little if any more storage space or
running time than good quality SAP coding. Compilation time is almost directly comparable with SAP
assembly time when the number of object instructions is taken into account.

.21

Language

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

IBM 704 FORTRAN II
Automatic Coding System.

. 211 Name: .
.22

Form

.221 Input media:

cards or tape.

.222 Obligatory ordering:

all statements must be in
order.
each individual subprogram
must be segregated.

.223 Obligatory grouping:
.23

Size Limitations

.231 Maximum number of
source statements:
.232 Maximum size source
Provisions are made to translate SAP coding within
statements: •
the body of the FORTRAN program. Although "log.233 Maximum number of
ic" 'operations can be entered as Boolean statements,
data items: .
it is not uncommon to find complex logic manipulations done in SAP notation. FORTRANU variable
names are translated when used in SAP sections as
OUTPUT
they would be in regular FORTRAN II notation. SAP .3
notation is also useful for inserting data into tables
.31 Object Program
specified in DIMENSION statements.
The compiler checks for many kinds of errors.
Should an error which prevents further translation
be detected, the translator automatically ceases
translating and scans the remainder of the source
program cards for errors. Error notes are printed
as soon as an error is encountered.

704 FORTRAN II .

.311 Language name:
. 312 Language style:
.313 Output media:
.32

Conventions:.. • . .

no limit.
660 char.
no limit.

704 Relocatable Binary
Format.
binary .
punched cards and/or tape,
controlled by END.
Input-Output routines exist
as closed subroutines
linked to a FORMAT interpreter.

A library of standard mathematical routines is supplied and may be expanded to contain any routines the
user desires. It is maintained by the SHARE users
group and is very extensive. The contents library
.33
tape are selected from the SHARE library and arranged in a sequence best suited to each installation. This is necessary because the compilation is
stalled while searching for a library routine. Each
subroutine compiled with a program appears only
once regardless of the number of statements referenced to it.

Subject

Various kinds of listings can be specified. The object program is output on cards or tape in relocatable binary format. A "load and go" option is available and can be used between hatched compilations.

TRANSLATING PROCEDURE

©

.4

Documentation

Source program:
Object program:
Storage map:..
Language errors:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Provision
in listing.
in octal and symbolic
listing.
listing.
listing.

10/62

406:182.410
§

IBM 704

182.

.41

Phases and Passes
Section One (1 pass)
1. Generates primary file of instruction in CIT
file.
2. Partially translates IF and GO TO statements.
3. Gathers information for subprogram definitiOD. statements.
4. Compiles all instructions for I/O statements
except those involving DO's implied by I/O
statement lists.
5. Assigns internal statement number to all
statements.
4
6. Compiles instructions for Arithmetic and
Arithmetic Function statements and places
instructions in COMPAIL file.
7. Keeps track of all constants and variables.
Section One Prime (6 passes)
1. Generates tables for DO statements.
Section One Double Prime (optional pass)
1. Error and Diagnostic Routine.
Section Two (approx. 30 passes)
1. Builds COMPDO file conSisting of computing
and indexing instrqctions for DO statements
(4 passes).
2. Builds TRALEV and TRASTO tables from
transfer instructions and DO state'ments (4
passes).
3. Processes, relative constants (approx. 4
passes).
4. Optimizes the use of index registers.
Section Three (1 full pass and many partials)
1. Merges COMPAIL and COMPDO.
2. Creates indexing instructions for transfers
out of a DO.
3. Combines COMP AIL and COMPDO with
TRALEV and TRASTO files to create TIFGO
file.
4. Assigns actual IR's to indexing instructions.
Section Four
1. Analyzes program flow pattern and builds
tables used to assemble linkages to subprograms (approx. 8 passes).
2. Reassigns IR's if necessary (optional passes).'
Section Five (approx. 8 passes)
1. Generates region aSSignments based on
FREQUENCY statement.
2. Adds all instructions to CIT table and completes CIT table except for index register
saving constants. pure constants. Hollerith
data and BSS loader information.
Section Five Prime (1 pass)
1. Places constants and source program data in
CIT file.

10/62

Section Pre-Six (2 passes)
1. Places Index register saving constants in
CIT file.
2. Places Hollerith data in CIT file.
3 . Places BSS loader data in CIT file.
4. Write CIT file on tape 4 and place end file
mark on the tape (1 pass).
SE!ction Six (2 passes)
1. Assemble symbolic CIT on tape 4 to absolute
binary format.

.42

Optional Mode

. 421
.422
.423
.424
.425

Translate: .
Translate and run:
Check only:
Patching:
Updating:

.43

Special Features

. 431 Alter to check only: .
.432 Fast unoptimized
translate:

yes.
yes.
yes.
no.
yes.

no.
yes.

.433 Short translate on
restricted program:

.44

Bulk Translating:

.45

Program Dia8!!0stics'

.451 Tracers:
.452 Snapshots:
.453 Dumps: •

.46

no.
yes.

from library at object
time.
from library at object
time.
from library at object
time.

Translator Library

.461 Identity: .
. 462 User restriction: .
.463 Form
Storage medium:
Organization:

704 FORTRAN LmRARY.
none .
tape.
card images or blocked
records.

.464 Contents
Routines: .
Functions:
Data descriptions:

open and closed.
yes.
no.

.465 Librarlanship
Insertion:
Amendment:
Call procedure:

possible.
possible.
call by name.

.5

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

.51

Object Program Space

406: 182.511

PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FORTRAN II

§

182.

.511 Fixed overhead
Name
Space
1,400 words

Package Routines:

693 words

.52

948 locations for format
interpreter and BCD converter, the rest for I/O.
supervisory routines.

one 120 character area for
card input-output and
printer only.

.513 Approximate expansion
of procedures:

5 to 6.

Translation Time

Translating Computer

.611 Minimum configuration: 4,096 word store.
4 tape units.
1 card punch.
1 reader.
1 printer •
• 612 Larger configuration
advantages:. • • •
multiple program (compiles
3 extra tapes).
.62

.7

Optimizing Data
Frequency statement:
Equivalence statement:
Common statement:. .

.54

.61

space and time.
space and time.
space.

Object Program Performance
Type
Elementary algebra:
Complex formulae:
Deep nesting:
Heavy branching:
Complex subscripts:
Data editing:
Overlapping operations:

Target Computer

.621 Minimum configuration: any 704 •
. 622 Usable extra facilities: all except CRT may be
used .

. 521 Normal translating: .
1 + O. 7 S min.
.522 Checking only: • • .
1 + 0.015 S min .
• 523 Unoptimized translating: 1 + 0.69 S min.
.53

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

Comment

I/O and Format:

.512 Space required for
each input-output
file: . . . . . .

.6

Time

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or Interlock

Action

Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
Target computer
overflow:
Inconsistent program:

check
check
check
check
check

message.
message.
message.
message.
message.

Space

decreased
decreased
unaffected
SlightlY increased
increased
increased
not possible.

©

decreased.
decreased.
unaffected.
increased ..
increased.
doubled.

if referenced
if referenced
if referenced
if referenced
if referenced

no detection.
check if logic of program is faulty

error

messages.

.8

ALTERNATIVE
TRANSLATORS:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

this translator can be run on
the 709/7090, 7094, 7040,
7044 and 7030 by using compatibility features and routines.

10/62

406: 191.1 00

.S1ANDARll

II

EDP

IBM 704
Operating Environment

REPORTS

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

§ 191.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

GMFSI
BS CRB
DA Z002
GMFSI
GM IOSI
GSTOP
CS ENKI
RL 0183

Description
The following SHARE abstracts summarize a few of
the environment programs.
BS CRB

CORBIE, AUTOMATIC OPERATOR SYSTEM

Reads Symbolic code cards. Stores codes on tape.
Automatically finds codes on tape and corrects them
or runs them. Prints monitored record but no listing. Library of subroutines is available on tape.
Includes SAP Assembler. No peripheral tape equipment is used. Suitable for remote use of computer
by programmers. Code checking features are included.
DA Z002 SUPERVISORY CONTROL PROGRAM
Z002 is an executive program which makes a stacked program-stacked output system of operation
possible. Programs and output may be on or offline at the discretion of the 704 operator. ZOO2
prints monitoring information at the beginning of
each job and provides a halt between jobs if desired.
It includes master input and general output subroutines and also contains an automatic core dump routine and a console print subroutine. It requires only the minimum 704, occupies 963 words of core,
and uses 51 words of common.

GM FSI

Description (Contd.)
THE F SYSTEM (Contd.)

TRAN unchanged. It requires 3 tapes beyond the
machi'1e com{lonents needed by FORTRAN.
GM IOSI INPUT-OUTPUT SYSTEM
An executive routine which controls multi-job nonstop off-line operation of the 704. Operates in three
phases (1) Converts all jobs from BCD to binary,
(2) Supervises sequencing of jobs during program
execution and (3) converts binary output to BCD for
all jobs. Also provides SAP assemblies with optional immediate execution, two types of debugging routines and job acctg. Requires 6 tapes, 1 core, drum
1 and a programmable clock (optional).
GS TOP

TAPE OPERATOR PROGRAM (TOP)

TOP is a self-contained program that automatically
sequences a set of completely independent calculations. The programs necessary for these calculations are self-contained and self-loaded from program file tapes, each of which contains many programs, or from binary cards, or chinese binary
tapes. The input data for the calculations and the
chinese binary programs, if any, are entered on the
input tape. TOP inspects the input file to determine
the program required, locates this program and initiates a self-loading sequence for the program.
CS ENKI TAPE ASSIGNMENT AND CONTROL PROGRAM
Provides communication between the operator, the
program and the machine for connecting, disconnecting, assigning and disassigning magnetic tapes.
RL 0183

STORAGE CONTROL PROGRAM EXECUTIVE ROUTINE.

THE F SYSTEM

This is an executive program that controls FORTRAN
to allow multi-job multi-function operation. Any
combination of compile, execute, or compile and
execute jobs may be placed on the input tape. Normal operation utilizes instruction decks that are acceptable to the peripheral equipment. Binary decks
may be obtained. The SAP listing may be printed
or punched. Operation is single phase with FOR-

©

All entries to the storage control program are
through the executive routine. The storage control
program provides a means of utilizing available core
storage in the most economical fashion. To accomplish this, SCP calls upon tape input and output routines, a print routine, and other routines which construct or eliminate tables or individual table entries.
Communication with the users program is through
call sequences and a communication table.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406:201.400

.S1"''''

_EDP

1"

IBM 704

REPORTS

System Performance

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

§

5 fifth-order polynomials.
5 divisions.
1 square root •
using estimating procedure
.413 Timing basis:
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.413 .
. 414 Graph: . . . . . . . . . Configuration VI, XI; card
reader input, on-line
printer output, floating
point machine coding.

201.

.412 Computation:.

.4

GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING

.41

Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates

.411 Record sizes: . . . . . 10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max. size
8 digits.

10,000

Configuration VI, XI; Single Length (8 digit precision); Floating point.
-=
R = Number of Output Records per Input Record
-

-

1,000

--

Time in Milliseconds
per Input Record

~

R= 0.1

~

lh
~

A

~

~ fo'"

""

.... ""io-'

R= 0.01

~

100

~~

R=l

10

1
1

0.1

10

100

C, Number of Computations per Input Record

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406:201.415
§

IBM 704

201 •

. 415 Graph:

. Configuration VII A; card
reader input, off-line
printer output, floating
point machine coding.
Configuration VII A; Single Length (8 digit precision); Floating point.
R = Number of Output Records per Input Record

10,000

1,000
~

~ 'fI"

R=l
Time in Milliseconds
per Input Record

R:::O. 1

--

~~

io"

"'" ~ c:

'

III"'"

~~
~

R- 0.01

100

10

1

0.1

1

C, Number of Computations per Input Record

10/62

10

100

406:201.416

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

201 •
. Configuration VII B; magnetic tape input, off-line
printer output, floating
pOint machine coding.

. 416 Graph:

Configuration VII B; Single Length (8 digit precision); Floating point.
R

= Number of Output Records per Input Record

10,000

II.

1,000
II
r~

~

V...,

Time in Milliseconds
per Input Record

-

R=l ~

100

~

,.".

,.

~~""

.... ~i-o

~

Iof'"

V

Va= 0.1, 0.01

10

1

0.1

1

10

100

C, Number of Computations per Input Record

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406:211.101
IBM 704
Physical Characteristics

IBM 704
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406:211.102

IBM 704

IBM 704 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Unit Name
IDENTITY
i Model

Number

Height X Width XDepth, in.

Weight, lbs.

Central
Processing
Unit

Core
Storage

Drum
Storage

Card
Reader

Card
Punch

Printer

Magnetic
Tape Unit

704

737

733

711

721

716

727

66X72X37

64 X 105 X3l

67 X55 X3l

32X32X30

50 X40 X26

47 X59 X30

69 X 29 X3.

3,150

1,620

1,930

560

670

1,910

950

---

PHYSICAl
Meximum Cable Lengths, ft.

-----

---

22

22

42

75

73

---

---

---

30 (716)

44 (716)

---

100 (753)

Temperature, of.

65- 110

65-110

65-110

65-110

65 -110

65 - 110

65-110

Humidity, '7.

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

20-80

Temperature, of.

65 - 80

65-80

65-80

65-80

65-80

65 -80

65-80

Humidity, '7.

20-60

20-60

20- 60

20-60

20-60

20-60

20-60

109,800

16,400

25,200

1,700

9,000

7,850

4,100

Air Flow, cfm.

5,400

1,240

800

---

---

---

220

Internal FUters

Yes

Yes

Yes

None

None

None

Yes

Nominal

208

208

208

208

208

208

208

Toleranee, OJo

±8

±8

±8

±8

±8

±8

±8

Nominal

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

Tolerance, cycles

±l

±l

±l

±1

±1

±1

±1

To Central Processor
To 746
To Designated Unit

---

---

---

35
95

Storage
Ranges

ATMOSPHERE

Working
Ranges

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Voltage

ELECTRICAL

Cycles

Phases and Lines

Load KVA

3CP, 4-wire
40.3

3CP,

4-wire

3CP, 4-wire

6.4

10.4

NOTES

10/62

I AUERBACH I

.tI

3CP, 4-wire
0.7

3cp. 4-wire 3CP, 4-wire 3CP, 4-wire
3.5

3.1

2.3

406:211.103

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

IBM 104 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS-Contd.
Tape
Control

Power
Di stri buti on
Unit I

Power
Supply

Power
Supply

CRT
Display

740

753

746

736

741

7S0

73S

52X26x37

67X60X32

65 X4l X34

65 X 61 X34

65 X6l X34

22 X24 X2S

64 X 159 X95

740

2,240

1,170

2,380

3,030

250

4,000

---

---

35

---

-----

40 (746)

40 (746)

CRT
Recorder

Unit Name

Core
Storage

IDENTITY
Model Number

Height XWidth XDepth, in.

Weight, lbs.
PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths, ft.
To Central Proces sor

22

90

42

To 746

60

---

---

---

To Designated Unit

14 (3CP,
20SV, AC)

40 (736
or 741)

--40 (740)

75

---

Temperature, of.

65-110

65 -110

65 -110

65- 110

65 - 110

65 - 110

65 -110

Humidity, '7.

20-S0

20-80

20-S0

20- SO

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

Temperature, of.

65-S0

65-80

65-S0

65- SO

65- 80

65-S0

65 -so

Humidity, '7.

20- 60

20- 60

20- 60

20- 60

20-60

20- 60

20-60

6,140

9,200

3,000

14,700

14,700

---

60,500

Air Flow, cfm.

---

550

---

2,SOO

2,SOO

---

2,760

Intemal Filters

Yes

None

Yes

Yes

Yes

None

Yes

Storage
Ranges

Working
ATMOS-

Ranges

PHERE

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Nominal

20S

20S

20S

20S

20S

20S

20S

Tolerance, "/,,

±S

±S

±S

±S

±8

±S

±S

Nominal

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

Tolerance, cycles

±l

±l

±l

±l

±l

±l

±l

3¢, 4-wire

3¢,4-wire

2.4

6.0

Voltage

ELEC.
TRICAL

Cycles

.
Phases and Lines

Load KVA

3C/J,

4-wire

1.2

3cp.4-wire

3¢,4-wire

3¢,4-wire

3¢,4-wire

5.S

5.S

---

23.4

NOTES

©

1962 by Auerboch Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10/62

406:221.101
IBM 704
Price Data

PRICE DATA

§

221.

Production of the IBM 704 system has been discontinued.
However, these systems are now becoming available as
used and/or rebuilt equipment. This equipment can be
purchased at discounted prices when it is available.
The Processor, Internal Storage, Tape Control, and CRT
units are discounted by 70 percent of their original prices,
but have no trade-in value. Five percent of their discounted price is the required down payment for these
units. Terms can be arranged to pay the balance over a
period of up to 60 months.

on the age of each individual unit. The maximum term
is 60 months and is reduced by the age in months ovt!r
48 down to the minimum term of 12 months. Included
in this group are the Magnetic Tape units which are
discounted by 10 percent per year of age. All of the
other units are reduced in price by 0.833 percent per
month of age from the original price for at least the
first five years.
For the purposes of maintenance contracts, the en:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/ stack:
Method of use:

reading.
1 card.
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

. 311 Medium: .
. 312 Phenomenon: .
.32

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by: .
.322 Parallel by:
.324 Track use
Data:
.....
Redundancy check:
"riming: . . . .
Control signals: .
Unused:
Total: .
.325 Row use:.
.33

Coding: .

.34

Format Compatibility': . . . . .

.35

standard 80-column cards.
rectangular holes.

Physical Dimensions: . . . . . . .

.4

CONTROLLER

,41

Identity:.. .

1962 by Auerbach Corporalion and BNA lncorporaled

1~

rows at standard spacing.
80-columns at standard
spacing.

72.
O.

O.
O.
8.
80.
all for data.
binary or Hollerith code
(see Data Code Table No.
2).
all devices using standard
mM 80-column cards.

standard 80-column card.

Data Synchronizer.
766.
11/62

407:071.420

IBM 709

§O71.
.42

.56

Connection to Sxstem

.421 On-line: •
•422 .Off-line: .

.431 Devices per controller:
.432 Restrictions: •

.44

1 to 3 controllers.
none.

1.
a Type 716 Printer must be
at'"..ached to a channel before a card reader can
also be attached. Only
one of the two channels of
each controller can accept a printer.

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:

•442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization:

.53

Code Translation:

.54

Format Control
Control: .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:

.55

11/62

250 chards/min.

none.
yes.
automatic.

.71

Adjustments: .

.72

Other Controls

1 card (24 words).

240 m.sec.
60 m.sec.
4 clutch points.
250 cards/min.

Demands on Sxstem
less than 1 percent •

none.

Function

Form

Start:
Stop:

key
key

Comment
places unit in "ready" status.
removes control from computer by placing unit in
"not ready" status .

end of card.
. 73
transfer 1 to N words to
core storage •
none.
N cards at a time.
. yes, skip N words under
program control.
none.
none.
by processor program
from card image.

plugboard and program.
1 as selected on plugboard.
by plugboard.

Control Operations
Disable: .
Request interrupt:
Offset card:
Select stacker:
Select format:

.621 Nominal or peak
speed:
.622 Important parameters
Cycle time:·
Clutch point:
.623 Overhead:
.624 Effective speeds:

EXTERNAL FACILITmS

Input-Output Operations

.525 Marking:
.526 Searching:

Speeds

.7

Blocks

. 522 Output:
.523 Stepping:
. 524 Skipping:

.62

1 word.

.51

.521 Input:

PERFORMANCE

no.
yes.
no.
yes.

Core store:

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . . •

.6

yes.
yes.
yes.
no.
yes.

1 to N words of a 72
column binary image in
the sequence 9 row left,
9 row right, thru 12 row
left, 12 row right, and
sometimes continuing
.63
through,consecutive cards.
core storage.

.5

.52

Disabled:
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium
marks: .
Hopper empty:
Stacker full:
End of card:

Connection to Device

.43

Testable Conditions

no.
yes.
no.
no.
no.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage

Capacity

Hopper:
Stacker:
.732 Replenishment
time:

.8

600 cards.
1,200 cards .
2.5 to 5.0 mins.
reader does not need to be
stopped.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Error
Interlock
Action
Reading:
Input area
overflow:
Exhausted
medium:
Imperfect
medium:
Timing conflicts:
Invalid Code:

check

programmed.

none.
check

indicator.

none.
check
all codes
valid

indicator

407:072.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 709

REPORTS

Input·Output

712 Card Punch

INPUT·OUTPUT: 721 CARD PUNCH

§

.22

072.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: . •

. 12

Description

• .'

Card Punch.
Type 721.

• 221 Recording system:
• 222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system:

die punch .
brushes •
none.

.23

Multiple Copie!?:

none •

.24

Arrangement of Heads

A 721 Card Punch is used in the 709 Data Processing
System to provide punched card output. Data is
punched on standard SO-column cards at a rate of
100 cards per minute. Data to be punched is stored
in core storage in the form of a card image. The
path for transferreng data from core storage to the
punch unit is through a 766 Data Synchronizer. One
punch unit may be attached to Channels A, C, and E
of a synchronizer. Any channel having a punch attached to it must also have a 716 Printer attached
since the printer controls the punching operation.
Punching operations, however, are specified by the
stored channel commands through the data synchronizer.
.
Data can be punched into card columns in binary,
BCD, or any other code. The punching format is
controlled by the stored program and a plugboard
located on the punch unit. ,Cards are fed to the punch
unit from a hopper with a capacity of approximately
600 cards. Each of the 12 rows of a card is divided
i'nto two parts: the first part consists of columns 1
to 36; and the second part consists of columns 37 to
72. Each part is treated as a 36-bit word to accomodate the word length used in the 709. Twenty-four
words can be punched in one card.
The minimum time between word transfers is 300
microseconds, and 31 milliseconds between rows.
These times should be considered when load data
channel instructions are used to synchronize the
punch with'the CPU. The card punch requires a 600
milliseconds punch cycle to perform a series of operations relating to punching a card.
The machine can be used for on- or off-line gang
punch punching operations by proper wiring of the
plugboard. Manual controls and indicating lights are
provided. Manual controls are used to run-in and
-out cards and the lights are used to indicate that a
malfunction within the unit exists.
• 13

Availability:

•2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

not in production, can be
rented or purchased used
or rebuilt only when available.

.211 Drive past the head: • clutch driven rollers.
• 212 Reservoirs: • • ••
none.

©

Sensing and Recording Systems

Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: •
Method of use:

control brushes.
1.
SO.
1 row at a time.

Use of station:
Distance:Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

punch dies.
3 rows.
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: •
Method of use:

punch brushes.
1 card.
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

. 311 Medium:.
• 312 Phenomenon:
.32

standard 80-column cards •
rectangular holes .

Positional Arrangement

. 321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:
.324 Track use
Data:
Unused:
Total:
. 325 Row use:.

12 rows at standard spacing •
80 columns at standard
spacing.
72.

S.
80.
all for data .
Hollerith (see Data Code
Table No.2).

.33

Coding: •

.34

Format Compatibility:. all other devices using
standard SO-column cards.

.35

Physical Dimensions:

.4

CONTROLL,ER

•41

Identity:.

.42

Connection to system

.421 On-line: •
•422 Off-line: •

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

standard 80-column cards •

Data Synchronizer •
766 .

1.
none.

11/62

407:072.430
§

IBM 709

072.

.43

Connection to Device

•431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions:. • . • • connected to channels A,
C, and E only.
.44

Data Transfer Control

. 441 Size of load: . . •
. 442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: • • • • .
. 444 Input-output area
lockout: . • •
. 445 Table control: . •
•446 Synchronization: .
•447 Synchronizing aids:

1 word •
core storage.
1 word.

no •
no .
automatic.
wait on row index pulse •

•5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks
1 card (24 words) •

. 511 Size of block:.
. 512 Block demarcation
Output: . . • . .

end of card.

.52

Input-Output Operations

.521
. 522
. 523
• 524
.525
. 526

Input: •
Output:
Stepping:
Skipping:
Marking:
Searching:

none.
N cards forward .
N cards •
N rows •
none.
yes.

.53

Code Translation:

matched codes (card image)
or programmed.

.54

Format Control
plugboard and program.

Conditions:.

.62

Speeds

• • • none .

.621 Nominal or peak speed:
. 622 Important parameters
Cycle time:. • • . •
Time between words
in same row: • • •
Time between processive rows: •••
.623 Overhead: • . • •
• 624 Effective speeds: •
.63

100 cards/min .

600 m.sec.
300 m.sec.

31 m.sec.
single clutch pOint.
100 cards/min .

Demands on System
Core store:

• • • . . less than 1 percent •

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:..... none .

.72

Other Controls
Function

Form

Start:

key

Stop:

key

Comment
makes unit "ready" when
hopper is full and control panel is in place.
places unit in a "not
ready" status •

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage

yes.
no.

Hopper: .
Stacker: .
. 732 Replenishment time:

Control Operations
yes.
yes.
no.
no.
yes.
yes •

Capacity
600 cards.
I, 000 cards.
0.6 to 1. 0 mins .

.734 Optimum reloading
period:. . • • • • • • 6 mins.

Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:.
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:
Hopper empty:
Stacker full:

..

11/62

.61

4.

Disable: .
•
Request interrupt:
Offset card:
Select stacker: •
Select format: •
Select code:
. 56

PERFORMANCE

.73

Control: . •
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
•55

.6

.

yes.
yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
no.
no.
no .

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or Interlock Action

Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:

check
check
check

Misfeed:

check

punch stops.
punch stops.
indicator and
punch stops.
punch stops.

407:081.100
•

STANDARD

II

REPORTS
ED
P

IBM 709
Input-Output
716 Printer
INPUT-OUTPUT: 716 PRINTER

§

081.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . .

.12

Description

Printer.
Type 716.

A 716 Printer may be attached to a 709 system
through data channels A, C and E. The 716 Printer
is a modification of the 407 Accounting Machine. It
prints information from 120 print wheels which form
a solid bank 12 inches wide. Each print wheel has
48 characters, including all the numerals, all the
letters of alphabet, and 12 special characters. A
line of printing is spaced at 10 characters to the
inch. Line spacing is 6 or 8 lines-to-the-inch,
single spaced, under control of a mechanical shift
lever.
Printing is performed at a rate of 150 lines per
minute for 72 characters and 75 lines per minute
for 120 characters. Printing format is controlled by
the arrangement of data in core storage and a plugboard, which is wired to perform specific functions
according to the requirements of the operation. The
printer has a paper tape-controlled carriage, which
uses a standard 12-channel paper tape to control the
skipping and spacing of the form. Functions of the
carriage such as changing or suppressing line spacing, selecting the channel on the carriage control
tape to control skipping, or sensing sheet overflow
may be controlled by various hubs on the plugboard
Various size forms and masters may be used for
printing.
Printing is controlled by the stored program. One
record is printed on a line, and a record consists of
twenty-four 36-bit words (72 characters) stored in
the form of a card image in core storage. The
wiring of the printer plugboard determines which of
the 120 print wheels will be used for the print operation: Through use of special hubs on the plugboard
and programming, up to 120 characters can be printed per line at the reduced speed of 75 lines per
minute. Card image words are sent to a data channel at 300 microseconds between words (each row
containing two words) and 13 milliseconds between
rows. Pulses representing the image set the print
wheels for the printing operation.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

· marginally punched pin
feed continuous forms
driven by forms tractor.
.212 Reservoirs: . . . . . . none.
.211 Drive Pllst the head:

.22

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:. . . engraved wheel.
.23

Multiple Copies

.231 Maximum number
• Interleaved carbon: . · 1 + 5 •
.232 Types of master
Multilith:
· yes.
Zerox:
· yes.
Spirit:
· yes.
.24

Arrangement of Heads

Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/ stack:
Method of use:
.25

· printing.
1.
120.
1 line at a time.

Range of SX!,!!bols
Numerals:
Letters: .
Special:
Alternatives: .
FORTRAN set:
Basic COBOL set: .
Total:

.13

Availability:

not in production, can be
rented or purchased used
or rebuilt only when
available.

©

0 - 9.
A - Z.
$. #, 0 /
%@ & - * BLANK

t 'available

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium: .

. 312 Phenomenon: .
To provide for reliable operation each print wheel
generates an echo pulse for the character printed.
By proper programming, printing with checking can
be accomplished using these echo pulses. Through
the use of sense instructions, various conditions can
be determined, thus, prOviding more flexibility in
the printer operation.

10
26
12
t
t
t
48.

.32

continuous fanfold form pin
feed punched stationery.
single sheets.
roll paper .
printing.

Positional Arrangement

. 324 Track use:
.325 Row use:

1 line at 6 or 8 lines per
inch.
120 print positions at 10
per inch.
all for data .
all for data.

.33

as in Data Code Table No.

.321 Serial by: •
.322 Parallel by:

Coding: .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3.
11/62

IBM 709

407:081.340
§ 081.

. 34

.523 Stepping:
Format Compatibility: . . . . .

mM 1418, Optical Character Reader can read a
single line.
mM 1428, can read a series
of line.

.525 Marking:
• 526 Searching:

step size, 1 or 2 lines, set
on plugboard; occurs before printing .
suppress step before print
in cycle.
call extra step after print
in cycle.
controlled by carriage paper tape loop with punched channels 1 to 12.
skip channel 11, less than
7 lines before print in a
cycle with no extra step.
skip channel 11, less than
3 lines after print in a
cycle as an extra step.
skip channell to 10, following print in a cycle, up
to form length using extra cycles.
skip channell to 10, up to
2 .inches following print in
cycle with no extra cycles.
end-of-page signal from
chann«:l 12 can be plugged
to give a skip on another
channel.
none .
none .

.53

Code Translation:

programmed to card image .

.• 54

Format Control

. 524 Skipping:

Physical Dimensions

.35

. 351 Overall width:
.352 Length
Forms:

.353 Maximum margins
Left:
Right:
.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: .

.42

Connection to S;y:stem

.421 On-line: .
• 422 Off-line: .
.43

4.75 to 16.75 in., vernier .
1 to 22 by 1/6 in. at 6 lines!
inch.
1 to 22 by 1/8 in. at 8
lines/inch.

17 inches.
17 inches.

Data Synchronizer.
766.

1.
none.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller:
.432 Restrictions: .
.44

1.
can only be connected to
channels A, C, or F.

Control: .
Format alternatives:

1 word.
core storage .

Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:
.442 Input-output areas:
• 443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization:
.447 Synchronizing aids:

1 word.

.55

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

. 51

Blocks
.56

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Output: . . . . .

.52

up to 120 print positions
per line.
up to 72 characters; fixed
(every 24 words).
up to 120 characters; plugboard wiring.

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input: .
none .
. 522 Output: . . . . . . . start printer cycle.
send a word as necessary
to printer by individual
instruction; up to 24 per
print action.
11/62

4 manual alteration
SWitches.
. plugboard .
plugboard.
plugboard.
plugboard.

Control Operations
Disable: .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
Suppress print in
cy,cle: . . . .
Short skip control:

no.
no.
automatic
wait on row index pulse.

program and plugboard.

yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
inhibits interlock .

Testable Conditions
The program can test one exit hub signal from the
plugboard. This can be wired for a variety of conditions including, exhausted, end-of-page, busy and
even disabled.

.6

PERFORMANCE

• 61

Conditions
I:
II:
Ill:
IV:

using short skip and optimum choices of paper
feed up to 2 inches.
not using short skips.
line. less than 73 char.
line more than 72 char.

407:081.62D

INPUT-OUTPUT: 716 PRINTER
§

.72

081.

.62

Speeds

Function

Comment

toggle
switches
toggle
switch

used to alter plugboard.

Stop before printing:

Demands on System
Core store:

Form

Alteration switches
1.2.3.4:

.621 Nominal or peak speed: 150 lines per minute for 72
char (one print cycle per
line).
75 lines per minute for 120
char (two print cycles per
line).
single point clutch .
. 623 Overhead: . . .
'. 624 Effective speeds
150 lines/min.
I & III:
75 lines/min.
I & IV: . • . .
II & III
75 lines/m'in.
up to 4 inches:
50 lines/min.
4 to 6 inches: .
II & IV
50 lines/min.
up to 4 inches:
37 lines/min.
4 to 6 inches: .
. 63

Other Controls

Test:

toggle
switch

ForI!' .top:
Print:

toggle
switch
key

Stop:

key

Start:

key

Restore(carriage control):

key

Stop (carriage control):
Space (carriage control):

key
key

. . less than 1 percent.
. 73

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled: . .
. 732 Replenishment time: .

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

. 71

Adjustments
Adjustment

removes printer from automatic status prior to printing each line.
allows print cycle key to
initiate a print cycle for
test operations.
turns "form" light on when
paper is exhausted.
initiates a print cycle under
special conditions.
inhibits printing and makes
unit "not ready" •
makes unit "ready" for
channel equipment.
restores carriage to home
position •
stops carriage operation.
advances form.

. 733 Adjustment time:
.8

Method

Comment

Vertical alignment: platen and vernier knobs,
Horizontal
alignment:
adjustable forms tractor.
Form thickness:
dial
varies distance between print wheels
and platen.
tine spacing:
shift cam
may be set for either
6 or 8 lines per inch.

©

continuous or single sheet
forms.
2 to 3 mins .
printer needs to be stopped.
3 to 5 mins .

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Recording:

Check or
Interlock
programmed echo
check.
implicit.

Output block size:
lnvalid code:
Exhausted medium:

check

Imperfect medium:
Timiug conflicts:

none.
check

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Action

none

overprint.
tums on indicator
and stops printer.
turns on indicator.

11/62

407:091.100
•

STAND'"

II

R[PORTS
EDP

IBM 709
Input-Output
729-1 Magnetic Tape
INPUT-OUTPUT: 729-1 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS

§

091.

.12

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . . . . . .

.12

Description

address selection, and lamps to indicate various
conditions that may exist within' the unit. A mechanical interlock is mounted in the reel door to prevent
tape operation when the door is open.

Magnetic Tape Unit
Type 729
Modell
.. 13

Up to eight Type 729-'1 Magnetic Tape Units can be
connected through a 755 Tape Control Unit to each
766 Data Synchronizer Channel associated with a 700
configuration. Since each Data Synchronizer contains two channels and up to three synchronizers can
be appended to a 709 configuration, a maximum of
48 tape units can be attached to a system.
The data on the tape may be recorded in one of two
modes, binary or BCD. Each is recorded in rows of
seven bits: six data bits and one parity bit per row,
even parity for BCD and odd parity for binary. Each
block is recorded with a final row which contains an
even parity bit for each track. In the binary mod~,
a 36-bit word is copied directly onto 6 rows; the
original data being binary patterns or char~cters in
the. binary 6-bit code. In the BCD mode each word
is considered as being 6 characters in binary 6- bit
code in storage and BCD 6-bit code on tape, and the
conversion between the two codes is automatic.
Reading or writing is performed at the rate of 2, 500
words or 15, 000 characters a second while tape is
moving at 75 inches a second. A two-gap readafter-write head is used which provides for more
reliable data transcriptions. As data is written, old
data is automatically erased as the new data is recorded. In addition, the new data is checked, and if
an error occurs, an indicator will be turned on.
This tape unit uses dual-level sensing to increase
discrepancy detection. During write operation, a
bit mismatch at either level is an error. However,
in the read mode, only parity errors at both levels
will turn on an indicator.
A reel on which data has been written may be protected from inadvertent writing by removing a circular plastic insert from the back of the file reel.
Tapes are read or written in a forward direction
only.
The normal rewind of the tape is 75 inches per second for a low-speed rewind and 500 inches per second for a high-speed rewind. A high-speed rewind
is initiated when more than 450 feet of tape has been
used. Rewinding a full reel of tape (2,400 feet)
takes approximately 1. 2 minutes.
Each tape unit contains manual controls for placing
the unit under computer control or removing the unit
from computer control, loading tape, unloading tape.

©

Description (Cont'd)

Availability:.... . . not in production, can be
rented or purchased used
or rebuilt only when
available.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

· 211 Drive past the head: .
· 212 Reservoirs
Number: .
Form: . .
Capacity: .
. 213 .Feed drive:
.214 Take-up drive: .
· 22

pinch roller friction.
2.
vacuum.
each approx. 7 ft.
motor .
motor.

Sensing and Recording Systems

. 221 Recording system:.
. 222 Sensing system: .
. 223 Common system:

magnetic head .
magnetic head .
no.

· 23

Multiple Copies: .

none.

· 24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/ stack:. .
Method of use:

recording.
1.

Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: .

reading (dual-level).
1.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storag:e

.311 Medium: . . .
.312 Phenomenon: .
.32

7.
1 frame or row at a time.

7.
1 row at a time.

plastic tape with magnetizable surface.
magnetization.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1 to N characters at 200
characters/inch.
7 tracks.

11/62

407:091.324
§

IBM 709

091.

.44

• 324 Track use
Data: . . . . . . . .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: .
Total: .
. 325 Row use
Data: .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: . . . . .
Inter- block gap:
.33

. 34

• 35

Coding: . . . . . .

6.
1.

o(self-clocking).
O.
O.

7.
I to N.

.441 Size of load:
.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: .
.444 Input- output area
lockout: .
.445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization: .
.447 Synchronizing aids:

O.
O.
O.
0.75 inches.

word.
no.
yes .
automatic.
wait for next row.

one character to a row,
using 6 bits as in Data
Code Table No. 1.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: .
Output:

1 to N words.

0.75 inch inter-record or
block gap.
termination of any of three
channel (!ommands, i. e.,
the disconnecting of a tape
unit.

Physical Dimensions

.52

•4

CONTROLLER

• 41

Identity:

.42

Connection to System

.421 On-line: . . . . . . .

0.50 inch .
2, 400 feet per reel.

Tape Control 755, connected to a 766 Data
Synchronizer.

two 755 Control units per
766 synchronizer.
Maximum of three 766 synchronizers can be
connected to a system.

.422 Off-line
Use
Tape to Card: .

Associated eqUipment
Type 758 Card Punch
Control.
Card to Tape: .
Type 759 Card Reader
Control.
Tape to 717 Printer: Type 757 Printer Control.
Tape to 720, 730
Printer: . . . • . . Type 760 Control and
Storage.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 8 per 755; 16 per 766.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . . 2 channels per 766 controller; 8 tape units can be
connected to each channel;
punched card equipment
can be attached to only
one of the channels - a
717 Printer must be used
if a card punch or printer
is usea.

11/62

1 to N words.
core storage.

1.

Format Compatibility: . IBM 727 low density.
IBM 7330 low density.
IBM 729 II, III, IV, V, VI
low density.

• 351 Overall width:
• 352 Length:. . . .

.43

Data Transfer Control

Input-Output Operations

· 521 Input:. . .

1 to N words forward with

cut-off as programmed .
1 block forward.
backspace one block or file.
(a) 1 block backward (backspace record).
(b) 1 file backward until an
end-of-file record or
load point is reached
(backspace file).
(c) skip N words forward
under channel command
control.
· 525 Marking: . . . . . . . . End-of-File; 3.75 inch
blank space followed by a
special character (tape
mark).
End-of- Record or block
gap; O. 75 inch blank space
on tape.
none.
• 526 Searching: . . . .
• 522 Output: . .
• 523 Stepping:.
· 524 Skipping: .

· 53

Code Translation:

matched codes for binary
6- bit; automatic for BCD
6- bit.

.54

Format Control: . .

none.

.55

Control Operations
Disable: . . . . . .
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind: ..
Unload: . . .
Record "End of-File":

optional.
yes.
no.
binary or BCD; specified by
I/O instruction.
yes.
no.
yes.

INPUT-OUTPUT: 729-1 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS

§

407:091.560

091.

.56

Testable Conditions
Disabled: ..
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Channel signals: '.' .
Sense "End of File":.

.6

PERFORMANCE

· 62

Speeds

· 621 Nominal or peak speed:
· 622 Important parameters
Start-stop time:
Character time:
Tape speed:
Rewind speed: .

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.72

Other Controls

yes.
yes.
yes.
yes, 14 feet.
yes.
yes.
yes, by data channel trap
feature.
yes.

Memory:
Processor:

Form

Comment

Address selection:
File protection:
Load -Rewind:

dial
ring on back
of reel
key

Unload:

key

Reset:

key

Start:

key

determines tape unit address.
inhibits writing when removed
from reel.
lowers tape into column and
rewinds tape to load point.
removes tape from columns
and r,!ises head assembly.
turns off ready light and
changes from high speed
rewind to low speed rewind.
places tape unit in ready
status.

15,000 char/sec.

10.8 m.sec.
67 J.l.sec.
75 inches/sec.
high speed: 500 inches/sec
(avg. ).
low speed: 75 inches/sec.
. 73
· 623 Overhead: . . . . . . . 10.8 m. sec/block.
stop time of one tape can be
.731
overlapped with start time
of another.
. 624 Effective speeds:
15,000 N/(N+ 161) char/sec .
. 732
. 734
.63 Demands on System
Component

Function

m. sec per block

Percentage

O. 012(C+N)+0. 60

less than or equal to
memory cycle time

based on floating point computations.

©

Volumes handled
Storage
Capacity
Reel: . . . . .
2,400 feet.
Replenishment time: •
1. 0 to 1. 5 mins •
Optimum reloading
period: • • • . . . .
6 mins.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

3(C+N)/N.
4 max.
1 avg. :f:

Tape passing
time (actual
time):
T+0.4N+1O.8R+51F.
C = total number of commands involved (small
compared to N).
N = total number of words in all records.
R = number of records to be read.
F = number of files or file gaps involved.

*

.8

Loading and Unloading

Error
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:

Check or
Interlock
lateral parity
lateral & longitudinal parity

not possible.
not possible.
yes
reflective spot or
tape mark
"Imperfect medium: yes
Timing conflicts:
interlock
Recording level:
dual level signal
strength check

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Action
indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm.

see reading.
indicator.
halts tape drive.
sta lis processor.
indicator & alarm.

11/62

407:101.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDlP
REPORTS

IBM 709
Data Synchroniz:er

766 DATA SYNCHRONIZER

§

lOI.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: ••

.12

Description

from the central processor orders call~d instructions. The channels operate independently of the
CPU once core storage transfers the first command
to the synchronizer. However, only one I/O device
per channel can operate at a time. A data channel
controls the quantity and destination of all data
transmitted between core storage and the selected
I/O device. The rate at which the channel transfers
data is dependent upon the speed of the selected I/O
device.

.Data Synchronizer.
766.
DS.

A 766 Data Synchronizer ptovides for simultaneous
computing and independent data transfers between
core storage and input-output units. Eachsynchro-.
nizer contains a pair of channels which logically
connect the input-output units to the central processor via core storage. The channels operate independently of each other and are used for inputor output transfers. Up to three data synchronizers can
be used in a 709 configuration; that is, a total of
six channels. The three pairs of channels are designatedA and B, C and D, and E and F. Each channel may have up to eight tape units connected to it
through a 755 Tape Control Unit. In addition, channels A, C and E may have one card reader, one card
punch, and one printer attached to a channel. The
printer must be included if a card reader or card
punch is attached to a 766. No controller is necessary for the card units.
Channel operation is initiated by the execution of
two instructions in the Central Processor Unit (CPU).
One instruction sets the selected device in motion
while the other specifies the core storage location
of the program for channel operation. Channel programs are termed commands to distinguish them

©

Description (Contd.)

Data is transferred to and from core storage 36 bits
at a time. The transfer of a 36-bit word between
any channel and core storage takes 12 microseconds.
The 766 Data Synchronizers have priority over the
CPU when both are requesting core storage at the
same time. However, a drum operation has higher
priority than the data syncpronizer when requesting
a storage cycle. Thus, 766 Data Synchronizer accesses may be delayed during transfers between
drum and core storage. When all data channels
connected to a system reqUire core storage cycles
simultaneously, the sequence of transmission is
handled a~tomatically.
.13

Availablity: • • • • • • not in production, can be
rented or purchased
used or reblolilt only
when available.

.14

First Delivery: • • • • August, 1958.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and RNA Incorporated

P/62

407:102.100

11
•

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 709

REPORTS

Data Synchronizer Console

766 DATA SYNCHRONIZER CONSOLE

§

102.

.25

Resets

.1

GENERAL

Name

Form

Comment

• 11

Identity: . . . . . . . . DSC Console; part of the
766 Data Synchronizer.

Reset:

pushbutton

.12

Description

resets all indicators. reg
isters and counters only
when in manual operation.

Form

Comment

spring-return key

loads data set in entry
keys into the data register.

The 766 Data Synchronizer Console (DSC) is a panel .26
that is a part of the unit itself. The upper section of
the panel contains neon indicators which are used to
display the contents of all the synchronizer registers
and counters. Beneath the indicators are pushbuttons. keys. and switches necessary for manual
operation of the synchronizer. In addition to the
above. incandescent lamps are provided to indicate
various conditions that may occur within the 766
unit.
The automatic. read-write select. channel select.
tape check or I/O check lights on the central processor console will not be turned on when a channel
is in manual operation.
.2

CONTROLS

. 21

Power
Form

Comment

Power-On:

pushbutton

DC-Off:

pushbutton

turns on power in proper
sequence.
removes all DC voltages
from tube panels; however. power is still
supplied to filaments.
blowers. and power
supplies.
removes all power except power to 40 volt
supply and 110 volt AC
convenience outlet.

Power-Off:

pushbutton

• 22

Connections: . . . .

.23

Stops and Restarts
Name
Auto-manual
Channel
A or B:

.24

Form

none.

Comment

two locking auto position - permits
keys (one
operation of selected
for each
channel and permits
channel)
resets initiated by 7fJ)
to reset channel.
manual position - activates other manual
controls and entry keys
for selected channel.

Stepping: . . . . . . . . none.

©

Name
Load Data
Register,

Load Control Word: spring return key
Load Location
Counter:
spring return key

.27

Name

Loading

loads data set in entry
keys into the indicators.
word counter. and address register.
loads data set in entry
keys into the location
counter .

Special
Name

Form

Comment

Entry keys:

locking
key

BCD:

locking
key

36 entry keys used for
manually composing a
word.
selects BCD mode of operation.

Store Data
Register:

spring-re- causes contents of data
turn key
register to be stored in
core storage.

Display
Storage:

spring-re- causes contents of storage
turn key
location to be displayed
in the selected channel's
data register.
each key causes its parWrite Punch: }
Write Printer:
"
ticular operation to be
sprmg- re- executed. Operation reRead Tape:
Write Tape:
turn keys quires a series of key
Read Reader:
settings before being
initiated.

Rewind:
}
Write End-ofFl" le'.
spring-re- each key causes its parBackspace
turn keys ttcular operation to be
Record:
executed.
Backspace
File:
Unit Selection
Switches:
dial
2 dial switches. one for
each channel; used to
switch
control unit selection.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

11/62

407:102.300

§

IBM 709

102.

.. 32

Conditions (cont'd)

.3

DISPLAY

Name

Form

Conditions Indicated

.31

Alarms

Read Tape:
Write Tape:.
BCD:
WEOF:
Rewind:
Backspace
Record:
Backspace
File:
Unit Selected:

lights

turned on whenever the
particular operation is
being executed.

.32

Name

Form

Conditions Indicated

Tape Check:

light

2 lights, one for each channel, turned on if an error
is detected during reading
or writing.

Filament
Detection:

light

indicates loss of filament
voltage; used for maintenance.

Conditions
Name

Form

Conditions Indicated

I/O Check:

light

on for lack of a storage reference cycle on one
channel operation.

End-of-Tape
(EDT):

light

Beginning of
Tape (BOT):

on when end-of-tape reflective spot is detected.

light

on whenever tape is backspaced to its load point or
attempts to backspace beyond its load point.

End-of-File
(EOF):

light

Word Count
Equal to Zero: light
Road Ga,eo
}
Write Gate:
lights
Data Register
Loaded:

11/62

lights

_d~'d

}
Reader:
Write Printer: lights
Write Punch:
Read Printer:
Print Binary:
A Select: }
lights
B Select:
Unit Priority:
light

A Priority:
B Priority:
Manual A, B:

}

light
light

Fuse:

light

turned on when an end-offile condition is sensed.

Ready:

light

turned on whenever word
count equals zero.

Thermal:

light

used for maintenance only.

Power-On:
DC-On light:

light
light

10 lights; each light indicates which unit is
selected.
these indicators are associa ted with channels A, C,
or E. Turned on whenever the particular card
machine is selected.
indicates which channel is'
in operation.
indicates which synchronizer of three has greater
priority.
indicates which channel
has priority.
indicates setting of automanual switches.
indicates blown fuse in the
synchronizer.
indicates both channels are
available for automatic
operation.
when lit, indicates that the
synchronizer temperature
has gone beyond limits.
indicates AC power is on.
indicates all voltages have
reached operating level.

407:111.100
•

STANDARD

II

A[lQRTS
EDP

IBM 709
Simultaneous Operations

SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS

§

Ill.

.1

• 12

SPECIAL UNITS: .

mM 766 Data Synchronizer
containing two data
channels.

.2

CONFIGURATION
CONDITIONS: •.•• assume maximum configuration on each channel.

.3

CLASSES OF OPERATION

Description

MEMBER

CLASS

The mM 709 clata channels permit almost totally simultaneous computation and input-output transfers.
Two units, the 733 Magnetic Drum and the 740
Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) Display, are not controlled
by the data channels, but by the processor.

A

Compute (including write
CRT).
Read or write drum(s).
Rewind or backspace magnetic tape on each channel.
Data transIl1ission(read or
write) on each channel.
Feed a card or space paper
on odd numbered channels.

B
C
D

Reading or writing on the Drum causes processing
to stop and reduces the processor to the equivalent
of a clata channel. In this status the processor must
wait for drum positioning (latency) and then perform
only data transfer operations until the transfer with
storage is complete, stopping computation but permitting other clata channels to access the store.

E

.4

Displaying clata on the CRT has no latency in almost
all applications. The delay required between data
transmissions is about five instruction times which
is shorter than the time that would be required to
generate a channel command to display it. Except
for the single instruction that actually displays each
datum, the processor is actually performing necessary computation. On this basis, use of the CRT is
considered to be simultaneous with computation even .5
though the processor is acting as the data channel.

RULES
odd channels
a+b =
c
d
e
c+d =
c+d+e=
c+e
=
d+e

1

8
1

3
8
11
11
4

1

8

allchannels
1

48
6
9
51
57
57
15

TABLE
odd channels

The data channels operate simultaneously with computation sharing memory cycles with the processor.
However, the devices that the channels control are
treated as though they were connected to an unbuffered processor without data channels. Only one
data transmission operation between the data channel and a selected device is possible. Non-data
transmission operations such as paper-spacing or
magnetic tape rewinding can be performed on all devices connected to a data channel provided that they
are started before a data transmission occurs.

even channels
1
8

a or b
c
d
e

even channels

all channels

1

1

1

8-dc

8-d

48-dc
6
9-de

1

1

3-de

0

One restriction is built into each 766 Data Synchronizer. This is that only one (odd) of its data channels can have a card reader and/or a card punch in
addition to a printer connected to it.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

11/62

407:121.101

_STANDARD
EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 709
Instruction List

INSTRUCTION LIST
§

121.
INSTRUCTION

Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

OPERATION

Flag or
Count

Tag

Address

Accumulator (AC) bits are called S, Q, P 1 thru 35.
Multiplier-Quotient (MQ) called S, 1 thru 35. Q, P,
hold overflows, S's sign.
Fixed Point Arithmetic

ADD
ADM
SUB
SBM

x

MPY
MPR

F
F

T
T

Y

F

T

X
X

F
F
F

T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

DVH

X

F

T

Y

DVP
VLM
VDH

X
X
X

F
F C
FC

T
T
T

Y

VDP

X

FC

T

Y

X
X

X

Y

Y

(AC and MQ use bits S, 1 thru
35 unless overflow in AC,
then P and Q).

(Y) + (AC) ~AC
I (Y) 1 + (AC)~AC
(AC) - (Y) --7 AC
(AC) - I (Y) 1-;;. AC
(Y) x (MQ) ~ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ
(Y) x (MQ) ~ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ, and if MQI = 1;
AC + 1--7AC
(MQ + .(Y) --7 MQ (quotient), AC (remainder). If
overflow, set divide-check indicator and halt
processor.
Same as for DVH except processor is not halted.
(Y) x (MQ)35-C---7 AC and MQ.
(AC) + (Y)I to C ~ (MQ)35-C to 35' remainder in AC;
If (Y) ~ (AC), halt processor.
(AC) + (Y)I to C ~ (MQ)35-C to 35' remainder in AC.
Floating Point Arithmetic

FAD
UFA
FSB
UFS

X
X
X

FMP

X
X

FDH
FDP
FAM
UAM
FSM
USM

FRN
UFM

X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

T
T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

T

F
F
F
F
F

T
T

F
F
F
F
F

F
F
F

Y

(Y) + (AC) --;. (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(Y) + (AC) --;. (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; unnormalized.
(Y) - (AC)-;.(MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(Y) - (AC) ~ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; unnormalized.
(Y) x (MQ)---7 (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(AC) + (Y) --;. MQ (quotient) normalized, AC
(remainder). If overflow, set divide-check indicator
and halt processor.
Same as for FDH except processor is not halted.
(Y) + (AC) -;. AC and MQ, normalized.
(Y) + (AC)~AC and MQ, unnormalized.
(AC) - I (Y) I ~ AC and MQ, normalized.
(AC) - I (Y) I --7 AC and MQ, unnormalized.
(AC) + (MQ)9 ~ (AC) normalized.
(Y) x (MQ) --7 AC and MQ, unnormalized.
Data Transfer (Arithmetic)

LDQ
STQ
SLQ
STO
STZ
STP
STD
STA
CLA
CLS

X
X
X

X

X
X
X
X

X
X

F

T

Y

F

T
T
T

Y

(MQ)~Y.

Y
Y
Y
Y

(MQ)S, 1-I7~ YS, 1-17.

F
F

F
F

T
T
T

F
F

T

T
T

F
F

Y

Y
Y
Y

(Y) --7MQ.

(AC)~Y.

o ~ (Y); sign is plus.
(AC)p, 1, 2.--7 YS, 1, 2.
(AC)3-I7 ---»- Y3-17.
(AC)2I-35 -;'Y21-35.
(Y) ---»- AC.
(- Y) ---»- AC.
pata Transfers (Logical)

CAL
SLW

X
X

F

T

F

T

©

Y
Y

(Y) --7 AC.
(AC) --7Y.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

11/62

.407:121.102

IBM 709
INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.

§

121.

Mnemonic
Code

INSTRUCTION
Flag or
Decrement
Count

OPERATION
Tag

Address

STT

X

F

T

Y

STL

X

F

T

Y

STR

X

X

X

X

XCA

X

X

X

X

XCL

X

X

X

X

ENK

X

X

T

X

(AChs-20 ~ YIS-20: remaining positions remain
unchanged.
Location of STL instruction + 1-;.. Y21-35: remaining
positions of Y unchanged.
Location of STR instruction + I ~ to positions 21 to 35
of location 0, take next instruction from location 2.
(AC)S, 1-35 exchanged with (MQ)S, 1-35: positions
P and Q of AC are cleared.
(AC)p, 1-35 exchanged with (MQ)S, 1-35: positions
Sand Q of AC are cleared.
Contents of manual input switches ~ (MQ). (See PSE)
Logical Operations (AC used P, I thru 35 unless
overflow in AC, then Q. )

ACL
ANA
ANS
ORA
ORS
ERA

X
X
X
X
X
X

F

F
F
F
F

F

T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y

(Y)

+ (AC).-,. AC.

(AC)
(AC)
(AC)
(AC)
(AC)

"AND" (Y) ~AC.
"AND" (Y)~ Y.
"OR" (Y)'-'" AC.
"OR" (Y)'-'" Y.
"EXCLUSIVE OR" (Y)

~AC

(binary half add).

Shift Operations (All are modulo 256 places).
ALS
ARS
LLS
LRS

LGL
RQL
LGR

X
X

X

X

X
X
X
X

X

X

X

X

X
X

T
T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y

Y

(AC) shifted left Y, sign unchanged.
(AC) shifted right Y, sign unchanged.
(AC) and (MQ) shifted left Y, (MQ)S --;.. AC S'
(AC) and (MQ) shifted right Y, (AC)S --;.. MQ S.
(AC) and (MQ) shifted left Y, signs unchanged.
(MQ) rotated left Y.
(AC) and (MQ) shifted right Y, signs unchanged.
Control Operations

X

NOP
HPR

X
X

X
X

X
X

X

HTR

X

F

T

Y

TRA
TZE
TNZ
TPL

X
X

X

F
F
F
F

T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y

TMI

X

F

T

Y

TOV

X

F

T

Y

TNO
TQP

X

X

F
F

T
T

Y
Y

TQO

X

F

T

Y

TLQ
TSX

X

F

X

X

T
T

Y

X

Y

Next instruction in sequence is executed.
Halts processor: processor steps to next instruction
when Start key is depressed.
Halts processor; processor steps to instruction in
location Y when Start key is depressed.
Next instruction is taken from location Y.
(AC) = 0, next instruction taken from location Y.
(AC) l 0, next instruction taken from location Y.
If sign bit of AC positive, next instruction taken from
location Y. Sign bit negative, next instruction
executed.
If sign bit of AC negative, next instruction taken from
location Y. If sign bit positive, next instruction
executed.
If overflow indicator on, it is turned off and processing
continues from location Y.
If overflow indicator off, continue from location Y.
If sign bit of MQ positive, next instruction taken from
location Y.
If MQ overflow indicator turned off, next instruction
taken from location Y.
(MQ) < (AC) next instruction taken from location Y.
2's complement of 'location Y placed in index
register T. *
• Not indexable.

11/62

I AUERBACH I iNn

INSTRUCTION LIST

407: 121.103
INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.

§

121.

Mnemonic
Code

INSTRUCTION
Flag or
Decrement
Count

OPERATION
Tag

Address

TXI

DDT

Y

TXH

DDT

Y

TXL

DDT

Y

TIX

DDT

Y

TNX

DDT

Y

TTR

X

F

T

Y

CAS

X

F

T

Y

LXA

x

X

T

Y

LXD

X

X

T

Y

SXD

X

X

T

Y

PAX

X

X

T

Y

PDX

X

X

T

Y

PXD

X

X

T

Y

XEC
BTT

X
X

F
X

T
T

Y
Y

ZET

X

F

T

Y

NZT

X

F

T

Y

LAS

X

F

T

Y

TCOA

X

F

T

Y

TCNA

X

F

T

Y

TRCA

X

F

T

Y

TEFA

X

F

T

Y

LAC

X
X

X

T

Y

X

T

Y

we

Adds the value of D to the number in index register
T and takes next instruction from Y. *
If number in index register T greater than value of
D, next instruction taken from location Y. *
If number in index register T is less than or equal to
the value of D, next instruction taken from location
Y. *
If number in index register T is greater· than the
value of D, the number· in index register T is
reduced by the value of D and next instruction is
taken from Y. *
If number in index register T is greater than the
value of D, nuniber in index register T is reduced
by the value of D and transfers to the next instruction; otherwise the index is unchanged and the next
instruction is taken from Y. *
Processor takes its next instruction from location Y
and proceeds whether or not in trapping mode.
(Y) < (AC) next instruction executed. If (Y) = (AC)
skip next instruction. If (Y) > (AC) skip next two
instructions.
Address portion of (Y) replaces number in index
register T. *
Decrement portion of (Y) replaces number in index
register T. *
(T) replaces decrement part of
location Y. *
Address part of (AC) replaces the number in the
index register T. *
Decrement part of (AC) replaces the number in the
index register T. *
o ~ (AC) and number in index register T is placed
in the decrement part of theAC. *
Execute instruction in location Y.
Test the status of data channel BOT indicator. Channel
specified by value of Y.
(Y)1-35 = 0, next instruction is skipped and processing
,continues. If (Y)1-3S I' 0, next sequential instruction is executed.
If (yh - 35 I' 0, the next instruction is skipped and
processing continues. If (Y)1-35 = 0, next
sequential instruction is executed.
(AC) compared logically with (y). If (AC) > (Y),
next sequential instruction is executed. If (AC)
= (Y), next instruction is skipped and processing
continues. If (AC) < (Y), next two instructions
are skipped and processing continues.
Next instruction taken from location Y if channel
A is in operation.
Next instruction taken from location if channel A
is not in operation.
When tape check indicator for channel A is on, next
instruction taken from location Y. If indicator is
off, next instruction in sequence is executed.
When end-of-file indicator for channel A is on, next
instruction taken from location Y. If indicator is
off, next instruction in sequence is executed.
(NOT(Y)21-3S) + 1 ~ (T).
(NOT (Y)21-3S) + 1 ~ (T).

*
© 1962

Not indexable.

by Auerbach Corporati~n and BNA Incorporated

11/62

407:121.104

IBM 709

INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.
§

121.

Mnemonic
Code
AXT
AXC
PAC

POC
SXA
PXA

INSTRUCTION
Flag or
Decrement
Count

x

OPERATION
Tag

Address

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
X
X
Y

X

X

T

Y

Y----:lP (T).
(NOT Y) + 1-:;. (T).
(NOT (AC)21-3S) + 1 ~ (T).
(NOT (AC)3-17) + 1----:lP (T).
(T) ~ (Yb-3S'
o --:. AC; (T) ----:lP AC 21-35.
Input-Output Operations

T
T
T
T

Y

X

Y

F

T

Y
Y

X

X

T

Y

PSE

X

X

T

X

MSE

X

X

T

X

BSF

X

X

T

Y

CAD

X

X

T

Y

WRS

X
X

X
X

BST
WEF

X
X

X

REW
LDA

X
X

.Cpy

RDS

X

Y
Y
Y

Start the unit specified by Y in the read mode.
Start the unit specified by Y in the write mode.
Backspace tape designated by Y one record.
An end-of-file gap and mark and a redundancy
character is written onthe tape on unit Y.
Rewind tape unit Y.
The first location of the record to be read or
written on the drum is Y.
Transfer one word between storage and an inputoutput unit. If the transfer occurs, then execute
the next instruction; otherwise, halt the processor.
During input operations, if an end-of-file condition
is encountered, no data is transferred and the next
instruction is skipped. If an end-of-record condition
was encountered, no data is transferred and the next
two instructions are skipped.
Provides a means for testing the status of sense
switches, controlling sense lights, and the sampling
of or sending of impulses to the printer and punch.
Other functions include:
(1) Clear Magnitude (AC).
(2) Low order bit test (AC).
(3) Change sign (AC).
(4) Set sign plus (AC).
(S) Complement magnitude (AC).
(6) Enter trapping mode.
(7) Round (MQ)l x 2- 35 + (AC) ----:lPAC.
(8) Divide check tes t.
Provides a means for testing and turning off the sense
lights. Other functions include:
(1) P bit test (AC).
(2) Leave floating trap mode.
(3) Enter floating trap mode.
(4) Set sign minus.
(S) Leave trapping mode.
(6) Redundancy tape test.
(7) End-of-tape test.
Selected tape Y is moved backward until end-of-file
or load point is reached.
A combination of the CPY and ACL functions.
Sense Indicator Operations

X

PAl
PIA
LDI

X
X

X

X

F

STI
OAl
OSI
SIL
SIR

X

F
X
X

11/62

X
X
X

X

X
X
T

X
X

T

Y

X

X
Y

T

X

Y

X

Y

Y

Y
Y

(AC)p, 1- 35 ----:lP SI.
(SI)----:lP AC P, 1-3S; O~ positions Sand Q.
(Y) ~ SI 0 _35 •
(SI) '--7 Y.
(AC) "OR" (SI) ~ SI.
(Y) "OR" (SI)~ S1.
Y "OR" (SI)0-17 -?- SI 0-17'
Y "OR" (SI)18-3S ~ SI 18-3S'

407: 121.105

INSTRUCTION LIST
INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.
§ 12~.

Mnemonic
Code

INSTRUCTION
Flag or
Count
Decrement

OPERATION
Tag

Address

RIA
RIS
RIL
ONT
OFT
LNT
RNT
LFT
RFT
RIR
lIA
lIS
IlL
lIR
lIO

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
F
X
F
F
X
X
X
X
X
X
F
X
X
F

X
T
Y
T
T
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
X
T
Y
Y
T

X
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
X
Y
Y
Y
Y

TIF

X

F

T

Y

"NOT" (AC) "AND" (SI) -7 S1.
"NOT" (Y) "AND" (SI) - 7 S1.
"NOT" (Y) "AND" (SI)0-17--7SI O- 17 '
If (Y) "AND" (SI) = (Y), skip next instruction.
If (Y) "AND NOT" (SI) = (Y), skip next instruction.
If (Y) "AND" (SI)0-17 = (Y), skip next instruction.
If (Y) "AND" (SI>18-35 = (Y), skip next instruction.
If (Y) "AND NOT" (SIO-17) = (Y), skip next instruction.
If (Y) "AND NOT (SI18-35) = (Y), skip next instruction.
"NOT(Y)"AND" (SI)18-35 --7S1 18-35'
(AC) "EXC. OR" (SI) ~ SI.
(Y) "EXC. OR" (SI) ~ S1.
(Y) "EXC.OR" (SI)0-17-7 SI0-17'
(Y) "EXC. OR" (SI>18-35 ---? SI 18-35.
IF (AC) "AND" (SI) = (AC), take next instruction
from Y.
IF (AC) "AND NOT" (SI) = (AC), take next instruction from Y.
Channel Trap Instructions

ENB

X

X

T

Y

RCT

X

F

T

Y

Enable from Y. The (Y) determines which channel
signals cause a trapping operation.
Restore channel traps. Allows traps to occur as
specified by ENB. Cancels the inhibiting effect
of an executed trap.
Input-Output Transmission Operations

SCHA

X

F

T

Y

RCHA

X

F

T

Y

LCHA
CVA

X
X

F
C

T
X

Y
Y

CRQ

X

C

X

Y

CAQ

X

C

X

Y

Store Channel A. (Y) replaced with contents of
Channel A.
Reset and load Channel A. Channel A is reset and
loaded with the (Y).
Load Channel A wi th the (Y).
Y ----;>0 (SR). «AC)30-35 + (SR» --;> (SR), (AC)/64
~ (AC), (SR)P_5 ---;. (AC)P_5, C times.
Y ----;>0 (SR). ( (MQ)S-5 + (SR) ----;>0 (SR), (MQ) x 64
'----'" (MQ), (SR)S-5~ (MQ) 30-35, C times.
Y ---? (SR). «MQ)S-5 + (SR) --;> (SR), RQL 6,
(AC) + (SR)~ ~C, C times.
Data Channel Commands

IOCD
IOCP

C
C

F
F

N
N

Y
Y

IORP

C

F

N

Y

IOCT

C

F

N

Y

10RT

C

F

N

Y

IOSP

C

F

N

Y

lOST

C

F

N

Y

TCH

X

F

X

Y

©

Input-Output C words starting at Y and disconnect.
Input-Output C words starting at Y and proceed to
next channel command.
Input-Output up to C words of one record starting at
Y, then proceed to the next channel command.
Input-Output C words of one record starting at Y
then accept the waiting LCH instruction or disconnect.
Input-Output up to C words of one record starting at
Y then accept the waiting LCH instruction or
disconnect.
Input-Output the smaller of 1 record or C words,
starting at Y then accept the next channel command.
Input-Output the smaller of 1 record or C words
starting at Y then accept the waiting LCH instruction or disconnect.
Take next channel command from Y.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

11/62

•

407: 141.100

STANDARD

EDP
_

REPORTS

IBM 709
Data Code Table
Internal
Magnetic Drum
Magnetic Tape
DATA CODE TABLE NO.1

§

141.

.1

.23

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size: . ••

.22

Character Structure

binary 6 - bit code .
internal.
magnetic drum.
magnetic tape.

LESS
SIGNIF ICANT
PATTERN

6 bits.

.221 More significant pattern: 2 zone bits; B, A

=32,

Character Codes

MORE.SIGNIFICANT PATTERN

0

16

32

48

0

0

&

-

Blank

1

1

A

J

/

2

2

B

K

S

3

3

C

L

T

4

4

D

M

U

5

5

E

N

V

6

6

F

0

W

7

7

G

P

X

8

8

H

Q

y

9

9

I

R

Z

0

-

t

$

,

*

%

16.

.222 Less significant pattern: 4 numeric bits; 8, 4, 2, 1

+

10

0

11

#

12

@

0

13
14

15

\

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated

11/62

407: 142.100
IBM 709
Data Code Table
Card Code
DATA CODE TABLE NO.2

§

142.

.23

.1

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size: • • • • 1 column.

Character Codes

punch card input-output .
OVERPUNCH

UNDERPUNCH
None

12

11

0

None

Blank

&

-

0

12

&

&

a::

+

11

-

a::

-

0

0

0

+
0

0

-

0

1

1

A

J

/

2

2

B

K

S

3

3

C

L

T

4

$

D

M

U

5

5

E

N

V

6

6

F

C)

W

7

7

G

P

X

8

8

H

Q

y

9

9

I

R

Z

+

-

8-2
8-3

#

.8-4

@

0

-

$

.

0

'"

%

+

fl.

8-5
8-6
8"7

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

TM

11/62

407:143.100

_STANDARD
_EDP
."

IBM 709
Data Code Table
Printer Code

REI'OIITS

DATA CODE TABLE NO.3

§

143.

.23

.1

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size:. ••

.22

Character Structure

Character Codes

printer.
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

6 bits.

.221 More significant pattern: 2 zone bits: B, A

= 32,

16.

.222 Less significant pattern: 4 numeric bits: 8, 4, 2, 1.

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0

16

32

48

-

+

0

Blank

1

1

/

J

A

2

2

S

K

B

3

3

T

L

C

4

4

U

M

D

5

5

V

N

E

6

6

W

0

F

7

7

X

P

G

8

8

Y

Q

H

9

9

Z

R

I

11

+

,

$

12

-

%

*

10

0

13
14
15

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

11/62

407:144.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 709
Data Code Table
Magnetic Tape

DATA CODE TABLE NO. 4

§

144.

.1

.2

. 23

USE OF CODE:

BCD 6-bit code.
magnetic tape.

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

STRUCTURE OF CODE

,.21

Character Size: . • .

.22

Character Structure

Character Codes

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN

0

0

6 bits.

.221 More significant pattern: 2 zone bits: Bi A

= 32,

16.

.222 Less significant pattern: 4 numeric bits, 8, 4, 2, 1.

16

32

48

Blank

-

&

1

1

/

J

A

2

2

S

K

B

3

3

T

L

C

4

4

U

M

D

5

5

V

N

E

6

6

W

0

F

7

7

X

P

G

8

8

y

Q

H

9

9

Z

R

I

10

0

:!:

a

-

+
a

11

#

,

$

12

@

%

*

0

13
14
15

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

TM

I:!.

+

11/62

407:201.011

IBM 709
System Performance

IBM 709

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

407:201.012

IBM 709
IBM 709 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE

1

Confi gurati on
Worksheet

1

InputOutput
Times

Item

Char/block

Re·ference
VII A

VII B

VIII A

VIII B

(File 1)

1008

4032

1008

4032

(File 1)

8

32

8

32

Records/block

K

m. sec/block

File 1 =·File 2

77

286

77

286

Fill' 3

12

nt

12

nt

File 4

12

nt

12

nt

m. sec/switch

File 1 =·File 2

4:200.112

File 3
File 4
m. sec 'penalty

2

File 1 =·File 2

0.2

0.7

0.1

0.2

File 3

0.1

0.2

0.1

0.1

File 4

0.1

0.2

0.1

0.1

m. sec/block

a1

1.37

1.37

1.37

1.37

m. sec/record

a2

1.42

1.42

1.42

1.42

m. sec/detail

b6

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

m. sec/work

b5

+ b9

2.46

2.46

2.46

2.46

m. sec/report

b7

+ b8

51.19

51.19

51.19

51.19

·m. sec
for C. P.
and
dominsnt

a1

Central
Processor

Times

3

column.

Standard
Problem A

F = 1.0

1.4

1.4

1.4

1.4

a2 K

11.3

45.2

11. 3

45.2

a3 K

437.4

1749.6

437.4

1749.6

File 1 Master In

1.0

File 2 Master Out

1.0

File 3 Details

0.1

File 4 Reports

0.1

Total

4

Unit of measure

2/63

n

0.4
0.4

452.3·

89

1.0

286
4:200.114

1.0
12

n

1.0

1799.0

363

1.0

1.0

0.1

0.4

0.1

0.4

n

452.3

1799.0

286

620

620

620

0

0

0

0

400

450

400

450

2,000

2,000

2,000

2,000

Files

756

3,360

756

3,360

Working

200

200

200

200

3,976

6,630

3,976

6,630

3 (Blocks 1 to 23)

4:200.1151
6 (Blocks 24 to 48)

Total
8 records per block.

286

620

Fixed

,t

1.0

(words)
Std. routines

Standard
Problem A
Space

77

4:200.1132

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

407:201.013
IBM 709 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE-Contd.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2

Con fi 9 u rati on
Worksheet

5

Item

Reference
VII A

VII B

VIII A

VIII B

Floating

Floating

Floating

Floating

input

CR 711

729 I

CR 711

729 I

output

PR 716

729 I

PR 716

729 I

i!,put

72 chars

90 chars

72 chars

90 chars

120 chars

120 chars

120 chars

120 chars

Fixed/Floating point

Unit name

Siz e of record
output
Standard
Mathematical
m. sec/block
Problem
A

input

Tl

240

17

240

17

output

T2

800

19

800

19

input

T3

45

0

45

0

output

T4

75

0

75

0

4: 200.413

m. sec penalty

7

m. sec/record

T5

9.9

m. sec/5 loops

T6

17.9

m. sec/report

T7

74.0

Unit name
Size of block

Standard
Stati sti cal
Problem
A

729 I

729 I

729 I

729 I

1000 chars

1000 chars

1000 chars

1000 chars

Records/block

B

m. sec/block

T1

77.4

77.4

77.4

77.4

m. sec penalty

T3

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

m. sec/block

T5

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.25

m. sec/record

T6

4.06

4.06

4.06

4.06

m. sec/table

T7

0.40

0.40

0.40

0.40

100

100

100

100

4:200.512

C.P.

©

1963 by Auetbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

407:201.100
IBM 709
System Performance

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

201.

using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113 .
see graph below.

.113 Timing basis:

.1

GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING

.11

Standard File Problem A

. 111 Record sizes
Master file: .
Detail file: .
Report file: •
. 112 Computation:.

. 114 Graoh: • • . •
.115 Storage space required
Unblocked detail and report files
Configuration VII B:. . . • 3,976 •
Configuration vm B: . • • 3,976.
Blocked detail and report files
Configuration VII B: .
6, 630.
Configuration vm B: . . • 6, 630.

108 characters.
1 card.
1 line .
standard.

10
7

".,-

4

2

-

/

----

-

!-'llII 8 , 'lZIII 8.."

~

7

..- ~

...--

"

- ~1ZIl 8',1!lIl 8'

4
Time in Minutes
to Process 10, 000
Master File Records

2

0.1
7

4

2

0.01
7

4

2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Details Records Per Master Record
Broken line indicates blocked detail and report files

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

407.:201,12.0
§

IBM 709

201.

.12

. 122 Computation: .
.123 Timing basis:

Standard File Problem B

• 121 Record sizes
Master file:.
Detail file: .
Report file: •

• 124 Graph: • • • •

standard •
using estipJa. ting procedure
outlined"in Users' Guide,
4:200.12.
see graph below •

54 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

10
7

4

2

~

/"
~.1lIIIB

... V

-----

~

~

7
4

Time in Minutes
to Process 10,000
Master File Records

2

0.1
7

4
2

4
2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

2/63

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCt:

407:201.130

§20l.
.13

.132 Computation: •
. 133 'Timing basis: .

standard .
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13 •
• 134 Graph: . . . . . . . . see graph below .

Standard File Problem C

. 131 Record sizes
Master file:.
Detail file: .
Report file: •

216 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

10
7
1llIS

~

~

4

.,. ~

EnS

2

7
4

Time in Minutes
to Process 10,000
Master File Records

2

0.1
7
4

2

0.01
7

4

2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

407:201.140

IBM 709

§20l.
.14

.142 Computation: •
.143 Timing basis: •

• trebled.
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.14 .
• 144 Graph: • • • • • • • • see graph below •

Standard File Problem D

•1:41 Record sizes
Master file:.
Detail file: •
Report file: •

108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

10
7

4

~

/

2

----

-"""'j\l13~n3

7

4

Time in Minutes
2
to Process 10, 000
Master File Records

0.1
7

4

2

0.01
7

4

2

0.001

.
0.0

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of DetaUs Records Per Master Record

3/63

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

407:201.200

201.

• 212 Key size: . . •
• 213 Timing basis: •

.2

SORTING

• 21

Standard Problem Estimates

.211 Record size: • • . • .

8 characters .
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213 .
see graph below •

• 214 Graph: • • . •

80 characters.

1,000
7
4

2

100
7

IL

4

L

,I

2

V

Time in Minutes to
Put Records Into
Required Order 10

,

7

t'

/

If
.;

I
l/'

"-

4

"JlII./

2

/,

7

I

4

I/JZm

l/'

/

~

~

/

V

""

/

t'
~

2

/

0.1

V
i/
2

I

4

"
2

7

4

1,000

100

7

2

10,000

4

7

100,000

Number of Records

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

407:20UQO
§

IBM 709

201.

.312 Timing basis: •

•3

MATRIX INVERSION

.31

Standard Problem Estimates

using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.312 .
see graph below •

• 313 Graph: • • • •
.311 Basic parameters: • • • general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating point to at least 8
decimal points.

10
7

4

If

~

2

V
1.0
II

7

J

4

Time in Minutes
for Complete
Inversion

1/

2

/

0.1
7
I
4

I

2

I

J

V

0.01
7
4

2

0.001
2

4

2

7

4

10

100

Size of Matrix

2/63

2

7

7
1,000

SYSTEM

PI;RfP~M~NC!=..

407:201.400
5 fifth-order polynomials .
5 divisions.
1 square root •
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.413.
see graph below .

• 412 Computation: .

§201.
.4

GENERALlZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING

.41

Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates

.413 Timing basis: .
• 411 Record sizes: . • • • . 10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max.
size 8 digits.

• 414 Graph: . . . .

CONFIGURATIONS VII A AND VIII A; SINGLE LENGTH (8 DIGIT PRECISION); FLOATING POINT.
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD

10,000
7
4

2

~

R=ID

1,000

~

7

~

b

.....V

4
·Time in Milliseconds per
Input Record

/./

R= .1
R = .01

2

100
7

4

10
7

4

2.

2

4

7

2

1.0

4

2

7

10.0

4

7

100.0

C, Number of Computations per Input Record

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporolion and BNA In""rporoled

2/63

407:201.415

IBM 709

§ 201 •

. 415 Graph:

••• . • • • see graph below.

CONFIGURATIONS VII B AND VIII B; SINGLE LENGTH (8 DIGIT PRECISION); FLOATING POINT.
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD

10,000
7

4

2

L;.~~

1,000
';IJ'

7

.,.,

'~

-"- ~L

4

Time in Milliseconds per
lnput Record

LL

2

""

~

V

100
7'

/

i---' ~ "'" II'~

I.-

~

I"l"
~

4

.!;.o!- I-'

2

R=.OI

V

....

""'" ""

10
7
4

2

2

0.1

4

7

2

1.0

4

7

2

W.O

C, Number of Computations per Jnput Record

2/63

4

7

100.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

407.:201.500

201.

.512 Computation: •

.5

GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING

. 51

Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates

augment T elements in
cross-tabulation tables •
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.513 •
see graph below .

• 513 Timing basis: .
• 514 Graph: . • . . •

. 511 Record size: . • • • • thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.

10,000
7

4

2

1,000
7

4
Time in
Milliseconds
per Record

[III

2.

V

V

./
L

7

"

4

-'

I,I~

2

./

10

-

7
~

4

V

V

....

'""

2

2

4

7

2

4

7

2

100

4

7

1,000

T, Number of Augmented Elem,ents
Roman numerals denote Standard Comiguration

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incarporated

2/63

-

407:211.101

II'TANOARO

EDP

"""~

IBM 709
Physical Characteristics

IBM 709
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporafion and BNA Incorporafed

12162

IBM 709'

407:211.102
IBM 709 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Unit Name
IDENTITY
Model Number

Height X Width X Depth, in.

Weight, 1bs.

Central
Processing
Unit

Care
Storage

Core
Storage

Drum
Storage

Card
Reader

Card
Punch

Printer

709

737

73S

733

711

721

716

66 x 72X37

64 X 105 X 31

64 X 159x 95

67x55X31

32 x 32X30

50X40X26

47x59x30

3,150

1,620

4,000

1,930

560

670

1,910

-----

---

PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths

--42
---

35
75

45
75

22
73

---

---

---

30 (716)

44 (716)

---

Temperature, of.

65 -110

65 -110

65 -110

65-110

65-110

65 -110

65 -110

Humidity, %

20-S0

20-80

20-80

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

20-80

Temperature, of.

65 -80

65 -SO

65 -80

65-S0

65 -SO

65-S0

65 -110

Humidity, '7.

20-60

20-60

20-60

20-60

20-60

20-60

20-S0

109,800

16,400

60,500

25,200

1,700

9,000

7,S50

Air Flow, cfm.

5,400

1,240

2,760

SOO

---

---

---

Intemal Filters

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

None

None

None

Nominal

208

20S

208

208

208

208

20S

Tolerance, ?o

±S

±S

±S

±S

±S

±8

±8

Nominal

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

Tolerance, cycles

±1

±1

±1

±l

±1

±1

±1

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

23.4

10.4

0.7

3.5

3.1

To Central Processor
To 746
To Designated Unit

---

35
95

Storage
Ranges

Working
Ranges
ATMOSPHERE

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Voltage

ELEC·
TRICAL

Cycles

Phases and Lines

Load KVA

NOTES

12/62

3cp,4-wire

40.3

3cp,4-wire

6.4

407:211.103

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

IBM 709 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS-Contd.
Unit Name

Magnetic
Tope
Unit

Tape
Control

CRT
Recorder

Power
Distribution
Unit

Power
Supply

Power
Supply

CRT
Display

729

755

740

746

736

741

780

69 X29 X31

60 X67 X32

52 X26 x37

65 x41 X34

65 x61 X34

65 x61 X 34

22 X24 X28

950

2,250

740

1,170

2,3S0

3,030

250

-----

-----

22
60

-----

-----

-----

IDENTITY
Model Number

Height X Width XDepth, in.

Weight, lbs.
PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths
To Central Processor
To 746
To Designated Unit

90 (755)

30 (766)

---

Temperature, of.

65 -110

65 -110

Humidity, '7.

20-S0

Temperature, of ..

Humidity, '7.

42

---

40 (Power
Frame)

40 (746)

40 (746)

40 (740)

65 -110

65 -110

65-110

65 -110

65 -110

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

20-S0

65-S0

65-S0

65 -SO

65-S0

65 -SO

65 -SO

65 -SO

20-60

20-60

20-60

20-60

20-60

20-60

20-60

4,100

9,200

6,140

3,000

14,700

14,700

---

Air Flow, cfm.

220

550

---

---

2,SOO

2,SOO

---

Internal Filters

Yes

None

Yea

Yes

Yes

Yes

None

Nominal

20S

20S

20S

20S

20S

208

20S

Tolerance, 0)'0

±S

±S

±S

:!:8

:!:S

±S

±S

Nominal

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

Tolerance,cycles

±1

±1

±1

±1

±1

±1

±1

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

3cp,4-wire

2.2

6.0

1.2

5.S

5.S

---

Storage
Ranges

Working
Ranges
ATMOSPHERE

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Voltage

ElEC·
TRICAl

Cycles

Phases and Lines

Load KVA

3cp,4-wire

2.4

NOTES

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

407:221.101
.ST"OARO

EDP
•

",PORTS

IBM 709
Price Data

\
PRICE DATA

§

221.

Production of the IBM 709 system has been discontinued.
However, these systems are now becoming available as
used and/or rebuilt equipment. This equipment can be
purchased at discounted prices when it is available.
The Processor, Internal Storage, Tape Control, and CRT
units are discounted by 70 percent of their original prices,
but have no trade-in value. Five percent of their discounted price is the required down payment for these
units. Terms can be arranged to pay the balance over a
period of up to 60 months.
The other equipment can be traded-in. Down payments
of 15 percent of the discounted price are required. The

Class
Central Processor

Storage

Input/Output

No.

Identity of Unit
Name
Model

709

1

736
741
741
746

2
2
3
2

746

3

753
766

1
1

733

1

733

2

737

3

737

4

738

1

729

1

716
711
721

1
2
1

740
780

1

1

term of monthly payments for the units purchased depends on the age of each individual unit. The maximum
term is 60 months and is reduced by the age in months
over 48 down to the minimum term of 12 months. Included in this group are the Magnetic Tape units which
are discounted by 10 percent per year of age. All of the
other units are reduced in price by O. 833 percent per
month of age from the original price for at least the
first five years.
For the purposes of maintenance contracts, the equipment is considered 37 months old. These rates are
shown below. The systems are fully guaranteed for the
first month or 176 hours of use, which ever elapses
first.

List
Price

Discount
Price

Prices
Down
Payment

Central Processing
Unit
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Distribution
Unit
Power Distribution
Unit
Tape Control
Data Synchronizer
Max. 3 per system.
Each has 2 Data
Channels.

500,000

300,000

45,000

10,000

1,456.00

57,200
72,800
72,800
72,800

17,160
21,840
21,840
21,840

858
1,092
1,092
1,092

1,100
1,400
1,400
1,400

97.25
66.50
66.50
42.00

67,600

20, 280

1,014

1,300

42.00

90,000
190,000

27,000
114,000

1,350
17,100

1,500
3,600

210.00
502.00

Magnetic
Storage
Magnetic
Storage
Magnetic
Storage
Magnetic
Storage
Magnetic
Storage

Drum

110,000·

33,000

1,650

2,900

372.00

Drum

110,000

33,000

1,650

2,900

372.00

Core

192,400

57,720

2,886

3, 700

238.00

Core

192,400

57,720

2,886

3, 700

238.00

Core

940,000

282,000

14,100

19,700

960.00

27,500

16,500

2,475

700

216.00

54,200
32,000
25,000

24,390
14,400
11,250

3,659
2,160
1,688

1,200
800
600

217.00
119.00
117.00

96,000
16,000

28,800
4,800

1,440
240

2,450
400

215.00
65.50

Magnetic Tape Unit
Max. 8 per channel.
Printer
Card Reader
Card Punch
711 and 721 must
be connected to a
716.
CRT Reader
CRT Display

ii:' 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

I

Rental

I

Maintenance

4/63

IBM 709

407:221.102

PRICE DAT A-Contd.
§

221.
Name

Class

No.

SPECIAL
OPTIONS

727
716

On-line off-line Switch (3 tapes)
Printer Carriage change 6 or 10 lines/inch
6 or 15 lines/inch
Printer Accounting Clock
Printer Co- selector
Type Wheel Cradle Assembly

721

Card Punch
Double punch blank column check (DPBC)
Central Processor
Sense Switches 7-12
Half-word arithmetic
Rewind Unload
Tape Control Rewind Unload
Magnetic Tape Unit Rewind Unload

704

753
727

4/63

Rental

- - 25.00
25.00
50.00
5.00/selector
1, 725.00 (sale price plus
$15.00 for use).
15.00 for 10 positions
75.00
500.00
40.00
17.00
17.00

RPQ No.

-- -74718
. 72234
78054
51014
70958
51402
54989
60169
W 90207
W 90207
W 90207

IBM 7090
International Business Machines Corp.

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

IBM 7090
International Business Machines Corp.

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

408:001.001
IBM 7090
Contents

CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.

4.

5.

6.
7.

8.

9.

10.

11.
12.
14.

16.

17.
18.

Introduction.
•
Data Structure.
•
System Configuration
Configuration V; 6-Tape Auxiliary Storage System
Configuration VII B; lO-Tape General System (paired) •
Configuration VIII B; 20-Tape General System (paired)
Internal Storage
7302 Core Storage.
7606 Multiplexor •
1301 Disk Storage.
7631 File Control .
Central Processor
7108 Instruction Processing Unit
7109 Arithmetic Sequence Unit
Console
7090 Console .
•.
•
'.
Input-Output; Punched Tape and Card
711 Card Reader
7607 Data Channel.
721 Card Punch.
7607 Data Channel.
Input-Output; Printers
716 Printer.
7607 Data Channel.
Input-Output; Magnetic Tape
729 Magnetic Tape Unit
7607 Data Channel.
•
7340 Hypertape Drive
7640 Hypertape Control
Input-O~tput; Other
7607 Data Channel.
7909 Data Channel.
1414 Input-Output Synchronizer.
7155 Switch Control Console
7281 II Data Communication Channel
Sim ultaneous Operations
Instruction List
Data Codes
Internal, Magnetic Tape and Magnetic Disk; Binary
Punched Card, Input-Output
Printer..
...
Magnetic Tape, Disk; BCD
Process Oriented Language
709/7090 FORTRAN II .
7090/7094 FORTRAN IV
Machine Oriented Language
FAP . .
Program Translator
FAP .•
•
FORTRAN II

.

© 1963

Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.

408:011
408:021
408:031.1
408:031.2
408:031.3
408:041
408:041. 4
408:042
408:042.4
408:051
408:051
408:061
408:071
408:071. 4
408:072
408:072.4
408:081
408:081. 4
408:091
408:091. 4
408:092
408:092.4
408:101
408:102
408:103
408:104
408:105
408:111
408:121
408:141
408:142
408:143
408:144
408:161
408:162
408:171
408:181
408:182
9/63

408:001.002

IBM 7090

CONTENTS (Contd.)
19.
20.

21.
22.

9/63

Operating Environment • • . •
System Performance .'. . . •
Generalized File Processing
Sorting • • . • • • • • . .
Matrix Inversion • • • • • •
Generalized Mathematical Processing
Generalized Statistical Processing
Physical Characteristics. •
Price ~ta • • • • • . • • • • . • •

A

AUERBACH
®

408:191
408:201. 011
408:201.1
408:201.2
408:201.3
408:201.4
408:201.5
408:211
408:221

408:011.100
IBM 7090
Introduction

§

OIl.

INTRODUCTION

The IBM 7090 is a large-scale data processing system with the same general characteristics as the 704 and 709 general purpose computers. Comparative throughput capacities
indicate that the 7090 has a six to seven times advantage over the 704. Because only lowspeed printers, card readers, and punches can be connected to the system, 7090 systems
are magnetic tape oriented and usually supported by off-line IBM 1401 data processing systems. The 1401 systems perform card-to-tape and tape-to-printer or tape-to-card operations, in addition to some editing for the 7090. Magnetic tape units can be switched between
the 7090 and 1401 systems. Monthly rentals for two-channel, eight-tape 7090 systems start
at approximately $60,000 (see System Configuration 408:031).
The 7090 transmits and receives data via a unit called the 7606 Multiplexor, which
time shares the data flow between the 32, 768-word core storage unit and either the proc~
essor or data channels. These data transfers are executed through 36-bit word parallel
circuits. The multiplexor determines which unit requires access to storage most urgently
and grants that unit access. In general, a processor request is less urgent than a data
channel request because the channel controls mechanical equipment, such as magnetic tape
units, which have a fixed demand cycle.
The basic cycle time of the 7090 central processor, i. e., the time for accessing the
store and performing a part of an instruction, is 2.18 microseconds. Most instructions are
executed in two cycles, permitting speeds of nearly 227,000 instruction executions per second in data processing applications. Multiplication and division instructions require more
cycles, and are executed at 41,700 and 35,400 executions per second respectively. Therefore, applications demanding heavy use of multiply and divide operations use a larger share
of central processor time than those involving primarily data movement and simple arithmetic operations. In applications that involve throughput of large volumes of data, the system tends to be speed-limited by the input-output facilities.
The processor uses binary arithmetic for both fixed and floating point operations.
Fixed point arithmetic is performed on 35 bits, plus sign and two overflow bits. Floating
point operands have eight-decimal-digit precision, and can assume positive or negative values between 10+ 38 and 10- 38 , including zero. Three "table look-at" instructions in the repertoire are very useful for code conversions, radix conversions, six-bit BCD addition and
subtraction, and simple editing. Address modification is facilitated by three decrementing
index registers. These registers use two's complement arithmetic rather than the absolute
value and sign arithmetic of the processor. However, a set of index register modification
instructions compensate for this incompatibility of two types of arithmetic. In programs
which use many indices for varied loop control, more indexing is required than three index
registers can provide. As a result, the storing and reloading of the index registers may be
required comparatively often. These operations require both data and program storage,
and add a non -productive burden Which, although small, is unusual in a large system of this
type.
The instruction repertoire of the 7090 is comprehensive and varied, and includes
five types of logical operators, single- and partial-word data transfers, input-output instructions (used to start data channels and select input-output units), and an extensive set
of test and conditional transfer instructions. Interrupts (called traps by IBM) can occur
when encountering: a transfer instruction, a 7040 or 7044 instruction, floating point underflow or overflow, a 704 input-output instruction, or an external signal; and for certain data
channel conditions.
A 7090 system can include any of three different types of data channels: the 7607
Data Channels, which can control 729 Magnetic Ta~s and peripheral unit-record equipment;
the 7909 Data Channel, which can be connected to 7340 Hypertapes, 1301 Disk Units, and
7320 Drums; or the 7281 II Data Communications Channel, which can control up to 32 "realtime" communication units. The 7281 II is different from the others in that it: is restricted

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

408:011.101
§Oll.

IBM 7090
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)

to one area of storage; can only be turned on or off; requires the Direct Data option and instructions; and has higher priority interrupts than the 7607 and 7909.
The 7607 and 7909 Data Channels are actually small processors which have program
and address counters, indirect addressing, and command registers. The function of these
units is to transmit data from the core store to an input-output unit, and vice versa. Data
transfers to and from the store are performed through parallel 36-bit word circuits. In all
of the input-output units, data transfers are serial by character to or from a six-character
word. Both units can control scatter-read and gather-write operations, and skip entire data
blocks or parts of data blocks being read from an input-output unit.
The 7607 Data Channel can also have a Direct Data Connection added to it to permit
on-line storage-to-storage data transfers between 7040, 7044, and 7094 systems. The 7607
can act as a controller for connecting up to ten 729 Magnetic Tape units, a printer, a card
reader, and a card punch.
The 79.09 Data Channel has a more extensive command set than the 7607. These
commands give the 7909 the ability to handle many of the input-output unit conditions that
would require processor intervention with the 7607 Data Channel. The 7909 can be used for
input-output editing, but the processor can perform editing tasks more economically. The
7909 has a transmit command which transfers blocks of up to 32,768 words simultaneously
with other processing.
The software for the 7090 system that is supplied by IBM is rather extensive. Included in this software are the process oriented languages FORTRAN II and IV, COBOL, and
COMTRAN. Source statements in these languages are translated into machine code and into
FAP or IBMAP, which are the machine oriented languages for the system.
Problem oriented languages include: 9PAC for file maintenance and report generation, IOCS for automatic input-output editing for formatting, various sort programs, and
Disk and Hypertape utility routines. Each program has its own monitor routine to permit
processing with a minimum of operator intervention. All of the software can be used as a
part of the IBSYS Processor Operating System, which permits input-output unit assignment
and can call the programs in the system, in addition to its normal monitor and maintenance
functions.
The 7090 can accept nearly all 704, 709, 7040 and 7094 programs directly, as compiled on those systems. A special program, Compatibility II, is provided for 704 programs.
Because of the compatibility features built into the 7090, very little interpretive running is
required. Thus, programs generated for the other systems run proportionately faster on the
7090 than on the system they are generated for. With the exception of the double-precision
arithmetic instruction, 7094 programs can also be run on the 7090.
A wide range of programs for handling mathematical function routines and service and
utility routines, as well as many complete program systems, have been compiled and are
maintained by the SHARE users organization since it was formed by 704 users. The 7090
can accept nearly all of these programs directly.

2/63

408:021.100
•

STANDARD

EDP

•

IBM 7090

REPDa[S

Data Structure

DATA STRUCTURE

§

021.

.1

.2
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of Location

Size

Purpose or Use

Word position:

36 bilS

Row:

6 bits +
parity
single column
code
24 words

basic addressable location in core storage.
character on magnetic tape.
character on punched

Column:
Unit Record:
Group or "byte":
Band:
Record:
Record:
Cylinder:
File:

6 or 8 bits
:!" parity bit
2,790 char
max
1 to 2,790
char
IroN
words
40 bands
1 toN
records

cards.

punched card or its
image in core
storage.
a BCD char on band
of a disk surface.
usable length of band
in disk store.
related char in a
band.
related words on mag
tape.
addressable group of
bands.
mag tape or disk
store.

© 1962 by Auerbach

INFORMATION FORMATS
Type of Information

Representation

Numeral: . . . • .

BCD char on mag tape or

Alphameric char:

card column.
BCD char on mag tape or

disk.
disk.

card column.
6 bits of word.
Fixed point numher: . . . . .
Floating point number:
Instruction:
Data: . . •

Corporation and RNA Incorporated

sign bit plus 35 bits in
word.
sign bit plus 8 bit characteristic plus 27 bit fractional
part in word.
1 word.
1 word.

12/62

408: 031. 100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7090

"PORTS

System Configurotion

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

031 •

.1

6- TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION V
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . . . . . card reader slower by 250 cards/min.
printer slower by 350 lines/min.
magnetic tapes faster by 11,700 char/sec.
floating point included.
no typewriter output.
Rental:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 64,060 per month.
Equipment

Rental

1301 Modell
Disk Storage:
27,900,000 char.

$ 2,125

7631 Model 2
Disk Storage Control

7909 Data Channel

2,800

7302 Core Storage:
32, 768 words

17,500

7606 Multiplexor
7108 Instruction
Processing Unit
7109 Arithmetic
Sequence Unit
7151 Console Control
Unit
7607 Modell
Data Channel
7617 Console
711 Card Reader:
250 cards/min.

Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© 1963

835

3,900

10,600
8,675
1,225
4,275
225
800

721 Card Punch:
100 cards/min.

600

716 Printer:
150 lines/min.

1,200

729 II Magnetic
Tape Units (6):
41,700 char/sec.

4,200

Power SuppUes

~

Total Rental:

$64,060

Cylinder Mode (Disk Storage) .

by Auerbach Corporalion and BNA Incorporaled

1/63

408:031.200
§

IBM 7090

031 .

.2

lO-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION VII B
Main Computer

Equipment

Rental

7302 Core Storage:
32,768

17,500

7606 Multiplexor

7108 Instruction
Processing Unit
7109 Arithmetic
Sequence Unit
7151 Console Control Unit
7607 Modell Data Channel
7617 Console
711 Card Reader:
250 cards/min.
716 Printer:
150 lines/min.

3,900

10,600
8,675
1;225
4,275
225

800
1,200

729 IV Magnetic
Tape Units (4):
62,500 char/sec.

3,600

7607 Model 2 Data Channel
7617 Console

3,275
225

729 IV Magnetic Tape Units (4):
62,500 char/sec.
3,600
Power Supplies
Total Rental:

1,600
$60,700

Deviations from Standard Configuration: • . • . . . . . . . . 19, 500 words more storage.
printer not required.
card reader 150 cards/min. faster.
3 f~r index registers.
no input-output by typewriter .

1/63

Rental: . . . . . . . . . .

. $60,700 per month.

Optional Features Included: .

. printer (required for operation of card reader).

~YSTEM CONFIGURATION
§

408:031.201

031 .

.2

lO-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION VII B (Contd.)
Auxiliary Computer (ffiM 1401)

Eguipment

Rental

1406 Core Storage:
4, 000 positions
Processing Unit:
1401 Model C3
Console

$2,680

1402 Card Read-Punch
Reads:
800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

550

1403 Printer:
600 lines/min.

835

729 II Magnetic Tape Units (2):
15,000 or 41,667 char/sec.
1,400
Optional Features
Total Rental:

Deviations from Standard Configuration:

. none.

Rental: . . . . . . . . . .

, $6,070 per month.

Optional Features Included: .

. High- Low- Equal Compare.
Advanced Programming.
Read Punch Release.
Sense Switches.
Print Storage.
Early Card Read.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

605
$6,070

2/63

408:031.300
§

IBM 709g

031 .

.3

20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURIA'qON VITI B
Equipment

Main Computer

7302 Core Storage:
32, 768 words

$17,500

7606 Multiplexor

3,900

7108 Instruction Processing Unit 10,600
7109 Arithmetic Sequence Unit
8,675
7151 Console Control Unit
1,225
7607 Model 3 Data Channel
7617 Console

4,360
225

711 Card Reader:
250 cards/min.
716 Printer:
150 lines/min.

1,200

729 VI Magnetic Tape Units (4):
90,000 char/sec.

3,800

7607 Model 4 Data Channel
7617 Console

3,360
225

729 VI Magnetic Tape Units (4):
90,000 char/sec.

3,800

7909 Data Channels (2)

5,600

7640 Control

3,400

7340 Hypertape Drives (4):
170,000 char/sec.

5,200

7340 Hypertape Drives (4):
170,000 char/sec.
Power Supplies

5,200
1,600

Total Rental:
Deviations from Standard Configuration

"

~

"

"

"

.

"

"

"

"

Rental: . . . . . . . . . .

$80,670

6, 100 words more storage.
printer not required.
card reader 150 cards/min. faster.
7 fewer index registers.
no input- output registers.
8 tapes 30,000 char/sec. slower.
8 tapes 50,000 char/sec. faster.
$80,670 per month.

Optional Features Included: .

printer (required for operation of ,card reader).
I

2/63

800

@

A-U-ERB';"A-CH--'-'

'-1

408:031.301

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

031 .

.3

20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION VIII B (Cont'd)
Auxiliary Computer (IBM 1401)
Equipment
1406 Core Storage:
8, 000 positions
Processing Unit:
1401 Model C4
Console

1402 Card Read-Punch
Reads:
800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

1403 Printer:
600 lines/min.

729 V Magnetic Tape Units (4):
60,000 char/sec.

Optional Features
Total Rental:

Deviations from Standard Configuration .

. none .

Rental . . . . . . . . . .

. $8.545 per month.

Optional Features Included:

Rental

$

575

2,730

550

835

3,000
855

$ 8,545

.. High - Low- Equal Compare.
Advanced Programming.
Read Punch Release.
Sense Switches.
Print Storage.
Processing Overlap.
Early Card Read.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corparatian and BNA Incorparated

12/62

408:041.100
.STANIlAAD

II

EDP

IBM 7090
Internal Storage
7302 Core Storage

'!PO.TS

INTERNAL STORAGE: 7302 CORE STORAGE

• 29

§041.
.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

7302 Core Storage.

.12

Basic Use:

working storage.

• 13

Description
The IBM 7302 storage unit is used with the 7030,
7080, 7090, 7094 systems. The unit is attached.
to a 7090 through a 7606 Multiplexor. The 7302 has
a capacity of 32,768 words of 36 bits each. Error
or check bits are not used. The unit does, however,
contain circuits that may be used for checking or as
an aid to servicing.

Peak
.292 Peak data rates
Cycling rates: • • 500, 000 cps.
• 1 word.
Unit of data:.
Conversion
factor:
• 36 bits/word.
Data rate:
• 18,000,000
bits/sec •
.3

DATA CAPACITY

.31

Module and System Sizes

I/O Control:
Transfer trapping: .
Floating point trap:

•2

PHYSICAL FORM

• 21

Storage Medium:

.22

Physical Dimensions

Number of locations
6 to 36.
3.
2.

magnetic core.

.23
• 24

Storage
phenomenon:

magnetization.

Recording Permanence

• 243
• 244
• 245

• 28

Access Techniques

• 242

• 281 Recording method:
.282 Reading method:
• 283 Type of access: . •

Rules for Combining
Modules:
• • • not permitted.

.4

CONTROLLER

• 41

Identity:

• 42

Connection to System

• 43

•

•••

.431 Devices per
controller:
.432 Restrictions:

.5

ACCESS TIMING

.51

Arrangement of Heads

.52

yes
no.
yes.
no.
no.

.53

Simultaneous
Operations:.

©

.6

• one.

1.
none.

one.
none.

Access Time Parameters and Variations

.531 For uniform access
Access time: •
Cycle time: • •
For data unit of:

coincident current.
sense wire.
uniform.

7606.
Multiplexor.

Connection to Device

.511 Number of stacks:

• 241 Data erasable

by instructions:
Data regenerated
constantly:
•
Data volatile:
Data permanent:
Storage changeable:

.32

.421 On- Line: •

• 221 Magnetic core type storage
Core diameter:
50 mils.
Core bore:
30 mils.
Array size: •
72 bits by 128 bits by 128
bits.
80 inches by 36 inches by
70 inches.

16,523,776
bits/sec.

7302
32,768.
196,608.
32,768.
1.

Identity: •
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Modules: . •

Reserved Storage
Purpose

Effective
458,716 cps.

Minimum Storage

Data is accessed in the store in 72 data bit groups.
In the 7090 system, the unwanted 36 bit group is
ignored.
• 16

Potential Transfer Rates

Peak
0.55 JI. sec.
2.00· JI. sec.
2 words.

Effective
2.18
2.18
1 word.

CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: • • • • • none •

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

408:041.700

IBM 7090

§041.

.8

.7

PERFORMANCE

.71

Data Transfer

Error

Pair of storage units possible
With self (Via 7909
Data Channel): ••
With self (Via 7090
Processor):

.

.72

yes

With self (via 7909): •
With self (via 7090): •

Reference to
locked area:

With self (via 7090): •

12/62

Nwords.
1 word.

Effective Transfer Rate
With self (via 7909): •

Check or Interlock

Invalid address:
. Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:

yes

Transfer Load Size

.73

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

230,000 words/sec.
4. 36 ~. sec/word.
78,000 words/sec.
12. 8~. sec/word.

I AUERBACH I $J

Action

not possible.
not possible •
none.
none.
none.
none.
none.
.data is lost,
(see 408:111.4).
none.

module restricted
store size.

408:042.100
IBM 7090n094
Internal Storage

1301
INTERNAL STORAGE: 1301 DISK STORAGE UNIT

§

042.

.13

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: .

Disk Storage Unit.
1301 Models 1 and 2.

.12

Basic User:

auxiliary storage.

.13

Description

Checking features include a validity check upon
data received by the File Control, a comparison
of the .record address on the disc with the address
in the stored program, and checks for illegal operation codes or sequences of instructions. Three
check characters are generated and recorded during each write operation. When the record is read,
the check characters are automatically generated
again and compared with the ones read from the
disc. As in the 7300 RAMAC unit, a programmed
comparison of data recorded on a disc with data in
core storage can be made.

The 1301 Model 1 Disk Storage Unit can store up to
27, 900, 000 alphameric characters. Model 2 has
two modules on a single vertical shaft and can store
up to 55, 800, 000 characters. Each module contains
25 discs; 40 of the 50 disc surfaces are used for data
storage. Each module is served by a comb-like
access mechanism. Forty data read-write heads,
one for each data surface, move horizontally between the discs. The entire aCcess mechanism
moves as one unit, so the hori:z;ontal position of all
the heads serving a given module is always the same.
The 40 bands, one on each disc .surface, that can be
read or recorded upon when the access mechanism
is in any given position are referred to as a
"cylinder. "
There are 250 bands on each disc surface. The size
and number of records stored in each band are variable. Their formats are controlled by a format
surface that can be written upon only by a special
instruction after manually releasing a write lock.
Each of the 250 bands on the format surface controls
the record format of the entire cylinder in the corresponding position. A different record format can
be used in each of the 250 cylinders in each module.

A maximum of five 1301 Disk Storage Units can be
connected to one or two 7631 File Controls. Each
7631 is attached to a'7090/94 via 7909 Channels.
Two read or write operations can occur simultaneously when two File Controls are used. Every disc
storage operation is initiated by a "channel select"
instruction, which sends the core storage address
of the initial channel command word to the specified Data Channel. Internal processing then continues while the Data Channel independently controls the disc operation. A group of 1301 units can
be shared by two IBM 7000 series and/or 1410
systems.
Optional Features
#3213 Cylinder Mode (RC). Enables transfers of
data, by one instruction, of a complete cylinder of
up to some 18,600 words, or 111,600 characters.
.14

Data can be recorded in either the 6-bit or 8-bit
.15
mode. In the 6-bit mode each band can store up to
2,790 characters. In the 8-bit mode, only 2,160
.16
alphameric characters can be stored in a band, and
6-bit groups are stacked in 8-bit locations. The
other 2 bits on the disc are ignored or cleared.
When more than one record is stored in a band, the
data capacity is reduced by 38 characters for each
. additional record.address. Instructions are provided.
to read or record a single record, a full band, or,
with the optional Read/Write Cylinder feature (RC),
a full cylinder of up to 111,600 characters.

,
".

Description (Cont'd)

.2
Time for access mechanism movement ranges from
zero (for a record in a preyiously-selected cylinder)
• 21
to 180 milliseconds. Maximum rotation delay time
is 34 milliseconds. Total reference cycle time to
.22
read a randomly-placed record of 270 characters,
update it, re-write it, and execute a programmed
.. 222
write check is 248 milliseconds. If no access
motiOn' is required, the total reference cycle time
is reduced to 88 milliseconds. Using the Read/
Write Cylinder feature, an effective bulk transfer
rate of 13, 833 words, or 83, 000 characters, per
second can be achieved in the 6-bit mode.

AVailability: • .

12 to 15 months (**).

First Delivery:

July, 1962.

Reserved Storage
Purpose
Number of locations Locks
not addressable.
Clocking: 1 disc surface
Spares:
6 disc surfaces
not addressable.
no heads avail2 disc surfaces
able.
manual lock.
Format:
1 disc surface
Addresses: 31 + 38R char/band, none.
forR records/band
PHYSICAL FORM
Storage Medium: .

. multiple magnetic discs .

Physical Dimensions
Disc
Diameter:
Thickness:
Number on shaft:

@ 1962 by Auerbach Carparation and BNA Incorporated

24 inches.
thin.

Modell, 25 discs.
Model 2, 50 discs.

12/62

IBM 7090n094

408:042.230
§

042.

.3

· 23

Storage Phenomenon:

.24

Recording Permanence

Module and System Sizes
Minimum
Storage
Identity:

. 241 Data erasable by
instructions: .
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: • .
.243 Data volatile:
.244 Data penuanent:
.245 Storage
changeable:
.25

, .31

magnetization.

DATA CAPACITY

yes.

0
Discs:
0
Words:
CharacteIS: 0
Instructions: 0
Cylinder
223,200
111,600
char:
Cylinder
37,200
18,600
word:
1
2
Modules:
0
6-bit mode, 1 record/band.
Basis:

no.
no.
no.
no.

Data Volume per Band of 1 Track
6-bit mode
465
2, 790
2,790
465

Words:
Characters:
Digits:
Instructions:

8-bit mode
, 360.
2,160.
2,160
360.

Maximum
Star age
1301 Modell 1301 Model 2 5 130ls •
Model 2.
200 data.
20 data
40 data
9,300,000
46, 500, 000.
4.650,000
279,000,000.
55,800,000
27,900,000
9,300,000
46.500.000.
4,650,000

: .32

Rules for Combining
Modules: • '; . • .

1,116,000.
180,000.
10.

up to five 1301s, Modell
and/or Model 2 in any
combination.

Note: These are maximum capacities, based upon 1
record per band; each additional record address requires ,,38 characters, or 7 words.
• 26

Bands per Physical
Unit: . . . • .

250 per disc surface.

. 27

Interleaving Levels: •

1.

· 28

Access Techniques
magnetic heads on access
arms whi,ch move horizontally in unison.

• 281 Recording method:

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

Data Channel.
7909 (see 708:102.12).
.42

Connection to System

.421 On-Line:
.283 Type of access
Description of stage
Move heads to
selected band: •
Wait for selected
record: • • . •

Possible starting stage
.422 Off-Line:
if new band is selected.
if same band was previous"

ly selected. Wait for transfer
of data: . . • •
.29

no.

• 292 Peak data rates
Unit of data:
Conversion factor:
Gain factor:
Data rate
6-bit mode:
8-bit mode:

12/62

.43
1,800 rpm.
630,000 bits/sec, including char. gaps.
540, 000 bits/sec, data bits
only.
Note: based on 6-bit mode .

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per
controller:
.432 Restrictions:

.44 Data Transfer Control
character.
7 or 9 (includingspace bit). .441 Size of load: • . . .
'
1 track/band.
90,000 char/sec.
70,000 char/sec.
8,750 words/sec.

one 7631 with one 7909, or
two 7631s with two 7909s
(two channels).
7631 Model 3 penuits
shared use of 1301s with
an IBM 1410 system.
7631 Model 4 penuits
shared use, with another
7000 series system
(except 7072).

Potential Transfer Rates

.291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates:
Bit rate per track:

File Control •
7631 Model 2, 3, or 4.

5.
maximum of 5 1301s per
system, whether 1 or 2
7631s are used. '

1 record of up to 2, 790
chars, 1 band of up to
2, 790 chars, or (with
read/write cylinder
option) 1 cylinder of up
to 111,600 characters.

'INTERNAL STORAGE: 1301 DISK STORAGE UNIT

§

042.

408:042.442

.53

Access Time Parameters and Variations

.532 Variation in access time
.442 Input-output
area: . . •
•443 Input-output area
access: • . • .
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . .
.445 Synchronization:
.447 Table' control:
. 448 Testable
conditions:

•5

ACCESS TIMING

.51

Arrangement of Heads

.511 Number of Stacks
Stacks per system:
Stacks per module:
Stacks per yoke: .
Yokes per module:
Total per system:
. 512 Stack movement:
. 513 Stacks that can access
any particular
location:
.514 Accessible locations
By single stack
With no movement: .
With all movement: . • . .
By all stacks
With no movement: . • . .
.515 Relationship between
stacks and
locations: • . . •

.52

B:

C:

Example,
m.sec.

o or 50 to 180
o to 34

160.0.

Stage

each word.

Move head to
selected band:
Wait for selected
record:
Read one record:
Read one band:
Total:

0.4 to 34
34.
0.4 to 248

CHANGEABLE
STORAGE:

no .

none.
automatic.
yes; scatter-read and
gam~;r-write, controlled
by channel commands .
access not ready, access
inoperable, and various
error conditions are
signaled by the File
Control in response to a
"sense" command.

.6

.

17.0.
4.0.
181.0.

.7

AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

.71

Data Transfer
Pairs of storage units possibilities
With self:
no .
yes.
With core storage: •

.72

Transfer Load Size
With core storage:

40 to 400, data only.
40.
40.
1.
50 to SOD, including spares
and control, (see
408:042.16).
horizontal.

.73

Effective Transfer Rate

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

1 band.

Error

250 bands.

Invalid address,
Invalid code,
Receipt of data,
Recording of data:

40 bands per module.
40 to 400 bands per
system.
first 4 digits of 6-digit
home address for each
band denote head and
band number.

seeking a specified
location.
reading.
recording.

a + b + c = at most 1 per DSU module.
b + c =at most 1 per File Control.

©

1 record, 1 band, or (with
RC) 1 cylinder.

With core storage, using optional RC
6-bit mode:
83,700 char/sec.
13,950 words/sec.
8-bit mode:
65,000 char/sec .
10, 833 words/sec •

.8

1.

Simultaneous Operations

A:

Variation,
m.sec.

core storage.

Dispatch of data,
Timing conflicts,
Physical record
missing:
Reference to locked
area:

Access inoperative:
Circuit failure:
Illegal instruction
sequence:
Illegal format
character:

Check or
Interlock

Action

check
check
parity bit check
programmed write
check; generate
check characters
parity
check

indicator.
indicator.

check

indicator.

ignored.
check
check

indicator.
indicator.

check

indicator.

check

indicator.

indicator.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.

Note: These error indications are transmitted from the File
Control'to the computer in response to a "sense"
command.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and aNA Incorporated

12/62

408:051.100
IBM 7090
Central Processor

CENTRAL PROCESSOR

§

051.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

.12

Central Processor.
IBM 7108.
Instruction Processing Unit.
IBM 7109.
Arithmetic Sequencing Unit.

. 12

Description
The 7090 is a large -scale binary computer. It is
particularly suited to large-scale numeric, realtime, and simulation applications. The singleaddress instructions provided cover an extensive
range of fixed and floating pOint operations on 36-bit
words. Useful instructions are included to cover
both logical and table look -up operations. Addition
and multiplication instructions each take about 4 and
25 microseconds respectively.
The IBM 7090 processor is the solid-state successor
to the 709 processor. Although it is composed of
two physical units, it can be considered a single unit
from a user's point of view. The 7090 processor includes all of the characteristics of the 709. Using
the 2.18 microsecond cycle core storage, the
processor times are approximately one tenth of those
for the 709. The 7090 can execute approximately
250,000 additions or 40,000 multiplications per
second. The differences from the 709 are summarized in the last paragraph.
The numeric representation is sign bit and binary
magnitude, using binary arithmetic for both fixed
and floating point arithmetic. On the other hand, the
index registers use two's complement arithmetic,
and the 7090 includes extra instructions to complement binary values being transferred to, but not
from, the index registers. The three index registers
are again used as in the 709 and 704; i.e., an instruction can call none, one, two, or all three index
registers which are "ORed" together, then subtracted
from the instruction address.
An idea of the variety of the "facilities can be given
by specific examples.
A set of "convert" instructions is provided which can
be used to do arithmetic using six-bit BCD characters,
radix conversions, editing, and character conversion
(both size and bit configuration). These are in
reality compound "table look -up" operations. The
table is a list which contains an entry for each possible value of a six-bit character. Each list entry
contains in one word both a value and the base address'
of a list. Unless successive characters have no
positional significance (e.g., blanks), a list is required for each level of significance. The values
may be used for addition or concatenation, for radix
and code conversion respectively.

©

Description (Contd.)
This radix-to-binary conversion for six digit numbers
is straightforward in one instruction and a table.
Editing is considerably simplified. Conversion from
binary is still awkward.
There is one level of indirect addreSSing. The
second address is not checked for an indirect address indicator. Both, addresses are indexable,
one before, the other after the indirect address is
used.
There is a fully recursive execute operation.
In addition to four standard sense lights, there is a
36-bit indicator register. A large number of instructions are provided to set, reset, and test this
register. The register can be used very effectively
for multi-sequencing or input-output control routines.
The keyboard can be used as a sense switch register
that can be stored, then tested. The six standard
sense switches can be tested, but no instruction is
provided to store them.
The central processor is used to initiate Data
Channel operations. The 7090 has two kinds of data
channels. First, the 7607 Data Channel, for use
with 729 tape units and unit record equipment, is a
solid-state version of a data Synchronizer. With the
exception of a new Reset Channel instruction, it is
identical to the 766 from a programming viewpoint.
Second, there is the new 7909 Data Channel that the
7090 uses for controlling 7340 Hypertapes and 1301
Discs, and which has required the addition of a few
new processor instructions and new control commands for the new units.
Additional "trap" locations have also been added for
the 7090 Data Channels, because a 7909 Data Channel
can accept and act on interrupts (traps) without disturbing the processor. When a trap occurs, the
program counter at the time of the trap, and/or the
conditions that caused it, are stored in specific
storage locations. The program counter is set to
access the next instruction from another specific
storage location. The specific locations are different
for each type of trap. Traps are caused by: any
transfer order which results in a transfer (the address is stored in any event); the data channel signals
(command completed, end-of-file, and magnetic tape
error); encountering a 704 or 709 input-output instruction (Simulate Mode); an external signal; or encountering a floating point underflow or overflow (spill).
All of these trap conditions except the external signal
can be turned on or off by instruction.
The main feature of the Central Processor facilities
is great variety. This variety can be considered
from three viewpoints. First, it provides scope for
many types of operations to be performed efficiently
for all types of logical and numerical working.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

408:051.120

§

os!.

.12

Description (Contd.)
Second, the variety presents serious problems in
learning all the possible ramifications. Third, this
also makes it difficult to write efficient generalized
routines because of the many special cases that must
be covered. It is particularly difficult for tyros to
understand expert coding which uses the variety extensively, and the extensive descriptions are often
distributed in pieces throughout many manuals. On
the other hand, a tyro need not use the full variety,
and the manuals are well set out for learning. In the
first instance, the subtraction of modifiers, inherited
in the 704, and the complement arithmetic of the index registers seem unnatural. In general, the 7090
processor is a tool for experts rather than tyros.

IBM 7090
.14

First Delivery: . . . . November, 1959.

.2

PROCESSING FACILITIES

.21

Operations and Operands
Operation and Provision Radix
Variation

.211 Fixed point
Add -subtract:
Multiply
Short:
Long:
Divide
Remainder:

automatic

binary

35 bits & Sign.

automatic
automatic

binary
binary

o to 35 bits and sign.
35 bits & Sign.

automatic

binary

35 bits & Sign.

.212 ,Floating point
~istic

~

The most restricting items in the specification are
the limit of three index registers and 36-bit word
size. The 7094 provides more index registers (in a
compatible manner) and double -length operations.

Add -subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:

*

The 7090 processor can accept all 704 or 709
programs and most of the 7094 and 7040/44 programs . . 213
A program called Compatibility 11 is available which
handles input-output differences between the 704,
709, or 7090. When running programs written for
other· machines, it is necessary to eliminate
references to input-output devices that do not exist
.214
on the 7090, and a few instructions that are not included in the 7090 instruction repertoire. The faster
speed of the 7090 can cause timing problems when
programs tightly coded for slower machines are run
on it. The inverse of the above is true when running
.215
7090 programs on slower machines.

*

*

automatic
automatic
automatic

binary
binary
binary

27 bits & sign 8iiits
27 bits & sign 8 bits
27 bits & sign 8 bits

*Both normalized and unnormalized.
Boolean

.-.~

AND:
Inclusive OR:
Exclusive OR:
NOT:

}

OOb~

automatic

{ 36 bits
36 bits
37 bits

automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic

36
36
36
36

automatic
automat~c

binary

Comparison
Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:

Code
translation

Provision From

bits
bits
bits
bits

To

Size

any code
any code six 6-bit char
card iinage BCD
standard
36 bits or
6 chars.
subroutine
standard
6-bitBCD card
36 bits or
subroutine
image
6 chars.
t

In summary, the differences between the 7090 and
the 709 are, the
additional interrupts, i.e., "traps".

t SpeCial tables are specified to be used with convert instructions.

elimination of the Drum and CRT instructions.
additional Disc and Hypertape instructions and
orders.

Size

.216 Radix
conversion
automatic 6-bitBCD
standard
any radix
subroutine

additional index instructions; load complement, etc.

any radix 20 bits.
36 bits or
6 -bit
BCD
6 chars.

t Special tables are specified to be used with convert instructions.

standard inclusion of 709 input-output optional
features; rewind and lock, etc.

.217 Edit format
The changes are:
the arithmetic speed is increased approximately
ten times.
the console is a separate unit.
the 709 is a vacuum -tube processor, whereas the
7090 is solid -state.
less air conditioning is required.
an off-line computer (as opposed to a tape-toprinter unit) is required for efficient operation.
.13

Availability: . . . . . . not in production, can only
be rented or purchased
used or rebuilt when
available.

12/62

Comment

Provision
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Insert character:
Float character:
Protection:

semi -automatic
semi-automatic
semi -automatic
semi -automatic
semi-automatic
semi -automatic
semi -automatic

.218 Table look-up:
.219 Others
Test: . • • .
. 22

r-~-

quences using
convert instruc·
tiODS and/or
logical instructioDS, with appropriate tables

Size
six 6-bit
characters.

none.
1 to 36 bits.

Special Cases of Operands

. 221 Negative numbers: •
.222 Zero: • . . . • . . .

binary magnitude and sign •
-; mayor may not be
equal, depends on
instructions .

+ or

408:051.223

CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§

051.

.2374 Index specification: .

· 223 Operand size
determination:

.23

36, 18, 15, 3, or 1 bits;
variable 0 to 36 bits in
multiply and divide, and
also six 6-bit characters.

Instruction Formats

.231 Instruction structure: . 1 word.
· 232 Instruction layout

Part

Operation

Flag

3

2

Size (bits)
Part
Size (bits)

II
II

Operation
3

Not
Used*
4

Decrement
15

Tag Address
15

3

I Tag
I 3

Address
15

* Not used for most instructions.
.233 Instruction parts
Name
Operation:
Flag:

Purpose
operation code
indirect addressing
specification.
index register
Tag:.
specification.
operand address.
Address:
Count: ..
variable length operands
and counts.
. 234 Basic address structure: 1 address (sequential) .
· 235 Literals
Arithmetic: . . . .
none.
Comparisons and
none.
tests: . . . .
Incrementing
modifiers: .
0 to 32,767.
Setting modifiers:
0 to 32,767.
· 236 Directly addressed operands
.2361 lnternal
Minimum Maximum
Volume
storage type size
size
accessible
Core Store:

3 bits

entire
store

Magnetic
Disc:

1 word

18,600
words ~

t

entire
storage
entire
storage

t

Only one word unless 7909 Data Channel
included.
~ Only 465 words unless RIC option is
included (see 408:042.013).

. 2362 Increased address
capacity:
. 237 Address indexing
.2371 Number of methods:
.2372 Names: . . ; .
.2373 Indexing rule: .

none.
1.

indexing (can be multiple
indexes).
the contents of the indicated
index registers are ORed
together then subtracted
from the address of the
instruction to form the
effective address.

©

each of the index bits specifies an index register.

.2375 Number of potential
indexers: . . . ..
3.
.2376 Addresses which can be indexed:
Type of address
Application
After ESNT
instruction:
o to 16,383.
After LSNT
instruction, normal condition: . . 0 to 32, 767.
.2377 Cumulative indexing:. via indirect addressing and
EXC instruction .
. 2378 Combined index
and step: . . .
yes.
IA bits
EXC
· 238 Indirect addressing
IilSiiuctions
.2381 Recursive: .
no.
yes.
.2382 Designation:
2 bits in the operation
instruction.
code EXC
with or
without IA
bits.
n level, will
· 2383 Control:. . . . . . . . automatic,
one level
not stop
only.
until another instruction,
other than
EXC is encountered.
· 2384 Indexing with indirect
addressing: . . • . . yes; possible
before and
after going
to the indirect address.
index registers.
· 239 Stepping:. . . . .
· 2391 Specification of
increment: . .
in stepping instruction.
. 2392 Increment sign:.
positive .
o to 32,767.
• 2393 Size of increment:
value of increment.
· 2394 End vallle: . . . .
• 2395 Combined step and
test: . . . . . . .
yes.

• 24

Special Processor Storage

.241 Category
Number of
of storage locations

Size in
bits

Program usage

Accumulator
MultiplierQuotient:

1

38

arithmetic unit.

1

36

lndex:

3

15

arithmetic unit &
input -output.
address
modification•

Program
counter:

1

15

Sense lights:
Sense switches:
Storage
register:
Instructions :
Indicator:
7151 Console
Keys:

1962 by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

4

1

6

1

1
1

36
18

1

36

1

36
bits

specified instruction
address•
save conditions.
accept condition,
buffer with store.
shift counter. holds
instruction.
save condition.
enter data.

12/62

IBM 7090

408:051.242
§

05l.

.242 Category
of storage

Total
number
locations

Accumulator
MultiplierQuotient:
Index:
Program
counter:
Sense lighu:
Sense switches:
Storage
register:
Instruction:
Indicator:
7151 Console
Keys:

Physical Access
time
form
fJ sec

1

register

0.36

1
3

register
register

0.36
0.36

1
4
6

register
flip-flops
switch

0.36
0.36
1.45

1
1

register
register
register

0.36

1
1

36
switches

0.36

1.45

.334 Interruption conditions: only when specifically requested (floating point
trap mode is normally
Access
• on).
time
high to low class of interfJ sec
rupts; floating pOint, di2.18
rect data, external signal
2.18
data channel.
2.18
.335 Interruption process
Disabling interruption: first interrupt in any class
2.18
disables all interrupts ex2.18
cept higher classes.
Registers saved: .
program counter.
Destination:
fixed location, depends on
2.18
cause.
.336 Control methods
2.18
Determine cause:
indication stored in a particular location.
Enable interruption:
instruction.

..

.34
.3
.31

Instruction Sequenci!!8:

. 341 Method of control: .
.342 Maximum number
of programs: . . .
. 343 Precedence rules: .
.344 Program protection
Storage:

.311 Number of sequence
control facilities:
1 sequential.
.314 Special sub-sequence counters
Number
Purpose
1: . .
.
counts shifts (not accessible
by program).
.315 Sequence control
step size: . . .
1 word.
. 316 Accessibility to
.35
change, save in index, or
routines: . . .
store .
. 317 Permanent or optional
modifier: ..
none.
.4
.32 Look-Ahead: . . . . . . none .

..

.. . .

. 33

¥ulti -runni!!8:

SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES

.....

. ...

In-out units:
Maximum separate
sets:

. ....

Multi - seguencing:

own coding.
own coding.
own coding.
words 0 to 16, 383 can be
used, with words, 16,384
to 32,767 made unavailable by ESNT instruction.
own coding.
own coding.
see paragraph. 344.

PROCESSOR SPEEDS

Interruption
.41

.331 Possible causes
In-out units: .

external signal.
tape error.
end-of-file.
704 I/O instruction in copy
trap mode.
direct data.
when free.
In-out controllers: .
none.
Storage access: .
floating point underflow;
Processor errors: .
overflow in floating trap
mode.
Other: • . . . . . . . on encountering transfer of
control instruction while
in trapping mode.
• 332 Control by routine
Individual control:
for I/O mask and
instruction.
request by instruction.
Method: . . .
external signal trap is
Restriction:
always active and may
cause timing conflicts.
some interrupts use common locations.
.333 Operator control: • . . can clear or set traps
manually.
12/62

Instruction Times in ~ secs

.411 Fixed point
Add - subtract:
Multiply: . . .
Divide: . .
. 412 Floating point
Add-subtract:
Multiply: .
Divide: • . . .
.413 Additional allowance for
Indexing: • . . . . .
Indirect addressing:
Re-complementing:
.414 Control
Compare: • . • • . .
Branch: . . . . . . .
Compare and branch:
.415 Counter control
Step: ....
Step and te st: •
Test: .
.416 Edit:
. 417 Convert:
. 418 Shift: . .

..
..

..

.42

4.36.
4.36 to 30.52 (25.29 avg. ).
6.54 to 30.52 (30.52 avg. ).
13.08 to 32',70 (13.95 avg.).
4.36 to 28.34 (23.98 avg. ).
6.54 to 28.34 (28.34 avg. ).
none.
2.18.
none.
4.36.
2.18.
6.54.
4.36.
4.36.
4.36.
none .
4.36 to 17.44(17.44avg.).
4.36 to 17.44 .

Processor Performance in I:! secs

CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§

408:051.421

051.

. 421 For random address
Fixed point
Floating point
c = a + b: . . .
13.08
22.67
b= a +b: . . .
13.08
22.67
Sum N items:.
4.36 N
13.95 N
c = ab: . . . .
34.01
32.70
c = alb: . . . .
37.06
39.24
.422 For arrays of data
c i = a i +b j :. .
26.16
31. 39
bj == ai + bj :. .
26. 16
31.39
Sum N items: .
8.72
18.31
55.27
c = c + aibj: .
45.78
.423 Branch based on comparison
Numeric data: .
15.26N
Alphabetic data:
15.26N
.424 Switching
Unchecked: .
6.54.
Checked: . .
15.26.
List search:
13.08 (N+l).
.425 Format control per character
Unpack:. . . . . . . . 112.92 card image to BCD.
16.48 BCD to binary.
Compose: . . . . . . . ?
.426 Table look up per comparison
For a match: . . . . . 13.08 (N+l).
For least or greatest: 13.08 (N+ 1).
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . . 13.08 (N+ 1).

©

.427 Bit indicators
Set bit in separate
location: . . . .
Set bit in pattern:
Test bit in
separate location:
Test bit in pattern: .
Test AND for B bits: .
Test OR for B bits: . .
.428 Moving
XMT (With 7909 Data
Channel): . . .
4 instructions: .
2N instructions:
'.5

2.18.
2.18.
4.36.
4.36.
4.36.
8.72.
6.54 + 4. 36N.
2.18 + 13. 08N.
8.72N.

ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Overflow:
Underflow (float -pt):
Zero divisor:

check
check
check

Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:

not possible.
none.
check

Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:

none.
none.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA hicorporated

none

Action
sets indicator.
sets indicator.
sets indicator and/or
stops processor.
attempts operation.
modulo memory
size.

12/62

408:061.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

IBM 7090

REPORTS

Console

CONSOLE

§ 061.

.25

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Description

. . . . . . IDM 7151 Console Control.

The IDM 7151 Console Control is a free-standing
desk unit which is basic to all 7090 systems. Power
switches and indicators are part of this unit. Provision has been made for display of all processor reg- .26
isters in a set of individual lights (with the exception
of the Sense Indicators, which are displayed in the
Storage register). The Data Channel status indicators for each Channel, and the display, operation and
entry controls present adequate information to assess the status of the 7090 system and to operate it.

Resets
Name

Form

Comment

Clear:

button

Reset:

button

resets all registers in
processor and the contents of core storage.
resets all registers and
indicators in logical sec- •
tion of computer.

Loading
Name

Form

Load Cards:
Load Drum:

allows operator to initiate
{ the loading of a self-loading program stored on
cards, drum or tape.

Load Tape:
Entry of data through the keyboard is somewhat cumbersome' as it is a two-step operation. However, a .27
simple program that reads data and addresses from
the entry keys can be used to facilitate the process •

Name

Form

Comment

•2

CONTROLS

Enter MQ:

button

.21

Power

transfers manually keyedin data to the MQ register

Enter Instruction:

button

causes manually keyed-in
word to be executed.
6 switches, the settings
are program testable.
the contents of the location
specified by the address
part of the manually
keyed-in word are displayed in this register.

Name

Form

Comment

Normal-On:
Normal-Off:

button
button

cycles up power in stages.
turns off all power in
stages.
turns off all power immediately.

Emergency-Off: pull
switch
Connections: . .

.23

Stops and Restarts

• 24

\

.• none.

.22

Form

Comment

Start:

button

starts computer operation
after a program halt,
read/write check, or
when in automatic mode.
stops computer operation
after instruction in
process is executed.
When I/O device is in
operation, computer
stops after device
disconnects .

switch

Special

Sense Switches: switch
Display Storage: button

Display Effective Address:

Name

Auto-manual:

\

Comment

Panel Input
Switches:
Display Sense
Indicator:

button

displays in the address
field of the storage register the difference between
the contents of the address field of the storage
register and the specified
index register:.

switches 36 input switches used for
manually inserting a
word.
button

displays the contents of
the 36 sense indicators
in the storage register.

Name

Form

Condition

Alarm

bell

DC power turned off.

Stepping
Name

Form

Single Step:

button

Multiple Step:

button

Comment
.3
used only in manual mode
to execute program,
.31
1 instruction at a time.
used only in manual mode
to execute program automaticallyat a slow speed.

© 1963

DISPLAY
Alarms

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

408:061,320

§

IBM 7090

061.

. 32

. 32

Name

Conditions
Name

Form

Conditions Indicated

Accumulator
Overflow:

light

MQ Overflow:

light

Divide Check:

light

Channel Select:

lights

indicates overflow during
fixed point operation or
shift operation.
indicates MQ overflow
.33
when the processor is
using the compatibility
program.
indicates in fixed point
division that the dividend
is greater than or equal
to the divisor.
8 select lights, 1 for each
channel. Each light
turned on according to
channel in operation.

Channel Check
Trap:

lights

Command Trap: lights

Channel Tape
Check:

lights

Ready:

light

Power:

light

Automatic:

light

Trap Control:

light

Sense Lights:

lights

I/O Power
Check:

light

Simulate:

light

Program Stop:

light

Read-Write
Select:

4/63

Conditions (Contd.)

light

8 lights, 1 for each channel, lit when Tape Check
Trap is enabled.
8 lights, 1 for each channel, lit when End of File
or Command Trap is
enabled.
8 tape check lights, for
each channel. A light is
turned on when an error
is detected.
indicates circuits have
reached their operating
level.
indicates power is applied
to the system.
on when computer is in
automatic mode.
on when computer is operating in the trap mode.
4 sense lights controlled
by the program.

fuse blown or circuit
breaker tripped in I/O
equipment.
on when 7090 is operating
in the 704-709 compatibility feature.
turned on when computer
executes a halt instruction.
turned on when an I/O device has been selected
for reading or writing.

Form

Console
Processor:
light
Computer Components Check: light

Conditions Indicated
on when the console is on.
on when a fuse is blown or
a circuit breaker is
tripped in the Processor,
Store, or Multiplexor.

Control Registers
Name

Form

Comment

Instruction:

lights

18 neon lights, allocated
to sign bit "and bits 1
through 17.

Instruction
Counter:

lights

Accumulator:

lights

MQ:

lights

Index:

lights

15 neon lights, allocated
to bits 21 through 35 to
indicate location of next
instruction.
38 neon lights, 1 for each
bit position plus 1 for Q
and 1 for P bit positions.
36 neon lights, 1 for each
bit position of a word.
15 neon lights for each of
3 index registers.

.34

Storage: • . . . . . . . 36 neon lights to indicate
contents of the processor
buffer register.

.4

ENTRY OF DATA

.41

Into Registers
(1) Desired word keyed into the 36 panel input

switches, then
(2) Depress Enter MQ button.

.42 Into Storage: •

1 core storage location is

written into by using the
enter instruction button
with a store instruction
keyed into tlie 36 manual
input switches.
.5

CONVENIENCES

.51

Communication:

optional.

• 52

Clock: . . .

optional.

.53

Desk Space:

none.

.54

View:.

when operator is at console,
all the equipment can easily
be seen if conveniently
placed.

408:071.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7090n094

REPORTS

Input-Output
711 Card Reader
INPUT-OUTPIJT: 711 CARD READER

§071.
.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

.12

Description

Card Reader.
Type 711,
Model 2.

The 711 Card Reader, Model 2, reads cards at a
rate of 250 cards a minute. Cards are fed from a
hopper with a capacity of approximately 600 cards
and placed in a stacker that holds approximately
1, 200 cards.
A 711 Card Reader may be connected to each 7607,
Modell or 3 (see 40S:101.12) that has a 716 Printer
attached. At least one 711 is required on each 7090
system.
During read operations, data read from cards is
sent directly to storage under control of the Data
Channel (see also 40S:101). Words may be read
into non -consecutive locations, through use of
channel commands. This card is stored in the form
of a "card image". Each card image represents 72
characters. Data read from cards may be in either
binary or BCD codes, and by a suitable program,
BCD data may be converted to binary data. The
card image is represented by twenty-four 36-bit
words; two words per row of the card image. The
reader will only read 72 out of SO columns of each
card.
There are two card reading stations. Reading format is controlled by the stored program and a plugboard located on the reader. Format control signals
can be read from a card at the first station by control brushes and decoded by plugboard wiring. The
plugboard can be wired to control the format of a
card read at the second read station. A minimum of
10 different formats can be conveniently wired and
up to SO columns can be controlled by these rearrangements.
The 711 Card Reader has a 240 millisecond card
cycle in which there are four clutch points ..
A programmed check of card reading of selected
columns can be arranged by reading those columns
at both stations. However, the total number of
columns read, counting two for a column read at
both stations, is still only 72. Thus, a total of 36
checked columns can be read.
Manual controls are provided for normal run-in of
cards. Various contacts are used to sense for improper feeding of cards, and lamps are provided to
indicate when a malfunction exists within the unit.

©

not in prodUction, can be
rented or purchased used
or rebuilt only when available .

.13

Availability:

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the
head:
.212 Reservoirs:
.22

clutch driven rollers.
none.

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system:
.24

Arran~ment

of Heads

Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:
Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:
.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

..

.311 Medium:
.312 Phenomenon:
.32

Positional

'

reading (control)
1.

SO.
1 row at a time.
reading.
1 card.
1.

SO.
1 row at a time.

standard SO-column cards.
rectangular holes.

Arran~ment

.321 Serial by:
.322 Paralled by:
.324 Track use
Data:
Redundancy check: .
Timing:
Control signals:
Unused:
Total:
. 325 Row use:
.33

none .
brush.

12 rows at standard spacing.
SO-columns at standard
spacing.
72.
O.

O.
O.
S.
SO .
all for data.

Coding
External:
Internal:

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

row binary.
Hollerith code (see Data
Code Table No.2)
card image of 72 columns.

12/62

408:071.340
§

IBM 7090n094

071.

.34

.54

Format ComQatibility:

.35

standard 80-column card.

CONTROLLER

.41

Identi!y:

.42

Connection to System

.56
1 to 8 controllers.
none.

.431 Devices per controller:
.432 Restrictions:

1.
a Type 716 Printer must
be attached to a channel
before a card reader can
also be attached.

Data Transfer Control

.

.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization:

.6
1 to N words of a 72
column binary image in
.62
the sequence 9 row left,
9 row right, thru 12 row
. 621
left, 12 row right, and
.622
sometimes continuing
through consecutive cards.
core storage.
. 623
1 word.
.624
none.
yes.
automatic.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input:

.

. 52

.

. 522 Output:
.523 Stepping:
.524 Skipping:
.525 Marking:
. 526 Searching:

12/62

.63

Code Translation: .

by processor program
from card image.

no.
yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.

PERFORMANCE
SQeeds
Nominal or peak speed:. 250 cards/min •
Important parameters
Cycle time:
. 240m. sec.
Clutch point: .
.60m.sec.
Overhead:
. 4 clutch points .
Effective speeds:
. 250 cards/min.
Demands on System
less than 1 percent.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:

.72

Other Controls

end of card.

transfer 1 to 24 words per
card to core storage, see
.441.
none.
1 card at a time.
yes, skip N words under
program control.
none .
none.

Testable Conditions

Core store:

InQut-OutQut Operations

.521 Input:

• 53

1 card (24 words).

no-.
yes.
no.
no.
no.

Disabled:
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly
exhausted:
Busy
controller:
End of medium
marks:
Hopper empty:
Stacker full:
End of card:

Connection to Device:

.441 Size of load:

Control OQerations
Disable:
Request interrupt:
Offset card:
Select stacker:
Select format:

Data Channel 7607 (see
408:101). Models I or 3.

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:

.44

.55

1 as selected on plugboard.
by plugboard.

.

.4

.43

plugboard and program.

Control:
Format
alternatives:
Rearrangement:

all devices using standard
80-column cards.

Ph:t:sical Dimensions:

Format Control

.73

none.

Function

Form

Start:

key

Stop:

key

Comment
places unit in "ready"
status .
removes control from
computer by placing
unit in "not ready"
status .

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper:
Stacker: .

Capacity
600 cards.
I, 200 cards.

408:071.732

INPUT-OUTPUT: 711 CARD READER
§071.

.732 Replenishment
time: . . . .
• 733 Adjustment time:
. 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . • . .

.8
0.25 to 0.50 min.
reader does not need to
be stopped.
0.25 to 1.0 min .
2.4 min.

©

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Invalid Code:

1962 by Auerbach Corppration and aNA Incorporated

Check or
Interlock
check
none •
check
none.
check
all codes valid.

Action
programmed.
stop and alarm.
indicator

12/62

408:072.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7090/7094

REPORTS

'Input-Output
721 Card Punch

INPUT-OUTPUT: 721 CARD PUNCH

§

Availab~lity:

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

Description

.21

Drive Mechanism

A 721 Card Punch is used in the 7090 Data Processing System to provide punched card output. Data is
punched on standard 80-column cards at a rate of
100 cards per minute. Data to be punched is stored
in core storage in the form of a card image.

.211 Drive past the
head:
.212 Reservoirs:

A 721 Card Punch may be connected to each 7607
Modell or 3 Data Channel (see 408: 101. 12).

. 221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system:

die punch .
brushes .
none.

.23

Multiple Copies:

none.

.24

A=angement of Heads

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:.

. 12

not in production, can be
rented or purchased used
or rebuilt, only when
available.

. 13

072.

Card Punch .
Type 721.

A channel having a punch attached to it must also
have a 716 Printer attached since the printer controls the punching operation. Punching operations,
however, are specified by the stored channel commands through the Data Channel (see 408: 101) .

. 22

Data is punched into cards by row in binary. The
punching format is controlled by the stored program
and a plugboard located on the punch unit. BCD or
other codes can be also programmed. Cards are
fed to the punch unit from a hopper with a capacity
of appro~mately 600 cards. Each of the 12 rows of
a card is divided into two parts: the first part consists of columns 1 to 36; and the second part consists of columns 37 to 72. Each part is treated as a
36-bit word to accommodate the word length used in
the 7090. Twenty-four words can"be punched in one
card in any 72 out of 80 card columns.
The minimum time between word transfers is 300
microseconds, with 31 milliseconds between rows.
These times should be considered when load data
channel instructions are used to synchronize the
punch with the CPU. The card punch requires a
600-millisecond punch cycle to perform a series of
operations relating to punching a card.
The machine can be used for on- or off-line gang
punch punching operations by proper wiring of the
plugboard. Manual controls and indicating lights
are provided. Manual controls are used to run-in
and -out cards and the lights are used to indicate
that a malfunction within the unit exists.

Sensing and Recording Systems

Use of station:.
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

control brushes.
1.
80.
I row at a time.

Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

punch dies.
3 rows.
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

punch brushes.
1 card.
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:.
.312 Phenomenon:

standard 80-column cards.
rectangular holes.

.32 Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:

Optional Feature
.324 Track use
# 2250 Consecutive Number Punching: This feature
Data:
enables four digit consecutive numbers to be punchUnused:
ed automatically into any four columns. The counter
Total:
may be reset by hand, and overflows from 9999 to
0000.
. 325 Row use:

©

clutch driven rollers.
none.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated

12 rows at standard spacing.
80 columns at standard
spacing.
72 (or 80 when also gang
punching).

8.
80.
all for data .

12/62

408:072.330
§

IBM 7090/7094

072.

. 33

.55

Internal:
.34

Format Compatibility:

•35

Physical Dimensions:

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: .

.42

Connection to S;rstem

.421 On-line: .
.422 Off-line: .
.43

.56
all other devices using
standard SO-column cards.

Data Channel 7606, Modell
or 3 (see 40S:101) .

Testable Conditions

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions:

.62

Speeds

I to N words.
core stora~ .
1 word.

.63

a .716 Printer must also be
attached to the Data
Channel.

yes.
yes.
yes .
no.
yes .
no.
no .
no.

none.

.621 Nominal or peak
speed:
.622 Important parameters
Cycle time: .
Time between words
in same row:
Time between processive rows:
. 623 Overhead:
.624 Effective speeds: .

1.

Data Transfer Control

. 441 Size of load:
.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
. 445 Table control:
. 446 Synchronization:

yes .
yes.
no.
no.
yes.
yes.

Disabled:
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:
Hopper empty:
Stacker full:

standard SO-column cards.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller:
.432 Restrictions: .

.44

row binary.
Hollerith (see Data Code
Table No.2).
binary ima~.

1.
none.

O~rations

Disable: .
Request interrupt:
Offset card:
Select stacker: .
Select format:
Select code: .

Coding
External:

Control

100 cards/min.
600 msec.
300 fJ. sec.
31 msec .
single clutch point .
100 cards/min .

Demands on System
Core store:

no .
no •
automatic •

less than I percent.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.51

Blocks

.71

Adjustments: .

.72

Other Controls

. 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Output:
.52

end of card.

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input:
. 522 Output:
. 523
• 524
• 525
• 526

Stepping:
Skipping: •
Marking: •
Searching:

. 53

Code Translation:

. 54

Format Control
Control: .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:

12/62

I card (24 words).

none .
1 to 24 N words
forward.
1 card .
none .
none .
none .
matched codes (card
or programmed.

.73

Function

Form

Start:

key

Stop:

key

none .

Comment
makes unit "ready" when
hopper is full and control
panel is in place.
places unit in a "not ready"
status .

Loading and Unloading

. 731 Volumes handled
ima~)

plugboard and program.
4.
yes.
no.

Storage
Hopper:
Stacker:
.732 Replenishment
time:
.734 Optimum reloading
period: .

Capacity
600 cards .
I, 000 cards.
0.6 to 1.0 min, unit does
not need to be stopped.
6 mins.

INPUT-OUTPUT: 721 CARD PUNCH

408:072.800

§ 072 .

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Exhausted
medium:
Imperfect
medium:
Timing conflicts:
Misfeed:

Check or Interlock Action
check

punch stops.

check

punch stops.

check

indicator and
punch stops.
punch stops.

check

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

408:081.100

_STANDARD

Ill-

EDP

IBM 7090/7094
Input-Output
716 Printer

REPORTS

INPUT-OUTPUT: 716 PRINTER

§

.12

081.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

. 12

Description

A special output operation is available to "Write Binary", in which a series of lines can be printed in
0' s and l's representing the binary patterns of consecutive words in the core store .

Printer.
Type 716.

The 716 Printer is a modification of the 407 Accounting Machine. It prints information from 120
print wheels which form a solid bank 12 inches wide.
Each print wheel has 48 characters, including all
the numerals, all the letters of alphabet, and 12
special characters. A line of printing is spaced at
10 characters to the inch. Line spacing is 6 or 8
lines-to-the-inch, single spaced, under control of
a mechanical shift lever.
A 716 Printer may be connected to each 7607 model
1 or 3 (see 708:101.12). At least one 716 is required in each 7090 system.
Printing is performed at a rate of 150 lines per
minute for 72 characters and 75 Jines per minute
for 120 characters. Printing format is controlled by
the arrangement of data in core storage and a plugboard, which is wired to perform specific functions
according to the requirements of the operation. The
printer has a paper tape-controlled carriage, which
uses a standard l2-channel paper tape to control the
skipping and spacing of the form. Functions of the
carriage such as changing or suppressing line spacing, selecting the channel on the carriage control
tape to control skipping, or sensing sheet overflow
may be controlled by various hubs on the plugboard.
Various size forms and masters may be used for
printing.
Printing is controlled by the stored program (see
also 408:101). One record is printed on a line, and
a record consists of twenty-four 36-bit words (72
characters) stored in the form of a card image in
core storage. The wiring of the printer plugboard
determines which of the 120 print wheels will be
used for the print operation. Through use of special
hubs on the plugboard and programming, up to 120
characters can be printed per line at the reduced
speed of 75 lines per minute. Card image words are
sent to a data channel at 300 microseconds between
words (each row containing two words) and 13 milliseconds between rows. Pulses representing the
i~age, set the print wheels for the printing operatlon.
To provide for reliable operation each print wheel
generates an echo pulse for the character printed.
By proper programming, printing with checking can
be accomplished using these echo pulses. Through
the use of sense instructions, various conditions can
be determined, thus, providing more flexibility in
the printer operation.

©

Description (Contd. )

. 13

Availability:

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

not in production, can be
rented or purchased used
or rebuilt only when available.

· 211 Drive past the head: .

margirially punched pin
feed continuous forms
driven by forms tractor .
. 212 Reservoirs: . . . . . none.
· 22

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system: . . engraved wheel.
· 23

Multiple Copies

.231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon: . · 1+ 5.
.232 Types of master
Multilith:. . . .
· yes.
Zerox:
· yes.
Spirit: . . . . .
· yes.
.24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

· 25

printing.
1.
120.
1 line at a time.

Range of Symbols
Numerals:
.
Letters: . . .
Special: . . .
Alternatives:
FORTRAN set: .
Basic COBOL set: .
Total: . . . . . .

*

10 0 - 9.
26 A - Z.
12 $.#,0/

* %@&-*
*

no.
48.

available; see Data Code Tables No. 3A to 3G.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:. . . .

.312 Phenomenon:

1962 by Auerb.ach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

'.

continuous fanfold form pin
feed punched stationery.
single sheets.
roll paper.
printing.

12/62

408:081.320

IBM 7090/7094

081.
. 32 Positional Arrangement

.512 Block demarcation
Output: . . . . .

§

.321 Serial by: .
.322 Parallel by:
.324 Track use:

•325 Row use:
.33

.35

Format Compatibility: . . . . .

Ph~sical

· 523 Stepping:

.521 Input:

mM

1418, . Optical Character Reader can read a
single line.
mM 1428, can read a series oOines.

.524 Skipping:

4.75 to 16.75 in., vernier.
1 to 22 by 1/6 in. at 6 lines/
inch.
1 to 22 by 1/8 in. at 8
lines/inch.

.353 Maximum margins
Left:
Right:

A

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: .

.42

Connection to

17 inches.
17 inches.

Data Channel 7607 (see
408:101).
S~stem

.421 On-line: .
. 422 Off-line: .

1.
none.

.525 Marking:
· 526 Searching:

1.
none.

•53

Code Translation:

.54

Format Control

• same as below (for checking).
• start printer cycle .
send a word as necessary
to printer by individual
instruction; up to 24 per
print action.
step size, 1 or 2 lines, set
on plugboard; occurs before printing .
suppress step before print
in cycle.
call extra step after print
in cycle.
controlled by carriage paper tape loop with punched channels 1 to 12.
skip channel 11, less than
7 lines before print in a
cycle with no extra step.
skip channel 11, iess than
3 lines after print in a
cycle as an extra step.
skip channel 1 to 10, following print in a cycle, up
to form length using extra cycles.
skip channell to 10, up to
2 inches following print
in cycle with no extra
cycles.
end-of-page signal from
channel 12 can be plugged
to give a skip on another
channel.
none .
none.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller:
.432 Restrictions:
.44

card image, as in Data
Code Table No.3.

Input-Output Operations

Dimensions

.351 Overall width:
.352 Length
Forms:

.43

• 522 Output:

.52

Coding
Internal: .

. 34

1 line at 6 or 8 lines per
inch.
120 print positions at 10
per inch.
72 for data plus extras by
double print cycles or
plugboard control.
all for data.

up to 72 characters; fixed
(every 24 words).
up to 120 characters; plugboard wiring.

programmed to card image .

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:
.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control:
.446 .Synchronization:
.447 Synchronizing
aids:

no.
no .
automatic.
.55

program and plugboard.
4 manual alteration
switches .
plugboard.
plugboard.
plugboard.
plugboard.

Control Operations

wait on row index pulse.

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

12/62

Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:

1 word.

.5

.511 Size of block:

Control: .
Format alternatives:

1 Nwords.
core storage.

up to 120 print positions
per line.

Disable: .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
Suppress print in
cycle:
Short skip control:

yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
inhibits interlock.

INPUT-OUTPUT: 716 PRINTER

§

408:081.560

081.

.56

.72

Other Controls

Testable Conditions

Function

Form

Comment

The program can test one exit hub signal from the
plugboard. This can be wired for a variety of conditions including, exhausted, end-of-page, busy and
even disabled.

Alteration switches
1, 2, 3, 4:
Stop before printing:

toggle switches
toggle switch

.6

PERFORMANCE

Test:

toggle switch

.61

Conditions
Form stop:

toggle switch

Print:

key

Stop:

key

Start:

key

used to alter plugboard.
removes printer from
automatic status prior
to printing each line.
allows print cycle key
to initiate a print
cycle for test operations.
turns "form" light on
when paper is
exhausted.
initiates a print cycle
under special conditions.
inhibits printing and
makes unit "not
ready".
makes unit" ready" for
channel eqnipment•

Restore (caniage
control):

key

restores carriage to
home position.

key

stops carriage operation.

key

advances form •

I: .

using short skip and optimum choices of paper
feed up to 2 inches.
not using short skips.
line less than 73 char.
line more than 72 char.

II:

m:
IV:

.62

Speeds

.621 Nominal or peak
speed:

. 623 Overhead: . . .
. 624 Effective speeds
I&m:
I & IV: . . . .
II & m
up to 4 inches:
4 to 6 inches:
II & IV
up to 4 inches:
4 to 6 inches:
.63

.150 lines per minute for 72
char (one print cycle per
line).
75 lines per minute for 120
char (two print cycles
per line).
single point clutch .
150 ·lines/min.
75 lines/min.
.
.

75 lines/min.
50 lines/min.

.
.

50 lines/min.
37 lines/min.

Demands on System
Core store:
EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled: . .
.732 Replenishment time: •
.733 Adjustment time: .
• 734 Optimum reloading
period:
Basis: . . • • . .

.8
Method

Comment

Vertical alignment:

platen and vernier
knobs.
Horizontal alignment: adjustable forms
uactor.
Form thickness:
dial
Line spacing:

. 73

less than I percent.

.7

Adjustment

Stop (carriage
control):
Space (carriage
control):

shift cam

©

290 min.
2-part forms, 22 inches
long, at 1- inch line
spacing.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Recording:

varies distance between
print wheels and platen.
may be set for either 6
or 8 lines per inch.

continuous or single sheet '
forms.
2 to 3 mins.
printer needs to be stopped.
3 to 5 mins.

Check or
Interlock

Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:

programmed
echo check.
implicit.
none
check

Imperfect medium:
TIming conflicts:

none.
check

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incarporated

Action

overprint.
turns on indicator and
stops printer.
turns on indicator.

12/62

408:091.100

.STA''''''

EDP

•

R£PORTS

IBM 7090
Input-Output
729 Magnetic Tape Units
INPUT-OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS

§

091.

.1

_12

Description (Contd.)

GENERAL
this smaller computer. Normally, library and system routines are also held on tape and one tape station (channel A, Tape 1) is reserved for a system
tape.

Magnetic Tape Unit
729 II, IV, V VI.

. 11

Identity:

. 12

Description

.13

Availability: . . . . . . 12 to 15 months .

These tape units are used in the IDM 1401, 1410,
7040, 7070 and 7080 series systems as well as in
the 709, 7090 and 7094. They use.a standard reel
and half-inch tape compatible with the 7330 and 727
tape units. The only significant differences among
the four .models are in recording densities and tape
speeds. These are summarized in the following
table:
Peak transfer
Density rate, chari
Tape speed,
sec
inches/sec
char/inch
Model

.14

First Delivery

II

75

IV

112.5

V

75

VI

112.5

200
556
200
556
200
556
800
200
556
800

15,000
41,t7
22, 00
62,500
15,000
41,667
60,000
22,500
62,500
90,000

Up to ten tape units may be connected to each 7607
Data Channel in a 7090 system. Tape operations
may be performed parallel with internal processing;
however, in normal operation, tapes attacned to a
single channel cannot be involved in simultaneous
data transmission. Any number of non-data transmitting operations may occur simultaneously. It is
usually economical to use the highest density of a
given model in order to achieve the maximum transmission rates; however, compatability with other
machines (such as the 704) may dictate the occasional use of lower density settings.

729 II:
7291V:
729 V:
729 VI:
.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the
head:
.212 Reservoirs
Number: .
Form:
Capacity:
.213 Feed drive:
.214 Take-up drive:.
.22

©

· pinch roller friction.

.2.
· vacuum.
· about 7 feet.
· motor.
· motor.

Sensing and Recording Sxstems

.221 Recording system:
.222 Sensing system:
. 223 Common system:

· magnetic head.
· magnetic head .
· two- gap head provides
read-afterwrite checking.

.23

Multiple Copies: .

· multiple copies may be
obtained by dialing two or
more tapes on a given
channel to the same number. This procedure is
not recommended.

.24

Arran~ment

The 7090 input-output command system permits
scatter read and gather write capabilities as well as
selection or deletion of recorded information.
Efficient use of the command system requires a
fairly sophisticated level of programming, but the
time-sharing of input-output and elementary scatter
or gather coding is understood by most programmers.
and results in a considerable saving on large volume
input-output tasks.
In most installations, the 7090 system uses magnetic
tape as .the primary input-output mode. A smaller
computer such as the 1401 is usually used to transcribe information from cards to tape, tape to printer, etc. Usually some formating is performed by

· November, 1959.
· November, 1959.
· May, 1962.
· May, 1962.

of Heads

Use of station: .
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use: .

· recording.
.1.
.7.
.1 row at a time.

Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use: .

· sensing.
.0.3 inch.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incarporated

.1.
.7.
· 1 row at a time.

12/62

408:091.311
§

IBM 7090

091.

.311 Medium:
.312 Phenomenon:
.32

· plastic tape with magnetizable surface.
· magnetization.

Positional Arrangement

.. 321 Serial by: . . . . . . · 1 to N rows at 200, 556, or
(models V and VI) 800
rows per inch (see 408:
091.431).
.322 Parallel by:
.7 tracks.
.324 Track use
Data: . .
Redundancy check:
Timing: . . . .
Control signals:
Unused:
Total: . . . . .
.325 Row use
Data: . • . . . .
Redundancy check:
Timing: . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: . . . .
Inter-block gap:
Inter-file gap:. .
Erased gap (to skip
flaw area):
.33

.34

Coding:

727: .
7330:

• 1 toN.

.1.
• O.
.0 (record and segment
marks are optional).
· gaps.
· 0.75 inch.
.3.75 inch.
.3.75 inch.
· column binary as in core
with odd parity redundancy check.
binary coded decimal
(BCD) as in Data Table'
No. 4 with even parity
check.

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

.42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:

Connection to Device

.44

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:. . . .
. 442 Input-output areas: .
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . .
. 444 Input-output area
lockout: . .
.445 Table control: . .

.0.50 inch .
· 2,400 feet per reel.
.25 feet.
.25 feet.

· Data Channel.
7607, Models 1, 2, 3, 4.

.1 to N words .
· core storage .
· each word.

· none .
· yes; scatter read and
gather write, controlled
by chanhel commands.
.446 Synchronization:. . . · automatic.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: .

Code translation
matched, low recording
density only.
matched, low recording
density only.

· may be switched to another
channel, another computer,
or an off-line auxiliary
unit either manually or by
means of the optional 7830
switching feature and 7155
Switch Control Console .

.431 Devices per controller:
Modell: .
. ten 729 IT/IV, one each 711,
716, 712.
. ten 729 IT/IV/VlVI, one
Model 2: .
each 711, 716, 712.
Model 3: .
. ten 729 II/IV.
Model 4: .
. ten 729 II/IV/V/VI.

Output:

Physical Dimensions

. 351 Overall width:
. 352 Length:
Leader:
Trailer:

12/62

.6.
.1.
· 0 (self-clocking).
• O.
• O.
.7.

.43

Format Compatibility
Other device or
system

.35

. 422 Off -line
Associated equipment: . . . . .

.52

· 1 to N words in block.
1 to N blocks in files.
· 0.75 inch inter-record gap.
3.75 inch inter-file gap.
· O. 75 inch end of transmission.
3.75 inch gap written by
instruction.

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input:. . . . . . . . · forward only.
read until either N words or
end-of-record or read N
words skipping over endof-record gaps .
end-of-file gap always terminates reading.
.522 Output: . . . . . . . · write N words followed by
end-of-record.
erase gap.
write end-of-file gap .
. 523 Stepping:
· non-transmit channel commands used to skip N
words during reading .
. 524 Skippifrg:
· one block backward .
one block forward.
one file backward .
. 525 Marking:
· inter block or inter file gap .
.526 Searching:. . . .
· none .

· up to 8 data channels w iI:h a . 53
maximum of ten tape drives
each, (see 408:101.12).

Code Translation:

· code (binary or BCD) se1ected by program - translations are automatic.

INPUT-OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
§

091.

.54

.55

.6

PERFORMANCE

. 62

Speeds

Models IV and VI
200 char/inch:
556 char/inch:

22,500N/ (N+ 150) char/sec.
62,500N/ (N+ 417) chari
sec.

Model V
800 char/inch:

60,000/ (N + 600) chari
sec.

Model VI
800 char/inch:
· yes.
· yes.
· no.
· yes.
· yes.
· yes .

• 63

90,000N/ (N + 600) chari
sec.

Demands on System
Component Condition
Core storage:

· yes.
· yes.
· yes.
· yes (25 feet).
· yes.

msec per word Percentage

200 chari
inch
556 chari
inch
800 chari
inch

.00218
.00218
.00218

0.545 (1 +
A+ C).
1.415 (1 +
A+C).
2:180 (1 +
A+C).

Note: A = number of indirect address per word
transferred .
C = number of commands obeyed per word
transferred, (see 408: 111. 4) .

· no.

,7
.621 Nominal or peak speed
Model II:
· 15,000 or 41, 667 char/sec. .71
Model IV:
.22,500 or 62,500 char/sec.
Model V:
.15,000,41,667, or 60,000
char/sec.
Model VI:
.22,500, 62,500 or 90,000
char/sec.
.622 Important parameters
Name
Models
II
IV
V
VI
Density (char /
inch:
200 or 556
200, 556 or 800
Tape speed (inches/sec):
75.
112.5
75.
112.5
Start time (msec)
.72
read:
10.5
6.7
10.5
6.7
write:
7.5
5.0
7.5
5.0
Stop time (msec)
read:
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
write:
5.1
3.8
5.1
3.8
Full rewind
time (min):
1.2
1.2
0.9
0.9
Gaps block
(inches):
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
file (inches):
3.75
3.75
3.75
3.75
.623 Overhead:
Gap crossin~ time
(msec):
Model II and IV Vand VI
Block:
10.
6.67.
File:
50.
33.33.

,

. . . 15,000N/ (N + 150) chari
sec.
41, 667N/ (N + 417) chari
sec.

556 char/inch:

Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device: .
Output lock: .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium
marks:

'.

· program.
· densities (2 or 3).
· no.
· no.
· no.
· no.
· yes.
· yes.

Control 0Eerations
Disable:
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload:

. 56

. 624 Effective speeds
Models II and V
200 char/inch:

Format Control
Control:
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: .
Insert spaces: .
Recording density:
Section sizes:

408:091.540

EXTERNAL FACILITmS
Adjustments
Adjustment

Method Comment

Recording density:

switch

Densities option:

switch

selects 1 of 2 densities.
selects any pair" of
densities (models
V and VI only),
(see 408:101.12),
200/556, 556/800,
200/800.

Other Controls
Function

Form

Address selection:

dial

Load rewind:

button

Unload:

button

File protection:

ring on
reel

Comment
selects unit address
0-9.
lowers tape into reservoirs and rewinds
tape to load point.
removes tape from
reservoirs and raises
upper portion of head
assembly.
ring permits writing.

I

\,

'-

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

408:091.730
§

IBM 7090

091.

.73

.8

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volume handled
Data format
Words/
~ecords/
record
file
20
40
20
40
167 (1,000 char.
167 (I, 000 char.

20
20
50
50
50"
1

Error
Words per reel
at Density (cpi)
200
556
800
384,000
498,000
548,000
548,000
872,200
960,000
408,000
542,000
600,000
572,000
926,000 1,036,000
752,000 1,845,000 2,350,000
752,000 1,845,000 2,350,000

Note: 1 word • 6 char.

.732 Replenishment
time: . . , . . . . . 1.0 to 1.5 mins.
tape unit needs to be
stopped.
.734 Optimum reloading period
Models IT & V: . . . . 6 mins.
Models IV & VI: . . . 4 mins.

12/62

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

Recording:
Reading:
Input area
overflow:
Output block
size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted
medium:
Imperfect
medium:
Timing confl.icts:
RecOl:ding
level:

Check or
Interlock
lateral parity
lateral & longitudinal parity

Action
indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm.

none - not possible.
none - not possible.
yes
see reading.
reflective spot
or tape mark

indicator.

yes

halts tape drive.

interlock

stalls processor.

dual level signal strength
check

indicator &
alarm.

408:092.100

_STANDARD
EDP
•

IBM 7090

RtroRTS

Input-Output
Hypertape

INPUT-OUTPUT: HYPERTAPE

.12

092.
.1
GENERAL
§

.11

Identity: .

. 12

Description

Whenever tape is rewound, unloaded, or the drive is
not ready for use, an "attention indicator'; is set.
This indicator is program testable (as are many
other conditions, e. g., beginning or end of tape) .
Indicators on each drive can be lit by the program to
inform the operator. These are Reserved, Change
Cartridge (set automatically after any unload command), File Protect, and the Check light, which is
used to call the operator's attention and .not to signal
hardware errors automatically.

Hypertape drive.
7340.

The IBM 7340 Hypertape drive is available for use
with the 7074, 7080, 7090 and 7094 systems. Up to
170, 000 characters per second may be written on or
re~d from the one inch wide, 1,800 foot tape, of
Wh1Ch 1,750 feet is usable. The effective speed for
I, 000 character blocks is 100, 000 characters per
second. The 7090 may record data on eight of the
~en tape tracks at a density of I, 511 characters per
mch. Two of the eight used tracks contain codes
which automatically correct all single and most
double-bit errors. The tape may be read forward
or backward (optional feature) at a rate of 112.5
~nches per second. Because, of a short (0.45 inch)
mterblock gap, average access time to a block is
4.2 milliseconds compared to 7.3 milliseconds for
the 729 IV or VI. Rewinding speed is 225 inches per
second but tapes may be dismounted without rewinding.

Hypertape drives can be connected to a 7090 through
a 7640 Hypertape Control, which is connected to two
7909 Data Channels (or if Data Channel Switches are
used, any two switch legs) and thence to the 7606
multiplexor. The 7640 has two separate channels
which can each accommodate 10 Hypertape drives.
If each 7640 channel is connected to a 7909 Data
Channel, it can read tape on one channel and write
tape on the other channel. However, read-read or
write-write operations are not possible because the
7640 has only one set each of read and write equipment.
Optional Feature

The Hypertape contains three reflective strips instead of the usual two. Two of these, beginning-oftape and e~~of-tape, occur on other ruM tapes;
however, 1t 1S not possible .to cause the Hypertape to
move beyond these marks. A third spot, called the
end-of-tape warning, occurs 40 feet before the endof~tape and may be sensed by the 7090 program in
either read or write mode.
Another feature of the 7340 which differs from other
ruM units. i.s the setting, by program, of a file protect condmon. Program removal of file protection
is not {lossible and may only be accomplished with
the tape cartridge removed from the unit.
~y

tape cartridges can be used with the Hypertape
dnve. Supply and take-up .!"eels holding 1,800 feet
of tape are enclosed in a sealed cartridge that
measures about 17 by 10 by 2 inches and weighs
about.8.pounds. The operator loads a reel of tape
by ra1smg the top cover, sliding the cartridge into
place, lowering the cover, and depressing the loadunload button. After the tape reels engage the drive
mechanism, the tape is then automatically positioned
for use. Unloading is accomplished by reversing
the procedure.
The automatic Cartridge Loader feature can operate
under program control. It accommodates one cartridge. When the change tape command is given, the
tape. cartridge being used is unloaded to a discharge
statlOn, then the waiting cartridge is loaded. The
operation requires about 30 seconds. This feature
helps eliminate operator set-up delays, especially
when using an automatic run-scheduling program.

©

Description (Cont'd)

Automatic Cartridge Loader: Reduces time lost
during tape changes by automatically unloading one
Hypertape cartridge and loading another under manual or program control. Maximum time for a complete unload and load cycle is 30 seconds. The
loader is mounted on top of the Hypertape Drive.
Optional features on the 7909 Data Channel (see
408:102) can be provided to enable the use of backward reading, and conversion of 6-bit BCD code.
.14

First Delivery: . . . . 1963.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

· 211 Drive past the head: .

· 212 Reservoirs
Number: •
Form: . .
Capacity: •
. 213 Feed drive:
.214 Take-up drive: .
.22

non-coated surface of tape
is held against single
capstan by vacuum action
of reservoirs.

2.
vacuum columns.
about 4 feet .
motor.
motor.

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:.
.222 Sensing system: . .
.223 Common system: .

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

magnetic head.
magnetic head.
two-gap heads provides
read-after-write checking.
12/62

408:092.240
§

IBM 7090

092.

· 24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: .

recording.

Use of station:
Distance: .. .
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/ stack:.
Method of use:

sensing.
0.3 inch.

.
.
.
.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

. 31

Form of Storage

. 311 Medium: . . .
. 312 Phenomenon: .
. 32

1 row at a time.

1.

10.
1 row at a time.

.322 Parallel by:
· 323 Bands: . .
· 324 Track use
Data: . .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: .
Total: .
.325 Row use
Data: .
Redundancy check: •
Timing: . . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: . . .
Gap: . . . .
TjPe mark:.
.33

Coding: . . . .

.44
plastic tape with magnetizable surface.
magnetization.

1 to N rows at 1, 511 rows
per inch.
10 tracks.
1.

6.

.4

CONTROLLER

. 41

Identity:....

.42

12/62

Connection to System

Connection to Device

2.

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load: . . . .
.442 Input-output areas:
· 443 Input- output area
access: • . . . .
• 444 Input- output area
lockout: . . .
.445 Table control: . .

1 to N words.
core storage .
each word.

none .
yes, scatter-read and
gather-write, with separate channel commands
for each field of data (see
408:109).
.446 Synchronization: . . . . automatic.

o(self clocking).
O.
2.

10.
1 to N.
O.
O.
O.

O.
0.45 inch.
3.75 inches.
Binary 6 bit/row as in
core.
BCD 6 bit/row as in Data
Code Table No. 4
(optional).
Only with Hypertape drives
on other mM 7074, 7080,
7090 and 7094 systems.

Physical Dimensions

.351 Overall width: . . .
· 352 Length:. . . .'. . .
· 353 Maximum margins
Left: .
Right: . . . . .

· 43

.431 Devices per controller: 20; up to 10 to each 7909
Channel or 3224 Switch.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . . none .

Positional Arrangement

. 321 Serial by:

· 35

1.

10.

.421 On-line: • . . . . . . . one 7640 (containing two
tape channels) connected
to two 7909s or two 3224
Data ChB.nnel Switches on
one or two 7909 Data
Channels, and connected
to 7606.
Note: 7909 requires special option in order to
read backward on
hypertape.
.422 Off-line: . . . . . . .
none.

1. 0 inch.
1,800 feet per cartridge.

25 feet.
25 feet.

Hypertape Control.
7640.

·5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation:
.52

1 to N words.
gap on tape write command.

Input-Output Operations

· 521 Input:. . . . . . . . •• read one block forward or
(optional; see 408:109.12)
backward into core storage area( s) specified by
one or more channel read
commands.
• 522 Output: • . . . . . . • • write one block forward
from core storage area(s)
specified by one or more
channel write commands .
• 523 Stepping: . . • . . . . . step one block forward or
backward.
step forward or backward
to end-of-file mark.
erase 8 inches (to step over
defective tape areas).
• 524 Skipping:.
skip N words or records
when reading.
· 525 Marking: .
inter- block gap •
end-of-file gap .
none .
• 526 Searching:
· 53

Code Translation:

matched.
automatic with optional
BCD feature.

INPUT-OUTPUT: HYPERTAPE
§

408:092.540

092.

.54

Suppress zeros:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Recording density:.
Section sizes:

program.
two.
yes; scatter-read and
gather-write.
no.
no.
no.
no.
yes.

Control Operations
Disable:
Request interrupt: .•
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload: .
Enter file protect
status:
Change Cartridge: •

disabled after unloading.
yes, priority signal.
no.
binary or optional BCD.
yes.
yes.

C:

..

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:.

.72

Other Controls

yes.
yes.

Testable Conditions
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes, 40 feet from end-oftape mark.
Busy controller:
yes.
Beginning of tape mark: yes.
yes.
End of tape mark:
yes.
Not ready:
yes.
Not loaded: .
yes.
Correction occurred:
yes.
Uncorrected error:
yes.
Code check:
yes.
Write failure: •
yes.
Timing error:
Forward or backward: . yes.
yes.
Attention required:
File protection on: . • yes.

Function

Form Comment

Address selection:
Start key:
Stop key:

dial
button
button

Speeds

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Cartridge:

Capacity
I, 800 feet; for I, 000 row
blocks, 14,000,000
characters.
O. 5 to 1. 5 min •
. 732 Replenishment time: •
tape drive needs to be
stopped, however, if cartridge loader is employed,
tapes can be placed in
loader at any time and
changed under program
control.
. 734 Optimum reloading
period:
3.1 mins.

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

Recording:

170,000 char/sec.
1,511 rOWS/inch.
112.5 inches/sec.
3.0 msec. maximum.
3. 0 msec maximum.
1. 5 minutes.
225 inches/sec.
0.45 inches/sec.
3.75 inches.
4.3 msec/block .
170, OOON/(N + 714) .

©

selects unit address 0 through 9.
makes unit available to computer.
removes unit from computer control:
stops any operation in progress.
loads if cartridge in unload status.
indicates rewind if tape not in ready
(available to computer)•

Loading and Unloading

Error

· 621 Nominal or peak speed:
· 622 Important parameters
Recording density: •
Tape speed:
Start time:
Stop time:
Full rewind time:
Rewind speed:
Inter- block gap:
Tape mark:.
. 623 Overhead:
. 624 Effective speeds:

none.

Load -unload button: button
Re wind:
button

Disabled: .
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:

.62

core storage.
reading or writing.
0.00218 (1 + C + A).
5. 8 (1 + C + A); see also
408:111. 4).
number of indirect addresses per word
transferred.
number of commands
obeyed in Data Channel
per word transferred.

A:

. 73
• 56

Demands on System
Component:.
Condition:
Msec per word:
Percentage :

Format Control
Control:
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:

• 55

.63

Check or
Interlock

Reading:

read -after-write dual
row parity
dual-row parity

Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:

none.
none.
check
reflective spots

Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Excessive skew:
Circuit fallure:

check
disconnect
check
check

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Action
indicator.
indicator-error
corrected if
possible.
indicator.
indicator. inhibit
movement passed
mark.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.

12/62

•

408:101.100

STANDARD

EDP
•

REI'ORTS

IBM 7090
Input-Output
7607 Data Channel
INPUT-OUTPUT: 7607 DATA CHANNEL

§ 101.

. 12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: .

.12

Description

• Specify a new location from which the next Data
Channel instruction is to be taken, ignoring the
remainder of the current sequence.
• Copy the current contents of the Data Channel
control registers into core storage without affecting channel operation, including instruction
location, word counter, operation control bits.
• Backspace, rewind, unload, set density, or
write control marks.

Data Channel.
#7607.
Models 1, 2, 3, and 4.
#7617 Data Channel
Console.

The #7607 unit provides an independently operating
data channel to the core storage for all models of
729 units in any mixture, the 711 Card Reader, 721
Card Punch, and 716 Printer.

The individual Data Channels may execute instructions (called commands by mM) (see 408:121) to:
• Copy data controlled by counters or block
delimiters.
• Change sequence.
• Disconnect, i. e., execute no more instructions
until directed by the Central Processor.
• Sense for control, access, and error indicators.

There are four models. They differ in the units that
they may control, and the number that may be connected to a system.
Modell: Up to ten 729's (II or IV), one 711, one
721, one 716.
3: Up to ten 729's (II, IV, V, or VI), one 711,
one 721, one 716.
2: Up to ten 729's (II or IV).
4: Up to ten 729's (II, IV, V, or VI).

The individual adapters and controllers for peripheral units can sometimes execute instructions
(called orders by mM).
A Data Channel has a large degree of autonomy and
its own sequence of instructions can be interrupted
by control and error conditions. The interrupts can
be inhibited if required.

Models 3 and 4 have a Tape Densities Option Switch
to select anyone of these density pairs: 200/556,
200/800, or 556/800 characters per inch. The program may choose "high" or "low" density.

Data is transferred between all Data Channels #7909
or #7607 and core storage via the #7606 Multiplexer.
The Multiplexer shares the access of all devices to
the core storage on a priority basis. To ensure
maximum simultaneous operation with no access
conflicts, the Data Channels are connected in the
sequence of their peak demands (see 408:111.43).

Each 7607 has a special 7617 console, which can be
used to control the Data Channel and associated
units, but not transfers with the core storage.
Every 7090 must have one 7607 model 1 or 3 with
both a 711 Card Reader and a 716 Printer. A 721
Card Punch is optional.

Data is transferred to core storage in 36- bit word
units as necessary. One access cycle is required
for each word transferred, each instruction selected,
and for each indirect address in an instruction. A
maximum of three accesses may be required for one
word. These parameters affect the actual demands
on the core storage. The maximum values affect the
safe number of simultaneous transfers (see 408:111.
43).

There may be a maximum of eight 7607 units in a
configuration, but this is substantially restricted
when any 7909 are used. A table showing the joint
maximum possibilities is in 408: 111. 41.
Each Data Channel behaves as a separate control
unit in selecting and executing instructions. The
Central Processor" may execute instructions (see
408:121) to:
• Start in motion a selected unit on a specific
channel.
• Start the control unit by specifying the location
of the first Data Channel instruction.

©

Description (Cont'd)

. 13

Availability:..

?

.14

First Delivery:

November, 1959.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

408: 102.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

IBM 7090
Input-Output
7909 Data Channel

REPORTS

INPUT-OUTPUT: 7909 DATA CHANNEL

§

102.

.12

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity: . . . . . . . . Data Channel.
#7909.

• 12

Description

Description (Cont'd)
• Disconnect, i. e., execute no more instructions
until directed by the Central Processor.
• Sense for control, access, and error indicators.
The individual adapters and controllers for peripheral units can sometimes execute instructions
(called orders by mM).

The #7909 unit provides an independently operating
data channel to the core storage for such units as
Hypertape Drives, 1301 Disk Storages, and TELEPROCESSING units.

A Data Channel has a large degree of autonomy and
its own sequence of instructions can be interrupted
by control and error conditions. The interrupts can
be inhibited if required.

A maximum of four #7909 data channels can be used
in a system, but the maximum is also affected by the
use of #7607 data channels. The table in 408:111.41
shows the maximum combinations.

Data is transferred between all Data Channels #7909
or #7607 and core storage via the #7606 Multiplexer.
The Multiplexer shares the access of all devices to
the core storage on a priority basis. To ensure
maximum simultaneous operation with no access
conflicts, the Data Channels are connected in the
sequence of their peak demands (see 408:111.43).

Only one Hypertape Control #7640, can be connected
to a system. It contains two independent inputoutput highways, and requires two #7909's for full
use, or one #7909 for restricted use (see 408:092.4).

Data is transferred to core storage in 36- bit word
units as necessary. One access cycle is required
for each word transferred, each instruction selected,
and for each indirect address in an instruction. A
maximum of three accesses may be reqUired for one
word. These parameters affect the actual demands
on the core storage. The maximum values affect the
safe number of simultaneous transfers (see 408:111.
43).

Up to two #7631 Disk Storage Controllers can be
connected to a system. Each controller requires
one #7909 (see 408:042).
Up to two #1414 Synchronizers can be connected to a
system. Each controller requires one #7909 (see
408:103).
Each Data Channel behaves as a separate control
unit in selecting and executing instructions. The
Central Processor may execute instructions (see
408:121) to:

Optional Features
#3224 Data Channel Switch. One manual switch can
be fitted to each channel to enable the channel to be
!iwitched to one of two devices, selected from a
Hypertape Control, a 1301 Disk Control, and a 1414
Teleprocessing Adapter.

• Start in motion a selected unit on a specific
channel.
• Start the control unit by specifying the location
of the first Data Channel instruction.
• Specify a new location from which the next Data
Channel instruction is to be taken, ignoring the
remainder of the current sequence.
• Copy the current contents of the Data Channel
control registers into core storage without affecting channel operation, including instruction
location, word counter, ,Operation control bits.
• Backspace, rewind, unload, set denSity, or
write control marks.

#1471 BCD Translation. This feature provides a
translation between the internal 6- bit binary code
of the 7090 (see 408:141), and the 6- bit BCD inputoutput code, for compatibility with other mM systems (see 408:144).
#5975 Read Backward Character Assembly and Storage. This feature enables the 7640 Hypertape Control read backward feature to be used ..

The individual Data Channels may execute instructions (called commands by mM) (see 408:121) to:
• Copy data controlled by counters or block delimiters.
• Change sequence.

©

. 13

Availability:..

?

. 14

First Delivery:

?

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

408: 103.100
·SlANDARD

EDP
•

IBM 7090/7094
Input-Output
1414 Synchronizer

R[POR1S

INPUT-OUTPUT: 1414 SYNCHRONIZER
I
§

103.

•1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity:

.12

Input-Output Synchronizer •
1414 Model 6.

Description
The 1414 Model 6 Input/Output Synchronizer is used
to control a variety of communlcations devices in a
7090 system. It contains six 80-character buffers.
Each buffer can be equipped with the appropriate
adapter and assigned to the input or output line of a
specific device. The 1414 Input/Output Synchronizer is in tum connected to one 7909 Data Channel
on the 7090 system. Four 1414s (one per data channel) can be connected to a system (see 408:112.12).
Each buffer can be operating with a unit simultaneously. The fact that transfers between the 7909
and 1414 are serial for each buffer is not a restriction.
Delays in executing the stored program are minimized during communications device input-output
operations. A "channel select" instruction selects
the I/O channel and sends the address of the first of
a series of channel commands to the 7909 Data Channel; the 7909 then assumes control of the input-output operation while the central processor continues
executing the stored program.. Channel commands
may be of the read, write, control, or sense type.
A read Qr write command initiates the transfer of
a biock of up to 80 characters between a buffer in
the 1414 and core storage. A control command •
transmits an order to the 1414 which selects the
desired communications device. A sense command
causes two words tei be sent to core storage ..yhich
indicates the status of the selected device. The
interrupt facilities of the 7090 series are utilized
to service the communications devices.
Data transfer between the 1414 and the 7909 Data
Channel requires 11 microseconds per character.
Transfer rates between the 1414 and the communications devices connected to it depend upon the individual devices; these are described below.
The unit can have a maximum of six buffer units
and can transfer data at rates of up to 90, 000
characters per second. A selection of the following units can be attached up to the limit of six
buffers.
Units requiring two buffers:
Data Transmission Unit Adapter (#3238), uses
#1009 Data Transmission Unit.
Read and Punch Column Binary (#6025), 12-bit
column to two 6-bit char.
1st Remote Inquiry Unit Adapter (#6136), uses up
to 10 #1014 Remote Inquiry Units.

©

2nd Remote Inquiry Unit Adapter (if6136), uses up
to 10 #1014 Remote Inquiry Units .
Telegraph Input/Output Feature (#7864), for #7871
and 7875.
Units requiring one buffer:
Paper Tape Reader Adapter (#5514), uses #1011
Paper Tape Reader.
1st Telegraph Input Feature (#7871), needs #7864.
2nd Telegraph Input Feature (#7871), only if no
#7875.
1st Telegraph Output Feature (#7875), needs #7864.
2nd Telegraph Output Feature (#7875), only if no
#7871.
.121 Data Transmission Unit, 1009 Modell: This device
enables the 7090 system to transmit and receive
data over telephone or telegraph lines at speeds of
75, 150, 250, or 300 characters per second. The
unit at the other end of the line can be a Similarly
equipped IBM 7000 or 1400 series system, a 7701
or 7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal, or
a 1013 Card Transmission Terplinal. The 1009
uses two of the six buffers in a 1414 Synchronizer
and requires the #3238 Data Transmission Unit
Adapter. One buffer is loaded while the other is
unloaded, so messages of variable length can be
processed. (See also Section 402:101).
.122 Paper Tape Reader, 1011 Modell: This unit reads
data from punched paper tape at a speed of 500 rows
per second. From five to eight tracks can be read.
The tape can be either chad or chadless and in the
form of strips, reels, or centerfeed rolls. The
1011 uses one of the six buffe:::s in a 1414 Synchronizer and requires the #5514 Paper Tape Reader
Adapter. Block length is limited to 80 characters.
(See also Section 402:071).
.123 Remote Inquiry Unit, 1014 Model 1: This unit consists of a modified electric typewriter with control
circuits and indicator lights, mounted on a 29-by
24-inch table. It is used for interrogating and
printing replies from a 7090 system, and may be
located up to eight miles away. Message length is
limited to 78 characters. Up to ten Inquiry Units
can be connected to a #6136 Remote Inquiry Adapter,
and one or two adapters can be connected to a 1414
Synchronizer. Each adapter requires two of the six
buffers. (See also Section 402:102).
.124 Telegraph Input-Output, #7864: This adapter permits direct connection of a telegraph transmitter
and receiver to a 7070 or 7074 system. Maximum
data transmission rate is about ten characters per
second, and the data portion of a message should
not exceed 80 characters in length. The #7864
adapter controls one telegraph input unit and one
output unit; each unit requires one buffer in the 1414
Synchronizer. A total of up to four telegraph units
can be connected to the 1414 through the addition of
the #7871 Telegraph Input and/or the #7875 Telegraph Output, which control, one unit each.

'962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

408: 104.100

_STANDARD
EDP
•

IBM 709017094
Input-Output
IBM 7155

R£PORlS

INPUT-OUTPUT: 7155 SWITCH CONTROL CONSOLE

§

104.

.12

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity: . . . . . . . . Switch Control Console .
#7155.

.12

Description

Description (Contd.)
The restrictions are:
o Each unit to be switched must be modified.
• Only two units per channel can be modified.
• If n extra units are switched to a channel, only
(n-2) normal units of that channel can be
switched to other channels or eqUipment.
• Only two extra units can be switched to a
channel.

The Switch Control Console is a manual switching
center from which especially modified 729 II, IV, V,
and VI Magnetic Tape Units may have their connections rapidly altered. Switching may occur only
when units are idle.

The controls of the 729 units are arranged so that
one switch on each unit specifies local or remote
(7155) control. Only when it is in remote control
can switches on the 7155 specify normal or alternative connection.

The possibilities include:

The power supplies are not switched, but the cables
can be changed by hand .

• Switching a unit from its normal channel to a
preset alternative channel. The other channel
may be on the same or a different computer.
• Switching a unit to a preset off-line connection
as an alternative to its normal channel.
• Switching a unit to a computer channel from its
normal off-line connection.

©

The console can control up to eight tape units in the
standard form or ten upon special request.
.13

Availability: . .

?

.14

First Delivery:

?

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

408: 105.100
IBM ·7090
Input-Output
7281 II Data Communication
Channel
INPUT-OUTPUT: 7281 II DATA COMMUNICATION CHANNEL

§

lOS.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: • . . . . . . . IBM 7281 II Data
Communication Channel.

.12

Description
The mM 7281 Data Communication Channel is used
when connection is required between a 7090/94 system and on-line "real-time" devices. The size of
the unit is adequate to handle 32 subchannels, provided most of the units to be serviced are slow in
speed and use small data items, e. g., 5-bit Teletype, which can also be handled by the 1414 Model 6,
using a 7909 Data Channel. Although each 7281 II
can logically have up to 32 input and/or output subchannels, the actual maximum may be less than 32
subchannels because the physical size of the subchannel electronics may limit the number of subchannels that will fit in a 7281 II unit. Each subchannel can control one unit. Since this is an RPQ
item, special requirements can probably be met,
but the cost might be disproportionately high. Possible uses of the 7281 II include communication with
radar, non-mM units, and other computers.
Each subchannel ''word'' is a fixed-size data unit of
any size from 5 to 36 bits. Each subchannel can be
preset to associate the external data unit with any set
of bits in a 7090 36-bit word format.
The 7281 II can transmit or receive data with the
7302 store at a peak rate of approximately 229, 000
''words'' per second. The fastest possible subchannel is limited to 10, 000 ''words'' per second. The
slow channels, such as Teletype, operate at 10
''words'' per second (in this last case a ''word'' is a
5-bit character).
The 7281 II is connected to the 7302 Core Storage via
the 7606 Multiplexor. Data transfers between core
and the 7281 II are initiated by a 7281 II request.
Requests are caused by a subchannel having received
data or requiring data for transmission, and are
sampled by a device called a sequencer. The sequencer normally samples all of the subchannels sequentially; however, the first ten subchannels are arbitrarily of higher priority and are always checked
before proceeding with normal sequential servicing.
The connection requirements of a 7281 II to a 7090
system are the same as those for a 7607 Data Channel. When real-time devices are attached to a system, a 7281 II linit replaces a 7607 channel. Up to
four 7281 II channels can be connected to a system.
The channel designations are the same (A through 1-0
as those used for the Data Channels.

© 1963

Description (Contd. )
The 7090 processor must be modified with the Direct
Data Connection hardware so that the new instructions (which start and stop the subchannels and traps)
and the traps (which signal end-of-block or end-ofmessage) are included. A set of address switches is
provided on the 7281 II to select a 256-word block of
the lower half of core storage to be the buffer area
for the channel. In addition, each subchannel has a
set of address switches that can select an 8-word
portion of the buffer area for its store. A modulo 8
counter in each subchannel is used to address a word
in its buffer area. When this counter reaches a
maximum, again set on switches, the subchannel is
selected by the sequencer and if its interrupt has
been enabled by the 7090 processor, the 7090 is
interrupted.
The handling of interrupts (or "traps ") is somewhat
complex in that the Direct Data, the 7281 II, and the
External Signal interrupts all use the same "trapping" locations. Although the Direct Data and 7281 II
interrupts set bits to indicate their presence and type,
the External Signal interrupt has no such indicators.
Should the External Signal occur simultaneously with
any combination of the other two interrupts, it would
not be possible from this information to determine
that the External Signal had occurred.
A rather complex control routine is required to
handle External Signal interrupts. Some of the requirements of this routine are:
Determine type of interrupt.
Determine unit affected.
Determine action to be taken.
Check for multiple interrupts.
Ascertain that data channels for activated inputoutput units have data transmission commands.
6. Prepare for subsequent interrupts.
7. Re-enable channel traps.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

There are eight types of subchannels currently
available; they are:
1. 36-bit 40-volt
RPQ
input:
2. 36-bit 40-volt
RPQ
output:
3. 8-bit 40-volt input: RPQ
4. s-bit 40-volt
output: l• • • • • • RPQ
5. 18-bit 40-vo1t
RPQ
sense output:
6. 36-bit 8-volt input
with 40-volt output
control lines:
RPQ
7. s-bit Teletype
RPQ
input:
8. s-bit Teletype
RPQ
output: . • . .

....
...

..

....

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

882003.
882004.
8820OS.
882006.
882007.
F91715.
F88733.
F88671.

3/63

408:111.100
IBM 7090
Simultaneous Operations

SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS

§

.3

111.

·1

SPECIAL UNITS

· 11

Identity:....

D:
E:
F:
G:
H:

#7909.
Data Channel.
#7607.
Data Channel.
#7606.
Multiplexor.

.12

Description

I:

.4

RULES

.41

Configuration Limitations On Equipment

R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
.42

S:

T:
U:
V:

W:
X:
Y:
·3

CLASSES OF OPERATION

A:
B:
C:
I

\,

number of #7909 Data
Channels.
number of #7640 Hypertape
Controls.
number of #7631 Disk
Storage Controls.
number of #1414
Synchronizers.
number of #7607 Data
Channels, Model!.
number of #7607 Data
Channels, Model 3.
number of #7607 Data
Channels, Model 2.
number of !/t7607 Data
Channels, Model 4.

compute.
read or write 729 tapes.
rewind, backspace record
or file or skip remainder
of a record on 729 tapes,
feed remainder of a card
or spa~e paper.

©

4
1
2
2-t
1
I-v
0
0

3
1
1
I-t
1
I-v
1
I-x

h
j
k

g+i+k
.43

2
1
0
0
1

0
1

I-x

2
1
0
0
0
1
2
2-x

2
0
2
2-t
1
I-v
4
4-x

1
0
1
2-t
1
I-v
5
5-x

0
0
0
0
1
I-v
7
7-x

Configuration Limitations On Channels

a
b+d+e+f
c
d+e+f
g

CONFIGURATION CONDITIONS

R:

Possible Sets

Class

In IBM terminology the central processor executes
instructions, the data channels execute commands,
and the special adapters and controls execute orders.
The various groups are all set out in the Instruction
Lisr (see 408:121).
.2

read cards.
punch cards.
print.
read or write Hypertapes.
rewind, backspace or skip
a record on Hypertapes.
read or write, disc store.
seek access, disc store.
1414 devices input-output.

J:
K:

In general, every Data Channel and Central Pr6cessor may operate simultaneously. There are three
types of limitations: The maximum allowable combinations of charinels, the units and channels attached, and the demand limitations on the core
storage.
The Data Channels are described in 408:101 and
408:102. In general, one unit on each Data Channel
may be operating (transmitting or receiving data)
simultaneously. In fact, each channel acts as a separate control unit, selecting and executing its own
sequences of instructions as initiated by the central
processor.

CLASSES OF OPERATION (Contd.)

at most 1.
at most V + W + X + Y.
at most lO(V+W+X) - b.
at most V+W.
at most 25.
at most 208 - g.
at most T.
at most 5 - i.
at most 6/J.
at most R.

Demand Limitations
If the units are assigned to channels such that those
with highest weights have priority, the total weight
of units operating may not be more than 100. Otherwise, the weight may not be more than 70.

Device
729 II, V (200)
729 IV, VI (200)
729 n, V (556)
729 V (800)
7750
729 IV, VI (556)
1301
1414 6
729 VI (800)
7340

Rate
KC
15
22.5
41. 7
60
71. 5
62.5
90
90
90
174

Weight
2.1
3.2
6.2
9.4
9.4
9.9
12.4
12.5
15.6
37.2

These weights allow for the usual worst case, in
which three access may be required for each word
transferred: the word itself, an instruction to the
data channel, or an indirect address.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incarporated

12/62

408: 121.101
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7090

REPORTS

Instruction List

INSTRUCTION LIST

§

121.
OPERATION

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

Flag or
Count

Tag

Address

Accumulator (AC) bits are called S, Q,. P 1 thru 35. MultiplierQuotient (MQ) called S, 1 thru 35, Q, P, hold overflows, S's sign.
Fixed Point Arithmetic (AC and MQ use bits S, 1 thru 35 unless
overflow in AC, then P and Q).

x

F

T

F

T

F

MPY
MPR

X
X
X
X
X

F
F
F

T
T
T
T

DVH

X

F

T

Y

DVP
VLM
VDH

X
X
X

F

FC
FC

T
T
T

Y
Y

VDP

X

FC

T

Y

ADD
ADM
SUB
SBM

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y

Y

(Y)+(AC) -?AC
ICY)I + (AC) ~ AC
(AC) - (Y) ~ AC
(AC) - I(Y)I --'?AC
(Y) x (MQ) ~ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ
(Y) x (MQ)'-" (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ, and if MOl = 1;
AC + I-;;..AC
(MQ + (Y) -;;.. MQ (quotient), AC (remainder). If overflow,
set divide-check indicator and halt processor.
Same as for DVH except processor is not halted.
(Y) x (MQ)35-0 _AC and MQ.
(AC) + (Y)I to C .-,.(MQ)35-C to 35, remainder in AC;
If (Y) ~ (AC), halt processor.
(AC) + (Y)I to C ~(MQ)35-C to 35, remainder in AC.
Floating Point Arithmetic

FAD

X

UFA
FSB
UFS

X

FDH

X
X
X
X

FDP
FAM
UAM
FSM
USM
FRN
UFM

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

FMP

F
F
F

F
F
F
F
F
F
F

F
F
F

T
T

Y

T
T

Y
Y

T
T

Y

Y
Y

T

Y
Y

T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

(Y) +
(Y) +
(Y) +
(Y) +
(Y) x

(AC) _ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(AC) _ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; unnormalized.
(AC) _ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(AC) _ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; unnormalized.
(MQ) _(MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(AC) + (Y)-;;..MQ (quotient) normalized, AC (remainder).
If overflow, set divide-check indicator and halt processor.
Same as for FDH except processor is not halted.
I (Y) I + (AC) .-,.AC and MQ, normalized,.
I (Y) I + (AC) - AC and MQ, unnormalized.
(AC) - I(Y)I- AC and MQ, normalized.
(AC) - I(Y) I - AC and MQ, unnormalized.
(AC) + (MQ)9 (AC) normalized.
(Y) x (MQ) - - AC and MQ, unnormalized.

Data Transfer Arithmetic)
LDQ
STQ
SLQ
STO
STZ
STP
STD
STA
CLA
CLS
CVA

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

F

T

Y

(Y) .-,. MQ.

F

T
T
T

Y

(MQ) -?Y.
(MQ)S 1-D _Y S 1-17·
(AC)~Y.
'
0 _ (Y); sign is plus.

X
X
X

CRQ
CAQ

F

F
F

Y
Y
Y

T

Y
Y

«!gp), 1,

F

T

F
F

T
T

F

T

Y

2 -;Ys, 1, 2
3-17 - - 3-17·
(AC)21-35 ~Y21-35·
(Y)-AC.

F

T
X

Y

(-Y)~AC.

C

Y

X

C

X

Y

X

C

X

Y

Y ~ (SR). «AC)30-35 + (SR» -? (SR),
(AC)/64 _ (AC), (SR)P_ 5'-" (AC)P_ 5, C times.
Y -(SR). «MQ)S-5 + (SR) _(SR),
(MQ) x 64 __ (MQ), (SR)S_5 _(MQ)30-35, C times.
Y~(SR). (MQ)S-5 +(SR)~(SR), RQL 6,
(AC)+(SR)~AC. C times.

Y

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1/63

IBM 7090

408: 121.1 02
INSTRUCTION LIST (Cont'd)
§

121.
OPERATION

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

Flag· or
Count Tag

Address·
Data Transfers (Logical)

CAL
SLW
STT
STL

x

F
F
F
F

T
T

Y

(Y)~AC.

X
X
X

Y

(AC)~Y.

T
T

Y

STR

X

X

X

X

XCA

X

X

X

X

XCL

X

X

X

X

ENK

X

X

T

X

(AC)18_ 20 ----l>- Y18- 20; remaining positions remain unchanged.
Location of STL instruction + 1 ~y 21-35; remaining
positions of Y unchanged.
Location of STR instruction + 1 ~ to positions
21-35 of location 0000.
(AC)S, 1-35 exchanged with (MQ)S, 1-35; positions
P and Q of AC are cleared.
(AC)P, 1-35 exchanged with (MQ)S, 1-35; positions
S and Q of AC are cleared.
Contents of manual input switches ~ MQ. (See PSE)

Y

Logical Operations (AC used P, 1 thru 35 unless overflow in
AC, then Q.)
ACL
ANA
ANS
ORA
ORS
ERA

X

F

T

Y

X
X

F
F

T

X
X
X

F
F

T
T

Y
Y
Y

F

T

T

(Y) + (AC) ~AC.
(AC) "AND" (Y) ~AC.
(AC) "AND" (Y) ~ Y.
(AC) "OR" (Y) ~AC.
(AC) "OR" (Y)~Y.
(AC) "EXCLUSIVE OR" (Y) --'J>-AC (binary half-add).

Y
Y

Shift Operations (All are modulo 256 places).
ALS
ARS
LLS
LRS
LGL
RQL

LGR

X
X
X

X

X
X
X
X
X
X

X

X

X
X

T
T
T

T
T

T
T

Y
Y

(AC) shifted left Y, sign unchanged.
(AC) shifted right Y, sign unchanged.
(AC) and (MQ) shifted left Y, (MQ)S --'j;>oACS'
(AC) and (MQ) shifted right Y, (AC)S -----l>- MQS'
(AC) ~nd (MQ) shifted left Y, signs unchanged.
(MQ)rotatect left Y.
(AC) and (MQ) shifted right Y, signs unchanged.

Y
Y

Y
Y
Y

Control Operations
NOP

HPR

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

HTR

X

F

T

Y

X

F

T

Y

X

T

X
X

F
F
F

T
T

Y
Y
Y

TMI

X

F

T

Y

TOV

X

F

T

Y

TNO
TQP

X
X

F
F

T

T

Y
Y

TQO

X

F

T

Y

TLQ
TSX
TXI

X
X
D

F
X
D

T
T

T

Y
Y

TXH

D

D

T

Y

TRA
TZE
TNZ
TPL

Next instruction in sequence is executed.
Halts processor; processor steps to next instruction when
Start key is depressed.
Halts processor; processor steps to instruction in location Y
when Start key is depressed.
Next instruction istakep from location Y.
If (AC) == 0, . next instruction taken from location Y.
If (AC) " 0, next instruction taken from location Y.
.If sign pit of AC positive, next instruction taken from location
Y. Sign bit negative, next instruction executed.
If sign bit of AC nega,tive, next instruction taken from location
Y.. if sign bit positive, next instruction executed.
If ov('!rflow indicator. on, it is turned off and processing
continues from .location Y.
If overflow indicator off, .continue from location Y.
If sign bit of MQ positive, next i.D.struction taken from
~catio~~
,
If MQ overflow indicator turned off, Il-ext instruction taken
from location Y.
.
(MQ < (AC) next instruction taken from location Y.
2' s complement of location Y placed in index register T. *
Adds the value of D to the number in index register T and
takes next instruction from Y. *
If number in fndex register T greater than value of D, next
instruction taken from location Y.

Y

,

1/63

@

A-U-ER-BA-CH---:-,

r-I

INSTRUCTION LIST

408: 121.103
INSTRUCTION LIST (Cant'd)

§

121.
INSTRUCTION

Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

OPERATION

Flag or
Count Tag Address
Control Operations (Cont'd)

TXL

D

D

T

Y

If number in index register T is less than or equal to the value

TIX

D

D

T

Y

If number in index register T is greater than the value of D,

TNX

D

D

T

Y

TTR

X

F

T

Y

CAS

X

F

T

Y

LXA

X
X

X
X

T
T

Y
Y

X
X

X
X

T
T

Y

PAX
PDX

X

X

T

Y

PXD

X

X

T

Y

XEC

X
X

F
X

T
T

Y

BTT
ZET

X

F

T

Y

NZT

X

F

T

Y

LAS

X

F

T

Y

TCOA

X

F

T

Y

TCNA

X

F

T

Y

TRCA

X

F

T

Y

TEFA

X

F

T

Y

LAC
LOC

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

T
T

Y
Y

LXD

SXD

AXT
AXC
PAC
PDe

SXA
PXA

Y

Y

of D, next instruction taken from location Y. *

the number in index register T is reduced by the value of D
and next instruction is taken from Y. *
If number in index register T is greater than the value of D,
number iil index register T is reduced by the value of D and
transfers to the next instruction; otherwise the index is
unchanged and the next instruction is taken from Y. *
Processor takes its next instruction from location Y and
proceeds whether or not in trapping mode.
If (Y) < (AC), next instruction is executed. If (Y) =(AC) next
instruction is skipped. If (Y) > (AC), next two instructions
are skipped.
.
Address portion of (Y) replaces number in index register T. *
Decrement portion of (Y) replaces number in index register
T.*
~ (Y) and (T) replaces decrement part of location Y. *
Address part of (AC) replaces the number in the index
register T. *
Decrement part of (AC) replaces the number in the index
register T. *
~(AC) and" number in index register T is placed in the
decrement part of the AC. *
Execute instruction in location Y.
Test the status of data channel BOT indicator.
Channel specified by value of Y.
If (Y)I-3S = 0, next instruction is skipped and processing
continues. If (Y)I-3S i' 0, next sequential instruction is
executed.
If (Y)I-3S i' 0, the next instruction is skipped and processing
continues. If (Y)I-3S = 0, next sequential instruction is
executed.
(AC) compared logically with (Y). If (AC) > (Y), next
sequential instruction is executed. If (AC) = (Y), next
instruction is skipped and processing continues. If
(AC) < (Y), next two instructions are skipped and processing
continues.
Next instruction taken from location Y if channel A is in
operation.
Next instruction taken from location if channel A is not in
operation.
When tape check indicator for channel A is on, next instruction
taken from location Y. If indicator is off, next instruction
in sequence is executed.
When end-of-file indicator for channel A is on, next instruction taken from location Y. If indicator is off, next instruction in sequence is executed.
(NOT(Y)21-3S) + 1 ~ (T).
(NOT(Y)21-3S) + 1 ~ (T).

°
°

T

Y

Y~(T).

T
T
T

Y

(NOT Y) + 1 ~ (T).
(NOT (AC)21-3S)+ I ~(T).
(NOT (AC)3-17) + 1 ~ (T).
(T) ~·(Y)21-3S'
---;..AC; (T) ---AC 21 - 3S '

T

T

X
X

Y
Y

°

* Not indexable.
© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1/63

408: 121.104

IBM 7090
INSTRUCTION LIST (Cont'd)

§

121.
INSTRUCTION

Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

OPERATION

Flag or
Count Tag Address
Input-Output Operations

RDS
WRS
BST
WEF

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y

REW
LDA
CPY
PSE t

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

Y
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
X

LBT
CHS
SSP
ENK
lOT
COM
ETM
RND
SLN
BTT
DCT
RCT
SLF
CLM
SWT
SPU
SPT
SPR
RIC
RDC
FRN
MSEt

X

X

T

X

PBT
EFTM
SSM
LFTM
ESTM
ECTM
LTM
LSTM
SLT
ETT
RTT
BSF

X

X

T

Y

CAD

X

X

T

Y

PAl
PIA
LDI
STI
OAI
OSI
SIL
SIR
RIA

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

F
F

T
T

Y
.Y

X
X
X
X
X

X

X

T
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y

X

X

F

,Start the unit specified by Y in the read mode.
Start the unit specified by Y in the write mode.
Backspace tape designated by Y one record.
An end-of-file gap and mark and a redundancy character is
written on the tape on unit y,
Rewind tape unit Y.
704/709 Input-Output instruction.
704/709 Input-Output instruction.
Provides a means for testing the status of sense switches,
controlling sense lights, and the sampling of or sending of
impulses to the printer and punch. These functions include:
Low order bit test (AC).
Change sign (AC).
Set sign plus (AC).
(Console Keys) ~ (AC).
Test for 'input-output error.
Complement magnitude (AC).
Enter trapping mode.
Round (MQ)l x 2- 35 + (AC) ~AC.
Turn on Sense Light.
Test for beginning of tape.
Divide check test.
Test for tape error.
Turn off Sense Lights.
Clear Magnitude (AC).
Test Sense Switch.
Send signal to Card Reader.
Test for Printer signal.
Send signal to Printer.
Reset Data Channel.
Reset and Disconnect Data Channel.
Floating Point Round.
Provides a means for testing and turning off the sense lights.
These functions include:
P bit test (AC).
Enter floating trap mode.
Set sign minus.
Leave floating trap mode.
Enter Storage Nullification Mode.
Enter Copy Trap Moue.
Leave trapping mode.
Leave Storage Nullification Mode.
Test Sense Light and turn it off.
End of Tape Test.
704 instruction.
Selected tape Y is moved backward until end-of-file or load
point is reached.
704/709 input-output instruction.
Sense Indicator 0eerations

.t

(AC)p,
35 -:> SI.
(SI) ~ Cp 1-35; 0 ~ positions Sand Q.
(Y) ~ SIO-35'
(SI)~Y •
(AC) "OR" (SI) -->- SI.
(Y) "OR" (SI) ---»- SI.
Y "OR" (SI)0-17~ SI0-17'
Y "OR" (SI)18-35 ~ SI18-35'
"NOT" (AC) "AND" (SI) ~SI.

t Note: Except for the sign bit, the first 11 PSE have identical operation codes to the corresponding MSE codes.
The particular variation is determined by the indexable address field.
!

1/63

A-U-ER-BA-CH-_~/~

rl

408: 121.105

INSTRUCTION LIST
§

INSTRUCTION LIST (Cont'd)

12l.
INSTRUCTION

Mnemonic
Code
RIS
RIL
ONT
OFT
LNT
RNT
LFT
RFT
RIR
IIA
lIS
IlL
llR
lIO
TIF

Decrement
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

OPERATION

Flag or
Count Tag Address
F
X
F
F
X
X
X
X
X
X
F
X
X
F
F

T
Y
T
T
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
X
T
Y
Y
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
X
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

"NOT" (Y) "AND" (SI) ~ SI.
"NOT" (Y) "AND" (S1)0-17 --;. SIO-17'
If (Y) "AND" (SI) = (Y). skip next instruction.
If (Y) "AND NOT" (SI) = (Y). skip next instruction.
If Y "AND" (SI)0~17 = (Y). skip next instruction.
If Y "AND" (SI)18-35 = (Y). skip next instruction.
If Y "AND NOT" (SIO-17) = (Y). flkip next instruction.
If Y "AND NOT" (SI18-35) = (Y). skip next instruction.
"NOT" Y "AND" (S1)18-35 ---7 SI18-35'
(AC) "EXC. OR" (SI)~ SI.
(Y) "EXC. OR" (S1) ~ S1.
Y "EXC. OR" (SI)0-17 ~SIO-17'
Y"EXC. OR" (SI>18-35 --.SI18-35'
If (AC) "AND" (SI) = (AC). take next instruction from Y.
If (AC) "AND NOT" (SI) = (AC). take next instruction from Y.
Systems Compatibility Operations

ESNT
LSNM
ESTM

X
X
X

F
X
X

T
T
T

Y
X
X

ECTM

X

X

T

X

Half effective storage for 704 simulation transfer to Y - (T).
Return to normal storage mode.
Enter select trap mode. Input-output instructions set to
cause trapping.
Enter copy trap mode CPY CAD. and LOA will be trapped.

Channel Trap Instructions
ENB

X

X

T

Y

RCT

X

F

T

Y

Enable from Y. The (Y) determines which channel signals
cause a trapping operation.
Restore channel traps. Allows traps to occur as specified by
ENB. Cancels the inhibiting effect of an executed trap.
Input-Ouq~ut

RUN
SON
ROC

X
X
X

X
X
X

T
X
T

Y
Y
Y

RIC
SCHA
RCHA

X
X
X

X
F
F

T
T
T

Y
Y
Y

LCHA

X

F

T

Y

Transmission Operations

Rewind and unload tape.
Set density of designated tape unit.
Zero all registers and indicators in the designated data
channel.
Reset all conditions in data channel.
Store Channel A. (Y) replaced with contents of Channel A.
Reset and load Channel A. Channel A is reset and loaded
with the (Y).
Load Channel A with the (Y).
Data Channel Comma!lds (7607)

lOCO
IOCP

C
C

F
F

N
N

Y
Y

IORP

C

F

N

Y

10CT

C

F

N

Y

Input-Output C words starting at Y and disconnect.
Input-Output C words starting at Yand proceed to next
channel command.
Input-Output up to C words of one record starting at Y. then
proceed to the next channel command.
Input-Output C words of one record starting at Y then accept
the waiting LCH instruction or disconnect.
Data Channel Commands (7607) (Cont'd)

IORT

C

F

N

Y

IOSP

C

F

N

Y

lOST

C

F

N

Y

TCH

X

F

X

Y

Input-Output up to C words of one record starting at Y then
accept the waiting LCH instruction or disconnect.
Input-Output the smaller of 1 record or C words starting at Y.
then accept the next channel command.
Input-Output the smaller of 1 record or C words starting at Y.
then accept the waiting LCH instruction or disconnect.
Take next channel command from Y.

,

'.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1/63

IBM 7090

408: 121.106
INSTRUCTION LIST (Cont'd)
§

121.
OPERATION

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

Flag or
Count Tag Address
Data Channel Commands (7909)

CTL
CTLR

X
X

X
X

X
X

Y
Y

CTLW
SNS
CPYD

X
X
X

X
X
CF

X
X
X

Y
X
Y

CPYP

X

CF

X

Y

LAR
SAR
XMT

X
X
X

F
F
CF

X
X
X

Y
Y
Y

LCC
TDC

X
X

CF
F

X
X

X
X

ICC

X

C

X

X

TCM

X

CFM

X

Y

SMS
WTR

X
X

F
F

X
X

X
Y

TWT

X

F

X

Y

LIP

X

X

X

X

LIPT

X

F

X

Y

Information is sent to the adapters starting with (Y).
Prepared to read from the adapter. Must be followed by a
copy.
Prepare to write to the adapter. Must be followed by a C0py.
Prepare to read sense data. Must be followed by a copy.
Transmit C words between the channel and core starting with
location Y.
Transmit C words between the channel and core starting with
location Y then obtain next sequential command.
(Y)--....,..(AR).
(AR) --....,.. (Y).
(XTM+l), (XTM+2), ... , (XTM+C+l)~(Y+l), (Y+2),
... , (Y+C).
Next channel instruction taken from (Y + C+ 1).
C~(CC).

If (C» 0, then (C) - l __ (C) and next instruction is taken
from (Y); if (C) = 0, command is no operation.
If C = 0, SMS indicators (AR)31-36'
IfC= 1- 6(CC)~(AR)characterC.
If C = 7 instruction is no operation.
Transfer on condition met, select a character by:
C = 0, use channel check register.
C = 1 - 6, use (AR) character C.
C = 7, go to Y; if M = 0, next command; otherwise for
C t- 7, go to Y.
If character = M and (TCM)ll = 0, or
if character "AND" M = M and (TCM)ll = 1;
otherwise use next command in sequence.
Set mode and select; (SMS)30_ 35 - - status indicators.
Wait and transfer; a start channel instruction will cause the
next command to be taken from location Y.
Trap and wait; the channel suspends operation until a start
channel instruction is executed.
If control word trap is enabled, the CPU traps.
Leave interrupt program, the channel resumes a program
that has been interrupted.
Leave interrupt program and transfer, the channel enters a
non-interrupted condition and takes its next command from
location Y.
Control Orders (Disc)
No Operation
Release
Eight-Bit Mode
Six-bit Mode
Seek
Prepare to Verify (single record)
Prepare to Write Format
Prepare to Verify (track with no addresses)
Prepare to Verify (cylinder operation)*
Prepare .to Write Check
Set Access Inoperative
Prepare to Verify (track with addresses)
Prepare to Verify (home address)

DNOP
DREL
DEBM
DSBM
DSEK
DVSR
DWRF
DVTN
DVCY
DWRC
DSAI
DCTA
DVHA

,

1/63

A-U-ER-BA-CH--:-'~

rl

INSTRUCTION LIST
§

408: 121. 107
INSTRUCTION LIST (Cont'd)

121.

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

OPERATION

Flag or
Count Tag

Address
Control Orders (Hypertape)
No Operation
End of Sequence
Reserved Light Off
Reserved Light On
Check Light On
Select
Select for Backward Reading
Change Cartridge and Rewind
Rewind
Rewind and Unload Cartridge
Erase Long Gap
Write Tape Mark
Backspace
Backspace File
Space
Space File
Change Cartridge
Unload Cartridge
File Protect On

HNOP
HEOS
HRLF
HRLN
HCLN
HSEL
HSBR
HCCR
HRWD
HRUN
HERG
HWTM
HBSR
HBSF
HSKR
HSKF
HCHC
HUNL
HFPN
Terms:
C means
D means
F means
M means
N means
T means
X means
Y means

count value.
decrement value.
indirect addressing flag.
mask character.
non -transmit to storage.
index register rag.
part of the operation code.
the address or value.

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1/63

408:141.100

II
•

STANDARD

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 7090
Data Code Table
Internal
Magnetic Tape
Magnetic Disk
DATA CODE TABLE NO.1

§

141.

.1

.23

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size: • ••

. 22

Character Structure

binary 6-bit code.
internal.
magnetic tape.
magnetic disk.

Character Codes

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

MORE.SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0

16

32

48

0

0

&

-

Blank

1

1

A

J

/

2

2

B

K

S

3

3

C

L

T

4

4

D

M

U

5

5

E

N

V

6

6

F

0

W

7

7

G

P

X

8

8

H

Q

y

9

9

I

R

Z

6 bits.

.221 More significant pattern: 2 zone bits; B, A

=32,

16.

.222 Less significant pattern: 4 numeric bits; 8, 4, 2, 1

+

10

0

11

#

12

@

D

0

t

$

,

*

%

13
14
15

©

1962 by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

408: 142.1 00
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7090

R[PORTS

Data Code Table
Card Code
DATA CODE TABLE NO.2

§

142.

.23

.1

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size: • . . • 1 column.

Character Codes

punch card input-output.
OVERPUNCH

UNDERPUNCH
None

12

11

0

None

Blank

&

-

0

12

&

&

ex:

+

11

-

ex:

-

0

0

0

+
0

0

-

0

1

1

A

J

/

2

2

B

K

S

3

3

C

L

T

4

$

D

M

U

5

5

E

N

V

6

6

F

(,i)

W

7

7

G

P

X

8

8

H

Q

y

9

9

I

R

Z

+

-

8-2
8-3

#

8-4

@

0

-

$

,

0

*

%

+

A

8-5
8-6
8~7

®

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

TM

12/62

408: 143.1 00
•

STANDARD

EDP
_

RtFORTS

IBM 7090
Data Code Table
Printer Code

DATA CODE TABLES NO.3

§

143.

DATA CODE TABLE NO. 3·A
DATA CODE TABLE NO.3

.1

USE OF CODE: . . . . printer (standard set).

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

• 21

Character Size:. . . . 1 card column.

.23

Character Codes (note: see alternative symbol
sets on this page; A, B, C, D, F, G.)

.I

USE OF CODE . . . .

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size:

.23

Character Codes

UNDERPUNCH
None

UNDERPUNCH
None
None

OVERPUNCH
12
11

-

&

None

0

Blank

printer alternate symbol
set A (FORTRAN set) •

1 card column .

OVERPUNCH
12
11

+

-

0

/

I

0

0

12

8-3

=

11

8-4

-

)

$

,

*

(

0

1

I

A

J

/

2

2

B

K

S

3

3

C

L

T

4

4

D

M

U

5

5

E

N

V

6

6

F

0

W

7

7

G

P

X

8

8

H

Q

y

9

9

I

R

Z

DATA CODE TABLE NO. 3.B

•1

USE OF CODE. . . .

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

• 21

Character Size: .

.23

Character Codes
UNDERPUNCH

8-2
8-3

#

8-4

@

0

©

$

,

*

%

None

printer alternate symbol
set B.

1 card column .

OVERPUNCH
12
11

/

None

-

1

&

8-3

#

8-4

@

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

0

0

$

,

*

%

12/62

IBM 7090

408:143.1001
§

143.
DATA CODE TABLE NO. 3·C

.1

USE OF CODE .

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

. 21

Character Size: .

.23

Character Codes

DATA CODE TABLE NO.3. F

printer alternate symbol
set C.

1 card column.

.1

USE OF CODE .

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size: .

.23

Character Codes

OVERPUNCH

UNDERPUNCH
None
None

12

11

&

-

1

8-3

#

8-4

@

0

DATA CODE TABLE NO.

.1

USE OF CODE.

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

. 21

Character Size: •

• 23

Character Codes

~.

printer alternate symbol
set F.

1 card column .

OVERPUNCH

UNDERPUNCH
0

None
None
1

$

,

8-3

=

*

%

8-4

-

D

#

8-4

@

12/62

0

)

$

,

*

(

.. 1

USE OF CODE.

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

• 21

Character Size: .

.23

Character Codes

printer alternate symbol
set G.

1 card column .

OVERPUNCH
11

0

-

1
8-3

/

OVERPUNCH
UNDERPUNCH
None

0

DATA CODE TABLE NO.3·G

1 card column.

12

11

+

0

printer alternate symbol
set D.

None

12

UNDERPUNCH

None

12

+

None

/

1

$

,

8-3

+

*

%

8-4

-

11

0

/

0

$

,

*

%

408: 144.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7090
Data Code Table
Magnetic Tape
Magnetic Disk

REl'QRTS

DATA CODE TABLE NO.4

§

144.

.1

.2

USE OF CODE:

• 23
BCD 6-bit code.
magnetic tape.
magnetic disk.

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

STRUCTURE OF CODE

• 21

Character Size: •

.22

Character Structure

Character Codes

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0

0

6 bits.

.221 More significant pattern: 2 zone bits: B, A

= 32,

16.

.222 Less significant pattern: 4 numeric bits, 8, 4, 2, 1.

16

32

48

Blank

-

&

1

1

/

J

A

2

2

S

K

B

3

3

T

L

C

4

4

U

M

D

5

5

V

N

E

6

6

W

0

F

7

7

X

P

G

8

8

Y

Q

H

9

9

Z

R

I

10

0

t

a

-

+
0

11

#

,

$

12

@

%

*

0

A

f

13
14
15

TM

(

"'©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

408: 161.1 00
•

STANDIRD

_EDP
."

IBM 7090

REPOR1S

P. O. Language

FORTRAN II
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 709/7090 FORTRAN II

§

161.

• 14

.. 1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

FORTRAN II Automatic
Coding System for the IBM
709/7090.

. 12

Origin: . . . .

IBM Data Proces sing
Division.

.13

Reference: . ".

IBM Reference Manual
C28-6054-2.

. 14

Description
The FORTRAN II language is the most widely used
process oriented language for scientific programming. Although the language is machine-independent,
it has been designed primarily for use with the IBM
700/7000 series scientific systems, and is strongly
oriented toward their hardware features. However,
because of its large community of users and its
proven facilities in scientific applications, some
version of FORTRAN II has been implemented by almost all system manufacturers.
FORTRAN II for the 7090 can perform double precision, Boolean, and complex arithmetic operations,
but lacks disc and drum input-output facilities. The
FORTRAN II Monitor, of which the translator is a
part, includes service functions that relieve the programmer of many of the less productive aspects of
machine coding, debugging, and operating tasks.
The FORTRAN II language has a pseudo-algebraic
format in which expressions describing arithmetic
operations appear in "equation" form. The left-hand
side of the equation is a variable, the value of which
is determined by evaluating the arithmetic expression on the right-hand side of the equal sign. The
equal sign loses its algebraic equivalence meaning
and takes the meaning of replacement; e. g., K = K +
I means increment the value of K by one.
In addition to the basic arithmetic statement, 37
other distinct statement types are pr9vided to handle
control, input-output, and data description functions.
Logical decisions are handled by the IF statement,
which transfers control to one of three numbered
statements depending upon whether the value of an
arithmetic expression is less than, equal to, or
greater than zero. Looping is controlled by the 00
statement, which precedes the sequence of statements comprising the loop and causes them to be executed an appropriate number of times. The format,
sequencing, and effect of each type of statement are
summarized in the Table of Source Program Statements, Paragraph: 43.
FORTRAN II labels for source statements are numbers less than 32,768. Variable, subroutine, and

© 1963

Description (Contd.)
function labels consist of from one to six characters.
The first character of a variable label must be alphabetic, and denotes the representation to be used for
the variable. Floating-point is the standard representation unless the first letter is I, J, K, L, M, or
N in which case the variable is represented as a fixed
point integer. Literal numbers used in the source
language are expressed in floating pOint if they are
written with a decimal point included; otherwise they
are considered fixed pOint. All the operands in a
single expression must be in the same mode; i. e. ,
all must be fixed or all must be floating point .
Floating point mode fs used for most calculations because of its range (±1O±38) and, when necessary, its
precision (8 or 16 decimal digits). Fixed point mode,
which is used mainly for counting and control, is restricted to integers under 131,072 (i.e., 2 17 ). Only
fixed-point integers, modulo' 2 15 , are considered
meaningful subscripts. These limitations are imposed by the equipment rather than the language.
FORTRAN II arithmetic statements with a "B"
punched in column 1 are interpreted as Boolean
statements, and the symbols +, *, and - denote the
Boolean operators OR, AND, and NOT, respectively.
All Boolean operations are performed upon the full
36-bit word. Boolean masks and constants are expressed as octal numbers. Arithmetic statements
with a "0" in column 1 are executed in double precision floating point, with a precision of 16 decimal
digits. An "I" in column 1 denotes complex arithmetic, in which each variable or constant consists of a
real part and an imaginary part, each part expressed
as a single precision floating point number. Boolean,
double precision, and complex variables are named
in the same way as single precision floating point
variables, and can be subscripted in the same manner. Direct input-output facilities are not provided
for double precision or complex variables.
The power of FORTRAN lllies in its ability to use
independently prepared subroutines, in the use of
subscripted arrays, * in the flexibility of its inputoutput features, and, in particular, in the relative
simplicity of writing FORTRAN II procedures. Every program written is essentially a subprogram.
The only difference between the main program and
subprograms is in usage: the main program is entered first. There are two kinds of subprograms,
functions and subroutines. In the procedural statement, functions appear as variables with specified
arguments; e. g., SINF(A +B). These functions cause
a subroutine to be entered that will compute the value
of the variable using the values of its arguments and
then return the computed value to the calling statement. A subroutine in FORTRAN II performs the

*

Tables of variables referenced by use of subscript
notation.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

408:161.140
§

161.

. 14

IBM 7090
• 14

Description (Contd. )
same function as in hand-coded programs; that is, it
accepts a number of arguments, operates on them,
and then returns control to the main prpgram.
Naturally, the value of this feature increases as the
number of available subroutines increases. For the
709/7090 this value is considerable because of the
large number of subroutines in the library maintained.
by the SHARE users' group. Subroutines can be
coded in FORTRAN or FAP. They can be taken from
the library tape, compiled with the source program
itself, or be separately compiled routines on either
cards or tape.
. 15
The input-output facilities allow considerable flexibility in handling numeric data, which is adequate for
most scientific uses but somewhat limited in other
areas of processing. The variables to. be input or
output are listed in the same statement that specifies
the input-output unit and, in the case of tapes,
whether external representation is binary or binarycoded decimal. Each BCD input and output statement
references a FORMAT statement which specifies the
translation required upon the data and its format on
the external medium.

Divisions: . . . . . . . one division, composed of
the following types of
statements.

• Detailed descriptions of files and record layouts
(as in COBOL) are not possible.
• Block transfers of multiple data items from one
file or array to another cannot be directly coded.
• Arrays are restricted to three dimensions.
• Subscript expressions, used for referencing individual array elements, are restricted to the form
C * N ±C' or a subset thereof, where C and C'.
are unsigned integer literals and N is an integer
variable.
• Although the notation used within the arithmetic
statements can be made quite descriptive, the relationships among all the statements comprising
.22
a source program are likely to be obscure (especially when the program is segmented) unless extensive comments are included.

4/63

original edition, 1958: current edition, January,
1961: double precision and
complex arithmetic added
in August, 1961.

. 21

• No control over the blocking of logical records on
magnetic tape is provided.

Modifications to the input-output facilities of the
IBM-supplied FORTRAN II system by individual
users have increased the amount of overlapping that
can be obtained.

Publication Date:

PROGRAM STRUCTURE

• Input, processing, and output cannot be overlapped (except for the last physical block of each
output record), even though the computer system
is equipped to do so. t

t

In summary, 709/7090 FORTRAN II is a convenient
language for scientific applications. The language is
comparatively easy to learn and use, but like most
process oriented languages, it requires a skillful and
experienced programmer who is also thoroughly familiar with the 7090 in order to use it most effectively. The inability of FORTRAN-coded programs
to perform fully overlapped input, processing, and
output operations severely limits their maximum
overall efficiency. Despite its limitations, the wide
use of FORTRAN II has made it the de facto standard
process oriented language for scientific applications.

.2

Use of the 709/7090 FORTRAN II language imposes
the following restrictions on the user:

Some of the restrictions can be circumvented by the
use of subprograms coded in FAP symbolic form
(Section 408:171). FAP makes all the hardware facilities of the 7090 available, but requires a knowledge
of assembly-level programming.

Description (Contd. )

Procedure statements:. algebraic formulae.
comparisons and jumps.
input and output.
Data statements:. . . . FORMAT: describes the
layout, size, scaling, and
code of input-output data.
EQUIVALENCE: causes two
variables to· have a common location or specifies
synonyms.
COMMON: causes data
storage areas to· be shared
by more than one. subprogram.
DIMENSIONS: specifies the
maximum number of elements in each dimension
of an array or set of
arrays.
Optimizing statement: . FREQUENCY: optional
statement of ratio of expected use of alternative
paths at a branch point or
average repetitions of
loops.
Procedure Entities
Program: . .
Subroutine: .
Function: .
Statement: •

composed of statements,
subroutines, and/or
functions.
composed of statements.
composed of statements.
composed of characters;
blanks are ignored except
when part of alphameric
literals.

Note: The general term "subprogram" is applied to
each independent subroutine, function, or segment of a main program.

PROCESS ORIENTE.D LANGUAGE: 70917090 FORTRAN II

§

161.

.23

408: 161. 230
.242 Designators (Contd.)
Equipment (Contd. )
Sense Light or
implied by noun SENSE.
Switch: • . . . .
Overflow Triggers: . im plied by noun
OVERFLOW.
Divide Check
implied by phrase
Trigger: .•
DIVIDE CHECK.
implies BCD data on tape.
Input or Output:.
C in column I of statement.
Comments: . • . .
key words FREQUENCY.
Translator control:
EQUIVALENCE, or
COMMON.

Data Entities
Array: •.

a group of variables of any
one of the following
classes; each array element is referenced by the
array name followed by 1,
2, or 3 subscripts.
Item: • . . • . . . . . • a floating point variable or
constant (single precision,
double precision, or complex).
an integer variable or
constant.
.25 Structure of Data Names
a Boolean variable or
constant.
none.
.251 Qualified names:. .
a Hollerith item.
.252 Subscripts
an alphameric item.
o to 3.
Number per item:
Hollerith item:. • . • . an item composed of alphaall variables.
Applicable to:
meric characters that can
Class may be
be used only for output; the
Special index
item is not named.
no special index variables.
variable:
Alphameric item: • . . an item, composed of alphaAny variable: .
only integers.
meric characters, that is
yes; only integers.
Literal: . . •
given a variable or array
Expression: . .
at most C * N +C'; where
name and hence can be
C and C' are literals and
processed and/or
N is an integer variable.
modified.
Form may be
C, C', and N.
Integer only:
no.
Signed: . . .
Truncated fraction: . yes (and modulo 215 ).
• 24 Names
no .
Rounded fraction: .
. 253 Synonyms
.241 Simple name formation
EQUIVALENCE statement
Preset: • • . • . . .
A to Z, 0 to 9.
Character set: .
causes sharing of storage
1 to 6 char.
Size: • . . . . . .
locations.
Avoid key words:.
no.
no.
Dynamically set: .
first char must be a letter.
Formation rule:
a final F may not be used if
.26 Number of Names
the name is subscripted
and is more than 3 charThe maximum number of variable names and proceacters long.
dure numbers permitted in the FORTRAN language is
a variable name may not be
essentially unlimited. The limitations imposed by
the same as the name of
the IBM 7090 FORTRAN Translator are covered in
any function without its
Section 408:181. These limitations are not very sigterminal F.
nificant because large source programs are usually
.242 Designators
divided into subprograms which are compiled sepProcedures
arately. Current practice is to use fewer than 1,000
Statement label:
unsigned integer.
source statements per compilation; this number of
4 to 7 characters with a terFunction label: .
statements is not likely to exhaust the name capacity
minal F for built-in and liof the translator.
brary functions; no designator for user-coded
see.26 .
. 261 All entities:
functions.
. 262 Procedures:
see.26 .
Subroutine label: .
no designator.
see.26 .
. 263 Data: .
Boolean statement:
B in column 1.
.264 Equipment
Double precision
o to 80.
Tapes:
arithmetic statePrinter: .
1.
D in column 1.
ment: . . . . . •
Card Reader:.
1.
Complex arithmetic
1.
Card Punch:
statement:. .
I in column 1.
Data
initial I, J, K, L, M, N.
Integer variable:
.27 Region of Meaning of Names
Floating point
any other initial letter.
variable:
In the straightforward use of FORTRAN, each name
Equipment
is established in a subprogram and is local to that
Card: . . •
particular subprogram. A name can be made to refimplied by verbs READ,
erence the same storage location in 2 or more subPUNCH.
Magnetic tape:
use key word TAPE.
programs by specifying,the name in the same position
Printer: . . . •
implied by verb PRINT.
of a COMMON statement in each subprogram.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated

4/63

408:161.300

§

161.

.3
. 31

.311
. 312
• 313
. 314
. 315
.3-16
.317
.318
.319

.32
· 321
· 322
· 33
• 331
.332
. 333
• 334

· 335
• 336

· 337
· 338
• 339

· 34
· 341
· 342

4/63

IBM 7090

.342 Possible classes
Floating point,
DATA DESCRIPTION FACILITIES __
complex: . . .
yes.
Boolean: . . • .
yes.
Methods of Direct Data Description
Alphameric: . .
yes, two forms.
· 343 Choice of external
Concise item picture:
FORMAT statement only.
radix:. . . . . .
FORMAT statement.
List by kind: . . . . .
no.
· 344 Possible external radices
Qualify by adjective:.
no.
Decimal: . . . . . .
yes .
Qualify by phrase: .
no.
Octal:. . . . . . . .
yes.
Qualify by code: ••
first letter of name.
• 345 Internal justification:
alphameric automatic left
Hierarchy by list: •
no.
justified.
no.
Level by indenting:
integers automatic right
no.
Level by coding: . .
justified in decrement of
Others (examples)
word.
Four-by-seven array
.346 Choice of external code: FORMAT statement and
size: . . . . . . .
DIMENSION ARRAY (4, 7).
READ, WRITE statement.
Four-digit integer:.
FORMAT (14).
.347 Possible external codes
Five four-digit
Decimal: .
yes.
int~gers: . . . .
FORMAT (514).
Octal: . . . .
yes.
Two floating point
Hollerith: •.
yes.
items: . . . . • .
FORMAT (F8. 3, E12. 4) for
Alphameric :
yes.
999. 999 ~ t:. 9. 9999E ~ 99 · 348 Internal item size
( ~- means either blank or
Variable size:
fixed; 1 word or 2 words.
minus sign).
Designation:
a D or I in column 1 indicates that variable size is
Files and Reels
2 words.
Range
own coding.
File labels: . .
Integer numeric:
fixed, 1 word (high order
no multireel files.
Reel Sentinels: •
18 bits).
Floating point
Records and Blocks
numeric:
fixed, -I word or 2 words.
Complex: . .
fixed, I-word real part and
Variable record size:
dynamic .
I-word imaginary part.
dynamic, with fixed upper
Variable block size: .
Boolean: . . .
fixed, 1 word of 36 bits.
limits.
Alphameric:
fixed, 1 word.
Record size: . . . . .
1 to N blocks .
.349 Sign provision: .
optional.
Block size
READ TAPE, WRITE
TAPE: • • • . . . . • up to 127 data words (binary
format).
.35 Data Values
READ INPUT TAPE,
WRITE OUTPUT "j' '1
up to 120 data characters
· 351 Constants
TAPE: . . . . .
Possible sizes
(BCD format).
Integer: . . .
up to 72 data characters
±2 17 -1.
READ, PUNCH:
Fixed point: .
none.
(BCD format).
+10- 38 to +10+ 38 .
Floating point:
up to 120 data characters
PRINT: . . . . •
660 char/statement or 66
Alphameric:
(BCD format).
char per card, 10 cards
Choice of record size:. implied by input-output list
max.
and FORMAT statement.
Subscriptible: .
yes.
none; 110gical record of 1
Choice of block size:
Sign provision: .
optional.
or more blocks is read or
same as constants .
. 352 Literals: . . . . .
written by each input or
own coding.
. 353 Figuratives: • . .
output statement.
· 354 Coriditional variables: . computed GO TO.
Sequence control: .
none.
In-out error control:
automatic.
Blocking control:. . .
none; 1 logical record of 1
or more blocks is read or • 36 Special Description Facilities
written by each inputoutput statement.
yes; by multiple references
· 361 Duplicate format:
to a single FORMAT
Data Items
statement.
COMMON statement .
. 362 Re-definition: . .
by name.
Designation of class:
EQUIVALENCE statement.
Possible classes
· 363 Table description
Integer: . . . .
yes.
mandatory in DIMENSION
Subscription: . .
Fixed point:
no.
statement.
Floating point, single
1 to 3.
Multi - subscripts:
length: . . •
yes.
Floating point, double
· 364 Other subscriptible
tape units.
entities: . . . . •
length:
..
yes.

PROCESS ORIENTED LANG.UAGE: 709/7090 FORTRAN II
§

161.

408: 161.400
.412 Operands allowed
Classes: . . .

.4

OPERATION REPERTOIRE

.41

Formulae

Mixed scaling:
Mixed classes: •

. 411 Operator List
Arithmetic

Mixed radices: .
Mixed precision: •
Literals: . • . . .
.413 Statement structure
Parentheses
a - b - c means:
a + b x c means:
a .;. b .;. c means:
abC means:

addition; also unary.
subtraction; also unary.
multiplication.
*
division.
/
exponentiation.
**
replacement: replace value
of variable on left side
with value of expression on
right side.
Logical (designated by B in column 1)
*
AND.
inclusive OR.
+ ..... .
.414
NOT.
Functions
. 415
ABSF ( ) ~ c• • •
absolute value.
truncation.
INTF ( ) ~ b• • •
MODF (A,B) a.b.
remainder A .;. B; i. e.,
A modulo B.
MAXOF (A, ••• ) ap. maximum value, result
fixed.
maximum value, result
MAXIF (A, ••• )!'~
416
floating.
minimum value, result
MlNOF (A, .•• )~~
fixed.
MINIF (A, ••• ) a. b.
minimum value, result
floating.
diminish A by A or B,
DIMF (A, B) !' •
whichever is smaller.
.42
natural log.
LOGF ( )b c ,
sine.
SINF ( ) ••
COSF ( ); •.
cosine.
exponential.
EXPF ( );. 6
.43
bas'e 10 log.
LOGlOF ( ).
arctangent (double length).
ATAN2F ( ) ~
square root.
SQRTF ( )<;.
arctangent.
ATANF ( )?
hyperbolic tangent.
TANHF ( ) . .
FLOATF ( )<;
float an integer.
XFIXF ( ) c••
fix a floating point variable;
same as XlNTF.
SIGNF ( )a.c.
sign chlinge.

+

usually numeric, but alphameric is possible.
yes.
only in exponentiation and
functions.
no .
no.
yes.
(a - b) - c.

a + (b x c).
(a';' b).;. c.
illegal; parentheses must be
used to clarify order.
Size limit: .
660 char (10 cards of 66
columns each).
Multi - results:
no.
Rounding of results: .
truncation of integers at
each step in expression •
Special cases
Integer
Floating
x = -x: . • •
K = -K
X = -X.
x=x+l:..
K=K+l
X=X+1.
x=4.7y:...
K=47*L/1O X=4.7*Y.
x=5x107 +y2: . . . too large
X=5.E7+Y**2.
x=lyl:······· K=XABSF(L) X=ABSF(y).
x =integer part of (y): K = XlNTF(Y) X =INTF(y).
Typical examples: . . • X = (-B+SQRTF(B*B-4. O*A*
C»/(2. 0* A).
18 ALPHA = CON.
DO 20 1= 2, N.
20 ALPHA = ALPHA * X +
CON (1).
Operations on Arrays:. by own FORTRAN coding
only.

Other Computation: . . See Table of Source
Program Statements.

Note:aFunctions may be preceded by an X to specify
fixed point operands.
hoouble length if a D appears in column 1.
C:Oouble length or complex if a D or I appears in
column 1.
TABLE OF SOURCE PROGRAM STATEMENTS
Statement

Normal Sequencing

Comment

a=b

next executable statement

ASSIGN i TO n

next executable statement

BACKSPACE i
CALL Name (aI' a2' . . . , an)
COMMON A, B, •.•

next executable statement
first statement of subroutine Name
not executed

CONTINUE
DIMENSION v, 'v, v,

next executable statement
not executed

arithmetic statement; value of expression b replaces variable a.
i is nl' n2 etc., in an assigned GO TO statement.
i is a tape number.
Name is the subroutine label and ai are
arguments.
A, B are labels of data storage areas shared by
programs.
ciilmmy statement.
v is an array label with its maximum subscriPt values.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

408: 161.430

IBM 7090

§ 161.

TABLE OF SOURCE PROGRAM STATEMENTS (Contd.)
Statement

Normal Sequencing

Comment

DO n i =ml' m2' or
DO n i = ml' m2' m3

DO-sequencing, then next
executable statement

END FILE i
END (II' 12~ 13 , 14 , 15)

next executable statement
no sequencing; this statement terminates a program.

perform through statement n with i starting at
m, increased by m3 (or 1) each time until
i is greater than m2'
write end-of-file mark on tape 1.

EQUIVALENCE (a, b, c, ... ),
(d, e, f, ... ), •..

not executed

labels within parentheses are assigned to
common storage locations.

FREQUENCY n (i, j, .•. ),
m(k, 1, ... ), ..••
FORMAT (Specification)

not executed
not executed

branch optimizing statement.
translation and placement specification for
input- output statement.

next executable statement
statement n
statement last assigned
to n
statement ni

first statement of function subprogram.
branch to statement n.
assigned branch.

FUNCTION Name
(aI, a2 .•• , an)
GO TOn
GO TO n, (nl' n2'···' nm )
GO TO (nr' n2' ... ' ~), i
IF (a) nl' n2' n3

statement nl' n2' or n3
if (a) < 0, (a) = 0, or
if (a) > 0, respectively

IF ACCUMULATOR OVERFLOW
statement nl, n2 if the
nl' n2
709/7090 FORTRAN internal overflow indicator
is On or Off, respectively
statement nl' n2 if the DiIF DIVIDE CHECK nl' n2
vide Check indicator is
On or Off, respectively
IF QUOTIENT OVERFLOW
statement n 1, n2 if the
nl' n2
709/7090 FORTRAN internal overflow indicator
is On or Off, respectively
IF (SENSE LIGHT i) nl' n 2
statement n I' n2 if Sense
Light i is On or Off,
respectively
If (SENSE SWITCH i) nl' n2
statement nl' n2 if Sense
Switch is Down or Up,
respectively
PAUSE OR PAUSE n
next executable statement
PRINT n, List
next executable statement
PUNCH n, List

next executable statement

RE;AD n, List

next executable statement

READ DRUM i, j, List
READ TAPE i, List

next executable statement
next executable statement

READ INPUT TAPE i, n, List

next executable statement

RETURN

the statement or part of
statement following call
next executable statement
next executable statement
terminates program

REWIND i
SENSE LIGHT i
STOP or STOP n
SUBROUTINE Name
(a I' a'2, .•• an)
WRITE DRUM i, j, List
WRITE OUTPUT TAPE
i, n, List
WRITE TAPE i, List

halt with restart provision.
print on-line; n is format, List contains.
variable labels.
punch on-line; n is format, List contains
variable labels.
read cards; n is format, List contains
variable labels.
709 only.
read binary magnetic tape; i is unit, List
contains variable names.
read BCD magnetic tape; i is unit, n is
format, List contains va·riable J4bels.
at least one in each function or subroutine.
rewind tape lInit 1.
set sense light.

next executable statement
next executable statement

first statement in a subroutine.
709 only.

next executable statement

write BCD magnetic tape; i is unit, n is
format, List contains variable labels.
write binary magnetic tape; i is unit, List
contains variable labels.

next executable statement
l

4/63

branch to statement ni' where i is an
integer variable.
a is an expression.

I AUERBAG~

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 70917090 FORTRAN II

§

161.

.47

.44

Data Movement and Format

.441
. 442
.443
• 444
.445

Data copy example:
Levels possible: . .
Multiple results:. .
Missing operands: .
Size of operands:

Alignment rule
Numbers: . . .

y =X.
items .
none.
not possible.
fixed for internal operations, preset variable for
input and output items in
BCD format.

zeros.
blanks.

Discovery

Overflow:
IF clause
In-out:
automatic
Invalid data: automatic

.5

integer to floating or fixed
point.
floating to integer or fixed
point.
integer or floating to octal.
Change radix:
.•• yes.
Insert editing symbols
automatic.
Actual point: .
automatic.
Suppress zeros:
automatic scaling indication.
Insert: • . . •
minus sign only.
Float: . . . . • .
none.
.447 Special moves:. •
automatic.
.448 Code translation:
.449 Character manipulation: none.

File Manipulation

.511 Destinations allowed:
. 512
. 513
• 514
.515

Unconditional jump:
Switch: • • . . . .
Setting a switch: • .
Switch on data: •.•

.523 Conditional relations: .

· 524 Variable conditions: • .
.525 Compound conditionals:
.528 Typical examples: .••

.464 Accept option:.

. .•

.531 Designation
Single statement: .
Set of statements
First: • . . . . .
Last: . • . • .
. 532 Possible subroutines:
.533 Use in-line in program:
· 534 Mechanism
Cue with parameters:
Number of
parameters:
Cue without
parameter: .
Formal return:.

Alternative return: •
.535 Names
PRINT uses on -line printer .
Parameter call by
same as log.
valuet: . . . . .
PAUSE and octal display •
Parameter call by
STOP and octal display.
namet: . . . . .
Non-local names:
PRINT message.
SENSE LIGHT.
Local names: •
use sense switch or usual
Preserved own
operator intervention.
variables:. .

© 1963

statement number less than
32,768.
GO TON •
GO TO M, (35, 47, 18) •
ASSIGN 35 to M .
GO TO (35, 47, 18), 1.

IF.
implied.
single form of mUltiple condition; see example in
paragraph.528.
IF (A)
C, D: if the value
of the expression A is less
than, equal to, or greater
than zero, respectively,
go to B, C, or D.
expression always against
zero.
no.
IF (X**2.0 - 3.0) 29, 37,
18; means go to 29, 37, or
18 if x 2 -3 is respectively
less than, equal to, or
greater than zero. This is
the only permitted form
for conditional statements .

a,

Subroutines

Operating Communication

. 461 Log of progress: . . . .
. 462 Messages to operator:.
. 463 Offer options: • • • • .

own COding.
halt and display error type.
halt and display error type.

.51

· 53

own coding.
Open: . • . . . .
own coding.
Close: . . • . .
Advance to next record: READ, WRITE, PUNCH,
PRINT.
BACKSPACE.
Step back a record:
none.
Set restart point:
none.
Restart:
...
own coding.
Start new reel: •
implied in each input-output
Start new block:
statement.
none.
Search on key: .
REWIND.
Rewind:
none.
Unload: . . . • •

Special Actions

PROCEDURE SEQUENCE CONTROL

.52 Conditional Procedures
truncate at left for integers,
right for floating.
• 521 Designators
truncate at right.
Condition:
Procedure:
no.
• 522 Simple conditions: •

Alpha: • . .
Variable size
destination:
.446 Editing possible
Change class:

• 46

Object Program Errors
Error

right justified for integers;
normalized for floating
point.
left justified.

Alpha: . . .
Filler rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: •••
Truncating rule
Numbers: •

. 45

408: 161.440

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

not possible.
SUBROUTINE.
END.
any number of statements .
no.
CALL XXX (X, Y, Z).
no practical limit.
CALL XXX.
RETURN statement at least
once.
more RETURN statements.
yes .
no.
use COMMON.
all.
all.
4/63

408: 161.536
§

IBM 7090

161.

.6

.536 Nesting limit:
. 537 Automatic recursion
allowed: . • . . . .

• 54

300.
no.

.7

LffiRARY FACILITIES

t "Call by value" and "call by name" are ALGOL
terms describing two methods of supplying parameters to a subroutine or function. The difference
between the two methods is in the way the parameters are used by the subroutine. not in the method
a programmer uses to specify them. Call by value
is a restric;ted. form. and indicates that the parameter. which may be an expression. is evaluated before the subroutine is entered and that this value is
then "plugged" into the subroutine. The call by
name. the unrestricted form which is correspondingly more difficult to implement. indicates that
the called variable or expression must be reevaluated each time it is used in the subroutine.

• 71

Identi!X::

.72

Kinds of Libraries

Function Definition by Procedure

.541 Designation
Single statement:.
Set of statements.
First: . . . . . .
Last: . . . • . .
.542 Level of procedure:
. 543 Mechanism
Cue: . . . • . .
Formal return: .
. 544 Names
Parameter call by
valuet: . . . • •
Parameter call by
namet: . . . . .
Non-local names:
Local names:.
Preserved own
variables:. .

no.
yes.

.73

Storage Form: • • .

magnetic tape.

. 74

Varieties of Contents: • subroutines .
functions.

.75

Mechanism

.751 Insertion of new item: . separate run .
. 752 Language of new item: . FAP and/or FORTRAN.
. 753 Method of call: . .
named in procedures.
.76

FUNCTION.
END.
any number of statements.

• 761 Open routines exist: .
yes; 20 "built-in" functions .
. 762 Closed routines exist: . yes .
. 763 Open-closed is
variable: • . . . . . . no .

RETURN .
.8

TRANSLATOR CONTROL

yes.

.81

no.
use COMMON.
all.

Transfer to Another
Language: • . . . . . yes; F AP subroutines can be
used.

.82

Optimizing Information Statements

all.

Loop Control

.562 Control by count:
• 563 Control by step
Parameter
Special index: .
Any variable: .
Step: . . • . . .
Criteria: . . . .
Multiple parameters:
· 564 Control by condition:
. 565 Control by list: . . .
. 566 Nesting limit: . . . .
".567 Jump out allowed: . .
•• 568 Control variable exit
status: . . . . . . .
4/63

Types of Routine

by name in expression.

Operand Definition by
Procedure: . . . . . . none.

. 561 Designation of loop
Single procedure:
First and last
procedures:. .

. FORTRAN library.

.721 Fixed master: . . .
.722 Expandable master:

• 821 Process usage
statements: . . . . • . FREQUENCY.
· 822 Data usage statements: COMMON • EQUIVALENCE.
· 83

". 56

......

can write new function for
library •

same as set.

t See footnote. Paragraph. 537.

• 55

EXTENSION OF
THE LANGUAGE:

none.

· 84

available.

Target Computer
Environment:. .

. . . implicit.
no.

.85

Program Documentation
Control: . . . .
yes; see next entry •

.86

Translator Output
Options: • • . .

current place to named end;"
e.g•• DO 173 1= 1. N. 2.
indirect.
no.
integer only.
positive integers.
greater than.
require nested loops.
no .
no.
200 of DO type.
yes.

Translator
Environment:.

END (II. 12' 13 • . . . • 115)
specifies choice of listing
and object program output
options.

.9

TARGET COMPUTER ALLOCATION CONTROL

.91

Choice of Storage Level: CALL CHAIN causes a program segment to be loaded
into core storage from
tape and executed •

.92

Address Allocation: • . relative to zero; object programs are re10catable.

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 70917090 FORTRAN II
§

408: 161. 930

161.

.93

Arrangement of Items In
Word In Unpacked
Form: . . . . . • • • standard; no control is
provided.

.94

Assignment of InputOutput Devices: •

. 95

yes; specified in inputoutput statements •

Input-Output Areas: • • built into input-output routines; no control is
provided.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

408: 162.100

_STANDARD
EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 7090
Process Oriented
Language

FORTRAN IV
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 709017094 FI)RTRAN IV

§ 162

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

. 12

.14

"FORTRAN IV was further encouraged by the action
of SHARE, which organized a cooperative effort
to provide a special FORTRAN II to FORTRAN IV
translator, SIFT, thus allowing the large SHARE
library to be made immediately available to
FORTRAN IV users .

IBM 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV.
IBM Data Processing
Division.

.13

Reference: • . . . .

.14

Description

IBM Publication C28-6274,
published January, 1963.

FORTRAN, as originally conceived, was a
scientific programming system that handled floating
point operations on a specific machine. It had some
integer operations (designed for housekeeping only
and restricted in scope) and a few machine-based
instructions (IF SENSE SWITCH, etc.). Most of the
necessary machine-level instructions were implied
in the language, making it unnecessary for the nonprogrammer FORTRAN writer to worry about them.
During the six or seven years since it first came
into use, the FORTRAN notation has proved to be
very successful. It has spread to almost all
scientific computers and has been adapted for
many circumstances where the original assumptions
did not hold. Some of these adaptations worked, but
were not in accordance with the generally accepted
meanings of the terms involved (Boolean operations
in FORTRAN II, for example, were carried out on
36-bit operands rather than two-valued operands).
Different firms started introducing new statements
to help programmers (for now there were many
FORTRAN programmers) obtain more efficiency
and use many types of operands which were not
included in the original FORTRAN. These include
double-precision floating point, alphameric, and
complex number operations.
FORTRAN IV is the result of a joint effort by IBM
Corporation and other members of the industry to
make the FORTRAN language more generally useful
and to eliminate some of the arbitrary rules, misleading nomenclature, etc., that had aris en over the
years. The overall scheme of FORTRAN statements,
which had been so successful in the past, was
basically left untouched, so that no FORTRAN II
programmer would have any difficulty in using
FORTRAN IV. (The source program statements of
IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV are listed and described in Paragraph .142.) Widespread adoption of

© 1963

Description (Contd.)

FORTRAN IV, like FORTRAN II, has a pseudoalgebraic format in which statements describing
arithmetic operations are written in "equation"
form. The left-hand side of the equation is a variable,
whose value is determined by evaluating the
arithmetic expression on the right-hand side of the
equal sign. The equal sign loses its algebraic
significance and denotes replacement; e. g. ,
K = K + 1, which would normally be
meaningless, has the meaning "increment
the current value of K by 1 . "
Integers, single- and double-precision floating point
numbers, complex numbers, Boolean values, and
alphameric items can all be used as variables. They
are normally distinguished by being "declared" in
Type statements, but the old FORTRAN II method
(names starting with the letters I through N are
integers; all others are single precision floating
point) is allowed as an alternative. From the point
of view of the language itself, valid and meaningful
procedures can be written, but in 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV some arbitrary limits are placed on
this. These limitations apply mainly to what is
called "mixed mode arithmetic, "which occurs when
more than one type of variable or literal is used on
"the right-hand side of a single FORTRAN "equation. "
For example, "I = (Floating Point Number) +
(Integer)" is a mixed rpo~e statement. Many mixed
mode operations are meaningful; many are not. Thus,
"I = (Floating Point Number) + (Integer)" is unambiguous, while "I = (Integer) + (Alphameric Constant)"
has no obvious meaning, and "I = (Integer) + (Complex
Number)" may be regarded as meaningful if properly
defined.
In most implementations of FORTRAN I and II, mixed
mode arithmetic was strictly forbidden except in
exponents, subscripts, and function arguments. In
IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV, there is somewhat
more freedom. Single-precision floating point
numbers (now misleadingly called type REAL) may
be combined with either double-precision or complex
numbers (but not both) in add, subtract, multiply,
and divide operations. Double~precision or complex
numbers, however, may not under any circumstances

Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.

9/63

IBM 7090

408: 162.140
.14

!l 162

.14

Description (Contd. )

Data to be input or output in an externally meaningful format is described by a FORMAT specification.
The input or output statement simply names the
appropriate FORMAT specification, and at running
time this specification is examined and used to
handle the necessary conversions, editing, and
forms movement. The FORMAT specification
allows numeric data to be handled in five different
ways, which do not directly corres pond to the
five types of arithmetic. Alphameric information
can be incorporated into the FORMAT specification itself if it is only to be used for headings;
alternatively, alphameric items of up to six
characters can be specified and manipulated in
the same way as any other named variable.
Because the FORMAT specification is examined
during execution of the object program to control
the editing and conversion routines, it is not
necessary to decide on precise format details
until running time, and two runs can be made
with different formats. The FORMAT specification itself can be read in as data, thus allowing
self-descriptive records to be used.

be added, subtracted, divided, or multiplied in a
mixed mode manner by variables of types other than
single-precision, irrespective of how meaningful the
statement is.
The use of integers in mixed mode arithmetic is
particularly restricted in the current 7090/7094
version. Integers cannot be used in expressions
of any other mode, except as exponents, subscripts,
or function arguments. These restrictions, which
are not present in some other versions of
FORTRAN IV, will complicate desk checking of
programs. It is no longer possible to look at a
statement by itself and see whether it is correctly
written, because a variable's name is no longer
necessarily indicative of its type.
FORTRAN IV uses the same control statements as
previous FORTRANS. These (the loop-control DO;
the unconditional, assigned, or computed GO TO;
and the IF test statements) are all based on "statement numbers, "which are arbitrary numbers
attached to some statements by the programmer.
The DO statement, for instance, reads:

Initialization of the object program can be done
by means of the new FORTRAN IV statement
"DATA." Its form is similar to an input statement, including list of names of variables or
arrays. Each list of names is followed, however,
by a list of literal values which are to be use.d to
initialize the named variables. A similar
facility, BLOCK DATA, is used to initialize the
COMMON areas, whose functions are described
below.

DO n I = m l , m2' m3
This indicates a loop from the DO statement through
statement n. The loop is to be done first with the
index variable I at ml' and it ends when I has
reached the value m2' I is to be incremented each
time round the loop by m3. FORTRAN IV maintains
the old rule that neither values of the index variable,
I, nor those of the indexing parameters, ml' m2'
and m3, may be amended by the program within the
loop itself. This represents a major discrepancy
between the ALGOL and FORTRAN languages.

FORTRAN programs need not be self-contained
and, in fact, usually are not. A FORTRAN
program usually consists of a main program and
a number of sub-programs. The sub-programs
can be compiled independently or called from the
FORTRAN library. Data values can be interchanged as needed between the main program and
its sub-programs.

The handling of input-output also sharply divides
FORTRAN from ALGOL. ALGOL has no inputoutput procedures in its language. It assumes that
each implementor will specify his own procedures
in his own way. FORTRAN IV has well-defined
procedures for handling input-output at object time,
and also for initializing the values of variables at
compile time.

There are four types of subroutines in FORTRAN
IV: "built-in" functions (such as MAX (X, Y, Z»,
which cause insertion of open subroutines into
the object program; arithmetic statement functions
(such as FIRST (ALPHA», which reference a
single user-defined statement such as FIRST
(X) = A*(X + B); and, for the case where more
than a Single statement is needed to define the
relationship, the FUNCTION and SUBROUTINE
sub-programs. Typical examples of the latter
two types include the SIN, COS, and ATAN
mathematical subroutines (which are FUNCTION
sub-programs) and DVCHK, a SUBROUTINE subprogram that checks the state of the divide-check
indicator on the 7090/7094. The distmctions.
between the FUNCTION and SUBROUTINE subprograms are that the SUBROUTINE sub-programs
must be CALLed by a separate statement and

The general input-output statements are READ
from or WRITE on a particular logical unit. The
FORTRAN II instructions READ TAPE and WRITE
TAPE have vanished, but the other hardwareoriented phrases PUNCH, PRINT, BACKSPACE, etc.,
are still used. One logical record consisting of one
or more physical blocks is read or written by each
input-output statement, The use of logical numbers
to specify input-output devices allows considerable
freedom as to configuration and makes FORTRAN IV
object programs easily compatible with many
operating systems, such as the IBJOB Monitor for
the IBM 7090/7094.
9/63

Description (Contd.)

fA.

AUERBACH
®

408: 162.1401

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV
§

162

. 14

.14
Description (Contd.)
cannot be used in the middle of an arithmetic
expression, and that they may return more
than one value after being executed. The
standard "build -in" functions and mathematical
subroutines are listed in Paragraph. 41l.
Dumping sub-programs, DUMP, and PDUMP, are
used to provide help in program testing.
COMMON facilities provide for the sharing of data
values between a program and its sub-programs.
A COMMON area in storage is an area which can
be used by two or more independent program
entities. Any data in this area can be acces s ed
from either program, provided the program knows
the position of the data within the COMMON area
This position is governed by strict rules (which
differ from those of FORTRAN II). FORTRAN IV
allows the use of Blank and Labeled blocks of
COMMON storage, which further simplifies the
programmer's task. (FORTRAN II had only one
COMMON area. )

.141

Description (Contd.)
To summarize, FORTRAN IV is a major step forward in that it has made the FORTRAN language
conveniently usable for various arithmetic modes,
and no longer restricted to being primarily for
single-precision floating point variables. The
language is relatively easy to learn and use,
particularly for persons already familiar with
FORTRAN II. The present 7090/7094 translator
has a number of restrictions which are unnecessary
in the language itself (e.g., restriction to three
subscripts and inability to use mixed arithmetic
freely). Like its predecessors, FORTRAN IV
provides no control over the blocking of logical
records on magnetic tape or the manner in which
a computer's capabilities for simultaneous operations
are utilized. No straightforward facilities are
provided for manipulation of individual alphameric
characters. Despite these limitations, FORTRAN IV
represents an obvious improvement over FORTRAN
II, which is currently the most popular process
oriented language for scientific applications. As
such, FORTRAN IV will undoubtedly be a widely
implemented and extensively used language.

Differences Between FORTRAN II and FORTRAN IV
The language differences between IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV and IBM 709/7090 FORTRAN II (Section 408:161)
can be summarized as follows:
(1)

The FREQUENCY, READ DRUM, and WRITE DRUM statements are available in FORTRAN II
but not in FORTRAN IV.

(2)

The DATA, BLOCK DATA, and Type statements of FORTRAN IV are not available in
FORTRAN II.

(3)

The following FORTRAN II statements must be changed to the corresponding FORTRAN
statements.
FOR TRAN II Statement

FORTRAN IV Statement

IF ACCUMULATOR OVERFLOW nl' n2
IF QUOTIENT OVERFLOW n 1 , n2
IF DIVIDE CHECK n l , n2
IF (SENSE SWITCH i) nl' n2
SENSE LIGHT i
IF (SENSE LIGHT i) n l' n2
READ TAPE i, list
READ INPUT TAPE i, n list
WRITE TAPE i, list
WRITE OUTPUT TAPE i, n, list

CALL OVERFL (j)
CALL OVERFL (j)
CALL DVCHK (j)
CALL SWITCH (i, j)
CALL SLITE (i)
CALL SLITET (i, j)
READ (i) list
READ (i, n) list
WRITE (i) list
WRITE (i, n) list

~V

(4)

The DOUBLE PRECISION, COMPLEX, and EXTERNAL Type statements of FORTRAN IV
replace the FORTRAN II column 1 modal punches D, I, and F, respectively.

(5)

There is no direct FORTRAN IV counterpart for the 36-bit Boolean capability (designated
by the B modal punch) of FORTRAN II.

(6)

The LOGICAL (true-false) capabilities of FORTRAN IV are not provided in FORTRAN II.

(7)

Function naming is more straightforward in FORTRAN IV.

© 1963

Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.

9/~.?

408: 162.141

IBM 7090

Iil 162

.141 Differences Between FORTRAN II and FORTRAN IV (Contd. )

• 142

(8)

Implicit multiplication is not permitted in FORTRAN IV; in FORTRAN II, it occurs as a
result of the combinations C(e), (e)C, and (e)V; where C is a constant, V is a variable,
and e is any arithmetic expression

(9)

The FORTRAN IV EQUIVALENCE statement cannot affect the ordering of the COMMON
storage area or create a gap in it.

(10)

The FORTRAN IV COMMON statement may specify array dimensions. (Arrays whose
dimensions are specified in COMMON statements cannot be included in DIMENSION
statements. )

(11)

Type REAL variables can be combined in an arithmetic expression with either DOUBLE
PRECISION or COMPLEX variables (but not both) in FORTRAN IV.

(12)

Integer constants and variables which are not used as suh;cripts or DO loop indices may
be as large as 235 _1 in FORTRAN IV, versus a maximum of 217 -1 in FORTRAN II .

Source Program Statements
Statement

Normal Sequencing

Comment

a=b

next executable statement

ASSIGN i TO n

next executable statement

BACKSPACE i
BLOCK DATA

next executable statement
not executed

CALL Name
(aI' a2' •.. , ao)
COMMON a, b, ••.

first statement of subroutine
Name
not executed

COMPLEX a, b •••

not executed

CONTINUE
DATA
DIMENSION vI> v2' v3 •••

next executable statement
not executed
not executed

DO ni= m 1, m 2 , or
DO n i= m 1, m 2 , mg

DO-sequencing, then next
executable statement

DOUBLE PRECISION
a, b,
END

not executed

arithmetic statement; value of
expression b replaces variable a.
i is n 1, n2' etc., in an assigned GO
TO statement.
iis a symbolic tape unit number
heads a special subprogram which
loads data into a COMMON area
during compilation.
Name is the subroutine label and ~
are arguments.
a, b are names of data storage areas
shared by programs.
specifies that a and b are complex
variables or functions.
dummy statement.
loads data values at compile time.
v 1 are array labels with their
maximum subscript values.
perform following statements through
statement n with i starting at m l'
increased by mg (or 1) each time
until i is greater than m2'
a and b are double precision floating
point variables or functions.

END FILE i
EQUIVALENCE (a, b, c, .•• ),
(d, e, f, •.• ), ••.

9/63

no sequencing; this statement
terminates a program.
next executable statement
not executed

EXTERNAL a, b •••

not executed

FORMAT (Specification)

not executed

A

AUERBACH
®

write end-of-file mark on tape i.
variable names within parentheses
are assigned to the same storage
locations.
a and b are sub-program names that
are arguments of other sub-programs.
specifies conversion and external
format of each item in an inputoutput list.

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV

408: 162.142

!I 162

. 142

Source Program Statements (Contd.)
Statement

Normal Sequencing

Comment

FUNCTION Name
(aI, a2 ... , au)

next executable statement

GOTOn
GO TO n, (n l , n 2
•.. , n m )
GO TO (nl' n2' •.. n m ),

statement n
statement last assigned to n

IF (a) nl' n2' n3

INTEGER a, b, ...

statement n 1, n2' or n3
if (a) < 0, (a) = 0,
or (a) > 0, respectively
statement sift is true; next
executable statement if tis
false
not executed

first statem ent of a function subprogram; ai are the formal
parameters.
branch to statement n.
assigned branch, or switch, set by
ASSIGN statement.
branch to statement ni' where i is an
integer variable.
a is an arithmetic expression.

PAUSE OR PAUSE n

next executable statement

PRINT n, List

next executable statement

PUNCH n, List

next executable statement

READ n, List

next executable statement

READ (i) List

next executable statement

READ (i, n) List

next executable statement

REAL a, b,

not executed

RETURN

the statement or part of a
statement following the
reference to this subprogram
next executable statement
terminates program
next executable statement

IF (t) s

REWIND i
STOP
SUBROUTINE Name
(aI' a 2 , ... ~)
WRITE (i, n) List

WRITE (i) List

statement ni

next executable statement

next executable statement

© 1963

Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.

t is a logical expression; s is any
executable statement except DO or
another IF (t) s.
a and b are integer variables or
functions.
halt with restart provision and
optional octal display of n.
print on-line; n is format,
List contains variable names.
punch on-line; n is format,
List contains variable names.
read cards on-line; n is format,
List contains variable names.
read binary magnetic tape; i is unit,
List contains variable names.
read BCD magnetic tape; i is unit,
n is format, List contains variable
names.
a and b are single-precision floating
point variables or functions.
used at least once in each function or
subroutine.
rewind tape unit i.
returns control to the Monitor.
first statement in a subroutine; ~
are the formal parameters.
write BCD magnetic tape; i is unit,
n is forma,t, List contains variable
names.
write binary magnetic tape; i is unit,
List contains variable names.

9/63

IBM 7090

408: 162.200
§ 162

.23

Item: . . . . . . • . . .

.2

PROGRAM STRUCTURE

.21

Divisions: . . . . . . . . . one division, composed of
the following types of statements.
Procedure statements: . . . . . . .. algebraic formulae.
comparisons and jumps.
input and output.
Data statements: .. . FORMAT: describes the
layout, size, scaling, and
code of input-output data.
EQUIVALENCE: causes two
variables to have a common
location or specifies
synonyms.
COMMON: causes data storage areas to be shared by
more than one subprogram.
DIMENSION: specifies the
maximum number of
elements in each dimension
of an array or set of arrays.
TYPE: specifies mode of a
list of variables; INTEGER,
REAL, LOGICAL.
DATA: assigns constant values
to variables at compile
time.
EXTERNAL: specifies names
of subprograms that are
arguments of other subprograms.

.22

Data Entities (Contd. )

Alphameric item: ..

Hollerith item: . . ..

.24

Names

.241 Simple name formation
Alphabet: . . . • . ..
Size: • . . . . . . . .
Avoid key words: "
Formation rule: ..
• 242 Designators
Procedures
Statement label:

Procedure Entities
Program:

composed of statements, subroutines, and functions.
Subroutine: . • . . . . . . composed of statements.
Function: . . . . . . . . composed of statements.
Statement: . . . . . . . . composed of characters;
blanks are ignored except
when part of alphameric
literals.

Function label: ..

Data Entities
Array: . . . . . . . . .

9/63

A to Z, 0 to 9.
1 to 6 characters.
yes.
first character must be a
letter.

unsigned integer below
32768.
governed by the rules of the
resulting variables.
no designator.
in a TYPE statement)
initial I, J, K, L, M, N.

Subroutine label:.
Data (if not specified
Integer variable:.
Floating point
variable: ... ',' any other initial letter.
Equipment
Punched card
(on-line): . . • .. statements "READ n, list"
and "PUNCH n, list."
Printer (on-line):. statement "Print n, list."
Magnetic tape
(BCD mode): ... statements "READ (i, n)
list" and ''WRITE (i, n)list."
Magnetic tape
(binary mode):
statements "READ (i) list" and
''WRITE (i) list. "
Comments: . . . . . . . C in column 1 of statement.
Translator control: .. key words EQUIVALENCE,
COMMON, EXTERNAL.

Note: The general term "sub-program" is applied
to each independent subroutine, function,
or segment of a program.
.23

an INTEGER variable or
constant.
a REAL (Single-precision
floating point) variable or
constant.
a DOUBLE PRECISION
floating point variable or
constant.
a COMPLEX variable or
constant.
a LOGICAL (Boolean)
variable or constant.
a string of up to 6 alphameric
characters that is given a
variable name (of any type)
and hence can be proces;ed
and/or modified.
an un-named string of up to
132 alphameric characters
contained in a FORMAT
statement; it can be supplied
either as a literal or as
input data, and can be used
only for output.

a group of related variables
of anyone of the following
types; each array element
is referenced by the array
name followed by 1, 2, or
3 subscripts.

A

AUERBACH
ill>

408: 162.250

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV
§

162

.25

Form may be
Integer only:
Signed: . . . . . . . .
Truncated
fraction: . . . . . .
Rounded fraction:
• 253 Synonyms
Preset: . . . . . . . . .

.33

Records and Blocks

by own coding; no direct
language facilities for file
labeling or handling of
multi-reel files •

none .
0 to 3.
all variables.

.331 Variable record size:
.332 Variable block size: .

no.
only integer variables.
yes; except Hollerith.
at most C * N ± C', where
C and C' are unsigned
integer literals and N is
an unsigned integer
variable.
yes.
no.
yes.
no.

EQUIVALENCE statement
causes sharing of storage
locations.
Dynamically set: . . . no.

Region of Meaning of Names

.3

DATA DESCRIPTION FACILITIES

• 31

Methods of Direct Data Description

• 311
.312
.313
. 314
• 315

Concise item picture:
List by kind: . . . . . .
Qualify by adjective:
Qualify by phrase: ..
Qualify by code: ...

. 333 Record size range: ..
.334 Block size range
Magnetic tape
(BCD mode):
MagnetiC tape
(binary mode): ...
Punched cards
(on-line): . . . . . .
Punched cards
(off-line): . . . . . .
Printer (on-line): ..
.335 Choice of record
size: . . . . • . . . • .
.336 Choice of block size:

. 337 In-out error control:
. 339 Blocking control: ...

In the straightforward use of FORTRAN, each name
is established in a sub-program and is local to that
particular sub-program. A name can be made to
reference the same storage location in 2 or more
sub-programs by specifying the name in the
corresponding position of a COMMON statement in
each sub-program.

• 316
.317
• 31S
.319

Files and Reels:. . ..

Structure of Data Names

. 251 Qualified names: . . . .
. 252 Subscripts
Number per item: ..
Applicable to:
Class may be
Special index
variable: . . . . . .
Any variable: . . . .
Literal: . . . . . . .
Expression: . . . . .

. 27

.32

. FORMAT statement only.
. yes; Type declarations.
no.
. no.
. by first letter of name if not
listed in a Type declaration.
Hierarchy by list: .. . no.
Level by indenting: .. no.
Level by coding: . . . . no.
Others (examples)
Array size (4 by 7): DIMENSION ARRAY (4, 7).
Four-digit integer:
FORMAT (14).
Five four-digit
integers: . . . . . . . FORMA T (514).
Two floating
point items: . . . . . FORMAT (FS.3, ElO.4) for
+99~. 999 and +.9999E+99

© 1963

.34

dynamically variable.
dynamically variable, with
fixed upper limits.
1 to N blocks .

up to maximum line length
of off-line printer.
up to 256 words.
up to 72 characters.
up to SO characters.
up to 120 characters.
implied by input-output list
and FORMAT statement.
none; 1 logical record of 1
or more blocks is read or
written by each inputoutput statement .
automatic.
none; see .• 336 above .

Data Items

.341 Designation of class:.

by TYPE declaration (or
first letter of name).

.342 Possible classes
Integer: . . . . . . . . yes; type INTEGER.
Fixed pOint: . . . . . no.
Floating point
(single- precision):
yes; type REAL.
Floating point
(douiile-precision): yes; type DOUBLE PRECISION.
Complex floating
point: . . . . . . . . yes; type COMPLEX.
Alphameric: . . . . . yes; any type.
Boolean: . . . . . . . yes; type LOGICAL •
.343 Choice of external
radix: . . . . . . . .. FORMAT statement.
.344 Possible external radices
Decimal: . . . • . .. yes.
Octal: . . . . . • . .. yes.
.345 Internal justification: alpha automatic left justified.
integers automatic right
justified.
.346 Choice of external
code:. . • . . . . . .. FORMAT statement and
READ, WRITE statement.
.347 Possible external codes
Decimal: . . . • . •. yes.
Octal: . . . . . • . .. yes.
Hollerith: . . . • . .. yes.
Alphameric: . . . .. yes.

Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.

9/63

IBM 7090

408:162.348
§ 162

• 348 Internal item size
Variable size: ..•.
Designation: . . . • .
Range:
Type INTEGER: .
Type REAL: •...
Type DOUBLE
PRECISION: ...
Type COMPLEX: •
Type BOOLEAN: .

Alphameric: ... .
. 349 Sign provision: ... .
. 35

.411 Operator List
Arithmetic
+ .......•...
no; sizes are fixed.
none.

*
.......... .
** .......... .
/

1 word.
1 word.
2 words.
2 words; I-word real part
and I-word imaginary part.
1 word; can only assume the
values. TRUE. and
. FALSE ..
1 word of up to 6 characters.
optional .

Logical
AND ...•••..•
Inclusive OR: .. .
Exclusive OR: .. .
NOT: • . • . . . . .
Relational
Equal: . . . . . . . .
Not Equal: .•...
Greater than: ..•
Less than: . . . . .
Greater than
or equal: . . . . .
Less than or
equal: . . . . . . .

Data Values

. 351 Constants
Possible sizes
Type INTEGER:
Type REAL: ....

235 - 1.
10- 38 to 10+38 (8-digit

precision).
Type DOUBLE
PRECISION: •..
Type COMPLEX: .
Type LOGICAL:
Hollerith:. • . • . .
Sublcriptible: ...•
Sign provision: ..•
• 352 Literals: . • . . . . . .
.353 Figuratives: . . . . . .
. 354 Conditional variables:

. 36

10- 38 to 10+38 (16-digit

• 362 Re-definition:. . • ..
.363 Table description
Subscription:. • • . .
Multi-subscripts: ..
.364 Other subscriptible
entities: . . . . . • . .

yes; by multiple references to
a single FORMAT statement.
COMMON, EQUIVALENCE
statements.
mandatory, in DIMENSION
statement.
I to 3.
magnetic tape units.

.4

OPERATION REPERTOIRE

• 41

Formulae

9/63

.AND •.
.OR •.
none .
. NOT •.

.EQ •.
• NE .•
. GT .•
• LT ..
.GE ..
.LE •.

Functions ("built-in;" use open subroutines)
ABS (A) . . • • . .. absolute value; real argument
and function.
lABS (A)
absolute value; integer
argument and function.
AINT (A)
truncate; reduce to integer
value; real argument and
function.
INT (A) . . . . . •. truncate; reduce to integer
value; real argument and
integer function.
AMOD (A, B) . . .. remainder A + B; real
argument and function.
MOD (A, B) . . . .. remainder A + B; integer
argument and function .
AMAXO (A, ... )
maximum value; integer
argument and real function.
AMAXI (A, ••. )
maximum value; real
argument and function.
MAXO (A, ..• )
maximum value; integer
argument and function .
MAXI (A, .•• )
maximum value; real
argument and integer
function.
AMINO (A, ••• ) .• minimum value; integer
argument and real function.
AMINI (A, ••• ) .. minimum value; real
argument and function.
MINO (A, ••• )
minimum value; integer
argument and flinction.
MIN I (A, ... )
minimum value; real
argument and integer
function.
FLOAT (A) •... float an integer .

precision).
each part same as type
REAL.
• TRUE. or. FALSE. only.
up to 132 characters.
yes.
optional.
same as Constants •
by own coding; e.g.,
TEN = 10.0.
computed GO TO statement .

Special Description Facilities

.361 Duplicate format: ..

addition, also unary.
subtraction, also unary.
multiplication.
division.
exponentiation.
replacement; replace value
of variable on left side
with value of expression
on right side.

A

AUERBACH
®

408: 162.411

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV

13 162

.411 Operator List (Contd. )
Functions ("built-in;" use open subroutines)
IFIX (A) ..

.411 Operator List (Contd.)
Functions (mathematical; use closed subroutines)
CEXP (A). . • . .. complex exponential.
CLOG (A) . . . .. complex logarithm.
CSIN (A) . . . . .. complex sine.
CCOS (A) . . . . . complex cosine.
CSQRT (A). . . .. complex square root.
.412 Operands allowed
Types:. . . . . . . .. usually numeric for arithmetic
operations, but alphameric
is possibl e.
Mixed scaling: ..
yes.
Mixed types:. . . .
generally no; see
Description (Paragraph. 12)
for exceptions.
Mixed radices: . .. no.
Literals: . . . . . .. yes.
.413 Statement structure
Parentheses
a - b - c means: . (a - b) - c.
a + b x c means: . a + (b x c).
albic means: .. . (a+ b)+ c.
abC means: . . . . . not permitted; parentheses
must be used.
Size limit:
1,320 characters (up to 20
cards of 66 characters
each).
Multi-results: .•.. no .
. 414 Rounding of results: . truncation of integers after
each step in an expression.
.415 Special cases
x = -x: . . . . . . . . X= -X.
x = x + 1: . . . . . . . X= X+ 1.0.
x = 4.7 y: ..... . X=4.7*Y.
x = 5 x 107 + y2: .. X=5.E7+Y**2.
x = integer part
X = AINT (Y).
ofy: • . . . . . . . .
X = (-B + SQRT(B*B - 4.0*A*
.416 Typical examples: ..
C»/(2. 0* A).

convert a real variable to
an integer.
SIGN (A, B) .
transfer sign of A to B; real
argument and function.
ISIGN (A, B)
transfer sign of A to B;
integer argument and
function.
DIM (A, B) . . . .. diminish A by A or B, whichever is smaller; real
argument and function.
!DIM (A, B). . . •. diminish A by A or B, whichever is smaller; integer
argument and function.
SNGL (A) . . . • .. convert double-precision
variable to type real.
REAL (A) ...•. obtain real part of a complex
argument.
AIMAG (A) . . . .. obtain imaginary part of a
complex argument.
DABS (A) . . . . .. ahlolute value; doubleprecision argument and
function.
!DINT (A) . . . . . truncate double-precision
argument to an integer.
DMAXI (A, ... ) . maximum value; doubleprecision argument and
function.
DMINI (A, ... ) .. minimum value; doubleprecision argument and
function.
DSIGN (A, B) . . . . transfer sign of A to B;
double-precision.
DBLE (A) . . . . . . convert type real argument
to double-precision form.
CMPLX (A, B) .. convert 2 real arguments to
1 complex number.
. 42
CONJG (A) . . . . . obtain conjugate of a complex
argument.
.43
Functions (mathematical; use closed subroutines)
EXP (A) . . . . . . rea~ exponential.
.44
ALOG (A) .•... real natural logarithm.
ALOGlO (A) . . .. real common logarithm.
.441
ATAN (A). . . . .. real arctangent.
.442
SIN (A) . . .
real sine.
.443
COS (A) . . .
real cosine.
.444
real hyperbolic tangent.
TANH (A). .
.445
SQRT (A) . .
square root.
DMOD (A, B) . . .. double-precision remainder.
DEXP (A) . • . . .. double-precision exponential.
DLOG (A) . . . . . double-precision natural
logarithm.
DLOGI0 (A) . . .. doublerprecision common
logarithm ..
DATAN (A) .•... double-precision arctangent.
DSIN (A) . . . . . . double-precision sine.
DCOS (A) ....•• double-precision cosine.
DSQRT (A) . . . . . double-precision square root.
CABS (A) . . . . . . complex ahlolute value.

© 1963

Operations on Arrays:

by own FORTRAN coding
only.

Other Computation:

see table of Source Program
Statements, Paragraph. 142.

Data Movement and Format
Data copy example: .
Levels possible: . .
Multiple results: .
Missing operands:
Size of operands
Alignment rule
Numbers: . . . . . .
Alpha: . . . . . . .
Filler rule
Numbers: . . . . . .
Alpha: • • . . . . . .
Truncating rule
Numbers: . . . . . .
Alpha: ..•• , .•..
Variable size
destination: ...

Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.

Y =X.

items.
none.
not possible.

right justified or normalized.
left justified.
zeros.
blanks.
truncate at left for integers,
right for floating.
truncate at right.
no.
9/63

408: 162.446

IBM 7090
• 52

!i 162

· 446 Editing possible
Change class: . . . .
Change radix: . . ..
Insert editing symbols
Actual point:. . ..
Suppress zeros: ..
Insert: . . • . . . ..
Float: . • . . . • •.
• 447 Special moves: .••.
.448 Code translation: . .•
· 449 Character
manipulation: . . ..
• 45

Search on key: . . ..
Rewind: . . . . . . . .•
Unload: . . . . . • . •.
. 46

automatic.
automatic.
automatic point.
minus sign only.
none.
automatic.

. 464 Accept option:

none.

own coding.
own coding.
READ or WRITij.
BACKSPACE.
none.
none.
own coding.
implied in each input-output
statement.
none.
REWIND.
none.

PRINT uses on-line printer.
same as log.
PAUSE with 5-digit octal
display in Storage Register.
PRINT message.
SSWITCH subroutine tests
sense switch settings.

.525 Compound Conditionals
IF x AND y: . . . ••
IF x OR y:
IF x DO a ANDy
DO b: . . • . . • ••
IF x DO a OR y
DO b: ..•••.••
. 526 Alternative designator:
.527 Condition on
alternative: •....
· 528 Typical examples: •.

Object Program Errors
Error

Discovery

Special Actions

Overflow:

by OVERFL
subroutine

set designated
integer variable
to lor 2.
?

In-out:
Invalid data:

automatic
automatic

?

.5

PROCEDURE SEQUENCE CONTROL

.51

Jumps

• 511 Destinations allowed: .
.512 Unconditional jump: .

. 513 Switch: . . . . . . . . .
. 514 Setting a switch: '"
. 515 Switch on data: . . . .
9/63

· 523 Conditional relations
Equal: . . . . . . . . .
Not equal: . . . . . .
Greater than: ... .
Less than: . • . . . . .
Greater than or
equal: ..•.•...
Less than or equal:
.524 Variable conditions:

Operating Communication

. 461 Log of progress: . . . .
· 462 Messages to operator:
· 463 Offer options: ...•.

.47

· 521 Designators
Condition:
Procedure: . . . . . .
• 522 Simple conditions: ..

yes.
yes.

File Manipulation
Open: . . . . • . . . . .
Close: . . . • . . . . . .
Advance to next
record: . . . . . • . .
Step back a record:
Set restart point: . • .
Restart: . . . . . . . . .
Start new reel: . . . .
Start new block: ...

Conditional Procedures

numbered statements .
GO TO n, where n is a
statement number below
32768.
GO TO M, (35, 47, 18).
ASSIGN 35 to M .
GO TO (35, 47, 18), 1.

· 53

A

• EQ •.
• NE ..
• GT ••
• LT ..
.GE ..
.LE ••
less than, equal to, or
greater than zero for
arithmetic expressions.
true or false for logical
expressions.
yes.
yes.
no.
no .
none •
no .
IF (X**2.0-3.0) 29, 37,18:
go to 29, 37, or 18 if X2-3
is respectively less than,
equal to, or greater than
zero •
IF «(A *B). GT. C). AND.
(D. EQ. E» GO TO 7: go to
7 if the expression is true
and to the next statement
if false.

Subroutines

· 531 Designation
Single statement: . •
Set of statements
First: . . . . • . . .
Last: . . . . . . . .
• 532 Possible subroutines:.
.533 Use in-line in
program: . . . • . ..
· 534 Mechanism
Cue with parameters:
Number of
parameters:
Cue without
parameters:
Formal return: ...
Alternative return:

AUERBACH
®

IF.
implied.
arithmetic expression is
tested for less than, equal
to, or greater than zero.
logical expression is tested
for true or false •

not possible.
SUBROOTINE.
END.
any number of statements •
no.
CALL XXX (X, Y, Z).
?

CALL XXX.
RETURN.
additional RETURN statements.

PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV
§ 162

.56

.535 Names
Parameter call by
value*: . . . . . . .
Parameter call by
name*: . . . . . . .
Non-local names: ..
Local names: . . . . .
Preserved own
variables: . . . . . .

.536 Nesting limit: . . . . .
. 537 Automatic recursion
allowed: . . . . . . ..

yes.
no.
use COMMON.
all.
all.

• 562 Control by count: ...
· 563 Control by step
Parameter: . . . . . .
Step: . . . . . . . .
Criteria: . . . . . . .
Multiple
parameters: . . . .
.564 Control by condition:
· 565 Control by list: ... .
· 566 Nesting limit: .. .
.567 Jump out allowed: ..
· 568 Control variable
exit status: . . . . . .
•6

EXTENSION OF
THE LANGUAGE: .

none;
current place to numbered
end; e.g., DO 173 1=
1,N,2.
indirect.
integer only.
positive integer.
greater than.
require nested loops.
no.
no.
?
yes.
available.

new functions can be added
to the library.

•7

LIBRARY FACILITIES

.71

Identity: . . . . . . . .

IBLIB library .

· 72

Kinds of Libraries:

expandable master.

.73

Storage Form: . . . .

magnetic tape.

.74

Varieties of Contents:

FORTRAN mathematical,
input-output, and system
subroutines.

• 75

Mechanism

?

no.

Function Definition by Procedure

· 541 Designation
Single statement: ..

Set of statements
First: . . . . . . .
Last: . . . . . . .
• 542 Level of procedure:
• 543 Mechanism
Cue: . . . . . . . . .

*

'~rithmetic

statement
functions," which apply
only within ~e program
containing the function
definition; e.g., FIRST
(X) = A+X**B.

.751 Insertion of new item:

special run, using control
card parameters.
.752 Language of new item: MAP (Macro Assembly
Program).
.753 Method of call: . . .. automatic.

.
.
.

FUNCTION.
END.
any number of statements.

.

use of function name in an
expression.
RETURN.

• 76

yes.

.761 Open routines exist:
· 762 Closed routines exist:
.763 Open-closed is
variable: . . . . . . .

Formal return: . ..
• 544 Names
Parameter call
by value*: . . . . .
Parameter call
by name*: . . . . .
Non-local names: ..
Local names:. . . ..
Preserved own
variables:. . . . ..

• 55

Loop Control

.561 Designation of loop
Single procedure:
First and last
procedures:

* "Call by value" and "call by name" are ALGOL
terms describing two methods of supplying parameters to a subroutine or function. The difference
between the two methods is in the way the parameters are used by the subroutine, not in the
method a programmer uses to specify them. Call
by value is a restricted form, and indicates that
the parameter, which may be an expression, is
evaluated before the subroutine is entered and
that this value is then 'plugged' into the subroutine.
The call by name, the unrestricted form which is
correspondingly more difficult to implement,
indicates that the called vlilriable or expression
must be re-evaluated each time it is used in the
subroutine.

· 54

408: 162.535

no.
use COMMON.
all.
all.

See footnote to Paragraph. 535.

Operand Definition by
Procedure: . . . . ..

Types of Routine

TRANSLATOR CONTROL

· 81

Transfer to Another
Language: . . . . . .

no explicit facilities.

Optimizing Information Statements

.821 Process usage
statements: . . . . ..

© J963

no.

.8

· ?2

none.

yes; 31 "built-in" functions .
yes.

Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.

none.
9/63

408: 162.822

IBM 7090

II 162

• 822 Data usage
statements: . . . . . .
.83

• 84

Translator
Environment:

COMMON, EQUIVALENCE.

Address Allocation: .

.93

Arrangement of-Items
in Words in Unpacked
Form: ., ... " .
standard; no control is
provided .

• 94

Assignment of InputOutput Devices: ..

implicit.

Target Computer
Environment:. . . .. none.

.85

Program Documentation
Control: . . . . . . .• none.

•9

TARGET COMPUTER ALLOCATION CONTROL

• 91

Choice of Storage
Level: , . . . . . . .

.95
none.

A

AUERBACH

9/63

nome •

• 92

®

InpJ.!t-Output Areas: .

symbolic references are
used for magnetic tape
units •
built into input-output
routines; no control is
provided,

408: 171.100
IBM 7090
Machine Oriented Language
FAP
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FAP

§

" 14

17i.

.1

GENERAL

,.11

Identity: .

FORTRAN Assembly
Program (FAP).

. 12

Origin: . • .

mM.

. 13

Reference: •

mM form

.14

Description

ious ways by various control routines. It is common
in scientific programming to develop libraries of
special purpose subroutines in this manner.
The FAP update feature is used primarily to modify
source and/or object programs that are on a library
tape. It can modify a large program by entering only
the modifications or references to other existing subroutines. The update feature also permits routines
from several tapes to be combined on one output tape
and to be assembled as one program, which is especially useful in those installations using special purpose libraries such as those described above.

C28-6235.

FAP is a two-pass, hatched job assembly system
normally operated under control of the FORTRAN
monitor. The Source language includes all of the
IBM 704, 709, 7090, and 7094 instructions expressed
as mnemonics. However, the translator is onlyoperational on the 709, 7090, and 7094. The FAP features include provisions for macro definition procedures, a reference to a defined system label list, the
ability to define new operation codes, and a set of
pseudo operations for linking subroutines generated
either by FAP or FORTRAN.
The source statements for the assembler consist of
card data, or tape records containing the equivalent
BCD information. The usual record format presents
the location label (where present) a three-letter operation code and a variable field length whose contents are dictated by the operation code. Comments
or sequence indication can also be printed. The
system output is a binary card deck which can be absolute or relocatable. It can be generated either onor off-line. In addition, a program listing in source
and octal objett language is available. The listing
contains indications for assembly-detected, anomalies (such as labels with multiply definitions, tag
miSSing, or improper sequencing) and optionally, a
list of defined labels with their assigned locations
and the locations of instructions referring to each
label.
The new operation definition feature permits a name
to be assigned a binary operation code and a set of
characteristics, such as requiring an address, an
index register tag, or permitting indirect addressing. This feature allows any special instruction
features to be included in FAP and permits assembly
of programs for computers other than those n..;,rma.lli
normally using FAP-generated routines.
The subroutine linkage feature provides the programmer with an option of combining two languages
(FORTRAN and FAP) into one program. FORTRAN
permits rapid coding of arithmetic and input-output
routines; FAP can be used where high speed, complex logic, or judicious use of storage is required.
This feature also allows sections of a large program
to be debugged while other sections are still being
coded and allows subroutines to be used in many different programs or to be connected t.ogether in var-

© 1963

Description (Contd. )

The major shortcomings of FAP are its complexity
and its limitations of expressions. The complexity
could be somewhat overcome with more straightforward written procedures. The limitations on expressions arise from two sources. The first of
these is the number of passes. A number of pseudo
operations require that any labels in the variable
field be previously defined, and no preliminary pass
exists to accomplish the function. The relocatable
format is the second source of limitations. For example, if A and B are address labels, A + 5 is an a.ddress, while A - B is a number. The address A + 5
may change as a function of the storage allocation of
other routines in the program, and cannot therefore
be used as a number unless this number is defined
when the program is loaded. The system loader
does not have this capability. Similarly, using A - B
as an address will not be meaningful, since it is not
a fixed location in the routine; in fact, relocation
may cause it to be located outside of the routine.
• 15

Publication Date:. . .• 1962.

.2

LANGUAGE FORMAT

.22

* for

system control record
or comments; may also be
part of location field.
Location: • . . . • . • . usually blank - can contain
alphameric string which
is the symbolic location of
the instruction; the equivalent of the contents of the
address field (see EQU,
SYN, BOOL under pseudos
• 82); the name of a macro
instruction; the first loca..
tion following a BES; or the
first location affected by a
BSS, VFD, BCI, etc.
Operation: . . • . . • • contains symbolic operation
code (followed by * if indirectly addresse~)
followed by blankS.

*: . . . .

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated

3/63

408:171.220
§ 171.

· 22

Legend (Contd. )
Address, Tag,
Decrement/Count:

Comments: . • • . . . .

Identification: . . . . .

• 23

Corrections:......

• 231 Insertions:. • . . . . .

. 232 Deletions: . . . . . . .

3/63

IBM 7090

.232 Alterations: . . . • • . any card in the input set
with serialization in columns 73-80 that exactly
matches a serialization on
the input symbolic tape
by convention, this field is
will replace that symbolic
started in column 16; howtape record.
ever, only one blank column need be left between
• 24 Special Conventions
the op code and this field.
.241 Compound addresses:
The field normally is a
none.
. 242 Multi-addresses:
separated by commas .
function of the operation.
Some typical field contents • 243 Literals:. . .
yes, may be decimal, octal,
and their operations are
or BCD words.
as follows:
• 244 Special coded
after TXH, TIX, TXL,
addresses: . . . . • . this address*.
TNX, TXI, the field
address to be set by the
usually contains adprogram**.
dress, comma, tag,
.245 Algebraic address forms - addresses are computed
comma, and decrement.
mod 235 and taken mod 215.
after shifting operations,
multiply X by Y.
X * Y:
the field usually conX/Y: .
divide X by Y.
X +Y:
tains a decimal number
add X and Y.
of shift places and may
X - Y:
subtract Y from X.
also contain a tag.
X/Y * Z:
divide X by Y and multiply
after BCD or BCI the
the integer part of the refield contains a word
sult by Z •
count, a comma, and
. 246 Boolean addresses - variable field of a BOOL pseudo
op, a VFD pseudo op, or a type D instruction (SIL,
alphameric information.
after OCT or DEC; a
SIR, RIL, IlL, RIR, IlR, LNT, RNT, LFT, RFT).
string of numbers sepA + B: •
A inclusive OR B.
arated by commas.
A - B: .
A exclusive OR B.
A * B: .
A and B.
Exponents, locations of
binary points, etc.,
/A: •
one's complement of A.
A/B: .
A */ B.
are optional (see • 82).
after some input-output
instructions, tape numbers, access and mod- .3
LABELS
ule, track, record,
.31 General
etc.
after SIR, SIL, IlL, HR,
etc., a mask or data
• 311 Maximum number of labels
Locations (including
field follows.
variables): . . • . . approximately 10,000.
this field is normally proConstants (literals):. 1,000.
ceeded by a blank and may
Defined operations or
be used for explanations
macros:. . . . . . . approximately 400.
of the coding.
this field is used for identi- .312 Common label formation
fication and sequence
rule: • . . . . .
no .
. 313 Reserved labels:. . . . locations within the system
numbers. The assembly
storage may be activated
program will detect and
by an SST instruction.
note cards out of sequence.
These locations are either
in the FORTRAN 'monitor
under system control, a set
or in IBSFAP (IBSYS monof records can be merged
itor). FAP is available
with an existing symbolic
with either of these
tape.
systems.
cards in the input set are
· 315 Designators
decimal literal.
inserted in an order de- ...
octal literal.
termined by columns 73=0: . . • •
BCD literal.
80.
=H: • . • .
pseudo DEC.
a DELETE pseudo op may
Decimal data:
pseudo OCT.
be used to avoid copying
Octal data: . •
binary coded decimal.
portions of the symbolic
Pseudo BCD, BCI:
tape.
yes.
.316 Synonyms permitted:

408: 171.320

MACHINE ORIENTEP LANGUAGE: FAP

§

171.

· 32

Universal Labels

· 321 Labels for procedures
Existence: . . .
Formation rule
First character:
Last character: .
Others: . . .
Number of
characters:

· 322

· 323

· 324
· 325
• 326

· 327

. 33

optional unless referred to
by another procedure.
A - Z, 0 - 9,
,( , ).
A - Z, 0 - 9, • , (, ).
A - Z, 0 - 9, • , (, ).

1 to 6, one of which is
alphabetic.
Labels for library routines
Existence: . . . .
same as procedure.
Formation rule
First character:
$.
Others: . . .
A - Z, 0 - 9, • , (and).
Number of
3 to 7, one of which is
characters:
alphabetic.
Labels for constants
After DEC, OCT,
etc.: . . . . .
same as procedures.
As literals:. . .
in variable field after =.
Formation rule
First character:
Second character:
o if octal.
H if Hollerith.
+, -, 0 through 9 or blank
if decimal.
Last character: . . . field terminates with comrna or blank if octal or
decimal. Terminates
after six characters if
Hollerith.
Others: . . .
see data.
Number of
not defined except for =H.
characters:
none.
Labels for files: .
none.
Labels for records:
usually same as procedure.
Labels for variables:
Exception is variable tape
definition using a TAPE
NO pseudo. The single
variable A - G cannot be
used because of redundant
or conflicting meanings.
Labels for allocated
areas: . . . • . • .
same as procedures.

.4

.DATA

.41

Constants

.411 Maximum size constants
Integer
Decimal:
±2 35 - 1 through +2- 35 , 11
decimal digits.
Octal: . .
:!: 12 octal digits.
Fixed numeric
Decimal:
±2 35 - 1 through +2- 35 , 11
decimal digits.
Octal: . .
±12 octal digits.
Floating numeric
Decimal:
± 1038 through "+ 10- 38, 8
decimal digits.
Alphabetic :
6 characters.
Alphameric:
6 characters.
.412 Maximum size literals
Integer
Decimal:
±2 35 - 1 through +2- 35 , 8
decimal digits.
Octal: .•
± 12 .octal digits.
Fixed numeric
Decimal:
±2 35 - 1 through +2- 35 , 11
decimal digits.
Octal: . .
± 12 octal digits.
Floating numeric
Decimal:
± 1038 through 10- 38, 8
decimal digits.
Alphabetic: •
6 characters.
Alphameric:
6 characters.
.42

Working Areas

. 421 Data layout:
. 422 Data type: . .
. 423 Redefinition:.
.43

Input-Output Areas

.431 Data layout:
.432 Data type:

.5

PROCEDURES

.51

Direct Operation Codes

.511 Mnemonic
Existence:
Number:
Example: .
.512 Absolute:.

Local Labels: . . . . . three levels of tables are
available. Labels for
COMMON pseudos are
universal, labels within a
HEAD region can be made
Number:
Example: .
to apply in that region
Comment:
only. Other labels are
.513 Defined by coding
valid within a given rouExistence:
tine or subroutine and not
Number:
elsewhere. Equivalence
of locations not defined as
Examples:
COMMON may be obtained
Comment:
as part of a CALL pseudo.

© 1963

own coding.
no specification .
by pseudo op .

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

own coding.
no specification.

optional.
approximately 350.
TXL 127, 1, 1.
only as constants or
special pseudo . operations.
all instructions.
OCT 700001100127.
equivalent.
optional.
approximately 400.
JUMP OPSYN TRA.
LOAD OPD 050071160000.
see.82.

3/63

408: 171.520
§

IBM 7090

171.

.52

.544 Annotation (Contd. )
Title phrase: .••

Macro-Codes

first card with '" or $ in
column 1 in first card
group (group of cards preceding first instruction).
Additional line maybe
Itdded by TTL pseudo
operation.

certain pseudo operations,
such as CALL and DUP
cause the.generation of instructions on a 1-to-N
basis. These pseudos are .545 Other
described in Paragraph
Insert new operation
.82.
code or change
The macros defined by the
op~ration code: • . . OPD, OPSYN, OPVFD.
MACRO pseudo operation
Modify output listing: DETAIL, EJECT, INDEX,
will be considered herein.
LBL, LIST, REF, SKP,
The pseudos OPD,
SPACE, SPC, TITLE,
OPSYN, etc., which are in
TTL, PCC, UN LIST.
effect I-word macro deCard format control: . ABS, FUL, TCD, 9LP.
fining were considered in
.513 .. Up to 400 macros
or operations are
permitted.
• 522 Examples: . . . • . . • LOAD MACRO A•
CLA A.
.6
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
LOAD END.
BRANCH MACRO A, B, C, .61 Special Arithmetic:
none •
D, E, F, G.
ST'AB.
.62 Special Functions
TX'C D, 4, E.
F G.
• 621 Facilities: . • .
maybe supplied to library•
BRANCH END.
.622 Method of call: •.
as binary cards or from
FORTRAN monitor.

.521 Number available: .•

..

.53

Interludes

.531 Possible· roles
Modify translator:

Insert or delete portions of symbolic
program: . • . .
.54

Overlay Control:.

redefinition of operations
list with OPSYN, OPD,
OPVFD or MACRO.
redefinition of object languages 704 or 7090 pseudo
operations. Define object
computer.

.64

Data Editing

update feature.

• 642 Format control: •

Translator Control

.541 Method of control
Allocation counter:.
Label adjustment:
Annotation: • . • .
.542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute: •
Set to label:
Step forward:. •
Step backward: •
Reserve area:
.543 Label adjustment
Set labels equal:
Set absolute value: .
Clear label table:
.544 Annotation
Comment phrase:

..

.

3/63

• 63

BES BSS.
SYN EQU.
REM, '" in column 1.
ORG, LOC.
ORG, LOC •
BSS, BES.
not possible.
not possible.

.641 Radix conversion:

Code translation:

DEC - converts to fixed or
floating decimal from binary (=for literals)
OCT - inserts octal information (=0 for literals).
BCI (or =H) input to 6-bit
BCD.
own or library coding.

.65

Input-Output Control:

own or library coding.

.66

Sorting:

..

own or library COding.

.67

Diagnostics:

.7

LIBRARY FACILITIES

.71

Identity:

own coding or monitor subroutines (see FORTRAN).

. ," .. , . , . SHARE supplied.
own coding.
FORTRAN.

EQU, SYN, BOOL.
EQU, SYN, BOOL.
not possible.
.72
follows first blank after
variable field.
follows of< in column one or
REM pseudo.

own coding•

Kinds of Libraries

. 721 Fixed master: • . .
.722 Expandable master:
. 723 Pnvate: ..

......

possible.
possible.
possible •

408: 171. 724

MAQUNE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FAP

§

171.

. 82

.724 Combinations:

.....

using the UPDATE feature,
routines maybe extracted
from several tapes and
used in a given program.
Facilities exist for placing
column binary cards on
tapes or for assembling a
mnnber of routines separately and executing the
result as one program.

.73

Storage Form: • . . • . either card or magnetic
tape.

.74

Varieties of Contents:. not restricted.

• 75

Mechanism

Pseudos (Contd.)
BCD, BCl: . . . .

BES: • . • . • . . . . .

BOOL: • . . . . . . . .

BSS: . . . . . . . • . •
.751 Insertion of new item:. update run.
card to tape on off-line
machine.
special run for system
library.
. 752 Language of new item:. usually FAP or FORTRAN.
• 753 Method of call:. • . • • from system LIDE card.
from library tape UPDATE.
as binary cards - behind
symbolic input.
• 754 Linkage to program:. • CALL pseudo operation.
$ before label in variable
field.
.76

Insertion in Program

.761
.762
• 763
.764

Open routines exist: . .
Closed routines exist:.
Open-closed is optional:
Closed routines appear
once: . . • • . • . • .

CALL: . . . . . . . . .

yes.
yes •
yes.
yes (or "n" times with "n"
UPDATE cards).

·8

MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES

· 81

Macros: . . . • . . . . defined by own coding.

.82

Pseudos
set to assemble for IDM
704.
7090: .
set to assemble for IDM
7090.
9LP: .
adds prefix bits to the first
word of the binary cards
assembled by the system.
The prefix is: 9 left columns 1, 2, and 3 if row
bina,ry, and column one
rows 12, 11, and 0 if column binary.
ABS: • . . . . • . . . . causes output cards to be in
absolute (non - relocatable)
format.

COMMON: • . . • • • .

704: .

©

COUNT: . . • . • . . .

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

used to generate words of
binary in 6-bit code. The
variable field contains the
number of words, comma,
and data.
the variable field defines a
number. This number of
addresses is reserved. If
a label appears in the
location field, the address
assigned to the label is
that of the first location
not reserved by the BES.
the variable field defines a
number (see. 246). The
label in the location
field is given this value.
same as BES except that a
label appearing in the
location field is assigned
the first reserved address.
causes FAP to assemble a
linkage to a subroutine .
The variable field must
begin with a name. TSX
name 4 is assembled. If
the name is followed by a
list of other names contained in parentheses and
separated by commas,
these are assembled as
TSX NAME1, TSX
NAME2, etc. The name of
the called subroutine will
appear as a BCD word at
the·beginning of the routine. The list of these
BCD words is called the
transfer vector. The binary program will contain
information yielding the
length of this vector and
the various loaders will
usually convert the BCD
words to TTR instructions.
the name in the location
field is assigned the current value of the common
counter. The variable
field defines a number
which is subtracted from
the common counter. This
counter is initially 774618'
Normally, COMMON is
used to define storage to
be shared by more than
one routine.
the variable field is a number. This is the approximate number of cards in
the symbolic routine that
follows. This number is
used by F AP to reduce
assembly time.

3/63

408:171.820
§

171.

.82

IBM 7090
• 82

Pseudos (Contd.)
the variable field consists
of one or more subfields
separated by commas.
The last subfield is terminated by a blank. The
contents of the subfields
are decimal numbers
which are converted to binary and stored in consecutive locations. Numeri cal forms are as follows:
field containing no characters (two consecutive
commas) - assembled
as zero digits - assembled as fixed point.
as above, but containing
a decimal point - assembled as floating
point.
any of above, followed by
E followed by digits or
sign and digits - assembled as floating
point with the number
following the E as an
exponent. For example
3. 5E - 2 is the same as
.035.
DETAIL: .
removes the TITLE listing
mode (see TITLE below).
the variable field is divided
DUP: . . .
into two subfields each of
which defines a number,
m and n. This pseudo instructs the assembler to
duplicate the next m instructions n times.
EJECT: • • • • • . • • . causes the next line of the
listing to appear at the top
of a new page. (standard
tape to printing routines
recognize a 1 in column 1
as a skip to beginning of
next page indicator).
END: • . • • •
designates the end of a
macro or the end of the
symbolic deck.
ENDFIL: ••.
writes an end-of-file mark
on the designated tape.
Used for updating.
ENDUP: • . . • . . . . terminates an update without assembly. If update
with assembly is being
performed, ENDUP will
be undefined.
ENTRY: • • . . . . . . defines an entry point to a
relocatable subprogram.
The variable field is a
name. This name will appear as the first variable
field of any CALL causing
a transfer of control to the
designated point in the
current routine (see
CALL).

Pseudos (Contd.)
EQU: . • • • . • .

DEC: . . . • . • •

3/63

ETC: • • • . . . . . . •

EXTERN: . . • • . . .
FUL: . . . . . • • . . .
HEAD: • • . • . . . . .

HED: .
IFF: .

IGNORE: . • . . . . .
INDEX: • . . . . • . •

IRP: . . . • . . • • • •

LBL: • • . . • • • • • •

the name in the location
field is made equivalent to
the name defined by the
variable field.
the variable field of this
card is a continuation of
the variable field of the
previous card.
the name. appearing in the
variable field is inserted
in the transfer vector.
causes the binary program
to be written as 24 words
per card.
the variable field consists
of one or more subfields
separated by commas.
Each subfield contains a
symbol. Any names appearing in instructions following the HEAD will be
regarded as preceded by
the first symbol of the
variable field unless this
causes the name to contain
more than six characters.
Names of less than six
characters appearing in
the location field of any instruction following the
HEAD will be regarded
after heading by the first
subfield as equivalent.
same as HEAD.
the variable field contains
an expression and two
names. The next instruction (and all ETC cards)
will not be assembled if
the expression is zero and
the two names are identical, or if the expression
is non-zero and the two
names are not identical.
deletes (does not copy) information from an UPDATE input tape.
used to form a table of selected locations within the
listing of the assembled
program.
defined within macros only.
The first of two IRP
pseudos should contain a
dummy variable, say X,
in its variable field. The
macro definition should
also contain X. When the
macro is coded with (a, b,
c, ••. ) substituted for X
in the variable field, the
IRP pseudos will cause the
instruction between them
to be duplicated first with
X =a then X =b etc.
causes labeling and sequencing in columns 73-80.
of the binary cards.

MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FAP

§

408: 171.8201

171.

• 82

. 82

LOC: • • • • • . • • • .
MAC: •.
MACRO:

MAX: • . . • • • • • • •

MIN: • • . . • • • • • •

MOP: •.
NOCRS:

NULL: • • . • • • . • •

the name' in the location
field is left justified in
columns 73 to 78 of the
next record of the update
output tape. The number
in the variable field is
right justified in columns·
75 to 79. Subsequent records are numbered byadding 1 to column 79. Carries into alphabetic characters will not occur.
Numbering will appear on
the program listing.
OCT: • • • . . • • • . • the variable field is divided
into subfields, each of
which defines a word of
octal data. Each subfield
may contain a sign and 1
to 12 integers, not 8 or 9,
or be zero. The contents
are regarded as an octal
integer and are cop,verted
to binary, right - justified.
OPD: . . • • • . • • • • this pseudo defines a machine operation code. The
name of the code appears
in the location field. The
variable field contains
twelve octal digits defining
the operation code as
follows:
NUMBER: • • . .

Pseudos (Contd.)
LIST: . . • . • • •

Pseudos (Contd.)

removes UNLIST condition
on the program or part of
program that follows.
(see UNLIST).
sets location counter but
does not empty punch
buffer.
alternate form of MACRO.
Name in variable field.
a name of 3 to 6 characters
in the location field is
added to the macro table.
The names in the variable
field are the variables of
the macro. The instructions following the macro
and terminating with an
END with the macro name
in its location field define
the macro operation (see
Paragraph. 52).
the name in the location
field is given a value
equivalent to the maximum
of the values of the expressions in the variable
field.
the name in the location
field is given a value
equivalent to the minimum
of the values of the expressions in the variable
field.
same as MAC.
if a macro operation calls
for N names in the variable field and an operation
of this type is written with
only R (N > R) names,
the remaining N-R names
will normally be replaced
by "created symbols".
Initially these symbols
are two points followed by
a 3-digit number. The
number is zero for the
first such symbol and is
incremented to •. 999.
The NOCRS pseudo stops
the generation of created
symbols.
this pseudo is used to cause
an undefined instruction to
be listed and to have no effect on the assembly. For
example, the pseudo operation ENTRY is undefined in an absolute assembly. A card ENTRY
OPSYN NULL will cause
any ENTRY to be listed as
if the assembly were in the
relocatable mode.

©

Octal Designation of
Binary Bits Affected
400000 000000
300000 000000
077700 000000
000060 000000
000010
000004
000002
000001

000000
000000
000000
000000

000000 400000
000000 200000
000000 100000
000000 040000
000000 020000
000000 017777
000000 000004
000000 000002
000000 000001

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Meaning
sign.
type A operation code.
type B, C, 0, or E
operation code.
indirect address permitted (type B).
address required.
tag required.
decrement required.
flags in low -order 13
bits.
indirect addres s permitted (type A).
non-transmit bit
(type A).
machine instruction.
permitted in 704
mode.
permitted in 7090
mode.
part of op code if bit
17-0.
type K disk comIl}and.
C instruction or K
with low-order
(mask) field.
type D instruction.

3/63

408: 171.8202
§

IBM 7090

171.

.82

. 82
Pseudos (Contd.)

OPSYN: .
OPVFD:

ORG: . . . . • • • • . •

ORGCRS:. . . • . . • .

PCC: . . • . . . . . . •

PMC: • . . . . • . . . .

PRINT: . . . . . • . . .
REF: •
REM: •
REWIND: .
RMT:. . .

SET: • . . . . • • • . .

3/63

Pseudos (Contd.)
SKIPTO: • . • • .

renames machine codes or
pseudo operation.
the name in the location
field is added to the list of
defined operations. The
variable field defines a
36- bit number as in VFD
pseudo. OPVFD is used to
define the machine operation code as in OPD.
the contents of the punch
buffer are written. The
location counter for assembled instructions is
set to a number defined by
the variable field.
sets the next created sym.. hoI to a value given by the.
location field. See NOCRS
for details on created
symbols.
causes DETAIL, EJECT,
INDEX, LBL, LIST, REF,
SKP, SPACE, SPC,
TITLE, and TTL to be
listed. Alternate appearances of PCC turn this
feature on and off.
causes card images generated by macro-operation
to be listed. Alternate appearances turn this feature on and off. It is initially off. Control with the
words ON or OFF in the
variable field.
columns 14 to 72 are
printed on-line. The
assembly then halts.
deletes the symbol reference table listing.
the variable field contains
remarks. The binary output is not affected.
rewind the addressed update
tape.
a pair of RMT instructions
within a macro define a
region to be assembled
elsewhere in the program.
When an RMT* occurs,
all waiting RMT sets are
assembled. If an AMT
region is not followed by
an RMT*, the assembly
will occur after the END
statement terminating the
routines.
the variable field defines a
number. The name in the
location field assumes the
value until it is redefined.
Redefinition will not be
considered an error.

SKP: . . . • . • . . • .

SKPFIL:
SPACE:.

SPC:
SST:
SYN: .••
TAPENO:.

TCD: . . . • . . • • . •

TITLE: • . . . . • • . •

TTL: . • • . • . . • . .

UMC: • • • • • • • • . •

UNLIST: • . • • . • . •

instructions up to but not
including an instruction
with matching serialization will be deleted.
causes on -line printer to
skip. Channel determined
by number in variable
field.
advance addressed update
tape to end-of-file mark.
the variable field defines a
number. The assembly
listing will contain this
number of blank lines.
causes the on -line printer
to space.
includes system symbol
table in defined symbols
for the program.
same as EQU.
the location field contains a
name. The variable field
contains a tape deSignation. The name is equated
with the tape address.
the variable field defines an .
address. The TCD pseudo
causes a binary transfer
card to be generated.
This card, during loading,
will cause the program to
transfer to the defined
address.
causes the listing to contain
only the first word of the
binary data resulting from
generative pseudo operations (OCT, DEC, BCI,
BCD, DUP, CALL, ETC,
VFD).
if a card containing an * or
$ in column 1 appears in
the symbolic deck between
the FAP card and the first
card-generating program,
the contents of this card
will appear at the top of
each page of the listing. A
second line of page title
may be introduced from
columns 11 to 72 of a TTL
pseudo.
causes macro definitions
and instructions to be deleted during updating.
Macro generated coding is
inserted on the updated
tape.
cards following this pseudo
will not be listed unless
they are flagged as
possible errors. List
control pseudos other than
LIST (reverses UNLIST)
will be ignored.

MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FAP

§

408: 171.8203

171.

. 82

. 82

VFD: • • • • • • •

Pseudos (Contd.)
UNLOAD:

UPDATE:.

Pseudos (Contd.)

rewind and unload the
addressed tape.
causes F AP to enter the update mode. The variable
field contains up to 4 subfields. The first 2 subfields designate the update
input and output tapes respectively. The third subfield controls blocking of
the output tape. The
fourth subfield controls
assembly.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

a data defining pseudo operation. The variable
field is composed of subfields separated by commas. Each subfield begins
with a type letter, 0 for
octal or Boolean, H for alphameric, blank for symbolic. This is followed by
an unsigned decimal integer designating the number of bits in the field.
This is followed by a
slash. The contents of the
field are then defined.
Symbolic fields are
addresses.

3/63

408: 181.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 7090
ProJiram Tronslator

FAP

PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FAP

§

181.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:.

. 12

Description

Description (Contd. )
o~ operation

codes, literals, and other variable fiela .
label addresses. The 15inary equiyalents are then
combined according to the rules implicit in the FAP
source statement format, macro operation
skeletons, and the arithmetic or logical operators in
the variable length address field. Errors are marked
on the listing being generated.

. • . . . . FAP.

The FAP translator is a four-phase two-tape-pass
system that operates at approximately tape passing
speed, thus making possible source-to-object translation speeds of up to 6, 000 statements per minute.
The translator is a part of the FORTRAN Monitor
system which is called from the system tape by a
control card.

The last phase of the assembly dumps the label table
and lists of labels, either undefined or with multiple
definitions. Other errors and statistics are also included.

During the first phase of Pass 1, the entire program
is read from cards or tape 80 characters at a time,
and each source statement is examined. All
storage -allocation operations, label-definition
pseudo operations, and macro-operation definition
statements are interpreted during this pass. In addition, the location fields are examined for labels.
Variable fields are checked for constants and.
literals. The source deck is (optionally) sequencechecked at this time.

In general, be!=ause SAP is a subset of FAP, SAP (see
406:171) coding can be assembled in FAP provided
that the proper control cards are added to the SAP
coding. One omission in PAP is the inability of the
translator to specify any address for undefined
labels, a facility that was included in SAP. The
macro operation definition facility is very flexible,
providing a convenient method for coding open subroutines and for reducing the number of source statements. The pooling of literals may result in reducing Storage requirements, especially when more than
one person has coded the routine.

From these definition-type operations, the sorted
literal values (with no duplicates), "Common Area",
and operation tables are formed and expanded for
use in Pass 2. Each source statement, with its operation code, literals, and Pass 2 indicators, is recorded on a work tape in 96-character records, 16
records to a block. When the "Count" pseudo operation is used, or after 1,000 source statements have
been recorded, the tape is rewound and a new work
tape is started. This action permits the first work
tape to be positioned for processing by Pass 2 while
the second tape is being rewound.

The fast translator speed makes it economical to reassemble programs rather than to try binary or octal
corrections in a program first. With the correction
(as opposed to patching pseudo operations) built into
the translator and the ability to "load-and-go", retranslation represents a negligible expense. The
most important reason for retranslation is that the
source program will always agree with the object
program and that documentation of the revised program is provided.

The second phase of Pass 1 sorts the label table and
detects labels with mUltiple definitions. All subroutine call vectors are placed in front of the program
regardless of where they appear in the source deck.
Thus, the labels which are relative to location zero
(except in the case of an absolute assembly, which
uses other subroutine call techniques) must be increased by the amount of the vector table. This information is communicated to Pass 2.
Pass 2 begins by generating a "program" card which
contains the name of the program, the length of the
transfer vector and program, and the lowest address
in the "Common" area in upper storage for use by
the relocatable loader at object run time. Next, the
program cards for subroutine calls are generated.
The remainder of this phase consists of producing
object code from the compiled tables in storage and
data on the work tapes, detecting and flagging
errors, writing tapes for off-line listing or punching, and defining literal addresses. The object code
is produced by table look-up for binary equivalents

© 1963

• 13

Originator: .

IBM •

• 14

Maintainer:

IBM •

.15

Availability:

September, 1962.

.2

INPUT

.21

LanguaB:e

..

. 211 Name:
.212 Exemptions:

.22

FAP .
Library usually available
from FORTRAN monitor
or maintained by
installation.

Form

.221 Input media:
. 222 Obligatory ordering: .

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

card or card imageS' on
magnetic tape.
yes; usually in the order in
which groups of instructions are to be executed.

3/63

4Q8:181.223

IBM 7090

§ 181.

• 223 Obligatory grouping: •

· 23

Size Limitations

. 231 Maximum number of
source statements: •
.232 Maximum size source
statements:. . . . .
• 233 Maximum number of
data items: .
•3

OUTPUT

.31

Object Program

.311 Language name:
• 312 Language style:
• 313 Output media:
.32

. 322 Compatible with: . . .

no practical limit,
10 cards.
no limit.

704 or 7090.
binar)i.
tape or cards.

.41

Phases and Passes
First pass:. .
Second pass: .

assign values to symbols,
check serialization (if
any).
prepares binary output and
listing.

Optional Mode
Translate: •.
Translate and run: .
Check only:
Patching:. • . . •
Up-dating: . . . .

.46

library.
library or DUMP
(FORTRAN).
library or DUMP
(FORTRAN) •

Translator Library

......

.461 Identity:
. 462 User restriction:
.463 Form
Storage medium: .
Organization: .
. 464 Contents
Routines: ••
. 465 Librarianship
Insertion: •.
Amendment:
Call Procedure:

FORTJl,AN .
relocaMble mode only.
tape or cards .
closed subroutines .
see FORTRAN .
possible .
possible .
LlBE card at beginning of
program.
CALL pseudo operation
within program •

yes .
yes.
yes .
yes.
yes.

.5

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

• 51

Object Program Space

.511 Fixed overhead: • . • . none unless FORTRAN
monitor used, or relocat-·
able routines loaded with
library program (usually
BSS loader - uses 100 locations in lower storage
and upper storage above
77461 8 ),
.512 Space required for each
input-output file: . . . own coding.
• 513 Approximate expansion·
of procedures: • . . . usually I-for-l exceptions
are generative pseudo
operations and macros.
• 52

Translation Time

0.1 + O. 00016S minutes,
where S.is the number of
source statements •
. 522 Checking only: • . . . • same •
• 523 Unoptimized translating: same •

.521 Normal translating:

• 53

Optimizing Data
Count of source statements is an optional input which
can be used to overlap tape rewind time with processing. (If count is not included, 2,000 statements
are assumed. )

Special Features

.431 Alter to check only:
.432 Fast unoptlmized
translate: • . . . •
• 433 Short translate on
restricted program:
3/63

.451 Tracers: •
.452 Snapshots:

yes .

Documentation

TRANSLATING PROCEDURE

.43

Program Diagnostics

column binary is compatible
with FORTRAN monitor •.
704, 709, 7090, 7094, 7040,
7044. Others using
operation definitions.

.4

. 421
• 422
,.423
. 424
.. 425

.45

.453 Dumps: . .

Subject
Provision
Source program:
listing.
Object program:
listing.
listing.
Storage map: . .
listing.
Restart point list:
Language errors:
listing.
Symbolic reference
listing.
table: . • . . . . •
Translation statistics: listing.

.42

Bulk Translatin!:i:

Conventions

. 321 Standard inclusions: .

· 33

programs and subroutines
must be together and
separated by END
statements.

..

.44

yes.
.54
not required •
yes.

Object Program
Performance: .

unaffected except for a
slight compacting of
literal constants. '

PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FAP
§

408: 181.600

181.

.71

.6

COMPUTER CONFIGURATION

· 61

Translating Computer

Error flags are printed in the left margin opposite
possible errors. These are as follows:
Flag
B: •

· 611 Minimum configuration: 1 tape unit.
1 card reader or tape unit.
1 printer.
1 punch or tape·unit.
· 612 Larger configuration
advantages: . . . . •
off-line tape-to-printer or
tape-to-punch FORTRAN
monitor library and
control options.
• 62

Specific Actions

E: ••
L: ...

0: . .
( ):.

Target Computer
P: .

R:.

• 621 Minimum configuration: the minimum available object system configuration:
.622 Usable extra facilities: any.

U:.
N:.

4: •

9: •

A:.
T:.
D: •

•7

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
I: .
Error

Check or
Interlock

Mfulng enuie!:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
Machine fallures:

check
check
check
check
check
check

Table overflow:

check

Action
error message.
error message.
error message.
error message.
error message.
error message; assembly
stops.
error message.

© 1963

F:.

M:
.8

ALTERNATIVE
TRANSLATORS:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Meaning
Relocatable or common
symbol in Boolean expression. Digit greater than 7
in octal expression.
Error in data-generating
pseudo operation.
Error in literal.
Undefined op code.
Unbalanced parentheses in
macro-definition or
macro - instruction.
Phase relocation error.
Relocation error .
Undefined symbol.
Programmer-defined operation code with unspecified
mode of assembly.
A 704 operation in the 7090
mode.
A 7090 operation in the 704
mode.
Address field not present.
Tag field not present.
Decrement field not present
or improper.
Decrement field will cause
indirect addressing. Indirect addressing specified where not permitted.
Excessive field.
Reference to label with
multiple definition.
FAP can be run on the 709,
7090, and 7094.

3/63

•..

STANDARD

-

408: 182.1 00

EDP

•

IBM 7090

REPORTS

Program Translator

FORTRAN II
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FORTRAN II

§

.12

182.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

.12

Description

Description (Contd. )
internal processing, the efficiency of FORTRANcompiled programs written by experienced programmers who have a good understanding of the operation
of the 7090 and the FORTRAN compiler will closely
approach the efficiency of machine language programs. The primary disadvantage of the 709/7090
FORTRAN II translator is its inability to take advantage of the extensive "hardware" capabilities for simultaneous operations that are built into the computer system. Only one input or output operation can
occur at a time, and there is little effective overlapping of input-output operations with internal processing. FORMAT statements are transcribed directly
from source to object program and executed interpretively each time they are encountered during the
object program execution, making it easy to alter input and output data formats without recompiling, but
increasing the execution time of the object program.

IBM 709/7090 FORTRAN
Compiler.

The 709/7090 FORTRAN II Compiler is designed to
operate under control of the FORTRAN Monitor System, described in Section 408:191. The Compiler
translates FORTRAN II source programs into relocatable 7090 machine language object programs. The
Monitor makes possible immediate execution of the
compiled object programs. The basic IBM-developed
FORTRAN II Compiler and Monitor described here
have been extensively modified by individual 7090
users.
FORTRAN source program decks can either be read
by means of the on-line card reader or transcribed
onto magnetic tape in a prior off-line operation. The
translation process is divided into six logical sections, described in Paragraph .41. The source program is read only once during a translation, but the
necessary manipUlation of the generated tables is
quite time-consuming. The translation time seems
to increase with the square of the number of source
statements. Therefore, current practice is to divide
large source programs into smaller subprograms to
reduce the total translation time and the time required for" retranslations due to errors. Each individual subprogram is compiled as a separate entity,
and subprograms which are to be executed together
need not be compiled at the sam~ time.
Object program output can be on magnetic tape or
punched cards, in relocatable column or row binary
format. The column binary format must be chosen if
the program is to be executed under control of the
FORTRAN Monitor. The translator listing is written
on magnetic tape for off-line printing, and includes a
listing of the source program, a detailed storage
map, and an optional listing of the object program in- ".13
structions in both absolute and FAP symbolic form.
.14
The translator checks for a large number of possible
source program errors and prints detailed diagnostic .15
messages"which provide on-the-spot, accurate descriptions of most syntactical errors. Errors which
are not detected include an incorrect number of vari.2
ables in a subroutine calling sequence, an out-ofrange value for a computed GO TO, and an excessively high subscript for a dimensioned variable. A .21
number of limitations on the size of anyone source
program are listed in Paragraph . 23. There is little .211
danger of exceeding these limitations as long as individual subprograms are restricted to less than 1, 000 .212
source statements.
.22
Automatic and programmer-controlled means for improving the efficiency of FORTRAN-compiled object
.221
programs are described in Paragraph. 53. For

© 1963

by Auerbach

Co,,~oration

The FORTRAN Library consists of the standard
FORTRAN input-output and mathematical subroutines.
The library is expandable, and additional closed
library subroutines and functions can be coded by the
user or obtained from the SHARE users' group.
Twenty input-output subroutines and three exponential
routines are considered "internal to FORTRAN" and
are called implicitly when specific input-output statements and the exponential operator appear in the
source program. The seven standard library function subroutines (ATANF, EXPF, LOGF, SINF,
COSF, SQRTF, TANHF) and all routines added by the
user are called explicitly by use of their names in a
source statement. The required closed library subroutines can either be included in the object deck at
compile time or supplied at run time through use of
the FORTRAN Monitor. Twenty standard "built-in
functions" (e.g., ABSF, INTF, FLOATF) are compiled as open subroutines and inserted into the object
program each time they are called. Up to seven additional built-in functions can be added by an individual user.
Originator: .

IBM Data Systems Division.

Maintainer:

as above.

Availability:

1959.

INPUT
Lan~ge

Name:
Exemptions:

IBM 709/7090 FORTRAN II;
see Section 408:161.
none.

Form
Input media:

and BNA Incorporated

punched cards or card images on magnetic tape.
4/63

IBM 7090

408:182.222

§

182.

. 32

Conventions

. 321 Standard inclusions: .
yes; e. g., a DIMENSION
statement for an array
must precede the first appearance of the array name·
in an executable statement.
.223 Obligatory grouping:. . individual subprograms must
be segregated and are
compiled separately.
. 222 Obligatory ordering:.

. 23

Size Limitations

.231 Maximum number of source statements
Total:. . • . . • . . • no specific limit.
DO statements and
DO-implying
parentheses: .
600.
Non - executable
statements: . .
1, 200.
Numbered statements: 3,000.
STOP and RETURN
statements: . . . . . 1,200.
CALL statements: . . 2,400.
ASSIGN, IF, and GO
TO statements: . . . 2, 400.
Arithmetic statement
functions: . . . . . . 140.
. 232 Maximum size source statements
Number of characters: 660.
Nested parentheses:. 138 levels.
. 233 Maximum number of data items
Integer constants:
400.
Floating point
constants:. . • .
I, 800.
Array names, total
I-dimensional:
400.
2-dimensional: '..
400.
3-dimensional: . .
360.
Double precision or
complex array
names: . • • . . • . 150.
Double precision or
complex nonsubscripted
variables:. . . .
400.
.234 Others
Nested DO loops:..
200 levels.
Literal appearances of
variables in COMMoN statements: . . 2, 400.
Literal appearances of
variables in EQUIVA.LENCE statements: 6, 000.
Literal appearances of
FORMAT statement
numbers: . . . . . . 2, 000.

.3

OUTPUT

. 31

Object Program

loader precedes object program when output is in relocatable row binary
form. Loader for relocatable column binary is built
into the FORTRAN Monitor. The Required FORTRAN library subroutines
may be included if desired .
.322 Compatible with: . . . . IBM 709/7090 FORTRAN
Monitor System (when output is in relocatable column binary format); and
with the FORTRAN inputoutput subroutines, which
must l;le present at
execution time.
. 33

Documentation
Subject
Source program: .
Object program: .
Storage map:.. .
Restart point list:
Language errors:

Provision
listing.
optional listing, in FAP
symbolic and octal form.
listing.
none.
on-line printer messages
and lisUng.

.4

TRANSLATING PROCEDURE

.41

Phases and Passes
Section 1:
The source program is read and internal formula
numbers (lFN) are assigned to all statements, first
to the non-executable ones and then to the executable
ones; The non-executable statements are stored in
a buffer area and then written on magnetic tape.
The executable statements are scanned, checked for
mode, and translated into machine language, resulting in a compiled instruction table (CIT). The CIT
is written on tape in the COMPAIL (complete arithmetic, input-output, and logical) file~ Storage 10eations are assigned for all constants and variables.
Error checks are made and diagnostic messages
written if necessary.
Section 2:
Non-arithmetic instructions associated with indexing are arranged into a COMPDO file. Indexing
loops are set up and index registers are assigned
symbolic tags .
Section 3:

.311 Language name:
. 312 Language style:
.313 Output media:

4/63

IBM 7090 machine language .
relocatable column binary
or relocatable row binary.
punched cards, magnetic
tape, or retained in cdre
storage for immediate
execution.

The COMPAIL and COMPDO files are merged, and
the remainder of the non-arithmetic statements are
translated to machine language instructions. The
object program is now essentially complete, but assumes there is no limit on the number of index registers available.

PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FORTRAN II
§

408: 182.41 0

182.

.41

· 46
Phases and Passes (Contd.)

.461 Identity: . . . . .

Section 4:

.462 User restriction:
. 463 Form
Storage medium: .
Organization:. . .

The program flow is analyzed in an effort to assign
the symbolic tags to the 3 available index registers
in such a way that the number of times the index
registers will have to be loaded and unloaded is
minimized. Several hundred scans of the object
program may be performed in this section.

· 464 Contents
Routines: •

Section 5:

Functions:

Actual index registers are assigned, and all indexing instructions are added to the CIT file.
Section 6:

Data description:.
· 465 Librarianship
Insertion: . . . . .

.42

Optional Modes

. 421
.422
.423
.424

Translate: . . •
Translate and run:.
Check only:
Patching: . . . . . .

.43

Special Features

yes.
yes.
no.
no; must retranslate or add
correction cards to object
program.

. 431 Alter to check only:
.432 Fast unoptimized
translate: . . . . •
.433 Short translate on
restricted program:

no.

• 44

yes, without restriction.

Bulk Translating: •.

no.
no.

Program Diagnostics

• 451 Tracers:.
· 452 Snapshots:

none.
the source statement CALL
PDUMP causes the FORTRAN Monitor to dump the
contents of core storage
locations between specified
limits onto magnetic tape
in either octal or floating
point format. Control is
then transferred to the next
executable statement.
.453 Dumps: • . . . . . . . • the source statement CALL
DUMP has the same effect
as PDUMP except that it
terminates execution of a
program and returns control to the FORTRAN
Monitor.
A DUMP control card causes
the Monitor to dump all of
core storage in octalformat.

© 1963

IBM 709/7090
FORTRAN Library.
none .
magnetic tape.
relocatable binary format;
each routine preceded by
an identifying program
card record.
closed input-output and
user-coded subroutines.
yes; standard and usercoded.
no.

via punched cards, in column or row binary format.
The new routine must be
inserted at the appropriate
pOint in the library card
deck and the entire deck
transcribed to magnetic
tape.
Amendment: . . . . . add and/or delete cards and
transcribe to tape as
above .
Call procedure: . . . by use of routine name in
source statement (e. g. ,
CALL RTNA, X = SQRTF
(Y»; or implicitly by use
of specific source statement type (e. g., READ
INPUT TAPE requires the
presence of 8 different
input-output subroutines) •
The LIBE control card
causes library routines to
be included with the object
program; otherwise, they
must be supplied separately at run time •

The object program is written on tape in FAP symbolic form for off-line listing, then assembled into
relocatable binary form and written on tape,
punched on~line, or retained in core storage for
immediate execution.

· 45

Translator Library

.5

TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE

.51

Object Program Space

.511 Fixed overhead
Space
Name
FORTRAN Monitor: 305 words.
Input-output
routines: . . . . . approx. 2, 650 words.
. 5112 Space required for each
input-output file: • . . contained in standard inputoutput routines.
.513 Approximate expansion
of procedures: • . . . averages 5 to 6 machine instructions per source
statement (**).
.52

Translation Time: . •• 0.3 + O. 0003S2 minutes,
where S is number of
source statements (**).

(**) Estimate by the Editorial Staff.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

See 1:010.400.

4/63

408: 182.530
§

IBM 7090

182 •

. 53

Optimizing Data

.531 Explicit:
FREQUENCY Statement provides data for optimizing the coding of branch points and loops.
EQlfIvALENCE statement reduces data storage requirements by causing locations to be shared by
two or more variables within a program.
COMMON statement reduces data storage requirements by causing locations to be shared by variabIes in two or more different subprograms that
will be loaded at the same time.
. 532 Implicit:
Common sub-expressions occurring within a single
expression will be evaluated only once if they are
enclosed in parentheses at each occurrence.
Do not compute anything within a DO loop that can
just as well be computed before entering the loop.
Do not compute the same sub-expression within two
or more different statements if the practice can be
avoided by evaluating the sub-expression in a separate arithmetic statement.
Keep all subscript expressions as simple as
possible.
Check input data for reasonability.
Keep on-line card input and printer output to a
minimum.
Do not allow the operator to attempt on-line corrective measures; when the program hangs up, get off
the machine.
Use successive multiplications rather than exponentiation to develop squares, cubes, etc.
.533 Automatic:
Program flow is analyzed and coding rearranged for
optimum utilization of the 3 available index
registers.
Sequences of successive arithmetic operations of
the same hierarchy which are not grouped by
parentheses will be re-ordered to minimize the
number of storage accesses. (Since fixed point
division produces truncated results, this optimization process can lead to unexpected results unless parentheses are used to indicate the order of
fixed point multiplications and divisions.)
.54

COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS

.61

Translating Computer

. 611 Minimum configuration: 5 magnetic tape units .
1 data channel.
1 card reader.
1 printer.
.612 Larger configuration
advantages:. . . . .
card punch provides on -line
card output.
additional tape units permit
tape input, speed up compilation, and permit additional Monitor operations .
.62

.7

Type

Time

Elementary algebra:
Complex formulae:
Deep nesting:
Heavy branching:
Complex subscripts:
Data editing (FORMAT):

unaffected. . 8
unaffected
unaffected.
unaffected
increased
increased.
increased
increased.
increased
increased.
increased
unaffected.
greatly
not possible in
FORTRAN.

(**) Estimate by the Editorial Staff. See 1:010.400.

Target Computer

.621 Minimum configuration: any IBM 709, 7090, or 7094
system.
. 622 Usable extra facilities: all magnetic tape units; any
1 card reader, card punch,
and printer.

Object Program Performance (**)

Overlapping operations:

4/63

.6

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Interlock

Action

Missing entries:

limited
checks

message: abandon
compilation.

Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:

none.

Improper format:

checks

Target computer overflow:

checks

Inconsistent program:

checks

Mixed arithmetic:

checks

Table limits exceeded:

checks

Error

check

messa ge: abandon
compilation.
message: abandon
compilation.
message: abandon
compilation.
message: abandon
compilatiOn.
message: abandon
compilation.
message: abandon
compilation.

Note: Upon detection of any error, compilation stops, but the
remainder of the source program is checked for additional
errors.

ALTERNATIVE TRANSLATORS
1. 'The basic, IBM-developed 709/7090 FORTRAN II

translator described here has been extensively
modified by numerous individual users.
2. The new IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN Compiler,
which operates under control of the m]OB MOnitor,
uses the FORTRAN IV language; the SIFT trans• lator has been developed to convert FORTRAN II
source programs into FORTRAN IV.
3. FORTRAN translators for other computer systems are listed in the Index.

408: 191.100
.STANOARO

II

EDP

IBM 7090
Operating Environment
FORTRAN Monitor

REPORTS

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: FORTRAN MONITOR

§

19t.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Description

IBM 709/7090 FORTRAN
Monitor System.

The FORTRAN Monitor is a widely used operating
system that coordinates FORTRAN II compilations,
FAP assemblies, and execution of object programs.
Compilations, assemblies, and object program executions can be intermixed in any order, as specified
on control cards. Object programs can be executed
immediately upon successful completion of the compilation or assembly process. Programs too large to
fit in):o core storage can be subdivided into a series
of program segments, called links. Only one program can be run at a time; i. e., there is no provision for multi-running~
Input to the FORTRAN Monitor is usually on magnetic tape, transcribed from punched cards in an offline operation. Input can consist of Monitor control
cards, FORTRAN source statements, FAP symbolic
cards, object program cards (in relocatable column
binary form), and/or data cards. The deck for each
job must be headed by a series of Monitor control
cards, identified by an asterisk in column 1, that
specify the job's identity, the operation to be performed, and (for FORTRAN compilations) the de:sired forms of output.
Convenient diagnostic facilities for snapshots and
dumps are built into the FORTRAN Monitor. The
FORTRAN source statements CALL DUMP and
CALL PDUMP cause the contents of core storage locations between specified limits to be dumped onto
magnetic tape in either floating point or octal format.
CALL PDUMP then transfers control to the next executable statement, while CALL DUMP terminates
the cUTrent program and initiates the next job. The
control card DUMP can be loaded whenever an unexpected halt occurs; it causes the entire contents of
core storage to be dumped in octal form. RESTART
control cards permit continuation of Monitor operations after unexpected halts. The current job can be
rerun from the beginning, or any subsequent job on
the input tape can be initiated. No facilities are provided for establishing restart points within a given
program or for tracing the execution of an object
program.
The CHAIN function of the Monitor makes it possible
to handle a FORTRAN object program that is too
.13
large to fit into core storage by executing it as a
series of smaller programs called links. Each link
or segment consists of a main program with all nec- • 14
essary subprograms. The links are stacked on any
of three tape units. The first link is called into core '.15

© 1963

Description (Contd. )
storage for execution by the Monitor, and each link
in turn calls in the next link in the sequence. The
control card CHAIN (R, T) must precede each link,
and the last executable source statement in each link
must be CALL CHAIN (R, T). R is a number that
identifies a particular link, and T specifies the tape
unit on which the link will be kept at run time. Data
values can be passed from one link to another by
means of the COMMON statement.
The FORTRAN Monitor requires an on-line printer,
on-line card reader, and up to eight magnetic tape
units on two channels. The tape unit assignments
are as follows:
AI: FORTRAN Monitor System tape.
A2: Input tape.

A3: Output tape for off-line listing.
A4: FORTRAN intermediate tape.

Bl: Monitor intermediate tape for CHAIN
(segmented) jobs.
B2: Intermediate tape for FORTRAN, DUMP, and
PDUMP.
B3: FORTRAN intermediate tape.
B4: Binary output tape for off-line punching.
No central processor time is required by the Monitor during the compilation, assembly, or execution
of a program because the monitor only directs program traffic. The Monitor, parts of which are always in core storage, assumes control only upon
completion of a job or when a Monitor function such
as DUMP or RESTART is called for. The last executable statement of each FORTRAN source program
to be executed under Monitor control must be CALL
EXIT or CALL DUMP, which returns control to the
Monitor for initiation of the next job. Detection of
an error in a FORTRAN or FAP source program
causes an on-line printout; translation of the remainder of the current program is skipped. Runtime errors (e. g., an illegal character in a data
field) in FORTRAN-compiled object programs cause
system halts. The operator must determine the reason for the halt from the storage register contents
and initiate the appropriate recovery procedure.
Availability :

1959.

Originator: .

IBM Data Systems Division .

Maintainer:

as above.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

_STANO,"O

408:201.011

EDP
_

RE~RTS

IBM 7090
System Performance

IBM 7090

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

408:201.012

IBM 7090

IBM 7090 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
Configuration

Work.he,,·t

Item

Reference

V

1

Char/block

Input.
O~tput

Records/block

K

Tn. sec/block

File 1

m.sec/swltch

VII B

VIII B

(File 1)

1,008

1,008

4,032

1,008

4,032

(File 1)

8

8

32

8

32

66

10.1

27.8

=File 2

34

22.6

File 3

13

8.7

22.7t

8.1

17.9t

File 4

13

8.7

22.7t

8.1

17.9f

File 1

=File 2

4:200.112

Times

File 3
File 4
m. sec penalty

Flle 1

=Flle 2

File 3

File 4

2

0.3

0.2

0.7

0.1

0.2

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.1

0.1

m.sec/block

al

0.22

0.22

0.22

m.sec/record

a2

0.25

0.25

0.25

Central
Processor

secl detail

b6

0.17

0.17

0.17

m.sec/work

b5 + b9

0.39

0.39

0.39

m. sec/report

b7 +b8

m.sec
for C.P.
and
dominant
column.

al

0.2

0.2

a2K

2.0

In.

Times

3

Standard
Problem A

a3K

2.0

8.0

2.0

8.0

75.4

301.6

75.4

301.6

0.3

34

0.2

File 2 Master Out

0.3

34

0.2

File 3 Details

0.8

104

0.8

File 4 Reports

0.8

104

0.8

79.8

276

79.6

22.6

66

0.7

0.2

0.7

Fixed

Standard
Problem A
Space

0.7

0.2

0.7

69.6

0.8

91

32.4

0.8

0.8
92.2

0.8

312.8

157

0.8

71.6

0.8
32.4

79.6

312.8

71.6

(words)

Std. routines

620

620

620

620

620

0

0

0

0

0

400

400

450

400

450

2,000

2,000

2,000

2,000

2,000

Files

756

756

3,360

756

3,360

Working

200

200

200

200

200

3,976

3,976

6,630

3,976

6,630

3 (Blocks 1 to 23)

4:200.1151
6 (Blocks 24 to 48)

Total

2/63

0.2

0.2

4:200.114

Unit measure

t

75.4

8.86

0.2

File 1 Master In

Total

4

8.86

8.86

4:200.1132

8 records per block

IAUERBAC~~

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

408:201.013

IBM 7090 SYSTEM PER FORMANCE -Contd.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2

Configuration
Worksheet

5

Item

Reference
VII B

VIII B

Floating

Floating

Input

729 IV

729 VI

output

729 IV

729 VI

input

90 char

90 char

120 char

120 char

Tl

8.2

7.7

output T2

8.6

8.0

input

T3

0.1

0.1

output T4

0.1

0.1

.Fixed/Floating point

Unit name

Size of record
output
Standard
Mathemati cal
Problem
A

input

-

m.sec/block

4:200.413

m.sec penalty

7

m. Bec/record

T5

1.46

m. sec/5 loops

T6

2.67

m. sec;::/report

T7

12.26

Unit name
Size of block

Standard
Stati sti cal
Problem
A

729 IV

Hypertape

9,000 char

21,000 char

Records/block

B

150

350

m.sec/bloclc

Tl

151

128

m.sec penalty

T3

2

2

4:200.512

... C.P.

m.sec block

T5

0.04

m. sec record

T6

0.73

m.gec table

T7

0.06

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

408:201.100

.STANOARO
EDP
•

IBM 7090

REPORTS

~ystem Performance

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

§20l.

.113 Timing basis:

.1

GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING

.11

Standard File Problem A

•111 Record sizes
Master file:.
Detail file: .
Report file: .
• 112 Computation:.

using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4~2QO.113 .
see graph below.

• 114 Graph: • . • •
.. 115 Storage space required
Unblocked detail and report files
Configuration V: • • • • • 3,976 .
Configuration VII B:. • . • 3,976.
Configuration vm B: . . . 3,976.
Blocked detail and report files
Configuration VII B: •
6,630.
Configuration vm B: • . . 6, 630.

108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
standard •

10
7

4

2

7

~

V

_

-~

4

Time in Minutes
2
to Process 10,000
Master File Records

JIll'

JlIIB.:.... ..........

JlIIIB

/'

JlII B

-

~!IIfI B

JZII[

-

B'

/'

~

0.1
7
4

2

0.01
7

4
2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
Broken line indicates blocked detail and report files

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

408:201.120

IBM 7090

§20l.
.12

.122 Computation: •
• 123. Timing basis: •

Standard File Problem B

. 121 Record sizes
Master file: .
Detail file: •
Report file: •

• 124 Graph: • . • .

standard •
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
- 4:200.12 .
• see graph below •

54 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

10
7

4

2

---------

-

lZIIB

7
.JI'

./

4

/
",

Time in Minutes
to Process 10, 000
Master File Records

2

0.1

/'"

.JI'

./

,

VElIB

J

7

4

2

0.01
7
4

2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

2/63

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

408:201.130

201.

. 13

.132 Computation: • •
• 133 Timing basis: •

standard •
• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13 •
. 134 Graph: . . • • • • • • see graph below .

Standard File Problem C

• 131 Record sizes
Master file:.
Detail file: •
Report file: .

216 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

10
7

4

2

-

7

4

l/'

~-

.....

--

----

:mII B

-

Time in Minutes
2
to Process 10,000
Master File Records

0.1
7

4

2

0.01
7

4
2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

408:201.140

IBM 7090

§20l.
.14

• 142 Computation: •
• 143 Timing basis:.

Standard File Problem D
• 144 Graph: • • • •

• 141 Record sizes
Master file:.
Detail file: •
Report file:. • •

trebled •
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.14 •
see graph below •

108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

10
7

4

2

~

7

~

"

4

.-.-

../ "

~

-

..... ""'"

Time in Minutes
to Process 10,000
2
Master File Records

/'

0.1
7

4

2

0.01
7
4

2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

2/63

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

408:201.200

201.

• 212 Key size: •••
.213 Timing basis: •

.2

SORTING

. 21

Standard Problem Estimates

8 characters •
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213 .
see graph below .

• 214 Graph:. • • .

.211 Record size:. • • • • 80 characters.

10.0
I

7

I

/

4

/
~

2

/

/
~

/

/

:/

'II
1.0
7

f

II'

/

, ,/

4

VI1.B/

/

~

2

,If

Time in Minutes to
Put Records Into
Required Order 0.1

£B

~I
I

, ,

7

/

4

2

0.01

/

/

1/

/

/

7

4
2

0.001

I
2

7

2

4

1,000

100

7

2

10,000

4

7

100,000

Number of Records

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

408.:201.~00

.

IBM 7090

§201.

.312 Timing basis: •

.3

MATRIX INVERSION

•31

Standard Problem Estimates

using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.312;
see graph below •

.313 Graph: • . • •
.311 Basic parameters: • • • general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating point to at least 8
decimal digits.

100
7

4

2

10
7

I

4

Time in Minutes
for Complete
Inversion

I

2

.

I

/

7

4

V

2

V
J

0.10
7
J

I

4

I
J

2

/

0.01
2

4

2

7

4

10

100

Size of Matrix

2/63

2

7

4

7

1,000

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

408:201.400

201.

.412 Computation: •

.4

GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING

.41

Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates

5 fifth-order polynomials.
5 divisions •
1 square root •
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.413 .
see graph below.

. 413 Timing basis: •
.411 Record sizes: . • . . . 10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max.
size 8 digits.

• 414 Graph: . . . •

CONFIGURATION VII B; SINGLE LENGTH (8 DIGIT PRECISION); FLOATING POINT.
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD

10,000
7

4

2

1,000
7
4

Time in Milliseconds per
lnput Record

2

VII
/

100
II

7

~

L

1/

4
Io'!

2

----

10

R~ ~ ~~

~'O~'"
~

R=O.OI

7
4

2

2

4

2

7

1.0

0.1

4

2

7

10.0

4

7

100.0

C, Number of Computations per Input Record

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

408:201 <115

IBM 7090

§ 201 •

•415 Graph:

••• • • • • see graph below.

CONFIGURATION VIII B; SINGLE LENG~T (8 DIGIT PRECISION); FLOATING POINT.
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD

10,000
7
4

2

1,000
7

4

Time in Milliseconds per
lnput Record

2

~

100

~

~!;i'

-,

7
.I

~

4
~

~

2

----I~

R=O.I

10

",,-

~~

~

R=ODI

7
4

2

2

0.1

4

7

2

1.0

4

7

2

10.0

C, Nwnber of Computations per Input Record

2/63

4

7

100.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

408:201.500

§20l.

.512 Computation: •

.5

GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING

.513 Timing basis: .

• 51

Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates

augment T elements in
cross-tabulation tables.
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.513 .
see graph below .

• 514 Graph: . • . .
.511 Record size: • • • • • thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.

100
7

4

~

•
./

2

/

4

V

~

2

V

JZlI B

7

I.l

-'

7

Time in
Millisel::onds
per Record

~

-

~

V

10010-

JZIII B

4.

2,

0.10
7

4

2

0.01
2

4

2

7

10

4

2

7

100

4

7

1,000

T, Number of Augmented Elements
Roman numerals denote Standard Configurations

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

II,,,,,,,,
II ""''''

408:211.101

EDP

IBM 7090
Physical Characteristics

IBM 7090
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

408:211.102

IBM 7090

IBM 7090 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Unit Name

Core
Storage

Multiplexor

Disk
Storage

Disk
Starage

Drum
Storage

File
Control

Instruction
Processing
Unit

Model Number

7302-1

7606-1

1301-1

1301-2

7320-1

7631
II/IIIIV

7108

80X36X70

56X30x69

33X85W<65%

33x85y,x65%

30x29x60

38x32X70

69x60x28

2,450

1,500

3,625

3,825

850

500

2,225

From 761875 ft.
From 760618 ft.

From 761875 ft.
From 715165 ft.

IDENTITY

Height x Width x Depth, in.

Weight, Ibs.

PHYSICAL

Maximum Cable Lengths

98

Temperature, OF.
Storage
Ranges

±

From 761875 ft.
From 715165 ft.

1

50 to 110

oil
immersed

Humidity, ,..

o to

50 to 80

Temperature, Of".
ATMOS.
PHERE

80

Working
Ranges
Humidity, ,..

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Air Flow, cfm.

20 to 80

~

15,420

1,550

16,700

20,000

2,800

4,800

3,620

1,860

400

---

---

---

---

400

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

208 or 230

208 or 230

208

208 or 230

208

Intemal Filters

Nominal

208

208

Voltage
Tolerance

ELECTRICAL

Nominal

60

Cycles
Tolerance
Phases and Lines

Load KVA

3-phase,
5-wire

3-phase,
5-wlre

3-phase,
4-wire

3-phose,
4-wire

3-phase,
4-wire

I-phase,
3-wire

3-phase,
5-wire

5.83

0.73

7.S

9.0

1.1

2.7

1.59

Max 5
Model lor 2

NOTES

ID
I

5/63

1
....-AU-ER-BA-CH---;--"

Max 5 per
Max 2
7631 Mode12;
10 per system

PHYSICAL CHARACTE RISTI CS

408:211.103
IBM 7090 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Contd.)
Arithmetic
Sequence
Unit

Unit Name

Console
Control
Unit

Card
Reader

Card
Punch

Printer

Magnetic
Tape
Units

Hypertape . Hypertape Paper Tape
Drive
Control
Reader

Data
Channel

Data
Channel

Height X Width X Depth, in.

Weight, lb •.
Maximum Cable Lengtho
PHYSICAL

7109-1

7151-1

711-2

721

716-1

729
II, IV, V, VI

69x60X28

49X60X41

32x32x30

50x40X26

47XS9x30

29x34x 69

60X48x29

2,225

650

560

670

1,910

1,200

1,350

From 761B- From 7618- From 71675 ft.
75 ft.
30 ft.
From 710965 ft.

From 71620 ft.

7340-1

7640-1

1011-1

70x74X30 ' 60x32x24

1,000

529

To 721 -44
ft.

Data
Channel
Console

Data
T ransmission

Unit

Remote
Inquiry
Unit

Switch
Control
Console

Programmed
Transmission

Power
Convertor

Power
Control

Control

7607
lor 3

7607
2 or 4

1414-6

7909-1

7617-1

1009-1

1014-1

7155
1/2/3/4

7750
I, II or m

7608-1

7816-1

69X56X30

69x56x30

70X73X31

70x38x32

30X30x17

40x29x31

35X24X29

12XBx7

70x1BIX31

5Bx61x29

69x56x30

1,100

700

110

500

175

10

2,700

1,680

1,150

2,290

2,290

From 1414- Max combined cable
Max of 40
90 ft.
ft. from
l:'J.th between 7607 &
f
est tape unit - 60
Data
ft. from plug (one per
Channel.
MTU leg) -14 ft. from
7618 -75 ft. From
7606 - 100 ft. From
7617 -50 ft. B.etween
7607s 100 ft.

From 7618- MTUtoMTU
60 ft.
75 ft.
From 7607- From 760760 ft.
35 ft.
To 711-30
ft.

For 2 chan-

From 1414- From 141460 ft.
50 ft.

nel system
100 ft per

50 ft. Input From plug14 ft.
50 ft. Output
50 ft. con-

signal leg
140 ftto connect signal
legs (total
340l Each
add tiona1
channel reduces total
by 40 ft).

verter

control

connected

only to

"'161B

I

Temperature, OF.

Storage
Ranges

Data
Channel

nizer

IDENTITY
Modo1 Number

InputOutput
Synchro-

50 to 110
I
I
o to BO

Humidity, ,..

~

I
Temperature,

ATMOSPHERE

Working
Rangeo

~F.

50 to BO
I
20 to 80

Humidity, ,..

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Air Flow, cfm.

3,620

1,570

2,600

3,070

7,150

3,900

400

---

---

---

---

550

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Intema1 Filters

20B

Nominal

12,000

3,400

4,100

3,590

3,590

4,450

4,000

---

1,000

500

---

---

---

---

500

500

---

---

---

---

---

---

Yes

Yes

20B or 230

208

208

115, 208,
230

115, 208,
230

3-phase

3-phase,
4-wire

3-phase,
5-wire

I-phase,
3-wire

I-phase

---

0.3

20B

208 or 230

20B

208 or 230

208

208

27~8b~0~ith
TCP*

---

Yes

19,800

500

1,100

---

Yes

Yes

208 or 230

208 or 230

208

208

3-phase

3-phase,
4-wire

3-phase,
5-wire

3-phase,
5-wire

---

10.8

B.69

0.20

Voltage
Tolerance

Nominal
ELECTRICAL

60

Cycles
Tolerance

Phases and Line s

Load KVA

3-phase,
5-wire

3-phase,
5-wire

3-phase,
4-wire

3-phase,
4-wire

3-phase,
4-wire

3-phase

3-phase,
4-wire

1.59

0.71

Supplied
by 716
0.7

Supplied
by 716
3.5

5.4

1.62

4.0

Max 20

NOTES

©

3-phase

--Max 1

I-phase,
3-wire

3-phase,
5-wire

3-phase,

1.8

1.53

1.53

5-wire

Add 13"
Model 1 & 2, Max 10729
to depth
II or IVs
for reading Model 3 & 4, Max 10729
board.
II/IV /V /VIs
Model 2 & 3 control a
711, 716 & 721.
For additional MTU
add up to 7-7607
Models 2 or 4. Each
requires a 7617.

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1.3

0.62

Max 4. Ad- One used
dition of
with each
7909 re7607 in the
duces num system.
ber of additional
7607s

O.lB

Max 1
This unit
houses the
*TCB=
Telegraph motor-genConverter erator.
Base

This unit
houses the
motor-geerator controIs and
distribution
~ower cabes to the
7151, 7302,
7606, 716,
7108, 7109,
7909, &
76078.

5/63

408:221.101

IBM 7090
Price Data

PRICE DATA
§

221.
PRICES

IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
Nam"e

No.

CENTRAL
PROCESSOR

STORAGE

Monthly
Rental
$

Monthly
Maintenance
$

Purchase
$

7108
7109
7151

Instruction Processing UnIt
Arithmetic Sequence Unit
Console Control Unit

10,600
8,675
1,225

555.00
453.00
13.00

449,500
368,000
61,700

7fiJ6
7302

Multiplexor
Core Storage

3,900
17,500

146.00
580.00

156,300
840,000

2,100
3,500
835
1,035
1,035

138.00
238.00
30.00
35.00
35.00

115,500
185,500
42,000
52,000
52,000

25

1.00

1,250

4,275

182.00

197,500

4,3fiJ
3,275
3,3fiJ
225

182.00
118.00
118.00
16.00

200,900
159,000
162,400
10,900

Additional Storage
1301-1
1301- II
763-II
7631-II1
7631-IV
#3213

Disk Storage
1 disk array 1
max 5 per system
2 disk array I
File Control
Max 2
File Control (7090 + 1410)
attached
File Control (7090 + other
J to 7909s
7000 except
7072)
Cylinder Mode (on any 7631)

1

Data Channels

DATA
CHANNELS
7fiJ7-1
7fiJ7-II1
7607-II
7fiJ7-IV
7617

Channel for 729 II/IVs (max 10),
711,716
Channel for 729 II/IV/V /Vls (max 10),
711,716
Channel for 729 II/IVs (max 10)
Channel for 729 II/IV/V /Vls (max 10)
Data Channels Console
(An extra 7617 required for each
additional 7607)
For 1301s, 7340s, 1410s or 7750

INPUTOUTPUT

7909-1
#1471
3224

Data Channel (max 4) optional
BCD Translation
Data channel switch
(Addition of 7909s reduces number
of 7fiJ7s possible)

2, 800
100
125

125.00
1.00
1.00

112,000
4,200
5,000

711-2
716
721
#2250

Card Reader
Printer
Card Punch
Consecutive Number Punching (Optional
feature for 721)
Magnetic Tape Unit
Magnetic Tape Unit
Magnetic Tape Unit
Magnetic Tape Unit

800
1,200
fiJO

63.25
116.00
62.25

32,000
54,200
25,000

35
700
900
750
950

8.25
116.00
128.00
122.00
134.00

2,275
36,000
41,250
37,200
42,450

85

6.50

4,400

72911
729 IV
729 V
729 VI

Optional for 729 II/IV /V /VI
#7830

Tape Switching Feature

\

cD 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

408:221.1 02

IBM 7090

PRICE DATA-Contd.
§

221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS

INPUTOUTPUT

No.

Name

7155
model
model
model
model
7640
7340

1
2
3
4

Switch Control Feature
(#7830 required on each MTU)
to be switched
for up to 2 MTUs
for up to 4 MTUs
for up to 6 MTUs
for up to 8 MTUS
Hypertape Control (max 1)
Hypertape Drive (max 20)

Monthly
Rental
$

PRICES
Monthly
Maintenance
$

Purchase
$

35
55
80
100
3,400
1,300

5.50
11.00
16.50
22.00
102.00
130.00

1,775
2,675
3,875
4, 775
218,000
78,000

Optional for 7340 on 7909
200

1.50

8,400

1414-6
#3238
1009
#5514
1011
#6136
1014
#7864
7871
7875

Read Backward Char Assembly and Store
Tele- Processing via
I/O Synchronizer
Data Transmission Unit adaptor for 1009
Data Transmission Unit
Paper Tape Reader adaptor for 1011
Paper Tape Reader
Remote Inquiry Unit adaptor for 1014
Remote Inquiry Unit (10 max)
Telegraph I/O Feature for 7871 and 7875
Telegraph Input Feature
Telegraph Output Feature

850
200
500
100
500
200
200
500
110
125

12.00
3.50
11.50
1.50
42.50
5.75
12.50
11.00
3.25
3.25

43,350
11,000
26,400
3, 750
22,400
11,500
11,000
30,500
6, 750
7,750

7608
7618

Power Converter
Power Control

700
900

1.50
5.00

25,000
35,000

#5975

POWER
SUPPLIES

4/63

L'

IBM 7094
International Business Machines Corp.

c
l

c

c
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

IBM 7094
International Business Machines Corp.

,/

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.

409:001.001
STANDARD

REPORTS

IBM 7094
Contents

CONTENTS

1.
2.
3.

4.

5.

6.
7.

8.

9.

ID.

11.
12.
14.

16.
17.

Introduction.....
Data Structure • . •
System Configuration
Configuration Vi 6-Tape Auxiliary Storage System
Configuration VII B; 10- Tape General System (Paired) •
Configuration vm B; 20-Tape General System (Paired)
Internal Storage
7302 Core Storage •
7606 Multiplexor •
1301 Disk Storage. •
7631 File Control •
Central Processor
7110 Instruction Processing Unit (7094 Model I) •
7111 Instruction Processing Unit (7094 Model II)
7109 Arithmetic .Sequence Unit (Models I & II)
Console
7090 Console • • • . . • • .
Input- Output; Punched Tape and Card
711 Card Reader •
7607 Data Channel.
721 Card Punch • .
7607 Data Channel.
Input-Output; Printers
716 Printer. • • •
7607 Data Channel.
Input-Output; Magnetic Tape
729 Magnetic Tape Unit
7607 Data Channel. • •
7340 Hypertape Drive •
7640 Hypertape Control
Input- Output; Other
7607 Data Channel. . •
7909 Data Channel. . •
1414 Input-Output Synchronizer •
7155 Switch Control Console
Simultaneous Operations
Instruction List • • • • • . • • •
Data Codes
Internal, Magnetic Tape and Magnetic Disk; Binary
Punched Card Input-Output
Printer. . • . • • • • •
Magnetic Tape, Disk; BCD •
Process Oriented Language
709/7090 FORTRAN II
Machine Oriented Language
FAP • • • • • • • • • •

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

409:011
409:021
409:031.1
409:031.2
409:031.3
409:041
409:041.4
408:042 (ffiM 7090)
408:042.4 (ffiM 7090)
409:051
409:051
409:051
408:061

(ffiM 7090)

408:071
408:071.4
408:072
408:072.4

(ffiM
(ffiM
(ffiM
(ffiM

7090)
7090)
7090)
7090)

408:081 (ffiM 7090)
408:081.4 (ffiM 7090)
409:091
409:091.4
409:092
409:092.4
409:101
409:102
408:103
408:104
409:111
409:121

(ffiM 7090)
(ffiM 7090)

408:141
408:142
408:143
408:144

(ffiM
(ffiM
(ffiM
(ffiM

408:161

(ffiM 7090)

408:171

(ffiM 7090)

7090)
7090)
7090)
7090)

7/63

IBM 7094

409:001.002
CONTENTS (Contd.)
18.

19.
20.

21.
22.

7/63

Program Translator
FAP • . • • •
FORTRAN II •
Operating Environment .. •
System Performance • • • • •
Generalized File Processing
Sorting • • . • • • • • • '
.Matrix Inversion • • • • •
Generalized Mathematical Processing
••••
Generalized Statistical Processing • • • • •
Physical Characteristics
• • • •
Price Ilata. . ... . . . . . . . . . . .

408:181
408:182
409:191
409:201. 011
409:201.1
409:201. 2
409:201. 3
409:201.4
409:201.5
409:211
409:221

409:011.100
IBM 7094
Introduction

I NTRODUCTI ON
§

\

011.

The IBM 7094 is a large-scale data processing system with the same general characteristics as the 709 and 7090 general purpose computers. Comparative throughput capacities
indicate that the 7094 is about twice as fast as its equivalent 7090 system. Because only lowspeed printers, card readers, and punches can be connected to the system, 7094 systems
are magnetic-tape-oriented and usually supported by off-line IBM 1401 data processing systems. The 1401 systems perform card-to-tape and tape-to-printer or tape-to-card operations in addition to some editing for the 7094. Magnetic tape units can be switched between
the 7094 and 1401 systems. Monthly rentals for two-channel, eight-tape 7090 systems start
at approximately $66,000 (see System Configuration, 409:031).
The 7094 transmits and receives data via a modified 7606 Multiplexor, which timeshares the data flow between the 32, 768-word core storage unit and either the processor or
data channels. These data are transferred in parallel in units of 36 - bit words. The multiplexor determines which unit requires access to storage most urgently and grants that unit
access. In general, a processor request is less urgent than a data channel request, because
the channel controls mechanical equipment, such as magnetic tape units, which have a fixed
demand cycle.
The 7094 central processor has a basic cycle time of 2 microseconds, which is an
increase of almost 10 per cent over that of the 7090. When accessing instructions from evennumbered locations that do not involve double-precision floating point instructions, the processor can accept two instructions during one instruction cycle. The first instruction is
executed immediately while the next is held in the register which is normally used for one
half of a double precision floating point operand. In most cases, storage access is thus saved
for the subsequent instruction, which is actually used to execute the current instruction.
Since most of the commands require 2 cycles, speeds of nearly 300, 000 instructions
per second are possible. Multiplication and division speeds of the 7094 are almost 3 times
those of the 7090, or approximately 120,000 and 65,000 operations per second, respectively.
Therefore, applications demanding heavy use of multiply'and divide operations use a larger
share of central processor time than those involving primarily data movement and simple
arithmetic operations. In applications that involve throughput of large volumes of data, the
system tends to be speed-limited by the input-output facilities.
The processor uses binary arithmetic for both fixed and floating point operations.
Fixed point arithmetic is performed on 35 bits, plus Sign and 2 overflow bits. Floating point
operands have either 8- or 16-decimal-digit precision, and can assume positive or negative
values between 10+38 and 10- 38 , including zero. This instruction repertoire includes double
precision load and store instructions, which transfer data between an even-numbered storage
address and that address plus one and the accumulator and multiplier-quotient registers,
respectively. Failure to observe this addressing convention results in an interrupt (see
409:051. 33).
Three "table look-at" instructions in the repertoire are very useful for code conversions, radix conversions, six-bit BCD addition and subtraction, and simple editing. Address
modification is facilitated by three decrementing index registers. These registers use two' s
complement arithmetic rather than the absolute value and Sign arithmetic of the processor.
However, a set of index register modification instructions compensate for this incompatibility
of two types of arithmetic. In programs which use many indices for varied loop control, more
indexing is required than three index registers can provide. As a result, the storing and
reloading of the index registers may be required comparatively often. These operations require both data and program storage, and add a non-productive burden which, although small,
is unusual in a large system of this type.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

IBM 7094

409:011.101
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)

The instruction repertoire of the 7094 is comprehensive and varied, and includes five
types of logical operators, single- and partial-word data transfers, input-output instructions
(used to start data channels and select input-output units), and an extensive set of test and
conditional transfer instructions. Interrupts (called traps by IBM) can occur when encountering: a transfer instruction, a 7040 or 7044 instruction, floating point underflow or overflow,
a 704 input-output instruction, or an external signal; and for certain data channel conditions.
A 7094 system can include any of 3 different types of data channels: the 7607 Data
Channels, which can control 729 Magnetic Tapes and peripheral unit-record equipment; the
7909 Data Channel,which can be connected to 7340 Hypertapes, 1301 Disk Units, and 7320
Drums; or the 7281 II Data Communications Channel, which can control up to 32 "real-time"
communication units. The 7281 II is different from the others in that it: is restricted to
one area of storage; can only be turned on or off; requires the Direct Data option and instructions; and has higher priority interrupts than the 7607 and 7909.
The 7607 and 7909 Data Channels are actually small processors which have program
and address counters, indirect addressing, and command registers. The function of these
units is to transmit data from the core store to an input-output unit, and vice versa. Data
transfers to and from the store are performed through parallel 36 - bit word circuits. In all
of the input-output units, data transfers are serial by character to or from a six-character
word. Both units can control scatter-read and gather-write operations, and skip entire data
blocks or parts of data blocks being read from an input-output unit.
The 7607 Data Channel can also have a Direct Data Connection added to it to permit
on-line storage-to-storage data transfers between 7040, 7044, and 7090 systems. The 7607
can act as a controller for connecting up' to ten 729 Magnetic Tape units, a printer, a card
reader, and a card punch.
The 7909 Data Channel has a more extensive command set than the 7607. These
commands give the 7909 the ability to handle many of the input-output unit conditions that
would require processor intervention with the 7607 Data Channel. The 7909 can be used for
input-output editing, but the processor can perform editing tasks more economically. The
7909 has a transmit command which transfers blocks of up to 32,768 words simultaneously
with other processing.
The software for the 7094 system that is supplied by IBM is rather extensive. Included in this software are the process oriented languages FORTRAN II and IV, COBOL, and
COMTRAN. Source statements in these languages are translated into machine code and into
F AP or IBMAP, which are the machine oriented languages for the system.
Problem oriented languages include: 9P AC for file maintenance and report generation,
IOCS for automatic input-output editing for formatting, various sort programs, and Disk and
Hypertape utility routines. Each program has its own monitor routine to permit processing
with a minimum of operator intervention. All of the software can be used as a part of the
IBSYS Processor Operating System, which permits input-output unit assignment and can call
the programs in the system, in addition to its normal monitor and maintenance functions.
The 7094 can accept nearly all 704, 709, 7040 and 7090 programs directly as compiled
on those systems. A special program, Compatibility II, is provided for 704 programs.
Because of the compatibility feature built into the 7094, very little interpretive running is required. Thus, programs generated for the other systems run proportionately faster on the
7094 than on the system they are generated for. Double-precision arithmetic, which give
the 7094 a large performance increase over the interpretive subroutines in the 7090 are
inserted by the FORTRAN program.
A wide range of routines for handling mathematical function routines and service and
utility routines, as well as many complete program systems, have been compiled and are
maintained by the SHARE users organization since it was formed by 704 users. The 7094
can accept nearly all of these programs directly.
~

3/63

I"'--~-U-ER-BA-CH~I~

409:021.100
.STAlIDAAD

II

REPORTS
ED
P

IBM 7094
Data Structure

DATA STRUCTURE

.2

§ 021.

.1

Type of Information

STORAGE LOCATIONS
Size

Pureose or Use

Word position:

36 or 72 bits

Row:
Column:

6 bits + parity
single column
code
24 words

basic addressable location in
core storage.
character on magnetic tape.
character on punched cards.

Group or "byte":
Band:
Record:
Record:
Cylinder:
File:

Reeresentation

Numeral: • • . . . .

Name of
Location

Unit Record:

INFORMATION FORMATS

punched card or its image in
core storage.
60r8bits+
a BCD char on band of a disk
surface.
parity bit
2,790 char max usable length of band in disk
store.
1 to 2,790 char related char in a band.
1 to N words
related words on mag tape.
40 bands
addressable group of bands.
1 to N records mag tape or disk store.

©

BCD char on mag tape or
disk.
card column.
Alphameric char: ••. BCD char on mag tape or
disk.
card column.
6 bits of word.
Fixed point number: . . sign bit plus 35 bits in
word.
Floating pOint number: sign bit plus 8 bit characteristic plus 27 bit fractional part in word.
Instruction:
1 word.
Data: • . . •
lor 2 words.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

409:031.100
•

STANDARD

_EDP
."

IBM 7094

REPORTS

System Confi gurati on

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

031 .

.1

6-TAPE AUXIUARY STORAGE SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION V
Deviations from Standard Configuration:

. card reader slower by 250 cards/min.
printer slower by 350 lines/min.
magnetic tapes faster by 11,700 char/sec.
floating point included.
no typewriter output.
$69, 960 per month.

Rental:

Equipment

Rental

1301 Modell
Disk Storage:
27, 900, 000 char.

$ 2,125

7631 Model 2
Disk Storage Control

835

7909 Data Channel

2,800

7302 Core Storage:
32, 768 words

17,500

7606 Multiplexor

3,950

7110 Instruction Processing Unit 16,350
7109 Arithmetic Sequence Unit
8,775
7151 Console Control Unit
1,225
7607 Model 1 Data Channel
7617 Console

4,275
225

711 Card Reader: 250 cards/min.

800

721 Card Punch: 100 cards/min.

600

716 Printer: 150 lines/min.

1,200

729 IT Magnetic Tape Units (6):
41,700 char/sec.

4,200

Power Supplies

1,600

'.

Total Rental:

$69,960

Optional Features Included: . . • . . . • . • . • . . • • • Cylinder Mode (Disk Storage).

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated

1/63

IBM 7094

409:031.200

§

031 .

.2

lO-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION VII B
Main Computer

Eguipment
7302 Core Storage:
32, 768 words

7606 Multiplexor

Rental

$17,500

3,900

7110 Instruction Processing Unit 16,350
8, 775
7109 Arithmetic Sequence Unit
1,225
7151 Console Control Unit
7607 Model 1 Data Channel
7617 Console

4,275
225

711 Card Reader:
250 cards/min.

800

716 Printer:
150 lines/min.

1,200

729 IV Magnetic Tape Units (4):
62,500 char/sec.

3,600

7607 Model 2 Data Channel
7617 Console

3,275
225

729 IV Magnetic Tape Units (4):
62,500 char/sec.

3,600

Power Supplies
Total Rental:

1,600
$66,325

Deviations f)Com Standard Configuration: .. . . . . . . . . . 19,500 words more storage.
printer not required.
card reader 150 cards/min. faster.
no input-output by typewriter.
Rental:

$ 66,325 per month.

Optional Features Included:

printer (required for operation of card reader).

!

1/63

~

A-U-ER-BA-CH-_-:-'

'-1

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§

409:031.201

031 .

.2

lO-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED) CONFIGURATION VII B (Contd.)
Auxiliary Computer (IBM 1401)
Equipment
Core Storage:
4, 000 positions
Processing Unit:
1401 Model C3
Console

........ .

2, 680

550

1403 Printer: 600 lines/min.

835

729 II Magnetic Tape Units (2):
15,000 or 41,667 char/sec.

1,400

Total Rental:

Rental:

$ - -

1402 Card Read-Punch
Reads:
800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

Optional Features

Deviations from Standard Configuration:

Rental

605

$ 6, 070

none.
$ 6, 070 per month.

Optional Features Included:

High - Low- Equal Compare.
Advanced Programming.
Read Punch Release.
Sense Switches.
Print Storage.
Early Card Read.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

409:031.300

§

IBM 7090

031 .

.3

2O-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION
Main Computer

vm B
Equipment
7302 Core Storage:
32, 768 words

7606 Multiplexor

7110 Instruction Proces sing Unit
7109 Arithmetic Sequence Unit
7151 Console Control Unit
7607 Model 3 Data Channel
7617 Console
711 Card Reader:
250 cards/min.

Rental

$17,500

3,900

16,350
8,775
1,225
4,360
225
800

716 Printer:
ISO lines/min.

1,200

729 VI Magnetic Tape Units (4):
90,000 char/sec.

3,800

7607 Model 4 Data Channel
7617 Console

3,360
225

729 VI Magnetic Tape Units (1:):
90,000 char/sec.

3,800

7909 Data Channels (2)

5,600

7640 Control

3,400

7340 Hypertape Drives (4):
170,000 char/sec.

5,200

7340 Hypertape Drives (4):
170,000 char/sec.
Power Supplies

5,200
1,600

$ 86,520
Total Rental
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . . . • 6, 100 words more storage.
printer not required.
card reader ISO/cards/min. faster.
3 fewer index registers.
no input-output by typewriter.
8 tapes 30, 000 char/sec. slower.
8 tapes 50,000 char/sec. faster.
Rental: . . . . . . . . .

$ 86,520 per month.

Optional Features Included:

printer (required for operation of card reader).

12/62

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

409:031.301

031 .

.3

20- TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION VIII B (Con tiL)
Auxiliary Computer (IBM 1401)
Eguipment
Core Storage:
8, 000 positions
Processing Unit:
1401 Model C4
Console

575

2,730

550

Printer: 600 lines/min.

835

Optional Features
Total Rental:

Rental:

$

Card Read-Punch
Reads:
800 cards/min.
Punches: 250 cards/min.

729 V Magnetic Tape Units (4):
60,000 char/sec.

Deviations from Standard Configuration:

Rental

3,000
855

$ 8,545

none.

$ 8,545 per month.

........ .

Optional Features Included:

High- Low- Equal Compare.
Advanced Programm ing.
Read Punch Release.
Sense Switches.
Print Storage.
Processing Overlap.
Early Card Read.

©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

409:041.100

.STANOARO
EDP
'[ro'lS

•

IBM 7094
Internal Storage
7302 Core Storage
INTERNAL STORAGE: 7302 CORE STORAGE

§ 041.

. 29

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:.

7302 Core Storage .

. 12

Basic Use:

working storage .

. 13

Description
The mM 7302 storage unit is used with the 7030,
7080, 7D9o, and 7094 systems. The unit is attached
to a 7094 through a 7606 Multiplexor. The 7302 has
a capacity of 32, 768 words of 36 bits each. Error
or check bits are not used. The unit does, however,
contain circuits that may be used for checking or as
an aid to servicing.

.282 Peak data rates
Cycling rates:
Unit of data: .
Conversion factor: •
Data rate: . . . . .

Reserved Storage
Purpose

DATA CAPACITY

.31

Module and System Sizes
Minimum Storage
Identity: ••
Words: . . .
Characters:
Instructions: .
Modules: • . .

7302.
32,768.
196,608.
32,768.
1.

.32

Rules for Combining
Modules: • . . . . . . not permitted.

.4

CONTROLLER

. 41

Identity: . . . .

.42

Connection to S)!:stem

Number of locations

I/O Control:
Transfer trapping: .
Floating point trap:
•2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Storage Medium: .

. 22

Physical Dimensions

6 to 36.

3.
2.

. magnetic core.

.421 On-line:

• 221 Magnetic core type storage
Core diameter: •
50 mils.
Core bore: .
30 mils.
Array size:. • •
72 bits by 128 bits by 128
bits.
80 inches by 36 inches by
70 inches.
• 23

Storage phenomenon:

. 24

Recording Permanence

• 241 Data erasable by
instructions: . .
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . •
.243 Data volatile:
• 244 Data permanent: •
.245 Storage changeable:
. 28

500,000 cps.
2 words.
36 bits/word.
36,000,000 bits/sec.

.3

Data is accessed in the store in 72 data bit groups.
In the 7094 system, the Data Channels take two
words ata time, and the central processor takes
two instructions at a time.
.16

Potential Transfer Rates

. magnetization.

yes.
no.
yes.
no.
no.

.43

7606 .
Multiplexor.

one •

Connection to Device

.43-1 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions: .
none.
.5

ACCESS TIMING

.51

Arrangement of Heads

.511 Number of stacks: .

one .

. 52

Simultaneous
Operations:. . . . . . none .

.53

Access Time Parameters and Variations

.531 For uniform access
Access time: .
Cycle time:. .
For data unit of:

0.55 f..L sec .
2.00 f..L sec.
2 words .

Access Technigues

. 281 Recording method: •
.282 Reading method:
• 283 Type of access:

..

coincident current.
sense wire •
uniform •

©

.6

CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . • none.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

409:041.700

§

IBM 7094

041.

.73

.7

PERFORMANCE

• 71

Data Transfer

With Self (Via. 7909): . . 41J. sec per word.
With Self (Via 7090):. . 4 IJ. sec per 2 words .
With Data Channels or
Processor: . . . . . . 21J. sec per 2 words.

Pair of storage units possible
With Self (Via 7909 Data
Channel):
yes.
With Self (Via 7090
Processor): .
yes.
With Data Channel or
yes.
Processor:

.72

Transfer Load Size
With Self (Via 7909):.
With Self (Via 7090): .
With Data Channel or
Processor:

12/62

Nwords.
2 words.
2 words.

Effective Transfer Rate

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Invalid address:
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:

Check or
Interlock

Action

not possible.
not possible.
none.
none.
none.
none.
data is lost. (see
409:111.4).

Reference to locked
area:

none

module restricted
store size.

409:051.100
.STANOARO

EDP
•

IBM 7094

REPORTS

Central Processor

CENTRAL PROCESSOR

§

051.

• 12

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . . . . . . . . Central Processor.
IBM 7094 Models I and II.

instruction. The maximum amount of time that could
be saved through this feature would be all of the instruction access time required for a string of instructions; however, this could only be realized if each
referenced operand were in the same bank as the instruction referencing it. Since such an arrangement
is almost impossible to achieve, it has been estimated
that an average of 40% of the instruction access time
will be eliminated by the overlap feature.

IBM 7110, 7111.
Instruction Processing Unit.

IBM 7109.
Arithmetic Sequencing Unit.
• 12

To show the overall increase in central processor
speed reSUlting from the decreased cycle time, the
reduced number of cycles for certain operations, and
the instruction time overlap, a sample problem was
run by the manufacturer on the 7094 Model I and
Model II. The Model II increased the throughput by
a factor of 1. 94. The sample problem had 22% of the
instructions indexed and had the following distribution of instructions:

Description
The 7094 Central Processor is upwards compatible
with the 7090 Central Processor. Its major differences are:
• There are two modes of indexing, with 7 index
registers or with 3 index registers (7090 compatible); they are chosen by the use of special
instructions.

38% load and store
13% fixed point arithmetic
15% floating point arithmetic
21% branches
13% other instructions.

o Operations are included to transfer complements

from index registers.
It

New operations are included to transfer double
words between the accumulator and core storage.

Specific comparisons of the internal speeds of the
7094 Model I and Model II are presented in Paragraphs
.41 and. 42 of this report section.

• Double length floating point operations are provided. Double length operands have an exponent in
each part; they must start in even addresses or
else a "trap" interrupt occurs when referenced.

An existing 7094 Model I system can be field
converted to a Model II system in 96 hours with a
$6, 000 monthly rental increase. An IBM 7090 system
can be field converted to a 7094 Model II system in
108 to 120 hours with a $12,000 monthly rental
increase.

o Access to instructions in odd locations can be ef-

fectively zero due to double word access, but not
for double length operations. (This applies to the
7094 Model I only. )
• Many instruction times have been reduced. Fixed
point addition is little altered; multiplication, division and floating point are approximately halved;
while the new double length floating point operations are about the same as single precision on the
7090.

Description (Contd. )

For a general description see Section 408:051.12
on the 7090 Central Processor.
• 13

Availability: . .

1

. 14

First Delivery:

October, 1962; field
conversion of 7090.

.• 2

PROCESSING FACILITIES

.21

0Eerations and Operands

7094 Model II

The recently announced 7094 Model II is completely
program-compatible with the 7094 Model!. Core
storage cycle time has been reduced from 2.0 microseconds to 1. 4 microseconds, and the number of
cycles required to perform several operations has
also been reduced.
The 7094 Model II core storage has been effectively
divided into two separate banks (odd and even). This
permits the instruction access time, for most instructions in a sequence, to be overlapped with the
execution time of the preceding instruction, thereby
reducing the total number of cycles required for the

© 1963

Operation and
Variation
Provision Radix
211 Fixed point
Add -subtract:

Size

automatic

binary

35 bits & Sign.

automatic
automatic

binary
binary

oto 35 bits & Sign.
35 bits & Sign.

automatic

binary

35 bits & Sign.

Multiply

shon:
Long:
Divide
Remainder:

by Auerbach Corporation and. BNA Incorporated

Revised 7/63

409:051.212

§

IBM 7094

051.

· 232 Instruction layout

.212 Floating point
Fraction
Add -subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:

*

*

*

automatic

binary

automatic

binary

automatic

binary

27 or 54
bits & sign
27 or 54
bits & sign
27 or 54
bits & sign

Charac-.
~
8 bits.

Part

Operation

Size (bits)

3

Flag Not
Tag Address
Used*
3
15
2
4

8 bits.
8 bits.

*Both normalized aud unnormalized.

* Not used for most instructions.

.213 Boolean
AND:
Inclusive OR:
Exclusive OR:
NOT:

binary
binary
binary
binary

automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic

36
36
36
37

bits.
bits.
bits.
bits.

36
36
36
36

bits.
bits.
bits.
bits.

· 233 Instruction parts
Name
Operation:
Flag:

.214 Comparison
Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:

automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic

•215 Code translation
Provision
From
t

Standard subroutine
Standard subroutine

any code
card image
6-bit BCD

Tag:.
Address:
Count: ..

To

Size

any code
BCD
card image

six 6-bit char.
36 bits or 6 char.
36 bits or 6 char.

t Special tables are specified to be used with convert instructions.

. 216 Radix conversion
automatic
standard subroutine

6 -bit BCD
any radix

any radix
6-bit BCD

20 bits.
36 bits or 6 chars.

.234 Basic address structure: 1 address (sequential).
· 235 Literals
none.
Arithmetic: . . . "
Comparisons and
none.
tests: . . . .
Incrementing
modifiers:
0 to 32,·767 .
Setting modifiers:
0 to 32,767.
.236 Directly addressed operands
.2361 Internai storage
Minimum Maximum ~

t Special tables are specified to be used with convert instructions.

· 217 Edit format
Suppress Zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Insert character:
Float character:
Protection:

Provision

Comment

semi -automatic
semi -automatic
semi-automatic
semi -automatic
semi -~utomatic
semi-automatic
semi -automatic

separate sequences
using convert instructions and/or
logical instructions with appriate tables.

.218 Table look-up:.
.219 Others
Test: . . . . .

.22

six 6-blt
characters.

none.
1 to 36 bits.

Core Storage:

size
3 bits

Magnetic Disc:

1 word

· 223 Operand size
determination:

binary magnitude and sign.
-; mayor may not be
equal, depends on
instructions.

+ or

36, 18, 15, 3 or 1 bits;
variable 0 to 36 bits in
multiply and divide, and
also six 6-bit characters.

Instruction Formats

.231 Instruction structure: . 1 word.

7/63 Revised

size
entire
storage t
entire
storage

*

acceSSible
entire
$torage.
entire
storage.

: only 2790 unless RC Qisc option is included.
t only two words unless 7909 Data Channel included.

· 2362 Increased address
capacity:
. 237 Address indexing
:.2371 Number of methods:
,.2372 Names: . . . .
.2373 Indexing rule: .

Special Cases of Operands

.221 Negative numbers: .
. 222 Zero: • . . . .

· 23

Size

Purpose
operation code.
indirect addressing
specification.
index register
specification.
operand address.
variable length operands
and counts .

'.2374 Index specification: .

none .
1.
indexing (can be multiple
indexes).
the CCll:ltents of the
indicated index registers
are ORed together then
subtracted from the address of the instruction
to form the effective
address .
each of the index bits specifies an index register.

.2375 Number of potential
indexers: . • . . .
3.
.2376 Addresses which' can be indexed:
Type of address
Application
After ESNT
instruction: .
o to 16,383.
After LSNT instruction, normal
condition:
0 to 32,767 .
. 2377 Cumulative indexing:. via indirect addressing and
EXC instruction.

CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§

409:051.2378

051.

. 2378 Combined index and
step: . . . . . . .
.238 Indirect addressing
.2381 Recursive: .
.2382 Designation:.

yes.
IA bits

EXC
instructions
yes.
operation
code EXC
with or
without
IA bits.
n level, will
not stop
until another instruction is
encountered.

no
2 bits in the
instruction.

.2383 Control: • . . . . . . automatic,
one level
only.

· 2384 Indexing with
indirect addressing:
· 239 Stepping:. . . . .
· 2391 Specification of
increment:
. 2392 Increment sign: .
. 2393 Size of increment:
· 2394 End value:
· 2395 Combined step and
test: . . . . . . .

. 24

yes; possible before and
after going to the
indrect address.
index registers.

Size in
bits

Program
usage

38

arithmetic unit.

1

36

Index:

if

15

Program counter:

1

15

Sense lights:
Sense switches:
Storage register:
Instructions:

4
6

1

1
1
36
18

1

36
36

arithmetic unit
& input -output.
address modification.
specified instruction
address.
save condition.
accept condition.
buffer with store.
shift counter.
holds instruction.
save condition.
enter data.

Total
number of Physical
locations form

Access
time,
I'sec

Cycle
time,
I'sec
Model I Model II
--2-~

register

0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
1.32
0.33

2
2
2
2

1.4.
1.4.
1.4.
1.4.

1
1
1

register
register
register
flip-flops
switch
register
register
register

2

1.4.

0.33

2

1.4.

1

36 switches 1.32

.1
3

i
4
'6

.311 Number of sequence
control facilities: . . 1 sequential.
.314 Special sub- sequence counters
Number:
1.
Purpose: . . . .
counts shifts (not accessible by program).
.315 Sequence control
1 word.
step size: . . .
.316 Accessibility to
change, save in index, or
routines: . . .
store.
· 317 Permanent or optional
none.
modifier: .
.32

Look-Ahead:

• 33

Interruption

Other:

1

Accumulator:
MultiplierQuotient:
Index:
Program counter:
Sense lights:
Sense switches:
Storage register:
Instruction:
Indicator:
7151 Console
Keys:

Instruction Sequencing __...

In-out controllers: .
Storage access: .
Processor errors: .

Accumulator:
MultiplierQuotient:

.242 Category of
storage

.31

yes.

Number of
locations

Indicator:
7151 Console Keys:

SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES

.331 Possible causes
In-out units: .

in stepping instruction.
positive.
o to 32,767.
value of increment.

Special Processor Storage

.241 Category of
storage

.3

© 1963

one instruction (40 to 45
per cent of the time is
average).

external signal.
tape error .
end-of-file.
704 I/O instruction in copy
trap mode.
direct data.
when free.
none.
floating pOint underflow;
overflow in floating trap
mode.
on encountering transfer of
control instruction while
in trapping mode.

· 332 Control by routine
Individual control:

for I/O mask and
instruction.
Method: • . .
request by instruction.
external signal trap is
Restriction:
always active and may
cause timing conflicts.
some interrupts use
common locations.
• 333 Operator control: . . . can clear or set traps
manually.
334 Interruption conditions: only when specifically requested (floating point
trap mode is normally
on).
high to low classes of interrupts; floating point,
direct data, external
Signal, data channel.
.335 Interruption process
Disabling interruption: first interrupt in any class
disables all interrupts
except higher classes.
Registers saved:
program counter.
fixed location, depends on
Destination:
cause.
.336 Control methods
Determine cause:
indication stored in a
particular location.
Enable interruption:
instruction.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised 7/63

IBM 7094

409:051.340

§

.42

051.

Processor Performance in ,",sec

.421 For random addresses
.34

Multi-running

.341 Method of control: .
.342 Maximum number of
programs: . . . .
.343 Precedence rules: •
. 344 Program protection
Storage: • . . . .

In-out units: . . . .
Maximum separate
sets: . . . . •
. 35

Multi - sequencing:

own coding.
own coding.
words 0 to 16, 383 can be
used, with ~ords 1~'-384
to 32, 767 unavailable by
ESNT instruction.
own cOding.
own coding.
see paragraph. 344.

.4

PROCESSOR SPEEDS

.41

Instruction Times in fJ.sec

411 Fixed point
Model I
Add-subtract: .
Multiply: . . •
Divide: . • • .
Model II
Add-subtract: .
Multiply:
Divide: . . . .
.412 Floating point
Model I
Add - subtract:
Multiply: ••
Divide: • • •
Model II
Add - subtract:
Multiply:
Divide: •

Model I
c =a +b:
b = a +b:
Sum N items: .
c =ab:
c = ajb: •
Model II
c = a +b:
b =a +b:
SumN items: .
c =ab:
c =ajb: . . . •

own coding.

4
4 to 10 (10 avg. )
6 to 16 (16 avg. )
2.8
2.8 to 5.6 (5.6 avg.)
4.2 to 8.4 (8.4 avg. )
Single Precision
4 to .24 (6 avg. )
4 to 10 (10 avg.)
6 to 18 (18 avg.)

Double
4 to 26
4 to 22
6 to 38

Precision
(8 avg. )
(22 avg. )
(38 avg. )

2.8 to 16.8
(4.2 avg.)
2.8 to 5.6
(5.6 avg.)
2.8 to 8.4
(8.4 avg.)

2.8 to 17.2
(5.6 avg.)
2.8 to 12.6
(12.6 avg.)
2.8 to 18.2
(18.2 avg.)

.422

Fixed
point

Floating point
Single
Double
precision precision

10
10
3N
16
20

12
12
5N
16
22

18
18
9N
32
48

7.0
7.0
2. IN
9.8
14.0

8.4
8.4
3.5N
11.2
14.0

12.6
12.6
6.3N
19.6
25.2

14
14
6N
24

22
22
ION
56

11. 2
11. 2
4.2N
16.8

15.4
15.4
7N
28.0

arrays of data
Model I
12
ci =ai + b j : . .
12
bj = ai + bf ..
Sum N items: .
6N
c =c+a·b·:.
24
Model II 1 J
Ci = ai + bf .
9.8
b j =ai + b j : .
9.8
Sum N items: .
4.2N
c =c +aibf . . . . • 14.0
.423 Branch based on comparison
Model I
Numeric data: •
7N
Alphabetic data:
7N
.424 Switching
Unchecked: .
4
6
Checked: . .
List search:
6N
L"Jl.

.425 Format control per character
Model I
Unpack card image
to BCD:.
•••
71
BCD to binary. • ••
8.3
Compose (without
radix conversion): • 6.0
.426 Table look up per comparison
Model I
For a match:.
•• 12(N + 1)
For least or greatest: 12(N + I}
For interpolation
point:. • • • • • • 12(N + 1)

Model II

4.9N
4.9N
2.8
4.2
4.2N

Model II
49.7
5.8
4.2
Model n
8.4(N+ 1)
8.4(N + 1)
8.4{N

+ 1)

.413 Additional allowance for

. 414

.415

.416
. 417

Indexing: . . . . . .
Indirect addressing:
Re -complementing:
Control
Compare: . . . . . .
Branch: . . . . . . .
Compare and branch:
Counter control
Step: . . . . .
Step and test: .
Test: .
Edit: . .
Convert:

.418 Shift:. .

7/63 Revised

Model I
none
2
none

Model II
none.
1. 4.
none .

4
2
4

2.8
1.4
2.8

2
2
2
none
4 to 16
(16 avg.)
1 to 7

1.4
1.4
1.4
none .
2.8tol1.2
(11. 2 avg.)
1.4to4.9.

.427 Bit indicators
Set bit in separate
location: . . . .
Set bit in pattern:
Test bit in
separate location:
Test bit in pattern:.
Test AND for B bits:.
Test OR for B bits:. .
.428 Moving, N words
Using XMT (Via 7909
Data Channel): . . .
Using 4 instructions:.
Using 2N instructions:

Model I

Model II

2
2

1.4
1.4

2
4
4
4

1.4
2.8
2.8
2.8

6 + 2N
2 + 5N
4N

4.2 + 1.4N
1.4 + 3. 5N
2.8N

CENTRAL PROCESSOR

§

409:051.500

051.

.5

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

Error

Check or
Interlock

Overflow:
check
Underflow (float-pt): check
Zero divisor:
check
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:

not possible.
none
none.
check
none.
none.

Action
sets indicator.
sets indicator.
sets indicator and/or
stops processor.
attempts operation.
modulo memory size.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Revised 7/63

409: 091. 100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP

IBM 7094
729 Magnetic Tape Units

REPORTS

INPUT-OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS

§

.12

091.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Description

.•...

Model

Tape speed,
inchesLsec

II

75

IV

112.5

V

75

VI

112.5

In most installations, the 7094 system uses magnetic tape as the primary input-output mode. A
smaller computer such as the 1401 is usually used
to transcribe information from cards to tape, tape
to printer, etc. Usually some formatting is performed by this smaller computer. Normal library
and system routines are also held on tape, and one
tape station (channel A, Tape 1) is reserved for a
system tape.

Magnetic Tape Unit
729 II, IV, V, VI.

These tape units are used in the IBM 1401, 1410,
7040, 7070 and 7080 series systems as well as in
the 709, 7090 and 7094. They use a standard reel
and half-inch tape compatible with the 7330 and 727
tape units. The only significant differences among
the four models are in recording densities and tape
speeds. These are summarized in the following
table:
Density
char/inch
200
556
200
556
200
556
800
200
556
800

The only differences between the use of these units
on the IBM 7090 and 7094 is in the demands made on
the storage and simultaneous limitations. See paragraph 409:091. 63 and 409:111.4.
Up to ten tape units may be connected to each 7607
Data Channel in a 7094 system. Tape operations
may be performed parallel with internal processing;
however, in normal operation, tapes attached to a
single channel cannot be involved in simultaneous
data transmission. Any number of non-data transmitting operations may occur simultaneously. It is
usually economical to use the highest density of a
given model in order to achieve the maximum transmission rates; however, compatibility with other
machines (such as the 704) may dictate the occasional use of lower density settings.
The 7094 input-output command system permits
scatter read and gather write capabilities as well as
selection or deletion of recorded information. Efficient use of the command system requires a fairly
sophisticated level of programming, but the timesharing of input-output and elementary scatter or
gather coding is understood by most programmers
and results in a considerable saving on large volume
input-output tasks.

©

• 13

Availability: .

.14

First Delivery
729
729
729
729

Peak transfer
.2
rate, char/sec
15,000
41,667
22,500
62,500
15,000
41,667
60,000
22,500
62,500
90,000

Description (Contd.)

.21

November, 1959.
November, 1959.
May, 1962.
May, 1962.

II:
IV:
V:
VI:

PHYSICAL FORM

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the
head:
.212 Reservoirs
Number:
Form:
Capacity:
.213 Feed drive:
.214 Take-up drive:

..

.22

12 to 15 months •

pinch roller friction.
2.
vacuum •
about 7 feet.
motor.
motor.

Sensing and Recording Systems

• 221 Recording system:
• 222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system: .

magnetic head •
magnetic head.
two- gap head provides
read-after-write
checking.

· 23

Multiple Copies:

multiple copies may be
obtained by dialing two
or more tapes on a given
channel to the same
number. This procedure
is not recommended.

· 24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: •
Method of use:
Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

J962 by Auerbach Carporotion and BNA Incorporated

recording.
1.

7.
1 row at a time.
sensing.
0.3 inch.
1.

7.
1 row at a time.
12/62

409:091.300

§

IBM 7094

091.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium: • •

plastic tape with magnetizable surface.
magnetization.

. 312 Phenomenon:
.32

• 322 Parallel by:
• 324 Track use
Data:
Redundancy check: •
Timing:
Control signals:
Unused:
Total:
.325 Row use
Data:
Redundancy check:
Timing:
Control signals:
Unused:
Inter-block gap:
Inter-file gap:
Erased .gap (to skip
flaw area):
.33

.34

Coding:

1 to N rows at 200, 556,
or (models V and VI)
800 rows per inch (see
409:091.431).
7 tracks.

Model 2:
Model 3:
Model 4:

6.
1.

o (self-clocking).

O.
O.

7.
1 to N.
1.

O.

o (record and segment

727:

.44

Data Transfer Control

.

.441 Size of load:
.442 Input-Output areas:
.443 Input-Output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control:

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

.42

• . •

12/62

none.
yes; scatter read and
gather write, controlled
by channel commands.
automatic.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

colwnn binary as in core
with odd parity redundancy check.
binary coded decimal (BCD)
as in Data Table No. 4
with even parity check.

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
• 512 Block demarcation
Input:
Output:

Code translation
.52

Data Channel.
7607, Models 1, 2, 3, 4.
(Modified)

.521 Input:

• • • . • ••

.523 Stepping:
• 524 Skipping:

up to 8 data channels with
a maximum of ten tape
drives each, (see
409:101.12).

1 to N words in block.
1 to N blocks in files.
0.75 inch inter-record gap.
3.75 inch inter-file gap.
0.75 inch end of transmission.
3.75 inch written by
instruction.

Input-Output Operations

0.50 inch.
2, 400 feet per reel.
25 feet.
25 feet.

Connection to System

•421 On-line: • • . • ••

each word.

5.75 inch.

.522 Output: • • • . . •

.4

1 to Nwords •
core storage.

.446 Synchronization:

Physical Dimensions

• 351 Overall width:
• 352 Length:
Lellder:
Trailer:

ten 729 n/IV, one each 711,
716, 712.
ten 729 n/IVIVlVI, one
each 711, 716, 712 •
ten 729 n/IV •
ten 729 n/IVIVIVI.

marks are optional).
gaps.
0.75 inch.
3.75 inch.

matched, low recording
density only.
matched, low recording
density only.

7330:

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller
Modell:

Format Compatibility
Other device
or system

.35

.43

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:

.422 Off-line:
Associated eqUipment: may be switched to another
channel, another computer,
or an off-line auxiliary
unit either manually or by
means oi the optional 7830
switching feature and 7155
Switch Control Console .

.525 Marking:
• 526 Searching:

•

forward only.
read until either N words
or end-of-record or read
N words skipping over
end-of-record gaps .
end-of-file gap always
terminates reading •
write N words followed by
end-of-record.
erase gap.
write end-oi-file gap •
non-transmit channel commands used to skip N
words during reading.
one block backward .
one block forward.
one file backward •
inter block or inter file
gap •
none.

INPUT-OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
§

091.

.53

Code Translation:

.54

Format Control
Control:
Format
alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Recording
density:
Section sizes:

.55

program.
densities (2 or 3)
no.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
yes.

Control Operations
Disable:
Request
interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind: ••
Unload:.
•

.56

code (binary or BCD)
selected by program;
translations are automatic.

409:091.530
.622 Important parameters
Models
Name
VI
IV
V
II
Density
(char/inch): 200 or 566
200, 556, or SOO
Tape speed
inches/
sec):
75.
112.5
75.
112.5
Start time
(msec)
read:
10.5
6.7
10.5
6.7
write:
7.5
5.0
7.5
5.0
Stop time
(msec)
read:
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
write:
5.1
3.S
5.1
3.S
Full rewind
time (min):
1.2
0.9
1. 2
0.9
Gaps block
(inches):
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
Gaps file
(inches):
3.75
3.75
3.75
3.75
.623 Overhead
Gap crossing time
(msec):
Block:.
•
File:
.624 Effective speeds
Models II and V
200 char/inch:

yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes.
yes.

556 char/inch:

Testable Conditions
Disabled: ••
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly
exhausted:
Busy
controller:
End of medium
marks:

Models IV and VI
200 char/inch:

yes.
yes.
yes.

556 char/inch:
Model V
SOO char/inch:
Model VI
SOD char/inch:

yes (25 feet).
yes.
no.

.63

Model II and IV
10.
50 ..

V and VI
6.67.
33.33.

15, OOON/(N + 150) chari
sec.
41, 667N/(N + 417) chari
sec.
22, 500N/(N + 150) chari
sec.
62, 500N/(N + 417) chari
60, 000N/(N+600) char/sec.
90, 000N/(N+600) char/sec.

Demands on System
Average
Component Condition msec per word Percentage

.6

PERFORMANCE

.62

Speeds

.621 Nominal or peak speed
Model II:
Model IV:
Model V:
Model VI:

Core
storage:

15,000 or 41, 667 char/sec.
22,500 or 62,500 char/sec.
15,000, 41,667, or 60,000
char/sec.
22, 500, 62, 500, or 90, 000
char/sec.

©

15.0
{0.17S
22.5 KC
KC tapel
tape
0.222
41. 7 KC tape
0.400
60.0KCtape 0.002(0.5+A+C) 0.556
62.5 KC tape
0.600
90.0 KC tape
0.S49

Note: A = number of indirect addresses per word
t;ransferred (avg 0)
C = number of channel commands per word
transferred (small)

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

409:091.700
§

IBM 7094

091.

.7

.71

.731 Volwne handled

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

Adjustments
Adjustment

Method

Recording
density:
Densities
option:

.72

One reel
Words/record
167 (about
1,000 char)
20

Comment

switch

selects 1 of 2 densities.

switch

selects any pair of densities
(models V and VI only),
(see 409:101.12), 200/
556, 556/800, 200/800.

Other Controls
Function
Address
selection:
Load
rewind:
Unload:

Form

12/62

20

20

50

40

50

Note: 1 word

,8

= 6 char.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

button

lowers tape into reservoirs
and rewinds tape to load
point,
removes tape from reservoirs and raises upper
portion of head assembly.

Recording:
Reading:

Loading and Unloading

Density
800
556
1,843,000 2,350,000
words,
words
498,000
548,400
words.
words
960,000
872,000
words.
words
600,000
542,000
words
words.
926,000 1,036,000
words
words.

1.0 to 1.5 mins.
tape unit needs to be stoppel.
,734 Optimwn reloading period
Models II & V: ,
6 min,
Models IV & VI:
4 min.

Error

ring permits writing.

200
751,000
words
384,000
words
548,000
words
408,000
words
572,000
words

,732 Replenishment
time:', .' ••

selects unit address 0-9.

button

20

40

dial

File
protection: ring on
reel
.73

Comment

Records/file
1

Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Recording level:

Check or
Interlock
lateral parity
lateral & longitudinal
parity
not possible.
not possible.
yes
reflective spot or
tape mark
yes
interlock
dual level signal
strength check

Action
indicator & alarm
indicator &' alarm

see reading.
indicator.
halts tape drive,
stalls processor.
indicator & alarm

409:092.100

_STANDARD
ED:!?
•

IBM 7094

REPORTS

Input-Output
Hypertape

INPUT-OUTPUT: HYPERTAPE

§

092.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Description

The automatic Cartridge Loader feature can operate
under program control. It accommodates one cartridge. When the change tape command is given, the
tape cartridge being used is unloaded to a discharge
station, then the waiting cartridge is loaded. The
operation requires about 30 seconds. This feature
helps eliminate operator set-up delays, especially
when using an automatic run-scheduling program.

Hypertape drive.
7340.

The IBM 7340 Hypertape drive is available for use
with the 7074, 7080, 7090 and 7094 systems.

Whenever a tape is rewound, unloaded, or the drive
is not ready for use, an "attention indicator" is set.
This indicator is program testable (as are many
other conditions, e. g., beginning or end of tape).
Indicators on each drive can be lit by the program
to inform the operator. These are Res·erved,
Change Cartridge (set automatically after any unload
command), File Protect, and the Check light, which
is used to call the operator's attention and not to
signal hardware errors automatically.

The only difference in the use of these units in the
IBM 7094 from their use in the 7090 is in the demands on the storage and simultaneous operations.
See paragraphs 409:091. 63 and 409:111.4.
Up to 170, 000 characters per second may be written
on or read from the one-inch wide, 1, 800-foot tape,
of which 1,750 feet is usable. The effective speed
for 1, 000 character blocks is 100, 000 characters
per second. The 7094 may record data on eight of
the ten tape tracks at a density of 1, 511 characters
per inch. Two of the eight used tracks contain codes
which automatically correct all single and most
double-bit errors. The tape may be read forward or
backward (optional feature) at a rate of 112.5 inches
per second. Because of a short (0.45 inch) interblock gap, average access time to a block is 4.2
milliseconds compared to 7.3 milliseconds for the
729 IV or VI. Rewinding speed is 225 inches per
second but tapes may be dismounted without rewinding.

Hypertape drives can be connected to a 7094 through
a 7640 Hypertape Control, wilich is connected to two
7909 Data Channels (or if Data Channel Switches are
used, any two switch legs) and thence to the 7606
multiplexer. The 7640 has two separate channels
which can each accommodate 10 Hypertape drives.
If each 7640 channel is connected to a 7909 Data
Channel, it can read tape on one channel and write
tape on the other channel. However, read-read or
write-write operations are not possible because the
7640 has only one set each of read and write equipment.

The Hypertape contains three reflective strips instead of the usual two. Two of these, beginning-oftape and end-of-tape occur on other IBM tapes; however, it is not possible to cause the Hypertape to
move beyond these marks. A third spot, called the
end-of-tape warning, occurs 40 feet before the endof-tape and may be sensed by the 7094 program in
either read or write mode.

Optional Feature
Automatic Cartridge Loader: Reduces time lost
during tape changes by automatically unloading one
Hypertape cartridge and loading another under manual or program control. Maximum time for a complete unload and load cycle is 30 seconds. The
loader is mounted on top of the Hypertape Drive.

Another feature of the 7340 which differs from other
IBM units is the setting, by program, of a file protect condition. Program removal of file protection
is not possible and may only be accomplished with
the tape cartridge removed from the unit.
Only tape cartridges can be used with the Hypertape
drive. Supply and take-up reels holding 1,800 feet
of tape are enclosed in a sealed cartridge that
measures about 17 by 10 by 2 inches and weighs
about 8 pounds. The operator loads a reel of tape
by raising the top cover, sliding the cartridge into
place, lowering the cover, and depressing the loadunload button. After the tape reels engage the drive
mechanism, the tape is then automatically positioned
for use. Unloading is accomplished by reversing
the pro<::edure.•

©

Description (Cont'd)

Optional features on the 7909 Data Channel (see
408:102) can be provided to enable the use of backward reading, and conversion of 6-bit BCD code.
. 14

First Delivery: . . . . 1963 •

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

..211 Drive past the head: .

1962 by Auerbach Corparation and BNA incorporated

non-coated surface of tape
is held against single
capstan by vacuum action
of reservoirs.

12/62

IBM 7094

409:092.212
§

.35

092.

. 212 Reservoirs
Number: •
Form: •.
Capacity: .
. 213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive:.
.22

vacuum columns.
about 4 feet.
motor .
motor.

; 351 Overall width: • . .
· 352 Length:. . . . . . •
• 353 Maximum margins
Left:
Right: . . . . •
.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: • . . .

.42

Connection to System

magnetic head •
magnetic head .
two-gap heads provides
read-after-write
checking.

.421 On-line: . . . . . . .

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: .
Stacks: . • . . .
Heads/ stack:. .
Method of use: .

recording.

Use of station: •
Distance: . . .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: .

sensing.
0.3 inch.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

. 31

Form of Storage

1.

10.
1 row at a time.

.312 Phenomenon: .

10.
1 row at a time.

.422 Off-line: • • . . • . .

• 322 Parallel by:
.323 Bands: . .
.324 Track use
Data: . .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: • . . . ;
Control signals:
Unused: .
Total: .
.325 Row use
Data: .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: • . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: . . •
Gap: . . . .
Tape mark:.

plastic tape with magneti~ble surface.
magnetization.

1 to N rows at I, 511 rows
per inch.
10 tracks.
1.

6.
2.

o(self clocking).

one 7640 (containing two
tape channels) connected
to two 7909s (or two
#3224 Data Channel
Switches, on one or two
7909 Data Channels) and
connected to 7606 ..
Note: 7909 requires special option to read backwards on Hypertapes.
none.

.43

Connection to Device

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load: . . . .
. 442 Input- output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access: • . . . .
· 444 Input- output area
lockout: . . .
. 445 Table control: . .

1 to Nwords •
core storage .
each word .

none .
yes, scatter-read and
gather-write, with separate channel commands
for each field of data (see
408:109).
.446 Synchronization:. • . . automatic.

O.
2.
10.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

1 to N.
O.
O.

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation:

1 to Nwords.
gap on tape write command.

o.

O.
0.45 inch.
3,75 inches.

Coding:......... Binary 6 bit/row as in core .
BCD 6 bit/row as in Data
Code Table No. 4
(optional).
Only with Hypertape drives
on other IBM 7074, 7080,
7090 and 7094 systems.

12/62

Hypertape Control.
7640.

.431 Devices per controller: 20; up to 10 to each 7909
Channel or 3224 Switch.
.432 Restrictions:. . . . . . none .

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:

. 33

25 feet.
25 feet .

1.

.44
.311 Medium: . . .

• 32

1. 0 inch.
1,800 feet per cartridge.

Sensing and Recording Systems

. 221 Recording system: .
. 222 Sensing system: .
.223 Common system:

• 24

2.

Physical Dimensions

.52

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input:. . . . . . . . . . read one block forward or
(optional; see 408:109.12)
backward into core storage area(s) specified by
one or more channel read
commands.
• 522 Output: . . • . . . . . . write one block forward
from core storage area(s)
specified by one or more
channel write commands.

INPUT-OUTPUT: HYPERTAPE
092.
· 523 Stepping:

409:092.523

§

• 524 Skipping:
· 525 Marking:
· 526 Searching:
• 53 Code Translation:

• 54

Suppress zeros:
Insert point: . .
Insert spaces: .
Recording density:.
Section sizes: . . .

• 63

program.
two.
yes; scatter-read and
gather-write.
no.
no.

Demands on System
Component:
Condition: .
m. sec per word: .
Percentage:

core storage.
reading or writing.
0.002(0.5+ C + A).
5.8 (1 + C + A); (see also
408:111.4).
A:
number of indirect addresses per word
transferred.
C: • • • . . • . . . . . number of commands
obeyed in Data Channel
per word transferred •

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:...... none.

• 72

Other Controls

!lO.

no.
yes.

disabled after unloading.
yes, priority signal.
no.
binary or optional BCD.
yes.
yes.
· 73

yes.
yes.

Function

Form

Comment

Address selection:
Start key:

dial
button

Stop key:

button

Load -unload button:

button

Rewind:

button

selects unit address 0 through 9.
makes unit available to computer.
removes unir from computer
control: stops any operation in
progress.
loads if cartridge in unload
status.
indicates rewind if tape not in
ready (available to computer).

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Cartridge:

Testable Conditions
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes, 40 feet from end-oftape mark.
Busy controller: .
yes.
Beginning of tape mark: yes.
End of tape mark:
yes.
yes.
Not ready: . . . . . .
yes.
Not loaded: • . . . . .
Correction occurred:
yes.
Uncorrected error:
yes.
Code check: .
yes.
yes.
Write failure: . . .
yes.
Timing error: •.•
Forward or backward:. yes.
yes.
Attention required:
File protection on: •
yes.
Disabled: •.
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:

Capacity
1, 800 feet; for 1, 000 row
blocks, 14, 000, 000
characters.
.732 Replenishment time: •• O. 5 to 1. 5 min.
tape drive needs to be
stopped; however, if cartridge loader is employed,
tapes can be placed in
loader at any time and
changed under program
control.
· 734 Optimum reloading
3.1 mins.
period: . . • • . .
.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:

none •
none.
check
reflective spots

Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Excessive skew:
Circnit failure:

check
disconnect
check
check

Speeds

. 621 Nominal or peak speed:
. 622 Important parameters
Recording density: .
Tape speed:
Start time: • . . •
Stop time:
Full rewind time:
Rewind speed: .
Inter- block gap:
Tape mark: . . •

170,000 char/sec .
1,511 rows/inch.
112.5 inches/sec.
3.0 m. sec maximum.
3.0 m. sec maximum.
1. 5 minutes.
225 inches/sec.
O. 45 inche s/ sec.
3.75 inches.

©

Check or
Interlock
read -after-write
dual row parity
dual-ro w parity

Recording:

.62

4.3 m. sec/block.
170, OOON/(N + 714) .

Control Operations
Disable: . . • . . .
Request interrupt: •
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload: . . . .
Enter file protect
status: . . . . .
Change Cartridge:

.56

· 623 Overhead: . . . .
• 624 Effective speeds:

matched.
automatic with optional
BCD feature.

Format Control
Control: • . . .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:

• 55

step one block forward or
backward.
step forward or backward
to end-of-file mark.
erase 8 inches (to step over
defective tape areas).
skip N words or records
when reading.
inter- block gap.
end-of-file gap.
none.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Action
indicator.
indicator-error corrected if possible.

indicator.
indicator. inhibit
movement passed
mark.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.

12/62

409:101.100

_STANDARD
EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 7094
Input-Output
7607 Data Channel
INPUT-OUTPUT: 7607 DATA CHANNEL

§

1OI.

.12

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: .

.12

Data Channel.
7607.
Models 1, 2, 3, and 4.
7617 Data Channel Console.

Each Data Channel behaves as a separate control
unit in selecting and executing instructions. The
Central Processor may execute instructions (see
409:121) to:

Description

o Start in motion a selected unit on a specific
channel.
o Start the control unit by specifying the location
of the first Data Channel instruction.
o Specify a new location from which the next Data
Channel instruction is to be taken, ignoring the
remainder of the current sequence.
o Copy the current contents of the Data Channel
control registers into core storage without affecting channel operation, including instruction location, word counter, operation control bits.
o Backspace, rewind, unload, set density, or write
control marks.

The 7607 unit provides an independently operating
data channel to the core storage for all models of
729 units in any mixture, the 711 Card Reader, 721
Card Punch, and 716 Printer.
The differences in use from the 7090 are the use of
72 bit, two word, transfers to the storage. Data is
transferred to core storage in 72 or 36-bit word
units as necessary. One access cycle is required
for each two words transferred, each instruction
selected, and for each indirect address in an instruction. A maximum of three accesses may be required for one word. These parameters affect the
actual demands on the core storage. The maximum
values affect the safe number of simultaneous transfers (see 409:111.43).

The individual Data Channels may execute instructions (called commands by ffiM) (see 409: 121) to:
o Copy data controlled by counters or block
delimiters.
o Change sequence.
o Disconnect, 1. e. execute no more instructions
until directed by the Central Processor.
o Sense for control, access, and error indicators.

There are four models. They differ in the units
that they may control, and the number that may be
connected to a system.
Modell: Up to ten 729 (II or IV), one 711, one 721,
one 716.
3: Up to ten 729 (II, IV, V, or VI), one 711,
one 721, one 716.
2: Up to ten 729 (II or IV).
4' Up to ten 729 (II, IV, V, or VI).

The individual adapters and controllers for peripheral units can sometimes execute instructions (called
orders by ffiM).

Models 3 and 4 have a Tape Densities Option Switch
to select anyone of these density pairs: 200/556,
200/800, or 556/800 characters per inch. The program may choose "high" or "low" density.

A Data Channel has a large degree of autonomy and
its own sequence of instructions can be interrupted
by control and error conditions. The interrupts can
be inhibited if required.

Each 7607 has a special 7617 console, which can be
used to control the Data Channel and associated units,
but not transfers with the core storage.

Data is transferred between all Data Channels 7909
or 7607 and core storage via the 7606 Multiplexer.
The Multiplexer shares the access of all devices to
the core storage on a priority basis. To ensure
maximum simultaneous operation with no access in
conflicts, the Data Channels are connected in the
sequence of their peak demands (see 409:111.43).

Every 7090 must have one 7607 model 1 or 3 with
both a 711 Card Reader and a 716 Printer. A 721
Card Punch is optional.
There may be a maximum of eight 7607 units in a
configuration, but this is substantially restricted
when any 7909 are used. A table showing the joint
maximum possibilities is in 409:111.41.

©

Description (Cont'd)

.13

Availability:

. 'l

.14

First Delivery:

. November, 1959.

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

409:102.100
.SlANDARD

II

EDP

IBM 7094
Input-Output
7909 Data Channel

REPOR1S

INPUT-OUTPUT: 7909 DATA CHANNEL

§

102.

.12

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity:

• 12

Description

Description (Contd.)
affecting channel operation, including instruction location, word counter, operation control
bits .
o Backspace, rewind, unload, set density, or
write control marks •

Data Channel.
7909.

The individual Data Channels may execute instructions (called commands by IBM) (see 408:121) to:

The 7909 unit provides an independently operating
data channel to the core storage for such units as
Hypertape Drives, 1301 Disk Storages, and TELEPROCESSING units.

o Copy data controlled by counters or block
delimiters.
• Change sequence •
• Disconnect, i.e., execute no more instructions
until directed by the Central 'Processor.
o Sense for control, access, and error indicators.

The differences in use from the 7090 are the use of
72 bit, 2 word, transfers. Data is transferred to
core storage in 72 or 36-bit word units as necessary.
One ~cess cycle is required"for each 2 words transferred, each instruction seleCted, and for each indirect address in an instruction. A maximum of
three accesses may be required for one word. These
parameters affect the actual demands on the core
storage. The maximum values affect the safe number of simultaneous transfers (see 409:111.43).

The individual adapters and controllers for peripheral units can sometimes execute instructions (called
orders by IBM).
A Data Channel has a large degree of autonomy and
its own sequence of instructions can be interrupted
by control and error conditions. The interrupts
can be inhibited if required.

A maximum of four 7909 data channels can be used
in a system, but the maximum is also affected by
the use of 7607 data channels. The table in 408:
111 •41 show s the maximum combinations.

Data is transferred between all Data Channels 7909
or 7607 and core storage via the 7606 Multiplexer.
The Multiplexer shares the access of all devices to
the core storage on a priority basis. To ensure
maximum simultaneous operation with no access
conflicts, the Data Channels are connected in the
sequence of their peak demands (see 409:111.43).

Only one Hypertape Control 7640, can·be connected
to a system. It contains two independent input-output highways, and requires two 7909 's for full use,
or one 7909 for restricted use (see 409:092.4).
Up to two 7631 Disk Storage Controllers can be
connected to a system. Each controller requires
one 7909 (see 408:042).

Optional Features

Up to two 1414 Synchronizers can be connected to a
system. Each controller requires one 7909 (see
408:103).

3224 Data Channel Switch. One manual switch can
be fitted to each channel to enable the channel to be
switched to one of two devices, selected by a Hypertape Control, a 1301 Disk Control, and a 1414 Teleprocessing Adapter.

Each Data Channel behaves as a separate control
unit in selecting and executing instructions. The
Central Processor may execute instructions (see
409:121) to:
• Start in motion a selected unit on a specific
channel.
• Start the control unit by specifying the location
of the first Data Channel instruction.
• Specify a new location from which the next Data
Channel instruction is to be taken, ignoring
the remainder of the current sequence.
• Copy the current contents of the Data Channel
control registers into core storage without

1471 BCD Translation. This feature provides a
translation between the internal 6-bit binary code
of the 7090 (see 409:141), and the 6-bit BCD inputoutput code, for compatibility with other IBM
systems (see 409:144).
5975 Read Backward Character Assembly and
Storage. This feature enables the 7640 Hypertape
Control read backward feature to be used.
.13

Availability: • •

7

.14

First Delivery:

19637

\

"
©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

409: 111.1 00
·SlANOARO

II

EDP

IBM 7094

R[PORTS

Simultaneous Operations

SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS

.3

§ 111.

.1

.11

SPECIAL UNITS
Identity:

CLASSES OF OPERATION

A:
B:
C:

7909.
Data Channel.

compute.
read or write 729 tapes.
rewind, backspace record
or file or skip remainder
of a record on 729 tapes,
feed remainder of a card
or space paper.
read cards.
punch cards.
print.
read or write Hypertapes.
rewind, backspace or skip
a record on Hypertapes.
read or write, disc store.
seek access, disc store.
1414 devices input-output.

7607.
Data Channel.

D:
E:
F:
G:
H:

7606.
Multiplexor.
.12

Description
In general, every Data Channel and Central Processor may operate simultaneously. There are
three types of limitations: The maximum allowable
combinations of channels, the units and channels
attached, and the demand limitations on the core
storage.
The difference from the 7090 is the reduced access
cycle of the storage, and the use of two word transfers.
The Data Channels are described in 409: 101 and
409:102. In general, one unit on each Data Channel may be operating (transmitting or receiving
data) simultaneously. In fact, each channel acts as
a separate control unit, selecting and executing its
own sequences of instructions as initiated by the
central processor.

I:

J:

K:

.4

RULES

.41

Configuration Limitations On Equipment

R
S

In mM terminology the central processor executes
instructions, the data channels execute commands,
and the special adapters and controls execute orders.
The various groups are all set out in the Instruction
List (see 408:121).
.2

T
U
V
W
X
Y

CONFIGURATION CONDITIONS
R:
S:
T:
U:
V:
W:
X:
Y:

number of 7909 Data Channels.
number of 7640 Hypertape
Controls.
number of 7631 Disk Storage Controls.
number of 1414 Synchronizers.
number of 7607 Data Channels Model 1.
number of 7607 Data Channels Model 3.
'number of 7607 Data Channels Model 2.
number of 7607 Data Channels Model 4.

Possible Sets

Class

.42

4
1
2
2-t
1
I-v
0
0

Confi~ration

a
b+d+e+f
c
d+ e+f
g
h
j

k
g+ i+ k

3
1
1
I-t
1
I-v
1
I-x

2
1
0
0
1
0
1
I-x

2
1
0
0
0
1
2
2-x

2
0
2
2-t
1
I-v
4
4-x

1
0
1

2-t
1
1 v
5
5-x

0
0
0
0
1
I-v
7
7-x

Limitations On Channels
at most 1.
at most V+ W+ X+ Y.
at most lO(V+ W+ X) - b.
at most V+ W.
at most 25.
at most 20S - g.
at most T.
at most 5 - i.
at most 6U.
at most R.

(
©

1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

12/62

IBM 7094

409: 111. 430
§

Ill.

.43

Demand Limitations
If the units are assigned to channels such that those
with highest weights have priority, the total weight
of units operating may not be more than 100. Otherwise, the weight may not be more than 70.

Device

Rate

Weight

KC
729 II, V (200)
729 IV, VI (200)
729 II, V (556)
729 V (800)
7750
729 IV, VI (556)
1301
1414.6
729 VI (800)
7340

15
22.5
41.7
60
71.5
62.5
90
90
90
174

1.9
2.8
5.2
7.6
7.6
7.9
9.6
9.7
11.7
23.0

These weights allow for the usual worst case, in
which three accesses may be required for each word
transferred: the word itself, an instruction to the
data channel, and an indirect address.

12/62

409: 121.101

·STANIlAAO
EDP
•

IBM 7094

REPORTS

Instruction List

§

121.

INSTRUCTION LI ST

Note: The majority of the IBM 7094 instructions are identical to those for the IBM 7090. Those beginning with the
the Double Precision Floating Point instructions are exclusively 7094 instructions.
INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

Flag or
Count

OPERATION
Tag

Address

Accumulator (AC) bits are called S, Q, P 1 thru 35. MultiplierQuotient (MQ) called S, 1 thru 35, Q, P, hold overflows, Sos sign.
Fixed Point Arithmetic (AC and MQ use bits S, 1 thru 35 unless
overflow in AC, then P and Q).

ADD
ADM
SUB
SBM

MPY
MPR

x

x
x
x
x

DVP
VLM
VDH

x
x
x
x
x

VDP

x

DVH

F
F
F

T
T
T
T
T
T

y
y
y
y

F

T

y

F

FC
FC

T
T
T

Y
Y
Y

FC

T

Y

F
F

F

y
y

(Y)+(AC)~AC

I(Y)/ + (AC) --;;..AC
(AC) - (Y) ~ AC
(AC) - I(Y)I .....,..AC
(Y) x (MQ) __ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ
(Y) x (MQ) ~ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ, and if MQl = 1;
AC + I-;..AC
(MQ i- (Y)-;..MQ (quotient), AC (remainder). If overflow,
set divide-check indicator and halt processor.
Same I1S for DVH except processor is not halted.
(Y) x (MQ)35-0 __ AC and MQ.
(AC) i- (Y)l to C ~(MQ)35-C to 3.5, remainder in AC;
If (Y) ~ (AC), halt processor.
(AC) .;. (Y)l to C --::o-(MQ)35-C to 35, remainder in AC.
Floating Point Arithmetic

FAD
UFA
FSB
UFS

x
x
x

F
F
F
F
F

T

y
y

T
T
T

FDH

x

F

T

Y
Y
Y
Y

FDP
FAM
UAM
FSM
tJSM
FRN
UFM

x
x
x
x

F
F
F
F
F
F
F

T
T
T

Y
Y
Y

T

Y
Y

FMP

x
x

x

x
x

T

T

T
T

Y
Y

(Y>'+(AC)~(MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(Y) + (AC) __ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; unnormalized.
(Y) + (AC) __ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(Y) + (AC) __ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; unnormalized.
(Y) x (MQ) __ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; .normalized.
(AC) .;. (Y)~ MQ (quotient) normalized, AC (remainder).
If overflow, set divide-check indicator and halt processor.
SaIne as for FDH except processor is not halted.
I (Y) I + (AC) ~AC and MQ, normalized.
I (Y) I + (AC) - - AC and MQ, unnormalized.
(AC) - I(Y)I-- AC and MQ, normalized.
(At) - I(Y) I -- AC and MQ, unnormalized.
(At) + (MQ)9 - - (AC) normalized.
(Y) x (MQ) --;;.. AC and MQ, unnormalized.

Da% T:qansfer .Arithmetic
LDQ

x

F

T

F
F

T

eVA

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

CRQ

x

CAQ

x

STQ
SLQ
STO
STZ
STP
STD
STA
CLA
CLS

F
F
F
F
F
F
F
C

T
T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y

y

T
X

y

C

x

Y

C

x

Y

© 1963

(Y)~MQ.

(MQ)~Y.

(MQ)~ 1-17 ~Ys 1-17·
(Act:) __ Yo
'
0 __ (Y); sign is plus.
(ACL·
--::o-YS 1 2
"
(A tt<)~i', I, 2 Y
'I" 3·17 - - 3-17·
(AC)2!-35 ~Y 21-35·
(Y)--AC.
(-,{) ~AC.
Y __ (SR). «AC)30-35 + (SR»~(SR),
(.o$..C),/64 __ (AC), (SR)P_5 ~ (AC)P_5, C times.
Y __ (SR). «MQ)S-5 + (SR) __ (SR),
(MQ) x 64 ~(MQ), (SR)S_5 --(MQ)30-35, C times.
Y ~(SR). (MQ)S-5 + (SR)-(SR), RQL 6,
(AC)+(SR)-AC, C times.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

IBM 7094

409:121. 102
INSTRUCTION LIST (Cont'd)
§

121.
INSTRUCTION

Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

OPERATION

Flag or
Count Tag Address,

Dag Ttansfers (Log!cal)
CAL
SLW
STT
STL

X
X
X
X

F
F
F
F

T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y

STR

X

X

X

X

XCA

X

X

X

X

XCL

X

X

X

X

ENK

X

X

T

X

(Y)~AC.
(AC)~Y.

(AC)I~_ 20 ~ Y18- 20; remaining positions remain unchanged.

LQcatJon of STL instruction + 1 ~Y 21-35; remaining
positions of Y unchanged.
Lqcation of STR instruction + 1 ~ to positions
21-35 of location 0000.
(AC)~ 1-35 exchanged with (MQ)S, 1-35; positions
P a Q of AC are cleared.
(AC~ 1-35 exchanged with (MQ)S, 1-35; positions
S a Q of AC are cleared.
CO,nten,ts of manual input switches ~ MQ. (See PSE)
Log~ca!

ACL
ANA
ANS
ORA
ORS
ERA

X
X
X
X
X
X

F
F
F
F
F
F

T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Operations (AC used P, 1 thru 35 unless overflow in
AC, then Q.)

(Y'+~AC) ~AC.

(AC)
(AC)
(AC)
(AC)
(A~)

,'AND" (Y) ~AC.
"AND" (Y) ~ Y.
"OR" (Y)~AC.
"OR" (Y)~Y.
'EXCLUSIVE OR" (Y)

~AC

(binary half-add).

Shif1: operations (All are modulo 256 places).
ALS
ARS
LLS
LRS
LGL
RQL
LGR

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

T
T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

(AC) ahifted left Y, sign unchanged.
(AC) shifted right Y, sign unchanged.
(AC) and (MQ) shifted left Y. (MQ)S ~ACS.
(AC) and (MQ) shifted right Y. (AC)S MQS.
(AC) and (MQ) shifted left Y, signs unchanged.
(MQ) ;rotated left Y.
(AC) and (MQ) shifted right Y, signs unchanged.
Co~ol 0eerations

NOP
HPR

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

HTR

X

F

T

Y

TRA
TZE
TNZ
TPL

X
X
X
X

F
F
F
F

T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y

TMI

X

F

T

Y

TOV

X

F

T

Y

TNO
TQP

X
X

F
F

T
T

Y
Y

TQO

X

F

T

Y

TLQ
TSX
TXI

X
X
D

F
X
D

T
T
T

Y
Y
Y

TXH

D

D

T

Y

Ndxt instruction in sequence is executed.
Halts processor; processor steps to next instruction when
Star.!: key is depressed.
Halts processor; processor steps to instruction in location Y
wheh Start key is depressed.
Next Lnstruction is taken from location Y.
If (AC) = 0, next instruction taken from location Y.
If (AC):f 0, next instruction taken from location Y.
If sign bit of AC positive, next instruction taken from location
Y. Sign bit negative, next instruction executed.
If ,sigp. bit of AC negative, next instruction taken from location
y. If sign bit positive, next instruction executed.
If 'Ov~rflow indicator on, it is turned o~ and processing
aonUinues from location Y.
If overflow indicator off, continue from location Y.
If sign bit of MQ positive. next instruction taken from
~oc~tion Y.
If MQ overflow indicator turned off, next instruction taken
from location Y.
(MQ < (AC) next instruction taken from location Y.
2's complement of location Y placed in index register T.·
Adds the value of D to the number in index register T and
takes next instruction from Y.·
If .nurtt'ber in index register T greater than value of D, next
~nstlruction taken from location Y.
~

5/63

I AUERBAC~

409:121.103

INSTRUCTION LIST
INSTRUCTION LIST (Cont'd)
§

121.
OPERATION

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

Flag or
Count Tag Address
Contr01 Operations (Cont'd)

TXL

D

D

T

Y

TIX

D

D

T

Y

If !lumber in index register T is less than or equal to the value
of D. next instruction taken from location Y. *
If !lum.ber in index register T is greater than the value of D,

TNX

D

D

T

Y

ITR

X

F

T

Y

CAS

X

F

T

Y

LXA
LXD

X
X

X
X

T
T

Y
Y

the :number in index register T is reduced by the value of D
and next instruction is taken from Y. *
If number in index register T is greater than the value of D,
number in index register T is reduced by the value of D and
traIlBfers to the next instruction; otherwise the index is
unchanged and the next instruction is taken from Y. *
Processor takes its next instruction from location Y and
prooeeds whether or not in trapping mode.
If (Y) < (AC), next instruction is executed. If (Y) = (AC) next
instruction is skipped. If (Y) > (AC), next two instructions
are skipped.
Address portion of (Y) replaces number in index register T. *
Decrement portion of (Y) replaces number in index register

SXD

X

X

T
T

Y

PAX

X
X

°T.*

PDX

X

X

T

Y

PXD

X

X

T

Y

XEC

BIT

X
X

F
X

T
T

Y
Y

ZET

X

F

T

Y

NZT

X

F

T

Y

LAS

X

F

T

Y

TcoA

X

F

T

Y

TCNA

X

F

T

Y

TRCA

X

F

T

Y

TEFA

X

F

T

Y

LAC
LDC
AXT
AXC
PAC
PDC

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

T

Y
Y

SXA
PXA

X
X
X
X
X
X

T
T

T
T

T
T
T

Y

Y
Y
X
X

Y
Y

~ (Y) and (T) replaces decrement part of location Y. *
Address part of (AC) replaces the number in the index
regi'ster T. *
Decrement part of (AC) replaces the number in the index
regi.ster T. *
~ (AC) and number in index register T is placed in the
decrement part of the AC. *
E"ecl1te instruction in location Y.
Test the status of data channel BOT indicator.
Channel specified by value of Y.
If (Y)1-3S = 0, next instruction is' skipped and processing
continues. If (Y)1-3S t: 0, next sequential instruction is
executed.
If (Y)1"3S t: 0, the next instruction is skipped and processing
continues. If (Y)1-3S = 0, next sequential instruction is
executed.
(AC) compared logically with (Y). If (AC) > (Y), next
sequential instruction is executed. If (AC) = (Y), next
instruction is skipped and processing continues. If
(AC) < (Y), next two instructions are skipped and processing
continues.
Next instruction taken from location Y if channel A is in
operation.
Next ~nstruction taken from location if channel A is not in
operation.
When tape check indicator for channel A is on, next instruction
taken from location Y. If indicator is off, next instruction
in sequence is executed.
When end-of-file indicator for channel A is on, next instruction taken from location Y. If indicator is off, next instruction in sequence is executed.
(NOT(Y)21-3S) + 1---;..- (T).
(NOT(Y)21-3S) + 1 ~ (T).

°

Y~(T).

(NOT Y) + 1 ~ (T).
(NOT (AC)21-3S) + 1---;..- (T).
(NOT (AC)3-17) + 1---;..- (T).
(1') ---;"-'(Y)21- 35·
~AC; (T) ~AC21-3S.

°

* Not indexable.
© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

IBM 7094

409: 121. 104
INSTRUCTION LIST (Cont'd)
121.

§

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

OPERATION

Flag or
Count Tag Address
Inl2ut-Output 0l2erations

ROS
WRS
BST
WEF

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y

REW
LDA
CPY
PSE t

X
X
X
X

X
F
X
X

Y
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
X

LBT
CHS
SSP
ENK
lOT
COM
ETM
RND
SLN
BTT
DCT
RCT
SLF
CLM
SWT
SPU
SPT
SPR
RIC
ROC
FRN
MSEt

X

X

T

X

PBT
EFTM
SSM
LFTM
ESTM
ECTM
LTM
LSTM
SLT
ETT
RTT
BSF

X

X

T

Y

CAD

X

X

T

Y

PAl
PIA
illl
STl
OAI
OSI
SlL
SIR
RIA

X
X

X
X
F
F
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
T
T
X
T
Y
Y
X

X
X
Y
Y
X
Y
Y
Y

t

X

X
X
X
X
X
X

X

Start j:he unit specified by Y in the read mode.
Start the unit specified by Y in the write mode.
Backspace tape designated by Y one record.
An end-of-file zaP and mark and a redundancy character is
writj:en on the tape on unit Y.
Rewind tape unit Y.
704/709 Input-Output instruction.
7rJ4/709 Input-Output instruction.
Provides a means for testing the status of sense switches,
controlling sense lights, and the sampling of or sending of
bnpolses to the printer and punch. These functions include:
Low order bit test (AC).
Change sign (AC).
Set sign plus (AC).
(C~)Usole Keys) ~ (AC).
Test for input-.output error.
Complement magpitude (AC).
Enter trapping mode.
Round (MQ)1 x 2- 35 + (AC)~AC.
Turn on Sense Light.
Test for beginning of tape.
Divide check test.
Test for tape error.
Turn off Sense Lights.
Clear Magnitude (AC).
Test Sense Switch.
Send signal to Card Reader.
Test for Printer signal.
Send signal to Printer.
Reset Data Channel.
Reset and Disconnect Data Channel.
Floating Point Round.
Provides a means for testing and turning off the sense lights.
These functions include:
P bit test (AC).
Enter floating trap mode.
Set sign minus.
Leave floating trap mode.
Enter Storage Nullification Mode.
Enter Copy Trap Mode.
Leave trapping mode.
Leave Storage Nullification Mode.
Test Sense Light and turn it off.
End of Tape Test.
704 instruction.
Selected tape Y is moved backward until end-of-file or load
point is reached.
704/709 input-output instruction.
Sense Indicator 0l2erations

t

(AC)p.
35 ~ SI.
(Sl) ~ C p 1-35; 0 ~ positions Sand Q.
(Y) ~ SI O- 35 '
(SI) --?>-Y.
(AC) "OR" (Sl) -.-,. SI.
(Y) "OR" (Sl) ~ SI.
Y "OR" (SI)0-17~SIO-17'
Y "OR" (Sl)18-35 ~SI18-35'
"NOT" (AC) "AND" (SI) ~SI.

Note: Except for the sign bit, the first 11 PSE have identical operation codes to the corresponding MSE codes.
The particular variation is determined by the indexable address field •

5/63

I.-----~~
AUERBACH) ~J

409: 121. 105

INSTRUCTION LIST
INSTRUCTION LIST (Cont'd)
§ 121.

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code
RIS
RIL

ONT
OFT

LNT
RNT
LFT
RFT
RIR

lIA
lIS
IlL
IIR
lIO
TIF

Decrement

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

OPERATION

Flag or
Count Tag Address
F
X
F

F
X
X
X
X

X
X

F
X
X
F

F

T
Y
T
T
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

X
T
Y
Y
T
T

Y
Y
Y

Y
Y

Y
Y

Y
Y
X

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

"NO'],"" (Y) "AND" (SI) ~ S1.
"NOT" (Y) "AND" (SI)0-17--';;'SI0-17'
If (Y) "AND" (SI) = (Y), skip next instruction.
If' (Y) "AND NOT" (SI) = (Y), skip next instruction.
If Y "AND" (SI)0-17 = (Y), skip next instruction.
If Y "AND" (Slhs-35 = (Y), skip next instruction.
If Y "AND NOT" (SI0-17)= (Y), skip next instruction.
If Y "AND NOT" (SI18-35) = (Y), skip next instruction.
"N01l''' Y "AND" (SI)18-35~SII8-35'
(AC) "EXC. OR" (SI)~ S1.
(X) "~XC. OR" (SI)~SI.
Y "EXC. OR" (SI)0-17 ~SIO-17'
Y "EXC. OR" (SI>18-35 ----»-SI18-35.
If (AC) "AND" (SI) = (AC), take next instruction from Y.
If (AC;::) "AND NOT" (SI) = (AC), take next instruction from Y.
SY/feII/-s Compatibility Operations

T
T
T

Y
X

X

F
X
X

X

X

T

X

ESNT
LSNM
ESTM

X
X

ECTM

X

Half effective storage for 704 simulation transfer to Y - (T).
Retutn to normal storage mode.
Enter select trap mode. Input-output instructions set to
cause trapping.
Eilter copy trap mode CPY CAD, and LOA will be trappe~.

Channel Trap Instructions

ENB

X

X

T

Y

RCT

X

F

T

Y

Enable from Y. The (Y) determines which channel signals
cause a trapping operation.
Restore channel traps. Allows traps to occur as specified by
ENll. Cancels the inhibiting effect of an executed trap.
Inppt-Output Transmission Operations

RUN
SON

ROC
RIC
SCHA
RCHA
LCHA

X
X
X

X
X
X

T

Y

X

Y

T

Y

X

T

T

Y
Y

X

F
F

T

Y

X

F

T

Y

X
X

Rewind and unload tape.
Set density of designated tape unit.
Zero all registers and indicators in the designated data
channel.
Reset all conditions in data channel.
Store Channel A. (Y) replaced with contents of Channel A.
Reset and load Channel A. Channel A is reset and loaded
With the (Y).
Loacl Channel A with the (Y).
Data Channel Commands (7607)

lOCO
IOCP

C
C

F
F

N
N

Y
Y

10RP

C

F

N

Y

IOCT

C

F

N

Y

Input-Output C words starting at Y and disconnect.
Input-Output C words starting at Yand proceed to next
channel command.
Inpu~-Output up to C words of one record starting at y, then
proceed to the next channel command.
Inpu~-Output C words of one record starting at Y then accept
the waitil!.[ LCH instruction or disconnect.
Data Channel Commands (7607) (Cont'd)

IORT

C

F

N

Y

10SP

C

F

N

Y

lOST

C

F

N

Y

TCH

X

F

X

Y

© 1963

Input~Output

up to C words of one record starting at Y then
accept the waiting LCH instruction or disconnect.
Input-Output the smaller of 1 record or C words starting at
then accept the next channel command.
:
Input-Output the smaller of 1 record or C words starting at Y,
then accept the waiting LCH instruction or disconnect.
Take next channel command from Y.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

y,l

5/63

IBM 7094

409:121.106
INSTRUCTION LIST (Cont'd)
§

121.
OPERATION

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

Flag or
Count Tag Address
Data Channel Commands (7909)

CTL
CTLR

X
X

X
X

X
X

Y
Y

CTLW
SNS
CPYD

X
X
X

X
X
CF

X
X
X

Y
X
Y

cpyp

X

CF

X

Y

LAR
SAR
XMT

X
X
X

F
F
CF

X
X
X

Y
Y
Y

LeC
TDC

X
X

CF
F

X
X

X
X

ICC

X

C

X

X

TCM

X

CFM

X

Y

SMS
WTR

X
X

F
F

X
X

X
Y

TWT

X

F

X

Y

LIP

X

X

X

X

LIPT

X

F

X

Y

Information is sent to the adapters starting with (Y).
Prepared to read from the adapter. Must be followed by a
copy.
Prepare to write to the adapter. Must be followed by a c'opy.
Prepare to read sense data. Must be followed by a copy.
Transmit C words between the channel and core starting with
location Y~
Transmit C words between the channel and core starting with
location Y then obtain next sequential command.
(Y)--(AR).
(AR) __ (Y).
(XTM+l); (XTM+2), ... , (XTM+C+I) __ (Y+I), (Y+2),
... , (Y+C).
Next channel instruction taken from (Y+C+I).
C--(CC).
If (C) > 0, then (C) - I----?>-(C) and next instruction is taken
from (Y); if (C) = 0, command is no operation.
If C = 0, SMS indicators.(AR)31_36'
If C = I - 6 (CC)-- (AR) character C.
If C = 7 instruction is no operation •
. Trallsfer on condition met, select a character by:
C = 0, use channel check register.
C ;: I - 6, use (AR) character C.
C = 7, go to Y; if M = 0, next command; otherwise for
C:f 7, go to Y.
If character = M and (TCM)ll = 0, or
if character "AND" M = M and (TCM)U = I;
otherwise use next command in sequence.
Set mode and select; (SMS)30-35 ~ status indicators.
Wait and transfer; a start channel instruction will cause the
next command to be taken from location Y.
Trap and wait; the channel suspends operation until a start
¢hannel instruction is executed.
If control word trap is enabled, the CPU traps.
Leave interrupt program, the channel resumes a program
that: has been interrupted.
Leave interrupt program and transfer, the channel enters a
non~ interrupted condition and takes its next command from
location Y.
Control Orders (Disc)

DNOP
DREL
DEBM
DSBM
DSEK
DVSR
DWRF
DVTN
DVCY
DWRC
DSAI
DCTA
DVHA

5/63

No Operation
Release
Eight-Bit Mode
blX- bit Mode
Seek
I-1;"epare to Verify (single record)
Prepare to Write Format
Prepare to Verify (track with no addresses)
Prepare to Verify (cylinder operation)*
Prepare to Write Check
Set Access Inoperative
Prepare to Verify (track with addresses)
Prepare to Verify (home address)

INSTRUCTION LIST
§

409:121. 107

INSTRUCTION LIST (Cont'd)

121.
INSTRUCTION

Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

OPERATION

Flag or
Count Tag

Address
Control Orders (Hypertape)

HNOP
HEOS
HRLF
HRLN
HCLN
HSEL
HSBR
HCCR
HRWD
HRUN
HERG
HWTM
HBSR
HBSF
HSKR
HSKF
HCHC
HUNL
HFPN

No Operation
End of Sequence
Reserved Light Off
Reserved Light On
Check Light On
Select
Select for Backward Reading
Change Cartridge and Rewind
Rewind
Rewind and Unload Cartridge
Erase Long Gap
Write Tape Mark
Backspace
Backspace File
Space
Space File
Change Cartridge
Unload Cartridge
File Protect On
Terms:
C means
D means
F means
M means
N means
T means
X means
Y means

count value.
decrement value.
indirect addressing flag.
mask character.
non-transmit to storage.
index register tag.
part of the operation code.
the address or value.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

IBM 7094

409: 121.108
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
§ 121.

Note: The following instructions are exclusively 7094 instructions.

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

Flag or
COoot

Tag

Address

Additional Instructions to 7090 List
OPERATION
Where (A, A + 1) appear as operand addresses,
A must be an even numbered address, i.e., with
a low order address bit set to zero.
Double Precision Floating Point Arithmetic

DFAD

X

F

T

A

DFAM

X

F

T

A

DFDH

X

F

T

A

DFDP

X

F

T

A

DFMP

X

F

T

A

DFSB

X

F

T

A

DFSM

X

F

T

A

DUFA

X

F

T

A

DUAM

X

F

T

A

DUFM

X

F

T

A

DUFS

X

F

T

A

DUSM

X

F

T

A

(A, A + 1) + (AC, MQ) ..... (AC, MQ) in
floating point, normalized.
(AC, MQ) + (A, A + 1) ..... (AC, MQ) oosigned
in normalized floating point.
(AC, MQ) / (A, A + 1) ...... (AC, MQ) in normalized floating point. Halt if the Divide Check
indicator is set. o .... sense indicators.
(AC, MQ) / (A, A + 1) .... (AC, MQ),in normalized floating point. o .... sense indicators.
(AC. MQ) x (A, A + 1) ..... (AC, MQ) in normalized floating point.
(AC. MQ) - (A, A + 1) - . (AC, MQ) in normalized floating point.
(AC, MQ) - (A, A + 1) - . (AC, MQ) oosigned
in normalized floating point.
(A, A + 1) + (AC, MQ) ..... (AC, MQ) in unnormalized floating point.
(AC, MQ) + (A, A + 1) - . (AC, MQ) oosigned
in unnormalized floating point.
(AC, MQ) x (A, A + 1) ..... (AC, MQ) in unnormalized floating point.
(AC, MQ) - (A, A + 1) ..... (AC, MQ) in 00normalized floating point.
(AC, MQ) - (A, A + 1) ..... (AC, MQ) oosigned
in unnormalized floating point.
Data Transfer

DLD

X

F

T

A

DST

X

F

T

A

SCA
SCD

X
X

X
X

T
T

A
A

PCA

X

X

T

X

PCD

X

X

T

X

(A) ---. AC, (A + 1) ---. MQ; A must be an even
numbered address.
(AC) --+ (A), (MQ) ---. (A + 1); A must be an
even number address.
(T),--+ (A21-25)' (AS, 1-20) are unchanged.
(T) ---. (A3-17)' (AS 1 2 18-20) are 00changed.
' , ,
Clear the entire (AC) to O. the twos complement
of (T) is inserted in AC21-35'
When T = 0, AC is set to zero.
Clear the entire (AC) to 0, the twos complement
of (T) is inserted in AC3-17'
When T= 0, AC is set to zero.

Index Control

5/63

EMTM

X

X

T

X

LMTM

X

X

T

X

Decode Tag bits to indicate one of seven index
registers. (A variation of the MSE instruction.)
Decode Tag bits to indicate any of three index
which will be ORed together before use.
(A variation of the PSE instruction.)

III

409:201.011
STANO,"O

_lEDP
rJI"
REPORTS

IBM 7094
System Performance

IBM 1094

SYSTEM PERfORMANCE

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

409:201.012

IBM 7094
IBM 7094 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1

Can fi gu roti on
Worksheet

Item

Reference
V

1

InputOutput
Times

Char/block

VII B

VIII B

(File 1)

1008

1008

4032

1008

4032

(File 1)

8

8

32

8

32

Records/block

K

m. sec/block

File 1 = File 2

34

22.6

66

10.1

27.8

File 3

13

8.7

22.7t

8.1

17.9t

File 4

13

8.7

22.7t

8.1

17.9t

m. sec/switch

File 1 = -File 2

4:200.112

File 3
File 4
m. sec penalty

2

m. sec/block

m. sec/record
Central
Processor m. sec/detail
Times

3

File 1 = -File 2

0.3

0.2

0.7

0.1

0.2

File 3

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.1

0.1

File 4

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.1

0.1

a1

0.18

0.18

0.18

a2

0.18

0.18

0.18

b6

0.13

0.13

0.13

m. sec/work

b5

+ b9

0.28

0.28

0.28

m. sec/report

b7

+ b8

4.94

4.94

4.94_

m. sec.
for C. P.
and
dominant
column.

a1

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

a2 K

1.4

1.4

5.6

1.4

5.6

a3 K

42.7

42.7

170.8

42.7

170.8

Standard
Problem A

File 1 Master 1n

0.1

34

0.1

File 2 Master Out

0.1

34

0.1

File 3 Details

0.7

104

0.7

File 4 Reports

0.7

104

0.7

45.9

276

45.9

Total
Unit of measure

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

2.8

0.7

2.8

0.7

0.1

66.0

182.4

66.0

45.9

2.8

143.2

2.8
64.8

182.4 143.2

620

620

620

620

0

0

0

0

0

400

400

450

400

450

2,000

2,000

2,000

2,000

2,000

Files

756

756

3,360

756

3,360

Working

200

200

200

200

200

3,976

3,976

6,630

3,976

6,630

3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
6 (Blocks 24 to 48)

Total
t 8 records per block.

92.2

64.8

620

Fixed
Standard
Problem A
Space

69.6

(words)
Std. routines

2/63

22.6

4:200.114

F=1.0

4

4:200.1132

4:200.1151

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

409:201.013

IBM 7094 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE-Contd.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2
Configuration
Worksheet

Item

Reference
V

5

VII B

VIII B

Floating

Floating

input

729 IV

729 VI

output

729 IV

729 VI

input

90 char

90 char

output

120 char

120 char

Fixed/Floating point

Unit name

Size of record

4:200.413

Standard
Mathematical'
m. sec/block
Problem

A

input

Tl

8.2

7.7

output

T2

8.6

8.0

input

T3

0

0

output

T4

0

0

m. sec penalty

7

m. sec/record

T5

0.902

m. sec/5 loops

T6

1.38

m. sec/report

T7

6.36

!unit name

Size of block

Standard
Stati sti cal
Problem
A

729 IV

Hypertape

9,000

21,000

Records/block

B

150

350

m. sec/block

Tl

151

128

m. sec. penalty

T3

0

0

4:200.512

C.P.

m. sec/block

T5

0.03

m. sec/record

T6

0.49

m. sec/table

T7

0.04

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

409:201.100

IBM 7094
System Performance

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

§

201.

• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113
'.114 Graph: • • . . . • • • see ~aph below.
.115 Storage space required
Unblocked detail and report files
Configuration V: • • • • • 3,976 .
Configuration VllB: • • • • 3,976.
Configuration VillB:. • • • 3,976.
Blocked detail and report files
Configuration VllB: • . . • 6,630.
Configuration Vill B:. • • • 6, 630.
.113 Timing basis: •

.1

GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING

.11

Standard File Problem A

• 111 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:
. 112 Computation:

• 108 characters.
· 1 card.
• 1 line.

• standard •

10
7

4

2

V

7
~

4
Time in Minutes
2
to Process 10, 000
Master File Records

~

----~

:---

"7'

-_ ...--

-.-.-~

~

-

:mI.!? l/""" -----

1-0-- JZII

81

"

1--- ~J:m:n:

81

0.1
7

4

2

0.01
7

4

2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
Broken line indicates blocked detail and report files.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

409:201.120

IBM 7094

§20l.
.12

.122 Computation: .
• 123 Timing basis: •

Standard File Problem B

• 121 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:

• 124 Graph: • . . .

• standard .
• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.12 .
• see graph below •

• 54 characters.
• 1 card.
•• 1 line.

10
7

4

2

7

~

.-

~

Time in Minutes
2
to Process 10,000
Master File Records

0.1

V

./

~

.J

~

~

4

~------

-

/

VJZIII:

B

l/

7

4

2

0.01
7

4

2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

2/63

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

409:201.130

§20l.

.13

• 132 Computation: •
.133 Timing basis:

• standard •
. using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13 •
• 134 Graph: . • . . • • • • see graph below •

Standard File Problem C

• 131 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:

• 216 characters.
• 1 card.
· 1 line.

10
7

4

2

-- -

~

7

4

-

~

..........

V

Time in Minutes
2
to Process 10,000
Master File Records

0.1
7
4

2

0.01
7

4

2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

409:201.140
§

IBM 7094

201.

.14

.142 Computation: •
• 143 Timing basis: •

Standard File Problem D

.141 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:

• 144 Graph: • • • •

• trebled •
• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.14 •
• see graph below.

• 108 characters.
• 1 card.
• 1 line.

10
7
4

2

~
7
~

....
~

4

:m;n:y

Time in Minutes
2
to Process 10, 000
Master File Records

. / I""'"

--- -

0.1
7

4

2

0.01
7

4

2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

2/63

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

409:201.200

§20l.

.212 Key size: • • •
.213 Timing basis: •

.2

SORTING

.21

Standard Problem Estimates

• • • 8 characters.
• • • using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213.
. see graph below .

• 214 Graph: . • • •

.211 Record size: . • . • • 80 characters.

10.0
7
1/

/

/

4

./

V
~

2
1ZII

/

/

~B

,,-~

1.0
7

/

/

4

V

/

2

~I;'

Time in Minutes to
Put Records Into
Required Order 0.1

)1

7
/

V

4

2

0.01

"

'"

/
./

V
./

V

V

1/

1/

/

[/ /

/

7

4

2

0.001
2

4

100

,

2

4

1,000

2

7

10,000

4

7

100,000

Number of Records

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporatiop and BNA Incorporated

2/63

IBM 7094

409:201.300
§

• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.312 •
• see graph below .

.312 Timing basis: •

201.

•3

MATRIX INVERSION

. 31

Standard Problem Estimates

•313 Graph: • • . •
.311 Basic parameters: . . . general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating point to at least 8
decimal digits.

100
7

4

2

10
7

4

Time in Minutes
for Complete
Inversion

I I

2

I[
7

J

I

4

'I

2
16 DIGIT
PRECISION

II

J

0.10

II

7

I I

4

I I
J J

2

1/ V

0.01
2

4

2

7

4

2

7

100

10

Size of Matrix

2/63

8 DIGIT
PRECISION

4

7

1,000

SYSTEM
§

PE~FPRMANCE

409:201.400

201.

.412 Computation: .

.4

GENERALlZEDMATHEMATICAL PROCESSING

.41

Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates

• 5 fifth-order polynomials.
5 division.s.
1 square root .
· using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.413 •
· see graph below.

.413 Timing basis: .
.411 Record sizes: • • . . • 10 signed numbers, avg.,
size 5 digits, max.
size 8 digits.

.414 Graph: . . . .

CONFIGURATION VII B; SINGLE LENGTH (8 DIGIT PRECISION); FLOATING POINT.
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD

10,000
7

4

2

1,000
7

4

Time in Milliseconds per
Input Record

2

~

100
7

'AI

1/.,,-

/ r"
/ ~

4

/~~

2
1; ......

R;.J...
'"
~

10

R=~

~I

7
4

2

2

4

7

2

1.0

0.1

4

7

2

10.0

4

7

100.0

C, Number of Computations per Input Record

©

1963 by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

IBM 7094

409:201.415 .
§20l .
• . . . • • see graph below.

. 415 Graph:

CONFIGURATION VIII; SINGLE LENGTH (8 DIGIT PRECISION); FLOATING POINT.
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD

10,000
7

4
2

1,000
7
4

2

~

100

J~
.$

Time in Milli - 7
seconds per
Input Record 4

2
R= I

V
R=O.OI

R=o;.,;

-'

10

~

7

4

2

2

0.1

4

7

2

1.0

4

2

7

10.0

C, Number of Computations per Jnput Record

2/63

4

7

100

S.YSTEM PERFQRMANCE

409:201.500

§20l.

. S12 Computation: .

.S

GENERAL1ZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING

• S13 Timing basis: •

. SI

Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates

· augment "1' elements in
cross-tabulation tables •
• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.S13 .
· see graph below .

• S14 Graph: . . • .
.Sl1 Record size: . . . . . thirty 2-digit integral.
numbers.

100
7

4

~I

2

/

10

/

~

f

7

f

L
4

)1

Time in Milli - 2
seconds per
Record
1lIIB

V
./

-

7

4

~

1/ 1

JZII[ B

2

0.1
7
4

2

0.01
2

4

2

7

10

4

7

2

100

4

7

1,000

T, Number of Augmented Elements
Roman numerals denote Standard Configurations

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

409:211.101

IBM 7094
Physical Characteristics

IBM 1094

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

409:211.102

IBM 7094
IBM 7094 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Unit Name

Core
Storage

Multiplexor

Disk
Storage

Disk
Storage

Drum
Storage

Model Number

7302-1

7606-1

1301-1

1301-2

7320-1

File
Control

IDENTITY
7631

Instruction
Processing
Unit

7110-1

U/In/lV
Height X Width X Depth, in.

Weight, Ibs.

PHYSICAL

Maximum Cable Lengths

Temperature, OF.

Storage
Ranges
Humidity, %

ATMOSPHERE

8dX36x70

56x30x69

33X 85W<65%

33x 85Y.a x 65%

30x29x60

38x32x70

60x28x69

2,450

1,500

3,625

3,825

850

500

2,335

From 761875 ft.
From 760618 ft.

From 761875 ft.
From 715165 ft.

98

±

From 761875 ft.
From 715165 ft.

I

oil
immersed

Temperature, of.

50 to 80.

Humidity, %

20 to 80

Working
Ranges

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr,

Air Flow, cfm.

15,420

1,550

16,700

20,000

2,800

4,800

4,410

1,860

400

---

---

---

---

400

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

208 or 230

208 or 230

208

208 or 230

208

Intemal Filters

Nominal

208

208

Voltage
Tolerance

ELECTRICAL

Nominal

60

Cycles
Tolerance
Phases and Linea

Load KVA

3-phase,
5-wire

3-phase,
5-wire

3-phase,
4-wire

3-phase,
4-wire

3-phase,
4-wire

I-phase,
3-wire

3-phase,
5-wire

5.83

0.73

7.5

9.0

1.1

2.7

1.82

Max 5 per
Model lor 2

NOTES

5/63

Max 5 per
Max 2
7631 Model 2;
10 per system

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

409:211.103
iBM 7094 PHYSICAL CHARACT ERISTICS (Contd.)
Arithmetic
Sequence
Unit

Unit Name

Console
Control
Unit

Card
Reader

Card
Punch

Printer

Magnetic
Tope
Units

Hypertape
Drive

Hypertape Paper Tape
Reader
Control

Data
Channel

Data
Channel

7109-1

7151-2

711-2

721

716-1

729
II, IV, V, VI

7340-1

7640-1

1011-1

7607
1 or 3

7607
2 or 4

69x60x28

49X60x41

32X32X30

50><40X26

47x59X30

29X34X69

60x48X29

70"74:<30

60X32x24

69x56X30

69xs6x30

70x73X31

2,225

700

1,910

1,200

1,350

1,000

529

2,290

2,290

1,100

Model Number

Height X Width X Depth, in.

Weight, Ibs.
Maximum Cable Lengths
PHYSICAL

560

From 7618- From 7618- From 71675 ft.
75 ft.
30 ft.
From 710965 ft.

670
From 71620 ft.

Humidi ty, '7.

1414-6

From 1414- Max comhined cable
Max of 40
90 ft.
ft. from
lenttth between 7607 &
fur est tape unit - 60
Data
ft. from plug (one per
Channel.
MTU leg) -14 ft. from
7618-75 ft. From
7606 -100 ft. From
7617-50 ft. Between
7607s 100 ft.

From 7618- MTUto MTU
60 ft.
75 ft.
From 7607- From 760735 ft.
60 ft.
To 711- 30
ft.
To 721 -44
ft.

Data
Channel
Console

Data
T rans-

mission
Unit

Remote
Inquiry
Unit

7617-1

1009-1

1014-1

70X38x32

30x30X17

40x29X31

35x2-4x29

110

500

175

For 2 channel system
100 ft per
signal leg
140 ft to conneet signal
legs (total
340l Each
add tional
channel reduces total
by 40 ft).

Pragrammed
Trans-

Power
Converter

Power
Control

7750
I, II or III

7608-1

7816-1

·70X181x31

58x61x29

69"><56x30

2,700

1,680

1,150

mission

Control

7909-1

700

Switch
Control
Console

7155
1/2/3/4

12x8X7

10

From 1414- From 141460 ft.
50 ft.

50 ft. Input From plug14 ft.
SO ft. Output
50 ft. converter

control

connected

only to
"7618

I
SO to 110
I

Temperature, OF. -

71

.521
.522
. 523
• 524
.525
. 526

Input:
Output:
Stepping:
Skipping:
Marking:
Searching:

1 card forward.
none •
none .
none.
none .
none.

• 53

Code Translation

automatic by 1414
Synchronizer.

• 54

F'ormat Control: .

none.

.55

Control Operations

.

Adjustments
Adjustment

Method

Card width:

interchange of hardware .

Other Controls
Function

Form

Comment

Load:
Check reset:

key
key

starts loading cards.
resets read error
indicators.

no.
yes.
no.
no.
no.,
with #6025 Read-Punch
column binary.
no •

.73

Loading: and Unloading:

.731 Volumes handled
Storage

yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes.

Capacity

Hopper:
Stackers:
• 732 Replenishment time:
.733 Adjustment time
(80- to 51- column
cards): . . . . .
. . 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . •

.8

3, 000 cards .
1,000 cards.
O. 25 to 0.50 mins .
10 to 15 mins.

1. 25 mins.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACfION
Error

Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: •
End of medium marks:
Exhausted: .
Full stacker:

O. 7

0.4

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

fixed.

Input-Output Operations

Unload: •

. processing unit.
read BCD read column binary
0.272
0.496

1 card.

.52

Disable:
Request interrupt:
Offset card:
Select stacker:
Select format:
Select code:

Demands on System
Component: . .
Condition:
Msec per card:
or
Percentage: •.

.72

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input:

none.

· 621 Nominal or peak speed: 800 cards/min, all cases.
· 622 Important parameters
read time in msec.
Name:
O. 272 (BCD), 0.496 (column
Value:
binary) .
read time 2.5 msec (col.623 Overhead:.
umn binary).
· 624 Effective speeds:
800 cards/min.

1 card of 80 characters.
core storage.

•5

3/63

PERFORMANCE

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:
. 442 Input-output areas: .
.443 Input- output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control:
• 446 Synchronization:

.56

.6

Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
lmperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Feed jam:
Stacker full:

Check or
Interlock
hole count
cannot occur.
check
check
none.
interlock
check
check

Action

indicator and alarm.
indicator and alarm.
indicator.
wait or Indicator.
stop and Indicator.
stop and Indicator.

410:072.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

IBM 7040

REPORTS

Input-Output
CP
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD. READ-PUNCH (PUNCH)

§

.,24

072.

.1

GENERAL

· 11

Identity:

. 12

Description

Arrangement of Heads
punching.
1.
80.
one row at a time.

Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

Card Read- Punch,
(Punch only).
1402 Model II.

Housed in the same cabinet as the card reader, this
unit punches standard 80-column cards at a peak
speed of 250 cards per minute. Conversion from
internal BCD representation to the column card code
is automatic. A reading station makes a hole-count
check on each column. The I, 200-card feed hopper
and three I, OOO-card stackers can be loaded and
unloaded without stopping the punch.
The 1402 can only be connected to data channel A
via a 1414 III or IV Synchronizer. The channel,
1. e., the central processor, is used for only the
time for the actual data transferofaboutO. 272milliseconds. If less than 80 characters are transferred
to the 1414, BCD blanks or binary zeros are punched depending on the selected mode. The 1414 is the
buffer for the punch. The data that is to be punched
is contained in 80 characters which are stored 6
characters to a word; the first 78 are stored in 13
words, and the last two characters are stored in the
high order 12 bits of the fourteenth word. The remainder of the fourteenth word is ignored.

Use of station: .
Distance:
Stacks:
•
Heads / stack:
Method of use:

."

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

. .311 Medium:
• 312 Phenomenon:
• 32

• 13

Availability:

16 months, as of
January, 1962.

• 14

First Delivery:

September, 1960.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

• 21

Drive Mechanism

· 211 Drive past the head:
.212 Reservoirs: . •
• 22

clutch driven rollers.
none.

• 321 Serial by: .
· 322 Parallel by:
· 324 Track use
Data:
Total: •
• 325 Rowuse
Data:
.33

Coding:

.34

Format Compatibility

· 221 Recording sy~tem:
• 222 Sens ing system:
• 223 Common system:

die punches.
brush.
no.

• 23

none.

Multiple Copies:

© 1963

12 rows at standard spadng.
80 columns at standard
spacing.
80.
80 .
12.
BCD or binary pattern of
holes in each column.

Other device or system Code translation
All devices using
standard aO-column cards: .
.35

Physical Dimensions:.

.4

CONTROLLER

• 41

Identity:

• 42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:
• 422 Off-line:

Sensing and Recording Systems

standard 80-column cards .
rectangular holes.

Positional Arrangement

Optional Features
Read and Punch Column Binary, #6025: This option
can only be used on a 1414 IV Synchronizer. It uses
two of the six available 80 character buffers; one
for the read section and one for the punch. Parity
bits are used for central processor-1414 data
transfers.

checking.
I card .
1.
80.
one row at a time.

• 43

not required.
standard 80-column cards .

Channel A only•
#1038 Adapter.
1414 III or IV Synchronizer.

one .
none.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller:
• 432 Restrictions: •

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

one •
none.

3/63

410:072.440
§

IBM 7040

072.

. 44

.62

.5
.51

.621 Nominal or peak speed: 250 cards/min, (all cases) .
. 622 Important parameters

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:. . . •
. 442 Input-output areas: .
• 443 Input- output area
acess: . . . • .
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . .
.445 Table control: .
• 446 Synchronization:

1 card of 80 columns .
Core storage •
each word.
no.
none .
automatic.

Name

Value

Load buffer BCD: .
Load buffer binary:
. 623 Overhead:. . . . .
.624 Effective speeds:
.63 Demands on System
Component

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

Processing Unit:

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Output:

Speeds

1 card.
fixed.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:

. 72

Other Controls

Input:
Output:
Stepping:
Skipping:
Marking:
Searching:

none.
1 card forward .
none.
none •
none.
none.

.53

Code Translation:

automatic, by processor.

.73

.54

Format Control: •

none .

.731 Volumes handled

• 55

Control Operations

3/63

Percentage

0.272

or

0.3.

0.496

or

0.6.

BCD

. 521
.522
. 523
.524
• 525
. 526

Testable Conditions

~

Punching
binary

InEut- OU!Eut Operations

• 56

msec. per card
Punching

.52

Disabled:
Request interrupt:
Offset card: .
Select stacker:
Select format:
Select code: •
Unload: .

0.272 msec.
0.496 msec .
load buffer time.
250 cards/min.

Function
Check reset:

none .

Form
key

resets punch error indicatolS •

.Loading and Unloading

Storage
no.
yes.
no.
yes, one of 3.
no.
BCD or column binary.
no .

Comment

Hopper:
Stackers:
.732 Replenishment time:
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . • . •

Capacity
1, 200 cards.
1,000 cards each.
O. 25 to 0.50 mins.
Punch does not need to be
stopped.
4.0 mins.

410:073.100
IBM 7040
Input-Output
Card Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READ-PUNCH (READER)

§

073.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

• 12

Card Read - Punch.
(Reader only).
1622.

Description

.13

~vailability:

3 to 4 months.

.14

First Delivery:

June, 1961.

•2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head:
• 212 Reservoirs:

The Model 1622 Card Read- Punch can provide
punched card input and output for channel A only on
the 7040 system. The reader and punch feed units
are separate and functionally in~ependent. They
contain their own switches, lights, checking cirCUits, and buffer storage. Nominal reading speed
is 250 cards per minute, and almost all of card
reading time is available for internal processing
by the computer. Card hoppers have a capacity of
I, 200 cards.

· 22

The Model 1622 Card Read-Punch may also be used
with the mM 1620 I and II systems.
Optional Features
Read Octal/Binary, M0l377: This feature permits
the 1622 to read column binary images from cards.
It consists of an 80 character buffer plus associated controls. A 7-9 punch in column one of a
card causes this feature to be activated.
Read 800 CPM, M03473: This feature permits the
1622 to read cards as fast as a 1402 reader.

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:
.222 Sensing system:
· 223 Common system:

none in Reader.
brush.
no.

.23

Multiple Copies: .

none.

· 24

Arrangement of Heads

When a 1622 is attached to a 7040 system, no 1414
m, IV, or V Synchronizer may be attached. As a
result this eliminates the possible use of 1403 or
1404 printers with the system. It also eliminates
the possibility of attaching communications eqUipment to channel A. Communications equipment,
however, may be attached to a 1414 VI Synchro,...
nizer via a 7904 Data Channel (B through E).
The reader has an 80- character buffer which
stores the data in BCD code from one card. A read
command from the processor transfers the buffer
contents into core storage in O. 272 milliseconds and
initiates the refilling of the buffer from the next
card. A second sensing station reads each card
and compares its data to the buffer contents. If an
error is detected, card feeding stops. In addition,
the 7040 checks parity of data received from the
buffer; an error causes an indicator to be set
which may be used by the program to transfer to
error- handling subroutines.

Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

sensing.
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

checking.
1 card.
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

· 31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:
. 312 Phenomenon:
.32

standard 80-column cards .
rectangular punched q.oles.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by: .

'.

. 324 Track use:
.325 Row use:

12 rows at standard spacing.
80 columns at standard
spacing.
all for data .
all for data.

· 33

Coding:.

BCD or binary.

.34

Format
compatibility:

.322 Parallel by:

all devices using standard
80-column cards.

.35

Physical Dimensions:

.4

CONTROLLER

Read 500 CPM, M03474: Doubling of the normal
card reading speed of the 1622 is provided by this
feature.

• 41
.42

Identity:
Connection to System

File Feed, MOO7l1: This feature permits placing
as many as 300 cards in the hopper.

.421 On-line:
· 422 Off-line:.

© 1963

rollers •
none.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

•

standard 80 column cards.

1622 Adapter #1064 •
1.
none.
3/63

410:073.430
§

IBM 7040

073.

.43

Connection to Device

• 431 Devices per controller: One 1622 Card
Punch.
A 1414 m, IV,
.432 Restrictions :
Synchronizer
used with the
.44

.

Blocks

.621 Nominal or peak
speed:
.622 Important parameters
Buffer unload time
BCD:
Binary:
.623 Overhead:
'
.624 Effective speeds:

. 63

The Smaller of the word
count or 80 columns.

• 522 Output:
• 523 Stepping:
• 524 Skipping:
• 525 Marking:
.526 Searching:
• 53

Code Translation:

automatic.

• 54

Format Control

Select code:
• 56

3/63

Component

msec per card

Percentage

Processor
BCD:
Binary:

0.272
0.496

0.2.
0.7 •

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:

• 72

Other Controls

none .

Function

Form

Restore ready status:

Remove ready status
and stop reader:
Read 1 card into storage and refill buffer:

Comment

momentary
switch

Stan key: does not
actually start
reader.

momentary
switch

Stop key: computer
stops at next
read command •

momentary
switch

Load key.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage

program.
2 (BCD or binary).
no.
no.
yes.

Capacity
I, 200 cards.
1,000 cards.

Hopper:
Stacker:
.732 Replenishment
time:

no.
yes.
no.
no.
yes (BCD or column
binary).
see format •

• 733 Adjustment time:
. 734 Optimum reloading
period:
.8

Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
Hopper empty:
Stacker full:
•
Read data transfer
error:

Demands on System

.7

.73

Control Operations
Disable:
Request interrupt:
Offset card:
Select stacker:
Select format:

0.272 msec.
0.496 msec.
buffer load time.
250 cards/minute if processing time per card
does not exceed approximately 237 msec.

80 columns.

read 80 char from reader
buffer into core storage
and initiate reading of 1
card.
see Section :074.
none.
none.
none.
none.

• 55

250 cards/minute.

.

Input-Output Operations

Control:
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Insert spaces:
Section sizes:

none .

or V
can not be
system.

no .
no •
automatic.

.51

.521 Input:

Conditions :

each word.

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.52

.61
.62

80 columns.
core storage .

.5

• 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input:

PERFORMANCE

Read

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:
• 442 Input- output areas:
• 443 Input- output area
access:
.444 Input-output lockout: .
• 445 Table control:
• 446 Synchronization:

.6

0.5 minute; device does
not need to be stopped.
none .
4.8 mins.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or Interlock

yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes (last card read).
yes.

Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Misfeed or jam:

parity and data
comparison with
check station
none.
parity check only.
interlock
see reading errors.
tnterlock
interlock

yes.

Dispatch of data:

parity check at 7040

Reading:

I AUERBACH / .$J

Action
stop, set indicator:
terminate ready
status.
set alarm, indicator.
wait, or indicator.
ready status removed,
set indicator.
setalarm, indicator.

410:074.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 7040
Input-Output
Card Punch
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READ PUNCH (PUNCH)

§

074.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

. 12

Description

Card Read Punch.
(Punch only).
1622.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

• 21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head:
.212 Reservoirs: . . . •
• 22

The Model 1622 Card Read-Punch can provide
punched card input and output for channel A only on
the 7040 system. The reader and punch feeds are
separate and functionally independent, and contain
their own switches, lights, checking circuits, and
buffer storage. Nominal punching speed is 125
cards per minute, and almost all of card punching
time is available for internal processing by the
computer. Card hoppers have a capacity of 1,200
cards.
When a 1622 is attached to a 7040 system, no 1414
III, IV, V Synchronizer may be attached. This eliminates the use of a 1403 or 1404 printer with the system. It also eliminates the possibility of attaching
communication equipment on Channel A although it
can be attached to a 1414 VI Synchronizer via a 7904
Data Channel (B through E).
The punch has an 80-character buffer which stores
the data for one card. A punch command from the
processor transfers data for one card to the buffer
in O. 272 milliseconds. The processor checks parity
of the data sent to the punch buffer and sets a testable indicator if an error occurs, and inhibits
punching of the card.
The data is punched, the punch buffer contents are
parity checked, and the card is read at a checking
station for agreement with the punch buffer contents.
Failure of the parity check or checking station comparison halts the punch and sets an indicator. Also
the program can select a stacker.

rollers.
none.

Sensing and Recording Systems

. 221 Recording system: .
• 222 Sensing system:
• 223 Common system: .

die punches •
brush .
no.

· 23

Multiple Copies: .

none.

• 24

Arrangement of Heads

•3

Use of station:
Stacks: . • • .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

recording.
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

Use of station:
Distance: . .
Stacks: . • . .
Head/stack:
Method of use:

checking.
?
1.

80.
1 row at a time.

EXTERNAL STORAGE

· 3U Form of Storage
· 311 Medium: . •
· 312 Phenomenon: . .
• 32

standard 80-column cards.
rectangular punched holes.

Positional Arrangement

• 324 Track use:
. 325 Row use:

12 rows at standard
spacing.
80 columns at standard
spacing.
all for data .
all for data.

The Model 1622 Card Read-Punch may also be used
with the mM 1620 I and II systems.

· 33

Coding:.

BCD and Binary.

Optional Features

• 34

Format Compatibility:. all devices using standard
80-column cards.

.35

Physical Dimensions:

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: . . . .

.42

Connection to System

Punch Octal/Binary, M0l376: Permits the 1622 to
punch column binary images into cards. The feature consists of an 80-character buffer plus associated controls.
Punch 250 CPM, M99145: This feature doubles the
normal punching speed of the unit making it as fast
as the 1402 punch.
.13

Availability: . .

3 to 4 months.

. 14

First Delivery:.

June, 1961.

© 1963

· 321 Serial by:. .
• 322 Parallel by: .

.421 .On-line:
.422 Off-line: . . . . • ..

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

standard 80-column cards.

1622 Adapter #1046.

1.
none .

3/63

410:074.430
§

IBM 7040

074.

• 43

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 1 1622 Card Read Punch •
. 432 Restrictions: . . • . . • a 1414 III, IV, or V Synchronizer cannot be used
with the system.
· 44 Data Transfer Control
• 441 Size of load: . . • .
• 442 Input-output areas:.
• 443 Input-output area
access: . . . • •
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . • .
.445 Table control: •
• 446 Synchronization:

80 card columns.
core storage .
each word.
no.
no •
automatic.

.6

PERFORMANCE

• 61

Conditions: •

. 62

Speeds

. . • • none .

.621 Nominal or peak speed: 125 cards/minute.
.622 hnportant parameters
BCD O. 272 msec.
Buffer load time:
binary O. 496 msec .
• 623 Overhead: • . • .
buffer load time •
.624 Effective speeds: .
125 cards/minute if processing time per card does
not exceed approximately
477 msec .
• 63

Demands on System
Component

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

• 511 Size of block: •
.512 Block demarcation
Output: . . . • .
.52

msec per card Percentage

Processor BCD punching:
Binary punching:
80 card columns.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

the smaller or the word
count or 80 card columns.

.71

Adjustments: • . . • • . none.

• 72

Other Controls

Input-Output Operations
Function

.521 Input:.
.522 Output:

• 523
. 524
• 525
• 526

Stepping: .
Skipping: •
Marking: .
Searching:

see Section :073.
transfer 80 columns from
core storage to punch
buffer and initiate punching of 1 card.
none .
none •
none.
none.

· 53

Code Translation:

automatic.

• 54

Format Control
Control: . • • .
Format alternatives: •
Rearrangement:
Insert spaces: . . • •
Section sizes: • ,..

program selection of mode.
2, BCD or binary.
no.
rightmost columns are
left blank if count is 13 or
less.
see insert spaces.

Stop punch unit on
1622 error:
Remove ready status
and stop punch:

start key; does
not actually
start punch.

2-position
switch

Stop/N-Stop
switch.

momentary
switch

stop key.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Capacity
Hopper: • . . •
1, 200 cards.
Stacker: . . • .
1,000 cards.
.732 Replenishment time: .
O. 5 minutes; unit does not
need to be stopped.
· 733 Adjustment time:. •
none .
• 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .
9.6 mins .
.8

no.
no.
no.
yes.
yes, BCD or binary.
see format.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Data transmission:
Recording:

Testable Conditions
Disabled: • • . . .
Busy device: . • .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
Hopper empty: . .
Stacker full: • • •
Write data transfer
error:. . • . . • •

3/63

Comment

Control Operations
Disable: • • . . •
Request interrupt:
Offset card: ••
Select stacker: •
Select format:
Select code: •.

.56

Form

Restore ready status: momentary
switch

.73

• 55

0.1
0.2

0.272
0.496

yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.

Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Misfeed or jam:

Check or
Interlock

Action

parity check at 1620 set Indicator and alarm.
halt before punching If
parity check on
buffer
Stop/N -Stop switch on
Stop.
check station com- send card to error
parison with
stacker. Stop, set
buffer
alarm If Stop/N -Stop
switch on Stop.
none.
parity chec k only.
Interlock
ready status removed.
see recording errors.
wait or indicator.
interlock
ready status removed,
interlock
set indicator.

410:075.100
IBM 7040
Input-Output
PTR
INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER

§

075.

. 22

.1

GENERAL

_11

Identity:

.12

Description:

Paper Tape Reader.
1011.

The 1011 Paper Tape Reader can be connected to a
7040 system through data channel A via a 1414 IV
or V Synchronizer, or on any of the 7904 Data Channels via a 1414 VI Synchronizer only. Only one
1011 can be attached to each 1414.
The paper-tape reader can accQmmodate any 5, 6, 7,
or 8- track tape, chad or chadless (in good condition). The tape width can be either 11/16, 7/8 or
1 inch. Data can be read from reels, center-feed
rolls, or strips, at a peak speed of 500 charactersper-second. Since the maximum block size is 80
characters (restricted by the 1414 buffer size), the
effective speed is about 467 characters- per- second_
The 1011 Paper Tape Reader uses a plugboard to
transmit its output to the 1414. The plugboard permits the rearrangement of up to four tracks, character deletion, and code translation. The inputs
from the photoelectric heads are connected from
tape channel hubs to the decoder network. The 67
possible outputs of the decoder and a parity error
output can be wired to any of the 64 encoder inputs
permitting any 6-bit code to be generated. The output of the encoder, which is sent to the 1414
Synchronizer, is the 1400 series 6-bit BCD code
plus an odd parity bit. An end-of-record input is
also available which causes reading to terminate
and the remainder of the 80-character block to be
filled by a character selected from the encoder.

Sensing and Recording Systems

.222 Sensing system:

photoelectric,

· 23

Multiple Copies:

none.

· 24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads / stack:
Method of use:

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:
. 312 Phenomenon:
.32

reading.
1.
8.
reads one row at a time.

paper tape .
punched holes (chad or
chadless type).

Positional Arrangement

• 321 Serial by:
• 322 Parallel by:
• 324 Track use
Data:
Redundancy check:
Timing:
Control signals:
Unused:
Total:
• 325 Row use
Data:
Redundancy check:
Timing:
Control signals:
Unused:
Gap: (if calibrated)

1 to N rows at 10 per inch .
5 to 8 tracks at standard
spacing.
6 or 5.
lor O.
1 (sprocket track).
lor O.
O.
8 to 5 (plus sprocket track) •
variable.
O.

O.
1 (end-or-record; optional).
O.
2.

When 5- channel Teletype code is used, a switch can
be wired which causes the letter and figure shift

.33

Coding:

.34

Format Compatibility

character to be suppressed and to set the decoder
to the correct shift. The output of the decoder then
contains all 58 telegraphic codes including blank.
.13

Availabillty:

16 months, as of
January, 1962.

.14

First Delivery:

June, 1961.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

• 21

Drive Mechanism

. 211 Drive past the head:
.212 Reservoirs
Number:
Form:
Capacity:
.213 Feed drive:
• 214 Take-up drive:

Other device or system

Code translation

Most devices using
5,6,7, or 8-track
paper tape: .
Physical Dimensions

plugboard wiring.

sprocket drive.

.35

2.
swinging arm.
about 2 feet.
motor.
motor.

• 351 Over-all width:
.352 Length
Strip:
Roll(inside feeding):
Reel (outside feeding):

© 1963

normally 5-track telegraphic or 8-track mM
coding; most 5, 6,7, or
8-track codes can be
translated by plugboard
wiring to any 6-bit code.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

11/16,7/8, or 1 inch.
20 to 240 inches.
5 to 400 feet.
5 to 1,000 feet .

3/63

410:075.400
§

I~M

.55

075.

.4

CONTROLLER

• 41

Identity: .

.42

Connection to System

.56
. 421 On-line: .
Off-line:
• 43

Connection to Device

Testable Conditions

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions:

.62

Speeds

yes .
yes.
no.
yes .
yes.
yes.
yes.

Data Transfer Control

• 441 Size of load:
.442 Input- output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization:

1 to N characters, where
N is limited by available
core storage.
core storage .
each word.

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

none •

.621 Nominal or peak
speed:
500 char/sec .
• 622 Important parameters
Name
Value

no.
none.
automatic.

.5

Tape speed:
Start time (to full
speed):

50.0 inches/sec.
2.5 m. sec average,
9.0 m. sec max.
1. 5 rows average, 2.0
rows max .

Stop distance:

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input:

I to 80 characters.

• 63

Input- Output Operations

.521
.522
.523
.524
. 526

Input:
Output:
Stepping:
Skipping:
Searching:

1 block forward.
none.
none.
none •
none.

.53

Code Translation:

plugboard wiring.

.54

Format Control
Control:
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: .
Insert spaces: .
Section sizes:
Omit unwanted
characters:
Assign several tape
codes to one character:

• 623 Buffer unload time
Overhead:
.624 Effective speeds:

O. 272 msec/block
500 N/ (N + 4) char/sec. ,
where N = number of
char/block.

end- of- record character
on tape, or physical end
of tape, or 80 characters .

.52

3/63

no.
yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.

Disabled:
Busy device:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium
marks:
Exhausted:
Buffer being filled:

1 per 1414 Synchronizer.
none.

.431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions:
requires 1 of the 6 1414
Synchronizer 80-char
buffers.
.44

Control 0Eerations
Disable:
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload: •

1414 IV, V, or VI,
Synchronizer.
no separate controller.
#5514 Paper Tape Reader
Adapter.

7040

plugboard.
undefined.
no.
yes.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
yes.

Demands on System
Component:
Condition:
Msec per block:
or
Percentage:

Processing Unit.
buffer unloading.
0.272.
0.1.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments
Adjustments
Tape width:
Tape code:

.72

Method

.

change reels.
change plugboard panels.

Other Controls
Function
Reset alarm circuits: .
Reel/strip selector:

Form
key.
2- position SWitch.

410:075.730

INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER

§

075.

.73

.8
Loading and UnloadIng

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Supply & take-up
reels: . . . .
Center-roll feed:
. 732 Replenishment time:
. 733 Adjustment time:
• 734 Optimum reloading
period:

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Capacity
1,000 feet.
400 feet.
O. 3 to 0.5 mins. for strIps.
1. 0 to 2. 0 mins for reels.
2.0 to 3.0 mins.
4.0 mins.

© 1963

Check or Interlock

Reading:
parity check·
Input area overflow:
none.
plugboard wiring
Invalid code:
check
Exhausted medium:
none.
Imperfect medium:
interlock
Timing conflicts:
Excessive stop
distance:
check
check
Photocell failure:
o No parity check on 5-uack tape.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Action
set indicator.
as wired.
stop, set indicator.
wait, or set indicator•
set indicator •
stop; alarm •

2/63

410:081.100

.STANOARO
EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 7040
Input-Output

1403 PR
INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTER

§

081.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

.12

Printer.
1403, Models 1 and 2.
PR

Description

.13

Availability:

16 months, as of January,
1962•

· 14

First Delivery:

September, 1960 .

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

• 211 Drive past the head:

The 1403 is a line printer with horizontal-chain
printing mechanism, tape controlled carriage, and
feeding and stacking system for continuous forms.
Each character is printed as it is positioned opposite a magnet-driven hammer that presses the form
against the moving chain at the correct printing
position. Peak speed is 600 lines per minute at
single spacing and 480 lines per minute at an average spacing of one inch. Modell has 100 printing
positions and Model 2 has 132; they are identical in
all other respects. The Model 2 Printer requires
the additional Synchronizer Storage option (see below) for the 1414.

.212 Reservoirs: .
· 22

.222 Sensing system: .
.223 Common system:

• 24

yes, with special ribbon.
yes.

printing.
1.
100 or 132.
one line at a time.

Range of Symbols
Standard Set
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
Alternatives:
FORTRAN set:
Basic COBOL set:
Total:

Interchangeable Chain Cartridge Adapter, #4740:
This option can be added to a 1403 if more than one

type font or the numeric font is required.
Numerical Print Feature, #5381: Option #4740 is
also required for this feature which permits printing the characters 0 through 9, plus six special
characters, at a rate of 1285 lines per minute. Two
sets of numerical type are available (#9485 and
#9484).

© 1963

6.

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

Additional Synchronizer Storage, Printer #7680:
This option must be added to a 1414 ill or IV Synchronizer when a 1403 IT is used.

Special Print Chain, #5530: Several special character sets and fonts are available. This feature
requires option #4740.
Selective Tape Listing Feature, #6411: Eight 1. 5
inchorfour 3.1 inch tapes can be printed and spaced
separately. A 1403 Model IT is required to make
full use of this option.

magnet-driven hammer
presses form against
moving horizontal chain.
echo check on hammer
magnet.
no.

Multiple Copies

.231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon:
• 232 Types of master
Multilith:.
•••
Spirit:. •
••

• 25

Optional Features

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:

• 23
The 1403 can only be connected to data channel A
via a 1414 ill or IV Synchronizer. The channel,
1. e., the central processor, is used for only the
time for the actual data transfer of about O. 320 or
0.384millisecondsformodels 1 and 2 respectively.
The 1414 acts as a buffer between the processor and
the printer. The data to be printed consists of
either 100 or 132 characters which are stored 6
characters to a word. Only the first 100 (or 132)
are transferred to the buffer if the word count in the
print instruction is greater than 16. (or 22). When
the word count is smaller, the remainder of the line
to be printed is filled with blanks.

sprocket drive push and
pull, paper punched on
both sides.
none.

10
26
12

0-9.
A-Z.
&,0- $ * / %#@'" •
by special request.
alternative Print Set F.
no.
48 and blank.
Numeric Set (NP)

Numerals:
Letters:
Special: .
FORTRAN set:
Req. COBOL set:
Total: •

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

by Auerbach Corporation and IiNA Incorporated

10

o
6

0-9.

$.,*-0.

no.
no.
16 and blank.

3/63

410:081.311
§

IBM}040

081.

.311 Medium:
. 312 Phenomenon:
.32

. 324 Track use
Data:
Total: .
.325 Row use
Data:
Coding:

.34

Format Compatibility:

.35

Phrsica1 Dimensions

.351 Over- all width:
.352 Length:
Forms:

.353 Maximum margins:.
Left:
Right, Modell:
Model 2:
.4

CONTROLLER

. 41

Identity:

. 42

Connection to Srstem

. 421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
• 43

• 44

.523 Stepping:

100 or 132.
100 or 132.

. 524 Skipping:

all.

.53

Code Translation:

none.

.54

Format Control
Control:
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: .
Insert spaces: .
Section sizes:

1 to 22. 0 by 1/6 inch at
6 lineS/in.
1 to 16.5 by 1/8 inch at
8 lineS/in.
1 to 17.0 inches (recommended maximum for
proper stacking).
continuous roll or fanfold.
3.0 inch.
6.2 inch.
3.0 inch.

.55

.56

1.
none •

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions
I:

1.
none.

.442 Input-output areas: .
. 443 Input- output area
access:
.444 Input- output area
lockout:
• 445 Table control: .
. 446 Synchronization:

1 line of 100 or 132 characters in multiple of 6.
core storage.

II:

each word.
no •
none.
automatic.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

III:
IV:
.62

none.
1 line forward with single
step.
step 1,2, or 3 lines as
separate operation, or as
combined "print then
step" .
skip to one of 12 channels
on paper tape loop; may
be combined in "print
then Skip".
none.
none.
automatic, by processor.

program.
none.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.

no.
yes.
no.
no.

Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device:
Output lock: .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:
Exhausted:

#1038 Adapter.
1414 III or IV Synchronizer.

fixed.

Control Operations
Disable:
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code: .

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:

3/63

.525 Marking:
.526 Searching:

engraved character font
(Internal coding as in
Data Code Table No.4).

3.50 to 18.75 in. by vernier •.

100 or 132 char per line.

InEut- Output Operations

1 line at 6 or 8 per inch.
100 or 132 characters at
10 per inch.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per
controller: .
.432 Restrictions:

.52

.521 Input:
.522 Output:

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:

.33

continuous fanfold
sprocket punched stationery .
printing.

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Output:

yes.
yes •
no.
no.
yes .
no.
yes .

standard character set,
Model I.
standard character set,
Model II.
numeric set (NP), Model I•
numeric set, Model II.

SEeeds

.621 Nominal or peak speed: I & II, 600 lines/minute .
III & IV, 12851ines/minute.
.622 Important parameters
Value
Name
Print 1 line, I & II: .
100. 0 m. sec.
46.7 m.sec .
Print 1 line, m & IV:
33.0 in/sec for skips of
Skipping speed:
8 lines or less.
75.0 in/sec for skips of
more than 8 lines.

410:081.623

INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTER
§

.72

081.

Function

• 623 Overhead
Step 1 line:
Step 2 lines:
Step 3 lines:
Independent skip N
lines: . . . . .

20 m. sec.
25 m. sec.
30 m. sec.
15 + 5N m. sec. (N < 9).
37.4+ 2. 2N m. sec.
(N ~ 9, all others).

Print &. skip N lines,
I &"II: • . • • • • as above + 80.0 m. sec.
Print &. skip N lines,
III &. IV: • • •
as above + 26.7 m. sec .
• 624 Effective speeds:
Average line
Lines/min. ,
Lines/min. ,
I &. II
feed, inches
III&. IV
600
1,285
1/6:
572
1,160
2/6:
545
1,059
3/6:
480
838
1:
418
664
2:
353
514
4:
(See graph)
.63

Demands on System
Component

Condition

m.sec per line.

I
II
III

0.320
0.384
0.320
0.384

Processing Unit:

Other Controls

IV

..!!! Percentage·
or
or
or
or

0.3
0.4
0.6

0.7

.73

Comment

~

Check reset:

key

Carriage restore:

key

Single cycle:

key

resets printer error
indica tions.
positions carriage at
channell on tape loop.
initiates one print cycle.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Capacity
20 inch stack.
20 inch stack.

Storage
Hopper:
Stacker:
.732 Replenishment
time: . . . .

1 to 2 mins.
printer needs to be
stopped .

. 733 Adjustment
time: . . • . . . .

2 to 3 mins.
printer needs to be
stopped .
. 734 Optimum reloading period
I &. II:
56 mins.
III &. IV:
35 mins.
2-part sets, 17 inches long,
Basis:
at I-inch line spacing.
.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

• At single spacing.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments
Adjustment
Vertical alignment:
Horizontal alignment:
Form width:
Printing quality:
Form thickness:
Line pitch:

I
\

Erro+

Method
Comment
knobs.
knobs.
sliding forms tractors.
graduated dial.
graduated lever.
switch
6 or 8 lines/in.

Recording:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imprefect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Feed jam:
Parity:

Check or
Interlock
echo check
none.
check
check
none.
interlock
check
check

Action
indicator.
indicator_
stop and indicator.
wait or indicator.
stop indicator.
indicator.

'.
© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

410:083.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 7040
Input-Output
Output Typewriter

INPUT-OUTPUT: OUTPUT TYPEWRITER

§

083.

· 23

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Description

Output Typewriter.
Part of the Console.

.231 Maximum number: .
depends on stationery .
• 232 Types of master
Multilith: . • • . . • • no.
Spirit: . . • . • . .
yes.
· 24

The Output Typewriter is a standard part of a 7040
system. It is essentially an IBM Selectric typewriter, but it has been modified to decode 64-bit
configurations into positioning coordinates for the
print-ball mechanism. The print-ball is an oblate
sphere that has the raised letter font in tiers around
its circumference. It swivels and tilts in order to
position a character for printing. The print-ball is
mounted on a carriage that advances across the
fixed platen as each character is printed.
The Typewriter is connected to Data Channel A. It
can be operated in a record or a character mode.
In the record mode the Data Channel (processor) is
engaged until every character of every word specified by the channel command word has been printed.
In the character mode the Data Channel (processor)
is tied up only until one character addressed by the
channel control word has been transferred to the
typewriter buffer. This represents about a 42 per
cent overlapping of the typing with processing.
Parity is checked both at core storage and at the
typewriter. Up to 15 characters a second can be
typed when operating at full speed. Two print-balls
with the "Report" and "Programming" fonts are
standard. Most of the unusual special characters
are in upper case shift. Since changing shift requires one character time, this delay is minimized.
Because of its slow speed and the tying up of the
processor, it is best used for the purposes of logging and notes to the operator. In these situations
the processor is generally not needed, or operator
intervention is required before processing may resume. Compared with operator reaction time, the
typing time should be negligible.
. 13

Availability: . .

12 to 15 months (**).

· 14

First Delivery: .

March, 1960.

·2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

• 25

Numerals:
Letters:
Special: . .
Alternatives: .
FORTRAN set: .
Req. COBOL set:.
Total: . . • • . . .
.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

· 31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium: . .
. 312 Phenomenon
Output: . .
· 32

printing.
1.
1.
one character at a time.

Range of Symbols
10
0 - 9.
26
A - Z.
18 } see Data Code Tables
1 and 2.
yes.
yes.
64 and blank.

continuous fanfold stationery .
printing.

Positional Arrangement
character at 10 per inch.

· 321 Serial by: .
• 324 Track use
Data:
· 325 Row use:

85 print positions.
all for data.

· 33

Coding:.

engraved character font.

.34

Format Compatibility: . none.

• 35

Physical Dimensions

.351 Overall width:
· 352 Length:. . . .

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: . . . .

.42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line: . • . . . . ,

.211 Drive past the head: . . feed platen.
. 212 Reservoirs: . . . . . • none.

.43
• 22

Multiple Copies

8.875 inches.
no limit .

Data Channel A.

1.
none •

Connection to Device

Sensing and Recording Systems

· 221 Recording system: .
• 222 Sensing system:
. 223 Common system: •.

engraved hammers.
none •
no.

© 1963

.431 Devices per controller: 1.
· 432 Restrictions:. . • . . . none.
(**) Estimate by editorial staff.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

410:083.440
§

IBM 7040
.55

083.

· 44

Disable:
Request interrupt:

Data Transfer Control

. 441 Size of load
Input: •
Output: ••
. 442 Input-output areas: •
• 443 Input-output area
access: . . • • .
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: . • . . .

.445 Table control: •
.446 Synchronization:

Control Operations

1 word or character.
limited only by capacity of
core storage.
core storage.

.56

Condition~

Disabled: .
Busy device:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium marks: •
Exhausted: .

each word or character.
processing is inhibited
during data transfers between core storage and
synchronizer register.
yes, for output.
automatic.

Testable

no.
yes .

.6

PERFORMANCE

· 61

Conditions:...

Speeds

no •
yes..
no.
no .
no.
no.

I : single character
II : a record of N words
(6N char.)

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.62

. 51

Blocks

.621 Nominal or peak speed: 15 char/second for output.
.624 Effective speeds: . . . . same as peak speeds, less
allowance for carriage
returns.

• 511 Size of block
Output: ..
.512 Block demarcation
Output: . . . . .
• 52

1 character to 32,767
words.

Demands on System
Component
Processor I:
Processor II:

Input-Output Operations

none.
type 1 block forward; data
is transferred from core
storage to typewriter via
the MQ register •
. 523 Stepping: . . . . . . . . carriage return at the end
of a line or when count in
channel control word is
zero .
. 524 Skipping: .
none.
.525 Marking: .
none.
.526 Searching:
none.
· 521 Input:.
.522 Output:

.53

Code Translation:

automatic.

· 54

Format Control: .

fixed format; automatic
'carriage return after
each line.

2/63

• 63

zero count in channel
control word.

msec per char

or

38.6
66.6

58.2 .
100.0.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

• 71

Adjustments:...... typical typewriter
adjustments.

.72

.other Controls: . . . • none.

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Recording:

parity check

Output block size:
Exhausted medium:'
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:

none.
none.
none.
interlock

Percentage

Action
set indicator and no
print.

wait or set indicator.

410:091.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 7040
Input-Output
729 Magnetic Tape Units
INPUT-OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS

§

091.

.212 Reservoirs
Number: •
Form: . .
Capacity:
. 213 Feed drive: .
.214 Take-up drive:

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

. 12

Description

• 22

These tape units are used in the mM 1401, 1410,
7040, 7070 and 7080 series systems as well as in
the 709, 7090 and 7094. They use a standard reel
and half-inch tape compatible with the 7330 and 727
tape units. The only Significant differences among
the four models are in recording densities and tape
speeds. These are summarized in the following
table:

• 221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system:
• 223 Common system: •

Model

Magnetic Tape Unit
729 II, IV, V, VI.

Tape speed,
inches/sec

II

75

IV

112.5

V

75

VI

112.5

Density
char/inch

Peak transfer
rate, char/
sec

200
556
200
556
200
556
800
200
556
800

15,000
41,667
22,500
62,500
15,000
41,667
60,000
22,500
62,500
90,000

Up to ten tape units may be connected to each Dita
Channel in a 7040 system. Tape operations may be
performed parallel with internal processing except
on Channel A. However, in normal operation,
tapes attached to a single channel cannot be involved in simultaneous data transmission. Any
number of non-data transmitting operations may
occur simultaneously. It is usually economical to
use the highest density of a given model in order
to achieve the maximum transmission rates; however, compatibility with other machines (such as
the 704) may dictate the occasional use of lower
density settings.
.13

Availability:

. 14

First Delivery
729
729
729
729

II:

IV:
V:

VI:

•2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head: •

12 to 15 months.

November, 1959.
November, 1959.
May, 1962.
May, 1962.

pinch roller friction.

© 1963

2.
vacuum.
about 7 feet .
motor.
• motor •

Sensing and Recording Systems
magnetic head •
magnetic head.
two- gap head provides
read -after-write
checking.

· 23

Multiple Copies: . • • • multiple copies may be obtained by dialing two or
more tapes on a given
channel to the same number. This procedure is
not recommended.

• 24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks: • . . .
Heads/stack: •
Method of use:

recording.
1.

Use of station:
Distance: •.
Stacks: • . . •
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

sensing.
0.3 inch.
1.

·3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

• 31

Form of Storage

· 311 Medium: • .

• 312 Phenomenon:
• 32

7.
1 row at a time.

7.
1 row at a time.

plastic tape with
magnetizable surface •
magnetization.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by: • . • . • ••• 1 to N rows at 200, 556, or
(models V and VI) 800
rows per inch
(see 408:091. 431) .
.322 Parallel by: •••••
7 tracks.
· 324 Track use
Data: . . • • . • •
6.
Redundancy check:
1.
Timing: • . • . •
o (self-clocking).
Control signals: •
O.
Unused:
O•
Total: •
7•
. 325 Row use
Data:
1 to N.
Redundancy check:
1.
Timing: . . • • •
O.
Control signals:. .
o (record and segment
marks are optional).

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

410:091.325
§

IBM 7040

091.

. 446 Synchronization: • . . . automatic •

. 325 Row use (Cont'd)
Unused: . . • . .
Inter-block gap:
Inter-file gap: •
Erased gap (to skip
flaw area):
• 33

• 34

Coding:........

gaps.
0.75 inch.
3.75 inch.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

3.75 inch.

.51

Blocks

column binary as in core
with odd parity redundancy check.
binary coded decimal
(BCD) as in Data Table
No. 4 with even parity
check.

.511 Size of block: .

matched, low recording
density only.
matched, low recording
density only.

727: •
7330:
Physical Dimensions

• 351 Overall width:
. 352 Length: .
Leader: .
Trailer:

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: •••.

. 42

0.50 inch.
2,400 feet per reel.
25 feet.
25 feet.

#1040 Tape Adapter.
1414 I, II, III Synchronizer.
#3585 800 cpi required on
1414 for 729 II and VI
800 cpi operation .

Connection to System

.421 On-line:

... ....

.52

.53

Code Translation:

.54

Format Control

....

.441 Size of load:
• 442 Input-output areas: •
. 443 Input-output area
access: • . . . .
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: .••
• 445 Table control:

.

.55

2/63

each word.
none •
no.

..

program .
densities (2 or 3).
no.
no.
no .
no .
no.
yes.

Control Operations
Disable: . . • . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code: .
Rewind: .
Unload: ..

.56
1 word.
core storage.

code (binary or BCD) selected by program - translations are automatic.

Control: . . . .
Format alternatives: .
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point:
..
Insert spaces:
Recording density:
Section sizes:. . .
·

Connection to Device

Data Transfer Control

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input: . . . . • . . . . • forward only.
read until either N words
or end-of-record.
end-of-file gap always terminates reading .
. 522 Output: . . . . . . . . • write N words followed by
end-of-record •
erase gap.
write end-of-file gap .
.523 Stepping:
none .
. 524 Skipping:
one block backward.
one block forward.
one file backward •
.525 Marking: .
inter block or inter file
gap •
. 526 Searching:
none.

• 431 Devices per controller: 10.
. 44

0.75 inch inter-record gap.
3. 75 inch inter-file gap.
O. 75 inch end of
transmission.
3. 75 inch gap written by
instruction .

Output:

up to four 7904 Channels
plus Data Channel A with
a maximum of ten tape
drives each.

.422 Off-line
Associated equipment: may be switched to another
channel, another computer, or an off-line
auxiliary unit either
manually or by means of
the optional 7830 switching feature and 7155
Switch Control Console.
• 43

.512 Block demarcation
Input:

Format Compatibility
Other device or system Code translation

.35

1 to 32,767 words in block.
1 to N blocks in files.

yes.
yes.
no .
· yes, binary or BCD.
• yes .
• yes .

Testable Conditions
Disabled: . .
Busy device:
Output lock: •
Nearly exhausted:
Busy. controller:
End of medium marks:
Beginning of tape:. . .

·
·
·
·
·
.
.

yes .
yes •
no.
yes (25 feet).
yes.
yes.
yes.

INPUT -OUTPUT: 729 blAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
§

410:091.600

09l.

.6

PERFORMANCE

.62

Speeds

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments
Adjustment

.621 Nominal or peak speed
Model II:
Model IV: .
Model V:

Recording
density:
Densities
option:

15,000 or 41,667 char/sec.
22,500 or 62,500 char/sec.
15,000, 41,667, or 60,000
char/sec.
22,500, 62,500 or 90,000
char/sec.

Model VI: .

Method

Comment

switch

selects 1 of 2 densities.

switch

selects any pair of densities (models V and VI
only), 200/556, 556/800,
200/800.

. 622 Important parameters
Name

Models
II

Density (char/inch):
Tape speed (inches/
sec):
75.
Srart time (msec)
read:
10.5
write:
7.5
Stop time (msec)
read:
2.1
5_1
write:
Full rewind time (min): 1.2
Gaps block (inches):
0.75
file (inches):
3.75

.72
V

IV
200 or 556

Function

200. 556 or 800

112.5

75.
10.5
7.5

6.7
5.0
2.1
3.8
0.9
0.75
3.75

2.1
5.1
1.2
0.75
3.75

Other Controls

VI

112.5

Form

Address
selection:
Load
rewind:

6.7

5.0
2.1
3.8
0.9
0.75
3.75

Unload:

Comment

dial

selects unit address 0-9.

button

lowers tape into reservoirs
and rewinds tape to load
point.
removes tape from reservoirs and raises upper portion of head assembly.

button

File
.623 Overhead:
protection: ring on ring permits writing.
Gap crossing time (msec)
reel
Model II and IV
V and VI
Block: . . • .
10
6.67.
.73 Loading and Unloading
File: • . . . . • . . • 50
33.33 .
• 624 Effective speeds
.731 Volume handled
Models II and V
Words per reel
Data format
200 char/inch:
15, OOON/(N +150) char/sec.
at Density (cpi)
556 char/inch:
41, 667N/(N +417) char/sec.
Words/
Records/
Models IV and VI
200
556
800
record
file
200 char/inch:
22, 50ON/(N +150)char/sec.
498,000
548,000
20
384,000
20
960,000
872,200
556 char/inch:
62, 50ON/(N +417) char /sec.
548,000
20
40
600,000
542,000
50
408,000
20
Model V
572,000
926,000 1,036,000
40
50
800 char/inch:
60, OOON/(N +600) char/sec.
all
752,000 1,845,000 2,350,000
167 (1,000 char.)
Model VI
800 char/inch:
90, OOON/(N +600) char/sec.
. 63

Note: 1 word = 6 char•

Demands on System
ComEonent Condition

msec Eer word

Core Storage: 15,000 char/sec
22,500 char/sec
41,667 char/sec
60, 000 char/sec
62,500 char/sec
90, 000 char/sec
Channel A
Central
Processor: IS, 000 char/sec
22,500 char/sec
41,667 char/sec
60,000 char/sec
62,500 char/sec
90, 000 char/sec

0.016
0.016
0.016
0.016
0.016
0.016

i

0.400
0.267
0.143
0.100
0.096
0.067

percentage
4.3.
6. O.
11.3.
16.0.
17.l.
24.11.

plus
sran
time
not
overlapped

msec Eer block

100.
100.
100.
100.
100.
100.

Percentage

\"

Start time not
overlapped:
Models II, V
read
write
Models IV, VI
read
write

6.5
1. a

100.
100.

5.2
1.0

100.
100.

© 1963

.732 Replenishment time: . 1. 0 to 1. 5 mins.
tape unit needs to be stopped.
.734 Optimum reloading period
Models II & V:.
6. mins.
Models IV & VI:. . . 4 mins.
.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Recording:
Reading:
Input area
overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted
medium:
Imperfect
medium:
Timing conflicts:
Recording level:

by Auerbach Corporation and -IiNA Incorporated

lateral parity
lateral & longitudinal parity
none - not possible.
none - not possible.
yes

Action
indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm.

see reading.

reflective spot or
tape mark

indicator.

yes
interlock
dual level signal
strength check

halts rape drive.
stalls processor.
indicator & alarm.

3/63

410:092.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

IBM 7040
Input-Output
7330 MTU

REPORTS

INPUT-OUTPUT: 7330 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

§

092.

• 24

•1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity:

_12

Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

. . . . . . . Magnetic Tape Unit.
7330 Model 1.
MT.

Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

Description
The 7330 Magnetic Tape Unit is slower, simpler,
and less expensive than the 729 Tape Unit, but the
two are completely compatible. Tape speed is 36
inches per second, and peak transfer rate is either
7,200 or 20,016 characters per second, depending
upon the recording density selected. Lateral and
longitudinal parity checks are made on both reading
and recording.

Arrangement of Heads

•3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

· 31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium: . .
• 312 Phenomenon:

The throughput of the 7330 can be limited by two restrictions that should be considered:

· 321 Serial by: •.

of the tape from the vacuum columns and readrecord head. Rewinding without unloading requires 13. 3 minutes.
(2) To switch the unit from read to write status, it
must be programmed to backspace over the last
record read and then rewrite it; such switching
between reading and recording will be infrequent
in normal applications.

• 322 Parallel by: .
· 324 Track Use
Data: . , .
Redundancy check:
Timing: . . . . •
Control signals: .
Unused:
Total: .
• 325 Row use
Data:
Redundancy check:
Timing: . . . • •
Control signals:
Unused:
Gap: •

Availability: ••

16 months •

• 14

First Delivery: .

October, 1961.

•2

PHYSICAL FORM

· 21

Drive Mechanism

• 211 Drive past the head:
.212 Reservoirs
Number:
Form: • . .
Capacity: .
.213 Feed drive: .
• 214 Take-Up drive: .

. 23

2.

Sensing and Recording Systems

· 221 Recording system: .
. 222 SenSing system:
• 223 Common system:. .

.33

Coding:

• 34

Format Compatibility

pinch roller friction.
vacuum.
about 1. 5 feet.
motor.
motor.

sensing.
1.

7.
one row at a time.

• plastic tape with magnetizable surface.
magnetization.

I to 32,767 rows at 200 or
556 char/inch.
7 tracks.

6.
1.

o (self-clocking).
O.
O.

7.
1 to N.
1.
O.

O.
O.
0.75 inch.
as in Data Code Table
No.!.

Physical Dimensions

· 351 Overall width:
• 352 Length: • • • •
.4

CONTROLLER

. 41

Identity: •

Multiple Copies: . . . . none .

© 1963

one row at a time.

Other device or system Code translation
IBM 729, 727 tape
units: . . . . • .
not required •
• 35

magnetic head.
magnetic head •
two-gap head provides
read -after-write
checking.

1.

7.

Positional Arrangement

(1) High speed rewind, which requires 2.2 minutes
per full reel, is always terminated by unloading

• 13

· 22

.32

recording.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

0.50 inch.
2, 400 feet per reel.

#1040 Tape Adapter, plus
either a 1414 II Synchronizer, a 1414 lor VII Synchronizer with a #7184
Tape Intermix feature.

3/63

41O:Q92 .. 420
§

IBM 7040

092.

.42

.56
Connection to System

• 421 On-line:
. 422 Off-line:
. 43

End of medium marks: . yes.
Beginning of tape:.
yes .
End-of-file:. • . •
yes •
End-of-operation:
. yes .

1 per data channel.
none.

Connection to Device

Testable Conditions (Cont'd)

.6

PERFORMANCE

.431 Devices per controller: 10.
.432 Restrictions: . • • • . . when using a 1414 I or VII
Synchronizer, the total
number of 7330 and 729
Tape Units is 10.

. 61

Conditions

.44

. 621 Nominal or peak speed: 7,200 or 20,016 char/sec .
.622 hnportant parameters
Name
Value
Density: . . . . . . •2Nfor 556 char/inch .
Tape speed: . . . . . 36.0 inches/sec.
Inter-block gap: . . . 0.75 inch.
Start time (can be overlapped with processing on
channel A).
Read: .•
7. 6 msec.
Write: •
20.4 msec •
Stop time,
Read:.
12.9 msec.
Write: .
15.3 msec •
.623 Overhead: . .
start time •
• 624 Effective speeds
At 200 char/inch: .
7,200 N/(N +147)char/sec .
At 556 char/inch: .
20,016 N/(N +408) char/sec.
(see graph).
where N = char/block
6 char = I word.

Data Transfer Control

....

.441 Size of load:
• 442 Input-output areas: •
• 443 Input:-output area
access: • . . . •
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . • •
. 445 Table control:
• 446 Synchronization: .

1 word.
core storage •
each word.
no .
none.
automatic.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

• 51

Blocks

. 511 Size of block: .
• 512 Block demarcation
Input: • . . . . •

Output:
.52
.521
.522
.523
.524

............

1 to 32,767 words.
the smaller of the words
between gaps on tape or
word count in data
channel.
word count iIi data channel.

.526 Searching:
.53

Code Translation:

matched codes.

.54

Format Control: • •

none.

.55

Control Operations

• 525 Marking: •

Disable: .. .. .. .. ..
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:.
'
Unload: .••

.

disabled after unloading•
yes.
no.
binary or BCD.
yes .
yes.

Testable Conditions
Disabled: . .
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:

3/63

.63

Speeds

Demands on System
Component

1 block forward.
I block forward.
none.
1 block backward (backspace). 3.5 inches forward (to skip defective
tape areas).
inter-block gap, or endof-file gap.
none.

.56

.62

Input-Output Operations
Input: ••
Output: .
Stepping:
Skipping:

yes.
yes.
no.
yes, 15 feet remaining.
yes.

Data Channel A.
7904 Data Channel.

I: . . .
II: . • .

Gondition

msec per block or

Percentage

Processing Unit: I; Data Channel A
200 char/inch
0 837N} plus
100. O.
O'• 300N
s~n
556 char/inch
100. O.
, nme
Stan time (not
overlapped)
Read
0.6
100. O.
Write
7.4
100. O.
Core Storage:
II; 7904 Data
Channel
Read or write
200 char/inch
0.016N
2.2.
556 char/inch
0.016N
5.3.
where N is number'of words per block.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILmES

.71

Adjustments
Adjustment
Recording density:

.72

Method
switch

Comment
200 or 556 char/in.

Other Controls
Function

Form

Address selection: dial.
Load rewind:
key
Unload:
File protection:

key.
ring on
spool

Comment
loads tape into
reservoirs.
ring permits
writing.

INPUT-OUTPUT: 7330 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

§

092.

• 73

410:092.73
.8

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storaff:
Spoo: . . . • .

Capacity
2, 400 feet; for 1, OOO-char
blocks, 5, 000, 000 char
at 200 char/inch,
11,300, 000 char at 556
char/inch.
.732 Replenishment time: . . 1. a to 1. 5 mins.
tape unit needs to be
stopped.
.734 Optimum reloading
period: • • . . • •
13 mins.

© 1963

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or Interlock

Action

Recording:

lateral & longirudinal parity

Reading:

lateral & longitudinal parity

indicator &
alarm.
indicator &
alarm.

Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing Conflicts:
Recording level:

none.
none.
all codes acceptable
reflective spot or tape mark
none.
interlock
signal strength check

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

indicator.
indicator.
indicator &
alarm.

2/63

410:101.100
•

SfANDAAD

II

mM 7040/7044

REroRTS
EDP

Input-Output, Other

INPUT-OUTPUT: OTHER

§

101.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:.

. 12

Description

. . . . . . 7904 I, II, Data Channels.

The 7904 data channel is optional equipment for the
7040 and 7044 systems. A system may have as
many as four such channels,_ which are designed B
through E. Each 7904 permits simultaneous inputoutput operation with computing and other data
channels.
Connected to each 7904 may be a DIRECT DATA
device, a 1414 I, II or VII Synchronizer and either
a 7631 File Control, a 1414 VI-Synchronizer, or a
7750 Transmission Control Unit.
A DIRECT DATA connection uses 36 data traJ;1sfer
lines, two parity lines, 20 sense lines, and nec~s­
sary control lines. An interrupt transfer to central
processor address 00004 is used to synchronize the
connection. Data may be transmitted at rates up to
62,500 (7040) or 133,333 (7044)words per second;
however, high data transfer rates require a curtailment of other data channel operations.
The 1414 I, II or VII is used to connect magnetic
tape units to the system, whereas the 1414 VI is
used to connect communications equipment.
The 7631 File Control provides a connection between
the central processor and 1301 disk storage units.
Up to five 1301-1 or 1301-2 storage units may be attached to the sy:stem through one or more 7631 control units attached to different 7904 channels.
The 7750 Transmission Control Unit is a specialpurpose computer system designed to multiplex a
number of communication devices. Its stored program may be used for formatting, editing, trunk assignment, and routine record keeping.
The operation of 7904 data channel is as follows:
The input-output operation is initiated by executing
a select I/O unit instruction in the central
processor. If the unit is busy, the instruction is
held up until the 1/9 unit is available. Once the
unit is available and ready, a data transfer command is sent to the data channel. The data channel
decodes the command and sets up the channel circuitry accordingly (i. e., mode of operation, starting address, and word count). After this operation
has been completed, the word counter in the data
channel is checked for zero. If the counter contains
a zero, the channel terminates its operation and
disconnects the I/O unit. If the counter does not
contain a zero, the channel continues with its operation in the mode selected (read or write).

© 1963

Description (Contd.)
During a read operation (input), the selected I/O device serially transfers a 7-bit byte (6 data bits plus
parity). The bytes are parity checked and the data
bits transferred to the Assembly Register. After a
36-bit word is assembled, the word is then sent to
the Channel Data Register for transfer to core storage. The core storage location is specified by the
contents of the Channel Address Counter. After a
complete word is assembled and transferred to core
storage, the word counter is decremented and the
address counter incremented, and the data transfer
operation repeated until the word count reaches
zero. However, should an end-of-record signal be
received from the device, the operation is terminated immediately.
In the write mode (output operation), the Channel
Address Counter specifies the core storage location
form which a 36- bit word is to be transferred to the
channel. The word is divided into six 6-bit data
P.Ortions and parity added to each portion before being sent to the selected device. The word counter
and address counter are decremented and incremented respectively after each word transfer.
The foregoing procedures are essentially the same
as the "Input-output a record and disconnect" channel command (lORD) in the 7090/7094.
An I/O transfer error on the 7904 turns on an indicator which can cause an interrupt. If interrupts
are enabled and the processor is not executing a
"Reset and Load Channel A" (RCHA) instruction, the
processor can respond to the interrupt immediately.
When this is done, it is possible to interrogate the
channel to ascertain which word was transferred in
error.
The 7904 Data Channel can sense and store many
error and conditional indicators. These indicators
can be used to interrupt the program provided they
are enabled. Under these conditions the program
counter in the processor is stored with the interrupt
indicators in the appropriate interrupt location and
the program counter set to the next address, as
soon as one of the indicators is set. However, when
the processor is acting as data channel A byexecuting an RCHA instruction, the program counter is not
used to access another instruction until the RCHA
instruction terminates. Therefore, the reaction to
an interrupt is delayed until an input-output operation on channel A is completed. This must be considered when "real-time" devices are to be controlled by the system. Interrupts from many input
"real-time" devices are notification that they must
be serviced within a prescribed time. If these interrupts are ignored, the "real-time" units may become overloaded and as a result, lose data.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

410: 102.100

_STANDARD
EDP
•

IBM 7040

REPORTS

Input-Output:
Data Channel A

INPUT-OUTPUT: DATA CHANNEL A

§

102.

.12

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . . . . . . • . Data Channel A, a part of
the Central Processor.

.12

Description
The basic 7040 and 7044 systems include one inputoutput channel, called data channel A, whose operation is not overlapped with that of the processing
unit. Attached to the channel may be a console typewriter (which is standard on the 7040/7044 systems);
a 1401; a 1414 Model I, II, or III Synchronizer; and
either a 1622 Card Read-Punch or a 1414 Model III,
IV, or V Synchronizer. Up to ten magnetic tape
units may be attached by means of a 1414 Model I,
II, or III. With the exception of the console typewriter, all channel A attachments require adapter
units to connect them to the processor.
Data channel A is the only channel in the system that
can accommodate a 1414 Model III, IV, or V Synchronizer. These units permit the attaching of a
1402 Card Read-Punch, 1403 and 1404 Printers, a
1011 Paper Tape Reader, telegraph units, 1014 Inquiry Stations, and 1009 Data Transmission Units.
Channel A is also the only data channel in the system to which the 1401, 1402, 1403, and 1404 units
can be attached.
The 1401 attachment permits the 7040 to transmit
and receive data from a 1401 and its connected input-output units at a maximum speed of 87,000 characters per second. The programs of both machines
must make periodic checks to ascertain whether the
other machine is requesting to transmit data. Data
transfers take place between the core stores.
Two way communication can be programmed. The
7040 assumes the role of master and the 1401 the
slave, since the 7040 can initiate data transfers in
either direction. When 1401 input equipment is to
be used, the 1401 inust read the data before it can
be transmitted to the 7040. Conversely, when using
1401 output equipment, the 1401 must accept the data
in its core store before transferring it to the output
unit.
Input-output instruCtions for channel A are performed as follows: First the channel and unit are
tested for availability. Even though the processor
is serving as channel A, the "channel A in use" indicator may still be on from a previous operation.
Next a "Select Read" or "Select Write" instruction

© 1963

Description (Contd.)
is given, which selects channel A, adapter unit, and
code translation mode. If either the unit or channel
selected is busy, thiS instruction will stall the processor until it is free. A "Reset and Load Channel
A" instruction is then given that causes a control
word to be sent to the accumulator. The control
word contains the word count, which is the number
of words to be transferred, and the location in storage of the first word to be stored.
The operation of channel A is as follows: The word
count in the accumulator is tested for zero. If it is
zero the transfer is terminated and the unit disconnected. If not, the operation proceeds. Six characters are accepted, one by one, checked for correct
parity, and placed in the 36-bit plus parity multiplier-quotient register. The contents of the multiplier-quotient register are stored in core storage at
the address specified by the contents of the accumulator. After a 36-bit word is transferred, the word
count is reduced by one and the address count incremented by one. If an end-of-record signal is received from the selected unit, the operation is terminated. This procedure is essentially the same as
the "input-output a record and disconnect (lORD)"
channel command in the 7090/7094. As in lORD execution, the above sequence is continued until one of
the terminal conditions is encountered.
Write operations occur in the same manner with respect to storage addressing and termination conditions, but with the data flow operation reversed.
An I/O transmission error turns on a check light.
However, since the central processor is delayed
until the completion of the transmission, the word
associated with the error is undetermined.
Channel A, like the 7904 Data Channels, can sense
and store many error and condition indicators.
These indicators can be used to interrupt the program, provided they are enabled. Under these conditions the program counter in the processor is
stored with the interrupt indicators in the appropriate interrupt location, and the program counter is
set to the next address as soon as one of the indicators is set. Because the RCHA instruction occupies
the processor until the input-output operation is terminated, the program counter is not used during
this time. Therefore, the reaction to the interrupt
is delayed until an input-output operation on channel
A is completed. This must be considered when
"real-time" devices are being controlled by the
system.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorparated

2/63

410: 103.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

IBM 7040

REPORTS

Input.Output, Other

1414 Synchronizer
INPUT·OUTPUT, OTHER: 1414 SYNCHRONIZER

§

. 12

103.

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity:

• 12

Description

• . • . . . . 1414 Synchronizer Models
I through VII.

Description (Contd.)
(which can limit the amount of data read and always
defines the amount to be written) and assembling (or
disassembling) of words from char::..cters received
(or written).

The 1414 Synchronizer is a controller used to monitor and direct the operations of the input-output milts
attached to it. There are two basic forms of the
1414: the unbuffered models I, II, and VII which
control magnetic tapes; and the buffered models III,
IV, V, and VI which control unit record equipment
and/or communication equipment.

The buffered 1414 Synchronizers contain SO-character buffers which are used to store input and output
records between the data channel and the unit.
Model III and IV can have a 1402 Read-Punch, and a
1403 or 1404 Printer attached. Models IV, V, and
VI can have communications equipment attached to
six SO-character communication buffers. The 1014
Inquiry Stations, telegraph terminals, 1009 Data
Transmission Units, and 1011 Paper Tape Readers
are considered communications equipment.

The unbuffered 1414 models I, II, and VII are essentially control units. They differ only in the type of
magnetic tape unit that can be attached to them. The
instructions to a magnetic tape unit are interpreted,
initiated, and controlled by the 1414 units. These
units have no data storage capacity as such; they
provide only control and a character data path between the tape unit and the data channel. The data
channel provides storage addressing, count control

With the buffered 1414, input-output operations proceed in much the same manner as an unbuffered
1414 except that all data transfers utilize the data
channel only long enough to load or unload the buffers from or to core storage. Adapters between the
buffer and the input-output units control data transmission to or from the devices. The table below
shows the connections of units to a 1414 Synchronizer and a 7040 system.
.

1414
Model 729 II 729 IV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

x

x

729 VI

729V

7330

Communications
Unit
Column
Data
7904
Data
Devices
Record Binary Channel
A
Channel

x (note 2)
x

x (note 1)

x
x
x
x

x

x

x

x
x

x (note 2)

x

x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x

x
x

Note 1. With SOO cpi feature.
Note 2. With intermix feature.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

410: 104.100
•

STANDARD

EDP

_

IBM 7040
DTU

R£FORTS

DATA TRANSMISSION UNIT

§

104.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: .

.12

Description

insure that each character received contains exactly 4 out of 8 bits, and a longitudinal parity check
detects most errors resulting from compensating
error bits. Data from the receiving 1009 is transferred to a 1414 Synchronizer and from there to
7040 core storage. Input messages may be of any
length and are terminated by an end-of-message
signal.

Data Transmission Unit.
1009 Model 1.

This unit enables the 7040 system to transmit and
receive data, via a 1414 Synchronizer, at speeds up
to 300 characters-per-second over public or private
telephone or telegraph lines. The unit at the other
end of the line may be a similarly equipped 1401,
1410, 7040, or 7750 system; an mM 7701 or 7702
Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal; or an mM
1013 Card Transmission Terminal. A specially
equipped telephone and a serial data set, supplied by
the communications company, are also required at
each terminal.
Data from core storage of the transmitting 7040 is
transferred to the 1414 Synchronizer in fixed length
loads of 80 characters. This transfer requires O. 272
milliseconds, after which the processing unit is free
to perform other operations. From the synchronizer, the data is sent to the 1009 DTU. There it is
converted from BCD form to a special serial-by-bit,
4-of-8 transmission code in which each character
code consists of four "I" bits and four "0" bits as
sent over the communications line.
The 1009 at the receiving terminal reconverts the
data to the internal BCD form. Validity checks

Description (Cont'd)

When a 1009 input buffer is filled in a 1414 Synchronizer, the 1009 "Attention" indicator is set in the
data channel which will cause an interrupt when
interrupts are enabled. Data may be lost if a full
input butter is not emptied into the core store within
1,042, 042, 521, 316, or 260 milliseconds when the
transmission speed is 75, 150, 250, or 300 characters-per-second, respectively.
Either a #1038 Card 1414 Adapter with a 1414 IV or V
Synchronizer on data channel A, or #1074 Control
Adapter with a 1414 VI Synchronizer on 7904 data
channels B through E is required for this feature. A
#3238 Adapter connects the 1009 to the 1414. Two of
the six 80-character buffers present in the 1414 are
required for this function.
.13

Availability: •.

14 months as of February
1962.

• 14

First Delivery:

October, 1961.

I

.",

© 1963

by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

410: 105.100

.S1,"OARO
EDP
•

IBM 7040
Input-Output
RIU

REPORTS

INPUT-OUTPUT: REMOTE INQUIRY UNIT

§

.12

105.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

Remote Inquiry Unit.
1014 Modell.

Description:

Optional- Feature

The Remote Inquiry Unit is a modified mM Selectric typewriter with control circuits and indicator
lights, mounted on a 29- by 24-inch work table. It
is used for interrogating and printing replies from
a 7040 system, and is connected to the system by a
4-wire cable which may be up to eight miles long.
The user is responsible for the installation and
maintenance of cable runs over fifty feet in length.
Up to 20 Remote Inquiry Units can be connected to
a 1414 IV or V Synchronizer on data channel A, or
a 1414 VI Synchronizer on data channels B through
E. An automatic sequencing device controls the
order of acceptance of inquiry requests when more
than one unit is connected.

Third Inquiry Adapter, #882017: This feature permits attaching 10 more inquiry units to a 1414
Synchronizer.

When an inquiry is to be made, the Request key on
the Remote .Inquiry Unit is depressed. This signals
the #6136 Remote Inquiry Unit Adapter on the 1414
Synchronizer. As soon as the adapter is not busy
with another inquiry operation, the Proceed status
light on the Remote Inquiry Unit is turned on. The
inquiry unit number (0 to 9) is automatically sent as
the first character of the message followed by up to
78 characters of text as typed on the Selectric. Depressing the Release key causes the character after
the last one in the text to be a group-mark character. If there are less than 78 characters of text,
the remainder of the line is filled with blanks.
When the 1414 buffer has been filled the adapter
sends a carriage-return signal to the inq!liry unit
(this unit does not have a carriage-return key on its
keyboard) and clears the proceed status of the unit
as an acknowledgment. The "Attention" indicator
is set in the data channel, which will cause an interrupt If the interrupt is enabled. The 80 character
message can then be transmitted to the core store
in 0.272 milliseconds when the processor
executes the proper read instruction.

.13

Availability:

14 months as of February,
1962.

.14

First Delivery:

July, 1962.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head:
. 212 Reservoirs: .
. 22

.23

pressed, the adapter sends a carriage-return to the
inquiry unit, clears its proceed status, and looks
for another inquiry unit requesting service. Typing
messages faster than 12.5 characters per second
causes the inquiry unit to halt. It can only be restarted by cancelling the request. An automatic
cancel is caused by not typing for a 20-second
period during a proceed status.
The reply message is set up in core storage with
the address of the receiving inquiry unit in the first
position. It is transferred to the output synchronizerbuffer inO. 272 milliseconds, and from there to

© 1963

engraved hammers.
typewriter keyboard.
no.

Multiple Copies

.231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon:
.233 Types of master
Multilith:
Spirit: .
.24

depends on stationery.
no.
yes.

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks: ••
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

printing.
1.
1.
one character at a time.

Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

keyboard input.

.

.25

sprocket drive - 'paper
punched both sides .
none.

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:
.222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system:

If the Cancel key rather than the Release key is de-

\

(Cont'd. )

the inquiry typewriter at 15.5 characters per second.
Each reply message is limited to the unit number
plus up to 78 characters, terminated by a group
mark, and followed by an automatic carriage return
generated by the adapter.

RIU.

.12

Description

1.

44 keys.
one character at a time.

Range of Symbols
Numerals;
10
26
Letters:
Special:
8
Alternatives:
FORTRAN set:
Req. COBOLset:
Total:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

0-9.
A-Z.
&. - $ *, # / (All other special
characters print as #).
none.
no.
no.
44 plus space.
3/63

IBM 7040

410: 105.300
§

105.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

. 311 Medium:

continuous fanfold stationery•
input - key depression.
output- printing.

. 312 Phenomenon:
.32

Positional Arrangement

85 print pOSitions.
all for data.

• 33

Coding:.

engraved character font •

.34

Format ComEatibi1i!y:

none.

• 35

Phxsical Dimensions

• 351 Overall width: •
. 352 Length: •
• 353 Maximum margins:
•4

CONTROLLER

• 41

Identity:

.

Synchronizer 1414 Model
IV, V, or VI.

Connection to System

.422 Off-line:
• 43

~

. 521
• 522
.523
.524
.525
.526

Input:
Output:
Stepping:
Skipping:
Marking:
Searching:

1 block forward .
1 block forward .
step Lline.
none.
none .
none.

• 53

Code Translation:

automatic .

• 54

Format Control: .

contained in data.

.55

Control Operations

.....

• • • • •

one 1414 Model4or5 on
data channel A ora 1414
Model 6 on data channels B
thru E plus one #6136 adapters per set of inquiry
stations.
none.

Connection to Device

.56

•5
.51

each word.
no •
none.
automatic.

PROGRAM FAClLITmS AVAILABLE
Blocks

• 511 Size of block:
.512 mock demarcation
Input:
•
Output: • • • •

3/63

1 to 78 characters •
core storage.

1 to 78 characters per inquiry (input) or reply
(output).
Release key.
group mark in core storage.

yes.
yes •
yes •
yes •
yes •
yes •

. .

.6
.61
.62
.621

PERFORMANCE
Conditions: .
none .
Speeds
Nominal or peak speed: input- -manual typing speed,
less than 12.5 char/sec.
output--15.5 char/sec .
. 624 Effective speeds:
same as peak speeds, less
allowance for carriage
returu.S •
.63 Demands on System
Component
Processing Unit:

msec per block Percentage
0.272
O. O.

•7

EXTERNAL FACILlTmS

.71

Adjustments:

.72

Other Controls

Data Transfer Control

• 441 Size of load:
• 442 Input-output areas: •
.443 Input-output area
access:
• 444 lnput- output area
lockout:
• 445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization:

Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device: •
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:
Exhausted:

• 431 Devices per controller: 10 per #6136 adapter.
.432 Restrictions: . • • . maximum of 6 buffers in 1414
Mode14or5;each#6136
adapter requires 2 buffers.
• 44

no.
yes.
no •
no.

Disable:
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code: •

9.75 inches.
up to 11 inches per sheet.
no limitations.

Remote Inquiry Unit Adapter.
#6136.
(Both units are required. )
• 421 On-line:

InEut- Ou!Eut Operations

character at 10 per inch.

.321 Serial by: •
• 324 Track use
Data: •
• 325 Row use:

.42

.52

.8

typical typewriter
adjustments.

Function
Inquiry request:

Fonn
key

Inquiry release:

key

Inquiry cance 1:

key

Comment
signals ada pter that an inquiry
is to be made.
signals end of message and sets
Inquiry Request indicator •
terminates inquiry without a
reply•

ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:

Check or
Interlock
parity
parity
none •
check
none.
check
none.
checks

Action
indicator & alann.
indicator & alann.
indicator & alann.
alann •
alarm if input typing
speed exceeds 12.5
char/sec. ; wait for
Proceed light if RlU
adapter is serving
another Inquiry
Unit.

II

410: 111.100

STANDARD

•

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 7040
Simultaneous Operations

SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS

§ 111.

.12

.1

SPECIAL UNITS

• 11

Identity: • . . . .

the operation is not buffered with central processor
operation, and proceeds at the speed characteristic
of the input-output unit.

7904 Data Channels

1414 III, IV, V
Synchronizer.

.12

Description (Contd.)

Description
The IBM 7040 system can have a maximum of four
time-shared 7904 Data Channels that delay processing only when the data channels and the 7106 central
processor simultaneously request storage accesses.
The processor can also be used as a data channel,
which is referred to as Data Channel A. Data Channel A operates in two different modes with respect to
simultaneous operaticin. When accessing communications equipment, inquiry Stations, punched tape
.2
readers, card reader/punches, and printers, the
central processor is not delayed by Data Channel A
for appreciably longer than any other data channel,
because all of these units are fully buffered by a 1414
III, IV, or V Synchronizer and processing is delayed
for only the time required to load or unload the 1414
buffer, prOvided that the input-output unit involved is
ready for operation.
When a magnetic tape unit or an IBM 1401 system is
involved in a data transfer through Data Channel A,

.3

An IBM 1401 system, which can be connected only to
Data Channel A, sends or receives data at approximately the same rate as a 7.29 VI Magnetic Tape Unit
reading 800 characters per inch (i. e., 90,000 characters per second nominally). The start time for
magnetic tape units connected to the Data Channel A
and the time to establish a data transfer with a 1401
system only partially overlap. Because of these delays, data transfers through Data Channel A delay
central processor operation for nearly the total time
required to activate and operate a particular device.
RESTRICTIONS
Only one input-output unit can transfer data through
a Data Channel (including Data Channel A) at any given time. Since there can be a maximum of five simultaneous transfers plus processing in operation at
any given time, the combined input-output rate cannot exceed 375, 000 characters per second.
PossmLE SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS

Max. No. of-Data
Max. No. of Units Transfers to and
Operating:
from Core Storage

Operations
Punch cards
Read cards
Read Punched Tape
Print or Skip lines on printer
Read or Write to Inquiry
Station
Read or Write to
Teleprocessing equipment
Read, Write, Backspace
Magnetic Tape Unit
Read or Write Through Direct
Data Connection
Read, Write, or Seek Magnetic
Disk Storage
Read or Write "Real-Time
Equipment"
Read or Write to 1401 system
Print on Output Typewriter
Rewind Magnetic Tape Unit

Restrictions

1
1
5
2

1
1
5
1

A, B
A, B

100

5

B

20

5

B

5

5

C

4

4

2

2

4
1
1
50

4
1
1

a

B

A, B

A, C
A, Cor D

Key:
I

\

A.
B.
C.
D.

Data
Data
Data
Data

Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel

A only.
A (i. e., the processor) stalled for data transfer only.
A (i. e., the processor) stalled for the entire operation.
A (i. e., the processor) stalled for about half of the operation.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorparated

4/63

410: 121.101

_STANOARO
EDP
•

IBM 7040

REPORTS

Instruction List

§

121.

INSTRUCTION LIST

OPERATION

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

Flag or
Count

Tag

Address
Fixed Point Arithmetic

ADD
DVP

X
X

F
F

T
T

Y
Y

MPY
SUB
VDP
VLM
VMA

X
X
X
X
X

F
F
F C
F C
F C

T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

(Y) + (AC) ~AC
(MQ) + (Y) ~MQ (quotient), AC (remainder).
If overflow set divide - check indicator.
(Y) x (MQ) ~(MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ.
(AC) - (Y) ~AC.
(AC) + (Yh -C ~ (MQ)35-C to 35; remainder in AC.
(Y) x (MQ)35-C to 35 ~AC and (MQ)1 to C·
(AC) + (Y) x (MQ)35-C to 35 ~ AC and (MQ)1-C'
Floating Point Arithmetic

*FAD
*FDP

X
X

F
F

T
T

Y

*FMP
*FSB
*UFA
*UFM
*UFS
*DFAD
*DFDP
*DFMP
*DFSB

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

F
F
F
F
F
F
F

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2Y
2Y
2Y
2Y

E

F

y

(Y) + (AC)~(MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(AC) + (Y)~ MQ (quotient) normalized, AC (remainder); if
overflow, set divide - check indicator.
(Y) x (MQ) ~ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(AC) - (Y) ~ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(Y) + (AC) - (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(Y) x (MQ) - AC and MQ unnormalized.
(AC) - (Y) ~ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; unnormalized.
(2Y, 2Y + 1) + (AC, MQ) ----»(AC, MQ); normalized.
(AC, MQ) + (2Y, 2Y + 1) ---?>o (AC, MQ); normalized.
(2Y, 2Y + 1) x (AC, MQ) (AC, MQ); normalized.
(AC, MQ) - (2Y, 2Y + 1) -;:.. (AC, MQ); normalized.
Arithmetic Data Transfer

CLA
CLS

LDQ
STO
STQ
STZ
*TMT

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

F
F
F
F
F
F
X

T
T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

(Y)~AC.

-(Y)----7 AC.
(Y)~MQ,
(AC)_~Y,

(MQ)~Y,

o ---?Y; sign is plus.
C = Y(mod 256), C words are moved from «AC)3-17 + i) to
«AC)21_35+i);i=O, 1" . . ,C-1.
Logical Data Transfer

CAL
*PCS
*SAC
SLW
STA
SID
STL

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

F
FC
FC
F
F
F
F

T
T
T
T
T
T
T

© 1963

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

(Y) -ACp , 1-35'
character C of (Y) ---;>AC30-35'
(AC)30-35 ---7Y character position C,
(AC)p, 1-35 ---;>Y,
(AC)21-35 - Y21 - 35 •
(AC)3_17 ~Yf.-17'
Location of ST instruction + 1---?>o Y21-35; remainder of Y
unchanged.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

410: 121.102

§

IBM 7040

121.

INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
INSTRUCTION

Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

OPERATION

Flag or
Tag Address
Count
Logical Operations

ACL

X

F

T

Y

ANA
CHS
COM
*MSM
*MSP
ORA
SLW
SSP

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

F
X
X
F
F
F
F
X

T
X
X
T
T
T
T
X

Y
X
X
Y
Y
Y
Y
X

(Y) + (AC) ~ AC added as 36 bit unsigned quantities with endaround carry from AC p •
(AC) "AND" (Y) -';;>oAC.
change sign of AC.
"NOT" (AC)P, 1-35 ~(AC)p, 1-35'
1 ----7 (Y)S'
O·~(Y)S·

(AC) "OR" (Y) --?>AC.
(AC)P, 1-35 ~Y.
o --»-AC S'
Shifting: Operations

ALS
ARS
LGL
LGR
LLS

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

LRS

X

X

T

Y

ROL

X

X

T

Y

(AC) shifted left Y, sign unchanged.
(AC) shifted right Y, sign unchanged.
(AC)Q P 1-35 and (MQ)S 1-35 shifted left Y (mod 256).
(AC)Q:p: 1-35 and (MQ)S: 1-35 shifted right Y (mod 256).
(AC)Q,p, 1-35 and (MQ)1-35 shifted left Y (mod 256),
MQS --»- AC S'
(AC)P,Q, 1-35 and (MQ)1-35 shifted right Y (mod 256),
(AC)S ~ (MQ)S·'
(MQ) rotated left Y (mod 256).
Control Operations

*AXT
CAS

X
X

X
F

T
T

Y
Y

*CCS

X

F C

T

Y

OCT

X

X

X

X

HPR

X

X

X

X

* LAC
LAS

X
X

X
F

T
T

Y
Y

LET
*LOC
*LXA
*LXD
*MIT
*PAC
*PAX
PBT
*PDC

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
F
X
X
X
X

X
T
T
T
T
T
T
X
T

X
Y
Y
Y
Y
X
X
X
X

Y -';;>0 (T).
If (AC) > (Y), go to next instruction.
If (AC) = (Y), skip next instruction.
If (AC) < (Y), skip two instructions.
CharacterC of (Y) is compared with (AC)30-35;
If (AC)30_35 > (Y)6C to 6C + 5' go to next instruction.
If (AC)30-35 = (Y)6C to 6C + 5' skip next instruction.
If (AC)30-35 < (Y)6C to 6C + 5' skip next two instructions.
If divide-check indicator on, turn it off; otherwise, skip next
instruction.
Halts processor; processor steps to next instruction when Start
key is depressed. Traps cause the location of the next instruction to be stored, and as a result, normally causes computation
to resume.
32,768 - (Y)21-35 --?> (T).
If (AC)Q,p, 1-35 < (Y), go.to next.instruction.
If (AC)Q,p, 1-35 = (Y), sklp next Instruction.
If (AC)Q P 1-35 > (Y), skip next two instructions.
Skip ne~ instruction if (AC)35 =1.
32,768 - (Y)3-17 ~ (T).
(Y)21- 35 -';;>0 (T).
(Y)3-17 - ? (T).
Skip next instruction if (Y)S = 1.
32,768 - (AC)21-35 ~(T).
(AC)21-35 --;..(T).
Skip next instruction if (AC)P = 1.
32,768 - (AC)3-17 --;"(T).

.1
2/63

AUERBACH I

B~J

410:121.103

INSTRUCTION LIST

§

INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)

121.

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

Flag or
Count

OPERATION
Tag Address
Control Operations (Cont'd)

*PDX
*PLT
*PXA
*PXD
*RPM

X
X
X
X
X

X
F
X
X
X

T
T
T
T
X

*SPM

X

F C

T

Y

*SXA
*SXD
*TIX

X
X
D

X
X
D

T
T
T

Y
Y
Y

TMI
*TNX
TNZ
TOV
TPL
TRA
TRP
TRT
TSL
*TSX

X
D
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

F
D
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
X

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

'Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

*TXH
*TXI
*TXL
TZE
XEC

D
D
D

D
D
D

T
T
T

X
X

F
F

T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

X
Y

X
X
X

(AC)3-17 ~.(T).
Skip next instruction if (Y)S = o.
(T) ---7 (AC)21-3S.
(T) ~ (AC)3-17'
Release memory protect. Store location counter in address 32
and trap to address 33.
Set memory protect; (Y)21-27---7 field register; (Y)3S-3S ~count
register; (Y)32 sets mode 0 =trap on equal, 1 =trap on unequal.
(T) ---7 (Y)21-35'
(T) ---7 (Y)3-17'
If the number in index T is greater than D, (T) - D ---7 (T) and
the next instruction is then from Y.
Branch to Y if (AC) minus.
If (T) > D set (T) = (T) - D; otherwise, go to Y.
Branch to Y if (AC) l' o.
If overflow indicator is on, tum it off and branch to Y.
Branch to Y if (AC)S = O.
Transfer to Y.
Parity and trap inhibits are turned off; control goes Y.
Trap inhibit is turned off; control goes to Y.
This location plus one -»- (Y)21-3S; control goes to Y + 1.
2's complement of the address of this instruction replaces (T);
control goes to Y.
If (T) > D, go to Y.
(T) + D -»- (T); control goes to Y.
If (T) < D, go to Y.
Branch to Y if (AC) = o.
Execute instruction in location Y.
Input-Output Instructions

BSR
CTR
ENB
ETT

X
X
X
X

I
I
F
X

T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y

ICT
lOT

X
X

X
X

T
T

X
X

PRO
*PSL
PWR
RCH
RCT
ROC
ROS

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

I
F
I
F
X
X
I

T
T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y

© 1963

Y

X
X
Y

Backspace tape designated by" I and Y one record.
Prepare to send control data to device designated by Y and I.
Enable from Y; the (Y) determine which traps will be permitted.
End-oI-tape test; skip next instruction if end-of-tape indicator for
channel indicated by (Y) is not on.
Inhibit channel and direct data traps.
Skip next instruction if I/O check indicator is off; otherwise tum
it off.
Equivalent to read select but will cause trapping on 7090/7094.
(Y)S-17 are sent to the direct data lines.
Equivalent to write select but will cause trapping on 7090/7094.
(Y) sent to the channel as a command word.
Restore channel traps.
Reset data channel.
Prepare to read from I/O device specified by I and Y.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

410: 121.104

IBM 7040

INSTRUCTION. LIST (Contd.)

§ 121.

OPERATION

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

Flag or
Count

Tag Address
Input-Output Instructions (Cont'd)
Y
Y
Y

Rewind and unload the tape specified by I and Y.
Prepare to read status data from the device specified by Y and I.
The static sense line contents from the direct data device
If channel-in-use indicator is on, go to location Y.

T
T

Y
Y
Y

F

T

Y

I
I
I

T

Y
Y
Y

RUN
SEN
*SSL

X
X
X

I

T

I

T
T

TeO
SCH
TEF

X
X
X

F
F
F

TRC

X

WBT

X
X
X

F

~(Y)8-17'

WEF
WRS

T

T

T

Store channel registers in Y.
Branch to Y if the end-of-file indicator for the specified
channel is on.
If the specified redundancy indicator is on, turn it off and
branch to Y.
Write blank tape (used to skip over bad spots).
Write end-of-file on tape designated by Y and 1.
Prepare to write to device designated by I and Y.

Terms:
C means
D means
F means
T means
X means
Y means
* means

2/63

count value.
decrement value.
indirect addressing flag.
index register tag.
part of the operation code.
the address or value.
optional instruction.

410:141.100
•

II

STANDARD

REPORTS
ED
P

IBM 7040
Data Cade Table
Report Writing

DATA CODE TABLE NO.1

§ 141.

.1

.22
USE OF CODE:

report writing graphics
console typewriter font.

.2

STRUcrURE OF CODE

• 21

Character Size:

Character Structure

.221 More significant
pattern:

3 bits; value from low to
high order: 8, 16, and 32.

.222 Less significant
pattern:
6 bits (shown below as two
OI;tal digits).

.23

. 3 bits; value from low to
high order: 1, 2, 4 •

Character Codes

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

0

1

2

3

4

5

0

0

8

&

H

-

Q

1

1

9

A

I

J

R

/

z

2

2

b

B

7

K

!

S

of

3

3

'if<

C

L

$

T

,

4

4

@

D

0

M

*

U

%

5

5

:

E

[

N

6

6

>

F

<

0

;

W

"-

7

7

V

G

T

P

A

X

-tit-

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN

© 1963

]

6
blank:

V

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7

Y

-y-

2/63

410:142.100
.STAl

F

<

~

;

w

\

7

7

V

G

P

6-

X

-III-

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN

© 1963

""

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6

7

Blank

Y

2/63

410:143.100
.STANIl\RO

EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 7040
Data Code Table
Card Code
.
DATA CODE TABLE NO.3

§

143 •

•1

USE OF CODE:

• 23

Character Codes

Hollerith Card Code.

OVERPUNCH
UNDERPUNCH

.2

STRUcrURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size: . •.

1 card column.

© 1963

None

12

11

0

lNbne

Blank

&

-

0

1.2

&

&

;II

-

0

0

71

1

1

A

J

/

2

2

B

K

S

3

3

C

L

T

4

4

0

M

U

5

5

E

N

V

6

6

F

0

W

7

7

G

P

X

8

8

H

Q

y

9

9

I

R

~

8-2

b

8-3

#

8-4

@

?

,

,
0

9-

.
0

$

,

*

%

8-5

:

[

]

-v-

8-6

>

<

;

'\

8-7

V

!j.

.l\

-flI-

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

410:144.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

IBM 7040
Data Code Table
Internal

REroRfS

DATA CODE TABLE NO.4

§

.22

144.
Internal and binary magnetic tape code.

.1

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size:

6 bits (shown below as two
octal digits).

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

Character Structure

.221 More significant pattern: 3 bits; value from low to
high order: 8, 16, and 32.
.222 Less significant pattern: 3 bits: value from low to
high order; I, 2, 4 .

.23

Character Codes

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

0

0

8

&

H

-

Q

blank

y

1

1

9

A

I

J

R

/

z

2

2

b

B

?

K

!

S

+

3

3

#

C

L

$

T

,

4

4

@

D

0

M

*

U

%

5

5

:

E

[

N

1

V

6

6

>

F

<

0

;

w

7

7

..;

G

<¥

P

l!.

X

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

7

-y-

\
-flt-

2/63

410: 145.100
•

II

STANDARD

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 7040
Data Code Table
BCD Code
DATA CODE TABLE NO.5

§

145.

.22

.1

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size:

.22-1 More significant pattern: 3 bits; value from low to
high order: 8, 16, and 32.
.222 Less significant pattern: 3 bits; value from low to
high order: 1, 2, 4.

BCD code on magnetic
tape.

6 bits (shown below as two
octal digits).

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

Character Structure

.23

Character Codes

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

blank

Y

-

Q

&

H

z

J

R

A

I

K

:

B

?

1

1

9

/

2

2

0

S

3

3

#

T

,

L

$

C

4

4

@

U

%

M

=I<

D

0

5

5

:

V

--v-

N

]

E

[

6

6

>

w

\

0

;

F

<

7

7

V

X

-jIf-

P

Il

G

o¥

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

410:146.100
IBM 7040
Data Cade Table
1400 Series
DATA CODE TABLE NO.6

§

• 22

146.

.1

USE OF CODE:

1400 series code to 1401
processor.

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

• 21

Character Size: . ••

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

0

6 bits (show below as two
octal digits).

Character Structure

.221 More significant pattern: 3 bits; value from low to
high order: 8, 16, 32.
.222 Less significant pattern: 3 bits; value from low to
high order: 1, 2, 4 •

.23

Character Codes

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN

0
Blank

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

b

Y

-

Q

&

H

1

1

9

/

~

J

R

A

I

2

2

0

S

+

K

!

B

?

3

3

#

T

,

L

$

C

4

4

@

U

%

M

*

D

c

5

5

:

V

-v-

N

]

E

(

6

6

>

w

\

0

;

F

<

7

7

X

-lH-

P

f:l.

G

'*

r

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

2/63

410:201.011

IBM 7040
System Performance

IBM 7040
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

I
\

"
©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

410:201.012

IBM 7040
IBM 7040 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
Configurotion

Worksheet

1

Item

Reference
(FUe 1)

Char/block

Inplt,t.
Output
Times

Records/block

K

msec/block

File 1

msec/switch

VIII B'

1,008

1,008

4,032

1,008

4,032

8

32

8

34.2

106.8

17.8

51.5

File 3

100

13.2

34.2t

8.1

11.st

File 4

17.5

12.9

34.1t

8.1

17.8t

---

-----

---

File 1

= File 2

8

-----

---

-----

---

32

---

---

---

2.08

8.06

2.08

8.06

File 3

0.272

.27

2.08

0.35

2.08

File 4

0.320

.26

2.02

0.33

2.02

a1

0.760

0.760

0.760

0.760

0.760

a2

1.560

1.560

1.560

1.560

1.560

b6

1.288

1.288

1.288

1.288

1.288

b5 +b9

1.728

1.728

1.728

1.728

1.728

msec/report

b7 +b8

26.792

26.792

26.792

26.792

msec/b10ck
for C.P.
and
dominant
column.

a1

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

a2 K

12.5

12.5

50.0

12.5

12.5

a3 K
Stondard
Problem A

File 1

= File 2

26.792

4:200.112

---

---

msec/record
Centrol
Processor msec/detail
Times
msec/work

238.5

238.5

953.9

238.5

238.5

File 1 Master In

2.2

2.2

8.1

2.2

2.2

File 2 Mester Out

2.2

2.2

34.2

8.1

106.3

2.2-

2.2

File 3 Details

2.2

2.8

103.2

8.1

136.4

2.8

File 4 Reports

2.2

1,000

2.6

260.6

1,000

261.6

4:200.1132

4:200.114

F= 1.0

Total

8.0

64.8

2.6

137.4 1,037.0 242.7

2.8

71.2

2.6

261.6

64.8

261.6

71.2

Unit of measure (word)
Std. routines

Standord
Problem A
Space

650

650

650

650

650

0

0

0

0

0

425

425

460

425

460

2,020

2,020

2,020

2,020

2,020

Files

756

756

3,360

756

756

Working

325

325

325

325

325

4,176

4,176

6,815

4,176

6,815

Fixed
3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
6((B10cks 24 to 48)

Total
t 8 records per block.

3/63

VIII B

2.8

msec/block

4

VII A'

34.2

Flle 4

3

VII A

(File 1)

= File 2

File 3

msec penalty

2

VI

4:200.1151

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

410:201.013
IBM 7040 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (Contd.)
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2
Configuration

5

Reference

Item

Worksheet

Fixed/Floating point

VI

VII A

VIII B

Floating

Floating

Floating

n

729 VI

1403 III

729 II

729 VI

input

80 characters

80 characters

80 characters

output

120 characters

120 characters

120 characters

input

1402

output

n

729

Unit name

Size of re cord

Standard
Mathernatical
Problem A

input

Tl

100

12.16

7.56

output

T2

75

12.88

8

input

T3

1.36

0.11

0.11

output

T4

2.19

0.16

0.16

maec/record

T5

0.10

0.10

0.10

msec/5 loops

T6

12.77

12.77

12.77

msec/report

T7

26.30

26.30

26.30

729 II

729 VI

maec/block

4:200.413

msec penalty

7

1402 Card Reader

Unit name
Size of block

Standard
Statist! cal
Problam A

10 words

3,500 words

3,500 words

1

350

350

Records/block

B

msee/block

Tl

100

514

240

moec penalty

T3

1.33

28.0

28.0

msec/block

T5

0.152

0.152

0.152

moec/record

T6

4.256

4.256

4.256

maee/table

T7

0.216

0.216

0.216

4:200.512

C.P.

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

410:201.100

II
•

STANDARD

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 7040
System Performance

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

§ 201.

.1

GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING

. 11

Standard File Problem A

.113 Timing basis: • . . . . . using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.113 .
. 114 Graph:. . • . . . . . . . see graph below .
. 115 Storage space required
Qmfiguration VI. . . . 4,176 words.
O>nfiguration VIlA •. 4,176 words.
Configuration VIlA 1 .6,815 words.
Configuration VmB . . 4,176 words.
O>nfiguration VmB 1 .6,815 words .

.111 Record sizes
Master file: .
Detail file:
Report file: .
. 112 o>mputation: .

108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.

standard.

100.0
7

4

2

10.0
7

"

/'

4

Time in Minutes
to Process
10,000 Master
2
File Records

/

J

1.0
7

,

/'

-,..

.. ""

V~

",,-

------

VIlA , , "
VIlA!
./ ?..,

.,~

-"':#

4

i!

VIlIB

....... ..... VIIIB!

2

0.1
7

4

2

0.01
0.0

0.1

0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

1.0

t And all configuratioas using an on-line prinrer.

Broken lines indicates blocked detail and report files.

© 1963

by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

410:201.120
§

IBM 7040

201.

:12

.122 Computation:
.123 Timing basis:

· standard.
· using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.12.
. 124 Graph:. • . . . . . • • · see graph below •

Standard File Problem B

.121 Record sizes
Master file: .
Detail file:
Report file: .

• 54 characters.

· 1 card.

· 1Une.

100.0
7

4

2

VIIt~

10.0
7

.JIll'

.JIll'

./

4

Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records

./

V

2

1.0
7

4

I

-

,

I

6

-'

"" "

~

~~ t-VIIA I,

.."",.-

----

VIIIB, VIlIB

---

I

VIlA

i'f

2

0.1
7

4

2

0.01
0.0

0.1

0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record

And all configuration s using an on-line print er.

Broken lines indicates blocked detail and report files.

3/63

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

410:201.130

201.

.13

.132 Computation: .
. 133 Timing basis: .
Standard File Problem C

.131 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:

.134 Graph:

• 216 characters.
· 1 card.
· 1 line.

· standard .
• using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.13.
. . . . . . . . · see graph below.

100.0
7

4

2

10.0
7
~

/'

4
Time in Minutes
to Process
2
10,000 Master
File Records
1.0

/'

-'"

VIlA

1---V
i'""'VllA'

7

i-Il'

4

--

---

.-

~

~

-----

-

"-

'\
VIlIS

VIlIS
I,

2

0.1
7

4
"

2

0.01
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail RecOrds Per Master Record
t And all configurations using an on-line printer.

Broken lines indicates blocked detail and report files.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

410:201.140

IBM 7040

§ 201.

.14

. 142 Computation: .
.143 Timing basis: •

• trebled .
· using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.13 •
.144 Graph:. . • . • • . . • • see graph below.

Standard File Problem D

. 141 Record sizes
Master file: .
Detail file: •
Report file: .

• 108 characters.
• 1 card.

· 11ine.

100.0
7

4

2

10.0
7

~
~

./

4
Time in Minutes
to Process
2
10,000 Master
File Records

1.0
7

4

/

~
....

~
-v;/

~-

~--

-

/

I
I

'-"
IL."""

"'-

VilA'
VIIIB, VIIIB'

2

0.1
7

4

,..
2

0.011
0.0

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
t And all configurations using an on-line printer.

Broken lines indicates blocked detail and report files.

3/63

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

410:201.200
• 212 Key size: . . .
.213 Timing basis: •

· 8 characters •
· using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.213.
• 214 Graph:. . . . . . . . • • see graph below •

201.

.2

SORTING

.21 . Standard Problem Estimates
. 211 Record size: . . . . . . 80 characters.

1,000

1

4
2

JIi

100
1
,J

4

VI .........

Time in Minutes
to Put Records
2
Into Required
Order

V

/

V
VilA

\V

,

~

I

7

/

4
~

2

/

V

/

'I~

1I

III

1I

/

1

V

I

1/

/

"\

\

IYIIJ!3

,J

/

:/ 'Iii
I

I

1

I"

/

V

4

0.1

Ii
~

10

2

"

V

V

1/

/
2

I.J

'I~

V

~

IJ

4

7

100

/

/

~

/
2

4

1,000

1

2
10,000

4

1
100,000

Number of Records

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

IBM 7040

410:201.300
§

201.

.3

MATRIX INVERSION

• 31

Standard Problem Estimates

.312 Timing basis:. . . . . . using estimating procedure outlined.in
Users' Guide,
4:200.312 •
. 313 Graph:. . . . . . . . . . see graph below •

.311 Basic parameters: . . . . general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating point to at least 8
decimal digits using
single precision floating point option, 16 digit
precision using double
precision floating point
option.

100.00

7
4

2

I

10.00
I

7

1_

I

II I

4

I

Time in Minutes
for Complete
2
Inversion

/
16-DIGIT PRECISION- -~

IJ

1.00

7

I

J II

4

,/
J

2

I

VV

0.10
I

7

I

I
I

I

II

4

II

2

//

I

/J ~

0.01

2

4

7

2

4

10

7

2
100

Size of Matrix

3/63

LS-DIGIT PRECISION

4

7
1,000

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

410:201. 400

§ 201.

.412 Computation: .

•4

GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING

.41

Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates

.411 Record sizes: . . • . . . 10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max.
size 8 digits.

. 5 fifth-order polynomials.
5 divisions .
1 square root .
. 413 Timing basis: .
. using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.413.
.414 Graph: . . . . . . . . • see graph below.

CONFIGURATION VI OR ANY CONFIGURATION USING ONE PRINTER ON·LINE,
LENGTH (8 DIGIT PRECISION); FLOATING POINT
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD

10,000

7
4

2
~

1,000

7

IL..o

"-

~

4

R=~

Time in Milliseconds per
2
Input Record

VR

W

= O. 1, 0.01

"

100

7
4

2
10

7
4

2

2

4

0.1

7

2

4

7

2
10

4

7
100

C, Number of Computations per Input Record

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorparated

3/63

410:201.415

IBM 7040

§ 201.

.415 Graph:

. . . . • . . . . see graph below.

CONFIGURATION VII A LENGTH (8 DIGIT PRECISION); FLOATING POINT
R

=NUMBER

OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD

10,000

7
4

2
1,000

7

II',;

h 'fII"

4

q

h

Time in MiUiseconds per
2
Input Record
I...-

100

7

R = 1.0
~

~

4

~

. R =0.1

A

2

#

~

,..,

~'.;

~

r,

II""

~

l1li'

A
~

~

%'"= 0.01

10

7
4

2

2
0.1

4

7

2

4

7

2
10

C, Number of Computations per Input Record

3/63

4

7
100

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

410:201.416

§ 201.

. • . . . see graph below.

.416 Graph:

CONFIGURATION VIII B LENGTH (8 DIGIT PRECISION); FLOATING POINT
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD

10,000

7
4

2
1,000
V

7

'b

~

..--~

4

Q

//

Time in Milli-

seconds per
Input Record

2

)1

100

7

R

1.0~
",

.."

4

i-'

2
/~

10

R

V

.L

...

~

V-

R = 0.1

~
~

'#

0.01

7
4

2

0.1

2

4

7

2

4

2

7
10

4

7
100

C, Number of Computations per Input Record

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

410:201.500

IBM 7040

§201.

.512 Computation:

.5

GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING

.51

Standard Statisncal Problem A Estimates

augment T elements in
cross-tabulation
tables .
.513 Timing basis: .
. using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.513 .
. 514 Graph: . . . . . . . . . see graph below.

.511 Record size: . . . . • . thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.

0

•

10,000

7

4

2
1,000

7
4
Time in Milliseconds per
2
Record

100

II~

VI t
1-

7
./

4

./

"

VVIl, VIII

2

~

10

7

...

....

~

""'~

.-

4

2

2

4

2

7
10

4

2

7

100

T. Number of Augmented Eiements
Roman numerals denote Standard Configurations
t And all configurations using one card-reader on-line without pre-editing.

3/63

4

7
1,000

II
II

410:211.101

"ANOAR'

EDP
REPDRIS

IBM 7040
Physical Characteristics

IBM 7040
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

410:211.102

IBM 7040
IBM 7040 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Unit Name

Processing Unit

Process·
ing Unit

Process.
ing Unit

Process.
ing Unit

Disk
Storage

Disk
Storage

7106·1

7106-II

7106·m

7106·IV

1301-1

130 I-II

IDENTITY
Model Number

Height X Width x Depth, in.

Weight, Ibs.

70x20sx31 70x20SX31 70X208x31 70x208X31 69x86x33

4,200

4,200

4,200

4,200

3,625

Switch
Control
Console

File
Control

7155
7631
I,II,III or IV II, morIV

Card
Read·
Punch

1402-11

69x86X33

12x 9X7

70x3SX32

10x58x30

3,S25

10

500

1,400

PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths

To 790450 ft.

Temperature, 0 F.

50 to 110

50 to 110

50 to 110

50 to 110

Humidity, '7.

20 to 80

20 to 80

20 to SO

20 to 80

Temperature, of.

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

65 to 90

65 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

Humidity, '7.

20 to SO

20 to 80

20 to 80

20 to 80

20 to SO

20 to 80

20 to 80

20 to 80

20 to SO

26,000

27,000

27,000

27,000

16,700

20,000

4,800

4,400

Air Flow, cfm.

4,015

4,015

4,015

4,015

1,800

1,800

400

290

Intemal Filters

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2080r230

208 or 230

±8'7.

±8'7.

±8'7.

±S'7.

±S'7.

60

60

60

60

60

± 0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

3ifJ 4 wire

3cp 4 wire

11.3

11.6

11.6

Console
See
table ex- Model I.
pands 20"
right or
left of

See
Model I.

50 to 110

50 to 110

50 to 110

50 to 110 50 to 110

Storage
Ranges

o to

SO

o to

SO

o to

SO

o to

80

o to

80

Working
Ranges
ATMOS·
PHERE

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Nominal

208 or 230 2080r230

208 or 230 2080r230

Yes

2080r230

2080r 230 2080r230

Voltage
Tolerance

Nominal
ELEC·
TRICAL

Phases and Lines

Load KVA

5/63

±8'7.

±8'7.

±8'7.

60

60

60

± 0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

± 0.5'7.

±0.5%

3ifJ 4 wire

3CP 4 wire

3ifJ 4 wire

7.5

9.0

60

Cycles
Tolerance

NOTES

±8'7.

frame.

3ifJ 4 wire 3ifJ 4 wire

11.6

See
Model I.

lcp3 wire lcp3 wire
2.7

Maximum 5 units per Controls a Requires
system.
maximum
1414 VI.
of 8 tape
unIts.

1.6

One can be
attached
to the
basic (A)
channel of
the system. Requires a
1414
Model 3
or 4.

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

410:211.103.
IBM 7040 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Contd.)

Unit Name

I/O Syn.
chronizer

I/O Syn.
chronizer

I/O Syn.
chronizer

I/O Syn.
chroni zer

I/O Syn.
chronizer

I/O Syn.
chronizer

I/O Syn.
chronizer

IDENTITY
Model Number

Height X Width X Depth, in.

Weight, 1bs.

Card
Read·
Punch

Paper
Tape
Reader

Printer

1011-1

Magnetic
Tape
Unit

Magnetic
Tape
Unit

1403 I,ll

729
All Models

7330-1

Programmed
Trans.
mission

Data
Channel

7904-1

7904-11

1009-1

Control
7750
I, n or III

Data
Transmission Unit

Data
Channel

Remote
Inquiry
Unit

Data
Processing
System

1014-1

1401
ModelaB-F

1414-1

1414-11

1414-11I

1414-IV

1414-V

l414-VI

1414-V11

1622 I, 11

70X3SX32

70x3SX32

70X3SX32

70X3sx32

70X74x32

70x74x32

70x3sx32

46X5SX30

60X32X36

53x 4SX29

6gx29x34

3SX29X31

70xlSlx31

70X37x31

70X37X31

40X29x 31

35x 29x24

500

1,000

1,100

1,100

1,350

529

750

1,200 (max)

650

2,700
(approx)

660

750

500

175

Maximum
total length
of a power
leg is 100'

Maximum
total length
of a power
leg is SO'

SO to 110

SO to 110

500

500

500

PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths

Temperature, of.

To 7106-50' To 7106-50' To 7106-50' To 7106-50'
To 7904
To 7904
Channel 0
Channel 0
--40'
-40'
To 7106
To 7106
Module AModule A75'
75'
50to 110

50to 110

50to 110

50toll0

To 7106-50' To 7106-20'
To 7904
Channel A
--40'
To 7106
Module A75'
SO to 110

50to 110

50to 110

50to 110

SO to 110

SO to 110

Storage
Ranges
Humidity, '7.

ATMOSPHERE

o to

SO

OtoSO

o to

80

o to

SO

o to

SO

o to

SO

o to

SO

o to

SO

o to

SO

o to

SO

o to

SO

o to

SO

To 7106-50' To 7106-50'
To Direct
Data-ISO'

SO to 110

o to

SO

SO to 110

o to

SO

SO to 110

o to

SO

To 7106-60'

SO to 110

o to

SO

SO to 110

o to

SO

o to

SO

Temperature, OF .

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to gO

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

60 to 90

Humidity, '7.

20 to SO

20 to SO

20 to SO

20 to SO.

20 to SO

20 to SO

20 to SO

20 to SO

20 to SO

20 to SO

20 to SO

20 to SO

20 to SO

20 to SO

20 to SO

20 to SO

20 to SO

20 to SO

26,000 *

3,260

6,040

1,000

Working
Ranges

Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.

Air Flow, cfm.

Intemal

50to 110

Fi1te~s

Nominal

1,400

1,400

2,120

5,000

4,050

4,450

1,400

5,500

4,100

3,000

3,900

3,415

500

500

500

1,000

1,000

1,000

500

280

ISO

310

550

150

?

710

710

120

---

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

20S or 230

20S or 230

20S or 230

20S or 230

20S or 230

20S or 230

20S or 230

20S or 230

20S or 230

20S or 230

20S or 230

20S or 230

20S or 230

20S Or 230

20S Or 230

115, 20S
or 230

115, 20S
or 230

±S%

±S'7.

±S'7.

±S'7.

±S'7.

±S%

±S'7.

±S'7.

±8'7.

±S'7.

±S'7.

±S'7.

±S'7.

±S'7.

±S'7.

±8%

±S'7.

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±0.5'7.

±O.S'7.

± 0.5'7.

3¢ 4 wire

Up 4 wire

3¢ 4 wire

3¢ 4 wire

3¢ 4 wire

3¢ 4 wire

3¢ 4 wire

l¢ 3 wire

3¢ 4 wire

3¢ 4 wire

3¢ 4 wire

3¢ 4 wire

3¢ 4 wire

3¢ 4 wire

1¢ 3 wire

1¢ 3 wire

0.5

0.5

O.S

1.S

1.2

1.3

0.5

1.8

---

1.6

1.1

1.6

2.6

0.3

O.lS

500

Voltage
Tolerance

Nominal
ELECTRICAL

Cycles
Tolerance

Phases and Lines

Load KVA

NOTES

OneMode11, See Model I.
2, or 7 can
be attached
to each
channel.

One Model 1414 In, IV or V can be
attached to the basic (A) channel.

l¢ 3 wire

1.46

One Mode16 See Model I. ~1ther m<>del On 1414
can be atcan b;, atmodels 4,
ached to a 5 or 6.
tached to
7106.
each additional channel (B, C,D
or E). Maximum, 4 per
system.

©

Either model
can be attached to
the basic ~A)
channel 0
the ~stem.

Req

res a

10.S

Requires
Only 1 per Either model. One per
1414 model system.
channel. Four per sysI, 2 or 7.
tem.
'*f27~OO
w th elegraph Converter Base)

On 1414
Models 4,
5 or 6.

On 1414
Models 4,
5 or 6.

See 1401.

1414 model
3 or 4.

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

410:221.101
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

IBM 7040

REPORtS

Price Data

PRICE DATA
§

221.

Monthly
Rental

PRICES
Monthly
Maintenance

Purchase

$

$

$

7,500
8,000
9,000
11,000

175.00
185.00
200.00
245.00

485,000
510.000
560,000
660,000

500

11.25

15,000

350

6.25

10,000

550
75
60

17.25
2.25
2.25

18,000
3,000
2,400

2,100
3,500

138.00
238.00

115,500
185,500

25

1.00

1,250

835
1,035
1,035
225

30.00
35.00
35.00
3.25

42,000
52,000
52,000
8,000

250

6.75

11,000

50

1.00

1,800

1,500
2,000

33.50
57.00

95,000
118,000

90

2.25

4,200

225

3.25

8,000

300

4.25

2,000

250

6.75

11,000

50

1.00

1,800

IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR

Name

No.
7106

Central Processor
Standard Equipment

Model I
II
III

TV

4,096 words of storage
8,192 words of storage
16, 384 words of storage
32,768 words of core storage
1 Output Typewriter
Data Channel A
Optional Features

#3880
#4428

#5080
#7498

Extended Performance
Floating Point Arithmetic Single
Precision
Floating Point Arithmetic Double
Precision
Memory Protection
Storage Block Iriternal Time

1301
Model I
Model II

Disc Store (5 Max.)
28 million characters
56 million characters

#4429

STORAGE

Optional Feature
#3213

Cylinder Mode
Prerequisite Equipment

7631
Model I
Model II
Model III
#1074
7094 lor II
#1845 or
#1846

/
INPUf-OUfPUf

7904 I
7904 II

DATA
CHANNELS

File Control (2 max.)
Un shared
Shared with 1410 or 7010
Shared with 7000 series system
Control Adapter
Dita Channel (see I/O)
Dita Channel B Adapter
Adapter for Dita Channel C, D, and
E (1 each)
Dita Channel B or D
Dita Channel C or E
Optional Equipment

#1040
#1074
#1080

Adapter, Tape 1414 (1 max. per
channel)
Adapter, Control (1 max. per
channel) to attach a 7631,
1414 VI, or 7750.
Adapter, Direct Dita or Non-ffiM
devices (1 max. per channel)
Prerequisite Equipment

#1845
#1846

Data Channel B Adapter
Adapter for Data Channel C and
D and E (1 each).

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4/63

410:221.102

IBM 7040

PRICE DATA (Contd.)
§

221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS

No.

Name

Monthly
Rental

$
7106 I
II, III,
and IV
#1046
#1040
#1034
#7080
INPUT-OUTPUT
CONTROLLERS

7631 II
III
IV

Data Channel A (processor)
Optional Equipment
Adapter, Card 1414 (1 max.,
none with #1046).
Adapter, 1622 (1 max., none
with #1038
Adapter, Tape 1414 (1 max.)
Adapter, 1401 (1 max., requires
#7080)

PRICES
Monthly
Maintenance

$
see

central

Purchase

$
processor

80

3.25

3,600

95
120

2.25
4.25

4,700
5,500

100

2.25

3,800

Serial Input-Output Adapter

100

1.50

3,750

File Control for 1301 DSU
File Control for 1301 DSU
File Control for 1301 DSU

835
1,035
1,035

30.00
35.00
35.00

42,000
52,000
52,000

12.00

43,350

Prerequisite Equipment
See Storage, 1301
Optional Features
See Storage, 1301
1414
1414
1414
1414

I
II
III
IV

1414 V
1414 VI
1414 VII

I/O Synchronizer Tape, 729 II, IV, V
1/0 Synchronizer Tape, 7330
I/O Synchronizer Unit record
I/O Synchronizer Unit record and
communications
I/O Synchronizer Communications
I/O Synchronizer Communications
I/O Synchronizer Tape, 729 II, IV,
V, VI

975
500
675
775
7
850
1,125

"Prerequisite Equipment
See Input- Output, Data Channels.
Optional Features

4/63

#3585
F92950
W99187
E1Oll2

Model
Model
Model
Model

I
I
III
III & IV

#7680

Model III & IV

#7681

Model III & IV

#6024

Model IV

M04578
882017

Model IV
Model IV

M00447
730631

Model IV
Model IV

#7184

Model I & VII

800 CPI for 729 V
Tape, Read Gapless
Printer, 1404 withcompare
Printer, 1404 attachment
without compare
Printer, 1403 II attachment
Printer, 1403 II Additional Synchronizer
Storage
Read/Punch, 1402 Read/
Punch Column Binary
Trans. Remote to 1001
Inquiry Adapter,
Indicator
2nd Buffer 1403 - channell
Reader 2nd 1011 Paper
Tape
Tape Intermix for 7330s

270
580
90
550
60

7
260
10
630
45
45

2,250

PRICE DATA

410:221.1 03
PRICE DATA (Contd.)

§

221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS

INPUT-OUTPUT
UNITS

For
prerequisite
equipment
see
appropriate
1414 or Dlta
Channel.

No.

Name

729 IT
729 IV
729 V
729 VI
7330

Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic

Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape

Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit

Maximum
10 per
Channel

Monthly
Rental
$
700
900
750
950
450

PRICES
Monthly
Maintenance
$
116.00
128.00
122.00
134.00
52.25

Purchase
$
36,000
41,250
37,200
42,450
22,000

Optional Equipment
#7830
E03378

7155
Model
Model
Model
Model

Tape Switching Feature for 729
MTUs attached to a 7155
Required for each 7330 MTU
attached to a 7155

85

6.50

4,400

125

Switch Control Console
I
IT
ill
IV

1009
1011
1014
1402 II

2 tapes
4 tapes
6 tapes
8 tapes

35
55
80
100

5.50
11.00
16.50
22.00

1,775
2,675
3,875
4,775

Data Transmission Unit ( 1 max
per 1414 IV, V, VI)

500

11.50

26,400

Punched Tape Reader (1 max per
1414 IV, V, VI)

500

42.50

22,400

Inquiry Station (20 max per 1414 IV,
V, VI)

200

12.50

11,000

172.00

32,900

Card Read/Punch (requires 1414 ill,

IV)

615

1403 I

Printer (requires #7680)

725

1403 II

Printer (requires #7680 and 7681)

775

1404 IT

Printer (requires ElO112)

1622

Card Read/Punch

615

Optional Features:
M01376
MOI377
M99145
M03473
M03747
M00711

Punch Octal/binary
Read Octal/binary
Punch 250 cpm
Read 800 cpm
Read 500 cpm
File Feed

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

160
140
170
75
65
35

4/63

IBM 7044
htternational Business Machines Corp.

(

"'---,

/"

\."...

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN

u.s,

A,

IBM 7044
./

International Business Machines .Corp.

/

/

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U.

s.

A.

411:001.001
IBM 7044
Contents

CONTENTS

1.
2.
3.

4.

5.
6.
7.

8.

Introduction: . . . .
Data Structure: . . •
System Configuration:
Configuration VII A; 10- Tape General- Integrated:
Configuration VIIIB; 20-Tape General-Paired: .
Internal Storage
7107 Magnetic Core: . . . • . • •.
1301 Disk Storage Unit: . • . . . .
7631 Model 2, 3, or 4 File Control:
#1074 Channel Adapter:
Central Processor
7107 Processor: . . . .
Console: . • • . • • • • .
Input-Output; Punched Tape and Card
1402 Model II Card Read- Punch (Reader):
#1038 Adapter: • • • . . . . • . . .
1414 - III or IV Synchronizer:
•.••
1402 Model II Card Read- Punch (Punch):
#1038 Adapter: • . . . . . . •
1414 - III or IV Synchronizer:
1622 Card Read- Punch (Reader):
1622 Adapter #1046: . . • • .
1622 Card Read- Punch (Punch):
1622 Adapter #1046: . . • . .
10 11 Paper Tape Reader: • . .
1414 - IV, V, or VI Synchronizer:
#5514 Paper Tape Reader Adapter:
Input-Output; Printer:
1403 Printer, Models 1 and 2:
#1038 Adapter: . . . . . .
1414 - III or IV Synchronizer:
1403 Printer, Model 3: . . .
Output Typewriter: . . . . .

9.

10.

.
.
•
.

Input-Output; Magnetic Tape Units
729 - II, IV, V, or VI Magnetic Tape Unit:
1040 Tape Adapter: • • . • • •
1414 - I, II, or III Synchronizer:
7330 Magnetic Tape Unit:
#7184 Tape Intermix Feature: • .
1414 - I, II, or VII Synchronizer:
#1040 Adapter, 1414:
Input- Output; Other
7904 - I, II Data Channel:
Data Channel A: • • • • .
1414 Synchronizer Models I through VII:
1009 Data Transmission Unit: . •
1014 Remote Inquiry Unit:
1414 - IV, V, or VI Synchronizer:

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

411:011
411:021
411:031.1
411:031.2
411:041
411:042
411:042.4
411:042.4
411:051
411:061
411:071
411:071.4
411:071.4
411:072
411:072.4
411:072.4
411:073
411:073.4
411:074
• 411:074.4
411:075
• 411:075.4
411:075.4
. ..
·
·
·

411:081
411:081. 4
411:081.4
402:082 (mM 141O)
411:083 .
411:091
411:091.4
411:091.4
411:092
411:092.4
411:092.4
411:092.4
411:101
411:102
411:103
411:104
411:105
411:105.4
5/63

411 :001.002

IBM 7044

CONTENTS (Contd.).
Simultaneous Operations
Instruction List: . . • .
Data Codes
Report Writing Graphics:
Programming Language Graphics:
Hollerith Card Code: . • • . •
Internal and Binary Tape Code:
BCD Code on Tape:. • • .
1400 Series Code: • . • .
Problem Oriented Facilities:
Process Oriented Language
709/7090 FORTRAN II
Machine Oriented Language

11.
12.
14.

15.
16.
17.

411:111
411:121
411:141
411:142
411:143
411:144
411:145
411:146
411:151 (RIP)
408:161 (IBM 7090)

FAP . . .' . . .
18.

19.
20.

21.
22.

RIP

408:171 (IBM 7090)

Program Translator
FAP • • • • . .
FORTRAN II . •
Operating Environment •
System Performance •
Generalized File Processing:
Sorting . . • • • • . • • • • • • • •
Matrix Inversion • • • • • • • . •
Generalized Mathematical Processing
Generalized Statistical Processing
Physical Characteristics:
Price Data. • . • . • • • • . . • •

=

408:181 (IBM 7090)
408:182 (IBM 7090)
409:191 (IBM 7090)
411:201. 011
411:201.1
411:201.2
411:201.3
411:201.4
411:201.5
410:211 (IBM 7040)
411:221

Report in Process

6.n
!

A-UE-RB-AC-H-j

'-1

5/63

411:011.100
IBM 7044
Introduction

INTRODUCTION
§

011.

The IBM 7044 is a medium to large scale, solid-state, general purpose pro(;essing
system. Unlike other members of the IBM 7090/7094 family, the 7044 (and the slower
7040) can communicate directly, storage-to-storage, with an IBM 1401 and its input-output
equipment, as well as with other 7040, 7044, 7090, and 7094 systems. The 7040 and 7044
are the only systems of the 704/709/7090/7094 group that can include high-speed printers
and card readers in which all data transfers are parity checked.
The 7107 Central Processor is available in three models which differ only in storage
size. Storage sizes are 8,192, 16,384 and 32,678 words; each word contains 36 bits plus
a parity bit. The basic storage or processor cycle time is 8 microseconds and all data
transfers in the processor are performed in parallel. The 7107 is similar to the 704 and
7106 processors in that it can be used either for processing or as a data channel for inputoutput transmission. The 7107 can also have four independent 7904 overlapped-transfer
data channels connected to it.
Like the 7040, the standard 7107 Central Processor has a set of fixed point arithmetic instructions and instructions for data manipulating, control and input- output, but has
no index registers. The Extended Performance option includes 3 index registers with a set
of 20 instructions for using these registers, 3 single-character- handling instructions, a
data block transfer instruction, and several sequence control instructions. Acquiring this
option is almost mandatory because the software being written for the 7044 relies on the
option for optimum object programs; also, the option can double the system throughput with
an increase of five per cent or less in rental or price. The 7044 without the Extended Performance option is about as fast as a 7040 with the option. The 7044 can outperform its
equivalent 7040 system by only a factor of approximately two. The increase of three-fold
in the cycle-time is partially negated by the use of more word cycles to execute many 7044
instructions than the number of comparable word cycles in the 7040.
Other options for the 7044 are: Single Precision Floating Point (required for
FORTRAN), Double Precision Floating Point (for which the Single Precision Floating Point
option is a prerequisite), a Clock and Interval Timer, and a Memory Protect option.
The 7044 system can be programmed so that its programs can also be run on the
7090 and 7094 systems. Running 7090/7094 programs on the 7044 is almost impossible because many 7090/7094 instructions are not in the 7044 repertoire. Recompilation in a
compatible language such as FORTRAN or COBOL is the only effective way to run 7090/7094
programs on a 7044. The 7040 software complement will be very similar to that for the
7090 (see 7090, Introduction), but will be restricted in capability and effectiveness on system configurations with smaller storage than the 7090. Programs for the 7040 and 7044 are
completely interchangeable, except where timing problems exist.
The 7044 system has a very extensive interrupt system that provides definitive indications of the reasons for the interrupts, in addition to links back to the main program and
to an interrupt processing routine. The interrupt system grows with the size of the system;
with few exceptions, adding any option or piece of equipment adds another source or kind of
interrupt. All interrupts can be enabled or disabled individually or in groups.

(
\

'-,

The input-output equipment is connected in modular fashion. The central processor
is connected to 7904 Data Channels B through E by adapters. Since channel A is the central
processor, no adapter is required. The data channels are connected to synchronizers by
another set of adapters, except in the cases of 7904 Direct Data connections (which connect
to "real-time" devices such as radars and Direct Data connections on other systems), and
the 1401 system connections on channel A. The synchronizers can be buffered or unbuffered

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:011.101
§ OIl.

IBM 7044

INTRODUCTION (Contd.)

controllers that are connected through a control adapter to the input-output unit or series
of units. One data transmission at a time may be in progress on each data channel.
A characteristic of all 7044 terminal units is that parity is checked duri!1g data
transmission operations at the core store, the data channel, and the terminal unit. Almost
all the units have some form of built- in checking in their read or write equipment.
The basic input-output controller in the system is the 1414 Synchronizer. Through
these units two 1403 or 1404 Printers and a 1402 Card Read Punch can be connected. The
communications equipment that can be connected to a 1414 permits data transmissions with
any digital equipment that can use telegraph or telephone lines.
In comparison to other systems in its class, the 7044 appears to operate twice as
fast as a 7040, five times faster than the 709 system and very slightly slower than a 7090.
Ignoring Hypertape units on input- output-limited problems, the 7044 speed should equal
that of the 7090 very closely, since the same disc storage and magnetic tape units are used
with either system. The basic 7044 system rents for approximately one-half and an expanded system for approximately three-fourths that of a comparable 7090 system. The
7044 processor rents for approximately one-half that of the 7090 processor, but the inputoutput equipment costs the same on either system except for the controllers, which rent
for somewhat less in the 7044 system.

./

/

3/63

411:021.100

_STANDARD
EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 7044
Data Structure

DATA STRUCTURE

§ 021.

.1

.2

STORAGE LOeAnONS
Name of Location Size
Word position:
Row:
Column:
Unit Record:

Group or "byte":
Band:
Record:
Record:
Cylinder:
File:

36 bits +
parity
6 bits +
parity
single column code
14, 17, 22,
24, or 28
words
6 or 8 bits +
parity bit
2,790 char
max
1 to 2,790
char
1 to N
words
40 bands
1 to N
records

INFORMATION FORMATS
Type of Information

Representation

Purpose or Use
basic addressable location
in core storage.
character on magnetic tape.
character on punched cards.
punched card and print image in core storage.
a BCD char on band of a disk
surface.
usable length of band in disk
store.
related char in a band.
related words on magnetic
tape.
addressable group of bands.
magnetic tape or disk store.

© 1963

Numeral:. • . • • .

BCD char on magnetic
tape or disk.
card column.
Alphameric char: • . • BCD char on magnetic
tape or disk.
card column.
6 bits of word.
Fixed point
number: •
sign bit plus 35 bits in
word.
Floating point
number: .•
sign bit plus 8-bit
characteristic plus
27 - bit fractional part
in word.
Instruction:
I word.
Data: • . . •
1 word.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:031.100
IBM 7044

System Configuration
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§

031.

.1

lO-TAPE GENERAL-INTEGRATED; CONFIGURATION VIlA.
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . • . . 65% more core storage.
10% longer printer line.
20% faster printer.
60% faster card reader.
150% faster card punch.
Typewriter is output only.
50% fewer index registers (only 3).
Equipment

Rental

Core storage: 32,768 words, }

7107 ill Central Processor,
with Console and Output

$ 20,500

Typewriter, l5.5'char/sec.

(~

)

'----..~-O

Processor Options (see below).

910

#1038 Card Adapter.
1414 ill Synchrontzer.

80
675

1402 II Card Read-Punch,
Reader: 800, Punch: 250 cards/min.

615

#7680 Attachment, 1403.
#7681 Additional Synchronizer Storage.

550
60

1403 II Printer, 600 lines/min.

775

#1040 Tape Adapter.
1414 I Synchronizer.

120
975

729 II Magnetic Tape Units (2),
41,667 char/sec.

1,400

#1845 First Channel Adapter.
#1846 Second Channel Adapter.
7904 II Overlapped Data Channels
(2 controllers).

250
50
2,000

#1040 Tape Adapter.
1414 I Synchronizer.
729 II Magnetic Tape Units (4),
41,667 char/sec.
#1040 Tape Adapter.
1414 I Synchronizer.
729 II Magnetic Tape Units (4),
41,667 char/sec.
Total Rental:

90
975
2,800
90
975
2,800

$ 36,690

Optional Features Included: • . . . . . • . • • • • • • Extended Performance, #3880.
Single Precision Floating Point, #4428.
Clock and Interval Timer, #7498

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411 :031.200
§

IBM 7044

031.

.2

20-TAPE GENERAL-PAIRED; CONFIGURATION VIII B.
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .

23% more core storage.
10% longer print line.
150% faster card reader.
Extra card punch (comes with reader).
25% slower magnetic tapes.
Typewriter is output only.
70% fewer index registers (3 only).
On-line connection to paired system.
Equipment
Core Storage: 32,768 words,

Rental

$ 20,500

7107 1II Central Processor,
with Console and Output
Typewriter, 15.5 char/sec.
Processor Options (see below)
#1034 Adapter, 1401.
#7080 Serial I/O Adapter,
87,000 char/sec.

985
100
100

#1046 Adapter, 1622.
1622 Card Reader-Punch,

95
615

Reader: 250, Punch: 100 cards/min.
#1040 Tape Adapter.
1414 VII Synchronizer.
729 V Magnetic Tape Units (2),
60,000 char/sec.

Optional Features Include: . . . • . . . • . . . . ....

3/63

120
1,125.
1,900

#1845 First Channel Adapter.
# 1846 Additional Channel Adapter.
7904 II Overlapped Data Channels
(2 controllers)
#1040 Tape Adapter.
1414 VII Synchronizer.

250
50
2,000

729 VI Magnetic Tape Units (4),
90,000 char/sec.
#1040 Tape Adapter.
1414 VII Synchronizer.

3, BOO

729 VI Magnetic Tape Units (4),
90,000 char/sec.
#1846 Additional Channel Adapters (2).

3,800

7904 II Overlapped Data Channels
(2 controllers).
#1040 Tape Adapter.
1414 VII Synchronizer.

2,000

729 VI Magnetic Tape Units (3),
90,000 char/sec.
#1040 Tape Adapter.
1414 VII Synchronizer.

2,850

729 VI Magnetic Tape Units (3),
90,000 char/sec.
Total Rental:

2,850

Extended Performance, #3880.
Single Precision Floating Point, #4428.
Clock and Interval Timer, #7498.
Memory Protect, #5080.

90
1,125

90
1,125

100

90

I, 125

90
1,125

$ 48,100

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

§

411:031.201

031 .

.2

20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION VIII B (Contd.)
Auxiliary Computer (IBM 1401)
Equipment
1406 Core Storage:
8, 000 positions
Processing Unit:
1401 Model C4
Console

1402 Card Read-Punch
800 cards/min.
Reads:
Punches: 250 cards/min.

To 7D40
System

1403 Printer:
600 lines/min.

729 V Magnetic Tape Units (4):
60,000 char/sec.
Optional Features
Total Rental:

Deviations from Standard Configuration.

· none.

Rental . . . . . . . . . . .

· $8, 545 per month.

Optional Features Included:

· High-Low-Equal Compare.
Advanced Programming.
Read Punch Release.
Sense Switches.
Print Storage.
Processing Overlap.
Early Card Read.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

Rental

$

575

2,730

550

835

3,000
855
$ 8,545

3/63

411:041.100

_STANDARD
EDP
•

IBM 7044
Internal Storage
Magnetic Core

REPORTS

INTERNAL STORAGE: MAGNETIC CORE

§

041.

· 28

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Basic Use:

.13

Description

7107 (processor) Magnetic
Core.
Models I, II, III.
working storage.

The core storage is physically part of the central
processor. The central processor model number is
determined by its storage capacity; Models I, II,
and III having 8,192, 16,384, ;Lnd 32,768 storage
locations, respectively.

• 29

Potential Transfer Rates

· 292 Peak data rates
400, 000 cps.
Cycling rates:
word.
Unit of data:
Conversion factor: .• 37 bits/word.
400,000 words/second.
Data rate: ..
.3

DATA CAPACITY

· 31

Module and System Sizes

Identity:

Instructions:

Rules for Combining
Modules:. . .

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:....

.42

Connection to System

.16

Reserved Storage: . . . .none.

. 422 Off-line:

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

. 43

· 21

Storage Medium: .

· 22

Physical Dimensions

Storage Phenomenon:

· 24

Recording Permanence

. 241 Data erasable by
instructions: . •
• 242 Data regenerated
constantly: • . .
0243 Data volatile: . .
· 244 Data permanent: •
.245 Storage changeable:

direction of magnetization.

yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.

© 1963

0

.421 On-line:

7107 n
16,384
98,304
16,384

7107 III
32,768
196,608
32,768

pick only one.

central processor.

core store is internal to the
processor .
none .

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 5 data channels.
.432 Restrictions: . . . • . . none.
· 44

· 23

7107 I
8,192
49,152
8,192

Words:
Characters:

A "Memory Protect" option (see Central Processor,
411:051. 12) which will prevent the program from
changing the contents of a region of storage is available with any of the models. Input-output operations
are not inhibited by this option.

· 221 Magnetic core type storage
Core diameter:.
?
Core bore: . . . . .
?

Maximum
Storage

Minimum
Storage

· 32

magnetic core.

coincident current •
sense wire.
uniform.

. 281 Recording method: .
.282 Reading method: .
• 283 Type of access: . .

A word is represented as 36 bits plus an odd parity
bit. Odd parity checking is provided on all data
transfers to or from the core store. A parity error
sets an indicator which can cause an immediate or
delayed interrupt of the program. When a parity interrupt occurs, the possibility of additional parity
interrupts is automatically inhibited.
This store has a cycle time of 2. 5 microseconds,
and it can accept or send data at a rate of 400, 000
words per second to the processor or any of the
data channels.

Access Techniques

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load: . . .
.442 Input-output area:
• 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: • . . . .
• 445 Synchronization:.
· 446 Synchronizing aids:
.447 Table control: . . .
· 448 Testable conditions: .
·5

ACCESS TIMING

• 51

Arrangement of Heads:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

1 to 255 words.
all of storage •
byword.
none.
automatic .
none.
none.
parity error.

set of read/write circuits •

3/63

411:041.520

IBM 7044

§ 041.

• 52

Si.riJ.ultaneous Operations

A:

B:
C:
D:
E:
F:

Data Channel
Data Channel
Data Channel
Data Channel
Data Channel
Computation.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A+B+C+D+E=5.
B+C+D+E+F=5.
. 53

CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . . none .

.7

AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

.71

Data Transfer
Pair of storage units possible
With self via
processor: . •
yes.
With data channel:
yes.

.72

Transfer Load Size
With self via processor: 1 to 255 words.
With data channel: . "
1 to 32,767 words .

Access Time Parameters and Variations

.531 For uniform access
Access time: . . .
2.0 J.Lsec.
~ycle time: . . . .
2.5 J.Lsec.
For data unit of: . . . 1 word.

3/63

.6

.73

Effective Transfer Rate
With self via processor: 5 + 5 J.Lsec per word.
With data channel: . . . 5 J.Lsec per word.

411:042.100
.STANDAAD

EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 7040/7044
Internal Storage

1301
INTERNAl.:. STORAGE: 1301 DISK STORAGE UNIT

§

042.

.13

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

Disk Storage Unit.
1301 Models 1 and 2.

. 12

Basic User: .

auxiliary storage.

.13

Description

Checking features include a storage parity check, a
validity check upon data received by the File Control, a comparison of the record address on the
disc with the address in the stored program, and
checks for illegal operation codes or sequences of
instructions. Three check characters are generated and recorded during each write operation. When
the record is read, the check characters are automatically generated again and compared with the
ones read from the disc. As in the 7300 RAMAC
unit, a programmed comparison of data recorded
on a disc with data in core storage can be made.

The 1301 Model 1 Disk Storage Unit can store up to
27, 900, 000 alphameric characters. The Model 2
has two modules on a single vertical shaft and can
store up to 55, 800, 000 characters. Each module
contains 25 discs; 40 of the SO disc surfaces are
used for data storage. Each module is served by a
comb-like access mechanism. Forty data readwrite heads, one for each data surface, move
horizontally between the discs. The entire access
mechanism moves as one unit, so the horizontal
position of all the heads se~ing a given module is
always the same. The 40 bands, Ion each disc
surface, that can be read or recorded upon when
the access mechanism is in any given position are
referred to as a "cylinder."
There are 250 bands on each disc surface. The
size and number of records stored in each band are
variable. Their formats are controlled by a format
surface that can be written upon only by a special
instruction after manually releasing a write lock.
Each of the 250 bands on the format surface controIs the record format of the entire cylinder in the
corresponding position. A different record format
can be used in each of the 250 cylinders in each
module.
Data can be recorded in either the 6- bit or 8-bit
mode. In the 6- bit mode each band can store up to
2, 790 characters. In the 8- bit mode, only 2, 160
alphameric characters can be stored in a band, and
6- bit groups are stacked in 8 -bit locations. The
other two bits on the disc are ignored or cleared.
When more than 1 record is stored in a band, the
data capacity is reduced by 38 characters for each
additional record address. Instructions are provided to read or record a single record, a full band,
or, with the optional Read/Write Cylinder feature
(RC) , a full cylinder of up to 111,600 characters.
Time for access mechanism movement ranges from
zero (for a record in a previously selected cylinder) to 180 milliseconds. Maximum rotation delay
time is 34 milliseconds. Total reference cycle
time to read a randomly placed record of 270 characters, update it, rewrite it, and execute a programmed write check is 248 milliseconds. If no
access motion is required, the total reference cycle
time is reduced to 88 milliseconds. Using the
Read/Write Cylinder feature, an effective bulk
transfer rate of 13,833 words, or 83,000 chanJrters, per second can be achieved in the 6-bit mode

© 1963

Description (Contd.)

A maximum of five 1301 Disk Storage Units can be
connected to one or two 7631 File Controls. Each
7631 is attached to a 7040/44 via 7904 Channels.
Two read or write operations can occur simultaneously when two File Controls are used. Every disc
storage operation is initiated by a "channel select"
instruction, which sends the core storage aaClress
of the initial channel command word to the specified Data Channel. Internal processing then continues while the Data Channel independently controls the disc operation. A group of 1301 units
can be shared by two IBM 7000 series and/or 1410
systems.
Optional Features
#3213 Cylinder Mode (RC). Enables transfers of
data, by one instruction, of a complete cylinder of
up to some 18,600 words, or 111,600 characters.
.14

Availability:

12 to 15 months (**).

.15

First Delivery:

July, 1962.

.16

Reserved Storage
Purpose
Clocking:
Spares:
Format:
Addresses:

.2

Locks
not addressable.
not addressable.
no heads available.
1 disc surface
manual lock.
31 + 38R charjband, none.
for R records/band

Number of locations
1 disc surface
6 disc surfaces
2 disc surfaces

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Storage Medium:.

. 22

Physical Dimensions

. multiple magnetic disc.

.222 Disc
Diameter: • • • •
Thickness:
Number on shaft:

24 inches.
• thin.
Modell, 25 discs.
Model 2, SO discs.
(**) Estimate. See 1 :010. 400.

by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:042.230

IBM 7040/7044

§.042.
.23

Storage Phenomenon:

. 24

Recording Permanence

magnetization .

.31

Module and System Sizes
Minimum
Storage

yes.

no.

Note:

6-bit mode
465
2, 790
2,790
465

8-bit mode
360.
2,160.
2,160.
360.

These are maximum capacities, based upon
1 record per band; each additional record
address requires 38 characters, or 7 words.

Bands 2er Physical
Unit:

250 per disc surface.

. 27

Interleaving Levels:

1.

. 28

Access Technigues

• 281 Recording method:
. 283 Type of access
Description of stage
Move heads to
selected band: .
Wait for selected
record:

Maximum
Storage
1301 Modell 1301 Model 2 51301s.
Model 2.
20 data
40 data
200 data.
4,650,000
9,300,000
46, 500, 000.
27,900,000
55,800,000
279, ODD, 000.
4.650,000
9,300,000
46, 500, 000.

Discs:
0
Words:
0
Characters: 0
Instructions: 0
Cylinder
char:
111,600
223,200
Cylinder
word:
18,600
37,200
Modules:
0
1
2
Basis:
6-bit mode, 1 record/band.

no.
no.
no.

Data Volume per Band of 1 Track
Words:
Characters:
Digits:
Instructions:

.26

DATA CAPACITY

Identity:

. 241 Data erasable by
instructions:. .
.242 Data regenerated
constantly:
.243 Data volatile: . .
.244 Data permanent:
. 245 Storage
changeable: . .
. 25

.3

.32

Rules for Combining.
Modules: . . . . .

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

. 29

magnetic heads on access
arms which move horizontally in unison.
Possible starting stage

.42

.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data: .
Conversion factor:
Gain factor: .
nata rate
6-bit mode:
8-bit mode:

3/63

up to five 1301s, Modell
and/or Model 2 in any
combination.

File Control.
7631 Model 2, 3, or 4 .

Connection to System

.421 On-Line: .
. 422 Off-Line: .

if new band is selected.

no .
.43
1,800 rpm.
630,000 bits/sec including
char gaps.
540,000 bits/sec, data bits
only.
Note: based on 6-bit mode.
character.
7 or 9 (including space bit).
1 track/band.
90,000 char/sec.
70,000 char/sec.
8,750 words/sec.

one 7631 with one 7904 .
7631 Model 3 permits
shared use of 1301s with
an mM-141O system.
7631 Model 4 permits
shared use with another
7000 series system
(except 7072).

if same band was previ-

Potential Transfer Rates

.291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates:
Bit rate per track:

180,000 •
10.

Data Channel .
7904 (see 411:101.12).
#1074 Channel Adapter .

ously selected.
Wait for transfer
of data:.

1,116,000.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per
controller:
.432 Restrictions:

.44

5.
maximum of five 1301s
per system, whether 1
or 2 7631s are used.

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:

1 record of up to 2, 790
chars, 1 band of up to
2, 790 chars, or (with
read/write cylinder
option) 1 cylinder of up
to 111, 600 characters.

411:042.442

INTERNAL STORAGE: 1301 DISK STORAGE UNIT
§

042.

.442 Input- output
area: . . •
. 443 Input- output area
access: . . . .
. 444 Input- output area
lockout: . . • .
.445 Synchronization:
.447 Table control:.
.448 Testable
conditions:

.5
. 51

.53
core storage.
each word.

ACCESS TIMING

40 to 400, data only.
40.
40.
l.
50 to 500, including
spares and control (see
41O:04l.16).
horizontal.

Simultaneous Operations

A:

B:
C:
\

'-

.6

CHANGEABLE
STORAGE:

o or 50 to 180
o to 34
0.4 to 34
34.
0.4 to 248

Example,
msec.
160.0.
17.0.
4.0.
18l.0.

• . . . no.

.7

AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE

. 71

Data Transfer
Pairs of storage units possibilities
With self:. . . .
no .
With core storage:. . yes.

• 512 Stack movement:
. 513 Stacks that can access
any particular
location: . • . . . .1.
.514 Accessible locations
By single stack
With no movement:
1 band.
With all movement:
250 bands.
By all stacks
With no move40 bands per module.
ment:
40 to 400 bands per
system.
.515 Relationship between
stacks and
first 4 digits of 6-digit
locations: . . . . .
home address for each
band denote head and
band number.

i\

Move head to
selected band:
Wait for selected
record:
Read one record:
Read one band:
Total:

Arrangement of Heads

.511 Number of Stacks
Stacks per system: .
Stacks per module: .
Stacks per yoke: .
Yokes per Module:
Total per system:

• 52

.532 Variation in access time
Variation,
msec.
Stage

none.
automatic.
no.
access not ready, access
inoperable, and various
error conditions are
signaled by the File
Control in response to a
"sense" command.

Access Time Parameters and Variations

seeking a specified
location.
reading.
recording.

a+ b+ c = at most 1 per DSU module.
b + c =at most 1 per File Control.

© 1963

.72

Transfer Load Size
1 record, 1 band, or (with
RC) 1 cylinder.

With core storage:.
.73

Effective Transfer Rate
With Core storage, wsing optional RC
6-bit mode:
83,700 char/sec •
13, 950 words/sec .
8-bit mode:
65,000 char/sec.
10,833 words/sec.

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Invalid addre.ss:
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:
Physical record
missing:
Reference to locked
areal
Access inoperative
Circuit failure:
Illegal instruction
sequence:
Illegal format
character:

Check or
Interlock

Action

check
check
parity bit check
programmed write
check; gene rate
check characters
parity
check

indicator.
indicator.

check

indicator.

ignored.
check
check

indicator .
indicator.

check

indicator.

check

indicator.

Indicator.
indicator.
indicatot.
indicator.

NoteS These error indications are transmitted from the File
Control to the computer in response to a "sense"
command.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

•

411 :051.100

STANDARD

EDP
•

I....

REPORTS

_

IBM 7044
Central Processor
7107

CENTRAL PROCESSOR

• 12

§ 051.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:.

. 12

Description

. . . . . . 7107 Central Processor.

The 7107 Central Processor is a solid-state, medium-to-large-scale scientific computer which is
available in three models. The models differ only
in storage size. The 7107 is similar to the 709,
7090, and 7094 processors in its instruction repertOire, word length (36 bits), register complement,
and use of independent simultaneous data channels.
Many of the standard features on the 709, 7090, and
7094 processors are optional on the 7107. Like the
704 and 7106 processors, the 7107 processor can
also be used as data channel A, but no simultaneous
processing can take place.
The basic processor with no options included has a
standard instruction set, an input-output instruction
set, indirect addreSSing capability, and the capability to be used as data channel A. An output-only
mM Selectric typewriter located on a desk below the
processor console is connected to channel A. Index
registers are not provided as standard equipment
with the basic processor. The 7107 uses singleaddress one-word instructions which can be executed at a rate of approximately 120,000 instructions per second, or about twice as fast as the 7040
processor. The increase of three-fold in the cycletime is partially negated by more word cycles to execute many 7044 instructions than the comparable
number of word cycles used in the 7040.
The basic instruction set is the same as the 7040
set and includes: a full range of binary fixed-point
arithmetic instructions; the AND, OR, and NOT logical instructions; a recursive "Execute" instruction;
the seven shift instructions used in the 709, 7090,
and 7094; an extensive set of test-accumulator-andbranch instructions; and several other set bit and
test instructions. Two new and very useful instructions are a "subroutine-branch" and a "multiplyaccumulate". Most of the instructions require 5
microseconds for execution. The notable exceptions
are multiplication (30 microseconds) and division
(50 microseconds). Indirect addressing requires an
additional 25 microseconds. The "table look-at" instructions' useful for radix and code conversions in
the 7070/7094, have not been included in the 7044.
However, three character-handling instructions are
available in the Extended Performance instruction
set (see optional equipment, below).

(
\

When the processor is used as data channel A, the
accumulator, address, and multiplier-quotient registers are used for the duration of an input-output
transfer to or from core storage, thus prohibiting
any simultaneous calculations. Because the card

© 1963

Description (Contd.)
reader, card punch, printer, and TELE-PROCESSING* equipment are fully buffered, calculation is
rarely delayed for more than one per cent of the
total input-output operation. The processor is
stalled for less than O. 15 millisecond while the data
is being transferred from any buffer to core storage.
Magnetic tape start time and the time between single
characters typed on the console typewriter can be
overlapped with computation time, but the actual
data transmissions are non-simultaneous with
processing.
The basic input-output instructions are comprehensive, and permit the status-testing of all addressable devices. Two instructions are required to initiate a data transmission input-output operation.
The first instruction selects the device, selects
either the read or write mode, and ascertains the
type of code translation (if any) to be used. The second instruction sets the data channel registers with
the word count and the starting address in core from
which data transmission will begin. These instruction assignments apply to all input-output data transmission operations, whether performed on a simultaneous 7904 Data Channel or data channel A. The
only data channel command is "input-output a record
and disconnect, "which does not permit scatter-read
and gather-write operations.
An extensive interrupt system is provided with the
7044. As the 7044 is expanded by adding options to
the processor or adding input-output equipment and
data channels, the interrupt system also expands. A
direct indication of the cause of an interrupt (called
"trap" by mM) is provided by the system. When an
interrupt occurs, the ~rogram counter and a detailed
indication of the interrupt condition are stored in a
location peculiar to the interrupt that caused it. The
program counter is then set to the address of the data
just stored plus one, where a transfer interrupt routine and interrupt routine should be stored. Thus,
both a link to the interrupt routine and a link back to
the main program are provided automatically. Interrupts are processed on a fixed priority basis. All
interrupts are mutually exclusive, thus making the
interrupt program routines straightforward. All in~errupts can be enabled or disabled individually, or
10 groups, under program control.
Compatibility: Consideration has been given to compatibility in transferring 7044 programs to the 7040,
7090, or 7094. In the 7090/7094 to 7044 direction
the only practical approach seems to be recompila'tion of the source program through a compatible
source language translator, such as FORTRAN or
COBOL, because many commonly used instructions
for the 7090/7094 are not included in the 7044 set.
All the new 7044 instructions that do not exist in the
* an mM Trade Mark

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:051. 120

IBM 7044
• 12

§ OS1.

. 12

Description (Contd. )

interrupts this timer interrupt may not be able to
occur. If the timer has not been incremented after
33 milliseconds, all data channels will be reset
(halting all input-output operations and setting all
channel registers and indicators to zero except in
the processor) and the timer-reset interrupt procedure allowed to begin. An overflow out of bit position 1 of the timer location causes a timer overflow
interrupt. If this interrupt is ignored for 16.667
milliseconds because of higher priority or previous·
interrupts, the timer reset interrupt occurs as outlined above.

7090/7094 have been given instruction operation
codes that would appear as "store and trap" instructions to the 7090/7094, which provide a link to a
7044 interpretive routine that can perfonn (or ignore, ,if not possible) the same function in the 7090/
7094 instruction complement. A read and a write
instruction in this fonn have been provided in additionto the 7090/7094 read/write operations. If input-output units that are common to both systems
use the 7090/7094 instructions, and input-output
units peculiar to the 7044 use the new read and,
write instructions, direct object program compatibility will result. Naturally, the equipment required by the 7044 program (such as double precision floating point hardware) must be available on
the system that executes a 7044 program.

Memory Protect Option, #5080: This option causes
storage to be protected in one of two ways, either to
restrict the program from storing data in a core
storage area or not. When a store instruction references a protected area, a protect interrupt occurs
and the protected word is not changed. Input-output
transfers are not affected by this option. The area
is defined by a "set protect mode" instruction which
gives the seven high order address bits, and a count
which tells how many of the seven bits are to be
used. This instruction defines a region as all of the
store from the high address down to a particular
256-word area. The instruction also determines
whether only the area is protected, or all of the rest
of storage is protected, but not the area. When the
low order part of storage is protected, every interrupt causes a protection violation because every interrupt stores indicators in this region at the time
of the interrupt. This action causes what is called a
pre-interrupt memory-protect trap. This trap links
the interrupt routine that caused the interrupt to the
memory protect interrupt routine, Which is in turn
linked back to the nonnal program. When the protect mode is on, a "set protect mode" instruction
causes a protection interrupt as well as any occurrence of a "release protect mode" instruction.

Optional Processor Features
Extended Perfonnance, #3880: The Extended Perfonnance option consists of three index registers
and 20 instructions to load, unload, test, and change
index registers; a load, a store, and a test singlecharacter set of instructions; a test storage word
plus or minus; and a move (up to 255 words) instruction. The 7044 without this option is about as
fast as the 7040 with the option. It is anticipated
that most users will acquire the Extended Performance option for the following reasons:
(a) All of the major software packages require
this option.
(b) The throughput capability of the system can be

increased by two to five times.
(c) . It costs less than three per cent of the cheapest
system configuration likely to be used.
(d) Programs written without this option will not
be any more efficient if the option is added
later. Even with recompilation the result
would not be as efficient as a program written
with this option, even assuming good software
existed for the option.

Description (Contd. )

.2

PROCESSING FACILITIES

.21

Operations and Operands
Operation
and Variation

Provision Radix

Size

.211 Fixed point
Single Precision Floating Point Option, #4428: This
option is very useful for scientific applications, and
is required if FORTRAN programs are to be run on
the system. The option consists of the nonnalized
floating divide, and the unnormalized and nonnalized add, subtract, and multiply instructions.
Double Precision Floating Point Option, #4429: The
#4428 Single Precision Floating Point option is a
prerequisite for this option. Double Precision requires the addition of another register which is part
of this option. The option is required if the double
precision arithmetic statements in FORTRAN programs are to be used.
Clock and Interval Timer Option, #7498: This option enables the time in sixtieths of a second to be
stored in location OOOOS of core storage. Every
16.667 milliseconds the processor is interrupted
and a "1" is added to the low order bit of location
00005. Because of higher priority or previous
3/63

Add-Subtract:
Multiply
Short:
Long:
Divide
No remainder:
Remainder:

automatic

binary

35 bits + sign + 2
overflow.

automatic
automatic

binary
binary

0-35 bits + sign.
35 bits + sign.

none.
automatic

binary

.212 Floating point
Single length
optional set:
Add -S ubtract:
Multiply:
Double length
optional set:
Add -S ubtract:
Multiply:
Divide:

35 bits + sign.
Fraction Characteristic

automatic
automatic
automatic

binary
binary
binary

27 & 8.
27 & 8.
27 & 8.

automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic

binary
binary
binary
binary

54 &
54 &
54 &
54&

automatic
automatic
automatic

binary

36 bits.
36 bits.
37 bits.

.213 Boolean
AND:
Inclusive OR:
NOT:

8.
8.
8.
8.

CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§

411:051. 210

051

· 21

Operations and Operands (Contd.)
Operation
and Variation

Provision

Size

· 214 Comparison
Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating sequence:

automatic
none.
automatic
same as letters
••• see Data Code Table

.215 Code translation:
.216 Radix conversion:
· 217 Edit format
Alter size:
suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Insert character:
Floating character:
Protection:

none.
none.
none.
see Boolean
see Boolean
see Boolean
none.
see Boolean

36 bits.
36 bits.
6 or 36 bits.
36 bits.

none.
1 to 36 bits.
o to 255 words.

automatic
optional

Test:
Move:

Special Cases of Operands

· 221 Negative numbers: •
.222 Zero:.
•

binary magnitude and sign.
+or -; mayor may not be
equal; depends on
instructions.

· 223 Operand size
determination:

.23

36 bits.
36 bits.
No.4. 410:144.

none.
none.

. 218 Table look-up: .
.219 Others

.22

35 bits + sign.

36. 18, 15, or 1 bits; variable 0 to 36 bits in multiply and divide; 6-bit
char in extended
performance set.

Instruction Formats

.231 Instruction structure:
.232 Instruction layout:

1 word.

Variable:

I Part

Operation Flag/Count Tag Address

I Size (bits)

12

3

6

15

Arithmetic and Data Transfer:

I Part

Operation Flagl Not Used tlTag Address

I Size (bits)

12

2

I

4

I3

15

I
I

Indexingt:

I Part
I Size (bits)

Operation Decrement Tag Address
3
15
3
15

I

• 233 Instruction parts (Contd.)
Name
Purpose
Count:. . • .
counts and variable length
operands.
Decrements:
index limits and modification values.
.234 Basic address structure: 1 + 0, sequential.
· 235 Literals
Arithmetic:. . • .
none.
Comparisons and
tests: . • . .
none.
Incrementing
modifiers: .
0 to 32,767.
.236 Directly addressed operands
.2361 Internal
Minimum Maximum
Volume
storage type size
size
accessible
Magnetic
entire
core:
1 bit
255 words t
storage.
Magnetic
disc:
1 word
18,600
entire
storage.
words t
t One word without extended performance
instructions.
:t 456 words without R/C option (see :042. 013).
· 2362 Increased address
none.
capacity: . . . • .
optional.
· 237 Address indexing: . .
1.
· 2371 Number of methods:
indexing (can be mUltiple
.2372 Names: . . . .
indexes. )
the contents of the indicated
· 2373 Indexing rule: .
index registers are
"ORed" together, then subtracted from the address
of the instruction to form
the effective instruction.
.2374 Index specification:.
each of the index bits specifies an index register.
.2375 Number of potential
indexers: • . .
3.
. 2376 Addresses which
can be indexed:
all.
.2378 Combined index
and step: . • .
via indirect addressing or
the EXC instruction.
• 238 Indirect addressing I A Bits
EXC Instruction
.2381 Recursive: .
no.
yes,
.2382 Designation: ••. 2 bits in
operation code EXC
the inwith or without
struction the IA bits.
.2383 Control:. • • • . . automatic, n -level; will not
one level stop until
only
another
instruction
other than
EXC is
encountered.

-=-=-_--l----==---L--=-=-__ I: 2384

L..:=~==.!...L-_--=--_---.L_ _

---.J

Indexing with
indirect addressing:

t Not used for most instructions.
t Optional.
· 233 Instruction parts
Name
Operation:
Flag:
Tag: •.
Address:

Purpose
operation code.
indirect addressing.
index register specification.
operand address.

© 1963

· 239 Stepping
• 2391 Specification of
increment: . .
.2392 Increment sign: .
. 2393 Size of increment:
. 2394 End value: . .': •
· 2395 Combined step and
test: . . . . . . .

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

yes; possible before and
after going to the indirect
address.
in stepping instruction.
positive .
o to 32,767.
value of increment.
yes.

3/63

411:051. 240
§

IBM 7044

.24

SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES

1.3

051.

.31

Special Processor Storage

.241 Category· of
storage

Number of Size in
bits
locations

Accumulator:
Address:
Countt:
Double Precision
Floating Point t:

1
1
1

38
15
4

1

27

Field t:
Index':
Instruction:

1
3
1

7
15
10

Multiplier-Quotient:

1

36 +

check
bit

Position:

1

Program Counter:

1

Sense Switch:
Shift Counter:

6
1

Storage:

1

Tag:

1

Instruction Sequencing:

.311 Nmnber of sequence
1 sequential.
control facilities:
.314 Special sub- sequence counters
Purpose
Nmnber
counts shifts (not
Shift Counter:.
accessible by program).
double precision
.315 Sequence control
add, subtract,
1 word.
step size:.
multiply and
.316 Accessibility to
divide.
memory protection.
store; store and change;
routines:
address modification.
trap; store in index and
hold instruction durchange.
ing execution.
.317 Permanent or optional
low order bits of
none.
modifier: .
product, Input-

..

Program usage
arithmetic unit.
address storage.
memory protection.

output, hold multiplier and quotient.
indirect address bit,
6
operation code,
character address
of instruction being executed.
address of next
15
instruction.
accept condition.
1
counter for multiply.
8
divide, inputoutput moves.
buffer with core
36 +
memory store.
parity
bit
index (s) to be used
3
to modify address.

• 32

Look-Ahead: .

.33

Interruption

.331 Possible causes
In -out units:

In -out controllers: •
Storage access:

t Requires memory protect option.

t Requires single and double precision floating point option.
'" Requires Extended Performance Instruction Set.

,242 Category
of storage
Accumulator:
Address:
Countt:
Double-Precision
Floating Point+:
Fieldt:
Index.:
Instruction:
Multiplier-Quotient
Position:
Program Counter:
Sense Switch:
Shift Counter:
Storage:
Tag:

Total num- Physical
ber of
form
IGlcations
1
register
register
1
1
register

Access
time,
/Lsec.

Cycle
time,
/Lsec.

0.42
0.42
0.42

2.50
2.50
2.50

register
register
register
register
register
register
register
switches
register
register
register

0.42
0.42
0.42
0.42
0.42
0.42
0.42
0.83
0.42
0.42
0.42

2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50

1
1
3
1
1
1
1
6
1
1

Processor errors:

Other:
.332 Control by routine
Individual control:
Method: •

2.50
2.50
2.50

Restriction:

t Requires memory protect option •

.f Requires single and double preCision floating point option.

t

Requires Extended Performance Instruction Set.

.333 Operator control:

I

3/63

I AUERBAC~

none.

parity error, end of file,
incomplete word on
tape, redundancy check,
1401 Attention, Direct
Data
adapter attention.
Tele-Processing.
free.
Memory Protection
violation.
read core parity.
write to core from inputoutput parity.
release Memory Protection
instruction.
set Memory Protection
instruction when Memory
Protection is in use.
floating point overflow or
underflow.
STR instruction.
add double precision
floating point operand
address.
Interval Timer Reset.
mask for input-output units.
interrupts activated by
instruction; some are disabled by the occurrence
of other interrupts.
floating point, disallowed
Memory Protect instruction, and STR traps
always occur.
can activate or deactivate
all traps.

411:051.334

CENTRAL PROCESSOR

§

05l.

· 334 Interrupt conditions
INTERRUPT (TRAP) INTERACTIONS
If this

action
Then occurs
the
trap
status is

Interval
Timer
Reset

Memory Parity Pre-inProtect
Error terrupt
Violation
Memory
Protect

Data
Channel

ICT
Instruction

Reset
Button

E
N
B

/

Instruction
T S T
R P
R
P M T

R
C
T

Memory
Protect
Violation
Parity
Error

Off

Off

Off

Pre - Interrupt
Memory
Protect
Interval
Timer
Overflow
Direct
Data

Off

Off
Off

Data
Channel

Direct
Data

Off
Off

Off
Off

Off

Off

In -out units:

Maximum separate
sets: . . . . . .

On

On

On

On

On

On
On
Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

own coding.

.4

PROCESSOR SPEEDS

own coding.
own coding.

.41

Instruction Times in Usec

* The program

counter is set to the Memory
Protect Interrupt Location.

© 1963

Add -subtract:
Multiply:
Divide: . . . .

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

On

On

On

On

On

the 7044 can be used to
communicate with an IBM
1401 system attached to
channel A; the instantaneous peak transmission speed is 87,827 characters per second. Each
of four 7904 Data Channels that can be attached
to a 7044 can have a
Direct Data Connection.
This option can be used
for on-line, "real-time"
data communication between other IBM computers that have this option (can include the 7090
and 7094). The instantaneous peak transmission speed can be as high
as 1, 000, 000 characters
per second.

Multi - sequencing:

own coding.

On

On

.35

.411 Fixed point
Add -subtract:
Multiply: . .
Divide: . . .
.412 Floating point

On

On
On

Memory Protect option restricts to or from writing
into an area except by an
input-output unit.
none.

On

On

Off

Off

On
On

On
On

· 335 Interruption process
Disabling interruption: The highest priority interrupt takes precedence except when the interrupt
locations are Memory
Protected. In the latter
case a "pre-interrupt"
causes an error indication, the program counter
is saved*, Memory Protection is disabled, and
then the interrupt that
caused the pre-interrupt
is executed.
Registers saved:.
program counter is saved.
• 336 Control methods
Determine cause:
first of two words contains
an error indication.
Enable interruption: ~ by instruction .
• 337 Interrupt interaction:
not all interrupts interact.
(see .. 334).
• 34 Multi -running
.341 Method of control: •
· 342 Maximum number of
programs: . . . •
• 343 Precedence rules: .
• 344 Program protection
Storage: . , . . •

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

On
Off

5.
30 avg.
50 avg.
single
precision
14 avg.
25 avg.
45 avg.

double
precision
21 avg.
78 avg.
120 avg.
3/63

411:051. 413
§

IBM 7044

05l.

.413 Additional allowance for
Indexing: . . . . . .
none.
Indirect addressing:
2.5
Re-complementing~
none.
.414 Control
Compare: • • . • . • ,. none.
Branch: • . • . • . . . 2.5
Compare and branch: 7.5
Without
With index
.415 Counter control
index option
option
15.
Step: • . • • •
5
17.5
Step and test:.
5
7.5
5
Test: •
.416 Edit: . .
none •
• 417 Convert:
none.
5 + 2.5 (bits - 6)
.418 Shift: . .
6

. 42

Processor Performance in /J sec
Fixed
Point

.421 For random access
c = a +b:
b =a +b:
Sum N items:
c = ab:
c = alb:
.422 For arrays of data
ci = ai +bf
bj = ai +bj :
Sum N items:
c = c +aibj:

t

*

*

46 20
46 20
38N ION
89 41

t

24
24
4N
35
55

*

t

41
41
78N
98
140

*

54 29
69 46
54 29
69 46
5ONI9N 57N 26N
92 59 153 129

Without optional index registers.
With optional index registers.

.423 Branch based on
comparison
Numeric data:
Alphabetic data:

3/63

t

15
15
5N
40
60

Floating Point
Double
Single
Precision Precision

Without
index option
25 + 44N
. 20 + 44N

With
index option

• 424 Switching
Unchecked: .
20
12.5
Checked: .•
35
15.0
List search:
27.5N
12.5
.425 Format control per
character
Unpack: . • . • .
. 95
21
Compose: . • • .
.486
104
.426 Table look-up per
comparison
For a match: ••
32.5N
15. ON
For least or greatest: 40N
17.5N
For interpolation
point: . • . • . .
32.5N
12.5N
.427 Bit indicators
Set bit in separate
location: • . . .
10.
Set bit in pattern:
10.
Test bit in separate
location: . . . . .
5•
Test bit in pattern:.
15.
Test AND for B bits: . 15.
Test OR for B bits: .
15.
.428 Moving: . . • . . . . . 5 + 5 'per word (word is 6
char).
.5

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

Error

Check or
Interlock

overflow:
Underflow:
Zero divisor:
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Protected address:*

check
check
check
not possible.
none.
none.
not possible.
check
check
check

12.5
12.5

* Optional feature.

Action
set indicator
interrupt.
set indicator.

interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.

411 :061.100

STANDARD

•

EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 7044
Console

CONSOLE

§ 061.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:.

.2

CONTROLS (Contd.)

.21

Power (Contd.)
Name

Console panel and desk, a
part of the central
processor.

Form

Normal Power
On:

switch

starts power on sequence for the CPU
and auxiliary equipment under control of the power distribution unit.

Normal Power
Off:

switch

starts power off sequence for the
CPU and auxiliary equipment under
control of the power distribution
unit.

.12. Description

The Console provides operator controls and displays
of the registers and indicators of the system. The
displays can be of use to the operator, the programmer, and to the customer engineer. Two notable
additions have been made on the 7040/7044 console
as contrasted with the rest of the 7000 scientific
processors. First, the rocker switches have been
replaced by arrays of pushbuttons representing
octal codes: a set of six pushbuttons for the Sense
Switches, an 8 by 12 pushbutton array for data entry,
and an 8 by 5 array for the location pushbuttons.
Secondly, location pushbuttons also have been added.
This permits entering data set up on the 8 by 12
pushbuttons array directly into storage as addressed
by the location pushbuttons. This replaces the more
cumbersome two-stage procedure of entering the
data into the MQ register, resetting the switches,
then storing the data. Visual checking is also made
easier.
Another convenience of this console is -the load
button, which starts loading data at location 100
rather than at location zero. This preserves the
data and program that may be held in the interrupt
locations which are located in the first octal 100
locations of the store. The other 700 and 7000 scientific systems always cause the low-order three
storage locations at least to be altered. The only
drawback is that the "Read-Select" instruction must
be set up on the data entry keys. This function is
performed automatically in the other systems.

Emergency
Power Off:

.22

pull-type when activated, all system power
switch
and all auxiliary power are
immediately removed.

Connections
Name

Form

Channel Bit
Density:

.23

switch

CONTROLS

. 21

Power
Name
Master Power
Connect:

Master Power
Disconnect:

Form

Name

• 24

Comment

switch

turns on power for on-off sequencing controls: activates power on
and power off switches: lights
when on.

Form

Comment

button

starts operation after a program stop
or after the CPU has been returned
from manual to automatic status.

Automatic/
Manual:

switch

stops computer when set to Manual
after it has completed the execution of the cutrent instructions unless an I/O device is in use. In this
case, the computer continues execution of instructions and remains
in automatic until all I/O devices
are disconnected from program
control. The storage clock does not
stop when the computer is in Manual
mode. The switch is lit when the
computer is in automatic •

Stepping
Form

Step Mode
Selector:

turns off power for on-off sequencing controls: deactivates power
on and power off switches: turns off
light in master power connect
switch.

© 1963

five density switches, one for each
possible data channel, are used to
select magnetic tape density pairs:
each switch has three positions
566/200, 800/200, and 800/556.

Stan:

Name
switch

Comment

Stops and Restarts

The console desk, which is located under the console panel, holds the output-only typewriter, and
provides adequate desk space.
.2

Comment

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

switch

Comment
controls the operation mode when
single or multiple step keys are depressed. The .three positions are
INSTRUCTION, CYCLE, and
PULSE. INSTRUCTION is the normal setting with the other two
positions serving primarily as
customer engineering aids.

3/63

411 :061.240

§

IBM 7044

061.

.24

.27

Single Step:

Multiple Step:

• 25

Clear:

Reset:

Load:

button

used only in manual mode to execute a program one instruction at
a time. When input-output instructions are executed, the computer operates in automatic until
all input-output devices are
disconnected.
used only in manual mode to execute a program at a slow speed.
The computer entelS automatic
for input-output (see single step).

I/O Interlock
Control:

switch

when on computer remains in manual whenever an I/O unit is selected; switch lights when it is on.

Continuous Enter
Instruction:

switch

Storage Clock:

switch

causes CPU to execute the instruction set up in the entry keys continuously if the CPU is placed in
automatic and the stan key is depressed; lights when on; au
engineering aid.
with the ON position, location
00005 is incremented 60 times
per second; incrementing stopped
by switching OFF position•

Form
button

button

Comment
stores zeros in all core storage 10cations and resets all CPU registelS; inoperative when the computer is in true manual status.
resets all registelS and 1ndicatolS
in the logic section of the
processing unit.

.3

DISPLAY

.31

Alanns
---Name
C B Thermal:

Form
light

Form
button

Comment
when depressed, a read select instruction is taken from the entry
keys. One record is read from the
indicared device (a tape unit, card
reader, or on-line 1401) into core
storage staning from location
00100. After the unit is disconnected, the computer takes its
next instructions from location
00101.

.32

Comment
on whenever a circuit breaker, fuse,
thermal, or airflow switch in the
basic system or auxiliary equipment opens •

Conditions
Name

Form

Master Stop:

light

Program Stop:

light

Program Stop:

light

Ready:

light

Channel in Use:

lights

Special
Name
Display Storage:

Form
button

Comment
displays contents of core storage
location addressed by the entry
keys; if storage clock is running,
the displayed word will nor be
maintained in the storage register. Operates only when the CPU
is in manual.

Enter
Storage:

button

copies word from the word bank of
the entry keys into core storage
location indicated by the location
bank of the entry keys; operates
only when CPU is in manual.

Enter
Instruction:

button

Sense:

switches

pressing this button executes the
instruction set up in the word
bank of the entry keys; CPU
must be in manual status.
six switches; settings may be
tested by the program.

Entry
Switches:

3/63

button

Comment

Comment

Loading
Name

.27

Form

Form

Resets
Name

. 26

Name

Stepping (Contd. )
Name

Special Contd.)

buttons

an 8 by 5 matriX used as a location
bank, and an 8 by 12 matrix used
as a word bank; data is placed in
the entry switches as octal
numbelS.

Redundancy Check:'lights
Input-Output
Check:

light

Position Register:

lights

Cycle Timer:

lights

Clock Pulses:

lights

Tally Counter:

lights

FPl and FP2:

lights

Comment
on whenever the master stop trigger
is on.
'
on whenever the master stop Jrigger
is on.
on whenever the computer executes
a halt instruction.
off when the computer is in automatic status and the continuous
interinstruction switch is on or
the I/O interlock is in manual;
otherwise, the light is on whenever the circnits have reached
their operating level.
five lights, one for each channel;
on whenever the corresponding
channel is in operation.
five lights, one for each channel;
on when a redundancy is detected.
the I/O check light is turned on by
an irregular input-output event.
five lights reflecting the contents of
the indirect address trigger and positions 14 to 17 of the instruction
being executed; positions 15 to 17
indicate which adapter is being
used on a select instruction and
the selected character on characterhandling instructions.
six lights which reflect the current
machine cycle; an engineering aid.
reflect the state of the timing ring:
an engineering aid.
indicate cycles of floating point
instructions; an engineering aid.
reflect the condition of floating
point triggelS; customer engineering aids.

411 :061.320

CONSOLE
§

061.

.32

.33

. 33

Name

Conditions (Contd. )
Name

Form

Parity Inhibit:

light

Trap Inhibit:

light

Channel Trap
Control:

light

Memory Protect:

light

AC Overflow:

light

Divide Check:

light

Parity Check:

light

Q Carry:

light

x Carry:

light

9 Carry:

light

9 overflow:

light

Comment
when on, parity traps are inhibited
as a result of a previous parity
trap.
when on, all traps are inhibited as
a result of a parity or interval
timer reset trap.
off when channel traps are inhibited
as a tesult of a trap, ICT instruction or a machine reset.
on whenever the machine is operating in the memory protect
mode.
on whenever any fixed-point or
shifting operation yields a carry
out of position 1 of the
accumulator.
on in fixed-point division if the
dividend is greater than or equal
to the divisor. In floating point,
the light is turned on if the magnitude of the fraction of the dividend is greater than or equal to
twice the magnitude of the divisor fraction.
on when the parity circuits detect
an error.
on whenever a carry out of adder
position Q occurs, an engineering aid.
on as a result of a carry out of
adder position 21; an engineering aid.
on whenever a carry occurs out of
adder position 9; an engineering
aid.
on whenever accumulator position
9 equals 1 in an accumulator left
shift or during a 9-carry in an
adder to accumulator operation;
an engineering aid.

Control Registers
Name
Instruction
Counter:

Form

Control Registers (Contd.)
Form

Instruction:

lights

Shift Counter:

lights

Tag:

lights

Addtess:

lights

Storage:

lights

Accumulator:

lights

MQ

lights

Comment
nine lights which display the contents of the instruction register.
eight lights which display the cantents of the shift counter.
three lights which display the
contents of the tag register.
fifteen lights which display the
contents of the address counter.
thirty-seven lights which display
the storage Jegister sign, bits
1-35, and parity.
thirty-eight lights which display
the accumulator sign, Q-bit,
P-bit, and positions 1 to 35.
thirty seven lights displaying the
MQ sign, positions 1 to 35 and
parity.

.4

ENTRY OF DATA

. 41

Into

.42

Into Storage:

.5

CONVENIENCE

.51

Communication:

for engineers •

.52

Clock:

optional.

.53

Desk Space:

40 x 20 inches.

.54

View:.

Re~sters:

.

instruction may be entered
when the machine is in
manual. The desired
instruction is set up in the
entry switches and the
enter instruction button
pushed.
when the machine is in
manual, one core storage
location may be written
into by pressing the enter
storage button. The word
and the desired location
are obtained by setting the
entry SWitches.

Comment

lights

fifteen lights which reflect the
contents of the instruction

Index A, B, and C: lights

three sets of 15 lights, each of
which displays the contents of
the index registers.

counter.

© 1963

.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

when operator is at the console, all the equipment
can be easily seen if it is
conveniently placed.

3/63

411 :071.100

.STAIIOARD
EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 7044
Input-Output
CR
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READ-PUNCH (READER)

§

071.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity :

.12

Card Read-Punch,
(Reader only).
1402 Model II.

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the
head: .
.212 Reservoirs:

clutch driven rollers.
none .

. 22

While the 1402 consists of a card reader and punch
housed in the same cabinet, the two units are completely independent of one another from the user's
viewpoint and are covered in separate sections of
this report.

.221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system: .
.223 Common system:

none.
brush .
no.

.23

Multiple copies:

none.

The reader reads standard 80-column cards at a
peak speed of 800 cards per minute. Conversion
from the card column code to internal BCD code is
automatic. A hole-count check is made on each
column at a second reading station, and the bit configuration of each character is checked for validity
as it is transferred into core storage. A hopper
with a 3, ODD-card capacity and stacker with 1,000card capacity can be loaded and unloaded without
stopping the reader.

.24

Arrangement of Heads

Sensing and Recording Systems

Use of station:
Stacks: .
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

reading.
1.
80.
I row at a time.

Use of station:
Distance: .
Stacks: .
Heads/ s,tack:
Method 0..' use:

checking.
1 card.
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:
.312 Phenomenon:
.32

.321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:

Read and Punch Column Binary, #6025: This option
can only be used on a 1414 IV Synchronizer. It uses
two of the six available 80-character buffers; one
for the read section and one for the punch. No
validity checking is possible but parity bits are
used for Central Processor - 1414 data transfers.
It is activated whenever 7 and 9 punches occur in
column 1 of a card.

.324 Track use
Data: .
Total:.
.325 Row use
Data: .

Availability:
First Delivery:

.33

Coding:

.34

Format Compatibility

16 months, as of
January, 1962.
September, 1960

© 1963

. 35

standard 80-column cards
(51-column cards with
optional IF).
rectangular holes.

Positional Arrangement

Optional Features

Interchangeable Feed, #4051: This option permits
the reading of either 80- or 51-column cards by
interchanging hardware, and reduces stacker
capacity to 800 cards.

.14

PHYSICAL FORM

Description:

The 1402 can be connected only to data channel A
via a 1414 III or IV Synchronizer. The channel,
i.·e., the central processor, is delayed only for the
time of the actual data transfer, about 0.085 millisecond. The 1414 acts as a buffer which is
always loaded with the next card to be read. The
data that is read contains 80 characters which are
stored 6 characters to a word; the first 78 are stored in 13 words, and the last 2 characters are
stored in the high order 12 bits of the fourteenth
word. The remainder of the fourteenth word is set
to zero. If less than 14 words are requested in
the read instruction, the last part of the card is
ignored.

.13

.2

12 rows at standard
spacing.
80 columns of standard
spacing.
80.
80.
12.
column code as in Table 3,
or binary pattern of holes
in each column.

Other device or system

Code translation

All devices using std.
80-column cards:

not required.

Physical Dimensions:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

standard 80-c61umn cards .

3/63

411 :071.400

IBM 7044

§071.

.6

PERFORMANCE

.4

CONTROLLER

.61

Conditions

. 41

Identity:

.62

SEeeds

.42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:
. 422 Off-line:
. 43

Channel A only.
#1038 Adapter.
1414 ill or IV Synchronizer.

1.
none.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions:
1622 read-punch cannot
be connected.
.44

.623 Overhead:
. 624 Effective speeds:
.63

none .
none.
automatic .

. 51

Blocks

processing unit.
read BCD read column
binary
0.085
0.155

1 card .

. 521
. 522
. 523
.524
. 525
.526

Input:
Output:
Stepping:
Skipping:
Marking:
Searching:

1 card forward .
none .
none.
none .
none.
none.

.53

Code Translation:

automatic by 1414
Synchronizer.

.54

Format Control:

none.

.55

Control Operations
no.
yes.
no.
no.
no.
with #6025 Read-Punch
column binary.
no.

Testable Conditions
Disabled:. . . .
Busy device:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Exhausted: .
Full stacker: . . . . .

0.11

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments
Adjustment

.72

fixed.

InEut- OutEut 0Eerations

Unload:.

Msec per card:
or
Percentage: .

0.21

Method

Card width:

. 52

Disable:
Request interrupt: .
Offset card:
Select stacker:
Select format:
Select code:

read time in m sec.
0.085 (BCD), 0.155
(column binary) .
read time .
800 cards/min .

1 word.

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation
Input: .

800 cards/min, all cases .

Demands on System
Component: .
Condition:

1 card of 80 characters.
core storage .

.5

3/63

.621 Nominal or peak
speed:
. 622 Important parameters
Name:
Value:

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:
.442 Input- output areas:
. 443 Input- output area
access: .
. 444 Input-output area
lockout: .
. 445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization:

.56

. . . none •

yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes.

.73

interchange of hardware .

Other Controls
Function

Form

Comment

Load:
Check reset:

key
key

starts loading cards .
resets read error
indicators .

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage

Capacity

Hopper: . . . . .
Stackers:
.732 Replenishment time: .
. 733 Adjustment time
(80- to 51-column
cards): . . . . .
.734 Optimum reloading
period: .
.8

3,000 cards.
I, 000 cards.
0.25 to 0.50 minute .
10 to 15 minutes.
1. 25 minutes.

ERRORS! CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Feed jam:
Stacker full:

hole count
cannot occur.
check
check
none.
interl~ck
check
check

Action
indicator and alarm.
indicator and alarm.
indicator.
wait or indicator.
stop and indicator.
stop and indicator.

411:072.100

II
•

STANDARD

EDP
WORTS

IBM 7044
Input-Output
CP
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READ-PUNCH (PUNCH)

g

.24

W2.

•1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

• 12

Description

Card Read-Punch,
(punch only).
1402 Model n.

Housed in the same cabinet as the card reader, this
unit punches standard 80-column cards at a peak
speed of 250 cards per minute. Conversion from
internal BCD representation to the column card code
is automatic. A reading station makes a hole-count
check on each column. The 1, 200-card feed hopper
and three 1, ODD-card stackers can be loaded and
unloaded without stopping the punch.
The 1402 can be connected only to data channel A
via a 1414 III or IV Synchronizer. The channel,
i.e., the central processor, is used for only the
time for the actual data transfer of about 0.085
millisecond. If fewer than 80 characters are transferred to the 1414, BCD blanks or binary zeros are
punched depending on the selected mode. The 1414
is the buffer for the punch. The data that is to be
punched is contained in 80 characters which are
stored 6 characters to a word; the first 78 are
stored in 13 words, and the last 2 characters are
stored in the high order 12 bits of the fourteenth
word. The remainder of the fourteenth word is
ignored.
Optional Features

Availability:

16 months, as of January,
1962.

.14

First Delivery: •

September, 1960.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

_21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs:
•
. 22

clutch driven rollers
none.

Sensing and Recording Systems
die punches.
brush.
no •

. 23

none.

Multiple Copies:

© 1963

punching .
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

checking.
1 card .
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:
.312 Phenomenon:
.32

standard 80-co1umn cards.
rectangular holes.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:
• 322 Parallel by:
•324 Track use
Data:
Total:
• 325 Row use
Data:
.33

Coding:

.34

Format Compatibility
Other device or system
All devices using
standard 80-column cards: •

.35

Physical Dimensions:

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

.42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
.43

.221 Recording system:
.222 Sensing system:
• 223 Common system:

Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

.3

Read and Punch Column Binary, #6025: This option
can only be usedona 1414 IV Synchronizer. It uses
2 of the 6 available 80 character buffers; 1 for the
read section and 1 for the punch. Parity bits are
used for central process or-1414 data transfers.
.13

Arrangement of Heads

12 rows at standard spacing •
80 columns at standard
spacing .
80.
80 .
12.
BCD or binary pattern of
holes in each column.

Code translation

not required.
standard 80-column cards.

Channel A only.
#1038 Adapter.
1414 III or IV Synchronizer.

1.
none .

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions:
none .

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:072.440
§

IBM 7044
.62

CJ72.

• 44

Speeds

.621 Nominal or peak speed: 250 cardS/min, (all cases) •
.622 Important parameters

Data Transfer Control
1 card of 80 columns •
Core storage •

• 441 Size of load:
•442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access:
•444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization:

each word.
no.
none.
automatic.

.5

PROGRAM F ACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

Value

Name
Load buffer BCD:
Load buffer binary:
.623 Overhead:
.624 Effective speeds:

.·· .

.63

Demands on S1stem
Condition

Coml!0nent
Processing Unit:

1 card.

•511 Size of block: .
.512 Block demarcation
Output:

. fixed.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:

.72

Other Controls

Input-Output Operations

• 521
. 522
.523
•524
•525
.526

Input:
Output:
Stepping:
Skipping:
Marking:
Searching:

none.
1 card forward .
none •
none •
none.
none.

.53

Code Translation: •

automatic, by processor.

.73

.54

Format Control:

none •

.731 Volumes handled

• 55

Control Operations

.56

Disable:
•
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
••
End of medium marks:
Hopper empty:
Stacker full: • •
•6

PERFORMANCE

•61

Conditions

3/63

Function

Form

no.
yes.
no.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes.

• • . none.

0.085

or

0.03

0.155

or

0.06

Check reset:

key

Comment
resets punch error ind Icators

Loading and Unloading

Capacity

·· · .

Hopper:
Stackers:
.732 Replenishment time:
.734 Optimum reloading
period: .

. ·

.8

Testable Conditions

.2! Percentage

. . . . none •

Storage
no.
yes.
no.
yes, one of 3.
no.
BCD or column binary •
no.

msec. I!er ca rd

Punching
BCD
punching
binary

.52

Disabled:
Request interrupt:
Offset card:
Select stacker:
Select format:
Select code:
Unload: • • •

0,085 msec.
0.155 msec •
load buffer time.
250 cardS/min.

1,200 cards
1, 000 cards each.
0.25 to 0.50 minute.
Punch does not need to be
stopped.
4.0 minutes.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Errors

Check or
Interlock

Recording:
Output block size:
lnva lid code:
Exha usted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Feed jam:
Stacker full:

hole count
fixed.
check
check
noue.
interlock
check
check

Action
indicator and alarm.
indicator and alarm.
stop and indicator.
wait or indicator.
stop and ind icator•
stop and indicator •

.~~D

411:073.100

EDP

•

REPORTS

IBM 7044
Input-Output
Card Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READ PUNCH (READER)
§

073.

.1

GENERAL

.ll

Identity:

.12

Card Read -Punch.
(Reader only).
1622.

Description

.13

Availability: • •

3 to 4 months •

• 14

First Delivery:

June, 1961.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head:
. 212 Reservoirs:

The Model 1622 Card Read-Punch can proVide
punched card input and output for channel A only on
the 7044 system. The reader and punch feed units
are separate and functionally independent. They
contain their own switches, lights, checking circuits, and buffer storage. Nominal reading speed
is 250 cards per minute, and almost all of card
reading time is available for internal processing
by the computer. Card hoppers have a capacity of
1,200 cards.

• 22

none in Reader .
brush •
no.

.23

Multiple Copies:

none.

.24

Arrangement of Heads

80.
1 row at a time •

Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

checking.
1 card.
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:
.312 Phenomenon: • •
.32

sensing.

1.

standard 80-column cards.
rectangular punched holes.

Positional Arrangement

• 324 Track use:
• 325 Row· use:

Read Octal/Binary, M0l377: This feature permits
the 1622 to read column binary images from cards.
It consists of an 80-character buffer plus associated controls. A 7 -9 punch in column one of a
card causes this feature to be activated.

.33

Coding:

BCD or binary •

.34

Format
Compatibility:

all devices using standard

Read 800 CPM, M03473: This feature permits the
1622 to read cards as fast as a 1402 reader.

.35

Physical Dimensions:

Optional Features

'-

Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: •
Method of use:

12 rows at standard
spacing •
80 columns at standard
spacing •
all for data •
all for data.

The Model 1622 Card Read-Punch may also be used
with the IDM 1620 I and II systems.

\

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:
• 222 Sensing system:
. 223 Common system:

When a 1622 is attached to a 7044 system, no 1414
III, IV, or V Synchronizer may be connected. As a
result this eliminates the possible use of 1403 or
1404 printers with the system. It also eliminates
. the possibility of attaching communications equipment to channel A. Communications equipment,
however, may be attached to a 1414 VI Synchronizer via a 7904 Data Channel (B through E).
The reader has an 80-character buffer which
stores the data in BCD code from one card. A read
command from the processor transfers the buffer
contents into core storage in O. 085 millisecond and
initiates the refilling of the buffer from the next
card. A second sensing station reads each card
and compares its data to the buffer contents. If an
error is detected, card feeding stops. In addition,
the 7044 checks parity of data received from the
buffer; an error causes an indicator to be set
which may be used by the program to transfer to
error-handling subroutines.

roller •
none.

.321 Serial by:

•

. 322 Parallel by:

80-column cards.

.4

CONTROLLER

Read 500 CPM, M03474: Doubling of the normal
card reading speed of the 1622 is provided by this
feature.

.41
.42

Identity:
Connection to System:

File Feed, M00711: This feature permits placing
as many as 3, 000 cards in the hopper.

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:

© 1963

by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

standard 80-column cards.

1622 Adapter #1064.
1.
none.

3/63

411:073.430
§

IBM 7044

073.

.43

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions:

Read

. 62

Speeds

or V
can not be
system.

.621 Nominal or peak
speed:
.622 Important parameters
Buffer unload time
BCD:
Binary:
. 623 Overhead:
.624 Effective speeds:

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: One 1622 Card
Punch.
.432 Restrictions:
A 1414 ill, IV,
Synchronizer
used with the
.44

.6

Data Transfer Control

.

.441 Size of load:
.442 Input-output areas:
• 443 Input-output area
access:
input-output
lockout:
.445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization:

80 columns.
core storage •

• . • none .

no.
no •
automatic,

.63

Demands on System
Component

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.52

.54

Format Control
Control:
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Insert spaces:
Section sizes:

.55

The smaller of the word
count or 80 columns.

Select code:

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:

.72

Other Controls

3/63

0.03
0.06

program.
2 (BCD or binary).
no.

none.

Form

Restore ready status:

Remove ready status
a nd stop rea der:
Read 1 card into storage and refill buffer:

.73

Comment

momentary
switch

Start key: does not
actua lly start
reader •

momentary
switch

Stop key: computer
stops at next read
command.

momentary
switch

Load key.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage

Capacity

no;
yes.

no.
yes.
no.
no.
yes (BCD or column
binary).
see format.

Hopper:
Stacker:
•732 Replenishment
time:

1, 200 cards.
1, 000 cards •

·

.733 Adjustment time:
.734 Optimum reloading
period:
.8

0.5 minute; device does
not need to be stopped.
none.
4.8 minutes.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND -!\CTION
Check or Interlock

Reading:

yes.
yes.
no.
yes,
yes (last card read),
yes.

Input area overflow:
Inva lid code:
Exha usted med ium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Misfeed or ja m:

parity and data
comparison with
check station
none.
parity check only.
interlock
see rea ding errors.,
interlock
interlock

yes.

Dispatch of data:

parity check at 7044

Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device: • . •
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
Hopper empty: • •
Stacker full: . • •
Read data transfer
error:

·

Function

Error
.56

0.085
0.115

automatic.

Control Operations
Disable:
Request interrupt: .
Offset card:
Select stacker:
Select format:

Percentage

80 columns.

.521 Input: . . • . . • • • . read 80 char from reader
buffer into core storage
and initiate reading of 1
card.
• 522 Output:
see Section :074.
.523 Stepping:
none.
.524 Skipping:
none .
. 525 Marking:
none.
.526 Searching:
none.
Code Translation:

msec per card

Processor
BCD:
Binary:

Input-Output Operations

.53

0.085 msec.
0.155 msec •
buffer load time.
25.0 cards/minute if processing time per card
does not exceed approximately 237 msec.

each word,

.5

.511 Size of block:
.512 mock demarcation
Input:

250 cards/minute.

Action
stop, set indicator:
terminate ready
status.
set alarm, indicator.
wait, or indicator.
ready status removed,
set indicator.
let alarm, indicator.

411:074.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 7044
Input-Output
Card Punch
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READ PUNCH (PUNCH)

§

074.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

.12

Description

Card Read Punch.
(Punch only).
1622.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs:
.22

The Model 1622 Card Read-Punch can provide
punched card input and output for channel A only on
the 7044 system. The reader and punch feeds are
separate and functionally independent, and contain
their own switches, lights, checking circuits, and
buffer storage. Nominal punching speed is 125
cards per minute, and almost all of card punching
time is available for internal processing by the
computer. Card hoppers have a capacity of 1,200
cards.

The data is punched, the punch buffer contents are
parity checked, and the card is read at a checking
station for agreement with the punch buffer contents.
Failure of the parity check or checking station comparison halts the punch and sets an indicator. Also
the program can select a stacker.
The Model 1622 Card Read-Punch may also be used
with the IBM 1620 I and n systems.

die punches .
brush.
no.

.23

Multiple Copies:

none.

.24

Arrangement of Heads

Punch 250 CPM, M99145: This feature doubles the
normal punching speed of the unit making it as fast
as the 1402 punch.
. 13

Availability:

3 to 4 months.

.14

First Delivery:

June, 1961.

© 1963

Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:

80.
1 row at a time.

Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Head/ stack:
Method of use:

checking.
?
1.
80.
1 row at a time.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium: .
•
. 312 Phenomenon: ••
.32

recording.

1.

standard 80-column cards •
rectangular punched holes.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:

•

. 324 Track use:
• 325 Row use:

12 rows at standard
spacing •
80 columns at standard
spacing .
all for data •
all for data.

.33

Coding:

BCD and Binary .

.34

Format Compatibility: . all devices using standard
80-column cards.

.35

Physical Dimensions:

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

.42

Connection to System

• 322 Parallel by:

Optional Features
Punch Octal/Binary, M0l376: Permits the 1622 to
punch column binary images into cards. The feature consists of an 80-character buffer plus associated controls.

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system:

When a 1622 is attached to a 7044 system, no 1414
IIT,IV, V Synchronizer may be attached. This eliminates the use of a 1403 or 1404 printer with the systern. It also eliminates the possibility of attaching
communication equipment on Channel A although it
can be attached to a 1414 VI Synchronizer via a 7904
Data Channel (B through E).
The punch has an 80-character buffer which stores
the data for one card. A punch command from the
processor transfers data for one card to the buffer
in 0.085 milliseconds. The processor checks parity
of the data sent to the punch buffer and sets a testable indicator if an error occurs, and inhibits
punching of the card.

rollers .
none.

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

standard 80-column cards.

1622 Adapter #1046.

1.
none.

3/63

411:074.430

IBM 7044

074.
.43

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 1 1622 Card Read Poncho
.432 Restrictions: . • • • • a 1414 nI, IV, or V Synchronizer cannot be used
with the system.
.44

Data Transfer Control

..

.441 Size of load:
. 442 Input-output areas:
•443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control:
•446 Synchronization:

80 card columns.
core storage .
each word.

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

• 511 Size of block: •
•512 Block demarcation
Output:
.52

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions:

•62

Speeds

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments:

.72

Other Controls

the smaller or the word
count or 80 card columns.

.53

Code Translation:

automatic.

.54

Format Control
program selection of mode.
2 BCD or binary.
no.
rightmost columns are
left blank if count is 13 or
less.
see insert spaces.

Comment

Stop punch unit on
2-position
1622 error:
switch
Remove ready status
and stop punch:
momentary
switch

start key; does
not actually
start punch.
Stop/N-Stop
switch.
stop key.

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper:
Stacker:
.732 Replenishment time:
.733 Adjustment time: •
.734 Optimum reloading
period:

Capacity
1, 200 cards.
, 1,000 cards.
0.5 minutes; unit does not
need to be stopped.
none.
9.6 mins.

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

.8
Control Operations
Disable:
Request interrupt:
Offset card:
Select stacker:
Select format:
Select code:

Error

no.
no.
no.
yes.
yes, BCD or binary.
see format.

Data tta nsmission:
Recotding:

Check or
Interlock
parity check at 1620
parity check on
buffer
check station comparison with
buffer

Testable Conditions
.Disabled:
Busy device: • •
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
Hopper empty: . •
Stacker full: • • •
Write data transfer
error:

yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes.
yes.

Output block size:
Inva lid code:
Exhausted medium:
Impetfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Misfeed at ja m:

yes.
I

3/63

Form

Restore ready status: momentary
switch

.73

.56

0.02
0.03

• • . • none •

Function

Stepping:
Skipping:
Marking:
Searching.:

.55

0.085
0.155

80 card columns •

.523
.524
•525
•526

Section sizes:

msec per card Percentage

Processor BCD punching:
Binary punching:

see Section :073.
transfer 80 columns from
core storage to punch
buffer and initiate punching of 1 card.
none.
none •
none •
none.

Control:
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Insert spaces:

Demands on System
Component

Input-Output Operations

.521 Input:
.522 Output:

. • • none •

.621 Nominal or peak speed: 125 cards/miilute.
.622 Important parameters
Buffer load time:
BCD 0.085 msec •
binary 0.155 msec •
•623 Overhead: . • •
buffer load time •
• 624 Effective speeds:
125 cards/minute if processing time per card does
not exceed approximately
477 msec.
.63

no.
no •
automatic.

.5

.6

$J

A-U-ER-SA-CH----:-'

r-I

none.
parity check only.
interlock
see recording errors.
interlock
interlock

Action
set indicator and alarm.
halt before punching if
Stop/N-Stop switch on
Stop.
send card to error
stacker. Stop, set
alarm if Stop IN-Stop
switch aD Stop •

ready status removed.
wait or indicator.
ready status removed.
set indicator.

411:075.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

R£PORTS

IBM 7044

Input-Output
PTR
INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER

§

.22

075.

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

.12

Description:

Paper Tape Reader.
1011.

The 1011 Paper Tape Reader can be connected to a
7044 system through data channel A via a 1414 IV
or V Synchronizer, or on any of the 7904 Data
Channels via a 1414 VI Synchronizer only. Only
one 1011 can be attached to each 1414.
The paper-tape reader can accommodate any 5-,
6-, 7-, or 8-track tape, chad or chadless (in good
condition). The tape width can be either 11/16,
7/8 or 1 inch. Data can be read from reels,
center-feed rolls, or strips, at a peak speed of
500 characters-per-second. Since the maximum
block size is 80 characters (restricted by the 1414
buffer size), the effective :speed is about 467
characters-per-second.
The 1011 Paper Tape Reader uses a plugboard to
transmit its output to the 1414. The plugboard
permits the rearrangement of up to four tracks,
character deletion, and code translation. The inputs from the photoelectric heads are connected
from tape channel hubs to the decoder network.
The 67 possible outputs of the decoder and a parity
error output can be wired to any of the 64 encoder
inputs permitting any 6-bit code to be generated.
The output of the encoder, which is sent to the
1414 Synchronizer, is the 1400 series 6-bit BCD
code plus an odd parity bit. An end-of-record input is also available which causes reading to terminate and the remainder of the 80-character block to
be filled by a character selected from the encoder.
When 5-channel Teletype code is used, a switch
can be wired which causes the letter and figure
shift character to be suppressed and to set the
decoder to the correct shift. The output of the
decoder then contains all 58 telegraphic codes, including blank.
. 13

Availability:

16 months, as of
January, 1962.

.14

First Delivery:

June, 1961.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head:
. 212 Reservoirs
Number:
Form:
Capacity:
. 213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive:

Sensing and Recording Systems

. 222 Sensing system: .

photoelectric .

.23

Multiple Copies:

none .

.24

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks: .
Heads/stack
Method of use:

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:
.312 PhenOmenOl1.:
.32

paper tape.
punched holes (chad or
chad1ess type).

Positional Arl'-angement

. 321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:
.324 Track use
Data: .
Redundancy check:
Timing: .
Control signals:
Unused:
Total:.
.325 Row use
Data: .
Redundancy check:
Timing: .
Control signals:
Unused:
Gap: (if calibrated)
.33

Coding:.

.34

Format Compatibility

1 to N rows at 10 per inch .
5 to 8 tracks at standard
spacing.
6 or 5.
lor O.
1 (sprocket track).
lor O.

O.
8 to 5 (plus sprocket track).
variable.

O.
O.
1 (end-or-record; optional).

O.
2.
normally 5-track telegraphic or 8-track IBM
coding; most 5, 6, 7,
or 8-track codes can be
translated by plugboard
wiring to any 6- bit code .

Other device or system Code translation
Most devices using
5, 6, 7, or 8-track
paper tape:

plugboard wiring .

Physical Dimensions

sprocket drive .

. 35

2.
swinging arm.
about 2 feet.
motor.
motor.

.351 Over-all width:
.352 Length
Strip: .
Roll (inside feeding):
Reel (outside feeding):.

© 1963

reading.
1.
8.
reads 1 row at a time.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

11/16, 7/8, or 1 inch.
20 to 240 inches.
5 to 400 feet .
5 to 1, 000 feet .
3/63

411:075.400
§

IBM 7044
.55

075.

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: •

.42

Connection to System

• 43

. 56

Connection to Device
.1.
requires one of the six
1414 Synchronizer
80 character buffers.

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:

1 to N characters, where
N is limited by available
core storage.
· core storage.

. 442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout: •
• 445 Table control: .
.446 Synchronization: .

· each word.

.

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: .

Testable Conditions

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions:

. 62

Sj2eeds

yes.
yes.
yes.

. none .

50. 0 inches/sec.

Tape speed: .
Start time (to full
speed):

2.5 msec average,
9.0 msec max.
1.5 rows average, 2.0
rows max.

Stop distance:
.623 Buffer unload time
Overhead: .
.624 Effective speeds:

· 1 to 80 characters.

0.085 msec/block
500 N/ (N + 4) char/sec.,
where N = number of
char/block.

· end-of-record character
on tape, or physical end
of tape, or80characters.
.63

.52

Inj2ut- Outj2ut Oj2erations

• 521
. 522
. 523
• 524
. 526

Input:
Output: .
Stepping:
Skipping:
Searching:

•
·
·
·

.53

Code Translation:

· plugboard wiring.

.54

Format Control

1 block forward .
none .
none.
none .
none.

Demands on System
Processing Unit.
buffer unloading .
0.085.

Component:
Condition:
Msec per block: .
or
Percentage: .

0.05 .

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments
Adjustments

Control:
• plugboard.
Format alternatives: . · undefined.
Rearrangement: .
• no.
Suppress zeros: .
· yes.
Insert point:
· no.
Insert spaces: .
· no.
Section sizes: .
· no.
Omit unwanted
characters:
· yes.
Asign several tape codes
to one character: •
. yes.

Tape width:
Tape code:

.72

Reset alarm circuits:
Reel/strip selector: .

I AUERBAC~.L@

Method
change reels.
change plugboard panels.

Other Controls
Function

.---_ _ _ A

3/63

yes.
yes.
no.
yes.

,621 Nominal or peak
500 char/sec .
speed:
.622 Important parameters
Value
Name

· no .
• none.
• automatic.

.5

no.
yes.
no.
no.
no.
no .

Disabled: .
Busy device:
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller: .
End of medium
marks:
Exhausted:
Buffer being filled:

• 1 per 1414 Synchronizer.
· none.

.431 Devices per
Controller:
.432 Restrictions:

.44

Disable:
Request interrupt: •
Select format:
Select code:.
Rewind:
Unload:

.1414 IV, V, or VI
Synchronizer
# 5514 Paper Tape
Reader Adapter.

• 421 On-line:
Off-line:

Control Oj2erations

Form
key.
2-position switch.

411:075.730

INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER

§

.8

075.

.73

Error

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Supply & take-up
reels: • . . . .
Center-roll feed:
. 732 Replenishment time: .
. 733 Adjustment time: .
. 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . .

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

Capacity
1,000 feet.
400 feet.
0.3 to 0.5 min. for strips .
1.0 to 2.0 min. for reels.
2.0 to 3.0 min .
4.0 min.

© 1963

Check or Interlock

Reading:
Input area overflow:
InvaUd code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:

parity check·
none.
plugboard wiring
check
none.
interlock

Excessive stop
distance:
Photocell failure:

check
check

Action
set indicata:.
as wired.
stop, set indicator.
wait. or set
indicator.
set indicator.
stop; alarm•

• No parity check on 5-track tape.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:081. 100

.STANDIRD
EDP

_

R£PORTS

IBM 7044
Input-Output
1403 PR
INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTER

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Description

Printer.
1403, Models 1 and 2.
PRo

The 1403. i~ a line printer with horizontal-chain
printing mechanism, tape-controlled carriage,
and feeding and stacking system for continuous
forms. Each character is printed as it is positioned opposite a magnet-driven ~ammer that presses
the form against the moving chain at the correct
printing position. Peak speed is 600 lines per
minute at single spacing and 480 lines per minute
at an average spacing of one inch. Modell has
100 printing positions and Model 2 has 132; they
are identical in all other respects. The Model 2
Printer requires the additional Synchronizer Storage option (see below) for the 1414.
The 1403 can only be ,connected to data channel A
via a 1414 III or IV Synchronizer. The chalinel,
i. e., the central processor, is used for only the
time for the actual data transfer of about 0.100 or
0.125 millisecond for models 1 and 2 respectively.
The 1414 acts as a buffer between the processor
and the printer. The data to be printed consists of
either 100 or 132 characters which are stored 6
characters to a word. Only the first 100 (or 132)
are transferred to the buffer if the word count in
the print instruction is greater than 16 (or 22).
When the word count is smaller, the remainder of
the line to be printed is filled with blanks.
Optional Features

.13

Availability:

.14

First Delivery:

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head:

sprocket drive push and
pull, paper punched on
both sides.

.212 Reservoirs:

none.

.22

.222 Sensing system: .
• 223 Common system:
. 23

.24

yes, with special ribbon.
yes.

printing.
1.
100 or 132.
1 line at a time.

Range of Symbols
Standard Set
Numerals:
Letters:
SpeCial:
Alternatives:
FORTRAN set:
Basic COBOL set:
Total:

Numerical Print Feature, #5381: Option #4740 is
also required for this feature which permits printing the characters 0 through 9, plus 6 special
characters, atarate of 1285 lines per minute.
Two sets of numerical type are available (#9485
and #9484).

Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
FORTRAN set:
Req. COBOL set:
Total:

Special Print Chain, #5530: Several special character sets and fonts are available. This feature
requires option #4740.

© 1963

6.

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks: .
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

.25

magnet-driven hammer
presses form against
moving horizontal chain.
echo check on hammer
magnet .
no .

Multiple Copies

.231" Maximum number
Interleaved carbon:
.232 Types of master
Multilith:
Spirit:

Interchangeable Chain Cartridge Adapter, #4740:
This option can be added to a 1403 if more than
one type font or the numeric font is required.

I\

Sensing and Recording Systems

.221 Recording system:

Additional Synchronizer Storage Printer #7680:
This option must be added to a 1414 III or IV Synchronizer when a 1403 II is used.

Selective Tape Listing Feature, #6411: Eight
1.5-inch or four 3. I-inch tapes can be printed and
spaced separately. A 1403 Model II is required to
make full use of this option.

September, 1960.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

10 0-9.
26 A-Z.
12 &, 0 - $. * / %# @ ,. •
by special request.
alternative Print Set F.
no.
48 and blank.
Numeric Set {NP)
10 0-9.

O.

6 $ . , * - D·
no.
no.
16 and blank.

3/63

411:081.311

§

IBM 7044

081.

.311 Medium:
.312 Phenomenon:
.32

Positional Arran&!,:ment

. 321 Serial by:.
.322 Parallel by: .
.324 Track use
Data: .
Total:
.325 Row use
Data: .
.33

Format

.35

Physical Dimensions

ComE!!:tibili~:

.351 Over-all width:
. 352 Length:
Forms:

. 353 Maximum margins:
Left: ,
Right, Model 1 ~
Model 2:
.4

CONTROLLER

. 41

Identity:

.42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:

.44

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Output:

.523 Stepping:
100 or 132.
100 or 132.
all.

.524 Skipping: .

.525 Marking: .
. 526 Searching:

none.
.53

Code Translation:

.54

Format Control

3.50 to 18.75 in. by
vernier.
1 to 22.0 by 1/6 inch at
6 lines/inch.
1 to 16.5 by 1/8 inch at
8 lines/inch.
1 to 17. a inches (recommended maximum for
proper stacking).
continuous roll or fold.
3.0 inch.
6.2 inch.
3.0 inch.

Control:
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement: .
Suppress zeros: .
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Section sizes: .
.55

1.

none.

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions
I:

1.

II:

none.

.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input- output area
access: .
. 444 Input- output area
lockout: .
.445 Table control:
. 446 Synchronization:

1 line of 100 or 132 characters in multiples of 6 .
core storage

1lI:
IV:

each word.
no.
none.
automatic.

.62

·none.
1 line forward with single
step.
step 1, 2, or S lines as
separate operation, or as
combined "print thell·
step" .
skip to one of 12 channels
on paper tape loop; may
be combined in "print
then skip".
none .
none .
automatic, by processor.

program.
none .
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.

no .
yes.
no.
no.

Testable Conditions
Disabled: .
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Exhausted:

#1038 Adapter .
1414 1lI or IV
Synchronizer.

fixed.

Control Operations
Disable:
Request interrupt: .
Select format:.
Select code:

.56

100 or 132 char per line.

Inl2ut-OutEut Operations

.521 Input:.
.522 Output: .

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load:

3/63

1 line at 6 or 8 per inch .
100 or 132 characters at
10 per inch.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per
controller:.
.432 Restrictions:

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.52

engraved character font
(Internal coding as in
Data Code Table No.4).

Coding:

. 34

.43

continuous fanfold
sprocket punched stationery.
printing.

.5

yes.
yes.
no.
no.
yes .
no.
yes .

standard character set,
Model I.
standard character set,
Model II.
numeric set (NP), Modell.
numeric set, Model II.

Sl2eeds

.621 Nominal or peak speed: I & II 600 lines/minute.
1lI & IV, 1285 lines/
minute .
.622 Important parameters
Name
Value
Print 1 line, I & II:
100.0 msec .
Print 1 line, III & IV: 46.7 msec.

411:081.622

INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTER

§

.72

OSI .

. 622 Important parameters (Contd.)
Name
Value
Skipping speed:. . . 33.0 in/sec for skips of
S lines or less.
75.0 in/sec for skips of
more than S lines.
. 623 Overhead
Step 1 line:
20 msec.
Step 2 lines: .
25 msec.
Step 3 lines: .
30 msec.
Independent skip N
lines: . . . . . .
15 + 5N msec. (N < 9).
37.4+ 2. 2N msec.
(N ~ 9, all others).
Print & skip N lines,
I & II: . . . . . .
as above + 80.0 msec.
Print & skip N lines,
as above + 26.7 msec.
III & IV: . . .
. 624 Effective speeds:
Average line
Lines/min.,
Lines/min.,
feed, inches
I & II
III & IV
1,285
600
1/6:
1,160
572
2/6:
1,059
545
3/6:
1:
4S0
838
2:
418
664
4:
514
353
(See graph)
. 63

Other Controls
~

Form

~

Check reset:

key

resets printer error

Carriage restore:

key

Single cycle:

key

positions carriage at
channell on tape loop.
initiates one print cycle .

indications.

.73

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper:
Stacker: . . .
.732 Replenishment
time: . . . .
.733 Adjustment
time:

Capacity
20-inch stack.
20-inch stack.
1 to 2 minutes.
printer needs to be
stopped.
2 to 3 minutes.
printer needs to be
stopped.

.734 Optimum reloading period
1 & II
56 minutes.
III & IV
35 minutes.
Basis:
2-part sets, 17 inches
long, at I-inch line
spacing .

Demands on System
Component

Condition

msec per line •

Processing
Unit:

0.100
0.125
0.100
0.125

II
III

IV

2!.
or
or
or
or

Percenta ge·
0.10
0.13
0.21
0.27

• A t single spacing.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

• 71

Adjustments
Adjustment
Venical alignment:
Horizontal alignment:
Form width:
Printing quality:
Form thickness:
Line pitch:

.S

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

Check or
Interlock

Recording:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Feed jam:
Parity:

echo check
none.
check
check
none_
interlock
check
check

Action
indicator.
indicator.
stop and indicator •
wait or indicator •
stop indicator.
indicator.

Method
knobs.
knobs.
sliding forms tractors.
graduated dial.
graduated lever.
switch
6 or 8 lines/in.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:083.100
IBM 7044
Input-Output
Output Typewriter
INPUT-OUTPUT: OUTPUT TYPEWRITER
§

083.

•1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: •

.222 Sensing system:
• 223 Common 'system:
.23

.12

Output Typewriter.
Part of the Console.

Description
The Output Typewriter is a standard part of a 7044
system. It is essentially an IDM Selectric typewriter, but it has been modified to decode 64-bit
configurations into positioning coordinates for the
print-ball mechanism. The print-bail is an oblate
sphere that has the raised letter font in tiers around
its circumference. It swivels and tilts in order to
position a character for printing. The print-ball is
mounted on a carriage that advances across the
fixed platen as each character is printed.
The Typewriter is connected to Data Channel A. It
can be operated in a record or a character mode.
In the record mode the Data Channel (processor) is
engaged until every character of every word specified by the channel command word has been printed.
In the character mode the Data Channel (processor)
is tied up only until one character addressed by the
channel control word has been transferred to the
typewriter buffer. This represents about a 42 per
cent overlapping of the typing with processing.
ParitY is checked both at core storage and at the
typewriter. Up to 15 characters a second can be
typed when operating at full speed. Two print-balls
with the "Report" and "Programming" fonts are
standard. Most of the unusual special characters
are in upper case shift. Since changing shift requires one character time, this delay is minimized.
Because of its slow speed and the tying up of the
processor, it is best used for the purposes of logging and notes to the operator. In these situations
the processor is generally not needed, or operator
intervention is required before processing may resume. Compared with operator reaction time, the
typing time should be negligible.

Multiple Copies

.231 Maximum number:
• 232 Types of master
Multilith:
Xerox:
Spirit:
.24

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.31

Form of Storage

.311 Medium:
.312 Phenomenon
Output:

engraved character font •

.34

Format Compatibility:

none •

Physical Dimensions

First Delivery:

March, 1960 .

.351 Overall width:
.352 Length:

•2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity:

.42

Connection to System

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:

character at 10 per inch •

8.875 inches.
no limit •

Data Channel A •

1.
none •

• • engraved hammers.
.43

(**)

printing.

Coding:

. 14

• 221 Recording system:

continuous fanfold stationery.

. 33

. 35

Sensing and Recording Systems

0-9.
A - Z.
see Data Code Tables
1 and 2.
yes.
yes.
64 and blank.

85 print positions.
all for data.

12 to 15 months (**) •

.22

1.
one character at a time.

.321 Serial by:
• 324 Track use
Data:
.325 Row use:

Availability:·

• feed platen.
• none.

printing.
1.

Positional Arrangement

• 13

• 211 Drive past the head:
.212 Reservoirs:

no.
yes.
yes.

Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
Alternatives:
FORTRAN set:
Req. COBOL set:
Total:

.32

depends on stationery •

Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: •
Method of use:

.25

none •
no •

Connection to Device

Estimate bY,editorial staff. See 1:010.400.
.431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions:
none.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:083.400
§

IBM 7044
.55

083.

. 44

Disable:
Request interrupt:

Data Transfer Control

. 441 Size of load
Input: ••
Output: .•
. 442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Inpu.t-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:

Control Operations

1 word or character.
limited only by capacity of
core storage.
core storage.

.56

Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device: • • •
Nearly exhausted: •
Busy controller:.
•
End of medium marks:
Exhausted:

each word or character.

processing is inhibited
during data transfers between core storage and
synchronizer register.
.445 Table control: • • • • yes, for output.
• 446 Synchronization: • • • automatic.

no.
yes •

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions:
Speeds

no
yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.

I : single character
ll: a record of N words
(6N char.)

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.62

•51

Blocks

.621 Nominal or peak speed: 15 char/second for output •
same as peak speeds, less
.624 Effective speeds: ••
allowance for carriage
returns.

.511 Size of block
Output:

1 character to 32,767

words.
.63

.512 Block demarcation
Output:

•52

zero count in channel
control word.

Processor I:
Processorll:

•524
.525
.526

• none.
type 1 block forward; data
is transferred from core
storage to typewriter via
the MQ register.
Stepping: • • • • . • carriage return at the end
of a line or when count in
channel control word is
zero •
Skipping:
none.
none.
Marking:
Searching:
none •

. 53

Code Translation:

. 54

Format Control:

3/63

Component

Input-Output Operations

•521 Inpu.t: .
.522 Output:

• 523

Demands on System

automatic.
• • • fixed format; automatic
carriage return after
each line.

.7

msec per char

or

38.6

Percentage
58.2 •
100.0 .

66.6

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71 . Adjustments:

typical typewriter
adjustments •

.72

Other Controls:

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

none.

Check or
Interlock

Recording:

padty check

Output block size:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing confIicts:

none.
none.

Action
set Indicator and no
print •

none.

interlock

wait or set Indicator.

•

411:091.100

STANDARD

II

REPORTS
ED
P

IBM 7044
Input-Output
729 Magnetic Tape Units

INPUT-OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
§

091.

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity:

.12

Description

• 22

These tape units are used in the IDM 1401, 1410,
7040,7044, 7070 and 7080 series systems as well as
in the 709, 7090 and 7094. They use a standard reel
and half-inch tape compatible with the 7330 and 727
tape units. The only significant differences' among
the four models are in recording densities and tape
speeds. These are summarized in the following
table:

.221 Recording system:
.222 Sensing system:
• 223 Common system:

Model

Magnetic Tape Unit
729 IT, IV, V, VI.

Tape speed,
inches/sec

IT

75

IV

112.5

V

75

VI

112.5

Density
char/inch

.13

Availability:

.14

First Delivery
729
729
729
729

• ••

II:

IV:
V:
VI:

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

. 211 Drive past the head:

2.
vacuum.
about 7 feet •
motor.
motor •

Sensing and Recording Systems
magnetic head.
magnetic head •
2-gap head provides readafter-write checking.

.23

Multiple Copies:

•

.24

Arrangement of Heads

Peak transfer
rate, char/sec

200
556
200
556
200
556
800
200
556
800

15,000
41,667
22,500
62,500
15,000
41,667
60,000
22,500
62,500
90,000

Up to ten tape units may be connected to each Data
Channel in a 7044 system. Tape operations may be
performed parallel with internal processing; however, in normal operation, tapes attached to a
single channel cannot be involved in simultaneous
data transmission. Any number of non-data transmitting operations may occur simultaneously. It is
usually economical to use the highest density of a
given model in order to achieve the maximum
transmission rates; however, compatibility with
other machines (such as the 704) may dictate the
occasional use of lower density settings.

\

.212 Reservoirs
Number:
Form:
Capacity:
• 213 Feed drive:
.214 Take-up drive:

Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: •
Method of use:
Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:
.3

• 312 Phenomenon:

pinch roller friction.

© 1963

7.
1 row at a time.
sensing.
0.3 inch.
1.

7.
1 row at a time.

plastic tape with
magnetizable surface •
magnetization.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:

12 to 15 months.

November, 1959.
November, 1959.
May, 1962.
May, 1962.

recording.
1.

EXTERNAL STORAGE

.311 Medium:

.32

multiple copies may be obtained by dialing 2 or
more tapes on a given
channel to the same number. This procedure is
not recommended.

.322 Parallel by:
• 324 Track use
Data:
Redundancy check: •
Timing:
Control signals:
Unused:
Total:
.325 Row use
Data:
Redundancy check:
Timing:
Control signals: •

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

I to N rows at 200,556, or

(models V and VI) 800
rows per inch
(see 408:091.431).
7 tracks .

6.
1.

o (self-clocking).

O.
O.
7.

1 to N.
1.

°0 .

(record and segment
marks are optional).

3/63

IBM 7044

411:091.325
§

091.

.446 Synchronization:

.325 Row use (Cont'd)
Unused:
.
Inter-block gap:
Inter-file gap:.
Erased gap (to skip
flaw area):
.33

gaps.
0.75 inch.
3.75 inches.

.5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.511 Size of block:
• 521 Block demarcation
Input:

Input-Output Operations

Format Compatibility
.521 Input: • •
Other device or system Code translation
matched, low recording
density only.
matched, low recording
density only.

7Z7:

7330:
• 35

.4

CONTROLLER

•41

Identity:

0.50 inch.
2,400 feet per reel •
25 feet.
25 feet.

• 523 Stepping:
• 524 Skipping:
.525 Marking:
• 526 Searching:

#1040 Tape Adapter.
1414 I. n, m Synchronizer.
#3585 800 cpi required on
1414 for 729 n and VI
800 cpi operation.

.53

Code translation:

.54

Format Control
Control:
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point: • • •
Insert spaces:
Recording density:
Section sizes:

Connection to System

• 421 On-line:

• •

up to four 7904 Channels
plus Data Channel A with
a maximum of 10 tape
drives each.

• 422 Off-line
Associated equipment: may be switched to another
channel, another computer' or an off-line
auxiliary unit either
manually or by means of
the optional 7830 switching feature and 7155
Switch Control Console.
.43

.522 Output:

Physical Dimensions

• 351 Overall width:
• 352 Length:
Leader:
Trailer:

.42

.55

• 56

Connection to Device

• 441 Size of load: • •
.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control: •

3/63

1 word.
core storage.
each word.
none.
no.

code (binary or BCD) selected by program - translations are automatic.
program.
densities (2 or 3).
no.
no •
no.
no.
no.
yes •

yes.
yes.
no.
yes, binary or BCD.
• yes.
yes •

Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted: •
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:
Beginning of tape:

Data Transfer Control

forward only.
read until either N words
or end-of-record.
end-of-file gap always terminates reading.
write N words followed by
end-of-record.
erase gap •
write end-of-file gap .
none •
1 block backward •
1 block forward.
1 file backward.
inter block or inter file
gap •
none •

Control Operations
Disable:
•
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload:

.431 Devices per controller: 10.
.44

0.75-inch inter-record gap.
3.75 -inch inter-file gap.
0.75-inch end of
transmission.
3.75-inch gap written by
instruction.

Output:

.52
.34

1 to 32,767 words in block.
1 to N blocks in files •

3.75 inches.
column binary as in core
with odd parity redundancy check.
binary coded decimal
(BCD) as in Data Table
No.4 with even parity
check.

Coding:

• • • automatic

.6

PERFORMANCE

.62

Speeds

yes.
yes.
no.
yes (25 feet).
yes.
yes.
yes.

411:091.621

INPUT-OUTPUT: 729 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS

§091.
.621 Nominal or peak speed
Model II:
Model IV:
Model V:
Model VI:

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments

15,000 or 41,667 char/sec.
22,500 or 62,500 char/sec.
15,000, 41,667,or60,000
char/sec.
22,500, 62,500 or 90,000
char/sec.

Adjustment

Method, Comment

Recording
density:
Densities
option:

switch

selects 1 of 2 densities.

.622 Important parameters
switch
selects any pair of densiName
Models
ties (models Vand VI
II
IV
V
VI
only), 200/556, 556/800,
Density (char/
200/800.
inch:
200 or 556
200, 556 or 800
Tape speed (in.72 Other Controls
112.5
ches/sec):
75.
112.5
75.
Start time (msec)
Form
Function
Comment
read:
10.5
6.7
10.5
6.7
write:
7.5
5.0
7.5
5.0
Address
Stop time (msec)
selection:
dial
selects unit address 0-9.
read:
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
Load
write:
5.1
3.8
5.1
rewind:
button
3.8
lowers tape into reservoirs
Full rewind
and rewinds tape to load
time (min):
1.2
0.9
1.2
0.9
point.
Unload:
button
Gaps block
removes tape from reser(inches):
0.75
0.75
0.75 0.75
voirs and raises upper porfile (inches):
3.75
3.75
3.75 3.75
tion of head assembly.
.623 Overhead:
File
Gap crossing time (msec)
protection: ring on ring permits writing.
Model II and IV
V and VI
reel
Block:
• 10
6.67.
File: .
. 50
33.33.
.73 Loading and Unloading
.624 Effective speeds
Models II and V
.731 Volume handled
200 char/inch:
15,000N/(N+150)char/sec.
Data format
VVords per reel
556 char/inch:
41,667N/(N+417)charlsec.
VVords/
Records/
at Density (cpi)
Models IV and VI
record
file
200
556
800
200 char/inch:
22,500N/(N+150)char/sec.
384,000
20
498, 000 548, 000
20
556 char/inch:
62, 500N/(N+417) char/sec.
548, 000
872, 200 960, 000
40
20
408,000
542,000 600,000
Model V
20
50
572,000
926, 000 1,036, 000
40
50
800 char/inch:
60,000N/(N+600)char/sec.
167 (1,000 char.)
752, 000 1, 854, 000 2, 350, 000
All
Model VI
800 char/inch:
90, 000N/(N+600) charlsec.
Note: 1 word : 6 char •

•63

Demands on System
.732 Replenishment time:
Component

Condition

Core Storage: 15. 000
22.500
41,667
60,000
62,500
90, 000
Channel A
Central
15, 000
Processor
22,500
41,667
60, 000
62,500
90, 000

char/sec
char/sec
char/sec
char/sec
char/sec
char/sec

char/sec
char/sec
char/sec
char/sec
char/sec
char/sec

msec per word
O. 005
O. 005
O. 005

1.3

1.9
3.5
5.0
5.3
7.6

0.005
O. 005
O. 005

0.400
0.267
0.143
0.100
0.096
0.067

1

plus
start
time
not
overlapped

msec per block
Start time not
overlapped:
Models II, V
read
write
Models IV, VI
read
write

percentage

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error

100.
100.
100.
100.
100.
100.
percentage

6.5
1.0

100.
100.

5.2
01..0

100.
100.

© 1963

1.0 to 1.5 minutes.
tape unit needs to be stopped.
.734 Optimum reloading period
Models II & V: • . • 6 minutes.
Models IV & VI: • • • 4 minutes.

Check or
Interlock

Recording:
Reading:
Input area
overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted
medium:
Imperfect
medium:
Timing conflicts:
Recording level:

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

lateral parity
lateral & longitud ina I pa rity
none-not possible.
none-not possible.
yes

Action
indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm.

see reading.

reflective spot or
tape mark

indicator.

yes
interlock
dll,allevel signal
strength check

halts tape drive.
sta lis processor.
indicator & alarm.

3/63

411:092.100

_STANDARD
EDP
•

REP()RTS

IBM 7044
Input -Output

7330 MTU
INPUT-OUTPUT: 7330 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

§

092.

· 24

•1

GENERAL

· 11

Identity:

• 12

Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: .

. . . • • . • Magnetic Tape Unit.
7330 Model 1.
MT.

Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack:. .
Method of use: .

Description
The 7330 Magnetic Tape Unit is slower, simpler,
and less expensive than the 729 Tape Unit, but the
two are completely compatible. Tape speed is 36
inches per second, and peak transfer rate is either
7,200 or 20,016 characters per second, depending
upon the recording density selected. Lateral and
longitudinal parity checks are made on both reading and recording.

Arrangement of Heads

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

· 31

Form of Storage

· 311 Medium: . . .
.312 Phenomenon:.

The throughput of the 7330 can be limited by two
restrictions that should be considered:
(1) High speed rewind, which requires 2.2 minutes

per full reel, is always terminated by unloading
of the tape from the vacuum columns and readrecord head. Rewinding without unloading requires 13.3 minutes.
(2) To switch the unit from read to write status, it
must be programmed to backspace over the last
record read and then rewrite it; such switching
between reading and recording will be infrequent
in normal applications.
. 13

Availability: . .

16 months .

.14

First Delivery:

October, 1961.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

· 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs
Number:
Form: . .
Capacity: .
. 213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive:.
• 22

· 23

7.
one row at a time.
sensing.
1.

7.
one row at a time.

plastic tape with
magnetizable surface.
magnetization.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:
• 322 Parallel by:
· 324 Track Use
Data: . . .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . . . . •
Control signals:
Unused: .
Total: .
.325 Row use
Data: .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: .
Gap:
· 33

Coding: .

· 34

Format Compatibility

1 to 32,767 rows at 200 or

556 char/inch.
7 tracks.

6.
1.

o (self-clocking).
O.
O.

7.
1 to N.
1.
O.
O.
O.
0.75 inch.

as in Data Code Table
No.!.

pinch roller friction.
Other device or system Code translation
IBM 729, 727 tape
units: . . . . • . .
not required.

2.
vacuum.
about 1. 5 feet •
motor .
motor.

.35

Physical Dimensions

· 351 Overall width:
• 352 Length:. • • •

Sensing and Recording Systems

· 221 Recording system: .
.222 Sensing system: .
.223 Common system: •

.32

recording.
1.

magnetic head.
magnetic head.
two-gap head provides
read -after-write
checking.

.4

CONTROLLER

.41

Identity: . . . .

Multiple Copies: . . . . none.

©

1963 by Auerbach Carporotion and BNA Incorporoted

0.50 inch.
2,400 feet per reel.

#1040 Tape Adapter, plus
either a 1414 II Synchronizer, a 1414 lor VII Synchronizer with a #7184
Tape Intermix feature.

3/63

411:092.420

§

IBM 7044
. 56

092.

· 42

.43

End of medium marks:
Beginning of tape:
End-of-file: . • .
End-of-operation:

Connection to System

.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line: • . • . . . .

1 per data channel.
none.

Connection to Device

.431 Devices per controller: 10.
.432 Restrictions:. . • . . • when using a 1414 lor. VII
Synchronizer, the total
number of 7330 and 729
Tape Units is 10.

.6

PERFORMANCE

.61

Conditions

1 word.
core storage.
each word.
no.
none.
automatic.

·5

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

. 51

Blocks

· 511 Size of block:
• 512 Block demarcation
Input: • . • . • . .

1 to 32,767 words.

the smaller of the words
between gaps on tape or
word count in the data
channel.
Output: • • . . . • . . word count in data channel.

. 621 Nominal or peak speed: 7,200 or 20,016 char/sec .
.622 hnportant parameters
Name
Value
Density:. . . . • . . 200 or 556 char/inch •
Tape speed:. . • . . 36.0 inches/sec.
Inter-block gap: . . 0.75 inch .
Start time (can be overlapped with processing
on channel A)
Read:
7.6 msec •
Write: .
20.4 msec.
Stop time
Read:
12.9 msec.
Write: .
15.3 msec •
start time •
. 623 Overhead: .•
• 624 Effective speeds
At 200 char/inch:
7, 20ON/(N + 147)char/sec.
20, 016N/(N +408) char/sec.
At 556 char/inch:
(see graph).
where N = char /block
6 char = 1 word.
.63

Input-Output Operations

.526 Searching:
.53

Code Translation:

matched codes.

• 54

Format Control: •

none.

· 55

Control Operations

Input: . . .
Output: . .
Stepping: .
Skipping:.

.525 Marking:.

Disable: . . . . . •
Request interrupt: •
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload: . . .

Demands on System
Component

1 block forward .
l' block forward .
none.
1 block backward (backspace). 3. 5 inches forward (to skip defective
tape areas).
inter-block gap, or endof-file gap.
none.

• 521
. 522
· 523
.524

Speeds

Data Transfer Control

.441 Size of load: . . . .
· 442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access: • . . . .
. 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . .
· 445 Table control: . .
. 446 Synchronization:.

.52

disabled after unloading.
yes.
no.
binary or BCD.
yes.
yes.

Condition

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

• 71

Adjustments
Adjustment

Method

Recording density: switch
.72

Comment
200 or 556 char/in.

Other Controls
Form

Comment

Testable Conditions
Disabled: . .
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .

3/63

msec per block or Percentage

Processing Unit: I; Data Channel A
100.0
200 char/inch
0 837N} plus
100.0
556 char/inch
O' 300N
s~art
•
tlme
Start time (not
overlapped)
100.0
0.6
Read
100.0
Write
7.4
Core Storage:
II; 7904 Data
Channel
Read or write
200 char/inch
O. 005N
0.59
556 char/inch
O. 005N
1.66
where N is number of words per block.

Function
.56

yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.

Data Channel A.
7904 Data Channel.

I: .
II:
.62

· 44

Testable Conditions (Contd.)

yes.
yes.
no.
yes, 15 feet remaining.
yes.

Address selection: dial.
Load rewind:
key
Unload:
File protection:

key.
ring on
spool

loads tape into
reservoirs.
ring perm,its
writing.

INPUT-OUTPUT: 7330 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

§

',-

092.

.73

411:092.730

.8

ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION

Loading and Unloading

.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Spool: •

• 732 Replenishment time: •
• 734 Optimum
reloading period:.

Error
Capacity
2,400 feet; for l, ODD-char
blocks, 5, ODD, 000 char
at 200 char/inch,
11,300,000 char at 556
char/inch.
1. 0 to 1. 5 minutes.
tape unit needs to be
stopped.
13 minutes.

©

Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing Conflicts:
Recording level:

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated

Check or
Interlock
lateral & longitudinal
parity
lateral & longitudinal
parity
none.
none •
all codes acceptable.
reflective spot or tape mark
none •
interlock
signal strength check

Action
indicator &
alllrm.
indicator &
alarm.

indicator.
indicator.
indicator &
alarm.

3/63

411:101.100

.sr'-'DARD

IIE~~

IBM 7040/7044
Input-Output, Other

\..
INPUT-OUTPUT: OTHER

.12

§ 101.

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:.

• 12

Description

. . . . . . 7904 I, II, Data Channels.

The 7904 data channel is optional equipment for the
7040 and 7044 systems. A system may have as
many as four such channels which are designated B
through E. Each 7904 ·pennits simultaneous inputoutput operation with computing and other data
channels.
Connected to each 7904 may be a Direct Data device,
a 1414 I, II or VII Synchronizer and either a 7631
. File Control, a 1414 VI Synchronizer, or a 7750
Transmission Control Unit.
A Direct Data connection uses 36 data transfer
lines, 2 parity lines, 20 sense lines, and necessary
control lines. An interrupt transfer to central
processor address 00004 is used to synchronize the
connection. Data may be transmitted at rates up to
62,500 (7040) or 133,333 (7044) words per second;
however, high data transfer rates require a curtailment of other data channel operations.
The 1414 I, II or VII is used to connect magnetic
tape units to the system, whereas the 1414 VI is
used to connect communications equipment.
The 7631 File Control provides a connection between
the central processor and 1301 disk storage units.
Up to five 1301-1 or 1301-2 storage units may be attached to the system through one or more 7631 control units attached to different 7904 channels.
The 7750 Transmission Control Unit is a specialpurpose computer system designed to multiplex a
number of communication devices. Its stored program may be used for fonnatting, editing, trunk
assignment, and routine record keeping.
The operation of 7904 data channel is as follows:
The input-output operation is initiated by executing
a select I/O unit instruction in the central processor. If the unit is busy, the instruction is held up
until the I/O unit is available. Once the unit is
available and ready, a data transfer command is
sent to the data channel. The data channel decodes
the command and sets up the channel circuitry accordingly (i. e., mode of operation, starting address, and word count). Mter this operation has
been completed, the word counter in the data channel is checked for zero. If the counter contains a
zero, the channel tenninates its operation and disconnects the I/O unit. If the counter does not contain a -zero, the channel continues with its operation
in the mode selected (read or write).

© 1963

Description (Contd. )
During a read operation (input), the selected I/O
device serially transfers a 7-bit byte (6 data bits
plus parity). The bytes are parity checked and the
data bits transferred to the Assembly Register •
Mter a 36-bit word is assembled, the word is then
sent to the Channel Data Register for transfer to
core storage. The core storage location is specified by the contents of the Channel Address Counter.
Mter a complete. word is assembled and transferred
to core storage, the word counter is decremented
and the address counter incremented, and the data
transfer operation repeated until the word count
reaches zero. However, should an end-of-record
signal be received from the device, the operation is
tenninated immediately .
In the write mode (output operation), the Channel
Address Counter specifies the core storage location
from which a 36-bit word is to be transferred to the
channel. The word is divided into six 6-bit data portions and parity added to each portion before being
sent to the selected device. The word counter and
address counter are decremented and incremented
respectively after each word transfer.
The foregoing procedures are essentially the same
as the "input-output a record and disconnect" channel command (lORD) in the 7090/7094.
An I/O transfer error on the 7904 turns on an indicator which can cause an interrupt. If interrupts
are enabled and the processor is not executing a
"Reset and Load Channel A" (RCHA) instruction,
the processor can respond to the interrupt immediately. When this is done, it is possible to interrogate the channel to ascertain which word was
transferred in error.
The 7904 Data Channel can sense and store many
error and conditional indicators. These indicators
can be used to interrupt the program provided they
are enabled. Under these conditions the program
counter in the processor is stored with the interrupt
indicators in the appropriate interrupt location and
the program counter set to the next address as soon
as one of the indicators is set. However, when the
processor is acting as data channel A by executing
an RCHA instruction, the program counter is not
used to access another instruction until the RCHA
instruction tenninates_ Therefore, the reaction to
an interrupt is delayed until an input-output operation on channel A is completed. This must be considered when "real-time" devices are to be controlled by the system. Interrupts from many input
"real-time" devices are notification that they must
be serviced within a prescribed time. If these interrupts are ignored, the "real-time" units may
become overloaded and as a result, lose data.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:102.100
IBM 7044
Input-Output
Data Channel A
INPUT-OUTPUT: DATA CHANNEL A

§

102.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Description

Data Channel A, a part of
the Central Processor.

The basic 7040 and 7044 system includes one inputoutput channel, called data channel A, whose operation is not overlapped with that of the processing
unit. Attached to the channel may be a console
typewriter (which is standard on the 7040/7044 systems); a 1401; a 1414 Model I, II, or III
Synchronizer; and either.a 1622 Card Read-Punch
or a 1414 Model III, IV, or V Synchronizer. Up to
10 magnetic tape units may be attached by means
of a Model I, II, or III. With the exception of the
console typewriter, all channel A attachments
require adapter units to connect them to the
processor.
Data channel A is the only channel in the system
that can accomodate a 1414 Model III, IV, or V
Synchronizer. These units permit the attaching of
a 1402 Card Read-Punch, 1403 and 1404 Printers,
a 1011 Paper Tape Reader, telegraph units, 1014
Inquiry Stations, and 1009 Data Transmission
Units. Channel. A is also the only data channel in
the system to which the 1401, 1402, 1403, and 1404
units can be attached.
The 1401 attachment permits the 7044 to transmit
and receive data from a 1401 and its connected input-output units at a maximum speed of 87,000
characters per second. The programs of both
machines must make periodic checks to ascertain
whether the other machine is requesting to transmit data. Data transfers take place between the
core stores.
Two way communication can be programmed. The
7044 assumes the role of master and the 1401 the
slave, since the 7040 can initiate data transfers in
either direction. When 1401 input equipment is to
be used, the 1401 must read the data before it can
be transmitted to the 7044. Conversely, when
using 1401 output equipment, the 1401 must accept
the data in its core store before transferring it to
the output unit.
Input-output instructions for channel A are performed as follows: First the channel and unit are
tested for availability. Even though the processor
is serving as channel A, the "channel A in use" indicator may still be on from a previous operation.
Next a "Select Read" or "Select Write" instruction

© 1963

Description (Contd.)
is given which selects channel A, adapter unit, and
code translation mode. If either the unit or channel
selected is busy, this instruction will stall the processor until it is free. A "Reset and Load Channel
A" instruction is then given that causes a control
word to be sent to the accumulator. The control
word contains the word count, which is the number
of words to be transferred, and the location in storage of the first word to be stored.
The operation of channel A is as follows: The word
count in the accumulator is tested for zero. If it is
zero, the transfer is terminated and the unit disconnected. If not, the operation proceeds. Six characters are accepted, one by one, checked for correct
parity, and placed in the 36-bit plus parity
multiplier-qUotient register. The contents of the
multiplier-quotient register are stored in core storage at the address specified by the contents of the
accumulator. After a 36-bit word is transferred, the
word count is reduced by one and the address count
incremented by one. If an end-of-record signal is
received from the selected unit, the operation is terminated. This procedure is essentially the same as
the "input-output a record and disconnect (lORD)"
channel command in the 7090/7094. As in lORD execution, the above sequence is continued until one of
the terminal conditions is encountered.
Write operations occur in the same manner with respect to storage addreSSing and termination conditions, but with the data flow operation reversed.
An I/O transmission error turns on a check light.
However, since the CPU is delayed until the completion of the transmission, the word associated with
the error is undetermined.
Channel A, like the 7904 Data Channels, can sense
and store many error and condition indicators.
These indicators can be used to interrupt the program, provided they are enabled .. Under these conditions the program counter in the processor is
stored with the interrupt indicators in the appropriate interrupt location, and the program counter is
set to the next address as soon as one of the indicators is set. Because the RCHA instruction occupies
the processor until the input-output operation is terminated, the program counter is not used during
this time. Therefore, the reaction to the interrupt
is delayed until an input-output operation on channel
A is completed. This must be considered when
"real-time" devices are being controlled by the
system.

by Auerbach Corparation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:103.100
IBM 7044
Input-Output, Other
1414 Synchronizer
INPUT-OUTPUT, OTHER: 1414 SYNCHRONIZER

§

• 12

103.

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity:

• 12

Description

. . • • . • . 1414 Synchronizer Models
I through VII.

Description (Contd. )
control (which can limit the amount of data read and
always defines the amount to be written) and assembling (or disassembling) of words from characters
received (or written).

The 1414 Synchronizer is a controller used to monitor and direct the operations of the input-output
units attached to it. There are two basic forms of
the 1414: the unbuffered models I, II, and VII which
control magnetic tapes; and the buffered models III,
IV, V, and VI which control unit record equipment
and/or communication equipment.

The buffered 1414 Synchronizers contain SO-character
buffers which are used to store input and output records between the data channel and the unit. Model III
and IV can have a 1402 Read-Punch, and a 1403 or
1404 Printer attached. Models IV, V, and VI can have
communications equipment attached to six SO-character communication buffers. The 1014 Inquiry Stations,
telegraph terminals, 1009 Data Transmission Units,
and 1011 Paper Tape Readers are considered communications equipment.

The unbuffered 1414 models I, II, and VII are essentially control units. They differ only in the type
of magnetic tape unit that can be connected to them.
The instructions to a magnetic tape unit are interpreted, initiated, and controlled by the 1414 units.
These units have no data storage capacity as such;
they provide only control and a character data path
between the tape unit and the data channel. The
data channel provides
storage- addressing, count
-

With the buffered 1414, input-output operations proceed in much the same manner as an unbuffered 1414
except that all data transfers utilize the data channel
only long enough to load or unload the buffers from or
to core storage. Adapters between the buffer and the
input-output units control data transmission to or
from the devices. The table below shows the connections of units to a 1414 Synchronizer and a 7044
system.

1414
Model 729 II 729 IV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

x

x

729 V

729 VI

x (Note 1)

7330

Data
7904
Communications
Unit
Column
Data
Devices
Record Binary Channel
A
Channel

x (Note 2)
x
x
x
x

x

x

x

x

x
x

x (Note 2)

x

x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x

x
x

Note 1. With SOD characters-per-inch feature.
Note 2. With intermix feature.

i
\

"

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:104.100

.STANDAAD

EDP
_

REPORTS

IBM 7044
Input-Output
DTU
INPUT-OUTPUT: DATA TRANSMISSION UNIT

§

104.

.12

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

.12

Description

insure that each charact-er received contains exactly 4 out of 8 bits, and a longitudinal parity check
detects most errors resulting from compensating
error bits. Data from the receiving 1009 is transferred to a 1414 Synchronizer and from there to
7044 core storage. Input messages may be of any
length and are terminated by an end-of-message
signal.

Data Transmission Unit.
1099 Modell.

This unit enables the 7044 system to transmit and
receive data, via a 1414 Synchronizer, at speeds
up to 300 characters-per-second over public or
private telephone or telegraph lines. The unit at
the other end of the line may be a Similarly
equipped 1401, 1410, 7040, or 7750 system; an
IBM 7701 or 7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission
Terminal; or an IBM 1013 Card Transmission
Terminal. A specially equipped telephone and a
serial data set, supplied by the communications
company, are also required at each terminal.
Data from core storage of the transmitting 7044 is
transferred to the 1414 Synchronizer in fixed
length loads of 80 characters. This transfer requires 0.085 millisecond, after which the processing unit is free to perform other operations. From
the synchronizer, the data is sent to the 1009 DTU.
There it is converted from BCD form to a special
serial- by- bit, 4- of- 8 transmission code in which
each character code consists of four "1" bits and
four "0" bits as sent over the communications line.
The 1009 at the receiving terminal reconverts the
data to the internal BCD form. Validity checks

© 1963

Description (Contd.)

When a 1009 input buffer is filled in a 1414 Synchronizer, the 1009 "Attention" indicator is set in the
data channel which will cause an interrupt when
interrupts are enabled. Data may be lost if a full
input buffer is not emptied into the core store within
1,042, 042, 521, 316, or 260 milliseconds when the
transmission speed is 75, 150, 250, or 300 characters per second, respectively.
Either a #1038 Card 1414 Adapter with a 1414 IV or
V Synchronizer on data channel A, or #i074 Control
Adapter with a 1414 VI Synchronizer on 7904 data
channels B through E is required for this feature. A
#3238 Adapter connects the 1009 to the 1414. Two of
the six 80-character buffers present in the 1414 are
required for this function.
.13

Availability:

.14

First Delivery: • • . • October:, 1961.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

• • • • . 14 months as of February
1962.

3/63

.~ANOARO

II

411: 105.100

EDP
REPORTS

IBM 7044
Input-Output
RIU
INPUT-OUTPUT: REMOTE INQUIRY UNIT

§

105.

.12

Description

(Contd.)

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity: . . . . . . . Remote Inquiry Unit.
1014 Model 1.
RIU.

the inquiry typewriter at 15.5 characters per second.
Each reply message is limited to the unit number
plus up to 78 characters, terminated by a group
mark, and followed by an automatic carriage return
generated by the adapter .

. 12

Description:

Optional Feature

The Remote Inquiry Unit is a modified IBM Selectric typewriter with control circuits and indicator
lights, mounted on a 29- by 24-inch work table. It
is used for interrogating and printing replies from
a 7044 system, and is connected to the system by a
4-wire cable which may be up to 8 miles long. The
user is responsible for the installation and maintenance of cable runs over fifty feet in length. Up to
20 Remote Inquiry Units can be connected to a 1414
IV or V Synchronizer on data channel A, or a 1414
VI Synchronizer on data channels B through E. An
automatic sequencing device controls the order of
acceptance of inquiry requests when more than one
unit is connected.

Third Inquiry Adapter, #882017: This feature permits attaching 10 more inquiry units to a 1414
Synchronizer.

When an inquiry is to be made, the Request key on
the Remote Inquiry Unit is depressed. This signals
the #6136 Remote Inquiry Unit Adapter on the 1414
Synchronizer. As soon as the adapter is not busy
with another inquiry 'operation, the Proceed status
light on the Remote Inquiry Unit is turned on. The
inquiry unit number (0 to 9) is automatically sent as
the first character of the message followed by up to
78 characters of text as typed on the Selectric. Depressing the Release key causes the character after
the last one in the text to be a group-mark character. If there are less than 78 characters of text,
the remainder of the line is filled with blanks.
When the 1414 buffer has been filled the adapter
sends a carriage-return signal to the inquiry unit
(this unit does not have a carriage-return key on its
keyboard) and clears the proceed status of the unit
as.an aCknowledgment. The "Attention" indicator
is set in the data channel, which causes an interrupt if the interrupt is enabled. The 80 character
message can then be transmitted to the core store
in 0.085 milliseconds when the processor executes
the proper read instruction.

.13

AVailability:

14 months as of February.
1962.

.14

First Delivery:

July, 1962.

.2

PHYSICAL FORM

.21

Drive Mechanism

.211 Drive past the head:
.212 Reservoirs:
.22

The reply message is set up in core storage with
the address of the receiving inquiry unit in the first
position. It is transferred to the output synchronizer buffer in O. 85 millisecond, and from there to

© 1963

engraved hammers .
typewriter keyboard .
no.

Multiple Copies

.231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon:
.233 Types of master
Multilith:
Spirit:
.24

Arran~ment

Ran~

no.
yes.

printing.
l.
l.

1 character at a time.

Use of station:
Stacks: .
Heads/stack:
Method of use:
.25

depends on stationery.

of Heads

Use of station:
Stacks: .
Heads/stack:
Method of use:

If the Cancel key rather than the Release Key is de-

pressed, the adapter sends a carriage-return to the
inquiry unit, clears its proceed status, and looks
for another inquiry unit requesting service. Typing
messages faster than 12.5 characters per second
causes the inquiry unit to halt. It can only be restarted by cancelling the request. An automatic
cancel is caused by not typing far a 20-second period during a proceed status.

Sensing and Recording Systems

. 221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system: .
.223 Common system:
.23

sprocket drive-paper
punched both sides.
none.

keyboard input.
l.

44 keys.
1 character at a time.

of Symbols

Numerals:
Letters:
Special:

10
26
8

0-9.
A-Z.
&. - $

* , # I (All other
special characters print
as #).
Alternatives: . .
none.
no.
FORTRAN set: .
Req. COBOL set:
no.
Total: . . . .
44 .plus space.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:105.300

§

IBM 7044

105.

.3

EXTERNAL STORAGE

. 31

Form of Storage

. 311 Medium: . .
. 312 Phenomenon:
.32

continuous fanfold station'
ery .
input-key depression.
output- printing.

Positional Arrangement

.321 Serial by:.
. 324 Track use
Data: .
. 325 Row use:
.33 Coding:

85 print positions.
all for data.
engraved character font.

.34

Format

none.

.35

Physical Dimensions

Com2atibili~:

. 351 Overall width: . . .
. 352 Length: . . . . .
. 353 Maximum margins:

.4
.41

. 42

character at 10 per inch .

Synchronizer 1414 Model
IV, V, or VI.
Remote Inquiry Unit
Adapter.
#6136.
(Both units are required.)

Connection to System

.421 On-line: . • . . . .

. 422 Off-line: . . . . . .
. 43 Connection to Device

one 1414 Model 4 or 5 on
data channel A or a
1414 Model 6 on data
channels B thru E plus
one #6136 adapters per
set of inquiry stations .
none.

.431 Devices per controller: 10 per #6136 adapter .
. 432 Restrictions: . . . . . maximum of 6 buffers in
1414 Model 4 or 5; each
#6136 adapter requires
2 buffers
.44 Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load:.
. 442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
. 445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization:

each word.
no .
none.
automatic.

PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE

.51

Blocks

.512 Block demarcation
Input: .
Output: . . . . .
3/63

.521
. 522
. 523
.524
• 525
· 526

Input:
Output: .
Stepping:
Skipping:
Marking:
Searching:

.53

Code Translation:

automatic.

. 54

Format Control:

contained in data .

.55

Control 9I>erations

1 to 78 characters per inquiry (input) or reply
(output).
Release key.
group mark in core storage.

1 block forward .
1 block forward .
step 1 line .
none.
none .
none.

Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Select code:. . . ,
.56

no.
yes .
no.
no.

Testable Conditions
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes .
yes .
yes.

Disabled: . . . .
Busy device:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Exhausted: . . .

.6

PERFORMANCE

.62

Conditions:

.62

Speeds

. . . none.

.621 Nominal or peak speed: input- -manual typing speed,
less than 12.5 char/sec.
output--15.5 char/sec.
.624 Effective speeds:
same as peak speeds, less
allowance for carriage
returns.
.63

Demands on System
Component
Processing Unit:

msec per block Percentage
. 0.085
0.0.

.7

EXTERNAL FACILITIES

.71

Adjustments: .

· 72

Other Controls

1 to 78 characters.
core storage .

.5

. 511 Size of block:

.In2ut- Out2ut OJ)erations

9.75 inches .
up to 11 inches per sheet.
no limitations.

CONTROLLER
Identity:

.52

.8

typical typewriter
adjustments.

Function
Inquiry request:

Form
key

Inquiry release:

key

Inquiry cancel:

key

Comment
signals adapter that an inquiry
is to be made.
signa~ end of message and sets
Inquiry Request indicator.
terminates inquiry without a
reply•

ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflictS!

Check or
Interlock
parity
parity
none.
check
none.
check
none.
checks

Action
indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm.
indicator & alarm.
alarm •
alarm if input typing speed
exceeds 12.5 char/sec.;
wait for Proceed light if
RlU adapter is serving
a nother inquiry Unit.

411: 111.100
IBM 7044
Simultaneous Operations

SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS

§

.1

SPECIAL UNITS

.11

Identity: . . . . .

. 12

Description

When ;j. magnetic tape unit or an mM 1401 system is
involved in a data transfer through Data Channel A,
the operation is not buffered with central processor
operation, and proceeds at the speed characteristic
of the input-output unit.

7904 Data Channels
1414 III, IV, V
Synchronizer.

The IBM 7044 system can have a maximum of four
time-shared 7904 Data Channels that delay processing only when the data channels and the 7107 central processor simultaneously request storage accesses. The processor can also be used as a data
channel, which is referred to as Data Channel A.
Data Channel A operates in two different modes with
respect to simultaneous operation. When accessing
communications equipment, inquiry stations,
punched tape readers, card reader/punches, and
printers, the central processor is not delayed by
Data Channel A for appreciably longer than any other
data channel, because all of these units are fully buffered by a 1414 III, IV, or V Synchronizer and
processing is delayed for only the time required to
load or unload the 1414 buffer, provided that the
input-output unit involved is ready for operation .
.3

Description (Contd. )

. 12

111.

An IBM 1401 system, which can be connected only to
Data Channel A, sends or receives data at approximately the same rate as a 729 VI Magnetic Tape Unit
reading 800 characters per inch (1. e., 90,000 characters per second nominally). The start time for
magnetic tape units connected to the Data Channel A
and the time to establish a data transfer with a 1401
system only partially overlap. Because of these delays, data transfers through Data Channel A delay
central processor operation for nearly the total time
required to activate and operate a particular device.
.2

RESTRICTIONS
Only one input-output unit can transfer data through a
Data Channel (including Data Channel A) at any given
time. Since there can be a maximum of five simultaneous transfers plus processing in operation at any
given time, the combined input-output rate cannot exceed 800, 000 characters per second.

POSSmLE SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS

Punch cards
Read cards
Read Punched Tape
Print or Skip lines on printer
Read or Write to Inquiry
Station
Read or Write to
Teleprocessing equipment
Read, Write, Backspace
Magnetic Tape Unit
Read or Write Through Direct
Data Connection
Read, Write, or Seek Magnetic
Disk Storage
Read or Write "Real-Time
Equipment"
Read or Write to 1401 system
Print on Output Typewriter
ReWind Magnetic Tape Unit

Max. No. of Units
Operating
1
1
5
2

Max. No. of Data
Transfers to and
from Core Storage

Restrictions

1
1
5
1

A, B
A, B
B
A, B

100

5

B

20

5

B

5

5

C

4

4

2

2

4
1
1
50

4
1
1
0

A, C
A, Cor D

Key:
A.
B.
C.
D.

Data
Data
Data
Data

Channel A
Channel A
Channel A
Channel A

only.
(i. e., the processor) stalled for data transfer only.
(i. e., the processor) stalled for the entire operation.
(i. e., the processor) stalled for about half of the operation.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

4/6J

411:121.101

_STANDARD
EDP
•

IBM 7044

REI'ORTS

Instruction Li st

§

121.

INSTRUCTION LIST
OPERATION

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

Flag or
Count

Tag Address
Fixed Point Arithmetic

ADD
DVP

X
X

F
F

T
T

Y
Y

MPY
SUB
VDP
VIM
VMA

X
X
X
X
X

F
F
F C
F C
FC

T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

(Y) + (AC) ~AC
(MQ) .;. (Y) ----»- MQ (quotient), AC (remainder).
If overflow set divide - check indicator.
(Y) x (MQ) ~(MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ.
(AC) - (Y) ~AC.
(AC)';' (Y)I-C ~(MQ)35-C to 35; remainder in AC.
(Y) x (MQ)35-C to 35 -?AC and (MQ)1 to C'
(AC) + (Y) x (MQ)35-C to 35 -? AC and (MQh-c'
Floating Point Arithmetic

*FAD
*FDP

X
X

F
F

T
T

Y
Y

*FMP
*FSB
*UFA
*UFM
*UFS
*DFAD
*DFDP
*DFMP
*DFSB

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

F
F
F
F
F
F
F
E
F

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2Y
2Y
2Y
2Y

(Y) + (AC) ----o.-(MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(AC) .;. (Y) -;.. MQ (quotient) normalized, AC (remainder); if
overflow, set divide - check indicator.
(Y) x (MQ) ~ (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(AC) - (Y) --?>- (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(Y) + (AC) ----»- (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; normalized.
(Y) x (MQ) --;>. AC and MQ unnormalized.
(AC) - (Y) --?>- (MSB)AC, (LSB)MQ; unnormalized.
(2Y, 2Y + 1) + CAC, MQ) ----o.-(AC, MQ); normalized.
(AC, MQ)';' (2Y, 2Y + 1) ~ (AC, MQ); normalized.
(2Y, 2Y + 1) x (AC. MQ) ---.,> (AC, MQ); normalized.
(AC, MQ) - (2Y I 2Y + 1) ~ (AC, MQ); normalized.
Arithmetic Data Transfer

CLA
CLS
LDQ
STO
STQ
STZ
*TMT

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

F
F
F
F
F
F
X

T
T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

(Y)~AC.

-(Y)----? AC.
(Y)~MQ.
(AC).~Y.

(MQ)~Y.

o --7 Y; sign is plus.
C

=Y(mod 256), C words are moved from «AC)3-I7 + i) to
«AC)21-35 +i); i = 0, 1, ••• , C-1.

Logical Data Transfer
CAL
*PCS
*SAC
SLW
STA
SID
STL

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

F
FC
FC
F
F
F
F

T
T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

(Y) ~ACp 1-35'
character d of (Y) ~AC30-35'
(AC)30-35 ---?Y character position C.
(AC)p 1-35 ~Y.
(AC)2i.-35 ~Y2I-35'
(AC)3_17 ~ Yf.- I7 •
Location of ST instruction + 1 ~ Y21- 35; remainder of Y
unchanged.

i\
\

© 1963

by Auerbach Carparatian and BNA Incarparated

3/63

IBM 7044

411:121.102

§

INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)

121.

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

OPERATION

Flag or
Tag Address
Count
Logical Operations

ACL

X

F

T

Y

ANA
CHS
COM
*MSM
*MSP
ORA
SLW
SSP

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

F
X
X
F
F
F
F
X

T
X
X
T
T
T
T
X

Y
X
X
Y
Y
Y
Y
X

(Y) + (AC) ---?>-AC added as 36 bit unsigned quantit,ies with endaround carry from AC p •
(AC) "AND" (Y) ~AC.
change sign of AC.
''NOT'' (AC)P, 1-35 ~(AC)p, 1-35'
1~(Y)S'

O---?>- (Y)S'
(AC) "OR" (Y) ---;i> AC.
(AC)P, 1-35 ---?>-Y.
o ---?>AC S'
Shifting: Operations

ALS
ARS
LGL
LGR
LLS

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

(AC) shifted left Y, sign unchanged.
(AC) shifted right Y, sign unchanged.
(AC)Q P 1-35 and (MQ)S 1-35 shifted left Y (mod 256).
(AC)Q' P' 1-35 and (MQ)S' 1-35 shifted right Y (mod 256).
(AC)Q:p: 1-35 and (MQh~35 shifted left Y (mod 256),

LRS

X

X

T

Y

RQL

X

X

T

Y

(AC)P,Q, 1-35 and (MQ)I-35 shifted right Y (mod 256),
(AC)S ~ (MQ)S'
(MQ) rotated left Y (mod 256).

MQS~ACS'

Control Operations
*AXT
CAS

X
X

X
F

T
T

Y
Y

*CCS

X

F C

T

Y

OCT

X

X

X

X

HPR

X

X

X

X

* LAC
LAS

X
X

X
F

T
T

Y
Y

LBT
*LDC
*LXA
*LXD
*MIT
*PAC
*PAX

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
F
X
X
X
X

X
T
T
T
T
T
T
X
T

X
Y
Y
Y
Y
X
X
X
X

PBT
*POC

Y ---;i> (T).
If (AC) > (Y), go to next instruction.
If (AC) = (Y), skip next instruction.
If (AC) < (Y), skip two instructions.

Character C of (Y) is compared with (AC)30-35;
If (AC)30-35 > (Y)6C to 6C + 5' go to' next instruction.
If (AC)30-35 = (Y)6C to 6C + 5' skip next instruction.
If (AC)30-35 < (Y)6C to 6C + 5' skip next two instructions.
If divide-check indicator on, turn it off; otherwise, skip next
instruction.
Halts processor; processor steps to next instruction when Start
key is depressed. Traps cause the location of the next instruction to be stored, and as a result, normally causes computation
to resume.
32,768 - (Y)21-35 ~ (T).
If (AC)Q,p, 1-35 < (Y), go.to next.instruction.
If (AC)Q P 1-35 = (Y), skip next mstruction.
If (AC)Q' P' 1-35 > (Y), skip next two instructions.
Skip next instruction if (AC)35 = 1.
32,768 - (Y)3-17 ---?>- (T).
(Y)21- 35 ~ (T).
(Y)3-17 ~ (T).
Skip next instruction if (Y)S = 1.
32,768 - (AC)21-35 ~ (T)'
(AC)21-35 -;;..(T).
Skip next instruction if (AC)P = 1.
32,768 - (AC)3-17 -;;.. (T).

1

3/63

AUERBAC~

411:121.103

INSTRU CTiON LIST
§

\

INSTRUCTION. LIST (Contd.)

121.

INSTRUGrION

"--

Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

Flag or
Count

OPERATION
Tag Address
Control Operations (Cont'd)

\

*PDX
*PLT
*PXA
*PXD
*RPM

X
X
X
X
X

X
F
X
X
X

T
T
T
T
X

*SPM

X

F C

T

Y

*SXA
*SXD
*TIX

X
X
D

X
X
D

T
T
T

Y
Y
Y

TMI
*TNX
TNZ
TOV
TPL
TRA
TRP
TRT
TSL
*TSX

X
D
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

F
D
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
X

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

*TXH
*TXI
*TXL
TZE
XEC

D
D
D
X
X

D
D
D
F
F

T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

X
Y

X
X
X

(AC)3-17 ~(T).
Skip next instruction if (Y)S = O.
(T) -.,.. (AC)21-3S.
(T) ~ (AC)3_17'
Release memory protect. Store location counter in address 32
and trap to address 33.
Set memory protect; (Y)21-27--7 field register; (Y)3S-3S ~count
register;'(Y)32 sets mode 0 = trap on equal, I =trap on unequal.
(T) -.,.. (Y)21-3S'
(T) -""(Y)3-17'
If the number in index T is greater than D, (T) - D -.,.. (T) and
the next instruction is then from Y.
Branch to Y if (AC) minus.
If (T) > D set (T) = (T) - D; otherwise, go to Y.
Branch to Y if (AC) t- O.
If overflow indicator is on, turn it off and branch to Y.
Branch to Y if (AC)S = O.
Transfer to Y.
Parity and trap inhibits are turned off; control goes Y.
Trap inhibit is turned off; control goes to Y.
This location plus one ~ (Y)21-3S; control goes to Y + l.
2's complement of the address of this instruction replaces (T);
control goes to Y.
If (T) >D, go to Y.
(T) + D ~ (T); control goes to Y.
If (T) < D, go to Y.
Branch to Y if (AC) = O.
Execute instruction in location Y.
Input-Output Instructions

BSR
CTR
ENB
ETT

X
X
X
X

I
I
F
X

T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y

ICT
lOT

X
X

X
X

T
T

X
X

PRD
*PSL
PWR
RCH
RCT

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

I
F
I
F
X
X
I

T
T
T
T
T
T
T

Y
Y
Y
Y

ROC

RDS

© 1963

X
X
Y

Backspace tape designated by I and Y one record.
Prepare to send control data to device designated by Y and 1.
Enable from Y; the (Y) determine which traps will be permitted.
End-of-tapetest; skip next instruction if end-of-tape indicator for
channel indicated by (Y) is not on.
Inhibit channel and direct data traps.
Skip next instruction if I/O check indicator is off; otherwise tum
it off.
Equivalent to read select but will cause trapping on 7090/7094.
(Y)S-17 are sent to the direct data lines.Equivalent to write select but will cause trapping on 7090/7094.
(Y) sent to the channel as a command word.
Restore channel traps.
Reset data channel.
Prepare to read from 1/0 device specified by I and Y.

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411: 121.104

§

IBM 7044

INSTRUCTION. LIST (Contd.)

121.

OPERATION

INSTRUCTION
Mnemonic
Code

Decrement

Flag or
Tag Address
Count
Input-Output Instructions (Cont'd)

RllN
SEN
*SSL

X
X
X

I
I
F

T
T
T

Y
Y
Y

Rewind and unload the tape specified by I and Y.
Prepare to read status data from the device specified by Y and I.
The static sense line contents from the direct data device

TCO
SCH
TEF

X
X
X

F
F
F

T
T
T

Y
Y
Y

If channel-in-use indicator is on, go to location Y.

TRC

X

F

T

Y

WBT
WEF
WRS

X
X
X

I
I
I

T.

Y
Y
Y

~(Y)8-17·

T
T

Store channel registers in Y.
Branch to Y if the end-of-file indicator for the specified
channel is on.
If the specified redundancy indicator is on, turn it off and
branch to Y.
Write blank tape (used to skip over bad spots).
Write end-of-file on tape designated by Y and 1.
PI.lpare to write to device designated by I and Y.

Terms:
C means
D means
F means
T means
X means
Y means
* means

3/63

count value.
decrement value.
indirect addressing flag.
in!:;lex register tag.
part of the operation code.
the address or value.
optional instruction.

411:141.100

_STANDARD

II

REPORTS
EDP

IBM 7044
Data Code Table
Report Writing

DATA CODE TABLE NO.1

§

141.

.1

.22
USE OF CODE:

report writing graphics
console typewriter font.

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

• 21

Character Size:

Character Structure

.221 More significant
pattern:

3 bits; value from low to
high order: 8, 16, and 32•

. 222 Less significant
pattern:
6 bits (shown below as two
octal digits).

.23

. 3 bits; value from low to
high order: 1, 2, 4 •

Character Codes

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

0

1

2

3

4

5

0

0

8

&

H

-

Q

1

1

9

A

I

J

R

/

z

2

2

b

B

?

K

!

S

of

3

3

>1ft

C

L

$

T

,

4

4

@

D

0

M

*

U

%

5

5

:

E

[

N

6

6

>

F

<

0

7

7

V

G

t

P

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
6
blank

7

Y

V

-y-

;

W

"-

tJ.

X

-til-

]

\

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411: 142.100
IBM 7044
Data Code Table
Programming
OAT A CODE TABLE NO. 2

§

142.

.1

• 22
USE OF CODE:

programming language
graphics, console typewriter font.

•2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

• 21

Character Size: • . .

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

6 bits (shown below as two
octal digits).

Character Structure

• 221 More significant
pattern: • • .

3 bits; value from low to
high order: 8,16, and 32.

• 222 Less significant
pattern: • . •

.23

3 bits; value from low to
high order: 1, 2, 4 •

Character Codes

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
2
4
3
5

0

1

0

0

8

+

H

-

Q

1

1

9

A

I

J

R

/

z

2

2

~

B

7

K

!

S

of

3

3

=

C

L

$

T

,

4

4

I

D

)

M

*

U

(

5

5

:

E

[

N

1

V

-yo-

6

6

>

F

<

fl)

;

w

\

7

7

V

G

$

P

1'1

X

-1/1-

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

6

7

Blank

Y

3/63

411:143.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

REPORTS

IBM 7044
Data Code Table
Card Code

DATA CODE TABLE NO.3

§

143.

•1

• 23
USE OF CODE:

Character Codes

Hollerith Card Code .

OVERPUNCH
UNDERPUNCH

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

• 21

Character Size: • •.

1 card column.

© 1963

None

12

11

0

Nbne

Blank

&

-

0

1.2

&

&

11

-

0

0

7J

.

0

1

1

A

J

/

2

2

B

K

S

3

3

C

L

T

4

4

D

M

U

5

5

E

N

V

6

6

F

0

W

7

7

G

P

X

8

8

H

Q

y

9

9

I

R

~

8-2

b

8-3

'it

8-4

@

8-5

:

[

]

-v-

8-6

>

<

;

'\

8-7

v

~

A

-1!/-

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

?

-

.

9=

0

$

.

*

%

3/63

411 :144.100
IBM 7044
Data Code Table
Internal
DATA CODE TABLE NO.4

§

.22

144.
internal and binary magnetic tape code.

.1

USE OF CODE:

•2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size:

6 bits (shown below as two
octal digits).

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

Character Structure

.221 More significant pattern: 3 bits; value from low to
high order: 8, 16, and 32.
.222 Less significant pattern: 3 bits: value from low to
high order; 1, 2, 4 •

23

Character Codes

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

0

8

&

H

-

Q

blank

Y

1

1

9

A

I

J

R

/

z

2

2

b

B

7

K

!

S

of

3

3

#

C

L

$

T

,

4

4

@

D

0

M

::0

U

%

5

5

:

E

[

N

J

V

6

6

>

F

<

0

;

w

7

7

,r

G

.j.

P

A

X

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

-y-

\
-flI-

3/63

411:145.100

.STANDAAD
EDP
•

RfPORTS

IBM 7044
Data Code Table
BCD Code
DATA CODE TABLE NO.5

§

145.

.22

.1

USE OF CODE:

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

.21

Character Size:

.221 More significant pattern: 3 bits; value from low to
high order: 8, 16, and 32.
.222 Less significant pattern: 3 bits; value fr~m low to
high order: 1, 2, 4.

BCD code on magnetic
tape.

6 bits (shown below as two
octal digits).

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN

Character Structure

.23

Character Codes

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
Q

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

blank

Y

-

Q

&

H

z

J

R

A

I

K

!

B

?

1

1

9

/

2

2

0

S

3

3

#

T

,

L

$

C

4

4

@

U

%

M

*

0

0

5

5

:

V

-v-

N

]

E

[

6

6

>

w

\

0

;

F

<

7

7

X

-JII-

P

t,.

G

$

© 1963

V

by Auerbach Corporafion and BNA Incorporafed

3/63

411:146.100
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

REroRTS

IBM 7044
Data Code Table
1400 Series
DATA CODE TABLE NO.6

§

146.

• 22

.1

USE OF CODE:

1400 series code to 1401
processor.

.2

STRUCTURE OF CODE

• 21

Character Size: • ••

LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0

6 bits (show below as two
octal digits).

Character Structure

.221 More significant pattern: 3 bits; value from low to
high order: 8, 16, 32.
.222 Less significant pattern: 3 bits; value from low to
high order: 1, 2, 4 •

.23

Character Codes

MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
Blank

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

b

Y

-

Q

&

H

1

1

9

/

~

J

R

A

I

2

2

0

S

+

K

!

B

7

3

3

#

T

,

L

$

C

4

4

@

U

%

M

*

0

0

5

5

:

V

-v--

N

]

E

r

6

6

>

w

\

0

;

F

<

7

7

Y

X

-lit-

P

A

G

"

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:201.011

IBM 7044
System Performance

IBM 7044

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:201.012

IBM 7044
IBM 7044 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE

1

Configurotion
Worksheet

1

InputOutput
Times

Reference

Item
VII A

VII A2

VIII B

(File 1)

1,008

4,032

1,008

4,032

(File 1)

8

32

8

32

26.8

77.2

17.8

51.5

File 3

14.1

26.8

8.1

17.8

File 4

14.0

26.0

8.0

17.3

-------

---

---

---

-----

-----

---

0.84

3.36

0.84

3.36

File 3

0.11

0.84

0.11

0.84

File 4

0.10

0.80

0.10

0.80

Char/block
Records/block

K

msee/block

File I

mset:/switch

File 1

=File 2

=File 2

File 3
File 4
msec pene!ty

2

maee/block

msee/record
Central
Processor maec/detail
Times
msec/work

3

File 1

= File

2

al

305

82

525

b6

447.5

msec/report

b7 +b8

9,094.5

mBec

al

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

a2 K

4.2

16.8

4.2

16.8

83 K

81.4

325.4

81.4

325.4

File 1 Master In

0.8

3.4

0.8

3.4

File 2 Master Out

0.9

26.8

3.4

77.2

0.9

3.4

File 3 Details

0.9

112.8

3.4

107.2

0.9

File 4 Reports

0.8

4:200.114

F=1.0

Tote!
Unit of measure

89.3

139.6

355.9

71.2

3.2

0.8
184.4

3.4

89.3

64.8

355.9

71.2

650

650

650

650

---

---

---

---

425

460

425

460

2,020

2,020

2,020

2,020

Files

756

3,360

756

3,360

Working

325

325

325

325

4,176

6,815

Fixed
3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
6 (Blocks 24 to 48)

Tote!

3/63

3.2

64.8

(word)
Std. routines

Standard
Problem A
Space

4:200.1132

630

for C.P.
and
dominant
column.

4:200.112

---

b5 +b9

Standard
Problem A

4

VIII B 2

4,176

6,815

4:200.1151

411:201.013

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
IBM 7044 SYSTEM PER FORMANCE (Contd.)
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2
Confi guration
Worksheet

5

Reference

Item

VII A

VIII B

Floating

Floating

input

729 V

329 VI

output

729 V

729 VI

input

80

80

output

120

120

Fixed/Floating point

Unit name

Size of record

Standard
Mathematical
Problem A

input

Tl

12.6

7.56

output

T2

14.0

8.00

input

T3

0.0

0.1

output

T4

0.1

0.1

msec/record

T5

0.035

0.035

maee/loops

T6

-

4,595

4,595

maee/report

T7

9,113

9,113

729 V

729VX'

maee/bloek

4:200.413

maee/penalty

7

Unit name
Size of block

Standard
Stati sti cal
Problem A

3,500 words

3,500 words

Records/block

B

350

350

maec/block

Tl

350

240

maoe/penalty

T3

17.5

17.5

maee/block

T5

0.053

0.053

maec/record

T6

1.398

1.398

maoe/table

T7

0.083

0.083

4:200.512

C.P.

©

1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:201.100
IBM 7044
System Performance

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

§20l.

. 112 Computation: .
.113 Timing basis: •

.1

GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING

.11

Standard File Problem A

. standard .
. using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide. 4:200.113.
.114 Graph:. . . . . . . . • . see graph below.
.115 Storage space required
Configuration VIlA .
Configuration VIlAl •
Configuration VIIIB .
Configuration VIIIBl.

.111 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:

108 characters.
1 card.
lUne.

10
7

4

2

~
7

4
Time in Minutes
to Process
2
10. 000 Master
File Records

~

--:7

---

,
'J\\!._--,

,

I,... - -VIIIB

~~IIB

1

--

~

-~

".

--.;ii'

0.1
7

4
2

0.01
7

4
2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
Broken lines indicates blocked detail and report files.

© 1963

by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:201.120
§

IBM 7044

201.

.12

.122 Computation:.
• 123 Timing basis:

standard .
using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.12 .
.124 Graph: . . . . . . . . . see graph below.

Standard File Problem B

. 121 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file: .

· 54 characters.
· 1 card.

· 1 line.

10.0
7

4

---~~

2

1.0

--

7
4

Time in Minutes
to Process
2
10,000 Master
File Records

0.1

-

.~

"VIIAy JIll"

/

/

/

~

I-VIIlB
r-VIIIB 1

.,//

7

4

2

0.01
7

4
2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
Broken lines indicates blocked detail and report files •

•

3/63

I AUERBAC~

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

411:201.130

201.

.13

.132 Computation:.
.133 Timing basis:

standard.
using eStimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.13.
.134 Graph:.. . . . . . . . . see graph below.

Standard File Problem C

.131 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:

. 216 characters.
1 card.
. 11ine.

10.0
7

4

2

1.0
7

V

~

~

-

VIlA'
VIlIB

VlIlB
...--- ---1

\B

---

~~lllB'
-=- - - vnA'

~

4
Time in Minutes
to Process
2
10,000 Master
File Records

0.1
7

4

2

0.01
7

4
2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

1.0

Act! vity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
Broken lines indicates blocked detail and report files.

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:201.140
§

IBM 7044

201.

.14

.142 Computation:.
.143 Timing basis:

Standard File Problem D

.141 Record sizes
Master file: •
Detail file:
Report file: .

.144 Graph:

• 108 characters.

trebled.
using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.13.
see graph below.

• 1 card.
· I line.

10.0
7

4

---V\\h

2

~ ~~

1.0
7
4

Time in Minutes
to .Process
2
10,000 Master
File Records

~I1B
~

./

/.-'
V\\~~ "'-7
1-'-

--

VmB'

P---

0.1
7

4

2

0.01
7
4

2

0.001
0.0

0.1

0.33

Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
Broken lines indicates blocked detail and report files.

3/63

1.0

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

411:201.200

20l.

. 212 Key size: •••
.213 Timing basis:

.2

SORTING

.21

Standard Problem Estimates

8 characters .
using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.213.
. 214 Graph: . . . . . . . . . see graph below .

•-211 Record size: . • . • • . 80 characters.

1,000

1

4
2
100.0

1
4
Time in Minutes
to Put Records
Into Required
Order

)'

2

/

10.0!
f

7

I

I I
I'

f

f
~

/

L /

4

//

VIlA

2

/vms

/'t

1I

1.0
1

f

~

4

/

L

II"

/

~

"

/

V

//

2

I

~

1'1

0.1

2

4

100

7

2

4

1,000

7
10,000

2

4

7
100,000

Number of Records

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:201.300
§

IBM 7044

201.

.3

MATRIX INVERSION

• 31

Standard Problem Estimates

• 311 Basic parameters:. . .

.312 Timing basis: . . . . . using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.312 •
.313 Graph: . • . . . . •.
see graph below •

general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating point to at least 8
and 16 decimal digits
using the optional
single and doubleprecision floating point
instructions.

100.00

1
4

2
10.00

,•

1

I

4

I

'/

Time in Minutes
for Complete
2
Inversion

/

B-DIGIT
PRECISION

1.00

7

II

4

If

J

2

16-DIGIT
PRECISION

I

~

I

J

0.10

7
J

J

I I

4

I 1/

1/

2

I/

0.01

2

4

7

2

4

Size of Matrix

3/63

7

2
100

10

4

7
1,000

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

411:201.400

201.

5 flith-order polynomials •
5 divisions.
1 square root .
.413 Timing basis: . . . . . using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.413 .
.414 Graph: . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
. 412 Computation:.

.4

GENERAIlZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING

.41

Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates

.411 Record sizes: . . . . . . 10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max.
size 8 digits.

CONFIGURATION VII A LENGTH (8 DIGIT PRECISION); FLOATING POINT
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD

10,000

7
4

2
1,000

7
4
Time in Milliseconds per
Input Record

~

~~

2

~

100

f

I'

7

""

I;'

4

~ ~

2

R

= 1.0

R
R

= 0.1

,

';1'1

~ !-I

V

0.01

7
4

2
10

2

4

0.1

7

2

4

7

2
10

4

7
100

C, Number of Computations per Input Record

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411:201.415
§

IBM 7044

201.

.415 Graph:

. . . . . • • • . see graph below.

CONFIGURATION VIII B LENGTH (8 DIGIT PRECISION); FLOATING POINT
R = NUMBE~ OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD

10,000

7
4

2

\

1,000

7
4
l11li

~.,

Time in Milliseconds per
2
Input Record

100
I~
II~

7

JlI

[I

4

~I..ij~

R =1.0 V

2
I.- ~

10

1-'1-1-

I.-/"
R=O·V

V

"'~-"

~=

0.01

7
4

2

2

4

7

2

4

0.1

2

7
10

C, Number of Computations per Input Record

3/63

I AUERBACH / .$J

4

7
100

\

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§

411:201.500

201.

.512 Computation:.

.5

GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING

.51

Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates

augment T elements in
cross-tabulation
tables .
.513 Timing basis:
using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.513 .
.514 Graph: . . . . . . . . . see graph below.

. 511 Record size: . . . . . . thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.

100

7

I/'
I/'

Iof

4

)~

/~
2

/

10

7
~

./

4
.JI

Time in Mllliseconds per
Record

~'"'

2

V

V

7
4

2
0.1

7
4

2
0.01

2

4

7

2
10

4

7

2
100

4

7
1,000

T, Number of Augmented Elements
Roman numerals denote Standard Configurations

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

3/63

411 :221.101
•

STANDARD

EDP
•

IBM 7044

R[PORTS

Price Data

PRICE DATA
§

221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS

CENTRAL
PROCESSOR

Name

No.
7106

Model I
II
III

Monthly
Rental
$

PRICES
Monthly
Maintenance
$

Purchase
$

Central Processor
Standard Equipment
8,192 words of storage
16, 384 words of storage
32,768 words of core storage
1 Output Typewriter
Data Channel A

225
235
255

1,150,000
1,200,000
1,300,000

500

11.25

15,000

350

6.25

10,000

550
75
60

17.25
2.25
2.25

18,000
3,000
2,400

2,100
3,500

138.00
238.00

115,500
185,500

25

1.00

1,250

835
1,035
1,035
225

30.00
35.00
35.00
3.25

42,000
52,000
52,000
8,000

250

6.75

11,000

50

1.00

1,800

1,500
2,000

33.50
57.00

95,000
118,000

90

2.25

4,200

225

3.25

8,000

300

4.25

2,000

250

6.75

11,000

50

1.00

1,800

17,500
18,500
20,500

Optional Features
#3880
#4428

#5080
#7498

Extended Performance
Floating Point Arithmetic Single
Precision
Floating Point Arithmetic D>uble
Precision
Memory Protection
Storage mock Internal Time

1301
Model I
Model II

Disc Store (5 Max.)
28 million characters
56 million characters

#4429

STORAGE

Optional Feature
#3213

Cylinder Mode
Prerequisite Equipment

7631
Model I
Model II
Model III
#1074
7094 lor II
#1845 or
#1846

,/

File Control (2 max.)
Unshared
Shared with 1410 or 7010
Shared with 7000 series system
Control Adapter
Data Channel (see I/O)
Data Channel B Adapter
Adapter for Data Channel C, D, and
E (1 each)

I

\

"

INPUT-OUTPUT

7904 I
7904 II

DATA
CHANNELS

Data Channel B or D
Data Channel C or E
Optional Equipment

#1040
#1074
#1080

Adapter, Tape 1414 (1 max. per
channel)
Adapter, Control (1 max. per
channel) to attach a 7631,
1414 VI, or 7750.
Adapter, Direct Data or Non-ffiM
devices (1 max. per channel)
Prerequisite Equipment

#1845
#1846

Data Channel B Adapter
Adapter for Data Channel C and
D and E (1 each).

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

5/63

411:221.102

IBM 7044

PRICE DATA (Contd.)
§

221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS

No.
7106 I
II, III,
and IV
#1046
#1040
#1034
#7080

INPUT-OUTPUT
CONTROLLERS

7631 II
III
IV

Name
Data Channel A (processor)
Optional Equipment
Adapter, Card 1414 (1 max.,
none with #1046).
Adapter, 162:! (1 max., none
with #1038
Adapter, Tape 1414 (1 max.)
Adapter, 1401 (1 max., requires
#7080)

Monthly
Rental
$
see

PRICES
Monthly
Maintenance
$
central

Purchase
$
processor

80

3.25

3,600

95
120

2.25
4.25

4,700
5,500

100

2.25

3,800

Serial Input-Output Adapter

100

1.50

3,750

File Control for 1301 DSU
File Control for 1301 DSU
File Control for 1301 DSU

835
1,035
1,035

30.00
35.00
35.00

42,000
52,000
52,000

12.00

43,350

Prerequisite Equipment
See Storage, 1301
Optional Features
See Storage, 1301
1414
1414
1414
1414

I
II
III
IV

1414V
1414 VI
1414 VII

I/O Synchronizer Tape, 729 II, IV, V
I/O Synchronizer Tape, 7330
I/O Synchronizer Unit record
I/O Synchronizer Unit record and
communications
I/O Synchronizer Communications
I/O Synchronizer Communications
I/O Synchronizer Tape, 729 II, IV,
V, VI

975
500
675
775
?
850
1,125

Prerequisite Equipment
See Input-Output, Data Channels.
Optional Features

5/63

#3585
F92950
W99187
ElO1l2

Model
Model
Model
Model

#7680

Model III & IV

#7681

Model III & IV

#6024

Model IV

M04578
882017

Model IV
Model IV

Mo0447
730631

Model IV
Model IV

#7184

Model I & VII

I
I
III
III & IV

800 CPI for 729 V
Tape, Read Gapless
Printer, 1404 withcompare
Printer, 1404 attachment
without compare
Printer, 1403 II attachment
Printer, 1403 II Additional Synchronizer
Storage
Read/Punch, 1402 Read/
Punch Column Binary
Trans. Remote to 1001
Inquiry Adapter,
Indicator
2nd Buffer 1403 - channell
Reader 2nd 1011 Paper
Tape
Tape Intermix for 7330s

270
580
90
550
60
?
260

10
630
45
45

2,250

411:221.103

PRICE DATA
PRICE DATA (Contd.)
'''--

§

221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS

No.

Monthly
Rental

Name

$
INPUT-OUTPUT
UNITS

For
prerequisite
equipment
see
appropriate
1414 or Dita
Channel.

729 II
729N
729 V
729 VI
7330

Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic

Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape

Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit

PRICES
Monthly
Maintenance
$

Purchase
$

700
900
750
950
450

116.00
128.00
122.00
134.00
52.25

36.000
41.250
37.200
42,450
22.000

85

6.50

4.400

35
55
80
100

5.50
11.00
16.50
22.00

1.775
2.675
3.875
4.775

Data Transmission Unit ( 1 max
per 1414 IV. V. VI)

500

11.50

26.400

Punched Tape Reader (1 max per
1414 IV. V. VI)

500

42.50

22.400

Inquiry Station (20 max per 1414 N.
V. VI)

200

12.50

11.000

Card Read/Punch (requires 1414 III.
IV)

615

1403 I

Printer (requires #7680)

725

172.00

32.900

1403 II

Printer (requires #7680 and 7681)

775

1404 II

Printer (requires ElO1l2)

1622

Card Read/Punch

Maximum
10 per
Channel

Optional Equipment
#7830
E03378

7155
Model
Model
Model
Model

Tape Switching Feature for 729
MTUs attached to a 7155
Required for each 7330 MTU
attached to a 7155

125

Switch Control Console
I
II
III
IV

1009
1011
1014
1402 II

2
4
6
8

tapes
tapes
tapes
tapes

615

Optional Features:
M01376
M01377
M99145
M03473
M03747
M00711

Punch Octal/binary
Read Octal/binary
Punch 250 cpm
Read 800 cpm
Read 500 cpm
File Feed

© 1963

by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated

160
140
170
75
65
35

5/63



File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19
Create Date                     : 2018:05:10 14:39:34-08:00
Modify Date                     : 2018:05:11 14:01:15-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2018:05:11 14:01:15-07:00
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:3de9a95b-e431-e543-8e73-9452f28bfa0c
Instance ID                     : uuid:93151a0c-800f-2c4f-ad00-bc737fcdcaf0
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 1136